MASTER 
 NEGATIVE 
 
 NO. 92-80753 
 
MICROFILMED 1992 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 ''Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 
 
 The copyright law of the United States - Title 17, United 
 States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or other 
 reproductions of copyrighted material... 
 
 Columbia University Library reserves the right to refuse to 
 accept a copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
 would involve violation of the copyright law. 
 
AUTHOR: 
 
 SHEPPARD, JOHN 
 
 TITLE: 
 
 NOTES ON 
 THUCYDIDES . . . 
 
 PLACE: 
 
 LONDON 
 
 DATE: 
 
 1870 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 S&T43 
 SS4 
 
 Sheppard, John George, I^IJ-^^S^ ^^ 
 
 Notes on TS^^^'f^^^'^^^^Sis Evans. Books I, 
 
 ?r-d Sr^fd ek\ "l^ndS Longn^^, 1870. 
 :;, 38d p. 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 1. Thucydides. ^ Evans, Levis, 1815-1859, 
 jt. au. 
 
 TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 
 
 REDUCTION RATIO: //_X 
 
 FILM SIZE: __3SjkUi4_^_^_ 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA (IIA) IB IIB 
 
 DATE FILMED:__'2.-_^£fl^a.- INITIALS IkllMl.. 
 
 HLMEDB^': RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS. INC WOODBRIDGE. CT 
 
L 
 
 Association for Information and Image Management 
 
 1100 Wayne Avenue, Suite 1100 
 Silver Spring. Maryland 20910 
 
 301/587-8202 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 12 3 4 5 
 
 I 
 
 ii|ii|ii|i|ii|i|ii|i|ii|iiii|i^ii|il^i|iljHil|iii 
 
 Inches 
 
 1 
 
 10 11 12 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 b4 
 
 2.8 
 
 tarn 
 
 ■thkU 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.5 
 2.2 
 
 2.0 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 13 14 15 mm 
 
 liiiiliiiiliiiiliiiil 
 
 MflNUFRCTURED TO fillM STfiNDRRDS 
 BY fiPPLIED IMAGE, INC. 
 

 %, ?:*!? 
 .^a' 
 
 '■■■i.'^i 
 
 ^ 
 
 **V 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 •^■^^ 
 
 .■%v- 
 
 
 ST A 
 
 l^'.-^^ff^ 
 
 'i***/* ^!r 
 
 'fiyS^'^-H^viiCi;^^^' 
 
 -.-* J?/ 
 
 :S 
 
 ';^ :. ;^^ ^ 
 
 ;-H^'M 
 
 Wf J 
 
 •t 
 
 ...% 
 
 ! f^< 
 
 :^1 
 
 i'i ' - 
 
 
 i ""'*. 
 
 i?*'^S;' .**-■-" 
 
 
 '-i'^^'Ml 
 
 -<> 
 
 ■1:' 
 
 '.-"-W 
 
 ?**' 
 
 >'ftv::^. 
 
 -, *4. 
 
 
 
 
 i'>'i 
 
 .*>h 
 
 3 -'■!*?, 
 
 W 
 
 '/l%^ 
 
 ■^ .'J*^ ^ 
 
 '1*^1 
 
 
 
 .fi%?. 
 
 ,l<7-J^l 
 
 i > uwCl-B 
 
 •^-%.* 
 
 "h .'t 
 
 m 
 
 %^*-'Jfm:'^ 
 
 
 ^ - .^> 
 
 ^.u-.^e 
 
 ,<t :v..'tf-c 
 
 '•i '-^ SJ 
 
 ■a.^ 
 
 Cif»»rf 
 
 
 ,#J^5 
 
 Sf.lC>-. 
 
 <jr»i^ ■^»**J .;:.■• 
 
 i.ri'-i»'r' 
 
 W^ 
 
 
 ■*f; 
 
 '■^ 
 
 'S% 
 
 f^i^^H 
 
 »&« 
 
 ijji 
 
 " W 
 
 ■m 
 
 ^ 
 
 •rv^ 
 
 
 *-« 
 
 *- S.- 
 
 -< i, — 
 
 t$i 
 
 i- t.Mt.tat 
 
:r:.' 
 
 
 •iii 
 
I 
 
 \ 
 
 NOTES 
 
 ON 
 
 THUCYDIDES 
 
 BOOKS I. II. AND III. 
 
lOWDOK: PRIITTBD BY 
 
 spoms^rooDE akd co.. kuw-strkbt sqpasb 
 
 AlTD PABLIlHBirt BTBBBT 
 
 
 » ffl c» 
 
 1 , ,.) 
 
 NOTES 
 
 ON 
 
 HUCYDIDES 
 
 ORIGINAL AND COMPILED 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN a SHEPPARD, M.A. 
 
 Late Head Master of KidcUrminster School 
 Formerly Fellow of WadMm Come, Oxford 
 
 AND 
 
 LEWIS EVANS, M.A. 
 
 Late Head Master of Sandbach School 
 Fmnerly Fellow of Wadham College, Oxford 
 
 BOOKS I., II., AND m. 
 
 SECOND EDITION 
 
 LONDON 
 
 LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 
 
 1870 
 
ADYEETISEMENT. 
 
 -*^». 
 
 SINCE the last edition of these Notes on Thucydides was pub- 
 lished, both the authors have died ; and the work which they 
 had ably begun must remain a fragment. 
 
 The publishers, feeling sure that annotations marked by so 
 much ability and learning will be acceptable t© many students, 
 have determined on adding to the new edition of the Notes on 
 Books I. and II. such farther portions of the commentary as the 
 authors were enabled to complete. These unfortunately do not 
 go beyond the third book ; but the notes to the first and second 
 books have had the benefit of their revision. 
 
 The authors' preface stands unaltered as it appeared in the 
 last edition. 
 
 l-VC- 
 
 182065 
 
PKEFACE. 
 
 mHE present pubHcation was suggested by Mr. Dawson Turner's 
 X Notes on Herodotus, and is intended to supply those wants, 
 the existence of which the very large sale of that useful volume 
 seems to mdicate. It is perhaps well to state thus much lest the 
 reader should misunderstand the character of the work, and be 
 induced to estimate it by a standard which it does not 'affect to 
 reach. It does not, for instance, deal in conjectural emendation, 
 It does not contain a digest of various readings, or anything like 
 aji apparatus criticus for Thucydides, and it leaves untouched, or 
 only briefly notices, many matters which a perfect edition of an 
 historical writer ought to discuss. What it attempts is some- 
 thing more humble, but at the same time, we trust, not altogether 
 useless ; for it endeavours i» furnish University Students with 
 that amount of information which their second examination may 
 be regarded as likely to require. What this amount exactly is 
 c^not, under present circumstances, very easily be estimated' 
 The penod usuaUy devoted to the preparation for a University 
 degree, when compared with the immensely increased require- 
 ments of the various examinations, will, to the student at any 
 i^te, appear but brief; and the arrangement of the relative 
 claims of different authors upon his time, is perhaps one of the 
 greatest difficulties with which he has to contend. If, for in- 
 stance, he desires to raise himself to the standard of philo'sophical 
 acquirement proposed by Mr. Pattison,* and of historical know- 
 "ledge by Mr. Froude,t how is he to find leisure for that careful 
 and critical study of the classical authors which Prof Conington J 
 ms so truly described as the only useful way of practising such 
 atudyatall? ^ 5 »^" 
 
 We do not presume to answer a question which must in some 
 leasure perplex those much more competent to enter upon it 
 than ourselves ; but we venture to say that thus much at any rate 
 is clear. The very conditions of the case render the examination 
 ^nder such^circumstances, of what commentators have written iii 
 * ^ford Essays. 1855. f Ibid. | Inaugural Lecture. 
 
y'^{ PKEFACE. 
 
 various lan^ages upon the text of Thucydides, nothing less dhan 
 a physical impossibility. And yet, unless we are Prepared to 
 surrender much of what hitherto has been mcluded under} the 
 idea of scholarship, an acquaintance to some extent withthe 
 labours of the great scholars of this and other ages, and a jfrac 
 tical imitation of their method, is surely necessary to any one 
 who aspires to be called by that once respected name. I 
 
 One help towards overcoming the difficulty might perhais be 
 found if competent persons were to collect, withm modirate 
 compass, so much matter bearing upon the various works, orjpor- 
 tions of works, taken up for examination, as would afford a rel son- 
 able amount of incidental information, and at the same Jtime 
 convey an adequate notion of the way in which these subjects 
 have been treated by the great masters of classical criticism. 
 
 This accordingly is what we have tried to do here : impertcctly, 
 perhaps, but to the best of a judgment tolerably instructed by ex- 
 perience. If these notes do not contain much less than what 
 candidates for the second University examination will require, they 
 may perhaps fairly deprecate criticism for not contaming more. 
 
 Persons who exercise their wit upon the pursuit of classical 
 studies, are fond of declaring that the chief duty of the editor of a 
 classical work consists in abusing his predecessors. Happily, to an 
 editor of Thucydides this is impossible. To pass over, for the sake 
 of brevity, though scarcely perhaps with justice, many early com- 
 mentators of great learning and varied merit, the names of Poppo, 
 Arnold, GoUer, Bloomfield, and Kruger demand the sincerest 
 respect from any person whose lot it may be to labour m the same 
 field of knowledge. Poppo's great work is truly a monument ot 
 erudition constructed with materials gathered from every possible 
 source • Arnold's affords a treasure of historical and geogmphical 
 knowledge, and, though certainly deficient in the more strictly 
 critical portion, must ever remain an admirable specimen of sound 
 sense, good taste, and eloquent language. Goller has the German 
 fault of over-subtlety, and sometimes confuses himself as well as 
 his readers ; but he has done much for Thucydides, and merits the 
 highest praise. High praise also must be assigned to the industry 
 of Dr Bloomfield, whose laborious and voluminous edition is par- 
 ticularly valuable for its references to later Greek literature and 
 the historical writers who have imitated Thucydides. It y^ ould be 
 no small merit in any writer to follow respectably where others ot 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 IX 
 
 sad\ ability and learning have gone before him. But Kriiger has 
 doili more than this, — ^much more. We cannot mention the name of 
 an mthor from whom we have learnt so much, without declaring 
 that! his edition, in respect of acuteness, soundness of judgment, 
 and general accuracy, seems to us to occupy one of the highest, if 
 notlthe highest place among commentaries upon Thucydides. 
 
 Of translations we have consulted three : — Mr. Dale's ; a Ger- 
 man version, lately published by Engelmann at Leipsic ; and the last 
 French version, by M. Zevort (Paris, 1852). Mr. Dale's work is 
 too well known to require any notice from us. If we have men- 
 tioned it occasionally for the purpose of expressing difference of 
 opinion rather than agreement, this arises from the nature of our 
 relative offices, and not from any desire to disparage so able a per- 
 formance. The translation published by Engelmann — so far as we 
 are competent to form a judgment, embodying, as it does, so much 
 careful exposition — is even of a still higher character, and deserves 
 to be classed as one of the most successful among the many suc- 
 cessful attempts of the kind for whieh Germany is distinguished. 
 
 M. Zevort has produced a readable version in a lively manner, 
 but what he himself states generally, is at any rate true of his own 
 language : 'Thucydide ne saurait etre traduit a proprement parler.* 
 The French idiom offers no counterpart to the massive dignity of 
 the Greek, and M. Zevort has himself so well appreciated the diffi- 
 culty of the style with which he has had to deal, that we shall, we 
 think, consult the interest of the student by referring him to the 
 able preface prefixed to his translation. 
 
 The learned Editor of Notes upon the Apostolical Epistles, Dr. 
 Peile, has kindly placed at our disposal a few remarks upon several 
 difficult passages, written by him many years ago. Of these we 
 have made some use, and should have made still more, had it not 
 been from the hope that he may himself some day be induced to 
 give them to the world in a more expanded and complete form. 
 
 These, then, are mainly the sources from which the following 
 notes, where they are not original, have been drawn. There are 
 of course others, such as Mr. Grote's great work, Cramer's Greece, 
 the Fasti Hellenici, and Mr. Jelf's edition of Kiihner, which it is 
 
 * The edition of the first two books, by the late T. K. Arnold, seems so 
 entirely a work of the scissors, as not to require a separate mention. Even 
 where Mr. Arnold's own opinions are expressed, they appear much too hastily 
 formed. 
 
 J 
 
^ PREFACE. I 
 
 unnecessary to particularise. We hope that we have writtenwith 
 care, but we know that many faults, both of omission and conftnis- 
 sion, must occur in a work of this nature, even when perfor-ned 
 by scholars very far more accurate and able than ourselves/ To 
 any one who will kindly take the trouble to point out such eiTors 
 we shall feel sincerely grateful, for it is only by co-operation oi( ^.his 
 sort, given, as we trust it would be received, in a right spirit^ that 
 we can hope to effect anything truly and permanently useful 
 
 « Le moi est haissable,' says a distinguished Frenchman ;* and 
 therefore the occasional recurrence of the personal pronoun in the 
 following pages may to some persons be offensive. It will be found 
 in those portk)ns of the work executed before I had the advantage 
 of any assistance from my present coadjutor, and in various scat- 
 tered remarks, which had long been in preparation. Upon the whole 
 it seemed a less evil than perpetual circumlocution ; nor could I in 
 any other way have expressed my own judgment between conflict- 
 ing opinions with sufficient simplicity to be satisfactory to myself. 
 After all, quite as much presumption may be latent in a periphrasis 
 as in a personal pronoun, and the latter appears to keep up more 
 clearly that unity in the various elements of a commentary, which 
 it is hoped they may exhibit from having been moulded into form 
 
 by a single mind. 
 
 The notes to the first two books are here given in a separate 
 form. Those to the next two are far advanced, and will, I trust, 
 speedily follow. These will form a commentary upon that por- 
 tion of our author generally taken up by students as one subject 
 for the second classical examination in the University of Oxford, 
 and for this object they are primarily designed ; but they may 
 perhaps also be found suited to the use of the higher classes m 
 schools, for which purpose, indeed, they have been already em- 
 
 ployed. 
 
 I subjoin a short Appendix on the Aorist usage to which re- 
 ference is frequently made in the commentary; and some few 
 remarks upon a celebrated passage which could not conveniently 
 
 be comprised within the limits of a note. t nl a 
 
 J. Grl b. 
 
 * M. Philarfete Chasles, Etudes sur VAntiquite, p. a. 
 
 » r'< 
 
 NOTES 
 
 ON 
 
 THUCYDIBES: 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Chapter I. — (a.) 0oi;*ci/5f5r;s. This simple statement of their name and 
 style appears to have been adopted by the ancient historians to identify their 
 works. Cf. the preface of Herodotus. Kriig. adds Hecatseus (cited by De- 
 metrius v. (pfi. 2) and Ocellus (bei Klem. AL vi. p. 741), cf. Dio. Chrys. 53, 
 p. 555. The formula recurs v. 26, where see note. In summing up the years 
 of the war, he simply uses his name. But when spoken of as General — iv. 
 104 — his full official style is given, and his Father's name appended. 
 ^vv4ypa^€. The compound verb implies the compilation and arrangement of 
 materials. So Sallust ' conscribere' and * componere.' Sail. Hist. i. i. 
 &5 iiro\4fi7)<Tav. — How they carried it on — i.e. its details and method, and 
 therefore more than ^v hr., which some have suggested. Cf. rek ^iretra cos iiro- 
 \(ixi)dri i^riyftffofxai, v. 26, Jelf, § 899, 7. fvdifs Kaditnafxivov — 
 
 as soon as it was set on foot y cf. Jelf, 530, 2. We must understand that he made 
 notes and collected documents from the very first. The regidar composition 
 was the work of a later period — probably in part of his exile. Miiller {Hist. 
 Lit. Greece, p. 485) is of opinion that all he wrote at Scapte Hyle was only a 
 preliminary labour in the way of memoirs. He did not commence the actual 
 arrangement of particulars till after the end of the war, when he was again 
 residing in his own country. This is shown partly by the frequent references 
 to the duration, the issue, and the general connexion of the war, but especially 
 by the fact that the History was left unfinished. Cf. i. 13, 93 ; ii. 13, 65 ; 
 V. 26. * He lived to complete six books entirely; to the seventh, as some 
 think, his final touches are wanting ; the eighth is altogether unfinished.' Arn. 
 See Appendix ii. ^Ktriffas. The intermediate sense of the word 
 
 signifying * expectation.' No idea of hope can be implied here, or in such cases as 
 Soph. AJax w. 606, 795, Track, iii. The scholiast therefore was right in 
 his remark, iKviaas, oh fiSvop iirl ayddcf) oAA.' airXws ivl t>7 tOv /xeWovros iK^dfffi 
 \iy(Tcu. The Koi preceding 4\iri<ras is generally supposed to involve a repeti- 
 tion of ^vveypaxpe. Kriig. renders, * and after he had therefrom fonnied the 
 expectation.* a^io\oy<t>rarov rStv irpoy. This substitution of the 
 
 superlative for the comparative seems to take its rise from the anxiety of the 
 writer to say a thing more strongly than the common forms of speech allow. 
 It has place, therefore, where very strong emphasis is intended, and is cognate 
 to the idiom where two superlatives are coupled together, — e. g. irM7<rrov 
 ^xBiarrjs, Soph. Phil. v. 631 ; * Most Highest' in our version of the Psalms. It is 
 very common in Greek. See fieylartiv rvv vph avrrjs i. 10. ovofJuurTiraTaTwy irpir 
 
 B 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CHiP. 2.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 // 
 
 ytvSfifva, i. %tf. fitylaTTj 8}j Ta5v- xph avr^s yfyfurrrai, i. 50. fifyi:rTov 8Jj tuv 
 trply KlvSbvou, \i. 'n/'. Seft for iiiPt{»nc'es Jelf, § 503, 3. But the idiom has a 
 deeper root tha/* the peculiarity of. any special language. Livy wrote, Bellum 
 maxime memovabiU om,a'mm, qile uttquam gesta sunt xxi. i, and Tacitus, C(Bte- 
 ronim Brij:a,nnoniia fu^acjjisinii, Agric. 36. Accordingly, too, we find in 
 am, the goodliest o( hjf rons.since born, the fairest of her daughters 
 Eve.' The im!p<^;rtan':e*cf ).>arttcnL>i:ly noticing such a form of speech arises 
 from its applic^at^on to the famous expression, ^pwT(iTOKos ttjs KTiafus, Col. i. 
 15, which on the same principle signifies, * bom before all creation.* 
 aKfid^ovTfs ^(Tav — ' were in a state of vigour , or at the acmk, or highest 'point 
 of their strength, — implies slightly more than the final verb ^Kfia^ov. Cf. 
 ippwuro is rhv v6\€fjLov ii. 8. a. Cf. note on avafiifivT^nKSfiefos, Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 121. Bekker reads ^ffav quasi ^laau (' woder Thukydideische 
 noch Attische' Kriig.) upon the strength of such phrases as Uvcu 4s rovs 
 iro\4fjiovs. But Pop. rightly remarks, Thuc. would surely have written ^€<rav 
 here as elsewhere. dpwy — the conditionalizing participle, equivalent, as 
 
 usual, when without the article, to tin kwpa, ' because he sawJ It should not 
 be connected with rtKfiaipSfxwos, but with Srt ax^iiCovrts k.t.X. 
 Biavoovjjuvov — having it in (or passing through) their minds — thinking of it. 
 Reference is made to Syracuse and the Dorian states of Sicily : perhaps also to 
 Argos. 
 
 (6.) Klvnff is K.T.X. * This was by far the greatest s^fr (or commotion) that 
 ever arose among the Greeks, and a i^ery considerable portion of the barba- 
 rians, or, 80 to speak, the greater part of mankind.* us elirfiu may also be 
 rendered ' propemodum dixerim* * / hed almost said* Cf. Jelf, 864, i, and 
 for TrXuffroif audpuirov see Jelf 422, B. Kiyr}<rts like our word * movement ' (cf. 
 the * movement party') seems to be applied by later writers at any rate to the 
 internal rather than the external relations of a country. * Thucyd. expressly 
 calls this war greater than the Persian, ch. 23, and no other war except the 
 Persian could within his knowledge enter into comparison with it.' Am. 
 5^, when added to a word, intensifies its meaning and directs attention to it. 
 Hence its use with superlatives. SeeoXiyois d-fi, 'feir t7ideed,' i. 33. Jelf, 723, i. 
 fiap^ipwv. According to Poppo, the Thracians, the Macedonians, several of 
 the Epirot tribes, the Sicilians, and perhaps also the Persians. 
 fifpfi rivl. The phrase signifies an appreciable and therefore considerable 
 part. Cf. ch. 23 c. So also the Latin * aliquot.' rh yap irpo 
 
 ahr&v. Inasmuch as Thuc. contrasts (c. 3 and c. 12) tci irph rdv Tpat'iKwv 
 and Tot /ufTct Tci Tpui'Kd, Poppo considers that these words mean the wars 
 between the Trojan and Persian wars, as well as these two themselves, while 
 the 'ira\ai6Tepa refer to those before the Trojan war. €upf7v — 'make 
 
 out,* on aSvvara, cf. infra, ch. 7 a. rtKn-ffptov. Consult Arist. 
 
 Rhet. i. 2, where it will be seen th&t TfKfxiipiov is the infallible proof (a posteriori) 
 as distinguished from a-nnuuv, the mere indication. Sv k.t.X. 
 
 The construction of the relative is not clear. Some, with Schaefer, repeat the 
 preposition *«, ' from the proofs, from which it happens that I feel confidence.' 
 This derives some support from a passage in Isoc. iii. 2, ravra «« tuv tpyav 
 &v rts ovx ^ttov ^ tuv x6yu)v triffTftxrufv. Others again, as Kriiger, consider 
 it a mere case of Attic attraction, Stv for &s or fi. * From the proofs which it 
 
 occurs to 7n£ to credit;— i. e. I am led to credit— (So Kriig. ♦ Ich finde mich 
 veranlasst.')— wpon carrying my investigations as far back as possible. This is 
 simple and preferable. Cf. Herod, iv. 16, H<rov 7)fic7s arpcKewy Ul {xaKp6TaTov 
 oloi T h^p6fx€ea i.Kofi ^iK€(Teai. oi,-ix4yaXa. Connect the two 
 
 words by a hyphen, so as to form a single term. ' I hold them to have been of 
 no importance.* The distinction in meaning between this collocation and con- 
 necting the negative with the verb (as Dale has done), is not in the present 
 passage great. But it is desirable to observe that Thuc. has a tendency to the 
 use of the * particula infinitans,' as logicians call it, and that such compound 
 negatives are not rare. ovk-6vuSi^6utuu, ch. 5. oh-BaXdaffioi, ch. 7. ovk- 
 ^fftpaXeU, ch. 6. oi-5»c£Ai;<rii/, ch. 137. is t^ &XXa. ' Caeteris in 
 
 rebus ' (Betant. Lex. Thucyd.), all matters not included under -rroXefiivs. A 
 favourite formula. Cf. ch. 6, 72 and vii. 77, 2, kuto, t^v Xhiov $lou, kuI is ret 
 &XXa. 
 
 Chapter II.— (a.) <patv€Tai with a participle expressed or understood, 
 is the Latin ' constat,* * it is clear,* ' it is an established point,* and is to be dis- 
 tinguished by the younger student from 80x6?, which states a matter of surmise 
 or opinion. (See ch. 3, ad init.) With the infinitive tpalv^Tai is different 
 
 —it seems to be, not it evidently is. tivuv del irXeidvcov ' by 
 
 some who, as it might happen, from time to time were more numerous.* The 
 idiom is of frequcHt recurrence, though more usually ael is placed between the 
 article and an adj. or part. 4 hit pi as— ' traffic by sea;* for traffic 
 
 by land must have been common, notwithstanding the fact of their communi- 
 cations being somewhat restricted by distrust. 'EXXds. Herodotus 
 wrote TTJs vvv 'EXxd^os npdrepov Se UeXaayiris Ka\€Vfi4vT]s, ii. 66. This Kriig. 
 says is to be modified by what Thucydides asserts in the following ch.— f. e. 
 Pelasgian was only the name of a predominant tribe. See Grote as referred to 
 ch. iii., note (b.). 
 
 {b.)y€fx6fi^yoi Th alr&v ti<r»v airoCrjv. 'Cultivating each their own land, 
 so far as to get a living off it,*— i. e. only cultivating it to such an extent as to 
 produce the necessaries of life, cf. Jelf, § 666. i/6>6o^at « to reap the use of* 
 generally is connected with yhv, but we have it with irdKiv ch. 74, and 4tnr6pia 
 KoL fifTuAXa ch. 100. TTfptova-lav xPVf^dTuv—' stock,* an amount of move- 
 able property over and above what was required for daily use; this is the 
 force of TTfpl in similar words. Cf. irap rh ir4piTTop &Kaipov. y^j, 
 
 (M/Tcuoi/Tes — referring more especially to vines and olives. The word 
 Kriig. remarks is the proper one to express planting in contradistinction to 
 apovv and (rirdpfiv, and yij v€(pevTcvfi4vn (Horn. (pvraXia) is contrasted with 
 ap6(rifios and <nr6pifios. UStjXov 6v—* it being uncertain.' (Cf. the same 
 
 phrase, viii. 96.) Matth. calls this the nom. absolute. Most grammarians are 
 now inclined, with Kriiger, to regard it as an accusative arising from the idea of 
 diu'ation or extension of time. See Matth. § 564. Kost 131, v. 4. Jelfs 
 Kuhner, § 581, 700. aT€ixl(TT<ay &na 6yTuv—and they being at 
 
 the same time without the defence of walls, sc. avTuv, to be supplied, as often, 
 from the context. avayKaio v — ' necessary sustenance,* raro generis 
 
 communis est. Pop. oh xaA.€7rws air av I err a yT0~'7?iade no difficulty 
 
 in abandoning, 
 
 m B 2 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 
 
 (c.) v vvv 0€(r<ra\(a Kakovfiivn. First called Pj^rrhaea, afterwards 
 Haemonia. Kriiger considers that Thucyd. was not thinking of these mytho- 
 logical names, but wrote under the impression that the Thessalians, like the 
 Hellenes, owing to their migratory habits, were long before they received a 
 collective appellation. Pop. remarks that these assertions are confirmed and 
 illustrated by the accounts of the movements of population given in Miiller's 
 Mint/(B and Pla-ss's History of Ancient Greece. Arcadia was to Greece what 
 Wales was to England, and Brittany to France: a rugged district, inhabited 
 by a rugged race, which offered no temptation to foreign invasions. 
 
 (d.) &p6T^»'— ' honitatemjertilitatem: Pop. kptii] is simply 'excellence.' 
 The nature of the excellence is determined by the adjunct. See Aristotle, Ethic. 
 Eud. ii. I. It cannot surprise us that the word came to signify (car' ^{oxV 
 ' moral excellence' or ' virtue.' Notice the etymology among a martial people 
 from "Aprjs, as Virtus from ' Vir.' On the goodness of the soil, Kriig. refers to 
 Herod, vii. 129 ; Xen. Hell. vi. i, 1 1 ; Strab. ix. p. 430- '^^^^' '^^^^ 
 
 is in general understood to refer to particular individuals. Kriig., however, 
 understands it of tribes, or states, thinking this interp. necessitated by 
 iyyiyv6n^vai ar. lie. It does not, however, seem unreasonable (T.K.A.) to 
 translate, ' ffrowing up to a greater extent among particular persons: 
 
 {e.) r^v yovv 'ArriK-hy— Attica accordingly, or at any rate, yovv is a 
 particularising, and also corroborative pirticle. The yt brings down the state- 
 ment to what follows by directing special attention to it, and the oiy expresses 
 conformity with what precedes. Cf. alyovv iixXw airoifciot, i. 38. iKTov 
 
 lirl irK^Urov. This, by the Schol. and others, has been connected with olaav, 
 as though th« latter were equivalent to cTmt. But it is better, with Arn. and 
 Pop., to take the words per se, and make them a single adverbial expression 
 nearly equivalent to ii hpxhs--from a very long time hack. For iK . . . olaav 
 of. 5ta aiH-»trxoi)(rai/, c. 7. Xitrriy^otv. ' Attica was not considered, 
 
 even in ancient times, a fertile district ; its rocky surface is covered with a very 
 thin crust of earth.' Niebuhr, Vortrdge uher alte Lander- und rolkerkunde, 
 S. 9Z (quoted by Engelman). It seems to have been a light gravelly or gritty 
 soil, ' tenuis argilla,' suitable for the olive. Virg. Georg. ii. 180, 21a. Poppo 
 refers to Dodwell, vol. ii. p. 5, and Kruse's Hellas, ii. i. We may add Boeckh's 
 Fub. (Econ. Athens, p. 40. It was from these circumstances that agriculture 
 was so highly valued at Athens, Xen. (Econ. 4 ; Aris. Pol. vi. 4. oi 
 
 o6to(. GoU. quotes from Wyttenbach, 'Locus communis in Atticorura 
 laudibus et oratiombus quod ouT(Jx0oi/f s fuerint.' Hence the custom of wearing 
 violets (io(TT€>aj/oO and golden grasshoppers in their hair. Cf. infra. It will 
 be enough to refer the student to Plato's Menexenus, Aristoph. Vesp(B, 1071, 
 and the celebrated funeral orations by Demosthenes and Lysias. One of the 
 earliest indications of this feeling is perhaps to be found in the speech of the 
 Athenian, Herod, vii. 61, 2. apx'^i^'^o.rov ti\vievosirapix^ii(voi,twvvQil"i iSvres, 
 ov fifraviffTOi "S.KK'hvwv. foi TrapaZiiyiia rdit K.r.X. The 
 
 enormous controversy which these words have occasioned is well known. 
 Perhaps we shall best enable the student to master it by placing the several 
 points of dispute before him. (1) What is the K6yos ? (2) What is meant by 
 isrh&Wa? (3) What is the subject of ou|Tj0?j.'Oi? (4) What increase is implied 
 in av^tienvai ? With respect to the first there does not seem any reasonable 
 
 rr> 
 
 CHi^P. 2.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 5 
 
 difficulty. Thuc. had never asserted in express terms 5iA rhs (jLeroiKias k.t.A. ; 
 but in the previous part of the chapter he had described the general insecurity 
 of property, and the txeravaarAfffis which resulted from it, and as a consequence 
 of them he added 8t' abrh oUrf /te-ycflet irSXeoov tcrxvov oUrf rri SXAjj irapa(rK€vri. 
 This therefore must be considered as the x6yos repeated in the words 8to tAs 
 jU€T. (2) is Tcb &\\a is sometimes rendered ' tw all other respects* as at the 
 close of ch. i. But * other * than what ? It is not easy to see. Nor had Thuc. 
 made any such assertion. What he said was, that the other parts of Greece did 
 not increase owing to their unsettled condition. It is better therefore, following 
 the second scholiast, to consider it as ' in irs other parts.* (3) Poppo once sug- 
 gested, and Haack adopts the idea, that r^v 'Attik^i/ is the subject of au{rj6i)voi, 
 ' on account of the immigrations, Attica did not increase in other respects (wealth 
 and power) correspondingly with its population.* But it is impossible to force 
 this meaning from dfiolus ; and if it were, it is contrary to fact, and also con- 
 trary to the whole argument. For having represented throughout frequent change 
 of population as the great obstacle to progress, it would be absurd to confirm 
 his argument by asserting a similar want of progress where the population was 
 permanent. Other editors therefore supply r^v 'EXXaSa as the subject of au|i|- 
 drjvcu — though the word has not been used, and. can only be extracted from the 
 context. Or it is possible that av^fidTJuai may be impersonal — in which case the 
 meaning would be the same — * that there was no similar increase elsewhere^ 
 (4) While some suppose a general increase in material resources to be implied 
 in ou^7j0V"» others, as Peile, consider the increase as confined to population. 
 This he thinks established by ch. 1 2, where what in connection with ^<ruxd<raa-a 
 is described by av^ridrjvai, is afterwards expressed by airoiKias i^circfiire. The 
 whole will then run — And this which follows is not the least proof of my state- 
 ment, that *twas owing to its migrations (n. b. the reason placed in the promi- 
 nent part of the sentence) that Gvece in its other parts was not similarly in- 
 creased, for out of the rest of Greece, those who, ^c. yap, as elsewhere, intro- 
 duces the proof intended by r6hi — as just below StjAoT Se fioi KoXroZi vph yap 
 rHv TpmK<av. Peile quotes Arist. .4 v. 514, ft 54 t€iv6rar6vy' iariv airdvr ajv . . . 
 6 yap Zeus. I should myself rather prefer the impersonal usage of av^rjdTJvaiy 
 for I think Thucyd. purposely means to speak rather vaguely of districts which 
 were not then styled Hellas at all, and in some cases perhaps not subsequently 
 included in it. We must add, that some editors, as Pop. and GoU., strike out 
 the is, thus making t^ 6.\\a sc. ttjs 'EWd^os the subject of ab^-ndrjuai, and 
 giving exactly the same sense as above. This is neat and simple. And I think 
 we may urge in its favour that common formulae like is rh 6,\Xa are apt to run 
 in the head of transcribers, and to slip from their pens when anjlhing like them 
 occurs in the copy. IJ|lrich (quoted by Engelman and Kriiger) very ingeniously 
 reads fifroiiciicrds for ixfroiKias is. The change in uncial letters would be in- 
 significant. And Plato's authority in three places {Apol. 40 c ; Phced. 117 c; 
 Laws, viii. 850 a), is cited for the word. P4$aiov. * Understand n (cf. 
 Kiihner, § 421 ; Jelf, 381) or Th d.vaxu}puv trap. 'ABriv. (cf. Matth. § 568).' Pop. 
 M<^C« ^Tt — ' still greater * i. e. it was already greater than others simply from 
 its tranquillity, but became yet more so from the influx of foreigners. 
 ^Iwvlay. The term is used by a sort of ir/»<jAijT|^ts, for, as Goll. remarks, the 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 country acquired the name from the settlement of these very Ionian colonists 
 in it (cf. if\fyovvra, vi. 4). 
 
 Chapter III— (a.) affe^veiav. Here, as in Herod, i. 143, Pausan. vii. 17, 
 'political inability,' resulting from the absence of irepjoua/a xpWt«»'. Bloomf. 
 ttph-Ttpdrepov. A not uncommon form of pleonasm, as may be seen by com- 
 paring (with Pop.) irpoiypa^a vpSnov i. 23; ifpoirifi\^ainis vpSrcpov i. 29; 
 irpli/ irpo5id7v«T€ i. 78. HqkcI tlx^f—tcal elvai. Kemark the varia- 
 
 tion from the indie, to the infinitive. 2ti is omitted before the indie, to give 
 vivacity to the narration. The passage quoted by Jelf, § 804, 6, from Thuc. 
 
 y .^^ •yj/ovs OTi Sia(pdapr)<ToiJLeyovs avrovs for Siacpdap^aoyrai is not 
 
 exactly parallel, for there, as a long ellipse occurring between Srt and its verb, 
 an anacolouthon not unnaturally ensues. An exactly similar casC to that in the 
 text is quoted by Pop. fr. Plato Laches. 184 b. 
 
 (b.) Ttt fifif — 'during the times before the Trojan war! The words are 
 used like rh avh rovbe, t6 irciAoi, and similar expressions. Pop. quotes ri irph 
 rovrtav, Dem. de Cor. § 188, (Edip. Cd. v. 291. The whole question con- 
 cerning Htllen, and the meaning to be attached to the mythus, is too elaborate 
 to be discussed here. The student will do well to consult Groto Pref. to 
 History, and vol. i. p. 137, as well as the remarks with which vol. i. concludes. 
 See also Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 79. fal vavv oi/bh ^Uai—'nevtr 
 
 even to have had any existence at allJ In what follows, Pop. makes out the con- 
 struction by supplying iBmrj, the phrase kut tevt] being taken adverbially, so 
 that it becomes kut teini (tributim) &AAo t€ Uvr) Koi rh U^KaayiKhv tdvos 
 Trap4x^<reai. It may be questioned whether GoU. and Kriig. are not right in 
 regarding Kar teirt\ here, and Ka& UaoTovs a little below as virtually accusa- 
 tives and subjects of the verb. As examples of a similar accusative we have 
 *0 NiJcfas Kard T€ tdtn) .... koX ^vfxiraffi TciSt vap(K€\€Viro ; and again as a 
 nominative, ivBvyiiiadi naff Uaarovs re koX ^vfiwavrfs. iirayofievuv. 
 
 It is a common brachylogy to find the pronoun supplied to a genitive abso- 
 lute from a word in the sentence itself, or in that preceding it (Jelf, 894); 
 or when the gen. part, is wholly indefinite, the pronoun is without diificulty 
 supplied by the mind, or the indef. words xpdynara, &vepuiroi, as Thuc. i. 
 116, inayyeKdemoov (Jelf, 696, 3). The pecidiarity of the present case is the 
 change of subject from Iffxvffdyrwv, ' when they grew powerful, and people called 
 them in: sc. as the Britons Ht-ngist and Horsa. The word appears to have 
 acquired a technical sense, for we find it ii. 68, v. 45, and in Herod, viii. 
 112. r^ 6fjki\l(f fiuKKo V — ' more from intercourse than from a7iy regular 
 
 - compact ;' }xa\\ov enim ssepe sic ponit ut altera pars comparationis intelligenda 
 sit, viii. 81, 140. Pop. and ch. 5 a, 8 c. Others, as Krug., understand 'more 
 than in fonmr times.' It has been suggested also that fiaWov may signify 
 *magis, magisque,' * indies sgepius,' or, as we say, 'more and more even- 
 day.' &ira(Tiv ijdvvaro ^icviicTjcroi, sc. "EAAtji/oj Ka\(7adai — could 
 not win its way to become the received name for all also. Thuc. repeats the same 
 phraseology, ^irl rh fivduSes iKviviKi\K6ra^ i. 21. Pop. cites an imitation by 
 Pausanias ii. 29, 3, tmiv i^tyiKr,a*, and also Tac. Ger. c. 2, * Nationis nomen 
 non in nomen gentis evaluisse.* reKtnfpioi—fr. T€Kfii)pioy, a word of 
 Thucyd. own. Krig. 
 
 (c.) oi/Sanou Tovs ^vfiTravTas u)v6fia(rcv—BC.''E\Xr)vas. Pop. Butwe 
 may simply say, 'has nowliere called them by a collective name.' Kriig. remarks 
 upon this that no»'6AAT7.'€5, //. ii. 530, is undoubtedly spurious. robs 
 
 /i€T' 'Ax/AA€«s. Cf. //. ii. 684, Ot' 5' elxov *^iV 7j5"E\Ac£5a KoXXiyivaiKa, 
 Myp/iiSdi/cy 8' iKa\evvro KaV'EWnves Kal "Axaiol. hvaKa\i7. Bl. re- 
 
 marks the ava here has an intensive force, as in oi'a7rei0€ti', &c. With this Pop. 
 agi-ees, who renders it * nominatim; ' Jwnoris causd: Undoubtedly this force of 
 the word arose from the primitive meaning of avd, ' over and over again,' as 
 such repetition would occur in encomiums. It is not impossible that the 
 primary meaning may be the true one here. Cf. Soph. Phil. v. 800, and Plato, 
 Rep. 471 D — yiyvuffKovris re koL avaKoXovvre^ ravra ra oidnara kaviovs, 
 a5€A<^ous, varepas, vUTs — where the notion of repeated mention comes pro- 
 minently forward, oif fi^v oifSh ^ap^dpovs — ' neque vero barbaros 
 guidon.' Nor, moreover, did Ae either speak of ^ap^apoi, because not as yet had 
 even the Hellenes, I fancy, been separated off i?ito one couniemame, the repre- 
 sentative of a counter, or antagonistic notion, sc. ' not Greeks.' All mankind 
 were distinguished into Greeks and barbarians — Plato, Politic, p. 262 d — and 
 the former were by nature, ipso facto, the enemies and masters of the latter. 
 See Dem. c. Mid. 14; Plato de Rep. v. p. 470 c; Isocrat. Panath. c. 66, and 
 Ar. Pol. i. 1,5, 5*6 ipdaiv at ironjTal ^ap^dpuv 5' "EAArji/as dpxfiv fiKos. Eurip. 
 Iph. Aul. 1379. (The metaphor is derived from a counterpoise, or equivalent 
 in the balance.) hvriTraXov seems rather out of its place in the 
 collocation, but this, as Kriig. remarks, may be justified by the emphasis which 
 it requires. It is no contradiction to this statement that Hom. 11. ii. 867, calls 
 the Carians ^ap^ap6<p(t)voi, for there no national appellative is intended, — ^the 
 word only has its original reference to imintelligible speech. See Nitzch. Od. 
 i. 1 80. See Niebuhr, vol. i. pp. 27, 28. ^'Jfations whose languages were more 
 nearly akin than Latin and Greek, would still speak so as not to be mutually 
 understood, and this is all Herodotus was thinking olTlThat there was an 
 essential affinity notwithstanding the difference, is probaCl^ from the ease with 
 which so many Polasgic nations ripened into Hellens, as well as from the exist- 
 ence of an element nearly akin to the Greek in the Latin language, the Pelasgic 
 origin of which seems unquestionable.' Compare * Nomen Latinum,' 'Nomen 
 Italicum,' &c., with %v ovofia. 
 
 (d.) Oi 5' oZv ws eKaffroi — KXijdepres. After careful consideration of 
 all that has been written upon this difficult passage, I conclude that Thuc. 
 meant to say, ' The Hellenes received their name first of all by separate com- 
 munities,— i.<?. such as spoke an Hellenic dialect intelligible to one another, 
 were so called, wherever found ; — subsequently all such were collectively em- 
 braced under one great distinctive appellation, sc. Hellenes. But during neither 
 of these periods did they enter upon any great common enterprise.' We must 
 translate : Tlie several Helle^iic communities then {oZv resuming what had been 
 s&\6.), first so called separately city by city {s2cch, that is to say, as spoke a dialect 
 intelligibk to each other), and afterwards collectively (sc. so called) did not, ^c. 
 I cannot agree with Peile that ot e/catrrot are the same with Kara 'iT6\fis. The 
 01 tKoa-Toi refer both to Kara irdXeis and ol ^v/iTravris {=when they came to be 
 united), and the two latter expressions imply different periods rather than 
 different persons. Poppo's version is not very clear : ' Ii vero qui pro se guisque 
 
8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ ChaIp. 5.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUOYDIDES. 
 
 et cppidatim, quotqttot mutuo se intelUgebant, et omnes una postea Hellenes sunt 
 vocatV On «$ Ueurroi, cf. Jelf, § 714, 2 c, § 870, 4, and on oZv, Jelf, § 737, 3. 
 Kriig. says that to ol %Kcurroi must be supplied itcKiidriaav, and that this is the 
 construction in all similar cases, and quotes i. 113, i, vii. 65-74, 3. In the 
 existing state of linguistic and ethnological science, it was not unnatural for 
 Thucydides, and Herodotus (i. 57) to imagine that the Pelasgic and Hellenic 
 were generically distinct dialects, and that consequently the races who spoke 
 them were generically distinct also. The contrary is now known to be the 
 case. Kead, as above, Niebuhr; vol. i. p. 27. tnparfiav may surely 
 
 1)6 considered as a cognate accusative after ^vvriXdov, as arpanlas i^rjXdov, c. 1 5, 
 •without supposing, as some do, an ellipse of us. See the instances quoted, 
 Jelf, §558, I. irXe/wis Attic Greek for -ir\e7ov, as Eurip. Herac. 
 
 258, rov Qtov irXtia) <f>povuv, Bl. It seems to be analogous to xpt^a" XP'io'^'*'i 
 ace. cognat. So xAciCTo xP^<'^^<»'. "V- 105. 0^(70, &c. XP'JO'^**. Kriig. Translate, 
 • because by this time they were making more use of the sea* 
 
 Chapteh IY. — (a.) Vlivws. Kead Grote, vol. i. eh. 12. 'Cretan Legends. 
 MinosandhisFamily.'Thirlwall, i. p. 144. toAo/totoj iKT-fiearo — like 
 the Latin ' primus adeptus est' — * was the first person whom we hear of as having 
 acquired.* Kriig. says Thucyd. preferred the form iraXairaTos, though most 
 MSS. here, and in i. 1 8, have wa\ou6raTos. 'EWuvikv 5, — irp6rfpoy yhp 
 
 KapiK^ iKokuro, Schol. Krug. refers to Pliny, H. N. iv. 11, to show 
 
 that the sea which washed the shores of Greece Proper was first called Grecian, 
 in distinction from the Macedonian Sea, by the Romans. Kapas 
 
 i^fXdaas. Herod, (i. 171) appears to contradict this, by asserting that the 
 Carians or Leleges lived in the islands under the protection of Minos, and did 
 not pay tribute. But Thucyd. qualifies his own statement by ^<^' 80-01/ ^Swvoto, 
 and we may suppose with Am. that Minos treated the Carians very mildly, not 
 expelling them altogether from their honjes, but allowing, them to amalgamate 
 with his own settlers. The Dorian and Ionian colonies at a later period com- 
 pletely cleared the islands, sweeping away all vestiges of the ancient race and , 
 their language. Isocrates ascribes this exploit to the Athenians, Panegyric. 
 C. 16, rks KvK\6.Zas vfitrovs, irfpl hs iytvovro iroAAal 7rpaynaT(7aiy Kara r^v M/vw 
 rov Kpi^rbj SwaarciaVf ravras rh reXevToiov inrh Kapwv ifaTexoM**'"^. iK$aX6vr(S 
 4K*lyovs, ovK ^iiiu<raadat rks x^P°-^ irdXfxTjaav, iXXh rovs fjdXiara filov rSav 
 'EXX-fiytov Beofitvovs KaT(fiKiffav fls aurds. r6 rt Xpa-riK6v — * Piracy ^ 
 
 in the abstract. Pop. and others have noticed that the re here, as elsewhere in 
 Thucyd., appends sentences to propositions already complete, more commonly 
 than in other writers. Yet even here the appended clause is a sort of epexegesis, 
 or carrying out of what precedes, the suppression of piracy being part of the 
 same act as the expulsion of the Carians — tr. ' and therein cleansed the sea of 
 piracy* See on the whole question, ch. ix. a. rov Uvai. The in- 
 
 finitive with the article in the genitive to express the final cause of an action. 
 See Jelf, § 492, who quotes Caesar de B. G. iv.. Naves dejiciendi operis a bar- 
 baris missse. The old grammars supposed an ellipse of «v«jca, Matth. 540-1. 
 Tr. for the sake of his revenues coming in to him more freely. * Sic et iiruaipxurBau 
 et iinrXflv* Pop., and cf. ii. 13, wpoaiSvroiv. There is a similar use of the Gen. 
 in N. T. Cf. hfiaruXfu rov axix^adcu, Acts xy. 20. 
 
 Chaptee V.^a.) naXXov — 'i.e. fiaXXov ^ irpSrfpov. Cf. V. 81 ; viii. 9,* 
 Pop. avruv k^vvaroirirtav. The negative here is a privative, 
 
 aa in ov fi4ya\a, ch. i, i.i^p oh n^yas, viii. 100. But ' this privative force really 
 belongs to the original negative notion, as may be seen when these words are 
 resolved into their full form, as av^p %s ov fi4yas 4<rrlv' Jelf, § 738, 2. i. The 
 whole expression is what is called a ' Litotes,' i. e. a figure of speech where less 
 is said than is meant, and therefore, perhaps, as in Irony, more implied. In 
 such cases, the negative, instead of being prefixed to the noun, precedes its 
 article, or governing preposition. rols aadf v4<ti rpo<t>Ti 5 — * support 
 
 for the needy.* Kriig. collects several passages where 6 aadev^s means ' the 
 poor man,' as opposed to * the rich.' Of these one is sufficient, 3 r ^ad€v^s 6 
 ■wXovaids rf, 'Em. Supp. ^2S- Kark Kti/xas olKovfidvas. Thismay 
 
 either mean (i) that the towns were little better than villages, i.e. that they 
 consisted of straggling houses, constructed upon no regular plan, or (2) that 
 the towns actually consisted of an a^regate of villages, as indeed was the case 
 with Sparta in earlier, and Athens itself in later times, cf. ch. 10 a. This Pop. 
 thinks is confirmed by ch. x. * Any society of men united together as one 
 Commonwealth under the same laws is called in Greek ir6xis. Thus a irdXis 
 may be a mere collection of huts in a forest ; or, like Lacedaemon itself, a 
 number of stra^ling houses unenclosed by walls,' Am. rov fiiou 
 
 rhv irX(7a-rov 4iroiovvro — ' they were in the habit of milking the greater part 
 of their livelihood ; ' the English idiom coincides with this use of iroiiiaQai, which 
 is by no means uncommon. Kriig. compares aTrb ytupyiat rdv ^iov ■voiuadw.j 
 Xen. (Econ. vi. The younger scholar will observe that jSfos is not ^«^ — animal 
 life — but social, and moral life, or, as here, the means of living, 
 alffx^vr^v ^xovros — 'not yet involving any shame* 'carrying with it any 
 shame* The phrases <pe6vov tx^iv, JEsch. Prom. 865, ixofup^v ^X*'»'> Pind. Isth. 
 V. 61, are similar, upon which Hermann (ad Vig. p. 753) remarks. In his 
 locutionibus omnibus ^x**" retinet suam vim, sic ut notet — * conjunctum quid 
 cum quo esse* quoted by Kriig. Zih. rh v^ov^v exov iu ry avrlKa, iv. 108 c, is 
 somewhat similar. ot traXaioi, rS>y Troirir&y — ' The old among 
 
 (t.c. of) the poets = the old poets* See for the fact Od. iii. v. 71, where Nestor 
 asks the question of Telemachus. Hymn. Apoll. v. 452. Indeed, the custom 
 belongs naturally to a rude state of society. Caesar, B. G. vi. 21, says of the 
 Germans, * Latrocinia nullam habent infamiam, quae extra fines cuj usque civi- 
 tatis fiunt.' Similar statements have been made concerning the North American 
 Indians and other savage tribes. Zevort instances the razzias of the African 
 Arabs, and we might refer to the Scotch * harryings.' Vide Lay of the Last 
 Minstrel, William of Deloraine, &c. KaXws. "Well rendered by Bloomf. 
 
 ' handsomely,* in the sense of dexterously ; ' as handsome is derived from the 
 low German * handsaem,' ' handy* He also aptly quotes Spenser (given in 
 Johnson's Diet.), ' under it he may convey any fit pillage that cometh handsomely 
 in his way.' The Schol. has tvatfiios, <piXavdpdm<a5 ; Dale has * cleverly ; ' Engel- 
 man, 'geschickt;' Zevort, 'Les pirates habiles.' Cf. rh \pfiffcurdcu koX&s 
 X(yf]<Tifiov, vi. 12 a. 
 
 (6.) Tcbj iriffrtis K.r.X.^iporr-fjo-eis. Some (e.g. Bothe and Owen) have 
 very naively objected that it is not the poet who asks the question, as 
 though a writer were not in such matters to be identified with the charactera 
 
10 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 ChAp. 6.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 IP 
 
 HI 
 
 of his work,—* in tie enquiries made from those who landed anywhere, always 
 'putting the same question,' or, in their questions . . . always asking. See kotA 
 iritrnv, ch. 136; Jelf, § 583. 74- When in ch. 10 Thucyd. says "O/iTjpos 
 irtiroirjKe k.t.K he does not mean that Homer made the Greek fleet, 
 fi' . . . €t(rti'— transition to the oratio recta. See Jelf, 886, d. Here oiK-omSi- 
 C6vroov is to be taken as one word— making no reproach of it, cf. ch. i a. Krug. 
 remarks that, owing to this close connection, we have tc-ou/c, and not oUr^. 
 4witi€\€5—those whose business it might happen to be that they 
 should knotv—i.e. because their interest required it. Bl. quotes oh im^LtXh 
 ravra u54vou, Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 
 
 {c.) T<p Tra\ al(t> rp6x(fi. Most editors understand this of piracy and free- 
 booting. Kriig. observes that we have a reference to Trjs iraKalas \r}tTrflas 
 immediately afterwards, and that the words iraAaiy Tpdircf ventrat are not very 
 appropriate for the description of a social habit, a mode of living. He therefore 
 believes the allusion to be to Kara Kw^as oUelffdai. AoKpovs— 
 
 'AKapvavas. Grote, vol. ii. p. 388, says, ' These were undoubtedly the most 
 backward members of the Hellenic aggregate. Though not absolutely without 
 a central town, they lived dispersed in viUages, retiring, when attacked, to 
 inaccessible heights, perpetually armed, and in readiness for aggression and 
 plunder wherever they found an opportunity. There is no information respect- 
 ing them from the commencement of the historical period down to the Persian 
 war.' Thuc. i. 6 ; iii. 94. '^^ (ri5Tjpo«|>op€T(70at— ' The wearing 
 
 ofweapo7is '— i. e. continuously, and when engaged in peaceful occupations. Bl. 
 quotes from Dr. Clark—' Among the Circassians the labours of the plough 
 become a warlike occupation, and the sower goes to cast his grain attended by 
 his sabre and his fusil.' 
 
 Chapter VI.— (a.) iai^vpo<pdp€i. Kriig. says that we have the act, 
 voice, and not the middle, as in last chapter, because v "EAAas cannot be con- 
 ceived of as wearing weapons /or itself;—' for its personal protection.' 
 a(ppdKTOvs olK-hffii^—'domicilia non munitaJ Sunt v6\iis kTcixiffroi. 
 Cf. vi. 85. Pop. There seem to be no historical grounds for supposing that 
 dwelling-houses ever were fenced. The position of luWjatj must be noticed. 
 ' They made their daily way of living habitually with arms '—^vviidT} is what 
 Dr. Donaldson calls a tertiary predicate, Gr. Gr. p. 200. This nomenclature 
 will be elsewhere discussed. Kriig. makes the whole equivalent to v Biaira, V 
 iTFoi-hffavTo fifff SirAwv, ^vvrjQns ?iv. This would make ^vtrfidn a simple predicate, 
 which does not seem to be what the author exactly meant. Jelf, § 458, z, seems 
 to express it more correctly. ' They made a habit of wearing arms in their 
 daily life.' (TTj/ielov 5' iffrl ravra rrjs 'EA\. ?Tt ovru vcfiofiiva. 
 
 ' These parts of Greece, Iry being so inhabited still, afford a proof: Dale's ver- 
 sion—' Those parts of Greece which still live in this way, are a proof; from 
 want of attention to the absence of the article before vffidfxiva, is incorrect. 
 ^vToT? irpwTOi.An idiom much discussed. Jelf, § 444, «. considers ro7s as 
 an instance of the article used for (or rather retaining its original force of) the 
 demonstrative pronoun, and compares iK toC, hence, vph rov, before, &c. ; yet 
 translates not ' horum,' but ' omnium primi.' In § 139, 4, he seems to adopt 
 the explanation given below as that of Arnold. Matthise, § 290, also says that 
 
 the article appears to be used as a pronoun in the phrase iv ro7s, and draws two 
 conclusions, (1) that the formula iv ro7s stands by itself, and is not to be joined 
 with the superlative following ; (2) that ro7s is neuter because the superlative 
 even in the fem. is sometimes used with it. He subjoins that hardly any 
 explanation of the phrase can be given to suit all passages, since usage has 
 given to it a greater extension than it originally had. Arnold's explanation is 
 that of Hemsterh. ad Luc. t. i. p. 170, i.e. iv rots is to be coupled with the 
 dative superlative (understood) of the word which stands in the superlative and 
 nominative — e.g. iv ro7s [npurois] irpwroi — 'first among the first; \ e. the very 
 first. Kriig. and Madvig think that the participle was originally supplied, and 
 that when iv ro7s came to be used adverbially the gender of the ro7s was no 
 longer considered. Kriig. accordingly interprets this passage iv ro7s [/caro- 
 d€/j.ivois] irpuToi KaridevTo. Hermann noticing the idiom {ad Vig. p. 765) 
 explains, iv ro7s rotovrois odtri, /xaAto-xa roiovros — ' i7i iis quce talia sunt maxime 
 talis; Yet certainly in several places where the phrase occurs, a qualified, and 
 not an exaggerated superlative is required. Cf. iii. 17, 81 ; vii. 24, and Arnold 
 seems right in translating — ' among the first; * 07ie of the first ' — ' but we suppose 
 not necessarily the very first,' says Peile. We may doubt whether this be not 
 the very meaning to be assigned to iv ro7s irpcaTois as contradistinguished from 
 iv ro7s irpuTot. av^ifiivp, as the Latin ' discinctus,' refers primarily 
 
 to a loose method of wearing the dress, and is therefore applied to a lax and 
 luxurious mode of life — N. B. the position of the article with the noun, and cf. 
 supra lui/^^Tj. Kal 01 vpffffivrepoi . . . <popovvr€S. DiflBculties 
 
 have been made concerning this passage, because a luxurious mode of living 
 was no reason why they should cease to wear linen tunics, but the contrary. 
 Thucyd. meant to say that the wearing of such tunics up to a late date was a 
 proof of the existence of greater luxury among the Athenians. For the short 
 period which had elapsed since the cessation of the practice was a proof of its 
 long continuance, and its long continuance was a proof of luxury. We may 
 join 5ia t^ a^poHairov to ov Tro\iJs xp^^'os erretSr? and tr., ' And the elder members 
 of the wealthy class among them, not till very lately {owing to their luxurious way 
 of living) left off wearing, ^"C. ov iroKvs XP^^^^ iveidrj must 
 
 be compared with ov iroWa Ittj eVciS^, at the close of the ch. and 6\p4 t' a</>' ov 
 ch. 14, whence it is plain that the phrase was used parenthetically, and almost 
 adverbially, like our own ' it's not long since; ' ifs no great while: A writer, 
 speaking of us, might say, ' Their older men, not till very lately (owing to their 
 old fashioned habits) left off wearing pig tails.' Kriig, takes hia rh aPpod. in 
 close connexion with <l>opovvrfs, meaning, I suppose, ' and ifs no long time since 
 their old men left off wearing, from luxurious motives, liiien tunics. But this, 
 with the existing collocation, seems to me unnatural. avro7s . Kriig. 
 
 well remarks that this is not the same thing here as avruv. Arn. excellently 
 expresses the difference in his version. It is not long since they saw their 
 elderly men leave off, ^c. KpcofivAov. The exact nature of this 
 
 mode of dressing the hair seems to have puzzled the Scholiasts, who might 
 reasonably have been expected to know more about it than we. Some imagine 
 it to have consisted in rolling the hair from the temples round the head in the 
 shape of a crown. The verb ava^uo'dai, however, seems to indicate that the 
 hair was gathered up to the top of the head, and there fastened round a pin 
 
12 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDE8. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 ChIp. 7.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 13 
 
 I 'Ml 
 i 
 
 made like a grasshopper, so forming a sort of horn — and Suidas indeed ex- 
 pressly says as much. "Winckelman admits that it must have been a bunch of 
 hair formed in some such way, and resembling a bunch of ivy berries. And the 
 etymology, KfwfivKos for Kopvnfiv\os, seems to indicate this. We cannot suppose 
 that it was nothing more than gathering the hair at the back of the head as 
 may be seen in the Greek statues, for this would be nothing distinctive or 
 remarkable. See Diet, of Gr. and Ram. Antiq. for mode of dressing the hair, 
 under * Coma.' The heads of Apollo and Niobe there given may illustrate a 
 KpoifivKos. Aristoph. refers to the custom, Nub. v. 984, Equit. 1331, and Virgil, 
 Ciris, V. 127. Mitchell on Arist. Vesp. 230, supposes that the Athenians 
 imitated the Egyptians, who wore the chafer, their favourite symbol, in a 
 similar manner. The custom, Kriig. adds, continued up to the battle of 
 Marathon. Cf. Athen<stis, yi. 512, who quotes Heracleides Ponticus, 'AXovpyri 
 fihv yhp ^/tirfaxox^o ludria, toikiAous 8' inr4^vvov x'Twras, Kopvfifiovs 8* avaSovfifPOi 
 rStv rpix^v^ X9^^^^^ rirrtyas trepl rh fifroyirov koI rhs Kdfias itpopovv. Kol ovroi 
 ^av oT TotouTOi, 01 T^v iv Mapadwvi viKi^aavres ftdxW- Like the violet crown, 
 it was intended to symbolize their indigenous origin — both the violet and the 
 grasshopper being regarded as the children of the earth. Bl. and G611. assert 
 that wearing linen garments could not in itself constitute luxury ; and that 
 these must have been the woUiKoi mentioned by Athenseus xii. p. 512, and by 
 JSlian, Var. His. iv. 22, 'embroidered dresses,' probably borrowed from Egypt. 
 But Krug. observes that there was a ' luxus ' even in wearing linen tunics, 
 which were very costly [Voss, Mythol. Br. iii. p. 262, flf.], and such a custom 
 would necessarily be considered effeminate, for we learn from Herod, [v. 87] 
 that these tunics were worn by the Athenian women. ivipati. 
 
 The old reading was ^i' ip(m ; but the editors now imiversally give the former, 
 which is contained in several MSS., and is supported by analogy, as it is from 
 iv€p<rca, old fut. of ivdpo). It also occurs in several later writers, as ^lian, 
 Procopius, &c. See Bloomf. i<p" oZ Ka\ •l(«»'»i/. 0. Miiller 
 
 {Dorians, § 26) says that, on the contrary, the Athenians borrowed the custom 
 from their Asiatic brethren. And Zevort (the French translator) pertinently 
 remarks, 'II est peu probable, en eifet, qu'a une ^poque oii les Atheniens 
 vivaient disperses dans les bourgades isol^es, et livr^s aux travaux des champs, 
 ils eussent d^j4 adopts un costume qui suppose tout a la fois beaucoup de loisir, 
 et des richesses que le commerce seul pouvait procurer.' See however on the 
 other side Bekker's Excursus on the subject in Charicles. 
 
 ic.) fji€Tpl(f icrBriri. * A sober style of dress, and suitable or conformable 
 to the present manners, the Lacedcemonians were the first to adopt, or, take into 
 ttaej This Miiller confirms at length. The Laconian himation was worn the 
 whole year through by the younger people, and even by the Laconizing party 
 at Athens. See vol. ii. p. 266. ol rii fitlCo* tcfKrrjfAfvoi. This 
 
 certainly seems to indicate that Thucyd. did not believe in the existence of 
 equality in property at Lacedaemon. Indeed the opinion respecting the re- 
 division of property by Lycurgus, and the banishment of gold and silver from 
 the state, rests upon the authority of Plutarch, and, as is well known, he is by 
 no means trustworthy. The reader should by all means consult Grote [ii. 
 520-525] on the other side. 
 
 (d.) lyvuvuerjcay. The story runs that Orsippus of Megara accidentally 
 
 dropped his girdle in the race, and was consequently victorious. His example 
 was purposely followed by Acanthius the Lacedaemonian, and hence arose the 
 practice of running without girdles. But as these circumstances are supposed 
 to have occurred in the fifteenth Olympiad, it is evident that great latitude 
 must be allowed to the expression oit iroWa trrj. Or we may adopt the hypo- 
 thesis of Boeckh [Inscrip. i. p. 555— quoted by Pop.], that the runners in the 
 Diaulus immediately followed the example, of Orsippus, but that the other 
 athletes, to whom the belt was no practical inconvenience, did not discard its 
 use until shortly before the time of Thucydides. Kriig. suggests that Thucyd. 
 is not speaking in reference to the Olympic, but to the other public games. 
 Miiller, in his Dorians, is wrong in saying that Thucydides is contradicted by 
 Plato, Rep. V. p. 452, for Plato does not assert that the Cretans were the first 
 to leave off their girdles, but simply that they were the first to commence 
 gymnastic exercises ; fipxovro rwv yvuvaffluv irpurov fikv Kprjrfs, ^ireira Sc 
 AaKfSaifiSviOi— And that yvfxvhs does not necessarily mean naked, see note in 
 Sheppard's Th^ophrastus, ch. xx. p. 204. The competitors in the Homeric 
 games wore girdles, iZ. iv. 68 5. ^t: rh <pav-.p6v. Poppo's exposi- 
 
 tion appears best, airoUvTes koL is rh (pavcphv 'irpoe\d6pT€S. Such a 'sensus 
 praegnans ' of the participle is by no means uncommon— there is no desiy7i 
 implied in the expression. Kriig. has * vor den Augen des Publikums,' which 
 
 comes to much the same thing. a lira ' Some think that 
 
 Xiira is the dative from rh Klira, gen. -aos, dat. -at, the 9 being by every day 
 pronunciation shortened to \iva, and then €\aiov is the adj. of ^Axui, so that 
 Kit iKaicp is * with olive oil,' but the quantity and the elision render this very 
 doubtful.' Jelf, § 113, 10. It looks much more like an ace. from Ai^|/5, gen. 
 Xiir65, which may have existed as well as \1fi65. Hence Xlirrof^ai, and XeXifififvos 
 
 * ready a)iointed for the co7nbat' and K€\infx4voi fxdxv^, S. c. T. 380, 'eager 
 for the fray: 5taCeu/xoTa— 'belts across the body.' This may 
 throw some light on aripvwv Siafiird^ P. F. v. 65. ^(rnv oTs. Jelf, 
 § 817. 8. id\a ridfrai Ka\ k.t.X. Kriig. writes that the 
 construction ought to have been &0A«v ndenivoiv sine Kai, for Thucydides does 
 not mean to tell us that the barbarians had games, but that they wore girdles 
 at them. This is true : yet there are many cases in which /cat is not a simple 
 copulative. We may express it in English— 'And even now the barbarians 
 have games where they wear the belt.' It was accounted immodest among 
 Orientals even for males to appear naked. Herod, i. 10. Plato, Rep. 
 V. 452 c. 
 
 (c.) 6tioi6rpoTra ^iair<li/xffiop. This Jelf, § 552, f. resolves into the 
 adverbial accusative like fifrpia Cvv, Ion 632 ; ovS' aX-n^TJ (axri. Plat. RejJ. 
 495 c. Kriig. connects iroAAa with 6yioi6rpo-na, and explains upon the principle 
 of a cognate accusative, so that SiaiTwi/rai iroXKh Siair-fjfjLara 6fjLoi6rpoTta is 
 equivalent to rtoXXhi, diaiT-fifxaTa & ^laiTuvrai bfxoi6Tpoird icrriv. He compares 
 ain-ivaXa pavfiax^'iv vii. 34, 5-7 1, 4. For the fact he refers to Herod, vi. 58. 
 
 Chapter VII. — (a.) vXainurepcov hvrwv. The plural agrees with a 
 noun understood, implying some indefinite notion. So in English we say, 
 
 • Things are looking better,' and so on. Eender, therefore, * When things began 
 to admit more of navigation^ — i.e. 'when navigation became more general,' 
 
H 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book T. I Chap. 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 15 
 
 Baid not of a particular case, but generally. Cf. irXcT^cirr.pa ^^vero ch. 8, and 
 ^iuara ^v, eh. i, which latter means that the subject comes under the category 
 of things impossible, and is thus more general and indefinite than the sing. 
 hZ<>varou- tr. one of things impossible, rather than, in more positive terms, «;. 
 impossible thing. ^ m^f^os, says Kriig., is from the Ionic ttAc^^ as .ActCo, 
 i M 4 Bekker has irAcituos, ' but Lobeck ad Fhryn. (writes T. K. A.), after 
 showin- that rXd>iuos occurs J^.schin. defalsd Leg. p. 337, and Thcophr^ist. CAar. 
 iii says" Si qua est igitur lectionum discrepantia Atticis utique prior scriptura 
 adserenda videtur.' ^.p.ovaias. This is of course in exact contrast 
 
 to ir«tou(Tfav xwi^*" «"'' ^Xo-'res, ch. 2, which see. auro.s to*s 
 
 ahiaXoU-the beach itself ^i.e. the very beach. i^^ A a^^avov- 
 
 *cut them off from the main land; sc, by a wall across the neck of the isthmus. 
 This implies the subsequent occupation of the ground. Cf. iv. 45- iv. "S- 1^- 
 102 See the case of Potidsea and its walls, i. 56. cKatrro 'tw 
 
 each several case; ' relatum ad ineolas, ut paulo post ivy/c.ffM^Vot.' Pop. 
 &,,T.(rxoCaav-or perhaps with Kriig. and Poppo's conjecture, the pres. part. 
 hvriaxovcrav. The construction I should compare with 4k rov hr\ -KKuarov 
 oZaau ch 2 where see note. Tr. on account of the long continuance (or wide 
 prevalence) ^ of piracy. h.vr4x^^v is to hold out in the sense which we give to the 
 word as equivalent to continue. Cf. with Pop. ii. 64, vii. 71. The reading of 
 many MSS., i.e. kvnnxov^Ta., is bad, though Goll. would fain defend it. For this 
 would imply that after long resistance to piracy, many ancient cities changed 
 their sites —a fact of which there is no historical evidence whatever. On 
 piracy in general, see the stories with which Herod, commences his ^^*^^r>n/and 
 Herm Pol. Antiq. § vi. 6, 7. %P"»'' '^^ ^^^ ^^'^^^ «^ ' plundered,' does not often 
 appear without the accompanying k<x\ h<^v, like the Latin, ' ferre et agere. 
 o/-0aXc£(r (not-like oh-p-haXa, ch. i, to be taken as a single term. So we say 
 * non-residents,' ' non-combatants.' ' Who dwelt on the seaside without being 
 seamen ' Hobbes. Kdrt^ and i^vot as the prepositions Karh. and h.vh, respectively 
 denote 'down on the sea-coast' and 'up the country.' Xenophon's Anabasis 
 is an instance familiar to everyone. hvc^K.<r^.iuoi--^sitiiate up the 
 
 country ' There is no necessity to read h.v^'Kicrtxivai, for cities and their in- 
 habitants are frequently confused together in construction: vi. 88, 94-; vi". 
 64. Pop. refers to h.voLKK^<jeai, ' emigrare in regioncm a man remotam, 1. 58, 
 and viii. 3 1 . 
 
 CHAPTEn VIII.— (ff.) Kop€s Koi ^oiviKis. Coucemiug the Carians, cf 
 ch iv and Herod, i. 171. On the occupation of Thasus by the Phcenicians, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 44; ^i- 47 ; also iv. 147 ; vi. 44- f^^<'^^' Some MSS. 
 
 have ^Ky^eav, which Kriig. in his note appears to prefer, though he prints ^Kioav 
 ill the text He compares ^K-neav rhv SixeXia*' iv. 6, ' dwelt in Sicily.' 
 A^Aou. See the account given, iii. 104. N««v &va.p€0.t.r«v. 
 
 OvK-f, is properly the * grave,' that which contains the urn, or sarcophar-i- I3ut 
 the verb avaip4<, is not'improperly used, as the earth would of necessity ue taken 
 up and carried off. (Kriig.) Or we may say, ' when the graves were tal'cn upl 
 meaning their contents. ^^r^p %^,<jv-^ above half: This is an 
 
 instance of the omission of the defining article in a very familiar expression, 
 such as, indeed, is common in our own language. We say, ' in town,' * above 
 
 bridge,' 'below bar,' and the like. The same was the case in Greek with 
 iv Tl€\oirovvii<T(p, ch. 28 ; 'IffdfiSs (of Corinth) ; BactAcjJy (of Persia) ; FIJAis, 
 "Aypos, 2irov5ai. Krug. defends the same expression, virep ^/xiav toC &\\ou 
 crrpaT€Vfxaros, Xen. Anab. v. 10, where Schneider would insert the article. 
 Kiihner, Gr. Gr. § 484, mentions several such words, ' which occur frequently 
 in common speech, and are thus so generally in use, that even without the 
 article they can express a defined and individualized object.' Cf. ch. 16. See 
 more in Schaefer's note, (E. T. v. 640. Add Kipas, ch. 48 b, and vcKpovs, ch. 
 54 b, and cf. 89 c, loi b, 136 c. yvoiaOivres . . . ^vvTedafjLfidvp. 
 
 This is generally interpreted with Pop., Agniti habitu armorum, sc. armatura, 
 quippe qucB cum iis sepulta esset. ^wnQan^ivri seems to me to stand almost 
 parenthetically, expressing the reason why they were able to examine them, 
 recognised from the garniture of their armx)ur, inasmuch as it was found in the 
 grave with them, and from the mode of interment, the same as that which they 
 now employ. Goll., with several MSS., has i,vvTf9apniivoi, which makes equally 
 good sense, from the fact of their being buried along with their arms. But the 
 two nom. plur. participles are in this case awkward, and it does not seem 
 certain that the custom was confined to the Carians. Vide Soph. Ajax, 1409. 
 For the peculiarities of the Cretan armour, see Herod, i. 171. They invented 
 
 * crests ' {\6<povi) : the interior double handle, or double hand for the shield 
 {6xavov), which took the place of the old single strap {T€\dfia>i'), and what may 
 almost be called armorial bearings — i. e. (Trifxeia, crests or devices drawn upon 
 the shield. The Schol. says the Phoenicians were recognised because they were 
 buried with their faces to the west. But Pop. argues this was no sufficient 
 distinction, as other nations did the same thing — e. g. the Athenians. He refers 
 to Plutarch, Solon, x. ; ^1. Var. His. v. 14. 
 
 (b.) KaraffTOLvros Se — The 5^ is in apodosi 'inquam,' and (as often) resumes 
 the narrative from ch. 4. KfxKovpyoi — ^ evil-doers ^ sc. pirates. 
 
 8x6 ire p. The use of ircp as a suffix seems to indicate that especial stress is to 
 be laid on the word to which it is joined. 8y, who ; Sanep, the very man who : 
 fl, if: tXvtp, if as we may assume : 8t€, when ; ^reir^p, Just when, at the very 
 time when. See the note on ^imp, ch. 59 b. * The word is rare. See Hes. Theog, 
 291. Herod, v. 99; vi. 106' (T. K. A.) and 77. iv. 259. r^v Krri<riv. 
 
 Kriig. explains Krdiynvoi xp^Mctra. It would be better to point out to the tiro 
 how the termination in <ris indicates the actual process of acquisition. Cf. the 
 same phrase, ch.13. fifpaiSrfpov ^kov v — ♦ dwelt with more stability ^ 
 
 this has reference to the fieTavaa-Tda-en before mentioned, ch. 2. 
 rXov(Ti(ar(poi eavruv. In phrases of this sort the subject, instead of being 
 compared with anything else, is compared with itself at another time or place. 
 All the grammars furnish abundant instances. See Matth. § 460, and Jelf 
 § 782 g, where, however, instead of translating ^€iv6TaT05 aavrov, ' w/ien you so 
 entirely surpassed yourself: it would be more accurate to say, * when you were at 
 your best' — 'when you reached the highest point in cleverness you ever did 
 reach.* 4<pi4fi.fvoi ydp. These words convey the reason for the 
 
 statement $€$ai6T€pov ^kow. SovXelav. Kriig. renders this word 
 
 * JJnterwurfigkeit: * subordinate position: for slavery, in the strict sense of 
 the term, was, he says, unknown to the most ancient Greeks ; he refers to 
 Athenaeus, vi. p. 264 [Tauchnitz, p. 77] ; Herod, vi. 137; Diet. Atitiq. 1034. 
 
i6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Cjjap. 9.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 17 
 
 li 
 
 ■iii 
 
 v p Off §iro 10 vvro— 'tried to bring over to themselves* a word of which Thucyd. 
 is fond. See i. 57, and particularly the note on iii. eh. 47 a. 
 
 (c.) Ka\ iv TOUTv TV "rpiirv — Kriig. translates ' Verhdltnisse' — 'mutual 
 relations," cf. i. 97, 4v oTy Tprfiry Kariarj]. ^laXKov—' more than hereto- 
 
 fore: See note, ch. 3 b, * for perhaps their former relations were not altogether 
 extinct,' Krug. 
 
 ChaptebIX.— 'Aya/ieVvwi/ . . .vpoUx'^^' • • o^* &yo>v-ay€7pai. The 
 meaning obviously is, Agamemnon, in my opiyiion. collected, the armament, because 
 he surpassed his contemporaries in power, and not so much because he took with 
 him, &c. There is nothing more important for junior students to observe than 
 the distinction between the participle with and without the article. With the 
 article it is simply identified with the subject of the verb. Without the article 
 it expresses the cause or condition under which the verb is predicated of the 
 subject, and may be always given in English by introducing ' when,' * because,' 
 ' since,' * seeing that,' and the like. 6 toDto irpd^as aveeavtv, ' The man who did 
 this was killed: irpd^as ravra airtdavfv, ' He was killed since he did this.' See 
 as parallel vpoUxovrfs, ch. 18, note b. Jelfs long remarks upon the participle, 
 § 681, may be read for illustrations. Kal vavriK^ re &txa k.t.X. 
 
 Keiske proposed to substitute 5« for rt, and thereby hangs the whole contro- 
 versv concerning the meaning and usage of the latter word. Dr. Peile has 
 devoted great pains to its elucidation [Agam. App. C], and his conclusions 
 seem to me the most reasonable which I have met with upon the subject. It 
 will, however, be necessary for the student to study the dissertation for himself, 
 as it cannot be reproduced here in any abridgment which would be intelligible. 
 Let it suffice to quote one or two sentences in which he states results. * re 
 serves to connect the several items which make up the detail of a poetic picture, 
 so that they impress the mind with the perception of but one continuous subject 
 or group: ' t€ introduces a new term which is but an enlargement upon one 
 leading (former) term, or train of thought '—* in point of fact, it communicates 
 nothing more than the mind has already associated with something precedinii 
 
 it is an indication of some previous perception, and as long as the mind is 
 
 associating only a series of particulars included under the same general per- 
 ception, so long it expresses its thoughts by tc . . . re, hence its use as an affix 
 to the relative pronoun, and in such phrases as oT6s tc' I will give one remark- 
 able case in order to fix this doctrine concerning t€ on the student's memory. 
 Soph. Aj. 1310, TTjs o-^s vn^p yvvaiKos, fj rov ffov ff dfialnouos Ktyw. Here Her- 
 mann substitutes 7* for 0*. But the line contains a sneer which Agam. properly 
 in the next line calls an oY<rxiO"Toy \6y05 ; it means that he doubts whether she 
 might not be called wife to both— o» behalf of gour wife, or, must I sag, your 
 brothers jointlg — where t€ blends the two men in the same relation Xo one 
 woman. The student may also be assisted in arriving at a conception of what 
 is meant by attention to such passages as the difficult one (ii. 62, ad finem), 
 r^v r6\fjiav tj ^vvcffis ix^panipav irapexfrai, iKvlSi t€ ?iffffov iriarfvn, where the 
 clause introduced by re does not contain a separate, additional idea, but is 
 rather the epexegesis of that expressed in the first. Tr. not — and also trusts 
 less to Hope, but, in that it trusts less to Hope, or, arid withal trusts less to Hope. 
 The student should also read the remarks of Dr. Donaldson, who connects n 
 
 etymologically with /C6V. New Cratylus, §§ 149, 186, 195. Peile's version of 
 the present passage is, concurrentlg therewith {re ajxa) he became master, 
 &c. TvvSdpeo}. The authorities for this compact entered into by 
 
 the suitors of Helen to secure her to the one whom she might select, are, 
 Apollodorus, iii. 10, 9 ,- Pausanias, iii. 20, 9. See also Eurip. Iph. Aul. 51-80 ; 
 Soph. Ajax, HOC. Kriig. conjectures that the use of the name Peloponnesus 
 may have originated in the poetry of Tyrtaeus, from whom he quotes the line, 
 evpelav ne'Aoiros vnaov a(piK6ix€da. The whole fragment (Strabo, viii. 5, p. 362) 
 may be seen in Grote. 
 
 (b.) UeKovovvriffluvm-dj depend upon ol SeScyfidvoi — ' those of the Pelopon- 
 nesians that have received,' or it may follow (ra<{>fcrTa-ra—'the clearest accounts of 
 Peloponnesian affairs: Arn. thinks that the absence of the article and the use 
 of mxoirovirnaiwv for n6\o7ro»'j/77(TiO*c&;j/ militate against the last. Neither objec- 
 tion is fatal, but both are strong enough together to make most editors prefer 
 the first interpretation. Poppo finally (ed. 2da) adheres to the last, influenced 
 by the imitations of Dio Cass. p. 8, <p6.aiv oi ra aa<pi(TTaTa rw 2aPlv(av eiSSres ; 
 and Dion. Hal. Ant. Bom. p. 888, ol ra 'Pw/jiaiwu (racpeaTara i^TjTaK6T€5. It may 
 be doubted whether this be a sound principle, for ' imitatores, servum pecus,' 
 are likely to imitate a peculiarity simply because it is one, without much inves- 
 tigation as to its origin. I incline to the opinion of Pop. (large edition), that 
 ri has been misplaced ; following, as it ought to do, the final ra of ffatpetrrara, 
 the transcriber made some confusion. etr-nKirtiv 6vra o/jlcjs erxttv 
 
 —foreigner though he was, nevertheless had the naming of the country ; or, as 
 Goll. and Am., gave occasion to the naming of the country. This sense might be 
 thought to require vupaax^lv. But the passages quoted by Goll. on ayaudKr-nffiv 
 h^i, ii. 41, and by Arn. iii. 82, iv. i, Herod, v. loi, vi. 86, certainly show that 
 he is justified in saying that exetv is sometimes * in se habere causam et rationem' 
 and hence ' ansam dare alicui rei' Pop. has ' obtinuisse hunc honore^n, ut regio 
 cognomen ab eo acciperet: iirn\{m]v — fr. iirepxofiai, i. e. from the 3rd 
 
 per. sing, of an old perf., as we have i]\vais from the 2nd. ^Jsch. Agam. 
 243. The form is unusual (but see Xen. (Econ. xi. 4, quoted by Kriig.), tirriKvs 
 being the common nominative. * On the general question (says T. K. A.) see 
 Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 70.' He urges that the testimony of Thucyd. is here of 
 little weiglit, because he is not stating his own convictions, but merely relating 
 what he heard from Pelopjnnesian antiquarians. ^vvevfx^vvo-i' 
 
 Pop. has ' obtigisse,' 'fell to their lot ; ' so Kriig., * zugef alien: which he rightly 
 remarks is unusual, * accidisse' being the more common force of the word. He 
 quotes, however, Herod, iv. 157, ohZh a<pi xpwri>v awecpepeTo; and Eurip. 
 Herac. 919, av^npiperai ra iroAAa TroAAots ; and this is sufficient support. The 
 old rendering, ' were carried to a greater length by his posterity: is untenable. 
 Mr. Riddle, Terminalia, ii. says, * the subject is hvvafiiv. This power became by 
 subsequent additions still greater: «V t^ 'ArriKfj. This shows that 
 
 the name of Attica — 'AjcriKri, the Sea-board — must have extended at this period 
 more widely than it afterwards did — at any rate as far as the Scironian rocks, 
 where, according to Euripides, Eur}-stheus was caught by lolaus, and not slain, 
 but captured, kcJaAkttoj/ anpodiviov. Heracleid. 860. At this period Megara 
 belonged to Attica, and may have shared in the name. The traditionary 
 accounts vary as to the captor of Eurystheus— Apollodorus, ii. 8, i, and Dioi 
 
i8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 10.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 19 
 
 iv. 57, siding with Thucyd. ; and Pausanias, i. 44, 4, and Straljo, viii. p. 377 
 (579). ^'ith Euripides, p'opp. The fact is of little importance, except so far as 
 it seems to illustrate the difficulty of obtaining trustworthy historical evidence 
 on these matters. The reader may find an attempt to account for the divergence 
 of the legends by Pflugk. Eurip. Herac. p. 8. 'H p o k A € 1 8 w 1/ - without 
 
 the article, as here and elsewhere, when patronymics are used as proper names. 
 Kriig. On the Heracleids read Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. /iTjrpJs. The 
 
 name of this sister of Atreus is variously given as Nicippe, Leucippe, Menippe, 
 and Amphibia. Kara -rh olK^tov—'on the ground of relationship: 
 
 <p€vyovra rhv irarfpo— so. Pelops. The legend has a double form. 
 According to one, Hippodamia, wife of Pelops, from hatred to her step-son, 
 induced her own children, Atreus and Thyestes, to slay him, and Atreus accord- 
 ingly fled to escape his father's vengeance. In the other, Pelops himself slays 
 Chrysippus, and Atreus flies, dreading the same fate. For the Pelopida, see 
 Grote, vol. i. ch. vii. ovKtri—no longer came lack; or rather, *came 
 
 back no more: The phrase may be somewhat unusual, but there is no reason 
 to change it into ovk iiravexf^ftriffev, as Krug. has suggested. Indeed, he him- 
 self points out that it is defended by ovk(ti a<pw(riv, i. 91, cf 12 c. <t>6P(f. 
 Jelf, § 607. n^pafihwv. Eurystheus was son of Sthenelus, and 
 grandson of Perseus. See Miiller's Dorians, i. ch. 3, and Grote, vol. i. ch. 4. 
 All the preceding paragraph, it must be admitted, is a specimen of exceedingly 
 confused narrative and inartificial composition. But it was written in the earliest 
 stage of prose writing. It is possible to re-arrange the whole as Kriig. has 
 done, and still to confess with him, that the great accumidation of participles 
 makes the new arrangement as bad as the old. The infinitives rvyx^v^^v and 
 irapa/Scii/ depend upon Xfyovffi. 
 
 (c.) T^v ffTiiar^iav. ' Pro hoc, et hie et alibi non raro apud Thucyd., ubi 
 expeditionis bellicfe notio requiritur, in MSS. aut omnibus aut plurimis arpariav 
 legatur.' Pop. The latU^r is found, moreover, in places in Aristophanes {e.g. 
 Acharn. 251, 11 43, £^. 587), where the metre requires it. It does not, there- 
 fore, seem possible to retain the distinction of Ammonius and the grammarians, 
 * ffrparela abstractum esse verbi arpareveiv, nomina in -10 esse concreta et col- 
 lectiva.' The truth is, perhaps, that in all languages such expressions as ' the 
 expedition ' and ' the expeditionary army ' are wont to be confuswl. oh 
 
 yipiTi, K.r.\. — ^not from favour so much as from fear: This is supposed to 
 "be a tacit contradiction to x'=^f'»»' 'Arpflir}jt (pfpovrfs, Od. v. 307. irXuov (in 
 Thuc. more commonly irXe'ov) is 8)'non}-mous with iiaWov, which occurs ii. 
 
 39, 3. Kriig. 
 
 (d.) (i r(f tjcoi/bs reKfxripiSierai — *if in anyhodi/s opinion he is sufficient 
 authority to ground an infrence upon: or 'competent to furnish sure evidence: 
 That Thucyd. did not unhesitatingly follow him is clear from i. 10 ; ii. 41 ; vi. 2. 
 Pop. On the omission of iarX see Jelf 376, e. ^i' rov <iK'i]irrpov rp 
 
 »apa5<J(r€i — i.e. in H. ii. 108. * It was the custom with the ancients at that 
 earlv period, when wTitings were not yet distributed into books or chapters, 
 to make a division according to the prominent subjects anywhere treated 
 on. This was especially the case with Homer, portions of whose Iliad were 
 called by the names Ta<^os T\arp6K\ov, UfKvofiayr^la, as is done here. Cf. Mark 
 xii. a6, ivl t^s ^rov : liom. xi. 2.' Bloomf. Cf. Miiller's Lit. of Anc. Greece, 
 
 50-52, and on the Rhapsodists, p. 32, 33. Grote on the Ehapsodists, &c., 
 vol. ii. ch. 21. 
 
 (/.) UoKK^ffi vf]ffoi(Tt. Miiller {Mginetica, p. 24) points out that this 
 can only have reference to the Argolic Islands and those in the JEgean Sea 
 which lay round about, for Zacynthos, Dulichia and Paphos belonged to others. 
 ' Quales sunt Calauria, Hydrea, Tiparenus, Cecr^'phalea, fortasse ^gina, quan- 
 quam de h^c dubitat Miiller.' Pop. 
 
 Chapter X. — («.) fiiv — without a corresponding Sc. The opposition is to 
 be found in § 4. Kriig. /iiKpdv — 'an insignificant place: The pre- 
 
 dicative adjective of the general notion in the neuter sing. See Jelf, § 381, and 
 the passages there quoted. Poppo says, ' non legitur hie generalis sententia,' 
 and therefore understands TroKiap-a. But if we say, ' a 'poor sort of place: "^o 
 surely do predicate a general notion. Mycenae was destroyed by t!:e Argives, 
 B.C. 468, thirty-seven years before the Peloponnesian war. Strabo says that in 
 his time not a vestige remained of Mycenae. Yet of the Gate of the Lions, and 
 the Treasury of Atreus, in a style so unlike the later Greek architecture, con- 
 siderable remains are yet to be seen, and will probably last as long as the 
 world. Arn. See the vignette in Thirl wall's Greece, small ed. ^v. 
 
 Observe, not ejf?; ; the fact is admitted to be true, but it is contended that the 
 fact aflfords no ground for supposing the expedition not to have been great — 
 'And because Mycence was but an insignifi4:ant place, or, if any of the towns of 
 that day now seem to be of small account, one shoidd not, taking this as a sure 
 proof, disbelieve: ^'C. On n^ with indicat. doKe7 see Jelf, § 749. 
 p.^ y€V€adai. . . . This is what has been called the rcc?2<m/rtwY negative. 
 It owes its origin to the genius of the Greek language, which, where the pro- 
 minent idea in the speaker's mind is a negative, attaches a negative particle 
 to the predicate, whether another has preceded or no. Similar is the practice 
 of the uneducated with us, and with all nations. The best notice of the subject 
 is to be found in Buttman's excellent edition of the Meidias, Appendix. See 
 also Jelf, §§ 747, 748, 750. KaT^x^i — * obtinet' in Latin, from which 
 
 our word 'obtains' — expressing that the report extends and dominates over a 
 certain extent. So Eurip. Hijyp. 1464, <\)ri^iai Kar^xovaiv. Cf. 11 c. Pop. 
 refers to iii. 89, viii. 28 ; Kriig. to Valckn. on Eur. Hi2)p. 1465. 
 
 (6.) et Arj<^0etTj. On et with the optative, expressing the most general 
 and indefinite form of h}'potliesis, see Jelf, §855. KaracrK^vris rb. 
 
 i^d<p7]. Arn. has a long note on the distinction between KaracrKevf) and irapa- 
 cKfirf], which amounts to this ; that the former is the stationary and j^ermanent 
 stock — the ' fixtures,' as it were : the latter denotes, on the contrary, what is 
 moveable and temporary — what can be prepared for an occasion. The former 
 would include the fortifications and public buildings of a city; the latter, naval 
 and military armaments, &c. This seems correct as a general rule, though 
 as he admits, passages occur which are difficult to reconcile with it, as koto- 
 (TKeiAf Tov iroXe^Liou, viii. 5. It is certainly used in i. 89 (which see), so as to 
 include the moveable furniture of a household: compare ii. 38, 65 ; vi. 31, 
 from which it appears as though Pop. were right in calling it ' totam domus 
 instruendse rationem,' so far as these passages are concerned. Kriig. says it 
 can here mean nothing but ' Anlage,' — or KTifffjtara, as the Schol. call them, 
 
 C2 
 
 / 
 
II 
 
 20 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ ^hap. II.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 21 
 
 ^foundations: He quotes Pint. Alcibiades, 36, rhv ruv rfixS>v KaracK^v^v, & 
 KareffKevaatv iv 0paK»7. Arnold quotes from Dodswell's Tour, ii. p. 303-4, 
 language with respect to the ruins of Sparta, in exact accordance with Thucyd. 
 anticipations. T. K. A. appends from Wordsworth, p. 335, ' The only HeUenic 
 ruin of any note is a spacious theatre. The prophecy, therefore, of Thucyd. 
 has been fully verified.' See as regards Athens, Grote, vol. vi. p. 24. 
 
 »p<Js 'in comparison with, from the notion of being placed alongside of,' Cf. 
 
 Jelf, § 638. rwv irevre rb.s Bvo fxoipas — 'two-fifths: The prin- 
 
 ciple upon which the article is used in these cases seem to be that, when the 
 existence of any whole number is assumed, the existence of all its parts is 
 assumed also— they consequently become definite quantities and admit the 
 article. The second Lacedaemonian portion was Messenia, the national name 
 of which was almost disused. Kriig. quotes Xen. Hell. vi. 2, 31. The remain- 
 ing portions were Arcadia, Argolis, and Elis. Some have supposed that Thucyd. 
 means two-fifths, physically and not politically speaking. i)yovvrai— 
 
 properly said of a military leading in time of war, but, as Kriig. remarks, this 
 soon merges into a general and political one. From about 580 b.c. Sparta 
 acted as the recognised commander not only of the Peloponnese but of the whole 
 Greek name. The confederacy itself, however, was formed by the inhabitants 
 of that peninsula alone on fixed and regular laws ; whereas, the other Greeks 
 only annexed themselves to it temporarily. Miiller's Dorians, b. i. ch. 9. 
 ir<i\€«s. The article has been supposed (see Am.) to be absent upon the 
 principle mentioned in ch. 8, note {a), which see. But the cases are not parallel, 
 for it is not here the familiar expression employed by citizens for their city, as 
 in (Ed. Tyr. 630, Ka/noi Tr6\ius fiinari. Therefore, either tr. with Kriig., 
 ' it being neither a city that has been compactly built, nor; 4~c., or regard 7r<i\€wy 
 as a gloss. It has been doubted whether ^vi/oiKtaOeicTris refers to the consolida- 
 tion of some separate demes, like that supposed to have been effected by 
 Theseus at Athens, or whether the words merely refer to the loose and straggling 
 ■ way in which the town was built. There is no historical e^^dence to support 
 the first notion ; and Kara Kdifxas—' village-fashion,' immediately following point 
 to the second. We know that there were four or five such K&fiai clustered 
 together, though not surrounded by a wall (as Bloomf. states them to have 
 been), at least before the time of Alexander the Great. Their names were, 
 according to Miiller, Pitane, Messoa, Limnse, and Cynosura. € I k d C* o" o ( 
 
 depends upon olfiai above. Cf. Grote, vol. ii. p. 344- ' It was noticed that 
 Sparta, even in the days of her greatest power, was not (properly speaking) a 
 city, but a mere agglutination of five adjacent villages.' (pavtpas 
 
 Hf^eus — ' the appearance presented to the eye: 
 
 (c.) o\pets— external appearance. Cf. Jelf, § 355, i. nfyiffTi^v 
 
 rS>v trph avrrfs. See note, ch. i. a. \€Lirotx4vriv—' left behind by,' 
 
 i.e. inferior to. Krug. quotes i. 144, 5, and rovruv <t>i\os evepyiruv ovSevh 
 \€i'ir6Tox, Xen. Mem. ii. 4» 7- 9iv—hc. Troirjaiv, or, according to Pop., 
 
 aTpaTtiav, implied in ivravda, which is equivalent tovfp\ ravr^s ttjs ffTpanias. 
 Kal od TO) 5— 'even in this way,' i.e. even accepting the naturally exaggerated 
 account of Homer. n f iro I riK€— 'represented in his poem: ^nst as 
 
 Plato has jBafftXe'ay Koi Suvdaraj "O/itTjpos ircTroiij/ce rohs iv''Ai^ov rhv dei XP<^»""' 
 ripLvpovix4vovs, Gorgias, 525 e. x^^^<^v '^'t-^—' consisting 0/ 1 200 
 
 ships: The Schol. on E. ii. says 1166, and Eustath. 1186. av^pwv. 
 
 By a similar idiom we say 'a ship of 1000 tons,' or *of 100 guns.' Kriig. 
 quotes ir\oia alrov, referring to Lob. ad Phryn., p. 262. 
 
 (d.) auTfperai — 'rowed themselves,' or 'did their own rowing,' i.e. there 
 were no mariners distinct from the fighting-men. vpo(rK<i>irovs — 
 
 * mefi at the oar: 
 
 (e.) ol iv r4\fi — 'men in power: the authorities. The same phrase 
 occurs ii. 10, 2, and a similar one, iii. 28, ol 4v roh irpaynacn, 'those i7i the 
 administration of affairs' repeated by Theophrastus, ch. vi. p. loi, ed. Shep- 
 pard. fieWovras. We might expect fxeWdfrcov, for certainly (as 
 
 Arn. remarks) the word does not refer to the ircptVcws or ' supernumeraries' 
 alone. Arn.'s explanation is that what precedes is equivalent to vepivtoos iroWovs 
 fifT^ (r<pS)v i7e»i/, and that therefore (by a irphs rh ar](jLaiv6fi^vov) fieWopra^ 
 follows just as if he had so written it. Pop. says, ' ad omnem Grsecorum 
 exercitum spectant; sed cum illi (trfpiuews) hoc continentur accusativos, ut 
 140, i., Thuc. collocavit ad quos usitatius alterum nomen opponeretur. Vide 
 iv. 118 ; viii. 63.' ra irKola — ' their vessels: Kari<ppaKTa — 
 
 decked. ' Quae ab Arri. Anab. vii. 6, i, ■n^<ppayixivai, a Latinis tectse vocantur.' 
 Pop.' See ch. 14, and Sheppard's note on imh tov Karaa-rpfajxaros, Theoph. p. 
 237. The Schol. explains (tiffavibufxiva, < with the hatches down: Bl. 
 
 (/.) 5' oZv. The MSS. have yovv, but as the proper meaning of that 
 particle (cf. ch. 2, e) is inappropriate here, almost all editors adopt the above 
 correction of Bekker. rh ij.4<rov ffKoiruvpri — to one regarding the 
 
 mean, striking an average, sc. between 50 and 120. This dative denotes the 
 person to whose estimate the matter is referred. Matth. § 388, gives instances. 
 Pop. refers to rh i^wdev airTOjueVy, ii. 49, 5. And, ' In universum aestimanti 
 plus apud peditem roboris.' Tac. Genii., e. 6. ws airh tt (£0-775 — 
 
 'considering that it was dispatched from all Greece: See Jelf, § 701 ; Matthiae, 
 §628. OX) noWoi — 1.6.1,200x85 = 102,000. 
 
 Chapter XI. — {a.) ovx V o\iy. too: da: v axpV/J- — ' ^^ot so much 
 the wa7it of men as the want of money: t^s rpo<pris. The article 
 
 implies, 'ihe necessary sustenance: vo\ifxovvra fiionixrciv — 'would 
 
 he enabled to get its living while prosecuting the war: A somewhat unusual way 
 of employing j8joT€yo>, but not unparalleled, as is proved by Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2. 25, 
 (IdiaHfyoi airh iroXe/jLov $ioT€V€iv. iireiS}} 5e. The Se, though the 
 
 reading of the MSS., is awkward in its position, and therefore most editors, 
 including Kriig., read re. He observes that Se does certainly correspond some- 
 times to a previous re, but rarely, except in cases where what precedes the 6e is 
 emphatically opposed to the former clause, as, for instance, here we might have 
 had a(l>iK6fifvoi S4. If we admit thus much, it seems imreasonable to demand 
 the exact collocation which logically expresses the antithesis, and we may 
 perhaps represent the 5e by translating, Say, even when they had now arrived 
 and won a battle {but that they did so win one is clear, for they would n^t other- 
 tcise have erected the fortifications of the naval camp, sc. because they could not 
 in the face of a victorious enemy), they manifestly, I say (Se in apodosi), did not 
 even thereupon employ their whole force, but, &c. rh yap tpvfia. The 
 
 article is used, for the poem of Ho^er rendered the existence of the entrench- 
 
22 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 12.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 23 
 
 ment known to all the Greek public. icpbs yt copy lap. The Schol., 
 
 from some unknown source, mentions Acamas and Antimachus as engaged in 
 this cultivation. And, ' Diomedes, primis annis belli Trojani, tV ©fxjKTji/ 
 iyeupyti, teste Eustath. ad H. p. 387.' Pop. Xrianiav—' predatory 
 
 excursions.' Homer gives autliority enough for this statement, //. i. 366, and 
 elsewhere. It will be rememl)ered that the plot of the AJax of Sophocles turns, 
 upon the result of some such foray. 
 
 (b.) ^ Ka\ fiaWov — ' wherefore all the more.' Cf. i. 25, 4 ; ii. 2, 3 ; iv. i, 2. 
 Kriig. Tck dfKa trt] — 'the ten years,' i.e. the famous ones of 
 
 the siege. jSioi avre^xov — 'held out resisting force bt/ force^' or us 
 
 Kriig. has it, * in the opin field, ' in pitched battles' ry aci irapuTv- 
 
 X^fTi, Kriig. prefers ihis to tw trapovri, the other reading, I suppose because 
 it is still more vague, ' the portion that far the time being happen' d to be with 
 them,' and though there be less authority for it in the M8S., the least common 
 word is also the least likely to have been substituted by a coppst. 
 "hv irpoa-Kadi^oixevoi. The &v is to be carried on to cTAoi/, for the participle 
 sine articulo would, itself express the condition. Cf ch. 9 a. And see the 
 matter discussed, iii. 82. 
 
 (f.) ovofiaffrSraTa. Cf. 1 a. KaretrxVit^'ros. Cf. 10 a. For 
 
 the general question regarding the Trojan war, the student will of course con- 
 sult Grote, vol. i., and Thirlwall, vol. i. 
 
 Chapter XIL — (a.) en fifTavl(TTaT6 re Ka\ KarcpKl^ero — ^ was still 
 undergoing migrations of its inhabitants, and was in course of settlement' He 
 means that it is not surprising that the Trojan expedition was of no grcjit 
 magnitude, since, even subsequent to it, the same distiu-bing causes were at 
 work. Bl. says the expression is one of poetic or Pindaric boldness. If so, we 
 ought, perhaps, to tr. fxfrav'Knaro, was shifting to and fro. Tjtrvx^o'aaa. 
 
 An exemplification of the common grammatical nde that the nominative pre- 
 cedes the infinitive, where the subject of the infin. is the same as that of the 
 preceding finite verb — the accus. which three MSS. exhibit is therefore not 
 necessary. The /x^, according to Kriig. and GoU., who quotes i. 141 ; iv. 126, 
 belongs to both. Tr. * so as not, from enjoying rest, to be develop* d ' — i.e. did not 
 enjoy rest enough for development — and this mode of explanation will not be 
 necessary. Iv^^xit-oi^^. This word with its kindred (says Kriig.) 
 
 seems to have l>een banished from Attic prose. It is an old-fashioned Attic, 
 i.e. Ionic, word found in Herod., and it has been pointed out th.it Aristot. uses 
 it, Sirep ahrbs (b %ios) I'eoxAto? ' qu€B nova ij)se edit et designat,' Steph. Tlics. 
 Tr. here '^ produced many revolutions' a<p' wv — refers to ardurds. 
 
 iKititrrovrfs Iekti^op — 'persons who v^re ejected ])roceeded to found the 
 cities' sc. those which they were well known to have founded — their cities. The 
 "yhp which follows shows (as Popp. has seen) that the cities meant are those 
 founded by the Ba?otians and Dorians, with others of contemporary date. 
 
 (b.) 'Wiov S.\w(riy. In the statement of epochs like this, the article does 
 not occur. Kriig. Cf. i. 23, 4; ii. 2, 1 ; vi. 4, 3. 4^ "Apvrjs. This 
 
 was the xVrne in Thessaly. Kriig. and Lobeck assert that the name includes 
 the territory as well as the town. Homer mentions an Arne in Boeotia, //. ii. 
 507 (GolL), which, according to this account, could not have been founded until 
 
 sixty years afterwards. Heyne, ad locum, explains tho discrepancy upon the 
 principle mentioned above that there was a district so called at the time of the 
 Trojjin war, but that the town was not built before the arrival of the iEolians 
 from Thessaly. air oS air fi 6s— ' a sprinJcling: The authority for the 
 
 fact is to be found in the Homeric catalogue, U. ii. 494, and Miiller (Orcho- 
 menus), supposes that it was merely in deference to Homer that Thucyd. records 
 it here. Yet ho adds, that, with the exception of Orchomenus and Aspledon, 
 all Bceotia was in their hands. As Thucyd. only speaks of an arodaaiJ.6s, it is 
 plain that he did not servilely follow the Homeric account. It is probable, 
 therefore, as Arn. conjectures, that Thucyd. had other sources of information. 
 ' The Boeotians in the tradition are a wandering race, first driven by the Cad- 
 ma?ans into Thessaly, to the vale of Arne, which cannot have been so small as 
 it is depicted in our maps, and afterwards again expelled by the Thessalians 
 and returning into Bceotia. In this narrative we find the influence of the same 
 paralogism which so commonly comes before us in the history of the ancient 
 nations, that, viz. where two peoples of the same stock are found in different 
 localities, they are connected with each other by mutual migrations. If the 
 Boeotians and old Thessalians were of the same stock, according to one form of 
 the legend, the Boeotians would be represented as having wandered to Thessaly ; 
 according to another, they would come out of Thessaly into Boeotia. I cannot 
 aflSrm that the Boeotians did not, in the Emathian migration into Thessaly, pass 
 onwai-d into Bieotia. If, however, this was the case, I cannot conceive that 
 they had previously been driven into Thessaly.' Niebuhr, Vor. ub. a. Lander u. 
 Volherk. S. 113, f., quoted in Engelman's Germ, translation. AwpiTJs. 
 
 Upon the return of the Heracleids consult Arnold's note, MiiUer's Dorians, 
 vol. i. ch. 2 ; Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 7 ; Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. 
 
 (c.) ovK€ri avKTranevT] — 'no longer subjected to evictio?is, or dislodge- 
 ments of its jwpidation.' e 1 6 tt e /li tt e— is a more suitable reading than 
 
 k^firefi^f, because the historian does not merely state the fact ; he means to 
 describe the action as continuous — * commenced the sending out of colonies' 
 "loavas. Remark that the name of the inhabit.mts is used, and not that of 
 the country. rwv vrjaiwrwu. ' Prteter Eubosam Cycladum incolas 
 
 intelligit velut Andrios, Tenios, Ceos, Naxios. Cf vii. 57, Herod, viii. 46.' 
 Pop- 'IraKias. The truth of this will, of course, depend upon the 
 
 country included under the name. The student must consult Niebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. 1 2-20, E. T. ' The Greeks,' he says, ' who regarded the (Enotrians alone 
 as Italians, were long strangers to the wider extent in which the name waa 
 applied within the country itself, and never used it so. . . . The region 
 which originally bore the name was, according to them, the peninsula bounded 
 by the isthmus, only twenty miles across, between the Scylletic j^nd the Nape- 
 tine Gulf ... in other wor<ls it was the southernmost part of what was 
 afterwards called Bruttium.' Antiochus of S\Tacuse, to whom Aristotle refers 
 {Pol. vii. 10), in his own time drew a boundary for Italy * by a line to Meta- 
 pontum from the river Laos, which, in after times, separated Lucania from 
 Bruttium.' eo-rii/ & x^P'^- He is speaking of the Ambraciots and 
 
 Anactorians, says the Schol. ' Adde Corcyram, Leucadem, Sollium, Corinthio- 
 rum colonias. Vide i. 24, 30, 55; ii. 30, 80; Zacynthum Achaeorum, ii. 66.* 
 |Flrteri 
 
24 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCIDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ chap. 1 4.] 
 
 ChapterXIIL— (fl.) TpjJrepov 54 ^iaau . . . . $a(n\t7ai. We must 
 not, however, suppose that the rvpawlSfs immediately succeeded these. Nearly 
 evarj-where there was a transition state where all real power was possessed and 
 disputed among the members of an hereditary- oligarchy. In passing from 
 this into a more democratical st^ge of social existence, the government verj- 
 generally fell into the hands of some ambitious individual— in most cases a 
 military chieftain. As long as he and his family retained it, they were ripawoi 
 properly so called; but, as in the case of the Pisistratidfe, it was frequently 
 wrested from them, and institutions more or less democratic succeeded. Eead 
 Arnold's excellent essay, Appendix, vol. i. ; Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 6, pp. 187, 
 192 ; and Hermann's 6>. A?itiq. §§ 54, 55, 56 ; Mmer s Dorians, vol. i. p. 176.' 
 iirl /i 1? T ?s 7 f'p a <r i— ' certain defined and specific rights and privileges: 
 'y4pas in genero omne prsecipuum notat quod quis prse aliis habet, etiam 
 praecipuum honorem aliquem.' Damn. Ux. Horn, quoted by Bl. See on the 
 7«>€a ^aalKua at Sparta, Herod, vi. 56-59 ; on 4i:\ indicating a condition of 
 tenure, cf. Jelf, § 634, 3, c. Read Arist. Politics, iii. 9, 10 : 7, Trepi rohs vpwiKohs 
 Xp6yous fiaai\€ia ^u kK6ura>u fxiv, c'xl 5€ tkti i^piafihois- <rrparvyhs 'yhp ^y kuI 
 SiKaar^s 6 $ari\€{>s, xal twu vphs robs &iobi Kvpios. See also Herod, vi. 56. 
 Kriig. romiirks that «Vl ^tjtoTs is a settled formuhi. Cf. i. 122 ; Herod, v.* 57 ,' 
 Isocrat. 17,19; Plato, Sh/mpos. 2 1 3 a ; and trarpiKai is 'founded hy their fathers} 
 of. ^-ii. 69, viii. 6; Isocrat. ix. 35. avr.ixovro-held to, applied 
 
 themselves to. On the change from singular to plural, Kriig. refers to his own 
 note on Xen. Anab. i. 7, 17, Klp65 rt koI ^ arpanb. irapii\e^, ««! ^y^yoyjo ^X<rtc 
 T^y rdippov. 
 
 (*•) fi^rax^iplaai—Vit.'to take in hand; rare in the active, though occur- 
 ing VI. 16, vii. 87. Kriig. adds iv. 18. kuI 2a^rois-i. e. 'as well 
 
 asM the Corinthians: cf. Jelf, § 592, i. But, says Kriig., the vavs here men- 
 tioned were certainly not triremes, as Pliny asserts, K H. vii. 56, as these were 
 rare before the Persian war. The Phocaeans had nothing but penteconters 
 Her. i. 163. 
 
 (c.) ndKiara-' ungefdhr: 'nearly: Kriig. Philologers are divided about 
 the meaning of this word. * Vehementer disceptatum est,' Pop., whose note 
 see. From the most careful and extended induction wliich I have been able to 
 make of its use in Thucydides, I should incline to the belief that the word is 
 employed, wherever an exact statement is impossible, to denote the verj' closest 
 approximation to it which the writer can make. It is therefore of Necessity 
 sometimes to be rendered at the least, and sometimes at the most, according to 
 the point of view from which the subject is contemplated ; and it is this appa- 
 rent contradiction which has so much perplexed commentators. See Peile's 
 note, ch. 18, who argues that the word means alwavs 'at the least' 'to the 
 full: 'every whit: Cf. Fasti Hellenici, p. 239, on the date. ' 4s r^v 
 
 reXevT^v-' cmnputed up to the close of this war: The more usual form of 
 expression is with a dative, as in the next sentence ra^r,, and in the well- 
 known line, koX ris xP^pos toTotS' i(Tr\v ov^^\n\vd(i>s ; ' (E. T. 735; Matth. 
 
 {d.)-Navnaxla waXaiTdrrj. See Herod, iii. 53. Refers to the expedition 
 undertaken by Periander to avenge the death of his son Lycophron who h ^ 
 been banished to Corepa, and murdered there. 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 25 
 
 (..) ael H xor 6. ' The rrore is to be referred to de.' ; the Sh has a slightly 
 mtensive force. Bl. _ i^.6p.o.. Kriig. refers to Arist. Po/ vii. 
 
 5. 5, where he is pointing out the most desirable site for a city. ro7s 
 
 raXa^o.s irotnraU. Corner h:is ^<pvu6v r. Kop^.Bov, Il.il ^jo. It does not, 
 however, appear certain that editors have a right to add, 'alluding, however, 
 .olely to Homer, any more than in ch. 5 b. 4.k6xCo.. The active 
 
 here res s upon the best MSS. authority, though elsewhere we almost always 
 meet with the middle. The act. is rather archaic and poetical (Hesiod, Op. et D. 
 632), and once or twice in this preface Thuc. seems to have affected such 
 expressions. a^.^po-r.pa. This must mean, 'by sea as well as by 
 
 land and so both Pop. and Kriig. interpret it; others have imagined it to 
 imply, in thej^^an and in the Corinthian grdf: They compare i. ,00, 112. 
 On the adverbial use of the word, cf. Matth. § 425, Jelf, | 579,6. The subject 
 oiKar^pov. IS 0. Kop..e.o., as being the principal subject in the whole state- 
 ment. iirX Kipov. Jelf, § 633, 2. 
 
 ^.1 ^■{'^?^rZ' ■ 1\ ^t«^*^°«' Her. i. ,63 ; the Milesians, iii. 39 ; the in- 
 habitants^of the islands, Herod, i. 27 (Krug.) ; Samians, e.g. and Chians. 
 
 11 T; ^^%]r'' ""'f^ ^"^^ g-^-' ^f- ^-reos, vf.ia.os. Thucyd. employs 
 both forms of the gen., for we have M, v. 16. noXv.pari^s Cf 
 
 n. 104, and read Herod, iii. 39, et seq.; Grote, vol. iv. p. 321. 
 
 bir T. 1 '^1 T^°'' '"• '°^- ^^'' '' ^'^'^on.^ here (Kriig. thinks) 
 
 ecord. ^ ^^ ^'^" "'"'"'''^'"^ '" ^"''^"'" '^'' circumstances there 
 
 ig.) oUlCour.s. There is no article, and therefore the form of expression 
 i sell points out, that some battle must be intended which was fought during 
 
 t L?fi r'"! "fT'""^ '^' P^^^^- ^^'°- '^''''^' i« -ight inlying th^ 
 k sea-fight mentioned by Herod, i. ,66, cannot be the one here meant, though 
 
 LX 'T "Vf^ ", translating, 'the Phocans who were foundfn^ 
 
 ITmI T r ''"f "' '' ''^"'^^^^ "^^^ ^ b«^y «^ I^hoc^ans sent 
 
 rth fifty-five years before the reduction of the mother city by the Persians. 
 
 n were sub.sequently joined by the citizens then expelled from their homes, 
 
 nfu ionT ^^' 'T^ '' '^'' ^'"^^' '^"^^°^^°^ '^-' «« --h chronological 
 ^'^fusion has occurred concerning the event. See the discrepancies in Poppo's 
 
 V^^^'^T f^^''~^'''} T^^'reKo.rJpo.,. Vessels with a single bank of 
 >m wenty-five on each side. ^^oio.s Ma^poZs-longriight boats 
 
 tSr'Tl "' "7 T' ^°' ^^^^°^ ^^ ^^-^ ^^^^- ^'' co-pfres them ' 
 ^ the piratical barges of earlier times, and refers to Wachsmuth, Antiq. Gr. ii i 
 pe Aen. Anab. v. i , i . ' x 
 
 Peli«t" k""'' L^ "^'"^""'-'■hen used as epochs, denote the .cco,^ 
 
 « an «ar. Krug^adds, the second determination of the date by reference to 
 
 t ■ " Tl •'>,?"^J-<''''es in order to mention the third Persian war We 
 
 Zt !'^ Herodotus. ,,^1 2,..x/a.. These words, as Pop 
 
 aI,;Ts' -^"T" ''" f "'■* •='-"■"<=!-.' '■-■ ■- the different part^ 
 quarters of Smly, cf. ti. z, 6, or -in Sicilid et finitimi Italia,' 'the parts 
 
26 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 1 6.1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDirES. 
 
 27 
 
 round about Sicily.' Cf. ii. 26. The rvpawot were Gelo and Hiero (Herod, 
 vii. 158), ' et prseter eos sine dubio Therunem, Anaxilaum, alios.' Pop. 
 ^5 irAf/0os — i(j) to, i.e. amounting to, a large number. Kriig. cites Bei^ler 
 on Aristoph. Ach. 686, es toxos iraiu. KfpKvpaicis i. 25, Herod. 
 
 vii. 68. 
 
 (c.) Miiller, in his Mjinetica, states a suspicion that the navy of JEgina 
 was purposely depreciated by Thucydides. Thirlwall, vol. ii. p. 66, conjectures 
 that the Athenians had no insignificant fleet in the time of Pisistratus. 
 Pop. ii Tives &\\oi — sc. i/airrtKa ^KfKT-qvTo. The Thasians, for 
 
 instance, or Lesbians. lb. Jelf, § 895, 2. Ppax^a- Kriig. inter- 
 
 prets st/iaU, 'trifling^' as i. 141, iirl ^^ax^'ia irpoipaffn. Pop., too, has '^paxf'a 
 z=fxiKpd ut i. 130, 140; ii. 22.' ov|/6' t€, a.<p' ov — literally, the period \ 
 
 is recent, counting from which up to the present, i.e. if you take that event as an 
 epoch, and count from it to the present, you \\\\\ find the time short, Cf. di^i' 
 ol, ch. 1 8. The phrase must be taken ' en masse,' and the latter clause is not 
 in translating to be carried forward to the verb. Tr., therefore, 'tis no long 
 while ago since, or that Themistocles, 4'c. We may compare 00 voKvs xp^^o^ 
 iv€i5r} . . . . oif iroWh errj eVeiS^. Peile refers to the Latin ' longo pod 
 tempore,'' and v. 26, trtf 5h es rovro ra ^vfiirauTa iyevtro ry Tro\€^y eVra koI 
 fUoffi. It seems hypercritical to suppose with Kriig. a^' oZ to be spurious. 
 Such familiar expressions indicating measure of time or space, \i-ill not alwa\s 
 stand strict logical analysis, as ^rjmi Kudev 20enrep t/jK€i {(Ed. Col. 1227), '/o 
 go thence whence he came.' irpoaSoKlfjLov ovro $ — * being expected! 
 
 a& we say. Cf. 'Aprv^iuv irpoa-doKinov is tvv Kvwpop clvai. Herod, v. 108. The 
 sea-fight mentioned by Herodotus, vi. 88, between the .Eginetans and Athenians, 
 occurred shortly before the battle of Marathon, and it is natural to suppose 
 that Thucyd. refers to the same here. But Pop. and others assume that ro'v \ 
 fiap^dpov must mean Xerxes, and not Darius, because, I suppose, the latter did I 
 not conduct the expedition in person. They therefore consider the time here 
 specified to be that between the two Persian wars ('Die Worte bezeichnen 
 offenbar die Zeit zwischcn den beiden Perser Kriegen,' Engelman), and are 
 obliged to resort to an hypothesis (started by MuUer, JEginctica) that anotkA 
 JEgiuetan war broke out after the battle of Marathon. But this seems to me 
 to be foundetl on a misconception of tuv ^ap^dpov, which does not necessarily 
 mean the Persian king at all, but stands for the people, just as the Latins stiiil 
 •Komanus,' ' Pcenus,' and we say 'the Gaul,' or 'the Turk,' meaning by the 
 term the whole nation, and so precisely, ch. 18, 6 fidpfiapos. ras 
 
 vavs — ' the well-known fleet.* e fow/xdx'jo-a*'— at Sahimis. 8ja 
 
 Trdff'qs — sc. tt}? v4us. Or we may consider it, ^ith Kriig., an adverbial ex- 
 pression like oLTrh irpwrrts, where fio7pa, or some such noun, has been suppressed. 
 
 Chapter XV. — {a.) Sjuajs. Notwithstanding their insufficient navies. 
 SiapKTJ. If the woi-d differs at all in signification from avrapK-fis, Kriig. M 
 suggestion may be correct, that, viz. it indicates a country incapable of accom- 
 modating a gradually expanding population, whereas avrapK^s has reference to I 
 an inability to supply the wants of its existing inhabitants. From vi. 90 (suM 
 finem) they appear nearly identical in meaning ; but 8ia may have the force cf | 
 ' thoroughly,' * throughout.' 
 
 (/>.) 3(rot Kttl iy4vovTo. This is one of those cases where the force of 
 the conjunction may (as Am. has well said) bo expressed by an emphasis on the 
 auxiliary verb, 'as many as did take place.' See ch. 97 and 105. The idiom 
 seems to class itself -with those cases where Ka\ introduces something to which 
 the attention is directed in contrast to what has preceded — the adversative Kal — 
 as in the phrase rl xph '<oi Keyeiv, concerning the right interpretation of which 
 scholars are not agreed. Hermann, e.g. explains, rl kuI xpv \4yeip, ' non solum 
 quid, sed etiara an aliquid dicendum sit dubitat.' Klotz, on the contrary — *Si 
 dico ri XP^ '*^^ \4yeiv, proprie hoc qufero, quid sit dicendum, etiam si solum de 
 dicendo cogitemus.' I tliink Hermann is correct, and that the phrase means, 
 ' well, if one must speak, what are we to say ?' where the speaking is introduced 
 in contradistinction to the more suitable silence. So ri Kal jSouAecfle, S> vewrcpoi ; 
 'what do you want ?' said when the parties addressed ought not to want any- 
 thing ; so here the koi iycvovro is in contrast with ovbels i,vv4ari]. 
 ■i[po(Tax(ivris. Cobet conjectures irpohx^vr^s, because he does not believe this 
 word can rightly mean — applying to them, i.e. giving attention to them. But 
 Kriig. quotes appositely, irpoffux^ rw koto, ddxaffcrau TroXefxa, vii. 4, 5. 
 iKiijfjLovs ffrpareias. It may servo as an instance of Goller's hypercriticism 
 and over subtlety to mention that he would strike out the words iroA-u avh ttjs 
 kavTfjsv as tautological after iK^rjixovs. Now this word, as is notorious, denotes 
 the simple idea 'abroad,' as iiriS-ljfxovs would 'at home;' and of course it is 
 quite as possible to be at a great distance abroad, as at a small one — cf. ivl 
 (^ohov fKSrjjxov ii. 10, \for a foreig7i expedition,' i.e. beyond the limits of their 
 own states. For the construction Kriig. compares rhv Uphv irdK^p-ov iarpdnvcraVf 
 i. 112; and Lobeck, AJax, 290. T. K.A. remarks it is an extension of the 
 strict cognate accusative 4^65ovs i^Jvai^ (rrpareiav arpaT^vfadai, tr. ' went out 
 on foreign expeditions' Cf. Jelf, §588, i. virifKooi ^vveariiKea-av. 
 
 Remark the absence of the article — ' associated themselves in a subordinate 
 fosition,' sc. ot "EAArji/es. auTol — ' themselves unaided,' sc. by imiiKooi. 
 
 atrh TTJS iff-qs — ' cequo jure' ^ ex cequo' Haack. We must, as in ch. 14, con- 
 sider the phrase adverbial from the ellipse of fio'pas. Kriig. renders — *in 
 relations of equality, independence of each other, cf. iii. 40, rod awh ttjs "ia-ns 
 ix^pov. 
 
 (c.) ird\f juoj/. Refer to Herod, v. 99. Thirlwall, i. p. 456. * Bellum ortum 
 est de Lelanto vel Lelantio campo. Vide Strab. x. p. 688.' Pop. ' Clavier 
 considers 800 n, c. as the date of the war for the Lelantic territory, mentioned 
 Herod, v. 99; Thuc. i. 15 ; Aristot. Pol. iv. 32.' Hevm-dnn, P. A. of Greece, 
 § II, 12, SteVrT/ — lit. stood apart — divided into the alliance. Kriig. 
 
 compares Si€xpidT)(rav, i. 18. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — (a.) iireyivero. This verb would naturally govern both 
 &\\ois and «al "lojo-t. The latter words, however, as Kriig. remarks, also link 
 themselves in construction to eTrearpdTiva-e. It is in fact one of the anacoloutha 
 of Thucyd., who sometimes introduces a fresh clause with a new type of con- 
 struction, apparently forgetting that the previous clause is imperfect, if the 
 form into which it has been thrown be not followed out. Cf. v. 95, ov To<Tovrov 
 jSAaiTTet 1) tx^po. vpLWv Saop rj (piXia (not fiXdirrei, but) acrOeuelas ■n-apaSery/ta to7s 
 o.pxoij.€vois ZriXovixivov. This, with other idioms of the same sort, depends upon 
 
28 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I I Chap. 1 8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 a principle of the utmost importance for the right understanding of Greek 
 authors, noticed by Mr. Shilleto in his edition of Demosthenes Be Falsa Leg.— 
 viz. that the Greeks scarcely ever, where it is possible to avoid it, make a two- 
 fold statement alike in both clauses ; they vary the construction even to affecta- 
 tion. Express KoflaKTi in English — 'and as their particular impediment to the 
 Jonians, Ci/rits and the Persian monarchy made a descent upon them.' 
 H^ av^rjdrjvai. Great difficulties have been made about the absence of the 
 article rod. But, as Kriig. says, the simple infinitive follows, because KwXv/uoTa 
 4irfy4vfro is exactly equivalent to iKwKvQ-qaav, cf. Jelf, § 668, 2. ivrls 
 
 "KKvos. ' This side Halys" — as this expresses a familiar division by a familiar 
 boundary, the absence of the article may well be defended on the principle 
 mentioned above (chap. 8 a), thougli, as a general rule, Kriig. may be right in 
 saying, the Greeks to ^lr6Ta^lOi prefix the proper name with the article, b "AAwj 
 ir6Taiiios. See for the facts, Herod, i. 28. iSov\oj<r€. The younger 
 
 student should compare Sovhacrofxefos voce media, ch. 1 8, and he will see that 
 the middle is avoided here, because reference is not made to the reflex effect of 
 the action upon the actor, or his interests, but simply to its effect upon the 
 sufferer. Kriig. also notices this — ' Hier nur das Leiden des Objects, nicht das 
 Interesse des Subjects zu bezeichnen ist.' Ka\ ras vf^a-ovs — sc. 
 
 iSovXucTf. Herodotus (i. 143, 151, 169) rehites, that upon the submission of 
 the continental cities to Harpagus, the islands voluntarily gave themselves up. 
 But, adds Poppo, either the submission of the islands was simulated and 
 temporary, or Thucydides overlooks this surrender, and is thinking of their 
 reduction beneath the Persian power, after the battle of Lade, at the close of 
 the Ionian revolt. See iii. 141. 
 
 Chapter XVIL (a.) rh i<p' tavruv. * Their own interests.' Pop. and 
 Kriig. * What cmicerned thetnselves' Am. * That which depends or rests upon 
 themselves.' Kiihn. Gr. Gr. 611. These of course amount to the same thing. 
 It is, however, possible to interpret witli Peile— ' what was for their own time, 
 i.e. would last their own titne' Cf. i. 144, 3 ; v. 81, 2. ?s t€ ri 
 
 arufxa. Kriig. understands this of personal security. It probably includes the 
 notion of luxurj' as well. 5t* curtpaKelas—' taki?ig measures for 
 
 security.' Kriig. This scarcely seems accurate. The preposition 8tA must, I 
 think, as usual denote, ' in a state of i.e. it indicates that the subject is passing 
 through some status. See what is said ch. 40 c, and the whole will mean— 
 'Keeping as quiet as possible,' allowing as few opportunities for change or 
 commotion as they could. On the administration of these rvpavvoi see Her- 
 mann's Political Antiq. of Greece, § 64. He adds in a note, ' Were the tyrants 
 generally warlike ? Thuc. i. 1 7 seems to deny it, but it is positively asserted 
 by Plat. Be p. viii. p. 566 e, and Aristot. Pol. v. 9, 5.' ^kovv. Am. 
 
 remarks the verb does not merely signify ' they inhabited,' but ' they lived in and 
 conducted' as in ii. 37, iii. 37. So ^ioikuv r^v irdAti/— is, * to administer the 
 a fairs of the city.' air' avrwv. The preposition 'has a mixed 
 
 meaning, partly expressive of derivation, and partly of agency.' Am. But as 
 the doer of an act is considered as the source from which it proceeds, both ideas 
 naturally coincide and are expressed by the same word. See, however, Matth. 
 § 573 ; Jelf» § 623, c. ct fi^ €(. The use of e* /i^ for ' unless ' is 
 
 29 
 
 readily explained by the ellipse of some predicate to be supplied from the rest 
 of the sentence. The second et appears to me to belong to n — i. e. * si quid,' 
 and such also is the case with three instances which Jelf, § 860, 7, has cited as 
 exhibiting a second u in connection with et fii}. Pop. supplies after et fi}j ef ri, 
 the words a^i6\oyov epyov hrpdxdri, and says that the whole runs thus : * Nisi 
 si quid adiersus suos quique finitimos memoria digmim fecerunt {quod certh 
 fecerunt Sicilice tyranni), nam {hi) Sicilies tyranni, ^'c. In flfi^ tt ri, says 
 Bl., we have an Attic phrase for et nh ^,ti. e/cc^o-rots— a sort of 
 
 ablative, corresponding with inr' avruv, and depending upon i-npdxQ-n- 
 
 {h.) 01 yap ip 5t/ce\to. The yhp has reference, as frequently, not to an 
 expressed, but an implied assertion—' but not all, for the Sicilian tyrants.' 
 This is more simple and natural than with Kriig. to refer it to is rb (Tw/xa ^kovu, 
 &c. ^ TravTaxodev—'from causes operating on all sides.' See i, 124, 
 
 and iii. 53 c. Karfixcro . . . aToXfxoripa etvai. There does not 
 
 seem to me any real difficulty here. Of course the words do not mean—' was 
 prevented from being timid ;' but the two infinitives proleptically express the 
 result of /caretxeTo, and ju^e ... re are like the Latin ' neque . . . et '—Greece 
 was kept in check, so as both not to perform in confederacy any Irrilliant {<pavep6v) 
 exploit, and to be in its separate comjnuniiies somewhat deficient in enterprise. 
 The absence of &ari is of no importance, cf. iii. 23 ; vi. 69. 
 
 Chapter XVIII.— (a.) ^TretS^ Se'. 'The construction of this sentence is 
 throughout involved and irregular.' Bl. ' Protasis prima sententid alio modo 
 post parenthesin repetitur verbis /uera 5e rw ruv rvpdvvwv KardKva-iv, et per 
 (luplicem particulam y^p causam, et causae causam indicat.' Goll. 
 rvpavvoi. 'The following tyrants are stated by ancient historians to have 
 been deposed by the Spartans : the Cj-pselidse of Corinth and Ambracia, the 
 former in Olymp. 49. 3 (584 b.c), the latter probably somewhat later;' the 
 Pisistratidae in Athens, who were allied with the Thessalians in Olymp. 67. 3 
 (510 B.C.) ; their adherent, Lygdamis of Naxos, probably about the same time ; 
 iEsehines of Sicyon, about the 65th OljTnp. (520 b.c); Symmachus of Thasos[ 
 Aulis of Phocis, and Aristogenes of Miletus, of whom we know only the names! 
 The larger numbers were dethroned under the kings Anaxandrides and Ariston, 
 Cleomenes and Demaratus.' Muller's Dorians, vol. i. p. 189. The deposition 
 of tyrants, as opposed to the principles of Dorian aristocratical government, was 
 evidently part of the fixed policy of Sparta, and upon these grounds we must 
 account for the great armament sent against Polycrates of Samos, which Herod. 
 in. 54 represents as despatched to avenge the plunder of a cauldron and breast-" 
 plate. ' It is easy to perceive,' says Miiller, vol. i. p. 187, ' in the dynasties of 
 the Sicyonian, Corinthian, Epidaurian, and Megarian tyrants, a powerful coali- 
 tion against the supremacy of the Dorians, and the ancient principles of that 
 race, the more powerful as they knew how to render subservient to their own 
 ends the opinions which had lately arisen.' For a full understanding of the 
 subject, the student must read Miiller's Dorians, vol. i. ch. 7, 8. ^^J 
 
 To\i5— « to a great extent ;' to be understood locally, says Kriig. ; but Engelman 
 l^&s ' grossen Theils.' ol irK^lffToi KaX r^\evra7oi. 'The junior 
 
 student should observe that, in accordance with Granville Sharp's important 
 canon, the same persons are denoted by both participles. The canon in ques- 
 
30 
 
 NOTESi ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. Bchap. 1 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 } 
 
 tion is : * When two or more assumable attriljutives ' {i.e. adjectives, participles, 
 or nouns denoting quality, relation, or condition) 'joined by a copulative or 
 copulatives are assumed of the same person or thing, before the first attributive 
 the article is inserted, before the remaining ones it is omitted.' On the theolo- 
 gical importance of the canon in such expressions as 6 @ehs Ka\ 2a>T^p VM-('>v, and 
 for ample illustration, consult Middloton on the Greek Article, pt. i. ch. 3. At 
 the same time it must be admitted that apparent exceptions to the canon are so 
 numerous as somewhat to shake implicit confidence in its correctness. The 
 matter is one which has not received as yet its full discussion. • The imporUmt 
 question appears to me to be this— Are the existing violations of the rule to 
 be ascfil»ed to the falsehood or inaccuracy of the grammatical principle upon 
 which it rests? or is the principle metaphysically and grammatically correct? 
 and are the violations of the rule owing to the looseness and rapidity of ordi- 
 nary discourse, which does not observe grammatical accuracy where the dano'er 
 of misapprehension is not a practical inconvenience ? In conversation we should 
 probably say, ' The man and horse,' without repeating tlie article ; for there 
 could be no fear of our hearers identifying tlie two. But in grave and written 
 composition, should we say ♦ the warrior and statesman,' if we meant two dis- 
 tinet persons -Wellington, e.ff. and Peel? I think not ; and, therefore, in all 
 cases of serious composition, where confusion was possible, I believe that the 
 Greeks, far more accurate thinkers and writers than ourselves, adhered to the 
 principle of the canon. I have been led into these remarks from the assertion 
 of a scholar whose opinion is entitled to the highest respect, that ' upon a pinoh 
 Granville Sharp's canon always fails.' As a general rule it certainly does fail, 
 but ' upon a pinch,' i.e. where its violation would occasion confusion of thou^^ht, 
 I myself believe that it does not fail.' Sheppard's Tlieophrastus, p. 56, note on 
 rovs aSiKovfifvovs Ka\ ayavaKTovvras — ' fhof<e who express their indignation at the 
 injuries they are receiving' I so expressed my opinion some time ago, and all 
 subsequent examination has confirmed my belief in its correctness. The reader 
 may, by way of illustration, compare with this passage, which means, the most 
 numerous, who were at the same time the last, 6 irpwros koI TfXevralos Spafiuv, 
 ^sch. Agam. 305. And, on the other hand, ruv TleKoiropvriffiwv koI 'Adrjvaim; 
 i. 1; ras tifyiffras Koi iKayJa-Tas vads,i. 10; tvs ^aXafiivlas Koi UapdKov, iii. 33; 
 contrastetl with eV aury rh a/xvi/fadai koI iradeli^, i.e. the suffering (ncotmtcrcd in 
 the act of repelling the enemy; oi AaK^Bai/xdvioi Kal 'AOrivaioi, i. 18; rh fipadv 
 KoX fxdKXov, i. 84; 7j irapavTiKa re Kafnrp6Ti\s koL is rb eiretTa S6^a, ii. 64; rh 
 0ov\6fifvov Koi v-Koirrov. i. 90 — the suspicious purjwrt of their policy. 
 /i€Ta T^v Kria-tv. The majority of MSS. have /cT^cti/. For the latter it has 
 been ui-ged that the Heracleids certainly did not build Sparta, but found it, 
 though a somewhat insignificant place, already inhabited by Achseans (Miiller's 
 Dorians). On the other hand, Thucyd. himself, v. 16, says Stc rh Trpwrov 
 AaK€^aifiova KTl^ovres rovs $a(ri\4as Kadiffravro; and Isocrat. Paw. c. 16 calls 
 the Heracleids and Dorians oiKi<rras 2irapT7jy. These passages have induced 
 most editors, and rightly too, to prefer Kricnv. Awpiewv. Pop. has 
 
 collected a large number of similar genitives in his note upon 'Ep^Tpteai/, ch. 
 15 c. Cf. Wunder on Soph. Phil. v. 191. crraa-idaaa-a. This is said 
 
 of the period before Lycurgus, and, as Am. suggests, probably refers to the 
 jealousies between the reigning houses of Eurysthenrs and Procles. See Herod. 
 
 31 
 
 V 
 
 eT77 
 
 i. 65, vi. 52; Isoc. Panath. § 177; Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 315. ^^^ 
 
 WerpaKSaia. The question concerning the age of Lycurgus is too long and 
 difficult for a note. Thuc. here makes it fall 804 b.c. ; since the Pelop. war 
 ended b.c. 404; Apollodorus, in 884 b.c. ; Messenia was conquered, and the 
 war concluded by Theopompus, according to Isocrates, about 750 b c [4rn 
 says the date ought to be 724 b.c] ; and Theopompus was next but one in 
 descent to Chanlaus. in whose reign Lycurgus made his reforms. See, however 
 Clmton, F. H. p. 408; Miiller's Dorians, ch. 7, p. ,54, who states, 'We abso-' 
 Mutely find no account of him (Lycurgus) as an individual person.' Thirlwall 
 vol. 1. ch. 8 ; Gi-ote, vol. ii. eh. 6. i.6.Xi<Tro.. Peile, comparing many 
 
 jpassages, argues that ii6.\i<TTa must mean ' at least,' ' every whit.' It is obvious 
 that he is right here, and in ch. 21, 54, 118, and others to which he refers. But 
 see ch. 13, note c. If ^^6.K,aTo. denotes the nearest obtainable approximation 
 when It IS the writer's intent to make the number as large as possible it will 
 I be ' at least; and when vice versa, ' at most.' is r^P r€\e'vr-f,u— 
 
 'computed up to the close of this war; and infra, is r6v^, rhv T6\efiov Peile 
 refers to Theoc. i. 26, Trorafiix^.rai els Uo 7r4\\as, not into, but as much as two 
 pails. So again, iii. 85, 107, is with a numeral, which, as in Theocrit I 
 should render ' up to.' ^.r^ Si. This is Sk in apodosi recalling 
 
 the statement with which the ch. commences after the interruption of a long 
 parenthesis. ° 
 
 (Ik) ry ,i,yd\y crr6\cp. Note the article. ru,y ^vfjLnoK^fi-n^rdvrwv 
 
 Those who regard the aorist as any other past tense, must be puzzled by this 
 participle, as Pop. is, who remarks, ' non ut plerumque participium aoristi dici- 
 tur, nam pnmum bellum Persicum non erat communiter gestum.' According 
 to our theory of the aorist, the form of the expression is exactly correct indefi- 
 nite, and not indicative of any particular time. The confederated Greeks— 
 almost equivalent to ru>v ^vfXfidx<ou, the confederate Greeks, cf. Appendix 
 ypoHovr^s See ch. 9, note a. ^^avo-nBi.r.s-^ having formed 
 
 me Idea. Ihe 5m denotes its passage through their thoughts. Cf. ch 17 a 
 Yva^K,va<Tdf,,voi. The correlative to Ka7a<TK,^JdCo^laL. It is used in military 
 liters to denote the breaking up of a camp. See Xen. Anab. vi. 2, 5 and 
 liere it must mean something similar, i.e. ' having packed tip all tJieir Lveable 
 lfurnUure,and taken it with them.' S.eKpienaa.-' were separated 
 
 If into th. parties of the A. and Z.' Cf. ch. 15 b. Pop. appropriately quotes 
 dissidere in Arminium ac Scgestem,' Tac. An7i. i. 55 ; so 5i,<pdpv means 
 ' vere manijestly seen to be the most powerful on the opposite sides: Cf. iv c i 
 |lo8; vi. 17. ■*■*'. 
 
 (c.) dfiatxfila is an Ionic word (Herod, vii. 145), not in use, says Krug 
 py the Attics. A distinction has been drawn that ^vf^f^axla denotes alliance in 
 subordination to some leader; Sf^aixfiia a league upon terms of equality But 
 pt is impossible to pronounce positively upon the correctness of this For the 
 circumstances see ch. 102. ^erA K.pUy^.-amid dangers, i. e in 
 
 actual ser^nce. Kriig. compares i. 70, 5 ; ii. 4., 3 ; iii. 56, 3 ; vi. 31, i. Am 
 paraphrases well : ^ Their field of exercise was not the parade, but the field of 
 ^U le Bl. quotes a similar description of the Koman military sv.stem. Joseph 
 U>«t. Jud. iii. 5. I. .. i- . 
 
32 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1.1 ^^'^^- ^^'^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 33 
 
 Chapter XIX. — (a.) vyovvro — 'exercised their riye/xopla.' Matthis 
 from a hasty consideration of this passage, was induced to believe that ^cio-^ J 
 governed the accusative. It evidently stands here independently, and thef 
 accusative depends upon ^xoyres. iTrirrfSfioos iroXircvei v — ' to Ikf 
 
 under a polity accommodated to oligarchical iiiterests.' It makes little difference 
 whether with Pop. we read TroXnivauxri, or with Kriig., TroXmvffovffi, as there 
 is ample authority for either form of expression— the latter being rather more 
 direct and definite — how they shall, instead of, in order that they may. The 
 words are paralleled exactly by ook iirnr^^iiws ix^iv, v. 82, i, and /carao-T/jo-eiJ 
 is rh iirir^Siiov, iv. 76, 4, and especially i. 144. The method and extent of the 
 Spartan riy^fiovla is set forth by Miiller, I)or. book i. ch. ix. § 2. The Spartan 
 supremacy was exercised in expetlitions of tli« whole confederacy. A Spartan 
 king was generalissimo, with many of the privileges of the old Homeric chief- 
 tain. The Spartans before a war sent round to the subordinate states an order! 
 to furnish part of a contingent, the maximum of which was always a determined 
 quantity previously fixed ; but they never (like their rivals) exacted a regular 
 annual contribution independent of circumstances. On the internal affairs, 
 laws, and institutions of the allied states, the confederacy had legally no influ- 
 ence. It was, says Miiller, the only confederacy which, in the flourishing times 
 of Greece, combined extensive powers with justice, and a respect for the in- 
 dependence of its weaker members. irapaXa^Sj/res — that this 
 word does not imply a possession acquired by force or craft may be seen (inter 
 alia) from its use, ch. 9 c, tV Pa<ri\(iav irapaXafifiv. For the manner of | 
 acquisition see i. 99, 96. rek Kpinara. must be connected as an 
 accusative with ^vQT](Tav, cf. i, 6 d. And so ra Kpanara TrapaaKiva^foQat (rT6\ov, 
 i. 31a, and to &pi(rra Trpdrreiv, v. 9, 7. Kriig. These are apparently adverbial 
 usages. The ws is taken by some of the old editors with to. KpanffTa, ' as excel- 
 lently as possible' Bl. remarks that this sense is little appropriate, and prefers 
 to consider m as equivalent to trav, ' than when they once most flourished! 
 ' This refers to the period a little before the conclusion of the thirty years' 
 treaty, when the Athenians were masters not only of the islands, and the Asiatic 
 Greek colonies, but had also united to their confederacy Boeotia and Achaia on 
 the continent of Greece itself.' See ch. 108, 11 1, 115. Am. The times of the 
 five years' truce (ch. 112) and the battle of Coronea (ch. 113), 
 kKpaitpv-ht is for A-zctpato, fr. Kipdvvvfxi, and <\>dvT)s—' fresh from the fmmt! 
 'pure, 'unmingled' ' uniinpairexi: Eurip. has j/^es aK-f)a«;)i^€rs, //cc. 533 ; but 
 Kriig. remarks that the word does not elsewhere occur in Attic prose. Tr. 
 than as (when) in former days they flourished most vigorously with their cm- 
 federation unimpaired. aurols. Grote has a note, vol. v. p. 356, in 
 which he contends that avrots includes both the Lacedaemonians and Athenians: 
 because, as Thucyd. had not said that the Athenian empire at the beginning of 
 the Pelop. war had diminished in magnitude, the comparison between two 
 periods of it could not be clearly understood. The contrast, he says, is between 
 confederate Greece before the war, and bisected Greece in a state of war. I 
 cannot regard this as probable; avrois plainly belongs to the second claiu^e 
 introduced by 'PiBt\vaioi 5 « opposed to the 01 fxtv AaK(8aiij.6vioi ; and, according 
 to Mr. Grote's interpretation, no satis-factory meaning can be assigned to rr,s 
 ^uufiaxias ajcpaKpvovs, which is a natural expression for the Athenian league 
 
 while fresh and unimpaired by desertion, but, as it seems to me, would be very 
 improperly applied as an antithesis to the entire breaking up of the confederacy 
 against Persia. 
 
 Chapter XX. — (a.) rh, fihv ovv. Most of the editors agree in observing 
 that the opposing clause is to be found in the next chapter, though some consider 
 it to be iK Se ruv, K.r.\., and others, with Kriig., Koi 6 wSAffios oinos. Very 
 much has been written about the words which follow. The difficulty seems to 
 be that, whereas the construction is complete with xa^^T^ ovra as the subject 
 of iriffrfvffai, — iraml e^^s TfKfirjp'Kp are added, forming a sort of ohjective case 
 governed by the verb. To me these words seem an after-thought or qualifica- 
 tion. Thncydides was about to say the t^ iraAaia are difficult to credit — but 
 while enunciating this, modifies it — 'yet not absolutely so, for on the whole they 
 are credible enough, but it is difficult to establish each consecutive link in the chain 
 of evidence.^ He therefore says they are difficult to believe as established by 
 argument after argument consecutively, or, perhaps, taking irto-TeGcat more in- 
 dependently, difficult for a man to become a believer in them upon an unbroken 
 chain of evidence — i.e. if a man does believe them, he must be satisfied with 
 finding some links in the chain less firmly established than others. That 
 TKTTfvffai should be found where Triarevdrivai might have been expected, is not 
 contrary to the genius of the Greek language. See the cases collected by 
 Miitthife, § 535> and compare x"^*"""?; ^p^at vii. 51, x"^^'"'*''''^P<'vs dvai irpoa- 
 ito\(}iuv y'n. 51. Bl. cites Cicero De Or. i. 58, 'res difficiles perdiscere,' and 
 see particularly note on eS iroiiiv, ch. 132 b. Reiske and Wyttenbach con- 
 jecture TTiffTuffai — ' difficult to confirm by a strictly consecutive chain of proof ,^ a 
 very obvious correction upon which most persons would hit, were the reading 
 of the text inadmissible. Kampfer explains, * quum cuivis testimonio forte 
 deinceps oblato credere difficile sit.' But (as T. K. A. rightly says) €|^s denotes 
 regular succession, not fortuitous occurrence. Pop. has, not very correctly I 
 think, • re^ difficilis crcditu, eiiamsi ex ordine quodque testimonium ad rem coni' 
 prohandam profcratur,^ for where does eiiamsi profcratur come from ? Kriig., 
 with ingenuity, reads -nav n — * in each particidar consecutively to believe from 
 proof. ^ But I cannot help considering the expression an unnatural one, though 
 he supports it from vii. 29. I find that Peile's translation does not materially 
 differ from that given, and he aptly compares iii. 13, roiavTas exovres trpotpaffeis 
 Kai alrias airiarrifiiv, (ra<pe75 fi\v ro75 aKovovai yvuvai us eiKdrcas iSpdcrafjL€v — clear 
 indeed [i. e. of such a nature that it is clear) for those who hi'ar them to perceive 
 that v>e have done it — as parallel to the present case — x*''^*"'"^ "^'^°- — being 
 difficult {i.e. of such a nature that it is difficult) to build one's belief of them 
 upon a complete chain of evidence. Bl. is, I think, quite wrong : ' Such I have 
 fmyid to be the state of affairs in ancient times, however hardly it may find credit, 
 even when established on a regular chain of proof s.^ 
 
 {b.) 'Adrivaiwv yovv. Some doubt has been expressed as to the meaning 
 of the particle. It obviously is, according to its etymology (cf. ch. 2 e), 'This 
 is evidenced, at any rate, by the case of the Athenians, if by nothing else/ 
 'Itt. Ka\ 0€(r. K.T.A. The ou/c i'tratrtv cannot be connected with ^frai/, for it is 
 plainly impossible that the Athenians could have been ignorant of this fact. It 
 is better, therefore, with Kriig., to consider these words as purely parenthetical. 
 
34 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 
 
 [Book T. 
 
 Chap* 2l»j 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 {uroToir-fia-avres, k.t.K Having had some suspicion that on that day, and 
 Just as they were on the point of acting (lit. 'alongside of the matter,' vi. 57), a 
 disclosure had been made by one of their accomplices— or, having suspected that 
 some disclosure, ^-c. Spdcraurds ri kuI KivivvfVfiv. Compare 
 
 the note on flvSvras ri KivSvyevtip, iii. 53. It is clear that the phrase means, 
 
 • not to risk their lives for nothing,' ' not to run the peril without having first 
 done something to make it worth while.' The words are well explained by 
 Peile. • But wishing before they were seized, having done something, so and not 
 otherunse—if it must be so (or e'en), to run the risk of their lives.' So in the 
 well-known prayer of Ajax— ^i' 56 (pdei koI uKfatrov—' e'en kill ns'—' kill us if 
 you will' Kriig. refers to the koL before ^vvuivrai, iv. 98, 2, which see, and cf. 
 inr^p Tov ayadov rdxa ris koI ToA/ia airodavelv, Romans v. 7. AfuKopiov. 
 
 * The temple of the daughters of Leos, who, according to the tradition, had been 
 sacrificed by their father during a fiimine, as an offering for the lives of the 
 people. The temple stood in the Ceramicus within the walls.' Arn. 
 
 (c.) afxvrtaTf7v. 'A rare word,' Kriig. ' I have only met with it in Soph. 
 El. V. 482, and Aratus, Biosem. 115,' Bl. ^ta ^'{]<p(f TrpoffTidcffdai 
 
 — * sese adjungere' sc. to the party voting— it means therefore simply, ' to vote! 
 The statement of Herod, vi. 57, to which this is supposed to refer, is somewhat 
 obscure. He speaks of the two senior senators who, in the absence of the 
 kings, represented them, as 5uo yi>i]<povs riOffifvovs, rpir-qv Se tV ffvrwv. Thu- 
 cydides evidently understood this (if he did refer to it) to mean—' each giving 
 two votes (sc. as the monarch's representative), and then, severally, a third for 
 themselves,' so that they would vote six times altogether. And so must wft 
 understand it, though C. F. Hermann {P. A. G. § 25. 7), Heeren, and Muller 
 consider that the words quoted do not imply with certainty that each king had 
 two votes— the latter, however, admitting that Herod, probably followed this, 
 the opinion generally received in Greece, vol. ii. p. 105, note. Arnold and 
 Miiller, Dorians (vol. ii. p. 105) state their belief that Thucyd. refers to Hel- 
 lanicus rather than Herodotus, whose work he can scarcely have read. If, says 
 Arn., Herod, i. 1 30 refers to the revolt of the Medes against Darius Nothus 
 A.C. 409, it may be questioned whether Thucyd. had ever seen his history, not- 
 withstanding the well-known story of his having heard it refid at the Olj-rapic 
 games. This seems correct enough, for the termination of Thucyd. exile dates 
 in the year 403 a. c, when probably the greater part of his work had been com- 
 posed. See ch. 23 b. Indeed Dahlmann seems to have established this view, 
 cf. ch. 22 d. The second charge of inaccuracy here brought does not certainly 
 involve the assertion that there was no such place as Pitane, for Herod, (iii. 55) 
 expressly says that he had been there himself; but, as A. remarks, it denies 
 that the demus of Pit«ane was ever of sufficient importance to allow its in- 
 habitant« to form part of th« national army, as in the old Greek and Eoman 
 system the military di\nsions corresponded entirely with the civil ones. Not 
 withstanding the denial of Thucyd., Muller {Dorians, ii. p. 49) asserts that 
 ' Pitane was of sufficient importance to have its own gymnastic contests, and to 
 feirnish a battalion of its own, called Pitanates.' This he considers confirmed 
 by the fact that Caracalla, in imitation of antiquity, composed a \6x05 Uiravdrris 
 of Spartans (Herodian, iv. 8), and that the Tarentines, who retained the memory 
 of thB mother city more in their names of places than in their customs, had a 
 
 35 
 
 division of their army which was c illed Pitanates. The UfpliroXoi UjrapuTat are 
 mentioned upon a coin of Tarentum, Millinger, Plate i. n. 19. Schweighauser 
 would reconcile both historians, by supposing that there was such a cohort 
 levied for the occasion at the battle of Platiea, and commanded by Amom- 
 pharetus ; but, as this was not perpetual, it had ceased to exist in the time of 
 Thucydides. This is, however, only that sort of hypothesis which any one can 
 make, and besides Thuc. boldly says — oi»5' ^761/6x0 irdnrore. araXaltrupos 
 
 —' unpainstaking.' Pop. compares (what is probably an imitation) 'vulgi in- 
 diligentiam veri,' Tac. Hist. iv. 49. eroifia—* what is ready to hand,' 
 
 ' the first account that presents itself^ 
 
 Chapter XXI. — {a.) ^fitas. Notwithstanding the difficulty of coming to 
 
 any satisfactory conclusion about ancient matters. Toiavra & 
 
 iiriKeov. Pop. seems to understand, ' such as I have recounted.' Kriig. makes 
 & hiri\dou the object of vofiiCocv, and roiavra the predicate — ' what I have recounted 
 to he such.' /ndKiara — ' as near as can be made out,' cf. 13 c. Tr. 
 
 a/uopTclvoiSC. vofiiCov — ' umi/d not be wrong in holding ;* so also join iri,mva>v, 
 ' and in not being more i7iclined to believe.' koX couples irto-reucDj/ to vo^lQav. 
 Xoyoypd(poi. The prose writers, generally historians. Scholars confine the 
 words to the prose writers antecedent to Herodotus, such as Hecat«us of 
 Miletus, Charon of Lampsacus, Xanthus the Lydian, Pherecydes of Leros, and 
 Hellanicus of Mytilene. The student will find a more particular account, 
 Miiller, Hist. Gr. Lit. ch. xviii. p. 258, E. T. With oUre ^vpddea-av of course 
 repeat TTto-Tcywj/. ^vvTidrifii. Perhaps, like our ' concoct,' implies 
 
 the notion of making up a fictitious story. Bl. cites Dem. p. 277, \6yov5 
 (virpoauTrovs Koi fxvQovs ffvudeis ; and in Latin componere me7idocia. 
 vpoffay. if) a \ ride <t. — ' with a view to what was more attractive to the ear, ratJier 
 than to truth.' This double comparative is common both in Greek and Latin, 
 when two qualities are assigned to the same subject, and it is supposed to 
 possess more of the first than the second. This is Jelfs explanation, § 782, f. 
 It appears to me that the presence of the second quality is only asserted by a 
 sort of euphemism, or politeness. In fact, it is gently implied that the subject 
 is rather deficient therein, e.g. Herod, iii. 65, 4iroir](ra raxvTepa ^ aoipdoTcpa, */ 
 have acted with Qnore preci'pitancy than wisdom,' implying there was very little 
 wisdom in the act at all. Madvig s explanation is similar to that of Jelf {Lat. 
 ^^' § 307)* 'A comparison of two qualities which are found in the same subject 
 in an unequal degree, is denoted either by the positive with " magis^' or by two 
 comparatives.' '^milii contio fuit verior quam gratior populo* (Liv. xxii. 38), 
 which seems to me equally open to the above remark. See e.g. "lot a-TparTryol 
 irKeovfS ^ ^eXrloves, Arist. Ach. loii. ave^eKtyra — 'which cannot 
 
 be submitted to the test,' or, as Arn. well gives it, ' which cannot be proved or dis- 
 proved.' iKeyx^iv, it may be well to remind the non-logical reader, may imply 
 the establishment of a conclusion by indirect proof, as well as its direct refuta- 
 tion. Consult the logical treatises of Arist. and his Rhetoric, Arn.'s version of 
 W T^ fivd. iKviv. is not so good — * having taken their place among fables' See 
 note on i. 3 b, and trans. ' have won their way into mythus ' — on atrlarus as 
 equal to uxm Hiriara clucu, see the long note and collection of passages, iii. 65, 
 <pi\ius KOLi ov xoKefilaes. Compare also i. 140, rhs ^vfitpopas ajjLadus x^p^trcw. 
 
 d2 
 
36 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book L 
 
 (h.) Tjyriffdfifvos, like the other participles, must be connected with 
 a^taprdvoi. ws vaXaih tlvat—'for matters so antiquated^ i.e. «con. 
 
 sidering they are antiquated ; ' the ^ivcu is quite pleonastic, and belongs, as in 
 iKuv €h(u, to an early stage of the language. Indeed, most languages in such a 
 stage have a tendency to pleonastic usages of the verb * to he,' as may still h 
 seen in the conversation of the vulgar, ef. Jelf, § 869, 5. The words, of course. 
 modify avoxp<^vra}s ; its, in this case, is common enough. Cf. oiSf aUvaros ij 
 AaKfSatfiSva uirup, iv. 84. " a pretty good speaker for a Laced fBinonian: Niniier- 
 ous examples may be seen in Matth. § 628, 3. The Latins use ♦ ut * in preciselv 
 the same way. Cf. Frequentem cultoribus, ut inter moutana populum, Liv. xxi. 
 34- 5t7Awo-€*. The ellipse is to be filled up as in Herod, i. 174. 
 
 At^uij 877X0? 6WUT7V ^ovaa TrepippvTos (T. K. A.). Compare iii. 84, rj avdpuTTfia 
 ipvais 4^\a>(^fv aKpar^s opy9is oZffa. avTuv—sc. Tuv apxakv. 
 
 ' Vetera extollimus, reeentium incuriosi,' Tac. Ann. ii. 78. 
 
 Chapter XXII.— (a.) The statement which follows, though apparently 
 clear enoiigh, has been the subject of much controversy. Bloomf. declares that 
 the writer, in recording speeches, brings forward no sentiment but what was 
 really spoken ; tliat the words only arc in some cases changed, because it would 
 have been impossible to retain in the memory the exact expressions used on 
 each occasion ; that due regard is always had to the characteristics of the 
 speaker, and that the intent of the writer was ' pnestare atque conservare 
 simulacrum eloquenti?e vironim clarissimonim,' Livj-, xlv. 25. But this is in- 
 consistent with the unmistakeably Thucydid.Tan impress to be found in everv 
 speech. Perhaps the most strongly marked attempt at imitation is to be fdunil 
 in the speech of Sthenelaidas. But this was a very short and very notorious 
 speech, and must have been tolerably well known. Otherwise, Athenian?. 
 Corinthians, Bceotians, Syracusans, and even Spartans; Pericles, Alcibiades. 
 and Nicias, so far as the mere/orw of expression goes, speak very much alike; 
 and, indeed, there are certain cases where it is hardly probable that Thucydidos 
 can have had much positive and accurate information whereon to construct hi« 
 written orations. • The speeches,' says 3Iiiller, ' often stand in a relation to 
 one another, which could not have been justified by existing circumstances. 
 Thus, the speech of the Corinthians, in i. 120, is a direct answer to the speech 
 of Archidamus in the Spartan assembly, and to that of Pericles at Athens, 
 though the Corinthians did not hear either of them.' Lit. Anc. Greece, p. 489. 
 
 tOn the other hand, we must not believe them to be pure fictions like those of 
 Livy, Tacitus, and Plutarch, and the majority of ancient historians. This ex- 
 treme opinion is adopted by the French translator: 'lis ne sont qu'un cadre 
 adopts pour detacher du corps de I'ouvrage des ev^nements, des details dc 
 moeurs que Thucydide a voulu mettre dans un plus grand jour.' Thucvd. 
 evidently obtained all the information available as to what was said, and what 
 there was occasion to say, and then placing himself in the position of the 
 speakers, he recounts it in his own words, as near to the imagined original as 
 he can. But, as has been said, he does not succeed in divesting himself of his 
 identity. Am. illustrates by what appears to me a very similar case— that. 
 viz. of Johnson, who reproduced elaborate parliamentary' debates in the Geni\(- 
 man's Magazine, with no other basis to go upon than the substance of the 
 
 Chap. 22.] 
 
 i^-J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 37 
 
 debate faithfully reported. Probably these exercises contain most of the argu- 
 ments used at the time, yet every one would recognise them as the composition 
 of Johnson. Peile translates : But as the several speakers would have appeared 
 to me {iftol emphatic), had I been always present, to speak most to tJie purpose on 
 each point that came before them. This connects the h-v with eSoAcoui/ : but he 
 also, as Pop., suggests its being taken with etTrcTi/, which seems to me more 
 probable. 'As they appeared to me — when writing my history — likely to have 
 spoken, so as at the same time to speak most to the purpose' See, for the col- 
 location, ii. 83, 89 ; iii. 42, 89. It means, in fact, only a set form of speech, as 
 distinguished from conversation. Xoytp eJirov. This is in direct 
 
 antithesis to to S' epya rwv irpaxOevrwv — ' The speeches that were spoken' — as 
 opposed to ' the deeds which were done.' Pop. objects that this cannot be so, 
 since it is not the pi. \6yois. He accordingly supposes the noun to be added, in 
 order to form one of those verbal balances on which Lob., Paral. Gr. Gr. ii. p. 
 525, has enlarged. But this seems hypercritical. Niebuhr remarks that the 
 speeches of Thucydides, and even those of Demosthenes, are not constructed 
 upon any artificial plan subordinated to the rules of rhetoric. But most persons 
 will agree with Kriig. in asserting that they are accommodated, on true psycho- 
 logical principles, to the circumstances under which they were delivered, and 
 could well afford to dispense with the pedantic rules of rhetorical arrangement. 
 Kriig., in my judgment correctly, renders ' durch Eede,' Ity means of speech. Cf. 
 ii. 46, 69. iv avT^ — sc. ry iroAe/xe7j/. Kriig. cites avrd, i. 69. It 
 
 may be of importance to the student to observe, that Thucyd. thus uses the 
 cases of this pronoun, i.e. without an immediate antecedent. Cf. iii. 84. 
 SiafjLvrifjLovfvaa t — * remember throughout.' \4xofxev y — ' keeping as 
 
 dose as possible to tJie general purport of what was really said {rrjs ^vfnrd<Tr)s 
 means, ' taken as a whole ') — so has it been set forth by me.' Or, as Kriig. has 
 it, ' So have I Tnade them speak.' 
 
 (b.) irpaxB^vrwv. Connect as closely as possible with 4v t^ TroAe/iy, 
 Kriig. ; who judiciously remarks that ra irpaxB^vra is a term of very wide com- 
 pass indeed, embracing all sorts of transactions, and even speeches. Therefore 
 TO tpya Twv Trpax64i/T(cp is only a small part of Trpaxddvra. Others understand 
 it as the mere verbal balance to the clause, \6ycp cItto;/. It seems to me to 
 imply, if we could so express it, ' the actuality of whar was done' ' the real acts 
 and results.' That the expression is emphatic and intensive is the opinion of 
 Hermann on Soph. Trach. v. 229, who translates 'id quod vere factum est.' 
 Compare, as an apt illustration, a passage cited by Bloomf. from Quintilian : 
 ' Historia scribitur non ad actum rei pugnamque praesentem, sed ad memoriam 
 posteritatis.' ctAAa oTs. Tr. ' 1 thought myself bound only to set 
 
 forth partly that at which I myself was present, partly that which, so far as was 
 practicable, I had with exactness informed myself of from others' — lit. 'having 
 exactly informed' oh is accordingly governed by irapTJv; the construction 
 changes, and instead of Koi & 4iT€^ri\dov, we have koI eTre^eKOcbv irapa twv &K\a)if. 
 This way of accounting for the construction apparently arises from an un- 
 willingness to apply ive^exewv to oh iraprjv avrds. To me it does not seem so 
 entirely inappropriate — ' Carefully going over again all the particulars of matters 
 whereof I was myself an eye-witness.' * It is supposed that Thucyd. served in 
 the first seven years of the war, for in the eighth he was appointed to command 
 
38 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 22.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 39 
 
 the Athenian fleet off the coast of Thrace.' T. K. A. from Owen. 
 Trvvdav6fjL€uos (auTo) = & iirvvQav6fn\v. tw*', the article, must be given, ^ all 
 iny other informants.^ 
 
 {c.) tvvoias ^ fivfifiijs €X0' — PC. (axn6u, ^ as each happened to he disposed 
 in res2>ect of his recollection of the facts, or of his good-will to one of the tm 
 parties.' €Kar4p(av \s the objective gen., as 'Adrjpaiwv ivi/ola, vii. 57. 
 
 For the gen. fvfolas, denoting the respect in which the action of the verb is 
 taken, see Matth. § 367; Jelf, § 528; and the long note, Sheppard's Theophrastiis, 
 ch. iii. p. 77. 
 
 (d.) rh ix^ fjLvdwdfs. The junior student will observe that rh ait fivOHohs 
 would convey the direct and positive negation of the presence of a mythic ele- 
 ment — 'the fact that they contain no myths.' But rb /xtj ixvdudes is subjective, 
 and refers to the impression existing in the reader's mind — ' the fact that he 
 sees no mvths in them,' cf. ch. 141 e. This I believe to be correct, but the 
 student may consult Jelf, § 745, 5. Stroi 5e PovK-fiaovrat. This 
 
 passage has been characterised as 'very diflBcult' by the editors, and has been 
 made the subject of special criticisms by Kriiger, Melhorn, Hermann, Osiander, 
 and others. Where Thucydides, in a somewhat complicated sentence, has 
 already employed words which would be subsequently suitable to express some- 
 thing else, sooner than fall into tautology, he avoids their repetition, without 
 supplying their place. In the present case, as it appears to me, either 
 fjL€\\6tn-u)p or iareadai is thus made to do double duty. Before consulting any 
 commentator, I conceived the arrangement of the whole to be, Baoi Si $uv\-f)aovTai 
 Tftjj/ re ycvo/xfUiDV rh (ra<pis CKOTn^v, koI tup fi€\\6pTa)v vorh addts — /caret rh 
 apdpcnvi7op — roiovTwv Koi -napairK-riaioip iaeadai [rovrovs] ixpiKijxa, Kplpeip avrh 
 apKovpTws f^ei [cyuoi] — ' But they who shall he desirous to attain to the correct 
 view of past transactions, and of those likely at some future time {in all human 
 prohability) to recur vi such or similar shape, for these to regard what I have 
 written as useful, will be ample reward for me.' Kara ih apOpotiruov is the after- 
 thought qualification, parenthetically introduced in our author's manner. Bh 
 Cf. Herod, i. 86, ov54p ti fxaWop h (avrov Xejoop, rj is airop rh i-pOpam-fjiop ; and 
 Terent. Heaut. iii. a. 40, ' Si quid hujus simile fortfe aliquando evenerit, ut sunt 
 humana.' rh aa<p\s — the clear and positive, as distinct from rh /xvduSts, the 
 obscure and mythical view. For roiavra koI TrapairK-fia-ia, cf. i. 143, and elj^e- 
 where, with rt Kai, i. 140, viii. 78, Pop. Cf. 'Ha?c atque talia.' apKovprws 
 €(€L, Bl. obserA'es, occurs again, ^sch, Choeph, v. 879, rySe 8' apKoiivrus €X«- 
 I really do not know that examination of the numerous commentaries has much 
 moditied my original view. Hermann understands thus. ' Satis trat factum, si 
 qui vel res qua gestce stmt, accurate considerare, vel uhifutura, ut fieri solet, ean- 
 dem aut similem formam hahebunt, iitilem judicare hunc librum voluerint.' On 
 which Poppo remarks, n€\\6pra)p tali ratione bis cogitari posse nobis non vide- 
 tur. The version in which he himself acquiesces is — ' Quicunque autem volent, 
 et iM Us qum evenerijit, id, quod pro explorato habendum, sit, considerare, et in Us 
 qua, ut sunt res humanes, talia vel similia eventura sint, si utUia hac {sc. hanc 
 historiam) judicent, satis erit factum ; ' which, if I understand it, does not 
 materially differ from what I have given. Kriig. writes {tkottup again with 
 uHpfKifia^ and understands fxtWdprwv a second time, i.e. rup fi€\\6pr<ap, /ueA- 
 \6pr(Dv r. Kol V. €a€<r6ai — meaning, I suppose, /w^Mre events about to take place 
 
 in similar form, #e. 4c (which is at least very awkward), and understands 
 roirois, not ifxoi, after e'^et— './wr die wird es {das Werk) genugen,' for stwk 
 pcr.^ons mf/ work will be safsfactory. Wex, a late German WTiter, would com- 
 bine wipiitpia Kpipeiv, and make rup ixeWdprcov—^ffCffdai a gen. case dependmg 
 upon it, traushxtmg ^ niltdiche Winke zur Beurtheilung von Ereig7iisse7i'— use- 
 ful hints for determining eve^its; but I know of no such government for the 
 genitive. ^pKoiprus ex^t. So used again vi. 101. i. JEsch. Choeph. 
 
 g^^, KrrifjLa is ctet. These words have acquired a world-wide 
 
 celebrity in the sense of ' an everlasting possession: It may perhaps disappoint 
 the student to hear that it is questionable whether they can bear such an inter- 
 pretation. Miiller {Lit. Anc. Greece, p. 487) ^ays— ' Thucydides for such per- 
 sons (sc. Uoi ^ovX-hcroprat) bequeaths his book as a lasting study— something 
 to be kept by one ;— it does not mean an everlasting memorial or monument. 
 He opposes his work, which people were to keep by them, and read over and 
 over again, to a composition which was designed to gratify an audience on one 
 occasion only.' aya>pifffj.a means a sort of prize-essay, and has 
 
 reference to the ordinary musical, poetical, and rhetorical contests, in which 
 compositions possessing only an ephemeral and transitory interest were no 
 doul)t often produced merely for the sake of an eirt5et|ts. Zevort, the last 
 French translator (1853), repeating a popular opinion, writes— ' Thucydide fait 
 ici allusion a Herodote, sans le nommer. II laisse raremeut echapper I'occasion 
 d'attaquer ce grand historien, dont le genie poetique et brillant coutrastait avec 
 I'esprit rigoureux et positif de Thucydide.' But Dahlmann, the biographer of 
 Herodotus, has shown that there is no ground whatever for Lucian's story 
 about Herodotus reciting his History at Olympia, and consequently very smaU 
 reason to suppose that Thucydides was acquainted with it (cf. ch. 20 c). At any 
 rate these covert and disingenuous sneers at a great fellow-labourer in the field 
 of historical literature are but little consonant with a candid and noble mind, 
 such as was that of Thucydides. Quintilian had this passage in his eye when 
 he wrote his well-known description of history, x. 1,31— Historia scribitur ad 
 narrandum, non ad probandum ; totumque opus, non ad actum rei, pugnamque 
 prsesentera, sed ad menioriam posteritatis, et ingenii famam compouitur.' 
 ivyK(7rai, as Krug. remarks, stands to ^vuridepai in the light of a perf. pass. 
 SoiEschin. i. 125, ^^ei koX 'inpos A6yos ris inrh rod avrod <TO<pi(Trod avyKcifx^vos— 
 tr. ' it has been composed and w placed before you.' 
 
 Chapter XXIII.— (a.) Returns to the subject fr. 21 b. Svolv. Phrynichus 
 has hv^tp i-nX p.6vns y^PiKXiS rider at, ovxl St SortKTjs, and Am. seems inclined to 
 accept the rule. The MSS. vary greatly in this and other places between the 
 two. Bek. and Dind. adopt S.eli/; Pop., GoU., and Kriig., Svo7p. Consult 
 Poppo's note, from which it appears that Svelp is not justly asserted by Bremi 
 {de Coronet, § 173) to have been a favourite old Attic form of the genitive ; that 
 it is of very dubious authority in the Tragoedians, and that it is only found 
 in the worst MSS. of Demosthenes, though most common in Plutarch and the 
 later writers. From all this, it looks like a modern form, introduced by the 
 copyists, to whom it was familiar, into their transcripts of the older authors. 
 The Scholiast says the two naval battles were Artemisium and Salamis ; the 
 two on land, Thermopyl^ and Platsea. Kriig. does not understand how these 
 
40 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 24.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 41 
 
 can be said to have decided the war, and therefore believes reference to be made 
 to the battles of Sahimis and Plataea, and the double battle at Mycale. 
 
 {h.) virh fiapPdpwv. None is recorded except Mycalessus, vii. 29, Kriig. 
 ff (pii'v is added, because, though vSKeis is the grammatical subject, *AdTjva7oi koI 
 n€Aoiro»/»Wj(rtoi^re really supplied by the mind. Thucyd. refers to Plataea, iii. 
 68, and Thyrea, iv. 57. Kriig. Poppo adds Mjtilene, iii. 50, but this was a 
 case of dismantling rather than of entire destruction. ot/ci^Topaj 
 
 fjLfTffiaXov. Potidsea, ii. 70; iEgina, ii. 27; Scione, v. 32; Thyrea, iv. 57; 
 Pop. oCt€ — Kai. Poppo remarks upon *cal thus following othf, 
 
 that the German idiom is similar, ' noch so viele Verbannungen und Metzoleien.' 
 The Ljitins also, he says, after neque have not only aut and ve, but also que; 
 and upon the strength of this passage he contends for a wider application of 
 the idiom than that allowed by Matthise, § 609. I had always referred this 
 oUre buck to the previous one, and rendered the present clause as embraced 
 beneatli the oi/re, ' 7»</r so much banishment and murder ;' and this, I now see, is 
 also Kriig.'s view. olK-firopas yL^ri^aKov. ^gina, ii. 27; 
 
 Potidaea, ii. 70; Scione, v. 82; Melos, v. 116. 8ia rh ffraffid^dv. 
 
 *Ut Corcyrse, iii. 69, 81 ; Megaris, iv. 74; Samos, viii. 21.' Pop. 
 
 (c.) OLKO^ — 'Jiearsay* or mere 'tradition,' as opposed to fact. Kriig. com- 
 pares Herod, iv. 16, to. KaTinrepde (Kcye UKor}, <f>a5 'laarfSdvas fluai rovs ravra 
 Xiyoinas. ovk 6.TriaTa Karfarr} — ^ have not been incontrovertihly 
 
 established* 'S.^iafiStv. See ii. 8; iii. 87, 89 ; iv. 52; v. 45, 50; 
 
 viii. 6. Pop. iir4<Txov. * Non occupabant, quae tamen explanatio 
 
 verbis, c. 50, nonnihil adjuvatur, sed j^f^^'d^efxifit, ut Dion Cassius, p. 1 140, iirl 
 7r\€iou5 6 <T€i<TfjLhs tVcix^t' Pop. The truth seems to be that €7r6x« is ' to extend 
 over,' and that Time and Place are after it, as in many other cases regarded as 
 identical in point of construction— the metaphysical basis at the bottom of both 
 ideas coinciding — but as we have 7^5 expressed here, I should not hesitate to 
 tr. ' extended over the greatest amount of country' certainly not of the habitable 
 globe, as has been suggested. The aufffiuv irepi, 'on the score of earthquakes,' 
 is, as Am. says, exactly equivalent to 6l6v rt acia/jLoi, and a nominative case. 
 iK\si\lf€is. A not uncommon change of construction. See for instance i. 52, 
 2, and supply with Pop. ovk &Tri(Troi KarearTjaav. trap a k.t.X. — 
 
 * placed alongside of,* i. e. * compared imth those recorded informer times.' 
 avxy^oi. The ' siccitates ' of Caesar, Kriig. fcrrt irap' oTs. Jelf, 
 
 § 817, 8, and ctVl koX al, Jelf, § 817, 3. ri ovx ^Kiara . . . . v 
 
 XoindoSrjs v6ffos. Kriig. aptly illustrates this repetition of the article by 
 Plat. Garg. 502 b. tI Se 5-^ ; ^ aifiv)) avrri koi Qav^aar)) ff ttjs rpaycf^ias Troiriffis. 
 We may add, tV iirayjfKlav 7^v ruvrov ravr-qv rrjv KoXiiv, and Midias, § 189, 
 rks avopp^Tovs — ras rovrov yovds. See other cases, Matth. § 277. From a 
 comparison of these, it will, I think, appear that the article is doubled where 
 the writer means to dwell upon, and make a great deal of, the notion indicated 
 by the noun to which it is attached. fitpos ri. Tirones will remark 
 
 that /Af'pos Tt is an appreciable and therefore considerable part, like 'aliquot' 
 in Latin. Cf. ii. 47 for the effect of the pestilence, and for the phrase cf. iv. 30, 
 ii. 69, iii. 89, where see note. Peile quotes Juvenal, xii. no, 'Partem aliquam 
 belli.' f uKeTt'dcTo — set upon them, or fell upon them at once, pro- 
 
 perly said of a hostile assault. 
 
 {d.) Xvaravres — sine articulo, in that they broke, or by breaking the thirty 
 years' truce. rpiaKovrovrns. The same form occurs, i. 115 ; ii. 2. 
 
 TpjoKOVTowTiSes, i. 87 ; rpiaKovraerfis, v. i a (cf. ScKaerTjs, v. 25) ; irevTriKOV' 
 raiTis, V. 32; ireiTijKoyrovT'qs, v. 27. Kriig. For the history, see i. 115. 
 Zb^olas aXwffiv, i. ii a. Trpoiypa^^a rrpwrov. Commentators com- 
 
 pare for the pleonasm, Trpoirfix^avTes np6T€pov, i. 29 ; vpSripov rrpoijorKeirro, 
 riii. 66; ((pdaaav "npoKaraKa^duTes, iii. 112; irpXv TrpoSidyvuTe^ i. 78. See, too, 
 Ivriig. on Xen. Jnab. i. 4, 14, rov fxi) (rir^aai. On this genitive, 
 
 gee Jelf, § 492. 2, and supra, ch. 4 a. irp6<pa(riv is here 'ground* 
 
 'occasion ; ' alria is perhaps more properly ' an alleged cause,' but both are used 
 with adjectives that modify and exchange their meaning. Kriig. says that 
 Schoraan on /sanis, p. 181, has a note on the matter. What follows, Kriig. 
 explains as a mixture of two constructions, sc. rrji' aXriOcaTdT-qv irpocpaaiv rous 
 '\6rivaiovs riyov/xai fieydXovs yiyvofiivovi, and rovs 'Adrjvaiovs T}y ovfjiai fieyd\ovs 
 yiyvoixfvovs avayKdaai is to TroM^uv. Pop. argues that as tovs 'Adrjvaiovs 
 riyovp.ai .... on fxeyaXot. yiypdfxevoi r^vdyKaaav would be the ordinary idiom 
 
 I of the Greek language, it is not strange to find the accusative with the infinitive 
 {Hiyi\ovs yiyvofiiyovs avayKatrai) substituted for its equivalent the conjunction 
 on with the finite verb. At any rate, the junior student must not confound 
 
 I yiyvoixeyovs with yiy^viifxivovs ; the latter is, ' because they had become great,' the 
 former, ' because they were growing great,' denoting that the apprehensions 
 the one party kept pace with the aggrandisement of the other. atpavi" 
 
 ffTdrriv \6y(p — ' least openly urged in words* is rh <pavep6v — 
 
 \' brought forward into tlie public sight.' Compare is rb ^avephv atro^vvres, ch. 
 6 c; tT&nsl'dte ' openly alleged' alTlai eKaripoov a<f) uv, Kriig. 
 
 says is for ahlai cup' &v kKdnpoi — * The cau^is in consequence of which either 
 
 yfarty.' It seems quite as simple to trans, the causes alleged by either party^ 
 
 I owing to which they broke the treaty and settled ifito the war. kKaripwv is here 
 a true genetic case, or genitive denoting the source from which the tdriai were 
 
 I generated. But see Jelf, § 483. 4. 
 
 Chapter XXIV. — (a.) rhv *l6viov K6\-nov. It appears from this passage, 
 
 land from Herodotus, vi. 127, where Epidamnus is said to be on the Ionian 
 
 jgulf, that this term included, in the fifth century before the Christian era, the 
 
 I southern part of the Adriatic, as well as the sea between Italy and Greece 
 
 southward of the lapygian promontory, to which it was more properly applied. 
 
 It never seems, howe\'«r, to have extended to the northern part of the Adriatic, 
 
 wliich was called 'Adrias,' a name applying properly, as Miiller thinks, to the 
 
 coast near the mouths of the Po, where the old city of Adria or Hatria was 
 
 jsituated. 'Adrias' in Herodotus, i. 163, and v. 9, is the country so called, and 
 
 not the sea. Miiller says that the earliest mention which he has found of the 
 
 jsea under this name occurs in Lysias, advers. Diogiton. p. 908. See Miiller, 
 
 \Etrusker, Einleitung, iii. 4. The sea between Sicily and Greece is by Thucyd. 
 
 [called the Sicilian Sea, iv. 24, 53 ; vi. 13. Yet even this was at a later period 
 
 illed 'Adrias,' as appears not merely from the well-known passage in the 
 
 jActs, xxvii. 27, where its meaning has been disputed, but also from a similar 
 
 Ipassago in the Life of Josephus, c. 3, where Joscphus says that on his way from 
 
 iJerusalem to Rome he, too, was overtaken by a tempest, Kara fiiaov rhp 'A5piav, 
 
42 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 25.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 43 
 
 and was picked up by a ship of Gyrene, on her way to Puteoli.' Am. 
 i<nr\€ovTi. On this use of the dative of reference, see Jelf, § 599, i, 't« 
 should say, on your right hand as you sail in.' Cf. v. 10, 6. Epidamnus was 
 subsequently called Dyrrachium ; hence its modern name of Durazzo. 
 icoTci 8^ rhv iraXaihif vS^fiov. ' Quaenam fuerint jura, quae colonise originibus 
 suis debebant, nou alienuni erit paucis hoc loco perstringere. Prinio igitur ii. 
 qui in coloniam mittebantur, armis et oommeatu a civibus suis instruebanturde 
 publico, ut docet Libanius in arguraento orationis Demosthenis, irfpl tuv h 
 X€ppovri<r(p. Prseterea publica lis diplomata debebantur, quae diroiKta voca- 
 bant, teste Hyperide in orat. Deliaca apud Harpocrat. Sed quod prdecipuum 
 est, sacra patria coloni secum asportabant, ignemque sacrum e ponetrali urbis 
 depromtum et accensum ; quod docet Auctor Etymolog. in Upvravua : qui 
 quidem ignis si casu exstinctus esset, ex Prytaneo conditorum accendi eum 
 oportebat. Moris quoque erat, ut colonise quotannis legatos in majorem patriam 
 (sic Curtius lib. 4, vertit, quam Gi-seci (x-nrpd-noKiv dicunt) mitterent Dii> 
 patriis sacra facturos, ut testantur Polybius, cap. 1 14, legationum, et Cevetius, 
 lib. 4. Solenne etiam erat, ut colonise ab originibus suis Pontifices acciperent. 
 ut constat ex Thueydide, i. 25, § 4, et Scholiastd ad eundem locum ; quin etiam. 
 si aliquando coloni aliam coloniam aliquo deducere vellent, moris erat, ut dueem 
 a majore patria postularent, ut hoc in loco docet Thucyd. ; nam Corcyrsei coloni 
 erant Corintliiorum, ideoque Phalium ex Metropoli arcessebant, ut colonis 
 Epidamnura deducendae dux esset. Plura hac de re vide in Valesii notis ad 
 Excerpta Polybii, p. 7. Hnds. Add. Spanheim. Dissert, ix., de Usii et Prasi. 
 Nitmism. p. 570, seqq.' Duk. There is little to be added to this note of 
 Duker's, except, perhaps, that the relation of a colony to a parent state va? 
 considered analogous to that subsisting between children and parents, us yovem 
 irphs TiKva, Polyb. xii. 10, 3 ; and that war between the two was revolting tu 
 the natural instinct of the Greek mind. Let the student consult for more 
 particulars Hermann's Pol. Antiq. § 73, 74, 75. The 5^ here has some sligbt 
 approximation to that usage in which it is almost identical with hi]Qiv, i.e. when 
 the \iTiter does not personally vouch for his statement. Not that Thuc. means 
 to deny it ; he only means, ' as was set forth by the parties themselves.' Cf. 
 ill. 104, Kara, xpvo't^^y ^V riva, ' in accordance^ as it was said, with a certain 
 oracle.' ruv a<p' 'HpaKXfovs, Grote, ii. p. 479. 
 
 (b.) araariavres 4v aW-fiXois, more usually irpds. For the fact, see 
 Arist. Pol. V. I, 6. avh iro\4fxov icpddprjaav — ' Were reducedto 
 
 the lowest ebb in consequence of a war.' So both Pop. and Krig., and I think 
 correctly. Kriig. compares a(f>' S>v iKTrhrovres, i. 12. Goll. takes avh in the 
 more unusual sense of ' after,' and Arn., notwithstanding his own note on o</>' a* 
 i. 12, connects the avh voAsixov with (rraaiavrfs. ttjs iroXA^s — 'tk 
 
 greater part' — cf. ttjv fia.ari\4ws 'yriv tV ttoWt^v ii. 48. For other instances and 
 an account of the idiom see Matth. § 442, 2. 
 
 (c.) Tck TcAcwTata, ' in der letzten Z^it,' Kriig. ; i. e. ' at last — in the peiid 
 immediately preceding this war ' — for a similar adverbial use of the words, cf. 
 iii. 65. Toi/s SwuTous ' optimates,' — one of the recognised appella- 
 
 tions of the party opposed to the democracy. See more on the subject iii. 65. 
 note b. aTr€AdovT€s. Haase has conjectured iir^Kdoyrfs, but this 
 
 is unnecessary — tr. after their departure, or expulsion. iXTjiCovro. 
 
 Imperf. denoting continued action. 
 
 (d.) Tovs (pevyovras. 'The exiles' — not in a past tense, because the 
 participle cum articulo almost becomes a substantive. Compare such cases 
 as T] rlKTovaa, ' the mother,' and the instances given in note iii. 14 b, r&v 
 ha&aK\6vr(au. ruv ^ap^apwv TrSXe/xov. The objective genitive. 
 
 Kriig. cf. i. 32, 3 ; \{. 6, 3. KaOeC^ixevoi. Suppliants assumed a 
 
 sitting posture ; to raise them from it was equivalent to granting their prayer. 
 Sae the account of Cy Ion's party, i. 126, KaOiCouffiv 4ir\ rhv fioofxhu Udrai .... 
 avaffT-fjffavres Be aitTovs 01 rwv 'Adrivaim', k.t.K See also iii. 75, and the case of 
 Themistocles, i. 136. is rh "Hpaiou. On this constructio prsegnans, 
 
 as it is called, for €\.d6in-cs is rh 'Hpa7ov iKode^ovTo, see Matthise, § 578. On the 
 government of ravja, cf. Jelf, § 529, i. 
 
 Chapter XXV. — («.) eeadai. Kriig. says the metaphor is from games 
 like chess and draughts, Plato, Bep. 604 c. Tr. were at a loss how to make any 
 satisfactory arrangemtnt, or, disposition of the present state of affairs. 
 Tifxupla is nothing more than fiorjOda, help, assistance, as below, and ch. 38, 
 58, 69. Kriig., however, does not regard it as an ordinary Attic usage, 
 ei vapdSoifif. Jelf, § 886 d. The optative is used after an historical tense in 
 indirect interrogative sentences, when the question is to be represented as pro- 
 ceeding from some one else. 
 
 (/>.) (r<pa}v ' for eavruv in this sense is principally Ionic and Thucydidaean,* 
 Kriig., who appends a large number of parallel instances. 
 
 (c.) Kara re afxa be Kal. See ch. 4 a ovres Hvoikoi. The 
 
 colonisation of Corcyra by the Bacchid Chersikrates, was a lateral branch of the 
 colonisation of Syracuse. See Miiller's Dorians, i. § 119. oUre yh.p 
 
 K.r.X. As this is followed by no finite verb, we must class it among the ana- 
 coloutha so common to Thucydides, and supply iraprjixeKovv from the preceding 
 clause. Either Thuc. intended to add another verb and forgot it, or imagined 
 that irapfjfieKovu would do duty for the remaining part of the sentence, not ob- 
 ser\'ing, as Am. remarks, that the insertion of yhp rendered this impossible. 
 ravf\yvpe<ri. The Olympian, Nemaean, &c., says the Scholiast. But this is 
 a specimen of their loose style of explanation. For how, as Kriig. observes, 
 could they possibly be in a position to refuse them the right of -Kpoedpia, e. g. at 
 the Isthmian games ? Reference must be made to some festivals common to 
 both countries ; colonies sent de(i)povs to attend some of the festivals in the 
 mother country. Kopivdicp avSpl -KpoKarapx^fJ^^voi. The exact 
 
 meaning of this has been much disputed. It must mainly depend upon the 
 sense assigned to Kardpxea-Oai. Kriig. quotes from Buttmann's Lexilogus a 
 twofold explanation, (i) The word denotes the initiatory consecration of a 
 victim for sacrifice. So we find it, Eurip. Ale. v. 74, where it denotes the act 
 of cutting off part of the hair on the victim's head by the sword of the person 
 officiating. So Virgil : — 
 
 ' tempora ferro 
 Summa notant pecudum.' — JEn. xii. 171. 
 
 (1) It denotes the removal of a selected portion from a whole, as for instance 
 
 |l 
 
44 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 first fruits, for the purpose of consecrating it. This we find Od. xiv. 427, 
 irdvToOcv apx^fifvos fxeXecov. Kriig, therefore understands it * imparting to a 
 Corinthian the first fruits of their sacrifice, or offering, in order that he may 
 burn it upon the altar: Others, as Bloomf., take the dative as a Latin ablative 
 — a usage which G611. wrongly would banish from Greek. Poppo says it is not 
 unusual in the poets, and quotes Bernh. Synt. p. 104. Matthige, § 396. Add 
 Jelf, § 608, obs. 3, and render, beginning by a Corinthian man, i. e. by the 
 agency of one, regarding the person as an instrument, not any given Corinthian, 
 but probably the chief priest, who, as the Scholiast tells us, was sent from 
 parent states to colonies, and whose duty it was to commence the sacrifice by 
 pouring a cup of wine on the head of the victim, then to sprinkle it with the 
 sacrificial meal, and cut off the hairs from the forehead and throw them into the 
 fire. To this Pop. (who has changed his opinion) in ed. and4, seems to incline, 
 translating 'per virum Corinthium facicntes sacrorum initium: He rejects his 
 old rendering * in usum viri Corinthii,' which indeed would seem more appro- 
 priate to the Homeric times ; for, afterwards, the first viands of the banquet 
 were offered to the gods. Besides, this, as relating to many occasions, would 
 rather require KopivQiois avlpatn. Compare for the word Herod, iv. 60, Eurip. 
 Jlc. V. 74, and Kardpx^ffQai twv Upiav, Dem. i» Midiam, p. 552. G611. places a 
 stop at rS)v UpSiv, thereby making KopivQl^) av^pX depend upon Uhovns ra 
 vo(xiC6niva yepa, wair^p ai &K\ai airoiKiai. For these see 
 
 Midler's I)»r. vol. i. ch. vi. § 7, 8. They were mainly Syracuse in Sicily, Chalcis 
 in Jtltolia. Solium in Acarnauia, Ambracia, Anactoriimi, Leucadia, Epidamnus, 
 and Apollonia, the whole forming ' a strong and continuous chain along the 
 coast. trepKppovovvres. Perhaps the notion of neglecting and 
 
 despising arises from the contemptuous survey of an object— the looking at it 
 on all sides round implied in irepi. I am not, however, so sure that is the 
 meaning in the passage cited by most editors — aepofiaTu koI iT€pi<ppovu> rh 
 ^Ajov, Arist. Nub. v. 226 : elsewhere in this sense we find vitfp<ppoviiv. The 
 ico2 before xpntidruv is in connection with the Kod before Tp is irdKffiui/ Kriig., 
 like • tum ' and * cum.' 6fio7a. This is classed by Jelf among those 
 
 cases where the predicative substantive does not signify a person but a thing, 
 and is then frequently joined with a subj. of different gender, sometimes of 
 different number. A familiar instance is oitx apTrayfihtf riyna-aro rh fJvou ha 
 ©eV» Phil. ii. 6. See also Herod, vi. 100, AiVxi^r/s iuv rwv 'Epfrpifwv ra 
 wpaJTo, and similarly ix. 77. Perhaps Kriig. hits overlooked these last instances 
 when he positively declares that vtnfs 6iJ.o7a cannot possibly be connected. I 
 shoiUd still, however, be inclined with him to place a stop at xp^vov, and con- 
 nect hvvaixni 6ifTf5 with SvvaTUT€poi, which seems amply sanctioned by SvvaT^v 
 hvvofiiy, A-ii. 6 ; Sfiola would then exhibit a sort of adverbial usage, and the 
 whole will mean—' and at that period being as well in the power derived from 
 wealth, on a scale equal to the wealthiest Greeks, as in their preparation for th 
 war, more powerful than the Corinthians.' irpotx^tv depends upon 
 
 ivaip6n€voi (Kriig.), as the particip. indicates pride and self-confidence. The 
 double gen. after TpoivolKTjffiv is paralleled by vii. 34, 81A tV rod avffxov Jkirwffiv 
 aurSiv is rh ireXayos. Pop. See more cases, Matth. § 380; Lob. ad Soph. 
 Ajax, 309 ; Jelf, § 543. 'Kul valet etiam.' Pop. and so also 
 
 Kriig.—' schon wegen.' It is generally admitted that the Phseacians were the 
 
 Chap. 26.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 45 
 
 predecessors of the Corcj-raeans in the island. See the 6th book of the 
 Odyssey. It has, however, been controverted. Pop. remarks that Thuc. does 
 not express his own opinion. tiKOffi Kal UarSv. See Herod, vii. 
 
 168, where it appears that sixty vessels were but a part of their fleet. They 
 had eighty triremesjn the time of Timotheus. Isocr. xv. 109. Kriig. 
 
 Chapter XXVL— (ff.) With respect to the subject of this ch. Grote ob- 
 serves :— ' Though the Korkyreans, themselves democratically governed, might 
 have been expected to sympathise with these suppliants and their prayers, yet 
 their feeling was decidedly opposite, for it was the Epidamnian oligarchy who 
 were principally connected with Korkyra, from whence their forefathers had 
 emigrated, and where their family burial-places, as well as their kinsmen, were 
 still to be found.' Vol. vi. p. 69. ^Tr^tiirov. Pop. remarks that 
 
 m the ease of verbs of 'going' and ' sending,' the imperfect frequently stands 
 where we might expect the aorist. He cites cTrAeoi/, ch. 29; aiijyovTo, ch. 48; 
 avf^rcWov, rii. 20 ; oTreire^Troi/, vii. 29. These cases belong to the distinction 
 noticed, Jelf, 401, 3, 4. 'The aor. merely narrates the fact; if the narrator 
 places himself, as it were, in the midst of the facts he relates, and tells them as 
 if he saw them with his own eyes, the imperfect is used.' Indeed, we find the 
 imperfect generally thus employed in the case of verbs, which, like those above, 
 denote a continuous action, occupying some time. Tr. ' theg proceeded to send} 
 oiK^Topa here equivalent to ^tfoikov. ^ « f ^_' on foot',—i. e. by land. 
 
 They afterwards went forward by sea to Apollonia, perhaps, as Bl. suggests, to 
 avoid the danger of passing through the territory of the Taulantii. 
 'AiroWuuiav. See Herod, ix. 92; Henn. P. A. G., § 86. deei ruv 
 
 KfpKvpaiwv n^ Ku\{,a,vTai iir' ahrwp—' from fear of the Corinthians, lest 
 they he hindered by them: KuKvwvrai is in the subjunctive rather than optative 
 after iiropevdvffav, by a sort of extension of the principle irph ofifidrwv iroifTv 
 {At. Rhet.), which is seen in the pnesens historicum. ICriig. remarks that 
 particular prominence is given to the main idea in the sentence by this sort of 
 repetition, and cites from Xen. Hell. ii. 3, 18, icpofioivro rhu Qripafiivnv fi^ 
 (Tvppvflnaav irpos avrht/ 01 iro\7rai. 
 
 {h.) krcpcp ffr6\a!. ' Navibus 15, id quod ex § 4 colligitur.' Pop. 
 kot' iirrjpeiau. It was needless to dispute concerning the force of this word, 
 since it is fully explained by Arist., Rhet. ii. 2, 6 iirrtpedCccv <palyiTai Kara- 
 (Ppopuv IffTi yhp 6 (Tr-npcaa-nhs ifxiroSia-fxhs ra7s fiovX-^ffcffiv, ovx 'Iva ri avrtf, 
 oXXh ha fi^ iKdvep. It is therefore ' vexatious and contumelioics ojyposition for 
 the sake of opposition: It is opposed as an exact antithetical notion to Trph^ 
 X<^piv. Arist. Pol. iii. 16, 7. rd<povs—sc. of their ancestors buried 
 
 in Corc}Ta. 
 
 (c.) ovVev avTwv vTT-i]Kov(rav. ahruv, says Kriig., is neuter. Cf. rovro 
 inroKoveiv, i. 140. But this seems to me to prove nothing. I should render, 
 • obeyed th^m in no respect: ' listened to them not a whit: And so in Kriig.'s 
 own instance, ^pa tl n aov tu /xaWov inruKovoi ^Kpdrrjs, Plato, Loch. p. 
 ^°° c- aAA(£. ' No single word of Latin or English will express the 
 
 force of aAAa,' Bl. Other editors expunge it. Kriig. prints the whole clause 
 aX\h~avTo7s in brackets as a gloss. There is evidently some ellipse, such as, 
 'Then the Corcyreans (no longer hesitate), but proceed to war: nal 
 
 I 
 
46 
 
 NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. Bchap. 28.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 47 
 
 couples irpoffKaPSpres with furh rwv <f)vy6.da}u, Kriig. -wpoffKaO^CSfifvoi 
 
 — ' sitting down l)efore^ not exactly equivalent to iroXtopKoiI»'T€s, which denotes 
 active siege operations. Poppo remarks that the Corcyraeans did not commence 
 a regular siege until the Epidamnians had refused to listen to any proposals. 
 For the accusative after the participle, Pop. compares <r€fivav -npoai^ova" "Af/refiiv^ 
 Eur. Hec. 935. irpoc'itrov — gave notice, proclaiaud. It is hardly 
 
 necessary to speak o^ dUogia or zeugma here. XP1<^'*<''^«* — treat 
 
 as enemies. The MSS. have the aor., but most editors say the future xp'h<rf(T6aL 
 is required. The whole depends upon the question concerning the aor., dis- 
 cussed in Appendix i. i<rdfi6s — * an isth?HUs,' for IffdfiuiSfs x^P'Of, 
 and therefore more easily cut off by an avordx^a-fiSs. Cf. ch. 7 a. The whole 
 is parenthetical. 
 
 Chapter XXYII. — (a.) iyytKoi on — Messengers to sag that. A verhal 
 noun, with a verb's construction. i,ir oikIuv fK-f]pv(r<rov — * pro- 
 
 claimed, or gave notice of a colony to Epidamnus, that any one who liked might 
 go upon the priyiciple of equal rights' av. is the accusative after the verb, yet 
 ifvcu follows the verb also. For a similar double construction, Kriig. refers to 
 i. 50, 1. The article t^ I should explain as above, * upon the principle of In 
 the common formula, says Kriig., bfioia refers to quality, and Xffri to quantity, 
 the latter being the antithesis to the idea conveyed by trX^ovi^ia. There is 
 some doubt as to the persons among whom the equality was to subsist. It 
 would not be necessary to specify that the colonists should be equal among 
 themselves, for this would seem to follow as a matter of course. This is, 
 however, Arnold's view. It appears, too, that equality with those at home 
 was a generally admitted principle, cf. ch. 34, iKv4fiirovrat iirl ry 6fjLo7oi rots 
 XuTOfiivois that. As this, then, seems to have been a special case, equality with 
 the previous Epidamnian colonists is probably the thing meant. 4d(\oi 
 
 . . . . fiovXfrai. Remjirk the union of the two moods. The first supposes a 
 possible case, the second something following actually upon it. Should happen 
 not to he ready to start with the rest, and yet wishes to share in the colony, — i. e. 
 in the privileges just notified. The Corinthian drachma, like the JEginetan, 
 was worth ten Attic oboli, whereas the Attic drachma was six oboli ; therefore, 
 fifty Cor. drachmse would be worth more than eighty-three Attic drachmae. 
 Read Bockh, book i. ch. 4; Muller, Dor. iii. 10, 12. fifveiv Kriig. 
 
 makes to be dependent upon iK-r^pvaaov, gave notice that he might stop behind. 
 Those, however, who make the preceding Uycu an epexegetical infinitive, con- 
 eider this" as identical — i. e. expressing the result of the whole sentence. 
 KarafidWovrfs and Kara$dWfiu — paid doimi the money; not a mere 
 deposit, but equivalent to 4ktIvovt€s. Kriig. quotes ftKoai rd\avTa Kpivas tovs 
 KopivOlovs icaTa$a\fiy, Plut. Themist. 24. KopivQias. The Corinthian 
 
 drachma = ten Attic obols — i. e. nearly a shilling. 
 
 (b.) Hermann, P. A. G., § 34, observes that the relation of the Peloponnesian ' 
 States to Sparta was so little inconsistent with their political independence, 
 that many were at the same time heads of particular confederacies, as, for 
 nstance, Elis. Xen. Hell. iii. i, 23. Those who were asked for support were 
 either members of the Peloponnesian confederacy, or colonies of Corinth. 
 IlaA^s in Cephallenia. Miiller remarks, 'Herodotus, Lx. 28, does not afford 
 
 any reason for supposing that Pale was a Corinthian colony ; yet both here and 
 in Thuc. i. 27, it appears as closely united with Corinth,' vol. i. p. 130, note. 
 Arguments respecting the origin of colonies are frequently drawn from coins. 
 But these are sometimes fallacious, for, as Miiller says, • Barbarous towns fre- 
 quently adopted the devices of the neighbouring Greek cities.' 
 {u/iirpoTTc/x^/etj'. The use of the future after verbs indicating wish or purpose 
 is common enough, as may be seen from Matthise, § 506, and from Kriig.'s note, 
 vho compares vi. 57. 2, and many other passages. In such cases, the MSS. as 
 kpT)(rc£(r0ai last ch., often exhibit the aorist. The reason of this falls within the 
 general discussion of the nature of that tense, vide Appendix. ' The act spoken 
 of is essentially future here, inasmuch as it is contingent upon the acts of the 
 I other party,' Am. ; and see Jelf, § 405, 2. 
 
 (c.) KopivQiuiv. Proper names are often joined to ahrhs without an article, 
 [Kriig. Here it is ^ of the Corinthians themselves,' in contradistinction to allies. 
 In vi. 32, auTwi/ ^PiB-qvaiwv, which Kriig. renders ^ Athener ohne Beimischung 
 1 Anderer,' it is much the same. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII. — (a.) oZs Trap4\a$ov. T. K. A. (after Owen) remarks 
 I that probably the Corcyraeans began to be alarmed at the powerful confederacy 
 which was formed against them, and 'had recourse to the mediation of the 
 Lacedaemonians and Sycionians ; ' qy. Sicyonians. eiri avriiroi- 
 
 lovprat. Understand ttjs 'ETriSayui/ou, if they on their part make any claim 
 \toit. The directa oratio, and present tense, to impart liveliness to the narra- 
 tive. SIkus ^ovvai — as the Schol. explains it, €VtTpev|/ai diKaa-Trjp'up 
 Kttl Kftidrjvai, to submit the matter to the arbitration of a court. Kriig. cites i. 140, 
 JiKtts Twv Sia<l)op(ii)v a\\r}\ois Si56vai, and the correlative Koi S4xf(rdai. Let the 
 junior student notice the distinction between these and Kafifidveiv Sl/crji/. ' For 
 1 disputes between citizens of different states, there was an entirely free and equal 
 intercourse of justice. Commercium juris dandi repetendique,' Miiller, Dar. i. 
 p. 202, who also remarks in reference to this case, ' Nor were disputes between 
 individual states brought before the congress of the allies, which, on account of 
 the preponderance of Sparta, would have endangered their liberty, but they 
 were commonly referred to the Delphian oracle, or to arbitrators chosen by 
 both states, Thuc. i. 28 p v. 79;' ibid. Sparta itself was sometimes chosen 
 arLitrator, as between Elis and Lepreum. See v. 31. ' Although,' says Grote, 
 'the Korkyraeaus had been unwarrantably harsh in rejecting the first supplica- 
 tion from Epidamnus, yet in their propositions made at Corinth, right and 
 equity were on their side.' Grote, vol. i. p. 73. Kpantv. Some 
 have interpreted this, ' to possess the colony,' but Kpareu often stands inde- 
 pendently, as in Soph. Ajax, v. 765, ^ov\ov Kparuv fifv (vv de^ S' ael Kparuv; 
 cf. viKw, ch. 64 b, and this sense is more proper here, as the actual possession 
 of the colony was not the matter of dispute, but certain rights in connection 
 Kith it. So, too, I see, says Kriig., who renders ' obsiegtn,' which, however, he 
 explains by ' die Kolonie haben.' Yet, in the instance which he quotes, Kparuv 
 IS independent — viz. rf; <pv\r) Kparovari aWidiraTos rov ix^ viK^qaai Karfartj. Some 
 Buch word before the infin. as ^Xeyop is, he says, understood. Tr. but to which- 
 Y^ever 'party of tlie two it should be adjudged that the colony belonged, that these 
 yhould be victors, sc. in the arbitration. kr^povs. Allusion is of 
 
48 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ chap. 29.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 49 
 
 course made to an alliance with the Athenians, who were aliens from the great 
 Dorian race and confederation. ws oi/ ix^rov avrols 'Eiri^dfxvov-^ 
 
 inasmuch as they would have them to know, that they (the Corinthians) hai. 
 nothing to do with Epidamnus. This is in accordance with the well-known dis- 
 tinction made by Elmsley (Eurip. Hvrac. 693), and denied by Matthiae (§ 5681, 
 that, viz. the genitive absolute indicates a fact, the accus. absolute, some ones 
 impression about it, either acted upon tacitly, or expressed to others. 
 5£>cay 5oui/oi is of course equivalent, as the Scholiast explains, to 4irirpiifai 
 ZiKacfTT]pi(f Ka\ KpiBrjvai. See the Lexicons. tr 6 \€(tiv. Such, in 
 
 exercising the function of arbitrators, were called tKK\7]roi. ovk ('((ev. 
 
 The note of Schweighauser quoted by T. K. A., points out the well-kno^n foot 
 that this expression does not mean ' nan sivit' but rogavit, precatus est. It 
 indicates unwillingness on the part of the subject, but does not imply that this 
 feeling of unwillingness can be carried out by any exercise of his power. 
 Valekn. describes it as a milder way of saying ' vetavit.' To me it seems that 
 the peculiar meaning very much depends upon the peculiar force of the im- 
 perfect, Was not for letting, or allorving, for the real past tonses of the verb do 
 not appear to have this force, cf. ouSeVo tri (1a<re iraptKOiiv, ' did not afttr thh 
 permit any one else to come forward^ vi. 41. With the present idiom compare 
 i. 126 ; iii. 48 ; Soph. Vhil. v. 442. €t h\ /x'f} . Here, as elsewhere, 
 
 u 8e would more accord with our own idiom, for the fi^ does not negative the 
 preceding verb, but is to be taken as a general negation of what the former 
 clause implies or recommends. Translate, *for if otherunseJ So the Germans, 
 • vridrigen falls' Kriig., in his Grammar, says u Se fi^ has become a sort of 
 fixed formula, and where a negative notion goes before, is still used to introduce 
 the contrary supposition, though this is of course affirmative. In the present 
 passage, oifK tXouv is this preceding negation, negatived by et Se /utj. We may 
 add as a familiar example, Luke iv. 26. kripovs — the Athenians. 
 
 rStv viv ovTwv. The members of the Peloponnesian confederacy. fiaWov 
 is to be connected with iroiuaQai, 'rather to make for themselves.' So Krug, 
 But Poppo prefers kripov^ yiaWov, ' alios potius.' 
 
 (/».) a-irdywffi — "■ withtlraiv the forty ships' ch. zS. vpSrepov 
 
 ic.T.A. — * But before this were done, it was not fair that the others (sc. Epidam- 
 nians) shmtld he undergoing a siege, while themselves were going to law.' 
 avrods — 'the Corcyrceans and Corinthians.' Goll. understands it of the 
 Corinthians alone, and T. K. A. agrees with him, * for if the Corcyreans are in- 
 cluded, they are engaged on both sides.' In this case we should have expected 
 (r<l>as, and the objection is absurd, for the Corcj-reans 7nust have been included, 
 if the Corinthians were, else it would appear that the latter went to law \\'ith 
 themselves. fTo7ixoi Se dvai . . . airopd^s Se Troi-fia-afrdai. 
 
 At first sight it is obvious to expunge the second S4, which Pop. has accordingly 
 done, and rendered the whole 'paratos vero etiam sese esse hdc conditione fadw 
 facere tit stto utrique loco mancant.' Against this it may be urged, as Kriig. 
 has done, that no MSS. sanction the cancelling of 5e, and that the words might 
 imply the existence of other proposed conditions of peace, besides that here 
 mentioned. Kriig. accordingly makes both iToTfiot ihai and <ntovhas Se iroivcraffdai 
 dependent upon an HXtyoif, to be supplied from amfXeyop, and to this tKeyov vie 
 may attach the force of ^kcAcwov. [See note on Sheppard's Theophrastus, i» 
 
 voce.] * They professed to be ready to do so (sc. SiKdCfffBai) also upon the con- 
 \dition of both parties remxiining as they were [status quo ante], and that they 
 I woidd make a truce so long as the arbitration continued.' Arn., who would also 
 retain the 54, attempts to explain it, as though (roifioi chai &ar€ tiivuv='4roiixoi 
 (hai (xivuv : but there is reason in the objection [T. K A.] that although erotfioi, 
 like many similar words (especially t/caveJy), might well be followed by Sxrre, 
 jet the insertion of afxtporepovs as the subject of thai renders that impossible 
 here. In other words, 'droifids el/ju &(rre rovro iroiuv is correct : '4roifi6s flfii &<m 
 f>e Koi ff\ TovTo iroi€7v is not so. Peile thinks the difficulty may be removed 
 ' by construing eroTfioi fhai in the same sense as id4\€iv, and that they were 
 ready also in the terms that (i. e. to agree that) both parties shall remain as they 
 were, and make a truce ' — Sxrre in fact extending over the whole sentence, in 
 which 56 can by no means be spared.' For the usage of eroifxos I would com- 
 pare Soph. Antig. v. 264, ^/*€i' 5* %roiyLoi koX fivSpovs atpeiv x^po^" k.t.K 
 
 Chapter XXIX — (a.) irX-fipfis — 'fully manned.' Kriig. remarks that 
 irATjpfts, -KK-npovv, TXTiptafiara, were regular technical terms for the manning of 
 vessels either with marines or soldiers. 'irpojr4fi'^avTcs irpirepov. 
 
 This is usually explained as a pleonasm ; but needlessly, for irpoTr4(ivfiv is the 
 common word, technically employed for the solemn conduct of a procession, 
 envoys, &c. Kriig. says the irpo has a local not temporal force, and is found in 
 Ttpoiivai, irpo4pxf<TBai, meaning out, away (Germanice 'ent'). Cf. iii. 100, i ; 
 i. 29, 2; iv. 30, 3; 78, I ; III, I. Sto-xtAiois. We heard of 3000, 
 
 ch. 27. Probably no more could be got ready in time. The Scholiast's ex- 
 planation is, that through contempt of the Corcyrseans, 1000 were left behind. 
 Not a very likely thing. 
 
 (6.) ^iv^avTis . . . ^tricrK^vaffavres. Considerable doubt has been felt 
 as to what these two operations severally denote. The first, as applied to old 
 vessels, apparently not sea-worthy, must imply the most. Indeed the latter 
 probably refers merely to the smaller gear and tackling which every ship 
 required before ♦ coming out of dock,' as we should say ; iiria-Kevd^dv then would 
 correspond to * rigging and fitting out.' Cf. vii. 24. The C^v^atncs has been 
 supposed to indicate the operation of ' under girdi7ig' with ropes, for the purpose 
 of holding the timbers together. That this was often done we know from Acts 
 ixvii. 17, Hor. Od. i. 14, 6, inter alia. And Arnold says that the operation 
 was found effectual with the Kussian ships taken in the Tagus in 1808. It was 
 done, Bloomf. shows, by ropes from poop to prow, and not across the middle of 
 the ship. But in this case should we not have had v^o^^v^avrc^ ? It is much 
 more likely that reference is made to the binding and strengthening the old 
 ships by the introduction of fresh timbers, and the technical name for these 
 timbers seems to have been ^vydfxaTa. With this agrees the explanation quoted 
 by Pop. from Gregorius, Cor. ad Hermogenem, iii., rh (ev^avres ras va\aias vavs 
 ttiri Tou (vyufxara Kparivavres [Schol. Thuc. ^vydifmra avrous ivQevns] KiLrai. 
 fv^w/xaTtt 5e KoXovvrai rh ^vKa ra avh rov roixov rrjs vews irphs rhu frepop 
 SiaTfiVon-a to7xop — ^ Ciryaffxara rh ^v\a ra i|Jifia^.\6|X€va rah aawiffip, ware 
 •^wfeO^ai rhs capiSas ras Sipprjfiepas tcrrip Hrc. 
 
 (c.) 5i4<pdeipap. Kriig. explains fiirAous iiroirjffav. Hence the phrase means 
 'disabled,' put ' hors de combat,' i. 54, no, ii. 2, 84. dfio\oyi<f — 
 
 E 
 
 I 
 
50 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 3 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 51 
 
 • terms of capitulation.^ Qi. i. 98, ii. 107. irapaffr-fiffacrdai — meaning 
 
 ' to make a person come and stand beside you ' — naturally passes intx) the sense 
 of subdue, reduce. Pop. adds, ' Supple outV ne rovs post Epidamn. transponen- 
 dum existimes, quae est suspicio Kruegeri.' (Tr-i]\v^as — ' the new 
 
 comers,' called IfVoi in ch. 26. In the next chapter they are mentioned as ol 
 &\Xoi, who were murdered contrary to the terms of the capitulation. 
 Z-lja-avras ?x*'*' — having bound to keep, i.e. * to keep in bonds.' The idiom 
 is common enough ; the verb fX^iv denotes continuance down to the present 
 moment of the action denoted by the participle. See next ch. and ch. 38, 6. 
 traph iro\v. Mr. Kiddle has an excellent note explaining the usages of Tropd, 
 Jerminalia ii. irapa signifies juxtaposition, and with the accusative motion 
 terminating in juxtaposition. The ordinary meaning holds good here ; the dif- 
 ficulty must be thrown upon the subject joined to it brachylogically. ' They 
 conquered so as to attain to a great distance from their adversaries.' So vi. 37, 
 Tupa TOffovTov yiyvuxTKO), *1 go to the length of thinking — or so far from the sup- 
 position of my opponents as to think' vii. 71, trap' oXiyov ^ hUtp^vyov ^ wk()\- 
 KvvTO — • as far as a little from escaping — as far as a little from perishing.' viW. 
 76, v6\is . . . t} Trap' ixdxicrrov 8)j ^Adt rh 'Adrjvaiau Kpdros a^4\e(rdai, * a citij 
 which attained to a very little distance from taking away ;' and similarly iii. 39, 
 where see note on that disputed passage. 
 
 Chapter XXX. — {a.) A^vkI/xh'^. What the Italians call Cap. Bianco, 
 and the Greeks, retaining the old name, Lerkimo, or Alefkimo. The latter is, 
 however, according to Leake, eight miles to the northward, Poppo. It is 'a 
 low cape advancing into the Channel at Corfu.' alxjiaXunois is only to be under- 
 stood of those captured in the sea-fight. 
 
 (b.) iir' oIkov — 'homeward.' With the gen., i» tlie direction of oin. o\i]eti\ 
 with an accusat., quite up to an object. As the latter would be the motion put 
 into practice by an attacking enemy, iit\ with an accusative is generally said to 
 denote hostile intent. Instances are innumerable. See Appendix i. 
 TTjs yrjs iTfjjiov. Taxtitixe genitive, ' ravaged sor/ie of the land.' 
 
 (c.) rov xp^t'ov '»'^*' »A.€*o-Toi/. Five or six months. The battle oc- 
 curred in the spring of 01. 86. 2, b.c. 434; Kriig. ; others, B.C. 435. 
 fi^xpi' The final iota is not elided before a vowel in Thucyd. Cf. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 13. Trfpu6vri ry dfpfi. The reading of most MSS. is 
 
 irepiSvri rep Qfpu, which is usually rendered superante adhuc cBstatc. Arnold 
 objects that flc'pct ' is not used absolutely as if it were ddpovs, but expresses the 
 time at which the thing was done ; and trf pi6vri ry 6epfi cannot signify reliqud 
 (Bstatis parte, as Haack and Poppo translate it, for then it should be either t^ 
 'irtpi6trTt Tov depovs or Tip dtpfi rtp ir^pi6vri. This may be true ; but why may not 
 the words mean, summer still being left — i.e. some of it still remaining over— 
 like portion of a stock not yet consumed. Still Eeiske's conjecture, 'irtpu6ni, 
 confirmed as it is by one good MS., and supported by Xen. Hellen. iii. 2. § 25, 
 irepiUvri ry dviavrcf is preferable. But it must not be rendered, with the 
 Schol., when the summer came round — i. e. at the beginning of next summer. 
 The metaphor is taken from the act of describing a circle, which, as the 
 line comes round, is more and more nearly finished. Tr. as the summer vas 
 drawing in to a close, or, in the course of the summer. Pop. reads trepiSm, 
 
 but I cannot understand his proposed version, * testate quum itta (tota) reliqua 
 csset.' 
 
 (d.) x^^H-^^o^ ^^V — ' when it was Tww winter.' Thucyd. employs a two- 
 fold division of the year, x^^h^v and depos, the limits of which were somewhat 
 undefined. But the x«'At«^»' may be considered to have begun about the middle 
 of autumn or the fall of the leaf, and to have lasted until the weather in early 
 gpring was fit for military operations. See lib. ii. c. i, y4y pairrai 5e €|^s us 
 (Kourra iylyviTo Kara Oepos Koi xciAiw*"*. 
 
 Chapter XXXI. — (a.) rhv iviavr6v. As we interpret the preceding ch. 
 this year will be either b.c. 434 or 433, or, as Pop. says, from the summer of 
 434 to that of 433. opyv <l>4poi/T€s. This seems to me analogous 
 
 to x<^^'*>^ €<pfpov. The dative dpy^ is just such a dative as in the old language 
 passed into an adverb. (The junior student may be reminded that the adverbial 
 forms in -t? -€i -us -01 are dative terminations.) Tr. bearing angrily the war 
 against the Corcyreans — i. e. regarding it with wrathful and excited feelings. 
 The common xa^f^^s (pipav — * csgreferre,' would disincline me from believing 
 with Pop. that hpy^ (pepovrts can mean animose, magno animi ardore ct impetu, 
 (idministr antes. And it is more than doubtful that irSXefiov <f>4p€iv can stand 
 for helium gcrcre. Bloom, is quite right in saying that irpoBvixus (pepeiv rhv 
 irSXfixov, Herod, ix. 18, is quite another thing. There the meaning is, zealously 
 to endure the labours of the war; and so too, rhv trdXefjiov Bicvoovvro irpodvfiws 
 ohuv. Thuc. iv. 121. Compare for the sense assigned v. 80 b, rd re &\\a dvfAcp 
 f<p€pov. 
 
 (6.) Kol .... ^ffav yap k.t.X eSo^ev. This parenthesis is more 
 
 in the style of Herodotus than our author ; but Thucyd. repeats the same 
 formula, iii. 70, iii. 107. Neither in this case, says Kriig., nor in that of a\\^ 
 ydp, should we place a comma after the first word. evcnrovBoi would 
 
 naturally govern a dative, but signifying as it does * members of the same con- 
 federacy,' it becomes virtually a substantive, and is constructed like one. So 
 some verbs change their original character and construction, cf. note on ii. 69, 
 apyvpoXoy^ffi. €vpi<rK€(r6ai, N.B. mid. voice — 'procure for themselves,' 
 
 as i<rfypd(f>avro is 'got themselves enrolled,' cf. i. 33, 3. irp€<r^cv<r6fjL€voi. 
 
 Perhaps the force of the future is — * unth the intent of managing the matter by 
 an embassy.' Pop. (larger edition) conjectures Trpe(rPev6/j.€voi. But, says Kriig., 
 perhaps vpefffi^vfadai means the actual discharge of ambassadorial functions, as 
 ffTpaT€U€(r0at does with reference to those of a soldier, and iroXirevea-dai those of 
 a citizen. I suppose he means that the present would not be used unless to 
 describe ambassadors in discharge of some actual duty. Whereas here we have 
 merely the general mention of the office in which they appeared. dir* 
 
 auTwj/ evpl(TK€ordai. By contrasting this with ^k aur^s ne\o7roj/j/^crou at the 
 beginning of the chapter, it will be seen that in such cases airh denotes a much 
 less intimate relation with the object spoken of than is implied by 4k. For 
 a»i is simply ' coming away from a thing ' — iK properly * coming out of, and 
 being derived from it.' Hence the former is used where there is uncertainty, 
 the latter where there is none, as in a somewhat curious passage, Eurip. 
 Sipp. V. 759, 60. ^ ^ 
 
 ^ yap air' afjuporepwy^ fj 
 
 Kpriffias iK yas Svcopvis ^irraTO, 
 
 K2 
 
jH 
 
 52 
 
 NOTES ON THUOTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 which is translated — ' vel eoim ab utr&que parte, vel certe e CretA proficiscens.' 
 Cf. note i. 128. 
 
 Chapter XXXII. — (o.) Trpov^fiXoyt-fv-qs. It is perhaps hardly neces- 
 sary to consider that there is any zeugma in the construction of this participle, 
 though it has a slightly different application to the two nouns — when neither 
 benefit nor alliance is previously owing to them, i. e. when they have done nothing 
 upon which to found a claim for a return of favours, or for alliance. Cf. Herod. 
 V. 82, ri <^x^f"l ^ Tcpoo<puKoix4vyi h 'Adripaiovs. This example might perhaps 
 induce us to write the word without a crasis. But Kriig. shows that in Attic 
 Greek, the cases where crasis does not take place, are occasioned by the fact 
 that the simple verb begins with an aspirate, as in irpoopav, irpof^co. 
 fid\i<rTa fi^v and ft Si /u^ denote, as usual, the best and most desirable 
 course, and what is next best — should make it appear that they ask what is even 
 exj>edient, but failing this, that they ask at least what is not prejudicial. 
 avaSiSd^ai. The preposition conveys the notion 0/ ^oiw^ back. Hence in 
 such cases it seems to mean to explain from first prijiciples — i. e. fully and satis- 
 factorily. X^P*"' This of course may be rendered two ways — that 
 they (the speakers) wdl retain a lasting sense of the obligation. In favour of 
 this it may be said that ^ovaiv in this case retains the same subject as Siovrai. 
 Or again — that they (those addressed) will have the gratitude felt towards them 
 an everlasting possession. This seems to give a better and more usual sense tu 
 Be^aiov, cf. iii. 37 b, note. 
 
 (b.) ^x^pa irapf^fffdai — get these points clearly established for you — i.e. iy 
 our explanations. This is one of the cases where the Germans, by the use of 
 the auxiliary verb lassen, come nearer to an exact expression of the force of the 
 middle voice than we can do. t € t u x 1? « e f . t. A. Translate — ' now 
 
 it has came to pass that the self -same practice is both in respect of you (i. e. as it 
 must seem to you) 50 /err as regards our request inconsistent, and as concerns our 
 own interests at the present crisis inexpedient.' The awkwardness arises from 
 the apparent tautology of irphs vpias and 4s xp^lav. But there is a distinction 
 between the use of the prepositions, though a somewhat subtle one. They are 
 often found interchanged in MSS. A case occurs in Theophrastus [ch. ii. p. 
 64 ed. Sheppard] where I have quoted «'s ^vKias ut vphs ffvfxfxdxovs irropfvfro. 
 observing that here us seems to mean turning the eyes in the direction ofth 
 object, while -Kphs gives a notion of some dependence placed upon, or aid expectid 
 from it. In general terms we may say that us denotes the more vague and 
 abstract relation, irpbs the more positive and practical connection. I find that 
 Peile's notion coincides with this. He translates rphs vfias, ' apud vos' ^j 
 Xpe^av, qvod attinet ad. He says is t^v itdKiv — ' urbem versus ' expresses motion 
 in the direction of, or towards the city, though the moving body may not 
 actually enter it. But "Kphs r^v ir6\iv, ad urbe^n, can only mean motion con- 
 tinued up to the city. He also calls attention to St. John i. i. It is, I think, 
 clear, that irphs rbv e^hv denotes a much more intimate relation than 4s rhv 
 e«oV. . . . Cf . ch. 102, ^vfifiaxio-v TTpbs ainovs. See Soph. Ajax, v. 1018, irpos 
 ouSfv 4s ipiv dv/xovfifvos. 
 
 (c.) Tripi,4<m\Kfv <f>aivofi4v7i — * has come round to approve itself' or 
 ' turned out evidently to be.' This seems antithetical to tctuxt^kc ^L^vfupopov {6v), 
 
 Chap. 33.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 53 
 
 and this may cause the construction with a participle of which Rriig. says 
 he knows no other instance except the imitation in Dionysius Arch. vi. 43. 
 if'pUffrrjKfv 7) SoKovffa rffiwv irp6voia iSia irp^s eKdrepov fi4pos OTrex^c^cti' ^epo/ntVij. 
 But see note on tvx^vtwv, ch. 120. (raxppoffvvn denotes 'quietude,' 
 
 a retiring and modest spirit, as distinct from a foi^ard and presuming one. It 
 is, says Kriig., aTrpayfxoffvvri as distinct from iroXinrpaynoavvri. 
 
 {d.) Karh fiovas. This is one of the formulae where Kriig. thinks fiolpas 
 was originally supplied by the mind. fx^yas 6 kIvSwos. Probably 
 
 this is the danger to Athens herself, which they proceed to enlarge upon by way 
 of argument, ch. 33. and 36. vav/xaxiav. Kriig. says, ' as if viKciif 
 
 followed,* and quotes rather a singular parallelism from Plato, Ap. 39, ri^wplav 
 vfuv ^iiv iio\v xaA.€7ra»T€po»' fj o'iav 4iJ.k airexTtJi/are. fiij fiera KUKias, 
 
 8J|tjj 5€ fiaWov afxapricf. It is quite plain that to take these words in 
 the common grammatical way with roAfiufi^v, makes nonsense. They have 
 therefore very generally been connected with airpay/jioavvri only — * a quietude not 
 associated with anything vicious, but rather originating in an error of judgment.' 
 This I always thought was to put a great strain upon the collocation. Surely 
 Thucyd. would have made some combination with the article, e.g. r^ fi^ /ncra 
 Kcutlas oKpayfiofflfyri K.r.\. I have therefore ever translated the words as gene- 
 rally modifying the whole statement — * And there is excuse for iis, if in a case 
 where there was no ill intention, but where we were rather influenced by an error 
 of policy, we now venture to act in direct contradiction to our former quietude,' 
 or, we may say, ' without any sinister intention now, but owing to a previous 
 error of judgment,' as however it was not their present, but their previous con- 
 duct which was regarded with so much suspicion, I prefer the former. This, 
 which was certainly quite an independent view, is confirmed by Kriig., who has 
 —'if we, not from malice, but rather from a defective judgment ;' adding that the 
 defective judgment is not connected with the present application for aid, but 
 with their previous isolation. Poppo's interpretation is slightly different. It is 
 reasonable for u^ to contradict our for^ner practice, if we do it, not for any sinister 
 object, but because we have been deceived in our expectations', making Bd^rjs afiaprla 
 equivalent to on d6^i)s rjudprofiey. 
 
 Chapter XXXIII. — (a.) t} ^wrvxia. rijj ^/tcr^pay xP«^a^- ^Thecon- 
 juncture of our request,' sc.^ with the existing circumstances. For luvrux^a 
 Kriig. refers to iii. 82, 2, 112, 5; v. 11, 3; vi. 54, i. KaTae-fia-ea-ee. 
 
 The old reading Karderjadt is, as Arn. says, barbarous. There can be but little 
 doubt that this trifling correction ought to be accepted, first because voiiifftffQf 
 has gone before, and secondly because ws hv catching the transcriber's eye might 
 60 readily have made him hesitate about writing the future indicative. We 
 must undei'stand the verb again with ws &v, so that the whole will be KaroBii- 
 ofade US htf fi6.\iara KaraduaQ^ — * Ye will store up as much as you possibly can 
 store up.' 
 
 {b.) Ti'j fv-rpa^la (T'iravia>r4pa, €t. The absence of the conjunction ff 
 is variously accounted for. Pop. refers to Matthise, § 450, and Hermann ad 
 turip. Ale. V. 890, ri ybi.p avhpX Kcuchv fiei^ov, afiapruv vKrrrjs aK6xov ; where the 
 infinitive is as a genitive, sine articulo. The genitive of the pronoun is gene- 
 rally expressed as in Agam. v. 63, ri yap ywaiKl tovtov <p4yyos ^Siov Spcucuy, 
 
54 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book L I C^ap. 35*1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 55 
 
 HvSpa vvXas avol^ai ; The present seems to me a somewhat similar case, touttis 
 being implied. What could be mare rare good fortune than if, ^c, is of course 
 the regular way of speaking. But expressing ourselves less accurately we 
 might say, What 'piece of good fortune could he more rare ! if the very 'pov.'er 
 Resented itself #c., or, inverting the expression, ' If the very power which m 
 wanted Resented itself voluntarily, what piece of good fortune could he mon 
 rare V is robs troWovs apfrii v — ' hringing with it in the eyes o/ 
 
 the world (apud populum) the rejmtatUm for courage.' Such is the force of aperi 
 Cf. with Arn. ii. 45, and with Kriig. iii. 58, Soph. Phil. v. 1420, and kokIo, 
 lii. 61. I. <t>4peiv 4s is, as Pop. remarks, properly perferre ad, but Tacitus has 
 ' Fama in posteros.' But is not this renown reaching to posterity ? irpi 
 
 voWatu xp^jLtttTwi'. Cf. Herod, i. 86, rhv tu 4yco irciffi rvpdvvoKTi irpoerinriffa 
 IxeydKuv xpWtwv 4s \6yon5 4\duv. 6\iyois 8^. Whether Stj be 
 
 an intensified form of St, or an abbreviated form of iJSrj, cf. ch. i b," we arrive 
 at much the same meaning. In the first place, it indicates that the mind 
 pauses and dwells upon some point of contrast with what has gone before : in 
 the latter, it indicates that the mind has at last reached a point upon which 
 it may pause and dwell. It therefore gives emphasis and intensity to any 
 word with which it is combined. voKXol S-f), 'full many:' o\iyois 5^, hut fev 
 indeed I irapayiyvovra i — ' present themselves before the persons to 
 
 whom they apply' 
 
 (c.) 5t' '6vir€p. Here 5ta with an accusative as occasionally, through tk 
 influence or agency of which. yv(i>yit)s Ojuaprai/e i — ' he misses, em 
 
 in his Judgment.' * A metaphor from archery,' Bloomf. and T. K. A. But if 
 this be true, yv(afxt]s is surely the object aimed at, not the instrument for reach- 
 ing it; the target, not the arrow, and, therefore, 'judgment' should not be 
 spoken of as the instrumeiit in operation. It is rather 'he fails to hit upon a 
 right judgment: On this use of yvuyLi), as ' a right opinion,' cf. Soph. Ajax, v. 
 jS-^, rovroav yvwfias irpo^ihaffKuv. <p6$tf> r^ v/jLertptf). The posses- 
 
 sive pronoun for the gen. of the x)ersonal, and here the objective genitive— 
 \fear of which you are the object,' so a little below 4s r^v vnfr4pav ^txefprjo-ii'. 
 iroAeftTj(T€io»'Ta5 — 'on the "qui vive" for war.' Let the junior stud, notice 
 these verbs desiderative, formed from the first fut. act., by changing -w into'-€'«- 
 Cf. airaWd^fuv, i. 95. 4; iii. 84. i ; -napaSaxruev, iv. 82. 2 ; ^vnfidffutv, viii. 56. 
 3 ; vavtM)Ji<T€iev, viii. 79. 3, Pop. They correspond to the Lat. verbs in -urio, 
 formed from a supine. irpoK<iTa\a^$dvovr as. This seems to me 
 
 a military metaphor, seizing upon us as an advaiiced post from which to prose- 
 cute their attack against you. Such, at least, is the force of the word, Xen. 
 Anah. i. 10. 6, and ch. 57 c. Ivolv (pdda-ai. afidpruaiv — Tnaynot 
 
 fail in both points at once, or, that they may make sure of securing one or other 
 of two things, either to damage us, or strengthen themselves. There is some awk- 
 wardness owing to the condensed form of the expression. Hermann {de Ellips. 
 p. 142), has expanded it, V} rod (^ddcrat, vfxas Kcucuxrai, ^ rod (r<pas avrovs fiefiaiu- 
 aaffdai. He compares Soph. Elect. 1320, ovk h.v Suoli/ ^ixaprov k. t. A. Poppo's 
 remark is ' dvo7v pendet ex andpruffiv, et <pdd(Tai propositum est, quia ad utrum- 
 que incisum, fj Kcucwcrai ^ $€$aia)aaa9ai pertinet, atque adjunctum habet intini- 
 tivum ut iii. 82. Cf. Matt. § 553,' i.e., not miss both points, viz., to secure before- 
 hand the damaging, ^c. Kriig. takes it as we have done, afxdpTw<Tiv (pddaai ivoiv. 
 
 Similarly in rpiuv r&v fxeyiffruv ^viKpopwv, aivvecrlas TJ fiaKanlas ^ afifXeias, i. 122, 
 the use of the disjunctive conjunction proves that rpwu must also be taken dis- 
 junctively, ' one of these three misfortunes.' There is a similar passage, Dem. 
 de Cor. § 166, X"pis ^c tovtwv ZvoIv xpV<rifJ^oiv oh Ziaiiapri]<Tea6ai. Shilleto, ad 
 locum, rightly observes that it was a mistake of the earlier commentators to 
 propose the insertion of kvhs or Baripov, and adds, in an affirmative sentence we 
 must say, 'to fail in one of two things,' but in a negative, not to fail in both 
 things obviously implies to succeed in one or the other. 
 
 Chapter XXXIV.— (a.) tiaBiraxrav. 'This form appears to have been 
 archaic, for it is often found in laws, as Demos. 21. 8. 94, and ^sch. 1. 12, 35. 
 It was not, however, rejected by the Attics, as may be seen from KoKaoe-hruaav, 
 Thuc. iii. 39, irapaXafifiaveTwcrav, Xen. Cyr. vii. 2, 14, Kpiviadwaav, Hell. 1. 9, 23, 
 and many others. It was avoided by the Tragoedians,' Kriig. 4KV€fi- 
 
 irovTai. The nominative is, of course, HiroiKoi, contained in airoiKta. 
 
 [h.) v p o KXTjd 4 vres— 'challenged to decide the matter by law.' See ch. 28. 
 p.iTiKQi'iv— to follow up— go through with— prosecute, ci. rifxwpiais fxeriovres 
 rovs aSiKodvras, iv. 62. Kriig. quotes also nixcopia /x6T€\e«i/ rovrovs, ^schin. 
 i. 12^ 35. irapdyeaBai—led aside from the right path by trickery. 
 
 iK rod evB4os. These words seem to be opposed to airdrri, so as to signify 
 'whether they cloke their object under any false pretence, or whether they prefer 
 their request directly.' So Arnold, after Heilman and Goller ; and Kriig. seems 
 to coincide. But I cannot help thinking that this is negatived by the existence 
 of T6 after Zioyi4vois, which surely could not be employed to introduce, as they 
 say, an idea antithetical to aitdrri ; for, according to every view of t€, it intro- 
 duces not what is antithetical, but what is epexegetical to that which goes 
 before. I understand it to mean— a/^^ not forthwith at once {i.e. without reflec- 
 tion) render assistance to them for the asking. Here the last clause S€o,m4voi5 re 
 K.T.X. is epexegetical, as it more fully sets forth the nature and result of the 
 airdrr, mentioned in the first. Had the antithesis, for which Poppo and others 
 contend, existed in the words, surely we should have had 5e, and not re. See 
 the notes, ch. 4 a ; 25 c ; iii. 51 d. fih iirovpy^tv are, says Bl., to 
 
 he taken as a single term, expressing a single idea, as ov <pvfii, and therefore oif 
 is not required, as Poppo would insist. Por this sense of 4k rov ey^ws see Herod, 
 ii. 161 (quoted in Bl. note) air4(rr'naav 4k tt?s iBdris, and iii. 127 ; ix. 37. 
 
 Chapter XXXV.— (a.) rots AoK68ai^o»/i«i/ crirov^ds—i.e. the thirty 
 years' truce (cf. i. 1 1 5). Remark the objective genitive. * Muller {Dorians,^ i. 
 p. 214) says that the defensive treaty with Corcyra engaged in a war with its 
 mother country was, according to ancient Greek principles, wholly unlawful and 
 unjust.' T. K. A. Miiller says so of the war itself, not of a treaty with those 
 engaged in it, which is not precisely the same thing. His idea of the meaning 
 of the article referred to is, that, * states not included in the alliance may join 
 whichever side they please, by which means they come within the treaty, and 
 the alliance guarantees their safety. But if a state already at war with another 
 state, party to the treaty {^vffirov^os) is assisted, a war of this description is like 
 one undertaken by the confederacy of the assisting state.' irpoKei- 
 
 ftivjj 5— proffered, lit. put before you for your acceptance. Portus tr. prasenti. 
 
56 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book I, I Chap. 36.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 57 
 
 fiprirai yhp iv a"iFovia7s. ' For it has been laid down in the treaty, whatso- 
 ever Grecian state is not in alliance anywhere may betake itself to either of the 
 two leading parties it chooses.* The language is somewhat elliptical. Pop. ex- 
 pands it thus, i^f^vcu iKduv Trap iK^lvovs, irap drorfpovs hv iKduu. tuv 
 irdAewv ^rts /iTjSa/iou {u/a/uox«* — ap€(r>CT7Tai. The verb ipiffKfaeai is 
 followed dative rei, e.ff. i. 129, 3 ; ii. 68, 2, and occurs absolutely Jti rh m)i 
 ap€<TK€aeai, x. 44 ; but does not take an infinitive after it. For (riropia7s sine 
 
 articulo, see ch. 8 a. 
 
 (b.) etpiovff I—' exclude,' according to Lobeck's rule. (AJax, 753), €^7*, 
 includo ; flpyu, excludo. T. K. A. has a profound remark. The pupil, as an 
 artificial help, may observe that when it signifies to exclude, the breathing is 
 turned out, but turned in when it signifies to include. elro. This is 
 
 it stands is either a very singular asyndeton, equal to * quid enim,' what then ? 
 shall they, ^c, which, as Engelman says, is very suitable for the expression of 
 indignation, or it is an error for KSra, or we must, with Krug., read elf re. In 
 this case the re couples the clause to the previous il. ''Tis hard i7ideed. if these 
 shall be permitted, 4'C., and if they shall regard it in the light of a wrong; Sfc. 
 ridtadal ri h rivi—' to place a thing in the category of another.* 
 
 (c.) oux3irwsicewAuTo(. It is generally considered a sufficient account of 
 this idiom to say that it resembles the Latin ' non modo,' for * non modo non.' 
 But this explanation of ' non modo ' has been shown by Mr. Long and others to 
 be incorrect. See Long on Casar. Bell. Gall. ii. 17, * quo non modo intrari, sel 
 ne perspici quidem posset.' The confusion, he says, arises from translating 
 • non modo,' ' not only," whereas it means ' not so much as,' and he renders the 
 words — ' into which there was not so much as a possibility of entering, nay mi 
 even of seeing through them.' The best way of rendering the idiom seems to me 
 to be—' not to speak of the first case.' And similar is the force of ovx Sirojs ir 
 Greek : 8ir«s is properly * how,' i. e. it is vus in its dependent form, the form 
 which TTws takes when it depends upon some verb, expressed or understood, and 
 therefore ovx 8ir«s is * I say not how,' ^c, and we must translate such phrases 
 as the present accordingly. ' To say nothing of hindering them, you will even 
 permit,' %c., ovx S^ws i^\rf^v, oAA* oWe Irpeo-cv— * to say nothing of running 
 away, he was not even frightened ;' and similarly without a negative in the 
 second clause — ovx ^"^^^ "^^^^ iroMixiovs irpi^amo 01 "EWrjves, aWa Kcd tV 
 X<i>pav iKdKwffav, ' To say nothing of routing the enemy, they also ravaged their 
 territory.' See note on the same idiom, iii. 42. irpoa\ap€7v ^^€pi6^(^ 
 
 ^real. Kriig. rightly calls attention to the distinction between the infinitive 
 and participle with these verbs, cf. ii. 18. 3, irepiiBuv air^v rfn}6€7aav. The first 
 states the case as a conception, the second as a fact. KwXvetv rovs 
 
 fii(Teo<p6povs. The conjecture fjii<reo<f>oplas is quite unnecessary, ' to put a stop 
 to the Tnercenaries,' means, of course, * to put a stop to levying them! Kriig. 
 quotes — oiKo<pd6pov yhp i.vhpa Kotkvfi yvvi]. Eurip. Stob. 67, 8. fo^ 
 
 5ti h.v Trtiffdrirf. 'Poterant enim modice, poterant clanculum, non aperte 
 nee magnis viribus Corcyraeis opitulari.' Haack. Perhaps the words are meant 
 to suggest the practicability of some clandestine aid. fiaav. It is not 
 
 easy to see how Popp. can suppose the imp. capable of meaning, ' were and stiU 
 continue to be.' Some consider that ^cav is inexplicable, and conjecture ilo^v. 
 GoU. rather strangely understands it as a sort of short caustic sneer, 'erant? 
 
 nonne etiamnum sunt?' a very characteristic version. Kriig., after Kampf, 
 gays the speaker refers to i. 33, and renders — ^are as we have seen' — as we have 
 said, or, perhaps, * were on the hypothesis of our argument.' Or might the im- 
 perfect here resemble the Eng. * were,' for would be, tr. ' in which case our enemies 
 were the same,' cf. infra, c. 37 c, ^^fjv avrols for i^riv hv avrols. Cf. the Lat. 
 ^dt — ' Tempus erat dapibus sodales.* ttIo-tis — here * the means of 
 
 producing or assuring good faith,' as in Arist. (Ehet.) it is ' the 'ineans of prO' 
 ducing conviction.' rovs fifTaarrdvras. The Corcyraeans them- 
 
 selves, as Popp. says. But this does not much help the argument, for damage 
 done to them need not affect the Athenians : besides, in this case we should 
 have anticipated some word denoting to punish, rather than fi\(i\pcu. I suspect 
 an error. Engelman explains the argument thus. The capacity of the Spartans 
 to punish us for joining you, is the surest guarantee for our remaining faithful to 
 vour alliance : for if we fall off we are at once at their mercy. This is ingenious 
 and may be correct. Kriig. I see has conjectured ras ixera(Tri\aavTas — i. e. 'you 
 if you reject us.' Ka\ vavriKrjs K.r.\. Notice the collocation of the 
 
 article, equivalent to v ^vfifiaxio-, ^ SiSoraj, vavriK^ odcra — Bi5oiJ.4vr] poutik^ is, of 
 course, ' being proffered in the shape of a naval one! iav . . . Ix***'« 
 
 These infinitives are governed by 5ioup4p€i understood, Haack ; by ivfupipu, con- 
 tained in ovx dfiola rf aWorpluffis, which is equivalent to oifx ^fJ-olus lvix<p4p€i. 
 Am. ; by Kpdriardv iari, latent in fidXia-ra fi4v. Kriig. Burgess supposes Set 
 has fallen out before €i. 
 
 Chapter XXXVL — {a.)yv^r<a rh fi€v SeSibs avrov. Most annotators 
 explain this passage, but there is no real difficulty. * Let him understand that 
 this cautious fear of his, if backed by such strength as would accrue from our 
 alliance, is more likely to alarm the enemy ; while his confidence in his security 
 as a faithful observer of the treaty, if he refuse to accept our alliance, being 
 powerless against his enemies in force is less likely to inspire them with alarm.' 
 rh ScSitJy is exactly equivalent to our participial substantive, and is therefore 
 well rendered by A., ' his being afraid.' Cf. rh opyi^dfiepov, ii. 59. 2 ; rh dvfxov- 
 fievov, vii. 68. i. The gist of the passage lies in the fact that (pofirjo-op is made 
 the predicate of rh 5c5t(Js, a piece of false taste into whicli the fondness of Thuc. 
 for antithesis betrayed him. It would have been more worthy of the Sophists, 
 as Krug. seems to suggest. This passage has been judiciously selected by Dr. 
 Donaldson to exhibit the difference between the use of the participle as an 
 ovoixa and as a ^^/ua. * ^vfupfpopra, irtiddfiepos, fx^"' (po^rjaop, Sela/neVov, oVf 
 ItTx^otnas, and iad^iipop, are all predicates, the two futures being equivalent to 
 infinitive moods of the same tense, while rh 5€5ti>s and rh Bapaovp are subjects, 
 or equivalent to noun substantives.' Though Dr. Donaldson's nomenclature, 
 so far as regards the terms in which he expresses predication, is open to some 
 question, few things will better repay the labour of the younger student than 
 a careful perusal of New Cratylus, § 300-306. See note, ch. 49 d. 
 oScc'o-Tfpov. The active meaning of this, too, Kriig. ascribes to its antithetical 
 position. I certainly remember no similar instance, except that which he quotes, 
 a8€€s Z4os Sf^Upai, Plato, Symp. 198 a. 
 
 {b.) ^ovKfvoficpos. We must of course supply 7i'c6tw. Zffop ov 
 
 rap6p7 a—' all but present.' So in Latin, ' tanium non.' Kriig. quotes ii. 94. i , 
 
 t 
 
58 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 37.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 s<i 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 iv. 69. 3, V. 59. 5, riii. 26. i. fi^ra nfyiffrwv KaipS)V—*is made a 
 
 friend of, or an enemy in conjunction with the greatest opjportimitles' — i.e. the 
 greatest opportunities for good or evil are involved in your decision to accept or 
 reject us. 
 
 (c.) rris *lra\las . . . vapdirXov Kilrai. The first is the ohjective 
 genitive, depending upon iropairAou. With respect to trapd-rrKov itself, cf. Shep- 
 pard's Theaphrastus, ch, iii. note on dedrpov. • Analysis shows that the genitive 
 expresses the antecedent notion from which any other notion may be conceived 
 to flow ; that this antecedent notion may have reference, as to several other 
 things, so to locality or position ; that adverbs and adjectives conveying such a 
 notion take a genitive of that from which the notion arises — in reference to 
 which, that is to say, they do denote position or locality.' The note proceeds to 
 examine Thue. iii. 92 (which see), i. 26 ; Herod, vi. 116 ; (Edip. Tyr. v. 345; 
 Heraclid(B v. 214, &c. Cf. note on hpxns htucflffdai, i. 75. But see also Donald- 
 son, 453 (bb). N.B. We have the compound, not the simple ir\ovs, as the Greeks 
 seldom ventured upon anything but coasting voyages. rh ivd4vde,hc. 
 
 vavriK6v — 'to convoy our marine in this pari of the world to those regions;' as 
 Trapavffnrnv, ' to convoy,' is said of one who assists another in reaching his desti- 
 nation, so here it is metaphorically applied to a port which materially assists 
 vessels in the prosecution of their voyage. $paxvrdr(f). Kriig. translates, 
 
 *By the following very brief summary which embraces the whole and every particv.lar, 
 you may learn not to give us up to our enemy ; ' and this seems to give the force 
 of the collocation. tqIs ^vfinuffi. /c. t. A. is in apposition to 0paxvrdr(f. 
 
 {d.) rpia fikv 6vTa. ' Repete mente tiu ^ddoire s. ixddeTf,' Pop., who sub- 
 joins, ' sed ne participium obstet non discendi verum reputandi notione.' Yet 
 even then there is something extremely unnatural in the language. I have re- 
 garded it as an instance of the nominativus pendens—' there being but thm 
 navies,' then place no full stop (as Pop.) at Kopiveiav; and read tovtwv U—ifl 
 say of these, &c. Kriig. supposes that the construction becomes ' anakoluthisch' 
 from bringing the yikv and 5^ into stronger contrast — or would read Kopiffli'wp 
 oS TwvSe €t ... TO 5uo : as in fractions, we have the article, for any given part 
 becomes definite. irXeloo-t vavtrX rals Ttfitrtpais — ' with your fleet 
 
 more by ours' — i.e. 'increased in number by the amount of vessels which we 
 bring.' I suppose Kriig. prefers this, for he explains it in his note as the dif- 
 ferential dative like ir6\\tf and oKiycp, and quotes rois roiovrois KaKoT? ir\(ite 
 Kafytrovrai, Plat. Rep. 579 c. In his text, however (first edition), he printed 
 {,fjL€T4pais, which I cannot help thinking the true reading—' with your nai% 
 which will the7i be nuyre nurnerous thaih theirs ; ' or reading Tifjuripais — ' with our 
 united navy, which,' &c. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII— (a.) Iva iia<pa\((Trepov irpoci^TJr*—* that you may 
 be 7Hore certainly acquainted beforehand,' Arn. ; rather, ' more securely' for afft^a- 
 \4<TTfpov refers to security against making a slip, or being tripped up, and 
 a(T<f>a\ciav, St. Luc. i. 4, has a cognate sense. h^laxriv, — XP^^°'^- 
 
 the first, the idea of the right, or worthiness of those who ask to receive their 
 request, is prominent. Hence it nearly is ' claim.' In the second, the promi- 
 nent notion is necessity, it is accordingly ' want.' M-h aXoyiff'To'^ 
 ii7rdcari)<rd€ — ' not reject them without having a reason to give for it.' I cannot 
 
 accept T. K. A.'s note, '/i^j aKoyitnus are to be taken together = non inconsulte,* 
 
 cf. ch. 21 a. 
 
 (6.) (paai 5e. Kriig. reads 5^, I suppose because what follows is not a 
 statement in any way contrasted with the preceding. Sc^acrOat 
 
 *as a preterite,' T. K. A. But I do not suppose Thuc. would have used the 
 same word in a future and prseterite sense within a few lines. Both have the 
 game genuine aorist sense, and refer to the general principle of receiving alliance 
 at all.° See Appendix. ^ ir 1 k a k u p 7 f 91— ' for knavery! ' mal-prac- 
 
 ivces: Cf. i. 102. iirX denoting the object, i.e. motive of an action, need not 
 have called for much elucidation. { tJ/u/* ax ov— because the fewer to 
 
 share, the more booty to divide. ou5e fidprvpa. 'Lege oUrf; 
 
 Dobree. * This is, I think, a true correction, and greatly improves the sense of 
 the passage,' Arn. I must venture to differ. Am. did not see that ouSe is, 'and 
 so not, and consequently not a witness either.' This at least is, I think, the mean- 
 ing, though the editors appear to overlook it. oUre irapaKa\ovvT€S 
 aiffx^viffdai — 7iot to be put to the blush by having to call others in — i.e. such 
 as would become witnesses of their knavery. It would be scarce worth while to 
 notice this, had not some (Pop.) supposed that Thuc. meant, ' to have to blush 
 for the rejection of their application ; ' to which Owen and T. K. A. seem to in- 
 cline. avrdpK-n e^ffiv K€ifi4v t)—' their city, lying in an independent 
 {i. c. requiring nothing from others) position, gives them the opportunity of being 
 rather judges in their own case of the damage th£y may have done to any one, 
 than that judges shoidd be (as elsewhere) apj^oifited by mutml agreeimnt.' Or 
 we may make it irapix^i avTovs yiyvtaeai biKaards, fiaWov ^ Kara ^vpd-hKas av 
 iyhovTO, instead of having SiKUffras understood as the subject of yiyveadaL. In 
 this case, Kara ^vvdiiKas will mean, judges, more than could have been the case 
 had they joined a league, according to the terms of such league. I had always in- 
 clined to this interpretation, and now see that Kriig. approves of it. Another 
 is adopted by Kampf, which was indeed given by Goll. in his first ed., i. e. Kara 
 |w0T)/cas yiyveadai are taken in close connexion, Tnakes them rather judges, Sfc 
 than makes them enter into the confederation. ^la rh K.r.X. — Because, 
 with less going forth than all other men, they more than all others receive the rest 
 of the world into their harbour, putting in of necessity (or when compelled to put 
 in) from stress of weather. The force of the various participles (sine articulo) 
 is here very delicate, and may easily be wrongly given. 
 
 (c.) K&i/ TouT(^ K.T. A. Several MSS. read /col toOto, which also makes 
 gootl sense. But perhaps the other reading comes to the same thing— aw<^ 
 herein have they put forward their specious abstinence— i.e. and herein conmsts 
 their specious abstinetice from alliance which thiy put forward as their defence, 
 not namely (i. e. it is this) that they may not be cmnpelled to join others in injus- 
 tice, but that they may commit injustice all by themselves, and that wherein they 
 get the mastery they may openly employ violence, and where they escape detection 
 they may secretly take advantage, and in the event of appropriating anything may 
 not be put to the blush, sc. as there would be no allies to witness the fact, cf. 
 supra. I have used the words ' openly ' and ' secretly,' because I believe the 
 form of the expression implies them, rh tvirpeirhs UtrirovSou is like rh avdpwirfhv 
 KonTTwSts, V. 68, and rh ^uKr?0es V^XO", vi. 34. Pop. ovx tVo k.t.A. the form 
 of expression is compressed, and this clause is to be taken in close connexion 
 
6o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 39.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 61 
 
 "with Affiroudov as its explanation — iv ^, and oZ exactly answer to each other, 
 and are another illustration of the fact Ihat where the Greeks can alter the form 
 of the second expression, they will, cf. ch. 16 a. a\r}irr6T€poi-~ 
 
 • ^^55 within the power of others,' A. But qy. * grasp* ^{^ »'— cf. supra, 
 
 c. 35 a. 
 
 Chapter XXXVIII. — {a.) a<p«ffra.ai — ^have stood aloof from all tfmnexion 
 with tis,' scarcely • have revolted,' as D. See i. 25. 5ii ir avr 6 s— 
 
 ^fro7n first to last.' Krug. has, ' not in this case only' which seems the real 
 meaning. iKirifiipdeirjaav. Kriig. remarks that this and similar 
 
 forms occur frequently in Xenophon, sometimes in the orators, never in the 
 dramatists. davnd(€(Tdai — here, like the Latin 'mirari,* ' to be treated 
 
 with respect.* On this and similar uses of the word, see note, Sheppard's 
 Theophrasttts, p. 72. * Amid the various colonies planted from Corinth along 
 the coast of Epirus, the greater number acknowledged on her part an hegemony 
 or supremacy. What extent of real power and interference this acknowledg- 
 ment implied, in addition to the honorary dignity, we are not in a condition to 
 say.' Grote, vol. vi. p. 67. 
 
 (6.) ou8* iiTiffrpartvofitv ^KirptirSts k.t.K On this much has been 
 written, more especially as there is abundant MSS. authority for iiriffrparevoi^fv 
 and wirpeKws. If the words stand, I apprehend their meaning is, «-or is it un- 
 becoming in tis to attack them (as otherwise it would have been), seeing that it 
 is in no ordinary sort of wag that we are being wronged. If our attacking them 
 is extraordinary, it is because our provocation has been extraordinary too. But 
 Thuc. has said this somewhat awkwardly. We do not assail them unbecomin^li/ 
 {i. e. unbecoming, as we admit it under ordinary circumstances to be) without 
 also being in the act of suffering extraordinary wrong from them. Under ordi- 
 nary circumstances, of course, a mother city fosters and protects its colony. 
 Peile, who prefers the opt. i-riarparfvoifieu, does not differ much in the general 
 sense. * The opt.,' he says, 'naturally follows ovk opdm oir., and, like it, follows 
 BijXov 5ri, and that we should not now be invading them, a thing that ought nd 
 to be, were we not also, ^c' Arnold's version, ^without having received, ^c.,' 
 would require ri^iicntifvoi. Pop. simply has iKirpfirws ut plerumque valet ' in- 
 signiter' Kriig. more acctirately, * nicht auf so ausserordentliche Weise' We 
 attack them not in so extraordinary a way without, ^r., explaining ' extra- 
 ordinary' in so far as it was a war carried on by a mother against a colony. 
 Stephens prefers €iJirpfT«y, supposing it equivalent to €iJirpo(rciir«j, ' with a good 
 face* i^ov<ri<f ttXovtov is well explained by Bl., The power, or 
 
 licence of wealth, — i. e. which enables men to gratify their appetites and passions. 
 Tacit. Agric., ' ex patern4 fortuni tantam licentiam usurpante.* 
 
 Chaptbb XXXIX. — (a.) ^v. This is obviously a ease where the relative 
 is to be resolved into a demonstrative and (conjunction — e.g. aWa ravrriv. It 
 is governed by trpoKoKovfievov. Am. quotes ii. 72, 73, 74, irpoKuXfircu, tliough 
 this is perhaps, as G. objects, not precisely the same thing as the construction 
 with a noun. Kriig. more appropriately, ras <rjrov8cks vpoKoXovvrcu, Equit. v. 
 796. The student will do well to observe that rhv appertains to irpoKaXovfiepov, 
 and that the other participles ' sine articulo ' are, as usual, only accessories 
 
 as conditions to the predication, — * the Tnan who from a ground of vantage and 
 security challenges you to this.' \4yeiv ri — ' to say something to the 
 
 purpose,' is the exact opposite to o^iv \4yeis, 'you talk absurdity.' rhv 
 
 is iffov . . . Kadia-ravTa. It is a question whether ' the equality between 
 deeds and words,' or * the equality between the persons themselves and their 
 opponents ' be meant. I incline to the former, from the fact that Thuc. is so 
 partial to this particular antithesis. Pop. considers that the introduction of 
 duoloos is a sufficient argument against this view. But may it not be the sort 
 of pleonasm not unusual in such familiar phrases. * Their acts all the same as 
 their words' because it was the acts more particularly that the speaker had in 
 his thoughts, and meant to say should correspond to (d/nwa ilvai) the words. 
 Every one laughs at the negro's saying, * Csesar and Pompey are very like, but 
 specially Pompey,' yet there is a meaning at the bottom of it. The second re- 
 calls the first to recollection more than vice verscL. ^laywvlCeffdai, 
 Here again it is doubted whether a contest at law, or one by arms is meant. 
 Pop. decides in favour of the latter, and with reason, since it seems to be ex- 
 plained by ov irplv woKiopKfiv. 
 
 (b.) irpd/ with the infinitive is usually employed in affirmations; it does, 
 however, occur in negations with the usage of a preposition, Thuc. i. 68 ; ii. 5 ; 
 vii. 50 ; Kriig. The difference between irplv iroXiopKeiv and vplu i-KoXiopKovv 
 TO X'^P'o*'* concerning which usages some discussion has taken place, appears 
 to me simply the difference between a general, or generic statement, and a 
 special one respecting a fact. The first is, before besieging the place, before pro- 
 ceeding to such an act as besieging the place ; the second, before they besieged the 
 place, before they did this definite act of besieging the place. This principle is, I 
 believe, correct, and of wider application, cf. -nplv iapaiveiy, said of that which 
 never became a fact, ii. 67. ^lacpSpovs ttvras is connected of course 
 
 with <T<pas, but Kriig. considers that oh bia(p6pov5 agreeing with u/aus would be 
 much more appropriate. 
 
 (c.) t<Jt€ irpoaiivai — * then to come for alliance.* It is said that reference 
 is made to the revolt of Samos, but the whole may be general and indefinite. 
 diro7ei/({/Liei/ot — 'having had no part in their delinquencies' Krug. quotes 
 avo^iyvfffQaL TTjr fio-xn^, Herod. ix. 69. iyKKtifidroav k. t. K. Even 
 
 Bloomf. has in his last edition given up the authenticity of these words. We 
 may suppose them to have crept in from a summary of the arguments attached 
 in the mai^in, or to be, as Ar. suggests, a quotation from some other author 
 appended by the copyist in the way of illustration. Their antiquity is proved 
 by the imitation cited from Dio Cassius, xli. 30. It is difficult to make anything 
 of iJi6vm, which probably is corrupt. Kriig. connects afx^r6xo>s with ovrw — so 
 innocent. If the whole have any meaning, it must run thus, — trdXai Se k. t. \. 
 ^0, but not without having long ago Tnade you partners in their power, ought 
 they nrm to make you partners in its residts ; whereas^ if their faults (the matters 
 laid to their chaise) are the wily things in which ymi had no share, then {ovro)) 
 ought you not to share in the consequences. On Koiv6aatnas, see Elms, ad Med. 
 ^. 793. ' Koivuffat et KoivwffoxrQai diversa sunt, illud rem aliquam cum aliis com- 
 muiiicare, hoc, rei alicujus particeps fieri signiticat.' He does not add, as he 
 might have done, that this difference fiows directly from the nature of the 
 middle voice, and may be illustrated by numberless other cases. Mr. Eiddl© 
 
bz 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 •I 
 
 « 
 
 (Terminalia ii.) interprets fiSvuv apart from the consequences, the offences simply^ 
 and quotes Soph. El. 153, oUroi crol fiovva, tckvov, &xo5 i<p(ivn $^)orwv, and Antig. 
 308, ovx vfiiv''AiSTjs fiovvos apKffffi. 
 
 Chapter XL. — (a.) ^px^i^fOa — ' we come ' = *we are come' by the rhetorical 
 use of the present. T. K. A. But it seems to me there is a diflference between 
 TlKOfiiv and ipx^t^fBa, and that the latter means 'you see us now coming forward! 
 Such a scholar as Dr. Bloomfield ought not to write in so loose a style as he 
 does here. ' ipx^H'^Oa, present for preterite, as often in ^kco, since, as every 
 one knows, it is because Viko) is derived from a pneterite, that it contains a 
 praeterite notion, or the notion of a completed action, yiku implying the result of 
 a previous coming.' 
 
 (b.) CI efpTjTOi, like 'si' with the indicative, assumes the h}-pothesis, if, as 
 must he admitted, it is specified. ^ov\trai is employed rather than 
 
 &!/ ^ovK-nrai, owing to that tendency towards vivacity of narrative in the Greek 
 writers which induces them to employ the exact words of the persons or doou- 
 ment to which they refer. See 51 a. aX\' Bans fx^ . . . ovt' 
 
 *ip-{]vrjs iroirifffi. The difficulties which have been felt about this passage 
 will best be understood from the remarks of Peile and Arnold which follow. 
 The first says, I agree with Baver in thinking that the former fi^ is to be taken, 
 not with axoffT^pwy, as most commentators have supposed, but with Sfrraj, and 
 that not merely on account of the Ba-ris fi^ 'noii)fffi that follows, but because, in 
 fact, it cannot be taken otherwise ; since in the absolute predication, or in 
 Matthiae's words, the definite denial, of not fraudulently withdrawing himself 
 from another, ovk and not ti^ would be required. "Ocris jx^ implying * in every 
 case that a man shall not,' virtually expresses an excepted case ; and it is thus 
 that I understand the passage. * The agreement does not extend to those who go 
 to the prejudice of one of the parties, but is to be understood with this provm 
 always, that a man is not fraudulently to separate himself from a7iother, and so 
 require protection, provided also that to those who receive him, he shall not, if they 
 are wise, occasion war in place of peace.' To this I should be inclined to reply 
 that 5<rTJS m^ avoarepuv is not a case of ' absolute predication,' or * definite 
 denial ; ' it suggests an hypothetical case, and does not describe a definite indi- 
 vidual. It means 'in the case of a man being found to do so,* and being in fact 
 equivalent to ft tis fiii, is therefore properly followed by fi^ and not oifK. Mat- 
 thise's idea is, that where the relative refers to a definite person of whom some- 
 thing definite is denied, we have ^aris ov, but when to indefinite persons con- 
 ceived of collectively by the mind, where it may be in fact rendered by siqnis, 
 ZffTis fx^ is required, cf. ch. 118. This is equivalent to the explanation alwve 
 given, and therefore forms no impediment to the more obvious way of taking the 
 passage. The treaty is framed, not for the benefit of those who bttake themselves 
 to an alliance for the damage of others ; but for such as, unthout depriving others 
 of the benefit of their aid, are in want of security ; and for such as will not tiim 
 peace into war to those who receive them, if they behave themselves, or assuming 
 that they act with discretion (cf. supra et cijfnjrai) so. oi St^dfiwoi. This somewhat 
 strange sense of airoffrfpwv avrhv &Wov is amply supported by Kriiger's refer- 
 ences, voijlICov 8iro<ra 6inff6fy iroiijffaiTo iQvy\ irima ano(Trtpi\<Tiiv $aa-iX4us, Xen. 
 Hell. iv. I, 41. <pv\aK^y Xe^^ovfiaov Trjs trdhfus atroarfpuv, Dem. xxiii. 3. I 
 
 Chap. 41O 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 63 
 
 have ventured to give a version which seems to make «* ffu<ppovoZ(ri intelligible. 
 Arnold, however (as I have hinted). Dale, and others, cannot understand it, as 
 it occurs. 'There is a confusion in the expression, and the words d ffoxppovovari 
 have really nothing to do with the sentence as it is actually expressed, which 
 is suggested, as it were parenthetically, to the writer's mind, but which he did 
 not set down in words. If written at length, it would thus run :— ' The benefit 
 of the treaty was intended for such only as should not involve those, who receive 
 them in war, as, if you are wise, you will take care that these 7?ien do not involve 
 you:' A. Kriig., following the German translator, says, el <rw<ppovovai belongs 
 
 to what follows. 
 
 (c.) afxvv€(r6ai tovtovs. Kriig. makes Tjfias sub. the subject of the verb, 
 and roinovs object, 'punish these, not without involving you: Popp. and others 
 make rovrovs the subject, and afivv^aQai the passive infin., which is more ob- 
 vious, though the passive occurs less often than the med. voice. 
 SUat'oi 7' i(TT^. See Jelf, § 677. /xei/ ye. Kriig. says, apparently 
 
 for fxh ydp, as ye at any rate generally stands to attract attention to some par- 
 ticular which illustrates or confirms what has gone before. T. K. A. quotes a 
 good remark of Buttman's on the distinction between the two phrases. ' Cum 
 quis uno argumento vel exemplo aliquid probat, potest hoc ut sufficiens adferre ; 
 quod fit particuU yap ; potest etiam significare plura quidem posse desiderari, 
 sed hoc unum satis grave esse, quod fit addito ye, " certe,'" " saltern," ' Midias, 
 p 46. ai/a»c<»x^ is the holding back of the hand, and not striking, 
 
 hence it means a mere temporary truce. Kriig. remarks that except in Thuc. 
 it is rare in Attic prose. For 5ta, ' in a state <?/,' see Jelf, § 627. i. 3, b. Arn. 
 thus states the rationale of the matter — * 5ia denotes the circumstances accom- 
 panying the action or situation spoken of ; or, more generally, whatever is inter- 
 posed between the beginning or end of an action.' To me it seems that as 
 physically 5ia would denote the course of the diameter of any spherical body ; 
 so metaphysically it denotes what is as it were central to certain surrounding 
 circumstances, which, so to speak, envelope it. So Arn.'s examples. Si' ox^ov 
 
 fhai ' to be enveloped by confusion ; ' Si a<T<pa\€las — ' to be enveloped in 
 
 security ; ' 81* ^x^pas yeviffdcu — ' to get into the middle of a quarrel ;' and simi- 
 larly, iih fjidxvs epxeo'^a*, ii- "• ^» ^^^ ^^- o^^^^^> ch. 42 c. Sia kivSvvvov. See 
 note 17 a. 
 
 id.) ct XP^ avTOts oLfivveip — * on the question whether it he expedient to 
 aid them: See supra, note on /BouXerat, ch. 27 a, and 40 b. (pavelrai 
 
 yap h K.r.\. * There will he found quite as many among your allies vjho will 
 come over to us: Jelf, § 817, 4. abT6v riva— every man for himself, 
 
 whoever he may be, cf. iv. 62 b ; i. 43 ; and vi. 77. rhv v6fiov^you 
 
 will be laying down your law against your own selves, ^c. hrl in this sense, as 
 in Dem. 52, i, i<p' i/fiiv avrois iaeade rh eOos rovro KaT€<rKevaK6T€5 (quoted by 
 Kriig.) is the exact opposite to vp6s, cum genitivo, rphs rwv ix^vrojv ^oi^e rhv 
 viyiov ridris. Eurip. Ale. * It seemed established as practical international law, 
 that neither of these two great aggregate bodies should intermeddle with the 
 other, and that each should restrain or punish its own disobedient members.' 
 Grrote, vol. vi. p. 66. 
 
 Chipteb XLI. — (a.) AtKatctf/iaro — 'pleas of justice.' See Sheppard's 
 
64 
 
 NOTES ON TnurVPIPKS. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 44»1 
 
 NOTES ON TriUCTmtlflfl. 
 
 65 
 
 ThrophrnnfftA, p. I99, not© npon <fc» woWA iraf>a\f\otw6rt r&v 9 iKalmv— having 
 omiftefi mttHp of the plmn whieh he tnifjht h^fY nty^^i. Kriip;. quotes v. 97 ; tj. 
 79, 80, and other anthort. Tho idoft ex|M*«'^scd bv the words i« eridpiitly memit 
 to be wntra«!te<l \i-ith 4^(tt?«rit' xdpiros, which might V»e rendered— 'o claim upim 
 wmr qrafifffffe.' irph% i\/Lia5 'to ^njr in your 'prrsrnce.' 
 
 &(Tr" iirixpri<r0ai. The menninp of this wonl hi\s Wn^n dispntrd. The nnir 
 passaerf with which a comparison has been made is Ijv 8i yw^ xdfi^, of ^irixfftt 
 /u«vai ,u<iXirt-Ttt ')'i»mr«f«v rai>ra toTiti hvUpdrrt mottvfrt, Her. tit. 99, where the wiml 
 refers to familiar intrn^onrse. We may. therefore, ttnderstand it here to imply, 
 * w.>r Oft the other hand friffida. fo as to hr on a vrry fnmilinr footing mth ym' 
 and this se«^m« to me established by the sense of « mutuality,' ' intrirhangr." 
 which has bo«^n pnn-e»i to attach to iw\ in comp«isition. S«h' note on Hifiaxk, 
 ch. 44. Others have seen in the iiri, the idea of • mvr and aho}^ ;' consequently 
 hnxprt<rBat is with them ' afn/ti -to i»akf an unfair ti-ftc of yon. ^ 
 
 (A.) v^imv ykp ir. t. X, For the history see Hen>d. vi. 89. t1»»p 
 
 — V/?e'^f>?r.' an uncommon nsap:e. Krit^. It is *hn{ond'\x\ reference to tinir. 
 taking the pn^sent as a stand-|vunt— * in times lying beyond the IVrsian iiirn- 
 sion.' Krrig. prints it as a glosi. vph% thv Myivyit&v nAKf^ov 
 
 8ee Hert>«i. v. S|. iiriKpA.r'f)ff\v. A Thncydidjran word. Cf 
 
 Tiobeck's Phn/niohit.'f, p. 351. That the I'orinthian flret had n^illy no right to 
 arrogate the result to themselves, is remarked by Miiller. .V^inrtica, y. ir, 
 Kriig. The .'\merican «>bt«^r translates this w»^nl in u special note, ' vitionj! 
 which is only worth obser>ing. as it encourages a sort of inaccuracy to wliioh 
 the junior student is t«TO prone. It is of inmrse, as may be seen from its termi- 
 nation, the means <yf petting the better of tfr. 
 
 (c.) kirtpioiTTOi irapk rh viKav—' regardlesf of ewrythimj in eomjiamm 
 with inrtory' i.e. all other things when plact^l beside victory swm as nought 
 This would Iv pi^rhaps unnecessary to notice, luid not Artu translated it— '/•►r 
 the mkf iff conqnerinp,' ar.d Kl. pnr, or im>pter.for the sake of Kriig. quotes 
 TOW Kivhin'ov Karfpp<^vvi(T( irapk rh alirxp^v ti xWo^xtivai. Plato, /ipot. p. 28. 
 
 Kriig. ingeniously remjirks that wpirtpov gives to fj the force of a pnetcrite. 
 G3\\. c<>mpares the Gennan * von johcr ' -/>r);;» an earlifv period. rh 
 
 oiKfia 11.T. X, — They <fi>;»cx<f. or man^iQe U'orjte, even their own affairs ovinij A' 
 the ej^citmmmt of the mement, Le, the excitetnent naturally engendere<l by stritV 
 with an enemy. B. has, less rightly I think— '/or the sake of their animo.fitii 
 at the wmmemi,^ See vii, 70 ; iii. 8a ; t. 3a. 
 
 Chaptek XLII. — (a.) 5r ivBvfxrie^vrts. This verb (Krug. remark?) 
 aeain governs the genitive, vi. 60. i, whereas the accus. most generally foll'»w> 
 it. The latter case denotes that the action of the verb simply operates upon it? 
 objecL as is the ease with any other transitive ; in the former it is equivalent 
 to ff«rri{€tr. t.f. with the accus. it is to 'consider' with the genitive to ' con- 
 mder about' a thing. Vf6rfp6s Tts, T. K. A. explains as equal to 
 
 c* rts ivTi v^mpos — ' each yonnger man;' rather say, and in the case of an]) 
 erne that is yoMuger, let him deem. a^iovru — attracted in number t(^ 
 
 the nea^e^t nominative. o^yFeaOai — 'to requite,' here in a good 
 
 mixM. CI iv. 65, a. Am. and others explain the word at length, but there is 
 
 no ercnliarity which does not directly follow from the nature of the mid. voice, 
 which the student should elaborate for himself. ft iroKffi-fiffft— 
 
 ' in casf he shall go to war :' the most simpio and naked form of stating the 
 bvpnthesis ; ^v voK^niinrf, ' in the event of his going to war' seems to me to be 
 umvl. when reference is more i)articula.rly intended to the course of action then 
 t.) he pursued. See the remarks on ch. 1 20 c. 
 
 (A.) T(J TC yhp ^vn<pfpov iv ^ K.t.k. For exprdienry tmsf follows npon 
 ihfft eof(r.te of conduct wherein a wan wakes fewest wlsfakrs ; or perhaps we 
 should say, 'commits the fewest errors;' for Kriig. is apparently right in saying, 
 'moralisch. am wenigsten fhlt: rh n^KKov. Not, 1 think, here, 
 
 'flir future of the war' — i.e. the nature of its contingencies, though this might 
 he easily supported ; but, the 'coming of the war' i.e. whether it will come or 
 „„ ' (ftavfphv ^5tj K.r.\. This is of course in strong antithesis 
 
 t„ iv h(pav(7 Hftrai—' which is already he fore your eyes, and not a waiter of the. 
 future at all.' {xpfKftv — to take a little away from — i.e. in some 
 
 (Icgrep do away with. For the history, cf. i. 103. 
 
 [('.) Ka I phv rxoy(ra-cf. Uxw tx^v, c. 36 a, ' whm possessing the (pudMy of 
 opporfutirtirss' i.e. when seasonably timed — coming in season. rh 
 
 ykp ^h i.5iKf7v. For to abstain from injuring one's equals /,«? a safer source of 
 povrr, than to he so excited hy the pro.oprrt of imwediate advantage, as to grasp 
 nf mjijrandisement surrounded ly perds. This I believe to be the general mean- 
 inp of the words. ry ahrina (pavipcp—' the admntage, imrn/'diately 
 
 hrfnreyour et/es'—i.e. that of adding the Cf>rcyrcan marine to your own. 
 ;!i^ KivS{>pwf rh itKiov ?x*'»'— 's I he taking more than rmr rights amidst 
 ilnni/rrs. rh ir\. ^x^*" ^^ opposed to the equally abstract notion, rh fi^ ASt/cfTc. 
 I riinnot understand why T. K. A. should declare ' the article is used because a 
 |.articiilar tuifuir advantage is meant.' This is not true, and if it were, could 
 the article be absent had the advantage not been particular? 8ii kivUvvv, 
 T. K. A. exf.lains by * through,' i. e. ' with dangers.' Rut see supra, c. 40 b ; it 
 means such a taking, or pf)Ssession, would be 'enveloped by dangers.' 
 
 Chaptkr Xlilll.— (a.) irf p ITT fir ra>K6r« s—hamnf/ fallen into the circMm- 
 Ktmms under tchich Vfc ourselves at Laeedamirm, proelaimeA the priticiple, that 
 "vry man should ham the chastising of his ovm allies ~oh is governed by the 
 participle : I do not think that Kriig.'s proposition ^i' oh is necessary. 
 
 (/>,) rovrov iKflvov K.r.K. iKftvov is of course the predicate: ' this is 
 that opportunity'— i.e. the sort of opportunity which people recognise to be the 
 one in which, &c. The Aristophanic roW iKitvo will at once occur to the reader 
 as paral lei. roiavra S4. For the corresponding fxev, see the close 
 
 of the Corey rean speech. 
 
 Chapter XLIV.— (a.) kuI Sty. ' Etiam his advocatd convocaiione' indi- 
 cating, I suppose, something remarkable, though the same thing occurred iii. 36. 
 Tp juev 7rpoT€'p(j. It seems to be doubted whether these words agree with 
 Tl^Afpflt or iKKKriaia. The former being more familiar, is perhaps more probable ; 
 but it is of little importance. fier 4yv (a (rav— used rather ' sensn 
 
 praegnanti,' since the meaning is, ' so altered their purpose as not to make ; ' or, as 
 we say, ' changed their minds not to make ;' equivalent, therefore, to n^ayv6vrfs 
 ^^v<a<Tw. Cf. titrayvSivai ra TTpoS€5oyiJ.4va, iii. 40. <r<plaiv must 
 
66 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 4/.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 67 
 
 be connected with ^vfiirKelv, for although Matthiae supposed it to be governed 
 by 4K(\ivov, all the later grammarians (Rost, &c.) contend that KeXeuw o-e iroiuv 
 is the only legitimate construction. ^u/A/xaxta — iwinax^a.. That 
 
 these wokIs were not, in common parlance, very positively opposed, seems 
 plain from the use of the first in the more special meaning of the second, v. 27, 
 vi. 19 ; and, as Pop. observes, ^vfifiaxos for iviKovpos, c. 53, iii. 70. It seems 
 evident that iTrifiaxict is a defensive compact, implying the obligation to aid an 
 ally if invaded : ^vfiixaxia therefore, when opposed to it, must stand for ' offen- 
 sive alliance.' But the truth is, that the latter became a sort of Koivhv uvojxa, 
 and was used generically for any alliance. Dr. Donaldson, JS'ew Cratylus, § 174, 
 observes that the force of iir\ in composition, where it denotes * mutuality,' 
 ' interchange,' ' the running of one thing into another,' has not been sufl&ciently 
 noticed by Greek scholars. In this way, i-wifiaxia would mean ' an alliance for 
 mutual defence' He amply illustrates this meaning of the preposition by other 
 citations. The student should consult the section. Cf. ch. 41, 4-irixprj<^6ot,!. and 
 viii. 85, iTraiJL<poT€pi(otrra. &<m rovs avrohs k.t.\. Pop. remarks 
 
 that this formula passed into Latin usage ; at least he quotes ' eosdem amicos 
 atque inimicos (alibi hostes) habere.' Livy, xxix. 23, xxxv. 50, xxxvii. i. Cf. 
 also iii. 75, iii. 10. 
 
 (h.) Ka\ &s—of course for ovrus, 'even thus;' i.e. even though they were 
 to reject the proffered alliance. ^vyKpoveiv aWiiKoi s — to wear 
 
 each other out by mutual attrition, or confiict, as we say. Kriig. quotes ' bello 
 collidere,' Hor. Ep. 1. ii. 7, and Pop. Isoc. Pan. c. 37 ; Dem. de Cor. § 19. 
 'Iva aadfvfffripois olffiv — ^ that they might find the Corinthians and the 
 other naval pou^rs more weak when they went to war with them, shmdd avi/ 
 such necessity arise.' The dat. are governed by KaOiffrumai, and are in the pre- 
 dicate. 
 
 Chapter XLV. — (a.) 8eico vavs. Probably quite enough for the purpose, 
 as Kriig. observes. It is not easy to see why Pericles should be suspected of 
 lukewarmness in the cause, as Bloom, (ed. prior) suggests. The story told by 
 Plutarch (Pericl. c. 29), that he meant to show contempt for the Corinthians 
 by the sraallness of the number, implies an unmeaning act of impolicy, absiu-d 
 in so far-seeing a statesman. Aa*ce5at/i(J»'tos. Cimon, it seems, 
 
 had six sons, to three of whom he gave the names of the nations for whom he 
 acted as Proxenus, i.e. fiOKihaifxSvios, 'HXelos, and ©fTToAoy. Ai(JTijUoy 
 
 the father, as Popp. supposes, of Strombichides, mentioned in the 8th book. 
 rSov iKiivuv ri x««'P»«»'- Bloomf. explains « ri rcov x«pW ^Ketucov, 'to any 
 of their places,' and remarks that such a separation of the article from its noun 
 by the governing word, or by another, though found chiefly in Ionic writers, is 
 not unknown in Attic Greek, as i. 106, h rov x<*>piov ihi<aTov. But in this case 
 rov stands for rivos, and the instances are not parallel. With Kriig., I doubt 
 the admissibility of such a collocation in Thuc, and with him would read x^'P*'"' 
 — some place among the number of those belonging to them. It is impossible to 
 see what T. K. A. means by declaring that Kriig. would read 4s tuv iKitvov n 
 Xopiov. The Schol. says Epidamnus is hinted at. ovrw — 'in this case.' 
 
 Chapter XL VI. — (b.) trpoafm^av — 'drew near.' 
 
 tffn 56 
 
 \j/iV ''• '''• ^' -^ ^^ discussion of the geographical difficulties here involved 
 would require too much space. The student may consult Bloomf., who has in- 
 corporated Col. Leake's valuable observations. The principal points made out 
 fjeem to be, that XipAiv is a predicate, there is a harbour, — i.e. a port called 
 Cheimerium, as well as the promontory ; that it is the object of the writer to 
 point out the locality of Cheimerium, though he does it awkwardly ; that uy 
 fvrhs means TtordfifDv, i. e. the rivers ; that Cheimerium is Cape Varlam ; but 
 that the Port Cheimerium is not, as was once thought, to be found in the Port 
 of Parga, but in the ruins discovered by Colonel Leake on the other side of the 
 promontory. Bloomf. translation best explains the passage : — * Now there is a 
 port, and above it, removed from the sea, is a city called Ephyra, situated in 
 the Eleaeatis of Thesprotia, alongside of which the Acherusian Lake disem- 
 bogues into the gulf, a lake deriving its name from the river Acheron, which 
 after running through Thesprotia, has its outlet into it. The river also ' — I 
 suppose Thyamis, though Bl. omits the word — ' runs to seaward in a parallel 
 direction, dividing Thesprotia and Cestrine, between which rivers the promontory 
 Cheimerium juts out.' 'E<f>vpri. This Ionic form instead of 'E^upa 
 
 is given in most texts, because the reading in the MSS. is *E<piip'p, and in one 
 'E<pvpr}. It appears that the grammarians declare this to be a word which 
 always retained the Ionic form. But since Strabo, Steph. Byzant., and others 
 employ 'E<pvpa, Popp. strongly suspects the reading. The 'E^yprj of Homer is 
 of course Corinth, and Thuc. would not have borrowed the form from his 
 writings to apply it to this town. e^eiai. Kriig. prints 4^lr}in 
 
 because of ii. 102, and iv. 103, but he admits that the best MSS. have e^cicri. . 
 6.vex€i — raises itself up, iv. 53, 3; vii. 34, 2. Kriig. Cf. Hermann on Soph. 
 (Edip. Col. 674. 
 
 Chapter XLVII. — (a.) 2»//8oTd — 'The swim pastures ;* now St. Nieolo 
 di Sivota. According to Leake, they lie five or six miles S, of the mouth of the 
 Thyamis. 
 
 (6.) ZaKvvQioiv, This seems at variance with what is said of the Corcy- 
 Keans, c, 3 1 . We must therefore suppose that they had made an application at 
 the same time as they sent an embassy to Athens, and were successful. See 
 Pop. in his larger edition. 4v rfj ijtrcipif — i.e. the Tnainlafid close hy 
 
 the Sybota. tj? rjirefpy = t^ Kara KtpKvpav riTrelpcp, for in the time of Thucydides 
 the woi-d was not yet a proper name, Pop. See notes on iii. 54. The Chaonians 
 are principally the barbarians meant. 
 
 Chapter XL VIII. — {a.) rpiSiv iinepuv ciria — ' provisions for three days.* 
 Kriig. compares ii. 23 ; iii. i ; vi. 34; and Xen. Hell. v. 3. 21. This sufficiently 
 proves how little the ancient triremes were calculated for anything like a long 
 voyage. us ivl i/avfxaxiay. We have the dative, iii. 4, vi. 34, 
 
 but this is a case where small reliance can be placed upon MSS. The us, in 
 cases like this, seems to me to indicate adherence to a common practice, drew 
 up as ships are wont to do when going into action, or, at any rate, that the act 
 described by the verb is compared with, and referred to a similar class of acts ; 
 even us 4s Uuffihas fiov\6ixfvos arpaTeiifadai, Xen. Anab. i. i, 11, means ' such 
 an expedition as would be organised against the Pisidians.' T. K. A. explains 
 
 f2 
 
68 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 thus : ' d>s does not perceptibly weaken the certainty of their determination = 
 with the purpose of engaging^ from which one does not gain much informa- 
 tion -wxiovris. Take this with Kadopuxri, while so sailing, catch 
 sight of. ixfTcdopovs — in the open sea, i. e. not hu^ing the coast. 
 Though a favourite with Thuc, it is not, as Kriig. remarks, employed by Herod. 
 
 or Xenophon. 
 
 (b.) T6\Tj— here 'divisions' or 'squadrons' cf. ii. 8i. Of cavalry, ii. 22. 
 j^j^_ rh Zk &\\o K.r. X. — * Along all the rest of the line they 
 
 themselves took place," or ' extended; cf. iii. 107. Pop. would rather say 'reli- 
 quum spatium ' than ' reliquam aciem; because it appears from the next ch. that 
 the Corcyrseans also occupied portion of the right. We must not, then, under- 
 stand rh&Wo as entirely exclusive of the right division. ehd/vvnov 
 Kfpas. Remark the absence of the article. This case comes vnder those where 
 the article is not applied to things sufficiently familiar and definite not to need 
 it,— as fiaffiXfvs, 'laen65, &c. See note, ch. 8 a. So we say ' right,' • left,' not 
 always ' the right,' ' the left.' 
 
 Chapter XLIX.— (a.) rk (rtj/ufta. The signal was a sort of flag raised 
 upon a mast or pole. The opposite term to denote the lowering of the signal in 
 order to put an end to the action, is Kareffirdae-n, i. 63, 2. The Macedonians 
 used a crimson flag for the same purpose, Plut. Philop. 6. Similarly among 
 the Romans, Ammian. xxvii. 10, 9 ; Caesar de B. G:\\, 20 ; Kriig. 
 Kaprfpd — the regidar term for an obstinately-contested combat, not found, 
 says Kriig., in Xenophon. oifx 6iiioi<i)s,ec. Koprfpd by a sort of 
 
 zeugma, not so much by the science of the parties. Bl. version approved by 
 T. K. A., ' less excellent; * meritorious; does not seem desirable. Kriig. says, 
 
 ♦ short for /Sict Z4, rrfCofiax^tf; 
 
 (6.) irpoff^dKoifv. Bekker prefers this to vpotr^dWoKv, which occurs in 
 the MSS. But it does not seem -necessary to alter the present, ' when thei/ happen 
 to lay alongside of one another; i. e. in the nautical sense of ' laying a ship 
 aboard of another.' The optative of course expresses ' indefinite frequency,' as 
 irtc'CoJKTo infra. i.ir«\vovTo—' got clear; Karaffravrts 
 
 ifxdxovro. Bl. is right in saying, ' the sense is maintained a piigna stataria: 
 rather than D. in translating, * Mej/ set to, and fought ;' it implies that they 
 formed into a regular set array, like a body of infantry. SieKirXoi. 
 
 This evolution, Bl. seems to think, corresponds to the modem evolution of 
 
 * breaking the line ' employed so successfully by Rodney and Nelson, and tho 
 original suggestion of which has been so much controverted. The object of thi> 
 is to destroy a portion of the enemy's fleet, which is thus cut oflf from the rest. 
 But does not the plural here indicate a single manoeuvre often repeated, which 
 could not be the case with such breaking the line ? I should therefore be in- 
 clined to accept the original explanation, that, viz., it was a breaking through 
 the enemy's line, in order by a rapid turn backwards to smash the oars, or sides. 
 or stem of the opposing vessel, ii. 83, 89 ; vii. 36, 70. Compare Livy's descrip- 
 tion quoted by Pop., * Libero inter ordines discursu praetervecti in puppim im- 
 petum dabant,' xxxvii. 24. 
 
 (c.) SfiiSrfs 01 (TTparriyol. Had the constmction proceeded smoothly. 
 we should have had at 'ArriKaX vrjfs still continued as nom. to ovk ^px^v, but <w 
 
 Chap. 50.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 69 
 
 arpoLTityoi is substituted, because they were the responsible parties in the 'Att. 
 y^€s, and the real causes of the delay. Kriig. places a stop at ^px^v, thereby 
 making Ziti&r^s ot (rrpar. a sort of nom. pendens. r^v irpd^priaiv. 
 
 See i. 45. 
 
 (d.) T^y aKrjvas iprjixovs. In this collocation, as in rfj Zi\pr) (uravarai, iv. 
 122, rais vava\ Kovtpais, vii. 37, rhu ktvttov fidyaVf vii. 70, we have what Dr. 
 Donaldson calls secondary predication, and the whole is equivalent to — ' they 
 set fire to the tents, afid the tents were empty; The idiom is of course familiar to 
 overy scholar ; but I have some doubt whether this mode of explaining it suffi- 
 ciently points out the fact that the adjective or participle so placed contains 
 the cause or condition of the whole predication : as rhv &vSpa yexdaavra trxme 
 is not — ' he struck the man, and the man was laughing;' but, he struck the man 
 because he laughed. Here I should render, they set fire to the tents as they found 
 them empty. D.'s ' burnt the deserted tents; may be defended by the ambiguity 
 of the English idiom, but should not have been given in a version intended for 
 students, as it might mislead. See more on the subject, notes on i. 36 a; 
 iii. 57 a. Iprj /A OS is in Thuc. of two, and also of three terminations. 
 
 liiipraffouv. Bl. way of accounting for the force of the prep, is probably 
 correct. They searched through (8m) and carried off, 'lipTtaffav, any articles ; as 
 infra, viii. 31 and 36. 
 
 {e.) hTr6 — \from an originally smaller number; i.e. no, see ch. 47, which 
 even united with the ten from Athens would not equal the Corinthian fleet of 
 150. See ch. 46. airpo(pa<ri(rTws. Said properly of an act which 
 
 required no irpScpaais to excuse it ; therefore it means more ' openly' and * un- 
 hesitatingly.' XafxTrpcos, (pavepus. Ci. ii. 7, 'clearly; indisputably, 
 Kriig. cf. Aajuirpa vUtj, vii. 55. epyov tXx^To — * set to work; lit. 
 held himself to it, so in German, * Griff das Werk eifrig an; 5t6- 
 KfKpiro. There was no longer any distinction between friend and foe. Bl. illus- 
 trates by St. James ii. 4 (Bl. ref. is wrong), ov SieKpidrjre iv eauroTs, where the 
 meaning obviously is — Have you not onade invidious distinctions among your- 
 selves? is rovro avdyKTjs — 'to such a pitch of necessity; ' eo 
 necessitatis; Kriig. explains * to such an inemtable collision; comparing is rovro 
 avdyicqs 6 \6yos Tjxet. Plat. Thecet. 170 c. Compare is rovro ^v/itpdpas, iii. 59. 
 ^j Tovro Svarvxlas, vii. 86. The usage of ^vviireacv in this impersonal way is 
 elsewhere, says Krug., confined to the meaning equivalent to ^vvifir). There 
 seems little authority for ^wiirfffov accepted by many editors. Pop. suggests 
 that irdvra may be supplied to ^vviireaev from ovSeV. The Schol. understands 
 tA npdyixara. 
 
 Chapter L. — (a.) rcb <rKd(f>n k.t.X. ^ They did not attempt to lash fast 
 and tow after them the hulls of the vessels which tliey happened to sink; The 
 opt. expresses the indefiniteness of the whole : the aorist is used because there 
 is no intention on the part of the writer to connote the exact time of the action 
 of the verb. Entertaining those views on the nature of the aorist, expressed 
 elsewhere, I do not attribute so much importance as others to the controversy 
 maintained between Madvig and Kriiger in their Greek Grammars, whether the 
 aor. optative in non-hypothetical relative clauses, be a preeteritum, or no. 
 Kriig. would naturally quote the present case in confirmation of his opinion 
 
JO 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I ^hap. 53-3 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 71 
 
 that it is. A. directs attention to the fact that Karo^iffnaif only implies a 
 partial sinking, or waterlogging of the ships. This is clear from Herod, viii. 
 90, and from the famous case of Arginusae, where some of the Athenian com- 
 manders after the action proposed vKuv iitX rhs KaraSeSvKvias vavs^ koX tovs h' 
 avTuv avBptavovs. St(KTr\4ovT€s vs of course not used in the tech- 
 
 nical sense of Su/cirAour in last ch., but simply — 'sailing through^ i.e. the scene 
 of action. 
 
 (b.) "EAArjo-t K.r. X. "With reference to the naval actions in the Persian 
 war — fieylarrf ruv rph avTTJs. Cf# i. i a. dTruloi seems strange for 6v6Tfpoi, but 
 perhaps it is meant to express the greatness of the confusion, rendering it im- 
 possible that anything of the character of the vessels could be made out. 
 
 (rf.) Kal 8(roi ^<rai/ hoiirai. The Kal has been very offensive to editors. 
 But Pop. explanation seems satisfactory : the irXwiyioi are those which came sea- 
 worthy out of action ; but beside these, ten had never been in action at all, for 
 the Corcyreans had 120 triremes, see ch. 25, and of these only no were era- 
 ployed in the battle. Engelman, thinking this 'very obscure,' proposes to 
 render Kal ' viz.,' so that ir\cii>ot and Xoiirol should mean the same ships. This 
 use of Kol I cannot but consider verj- dubious. He supports it by toiovtuv jcoI 
 iiKowTioiv aiiapTT\ix6.r<av, Plato, Apol. p. 26 a, which he says is only used to 
 denote one class of afiapr-rifjiaTa. But I am not sure that it only denotes one 
 aspect of them ; and the word roiovros, owing to its collocation in such plirases 
 as Toiavra koX vapaT\T}(ria, has a particular usage which renders it impossibln 
 for us to quote the above phrase as any authority for such a use of Kcd in the 
 text. Of the other reference to iii. 26, rd re irp6r€pov rerfxrififva Koi el n 
 i^e^KaffrnKfi Koi Zffa 4v TOis irp\v ia^oXaxs irapf\€\€iirTo, we can only say — ' Nil 
 agit exemplum quod litem lite resolvit.' 
 
 (e.) 4ir€iraia)viaT0. ' Etsi Grseci non vaioova sed raiaua ii^€iv dicunt, tamen 
 promiscu6 iraieuvi^a) et vaiavi^a) usurpant.' Stanley ad Msch. S. c. T. v. 274. 
 The MSS. here as elsewhere exhibit both. itpv^vav, sc. 4it\ trpifivav 
 
 iKpomvro, rowed stemward. The object of this evolution sometimes, was to 
 gain space for returning to the charge, and sometimes, as here, to present the 
 least vulnerable part of the ship to the enemy. Cf. Herod, viii. 84. Thuc. 
 i. 51 ; iii. 78 ; vii. 36. Kriig. cf. the military phrase ^iri ir6ha avaxt^p^'tV' Xen. 
 Anab. V. 3, 31. oXiyat h^jL^vtiv, ' too few to aid' Cf. 2, 61, b: 
 
 5. Ill b. This sort of comparative usage of the positive is not peculiar to 
 Greek. Thus we might 8a.y— few for the purpose. Cf, oXiyovs €?mi ttJ ffrpanti 
 T^ Mi]^(Dv (TvfxfiaxUiP, Her. vi. 109, and again vii. 207. See Jelf, § 666. Matt. 
 §448. 
 
 Chapter LI. — (a.) fxaXXov ix rod ^cpavovs — 'more than to the Corin- 
 thians.' 4k tov Supavovs — adverbially. Pop. quotes as similar cases from Thuc, 
 4k 70V (pca/fpov, iv. 79, 4k tov irpo^avovs, iii. 43, and others. 46aviJ.a{,ov— 
 
 woyidered at the Corinthians backing water^ as we might say. See Jelf, § 495- 
 obs. 3. vy\ts 4Kfivai 4xnrx4ova-ip — as often, a transition to the 
 
 words actually used, ' yonder are ships sailing up to us.' See ch. 40 b. 
 ^vvf(TK6ra^i — ' darkness was closing in J 
 
 {b.) 4r€X€vTa 4s vvKra. See note iii. 78, ended at night, i.e. lasted up to 
 night and then ended, ch. 5 8 b. *AvhoKiZns. This is the well- 
 
 known Andocides the orator, who afterwards played so important a part in 
 reference to the mutilation of the Hermse. wpfiiffavro, sc. at vri^s. 
 
 ' Subjectum enim mutatum ex medio apparet,' Pop. But I am not convinced 
 that the word cannot mean, ' brought their ships to moorings,' without any such 
 awkward change of subject. at (Xkocti v%is airh twv 'Adijvuv, 
 
 avrai. In this and some other passages of Thucydides, as iv. 9. i, vi. 96. 3, 
 ni. 41. I, the article seems used in somewhat an anomalous manner. I fully 
 agree with Engelman that to alter the passages, as Kriig. would in this case, is 
 futile, for how can we account for their existence ? The correction of them, 
 which we find in some few MSB., is much more probably owing to the hand of 
 the transcriber. It only remains, therefore, to conclude that Thucydides is 
 somewhat peculiar in his way of employing the article. Now if a "writer were 
 to say, ' The ships from Athens, those, I mean, which Glaucon commanded,' no 
 one would express any surprise. But here we have ' these ' instead of those. 
 May not this, however, be ascribed to the same principle of composition upon 
 which, as above, we have a transition to the directa actio in vrjfs cKuvat k.t.A., 
 the narrator vividly entering into the action, and speaking from that stand- 
 point as it were ? 
 
 Chapter LII. — {b.) t^ls filv vavs &pavTfs . . . rjavxa^ov. Here is a 
 slight anacolouthon, for either we ought to have read ras /xhv vavs "^pav, T](Tvxa^ov 
 8f, or tifv should have been omitted. Pop. But Kriig. remarks that fihv belong? 
 rather to the general thought than to any one of the separate ideas, and may 
 be supposed to connect itself with rov 8e oXKaZe irXov in the next section, va} 
 ipavrfs is not so common as vavtrlv &pavT€i, but Kriig., cf. Herod. \4ii. 57 
 avalpovffi TCks v4as dir5 ^Xafxivos. The ships themselves were drawn up on 
 shore, therefore ayKvpas need not be substituted. 4iri(rK€vf) — 'the 
 
 means of refitting.' Pop. says, in the same way as irepiTflxi<ris is the ' means of 
 fortifying,^ but surely, in this latter case, it is the termination in -<ns, which 
 denotes the operation: so also with aXuais^ ^the means of capturing,' Phil. 61. 
 4v x^P^V ^P'flH'V' The junior student should note the effect of the article's 
 being absent ; it conveys the reason why there was no 4'jri<rK€V7i, but scarcely 
 say with D. ' in so deserted a place.' rov ttXov for rSSe rod irXov 
 
 Smj. Cf. I. 68, Kriig. But see Jelf, § 496. 
 
 Chapter LIII. — (a.) KtX-fjriov, explained by the Schol. ixiKphv irXoidpiov 
 airh neTa<popa.5 rov KfX-qros 'lirirov, ^ ch av^p 4viKddr)rai. As the K4Xr]s was the 
 riding-horse (light horseman, says T. K. A.), the small light skiff containing 
 an individual was so named metaphorically. Kriig. cf. iv. 120 ; Adii. 38 ; Herod. 
 nii. 94. Hvfv KTipvKfiov. ' This was a straight stick of wood 
 
 or of metal encircled around with two serpents, having their crests opposite to 
 each other, so as to bear the form of the letter *. Thus it answered to the 
 caduceus of Mercury. Sometimes, however, instead of serpents, it was encircled 
 by sprigs of olive, indicative of a desire for reconciliation,' Bloomf. Thus it 
 would be equivalent to our flag of truce, and the sending a message without it, 
 Would be meant to imply that the Corinthians did not admit themselves to be 
 at war with Athens. irelpav voiiiffaffda t — to try to find out what 
 
 their purpose was, v 4 fxr^/avre 5, on the principle of ' qui facit per 
 
72 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 57.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 73 
 
 aliuin, facit per se,' the legates are regarded as 'the mouth-pieces of the prin- 
 cipals, froTii whom they come, cf. Sif(pdfip€, ii. 69, ad fin. (riroi/Saj 
 Xvovres, may be much more emphatic, sine articvlo, are breakers of treaties, 
 but, see ch. 48 b. 
 
 (6.) Ai/6T€. This Bloomf. regards as a negligence of expression for Xvuv. 
 to me it seems a very natural anacolouthon, and quite in the manner of Thucyd- 
 
 * and are breaking treaty too* 
 
 {c.) rh fify. Upon any explanation which I have seen the fifv is misplaced. 
 for the ffrpaT6'tr(Sov is not contrasted with anything. It may be a mere 
 carelessness of expression, the writer's real intention being to contrast the 
 Corcyreans and Athenians, or, as Kriig. suggests, it may have crept into the 
 text from what has gone before. avf^drifftv — * called out to lay 
 
 hold of and kill tkem^' Kriig. Cf. Xen. Anab. i. 8. 12, Kvpos e$6a &yfiv rh 
 (rrpar€v/j,a. 
 
 Chapter LIV. — (a.) iir* otKov, not ^w* oIkov. Therefore, * homewards' i.e. 
 in the direction of a point ; with the accusative, right up to a point, as ch. 30 h; 
 hence I imagine its common signification of ' hostility,' which in some grammaxs 
 and lexicons is given as the primary one. 
 
 (b.) yfKpovs aveiKovro. See note, ch. 8 a. The absence of the article is 
 explicable upon the principle often noticed of its natural omission in the descrip- 
 tion of any familiar process, where the object of the verb's action is at once 
 intelligible without particular definition, — e.g. * weigh anchor,* ' shoulder arms,' 
 
 * furl sails,' and the like. So ' to take up dead ' describes so natural and neces- 
 sary a process, that no article is required. Cf. iv, 4; iv. 54; v. 10; vii. 5 ; viii. 
 106. i^fvex^^vTa. The neuter, because the corpses were regarded 
 as without personality — mere things. Kriig., cf. Sffa ii. 92, and Xen. Anab. 
 i. a., 8. &<rT€ /coi vavdyia k.t. A. This would of course, as in 
 the similar case on land, indicate that victory rested with them. 
 
 Chapter LV. — (a.) iv 6 € pain I a elxov — ' treated them mth great courtesy 
 and attention.'' Kriig. cf. ty alria tx^iv, v. 60; vii. 81. On the result, see 
 iii. 70. irpoa"iroii\9nay — ^ might bring over to themJ On this some- 
 
 what peculiar word, see the note on iii. 47 a, and in Sheppard's Theophrastus, 
 c. i., irepl flpwvfias. All the usages of the word appear to me directly deducible 
 from the primary meaning, to bring over to; cf. irpoainoir\(Tavro, last chapter; 
 ' took to themselves* i. e. claimed. 
 
 (b.) v^piyiyyerai. A. taking the prepos. in a not unusual sense, cf ch. 
 2 b, translates 'thus overlived the war* i.e. thus came out of the contest with the 
 Corinthians undestroyed. And I am not at all sure that he is wrong. Kriig., 
 however, and others, contend that it is 'got the upper hand* Cf. ii. 65. The 
 connexion between ' superesse ' and ' superare ' shows how closely the ideas are 
 united. c<pi<riy — because logically ol Kopiydioi is the subject of the 
 
 sentence. iv a"iroy^a7s. Kemark the absence of the article, 'in a 
 
 time of treaty ; ' sc. the thirty years' truce. But see chap. 54 b. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — (a.) ti6,<t>opa — ^points of difference* or points in dispnte; 
 hence ' causes of quarrel.' More frequent, says Kriig., in Thuc. than elsewhere. 
 
 Cf. i. 67, 68. Trpacra-dvrwv. This word, in the sense of ' working,* 
 
 'scheming' may, as A. remarks, be compared with our own expression *to 
 practise,' and ' practises.' See note on iii. 56. Kriig. remarks that it is most 
 common with Sttcws and an indicative, iii. 4, 70. TlaW'nvris — 
 
 formerly called Phlegra, now the Gate of Kassandhra (says CoL Leake). Be- 
 tween the Gulf of Therma and the Strymonic Gulf, the whole district called 
 Chalcidice juts out into the sea with three promontories, of which this lies most 
 to the west. Consult Grote vi. 90, 91, who remarks that the Athenian empire 
 was much more secure over the islands than over the seaports situated on the 
 continent, as the latter would have a much better chance of receiving aid from 
 some neighbour powerful by land. <p6pov uTroreAets — i.e. pay- 
 
 ing a fixed sum annually, instead of a contingent of ships. See ch. 29, and the 
 commentators on Arist. Vesp. 669. rh is UaW'fipriv tcTxos. 
 
 The effect of this would be to leave standing the fortifications towards the 
 mainland, but also to leave the town destitute of defence on the side where it 
 was accessible from the sea — i.e. from Athens. iiri^rj/xiovpyois. 
 
 ' This term and AafiiovpySs was applied to the chief magistrates of the Pelopon- 
 nesians, expressive of their doing the service of the people.' See Livy, xxxii. 
 22, and Arist. Pol. iv. 4, p. 140. Asclepiades considers the prepos. superfluous. 
 GoU. understands it to mean ' extra magistrates sent as colleagues to the 
 ^rjiJLiovpyoi.* Arn. It is possible inl may only have the sense of superintend- 
 ence, as in iirlffKovos. For the nature of the magistracy, cf. Miiller, Dorians, 
 i. 2, 46, who, however, seems to interpret * upper magistrates.' ' The words ra 
 h\ QpaKTii denote generally the towns in Chalkidike, places in the direction or 
 on the skirts of Thrace, rather than parts of Thrace itself.' Grote, vi. 90. Mr. 
 Shilleto makes it embrace Chalcidice, with its three projecting tongues of land, 
 all the Hellenic colonies stretching eastward along the coast, and terminating 
 at some unknown point to the W. of the Hellespont. Its western boundary was 
 Macedonia, and it included several islands in the iEgean, among which Thasos 
 was certainly one. Thucydides, or Grote, p. 10. 
 
 Chapter LVII. — (a.) <pav€pws hid<popo i — * openly at variance.' 
 ' U^pSiKKas — the line of the Kings of Macedon, from their founder, Perdiccas, 
 may be seen Herod, viii. 139. They were reputed to be descended from 
 Temenus, that one of the Heracleidse who at the return of his family with the 
 Dorians, obtained possession of Argolis, and on the strength of this descent 
 they were allowed to be Greeks. Herod, v. 22. But the Macedonian people 
 were regarded at best as half-barbarians. Thucyd. iv. 124, 126.' Am. 
 ^aK(S6vuy without the article, and means certain Macedonians on the sea- 
 coast ; see ii. 99, rrjs nirta MaKtSovias. Perdiccas was to have reigned jointly 
 with his brother Philip and his cousin Derdas, but attempted to deprive them 
 of their provinces. Besides these, says Pop., the brothers of Derdas, c. 59 ; 
 Pausanias, c. 61 ; and Augustus, son of Philip, are mentioned as rivals to Per- 
 'i'ccas, iimroXiyLoiT — ' had been made a foe of.* 
 
 fvavTiovfifvois — * acting together in opposition to him.* The construction, 
 though unusual, verborum pugnandi usu defenditur. Cf. Plut. Cleom. vii. 3. 
 ^poaiTcoiitro. The preceding t€ would induce us to expect irpoairoiovfxevos, 
 out it is quite in Thuc. manner to pass thus to the finite verb. Pop. cf. ii. 29 ; 
 i^- 4, 72. 
 
74 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ cdap. 6l.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 75^ 
 
 (b.) t flop a 6vra rh, x«P»«- Many MSS. omit the rd, which most editors 
 inclose in brackets. If it stand, it must mean, I presume, ' if he could get pos- 
 session of the places, being as they were, close to PotidceaJ eVcKa— 
 denoting the final cause, *for the sake of' 
 
 (c.) XaXKihivori. According to Col. Leake {N. Greece, iii. 54), these 
 Chalcideans occupied the whole of the great peninsula south of the Mount 
 Khortiatzi, though Chalcidice itself was originally the name of a much smaller 
 district. When Xerxes was retreating from Greece, he left behind him Arta- 
 bazus ; the latter subdued Olynthus and placed it in the hands of the Chalcidians. 
 Ever after, the Bottiseans are found in close alliance with them, cf. ii. 79. 
 vpoKaraKafji^dviiv — properly a military word, meaning, 'to anticipate tk 
 enemy in occupying some position' See ch. 33 c. 
 
 {d.) ax/rov — sc. Perdiccas, cf. i. 59. /uf t' &K\<t)v StKa. Eleven 
 
 generals are quite an unheard-of number, and, besides, many more than are 
 suitable for one thousand men, to say nothing of the five who follow, c. 61. 
 The very ingenious conjecture of Krug., fier' &\Xuv 5', 'with four others^ gets 
 over the difficulty ; and they who know most about numerals in MSS. will 
 make least difficulty in accepting it. It is no valid defence of the old reading 
 to say with Am., that Pericles was employed with nine colleagues in the Samian 
 war, c. 116, for Thuc. there only says that Pericles was one of the ten regular 
 OTpaT-qyol of the state, ZfKarov avrov ffrparxfyovvros, and not that all ten were 
 on duty in the same expedition, and with the same force. The five mentioned. 
 c. 61, would make the number exactly ten. 
 
 Chapter LVIII. — (a.) ^irpaaaov. Most editors agree with Pop. in mark- 
 ing this as spurious. If it be genuine, says Kriig., ixddyres — Sc't? must be con- 
 sidered an anacolouthon of parenthetical character ; or after itmhi], we may add 
 with one MS. a 5». ^k troWov — 'after a long time^ after muck 
 
 negotiation. uirccxfTo. The majority of MSS. have inrfffxovro, 
 
 which Kriig. in his notes appears to accept : for neuter plurals which stand for 
 persons, individual agents, sometimes follow the law of all plurals. Cf. note on 
 ch. 126; iii. 8a; vii. 57. rh tcAt] — ' the authorities* Am. has a 
 
 good note on the origin and various meanings of reXtw, as traced by Damn. La. 
 Homeric, and Wachsmuth. They seem to resolve themselves into the notion of 
 * completing and perfecting,' bringing to a culminating point. rirt 
 
 B'fi — then at last. Kar^ rhv xaiphv rovrov — when they met nith 
 
 this favourable crisis. The first, says Kriig., denotes only the time, the second. 
 the favourable conjunction of circumstances. 
 
 (b.) ravTTiv is the object, fiiav irSKiy hxvpaif the predicate, and is therefore 
 sine articulo, &.votKi<raff6ai 4s "OXvvBov is not an uncommon, 
 
 though elliptical way of speaking — ' to break up their establishments and setth 
 in Olynthus.' See nearly the same notion, Arist. Aves, 1340, cf. ch. 51 b. 
 rrjs 7^s — this, says Kriig., depends upon irtpl r^v \lfitniv BSk^iju, wherewith 
 one may mentally supply rl. The Lake of Bolbe seems now to be called 
 Besicia. Henceforward Olynthus became the principal Chalcidaean city. It 
 was at a subsequent period taken by Philip II., its inhabitants sold for slaves. 
 and its walls razed to the ground. Bloomf., who considers that ivi implies *vp 
 the country,' shows that Olynthus was not, as represented in the maps, on the 
 
 sea shore, but about five miles inland, in a N.E. direction. ^5cy«e 
 
 vfnea-Oai — gave it to them to inhabit, or occupy and cultivate, whether by farm- 
 ing or grazing, and to receive the fruits thereof. Such is the full import of the 
 phrase. Bloomf. 
 
 Chapter LIX. — (a.) ra iirl ®p<^Kir\s. See Grote as quoted above, c. 56. 
 KaraffrdvTfs iiroKefxavv. Either, says Popp,, ' quum pervenissent,' or ' quum 
 conscdissent.* I should prefer the latter, taking the words in a military sense — 
 ' when they had established themselves there,' i. e. secured a base for their opera- 
 tions. &v<t}6iv—from the upper, or, inner country. 
 
 Chapter LX.— (a.) irepX rtf x^op^V- Thucyd. uses both the dative and 
 gen. freely in this meaning. Dat. i. 67, 74, 119, &c. Gen. iii. 102, and with 
 <l)o^e7jdai, viii. 93. rovs irdpras, in all, the German idiom * im 
 
 Ganzen ' corresponds. 
 
 [h.) 'Apia-rfvs. 'Apiareas appellatur, Herod, vii. 137. 'ASct- 
 
 navTov. Est Adeimantus, d 'CiKVJov, Kopivdios ffTparriySs, de quo Herod, viii. 
 5. 59, 61, 94. Pop. iirir-nSeios — is * a fit and proper person for 
 
 anything ; ' hence it naturally slides into our meaning of * proper,' except in 
 such cases as Xen. Anab. i., where it is 'ft and proper to be beaten;' here it de- 
 notes accordance in political sympathies, and is equivalent to <pi\os. Cf. i. 95 ; 
 ii. 49 ; viii. 47. 
 
 (c.) reffffapaKOffTTJ — reaaapaKovra r}fx4pais vffrepov would have been more 
 usual, but we have rpirri vfiepa va-repov, viii. 24, and so in Latin ' tertio anno 
 post,' as well as * tribus annis post.' Popp. We may add that Anglic^— ' forty 
 days after,' and • the fortieth day after,' are alike used. 
 
 Chapter LXI. — (a.) iimrapSvras — 'had come up besides.' Kriig. cf. Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 4, 30. eavruv — sc. of Athenian citizens. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 {h.) avayKuiav — 'compulsory,' i.e. such as circumstances compelled them 
 to make. Cf. exactly the same use of necessarius, Liv. xxii. 2, ' necessarium 
 cubile,' and of avayKa7os, i. 90 ; ii. 70. 
 
 (c.) airaviaravTai iK ttjs MaKf^ovias — 'break up their encampment 
 forth purpose of leaving Macedonia.' So, says Poppo, the words must be taken, 
 as it is impossible that Beroea was not within the limits of Macedonia. The 
 town, it will be remembered, is honourably mentioned in the Act. Apost., and 
 w still called * Veria.' iiri(np4y^avr€ s—' they 7nadc a turn back ' 
 
 ~' mare versus,' says Popp. ; ' gegen Osten,' Krug. Both Arn. and Bloomf. 
 understand Thuc. to mean — 'they turned back again into the regular route 
 from Pydna to Potidaea, from which they had deviated in their attempt to sur- 
 prise Beroea. Now, as the latter place lay in a westerly direction, and some- 
 what inland, such a turn must have brought their line of march toward the east 
 and the sea. All the explanations, therefore, come to much the same thing. 
 The student should, if anxious for further discussion, refer to Grote's elaborate 
 Dote, vol. vi. p. 95. But Plugers in Cobet's Miscellany has pointed out from 
 ^Eschines, ii. 27, that there was a town called 2rpe>a in this neighbourhood; 
 read therefore M 2Tp4\l/aif, which at once explains rov x^P^ov — a brilliant cor- 
 rection. The Koi before Trtipdvavr^s, which Popp. dislikes and Bloomf. would 
 
I 
 
 76 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 obliterate, ought I think to stand. It seems to me to resemble the Koi in flirovris 
 ri Kui Ktvhvvfvfiy, and such phrases, yet not before having made an attempt upn 
 the place. Cf. rrtipav tuv Tcix«»', vii. 12, and rrjs 'Siaaias irfipav, iv. 70. 
 ^„p is— here not in its usual sense, but 'besides,' which meaning it appears to 
 derive from the notion of — 'without counting this or that.' Cf. with Kriig. ii. 
 13; iv. 97 ; iii. 17. I- Gigonis is described by the Schol. as a promontory 
 between Macedonia and Pallene, Leake places it near ' Apanormi promonto- 
 rium.' efiSofi-fiKovra, made up with the forty of Callias and the 
 
 thirty of Archestratus, c. 57. 
 
 Chapter LXII.— (a.) irphs 'OXvvdov. The majority of MSS. have irpi 
 'OKvi'dov; but the allies were not encamped in front of Olynthus ; nor yet, says 
 Popp., close to Olynthus, vphs 'OXvvdcf, but under the walls of Potidaea, on the 
 side that looked towards Olynthus, and this idea can only be expressed by irpJij 
 'OXvvdov. So iii. 21, irphs n\arai<av ; iv. 31, irpbs toO Ki^iivos ; iv. 130, rb irpij 
 ^idivtis. iiu> rr\s ir oAews— to prevent the men from straggliDg 
 
 into the town of Potidaea. Cf. iii. 6 ; v. 1 1 5 ; vi. 50. 
 
 (6.) lxo''T*. The junior student may remark a good instance of a not un- 
 common irphs rh <njiJ.aiv6iJifvov construction, i. e. because rov 'ApiffTfws t) yvwni\ 
 ^y is equivalent to l5o|e ry 'Apicrru, the participle stands in the dative. In- 
 stances are numerous. Popp. gives one from Homer, lib. xiv. 139— 'AxtAAJloJ 
 oXohv KTip rne€7—S€pK0fiev(t). ry i(rdfX(fi . . . Ha> XaQp-ov. This 
 
 appears contradictory to the common usage of the article. It is to be explained, 
 I think, by supposing that in the second case Thuc. uses the expression as 
 employed in the common parlance of the locality, where Jhe article would be 
 omitted, just upon the same principle as it was omitted before the Isthmus of 
 Corinth by the Southern Greeks (i. ic8 ; ii. 9 ; iv. 42), and as it is omitted 
 before thoroughly familiar objects by ourselves. See note, ch. 8 a, and ch. 54a. 
 Elsewhere, in this part of the narrative, Thuc. describes it as a stranger ' cum 
 articulo.' Qi. viKpovs aviiKov-ro. Cf. c. 54. ff<pas. Aristeus and 
 
 his own troops. irontv — to make them to be — bring them between, 
 
 1.1090. Ma/fe'Sovas— here an adjective. Poppo. Cf."EAAT)m, 
 
 Xeu. Anab. vi. 3, 26. 
 
 (c.) rovs MaKeScJj/as tirirc'ay. This word appears to be used adjectively 
 here and in c. 63, oi maKiUv^s iVittjs. So also we have oi"E\A7ji/6s itcAtcwtw. 
 Xen. Anab. vi. 5, 26, and such phrases as T^v"EAAa5a yK<a<jauv. 
 
 Chapter LXIIL— (a.) biroripufff ^laKiv^vvficrri xop-h^as—in which 
 of the two directions he should run the risk of going. The subj. after rjirSpnfff ^^ 
 given by Bekker for the future,— j^eiio-ft. It is remarked that xwp'J*^''" ^^8^^ 
 have been employed, or the word altogether omitted, as in vii. i ; viii. 47- 
 as is 4\dxi<rrov x«^P '<'»'—' ^^io «* narrow as space as possible,' because the 
 denser the column, the more easily they would force their way through the 
 enemy. Popp. points out that x^^P'o" stands for ' spatium,' ii. 77, 7^- '^^^ 
 transposition for ^$ ws i\dxi(rrov is to be noticed. See Matth. Gr. Gr. § 4^'; 
 and cf. with G. iii. 46, St* iy fipaxvrdT<f,. ^ 1 6. a a (X 6 at— force hu 
 
 way into PotidcBa. x^^-'hv—W.t. ' the claw of a bird.' Here the 
 
 * mole,' or ' stone breakwater,' which, as Am. points out, after being constructe 
 
 Chap. 64.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 n 
 
 just below the sea-wall of the ancient towns, in order to strengthen them, was 
 afterwards continued so as to narrow the entrance of the harbour. It projected 
 like a talon or claw, and hence its name. Aristeus could not enter the regular 
 (rates of the town, as the Athenians had probably cut off the retreat, and in 
 passing along the mole he was exposed to missiles from the ships. 8ta 
 
 is undoubtedly ' through the sea' as is easily intelligible from the position of 
 the mole. Others have rendered it prceter vel jropter mare, which meaning 
 Popp. says only exists in the poets, Herod., and the ancient writers. But 
 
 see xl. c. 
 
 {}).) Kara<l>av4s. We may either, says Pop., understand x(*>P^ov or n. But 
 the neuter form of the predicate need not be tied down to any particular word. 
 We may translate — ' in sight' which would imply that the places were recipro- 
 cally visible, which sense seems to be required here. Pop. refers to 4iri<pav€s, 
 said of Decelea, vii. 19, which is apparently taken in an active sense, * latus late 
 pp)spectans,' Tac. Hist. iii. 60. Kriig. has ' ein iibersichtlicher Kaum ; ' and cf. 
 7rT)\w8€s, vi. loi. iyiyviTo . . . ijpdTj. The tenses vary, as the 
 
 sense requires — as soon as the battle began (of a continuous action), and the 
 standards were uplifted (of an act done once for all). Cf. Kari<nTd<rd7] infra. 
 Vide Append, on Aorist. SiOToxoGs. Cf. xl. c. 
 
 (c.) vTcoff-ndv^ovs — 'under a truce,' the technical term. This was the 
 regular admission of defeat upon the part of those who requested the permission. 
 Cf. c. 54. airidavov. The exceedingly interesting inscription upon 
 
 the Athenians who fell in this battle may still be seen in the British Museum, 
 where it was placed by Lord Elgin. It is engraved upon a small stone found in 
 the plain of the Academy, and is much mutilated. See Bockh's Restorations, 
 Corpus Inscript. i. p. 300, and Arnold's note. It forms part of the subject of an 
 I interesting lecture by the Professor of Anc. History, Oxford. 
 
 Chapter LXIY. — {a.) rh iK rod lad/xov rt7xos. Compare KKeapxos 
 (fol ol i^ iKfivov, Xen. Atiab. 1. ii. 15. The preposition here is equivalent to fl, 
 I or af), a parte, as in ' Pastor ab Amphryso,' and the whole means ' the wall on 
 the side of the Isthmus ' — i. e. the wall on the outer or northern side towards 
 Olynthus ; as towards the close of the chapter, rh 4k rrjS UaWrii/ris is the wall 
 \on tlie side of Pallene — i.e. the south or inner wall. The same wall had been 
 I called rh is TlaX\i\vi]v, but the difference arises from the different point of view 
 — « implying the wall, which the spectator sees when looking from Pallene {iK 
 T[a.KKi]vi\s) ; is, the wall which itself looks towards Pallene. It is clear, says 
 Ara,, from Herod, viii. 129, that Potidaea occupied the whole space across the 
 neck of land from sea to sea, and that, consequently, the Athenians on one side 
 could not communicate with those on the other. a.iror€ix>-<^o-vr€s. 
 
 This is the technical term for a wall built for the purpose of cutting off commu- 
 nication from a place, and this is the sense conveyed by the preposition, cf. viii. 
 16, vii. 6. The imperfect i<ppox>povv implies that they regularly garrisoned and 
 [continued to guard it. Si'xa, an adverbial predicate — in two different 
 
 Y^'^^'^i'ions — apart, Kriig., cf. vi. 100. drelx^o'rov must be consi- 
 
 I dered as equivalent to ouk a.TroreixiO'rov. 
 
 [b.) *A<l>vrios. Kriig. remarks that this is an Ionic genitive like Tod^ios, 
 I IV- 107, and KylSios, v. 51. So even in Xenophon, Ag. ii. 18, we have Kpiv<rios, 
 
78 
 
 NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 67.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 79 
 
 The town was situated on the shore towards the E., near the present village of 
 Athyto, Leake iii. 156. dpfiufifvos—lit. starting from, i.e. making 
 
 that his starting-place, or head-quarters— the regular military term, as in 
 Xenophon, passim. Cf. iii. 31, iv. 51 ; so also 4<t>opfiuv is the usual term for a 
 naval blockade. Cf. i. 1 1 6- 1 42. i.fi<poT4pwe€v refers to the two 
 
 walls an land, specifietl at the beginning of the chapter. viKap^'to 
 
 he victors: Engelman well remarks that this transmutation of a transitive into 
 iin intransitive verb, is common to all languages. Cf. iKivBfpovv, ' to he liherators' 
 1. 69. iiSiKovfjLfv, ice are guilty, iii. So 'amare' \s'to be in love: and trinkeix 
 in German, as ' to drink' in English, means ' to he a drunkard: and IviKa is said 
 of the Olympic victor. 
 
 Chapter LXV. — (a.) a'Korfix''<f^^^<^'ns—Ka\—%x^v. Remark the con- 
 nexion of a genitive absolute with a nominative by Kai : the same takes place 
 with T€ KoL also. Popp. quotes similar examples, c. 67 ; iv. 29, 100, 124; v. 
 116; vi. 93. &\Xo K. T. \. — or if anything else, contrary to expecta- 
 
 tion, turn up. Kriig. says, we should have anticipated HWoOfv, but, as in the 
 version given, &\\o is more indefinite. Kriig. himself quotes v. 80, koL Hiroaa 
 aW-hKov Tro\c>¥ ^ €? Ti &\Ko dxov. There is a question between the readings 
 Tapct \6yov and Trapdkoyoif. Bl. argues, that as Thuc. uses the substantive irapd- 
 A070S, it is unlikely that he would also employ the same word as an adjective 
 tnascidine. rh iieX rovrois — ' tJiat which was to folloic next vpcn 
 
 these things *—4. e. the next steps to be taken. rh 1 1 (w € i/— ' what 
 
 was to he expected from abroad: Poppo says the expression equals ra €|w, but 
 this seems inaccurate, as the above translation is meant to show. 
 
 {b.) Tck &KXa. This construction may be regarded as a sort of extension of 
 the cognate" accusative : so Kriig., who considers it equivalent to ir6\€fiov voM- 
 ufiv. Tr. • he both took part in the other operations of the war: 
 26p/iuAia>i'. This gen. has been considered as dependent both upon ir(JX€» and 
 iroWovs. Perhaps the last is more probable, as the Athenians have not lately 
 been named. At v. 18, we find them in subjection to Athens. The place ^ras 
 situated in Sithonia, Herod, vii. 122, and is now called 2to 'OpfivMa, according 
 to Leake, iii. 153. ^* fVv UtXoirSwnaov i-Kpiffffei — a common 
 
 form of condensation, cf. c. 51, on irfKfvra is vvktu. Popp. also compares 
 Ke\fv(iv is r^v AaKeSalfxova, iv. 108, arpariav i-irayyfWuv is robs ffvfinix^vt, 
 y-^[ iiy_ Stttj— for this, 8ir«s has been conjectured, because the 
 
 latter is universally the word employed by Thuc. after vpdffffeiv. But there is 
 no reason in grammar, nor in the nature of things, why we should not also 
 employ ^V- -^^^ Kriig. observes that we have gry rprftry, iv. 128, and Tfoifa 
 3in;, vi. 93. * Bottice, or Bottica, denotes the new country of the Bottiseans, to 
 the east of Potidsea and the Gulf of Therma, where they had settled after they 
 had been driven out of their old country by the Macedonians [Thuc. ii. 99]- 
 But Bottica denotes their old country, situated much more to the westward, 
 between the rivers Axius and Lydias, of which Herod, speaks, vii. 123, HI- 
 In the Thracian invasion, Sitalces overran Bottica, but never penetrated as far 
 as Bottisea, ii. 99, 100, loi.' Arnold. 
 
 Chapter LXVL— (a.) irpoaty. The irphs refers to the previously-men- 
 
 tioned causes of quarrel about Corcyra. ^we^^ciiyfi. The form 
 
 ^v^f)w(T<D for ^v^^iiau occurs, says Bl., also in Dio Cassius, 186, 62. 1247, 53. 
 6 ir6\ffios ^vvf^lxvyei. In all probability it is a direct imitation of this. Kriig. 
 cf. d ir6\fixo5 Kan^pdyn, Arist. Eq. 644. avaKwxv — a graphic term, » 
 
 'rt hiding hack;' sometimes also employed of a temporary suspension of hos- 
 tilities. l^i<i — ' on their own account,' i. e. as Popp. explains, per se, 
 ' 7ion consultis sociis* 
 
 Chapter LX VII. — {a.) iv6vTwv — 565t<JT6s. Cf. c. 55 a. Trcpl 
 
 T(^ x^P^V — ^'S we, ^ being alarmed about the place: See with the dative, i. 6, 
 and ii. 5. (rirovSds. See c. 53 a. 
 
 {b.) iprjyov — egged on, or urged on the war. Kpv<pa Kriig. 
 
 connects with irpea^evS^ivoi, whereas Hermann, ad Elect, v. 1059, and most 
 others, attach it to ivriyov. His words are ' Particulse juev— 5« interdum ad ea 
 tantura ipsa, quae opposita inter se sunt, referuntur, manente constructione 
 participii.' Kriig.'s method avoids this difficulty, but is less obvious. Arnold 
 believes that ras <nrov5ds must refer to the thirty years' truce, and indeed, when 
 the word occurs thus with the article, this peace is commonly meant. It has 
 been objected by Miiller, jEginctica, p. 180, and Goller, that this cannot be so, 
 as iEgina had been reduced by Athens before the commencement of the thirty 
 years' peace (cf. i. 108), and he thinks that reference is made to the general 
 compact, entered into by the Greeks after Plataea. Cf. ii. 72, iii. 68. Kriig. 
 adheres to the former opinion, conjecturing that in some way or other provision 
 had been made in the thirty years' peace by the Lacedaemonians for the outo- 
 vofik of -iEgina. See similar provisions for the Olynthians and others in the 
 peace of Nicias, v. 18; and of the same opinion is Arnold. Grote, vol. vi. 
 p. 104, is undecided. * Miiller's opinion,' he says, * might seem to be counte- 
 nanced by the allusion to JEgina. in the speech of the Thebans, iii. 64 ; but on 
 the other hand, if we consult i. 115, it will appear possible that the wording of 
 the thirty years' truce may have been general, as airoSovvai 5e *Mrivaiovs ocra 
 i\(ivai TlfKoirovvrja-ltov ; at any rate, the .^ginetans may have pretended that by 
 the same rule as Athens gave up Nisea, Pegae, &c., she ought also to renounce 
 iEgina. However, we must recollect that the one plea does not exclude the 
 other : the .S^ginetans may have taken advantage of both in enforcing their 
 prayer for interference. This seems to have been the idea of the Schol.' 
 
 (c.) Ka\ tt tIs ri &\\o — * and any of the allies that had any other wrong 
 to complain of: Jelf, § 45, 3. rls &\\os, the proposed alteration, is inferior to 
 the original reading, for any other injury is the prominent part of the idea. 
 rhv (luddra. The ordinary assembly, consisting of all Spartan citizens who 
 had attained to the age of thirty years. Am. Popp. points out that it is called 
 1 kK\ij<Tia rS)v AaKtSai/jLovluv, c. 87, and rh vXridos avTwv, c. 72. It is so called 
 probably, to distinguish it from 7] fiiKpa iKKArja-iay which was composed only of 
 the Spartiate Peers, or 'O/xoTot, to the exclusion of the Lacedaemonians. See 
 on the subject of these assemblies, Miiller's Dor. vol. ii. ch. 5, and the remarks 
 of Grote, vol. vi. p. 105. Remark the usage of irotew in iroffta-aurcs, so like that of 
 our own verb to Tnake. Cf. i. 139, iv. 118. \ip.4v(av etpyfaOai. 
 
 This celebrated decree, which inflicted so much distress upon the Athenians, is 
 much harped upon by Aristophanes. The student should refer to the Achar. 
 
8o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ (jg^p. 69.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 81 
 
 
 
 vv 477 729 752,758. TheSchol. on i?«»<?,r. 273, preserves tlio terms of the 
 decree, Mnc^4as /i^r' ayopas, fx^r^ doKdaavs, H-'^r ipr^ipov fi^rix^iv. See also 
 Plut. Vit. Peric. c. 29. 
 
 Chapter LXVIII.-(a.) rh iriffrSv. The reliahility, if there were such a 
 word in default of which render good faith, layaute, it means the trustworthi- 
 ness of their conduct in all the relations of internal policy and private hfe. ^ Cf. 
 T(i marhv tt}s dX7?0€iay, Soph. Trach. v. 398, cf. Jelf, § 436, 7- «'^'- 
 
 ffror^povs-less inclined to suspicion, or, ' less ready to believe us when we so>j, 
 activo sensu, less ready to believe,' cf. iv. 17, viii. 66. ^^ touj 
 
 d A X tJ 5 . This is generally connected with A^itTTorcpo w— ' less suspicious towards 
 all the rest of the world, in the event of our saying anything against th^n. Others 
 give a different force to is rohs ^Xois-^ore incredulous towards the rest ofns, 
 if we have anything to say. Both are possible. To the tirst it has been objected 
 that the Corinthians were going to accuse the Athenians alone. But this is 
 surely futile, for the general form in which the expression is couched is pre- 
 ciselv what we should have anticipated in a rhetorical statement. Nor is 
 Pcppo's assertion that rovs aXAols (in the second method of taking the words 
 cannot include the Corinthians, because ^fius is subsequently distinguished 
 from roh, ^^/xaxous roi<rS., anything more than a hypercriticism ; for of course 
 it is possible for them sometimes to identify themselves with the rest, and 
 sometimes not. His own way of taking the words is to connect them ^ith 
 X4yc.fx^p-^ if we have anything to say against the rest: But here the first given 
 obiection would apply, and Popp. seems sensible of it. for he conjectures ro.s 
 'Adnuaiovs-^nd surely in this aise we should have had &XXovs sine articuk 
 The ^v Ti \4ya>ixty is a sort of euphemistic expression with which Kriig. well 
 compares Ar. Ach. 579, ^-yy<^f^vy H^, ^l ^ra^xhs t>v .U6u r. Kdaru>f.vK<iMv. 
 aw<ppo(rvyvv-' moderation: See an explanation of what is meant by the ^ro^a, 
 ^ g a J iifjLaeia—d. Sheppard's Theophrast. ch. ix. p. 115. 
 
 (b) r^v fidd-naiP ^ttoicTtc is said to be identical with ^/.a^ed^erf, but 
 there 'is I think, always some shade of difference between the simple verb, and 
 the cognate noun with irou'«. The latter seems to dwell more upon the action 
 expressed by the verb : tr. took the trouble to inform yourselves. t«^ 
 
 X^y6yru>, K.r. \. Am. has a very long note, following Pop. ed. maj. wherein 
 he says that the gen. X*7^vt«. depends upon the latter part of the sentence, and 
 that «s X€7ou(ri is exactly equivalent to t^, xiy^iv, the gen. expressing that con- 
 nexion of the subject spoken of with the verb which is expressed in English bj 
 the prep ' in.' But it has always seemed to me much more simple to make the 
 gen governed by hrctvo^ln, and &s kiyovffi one of those recurrences to the 
 directa oratio so common-' You suspected the speakers and (declared) thatthq 
 are speaHng for their private interest: lii<Popa slightly difle^ 
 
 from its use in the last ch., where it was 'points of difference; here it is, 
 ' points which make a difference: See note on M^ n a{.T<? 5.a<^e>€., 111. A^• 
 {v rif ip'^,t-<^ctuaUy involved in the eiM ; this is the primary force ot ne 
 preposition, as may be seen in such phrases as ii^^ar^C^iv TrarpfSos, Sophocles, 
 0. T. 825. Pop. renders it apud, coram. 
 
 (c.) a (Ravels—' if they were committing this wrong in a comer: 
 ovK €i5(J<n. Dat. commodi, ' as to persons ignorant of the fact; cf. ii. 3^ ; ^^^ 
 
 59. Not^ the absence of the article. iroAejU^o-oi/rai for iro\€fxve'f}(rovTat, 
 
 Poppo. This is one of the cases which will illustrate the way in which a 
 middle sense passes into something like a passive one. See the observa- 
 tions, iii. 40, and Jelf, § 364, and transl. britig war upon themselves, viii. 43, 
 and SiairuXf/jL-ftafnOai, vii. 14. 
 
 {d.) ov y^p &u—*for otheruise they would not; supply with Poppo, ei /xJ) 
 i[poirap((TKiv:ian4voi ^aav ^s v6\ifiou. viro\a06vT€5. This is ex- 
 
 plained by the Scholiast bf^dfievoi, and by Thorn. Mag. Trpo\afi6in(s, but I have 
 little doubt but that Stephanus was right in thinking that vnh contained the 
 sense, clatn, et per insidias, an opinion which has been repeated by several 
 editors. Cf. with Kriig. i. 121, 143. airoxpvtreai. A. interprets 
 
 this, ' to give you the full benefit of your dominion in Thrace; and it is certain 
 that such a use of mrh may be supported. But this does not seem to me called 
 for by the sense. It is better to take the old interpretation, ' to avail yourself 
 of,' ' to reap the bejiefit of: Goll. compares aTro^v, i. 2, and Kriig. vi. 17 ; vii. 
 42. So, says Popp., the Latins used abuti, libere uti. rh iiiv, which 
 
 might have been ^ iiiv, referring to Kepicupo, is attracted to x^P^ov. 
 
 Chapter LXIX. — (a.) Kparvvai. A somewhat poetic and rhetorical word, 
 cf. iii. 18, 82. On the subject compare c. 90 and 107. Kriig. airo- 
 
 ffT6poOyT€s— active voice upon the principle of • Qui facit per alium facit per 
 se,' as is explained in the next section. 
 
 [b.) (tirtp K.T.K. Arn, quotes with approval Hermann's dictum, 'ciiirtp 
 hKu ffoi, dicimus ei de quo non certo scimus quid ei placeat, aut de quo id 
 nescire simulamus,' and renders, ' if he makes a pretention of being the deliverer 
 of Greece, we cannot say whether he does make it, but if he does.' This I believe 
 to be wrong. (X-Kip, as its form imports (cf. Uir^p, ch. 8 b, and Donaldson, 
 y.Crat. § 178), will be found upon a careful induction, more especially in the 
 philosophers, always to assume the hypothesis which it makes ; sometimes, it is 
 true, only temporarily and for the sake of argument, but still always to assume 
 It, especially if they carry off the honour of being the liberators of Greece, as I 
 suppose you think you do. I was induced to examine the question, owing to 
 an assertion in a note by the learned editor of the Agamemnon (Peile), ad v. 29, 
 'f?irfp is used when the proposition is doubtful.' But after the largest induc- 
 tion which I have been enabled to make, I find that tlirtp always assumes the 
 hypothesis either from its intrinsic truth, or simply for the sake of argument ; 
 and it is from cases of the last sort that the notion of its doubtfulness arises. 
 Numerous instances of this will present themselves to the reader throughout 
 Thucydides. But it is still more important to trace the usage in strictly argu- 
 mentative writers like Aristotle. It will be found that he is perpetually stating 
 "is principles in a delicate way by tXinp, while his mere U^ai are introduced 
 by «'. The real state of a disputed fact, he, for the purpose of avoiding dogma- 
 tism, continually introduces by dAA' tXirep—e.g. Men do not wish for the good 
 01 an inanimate object, except so far forth as may be desirable for themselves, 
 h(\o:ov TV ofi/y $ov\(ffdai rayaed, oAA' flTTfp adC^aBai fiovXerai aMu, Xva avrhs 
 j Xp. Here (tirep obviously and necessarily assumes the supposition contained in 
 pi^^fTot. See again Eth. Nich. lib. vii. c. 7, x. 3. To go through the instances 
 which I have selected would be tedious ; but even in the very case quoted by 
 
82 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book U 
 
 ^ /I-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 83 
 
 Peile, ad loc., tUtp ri 7' ^cttI rrjs kkvOflas adfvos, (E. T. v. 369, the ' vis veril 
 tatis" is assumed as a foundation for what follows. A long note will perhaps 
 1)6 pardoned, as the matter is of great importance from the use of the wor.l 
 in arguments, and Dean Stanley, I perceive, in his valual>le work on the 
 Corinthians, has again reproduced the assertion aliout its being a particle of 
 uncertainty. The error arises from contrasting it solrhj with et 7«, which 
 assumes the same hypotliesis in a more emphatic, and, so to speak, deictic and 
 lively way. Peile himself has elsewhere said, * If the original notion of ir*pl be 
 connected with that of its derivative, 'Ktpi(i<T6s excess, we shall l»e led, consider- 
 ing ir€p as a kindred particle, to the same int<)rpretation, t6(tov irfp — thus )nuch, 
 and more ; full as miu'hJ A<jatn. v. 141. a^ioxns — nearly as a^t«|Ufl. 
 
 Kriig. cf. i. 138, ii. 2, iii. 37. ip^ptrai, I believe to bo a metaphor 
 
 from the games ; as wo say, * hear off the price.' See Soph. FJectra, 969, olcfi, 
 and 1086, <p4p€iv. Others tr. ^ ostentatiousljf set forth \' cf. prae so fenmt. If 
 a^ioaorts be taken activo sensu, then we must tr. ^ si virtutem jmJam sihi vindicai' 
 as Popp. ; but this is not so gotxl : for, as Kriig. indicates, cf. ii. 11, with ii. 60, 
 and iii. 53. oi yhp Spwvrfs. 7'he doers, the active part//, or w 
 
 may be possible to supply &8tKa to the participle from dSiKou/iePo, an«l tr. 'thr 
 urrtmfj-doers' Either is preferable to disconnecting 01 and Spuvres, and making 
 the first here a demonstrative pronoun, as it sometimes is l)ef()ro S4. Tr. there- 
 fore, /or the mrong-doers are coming against persons v^ho have not yet made up 
 their mind, with their own measures a/read// takin, and not merely threat) vimj : 
 rather than,/(^r they already acting, are coming against, ^r. ^cAA7)<nr 
 
 denotes a menacing attitude ; as A. explains, holding up the stick, but never 
 striking. Cf. iv. 126. 
 
 (c.) «co( — 'a not uufrequent use of nal, by which it is nearly equivalent to 
 ^Ad, immo, the literal sense being ' and now,' as in Arist. Pac. 402, nai m 
 ^pdffw Ti Trpayna Stivhy Koi fifya,' Bl. kot' oKiyov — sfejt hy step. 
 
 creeping on. Kriig. well compares kot* 6\lyop rh irpanov (fnr'nrTovaa, Plat. 
 Tinueus, 85, d. rh avalffdrirov — ^your inse7idhility,' ^yourvnxt 
 
 of perception of what i^ going on about you.' Kriig. remarks that the word is 
 not used by Thucyd. in so contemptuous a sense as by Demosthenes. Cf. i. 82. 
 vi. 86. This seems true of the later writers. See an examination of the character. 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. x. yLtKKi\an. Cf. supra, a. 
 
 {d.) ici^oXtiS — * safe men ,' lit. ' such as cannot be tripped up in wrestling. 
 Cf. <ppovuv yh.p ol raxfis oi/K iL<T<pa\us, (Edip. Tyr. 617. Stv refers ot 
 
 course to u/uets, and must be resolved into its constituents — ' thongh, as it ncv 
 seons, what was said of you transcendid the reality.' In Thuc. the prrpetual 
 antithesis between \6yoi and %pyov must be rendered sometimes in one way, and 
 sometimes in another: u)v has been taken for the neuter — the common ref>rt\ 
 about which things ; but I cannot believe this to be right. •rrpoairai'TTJffoij 
 
 — ' before the preparations made by you suitably encountered' or rather, ' <?«''«'• 
 pated him on the way.' The infinitive, says Popp., stands after irpJrepov ^J. !»' 
 commonly as after irpiv. Cf. note, ch. 39 b., and vi. 58, and Jelf. So atior 
 vffT^pov ^. vi. 4. Kal 4s rvxo-s . . . KUTaffr^vai. Popp. tr. Fortun^l 
 
 casus subire. The meaning of the whole is, undoubtedly, to expose yoursthes f''| 
 the influence of accident by struggling against your enemies when they havebecom 
 more powerful, and not before — i.e. by delaying the struggle until they are so. Cl.| 
 4it\ ra.sa<pavui 4\TTlhas Ka6i(rravrai,\. lo^. avrhv irepX avT<f <r(pa\iVTa-l 
 
 jnior from shipwTeck, that he was the rock upon which he himself made .ship- 
 k—i.e. his own errors were for the most part the cause of his failure. Com- 
 pnre vi. 33, irtpX <T<pi<Tiv avrols to ttAc/w -nraluaiv, and Ilerod. ix. loi, /i); vfpX 
 Kapdovlcf iTTalffT] 7} "EAAos. 
 
 (e.) ai vfifTfpat 4\iTiSfs. The pronoun stands, as often, for the objective 
 genitive— ^//i? hopes of which you are the object; cf. ch. 33 ; Jelf, § 652, 6. 
 Tjj'oy. Reference is made, perhaps, to the Thasians (i. loi), the Eul)oeans 
 (i. 114), certainly to the Potid?eatans (i. 58), Popp. a\ri<^—\% 
 
 'charge ' in general, here, a * friendly remonstrance.' Kar-nyopia 
 
 has a more special and forensic sense— an accusation at law. 
 
 Chapter LXX. — (a.) &^io i — it is our desert — we may claim. t cD 1/ 5 1 o - 
 
 ipfp6i'Twi/. Cf. note, c. 68 b. ; tr. as 5ia(p6puv—' the interests which are at stake 
 king great : ' iho ^ia<p4povTas which follows in, ' differing in character.' Some 
 coninient^itors, indeed, suppose that the psoudo rwv Sia(l>ep6vTa>v meant the same 
 thing. olovs vfi'iv must be taken in close connexion with d ayiiiv tarai. 
 
 Cf infra. 
 
 (/>.) off IS 4Trivori<Tai is 'quick at devising novelties ;' the ^ttI in compo.sition 
 denotes something over and above what has been before: fmm the o^us is 
 derived by zeugma another adjective, which governs ads^^Lv. ' The meaning of 
 'oliis, sharp, when applied to the latter half of the sentence, is in the nature 
 of a sarcasm,' Grote, vol. vi. p. 110. Goller's idea of understanding iKavol in- 
 stead of oi,us, is, I think, quite unnecessary. iniyvwvai has reference to 
 hivoriaai, and the proposition has the same force, to devise fresh measures. 
 H'^KcffdaL—' to fallow out.' ' A meaning,' says Kriig., * and construction which 
 I am unable elsewhere to find.' TropA Svya/miv ToKfirjrai—darinq 
 bei/oiid their power. The words which follow I understand to mean, 'venture- 
 some beyond what their sober judgment sanctions,' and arc explained by the anti- 
 thetical clause, -rris yptafi-qs /xTjSe roTis 0€0aioi5 iriaTevaai, to have no eonjidence 
 even in such schemes as t/ieir judgment sanctions, cf. Jelf, 442 a. Many other 
 translations have been suggested ; but I have little doubt as to the correctness 
 of the above. rh Sc vix4Tfpo v—it is your way, or your characteristic, 
 to perform what falls short of your power— i. e. not to effect all you are able to 
 effect. Livy seems to refer to this (as Bl. observes): ' Atheniensium populum 
 fama est celerem et supra vires audacem esse ad conandum ; Lacedjjemonionim 
 cuDctatorem, et vix in e-a quibus fidit ingredientem,' xlv. 23. 
 
 (c.) fic\\T)Tds, air 0^71 fi-nral, ivdrffiordrovs. All these words are of 
 peculiar significance ; on the first, see sup. c. 69 b. ; the second means, 'roamers 
 af'road;' the third, 'stay at homes.' diroZntiuv and ip^fitiv were used at 
 
 Athens to express our ideas ' at home ' and ' abroad.' 4^4pxovTai 
 
 './WW out their adva7itages to the utmost,' Popp. tr. longissime progrediuntur. 
 Si verba explicanda essent longissime victoriam persequuntur, ex tribus pessimis 
 membranis scribendum esset 4ir€^4pxovrai. The translation I have given is not 
 to be restricted to actual pursuit of an enemy. airovala. Kriig. remarks that 
 tMs does not refer merely to military campaigns. avairlirr ovaiv. This 
 
 ^erb denotes the action of a man who throws himself back from his task in phy- 
 sical exhaustion or despondency. Arn. says it is a strange mistake of Athenaeus to 
 suppose that its primary meaning is Tnental discouragement, for in all languages 
 
 G2 
 
84 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 CB00fKl.BcHAP. 71.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 85 
 
 terms expressive of mental operations are borrowed from those of the body. iTiis 
 is quite true ; but it seems a no less strange mistake of his own to deriTf the 
 notion * dispirited ' from ' the movement of a rower who throws himself back 
 to give force to his stroke.' Neither does Athenaeus loc. cit. say so much, but 
 ^iri y^ux^s iffTiv o!ov advfjL€7v. irl ^i ro'is ffdffiaffiv k. r. \. The 
 
 antithesis here expressed is, though somewhat difficult to translate, easy 
 enough to understand. ' They are as reckless of their persons as if they did 
 not belong to them, when fighting for their country, but they are most thorough 
 masters of their intellect, and employ all its powers in her service '—i.e. hus- 
 banding all its resources, and allowing none other the advantage of them. The 
 orators seemed to have admired the sentiment, for it has been imitated by Iso- 
 crates, FaJiegyric, p. 58, and Lysias, Orat.funeb. p. 87. See Arn. and Kriig. 
 Some have regarded oiKuordrri as if it belonged to v6\€^—' most entirely tk 
 jyroperty of their country ; ' but if the antithetical word a^J^orpiundrois has refer- 
 ence to the subject of the verb, this must also. 
 
 (d.) 4 ^4 \ duff IV. This is Poppo's and Bekker s reading from most MSS. 
 He quotes Soph. Track, v. 506, iiriXdov &60V i7t6»'«i/. Kriig. has ht^- 
 (Kdoxnu. oXiya . . . wpd^avrts. The construction seems to be, 
 
 Tjyovvrai rvx^'iv wpdJiavTis bxlya irphs rot fi4K\ovra. They think they have 
 chanced to effect hut little as compared with what they will hereafter effect. ' Ac- 
 cording to Matthise, the participle vpdiaurfs stands for the infin. vpd^ai, as 
 dependent upon Tryovvrai.' BL, who tr., whatever they so pursue as to gain, then 
 esteem trifling compared with what they may chance in future to attain to. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 683. Peile believes ' the correct version of this difficult passage ' to be, 
 And whatever indeed having projected, they shall not have followed out, then 
 reckon (their own to lose, i.e.) an actual loss of their own property; hut 
 whatever having followed up they shall have acquired, (they reckon) a trifle wkn 
 compared with what they were to have succeeded in effecting,' as if in the last 
 clause it had been irpbs & ifxtWov tux**" "^pdiavris. Cf. iii. 20 : hoL ifxiWov, ol 
 fi4v rivts a.fxapr'fiffeffeou, ol Sc trX^iovs Teu{€rr0ai rov aXridoSs Xoyiff^iov- iii. 2J, 
 Kol i^iXXov bdlfauv K. T. X. inXiipuxray r^v XP«^«»'- The true aorist. 
 
 denoting an act not restricted to any special time, past, present, or future, 
 which we somewhat clumsily express by a present. They supply the deficiency, 
 i. e., are wont to supply. See Appendix ii. Siv hv yvuanv. The whole 
 
 may be roirwv iv hv ri{V i'icixfipV(riv irojf t(r0oi yvuxriv, or rovruv & &v yvuffiv- 
 Krug. prefers the last. iirix^ipn<riv «. t. X.— because they imic 
 
 diately set themselves about attempting whatever they have made up their wi«(^« 
 about,— i.e., make their attempt an immediate one. Kriig. cf. ^Trtxe^p^'^'s t«» 
 *EiriiroXw , vii. 43. 'The attempt upon Epipolae.* 
 
 («.) fiox^odcriv, &s our word toil, or sometimes TnoU, is somewhat poetic, 
 and as Kriig. remarks, scarcely used in Attic prose ; but it seems to have a 
 peculiar appropriateness here with aluvos, cf. Hom. Od. E. zoz, cf. ii. 39- ^ 
 speeches Xenophon frequently employs it. Here it governs ravra. Cf. Eur. Hr- 
 V. 59, rl ^ox0€*5 TttOra; k too- flat. Not« the present, 'being alua'ji'i 
 
 in the act of acquiring: i pr if y— Think nothing else a holiday, than I 
 
 the doing what the occasion requires. There seems some tacit reference to the 
 practice of the Lacedemonians, who, as on the occasion of Marathon, would not | 
 go forth upon even the most necessary expedition during the time of a festival 
 
 On this account, I think Reiske's interpretation of the word, delicias, voluptatem, 
 is incorrect ; and Dio Cassius probably overlooked the allusion when he sub- 
 stituted the ivBaifioylay in the imitated passage, xxxviii. 37. Cf. Miiller's Dor., 
 l]ook ii. vfipvKfvai. 'To have been born,' ' to have been brought 
 
 into the world.' Cf. Xen. Mem. ii. i, 9 : ^ovXofjL4vovs iroXXa npdyixaTa tx^**' 
 tJnovs T€ Kal &XX01S vap4xeip. 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) rairjis ii4vroi k.t.X. This and the following 
 sentence are confessedly difficult. I will first mention what I myself imagine 
 to be the meaning, and which I now find to be nearly that given by Bloomf. : 
 ^ And yd when such a State as this stands, as it were, in battle array against 
 you, Lacidcemonians, ye continue (5io) to procrastinate ; and think not that 
 •peace endures longest for those men, who go not indeed beyond what is just in the 
 matter of armament, yet plainly show that their resolution is, if they be wronged^ 
 not to permit it ; but ye hold fair dealing to consist in doing no violence to others, 
 while ye prevent injury to yourselves by repelling it when attempted J The second 
 clause of the sentence would naturally have commenced with oUa-Oe 8€, and con- 
 tained some other opinion concerning the nature of a durable peace, ascribed to 
 the Lacedaemonians. But with that love of variety which we have so often 
 remarked (cf. ch. 38 c), as characteristic of Greek composition, the antithetical 
 clause is cast into a new form. ttJ irapaffKevfi I have translated ' armament,* 
 for want of a single word which better expresses its meaning ; but it must be 
 understood to include all acts and measures which might awaken the jealousy 
 of a neighbouring government. Bl. says, ' I must still adhere to my opinion 
 that TT) irapaaKivri means in vita institutioneJ rh Xxrov pffiers — lit. ' ye allot 
 or deal out the equitable, — i. e., equity.' The translation given to it is therefore 
 quite as tenable as Am.'s, to deal justly, or Donaldson's, ' ye lead a life of 
 (asy indifference: or Poppo's, * cequitatem colitis: an.vv6yt.evoi can scarce mean 
 ' suflering harm, by attempting to defend yourselves ; * for by no code is self- 
 defence considered as inconsistent with justice ; and again, it is going much too 
 far to say that the Lacedaemonians would not defend themselves, which in this 
 case the orator would imply. /SAdTTTco-Oot, says Donaldson ( A^ (7. § 454), is 
 
 a certain degree of harm or mischance, a hindrance or Eiccidental harm ; (this I 
 hare pointed out with examples in a note upon ^sch. Ag. v. 119. Terminalia 
 ii.) never an injury of that kind which can cause resentment. The present 
 passage has, he thinks, been misinterpreted by all commentators. His own 
 version is, — ' It is not your opinion that those persons enjoy peace the lo7igest, who 
 UkUe they act justly, show they have made up their minds not to submit to injury, 
 mtyou observe the rule of non-interference, — i.e., you are strictly neutral or im- 
 partial, on the principle of not hurting others, and of avoiding the inconveniences 
 to which reprisals would subject you: 
 
 {b.) apxaiirpova, exactly corresponding to ' old-fashioned: 
 Tpbs avTovs — when compared with them. A very natural ellipse for trphs ra 
 UriTTjScvjuaTa avra>v. Li a similar manner, r4xvris stands for ficTrep r4xvris 
 «1 Tck 4Tfiyiyv6yLiva Kparu, Bl. is scarce right in saying with respect to the 
 government of r4xvris ' supply 5t^ or irepi: The * additions' here of course are 
 the improvements made from time to time. Illustrations will occur to every 
 lone. Cf. Xen. i. 6, 38. ^irtT€x»'^o'€«s. The ivi has the same 
 
86 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 rT> Bchap. 7^.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ ' "^ 
 
 87 
 
 force as in i^nvu>vai, ch. 70 b., which spe ; but as the word r^x^il has been 
 used, ^ir,T€xH7(r6a;y, says Popp., * exquisite positum est.' The word occurs, 
 Herod, ii. 2, 1 19. Grote gives the sense correctly, but somewhat too magnilo- 
 quently for a Spartan, • 7nultij>lmty of active obligatians requires multiplicity! 
 and novelty of contrivance.^ 
 
 {c.) fi€xpl ToCSc. Let your procrastination be limited by this; go thus far, 
 and no farther. The words /x€xpi and axpl I believe sometimes signify, not 
 simply up to a certain point in time or space, but coincident or co-extensiye with 
 a certain amount of time or space. ^rdpav riva ^vfifxaxi^^y rp4^7,rt 
 
 This probably refers to the Argives, who were ever ready to take advantage of 
 any opportunity to establish a counter-influence to Sparta in the Peninsula. 
 
 {d.) efuvrwv SpKtup. 'The Gods who were called upon to witness the oatk: 
 Expressed by Livy- Fcederum arbitros ac testes. Li v. xxi. 10. Poppo. 
 tS>v al(r0avo^4va>y, i.e., ataer,<nu ix^urwu, <ppovitiwv. This makes the expres- 
 sion the exact antithesis to avai(yei]Twv. and we may render it, men of fceVmj 
 and intelligence. Popp. refers to v. 26, and Xen. Mem. iv. i, i. Othen»ise- 
 ' of these men who wtness the act; under whose cognizance it comes, as the oaths 
 came under the cognizance of the gods. ipnfiiav-desertccl.mi 
 
 therefore dr fenceless positim. Kriig. cf. iii. 67. «<r .0-' holy m the 
 
 sight of gods'— horn which we may infer the strength of the religious feeling 
 connected with the idea of race. i^y^y tiff dai. The notion is, ' Do 
 
 not let the power and glory of Peloponnesus degenerate under your headship.' 
 Popp. explains the construction i\(i(T(ruf, = to &<rr( iKdaau, thai ; others say 
 that the double accusative is occasioned by the elliptical way of speaking, t^ 
 n(KoiT6vvTi(Tov iXdffffw Karaarrjaai i^rryovfidvovs. To me it seems explicable by 
 prolepsis. On the verb ^iry^ofiai in this sense and construction, cf i. 76, 95! 
 vi. 85, and L. and S. Lexicon. On the Spartan vye/*o»'^a, see Grote, p. 396, 
 note, and i. 38, and vii. 55. 
 
 Chapter LXXIL— («•) "^^^ "^^walufv. This genitive must be referred to 
 irp€(r)3€to, but the whole sentence is, as Am. remarks, an instance of irregular 
 construction, known to most Greek authors, and particularly to Thucydidcs. 
 When the subject of the discourse is suddenly altered, the new subject is 
 brought forward into the most prominent place in the new sentence without 
 much regard to the necessities of the construction, which often is changwUty 
 an anacolouthon, and the subject left independent of any government. This is 
 most common where, as in Herodotus, the reason of the predication is introduced 
 by ydp, before the writer gives us the predicate itself. See Jelf, § 7^6, ^^ 
 The introduction of koI before «s pdomo renders this passage more confused 
 than usual, and I confess it seems to me very like the work of a copyist, ^ho 
 did not perceive that irptiTPfla could form the subject — by repetition -of 
 I'iaeovro. In this suspicion I perceive that Kriig. concurs. Am. cites, by way 
 of illustration, i. 1 1 5 ; vii. 48 ; viii. 30, which the student will do well to consult. 
 So also Herod, iv. 149, ^ 5^ 'raTs 06 ykp ^v ol <rvfxir\,ia^<reai, roLyap<vv efl 
 ainhv KaraXd^tiv 6Xv 4v \vKOiai. iv. 100, ruv Sh irav ykp ^v rh irA^eos fieTalriOV, 
 ovK iUKOvro Toi;f \6yovs. ix. 109, rrj 8i KaKws yhp ?5€6 iravoiKir, 7eW<Te«, 
 elire t(? Stp^v hiroXoynffOfiivovs. This accusative must be con- 
 
 ■ - sidered to depend upon the verbal adjective TroptTirre'a. On the construction 
 
 see Jelf, § 318. Matthiae, § 447. GoU. accounts for the fact that these verbals 
 govern accusatives, on the principle that they tacitly contain the notion xP'h, or 
 J«r, and cites Matthiae, § 447, 4. Cf. oUre fii<reo<poprireov el-n &Wovs ^ rovs 
 ffTpaTCvofievovs, \nii. 65. vepl iravr6s—' concerning the general question ;' 
 
 the constmction is varied by the infinitive 8rj\u(xai, which is admissible after 
 verbs of motion. Popp. iv irheiovi, sc. XP*^"?'* opposed to rax^tas, 
 
 cf. i. izi. Kriig. 
 
 (h.) 4k 7u>v xSyuv — 4k from its proper notion, which is that of the material 
 cause— in the metaphysical sense of the word— passes into a cognate one of 
 (ifler, or arising from, regarding the antecedent events as in some degree the 
 cause of those which follow. We may therefore translate— ' Arising out of,' 
 i. e. ' In consequence of what had been said.' ro7s AaKe^aifioviois &8 
 
 distinguished from rh irArjflos avr&v probably refers to the Ephors. 
 (i Tj fjL-h, a transposition for fi m^ ti. So €t n^ Kai, for fl koX fiij, ii. 11 ; vi. 60. 
 Popp. Kriig. would strike out ri and make awoKoXvei intransitive. The verb is 
 so in this book, 144-2 : oin-e cKeTvo KwKvei iv rais (rirov^ais oUre t6^€. 
 ^TCi^vat — adirc, accedere, irapiKQeiv, ad dicendum prodire. But, as Popp. ob- 
 serves, the distinction is not always kept up, cf. i. 119. 
 
 Chapter LXXIII.— (a.) trpiff^evtris. This word is censured by Dion. Hal. 
 as too poetical, but the truth is that irpitr^fla is ' embassy,' just as we might 
 say the 'English embassy' at Paris; and irpeo-jSeucty is 'the fact of coming 
 upon an embassy.' Karafioiiv receives the same censure from the 
 
 critic, but it is very graphic and suitable to the speaker. ' The outcry against 
 us,' cf viii. 85, 87. See also ch. 67, koX Kanfiowv rwv 'A07jj/aiW. 
 liKaffrals vyi'iv—'you as our judges.' fic^di us— 'easily,' and, 
 
 therefore, lightly, cf. i. 80 ; vi. 9. 
 
 {b.) Tct vavb IT a\a id. The old mythical legends about Theseus, the 
 Amazons, &c., which were a stock topic. Kriig. refers to Isocrates, v. 42, 
 Dem. xxii. 15, Xenophon, U^pl Upoa. iv. 16. &V. This gen. depends 
 
 upon fxdprvpes. Popp. explains a/cool X6ya>v as equivalent to aKovffdivrfs 
 X/ryoi—fhe hearsay of tradition. ir^is is, 'the personal observation 
 
 of those who are to hear us speak: el Ka\ . . . vpo^aK\op.ivois— 
 
 'Although U be somewhat irksome to us to be for ever bringing this subject for- 
 ward: Thus Arn. after Haack and Popp. I think correctly; but Kriig. 
 adops the other explanation, even though it be somewhat disagreeable to you to 
 have this ever put before you. On the force of the prepos. in Si ox^ov, cf. 
 17a. iKivdvvevfTo. Either TO MrjStfca is the subject, or it is 
 
 impersonal. ^s toO llpyov—sc. ttjs u<p€\ias may, I think, be 
 
 rendered ' the practical benefit,' in contradistinction to rod \6yov; but Popp. and 
 G611. understand, ' of the actual doing of the good,' which makes the antithesis 
 less effective ; ttjs i}<p€\las, ' the betiefit of the reputation, if any there be.' 
 (tri ax^fXet . . . iropaiT^<r€«s is explained by the Schol. 'iv€Ka rov alrelv 
 <rvyyv(!>nriv,for the sake of deprecation, to which, namely, they would not con- 
 descend. 
 
 (c.) MapaeSfvi. The word had become so familiar, that its use is almost 
 adverbial,— i.e., without iv before it. Cf. with Krug. Dem. xviii. 20S, Plato, 
 Moiexcnus, 240. Yet Thucyd. sometimes employs the preposition, as i. 18, 
 
88 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. H^p^p. 75.] 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 89 
 
 .MIUL 
 
 ii 34, cf A€\<^oiy, oh. 143. Aristoph. always omits it. vpoKivlv 
 
 p^vffai^'to hiJVi borne the hrunt of the clmiffcr: The Pamo cxprpssion oonirs 
 in tho far-fanie«l mih of Domostheues. Oi,K tan^ 8ir«s Vfidprtrt ov ;*A rohs iy 
 mapa&i^i wpoKiyhvt>^(xra.ras. iax*-himhred, prevenfeJ. Tlir us. 
 
 of tho simpU^ verb in this sense is not so common, yot Kriip. gives abiuulam 
 instances. Xon. Amh. iil. f, ' ^ * ^^"^^ '^^ '^"^ ^'''P*'' ^'" '*^ KaraSi-.a.. 
 and Honxl. iii. 79- »'"{ ^tr«\0ourra «Vx', &c. Add ibid. v. 101. 
 48i;vdT«yii'fii'T*»i'. This is a very ckmr case of tho usiigc of hv with a par- 
 ticiplo. Cf. Matth. 597, 6, and Jelf. 4i9> 4- It may bo resolved into S^.,, 
 «i ^7€V€T«, iiZvvaroi hr fi<ray oi TlfKowouyiitriot. 6 m o U s -' eip,al to 
 
 what it ims before: Cf. ii. 80, i T.piwKov, Knoiro ti^onu This seems to ni. 
 comvt, nor can I undorstaml why Bl. shonld consider this sense so very 
 feeble, that it should bo necessary to give the unusual force .>f ' an meqiov 
 n^tch for the Greeks: to the wonls. This is inconsistent with obK In, and u, 
 should' have had ^^yriwdXov. He did not consider before this that ho wi.s 
 fqnolli/ mat<^hed with the (Iroeks. ho imagined that he was imme,useh/ superior 
 to them. He now saw that this superiority no longer existed, and thorcforo 
 abandoned the enterprise. 
 
 CHiFTKR LXXIV.— ('^.) ^y TttTs I'aCo-i— m their ships,-'i.e.. depcnd.d 
 upon them. Cf. Jelf up.>n ^., § 622. Sr, Aa,0^.To.-' vhen it W 
 
 been clr^rrlt/ sAou.f».' So i^yytKeiyros and similar phrases an^ used occasionally 
 Jelf, § 696. ^s avr6-'to it: in general reference to the ciivum- 
 
 sUinoes described bv the intnxluctory wonis. It is important to notice this 
 use of the pronoun in refon^nce to tho discussion concerning the genuineness ot 
 iii. 84, where see the long note, and cf. az a. is rks rtrpa- 
 
 Koaias^' to make up the four hundred: Speaking in round numbers, tor as 
 we learn fn^n Hen>*lotiLs, the exact amount was 378. Great difficulties have 
 been made alK»ut this, because Domostlienes, de Cor. 238, the poet .Eschylus. 
 and Nep^^s, who copied fnmi them, call the fleet 300 only. But it is plam that 
 poets and actors, when engaged in proclaiming the glories of Athens befort^ 
 ■itbenians, would diminish the number of tlio fleet as much as possible-' the 
 fewer ships, the greater share of honour.' Therefore, they t(X)k Ihe hundrcnls 
 below instead of above the .xid numbers. HertN however, the estimate is 
 naturally more exact, though still the speakers make an exjiggeration m their 
 own favour, for Herod, makes the Athen. quota 180 (viii. 44). ^^t see also 
 Tiii. 61 ; and Dit^. Sic. (Ixv. 58) gives it as 200. It is to be observed that 
 Isocrates. Pan. c. 31. more accurately describes the Athenian contingent as 
 ' more than double' that of the others, rpi-hptis h^Xaaias fxiv ^ ffifiiratnfs oi 
 iAXoi. But this cannot surely justify Didofs interpretation, rwu Sua fxoipc..'. 
 the half Popp. seems to incline to it, but it is quite contrary- to the practice 
 of Thiicyd. in giving numbers, and to the general idiom of the language. 
 aiTi.iT aroy— * th« principal cause offyhtinff in the strait: sc. Salamis. Goll. 
 points out that this construction of aXnos with the infinitive without tho article 
 ToD.istheonlinary one. See i. 25, 33, 75' ^33 ; Xenoph. Hellenic, vii. 5, § ^7- 
 Kriig. adds other instances, cf. Matt. 542. irifiijaarf. See an 
 
 account of these honours, Herod, viii. 124, and Plutarch, Vita Them. U, 
 
 1 Popp. !ind Giill. read ahrol from some good MSS. for aMv, ' You yourselves 
 s^mtaveoush/: 
 
 (b,) hiaipetipavrtt. It has been said that wo might rather have expected 
 thp mill, voice, since tho Schol. interprets hacpBt'ipai idaavrts. But the active 
 repi-esents tho sacrifice as more personal, as it wore, 'with our own handft 
 
 i^c.) rovrov—i.c.,Tovw<pf\u(r&at. rrji oh k oUffrfs—' which was 
 
 \„ow no mwe: So in ii. 44, rwv ovk tvru>v, 'those who are, no more.:— i.e., 
 
 'the (load.' Similarly Howd. : Trepl ovSfnirjs TrarpiSos, viii. 57. What, thero- 
 Ifore. is meant by Trjs {ir6\fu,s) iv jSpax^f? ^Airf»i oCctTjt? The ' ireJXts,' says 
 I Popp., must bo either tho fleet, or tho citizens embarked in it; or reference 
 
 mav 1)0 made to its future restitution. This I prefer, and interpret with Kriig. : 
 yf'-r the restitution of which there was hut a verif .sfiffhf (jround of hrpo: 
 ItJ) y^fpo^, when thus specified, means ' aliquant um: ' took mirfnll share: Cf. 
 
 i. 117, ii. 67, and Jelf, § 579, 6, cf. ch. 23 c. Kriig. tr. ' unsorn Kriiften nach,' 
 
 'to the best of our power,' quoting Dem. xix. 82, 5i€07/>fas rb /xepos av. n fiipoK 
 lis more usual, and Bl. would substitute it; but rh is here for tho personal 
 I pronoun, cf. 22 c. 
 
 Chaptku LXXV.— (rt.) Ip «^o< ivpiiv. I subscribe to tho remark of 
 Kriii;., tliat apa in itself neither implies affirmation nor negation, and 
 1 may perhaps be permitted to refer tho render to a disquisition of my 
 own on tho word in the Class. Mus(pum. The context, and tlie speaker's 
 intonation, make the difference in the meaning. Here with Popp. render 
 \mine digni sumus: and consider the subsequent iiii to form part of the 
 verb liaKftffQai, so that, so far as this passage is concerned, no question 
 need bo made on the distinction between Jpo ii^ and apa ovk, 'do we not 
 \deserve not to he under quite so much odium in the eyes of the Greeks V 
 Uvw^Tjj ^vvi(T(o>s. There is some difficulty about the two genitives. 
 IricIi has been rejected by editors, but the latter is probably added in 
 Ireferoncp to Ivvfrwrarov in the last ch., and as Am. remarks, we have 
 Vimm afidprntxa, ii. 65. Why, then, not say ' the perspicacity of our 
 \vdijmcnt: as well as 'an error of judgment V dpx^^— sc- «»'«««»'. 
 
 [ilatih. § 368, Jelf, § 499; or with Bl. understand that hiaK^iaBai k.t.K. 
 lis equivalent to (pdovitaBM, and takes its syntax. Or hioKiiaQai may itself 
 Itake a genitive, in accordance with the general notion implied by this case 
 Irespectively to verbs indicating position. See note 36 c. 
 iTa vi(6Koiita. rov $apfidpov—' what yet remained to be done against the 
 iPersian: So iii. 10, rci vir6\oiira iSiv tpyteu. 
 
 (6.) vpoaydytiv. As vi. 18 and i. 44, Popp. and rohs''EK\vpas h ro(ra{ny\v 
 Iwiropfai/ -irpo^aytv, Isocrat. iv. 37. Kriig. tr. we were compelled by the very 
 nature of the case to advance it to this, its present pitch of greatness. 
 5«'ous K.r.k. If these motives be meant to be taken in the order of time, this 
 nil signify ' fear of Persia.' But fidhiara fiev points to the order of intensity ; 
 ft therefore signifies, fear of the revolted allies, cf. infra. ^LiFocrrdvrwv 
 
 ^o^'TiorpapLyLivwv—' and when now some revolters had been reduced to subjec- 
 \m: Remark the two participles taken together. Kriig. cf. ii. 5, twv Cw^twk 
 hoy^ivm, and iv. 38, vii. 75. '"o-* Se, k.t.a. 'Now no odium is 
 
90 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book., ■gaip. 77.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 91 
 
 i 
 
 entertained against any man, f(yr making the best disposition he can of his inter- 
 ests, in respect of matters involving the greatest risks' Krug. would erase 
 KivUvwv, but from what goes before, we see that the perils of the Athenian 
 Empire were the prominent argument in the speaker's mind {naXiera ^.h M 
 Se'ouj), and this allusion to them in summing up is natural. Popp. compares 
 the Homeric phrase, ov pffi€(nrr6v. Thucyd. repeats the word, vi. 83, ram 
 avem<p0ovov. Bl. adds vii. 77, viii. 50. Soph. Trach. 1035, of. for e5 rldiffBai 
 iv. 59, T^ l^Sta eu QiffQou. 
 
 Chapter LXXVL— (rt.) ^-nyftffBt. Cf. ch. 19 and ch. 71, ad finera. 
 hih. Ttavrds—throiigh the whole war, up to the time of the final operations. 
 iyKparws — vigorously, 'with a tight rein.' Cf. Soph. Antig., v. 715, and 
 Theocritus, xxv. 266, where the original physical sense is found from which the 
 present metaphor comes. 
 
 (h.) dirb rod hvdpoiTriiov — removed from, away from, and so contrary h> 
 the common practice of mankind. The Athenians maintain and improve upon 
 the same doctrine to the Melians, v. 105. rii^ofxivnv. It should always 
 
 be remembered that the present participle stands also for the imperfect. Tr. 
 ' proffered' rod roiovro v — such a practice, or si/ch conduct as this, 
 
 i. e., the acceptance of power, and its maintenance by all practicable means. 
 vyilv doKovyrts. See ch. 95. ry Si/coly \6y<i} — the argumat 
 
 about justice, or the plea of justice. 
 
 (c.) traparvx^v. On the neuter nom. part, absolute, cf. Jelf, 700, 2 a. The 
 same word is used again, v. 60. With others, says Kriig., •irap6v is more usual. 
 ri] avOpaiirticf. (pvfffi. Kriig. transl. the inclination of men. I should rather 
 render (pvais — the natural character, or disposition of hunanity — ' human na- 
 ture,' as we say. Bl. quotes, for similar usages of xf>^o"<^/*«''o*i i- ^O' ^^173 
 XP>?(r. ; vii. 30, TrdQei XP-', vi. 15, iridufxiais x^- iiKuiSrepot ^ koto 
 
 r^v virdpxovffav SvvafjLiv. Literally, more just than accorded with the scak 
 of our existing power — i.e., more just than we had any necessity to be, ijn 
 looked at our power. On this sense of Kari, according to the grade of, see Jclf, 
 § 629. Trfpifffr-n — ' has come round to be.' Arn. adds. This word generally 
 
 denotes a new and unexpected result, as in ch. 32, 120, and vi. 24. But some- 
 times simply what has happened, or befallen, as vii. 70. Cf. ch. 28 b. 
 
 Chapter LXXVII. — (a.) i\a<r<Tovfifvoi — 'taking up an inferior position' 
 i. e., not taking such high ground with their dependents as they might have 
 done. Thev need not have had the trials at all, but might have decided the 
 points in dispute by their sovereign power. Arnold cites Thucyd. iv. 64, o^«* 
 oaov (ixhs riffffaffdai ; and Demosth. coni. Dionysiod. p. 1287, ed. Keiske, V"^ 
 fxiv ravraffvvix<t>povyifv, ouk ayvoovvrts rh iK rrji ivyypa^r\s hlKaiov, a\\ rn^^' 
 fifvot Suu 4\arrov<rdal ri Koi (tu7x«P**»' ^^"^^ M SoKetj/ <pi\6^iKoi flvai. The posi- 
 tion of Kol — yap — Kou is somewhat unusual, ko* ydp, says Kriig., is oftener con- 
 nected with Kcd following, than koI simply, but not then with a word inten-ening. 
 But G611. remarks, that the words koi yhp are not, as generally, in this case to 
 be combined into a single expression ; the koI is to be referred to the Koi follow- 
 ing in the sense of ' both," ' and;' the one clause contains the cause of the other, 
 and is well explained by Groll., ' etsi enim apud nos judicia constituimus, tamen 
 
 litigiosi esse videmur.' Kriig. supposes that the Koi here can mean also, even, 
 and quotes Arist. Ecclez. v. 603, KaKri\(Taro yhp Sih. rovro, for this was even the 
 reason, the very reason, that, #c. Cf. also Ranee, v.735. <pi\o^oK€7y. 
 
 Of the litigiousness of the Athenians the Vespee of Arist. forms the best 
 illustration. Cf. Aves, v. 40. ^vfifioXalais. These suits, called 
 
 hiKai.airh ^vyL^6Kwv, were grounded upon contracts existing between persons 
 who belonged to the several states comprised under the Athenian dominion, and 
 the necessity of trying them at Athens, owing to the expense and delay thereby 
 incurred, was one of the greatest grievances to which her allies were subjected. 
 The orator here tries to gloss it over, by making allusion only to such as Athe- 
 nian citizens were themselves engaged in. Cf. Sheppard's Theophrastus, note 
 on Tovs ^fvovs, p. 73 ; Goller in hoc loco; Schoman de Comitiis. 
 
 ^/^ ) ol 5e'_' u^hUe they' sc. our dependent allies. ffa.p^ ^b fih 
 
 oUffSai xpvvai—' contrary to what they think they ought.' The negative must 
 he taken in close connexion with the verb, as in the case of (prffii, Kriig., who 
 also proposes to read in} for fiv. Cf. Matth. § 534. 7»'^M?7, says Bl., is 
 
 any decision at law ; and so, too, Kriig. ; but they do not cite any instance. I 
 do not, therefore, think it improbable that it here has the more ordinary sense 
 of a public resolution, vote, decree, or proposal. Cf. Herod, iii. 80, and ©e^t- 
 ffTOKXeovs yvd>iJL-p, ch. 90. We may regard rod ivdfovs opposed to rov trXeovos, 
 and supply ffrepifftiffievoi ; but this is needless, for it can be governed by 
 XaXiirws (pfpfiv, as we see by xa^f'^ws <pfp€iv avrSv. 2. 64. d. 
 
 (c.) a-wh rov tffov. Is this the masculine or neuter gender? GoU., Poppo, 
 and others seem to have decided that it is the former, * a mail's equal' But 
 the whole usus loquendi, in Thuc. at any rate, seems to point the other^way. 
 See ovK anh rod taov, i. 143, airh rup Sfxolvov iXoffffovfifvos, viii. 89, airh rod tffov 
 bfii\ovvr€s, iii. 11, airh rod ttyov Se ^m6vres, iii. 84. Other passages might be 
 cited from other writers, as Eurip. Ph£7i. v. 541. I should therefore translate, 
 ' men are more angry at being urronged by law than by open violence ; for the one 
 looks like being over-reached on a footing of equality, the other like compulsion by 
 a superior force: This Bl. calls an aKpifioXoyia, or over minute distinction; to 
 me it appears plain and forcible enough. Cf. for the sentiment, iv. 86, and 
 .\rist. Rh. i. 11. 9. 
 
 {d.) KadfXSvrf 5—* after having overthrown ris.' Cf. i. 4. « p | a t t e— 
 
 'were to assume dominion^ Kriig. compares <nr€tJ5ovT€s ws Zci/s a^^ot' tpi^nv 
 kHv, ^8ch. :^om. V. 203. T b ^ M € T € p 1/ 5 € s— ' ^Ae fear of which we are 
 
 the objects: Objective gen. expressed by pronoun. Cf. note on ch. 69 e. . 
 ffircp K. T. X.—' if your policy is going to be such as you evinced symptoms of its 
 king, when ye headed f en- a short time the confederacy against the Persian: 
 SjutifTa— sc. v6yLiyia, i.e., * institutions which do not amalgamate with those of the 
 rest of Greece: On this meaning of fi/xt/CTa, Bloomf. aptly quotes ^sch. ^^^. 
 312, oT/xat j8oV &fiiKrov iv irSXei irpfireiv—o^os t* &\u<pa r iyx^as ravrQ Kvni, 
 hxoararodvr' &v, oh (plKtp irpua-evviirois ; and Krug. <pl\ois r* HfxiKrSs iffri koI 
 ^ijri irJ\(i, Eurip. Stobceus, 10, 7. See, for the well-known fact, i. 144, 124, 
 ii. 39. In what follows, allusion is perhaps made to Pausanias. The same ob- 
 servation was made by Aristotle and Isocrates, Panath. ch. 82. ois. 
 This is one of the passages quoted to prove that vofxiCfi governs a dative. Cf. 
 ii. 38, iii. 82. See note upon this last passage. I am not satisfied that the 
 
 
 i\ 
 
1 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 92 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Cbap. 81.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 93 
 
 present one proves anything, for we may easily supply xpv<reai, and that 
 vofiiC^y is constructed with an infinitive is, as Kriig. says, plain even from 
 SirAa oh vofxiCoi'ctu l^x^iu, Herod- vii. 85, and cf. Thuc. ii. 15. If any one 
 prefers the former construction, vofiiCu must be rendered ' attac?ies a value to: 
 
 Chapter LXXVni— (a.) oi— supply Pov\fv6^fvoi. irp<J(r0Tj(rfl€. 
 
 Bring upon yourselves. So i. 144. KiyB^vov, irpoffrld^adcu. Kriig. quotes ohh^s 
 MKfiva' rSia irpoadiffdai kok^l, Eurip. Her, 147. . rhv irapihoyov. 
 
 Used by Thuc. only as a substantive, but see ii. 61, 85, iii. 16, vii. 28, Kriig. 
 
 (h.) Trtpiiffraffdai. See note upon irepteWrj, ch. 76, ad finem—' when pro- 
 longed, is wont to bring things round to the injluince of accidents— to the award 
 of chance: Kriig. ; cf. i. 69. i ir € x m € y-from which one of us w no 
 
 further removed— i.e., further exem^i^than the other. 6 ir or cpas 
 
 ^(rrai—in which of the two ways it unll turn out. Cf. with Popp. ch. 82, KaBin 
 X«p7)<r«. iv ^8ii\tp Kivivufvtrai, means ' the danger is run while it 
 
 is as yet uncertain: On the impersonal use of the verb, cf. ch. 73. 
 ^5^ is to be taken in connexion with KaKonadodyrts, when now they have got 
 into difficulty they address themselves to deliberation— ox rather to discussion, sc. 
 diplomatic. Cf. irAcTaTOK a^dtuvos \6yuv, Alcestis, v. 967. 
 
 {c.) bpwvrts—BC. iyrySt atiaprla 6yTa5. abdalptros—^ofour 
 
 own free choice: ».«., before we have been compelled to modify it by the course of 
 events. a-rov^ds— sine articulo, not to break treaty; cf. ch. 67. SUj). 
 
 For in the thirty years' treaty (i. 115) this provision had been made ; cf. i. 140. 
 AiJ€(r0ai, the midd. voice, to have our differences arranged. Cf. i. 14?- 
 eUi Ai^. This is the reading of twelve good MSS. and Popp. Bekkerand 
 the other editors take the common reading, <J, which has precisely the same 
 meaning in some passages. Kriig. quotes Soph. FhU. 1341 ; Lysias, xxv. 14; 
 Dem. ii. 8 ; and Stallbaum, Plat. Rep. v. 463 d. 6<^7,7^<r06-idem 
 
 est quod irpo-hrn<re€, GoU. Am. says they do not express the same part of t!i. 
 same idea: the first expresses precedence; the second, the nearness of Uie 
 leader. Kriig. refers to the Lexicon Flat. There is an eUipsis of 6S6y. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX.— (a.) Karh <r<pa5 ahrois. What is sometimes ex- 
 pressed by icae* iavro<>s, as iv. 38, vi. 13. All strangers were ordered to witli- 
 draw ; i.e., the allies who had come to the conference. The great assembly ot 
 the Spartans, we thus see, decided upon questions of peace and war. 
 
 (6.) iir\ rh avrh itptpov — ' tended to the same point: Kriig. rightly ex- 
 emplifies this by the use of the verb in 65bs <p4pu. There is a similar use of /fro. 
 ' In nova fert animus.' Ovid. Metam. v. i. Bl. quotes Herod, viii. 100, irK^ov 
 ?<p€p€ v 7V(i/nTj KaTfpydffoadai tV 'EAAciSo. 'Apx^So^os, i.e., the 
 
 Second. He succeeded his grandfather Leotychides, as his father Zeuxidamus 
 had previously died. 
 
 Chapter LXXX.-W TO {;s iv rfi ahrfi h^iKic^ 6pQ. The simplest ex- 
 planation is to supply i^iirtipovs 6vras. Others not so correctly have interpreted 
 — and I see among you those of the same ti?ne of life as myself ^ « v 
 
 takes in any of this class indefinitely— ' a man.' Remark the studied variety 
 produced by the transition from aveipla to vofiiaovra. See ch. 38 c. 
 
 iKKoylCoir 
 
 fft,(pp6vta 5— without extravagance, or exaggeration, 
 compute it to the full, i.e., wMh^Wii^ chances, &c. ^ 
 
 (b)xap6fxoLos—'ofihe same description: i. e., mihtary rather than naval. 
 Compare Aristotle. Bhet, i. 4, 4. ^yayKalov eZSeVa* tAs 5uvci/*c.s n6repou 
 ■oaom fi h.v6ixoiai. Am. The koX which stands before h-arvy^irovas does not, as 
 .ometiraes happens, so much introduce a new idea, as a part of the original one. 
 Popp compares v. 112, 2, h-nh rS>v i,vQpd>i^o>v Koi AaK,8ai,.ovio,p, vi. 20, 3; 
 ^../^g , itp^ 'iKaara. The neuter is employed because the idea is 
 
 ceneral, including their towns, &c. Ka\ U^ois Kal H^Kas Kal 6xJ^V. 
 
 The equites, the heavy-armed infantry, and the remaining population which 
 served as rowers or light-armed infantry. There is no necessity to say that 
 t,x\v is ' put for light-ai-med troops,' an assertion which Bl. combats, cf. vi. 1 7, 
 h^ois ivfifiUrois, mixed populations. '^vi 7«. Jelf, 735. 5- 
 
 IVkkh computes the whole at about 500,000, whereof 180,000 belonged to the 
 town and harbour. Niebuhr, Vortrdg. uber dte Lander- u. Volkerk., p. 108 
 expresses an opinion that the general estimate among the ancient writers of 
 \thenian population, especially of the number of slaves, was much too high. 
 
 Ic) fji€\vrii(roix€u. Kriig. supplies Tb vauT.Kd./ from raTs mu^r.v, comparing 
 i lai. But the word may stand independently, like our own verb ' to practise ;' 
 thus we have rohs ro^Sras fieKer&yras, ' the archers practising: Xen. Hell. m. 
 4 16 So also, though less certainly, ii. 86, fieXer&yres koI irap.aK.va<rn4uoL 
 rV yavf^axlau, i. 64b. XP^^os iy^crrai-^ Time uill intervene, i.e 
 
 •that will take time,' as we say. Iry .o..^-' The public treasury. 
 
 The phrase is not unusual. Herod, vii. 144, ^^ 'Aenyaioi<rL y.yof..yu>y 
 XpWt«v lieyd\u,y 4y ry Kotycf. Cf. Arist. Pol. ii. J, 6. <pfpo,i(y, 
 
 fur the more usual compound ^acpepofxiv. 
 
 Chapter LXXXI.-(a.) ry wkiid^i-populafion. 4Ti<poirciyr^s.^ 
 
 The verb <pondw is a frequentative, hence (poiray is said of ' attendmg school, 
 and also of ' courting,' as the suitor regularly visits his mistress. We may 
 therefore translate, ' by making frequent, or regular, incursions: ^ ■ 
 
 itifoyraL. ' They uill bring in from abroad: Pop. quotes (r7ros ^iraKr6s,yi. 20. 
 Knig. rrdyra HoKrd, vii. 28. I would add. Soph. Tra^h. 258. (Ed. Col. i s^^• 
 Ajax, 1275. There is therefore no necessity for Popp. to remark, 'usitatius h&c 
 Yi iadytffdat: On the fact compare ii. 38. , r ^. 
 
 (b.) iS Aa4.(J/x€0a. Passive, says Kriig., as vi. 64. It is rather one of those 
 cases abeady (ch. 68 c, Jelf. 562, 3) noticed where the reflexive force of the 
 middle runs into a passive sense. ' We shall do ourselves fnore daimge than we 
 shall do to the-m: See note i. 68 c ; i. 81 b, andii. »7. r^ irX.icc-'onthema- 
 jmfy of matters: iy roirv. D. has translated, ' and in such a time, and 
 T.K.A. quotes Bothe's ^interea: But why should it not be, 'm thi^ case, 
 or, contingency, i.e., that expressed by the previous words ? Traue^trerai. 
 'This form without the ff is found also ii. 77 ; v. 91, 100 ; vi. 59. Popp. 
 <^9ovhp.aTi. I regard this as a causal dative. T.K. A. renders, the Athenians 
 mth their usual magnanimity. I should prefer to say--owing to their high 
 spint, such I think being the real force of the word. Theologically the 
 (fp(i.T,jua <rapKhs is tlie spirit of pride naturally inhering m man's heart. On 
 MT)T6 omitted, cf. Jelf, § 775, 3. and on <pp6y. ib. 603, 2. 
 
NOTES OX THUCYmDES. 
 
 [Book 1. I chap. 84.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 95 
 
 
 ,v\fvaai—'bethe slaves of their land; i.e., be so servilely attached to their 
 property as not to sacrifice it to the common good. We may also connect 
 8ov\fdffai <ppovi]tiari- -' sla ves in spirit.' KarairKriyriva t— lit. ' to k 
 
 struck down; i.e., to be dismayed, and paralysed by the war. 
 
 CiLVPTER LXXXII.— (a.) ov yi^v ov^4. These particles are often thus 
 employed in qualifying a previous statement. The ov generally denies, the 
 ovl\ particularises, as Hoogeven says, ' not that either I iman to recommend: 
 iLvaiad'hrws has doubtless reference to the rb avaiadvrov, charged against them 
 by the Corinthians. The word denotes dulness of the natural perceptiocs. 
 'want of feeling; and is metaphorically applied to indiflference to the wrongs of 
 the allies. See the analysis of characters connected with this element, viii.-xv. 
 SheppartV s Theophrastus. k ar a 4) « p a i/. The Sch. explains ^Xi-iX'iv. 
 
 titiff ojs ^jrtTp6\|/o/i6^. Gull, interpretation is, ' nor to let them see that we ik 
 not mean to notice their conduct: But it is the direct antithetical expression t. 
 irSKffxov, thus constructed upon the principle of variety, of. 38 c. The meaning 
 therefore is, ' ntithcr too plainly indicating that we shall go to war; nor do the 
 opposite thing, i. e., permit them to go on as they are doing, ^v ahKuxriv ok 
 ivirp4\\iouaiv. Xen. Hist. ii. 4, 11. Cf. Jelf, § 804, 4. 
 
 {b.) ivfxfidxf^v Trpo(Tayu>yv—to this is opposed subsequently rb. afnm 
 ^KTropic^Mf 0a ; with respect to the latter word, it may be doubted what force 
 should be attached to the prep. 4k. It may either imply ' full, complete prepa- 
 ration,' or, as Kriig. says, it may have reference to the difficulties out of whieli 
 they had to extricate themselves. He compares i. 125 ; vi. 83. We may add 
 the similar use of the Latin ' expedio.' ' Expediunt per acuta belli,' Horace. 
 avTwv, Jelf, §504. aj/6Tr(<^0oi'oi'of course implies after it a woi>l 
 
 which stands as antecedent to the relative taoi. There is nothing invidiam h 
 the enlisting of foreign allies by all such as, ^r., cf. Jelf, § 817, 7. 
 
 (c.) Ka\ 5vb Kal rpiwv. Two, or it may be three years. On this adversative 
 Koi cf. 80 b. ^v SoKfi—'in the event of its appearifig disirahkl 
 
 cf.'42a, 120 c. Connect this with i^iiv in aurous. irttppayfifvoi 
 
 ' Better fenced and secured; the metaphor seems to be taken from a fortified 
 gamp. vvoa-nfiaivovras. Note the force of the preposition, ^iiw/ 
 
 indications of. So Aristotle, Eth. iv. 2, Kaddirep roHyona {nroorjuaiy^i. 
 
 (d.) fih y^P K.T.K. 'Look not upon their land as anything else than c 
 hostage or pledge for you to hold: Bloomf. well compares a similar declaration 
 of policy, Livy, v. 42. ' Non omnia concremari tecta ut pignus ad fleotenib 
 hostium animos haberent.' ovx V(T(rop—' all the more in proporim 
 
 ^^» airovotoi'— 'the casting away of all hope, recklessness 
 
 despair,' a better reading than airoyvoiau. Archidamus throughout urges the 
 principle that we ought to build a bridge for a flying enemy. 
 a\r)irror4povs ?x***' — ^^^'^ ^^^^ '"^^^^ impracticable to deal with. 
 
 (e.) ToTs iyKK-hy^affiv iir^ix^^vm. Pop. expresses a doubt astotli? 
 genuineness of these words. T. K. A. is particular in pointing out that to.j 
 iyKX-hfiaai must not be taken with IvfixBfPres. Yet it seems to me much the 
 simplest way to do so—' having been egged on, excited to premature action, by w 
 charges which our allies have brought.' Where is the impropriety in sense or con- 
 struction? irp(£|ou€i/. Arnold. Kriig. irpdiufxty. Vulgo. Popp 
 
 Bekker. This of course involves the well-known question whether the canon 
 of Dawes bo correct, which asserts that Birws fi^ cannot be joined with the sub- 
 junctive aorist except in the passive voice. No intelligible reason can be given 
 for the dogma. All that can be said is, that the future is the more lively and 
 graphic form, as approaching more nearly to the oratio directa, and is therefore 
 almost universally used by the Attic writers. I should therefore retain it where 
 there was any MSS. authority in its favour. The later copyists, in their frigid 
 attempts at correctness, even invented subjunctives in cases where they had 
 no real existence, e.g., \i]awtn, U(Tw<n, &c. Therefore, as Am. remarks, the 
 mere number of the MSS. which give irpd^wfi^v ought not to force it upon us. 
 aUx^ov Kal airopi&Tepov. The comparison is generally supposed to be with 
 the Athenians, but it may be with their own previous condition. rwv 
 
 ISi'wv— for, as the Schol. remarks, the private interests of Corinth were not 
 necessarily shared by all Peloponnesus. evirpeircas 04 ad a i—to settle in 
 
 such a way that both parties may have specious reasons for coticluding it, i.e., as 
 a salve to their vanity, cf. ch. 21 a, and iii. 65 b. x<^P'h(r^i. The 
 
 simple verb, says Kriig., does not occur in the future indicative active save in 
 this place. The middle future, x<^P'h<rotiai, is always found. Yet in the com- 
 pounds, as he shows by abundant instances, the active form, x^^'P^o"^. is more 
 common. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIII.— (rt.) xp'hf^^^'ra (p^povres. Eemark that there should 
 be a comma before xP^M«Ta, in order that we may translate ' iique tributa 
 ferentes; for the orator evidently means to contrast them with their own alliefe, 
 who paid no such contribution. ovx '6Tr\o)v k. r. \.—' depends not 
 
 so much upon arms as upon money; i.e., its result would not be determined so 
 much by the first, as by the second. 5t' ^r. It may be right to 
 
 say with Kriig. that 5tcb with the genitive denotes the instrument or rncans, 
 with the accusative the occasion [Veranlassung] of an act, but obviously the 
 two frequently run into each other. * How oft the sight of means to do ill 
 deeds, Makes ill deeds done ! ' and but little distinction can be made in our 
 version of them. Kriig. cf. ^vepuiros av^dverai dia rh laBieiv koX iriveiv. Plat. 
 Vhcsd. 96 c. It may be here, * it is only through the opportunity afforded by which 
 that arms do any good: &\\«s re Kal here stands simply with a 
 
 noun. Kriig. quotes voWa &v rts exoi, &\\a)S re koI pi]ru}p, eWelv, Plat. Crit. 
 
 5° B. _ _ - 
 
 (A.) rwv avoPaivdvrwv ttjs air las. Remark the present participle, 
 and for explanation, see ch. 24 d. alria is employed in an intermediate sense— 
 ' the responsibility of the conseq uences: iir*afi(l>6rep a—* for either 
 
 result; i.e., good or bad, cf. ii. 11 ; iv. 17. otroi rather anusual 
 
 in the first person — * we who stand in this position; 
 
 CHA.PTEB LXXXIV.— (rt.) rh &paVv Kal rh yieWov—' Of the slowness and 
 procrastination, which is the principal thing they bring against us, be not ashamed: 
 If tlie rh be omitted before fieKKov, it is a case of Granville Sharp's canon. See 
 note 1 8 a. According to Kriig. the gen. hh^v is governed by 5, 'the quality 
 of ours which they most find fault with: He quotes, in illustration, Plato 
 legg. 685 A, ri fie^jLipSfieyos avrwv \eyeis ; But cf. Jelf, on fie^Kpovrai, § 495. 
 
96 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 1 Chap. 86.1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 97 
 
 •1 
 I 
 
 Ka\ &fia. Kriig. remarks that the second reason here introduced by Ka(, b 
 really to be gathered by inference from the statement, and is not found in the 
 statement itself. The wisdom of their usual cautious policy may be inferred 
 from the greatness and glory to which, under it, their city had attained. 
 
 (b ) StJi/arai rovro tlvai. We must understand ro?no as a repetition of 
 rh fipaU K. T. A. Uvarai is here, as in some other places, amounts to, is cquim- 
 lent to, a unse moderation. r&v . . . inorpvy6vri.r. The genitive 
 
 depends upon ij^ov^—the pleasure we receive from those who urge us on into 
 danger contrary to mr own convictions. kv^-KticUli^v—^ann 
 
 ever brought over to their views,' remark the true indefinite predication of the 
 aorist. The force of the prep, is the same as in kva^iUffKiiv. 
 
 (c ) Tb /i4v Sti «. T. \. The argument is a sort of sorites. ' Good discipline 
 (rb ^iiKoafiov) produces a sense of shame \aiUs^ ; a sense of shame produces a 
 manly spirit {^h^vxia), and a manly spirit produces martial excellence [i\ 
 iro\€^iK6y): We see that al5<i,s is employed as the equivalent of alaxvy% The 
 expression -KXuffrou fi,r4x*i is repeated, iii. 83. ^^ «<^^«. °^ ^^ 7«»'»'a^»' '^«"«^t«' 
 ;xeT6X€i, either, very largely partakes, or, farms a very large ingredient See 
 note there. The speaker proceeds to show that rh itiKoatiov produces practical 
 wisdom ^Xs^inasmuch as we are brought up with too little preti nee to learning 
 to despise the laws of our country (on afiadia as an intellectual habit, cf. Shep- 
 pard's Theophrastus, p. 115, and note on iii. 37), and unth too much severe self- 
 control and modesty to disobey them. After ,rai56.({;*6voi Popp. supplies (oSr^j 
 SxTirip) fih virepopav. Kriig. prefers to understiind oJoi re. Most readers viU 
 call to mind rh rS>v y6^u aoi^Jn^pou C^cT^ ^hai, toGt' l^anut iy roh inaiyovfim, 
 ydfiois &xayop.6.rcu, Ar. Rhet. i. 15. hjV ^^c^*'"-*- PopjK) doubt. 
 
 whether T^apaaK^vds is to be understood after the verb, which will then be taken 
 in the sense of ' exequi,' or whether, with GoU., we are to supply rhy \6yoy, u.. 
 rh Xfx^fvra fls ixffjL^iv rS>v TrapaffKtvcJu rS>v troMn.iwy ; in which case he says we 
 must render ^irc^uVot by persequi. Both, though intelligible, seem to me 
 somewhat obscure explanations. Possibly the whole may mean, after criti- 
 cising speciously the preparations of the enemy, not to prosecute the war agam. 
 them in any corresponding scale : iic^^Uyai ainois, to assaU them ; kvotioiwi, not 
 on a scale corresponding to our affected superiority. Cf. fp7¥ ^Tc^epx"*- 
 ii2o;iv. 5. votilC^tv irapairKrtfflovs. Our view of this passage 
 
 depends upon the method in which T^apairXnaiovt is to be constructed. If vritli 
 Am G611., BL, we connect it with nai, as simUis atque, the words mean, }U 
 are taught to hold the plans of our neighbours to be very like the ordinary acci- 
 dents of war, that is to say, quite undefinable by any process of reason. For my 
 own part, I believe that Thuc. would have admitted the policy of our enemies 
 to be quite a fair subject for rational conjecture, inasmuch as it is sure to be 
 founded upon certain common and unvarying principles of human nature. S;e 
 his sentiments upon the point, iii. 82, and infra, toXv t€ 8ia<f>6p€iv oh U^ vop^i^^ 
 $.vQpo»cov oi/0p«irou, a sentiment introduced by t€ as if contained by the pre- 
 ceding, not by 8/, as if contrasted with it. I therefore prefer the other inter- 
 pretation (Pop.), We are taught to believe that the schemes and policy of our 
 neighbours are very like our own, and that the accidents of war are matters yJ<J'« 
 undefinaUe by reason. There can be no objection founded upon the fact that 
 irapan\7iaioviis not followed by a dative, for we have such phrases as To.a.Ta 
 
 Kol irapair\i\(Tia. To the other objection, that in this case we should have /x^) 
 and not oh, I should reply by translating as above, making, in fact, oh — h6y<f) — 
 8(Ojp€Tos one logical term, equivalent to aSioMppros. Mr. Grote's version. We 
 think the capacity of neighhourvig states is mux;^ on a par, does not appear to me 
 to cast much additional light upon the passage. acl Se. We always 
 
 practically make preparation against our opponents on the assumption that their 
 schemes are good. We do not calculate on errors, and Mse moves on their 
 part. ^1 iKtlvujv — dependent on them. iv ro7s avay- 
 
 Kaiordrois. GoU. renders • in usu rerum, et omnino in agendo magis quam in 
 (loquentid: Grote, ' in the severest trials,' and so Kriig., quoting d fx^ Sapels 
 ivdp<Diros oh TraiSewerat. Arn., in what is most needful, wherein he is followed 
 by Dale. But has the word ever this meaning ? It is possible also that some 
 allusion is intended to the strictness of the Spartan discipline {iir'nrovos &(rKT\(Tis, 
 2) 39 b)' where the soldier was obliged to put up with the merest necessaries 
 of life, the minimum with which they could do, cf. eh. 90 c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV. — (a.) fie \4r as— institutions, T. K. A. Kather 'habits' 
 or more literally, * practices' Cf. 80 c. « <^ e \ u/a e »/ i~' to our benefit.* 
 
 (XOfifv—* maintain.' erepcov. Strictly speaking, we should have 
 
 had ^ *T€pois. Kriig. quotes ii. 51, %i. i. Sih Iffx^v. The 
 
 Scholiast explains 5i' V ^xo/a*" 'Vx""- Cf. 83 a. iv 3pax«^ fiopi(p 
 
 i] fit pas—' in the brief space of a day ; ' i. e., the brief space of time which a day 
 comprises. Cf. ' Horse momento,' Hor. Sat. i. i. 4. 
 
 (e.) diKas dovyai. As in c. 28 — to submit the matter to arbitration. 
 iiUvra. The present or imperfect participle is of course, 'the man who 
 'proffers arbitration.' 
 
 {d.) eTs rwv i<p6p<cv. On the ephors, see the excellent information 
 amassed by C. F. Herman. Pol. Antiquities, § 44, English transl., and Grote. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVI.— (a.) fi^v here not followed by S4, expresses a contrast 
 to the actual deeds of the Athenians, which the speaker does not specify. 
 ov yivwffKoa^' I do not understand,' Dale. But it is not cognovi, so much as 
 cognosco— I cannot make out ; I shall not enter upon the consideration of : he 
 means he is not going to give himself the trouble of studying it. On the con- 
 trary, T. K. A., after Bloomf., makes yivuaKoi mean much more than ' under- 
 itaild;' according to their view it contains the additional notion of ' approve.' 
 
 {h.) Ka\ r6r€ {^fi^v) Koi vvv iafiey. An ellipse common enough in all 
 languages. of Sc. Here we must consider Se, as it not unfrequently 
 
 is, a causal particle — 'for their suffering wro?7g is no longer a matter of the 
 \ future: On this pronominal oi Se, cf. Jelf, § 768, 3. ou5€ 5io- 
 
 tpjTt'o. Tr. nor inust we decide ^natters by lawsuits and debate, seeing that it 
 is not in word that we are wronged. Popp. remarks that the accusative ahrovs 
 j &\airrofi4yovs is not governed by SiaxptTca, ' nee ob addita koL ahrovs per axVH-O' 
 5«a nfffov explicari possit ; ' but that it is to be constructed like airo\oyrt(rofi4vovs, 
 ch. 72. It agrees, therefore, with Tjfias, understood. But cf. Jelf on irapa^ 
 |8oT6a, § 383. 
 
 (c.) KaT07rpo5i8a>/t€i'. The preposition exerts a force which must not be 
 overlooked. Tr. ' betray to utter ruin ; ' this meaning it of course acquires from 
 
98 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ ''»'"' 
 
 ?. 89.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 99 
 
 the notion of down from the top-' ruit alto a culmine Troja M',^, 
 
 IpbTrois i8.KoO.T«.. Somedoubt has been express«l about the nght con- 
 struetion of these words. Popp. hesitates about the preposition ; Krug. a^serU 
 that^x«Va. is rarely construcKKl with a simple accusative. But *« 'ert ,, 
 confirmed by iv. 92, rpi, r.is ^i) il^<««^i'ovs Ud,r.,, and a. 65. Otherwise 
 a dative is more usual. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIL-(«.) iir.^yi<pi^<^-^to put to the vote: should be 
 BOticed by the junior student, and distinguished from ^^oi^a., « to vote Its 
 usual construction is with an accusative of the person, or a dative ; here (Kn., 
 coniectur.8) Thuc. wrote is iKKX^alau, to avoid a double accusative, for To.avra 
 Z de^nds upon the same verb. He would now strike out is, quo u, 
 im^V<piC^t^ rohs ^apSvras, Plato, Gcrrgias, 474 A. 6pM^«^«*- ^^^ this 
 
 place transitive, as i. 1.7, ii- -• The act of Sthenelaidas was probably 
 Lunded upon the assumption, that many of those who had raised their voice 
 ^ peace, would not dare to vote for it openly. ^v<po^ ^"^7' C'^i'^ 
 employed in a simUar sense. Sry ,h 8oko0..v. On ^^ with ind.c. 
 
 '^" /m k! J<r^T'/r « is... x-pio.-' Let him rise vp and go to that place: This 
 is what is called the ' usus pr^gnans,' which is not uncommon with verbs M 
 implv motion of some kind or other. Kriig. quotes vii. 49. ^";- ^S- ^^^ ««te, 
 6c b The idiom is le.s common in Latin, but Popp. has produced exsurgere 
 foras,' fn)m Plautus. MiL Glor. ii. i. 3. It seems from this that the "lembe" 
 of the LacediBmonian assembly were seated. Haack supposes that this was an 
 imitation of the Homeric practice, where the heroes seated themselves upon the 
 cround like the American Indians. , , , • v 
 
 ic) rohs ^vfjifiixovs-sc. the legates from their allies, who had previously 
 been ordered to withdraw. ^o.i.rac-pres. ' commejice operatm. 
 
 (d ) xpn^ai-Icrai/Tes— ' having transacted the business. This, it appears, 
 was especially a diplomatic word. Kriig. refers to v. 5, 61, and vL 6a. BW 
 has remarked its frequent use among all the regular imitators of Thucyd. Hero- 
 dotus (he says) would have used the middle voice ; and the writers of the midcUe 
 Attic .pay,ar.^.<rea. ^^ay.ci.V, for ^Scdo^.c.., is pecuhar « 
 
 Thuc. Schol, ' dimsion of opinion: ip rv .t.l k.tJ. ihis, sa 
 
 Kriig , is for ^s rb ?tos irpoKex«P^«««^»' ''"^ ^^ ^V ^^*' ^'^'"'' ^^'^ ^P^'^'^^PJ 
 Kvmu seems added as a sort of afterthought-Mos. nmny years having alrcaq 
 elapsed. This would be Olymp. Ixxxvii. i, or B.C. 43^- ^^i the ra Zv^o^k.. 
 see eh. 114. See also ch. 23. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII.-(a.) to Xc^tjT .'«-« that they must go to war.' Tk 
 pi. in such cases as I have said seems to me a shade more general and ^^"^^^^^ 
 than the singular -^Aa< it was a case for war, a casvs belli. It might be w ^ 
 while to examine in this view the instances quoted by Kriig., TroK^fivr^a, vm ^ 
 
 and Mp^Wa, i. 86. Su.^Occr... I q-te T. K. A.,;of tlie comme - 
 
 raent of a state attained to = should arrive at greater power. ihus ever) y 
 sible shade of meaning is at one time or another assigned to the aonst. \ 
 
 much more simple is it to adhere to the plain interpretation of the tense, 
 could be no reason why the Spartans should fear the commencement, any m 
 
 than the progress and consummation, of the Athenian power, even were there 
 anything in the notion of an aorist to convey such an intimation. What they 
 feared was the fact itself, no matter when it happened, or was likely to happen. 
 Consequently the aorist was the right tense, from its nature. Vide Appendix. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIX.— (a.) We have here an episode relating to the fifty 
 years (in round numbers) between the second Persian and the Peloponnesian 
 war. The student should refer to Herod, ix. 114, with which the present 
 episode is connected. ^\eou iirX r^ •rpdytiara k.t.\. This is inter- 
 
 preted (i.) wrre 6roM^A«; ^0 the circumstances under which they prospered ; and 
 (ii ) were induced to adopt that means of administering their affairs under whi^h 
 they prospered. From the Thucydidean usage of vpd<T<ra> and its cognate words, 
 the latter seems preferable. Kriig. cites Hiov iuevfivewai o'lcp rpdircp ipxovrat. 
 Iti Th. irpdytiara, Antiph. vi. 20. ^ tt € » S ), M r) 5 1. Kriig. refers to 
 
 an historical tract of his own, discussing more especially the chronology of 
 this period, but I have not had an opportunity of reading it. Arnold points 
 out that the historical student, after finishing Herod., should proceed to the 
 perusal of the present episode, ch. 89-117, and then take up ch. 24-88, sub- 
 sequently carrying on the narrative from ch. 118. The digression about 
 Pausauias and Themistocles, 128-138, synchronizes with 95-98 of the general 
 sketch. A € w T ux f 5 7] s. This king was the grandfather of Archidamus 
 
 the Second. After the campaign of Mycale he was sent to reduce the Persian 
 party in Thessaly and Northern Greece, but having been suspected of receiving 
 bribes from the Aleuadae, he was recalled to Sparta, condemned, and banished. 
 He died at Tegea, B.C. 469. t«»' ^^ MvKd\v-those who fought at 
 
 Mycale. Kriig. quotes robs iv Mapadum, ii. 34, i". "3, and Arist. Eq. 355, 
 [w^aKfidaw rohs iv U<^\<^ arparvyo^s, and more peculiarly still, MiATiciSi,!/ rhv 
 VLapadwvi, to which Arist. Thesm. 806 is similar. 
 
 {b.) ^8rj. Even before Mycale, See Herod, ix. 114. M^8«v 
 
 f'xd^T«i/-sc. ain-fiv, while stUl in the occupation of the Persians. Kriig. sup- 
 plies many similar phrases. 
 
 (c) rh K0iv6v . . . ai,To75. This sort of dative is simply accounted for 
 by the common principle of the dative, which makes it the ease expressing the 
 more remote object in reference to which the action of the verb takes place. 
 This conception of the dative seems to have been but imperfectly realized by 
 the compilers of our common grammars, if we may judge by the mass of rules . 
 collected with respect to the usage of this case. ' Quid mihi Celsus agit in 
 principle does not differ from Do tibi librum. oB^v lir^^^e^vro. Ihe 
 
 5fl6. must in strictness be taken with the preceding iieKofiiCovro. The use ot 
 2tou here, says Kriig., would be ambiguous. 20€v for iKudev Zirov may be ac- 
 counted for by considering that ^d.v does in effect hold a place -^moBg relatives. 
 See Matth. § 473 ; we may also cf. Jelf, § 822, 6. Trcezen and Salamis are the 
 places meant, and also ^gina. See Her. v. 5. '^"'^as Kal ?»'»'«»««/ 
 
 -wives and chUdren. Kemark the absence of the article, and cf. ch. 8 a, 48 b. 
 ix(7«.. According to Herod, ix. 13. says Kriig., Mardonius had left nothing 
 at all standing behind him. But this is a way of speaking smtable to the semi- 
 poetic character of Herod, style and narrative; and cannot be accepted against 
 the circumstantial statement of our author. 
 
100 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 
 
 Chap. 91.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 lOI 
 
 Chapter XC— (a.) rh ^4\\ov—' what was going to happen: 
 ^\dov irpcc/Sefi?— for bik irp€(r/3€ios, upon the principle of ' Qui facit per alium 
 facit per se.' Popp. quotes ^sch. cont, Ciesiph. § 95, 'At/Jt/cwTrat -yhp Trph 
 Ifxas ovKeri 81' &ryeA««', iA\' avr6s. The dative irpctr^tia is not as Bl. says fop 
 is irpefffidav, but denotes the niodus, or manner, of their coming, as is the proper 
 usage of the dative. t a /u 6 y answered immediately by rh 5^ ir\4ov. 
 
 fi-fiTf. Kriig., considering that according to grammatical principles we should 
 have had othe, explains the deviation from the rule by the fact that the notion 
 of ' prevention ' is implied. rSKfiav y€vofi4vnv—' the valour tkt 
 
 was exhibited: Such phrases point out the true force of ylyvofuu, denoting 
 existence as the result of a process as distinct from flfxi Cf. avZpiav ayafiiv 
 ipy<f ytyoixfvwy, ii. 35, and the long note on this matter, Sheppard's Theo- 
 
 phrastus, p. 102. 
 
 (6.) ^ u 1/ 6 1 <T T ^ K € i— * held together: and consequently were standing. Supply 
 Tck Ttixn from Tctx^C*'*'. Others with the Schol. understand irepi^oAoy. 
 Tb fiov\6tiivov Ka\ xnroitrov. Both, say the commentators, belong to ttji 
 yv<i>fiiis. This is true, but it seems to me that in accordance with the principle 
 of Granville Sharp's canon, both are to be combined into a single idea-the 
 suspmous purport, or bearing of their policy, cf. 18 a. For the neuter parti- 
 ciple followed by a genitive, cf. ii. 59 ; iii. 10 ; viii. 68. ^ oIk h 
 IX 01/ T OS, as above, h.v bpwvrts, may easily be resolved into the equivalent form 
 with the finite verb = ovk t^v ?xo*. See Jelf, § 429, 4. and § 697. 
 kvax<!>pV(^iy T€ Kol a<popii'f}v. « Distinguo ai/ax«p»?<rt»', locum, praesidium quo 
 reciperent sese, a((>opfxi}v unde erumperent.' Both conditions might be fulfilled 
 by one place. T. K. A. weU explains ^^(popfi^v by the modern military term, 
 * base of operations.' With reganl to the general construction of the sentence 
 Kjiig. is right in connecting ws B4, as well as STjXoDvres, with i)^iovv—in that tkj) 
 alleged the Persian world would not by this 7neans have, &c. 
 
 (c.) fifXP'^ roaovrov €« s— ' up to so long a time as: lit. until. These words, 
 says Kriig., would not easily elsewhere be found in combination. He however 
 quotesPlato, i?«i>. 471 B. M«>» roinov, /ie'xpt o5. Ikpotaiv. This 
 
 inBekker's conjecture. The MSS. have arp«<ni/, which is ' duin erigennU 
 during the time they were raising ; but perhaps im^xpi roffovrov, as A. says, m 
 this case would not have been so proper as Trivra xp^vov. I have some doubt 
 whether /ue'xp* roaovrov may not be the exact equivalent of this very phrase. 
 if fiixpt' may mean, as I believe it sometimes does, not up to a certain point 
 but coincident in extent or duration with something that follows. In this case 
 we must render 'just during so much time as they were raising: cf. ch. 71 c. 
 The other expression, ecus hv Upaxriv, is of course donee erexissent—' until they 
 should have raised: &<rrf . . . Hovs—So as to fight from the least 
 
 possible elevation which would be sufficient, i. e. they raised the wall to the 
 minimum height necessary for defence, and soon as ever they reached this, 
 delayed no longer. Concerning ayayKaiordrov, cf. ch. 84, ad finem, (andcf. 
 Livy's ' necessarium cubile.') Srjfioaiov. ' We are not to under- 
 
 stand that temples are here included, for that the religious spirit of the Greeks 
 would forbid. [Acts xvii. 42.] Among the public buildings we may include 
 he Mausolea and other tombs. So ^sch., p. 87, 31. and Diodorus.' Bloomf. 
 |(r TOi— certainly, as T. K. A. says, a recurrence to the directa oratio, but not 
 
 therefore to be translated as he translates, fram whence there might be, which 
 does not indicate the transition. rSXAa — t dicer. Kriig. considers 
 
 this a case of the 'doubled article,' and refers to his own grammar, 59, 9, 2, 
 ■where it is laid down, that after b $.XKos, when another notion occurs which is 
 regarded in the light of a substantive, it always takes the article. To me it 
 seems more simple to take one phrase as the epexegesis of the other — the other 
 imtters, i.e. what was to be done there, cf. note 23 c, and 108 b. This T. K. A. 
 denies, but he seems to contradict himself — if there be not a misprint. 
 
 {d.) roLs apx^s. * The authorities: i e. the rh 4v r€\€i ovra. 
 iirjyf, sc. rhv XP^^^^- This is the explanation given by Stephanus in the 
 Thesaurus. TrpoxxpaffiC^ro — continued to make excuses. 
 
 2 Ti ovK irrfpx^Tai. There is some difference of opinion concerning the view 
 to be taken of 8 n in collocations of this sort. 8 ri, says Am., is ' quod ; ' and 
 would best be translated into English, * When any one asked him about his 
 not coming, lit. as to that he came not, before the governTnent: This nearly 
 agrees with Madvig's view, who classes the idiom with those where Zn denotes 
 a circnmstance or relation which takes place, and of which something is said — 
 e.g., rh. fi€v &\\a opOtas fJKovcras, Zri 5c koI 4fi€ oUi eiireiv rovro, •Kapi\Kov(ras. 
 Plato, Protag., where he translates Srt, but as to the circumstance that. Com- 
 pare some very similar remarks of his concerning quod, Latin Grammar^ 
 I 398, b. E. 2. We might illustrate by Hor. Ep. i. vii. 94, Quod te per 
 Genium, dextramque, Deosque Penates Obsecro et obtestor, where Orelli ob- 
 serves, • Est relativum infinitum ii6ri propter quod.' Kiihner (Jelf, § 849, 3) 
 says, * The relative Stx, quod, refers to a demonstrative in the principal clause, 
 expressed or supplied, as rovrcp, 5td rovro, iK rovrov, &c.' Other Grammarians 
 consider Herns to resemble Sirow, iiirws, &c. ; that is to say, the adverbial and 
 pronominal forms of questions used in the indirecta oratio, are framed from 
 those of the directa oratio by the relative prefix 6, which is indeed the symbol 
 of their connexion with what goes before. Thus vws is answered by Sirtws, and 
 on the same principle r\s by Scrrts. So on this principle rl ovk iirepx^at, be- 
 comes in the indirecta oratio, ijpcro avr6v, 8 ri ovk iirepxoiroj or ivepx^rai. 
 
 Chapter XCI. — (a.) ruv HWiav a^iKvovfiiviev. Poppo would read 
 rivtcv, and he, with others, greatly disapproves of ruv &\\a>v. To me the diffi- 
 culty does not seem insuperable. I had always supposed the words twv &\Xa>v 
 to be simply exclusive of Themistocles — ' When every one else came and told 
 them, i.e. when every one else who came, told them: Mr. Dale has I see hit upon 
 nearly the same words in his version, and I believe we are right. For certainly 
 I have observed other cases where &\\os occurs even • cum articulo,' and not 
 less strangely than here, e.g., ruv TroXirwv koL rS>v HXKoiV ^evoov, Plat. Gorgias, 
 473 C, and again, avroO Koi ruv &\\uv olKfiuv, 840 d ; see also Eurip. Herac. 
 644; Ar. Equites, 905. Kriig. says that 01 6x\oi often occurs where we 
 should have expected to find &\\oi, because the article only implies — the others 
 «'Ao have any connexion with the matter in hand — * the only other persons to be 
 iMisidered: Kan^dvei^ i.e. rh rtixos, understood from reixiC^rcu. 
 
 {h.) Ka\ ^Kov — had even arrived, i.e. in reference to the long-existing ex- 
 pectation of their coming. ' A /3 p <i v i </> s — * commanded the ship 
 stationed at Thermopylae, to communicate between Leonidas and the fleet 
 
102 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ri> T I Chap. 93.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ ^^ 
 
 103 
 
 a 
 
 stationed at Artemis.' T. K. A. See Herod, viii. 21. Stot. 
 
 kKo{}a(iav. I cannot understand the doctrine that (as T. K. A. has it) this 
 phraseology represents the aor. subjunct. of direct narration with Av, and is to 
 be translated—' when they should have heard: Why should not the simple 
 optative retain its ordinary indefinite meaning—' when the Lacedammians came 
 to hear of it, whenever that might be;' cf. rwv v^S>v ts Kara56auau, ch. 50. S.e 
 
 Jelf, § 844 a. 
 
 (c.) ivradda B-f}. Popp. note is ' post partic. ut ii. 58, est turn vera. Sail 
 Jug. c. 71, turn defnum, ibi vera ; similia apud Liv. ; cf. Sanp. ad Xen. mm.xix. 
 5, 8.' The truth is that, in this common phrase, 5^ exerts its usual force, 1/. 
 it adds intensity to the meaning of the word to which it forms an adjunct- 
 Ureupcm then, or if derived from ^JSt) denotes that the mind has at last reached 
 a point on which to pause— wi>on this at last. Cf. 8^ in connexion with relatives, 
 superlatives, &c. See note ch. i b. i>s irphs k.tX. Popp. sap, 
 
 ' Consecutio verborum h«c est rh Xoiirhu Uvai is irphs biayiyv(i,aK0VTas, k. t. \. 
 Trans.— '/o ccyme- to them fcrr the future as to iiwn capable of discriminating: 
 Eemark the variation between the singular and plural numbers, as though 
 Themistocles sometimes spoke in his own person, and sometimes in that of his 
 
 colleagues. 
 
 {d.) tih kifh avTHtaXov vapaffK^vris. I think the obvious sense of the«e 
 words is— 'where the means of military defence are not equal among the 
 parties, it is impossible that fair and equal counsels can be contributed to th. 
 common interest.' Themistocles purposely, I should imagine, couched the 
 maxim in general terms, and left it to the Spartans to make what particular ap- 
 plication of it they pleased. It is not therefore needful to convey this particular 
 application in the words of our translation, nor indeed do I hold that it would 
 be correct. The Schol. and Poppo suppose that Themistocles insinuates- 
 in case of invasion, if Athens is without a wall, she might be more inclined to 
 counsel submission to an enemy than the better defended members of the con- 
 federacy. Kriig. explains, that they could not enforce their opinions with the 
 same authority as more strongly protected states. This is true, but as this 
 would be a contingency by no means displeasing to Sparta, we must be careful 
 not to regard it as an argument addressed to her, but as a general assertion. 
 With respect to the phrase ^s t5 koivIv $ovK€ifffdai, Poppo well cf. 'in com- 
 mune consulere,' Terent. Afid. iii. 16. a7r6, ' starting from,' as we might say. 
 Kriig. quotes a very similar usage from Plutarch : rvs 'EWdSos apx^lv iiripiu 
 /BcjSatws oLTrh rrjMKavTris Suvijtiews, Pgrrh. 14. 
 
 Chapteh XCII.— (a.) ouS^ yap, here equivalent to Kal yhp ov. 
 jca»XtiA*p — *a Thucydidean word, cf. iv. 27, 6a, and imitated by Herodian 
 viii. 1,6.' Kriig. yvfi^vs irapaiv4(T€i — ' a recommendation of policy: The 
 particles 8^ and 5^0ev are, as is well known, frequently employed when the 
 writer is giving what is the sentiment or statement of another, and not his own. 
 See Jelf, § 762, 2 a. The idiom seems to me to have arisen from an ironical 
 emphasis. It is generally employed in cases where the writer himself distrusts 
 the statement to which it is affixed, and is evidently meant to mark out this 
 statement with, as I have said, somewhat of irony. But from this usjige it may 
 pass into the simple index of language for which the author does not hold him- 
 
 self responsible. T^ Koiv^. No editor has determined whether 
 
 this is to be taken, as the Schol. says, for \m\p rov koivov, or whether it is 
 governed by the verbal notion contained in irapa.vicru — * a recomniendation 
 addressed to the State: afxaprdvovrfs. This use of the present 
 
 participle seems to me akin to those noticed, ch. 24 d, and 83 b, where see 
 what has been said, Kriig. says that this verb, and a^iKu also, virtually have 
 a past signification, cf. i. 38. He quotes afiapTdvoov Qt\txiu>Q'i](Te7ai, Xen. Mem. 
 iii. 9, 12. avciFiKXiiTats — 'unquestioned: Sch. ovdh 4yK\rid4vr€S, 
 
 and L. and S. * unblamed: There seems no ground for making it active, as 
 T. K. A. 
 
 Chapter XCIII. — (a.) S^Ar; . . . ianv Srt — for the more usual construc- 
 tion with a participle. But perhaps a slight difference of meaning is implied. 
 Shews in its very appearance ; carries in its appearance, a proof that it was. 
 But see Jelf, §677, 804, 2. inr6K€ivrai. Apparently a technical 
 
 term, for Bl. quotes Xen. Hipp. i. 2, /tt)) vTroKei/xevu^v otuv Bu tSov diix^Kiuv — 
 tr. 'the foundations are laid of stones 'of all sorts and sizes.' 
 ^vvnpya<Tfi4v(av — 'so hewn as to fit into each other: Kriig. cf. ^vifqjKoiofirffxhoi, 
 i. ^3. iyKaTa\4y<a is translated by L. and S. (from the Scholiast's 
 
 iyKaTtfKoBofi^Bvffav) — ' to build in: But it seems to me that the idea of syste- 
 nmtic building is precisely the one which Thuc. meant to reject. Kara\4y<a is 
 simply to collect, and the whole- word implies, I think — ' were picked up and 
 hastily put in: The fact is confirmed by Col. Leake, who saw whole courses of 
 masonry formed of broken portions of Doric columns, and composite blocks of 
 Doric entablature. Topogr. of Athens, vol. i. p. 312. The dpyaa-fxeuoi KlOoi were 
 from these very entablatures, sculptured in rilievo. This seems to have been 
 overlooked by the English trans, who has merely — ' wrought stones: 
 KivoZvres. This looks almost like a reference to the proverb TrdvraXiBov 
 Kivuv — ' to leave no stone unturned: 
 
 {h.) virripKTo av7ov. * A commencement had been made of it,' Kriig., cf. 
 »€VawToi, i. 6. ivl, cum genitivo, ' in the time of: The construc- 
 
 tion apxV *M-nvaiois &p^ai is, says Pop., equivalent to &pxojna trap* * Mriuaiois 
 iivu. There is more difficulty about Kar* iviavrSv, which, according to analogy, 
 should mean, year by year, yearly. Poppo's notion is, I think, most probable, 
 that, viz., it is so connected with dpx^? h as to be almost equivalent to apx^ 
 tor' iviainhv ovcra. I should therefore translate, held the annual office of 
 Archon, i.e. archon eponymus. What this year was is disputed. Bockh, 
 who has published a learned dissertation, de Archontibus pseudcponymis, fixes 
 upon Oljmp. Ixxi. 4, i.e. B.C. 493. Kriig., in his Studia Histor. et PhiloL, 
 maintains, on the contrary, that the year was 01. Ixxi v. 3, i.e. B.C. 482. 
 Clinton argues for B.C. 481, with whom Dr. Thirlwall coincides, having aban- 
 doned Kriig.'s view. See Appendix v. vol. ii., Hist. Grreece, all of which should 
 indeed be read as bearing upon this subject. Mr. Grote has a notion of his 
 own, that Thuc. meant, 'during the year when Themistocles was strategus 
 (vol. V. p. 338, note), but I cannot see how he supports it. Xifitvas 
 
 TpcTy. Pop. refers to Pausanias, and the Schol. Arist. Pax, 144, from whom 
 we learn that the two were called rhv Kavddpov \ififpa and rh 'AcppoBla-cov. 
 Hesychius supplies Zea as the name of the third. Kapp, de re naval i Athcn, 
 
104 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. Bchap. 94-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 105 
 
 ill 
 
 
 interprets the above-mentioned Schol. so as to substitute Tleipaia Kar i^oxifv 
 for rh * A<^po5i<nov. avTO<pv('is, lit. of spontaneous growth, natural. 
 
 fi4ya irpoipfptiy. The infinitive may have for its subject, avrohs vavriKovi 
 yiyfvTiHivovs, in which case tr. the fact of their having become^ a naval people 
 would greatly contribute to the acquisition of power : or its subject may be ri 
 XcSptoi', in which case tr. that the place would greatly aid them, when they had 
 once become a naval people, in the acquisition of power. Kriig. aptly cites Eurip. 
 
 Med. 1090: ^ , 
 
 Koi <prifiL fiporuv oinvfs fiffiv 
 
 Trdixirau ivfipoi /itj5' i<pvrivaav 
 
 iraiSos, irpo<pipiiv tU evTX/x^av 
 
 Twv yfivafiivatv. 
 
 eudus, as explained by the Schol. &fia r^ ffvfi&ovXivaai. Arnold thinks 'im- 
 mediately after the departure of the Persians.' GoU.'s idea that it means ' statim 
 postquam archon factus est,' is negatived by what follows, cf. note upon inKhH 
 r^v ipx'hv, generally considered to mean * their dominion,' h\xt 
 Kriig. would rather refer it to xnr^picro. ^p^f v—' the commencement of 
 
 the building: He, with his colleagues, erected a Hermes with this inscriptioif— 
 'Apliftci'oi vpSnoi rctx^C***' "^^^ 5' av46r\Kav. Kriig. Hist. Phil. Stud. p. 23. 
 
 (c.) Ka\ cpK 0^6 nv<rav. This description has caused some difficulty. The 
 exposition of Mr. Grote seems to convey the general opinion. * Two carts, meet- 
 ing one another, brought stones, which were laid together right and left on the 
 other side of each, and thus formed two primary parallel walls, between which 
 the interior space (of course at least as broad as the joint breadth of the tw 
 carts) was filled up, not with rubble in the usual manner of the Greeks, but con- 
 structed throughout the whole thickness of squared stones, cramped together 
 with metal. The result was a solid wall, probably not less than fourteen or 
 fifteen feet thick, since it was intended to carry so very unusual a height,' 
 vol. V. p. 339. And so Thirlwall. ' The wall was of a breadth which allowed 
 two wagons to pass each other, and this space was entirely filled with he\ni 
 stones, exactly fitted together within, and consolidated upon the outside with 
 iron clamps and molten lead.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] T. K. A. wonders why 
 Thuc. should tell us that they kept bringing the stones to the wall in different 
 directions, and suggests that some of the stones were imported, and therefore 
 came up from the port. I do not see that Thuc. does tell us anything of the 
 sort. I suppose a cart, after having discharged its load, would not unnaturally 
 return for another, and might meet a laden cart by the way. We need make 
 no difficulty about ivriyov, for this does not imply that the carts went on tk 
 top of the wall, but that they brought their load up to the place where it was 
 to be deposited; as may be seen from ivdyuv rh ^irtTTjSeTa, vii. 60. The 
 Schol. explanation ivoanlai, ffvveCfuyfifvou: and Bothe's conjecture, ivdprioi, 
 lashed side by side, are not to be thought of; this is clear even from.Aristoph. 
 Aves, 1 1 14, a passage evidently referring to this very building : 
 
 ficT* iv . . . . ivcunleu 5u &ptxar(^ 
 
 (nrh rod irXdrovs &v irapfXouTalrriv. [1048, ed. Bothe.] 
 ScScfi^voi. * Clamped together with iron and lead^ i,e, the iron clamps were 
 
 Ifastened into the stones with melted lead. Sircp vvv tri. We may 
 
 Iremark that the doubt expressed by recent editors concerning the razing of the 
 I walls by Lysander, which has originated in these words, is without foundation ; 
 for they can only refer to the period at which they were written, and this may 
 I have been at any time before the conclusion of the war. Cf. apldfievos fifdvs 
 hadiffrofifyov, i. i. For the more usual ^i' rojup, Kriig. reads with one MS. 
 linijiV. The first I should render, ' inade angular in the hewing,' i.e. cut in 
 an angular form, so that the meaning would but slightly differ from Kriig.'s 
 1 instrumental dative, which, however, would make 4yyd)uioi = to rtTpdyaivoi, 
 For this he produces the authority of Josephus, p. 108, 21. But Josephus 
 mav have been imitating this passage under a misapprehension. Am. cf. 
 lii. 76, airh r^s rofirjs — *from the point where the stones had been cut: Goll. 
 has 'locis quibus incisi sunt: x <^ ^ * |— fragments made in 
 
 quarrying and squaring stone, which were used by the ancients to fill up the 
 interior of thick walls. Pliny, xxxvi. aa. Vitruv. ii. 8. Comment, on Hor. 
 \od. iii. I, 35. ^n. iv. 711. In this case x«^*l ^^^ mixed with plenty of 
 Liay_for this is meant by ir7jA(Js, or cZay-wor^ar. Bl. rb Se 0v|/os. 
 
 The height of the wall was finished to as near as Tnay be lialf what he inteiided^ 
 \\.€. SffTc ^iiicrv iivai ol Zifvoiiro. So too, I see, Mr. Grote. This I cannot but 
 1 believe to be correct, though Thirlwall explains — ' had intended before this com- 
 pletion of his plan.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] a<piffTdvai iTrifiovXds— 
 A rather unusual use of the verb, which the Schol. explains by airorpoirriv 
 \m(iv. Several MSS. have iirifioXds, i.e. imdcaeis, 'assaults,' which looks 
 more natural. ruu axp^iordruv, i.e. ruv trpiff^xndrwv kcCL twu 
 UfuniiTcov. See ii. 6. Kriig. adds iii. 78. Xen. Anab. v. a, 4. 
 
 {d.) vpofffKetro. Sch. rhv vovv irpoffiix^ — he laid most stress upon the ships. 
 Iking far-sighted enoiigh to perceive. 4Tcixi<r0V<ra'V — * were provided 
 
 With a wall: For understanding the full force of Kar co-KevaCovro, refer to ch. 10, 
 1 KaraffKfvii. 
 
 Chapter XCIV.— (a.) Uavtravlas Z4. This 8^ refers the narrative back to 
 Ich. 87. For K\f6fjL$poTos, cf. Herod, vii. 71. 4 ^etr 4 fi<p 6 v. In the 
 
 spring of the year, 478 B.C., i.e. one year after the battle of Platsea under 
 Aristides and Cimon. Diodorus, says Grote, makes the Peloponnesian ships 
 fifty; but his statement is not to be accepted in opposition to Thucydides. 
 Uv T^Se rfj T}y €fiovl<f. Stephens, Goll. and Knig. connect these words with 
 the following chapter. Arnold retains them in this, because he believes that 
 Thucyd. means to express that Byzantium was taken during the term of 
 Pausanias' command, though certainly towards the end of it. This would 
 I place the recall of Pausanias in B.C. 378 ; and as Dorcis, his successor, never 
 succeeded in securing the allegiance of the allied Greeks, IVIr. Fynes Clinton 
 assumes the year B.C. 377 to have been the true commencement of the Athe- 
 biian dominion. According to this view, the building of the walls, the capture 
 hf Byzantium, and the recall of Pausanias all occurred B.C. 378. Mr. Grote, 
 generally assenting to Clinton's view, adds, 'Pausanias' command, however, 
 need not be restricted to one year, as Mr. Clinton maintains, for the words of 
 Thucyd., 4v t^Sc t^ rryefxovitf, imply nothing as to annual duration, and 
 Jsignate merely the * hegemony which preceded that of Athens.' See note, 
 IvoLv.p. 4,5. 
 
io6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ chap. 97.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 107 
 
 Chapter XCV. (a.) Karh rh ^vyyevfs. Because the lonians, who had 
 
 been expelk<l from Peloponnesus, took refuge in Attica previous to their mi- 
 gration to the Asiatic coast. See on the Ionic migration Arnold's note upon 
 this passage, and a very full account, Hermann's Pol. Ant. of Greece, sections 
 77, 78. Grote, vol. iii. ch. 13. Thirlwall, i. p. 295- ""^toIj. 
 
 Of the Athenians, as is obvious from the context, though a<f>l(Tiv might rather 
 have been anticipated. Krug. compares v. 32 ; vi. 35 ; vii. 17 ; viii. 46. 
 idiKia Kar-nyopflro avrov—'much wrongdoing was laid to his charge: Kriig. 
 is unacquainted with the phrase KaTTryopodixai h^iKiav. fl ffrpaTiiyia- 
 
 * than a military command: To read h ffTparTryia with Poppo in order to 
 obtain a subject, appears to me to destroy the force of the language. Kriig. 
 aptly cites apurroKparla juoAAok I) fiaTiXeia vofjuad-na^rai. Herodian, v. 1, 4, 
 
 (6.) auT<?, for the more strictly correct avr6v — 'it happened to him to k 
 
 summoned: T. K. A. says, 'as both events have reference to Pausanias, 
 
 ovrbs is placed under the government of luvfjBrj.' ^6TaTd|o(reai. 
 
 The prep, denotes as usual * change,' and the whole is correctly given by Dale- 
 
 went over and ranged themselves upon the side of the Athenians. 
 
 tvdvvdri. The Schol. explains ii/dvyas Sc'Swkc kuI KarediKdadri: lit. he suffered 
 
 judicial condemnation. The (vQvin\ was the examination (at Athens) into the 
 
 way in which a magistrate had discharged his office in order to see whether he 
 
 had acted correctly {tvQ<>5). The meaning here therefore is clear. On la-K 
 
 thevvd-n, cf. Jelf, § 501. Remark how the aorist merely denotes the fact. 
 
 while his partial and incomplete acquittal is expressed by a transition to the 
 
 present airoAtJcroi: the y^i before a^iKuv is in accordance with the usual Greek 
 
 idiom, which affixes the negation to the part of the notion negatived in the. 
 
 speaker's mind ; Poppo has produced a somewhat uncommon imitation from 
 
 the Latin language, * Liberatur Milo non eo consilio profectua esse ut inM- 
 
 diaretur,' Cic. pro Mil. 18. 47. 
 
 (c.) xfipovs yiyvoivrai. Not simply as Bl. would have it, comparative 
 for positive, but ' should deteriorate: That such was the fact with the Spartan., 
 owing to a reaction against their severe domestic discipline, is notorious. Sw 
 Plut. Arist. c. 23. Aristotle notices the fact, and gives the same reason for 
 it. girep ivf7hov— which they saw to be the case in Faiismm. 
 
 Miiller {Dorians, i. p. 204) considers that the unwillingness of the Spartans to 
 send more commanders to Asia, lay deeper than any annoyance at the defection 
 of the Ionian Greeks. They deemed it inexpedient to aim at the mastery of 
 the sea, or run the hazard of breaking up the Spartan institutions by attempts 
 at foreign conquest. Uavois. See what the Athenians themselves 
 
 say, i. 76; and for a Lacedaemonian witness, Xen. Hell. vi. 5, 34- ^'^^' 
 ^ T t T Tj 8 € 1 u s, properly fit. Kriig. explains ipihov^, but it rather means ' m ii 
 way that suited them.' 
 
 Chapter XCVI.— (a.) Tlavtraviov fi7<ros. Objective genitive. 
 "EWrivoranlai. So called because they received and then disbursed the con- 
 tributions of all the Hellenic confederacy. These contributions were originally 
 deposited at Delos, and then removed to Athens. Boeckh {Public Econ. Ath. 
 ii. p. 236), from some inscriptions, concludes that they were ten in number, an 
 that, like the treasurers of the gods, they were chosen by lot, out of the Penta- 
 
 cosiomedimni, and that they did not enter upon their office at the beginning of 
 the year, but after the Panathensea. They {iUxovro) received, but did not 
 collect the tribute. The word <p6pos became so odious, that at Olymp. c. 
 aivra^is was substituted for it. Delos was selected for these |.5vo5or, or 
 'councils,' 'meetings of commissioners.' Subsequently they were called 
 ffiy,Spoi. Bekker, Anec. p. 302. Isocrates, viii. 29. For fuller information 
 see Herm. Pol. Antiquities, § 56. Boeckh, Public Econ. Athens, p. 236, Eng. 
 trans. The Hellenotamiai were not (says A.) reappointed after the establish- 
 ment of the democracy by Thrasybulus. 
 
 Chapter XCVIL— (a.) airi» koiuS>p. This airh has, as Kriig. remarks, the 
 force of the German von. It indicates in a less intimate way than ix the 
 source from which any action proceeds. For examples cf. L. and S. and Jelf's 
 Grammar, voc. anS. iirriXdov, prosecuted, or cxeciited. 
 
 rpodrvyx^vovras is explained by the Scholiast eViroS.'Coi'Tas ; perhaps it is 
 rather more general— m;^ in each particular case caim into contact ov collision 
 xiith them. Kriig. quotes Xen. Cyr. vi. 3. 2, oi irpoarxryx<^vovr^s tS>v apx^vrciv 
 hffi(\ovro, and Dem. 25, 96, 6 irpoarvx^v ael Tt/x«pet(r0«. 
 
 [b) typar\,a . . . iiroivffdfi-nv. As perfects, says T. K. A. Why not as 
 aorists I am unable to determine. The fact that Thucyd. had so written is 
 all that he wishes to convey. The time of writing is of no importance. 
 hfioKii, a digression, called in later Greek writers Trapin^aais. 
 h\irf4s, omitted, left out, only imitated by Arrian. x^P^o" seems to 
 
 be here used as a sort of diminutive for the ordinary r6'!ros, i.e. locus, topic. 
 ital Uaro, this Koi is one of those which, as Arn. observes, may best be 
 rendered by an emphasis upon the auxiliary verb—' did touch upon.' It seems 
 in this and similar cases to imply, ' for all that,' ' notwithstanding what I have 
 said,' cf. ch. 20 a. roU xP<i^ois-' The chronology: and in later 
 
 liters. The reference is to the Athis, or History of Attica, which Hellamcus 
 composed in four books at least. He was a native of Mytilene (see i. 21.)— 
 Aulus Gell. makes him come from Miletus— a contemporary of Herodotus— 
 i.e. twelve years older, and sixty-five years of age when the Peloponnesian 
 war began. See Miiller's History of Greek Literature, ch. xviii. 7. 
 hu hero, as elsewhere, nearly Trapf'x". See GoU. on i. 9. Its subject is either rh 
 X^^piop, or as Pop. and Kriig. suggest, ravra from what precedes, cf. Jelf, § 898, 
 lAr., it involves, or gives opportunityfor the setting forth. Herod, i. i. Mr. Grote, 
 after observing that the period from B.C. 477 to B.C. 405 is sometimes incor- 
 rectly described as the Athenian Empire, and that no one word will express the 
 character of their ascendency during these years, proceeds to direct attention 
 to this portion of the work of Thucyd. as indicating the imperceptible transition 
 from an Tiy^fiovla to an opx^. ' The transition from the Athenian Hegemony 
 to the Athenian Empire was doubtless gradual, so that no one could determine 
 precisely where the former ends and the latter begins ; but it had been consum- 
 mated before the thirty years' truce, which was concluded fourteen years before 
 the Peloponnesian war, and it was in fact the substantial cause of that war.' 
 Grote, vol. v. pp. 395-6, where see also the long note on the ya^fiovla, as con- 
 trasted with ipx^. ^v olcp rpSirtp. The prep, conveys somewhat 
 more meaning than the simple dative. Bremi, to whom Poppo refers, says 
 
io8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 1 00.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 109 
 
 upon Lys., p. 69, Tlfpl Sij/c. ^i' TotJryTy rp6ir(p ^(rda &v /xe rfrificopTifievos, est cum 
 prepositione, quod nos diceremus, qiid ratione innixi, Jidentes, tr., under what 
 circuTnstanccs it became established^ cf. i. 8, ad fin. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII.— (a.) 'Ht ova. ' On the site of this city, subsequently 
 the port of Amphipolis, of. iv. 102. The words ^ M ^Tpvfi6vi are added to 
 distinguish it from a Mendjean colony, and perhaps from^ a third Eion 
 mentioned by Eustathius.' Popp. MijScov ix^^ruv. Herod, vii. 107. 
 
 The event occurred, Olymp. Ixxv., 4, and Olj-nip. Ixxvi. Kriig. The capture 
 of Scyros occurred in the latter year. Grote has, I think, successfully shown, 
 that these three events could have formed but a small portion of the operations 
 carried on against the Persians, from B.C. 477 to b.c. 466. See Herod, rii. 
 106, 107. Nothing but years of active training could have enabled the 
 Athenians to acquire their remarkable ascendency in nautical skill, and their 
 various other advantages, and to the same prolonged and continuous labours 
 must be ascribed the disgust of the Ionian confederates, vol. v. p. 403. 
 
 (6.) vphs 8^ Kapvffrlovs. Nothing is known of this. ^toW- 
 
 fiticrav. ' That this happened during the time of Themistocles' flight into Asia, 
 we learn from ch. 137, and before the battle of Eurymedon, ch. 100. But as 
 the date of this battle is itself undetermined, Clinton and Wachsmuth place the 
 siege of Naxos b.c. 466, but Kriig. in the year b.c. 473,' Popp. 
 vapcffT'fja'avro — ^lit. * made them come and stand beside them* is not express as 
 to the means employed to compel a surrender. That the place was carried hy 
 assault seems (as Bl. has seen) implied by the words of Aristophanes, Uh (ravrhv 
 Kara rod reixovs 8t€ S-^ 7' i] fid^os idXco, Vesp. 355. 45ovXudr\. 
 
 From what precedes, we see that this word is not so strong as i.v^pairoiiC€ndai; 
 indeed, Kriig. says it is simply opposed to ainSifofxos, as is the case in Xen. 
 Hellenic, iv. 8, § 1, 2. 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — (a.) I^K^tiai — 'arrears.'' This is evidently so to be 
 translated, as the passages adduced by Popp. prove. Zon. et Suidas, eKtfia, ij 
 K€Kp€a}(Tfi€V7i \otTrds. al ruu <p6pwv cfcSetai simt Polybio ri 7rpo(ro<p€i\6p.eva ruv 
 &fxo\oyr\Q4vTwv xp^t^'^'^^^- Livio, reliquum pecuniae ex eo quod pepigerant, 
 xviii. 37. The term in the Latin jurists is re/t^^Mfl^io. KfiiroffTpdriov 
 
 — refusal, or omission of military service. The word had a technical applica- 
 tion in the Athenian law, as indicating a particular civil oflfeuce. In the case 
 of a 7f>a<^^ \€nro<npariov, actual desertion seems to have been implied. The 
 penalty upon conviction was a fine, and complete disfranchisement of the 
 offender and his descendants. (irpaa-ffov, as the compound verb, 
 
 iKTtpdffaoi — were very strict and exacting. raXanrtapftv. This and 
 
 the cognate substantive rdKanrwpia denote regular and prolonged devotion to 
 labour. Wachsmuth, vol. ii. § 53, is justified in saying, • The lonians and their 
 Greek neighbours were too much debased by sensual pleasures to prefer frewlom, 
 at the price of toil and privation, to servitude which insured them the enjoy- 
 ment of luxury.' See their conduct as described by Herod, vi. 12. 
 Tckj avdyKas — • the compulsory measures which they did employ! said in the 
 first instance of tortures applied to extort confession. I cannot agree with 
 Popp. that there is any allusion to military engines and besieged towns, d. iv. 
 87, and Dem. ii. 29 ; Isocrates, iv. 81. 
 
 (h.) ^v ri^ovv itpx^vTcs. This may be considered equivalent to -^ScTs iv r^ 
 
 ^py,- agreeable in their government ; but such a use of rjSovy must be admitted 
 
 to be unusual ; compare, however, our use of the expression ' in favour.' Kriig. 
 proposes to make lipxoy^fs ^aav equivalent to ^px^y, a predicate modified by 
 the phrase iv v^ovfj, ' no longer ruled to the satisfaction of their allies.* The use 
 of the participle with fifii for the finite verb is, I think, common in the Greek 
 Test., and may be found elsewhere. Sfiolcas — ws iv apxfj fj-era rhv 
 
 Tlavffavlav, Schol. ffcf^lov ^v. This perhaps may mean, they made 
 
 light of it, ^ust &8 Jnyenal uses ' facilis,' — Queis facile sedem conducere, &c. 
 
 iii. 31. 
 
 [c.) arr 6 Kv-no" IV, -we might almost render ^ shirking, * — * trying to get off.* 
 
 fjilavro — '■they made the arrangement for themselves* voce medid. The accu- 
 sative rb iKvovfifvov avdKwfjLa, not as Bl., ' what the expense comes to* but the 
 expense coming to, or devolving on than, may be regarded as placed in explana- 
 tory apposition to -^a xp'fjf^^'''^- Popp. suggests another way of taking the 
 words, sc. XP^M'*''''* ird^avTo (uffre) <p4p€iv rh Uv. avoK. ; but this does not seem 
 necessary. This sense of iKvioixai is found in Herod, vi. 65, 84, 86, ix. 26 ; and 
 Kriig. also cites Ar. Pol. iv. I, i, idv ns /jl^ ttjs 'iKvovfxdvns iTriQvfxri jxtiff €'|e«s 
 X T. X. iimpoi. The common reading is &iropoi, but many of the 
 
 best MSS. read &ir€ipoi, which is adopted by Bekker, Poppo, and G611. I think 
 they are right, for &iTopoi is rather tautological, and at any rate much more 
 likely to have been substituted for &irfipoi than vice versA. Hireipoi implies that 
 they were destitute of that experience which the practical service they had 
 declined alone could give. 
 
 Chapter C. — (a.) rhs irdaas is [ras] ^laKOfflai. There is much varia- 
 tion in MSS. and among editors concerning the article before the numeral. 
 The reading appears to me to depend upon the historical fact whether the 
 Persian fleet at Eurymedon consisted of more than -200 sliips or not. Later 
 writers state the number as much higher, but they vary so among themselves, 
 and exhibit so much tendency to exaggeration, that their authority is not worth 
 much. Besides, what became of the remaining vessels not destroyed by Cimon? 
 From the necessity of the case, and indeed conformably to the usual practice, 
 the Persians, we may be sure, ran all their ships on shore, so that their whole 
 force might be concentrated to repel the inevitable attack of their enemy ; and 
 how, in this case, could any of the vessels have escaped the victors ? I should 
 therefore tr. the whde of them, up to their full count of 200 — i.e. the whole 200 
 of them. Other ways of accounting for the article seem to me futile. Mr. 
 Grote has, I see, taken a view similar to the above, vol. v. p. 419, note. 
 X9^v<e vffTfpov. B.C. 465, or, according to Kriig., b.c. 467. rod 
 
 litrdWov. According to Herod, the gold mine brought in 80 talents yearly 
 to the Thasians. See vi. 46-48, vii. 18 ; and read Bockh, Public E. of A. book 
 ill. ch. 20. Thucyd. had an interest in it, through his wife, and resided at 
 &iapte-Hyle during his banishment. For an historic parallel, see Grote's 
 Dote, ibid. 
 
 (6.) 'E V 1/ € a 6 5 u s . ' On the Strymon, about three miles higher up than Eion, 
 near the spot where the river narrows itself again out of a broad expanse of the 
 nature of a lake, was situated the Edonian town or settlement called Nine 
 
NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 
 
 
 110 
 
 Ways, H little above the bridge which here served as an important commiinica. 
 tion for all the people of the interior,' Grote, v. p. 4^1. On the Edonians.ci 
 Herod. V. 124, vii. 1 10, 1 14, ix. 75, and 'H5u,m aU JEsch. Persce 487. 
 iuuirdvTc.*' Their destruction is ascribed to the Edonians alone by other 
 writers Kriig. would therefore accept Valla's conjecture, 4.5/*7rarr«, t.e. the 
 colonists • or, with Heilman, read iutTrdrra,.. Arn. considers it natural that 
 all the Thracian tribes should combine to destroy a colony attempting to settle 
 itself in such an advantageous position as Amphipolis especially as they h^ 
 already defeated a similar attempt by Aristagoras of Miletus, Herod^v n6. 
 Histiaeus, he might have added, had been similarly unsuccessful, Grote v. 
 p. 1 6. Ap(£3T,(rKos, according to Leake, is the modem * Drama. This occurr^ 
 
 B.C. 467-464. 
 
 Chapter CI —(a.) M<ix«*5- Commentators are puzzled, as only one battle 
 is mentioned. I regard it as the indefinite use of the plural, ' hostUitm: See 
 note on iii 65 h'Ki<xxovro Kp<><pa. Upon this, Grote takes occa- 
 
 sion to remark, ' The first intent of unprovoked and even treacherous hostility 
 —the germ of the future Peloponnesian war-is conceived and reduced to an 
 engagement by Sparta,' v. p. 4^3- ETXctcs n.p|^o.Ko.. The student 
 
 must consult upon these, Arn.'s excellent note on this chapter; MuUersi).- 
 Hans, book iii. ch. a, 3 ; Hermann's Vol. Antiq. Greece, § 19, ^4, ^8, 48 1 and 
 Qj,^^^ rov <r€t(rfjiov. The article, because it was the worst ever 
 
 known in Greece, Olymp. ci. It laid the whole of Sparta in ruins, save five 
 houses, and it is said, broke off a peak from Mount Taygetus, which roUed mto 
 the river Eurotas. The Spartans regarded it as a judgment sent by ^eptune 
 for the murder of some revolted Helots who had taken sanctuary in his temple 
 at T^narum. See Grote, v. p. 4^8. is 'I0c6^t,v a.Jarvcra.. Re- 
 
 mark the contracted form of the expression, as in 65 b, 87 b. Krug. quotes 
 Maras .Is Miaovs, Xen. Anab. i. 6, 7. The remarkable expression of Ari- 
 stotle {Pol ii. 6, z) concerning the Helots is quoted by Kriig., &(nrep t^p i<^ 
 Sptvovrts roh arvx-hfMffi niartXodffiV. ^ ' tt,^ 
 
 (b ) T(JTe-here, as often, ' the well-known tirm: Qa^ioi 5e. iiew 
 
 the narrative is resumed. relxos and v«vs-without the article as 
 
 in the quotation of legal formula, items in an account, and such fiimibar mitten 
 See note. ch. 8 a; cf. inter alia ch. .08. iii. 117. ,?^' ///l/Il 
 
 this case, as generally, the participle sine articulo expresses the conddimn^ 
 the predication. This is clearly shown by the present example, since it stan^^ 
 for 1^' f-&<rr.. Cf. i. 108, iii. 115, 117. Ta^aM^^o.. Cf. ^ra(avr. 
 
 ^^ ^^. g<ra 15 Ci, Kriig. supposes to mean arrears and the pajinec^j 
 
 of the expenses of the war. 
 
 Chaftee CIL-(a.) ^^7,K.JvcTo. Two battles are mentioned byHe^j 
 ix - . kWois. 'The JEginetans, ii. 27 ; Plataeans, in. 54 ; -^*" 
 
 n^ans, Xen. Hell v. 2, 3,' Popp. U^ov. Olymp. Ixxix. i, or B.c.46^^ 
 
 ovK 6\iyv. With 4000 hoplites, Arist., Lysist., Kriig. tcix^M ^^^ I 
 
 So in the case of Plat«a, Herod, ix. 70. Cf. Thuc. ii. 75. vn. 79- J'' 
 
 We must supply roD TC^xo/iax^'"- Popp. refers to rijs 8u.(£/xca,. ^^^.a n 7^1 
 ' »Ek5€« i<paly.ro quasi rh ^pdy[iara tS>v 'A0T,Kafa,y est dicendi geuus imp 
 
 [BooKllcHAP. 103.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 I «onale ' Popp. ' When there was shown to be a deficiency in this respect* 
 \to\iopKias, without the article, as it turned out a long siege. Kriig.^quotes 
 Polyb i. 17, 9. TfoMopnias xpoviov vpo<paivotiirir)S. pia J^p ^v eT\ov 
 
 \oth?rwi^e, had not this deficiency existed, theg would have captured the place by 
 
 (b.) <pav€pd, opposed to iS^Xws ^x^ovro, ch. 92, Popp. /i^ ri connects itself 
 -y^ith 5cf<rain-6S, tliough the cognate notion koL h\\o<f>v\ovs fi/ia Tj-^Tjadfi^uoi inter- 
 I venes. Kriig. refers to Pflugk on Eurip. Herac. 227, and Lobeck, Ajax, p. 268. 
 rhroXunp^v Kal r^u i/eojT.— ' the enterprising and revolutionary spirit! 
 \(^{\l%'j, h\\o<pvKovs. The never-extinguished animosity between 
 
 the Dorian and Ionian race is justly considered as one of the real causes of the 
 Peloponnesian war. Clinton {Fasti Hell 'Ann. 464-461 B.C.), following Plu- 
 tarch, has recognised two Lacedaemonian requests to Athens, and two expedi- 
 tions to Sparta, both under Cimon, one b.c. 464, just after the earthquake, a 
 second B.C. 461. Mr. Grote's arguments for a single expedition (vol. v. pp. 
 430, 431, note) appear to me conclusive. The earthquake took place at the 
 i time of the siege of Thasos, for it was the earthquake which prevented the 
 Lacedaemonians from acceding to the request of the Thasians for an invasion of 
 \ttica ; but Cimon commanded at Thasos, and consequently could not have 
 led an Auxiliary force at that time into Laconia. Next, Thucydides must have 
 mentioned two expeditions had he heard of them ; nor is it probable that 
 Sparta, the first military power in Greece, should have been all at once reduced 
 to such helplessness as to owe her safety to foreign intervention. The gross 
 exaggerations of the comic poet, Lysistrat. v. 1 1 38, deceived Plutarch. 
 
 {c.) oi,K iir\ TV /3€\Tiovi— ' not for the best of motives; as we should say. 
 Cf 'Kpotnrolvffis M x^'^pop, Theoph. Uepl Elpt^v.ias, or, in this place perhaps, 
 not for the more honourable reason of the two— i.e. Sri obSkv -KpoaZiovTai avrwy 
 in ' A p 7 € Ta s. On the Argi ves and their policy, consult Thirlwall, 
 
 ii. p. 424, and Grote, v. 4^9- ' Argos, neutral during the Persian invasion, 
 had now recovered the effects of that destructive defeat suffered about thirty 
 years before from the Spartan King Cleomenes.' ^ttI t^ M^8y. The 
 
 dative is unusual, but quite legitimate, for it denotes the * object ' against which 
 the treaty was directed. KaTcVrr,. The verb agrees with the nearest nomi- 
 native, as is not unusual. Kriig. quotes from Herodotus Uiroi re koI hi^p 
 TiTayfihos, 8, 98. 
 
 Chapter CIIL— (a.) SeKcfry. Kriig. would read 5', i.e. rcrdprcp. Dio- 
 dorus also, however, says 10. i<t>' ^ iiia<nv-^ on condition that 
 
 they shall emigrate.'' See Jelf. 
 
 (6.) icar' ?x^os fjSi? rb AaK.Satfioplcov—' the animosity which they had 
 hy thi^ time begun to entertain towards the Laced(Sim)nians: The objective 
 genitive, as ch. 96, H^'i<ros, and rh 'Advvaluv tx^os, ii. 1 1. Cf. iv. i, vii. 57. 
 Kary'Kiaa^ is-settled into, or, as we should say, iw-an elliptical way of 
 ^peaking that has often been noticed, cf. supra 100 a, and with iv for is, v. 35. 
 The same words occur vi. 7. NatJiraKTov. The modern Lepanto, a 
 
 town which commanded the Sinus Corinthiacus. Subsequent events showed 
 Jhe perspicacity of the Athenians in selecting this spot in which to locate an 
 enemy to Lacedaemon. Cf. ii. 90. Kriig.'s date for this event is B.C. 462. 
 
112 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 1 Chap. ^^5-1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 '^3 
 
 (c.) •wpo<r€x<i>P'n<r<'ty- On this brief notice of a most important event, see 
 Grote, vol. v. p. 435. 'This was an acquisition of signal value to the Athe- 
 nians, since it both opened to them the whole range of territory across the outer 
 Isthmus of Corinth to the interior of the Crissseun Gulf, on which the Megarian 
 port of Pegse was situated, and placed them in possession of the passes of Mount 
 Geraneia, so that they could arrest the march of a Peloponnesian army over 
 the Isthmus, and protect Attica from invasion. It was, moreover, of grtat 
 importance in its effects upon Grecian politics ; it was counted as a \\Tong liv 
 Lacedsemon, gave deadly offence to the Corinthians, and lighted up the flames 
 of war between them and Athens ; their allies, the Epidaurians and iEginetans, 
 taking their part.' Hence the exceeding indignation which, as we know fnjm 
 poets and historians, was felt at Athens when Megara once more reverted to 
 the Peloponnesian alliance. See infra, ch. 114 ; Arist. Ach. v. 460, 648. The 
 date is very uncertain : Miill. says b.c. 458 ; Wachsmuth, b.c. 457 : Manso.B.c. 
 464 ; Grote, b.c. 461 or 460. Hiaaiav. This pLice was eighteen stadia 
 
 from Megara, and even in Strabo's time (9, p. 391) connected with it by long 
 walls. ♦ These " long walls," though afterwards copied in other places and upm 
 a larger scale, were at that juncture an ingenious invention for the purpose of 
 extending the maritime arm of Athens to an inland city,' Groto, v. p. 437. 
 They doubtless gave the idea, and formed the encouragement for undertaking 
 the more gigantic scheme of connecting Athens with its ports of Piraeus and 
 Phalerum. Kdretxoi/. Cohibebant, kept them close, restricted, consequently, 
 harassed. o.irh toG5€ — it was mainly from this that the excesm 
 
 {or violent) animosity of the Corinthians against the Athenians originated, ki 
 T0C86, according to the general rule, would not refer to what precedes, Kriig. 
 understands oirb rovh^ XP^*'<>^' ^^^ ^^® '3ibo\Q rule is not without exceptions. 
 
 Chapter CIV.— (<t.) kTriffr-nfffv. Kriig. assigns all the events mentioned 
 in this chapter to the year b.c. 460. ^k Uaptias. This place stood, 
 
 according to Kiepert's map, on the inland shore, to the S.W. of the groat lake 
 of Mareotis. Inai-os thus commencing his insurrection on the western extremity 
 of the Delta of the Nile, gradually advanced towards the east. Diodorus 
 says the insurrection began b.c. 361, which agrees with Kriig.'s chronology. 
 *dpou. This small island lay off the mouth of the harbour of Alexandria, and 
 from the lighthouse there erected, all similar beacons have received the name. 
 'ApTa|6p|ou. This form of spelling is most consonant with the analogy of 
 Eep^ijs, and the Hebrew form of the name. See Donaldson, New Cratf/l'-S, 
 p. 195, yet Bekker, following some few MSS., reads 'ApTa^6p^ov. 
 
 (b.) An inscription preserved in the Louvre contains the name of those 
 Athenian citizens who in one single year perished for their country in Cyprus. 
 in Egypt, in Phoenicia, among the Haliensians, at iEgina, and in Megara. 
 Nothing could more forcibly indicate the extent of the Athenian empire, and 
 their military activity. Boekh, in his great work {Corp. Inscrij).), assumes 
 that the year intended is not the natural, but the civil year; i«. Olymp 
 Ixxx. 3, or from summer b.c. 459 to summer b.c. 458. This he infers from the 
 fact that the battles mentioned by Thuc. as having been fought in the Mogand. 
 would not otherwise be included in the given year. But Am. remarks that 
 preliminary skirmishes must have taken place, and that the men may have been 
 
 slain in some of these. * The funeral ceremonies,' he adds, • in honour of those 
 who had fallen in the first year of the Peloponnesian war were performed in the 
 winter, i.e. at the close of the natural, and in the middle of the civil, year.' 
 yav<r\ SiaKoaiais. According to Isocrates 200 triremes were lost in Egypt, 
 viii. 86. Diodoms says 300, xiii. 25. More than 200 vessels, Thuc. ch. 110. 
 Kriig. o»'airA€uo-oi'T6s. Eemark the force of the preposition, as in 
 
 avdficurts. Kparovi/res k. r. \. Kriig. refers to Ctesias, Ptrs^ic. c. 32, and 
 
 Diodorus ii. 74, who speak of a great battle, in which the viceroy Achaemenes, 
 brother of Artaxerxes, fell by the hand of Inaros (cf. Her. vii. 7). According 
 to Herod, (iii. 12) 100,000 men perished. AevKhv rerxos. Arn. 
 
 says : ' The white castle of Memphis was the headquarters of the Persian force 
 in Egypt, amounting, native and tributary, to 120,000 men, (Herod, ii. 30, 
 iii. 91). According to the Scholiast it received this name because built of stone, 
 whereas the other two fortified places were brick. On rwv 5vo fiepuv, cf. ch. 10 
 and 74. U^pffuv Ka\ miitoiv. So described, though they had 
 
 some time before coalesced into one single state. It is remarkable that the 
 ancient appellation, ol M^Sox, was generally retained, though the Persians were 
 the dominant race. Cf Mr/Si/cijs ndAejuoy, MTjSi'CftJ', M7/5i(r/i($f, &c., and cVei 
 (npvrhv &\(cre M^3a>i', ch. 132, as well as the well-known epitaph upon the 
 brother of iEschvlus. 
 
 Chapter CV. — (a.) 'AAtas. The name 'KKi^h belonged both to the place 
 and people. They were probably a race of poor fishermen, perioeci to the Dorian 
 Argives, who had forced them down to the extremity of the Argolic peninsula. 
 Probably, as Grote conjectures, it was upon this occasion that the Athenians 
 made themselves masters of Trcezen, which we subsequently find in their posses^- 
 sion without knowing how it came to be so. The war, though it is not distinctly 
 so said by Thucyd., doubtless arose from the jealousy felt by Corinth at the 
 accession of Megara to the Athenian alliance. KeKpv<pa\€i<f. 
 
 According to Leake, the modern Kyra, one of the small islands which lie 
 between Epidaurus and jEgina. This action was not decisive, but * in the great 
 naval battle which ensued off the island of iEgina, the superiority of the new 
 nautical tactics acquired by twenty years practice of the Athenians since the 
 Persian war over the old Hellenic ships and seamen, was demonstrated by a 
 victory most complete and decisive. . . . The maritime power of iEgina was 
 irrecoverably ruined.' Grote, vol. v. p. 438 (part ii. ch. 45). 
 
 {b.) AfwKpdTous. Colleague of Aristides in the battle of Platsea. Plutarch, 
 Arist. c. 20. Popp. Wachsmuth, Hell. Alt. i, 582 § (German edition) speaks 
 highly of these men. ' Between the political parties of this age, far from being 
 anything like demagogues, and yet not decidedly opposed to Pericles and the 
 Demus, for the most part inspired only with the thought to rival each other in 
 j great exploits, there stand forth from the darkness which shrouds the frag- 
 mentary historical traditions of the time, the great outlines of those stout war- 
 nors Myronides, Tolmides, and Leocrates.' Myronides, he goes on to say, won 
 "le admiration of his contemporaries and posterity (ai^p ^ir' aperfj Oavfia^Sfitvos, 
 l^iod. xi. 89) by his expeditions, undertaken to advance the popular cause, into 
 ^tia, Phocis, and Thessaly. Leocrates was colleague to Aristides at Plataea, 
 |and commanded in the war with ^Egina, B.C. 457. Tolmides was more distin- 
 
 I 
 
iH 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 107.J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 1^5 
 
 I 
 
 J r¥,,«;Ttrr tlip hanishment of Cimon he con- 
 
 ^;.hea for daring than pn.d™« »«™5 *~7ft,, cimon's death he 
 
 ducted ,ucc...ively ^^^'^l^^^l^^^ ,^TccJle^. r,6r,^ belong, 
 led the Atheman army ,nto Bceot.a, i ^^ ^.^ r.pa..ia.. Krtg. 
 
 to Wpov, (•.vra.l K,^- ^,^^,^^i ,,„,, the Isthmus ta 
 
 reads r.pa.(... The high "dge o' ^^^^, J.^ to a crane's neck. On 
 
 Corinth to Megara. so called from ■'/ '^'""""^^ ^^^^smuth, Eng. tra„,l. 
 its importance as a military position, cf. supra. See Wacnsmu , b 
 
 Tol. i. Appendix iii. „.„;,„. T K A. tr., ' (*<we «'*o tiw Ifft 
 
 A,*,W .« the city; a version not strully accurate , ./ , 
 
 Mr„isW.^r<«n the «Vy, i. «-c* «' ;^";'f;^t^- ,,„i,e. which reached ta 
 .-..those aW the age of -P^^J^ ™;;:'<'^;:7':, V^f^r to those no. ,« 
 ^rd S o ^e «;f.oX...a sort of mobilized militia, in which all young Ath. 
 :liXlighteen'.-^^^^ 
 
 wl!ir^«.hevictor,-.' Ka«.fo...o.. • This nid^afo. 
 
 Tthe r own old men is highly characteristic of Grecian manners Gr^te. 
 
 ; „ i aX » The confli'c t is said by Diodorus to have taken place i. v, .^ 
 
 OHArrFR CVI-(«.) .po.&^aeOiv. Kriig. con.icctures yp<.3.a.e<.. y-f-i 
 CHATTKR Lvi. V-' ^ ..,.»„„„ tn understand ri Yiip'oi- after thc p'' 
 /V«,W,- iM-cause he considers '» ^'^-^f, '° "°J"'p"" ^^^' „i,. ,;, ^.,x„;, 
 tieiplc, and x»,i, demands something of the sort. Pop. fills up f 
 i, «.T.X., and compares :rp..,ra.a7.af«., iv. 78, ;■'•'*• j^ Xn mean' 
 
 ,ere what we call a -close,- though, as .n «>■; ^-J-— ' "^ „„,„>,^ 
 
 ;:::™a:lZ =; t:::. used to denote „ body of men t^.^^ 
 :rbut.asKr.g':.£.._^eco.. 
 
 =!^=^^^r^Se^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 '^ t KariK^vnav-moBt probably by the use of slings, 
 
 gonem. ^"-^ . ^ff.„ found and may be perhaps included und."! 
 
 «£rToTs— such a dative as is often found, ana may "'^ 1^ i^ 
 the general head of dativus commodi. Cf. ch. 89. ^ 3- 
 
 ^,.^a. when the notion is in -^f -' -^ -g^^; ^^^ ^^^^"^^ .a.pi 
 roL«, when it is actually begun. See Jelf § 688. obs^ 
 C.iv/«T.X. The difficulties concerning these walls will be ^f'^y^^^ 
 ICJl il M In the present passage Thucyd. speaks of the Phaien 
 properplace, 11. 13- m uir p ^ 1 „/^« • the intermediate wall, t* »'* 
 
 wall, and that to the Piraeus, as rii^ayh r.ix'n • ^^' l^^T^'l ^ 
 .,4,., is included by implication. Krug. assigns the ^^^^^^^^^^^ I 
 
 l^pas.rh. ^nrp6.oX... It is certainly common enough to use the 
 
 a people for their country, as * JEquos,' ' Sequanos,' by Livy, and 'le Milanais,' 
 by French historians (cf. ch. iii.). Here it is rather more remarkable, as the 
 singular stands in direct apposition. So AopiTJs, r) fitirpSiroXis rwv AoKedaifioviuv, 
 iii. QZ. Doris is here a rpliroKLS, not, as usually described, a rtrpdvoXis, i. e. 
 Pindus is omitted. But there seems to have been some uncertainty about the 
 point, for Pliny (iv. 13) makes it a ir€vrdno\i5, and the Schol. on Find. Pyth, i. 
 1 2 1 , an (^dvoXis. /3 a m A € ft) s of course belongs to nXeio-Toava/cTos, 
 
 so also i. 1 14, Kriig. Pausanias, properly speaking, was never king of Lacedae- 
 mon, but guardian to Pleistarchus, cf. ch. 132. Nicomedes was his younger 
 brother, and also * guardian ' to Pleistoauax. On the objects of this expedition, 
 see Grote, vol. v. p. 443. ' It was soon seen that this was only a part of the 
 olijects of Sparta, and that her main purpose, under instigation of the Corin- 
 thians, was to arrest the aggrandisement of Athens. ... To strengthen 
 Thebes, and to render her ascendency eflfective over the Boeotian cities, was the 
 best way of providing a neighbour at once powerful and hostile to the Athe- 
 nians.' Miiller fixes the expedition at n.c. 457, Kriig. in the spring b.c. 458. 
 
 (b.) fn€\\ov. A good instance of the usage of this verb, were ready to pre- 
 vent them, were sure to prevent them. The editors hesitate about the future, 
 and most of them print K<a\v[(T\iiv, and %fii\\ov ^a X^i^nv, Soph. Fhil. 
 1084-5. Kj"^- thinks that the infinitive future with fxeWw is used of intcri' 
 ikmSy implied probabilities, &c. I would compare efieWov &pa irawreiv Iras' 
 vfias rod Kod^ (Ar. Bana, 261), '/ iIioi(</ht I would stop your Kod^! 
 ael t^poi/peiTo, i.e. since the events described in the latter part of ch. 
 105. T^ Se Tt, mid in sotne degree too, Kriig. cf. i. 118; vii. 
 
 48. For ivijyov, which means, ' were for bringitig them in,^ Bl. would read 
 ivrffov, ' were egging them on,' needlessly, I should imagine, for Thucyd. means 
 to describe the schemes of a traitorous party at Athens who were for bringing 
 the Spartans in, and arresting the progress of the Long Walls, and ivdy^ffQau. 
 hears this meaning passim. See, with Poppo, the active, also ii. 85 (^ir^ye) ; 
 viii. 46 ; iv. 79 {J^vviird'yiiv). Upon the circumstance, see Plutarch, Vit. 
 Cimon. c. ij, and Pericles, 10, Grote, vol. v, p, 441. olKohofinv- 
 
 tifva admits of literal rendering in the English idiom — hinder, or rather stop 
 the long v^alls hein<g built. 
 
 {€.) ifiorjdriffav — * cam£ up to the rescue against them.^ Poppo has a long 
 
 note upon the usage of this word. All the perplexity attending it will be 
 
 removed if we remember that /Sorjfleo) is really ^or\Qhs tea, i.e. tifii. See the 
 
 •jnestion fully discussed in Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 58, and add to the 
 
 j instances there given a very clear one, wt irav nXovvri (not r^Kovvra) irpo^4vei, 
 
 Br my Proxemis. On the same principle I have always maintained B^upiiaaaa 
 
 iToujubi/ (5/Li/ia, (Edip. Cd. 1083, (which Linwood says, * vix intelligi potest,') to 
 
 Imean, hamng witnessed with my own eyes; because deupijcratra = decophs odaa. 
 
 TavStj/ic/, i.e. all capable of bearing arms. Pop. refers to Clinton, Fast. 
 
 \Htllen. p. 417. The number of hoplites when the war began was 29,000. See 
 
 "13. iirr} SifXdooffiv. This is said to be the ' conjunctivus deli- 
 
 herativuB,' which occurs even after past tenses, cf. ii. 52; iii. 112; v. 65. 
 
 [The explanation seems to me to rest upon the same ground as the perpetual 
 
 recurrence from the directa to the indirecta oratio. The mood, i.e. mode o{ 
 
 I thought, is employed under which the question presented itself to the partj 
 
 I 2 
 
 ^^Rm I 
 
ii6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 109.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 117 
 
 tion, io ^e at a ... ^^J^-^^^^Z/aZJt't^ ,Js of tU am^.: Kr^. 
 
 cf. ii. 21 ; iii- 3 ; "■ 3 ; ';• *■ ... ,„,„es9 of the Thcssalmns to Bornel. P™%. 
 who refers concermng the faithlessness oi 
 L C. p. 89. a work which I have not seen. 
 
 - n«.«T(as This collocation is of 
 
 C^rr.. CVin.-(«.) ^';y^i:Z 'rBo-'as- «. .5, -«^-' - 
 frequent oceurrence. See lu , ^^ ... ^^^ ^^^ j„„„ ^^ i„i„ 
 
 A<«<.«««^ aud more P*'"™^'^ ";' ^„^, „( the Asopus, near its junction 
 upon a rugged eminence upon '^ °«* J";" ,, ,peaL of it as a draw. 
 Jth the Thermodon. Plato, ^'"^'^^IJ^Jot invalidate the hone, 
 battle, but this is only a rhetorical A^-^' "^^ ^^j,;^, ^h^t ,he Pelc 
 
 testimony of Thucydides. It was h^-^'^hropportnnity of an undisturW 
 ponnesians obtained no mlvantage boy""^ the opp y^ ^^„„„i„g„,, ,.. 
 
 W over the ridge of Gerane.a (G™te v. 44 ^ ^^^ .^_ ^^ ^^^^ 
 
 eluding Clinton, place ^^^ Jlf /J/"' «J-„f <Jf battles, but there is n. 
 has it, one year earlier. The Utter speaks 5.,8»OT.M«.r«vT.s, arare 
 
 ground for supposing him ^\^^.^"'?■,...^„^ implied ravages of otter 
 t;;^. Cutting dow^ the frmt and timber t«s^^^ poppo quotes to, 
 Mnds. 'rheSchol.theretore_e.p^^^^^^^^^^^^ ,,,,,„, , 
 
 If^^aving made a truce for four 7»*:;7; J^f ^^'e^^tle preci.io. 0, 
 L"t: ra:Krs:;:re: t*.f/S":^^efl w^ch it made u.n . 
 
 Athenian mind. „„,!,„ ™«sai?e in the Menexenus, sup- 
 
 (6.) Oi.»4."T.... Schleiermacher, on the £'^*f ' .^he vineyari..: 
 
 jjs 'this name to denote s^onie spot ^--^^^J'^J^.^.h attributes: .h. 
 
 i:too,Bl. But localities often denvet^^^^^n^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 descripUve term V>ocom^ ^^^rthis o be the case in the present inslan. 
 absence of the article Krug. belicTes luis _ irfpijptif""" 
 
 by an invading force. maioribus mulieribus deducebatur, 
 
 :^ ^r^rz ;^r =: was p-^i^ -^ ^:: 
 
 tfof these. r, .c^X. • • .;^ ^^^ :X':^o^Z:, for tl« 
 
 tbe writer dwells upon an f^X:^^!^^ naturally rei^at. 
 purpose of more clearly identifying it. '^^^" ^^^ .^ ^oX^v, r^' 
 L S ^^r;^;;Z et;^;rtte fdL:" men\wo or .ore a.. 
 
 article is used with each, ^his is mor ^^^^ ^ ^.^^^ ^, „,,, ^ 
 
 the substantive. «^ ^Jlime citv marked Athens as mi^tre^' 
 
 . The reduction of this once powerful ^^""''^l^'^^^ ^^ ^^e ^ean.' Grot*- 
 of the sea, on the Peloponnesian coast, not less tnan on ^ 
 
 Kriig. dates b.c. 458. ^^^^^ «•*'• ^57- 
 
 (c.) vfpifKivTfs K.T.K. I agree with Kriig., against some other com- 
 mentators, that these participles cannot, in this place, denote the condition under 
 which the surrender was made. They denote circumstance rather than condi- 
 tioii__«A^» they had pulled down their walls, &c. ; cf. airoUvTes Ntcafai/ . . . 
 ffirovUs iirooff}.7avTo, ch.115. •jrepte'irAcuo-a v — with fifty triremes 
 
 and 4000 hoplites (Diod. xi. 84). JEsch. ii. 75, p. 38, names only 1000, as 
 the remainder were volunteers ; but perhaps there is some confusion with 
 (h. 113. Kriig. rh vedpiov. Gythium. XaA/cf5a. 
 
 A city of ^tolia. at the foot of Mount Chalcis, and near the mouth of the 
 Evenus; it is now called Bapdaofifia. The Corinthians were at this time 
 occupying the city, just as they had Molycrium for a colony in Locris (iii. 102), 
 and SoUium in Acarnania (ii. 30). Diodorus informs us that Naupaetus was 
 captured at the same time by the Athenians. Poppo. iv avo^dcrfi 
 
 tJ/j 7TJs. A sort of objective genitive, ' in a disembarkation in their country', 
 .lelf, § 464. 
 
 Chapter CIX.^(a.) The narration is resumed from ch. 104. 
 iSt'aj. On this word, to which Plato has given such a world-wide celebrity, 
 Kriig. remarks. ' Excepting Plato, the Attic writers seldom use this word ; it 
 is indeed almost unknown to their prose, yet Thucyd. employs it thirteen 
 times : in the sense of Gestalt—form or sha'pe — only once, vi. 4, 6 ; elsewhere it 
 stands for Weise—way, manner or modeJ To this I can scarcely subscribe ; as 
 form, i.e. mental form, form conceived by the mind, is its original meaning, so 
 I believe it may in most places be translated, e.g. here — ' many forms of 
 warfare;' ii. 19, iraaav l^eav irfipdffavns, having tried every conceivable form of 
 attack; iii. 81, iraaa iSea Oavdrov, death in every form (* Plurima mortis 
 imago,' Virgil); ch. 83, irao-a tSe'a KaKorpoirias, vice in every shape; and so iii. 
 93, 112. In iv, 55 we have wapa t^j* imdpxovffav Ihiav ttJs -napaxTKivriS, con- 
 trary to the form which their warlike preparations usually took — or, an unusual 
 tt/pe of warfare ; vi. 4, hpfrravoiiBh r\)v i^fav rh x««'P*o*'> ^^^ P^^^^^ ^^ scythe- 
 tike inform, or shape; vii. 29, precisely as iii. 81. Similarly in the Attic poets, 
 ijfpav vnvwv lS4av, At. Ran. 382, another type of poetry ; and Aves, 993, ris 
 iSf'a ^ovXijfxaTos ; what is the form of your plan ? what shape is it going to 
 take? By keeping this, its true meaning, in view, we shall, I think, be better 
 enabled to understand why Plato selected the word to express the eternal type 
 ' or form of which all perishable things were the antitypes. The interest of the 
 word, the authority of Kriig., and the explanations given in some instances by 
 L. and S. Lexicon, e.g. ' manner' must excuse this long notice. 
 {h.) vpovx<i>pfi — sc. Ttt irpdyfjiara, cf. ch. 74, ad finem. 
 \ix\u 5— otherwise, i.e. another way than the right one, uselessly, in vain, 
 cf. ii. 18; iv. 36; vii. 42. Vieyd&a^os may be the individual 
 
 mentioned Herod, vii. 97 as holding a command in the fleet. Mfydfiv^os Yfus 
 one of the generals of Xerxes; he also commanded at Eurymedon, and must 
 [therefore have been a person of some experience, see Herod, vii. 82, and 143. 
 jZwTwpos was the man through whose self-mutilation Darius obtained posses- 
 hionof Babylon, Herod, iii. 160. &v^pa Ufptrv^- ' So the Normans, 
 
 after the conquest, to their Christian name, added " Norman" as a surname,' Bl. 
 jA distinction from 'Mede' might be intended if we accept the parallelism 
 
I 
 
 NOTES ON THCCTDIDE8. 
 
 lie ^ai.00 o. ...pa to .he ^-^^f^tZ^^T;^:^^^ 
 writers. M-i <';^"T'" ';^\7 ^,te, the number »oo,ooo, bu, 
 
 .hips and 300,000 men. Ctes -, F^^JV ^^^^,^^ .^ ^^^^ 
 
 adds the troops, amounting to 300,0 , ; j exaggeration and inac- 
 
 ^ix. ^Kpi--"- We may ^''^-^^ '''"."that Diodorus denies thi. 
 :JLy of the later Attic ^'j/™: ^^dl-Ued by two branches of the 
 
 Tictory. »P«J , ^ ^anal, Herod, n. 41. ^ 
 
 Nile, or, as BL thmks, by the Nile and a oe p M rov ^vpov 
 
 1.0,, I4« ^^^-; -f- ^^- ^r'fm\Z ^'i know no other example of cVoI,.. 
 dicato with inoin<r^, 'dry land^ m. sajs ^^^^^i^n/ and 670^ «?;"- 
 
 for .a..,' hut ef. W^^ 'r;::\:ke;\HWC; ; necessary, says W: 
 arros, ch. I35- 
 
 ef ireCp x**?*^^"^^"*' ^^' *^" 
 
 X ^„ >w a sort of hypallage agrees with 
 
 Tpi-yM»Ta, instead of 'Aer,vaio,y. The exae .. } 4^^e,«r. 
 
 Clinton makes them commence B c. 455. "^ J • *• ^ ^^e Pertiaib 
 
 Here again Di«lorus betrays »- «agg™ by say. g ^^^.^^ ^^ ^^^_^ 
 
 allowed the Athenians to return home -'"°^^'';^;;™,h^ ^ave adopted the 
 valour. But why in that case, as »'• --""^^J ~, .J^f. sup. .o. a, 65 b. 
 dangerous and difficult route to Cyrene? ^"^''f^' ' ^f^, ^y^ time, 
 ■A,„pTa:o.. Not 'he Amyrt>eus who^o 4^4,|- f J^y^^^^^,^^ ^.^^^ ,„ 
 
 revolted from Darius Nothus, ^"^/^''^^X OohL sixty years after^vaA. 
 the Persians regained the,r ascendency 7<^'™^^„ "'J.o^i^g to He.«l., 
 The man here mentioned was ^f^^ ;".^f„"^^;X "„ district. Herod. ... 
 though his son Pausiris was perm.tt«i «J-S^ °;;'-;;^^ ^^^^,^^ between lb 
 
 ^, UL .5-- ^■^-- ^\"^„f"th'e"Ni* and forLd most of what was calU^ 
 Canopic and Tan.tic mouths of the f '«• ""y" ^^^ „f ^ by the Engfch 
 
 the Delta. Compare the ^'--l/f V" f^™ .EA.i"-. -' ^'- 
 after the Norman invasion ; and cf. ^sch. ^er^, 39. 
 
 A««.'. irXS'-i' t' i>"'P'9'^'- „„;„t„res •ASTi.'ii', but cf. with Kriig. iv- 
 
 (6.) ^«.«.-Ae,.aU.. Bekkereonjectu^s A9..^^ 
 
 „. The reading of the text seems to -^Jf'^f^l^fan]. {vM.»X»- 
 
 . ' ... .^ ,A-vii I ' Insolentia sunt verba, vii. 35- ^«PP" , 
 
 :;avTmvv^ '";:.;«. The ^th mouu. of ^^^j^-^xtJi ' 
 
 Z^ westerly one. It entered the sea ne» '^^"Jj/^^;" at the «. 
 ef. Pindar. Fra^^ 8,. ^';^' J.^^j'^eieTsymW sm Ich ^presented r.* 
 of KJpas may be a relic ot the ancient sym _ ^^^^, ,, 
 
 uuder' the type of a buU ; cf. • '-"/"Tltrwhil wrlnverted into ^ 
 
 Arnold upon the ^-''^ ^''^ .^ ^ ^ 't-^^^^^^ 
 cornucopiae. ovk ti»» , 
 
 ii. 83, 91; vi. 5^; viii. 101. Poppo. 
 
 [Book!. I Chap. 112.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 119 
 
 Chapteb CXI.— (a.) Bo(ri'\€o,y. Certainly not king of aU Thessaly, as 
 is plain from iv. 78. Popp. therefore suggests that he was Tagus. But thero 
 were several of these dominant families in Thessaly— the Aleuadse, for instance 
 _-who are styled kings by Herod, vii. 6, and appear to have ruled at Larissa. 
 But, as might be expected, history casts but little light upon these early 
 The'ssalian rulers. Orestes was, according to Wachsmuth, uncle of Antiochus, 
 and member of a dynasty connected with the Aleuadae and Scopadae, which 
 had its seat at Pharsalus. The date of the expedition is very variously given : 
 Am., B.C. 454; Diodorus— mixing it up with those against the Phocians and 
 Locrians— after (Enophyta, B.C. 457 ; Kriig. agrees with Arn., adding, ' in the 
 spring;' Clinton, B.C. 455. napaKafiSures^after taking up the 
 
 Bmtian and Phocian contingents. Kriig., who cf. the same word infra, and 
 ^-ii JO. %aa tJL^ vpoX6vT€s. Popp. rightly fills up the ellipse. 
 
 Im Kparilv iUvamo fih Trpoi6vr€5—' all they could make themselves niasters of 
 without stirring far from camp;' cf. iv. 16, «^u\(£(r<r6(,/ r^^v vriaov Ua fih airo^al- 
 vonas. Kriig. adds, Uaov fih X^P^^ 'f*^"""' ^d. Tyr. 346. gTrXwv— 
 
 the place where their arms were piled, and consequently equivalent to e castris 
 (Popp.), but see the note on iii. i. iirpoKTof— ' mithout effecting 
 
 anything: In Thuc, says Kriig., always active. 
 
 {h.) /ACT at 56 rcLvra^i.e. in all probability the following year, B.C. 453. 
 Kriig. says in the same year. ras Tl-nyas. See ch. 103. 
 
 ^aOj-iifty, according to Diodorus, xi. 85 ; a hundred, according to Plutarch, 
 Vcrvcks, 19, Kriig. rovs irpoayiiiavTa^. Those who came into conflict 
 
 with them. ' The less veracious Diodorus declares that the Sicyonians came out 
 raph)nil. niair\€vffavT€S Tepa./, to be taken together— Aat;tw^ 
 
 mled across, probably to Naupactus. OlvidSas, a name from the 
 
 wine made in the district. In S. Acarnania, on the right bank of the Achelous. 
 Leake supposes that it is identical with Trikardho, or Trikardhocastro, a large 
 modern city. This, says Poppo, is one of those states which is always in- 
 dicated by the name of its inhabitants. Cf. ii. 102, iii. 94, iv. 77- Such, too, 
 is the case with Leontini. From these we must distinguish such names as Veu 
 and Gabii, which always stand for cities. Cf. not« on ch. 107 a. 
 
 Chapter CXII.— (tf.) hiaKnrSvrfay iruv rpi&p. The five years' truce, 
 therefore, according to the general computation, commenced B.C. 450; accord- 
 ing to Kriig., summer B.C. 451. Grote points out that the truce was probably 
 concluded by the influence of Cimon, who was anxious to carry out the opera- 
 tions against Persia ; while, on the other hand, Pericles would not be sorry to 
 see his rival removed from Athens (vol. v. p. 453)- iro\e>oif eo'Xoi'. 
 
 Elrasley refers to this passage in his note on Eurip. Heracleid. 924, ' (ffx^v 
 2' SjSpis. In his locis (rx^2y idem fere valet ac »ov<ro«r0ai, quo sensu saepe adhi- 
 bentur r(rx€ et <rx«. • . Noster locus fateor ab his paulo diversus est. Quamvis 
 enim bene Gr«ca sit locutio ?<rx6 rov nokifiov, cessavit a bello, non ideo tamen 
 constat, Graecos dixisse ^x^v 6 irdAc/ios, cessavit bellum.' Bl. says, for &xe(rxoy, 
 there being an ellipse of eavrovs, Matth. § 353- 3- Cf. Jelf, § 517- 
 't^livpraiov. See ch. no. We see from this that in the former chapter Thuc. 
 was anticipating the regular course of his narrative. nerairefx-Kovros. 
 
 'MeTaT6^ir6iv = accersere, usually the middle fxeTairefineaeai,' T. K. A. Tho 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Cbap. 1 13-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 121 
 
 ■1 
 
 120 -. 
 
 ♦v^ xvnvd siffiiifies to send jor a!< 
 aiiference 1 believe to be that med.4 ^-jj;^^;7, J^,,, ,. in the active. 
 wmething of our ovm, to send Jar as y , ^^^^^^ .^ ^^^ south-east of 
 tiimplv <o send for as a request. Kifia>yos. It is 
 
 Cvpru's. the birth-place of Zeno and AH^loaoru^^ ^„, ,." ,55. 
 
 nuclear whether of disease or ^-^ »--";>; „^^^,^ nomenclature. Lit. kan,- 
 (6.) 6.^^' of Salam,s: ''-"^'^ ""^^^ ^„.„,„, o. apparently ... 
 
 i„,V«r, because vessels seen f'°°^ ^"^/p^,'^ i^J. ii. 636). Cf. i. .37. 
 
 ponded upon the ^^'^'^ f^ ^^'^l^^!:/^, says Grote, as implying .ha. 
 
 viii- 95- *VJ ■■ „„a a double one on the same day. 
 
 the battle, lite that of E«'^-'"'^»»: "^utThe P^^^^^^^^^ of ** ^"'^^ ^ ^^"™' 
 ,i^.,. There is some awkwardness about the p ^^e„c„._a, we 
 
 however, that it is only a ^I'g^ly /'^g"!*' "^^^ ^^^^^ , ,„ppie i^x^f-'"- 
 .i,ht say.,.*. s.,s fr^Y, ':^XZ ^^^^ <^- «' ^' f^^ 
 
 Z.X...., A -g»- »T-S;r Jii r^^^^^^^^ ^p'"'- '• ^3. '"^ 
 
 TOch phrases as irv,T.« ..«r»., k ' " " ^ ^^^ ^^e noble Delphian fan..h« 
 
 „p^5o.«. A,l^«.-. »>-"'«''»'„^,!!r„V;r *«m, denoting some aCo- 
 were of Doric origin. , .^ ^ ^een last mentioned, 
 
 wrongly con.rasted with or ^^^^^^^^^^^l ,e.), had no real claim ,. 
 The Phocians, according to M"""^ J^T . ^here was a native nobility who<e 
 the management of ^^^elphian Oracle There ^^ g,_^ ^.,, 
 
 influence over the oracle was ve^ ;°;~':etual managers of it,' B^lh 
 that they may have been onsider^l to be the . ^^^ ^^^^.^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 (P„W« £»». p. 60,, "f'«)"^.''';' J^' '3ed possession, the chief maonr 
 agreement of the Greeks. »";»'l''P^"/"°\te »uncil of Amphictyons, and the 
 
 ^ent of which was ^-'^-^''^'r.T%Z^LZ^^^l^%^ putting in claimsfor 
 sacred assembly at Delph, ; but the Phocians were y P ^^ ^^^, 
 
 the direction of this temple, which *ey aflinn"! to « ^^^^^^^ ^^. „ 
 
 ,hey had even once been ^-.^2^2:l^,TitoZ Jui- 5.S) ; and .h« 
 they also strengthened with the .»«th""'y ^^^^^^ ;„ oiymp. cvi. 
 
 clafms. according to Dio-^"™' (^^'^Z' ' —"le also Grote (iv. p. Si' 
 ,, and assisted by the '^^-''-^ZuorlT^i-^ the references in .h. 
 T K. A., following the American ed tor, has con 
 pl'ace. Kefertoch...8,iii. "■,»ndv..S. 
 
 rXIII -(<. -) The operations of Athens against the Persian^"^ 
 Chaptbb CXlll.— i«-; i"" F femous controversy concemmg 
 
 here concluded. With th.s is -»2'?\*VbI made at this time with. k 
 the peace of Callias or Cmon, supposed »» J'J^J';''; ^ unfavourable .« 
 
 Grea": King. Its conditions ^^ ^^^^^ :^Z. 'jf having originated . 
 Persia, that the whole story is not «" °''^y ™ ^ panegyrists. The Persia"' 
 ,he rhetorical extravagance of the 1^'« Athenmn p gy ^^^^ j„, 
 
 were to abandon the m.Utary °«"fT "^^t ' or, according to aao.l" 
 journey on foot, or one on horseback "^ *;;'^f ' ^^^j,^ ^J^ of the ^■ 
 iecount, they were not to P-V'L Ml A iatirGr;eks were to be left uBdis- 
 
 ,,,ayto the subject, in which the above view is mam.a.ned. He is followed 
 
 ; ThTrlwall (vol. ii. p. 473-4), who argues that the entire -l-ce of Thncy 
 
 L the vague and contradictory statemente of later writers .*' °''^^' 
 
 t;,ciousI^s of the Persian court that it had ever resigned its dominion 
 
 trisiatt Gr eks, and the absence of all reference to any such treaty in 
 
 existed in the crcum ^^ ^^^j,^ ^^^^ ,^, ^^^^ 
 
 raents (see vol. v. p. 45«'-'>»)- ^"* P°""' "i~ .^. „ , ,, . „,.,. „{ things 
 ,,1, . Convention would only have been a recognition of the state 01 im g 
 hth rruv exHTafter Cimon's death. As such, it might easily have been 
 
 whi h ^«'»y^'™ ^„ ii^.^a i„ fhe actual fulness of Athenian empire, 
 
 Tl it'wouldteem to him simply a matter of course, and because he was 
 Z. to conden rhis narrative" But Isocra.es and later rhetoricians, m 
 
 Z 1 ety to amplify the past glories of Athens, indulged in absurd exagge- 
 run?n Thrmatter, and have thus naturally thrown discredit upon it 
 tZZl : Sak" in v'ery positive terms of the -i-nce^»f -^pe«. ;^ 
 
 e,.Ko.,in' M",' i.p.<r3..Wvra K.rX.--I)e Falsa Leg. is.- 
 . „„.'vn„ iwivw-feai is intemdere. as iv. iii, vm. 9, Heroa. v 9», 
 K ': He als'o c^M ct, M"4 "-«-i*" ^77-M--, ' »*« «« m^e^a o/<.«« 
 X'm "I^ x^." It is possible also, of course. ,0 take it with ...p<t^--, 
 
 Jh IS perha/s ^^t;!: jr^XX^T^.:-^^^^^^^^ 
 
 :--"-- ^^^?°i?::: supply .:;ir.i"..:^^^^^^^^ 
 
 memk severally had to fumhhthtm: ...,„„!a savs Pausa- 
 
 rtl ^r Kooc..«!a The name is variously given : iv AMopr.?, says rausa 
 
 .i ■ «^i 6 . A.3a8.ra, Xen. M.».. .... v. 4. I-crates. «pl C.^»^., agrees 
 
 S Th^^d a's do Plato (AwKa<fe.) and Diodorus. Popp. The truth is. tha^ 
 the ies were ver) close together, and the battle "J ^^ ^^^ f, 
 
 over them, as in the case of Mont St.-Jean and '';*'^'^l'^'2tT^nleZ 
 T.k,ir Bridge. Upon this, the first great blow to the Athenian ascendency. 
 
 followed by so --y ^^i^-'^"' ^^'f"!*''' !"'•" ^'^'been subjugated with- 
 TheOpuntian Locrians, says the Schol. As they had been su jv« 
 
 ,he B^tians. cf. .08, they doubtless rebelled with them. .\ll',"^^{ 
 
 y^..^-^oflhesa.e.a,ja^^^^^^ 
 
 for the construction, Jelf, ^5"'*- tovs^*k r 
 
 them, Tolmides himself. , .-u 
 
 ( .) oi SXX.. iri,T«. Both Am. and Popp. interpret *".« to m^n Ae 
 Locrian and Phocian exiles, with perhaps those rom Eubo^a Butji "g^^^ 
 riders that .; iXXo. can only be Boi«^o.-™T.x«i.r„ does no , he says belong 
 .0 »i toxc-and the sense is. The Baotiun e^es uponthar «'-» *«^;f J 
 iU other B^otians, becanu independent again, i.e. w.th ^'^'ll 1 J^ Z' 
 Cf iii 6x- iv 02 Heilman, the German translator, took th,s view, so, too, 
 
 D^ an tL as'tGerman translator (Engelmau) : ' »» V-^^"^" ^Z**^ 
 . . . als auch die iibrigen aUe,' &c. Grote's remark .s just, that probably, as 
 
*l 
 
 If V 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book t. 
 
 122 
 
 „f Pvlns the captured Athenians be- 
 ,a« the case with the I*"*^*™™'*"' *' Zrwise they would not have con- 
 longed to the best families in the state . otherwise y 
 3 to such unfavourable terms to recover them. 
 
 ChaptebCXIV.-{«.) E«3o.a '"'";• J'^^'fo^p^o^of more 
 Z..,.,,.6ros .<.r,. Theconstrucu^ th^-^^ /^^^^^ „, 
 
 clearly marking the time. After Per^cl^^ ^^^^^ ^^ _^^ ^^,^^_ ^™„, 
 hnmghttohim. "„' ^T^litics After the democratic 
 
 ii. fj,, gives a short account of f ^g^^"" ^f ^he nobles returned, con- 
 revolution which had united the place '» A*^"'-;^'^ gu^ ,u public offices 
 
 quered the people in battle, restored an ""g^^^y- probably caused 
 
 lith persons who had fought against the people. This retur p 
 
 the revolt. See note on ch. 103. rv ii ch 10. A well-known 
 
 (6.) ep.ir.. Sch. i, ri ep,a..o. «'-• « -^^^ 9^^ 1^^,;,^ „„ ,,, 
 
 battle ground, as appears from ""°'^: '^- '' ^.,„^ ^i^^^e Eleusis. OnPleisto- 
 Sandaff™, orEleusinian Cephisus, about tbref --l^-;;-^ ^^^;„,_ ;, ,, 
 
 anax, cf. supra, ch. 107. , '^ , ; ,,,^, pieiat vp^ifaai irtifrSi)""' ■rti' 
 
 i^.X-ip'."'- Because it was though ^^^J^JoZibei him. Gro,e 
 
 supposes they were too weak in force to ^^-^^J^^^^ ^.Mnoi, Krug. See 
 ..p^+«,T. .a.a. Therefore .t was hithertoJupaxM.^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^.^^^ 
 
 .Vristoph. A«6«5, 413. ,,•,„.,„»/• and 'c<w»«os«««»i,' Pop. Cf.ui. 
 
 The Latins said both '?-!-« ^^^^ s tttrs subsequently received this 
 ^c 'EcTTioias. itieATneuiciu a ^u^ ^,.h^llast was after- 
 
 ^ me.andwerealsocalled'np;^^.asthe Pl-e -3^^^ ^ .,„ 
 
 wards called 'flp™.. Hut-rcl"; Pendes , -3;»^'=^"'^ ^^^^„i,, ,„,,„e. Tl.. 
 f^t that the Hesti^ans had put to death th« ««^ »^ ^ ^ ^.^.blish in the 
 
 Athenians would gladly ava.l themselves '>\fij^'-''^'" 
 island a military post upon wh.ch they could rel>. 
 
 * ' Ti,« fimous thirty years' truce. In the 
 Chafteb CXV.-(«.) -»'»«• ^';; " A ,L',tion is raised whicb 
 spring, B.C. 445- See Grote. ^^,J^^\„ whether the province of that 
 
 it is by no means easy to <'''^^'''' f^^^'J,^U^^Ln\.ns. Autho- 
 n»me be meant, or some town .n the °J™Pf '""jj p ,,d Kriiger decide 
 
 riues are pretty equally dmded. ^a°«. f °U«,^X has been made by 
 gainst the province, pnne.paly^ W b--- ;^^,,.^,^„ ;, coupled bo, 
 Thucyd. of the acquisition of it by Athens W ^^^ ^^^^^ „, 
 
 here and in iv. ». with other towns ; and '" *« J-^; ^ ^f inappropm^ 
 Cleon from the I-ced»mouians, ««5o„.„ Ax.tav ^^^' ^^^ J^- ontbe 
 
 language as applied to a ^-''y ""''^'^^^^LpXe is meant, for i. 
 oth^r hand, Mr. Grote (v. 475) ^as no ^^^^ '^^^'^^^ ,, ,„ i„depende.. 
 ch III we find that ' the Athenians had acquired Acna .^ ^^^ 
 
 %: Arnold, from the political -'^-^^T^^^^ttZ^^Ti. be meant iu 
 have been alienated from Laced»emon, and ^^^''^^^.ii,,, i. .57, «, 
 
 this place. Bloomfleld also ^^'fl'^I^^ZZ^^^y^-^^'''''"''': 
 .,.Axa.-«*'- ™riwaU raises no doubt b^t^ssum^st ^ J ^^^^ ^._j^_ 
 
 Z^Z a«S; .to "a srr^S;:..- to .th the provmeea^a 
 
 sv 
 
 CBiP. 1 1 5-] NOTES ON THtJCYDIDES. '^J 
 
 „, towus in the same sentence. I cannot P--'^ t^^^ecid^ }'X;:^^t^ 
 utants, but would remark that when Mr. ^^'^^t „lnT wofds .«pa- 
 L an independent ally.' he builds a large ^-P^^t^™^ „,,,, ,,^ certain 
 .^..«-Axa<o« (ch. "0 which ean only m^n^-^^^;^^^ _^_^.^^^ ^ ^;,, 
 .fcteMS. It seems strange too that Thucjdiaes j^ j,^,., 
 
 ,„ account of this acquisition by Athens, for we must reme-b 
 teen directly eonne<.ed with h^s "^^^^^l^^^^, territory'precisely 
 lar in specifying alliances. To speak »« '"^n /prisons, raura 7^ ''xo- 
 
 i„ the same rapid way as of some small St^^'""^ "hat Ae Spartans con- 
 mxoiro.n,aW, is not explained to my mind ^J ^^^^f^^' Z\<i not con- 
 ,idered all within Peloponnese as their P'^P^^y-^^^'^ ""^^^faS whether in 
 „aer it so in tke .an. .ay ; and on -™1«|™-^^ ^"led country. 
 pave proposals for a peace i^oSovi-a. would be W'^l »» ^^ ^^ 
 
 Lus! it had been used of a garrisoned town ^^^^^^^^^^Xo^^ „„te, 
 „I„n i.o5,0«.. to re^t^e, because it is said of a cla ms^ Se ^ J^ ^^^^ 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. xvni. p. 176. It is PJ^''^ /.^j ,„„e small 
 mX, whoin the first edition of his *™« -P'^^ht' l^lThismiud. 
 town of the Megarid was intended, appears in the second tohave etantea 
 Tg eonjcctuisthat 'AX.^a (ii. 56) may have been ong-aUy luthe^ ext 
 
 '^(l) dr, ..... In the beginning ^^^ l^^'oiV^^Z^^olZ. the 
 shep,acesin«.440^^^e^ed.^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^- . „. ^ ^^ rhv ■KoKi.ma.v. At tUat time 
 
 implies accusation, ct. i. 73» ^- 45* 
 
 an aristocratical one, Kriig. ^nn^tniction cf. Jelf, 
 
 (;.);- »^ -;i;:r^rh:slaU;;arsl"h" rrmost^wer- 
 
 il!^a^..eallies!fltl^.pay...U.^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ::r:;':;:^p^rwrra n^ ^^^ ^^ —sf t'Si 
 
 .. ,, T«>' SaMl"" depends upon Ti«s. bee i. 72- '■ •°; "s 
 
 pp. 34. 35- _ '^'"',-' ** J' powerful members of the ar.sto- 
 
 Ucfer to note. toIs SumTWTaTo.s-the most powenui 
 
 c»tical party. The term {v^^ax-W only applies to P--*°f '^ ^J" 
 ;«,.ipovs-probably ' mercenaxies,' as the word generally impUes^ 
 i„v jT„<r.. Kriig. contrasts 4-.i<rr«<r« with .wa^Toff.s. The hrst > 
 
 ::;;::., the se id is ^-r^ti^-^-f^ii^rTz:^:^^:^ 
 
 H t :ra:sShese words, but that if genuine we must^ppo^e that 
 
 - of the democratical party -"^ ^S^o:::^^ :Uitarottut the 
 maintained themselves there. tous apx^J'-^"^- ^'jKi^oVh Vuhlic 
 
 oivilofficers left behind by Pericles as ^.f...- or t.^a««. ^^e ^ock^;^;^ 
 
 , s .rA.V,^ . e T0« 2aj»Io.j, so ff^as in a relative clause, ui. 3, J^o- 
 
 :.W. t:;%"Bzanrinm came^nder Athenian d^^^^^^^^ 
 
 conduct of Pausanias at that place induced the ^«^"""^.*" "^ric 
 command of the confederacy against Persia. But as it still ~^ itaj^oric 
 institutions and character, it seems to have taken the -^lest op^rtum^ 
 freeing itself from Ionian domination. It was, however, compelled to submit 
 again at the fall of Samos, cf. 1 17. 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES; 
 
 r« , I Phap I 17.1 ^^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ '^**'^ ' 
 
 12S 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 124 
 
 / • rri^o 1 A which remained, after suh- 
 
 ,„cting the 44 ".ent.oned f-™ «°- f J;,,; i, ;,ed. -^'»>- 
 
 part of a fixed number .s spec.fied the an ^<, <,^ „j, 
 
 I aid. The infinitive stands h^"- ^ *7:^2 Jh the English idiom, 
 go, iv. 8, V. 54, and, a« m the »'>«" "" ?"' °f s<,p,,ocles was one. 
 ,.;...„ a..»0. Of these mneothe^^hepo^tS^P'^ 
 
 Islal, i. 8., ii. ,.. W. •■ •/tJ.^:::"fT pt Wl • • a twofoU wail, one 
 
 to keep in the besieged, and ''■'°"'"*<"'^,P , , . ^jjher can I call to m.ndam 
 But three walls of circamvallat.on seem absu d »«">e „„ ^^ side 
 
 similar ease. Kriig. is induced .0 ^-VV^M three^^^^^ ,^.__^ ^^^^ ^^_^^^._, 
 of the town, except the sca-s.de, are in _^^ ^ ^^ ^^.^^^ .^ sometimes • a 
 
 would have called such a «'""'f"".'7„\h„.e 'detached forts, built in com- 
 fort,' might not the Tp(<r. ^''X'"' « ^^ ,he purpose of a 
 manding lK.sitions. and so ^^^^^^J^J^Zgests the same thing, and adds, 
 
 '-;, .,. ... '-^-----rr " t:^ro::htShl"rSui::t 
 
 ,„„) Ido not see why the use of *; P;;P°;-7„ ^'^it. as the spot where he 
 
 singular. ^;> ^'"''''l^'^.^ZlZ^ Caria generally, because he d,d 
 
 expecte,! to meet the enemy, bu aW« ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ .^^ 
 
 not know where he might fall m wiui ^^^ ^^^^ di,ju„etive, and Pop. wf" 
 
 BoMpov «»1 T^s Saxofi.-"; '"• 5'-_ _ ^ . chrysippus et Stoic. 
 
 remarks-non opns fuit -"^;.f^::'^^^Z::.X examples ; M. xix. 6,,"E.- 
 
 Cic. T«<^. iv. 5. 9. 'here Davis has selec e ,^^„, This apF'^ 
 
 Top. ^{. «<■> yp-'i; i»; 33 ; ".ffilD'^'noun, instead of standingin the pen. 
 
 ,0 agree with the genitive of the f""''^ ," ot 'when it was reported that thy- 
 
 sinr»b»olute--»A«. they were "porfd^^ »*« ^^^^^ ^^„,, ,h„, 
 
 Jeff, I 6,6. 3. .-'!-^J:3 r:n :^o:^ hI iUrates by the Utin 
 ^pi-y^ra or some indefinite word u ^ ,^„e..„„, i. 74. 
 
 . cognito' for ' postquam cognitum erat. See 5^ ^^^ ^^^^ „f ^^ 
 
 ♦ „iv.ffff«. vS"-« Phm«:,an fleet. ^I'- *^™'^.,h„„\,«i never any i.- 
 . i^ ri„ii;„. ^oeo last ch.) supposes that rissuinnes 
 
 -rrs ittiny h^£:r --.^r/iib^Ls .enmc:. 
 
 ."T.v,-- *o M,ir as^tance:^ ''J^l^''^,. ' eed. As Kriig. remarks, « 
 
 should rather have anticipated ^.P a "^^ o^ xp^ ^ ,, ^.u* 
 
 be supT..rted. Kriig. says, nothing hind rs us ^m ^^^^ ^ ^_^^ _^ ,. 
 
 Athenians, as i^^.^9^^- represents the tens^e^ot^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^, 
 possible that he may be right, 
 ■tesagoras was a Samian. 
 
 ruiPTER CXVII.-(a.) iv Toir^during the absence of Pericles. 
 i^pirrWhen a fleet was for any length of time drawn up on shore, it was 
 *lav bt seen from many instances, protected by a palisade or a,avp»M«. Cf. 
 :: 7vH. .5 This pre^ution appears in the present instance to have been 
 1 :,Id the Athenians thinking it enough to keep some ' look^t ships (t« 
 °±W5«) mooTat a little distance teaward. When these were captu«d 
 :r?herddn onset of the enemy, the Athenians weie compelled to launch the 
 ils on shore in detachments as they best could, and were thus easily bea en in 
 Z\ t wL in a somewhat similar manner that they lost the great batUe of 
 S:U»^ R™"'' *« P"^™' f"''"^''' i^<^..o..W-«. they we. 
 '"1%171' W" I think we mustunderstand Thucydides, son of Melesias 
 ,h. suLessor of Cimon at the head of the oligarchical party, and the rival of 
 Peridr even though his return from ostnicism has not been mentioned. 
 Gmt ' ;i 38. says tSere is no evidence on either side, by which we may deter- 
 m^whetL it were he or no, and favours the idea that a third Thucyd. is 
 Zt The negative evidence that nothing is said to mark his dis mct.on 
 tol the leading man of Athens, though he bore the same name is, I think, 
 " enoVh to prevent us from imagining a third Thucydides. For a 
 vfirv ffood account of him, see Grote, vi. 20. . • , • j 
 
 from the fact that they were only able to maintain it Jar a short t^me. 
 Jp.Xorla, on terms, i.e. they did not surrender at discretion. 
 ,.e.xL;»-8.i.r«-x«p«5<i.'T". These participles, as general, -sinearti- 
 cdo.' conditionate the finite verb with which they are connected, .... these are 
 
 th, conditions upon which they .po^x-ipi"'- . " T\^1"\Z. 
 
 ■the expenses of the si^ge.' These have been variously estimat d^^ .000 
 
 talent.?accoKling to Isocrates (.5, ••.), "°o --y^ ^°™;,^r,l ^^'"^""t 
 But these writers were sure to exaggerate. On the other hand, the .00 me«. 
 tiooed by Diodorus (xii. z8) is evidently under the truth. D'^^orus, ^ Kr^ 
 says, most probably wrote zooo. -c-J^ '=''^7^^^ distributive 
 
 »se oi «.Ti-' at stated times: Cf. Kard «ix«., ch. . . 9, and the like «.ra Ka,^as, 
 11 Jelf % 355. ., and 619. From the narrative here given, Mr. Grote draws 
 se;eral 'inferences in favour of the Athenian administration "^ their 3J- 
 None of the dependent allies except Byzantium joined in the revolt Therefore 
 tliey could not have been much oppressed. It '»-"»^ '''''" .'^''"'^'f"*^ 
 the Athenians renewed the democracy. Therefore they djd not force this 
 form of government in cases where the natural tendency of the parties ran the 
 other way. The conduct of Athens to other dependences, «.?. Melos, might 
 perhaps induce us to suppose that there was something in the great power of 
 Los, and the particular position of affairs, which rendered a mild pohcy m 
 thU case preferable. The student must remember that when '° *his war 
 Bamos applied to Sparta for aid, the Corinthians prevented ttie latter from 
 .tirring, by maintaining the principle that every state had a right to !>«■»* its 
 own recusant dependencies. Hence the extreme exasperation fel by he 
 Oorinthians against the Athenians, for viokting this same principle in the 
 affair of Corcyra and Epidamnus. See the Corinthian Speech, ch. 40. 
 
 St 
 
126 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 
 
 I 
 
 ,» '. tr,itiv The history now proceeds 
 Chapteb CXVIII.-(«.) ov -"^J;'"/ ^^- 6, ^^ ,he thirty yenr^' 
 from ch. SS. The Corcyrean '^:^^^J^: ^l^l^, t„„,. place about fo. 
 trace was concluded n.c. 445^ ^^""Zl e^ 24-55 On the affair of Pot,d=ea. 
 years after the reduction of Samos ^- ^-J/^ ,,.,,.. ^ the utmost, 
 
 L ch. 56-66. *' J" 'f Xer^ s Olvmp. l«v. ., in the autumn, U, 
 
 says Dobree, from the ^^P"^"; " ; ^;'^:; „„„ [ban forty-nine years can be 
 the Lacedaemonian .nvas^n Uxxv, ■ • ^^^ g,^, ^^.^ act of the w»r, 
 
 „,nputed. From the "'g^' "»*";;„,_ .^.^ the war is dated from the .rrup- 
 there are only forty-e>ght.Popp.rej ^^^ qualifying express™ 
 
 tion of the Thebans mto Platiea, see lu i^a^ • ,,ifi,^tion of the language 
 
 ,i..^a is used. This I consuie q- -« » ^ ^riig.) translated .ix.,.. 
 ^f Tbucydides. more especaUy - C.cero (q J^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 by /«-e (^<« ^«'>- ™-.' -.^h, bVpen^ that ^X."« -always means tothefd. 
 theory elaborately mamtamed b> Pe.le, 1^ ^ ^^^^,„^ifav, as i7KpaT»,. 
 
 Kefer to note upon the «»'^- *' " „ 5wvd^.»s. As ^V. ^^7" i-rx^os, 11.9^ 
 r 'fuVifb The idi': ^th'er belongs to the Epic and lon.c formsof 
 See Jelf, § 44» o. a" 
 
 "Pew**- , J- i, ,,/,W I do not think that Dale is right in 
 
 (b.) M 0P«X*. toaduiht extent Ido ^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^^^^ 
 
 fouUng Bloomf. who -'X;;^ ^m^l Tf the preiK>si,ion. Knig/s 
 T. K. A.'s i« « rf'?*' */-'!• "° "!XTLr 3paru ..^O.i<,r,. Dion. «pl 3.rf.. 
 quotation bears - -*;;tr: "pit'.' Popp. remarks that .0, .mW. or 
 ,4.p.'6i- . "^ Th„°.dideum' Nostrum tamen non falsum. Th.s 
 
 U corroborated by Kn.g. from. WX".«^^^^^^^ * ^^^, ^„,,,,,,„„, 
 
 On this nnnsual ,A Poppo «'".*«^; l^'"" ^^i„t pemosth. c. Boot, de «m. 
 
 ca^U rarius legitur in -"P !» ^"^™";;:; Kriig. agrees so far as .0 
 
 5 35, «epi«s apud '<''"'""°'^'*'*'f ^'''f ;j,;pt that in this case the influ- 
 
 ay that .« is positively required *->-•;- "^ which itself requires to be 
 
 ence of the -^"'■"i'';';^" ^^.tween I two negatives is, that o» s^plv 
 
 explained. The broad distinction ^^^^^l"^ ^ J;,, ;„ reference to some 
 
 S directly denies a fact or prop^mo^ J.'J^^ltions : it is entirely subjee- 
 
 conception formed by the ™-d °^/»"^ "^F^J^ ,he mind, not non-ex.sten. 
 
 tive. and expresses negcU.c^ " *' 't""^- "slow as an absolute reality, A 
 
 in nature. If »* "X"; ^' ' «;' .^J^i '" „f 5,„>r-those with whom the 
 
 „X«. is, ' not conceived "^ "'">'%\''^'=^'X ^^^cal purposes, in collocations 
 
 noUon of ' quick- was never conn c^. Fo^ P- P ^^ ^,p„,,ed. >« 
 
 like this the difference of meaning IS triMal _^,^^(^,^ The Helot «ar. 
 
 note on i.*l i^' *'''''*• "' ''' V .1 . „«r with the Arcadians is meant. 
 st^cb. To.. Muller (Dor) thinks tha a war ^^I I do not believe 
 
 But considering the antagonism ^^^l™ ^ ;;;^° ^^ fee the claims of Spam 
 .!«!,., would in such a case be used, '"•■""^^^^'f (,, AbstraC^ 
 
 to a hegemonia in »""--_. „„, ^,if,My on tke me.' This ve^ 
 
 pro concreto. "^"f""' jTburvdides should be borne in mind by « 
 
 candid and positive statement "^ Ttacyd'd^sjh ^^^^ ^^^ ^ _^^,^,,, 
 
 . historical student, for »"« P^™^\f, "J^^^^Xch ifasserU. The ingemo.^ 
 tendency to obscure or obliterate the fact wn 
 
 CHAP. 120.1 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1^7 
 
 .leading of Mr. Grote would almost persuade us that Athens could never have 
 
 F ««ir^Qhlp in her relations with Lacedaemon. 
 
 (,.) »"«"'«'' X i^,^,,f^^4a-^ atUn^tobe attempted: 
 
 't'^'fZn iroK.,oi..r. .i<rra,. See Jelf, 1 69.. The 
 
 ""J™ ista^sferred to the direct form, as addressed to the god ; so in the 
 
 tt u ua'l orllar ambiguity is latent in «X.^0.., which is -.versal^and 
 ithUe applied to either party. It may be so ; yet, as Krug remarks, the« 
 t r^lTound for sup^sing that the oracle had a double -aning. t 
 rinlTwS universally believed to favour the Lacedemonians. Cf. tou fl«v 
 
 Krte adds Plut. & Or. Pylh. .9. Grote, from the i. X.>.Ta., considers that 
 Thncvd was sceptical as to the fact of its ever having been given^ 
 
 tif. refers to the common .s .ol ...0. -^^^f^f .^^^^^ ^1 
 t'^™; 'fiZ°-iZ ' Zatu. at^ue J^Ls audit.'^Me Laced.- 
 lln's' onsid"::^' il plague at Athens as exhibiting the fulfilment of the 
 god's promise. See ii. 54. 
 
 CHipran CXIX.-W «S9" r^fevB h^^k U> tM conferences mentioned ch. 
 C'^^l'^^.^^J' ^,^. ^.^i.a.ea.. Similar instances are ctM by 
 Kriig • .iK ^-.'«»vTo &<rr. Ix'^tar and viii. 45. ^l'"^""' «'« 5o^a ,«.a.. 
 >SrGr Gr. | 629 c. expresses himself unable to satisfy his own mind 
 1 h r'any,' and what difference, subsists between S^. with an .nflmtive and 
 M a ^e The former appears to me to be employed when the result might 
 —ral principles, be anticipated ,., likely, and when, Buppos.ng that >t 
 JMflow it might be accounted for a prwri. With the indicative, on the con- 
 In i"; de" Is, as a positive truth, that the result did foUow; .t points to 
 a ma ter of fact and is quite independent of all a pr^i considerations. In ,i. 
 
 ^C,rT::t^^re.; a .-al result following n.ur^^^ 
 from the previous act. So I had been accustomed to teach ong before I had 
 Tadvantage of seeing Mr. Shilleto's able paper "I"".'"-:;^-- 
 rimilar doctrine appears to be laid down, but wah ve^. ^ ff^'»' P'f '^•?°;"^* 
 accuracy. 1 shall consult the advantage of the student by referring h.m to 
 Mr. Shilleto's edition of Demosth. De Falsa Legatume, Appendix B. 
 ,.1 .ir, K.l T.X.uTalo.. coming forward last upon thu occasion as well as 
 vpm the previous one (see 1. 67. »» nnem;, m o»^<" r. 
 
 greater force, all the complaints against Athens. 
 
 n nvY u^ «i» ty in. As they had done before. See ch. 6S. 
 
 . ^^^^ ultJZ/lt imp ving that now they have. No difficulty 
 is oh— as thomh they had n-or, implying vnu.^ j. . , ^ n « j^^ 
 
 need be made about^is. for the y^P in XP^ y^^'^^^^T'^^'^Z'^tZ 
 not give the reason for the foregoing statement, but, as often happens for an- 
 <* erImpUed by or involved in it. Translato, '[We say blame] for those .Ho 
 
128 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 1 2 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 129 
 
 > 
 
 are leaders ought, while administenng their ou^ affatrs fairly [lemiho^^^^^ 
 TaspTrg spirif towards their neighbours], to be before others tn attendtng to tU 
 ^27^Zests. just as they are amor^g others selected out of all to receive tk. 
 iZZ honours This is what I have always thought the r,ght mterpretation, 
 tC i. &AXO.S is generally interpret^, acconlmg to the expos.Uon of the 
 ^hXst, in other tlings-i.e. i^ ^po.l.la .al rols ro.o.ro.s. Krug agrees 
 with he version I have given ; for ^| Xeo. he compires the conduct attnbutd 
 To the Jhenians, iv. 6,, 4, -X-v.^rcT. ; but the idea of ' fa^r deabng to 
 
 others ' is the essential one contained in rh X<jov. . . • .u .• 
 
 (b) i.vXKdyriaay-havehaddealingswith. The word contains the notion 
 of barker and exchange. See L. and S. I^.icon. iu .6p<,-^ntheh^ghwayof 
 
 luercourse. The Schol. explains .V-«^- - f'^-" "'^'^'YZ.T^^ 
 
 !ion between two seas, was eminently such an i^.6p.ov, and is doubtless hinted 
 
 at here. So several cities are said to be ip irrfpy, vi. 48. .'^«'^«''«- 
 
 u^H^-a conveyance of goods for erportation down to the coast,^ as is evident 
 
 from the elements of which the word is composed. "" ?/ ^ 
 
 the recnmug of others in exchange. -a-u, Kp.rHs-badj^uige, 
 
 bluse careless and uninterested. Bloomf. cf. xo..p^ xP^-ra. ^p^,, Euri, 
 
 mZ .70 rrpdoiyro. So read Kriig. and Poppo. Bekker pnnt. 
 
 W'some MSS. .po.lyro, and Arn. follows him from deference to his judg- 
 
 ment It is certain that the forms in -o.pto are pronounced by the gmmma- 
 
 rians'to be peculiarly Attic, but for this very reason Bekker believes thein to 
 
 have been frequently substituted for others by copyists. Such he imagines to 
 
 have been the case here. On such a point, without great special experience, >t 
 
 is impossible to pronounce. , , ^^ •, -c- •• 
 
 (c\ €l uh kdiKo7yro-ioT V M^ aiiKSiyrai say both Popp. and Krug., not. 
 however. I presume, without a distinction of meaning. This distinction 
 between flu M^J cum subjunctivo, and cl ^^ cum optativo, i. frequently misun- 
 derstood. It is not, for instance, quite correct to say, that the former contem- 
 plates the realization of the hjTothesis positively and certainly, the latter 
 vaguely and dubiously. The event expressed by the verb which follows . 
 nrnvbe less probable than that expressed by the optative after « but the 
 former puts an alternative which experience will soon decide, or is likely soon 
 to decide or perhaps has decided, one way or other; the latter expresses a 
 less positive opinion as to the arrival of such an opportunity for decision; ct. 
 ii r crTiva\(£3o.€. . . . fly &pa rix^ai rcy.s K<^pyi,.iyoi. The first case wa. 
 quite uncertain-i/" they should have the luck to catch any ; the second supposition 
 must have been tested in the course of the night, as the &pa shows-i/", as % 
 had reason to anticipate, any had been captured. Here T. K. A. asserts that 
 the mixture of the obliqua and directa oratio is quite enough to account for tne 
 change The optative, therefore, is often employed by a sort of euphemism 
 for the setting forth of disagreeable or unwelcome alternatives, and the state- 
 ment of questions which are not in themselves pleasant to entertam ; ct. « 
 iyrl<rxoi^y, next ch. Again, as here, upon the same principle, generaUzea 
 statements about undefined persons require ti with the optative ; but where 
 the statement concerns definite, known persons, and an alternative to whicni 
 is thought they will be subjected, fly with the subjunctive is employed. &« 
 tEd Col 1442, for an instance, flv fi^ i5iK«KTai, in the event of their no 
 
 being injured ; el (i^ oSikoivto, supposing it should come to pass they are not 
 injured. €*c fxfu. The preposition denotes here, as often, out of 
 
 ie. after a state of peace, &c. -napaax^v, as irapex^i, is sometimes 
 
 used impersonally, the neuter participle, like those of other impersonals, stands 
 ia the nom. absolute — 'when good opportunity offers.^ Kriig. quotes Kairoi 
 KoXwj 76 aoxppoveiv wapetxc (Toi, Eurip, EiCct. 1080, cf. v. 14, 60, 63. 
 rih6ix€Vov. We might expect the plural after ai/Spwi/ aa}<pp6i(DV — ayaduv. But 
 it comes to the same thing, for the singular riUfxevov is as indefinite as the ante- 
 cedent plural: so in English, it is the part of good men, and it is a good man's 
 fart. For the change from a-yaQuv to a^iKovfxeyovs, cf. Jelf, 675 a. aSt/cet- 
 
 ffQai—'to be the subject of wrong,' or aSinia, just as i Cor. vi. 7, Siari ovxl 
 fiakXoy aSiK€i(Td€ ; Popp. cf. iroKiopKuffdai, iii. 52. 
 
 (d.) ti fjffvxaCoi. Note the force of the present, * if he continues in a state 
 of apathy.' €VTvxl<f irKeovdCo} v — in the present case very much the 
 
 same as 7r\eoi/€/cTwv, except that the termination in -d^w modifies the way in 
 which the notion is predicated — is induced by success to exhibit too high preten- 
 sions. See Dem. 117, 5 : iirfi^ri ir\eovd^eiv iircx^ipovv Koi rrepa rod fierpiov ra 
 Ka.9i<Trt]K6ra 4kiuovv. airiffro) — which is not deserving of trust. 
 
 KUKws yvoxrdevT a — badly judged measures. rvx^vrc} v — because their 
 
 opponents chanced to be still worse advised. So we must tr., if with Bekker, 
 Poppo, and G oiler, we read the genitive tvx^vtuv. This will, then, form one 
 of the rare instances where ruyxdyo) occurs without a participle. See i. 32 c. 
 "So one very clear case is found ; but cf. Soph. Ajax, 9 : evSov yap ayrjp 
 itpTi Tvyxdvfi, which may be explained away by the occurrence of a participle 
 in the next line. Cf. also Electra, 46, 113. Some MSS. read Tvxovra, which 
 Goll. prefers to retain. tn ttAcw. Omissum est verbum substan- 
 
 tivum. Popp. vepiearri — have come round to be. See note on 
 
 irepifffTrjKiv, ch. 32. Sfioia ttj irlffTfi. This is the common 
 
 reading, retained by Bekker, though both Popp. and Kriig. adopt Keiske's 
 emendation d/jiola. I should tr. : ' For no man in actual performance carries out 
 things upon the same scale, as that on which he speculates upon them %n his 
 sanguine hopes [lit. co7iJidence],for we indulge our fancies in security, but in the 
 midst of apprehensions we fail in the execution,' — i. e. so long as we are in a 
 state of security, we may frame what visionary schemes we please, but the 
 dangers which attend their realization disable our powers by the apprehensions 
 which they excite. The other (purely conjectural) reading, b^oia, would be, 
 ' no ruan lays his schem£S, and proceeds practically to execute them with equal con- 
 fidence' — lit. *his conjidence equal.' The meaning does not seem to me suffi- 
 ciently improved to warrant the alteration. The objection urged by Dale, that 
 Tj; irio-Tet ought to be answered by r^ epycp, is, I think, obviated by con- 
 Mdering the nature of the latter noun and its use in Thucyd., where it is 
 so familiar as almost to assume an adverbial character. Indeed, we ourselves 
 say ' in ptractice,' instead of 'in his practice.' Cf. Jelf, 752, a. Cf. ^v Kaip^, 
 ot the proper time, next chapter. 
 
 Chapter CXXI. — (a.) a^iKovfievoi. Sine articulo ; therefore expresses 
 cause or condition, because we are suffering wrong. iyclpofiey — 
 
 ' v^ake up the war.' Rather poetical : but it is not unnatural that an orator 
 
130 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1. 
 
 Chap. 122.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 131 
 
 «■ 
 
 be seen in the citations of Bl. and 1^^"^- ^ comnmnd along (irapa) 
 
 Tins is the technical military term for pas ,ng ^^^^^^f^^^^^^,,,,,,, &e., trans- 
 the ranks. See inter alui Xen. Annh. 1. ». 3. present, which 
 
 Ute a, tho,„h it were ™ ,.,.^.xa.W. ^s,ng^^^^^ rWinaU.^,, but of tha, 
 is worth notice. For they <lo not bo-t^t ot me ^^^^ ^^ 
 
 aptitude and training which enables sold.ers m action 
 
 ~Tr^y'xrr' tlSr::: tWefor* ha™ passed away fro™ the 
 (4.) i, A€\t<..j. /^''P;' ,„ in under Lacedffimon.an in- 
 
 Phocians (ef. ch. '^ V^^^^J.X.:^-. *<,«», e/...«^ « ^-' Tl. 
 fluence. oavfitrfx , r „„tiniiitv All the provisions for 
 
 temples were the banks and '"P'^^'^'V^^^; ^^re almost as elaborate 
 securing repayment of one of these loans f™"""^'"?';;^;;^-,. i„ ^, ;, ,„, 
 as those of modern times. ^1. "• IJ- iv,T<). Kriig. 
 
 tained the idea, ^ercilg or furtMy «"'*«™^- . . ^ „;,W, mercenarp. 
 doubts whether this is 7. ^-^by I'll meant that the ambiguit. 
 or iauflich, i.e. ]mrcha.,mhle ^'"l^l'"^ ^^^ ,^„ ideas. 
 
 of the word should suggest '^e ;«»--" j";'-- ^, ,,, ,. MetapVt 
 
 (..) &M^K.KT..-cf ch^3v Therejte g^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 f„m captur ng a ''^^'^S^J*"""^ ,;; ' j„. „, ,«,«. At any rate, it meaas, 
 rated int« slang, we m.ght '""^'''I'^, ^J gee note on « ^n i5i«o,K,., 
 
 U is alt over with the,n^ "J' ^ ^ ^^^^^ . j „„,, Th. 
 
 Ust ch. »« ""'-/ ''T, "',\nJ M and then qualifies it by 
 
 speaker enunciates a Pa«iole of absolu e -^. ^ W. » ^^^^J 
 
 one of „neert.>inty, «v, as ,f he h^'lj-'d. '^;',^^_^^„^^ j^^^, ^„,„ (,it.y„(W 
 ^ppone we may say so. P ^^^^^j^,^ ^^^ j, „„,i„rf 
 
 Jj, „,: The Attic usage is surely aU the »*« way. Cf. ^ P .^ ^ 
 
 Isch. S»™. .86. and ^^<T^^\^;Zl.;^^:^ ^^^ \^a,^. infra, ch. 
 
 rr/lrirnt: S "X* UZ. W..»; and Zevort. ... 
 
 '»'zr:;:;::rt;refutationofth^word;^^^^^ 
 
 i, aiTd— without any immediate word to wnicn i r ^,^ 
 
 have more than once observed c..-.--J^^^^^^^^^^^ ,,i„,i„, ,er.. 
 
 airfpoSffti'— '^Afl^^ «o^/«*^' or /aw. x Tt will be ob¥ei'V€<i 
 
 o,«i .« .;.<.*. In this sense i«»o, ,s ;-;;;™;^: J'J L „sual r«l« 
 that in this sentence .i tw.ce follows « '^'^^^"^ jr"";^^^^^^^ .j ;,, however, a 
 of the language ,^ would ^ ^^^'^.^''^jm^^-no doubt is at a., 
 
 peculiar one, and really amounts io a ^''''i;~^\^ grammatical for«. 
 
 Lte implied, and therefore « loses m a great me^ur. rts ^ , ^^^^ 
 
 •It would be harf that while the.r -''^'T ^ T^. Zlsl^^^ eL^ the««. 
 won-t,Mmplyingd„ubtVweshaUno , &c. Jh^^^^^^^^ ,^^ 
 
 nation is introduced— V"s o" Boaravija-ofxfv. He quotes Lysias, xii. 36, 
 oSkovv Seivhv ct tovj /u€j/ arpaTTjyovs Qavartfi iCvM-iuaare, rovrovs Se Srj . . . ovk 
 ipo XP^ Ko\dCi(rdai ; where also we might render— 7s it not hard that you 
 should have punished, &c. Buttmann, in speaking of the passage (quoted by 
 T. K. A.), says the first ov is used because a positive and notorious fact is as- 
 sumed ; in the second clause the construction passes into the form of a question 
 implying surprise and conveying reproof. ovk &pa Zairavl](TO(xiv — 
 
 ' shall not, as it seems to be inferred, contribute our money.' avrd, 
 
 sc. xp^fiara, cf. note supra. avTo7s rovrois—hy this very money of 
 
 our own, which, like the eagle's pinion in the At/Suo-rt/cbs \6yos, would be used 
 against us for our own destruction. Arnold surely is wrong in tr., ' in that very 
 part in which we are most sensitive ; ' viz. our property. 
 
 Chapter CXXII.— (a.) 65oiiroX«>o v—'ways and means for carrying on the 
 mr! So Tacitus—' belli vias,' An. ii. 5. air Saraais— much con- 
 
 troversy has been wasted, whether or no this word can have an active sense, 
 t.g. withdrawal. I believe it cannot, but it surely comes to the same thing. 
 The speakers say, * revolt of allies,' in general terms, not thinking it necessary 
 to specify how such revolt was to be brought about. It might be by their 
 intrigues or by the inclination of the parties concerned. At any rate, war 
 would give an opportunity for it, and it would, in either case, be equally dis- 
 astrous to Athens. ^irir^ix^ffyiSs. The construction of fortified 
 positions either in, or close to, an enemy's territory, which may be used as a 
 * point d'appui,' or basis for predatory and other operations against them. It 
 has been observed that this is an anticipation. The Peloponnesians never 
 thought of such a thing until Alcibiades put it into their heads. Then, how- 
 ever, they carried out the suggestion by fortifying Deceleia. See also ch. 142, 
 note. iirl ft-nrols, specified, and therefore definite, fixed rides ; cf. 
 h\ l)T}Tois yf pouri, ch. 13. aifrhs a<p* avrov — 'forms its schemes 
 itself Jrom itself to suit the emergencies as they arise.' rh iraparvy- 
 Xavov—^' pro re natd,' the occasion as it presents itself. ^v ^ — sc. 
 roKfiicp. fvopy-fiTOfS — ' without losing his temper* If we read ahrhv 
 with Am. and Kriig., it is perhaps best to connect it with op7t(r0€ts, so that the 
 two expressions exactly balance : lie who deals with it in good temper, and he who 
 futs himself in a passion about it. ir t a i e i—' stumbles,' meets with an over- 
 throw. Bekker has accepted Dobree's conjecture, irepl avrdv, stumbles over 
 himelf= is the cause of his own failure. But in vL 33, we have irepl acpiaiv 
 cunois irraiaaxxiv, and in i. 69, wepl awry atpaXivra, where Am. quotes /xt; irepl 
 Map5oWy irraitrri r) "EAAas, Herod, ix. loi. We should, therefore, expect the 
 dative here. 
 
 (h.) Kark irSXiv—* state lyy state separately,' or rather, 'against each state 
 separately.' «t /j-t} — if we do not all collectively and severally. 
 
 Every member of the confederacy must individually exhibit its zeal ; it will 
 not do to have some active, and some lukewarm. &vriKpvs 5ow- 
 
 f^fiav. We have v &vriKpvs ^AeuOepfa, viii. 64, downright freedom; but per- 
 haps T. K. A. is right in remarking that the absence of the article should 
 make a difference in our rendering : tr. ' slavery outright,' ' slavery staring us in 
 ^heface' iv^oiaffOrivai. Accordi ng to the etymology the word must 
 
 K2 
 
132 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 .i^ify . M U in a state of HaUin,; or '"■"^-'X" t«;^''Iu'.' 
 
 I do not like Arn/s "rsion ^A«< * J^-y^"" -^ ^,^,f „„««„„,rf „, oon/in- 
 „» «,,Mi» po.»».«'y W'-*^ ';^;-; f- the word is not used by Attic 
 gmt: cf. 1. 36 ; ^'- 9 ' • '^^ =■ (p ^ a rf„„„( <,i7v (or, a usurping city) to 
 
 T^riters. ripavvo. ' '^ "-"'^'''." J., ' s' in Oreece by the 
 
 M set up in Greece. Upon the suppression of tyrants 
 
 Wd.n.onians see ch^ ^^^-^j";,:"::;* W«.. .e., ri, of tUree of tU ... 
 
 calamitous things that can befall a "«"'"' . „„„< /• spirit, or 
 
 - 0/ */^ three greatest e.is .H. ^^^^^-X;!,, „<,/,.<.,e tl.se eUr^ 
 mint of care. »" T P ' ; , . y„so„, than anything 
 
 h,, taking refuge in that wh.ch has '''' ^ «frl the ruin it has inflicted u,.. 
 else, contempt of your enemy, we mean. "•*''*-^;"7 J*' ™ ,ue, conlcnp. 
 
 .„d Lrtiou; It is imt«s.U,le in our l-^^^^ "^ (C CrLy^' P 'Hi 
 the words «.T««prf^<r« and a^poTuv^. Dr. D""^""^^ ^ ^, ^11 as i« to 
 
 h. obser^ed that the pre.^t ^-^JZll^^^^^^^ - ^ ^^ ^'"•- 
 be a direct opposition to .ara. 1 1**™ "''"f ' 1^^ ^-^^^ of it is accepted 
 
 consider, con.ams ,00 direct a charge ''^•"f J*?^— ^ad not so muck 
 
 wished to conciliate; and, --^^^'^f/^^ ITkT^ from a..<r.!« a.d 
 despised the growing power of '\"'ens as over 
 ifLctela. See ch. 68 ; and on i^poavpv. Jelf, § 475 »• 
 
 , ^ - ,.-^, RnnDovvras—' coming tothcaiie) 
 
 Chapteb CXXIII.-«..) \l'\\Zr cTu.7'^^ fortuna coegisset i» 
 
 fieri, eandem cogere tueri factum (xim. "- Krug considers m"'- 
 
 ,erb implies the ^^^'^-^\^^ f'^^^fSZ^^^l^^^^^^^ ""' '^'P-'" 
 X6vrwv with ^ireira suspicious. It is not necessary ^xXovtoj 
 
 .ntithesis of sound .and he ""t'^pt atTotlp: P IlTKr^ i^-^ 
 (Plato, P«m. -4. B)_ - , P „.^^„,^_. . „ ,j„„d^/.r 
 
 same meaning as to aptr*, ch 33, .«. ^ _ ^^ ^^^^^,,^ 
 
 valour: Cf. the Latin use of laus. laudes. Sovhonores. e.g. p 
 
 3I„r. Ep. r. vii.. and so, indeed, ^—'^^^f '"though Krio.<u be deponent 
 
 ,,, .„, ofalldance. what ha. Uen - ;» * ^LloSLental dati.e^ 
 ^o\H-'o»manyscorc.i. , !i. The weakening of the Athenian 
 
 'from the benefit thereby accruing to them ^he weakening^ 
 rlwer wottld free them from oppression and .n m«v> ^^^^^^'^^^ ,^, perf. 
 \ae<^».»ia»a.-' to have been tmnsgressed. K™g^P°;;'' " ; gg „,a i«.- 
 pi. from 3.'3a^. occurs in oiUer compounds-{..3^3a-«-. "' -SS; 5,, 
 L3ia,.os, Xeu. KipyarcA. i.4; the aor. £„;x3<.ey«, iv. 3°. ^"^ 
 xfn n.p •!».. ili. 4 El-ewhere the form is not found m Attic ,riters. 
 
 OV V 
 
 Chap. 125.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 133 
 
 Chapter CXXIV.— (a.) vvdpxov. D. tr. ' since on every ground you have 
 nocd reason for going to war: But I am surprised that he has not seen how 
 htipxov has direct reference to inrdpxovcn, c. i2Z— * since you have excellent re- 
 sources coming in on all sides for war.' Cf. ii. 62 : inrdpxov y€ i>fi7u, ' at least 
 when you had the resource.' efTrcp— ' if as we must assuine / cf. supra 
 
 69 b. It is natural to conjecture ravrk for radra, as I had myself done without 
 seeing that Reiske and Goll. had done the same, but the latter now allows, and 
 I believe with truth, that ravra is right. Arn. well explains : ' We advise this 
 war for the interest of the whole confederacy, and it is for their interest, if it 
 be admitted as most certain, that this measure is alike for the benefit of states, 
 and of the individuals who reside in them.' Both radra and raSe refer to iroAe- 
 So says Popp. c. 143, ' ravra et rdBf de eMem re dicuntur.' 
 p6r€po V—' the opposite of which was formerly the case.' ov refers to the whole 
 clause. See, for the fact, v. 9, vi. 77, vii. 5, viii. 25, Popp. /t€T€A067;/ 
 
 t),v iheve^plav—' to ensue the freedom of the rest; as in the E. V. of the New- 
 Test., ' scc/fc peace, and ensue it: The Germans similarly say, ' nachgehtn der 
 
 Freiheit: 
 
 (b.) oifKfri iv^fX^'TO'i—it is 'no longer admissible— it is no longer a 'possible 
 case. Cf. ch. 1 40. 1 42. a(f>7xBa i— impersonal, ' that things have come to a strait: 
 Cf. h oiop rf\€vr^v a<t>7Kro, vii . 7 5 . Bid ir\eloyos, 8C. xp^vov—' lasting 
 
 a'longer time: ^« 7roA€>ou . . . d<p' ^avxias. The different use of 
 
 the prepositions is well seen here— €k arising out of, and therefore following 
 from; airhfrom a regard to. iK is ever the material cause ; in dirh the causal 
 
 notion comes from the primary local one— ^Aaj; whi^h comes away from an object. 
 
 Tk\v KadearTiKv7a v — the usurping (or detpot) city that has been set up in Greece. 
 
 ixi-to the detriment of. Siapoe7<rdai, sc. &px^iu— on this 
 
 use of Sjffre, denoting the natural consequence of what precedes, cf. supra 
 
 76 c. 
 
 Chapter CXXV. (a.) d<p' dirdvrwv. Kriig. remarks that such a use of 
 
 the preposition is rare with aKovnv though not with fiavddvfiu—' heard from tJie 
 lips of all: There is nothing strange in the omission of the article before 
 yvdinnu, it belongs to the class of cases already noticed (cf. 8 a), and may be 
 illustrated by such expressions as ' show cause,' &c., in our own language. 
 th trXr^Qos—'the majority;' for, as A. remarks, it is said, v. 30, Kvpiov chai 
 iTih>rh TTkridos rwv ^vfifidxciv ypv<t>'^(r-nrai. 8 e 8 o 7/i e v ;/— used abso- 
 
 lutely, as the more familiar cases of S6^av, irapdaxov, &c. This would be scarce 
 ▼orth noticing had not some copyists introduced 86So7/tfVou into the MSS. Cf. 
 with Kriig. up-nfievov, i. 140 and elsewhere, yeypafxfievov, v. 56, irpoarerayfifpov 
 in Plato, and Jelf, 700. 2 a. 'dfitas S'e k.t.A. This I believe refers 
 
 to/irj fli/oi fji4W7)aiv, i.e. notwithstanding the resolution to make no delay in the 
 settlement of the necessary preliminaries, not indeed a whole year (one cannot say 
 a year), but something less was cmisumed. This was my own impression of the 
 meaning, but the editions with which I was ftimiliar, A. and Popp., gave the 
 sense as the Eng. trans. D. does : ' A year, however, did not pass while they 
 ttwg settling all that was necessary ;' but I cannot think that Thuc. would speak 
 of a year as a short time for the purpose. Kriig. seems to adopt the first inter- 
 pretation, and so does the last German trans. (Engelman) : ' zwar kein Jahr, 
 aber dock nicht viel weniger: 
 
 y^ 
 
NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 Chapter CXXVI.-(a.) 1 " f^ •" ^"o""**"""- ^f- "°f- . 
 Ti a-yo! T^. e.oO--' the ahomination of the goddm,' i.«.-a8 it might raeanm 
 our own language-' (/!. thi,,^ uMeh ty goddess almninated.' /^«"."">» 
 
 the regul^ technical term for the expulsion of person, (^,«t,«.) «> situated, 
 a /TOJ- T,^ a% Vii\<»y K.r.\. The simple and lucid way 
 
 it w^lfThucyd. has given this narrative, and its difference from his usual 
 "ernor style (d .po^.p^. ««AAoO struck the grammarians ,0 much that they sa,d 
 ont A^c. A.-a1. See Grote, iii. .08. The date of the victory of Cylon 
 in the Diaulus. according to Corsini, Diss. Ag. p. .7- (Krug.) was Olymp. 
 ,T-,v ifr^Xtv. The regular word for the answer of the oracle. 
 
 ^r^'xB.,. SeveraUnd I believe the better, MSS. have ^'^i^'''"';.™^ i»™'T 
 hequestion concerning the real nature of the principle upon which the Greeks 
 ombine a neuter plural with a verb singular. I believe it to be this : Neuters 
 what V r may be their plurality in mere number, do not contain the notion 
 Tepire irdividuality and agency ; they are embraced by the mind ' e» J^ 
 Ta a single whole. As they thus exhibit but a single operation or action he 
 V rt denying this action is put in the singular number. This accords with the 
 I ew taken by Coleridge, Tab. Talk, ii. 6., viz. that neuters may posses, 
 ZeUy but not ,l.r«lity. From this he deduces the conclusion that neu e. 
 plural beingmerelyoA;>rf.,hayenopropers»A;e.<-/.r«ornominativeDr.Donad 
 
 „ports the sLe theory, regarding all such neuters as properly .^cu^t^e 
 cases and the verb with which they are connected as impersonal m usage. 
 ^Apu'd Gr«.cos neutra pluralia (i.e. accusativi, nam genus neutrum nomiua tivo 
 cfretTverbo singulari apponuntur. ut ri iHa rpix». «• curritur quoad animalia. 
 Cn 21 same ^inciple! it is plain, as is here laid down, that there is no neu. 
 nominative singular. It may be true, as Coleridge says, that neuters have 
 lectiv tV alL, yet I can scarcely admit that, because neuters do not pos- 
 set a nfcions m;'aphysical subjectivity, they cannot be made the subjec^of 
 a ^xmmatical proposition. The same mental tendency which, m all languages, 
 :.Sbrma culL'and feminine ■ nomiua ' to things without U^ and ra i^x^ 
 
 .auction the subject-form, or nominative, as applied to a neuter noun But neuter 
 ; u^ba e sometimes followed by verbs plural, when the idea which they expres. 
 !ud whL forms the subject of the verb, may easily be divided in thought inU, 
 rX individualities and agencies, a case by no means so universal as At. 
 • ^i^e. Thus t4 iwa rp4x^i—' living creatures run,' regarding them as a 
 I^Igical class but weV\ht have'.i f.a Vx»---.*e ereaU^^r, 
 „lingf^ii the writer meant to describe several separate animaU as d„ g . 
 Here reference may be intended to the various i7-« of which the Oljmp. 
 consisted At any rate this principle appears to me to explain the only 
 Ts «s 'in which; so far as 1 remember, Thucyd. in this way couples a ueuto 
 ^UrtoapTuralverb: ..^. ii. 8, iroXXi X^.« ^^.V-o: here the diversity 
 ml ng or 'expre-io" iu the X^.a, or, at any rate, their entire independence 
 Z'h other, I conveyed by the plural ; v. .6, i^^po^s i^^^^T. iy«^^. 
 the separate and distinct errors ascribed to either party would natunjly 
 not fall under a single conception expressed by a singular T^^''- J^';-/ ' 
 Kao«Ta Iriyxo^^oy Srra is a case which exactly resembles the present oDe^ 
 In 1 e' %'-T. .tKo.. Kal i.ar». riXavra, the plural indicates the 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 26.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 135 
 
 „veral sums which together made up (^.W^o, ■ «™.''"«*''' '"">' ^'j^'"^', .^^ 
 It If R ,«. KariKa^f. According to Herodotus(v. 7i)he 
 
 also Jelt, § 3»5- i,, i-nX rvoavviSi—' as they 
 
 made the attempt without succeeding. T /T if 8 fi,. ,» 
 
 .,.,,7^ do who were striving to establish a tyranny ; cf. Jelt, ^ 534, 3 a. . 
 
 ZZo.^L,-' had sle peculiar refonn^e to U.ff (o. appropru.tenessto 
 I ,A „„ ni„mmc victor- «t. K<,.Tiy6r,<r^-any further, %.e. his 
 
 :i:s:ntf'Zr::Jrs meaning went no further. Kriig^.ays, however. 
 'ZS^Z-l' considered: but cf. Ka«.V. ch^ n^ b- On ^OX....a «.. ,- 
 1 1 Jelf, § 459- 5 : Monk on Alcest. v.; and on .. ^-, § 6.6. ., on W 
 
 "7;".!/;:.'' r;!jf MTSotthr^^^veteres -lentio,. Buker. Kor 
 • ti, worship confined to Athens alone, nor indeed the name to Zeus As 
 nalTrraledUw. and without the walls, there would natural X^- 
 excellent opportunity for the execution of Cylon's plan. '°^ "L 
 
 Ta^lftZ^not Jctims, but sacrificial offerings, such as were comjnon ^n tl. 
 Z!tn, These, as he goes on to explain, were cakes made in the shape of 
 imat and off;red by persons too p<«r to P--- ;- P"^f « ^^^j^^;^ 
 ihemselves-irwaTa .« C"i"' l^'f^' T.T«r«,^e,«, bchol. Cf. Uerod. on the 
 
 ^tu^nn'o,.ivov-' accruing; ' being added to whnt went before'. 
 JLiZ^Jwiih fuU powers: Arn. refers to Herm. Pol. Antn^ Greece, 
 .0 Cho says that it is impossible to ascertain the manner in which, at this 
 p2 the ruling houses (y.'n,) exercised their privileges. The insurrection, 
 Cve without doubt was only a consequence of their sanguinary enactments, 
 a r 1 ouTh they succeeded in overpowering Cylon. the perfidy with which they 
 a «d pr^ipitated their fall. Herod., it will be remembered, v. 7.. 3, sp-ks 
 T2^L.u, ™. .auKpip... .fr.p Wo. T,ir. ri. 'A.-Vas, as the persons 
 LtneS in these dealings with Cylon. They perhaps were the execu^^^ve 
 pow acting under the authority of the archons. Engelman s ed. supposes that 
 ; orm^'a sort of college among themselves Mhr, ad >-» Her<^., Wachs 
 mulh, « 436, Bockh {Fubli. EC. of Athens), Schoman Ve ComUas, -"• ^»'-. »" 
 lit of this difficult question. The younger student may refer to the I>.H 
 A^ig Grote. and Thirlwall. r6r.. Because the power of tl e 
 
 a hous was imited by Solon. ^Kaip.s-i.e. .a..s, or. as vulgarly 
 
 tld be aid, 'scurJuy: Poppo remarks that Thuc. «l-"'^-J^''f^ ^^^ 
 ^Ms, but never <paiK.s. Upon such matters nothing can d^^'-i^ J-"' 'he 
 usus'of the time, with which truly rest the 'arbitrium, jus, et norma 
 
 'TdfiraaTAffavTtr-'raiscrf them np from their suppliant position: As 
 IMg. says, this is the regular word for inducing persons to quit a Banctmry*.. 
 
 ■ ■ • v,» F^l iii 106 • 'Suspensi loculos, Uor. IMt. 1. 
 
 •cmti nomina regum, Virg. J<^. m. 100. ouop^. . 
 
 V,,, iTTodyiiaKovras—' on the point of death. <»» 
 
 Ti, ,.u,i._' at tl>e altar of the venerable goddesses.' See Anst. Equtt .311, 
 ^.eS^, aoK« . . . Vl Ti. «^.». 0..5V. This temple, says the fechohast 
 lay between the town and the Areopagus. Join, with Pupp., iy to« e<.M»« to 
 5«xpV9a, ; the latter word may be rendered-' dealt wUh, ' de^atcUd. 
 iX.T^p.... T«i,s i.m"i.y<,yra, .is Toi,. .'«>« aMT^p.o"^ "P'^'^'"'- Sch. on 
 
•4 
 
 136 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDE9. 
 
 [Book 1." I Chap 
 
 129.1 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 137 
 
 avTuv refers 
 
 n 
 
 fr;;,"^'; :;; r.J<^ ^>y aeisthenes. KrUg. 
 
 to the Alcmseonidae. 
 
 ^ rxXVn -f« ) 5iie— »n unusual position for the word which 
 
 Chafteb CXXVII.--(«.)01 ^„^^ ,^„,e. The later 
 
 always, as Kriig. remarks, m Thucjd., J^''_. ^^^^^i„,^„; .paints/.' 
 writers however prefixed .t. ^^^.^^ ^^ ^j^^ ^^^ -^ ^^ich we should 
 
 ,p„..X^,/'""' ":;*„ J^twriter would say, attached to him. 
 Slate the idea, ^.e. an f "g''f J"; . ,j, j(A««m«s,' i.e. their demands from 
 .i M T«. -AeriKaU.-' '"''"J'f^"',^,;^^ ^^icle here has oansed much cm- 
 the Athenians. J f ^ , ■ .^ , ^n reference to rb 8Xo». 
 
 barrassment. It is generally sa.d t^^e ^e* w''^ * ^„,, ,„phatic than 
 
 U seems to me to '"'^^J^-f „ °«^r6~.,- m-ing that a definite, an 
 
 a^po, per se, ' "''3'"'"'" ,"'• /" "" Siity rest^l with him. Might we not, as 
 
 ascertainable amount of the "I^P""^'^' ^ j^ ^e ' aliquantum ? ' 
 
 before (^3 c) read r. ,4^s, -^^'^"^^^ZnZ the stat^, ef. ii. 65. On the 
 
 S^„,_. lead,ng; as we ''^y- 'J^^"'"^^;,,,, ;„ the support of the war, such as 
 alleged causes, supposed to .nfluence i-ercie 
 
 the wishes of Aspasia, &c., see Grote, vol. n. p. .3«. 
 
 PVVVTII (a^ iir!. T...ipou-«.Aic4 cam« «/.<>n them from 
 
 TiBnarus. ''" , ^ . ,^, , .^ „. y;u <,^ga^ earthquake visited 
 
 .entence--/.r »*io* -- f »;*^, ^^^^'JJ*: Z U cf- ch. 'o.. 
 
 <Am.' Kriig. cf. 1. 1 3° : »■ "• j^^JeJap^J.' Probably, as Arn. suggests, 
 
 the walls were lined wth pktes of bra^, '-k^J"' '." , J^^,; <,i^ chalciceeon 
 refer to Pausanias in. '7, 3- «J^ ^ ^^„,„, gir W. Gell, ArgolU, 
 (Minerrs est templum areum) <=™g[ff „f ^treus which must haw 
 
 p. 30, speaks of the bronze na.ls m the treasury ,^^fl.h-'««< 
 
 been used to fasten the metal to the walls. ^i^^^Hermme. 
 
 after: i.e. judicially summoned, bx. 478- ^^iy^ara ^pi<"""- 
 
 . city of the Lacedemonian confed^^y. ^ ,^„„j 
 
 'toearryon an tntnffue The "«°''';^ f Greek more nearly than the 
 and in this case the English idiom "PP'^*"'''^.^' %„, „ . and i. -^, viii- 
 
 Lan. Kriig. aptly '^^, '""*;^-:J,;n,b^fag. It »«« here means- 
 „. It is perhaps needless t» remark wiin r. g ^.. 
 
 ^^.X^'P""'- ^"^ eo^od M&S «h.h.t^«X 2 i„i the reasons for 
 
 ri, ,p£T.K-i... hefore h'S recall The ^f^^^^^^_.^^,,a,pasadeim>'{ 
 this r.«ill extends to thecioseof eh. .3-^^^ .^^ ^.^ ^^^^ „^„„, ^liithe. 
 /.f 1 11 ^V T^P^^^r^ ^ T oVimiM rr 'on the first 
 
 1 .p-»»'*' «^- ^"' ■' 'T' r%r Tcr"'' the worf Soph. Elect. 540. 
 ^X ./ »^ ^i». '*->; -^J ts r : W aatiVe, 'denoting -he 
 and Eur. H^c. 227. Jelf cUs^ihes ^"^« ^pocr^KOvrcs- 
 
 place .here the action o^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^°5. ^^^^^^^^ ^ ^^^^. 
 
 . co«n^xio«. 0/ the king, affines, the P^',^^?^^P ^^^^■^,, ^^ed generically of 
 f„^7c.€7s-'r«^a^i«^« f^ consar^ffnimty, though somen b • 
 
 ^vyy^y .^ p Cic. pro Sej:t. Hose. 99°' i' *" 
 
 those 'who were not bo. ^i. 'wim xu^.^; x- 
 
 „^ati,ue;- Csar. m «««. i- -. 'necessarii - -— Jt' en'cTo'sfln 
 iii. 34, . propinqu. adfinesque. ^„^^i^„,, Gongj-lus, says T. K. A., 
 
 •.u fV,^ Pvrpans found his widow still living, B.C. 399. 
 
 'jri^irX^ the first is notiw uncommon ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 - t^tttfa: fs used in reference to the time --. ki^ w.ld rec^ 
 4e letter-' these prisoMrs before you. '^ P 
 
 . P„,,n Thucvd always connects a dative with tins vero in iiie a 
 ""^ He' has Jlso used the passive i^aK.^^ rm, ch. ..9 and ... 68. 
 
 Soph krvS. "^' ...„„.-'»A«.»-*««*«-'<'-^' 
 
 CH.PT,™ CXXIX.-W -^Mo. Most proba% the ^me^so^often 
 
 ::f ™rs^:Sr stc^iedt:: :;:il town on the ^.-er Ehyndacus ; 
 "LS^lZ the cities of Bithynia and Paph.agonia, f^m *e shor^ o^^the 
 HelJpont along those of the E"^*- Jh. w^s,^ay. A. he p^vm^e ^ 
 
 '°' . - o . ' c X. Kara M6V Ti^as tV /Ba^riAe'cos ekcJva, Kara Se 
 
 Krug. refers to Xenophonmpl np»<r^m."^ . ^^^^^.^^ 
 
 diffelnt from the present. The latter would mean-* »" "'"^^JX^^* 
 »«( to he offered, lit. fee it not be in a Me of i"*""';'.,^"*' ^".f ''^^"^l 
 all., any iipeduncnt u^hich has been offered to prevent U; W- «»'»<" *^» 
 .™.^i imakethisremarkhe.^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^:,d. ""/r.."rtrse>n-.nce:the^^^^ 
 
 Of the letter. So too always the Latms ' dabam. The younger siu 
 
'138 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 32.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 139 
 
 notice this a, we always make the time of onr own vmting the standard of 
 "nle! l" In'thing indLted by this difference between the anc.ent and m«lern 
 practice ? 
 
 Cbapteb CXXX.-(a.) ri yfi^^^r.. As the Latin liter<B. ' a letter.' 
 iJUr.T: verbal substantive with passive meaning and takes a verbd .n- 
 stLtion. being fol.«w«l by >.6 Knig^ ct v.. .5, -d Vxi "■/;^.;;- j^™' 
 
 for the more usual KaStcrTiT., cf. i. 98. Eur. Hd. 438. &<=• Kni?- 
 
 for the more us ^^^^^^^ ^^^.^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^_^f,^„^ ,i 5„^ 
 
 :;::h L":in:: woddTve been described by <.o.,. See his note, Xe„. 
 
 ""*"(» )■ T;!wf a. Just as we say he kept an expensive table so here the wori 
 JL L. Lely the thing itself, but the luxunous Uv.ng^ Kemark^.|. 
 mid. voice exercising .ts force m.ap^.e.ro. •""' '^^ , J'^_. ,„^i„^,. ,, 
 
 'kP^n under (conceal) his intentmn, PP°-X J ^ 
 
 keep u^uier (. ; ^^^^^^^^^ ^.^^ .^^^^_. ^^^ ^^ i,,, ,, 
 
 often. 7i'«A*T/ 5v(rirp(J(ro5os. This adjective 
 
 ^0/ i.^. wasinirposed to do. ^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^.^ 
 
 ^:^~^::::'/^ i^grxeiv^.^,. and .^...™, 
 
 presence aijic y i„.^,-_her6 evidently in the general sense, 
 
 i o^x" wd • t mper' has a gene^l sen"^;. and a special acceptation as 'anger,' 
 rf Ih .40 IsTight have' been anticipated, the former mean.ng .s fou„ 
 t::-^;ently in^nearUe^stage ^^^^^^^^rZ^ "^ 
 
 T^u Hes Op 502. Accordingly we have the word in the plural to denot^ 
 oprfiiy, Hes. op. lly . g 7^ ^iii_ 83. Elsewhere it is scarcely found 
 
 tempers, ' animi affectus, in. 52 anu vm. 03. 
 (among later writers at any rate) in this sense. 
 
 PVVVT (a^ rh 'Kowrov — 'as well the first tbm: See 
 CHAPTEB CXXXI.-(«.) ;^^^J^ Here the preposition denotes the COO.. 
 
 Set^^n of the act. and therefore the word is ^-^^ ^ J, J," rt. 
 5^„, « / Tpa,<£s as an adjective. So EXAor vi. t>z, ws ^ 
 
 mp.isi.i3f,Krug -Pa.cr«. ^.77^^^^ See L. andS. X...,or 
 
 i.ir.^«»;.^ ; cf. m. ';';^; *5; ^ ^^ ^ .^^e expedient, 
 
 iTe't^;:::^^ otrr t^^eSy an enemy .n. whosej- 
 he dlpatch had fallen might easily find out the key to the -'tmg _ P-bab^ 
 there was some mechanism connected with the staff wh.ch none of he accouBt 
 derriK and a secret cypher also. The Schol. --^^^--;^^; ;: 
 
 r.ix..»a/ This does not. I think, mean. • «e..r <o 6. o«« 0/ (A. *^r« W^ 
 t; «<,* ^» stay UHi.i ki,n-to accompany *m to S.arta^ J^'K^i.^.B'; >^;^ 
 Kriig. remarks, more common in this sense. t'i^ s . .n 1 
 
 ' neuter with a passive force has the passive construction, j^l'l^^;^;,^ 
 ib)rbu /3a<r;A^a. He was, more properly speaking, .^irpoTros or reg 
 
 Pf next chapter, though in this capacity he acted for the k\ng-rL^¥ ^ovra. 
 Arist. calls him king, vii. 13. I3- 5ia,rpa|ci^evos f^l^^^-'^ff 
 
 out hv settling the affair, compromising it with the magistrates. So 1 thmk the 
 r^rev U signifies; the simple irpaidf..pos would be, by scheming, or zn- 
 1^^/;. Kadiarv<Tiv k.t.X.— * surrenders himself to take his 
 
 JaV »fpi ahrbv iK4yx^iy—3. somewhat unusual phrase, but, as 
 
 Popp. remarks, it is proved to be genuine by c. 135, «* ^^V^'^^^" ^« '^^'^ ""'P' 
 Uavffoylav ixiyx^^- 
 
 Chapter CXXXIL-(a.) hv irtfiu^podvro^' on the strength of which they^ 
 ^e to punish: Peile cf. Herod, vii. 139, -^^ ^^'^^'^ '^^'' "^"X^W • • ov 
 Jivoucu irt^0€(r0ai fins h.y ^v-' of what u^e walls were ' (or should have been) 
 y.^ds-first-cousin. Cleombrotus, father of Pausanias, and Leonidas, father 
 of Pleistarchus, were brothers, sons of Anaxandridas by his first wife. 
 Cleomenes was also his son by his second wife. See the story Herod, v. 41, 
 ^..j ^leSeSip'TTjTO— ' departed in his habits of living from the 
 
 'latmal institutions: which would, in accordance with the spirit of the Spartan 
 constitution, be regarded as a grave offence. Bl. quotes several mstances where 
 later historians have adopted the word. I do not remember its use elsewhere 
 among earlier writers. Notice the double augment, which Krug. amply illus- 
 trates by other cases, chiefly from the orators. rhu ^P'^^^^jc. Ihis 
 was a golden tripod, supported by a triple-headed serpent in bronze. The histoiy 
 of this tripod is curious, and may be seen, Gibbon, Decline and Fall vol m. 
 cl, 17 Dr Turner, who examined it in the year 1853 in Constantinople, where 
 it stands in the Hippodrome, states that it is in excellent preservation, but that 
 the drawing of it in the Dictionary/ cf Gk. and R. Antiquities is not accurate. 
 See Herod, ix. 81. rh ixey^iov r6Be-' this elegiac distich 
 inK6\ar\>av-erased, lit. beat out, because the erasure was probably effected by 
 hammering the surface of the brass. If we are to believe the Athenian author 
 of the oration nark ^.alpas (§ 97), the Lacedemonians did not do this of their 
 own free-will, but because they were cited by the Plataeans before the 
 Amphictyons. According to the same authority, they were fined 1000 talents 
 which, when we consider their position in Greece, their services in the war. and 
 the sUence of Thucyd., is, as it seems to me, enough to throw discredit on the 
 whole story. Diodorus (xi. 33) suppUes the improved distich,— 
 'EXAdSos (vpvx^pov ffayrrjpes r6v^" ai/€07jKov, 
 ^ov\o(rvvr)5 ffrvy^pas ffvffdnevoi ir6\ias. 
 
 ital Tovro—i.e. the previously-mentioned inscription. 
 
 (6.) u^t!,r^p6v ri Troi^iv-Uo adopt any violent TMOSure: It may also have 
 reference to the unpredecented nature of such an act, just as the usual force of 
 the phrase contains a mixed notion of revolution and violence, 
 i^^/tcaroi/. D. tr. ' an extreme measure.' It is so, because the word means 
 irreparable, irremediable, like the infliction of capital punishment, which can- 
 not be recalled. 'Ki(rr6raros. It is by no means necessary to 
 lesort to the expedient of making this word passive, ' cui ille fidem Tnaxime 
 khehat: Whatever was the conduct of this man after the discovery of his 
 master's treachery, it may have most thoroughly deserved the epithet previously. 
 
II 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 140 
 
 Upon V" » the sense • untU, cf Jrf , i 848, 3- ,<.„a,ro.,<riM.., 
 
 Argilus was in the peninsula «/ "'*1'="'';?- „^, fo^e of the prep, in 
 
 ,^,ayna-' having cou.terfatedthe «« • ^"?* — „„,;„„ „f, J,i,i, 
 
 composition, the idea "^f ^'^^^J^pTr \ J^^ of the particle .r in 
 rrirt-na;^;;- tr^^^^ - .- -.. co„ectea^h.^^^^^^^^ 
 
 difflcnlties made about this passage, ,t appears «» "y" >" ^ 
 
 many others, where an active infiniUve.s •"^^"^^f^,^ jj^"", asttliom of 
 he supplied, instead of a ^^';;^:^;^^Xot.:^^^^ Lt instance whic. 
 our own language would have reqmrea , y k Englishman would 
 
 preseat. itself), ™-- ^^^J^ ^^ i: ^ty no" an/then, the idio™ 
 have written .. .o..a a. (^e- ^^^^^^^^^ "Llare'inclined to make a change 
 seems more than usually awkward, and the editor ^. 5' a, e.'xo.s tJ> 
 
 • ♦!,« f^^f Thii«! in the converse case, Soph. Uid. Lot. 1400, ^i u 
 
 in the text, xnus, m lue cuuxrio r cnVmtitute ^uAi/ffm. 
 
 „<„.. .,*=.. ,p..i; \-'"™;i^r':?,';:rn^^;truirhraU to'taake 
 Yet there is no MS. authority for the alteration, ana 1 snom 
 
 it. Cf. eaw/xdo-ai, ch. 1 38 c. 
 
 CH.^K CXXXIII.-(«.) air^Koo.-- to Uar uM 'Jf -» ^^ J"* 
 positive assurance was necessary in dealing w.th so ^I'^^^^V^™ 
 
 :;:r:::;:Mr;:.ir"4::wai.^ 
 
 that the right of sanctuary extended to the tc^.os, or .^^'^^ Precn 
 rounding .he temple. Suppliants would, either from "^ho.ce or nece s tj, JO 
 fre^uenfly take up their abode th '-;f/jt:nt::lJ:/ore.ei 
 r^versy. Z£'J^::^0^ it wit.n -..s and Ha.u,^^ 
 in his woi on particles, would expunge U altogether_^ ,tir ,L^ar ™.. 
 Am. and Peile retain it. explaining .ts usage -'""^'"g ^ '^.f .^ ^rn. .»vs. 
 For these, refer to the note on 'Aw^V-.' «. .^ 9- ^^ f ^f ^^jj^, ,„d« 
 „ .gniees no more t-n «.. .— ^^^ ^^ -\,J _. 
 
 r:;g:';fnL\:^a;:ni;'be render^. •»-;;- -^^^^^ 
 
 same of the ephoH: Peile (Appendix. Agamem. p. 383) explains, « s 
 
 La tie clauses, ... ^^^P- f^^r '^'^^^ hf t^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 alike to be connected with .Is V. so that we might translate tntow 
 
 toducedsame of tke e^kors, and kid tk.n ^f^dtlZZ^^^^^ 
 .kick also Pausanias) ka^ng can. YZl^Zt^V^^^ ''^ 
 
 .ar^t^ry: As in the same Appendix (p. 3 8 a) the P"^^^P ^^^^ ,^, 
 
 that '« is altogether rdro^ecti.e, and herein to be ^^^.^^^f ^^^^^ ^.^ BOt 
 which is always ^^^o^l I should myself f-V-;^^^^^^^^^ 
 so much relation to the fact that Pausanias also came into the h ^ . ^ 
 
 subsequently stated, as to the fact '^-\'^'f'\^'^t^^^^^^^^ 
 
 the narration, and that he introduced the ephors, as well as hiTOsej, 
 
 Z conv^^ltlon of Pausanias- .^iMin .KuH ke concealed sorr. of iU ep 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 134.1 ^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 141 
 
 /,o' or the ephors withal. See also Jelf, § 756, obs. irapa^aKoiro. 
 
 The Sehol. explanation is i.apa&6K<.s KaTrryop^<r«. ^ im6nrr<.s h^aKoyv<reie It is 
 Ihably the Homeric usage, aie. e>V ^vx¥ ^apafiaXX6,..vos .oMj..C^iu, and 
 L5,J.y must be supplied, ' exposed him to risk: ^poTt,xr,06(„. The 
 
 word certainly appears to me to contain somewhat of irony. So too Krug., 
 who tr ^had the distinguished honour; &c.; we might say, 'preferred to death^ 
 T K A says it may be simply rendered, ' thought worthy of being put to death 
 and quotes i.ni^^.iou, Xen. Anab. ii. 3, "• But as that word means ^^ and 
 the context there implies plainly, ^ft to be beaten,' I do not see the parallelism. 
 ovK 4S>vros. The common usage of these words, note, ch. 28, andcf. L.and b. 
 y^-^^n -KiffTiv. Kriig., after Bauer, tr. Verbiirgung, bail or 
 
 security (if he would rise and quit the sanctuary). See noted, ch. 126, on 
 iA<^'rLs On the distinction between Uphv and re^evos, which are. however, 
 often used synonymously, see Arn. re^.o, {i.e. rei.v6t..vos) = ms separatus 
 aaer, including the consecrated ground, and all the land of which the usufruct 
 L devoted to the temple. Uph. seems to express all the actual bui dings as 
 well the (TTool and dwellings of the priests, as the sacred edifice itself. Thus 
 the iphy is said to be iy r^ii^v.X in Herod, ii. 1 1 a. vahs is the great central shrine 
 where the deity himself was supposed to dwell, and where his statue stood. 
 There were, however, smaller vaoi, like the side chapels in Roman Catholic 
 cathedrals. tA itpaaa6ti.va-^ the transactions then actually going 
 
 o-al i.e. with Xerxes. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXIV.— (a.) iiroiovpro. The true imperfect, describing an 
 .ction never completed-' t..r«/orarm^m^,' cf. i<r^ey^oyro, iii. 24, andL with 
 Am., ifjiiiTdodro irap' ovk iKmouros, Herod, i. 68. i^ rv 65y- m 
 
 the street: a not uncommon use of the word, especially in N. T. ^. . ^ , 
 
 k<pav.7-^ secret: ' unseen by the rest: ^poKara<pvyeh;^' anticipated 
 
 them in taking refuse: , • ir 11 
 
 (i) oTfCTjua Either a chamber attached to the temple itself, or a small 
 house in the sacred precinct. Mov S.ra-' when th^y knew that he 
 
 urn housed: iv^ov is one of those adverbs which must be regarded as formed 
 from the accusative. They denote, as I have endeavoured to express, not a 
 simply local position as the dative, but motion terminating at a place. 
 ki^o\a&6vT.s .Uu,-^ having shut him up within;' in this phrase, as in the 
 following one, ai.<fKoS6^v<ray rks dipas (with Kriig. cf . rhs 6Bobs k^otKo^o,xv<rat, vii. 
 '3), barncaded the doors, the preposition indicates the cutting off all communica- 
 tionfrom without. Similar is its usage in iLiroruxiC<^ and its cognates. See 1. 64. a. 
 (c ) &a7r.p €lx^P The general import of this phrase is, forthwith, e.g. 
 iii. 30. It is not, however, improbable that here the primary notion may be 
 \ni,nded-'justashewas:i.e. in the piteous state into which he had fallen. 
 Bl well supports this sense by Herod, i. 24, ^i^a. M'»' ^^ "^V BaXaacrau eo,vr6y, 
 Smp 61x6, ahv TV aKevii ird<rv, where the concluding words explain w<r^ep ,Jx^ 
 rhv KaidSav. Strabo explains arrh^aiSy n. Its etymology implies a natural 
 cleft in the earth, such as those which arise from volcanic agency. Similar 
 ^as the UpoBpov of which we hear at Athens. ifi$d\\€iv. Krug. 
 
 governs by ip.4\\v(ray, supplying the word a second time to eWeetra;/. 
 tKn<rloyTov-^in the neighbourhood of the Ceadas; as may be understood from 
 
 r 
 
142 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [BooKl. I Chap. 136.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 u.r€.e7K€i. olrKep a^^Bave. Kriig. This is. I think, correct, and the transac 
 
 tion, notwithstanding all the difficulties made about it, seems tolerably clear. 
 
 The Delphian god, indignant that a Spartan monarch, and a suppliant of his 
 
 own, should lie in so ignominious a locality, desires that he should be removed. 
 
 and buricKl where he died. He is accordingly entombed, iu t<? jporc/x^vtcr/xar, 
 
 which, I apprehend, must mean some edifice at the front part of the t^^cvoj 
 
 -the entrance, or, in scriptural language, the going in. I believe Am is right 
 
 in comparing it to the gateway of the ' close ' at Peterborough or Salisbury ; but 
 
 he asserts too strongly that no burial could have taken place within the sacred 
 
 precincts; this Thirlwall shows from the case of Euchidas, Pint. Htst ic. 
 
 Probably the irpore/icV.tr^ua was chosen as a sort of compromise between their 
 
 own scruples and the command of the God. That it was a building of some 
 
 sort and generally a decorated one, seems clear from Clem. Alex. P<Bdag. 111. 2 
 
 (quoted by BL), Karh rohs Alyuirriwu K6(rfiovs, oh yao\ koI irpoirvKaia tap 
 
 ainoh Kol wpor.,.eyl<rt.ara n^aKvroi. The <rrr,A<u probably were a double 
 
 column with the appearance of the tables on which the Commandments are 
 
 engravJd in churches, Bl. Mpid.ras. Two images or statues of 
 
 Pausanias. They were seen by his namesake in the Chalcicecus. See 111. 17. ', 
 
 Cf. Diod. xi. 45, Popp. The death of Pausanias occurred 01. 76I, or b.c, 
 
 473, Kriig. 
 
 Chapter CXXXV.—(«) iyos Kplvavros—' having determined it to be a 
 pollution: sc. avr6. The noun stands as a sort of predicate, as in the caseoiri. 
 i-Kolv^^u 'hO^ucuov. cf. 109, c. |vv€ir7,Ti«vT0-' iinplicated him in ik 
 
 charge: A very rare word, says Bl., which I have only found elsewhere, Plut. 
 Ptric. ots avy^irvrmuTO rod MrjStcr/iou. This digression concerning Themistock 
 continues to ch.'i 38 inclusively, and may be .justified partly by its connexion with 
 the affair of Pausanias, and partly by the important influence which Themistocles 
 exercised upon Grecian politics. Roscher, a German writer (Clio, 1. p. 359^- 
 thinks that these four digressions of Thucyd. on Theseus, Cylon, the Peisistra- 
 tidae, and Themistocles, are intended to represent the four principal epochs cf 
 Greek history before his time. Probably he had no such artificial notion, and 
 there is no reason to suppose that he would have hesitated to say so if he had 
 meant it. i\4yxooy- This is explained by Plut. Them. 23, ^TrmoXo. 
 
 Tii/€s ai/€up606:(ra*, Kol ypdtifiara ir,p\ ro<nwv us {nro^lau 4y4Pa\op rhy ©efiiffroKkk 
 i>arpaKi<Tiiivos. Circiter b.c. 476, Kriig.; b.c. 471, Clinton and Grote. 
 
 Chaptbb CXXXVI.— (rt.) ahT5>v, sc. twv K^pKvpaiotv, implied in K€>«|W 
 by the figure irpbs rh ffrifiaivSixfvov, Jelf, § 379 C- (vfpytni 
 
 Either, as Plutarch says, by his friendly mediation in a dispute with Connth 
 about the Leucadian peninsula, whereby Corcyra obtained the object she con- 
 tended for ; or, as the Schol says, by dissuading the Greeks from proelaimiD^ 
 as public enemies those states (including Corcyra) which had refused to co- 
 operate in repelling the Persian invasion. ^X**'' a^"^^" ^'^'^* "'' 
 4xe^(reai—Uo keep him so as to hrcome odious to:— i.e. to keep him, and soow\ 
 offence to. For the construction of StSicVou, Kriig. quotes ih^tUaw ^offaviff^v'^ 
 Lys. xiii. 27. rhiv l^iriipov—BC. Thesprotia. 
 
 (6.) ir poffTtr ay tiivuv—' those to whom the duty had been assigned: Cf.^ 
 
 H3 
 
 75andviii.23. Kara irvffTiv—' according as they learnt by inqu iry where 
 
 he was gone: — ie. they regulated their pursuit by the information which they 
 received concerning his movements. Cf. iruo-rets, ch. 5, and cf. Jelf, § 802, i, 
 and 831, a. Kard n &Tropov. The editors generally understand, 
 
 in a great strait, supposing that ri bears the same force as in the expression r\ 
 fifpos, ' aliqmntum: ' a considerable portion: This is, I think, very doubtful, 
 and no examples are given. Thiersch accordingly, and apparently Kriig., 
 would read rh &iropov, — i.e. in his difficulty. But may we not suppose that, 
 like Charles Edward after Culloden, he passed through Tnany hairbreadth 
 escapes, and that n indicates this? — ' in one of his perils: MoXoffauv. 
 
 Their territory was but small, since, according to Scylax, it only contained fifty 
 stades of sea-board, though broader inland. Kara\v<rai. I do not 
 
 think that Am. and others are right in saying that tV 6Sdj/ is to be understood. 
 The word is Ijorrowed from Eastern, or at any rate primitive travelling, where 
 the party, always a sort of caravan, broke up for the night to lodge in a khan 
 or caravanserai ; and the reference is to unsaddling and unloading the animals, 
 &c. Cf. Hom. Od. iv. 28, KaraKva-ofiev wKtas l-mrovs. The word and its 
 cognates are common. After Platc-ea was razed to the ground, they made there 
 a Kwrayuyiov hiaKoffiwv iroSwp trayrdxp KvKKcf) olK-f^fxara ^xov, iii. 68. The 
 analogous Latin word was ' deversorium.' rrjs yvyaiKds. Plut. 
 
 says her name was Phthia. (Ttjiwv. Because, says Kriig., yvjrf) is 
 
 the principal subject in the writer's thought, though not grammatically so. 
 Ka^ 6^6 0-004. * So I have given, for Thuc. uses Kadl(eiu, but never Kaei^ca-eai.' 
 Kriig. € (TT la — because, being the shrine of the household gods, and the 
 
 chief seat of domestic life, it was regarded by the ancients with special venera- 
 tion. Cf. Grote, v. 384. 8r]\o7 Ss 4ffriv. Here we have the 
 simple relative in a dependent clause, where, according to the genius of the 
 Oreek language, we should anticipate a dependent interrogative Sa-ns. ' Optime 
 iGrsece dicitur ol^d tre hs ft, novi te, qui sis ; minus bene vero ovk oUd tre, hs et 
 Rectius ScTty el, vel etiam ris cl.' Elms. Mid. 1086. Kriig., however, pro- 
 duces instances of hs after a negative. Her. ii. 121 ; Eur. Hel. 818. In ch. 
 Ul7, we have the more regular (ppd^ei Bans iffri, cf. Jelf, § 877, 4. 
 lovfc a^joi, as in the parallel case of oH <pi]fjn, the negative passes on to the 
 It'oUowing infinitive. Kriig. cf. ii. 89, iii. 44. avre7Tr€v. 'An 
 application to the Athenians from Admetus for help, was rejected by the advice 
 jof Themistocles.' Sintenis, Plut. 7'hem. 24. Kriig. a<r6€v4(rrfpo5. 
 jOne MS. exhibits this as a correction for aa-deycarepov, and it must surely be 
 jneht. The intention of Them, evidently was to work upon the generosity of 
 jAdmetus, by representing himself, who once was stronger, as now the weaker 
 of the two, and therefore an unfit object for his enmity. The genitive — by one 
 far weaker than he — would suggest an idea of the weakness of Admetus, which, 
 however true, was not likely t^ have been urged by one seeking for his protec- 
 tion against a powerful enemy. lam therefore surprised to see that T. K. A., 
 after Popp., retains aadevfa-repov. avh rod Xaov — 'on a footing of 
 jqvality: Cf. i. 77, ii. 89. el yai is governed, as Popp. points out, by 
 ^hft, implied in d|to7. 
 
 (c.) xpeias riv6 s — • had opposed him in the matter of a reqitest ' or private 
 interest. Some editors supply a preposition, but Kriig. has shown that ivami- 
 
144 
 
 KOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 38.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 oio-eat governs a jrenitive, from Xen. Anah. vii. 6, 5 : apa nh koI VH-'^iu ivavrid- 
 fferai rris oTro7«o7i)s. See Jelf, § 531. He adds that rh belongs to (TuCfcdai, 
 for the human body and its members are mentioned frequently without the 
 article. Plat. Rep. 461 a. This is upon the principle, already explained, of 
 familiarity with the subject spoken of, and is, I think, preferable to the arbitrary 
 supposition of Popp. and GoUer, that the phrase is for is rh rh a&^ia aw^^uQai, 
 with the second article elided for euphony. We too say ' body and goods,' and 
 cf. the German phrase ' mit Blut und Gut.' In addition to the words men- 
 tioned, ch. 8 a, cf. o-irovSas Kvnv passim, and ra(pas voifladai ii. 2, 4. 
 fi€yi(TTov—i.e. among the Molossians. All editors quote Plut. Tkemist. 24: 
 ravTr\p fify'KrTfjv Koi ^i6vt\v trxeSbi/ avamipprryrov riyovp.(va)V Uefflav t&v Mo\o<T(tuv. 
 
 Chapter CXXXVIL— (a.) t^)v hrtpav ddXaffffav. The iEgean. 
 Tf^^-^—lyy land. 'kX^idvZpov. Tenth king of Macedon. 
 
 KOTtt^cpfT oi — ' carried down by the force of the tempest.' Cf. iv. 120, and note, 
 Sheppard's Theophr. Pref. p. li. lid^ov. Refer to ch. 98. tV 
 
 a(T<p6.\fiav — ' the safety required' We should perhaps write, * the only means 
 of safety -consisted in' &c. A*«XP* trXovs yfvnrai — ' till a favourable 
 
 time for sailing arise,' for such is the meaning of -nKovs. So Xen. Anah. v. 9. 
 33: d's aHpiov, 4^y vKovs ^ (on the usage of ftfxp^ with a verb, cf. Jelf, § 
 841, 5), &.va^6iJL€voi. where aee Kriig.'s note. inrofivtiffeffdai 
 
 xdpiv — ' would remember it to him with fitting gratitude.' Popp. quotes Eur. 
 Ale. 299 : vvv TwvS' air6fivrj(rai X'^P**'- Kriig-. however, conjectures that Thuc. 
 \»Tote airofiiixv^ffiffQai, for the future in the text is not Attic. 
 
 {b.) avoffaKe vtras. The verb seems to imply lying out from the land in the 
 open sea. Cf. iii. 7. a, and yLerfdjpovs airoaa\(v(iv, Dem. 1. 22. Kriig., I see, 
 quotes Dem. 1. 22 (121 3, ^4), avayKoiov ^jv iif ayKvpas airo<Ta\€vfiv Tf\v wkto. 
 fifTftipovs. The translation of Nepos is, • in salo navem tenuit in anooris.' 
 idfpdtrfvaf. Portiis' version is ' liberal iter prosequi.' Dale's simply ' r^wanW. 
 But in the many passages where Thucydides uses the word, something of con- 
 tinuous action is ever implied. uire|€/c€tTO — cf. vvf^fdemo i. 89. It 
 was said that property of his to the amount of one hundred talents was con- 
 fiscated at Athens, vcojffii. According to Kriig.'s computation, 
 Olymp. 76|, b.c. 473, but the date is generally given b.c. 465 or 466. He 
 also cf. vfwarrl t^x^^"- i"- S^- See Thiersch, G-r. § 289. 
 
 (e.) ih-hKov T] ypa<pi\. The question concerning the real authorship of this 
 lettfr is, I imagine, the same as that respecting the speeches, which see cli. 
 22. a, though the term ih-i\Kov certainly does look as if Thuc. professed to quote 
 the very words. Remark that Srt here introduces the oratio recta. Cfv. 10; 
 viii. 53; and Jelf, § 802, 6. iv ry a(r<^oA€r. . . iiriKivlvvti- 
 
 This is the common idiom of the neuter adjective with an article standing fori 
 substantive. But it is rather varied, inasmuch as we have two adjectives with 
 one article, which, in accordance with Granville Sharp's canon (ch. 18 a), refer 
 to the same subject ; tr. in that state of things which was secure for me, but 
 perilous for him.' Popp. remarks, 'potuit quidem scribi iv ry a<r<pa\fi i^^ 
 iydo,' but this would have required a repetition of the article in the second 
 clause. wd\iv ^— by a sort of inversion, say the editors, for 
 
 1} irdXiv. But see i. 82, ii. 18. ypd\l/as. This stands thus, because 
 
 mxov rj ypMjyfj must be considered equivalent to ivfffTeiXfv 6 QeniaTOKXris. 
 Popp. Thucydides as frequently falls into an anacoluthon, and writes as if he 
 thought his sentence had been cast into a form different from that which he 
 really gave to it. rijs avaxf^p-ftaews. The question is, does this 
 
 refer to the message sent before the battle of Salamis, informing the king of 
 the pretended intention of the Greeks to escape ; or to the message sent after 
 the battle, warning him to retreat without delay ? The first message, if ever 
 sent, must surely from its disastrous issue have rendered the sender an object 
 of suspicion ; neither under such circumstances could Theraistoeles have de- 
 cliired himself in a state of security {iv rip a(T(paXu) while the king was in a 
 state of peril. The message after the battle must therefore be meant by these 
 words; yet Herod, (viii. no) clearly states that this message was sent from 
 Andros, and not from Salamis. Still, I would rather suppose with Am. that 
 Thucyd. is here guilty of slight oversight, than refer the words to the first 
 message with Popp. and Haack. Thirlwall, vol. ii. p. 430, agrees with 
 Arn. '^po(T€iroii]<raro—' took to himself: rvv ov- 
 
 iiikvffiv. The negative particle so combines with the noun as to make one 
 negative term. See the note on ov-fiiya\a, ch. i, and cf. v ov-Tr^pnelxKris iii. 
 95, ii oi,K.iiov(rla V. 50, and Jelf, § 745, 5. a^y <t>iKiav—foT the 
 
 objective genitive cf. ch. 33, note. 
 
 Chapter CXXXVIII.— (a.) iK4\€v€. This, though the reading of the 
 best MSS., is scarcely defensible, for it is difficult to see how any sense can be 
 given to e/c^Aci/e, which would justify such a variation of tense. This is not so 
 with the other cases where an imperfect is coupled to an aorist, e.g. in Hero- 
 dotus, for there the liveliness of the narration accounts for the imperfect, the 
 subject of the verb being vividly brought forward, and represented as engaged in 
 action. But, as Arn. remarks, this would be altogether out of place in the 
 very calm and sober style of Thucydides. I should therefore prefer reading 
 (Ki\fv(re, but if the imperfect stands, tr. * the king was surprised at his scheme 
 {what passed through his thoughts) and proceeded to bid him,' &c. 
 So-o Wvaro KaT€v6ri<T€^* mastered as much of the language as he could: Bl. 
 says this is a very infrequent use of Karavoeo). I do not myself see that it is 
 unusual to employ the word for such an exercise of the intellect as that implied 
 bere; cf. ch. 126, note a. The exaggeration of the later writers is well illus- 
 trated by the extravagant proficiency in the Persian tongue ascribed by Nepos 
 to Themistocles. 'AXf^dvSpov. Successor of Amyntas the first, 
 
 Either and predecessor of Perdiccas. 
 
 (*.) rod 'EWriviKov. A species of attraction, says Popp., for Kot r^v 
 <WSo V vir€Tid€i avrf, hovXdxr^iv rh "E.\Kr)viK6v. Kriig. makes hov\<i)(Tiiv 
 Gepend upon iKiriha, i.e. {nrerifiei avrcp rov 'E?^r]viKov i\irida SovXdaeiv. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 898 b, who classes this under ' contracted sentences' :—' When an infinitive 
 or particle stands in the same sentence with some other verbum infinitum, the 
 substantive which properly depends upon the infin. or part, is frequently made 
 to depend upon the verbum finitum, so that it is in the case required 
 thereby.' fidKiffra 5e k.t.A..— * but especially from his wisdom 
 
 v:hich he had established by giving ^roof/ lit., froin the by-giving-of-proof^ 
 Ktablished reputation for wisdom. 
 
146 
 
 NOTES OS THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ (Tg^p. ijg.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 (c.) $f$ai6Tara 5^. The particle strengthens the superlative, of. ch. 
 23 b ; tr., ' one who most indisputahly exhibited strength of natural genius: 
 lia(p^p6vria s Ti . The ri here as often is ' aliquantum;—' in no small degree 
 more than any other man remarkahhj deserting to receive admiration: For 
 Baviidtrai active infin., see ch. 132, note h ; Jelf, § 667, 3. is avni—'with 
 
 rcfirence to it; though (pvfffus has gone before ; ef. 22 a. oCt6 
 
 vpofiaOtify K.T.A.— • without having acquired anything by previous studies to con- 
 tribute to it, nor by subsequent studies to add to it/ this administration was the 
 fruit of natural genius, not formed by previous or increased by subsequent 
 study. Tuv re irapaxpVfJ^o, k.t.K — * of what immediate expediency 
 
 required, when the opportunity for counsel was most brief, he was of all men the 
 ablest judge ; and of future events the best conjecturcr, with the most far-reaching 
 view of what was going to happen: This seems to me the best way of taking 
 the sentence, because it best preserves the balance of the clauses, after which 
 Time, was ever straining, though occasionally at the expense of a false or im- 
 perfect antithesis. Kriig. makes twv fxeWSvrwv dependent upon iirl irXuaiov, 
 but if Thuc. meant rwv irapaxr>« ^o be governed by KpdTKTTos yvfifiav, I am 
 nearly sure that he also meant ruv fi^WovroiV to be governed by &pi<TTos 
 €iKa(n^s. The noun fiKaarits is very unusual, and I have therefore rendered it 
 by one which is unusual also ; but why either should be so, is not easy to 
 explain. 
 
 id.) fifTa x^'p"' ixo^—'^^PP^'"' ^^ ^^^'^ ^'^ hand; lit. between his hands. 
 Kriig. cf. Herod, vii. 16. eV x^P*^^" ^X" means the same thing, and is of more 
 frequent occurrence. i^nyv(ra<Teai—' to interpret; an i^vyvr-fis w:is 
 
 one who went over words first, wliich were subsequently repeated by his 
 hearers. The connexion with the primary meaning of ' leading the way,' and 
 the tertiar}' one of ' expounding,' are obvious, and may be easily illustrated by 
 consulting L. and S. Lex. in voce. Kp7vai Uavws oi,K aTr-h\\aKro~ 
 
 ' he was not without the power to pass a competent judgment on: ovk d7nj\Aa/cTo, 
 like ohK &vev, ' non sine,' and many other such phrases, is not the less positive, 
 though purposely qualified in form ; /cpli/ai, a common-sense judgment, was 
 always, says Am., distinguished by the Greeks from full theoretical or practical 
 knowledge. It was obviously shared by a much larger mass of men, and upon 
 this principle, he adds, the people at largo were competent judges of the conduct 
 of their magistrates. See ii. 40, ^^01 Kpivon4v 76 k.t.K fifXervs 
 
 ppaxvr-nri. Am. tr. ' with acquired learning thus scanty; his meaning probab y 
 is correct, but the words might mislead the younger student, as the lit. tr. is, 
 with scantiness or brevity of practice, where fifX^rrj, I think, refers to the 
 preparation usually made by public speakers ; so ' exercitatio,' Cic. de Off. 1. 
 jg^ ouT0(rx«5tcCC«*»' Tcl hiovra— 'to extemporize [devise at a 
 
 momenfs notice) what was wanted: 
 
 (e.) voff'hffas. The collocation is peculiar and emphatic, ' 'twas by diseasi 
 that he died; because the contrary had been reported; cf. Plut. Thm. 31, and 
 Arist. Eq. 83. As early as the time of the latter, the story was prevalent that 
 he died from drinking bidl's blood at a sacrifice, or perhaps a poison so called. 
 Cic. Brutus, c. 1 1, rightly ascribes the legend to a desire ' mortem (ejus) tragice 
 et rhetorice ornare.' Mayurjalau ,ihp Jkprov. The predicate 
 
 is iprov, as in those cases already noticed, ch. 109, 134. The practice ot 
 
 H7 
 
 assigning certain cities to particular persons, or rather the taxes which these 
 cities paid, is one well known, and, as Bl. observes, dates from remote antiquity, 
 vestiges of it being found in Homer, where Agamemnon offers to Achilles, as 
 the price of reconciliation, seven cities, each possessing some peculiar excellence, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 98, Xen. Anab. i. 49. Athenaeus, 534 d, records the cities assigned 
 to Alcibiades, whenever he went abroad, for his tent, &e. ' The custom,' Bl. 
 writes, 'continues to the present times in the east, Athens having been 
 assigned to the Sultana for pin-money, and Jerusalem to the concubines for a 
 similar use.' Mr. Grote says, ' I doubt Dr. A.'s statements about the land-tax 
 rent. I do not think it was a tenth or fifth of the produce of the soil in 
 these districts which was granted to Themistocles, but the portion of regal 
 revenue or tribute levied in them. The Persian kings did not take the trouble 
 to assess and collect the tribute ; they probably left that to the inhabitants 
 themselves, provided the sum total were duly jDaid.' Hist. Gr. iv. 386. 
 avrov governed offra, not ol irpoaijKovTfs. ov yap e'l^i/ explains the 
 
 reason of Kp{><l>a 'Adrjuaiuv. The law is mentioned by Xen. Hdl. 1. vii. 22: 
 Karh Tovrov rhv y6,xou—'6s iffnv iirl to7s Upo(r{>\ois Kal irpoddrais . . . fi^ Ta</)^»/at 
 
 Chapter CXXXIX.— (a.) AaKe^aifiSvioi. The narrative is resumed from 
 ^^- ^'^^- ^ IT poii\eyov— 'warned them* (or publicly declared to them). 
 
 OntheaffairofMegaracf. ch. 67. iTriKaKovvres r^v iirepyaa-iav— 
 
 ' lai/ing to their charge the cultivation of the sacred land, and of that which was un- 
 enclosed: The noun seems nearly equivalent to the simple ipy<KTia,t\io\xg\i there 
 may be some latent force in the preposition ; perhaps—' extending their cultiva- 
 tion over: On the construction, cf. Jelf, § 568. I certainly agree with Goll. 
 cf. ch. 18 a) that the article rrys before aopiarov implies that the land described 
 by it is distinct from ttis Upas 7^5. Goll. may be wrong in supposing that the 
 latter was dedicated to the Eleusinian goddesses, for the distance would certainly 
 be great, but it may have been dedicated in some other way. The ^opicnos was 
 probably so left from a political rather than a religious object, since the con- 
 flicting claims of individuals, if any were allowed to appropriate border land, 
 would be very likely to involve their respective states in warfare. Arn. remarks* 
 that on similar common land the Israelites fed their flocks without disturbance', 
 
 I but when they wanted a piece of ground for a burial-place (a permanent pos- 
 session), a regular sale on the part of the people in occupation was necessary. 
 'ivhf>aTt6ha>v. It has been supposed that allusion is made to the slaves of 
 
 |Aspasia; cf. Arist. ^cAar. 525. rwv acptffrafjievwv. Eemark 
 
 ihe present participle, which implies a process going on—' the slaves as they kent 
 
 I mcemding: 
 
 [h.) ruv reXivraiwv—' ambassadors with an ultimatum; as we should 
 {'^\ "r^" ^'^P'hvvy f'ivai—'the peace to continue; or it may be, ' they 
 
 Y'^shfor^ the existence of the peace; ' which all desire,' or ' is the subject of nego- 
 mtion,' or something similar, implied. yv(l>fias inotovvro. Kriig. 
 
 weU gives the general sense, 'to lay matters before a person for deliberation; 
 \m 80 D., 'proposed the subject for consideration: We may however remark 
 I at the words lit. mean, 'proposed to themselves judgments; i.e. the formation 
 I judgments: then subsequently yiyvSfxcyoi reus yvdpMs is, 'coming to be in 
 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDE9. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 4 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 149 
 
 their Judgments: The younger student wiU notice how well this illustrates 
 the distinction between ytyvStx^vm and gvT« ; the former denotes the process 
 of forming the opinion, the latter only states that persons are of such an 
 opinion. T. K. A. has yty^Sfi^uoi, deciding ; prop. ' becoming, ranging them- 
 selves/ from which I do not see what is to be learnt. <»' 
 lt,fp6r^pa-^for both views of the case: i.e. for and against. The whole 
 phraseology is certainly very intelligible, but Bl. remarks that he only knows 
 one other example, and that an evident imitation of the present passage, D,o 
 Cass., p. 65, ^V h.fx<p6r.pa rah W/xais y.v6t..yai. &ira^-^oncefor all: 
 cf a^ol evi)<TKov<n, Od. xii. ai, and ' semel ' in Latin ; Bentl. Hor. Sat. 11. 8, 24; 
 Jude V. 3 ; Hebrews ix. z-j. ^h^^^ ««^ irpc£(r«r€tv denotes oratorical 
 and administrative ability. Niebuhr, Vortrdg. uher alte Gesch. 11. 13, remarks 
 that it was only in the time of Pericles that war and the forum had a real con- 
 nexion. The old statesmen were of necessity generals, and vice versA. But Demo- 
 sthenes saw no real service in the field ; while on the other hand Iphicrates was 
 a most ineffective speaker in the ecclesia, and Chabrias did not speak at all. 
 
 Chapteb CXL.-(a.) ^xoH-at-^ hold to: from the physical image of a 
 
 thing or person clinging to an object : cf. Eur. Hec. 402, ^ota K^aah ^pv6s, 
 
 thrm rrxT^ Hofuu, cf. viii. 81, Jelf, § 536- F^om this notion of holding on 
 
 to that which is beside you comes the somewhat singular adverbial use of 
 
 4x6fJiepou, • next in order: cf. ix^t^^^oy t^s 'VoUin,s, ii. 96, and Anstotle passim 
 
 Cf. ' conditoris Seleuci retinens.' Tac. A7m. vi. 4^. h^V-' excitement of 
 
 feeling: ' temper: cf. ch. 1 30 b. -' men are not persuaded to undertake a war, and 
 
 actually engage in it, in exactly the same temper: i.e. do not prosecute it with 
 
 the same zeai and excitement which they sbowed when first induced to engage 
 
 in it. On -npia^rovra,, cf. Jelf, § 1S^, '• ^P^' ^^ -^^^ "'-"^-^ ^''T 
 
 just as circumstances cMnge, they change their notions also: t^s ^'J'f"'^'^ 
 
 qucB accideHnt-^\B.\n\y takes in both good and evil accidents, as (Kdip. Ij/r. 
 
 44, and elsewhere. 6f^o7a Ka\ Trapa^Ki^cria-.^ similar and coming 
 
 very near to what I admsed before: rohs h.va-K.iBotx.yov,- those 
 
 who allow themelves to be persuaded: ro7s Koiurj B6^acriP ^oTjtfo^ 
 
 Kr\—^to come to the rescue of the common resolves: i.e. when there is any dim- 
 
 culty in carrying them out, or when their policy is assailed-' or neither {le. not 
 
 either), should you even succeed, to claim a share in th^ wisdom whwh devm 
 
 7h ) ivtix^rai, tLS in ch. 124 b.-' tlie incidents to which circumstances giw 
 rise are wont to take a course which can be as little determined {IfxaBm, not to ^ 
 mastered by study) as the schemes of men: I do not like to translate, as all tn 
 editors do, ^vfx<t>op&s bv results, for the notion of a fixed result is the one mos 
 entirely foreign to the word, yet it is difficult to do without it ; ax ^v,.^pcd t« 
 irpaytJidrwy are the * indeterminate incidents which may be expected to occur in 
 a course of human transactions.' The question is, what does ydp give the reason 
 for? GoU. supposes that it contains the reason why those who rashly cnacg 
 their mind, even should things turn out well, ought not to claim for themsei 
 the praise of prudence. But it is more consonant with the general course 
 the argument, and the tone of thought, to say, as Poppo, that W g»^'' ^. 
 reason why even well-planned schemes sometimes fail of meeting with a 
 
 cessful issue. That this refei^ rather to what is understood than expressed, 
 will not be any difficulty to one familiar with the style of Thucydides. 
 itSirep Kal — ' which is the reason too why we are wont to lay at Fortune's door 
 all that chances to fall out contrary to calculation: alnacrdai may not 
 
 have the grave sense of accuse, as Bl. remarks, still I hold that it in some 
 measure partakes of such a sense ; just as we are always saying * to blame 
 Fortune: 
 
 (c.) SiKas ^i56yai Ka\ 5€xe<r0at. The usual terms to denote a legal 
 settlement, though, as Popp. points out, it is clear, from ch. 28 and v. 79, that 
 arbitration by some friendly city, if other means failed, is included in the for- 
 mula. ^X^*" & ^x^H-^^' A clear recognition in ancient diplomacy of 
 the principle of * uti possidetis,' or * status quo ante.' See also iv. 65. 
 xal iTiTdffffovTfs — 'and now they come forward in the character of persons 
 dictaiing: &c. Bl. quotes Trcurdfieyos iirircuraf, give your orders when you are our 
 master, but not before (Theoc. Id. xv. 90). Hvep is, according to Popp., the 
 object of xpoUxoyrai — ' which they especially hold forth as a pretext: and this 
 certainly seems most natural, the construction being that sort of attraction found 
 in such sentences as 6 iiy^p ty ola-da '6ri ^\6€y. Kriig. denies that such attrac- 
 tion is found before a particle which denotes a condition, as cl here, and therefore 
 makes 2ircp the subject of /caOatp 606 117. /utj5' iy vfiiy atrois viroKiir'na-Oe 
 — * mr leave behind in your own minds a r&proach: i.e. nor allow any feeling of 
 self-reproach to linger in your minds. 
 
 {d.) rh fipaxv ri tovto — 'this little trifle, as they call it, involves the 
 whole confirmation and test of your purpose: or ' carries with it the whole con- 
 firming and testing of your resolution: We seem to have here a sort of tiffrepoy 
 vpSrepoy, as the grammarians call it, inasmuch as the ' confirmation' must follow 
 the ' testing,' and not vice versA. This is, I think, more correct than to say, 
 with Bl., that ' fiffiaiuanv koI ireipay is an hendiadys to signify proof or triaL' 
 iwiTaxB-fiffiffde — i.e. rovro iTiTaxOvc^Tai v/uy. Our own ordinary idiom coin- 
 cides — 'ye will be ordered sotne greater thing: Cf. ii. 7 ; on iX\o ri, Jelf, § 545. 
 3, and 548 e, axiax vpiffifieyoi — * having m£t it with decided refusal: 
 
 The ar^, I apprehend, exerts the same force as in a-K6<paffis, when lexically 
 opposed to Kara<pa<Tis, where, as it is well known, the prep, denotes the separa- 
 tion in thought of the subject from the predicate. We may mention, in pass- 
 ing, that, from not knowing this, some editors have strangely erred in their 
 interpretation of fi€fi^ofi4ywy tt.y KaTa<pai'riv, (Ed. Tyr. 503. Compare airo^a- 
 VKowra, ib. 484. airh tov t(rov k.t.X. — * to treat you 7nore upon a 
 
 ground of equality ; i.e. to come here as equals, and not as entitled to dictate 
 {iriT&fftrorres). Editions vary about kotowt^o-outc and KaTcurT-fiffeTf, of which 
 the former, which has also most MS. authority, is adopted by Bekker, BL, and 
 Kriig., the latter by Goll. and Poppo. The common reading, KaTcuTT-fiarjrf, 
 which would be a soloecism, seems to point to KarcuTri)<raiT€, of which Bl. re- 
 marks, ♦ it may be rendered *' planum ipsis efficietis," as infra, ii. 42, rr/y 
 fvKoyicw ^popfpav KoBwris: 
 
 Chapter CXLI.— (a.) avrSBev. D. tr. ♦ henceforth ; ' Pop. and Kriig., ' on 
 these grounds: I should rather be inclined to render, 'forthwith: ' at once: ' on 
 the spot: as more consentaneous with the etymology and common use of the word. 
 
 it 
 
150 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 5iavo^07jT€ — ^ make up your minds* usually constructed •with an infinitive. 
 But that it should here be also followed by €T|okt€s is defensible upon tho ground 
 that it follows the analogy of yiyvuaKu^ ivdvixov/xai K.r.\. Kriig. quotes <ppov. 
 rl((ff Eur. Hte. 256, fi^ yiyvcixTKoir ifioi^ oi robs <f>i\ovs ^Xdirrovrfs ov (Ppoini- 
 ^ere. In this case, however, I regard ^Xairrovrfs as agreeing with the subject 
 of the verb in the usual way : * who^ when you injure your friends, take no thought 
 upon the 'matter.* Kriig. seems to forget that (ppovri^o) has an intransitive force 
 and properly means, ' to be in a state of anxiety.' ^vvarai— 
 
 * amounts to the same enslavement.* On this use of Svvafiai, cf. L. and S. Lex. 
 and iii. 46. BlKaiucrts. A Thucyd. word, according to Dion, iii. 
 
 82, iv. 86. Kriig. translates ' a claim,' because originally supposed to be founded 
 on justice. S/xolcoy. I agree with Kriig. that controversy is here 
 
 unnecessary. The word must be masculine. irph S/ktjj — ' btfore an 
 
 attempt at Judicial arrangement* ^iriraffaofxdvrt — ' coming in the 
 
 shape of a command* 
 
 (b.) TO, 8^ rov TToXffiov K.r.X. — * with respect to what is required for 
 carrying on the war, and the resources of both parties, that we shall not find our 
 means the feebler, I would that yo^i, should feel assured, by hearing them in detail! 
 A very intelligible and pardonable inaccuracy of expression, for no confusion can 
 arise, though OKr^cWo-Tcpa is grammatically referred to twv €Kar4pois virapx6vrwv. 
 avrovpyol — * living by their own labour.' We must remember that at Athens 
 all manual labour and artisan's work was performed by slaves. In Sparta, 
 agriculture was probably the office of the Helots. Am. has an instructive note, 
 in which he refers to Xen. (Economic, v. 4, revs fxhv airrovpyovs 5ia r&v x«pwv 
 yvixvd^ovffa {rj yrj) Iffxvv airrois irpoa-TiOriffi. « The number of slaves in Laconia/ 
 he adds, ' was a striking exception to the rest of Peloponnesus. Herod, vi. 137, 
 ▼iii. 137; Athen. vi. 83 ; Juv. Sat. xiv. 168.' He also makes an apposite re- 
 ference to the ancient Koman republican heroes, who, as is well known, tilled 
 their own land. See on the subject, Ar. Pol. n. 8, 9. fipax^os—'for a brief 
 time.* i-Kupcpetv — sc. iro\4^iovs. Their poverty was the cause why they 
 
 made no wars, and the making no wars was the cause of their inexperience. 
 
 {c.) ir\r}povvr€s. We must, with Pop. and Kriig,, again supply ToAAcufu 
 iKirefxtreiy bvyayrcu. iiri> ruv avr&v — n. b. not aurSiv, but here ra atnwv, 
 
 their own property. Arnold (quoted by K.) says, that elsewhere Thuc. prefers 
 ff<p€repuv — which seems true, ii. 20. rrepiovffla t — ' stock laid by' i.e. 
 
 that which is over and above our daily wants. See ch. 2 b. Pericles doubtless 
 meant that the treasures of the Acropolis and their other surplus stores should 
 recur to the recollection of his hearers. /Sfoioi ii<r<popa I — ' compulsori/ 
 
 contributions.* Cf. ch. 121. ity4xov<riv^uphold. Cf. Soph. JJ. 212. 
 
 {d.) ffdfxao-i fj xp'hfJ^afft — * in person than in purse.* rh fxey iriffriv. 
 The Schol. tells us to place a comma at fx4y, and to explain t^ tuv euyLarmv, 
 (which seems right,) 'having confidence about the one that it may even escape the 
 peril, but not feeling security about the other (lit. the other secure) that it will not 
 ere that be spent;' lit. * that they shall not spend it before' they got out of tho 
 danger. 
 
 (e.) fj.^ irphs SfjLotay. The junior student will remark that we have fih b^re 
 instead of ovk, on account of the hypothetical nature of the clause, if it be not 
 an homogeneous one. Cf. rh fi^ /iudwScs, ch. 22 d, and Jelf, § 904. 3. 
 
 Chap. 1 42.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 151 
 
 trav—* since;* but, says Kriig., the * Zeitbegriff,' i.e. the ' notion of lime,' has 
 Dot vanished. This is well illustrated by our own word when, which often 
 retains part of the temporal notion, even when signifying ' since.' 
 fiitTf . . . T€, as often, ' nee . . . et.* The negative affects both clauses. 
 &ov\fvTT]pl(f)—' council-board (or chamher)' This is again a tacit contrast 
 with the state of things among the Athenians, who had a centralized admini- 
 stration, and were not compelled to consult their allies when occasions for 
 action arose. rh €<p' kavrdv. This is the reading of the best and 
 
 most numerous MSS., and is well supported by Kriig. from Porson, Eurip. 
 Orest. 1338, (Twe-riQ' Zaov ye roxrn iix4, and rh iirl a<pas flvai, iv. 28. Tr. 
 • what concerns hiviself personally.' A few MSS. read rh i(p' lavrwv, with which 
 we may cf. i. i'j,rh 4<p' eavruv. But then there is no c/cao-Tos in that passage. 
 (/•) fp^ ^ 'ipai. The verb here, as often, denotes an extravagant and useless 
 expenditure. xp^^^oi- ^vvi6vr€ 5 — ' being long in coming together.* 
 
 4v $pax€^ H-opicp — sc. xpf^vov, understood from xp^^^oi. This, the common and 
 obvious way of taking the passage, is, I think, better than Kriig. 's, who supplies 
 rris ivy6Sov fr. ^vvi6yr€s. The antithesis is between the length of the time spent 
 in getting the council together, and the very short time during which at best 
 they can deliberate ; to this is appended another antithetical notion, i.e. the 
 greater amount of time which they spend upon their own interests. But does 
 7(fi Tr\4oyi mean, the greater part of that time which they have for deliberation; 
 or, the greater part of their time during which they are unable to deliberate ? 
 trapk r^v eavrov a/x4K€iay. Arn. cleverly adduces the English vulgarism, 
 alotig of his own neglect — i.e. owing to his own neglect. The cases are probably 
 parallel, though wo still require an explanation of the way in which this causal 
 force of the prep, arises. It may be that the idea of close proximity implies that 
 of dependence. Arn. quotes Dem. PhU. i, p. 43, ovZe yap auras irapa r^]v avrov 
 fxifiTiv roaavrov iTrrjv^vraij to which add i Cor. xii. 15, 16. Cf. L. and 
 S. Lex., and note on Trapa 7ro\i5, ch. 29 c. Cf. Jelf, § 67, iii. 3 e. 
 vvep e avrov. It certainly seems to me that, according to the sense, &\\o5 
 becomes the principal subject, and that therefore we may tr. that others as well 
 care to look out for their own ititerest. If, however, it be necessary to refer 
 (avrov to the strict grammatical subject, we must, with Kriig., tr. in sue loco, 
 'tn his stead.' &ar€ ry auT&J K.r.K. — 'owing to this same notion 
 
 {i.e. of personal interest) entertained iudimdually by all' The Ma is intro- 
 duced because, though all do it, they do it each separately for their private in- 
 terest. To tStqt is opposed adp6oyy ' collectively ruined.' 
 
 Chapter CXLII. — (a.) fi4yi(Trav Se — 'but what is of most importance.* 
 iirug. cf Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 7 : irpwrov koI ix4yi<Trov oi de&v bpKoi rffias KwKvovffiv. 
 See Jelf, 580, 4. <rxo\^—^pad4(i)5i Schol.; (sgre, Kriig. So we say, 
 
 ' / should be slow to do^ it.' And Shakspeare, ' I'll trust by leisure him who 
 mocks me once.' KuKva-avrai. Kriig. considers this the only instance 
 
 where the fut. med. of this verb stands for a passive. Upon the general question 
 of such futures, see i. 68, c. Tr. ' they will bring difficulties upon themselves* 
 ov fifpfToi — 'the opportunities of war wait for 710 man,' in tho sense of the 
 proverb about 'time and tide.' Cf. Arist. Ach. 1620, and Jelf, § 364 a. 
 t^^nro) dtoif ' the gods are longsuffcring' The orators probably imitated this 
 
 ^ 
 
152 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 43.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 153 
 
 
 usage in such passages as those quoted by Kriig., e.g. Dem.iv. 37, olr&virpayiJLd. 
 T(DV Kaipol oh fi(vov<nv. oifSt — ne quidem. Thuc. seems to refer to the 
 
 threat of the Corinthians, ^iriTctx'^^M^* "^V X^P?» ch. izz. It is possible that a 
 report of their proposed scheme may have reached Pericles ; or Thuc. may be 
 merely answering himself. r^v fikv ykp xa^^ireJi/ k.t.K. The diffi- 
 
 culty here does not, I think, so much arise as Am. supposes, from not seeing 
 that -kSKiv is the ace. after irapaaKfida-aardai, as from foiling to perceive that it 
 stands in apposition to, and is an epexegesis of, the primary predicate rr)v 
 4inr(lxi<rtv. Tr. '/or the former (sc, ^TnTflxiciv) it is hard even in peace to esta- 
 blish in the shape of an equally matched city' i.e. a city which shall be an equal 
 match for Athens. Kriig. suggests that iirmixt^ffiv may be the subject of irapa- 
 ffKfvdiraxrdai ; in this case tr. ' that any process of fortification could ever esta- 
 blish,' &c. ^irou 5^ — * surely then we may assume,' &c. 
 ovT€iriTCT€(xto"Aif»'a>»'. Most editors assert that here the passive stands for 
 the middle, and that very unusually. I do not see why the participle should 
 not be a regular passive — when we on our part have been well fortified in their 
 territory, i.e. in the possession of well-fortified places. So our military writers 
 might say — well entrenched in the place. This is surely confirmed hy^r^ixio-OTiffav, 
 ch. 93 d. ' Thucyd. is here distinguishing between two sorts of ^TriTflxiffis, 
 the one by founding a city {4TroiKi(fiv, vii. 27) in the neighbourhood of Athens, 
 strong enough to be a check upon her power (iii. 9), the other by erecting forts 
 in Attica as strongholds,' Am. Of the former, Megara, founded by the Dorians 
 as a check on Athens, is an instance ; as also is Heracleia, cf. iii. 92. The 
 latter scheme was carried out by the fortification of Deceleia. <^oj3t;- 
 Brjvai — *to be afraid of T. K. A. says its usual meaning is to fear. As 
 ipo$(w is to terrify, a little consideration will show the cause of the varieties of 
 meaning found in the active and passive voices. 
 
 (b.) ippovpiov — • a fortified place,' as opposed to ir6Kiv iLtn-iwaXov. 
 avrofMoXias — * by the facilities which it would afford for desertion.' See vii. 27. 
 The slaves are principally referred to. Similar complaints are found in Aristo- 
 phanes. ^TiTetx^C*t»'i9 governed by the following inf. kwXvuv — 'prevent 
 us from constructing an ivirelx^rfxa against them' — cf. Jelf, § 664. vKtov 
 yap K.r.K. Though it is sufficiently obvious, most editors point out that toD 
 Karh yrjy depends upon ifurapias, and iixneipias upon ir\€ov — ' we have more 
 experience of land service from our serving on board ship, than they have ex- 
 perience in nautical matters from their service on land* 
 
 (c.) ohi\ yh,p 6fjif7s — * for neither have you, though practising it ever since 
 the period directly following the Median invasion, as yet brought it to perfection.' 
 iaffdfjLfvoi. Passivo sensu. Cf. supra, (a.) Cf. Eur. Jph. Aul. 331, ovx^ 
 Zfivi: rhv ifihv oiKftp oIkov ovk 4dffofiai; For the fact, see i. 80, 121. 
 
 (d.) iv Ty ft9j (itXirSivri. This is a good instance of the extension to the 
 participle of that idiom which makes a neuter adjective with an article equiva- 
 lent to a noun. Owing to the use of participial substantives in our language 
 we can easily translate such phrases — owing to their not practising. See iii. 48, 
 4v Ty TotySc a^iovvri, and Jelf, 436 y. rh Se vavTiK6v K.r.K.— 'for 
 
 nautical skill is as much the work of art as anything else, and does not admit of 
 being practised as a mere bye-work when occa.sion happens, nay, it rather admits 
 of nothing else being engaged in as a bye-work beside itself — &<XTrfp koX &Wo is said 
 
 to be identical with flirfp Hwo. Perhaps it is a little less strong. 
 
 iripfpyov — a work done alongside of, or contemporaneously with, another (Ger. 
 
 Nebensache). C{. iy irapepycpy vi. 69; yiyviffdai is governed by ivhix^Tai 
 
 gubaud. 
 
 Chapter CXLIII. — {a.) Ae\<poi5. The adverbial dative is not uncommon, 
 as in the case of Mapaduviy but £ie\<pois without iv is seldom found. Perhaps 
 the position of 'OKvuiriaa-tv occasioned and justifies it. viroXa^itv — ' clam 
 
 mhducere.' See ch. 1 2 1 . t <J 5 c— as the Schol. explains, for the full sentence, 
 
 ri avrnriXovs Vfias ainovs fifra ruv fifToiKcov thai avro75. Cf. Eur. Ale. 506. 
 Kv^fpvf} T as— ' native Athenian citizens for steersmen' 'A^viiyoi more importance 
 in ancient vessels of war even than in our own, for the success of the various 
 manoeuvres employed in action must have materially depended upon their 
 management. vtr-npeala is the * abstractum pro concreto,' the 
 
 remainder of our crews; or, as we might say, 'the manning of our vessels.' 
 Krug. thinks the word is exclusive of the iiri^drcu. In its narrowest seuse it 
 vould, as its etymology imports, be confined to the oarsmen. 
 
 {b.)4'irlr^ KivSvv y— ' to their risk,' as we use the preposition in such phrases 
 &s—to their discredit, i.e. importing the result to which any action tends. Or 
 it may be — ' ovtr and above the risk.' I prefer either of these to the interpretation 
 of the edd. 'in face of the danger,' D., and similarly 'bei der Gefahr,' Kriig.; 
 ' ob impendens periculum,' or ' utpericulum adeant' Pop. t^ivy^iv. 
 
 The word importing banishment is used, for most of these men would naturally 
 belong to the subject states of Athens, and so be subject to sentence of q\xX.- 
 la^ry- M«Tat T^s Tfi<T(Tovo5 iXirldos — ' siding with the inferior 
 
 hope' i.e. with the party whose hope of success was inferior. ovk 
 
 awh rod Xffov — 'other advantages not upon an equal scale,' i.e. upon a very 
 much greater scale than the enemy. See these enumerated, ii. 13. ijvrf. 
 
 Cf. Ar. Iian(B, 1463, Kriig. ovKtri iK rov dfiolov—'it will be no 
 
 longer the same thing.' Cf. with Kriig. ii. 44, iii. 32, iv. 10. a/iaxct. 
 
 So all the MSS. but one, which has o/^axt. Cf. Blomf. ad P. V. Gloss, v. 216, 
 and Ellendt, ikr. /So/jA. voce dmT€i. Kar* Ijirfipov, This refers to 
 
 their possessions in Asia Minor and Thrace. 
 
 (c.) €i yap ^ij,€v. So we, • if we were,' an ordinary employment of the im- 
 perfect in hypothetical propositions. rovro v — i. e. the being islanders. 
 ^lavonecvras—'havitig disposed ourselves in thought,* i.e. having brought 
 ourselves to the state of mind. Cf. ch. 18 b. q t)c Us— without the article, 
 hecause, says Kriig., only some houses were in a position to be taken. But 
 inay it not fall under the head of ' familiar mention,' as in the phrase ' house 
 and home V Cf. Matt. xix. 29, koX iras Bans a<p7iK(v o'lKias K.r.\., and in the next 
 ch. iy6p(f Kol Kin^ffi xpV<r6at. '66 ev iax^o/jLe v—' the source of our 
 strength,' i.e. in men, ships, and money. 
 
 (d.) Tjffvxdaovcri — 'they will not keep quiet,* i.e. there will be a revolu- 
 tiunary movement. Kriig. says, after Popp., ' treu bleiben,' remain true to our 
 o^jlegiance, which is not the special aspect of the idea presented by the word. 
 o^O(|>uports_« ^^ake our wail; properly applied to the lamentation of females, 
 ^<i here, therefore, the word insinuates an argument against the eflfeminate 
 I cowardice of such a course. oUiuy—cL supra, last note. For the 
 
154 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 1 46.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 155 
 
 sentiment, of. rii. 77, 7. avrohs ^i^Zffai. These words should be 
 
 taken together, bum with t/mtr own hands. tovtwv ys eVeica— 
 
 *for the 7nattir of these,' or 'for the sake of these at any rate' 
 
 Chapteh CXLIV. — {a.) is iKirl^a — ' tending to a hope' ' that go to make 
 np a hope' of. is airdSei^iv, ii. 13. id4\7}T€. Popp. cf. iv. 104, ii. 
 
 94. fiov\€(Tdai /X17, &e. It has been supposed that the words exhibit an inver- 
 sion for fJL^ i6€\TiTf, but I prefer to tr. ' if you consent to forbear making 
 fresh acquisitions of dominion while engaged in warfare.' The junior student 
 will do well to notice, as in eh. 139, how strongly this passage confirms the 
 distinction between Qi\u) and iSouAo/iat, for here f^cArjre, so far from denoting 
 a wishy implies a constraint put upon the natural wish. The Schol. explains 
 aiViTT€TOi '2,iKf\iav koX ^iToXlav ^s itredvfjiovv Kparriffai. The account of the 
 fatal expedition to Sicily (books vi. and vii.) is the best commentary on the 
 wortls, and an entire confirmation of the policy of Pericles, a policy Aristo- 
 phanes has so succinctly expressed : — 
 
 T^v yriv OTOV voixiffwcri r^v ruv jroKfixiuv 
 
 flyai ^(pfrfpav, ttjv 5( (r(p€T4pav ruv iroKe/JLluv • 
 
 •jrSpov Be ras vavs, airopiay Se rhv vSpov. 
 
 RancBf 1463-65 (ed. Bergk). 
 
 itpoarideaQa i — ' bring upon yo ur own heads additional perils.' ir€(p6$rifiai, 
 * like SfSoiKa, often has the meaning of a present. So iv. 114, vi. 34, Plat. 
 Crat. 403 b.' So T. K. A. after Kriig. But it is perhaps as well to indicate 
 a shade of difference in the meaning. Tr. ' what I have been and am afraid of 
 is,' &c. ras oiKeias. The possessive adjective, accompanied by a 
 
 genitive denoting possession — a very emphatic formula. Editors quote ras 
 iSlas avrSiv ■trpoa6Sovs, Dem. 
 
 (b.) iv iAAy \6y<t). Cf. ii. 13, and 61. M 67 apeas, an accusa- 
 
 tive (as below Th,s vdKfis), stands, because the primary notion in the speaker's 
 mind, even before Sri. It is, therefore, to be rendered, And as regards tk 
 Megarians. ^€vr}\aalas. Arnold assigns two motives for the existence 
 
 of these ^fVTj\a<riat or ' alien acts' at Sparta — first, to preserve intact the Dorian 
 type of character and principles ; second, to prevent the formation, within the 
 bosom of the state, of a wealthy and mercantile alien body. The junior student 
 should consult Miiller, Dor. n, p. 4, note. Miiller remarks that ^fVTjAaflrlo was 
 only practised against tribes of different usages, particularly lonians and Athe- 
 nians. Philosophers, such as Anacharsis the Scythian, were willingly ad- 
 mitted ; other persons were excluded ; there were fixed regulations concerninj 
 the time and manner of admitting foreigners, and hence the earlier writers, 
 Thucydides and Xenophon, speak of ^em^Kaalai in the plural number. See for 
 further information the authorities collected by C. F. Hermann, Pol. Antiq. &'^- 
 § a8, I. KwAjJci. Hermann understands ri as the subject of this verb, 
 
 making iK€7yo and r6Sf accusatives after it. But it is simpler with the majonty 
 of editors to suppose that icwAiJci is here impersonal — tr. * for there is nothing i^i 
 the treaty to prevent either one or the othT ' — and Kriig. supports tliis view by 
 quoting Ar. Aves, 463, %v dia/j-dmiv «u Ku\vft. Ixo*"*"*^""*-^* ^° 
 
 capacity of allies. ia-Tr€i<rdfi(ea refers to the thirty y^ars 
 
 truce. i.iroBwffi k.t.X. Tr. ' when they also grant to their allies 
 
 not to be independent after a fashion which suits themselves, the Laccdcemonians ;' 
 implying that the boasted independence of the allies of Sparta was nominal 
 rather than real, for that as a matter of fact they were compelled to accommodate 
 their institutions to the Spartan taste. See i. 19, kut' 6\iyapxiav Sk <r<pi(riv 
 ainois imrrjSeioDS (hrws voKlTcvaaxri, and cf. i. 76, v. 81, 82. avTo7s 
 
 kKdffTOis, sc. aTToSwai, 'permit each of them severally.' Kriig. would readauroty 
 kdffTovs, but I think unnecessarily. idf\ofjL€y—c{. supr. this ch. 
 
 note a. &p^onev. dpxofievovs. Why are the voices varied ? 
 
 Perhaps the first may mean, we will not commence the war ; the second, if they 
 take upon themselves to make war, if they allow themselves to be led into a war. 
 T. K. A. writes, ' Kriig. makes &pxf(Jdai ttoA. = to commence hostilities with 
 the intention of prosecuting them vigorously.' I cannot see the rationale of 
 this, nor do I think Kriig. says so, for his expression is, ' Wenn sie sich in 
 den Krieg einlassen,' an expression which is the proper German equivalent for 
 the middle voice, and much more nearly agrees with what I had given as the 
 meaning, quite independently of what others have written. 
 
 (c.) Sex'i'M^^o — sc. iroKfixflv. ^a-ffov iyKeiffOfiivovs — * we shall 
 
 find the enemy likely to be less vigorous (or urgent) in their assault upon us.' 
 vepiyiyvovrai — ' co7ne round as results.' Cf. supra, ch. 32 c. Kriig. cf. ii. 39, 
 and Dem. 3. 12, rovrov fx6vov irepiyiyvecrBai ^iWovros. The lit. meaning of the 
 word has reference to what remains over and above, after any action. Cf. 
 Kipiovciav, ch. 2 b. and 141 c. The infinitive etScVat must be again supplied 
 after Kivdvvwv. 
 
 {d.) 01 yovv varfpt s — ' our sires at any rate.' On the illustrative and in- 
 ferential force of the compound ye-ovv, cf. supra ch. 2 e. 6piJni>fi€voi 
 — ' not starting froQu such great resources' T. K. A. quotes with approbation 
 from an American ed. this remark, ' dpfxcifievoi happily expresses the eagerness 
 and ardour with which Pericles represents their Grecian ancestors as rushing 
 to battle.' But, in the first place, 6pfid^fx€voi here applies primarily to them- 
 selves, and not to their ancestors ; and, secondly, the word in such collocations 
 comes to be quite a technical one (cf. Xen. Anab. passim), and is used in cases 
 where no such eagerness, &c., can be connoted by it. yvd}p.ri k.t.K. — 
 ' hy policy more than by luck, and with greater courage than power,' the datives 
 are instrumental, Jelf, 603. is rdhe—'up to the present pitch: Popp. cf. 
 VI. 18, is TttSe ^pav avrd. We must explain avrd grammatically by ra imdpxovra. 
 
 ^dirfffdai—* left behind,' i.e. in the race of glory. Cf. \enro^t4vr)v twi/ j/C?/, 
 i. 10. 
 
 Chapter CXLV. — (a.) ovBkv K€\€v6fx€voi iroiija'fiv — 'that they would 
 do nothing tipon compulsion (or dictation).' Bl. quotes imitations from Dion. 
 ^^^' ^*i i<yv Kal bfxola. See note upon iirL rfj ftn? Koi Sfiola, supra, 
 
 *'"• *7 ^' ovKiri i-TTpfirfievovTo. For, as Popp. reminds us, 
 
 ^elesippus, mentioned ii. 12, was only a herald. 
 
 Chapteb CXLVI. — (a.) Air la i — * crimina' charges which they brought 
 (fgaimt each other, cf. cuTiai, ch. 23, in fin. dia^popai—' differences,' 
 
 causes of quarrel. aKrjpvKTus p. iv—' without, indeed, as yet employ- 
 
 
iS6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 2.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 157 
 
 irtg heralds (whose services were required in all transactions after an open 
 declaration of war), but not without feelings of distrust.* BL quotes ' Bellum 
 indictum, tacitse induciae quietum animum tenuere/ Liv. ii. 18. 
 ivyxv(f^s, properly ' a confounding,* hence 'a breaking up* * arupture* Kriig. 
 appositely quotes Plat. Rep. 379 e, tttiv rwv bpKuv koI fftrovSuv arvyxvffiu V <5 
 Uiv^apos ffvvix^iv, where the word aptly denotes the confusion caused by the 
 treachery of Pandarus. It occurs again v. 26. 
 
 BOOK II. 
 
 Chapter I. — "h-px^Tai. The war began, strictly speaking, according to 
 Tlmcydides' view, with the attack on Platsea, in the month Munychion, B.C. 
 431, the thirty years' truce having been made in the same month, b.c. 445. 
 The revolt of Potidaea took place about Midsummer, b.c. 432. Clinton. 
 A/)xeTat b irSAffws ivdfySe ^5tj seems to have passed into a proverbial expres- 
 sion. Cf. Lucian, Paeudomant. § 8, ii. 215, ed. Hemsterh. Aul. Grellius, 
 Noct. Att. xvii. xxi. 16, says, 'cceptum est circa annum ierk post conditam 
 Komam, trecentesimum vicesimum tertium.* ^KrjpvKrel. Cf. lib. 
 
 i. 146, where he uses the form aKripvKrcos. For the termination rtl or ri, see 
 Ivruger ad loc, and Jelf, § 324 j8, Kriiger reads rsl with Hudson and 
 Duker, and says only one bad MS. has ri. Goller has ri, and Jelf says, * when 
 the T does not belong to the root, as in the case of verbal adjectives, e.g, 
 aKXavri and aK\av<rrl, aKfxrrrif &c., the ending of the modal adverb is in i,* 
 Baaer thinks the termination in as is the Tnore forcible, as implying an im- 
 placable and internecine war — ir6\^ixos hdipuKros. In time of actual war those 
 \rho passed the borders took a herald with them. This was not necessary now, 
 but their intercourse was restricted and mistrustful. Grote, vi. 151. 
 Karaffrdvrfs — * when once engaged in the war* Cf. c. 9, 13, 65, 75, 78, not. ad 
 i. I, iii. 69, and Jelf, 530, a. K. compares i. 49, 2, Karaardvres ifxdxomo. 
 Karh dfpos Koi x^^f^^^^' GrTote (vi. 153) considers that the bisection 
 of the Thucydidean year into 64pos and x*'A**^'' is marked by the equinoxes ; 
 and that consequently his summer and winter are eeich half a year, comparing 
 V. 20, cvpija-ei i^ Tifjuaeias knaripov rod iuiaxnov tV ^"ovafjiiv exotnos K.r.\. 
 But H. Stephens had already remarked that this did not necessarily imply an 
 equd division, * sed ut tota sestas sit una dimidia pars, tota hyems sit altera ;* 
 Stpos therefore will be ' the season for military operations.' It is plain from 
 Csesar, B. G. ii. 2, that aestas had the same modified signification in Latin. 
 Poppo and Kriiger consider that the winter began with the month Maemacterion, 
 aud ended with Elaphebolion, leaving eight months for active warfare. 
 
 Chapter II. — ydp refers to Hpx^rat in chap. i. K. and P. ry JJ^ Trifxirrtp 
 Kol SfKciry. Cf. Xen. Hellen. ii. 3. 10, where he gives the names of all the 
 ''phori eponymi of Sparta for the first twenty-eight years of the war. 
 '^'^ rpiaKovrovnis (Tvovhal. Cf. adi. 115. Xpvai^os. Cf. iv. 133. 
 
 f his was the priestess through whose carelessness the Heraeum was accidentally 
 hurnt, in the ninth year of the war. These priestesses of the Argive Juno were 
 called ^piaib^s, i(p<i}fi4vT}s K.r.\. — * in the forty-eighth gear of her 
 
 consecration.* Irt SiJo fxrjyas &pxovros — ^ having still two months 
 
 io be archon* It appears from Ideler and others that the Athenian archons 
 entered on their office in the commencement of the month Hecatombaeon. If 
 80, and the reading be correct (and we ought not rather to read 8' for Ho, i.e. 
 four months instead of two), the attack on Plataea was made towards the close 
 
158 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book IL | Chap. 2.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 159 
 
 of March, b.c. 43 i, i.e. in the month Munychion. Kriiger would carry it back to 
 January. irpocriroiTia-a i — ' adjtm^ere,' P. * to make over {i. e. 
 
 restore) to the Boeotian league.* Cf. i. 55, t^" KtpKvpau irpo(nroi-fi<T€iav. 
 &fjLa ^pi a.pxotx4v(i). Cf. Jelf, 699, 2. BoiwTapxovpTfs. Cf. iv. 
 
 92, V. 37. The Bceotarchs appear to have been thirteen in number, two of 
 whom were chosen from Thebes. They were the military heads of the Boeotian 
 confederacy, chosen by the different states. When engaged in military service 
 they formed a council of war, the president being one of the two Theban 
 Bceotarchs, who commanded alternately. Cf. Smith, Diet, of Ant. s. v. 
 wepl vpurov Zirvov. Cf. for this measurement of time, Soph. Aj. 278. 
 5i* Evpvfjidxov Tov Afovr idBov. Herodotus, vii. 233, mentions Leontiades 
 as commanding the Boeotians at Thermopylae. He was the * arch tmitor ' who 
 went over to Xerxes, and received the royal brand. Sri eaono 6 
 
 v6X€ixo5. For the optative in the oratio obliqua, see Jelf, 885, 3. r^v 
 
 UKdraiav . See separate note at end of present chapter. tn 
 
 4v cip^yp, and moreover during the time of a religious festival. Cf. iii. 56, 
 in the apology of the Platseans, ^v ffirop^ais koI irpo(r4ri Upofx-qvia. Cf. Duker 
 ad loc., where however Upofir^via cannot be equivalent to povfir^yla, as we hear 
 c. 4, that this happened reKeinwyros rod ij.rjv6s. vpoKaB- 
 
 fffTTjKvias — 'set to defend the city,* So irpo<pv\d(Tffuv, c. 93, and ' pro castris 
 aciom instruere,' Cses. B. G. i. d4fifvoi 45 r^v ayopav ra '6irKa. 
 
 Cf. Grote vi. 155, who clearly shows that Dr. Arnold has mistaken the sense of 
 these words. It is quite evident that no soldiers under the circumstances of 
 the Thebans, making a hostile attack in the night-time upon a garrisoned town, 
 would think of ' piling their arms,' any more than Proxenus (in the well-known 
 passage Xen. Ajiab. i. 5. 13) would have thought of giving such an order to 
 his men in their critical position between the troops of Clearchus and Menon, 
 or Hippocrates to his, when the enemy were actually in sight before the battle 
 of Delium (Thuc. iv. 93, cf. vii. 3 ; Xen. A7iab. iv. 3. 17). In the passage 
 viii. 93, d4fxivoi rh Sir\a 4^iKKKr\ffiaaav, Dr. Arnold's rendering may possibly be 
 the right one. But Hudson's interpretation is far better, * armis instructi et 
 ordine coUocati, concionem habuerunt, imminehat enini hostis.* The latter gives 
 the four meanings very clearly : 
 
 1. pro rdmiv et TonfffBax. 
 
 2. pro <rTfxiToir€5€U€<r0cu. 
 
 3. pro castra munire. 
 
 4. pro iro\iopKiiv. Cf. viii. 25. 
 In most cases it may be explained by 'armati consistere,' to maintain 
 
 rank, resting the spear and shield upon the ground ; and in this case means 
 little more than our 'ground arms.' Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 12, wliere the 
 soldiers of Thrasybulus rest their shields, but retain the rest of their arms, 
 so 16, § 5, 6, where compare the story of David and Saul, 1 Sam. xxvi. n. 
 ipyov Ix^o"^** — * set about their work at once* aveiirfv. 
 
 The technical word ; therefore found without the substantive. Cf. Arist. 
 Ach. II, d 8* &v€i-ir€r (Xcra-/, & e4oyvi, rhv x^P^^- Kurh, tA 
 
 irdrpia twp irdtfrwv Boiwruy. After the death of the mythic Xanthus 
 in his single combat with Melanthus (cf. Grote, ii. p. 22), the monarchical 
 form of government was exchanged for a republican constitution, founded on a 
 
 mixture of aristocratic and democratic principles (b.c. 1126, Heeren); the 
 former shown in the appointment of eleven annual magistrates called 
 j Bceotarchs, who presided over the military as well as civil departments ; the 
 latter in the establishment of four councils (fiovXal), which were possessed in 
 fact of the sovereign authority, all measures of importance being submitted to 
 them (as Thuc. says, aln^p &nay rh Kdpos ^xovti). Tradesmen and artisans were 
 allowed no share in public affairs, unless they had abstained for ten years from 
 cArry-ing on their employments. Heeren thinks these fiovXai were held in the 
 four districts into which Boeotia was divided (p. 147). The general assembly 
 was held m the temple of Itonian Minerva, near Coroneia (Paus. ix. 34). It 
 was in fact a political confederacy under the presidency of Thebes. The 
 greater cities which had smaller towns dependent upon them, seem to have been 
 originally fourteen, the names of which are variously given. The religious 
 festival of the whole league was called Pamboeotia. Cf. Smith's Geog. Did 
 art. Boeotia; Cramer, vol. ii. pp. 191, 238; Heeren's Ma7iual, pp. 146 gq' 
 For the constitution of the several ^ov\ai, see Smith's Did. art. Bceotarchs 
 ci'r.y fio6\,rai k.t.K. Cf. iii. 62, 66, iv. 118. rle^adai nap* 
 
 avr obs T^ SjrAa. Cf. iv. 68, -rhp ^ovUfjiivov i4yai MeyapeW fierk *A6r]uaia,y 
 6r}(r6fi€yov ra oVAo. 
 
 T^y U\draiau (cf. supra for place in text)— Platcsa or Platcsce (Homer 
 uses the siyjgular form, //. ii. 504; (&y 4uikws dney 6 iroivr-hs, Strab. ix. 2, 
 p. 266,) as does Thucydides generally, though sometimes the plural, * as 
 c. 7 a, 10 : Herodotus the plural usually, as does Diodorus and Demosthenes) 
 was situated on a spur of Mt. Cithseron, from which the Asopus takes its 
 rise, which river separated its territory from that of Thebes ; at the distance 
 of about seventy stadia from Thebes (c. 5. a), the same from Thespiae about 
 a hundred from the border town of (Enoe, and 250 from Athens'. The 
 PJataeans had early separated themselves from the Boeotian league, considering 
 that their own interests were at variance with this political union, and had 
 put themselves under the protection of Athens, about 93 years before the 
 date of their surrender (lib. iii. c. 68), i.e. b.c. 519 (Clinton in an.). They 
 had at first offered themselves to the Lacedaemonians and Cleomenes, but 
 were advised by them to aUy themselves with Athens (iii. 55 ; Herod, vi. 
 108). In return for the good service done for them by the Athenians,* 
 the Plataeans furnished a thousand soldiers for Marathon, and manned -some 
 of the Athenian vessels which fought at Artemisium. They fought most 
 bravely at the battle of Plataea, and were publicly thanked by Pausanias and 
 tlie confederate Greeks for their gallant conduct. But they afterwards 
 incurred the hatred of the Lacedaemonians, and especially of their kings, by 
 causing the boastful inscription of Pausanias on the tripod offered at Delphi 
 to be altered (Herod, ix. 81, Demosth. in Necsr. 1378). Plat^a was burnt by 
 the army of Xerxes, but restored by the assistance of the Athenians. After 
 their surrender to the Lacedaemonians in the fifth year of the war, b.c. 427. 
 the town was razed to the ground, with the exception of one building con- 
 structed from the ruins, which they used for the reception of travellers (/cot- 
 1'^wi', iii. 68). After the peace of Antalcidas, the town was rebuilt, and the 
 inhabitants restored, in consequence of the measures of Agesilaus with the 
 ^ebans, b.c. 386 (Paus. Bmt, i. ; Xen. Hdl. v. i. 33). But in the archontate 
 
 .1 
 
i6o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDE8. 
 
 [Book IT. I Oiiap. 5.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 i6r 
 
 of Asteius, B.c 373, the Thebans, suspecting that the Plataeans had been 
 priry to the seizure of the Cadmeia by the Lacedaemonians under Phoebidas 
 nine years before, got possession of the town by stratagem, and once more 
 demolished it (Paus. B<xot. i.). After the destruction of Thebes by Alexander, 
 B.C. 335. the confederates decided on rebuilding Plataea ; but this design does 
 not seem to have been carried into effect till the time of Cassander (Paus. 
 Bteot. iii.) who also rebuilt Thebes. Dicaearchus, who died about b.c. 285, 
 mentions the town as existing in his time. Traces of the walls, consisting of 
 very considerable masses, evenly hewn and well built, may be seen near the 
 village of Kockla. (The N.W. angle seemingly was the portion restored.) 
 They are on the steep and rugged slopes which fall from the heights of Cithaeron 
 into the valley on the north. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 1 8a. 
 
 Chapter III. — kd)p<i)v — * they could not see! ivfoortpi^ov— 
 
 * offered no violence' Cf. 16./, fjL-T)h\v vfilnepov voiuv, i. 133. b. For the usual 
 meaning, cf. c. 73. Cf. iii. 66. k. ftaSlus Kparrja-ai. Usually 
 
 with &v, as c. 70, but cf. our own idiom, • they thought to get the better of them, 
 oil $ovKofi4v<i> "^v. The dative expressing reference to (Jelf, § 599. 3; 
 Matth. p. 621). Cf. Sail. Jug. 4, *uti militibus sequatus cum imperatore 
 labos volentibus esset,' and Tacit. Agric. xviii. * quibus bellum volentibus 
 erat.' ^Ttx^^P^ITfo. For the plural form of the verbal adjective, 
 
 cf. not. ad i. 88. hiopvacrovrts. See Grote, vi. 155, and the 
 
 letter of M. Marrast. h.vr\ rtlxovs ^, anacoluthon. Cf. Matth. p. 519; hop. 
 V. Arnold ad loc; hence the roixopvxos (Arist. Ran. 773); Plut. 204 (cf. 
 165); Xen. Mem. i. 2. 62; Plat, Leg. viii. p. 353. <pv\dl- 
 
 avT€s — 'having watched their opportunity while it was yet night (or barely 
 the break of day).' <pofi€pdoT(pot. Qy. transitive or intransitive ? 
 
 Arnold takes the former view, the Etymologic. Magn. the latter, as also 
 Suidas, Photius, Poppo, Kriiger, Goller. Cf. Soph. (E. T. 153, Eur. Iph. A. 
 620, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 19. The same double meaning attaches to our English 
 adjective ' fearful,' and the Latin ' formidolosus ; ' cf. Tac. An7i. i. 62, and Sail. 
 Cat. § 7. Either sense would be admissible, the subject being clearly changed. 
 ^juirctpfas. The causal genitive, Jelf, § 481. ^/xirt fpous, as always 
 
 in this collocation, the predicate — ' hairing for their pursuers (or, to pursue 
 them), persons well acquainted with the bye-ways, so that,' &c. 
 
 Chapteb IV. — { vv€(rrpf<poyr — 'formed in to close order. ^ Cf . Herod, ix. 
 18. iv (Ttpiaiv avrols. Cf. Jelf, § 622. The /oca? meaning of ^J', 
 
 the notion of being in a number or crowd. KfpifKp. Plural idea 
 
 conveyed by the singular noun, as c. KoKafi^ for KoAti/nots, so irxivdos, &iiir(\os, 
 K. Kix^vi iv. 26, 5a J, Kapv6s, P. ; cf. Judges ix. 53, the death of Abimelech; 
 and Paus. i. xiii. 7, the death of Pyrrhus, King of Epirus. itrov. 
 
 Cf. c. 5. 5tct vvKr6s-'* the whole night through.' Cf. Xen. Anab. 
 
 IV. vi. 22. TfKfvTuvros rov firivSs. Cf. Grote, vi. 153. 
 
 ToC (A^ 4(peiyfi». Infin. with article used to express the "result viewed as 
 the cause (Jelf, § 492. 3 ; Matth. |,54o). Cf. 22, iKKKr^aiav ovk iiroUi . • • 
 rod fi^ opyri . . . i^a^xapruv, and ii. 32, irfixicrdTj . . . rod /x^ AjjoTcts iKrrKeovras 
 Kcucovpryfiv. &<Tr€ Bi€<pe€lpoyro. The action or fact primarily 
 
 represented by the indicative, its other character of a result not being lost 
 sight of (Jelf, § 863. c). ixrvpaKiv-the iron point at the bottom 
 
 ot the spear by which it was stuck into the ground. The dimin. of (rrOpaf: 
 {Xon. HelL iv. li. ,9). Cf. <rr6peu^, L. and S. ; Smith's Diet, of Ant. s v 
 Hasta. Called also ffavpdnnp, Horn. //. x. 153; Herod, vii. 41. Cf. i Sam 
 xxvi. 12, the story of David removing Saul's spear. This point of the javelin 
 was used m place of the peg by which the bar of the gate was usually held 
 fast. The peg wa^ termed fi6.\avos, the instrument by which it was removed 
 BaKaviypa. Ct Arist. Vesp. 200, cum Schol. ; Thesm. 423; art. Pessulus, 
 lUh^ Du^twnary. 3aAa,.oy = ^:£yyavoy, Schol. (cf. Schol. ad Arist Ve^ icc)' 
 .. I^ivlaxos {fiaxaviypa, cf. Xen. Hell. v. ii. 29). P. compares the Homeric 
 oxm, 11. xii. 121, Odyss.^ xxi. 47. On the subject of bolts, s^e Bekker's Gallus, 
 P- ^\ 01 ir\€ lovs, i.e. of those who threw themselves from 
 
 the wall, for 180 out of 300 were taken prisoners. XadSyrcs Ka\ 
 
 $iaK6\^aur€S. Hendiadys. rh Sh irA*r/r^/,« j^ ' 
 
 The idea of several subjects included in the word of number (Matth § 302) 
 &yriKpvs. Cf. i. 122, viii. 64, ^sch. Choeph. 190, Piat..£'z.%^. p. 215. For 
 the difference of meaning and quantity between &yTLKp{, and &yTiKpv5 cf 
 Jiuhnken, ad Tim. Lex. Plat, in v. There seems to be in this passage 
 clearly the meaning of ' straight through,' as well as of ' right onward,' as 
 noticed by T. K. A., who appears from his note to have been unaware of the 
 distinction between the two adverbs dravra by ancient as well as by modern 
 grammarians. .U, KaraKovffovcny. The indicative representing 
 
 the fact as actually existing or happening, and as something independent of the 
 thought and conception of the speaker, ' utrum eos concremarent an aliud quid 
 .llisfacerent,' Matth. 507. i, but many MSS. have the subj. ; Bekker retains 
 theind XP^^aaOai S n &v &o{,Ku>yrai. Cf. iv. 69, vii. 85; 
 
 \en.Hell. 11. iv. 37. >fc. y ^^ 
 
 CukVTEnY.—n^i—'who should have arrived according to previous arrange- 
 ^nt. T^s vvkt6s. The temporal genitive, the moment of time in 
 
 wliieh an action takes place being conceived of as a necessary condition of the 
 action, and therefore antecedent to it (Jelf, § 523. i). ^x ri &pa— 
 
 'if, as was not an impossiljle contingency' Cf. c. 12. 87. 'aua 
 
 '^^mng received tidings withal.' 'Aacc^6s. ' The Asopus, formed by 
 
 tfie confluence of several small streams (one of which rises near the town of 
 
 ^*a itself, and another near Thespiae), flows in an easteriv direction through 
 
 Jteotia; m part of its course forming the boundary between the Plataean and 
 
 neban districts (cf. Herod, vi. 108), passing through a plain called Parasopia 
 
 wen through a rocky ravine into the plain of Tanagra, and falling into the 
 
 ^uripus in the territory of Attica, near Oropus. In the upper part of its 
 
 <^yme It IS called Vuriemi, in the lower Vuriendi. It was on its banks that 
 
 I'le battle of Plataea was fought (Herod, ix. 51). Cf. Leake's Northern Greece, 
 
 »• PP- 326, 424 sq. ippir,. Cf. Demosth. c. Necer. p. 1379, who 
 
 «es the very words. (On the discrepancy in the statements of Demosth 
 
 nd Thucydides, v. Grote, vi. 158.) The river is still subject to these floods 
 
 ireshes. Mr. Hawkins, in a letter to Dr. Clarke (ii. § 3), says that the 
 
 "pus 18 in winter a muddy torrent, and for eight months of the year wholly 
 
l62 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 I 
 
 dry. KaraffK^vfi. Cf. not. ad i. lo. 6; ii. 14. 16. 17. 65. 97; 
 
 iii. 68. The word here evidently implies all the furm buildings, stock, &c., as 
 in ii. 14, where perhaps it may be limited to their moveable property (Grote, 
 vi. 173). For the general idea, cf. Herod, i. 17, on the invasion of Miletus 
 by Alyattes. virdpx^iv ctj/ri rwv ^vSov — ^ should serve as hostages 
 
 for those within the city, or, as something which they might exchange for such lu 
 were prisoners^ ^t nva \ajSotev . . . ^v &pa tvx<^'^'" For the 
 
 oratio obliqua followed by the oratio recta, v. Matthife, § 524. 6, Jelf, § 854. i. 
 fl h\ fii} — 'otherwise.^ So ii. 71, ffrpanvffai firjSfva irore aZiKws iir ainovs, d 
 Sh fiiff d.fivveiv lohs Trapduras. The negative sentence is often followed by u Se 
 /*^ for €t 8e, this form being commonly used to express the contrary of the former 
 conditional sentence. Cf. Herod, vi. 56; Xen. Cyr. in. i. 35; Vhit. Hip. M. 
 p. 285 ; Jelf, § 860. 5-; and not. ad i. 28. iirofi6(rat^' confirmed it by 
 
 an oath' ^k 8' olv rris yvs—' at all events! The attack upon Plataea 
 
 was considered unjust even by the Spartans themselves (cf. vii. 18, and Grote, 
 vi. p. 149 sq.), but the murder of the Theban prisoners by the Plataeans was 
 still more atrocious. In spite of the impartial statement of Thucydides, few 
 persons can doubt that the oath was given or at least implied, and that with 
 this belief the Thebans retired. Cf. iii. 66. But the act was highly impolitic as 
 well as grossly unjust. It was ' a blunder as well as a crime,' v. Grote, p. 1 60. 
 Fupii/Liaxos. Herodotus (vii. 233) mentions this fact when speaking of his 
 father's treachery. Cf. supra, ch. 2. thQvs. Cf. c. 67. 4. 
 
 irpo5(5oi/T€s. KB. part. j3res., because the attempt was not successful = ot 
 
 Chapter VI. — v(<i)ripov. Cf. c. 3, iuaarfpiCov. irplv li.v. 
 
 Jelf, § 848. The difference between irpiv and -rrpiv tv seems to be in the 
 latter marking that the action of the temporal clause is viewed as something 
 which will probably take place = ^aj/ fi-fj, irplv alone leaves it uncertain. 
 T€0ifi7»c(iT€s fJiv. Optative in oratione obliqu4 (Matth, § 529. 2). 
 oxp«'ot(£tows. Cf. PopjX) ad i. 93. So c. 78. h. 1. rh kxp^'iov ruv avdpokaiv, 
 ' The old men and sick, with the women and children,' Grote. 
 
 Chapter VII. — (a.) Xafiitpus — *in a glaring manner* Cf. i. 49. P. 
 ws iro\€]U^(rovT6S. Cf. Jelf, § 690, 2; Matth. p. 991. irpeapdai 
 
 irapa fiafftXea — i.e. both parties, Athenians and Lacedaemonians. P. and K. 
 The Lacedsemonians depended on Phamaces to convey theirs to the king, 
 cf. c. 67. ' A remarkable evidence,' Grote observes, *of melancholy revolution 
 in Grecian affairs, when that potentate whom the common arm of Greece had 
 so hardly repulsed a few years before was now invoked to bring the Phoenician 
 fleet again into the iEgean for the purpose of crushing Athens' (vi. 167). For 
 the fate of these ambassadors, descendants of Sperthias and Bulis, see c. 67; 
 Herod, vii. 137. {uju/uaxfSas irotoJ;/iei/oi. N.B. pres. and im- 
 
 perfect part. — ' endeavouring to win over! 
 
 (b.) TTphs Toty avTov vtrapxo'offais — ' in addition to the ships alreadt/ m 
 the Peloponnesus,' says Kriiger ; ' to those in Italy and Sicily,' says Hermann ; ' »w 
 addition to their allied cities in Greece' T.K.A., and this seems to bo Thirlwalls 
 view; 'Her allies in this quarter (Italy and Sicily) engaged to furnish her with 
 
 163 
 
 money and ships, which it was calculated would amount to no less than 500' 
 (n.. 120). Grote apparently inclines to Kruger's view : ' The Lacedemonians 
 resolved to make up the naval force already existing among themselves and 
 their allies to an aggregate of 500 triremes, chiefly by the aid of the friendly 
 Dorian cities on the Italian and Sicilian coasts' (vi. 167). Diodorus (xii 41) 
 says the Italians and Sicilians were to send 200 ships, but it does not seem to 
 have been actually done. e\ofi4uois. Cf. Jelf, § 589, 3 K cf iii 63 
 
 P explains JAeVfla. as equivalent to <l>poue7y .d n.os. We say, to take part to 
 take up a suie. inr.rdxBr^ea.. Here is another difficulty; what is 
 
 the nominative to ^..? If we had ^«, the construction would be simple and 
 regular. (Cf. Cses. B. G., ' naves iis imperatae sunt.') But Lobeck and all the 
 commentators agree that mvs is always accusative and never nominative 
 Poppo therefore would read i^erdxdr,, (which in fact must be supplied before 
 ero^^are..,) from the Vienna MS. Cf. n. ad i. ,41. d. Jelf. § 898, 2, consider. 
 It as a sort of attraction, the subject of the dependent being transferred to the 
 pnrwipd clause, in which it stands as the object. But, after all, is it so certain 
 that va.. cannot m Attic Greek stand as a nominative ? If it cannot, probably 
 some transcriber, not knowing the fact, substituted it for urj.s, imagining that 
 he was removing an lonicism from the text. kpyip.ov b-nrSp— 
 
 'a specified sum' cf. c. 70, and iv. 69. • The highest amount which each state 
 would be called on to supply was fixed once for all. The supplies in money 
 and stores were also regularly appointed, so that an army with all its equip- 
 ments could be collected by a single summons.'-Miill. Dor. i. 198 Thirlwall 
 says, ' If Sparta determined the amount of the contributions required by 
 extraordinary occasions, she was obliged carefully to adjust it to the ability of 
 each community' (iii. 1,9). Cf. Wachsmuth, ii. 144. ^,5 ^ f ^ 
 
 greater number would imply a hostile intention. Cf. iii. 71, vi 52 * 
 
 (^•) H^raCoy=.4doKifjLa(oK Schol. Cf. vi. 97. ' * ixaWoy^ 
 
 '%..^m.'P K4pKvpau. P. ad i. 44. Ke^aA. Cf. c. 9, 68. 
 
 laKvudoy Cf. 1. 47, ii. 9. The Zacynthians were allies of Corcyra before, 
 -e,,. Cf. Jelf, §885. 2, Matth. p. 907. .e>|. Cf. vi. 90. 
 
 KararoX.^naoyr.s. Jelf, § 681. 6, participle used for the infinitive re- 
 lemng to the present conviction with regard to something future. Karair (cf 
 iv.i.)=debellare; 'belloinfestare/P. " 
 
 Chapter Vm.-(a.) ^OKiyoy i^.y6ovv ohUv. P. compares Liv. xxix. i , 
 >ai,l parvum agitabat animo.' hp<^yro-^ ad helium cupideferc- 
 
 ^ntur, Goll. (cf. Hom. II. xi. 50; Odys. xxiv. 68; Callim. H. Del. 175; 
 •^Ppian .B. C. 11. 30), so vii. 7, h r&XXa iroXh iireppwvTo. Hence ''Eppco'o = the 
 ^t. Vale (Acts ixiii. 30). P. translates it ' totis viribus incumbebant ' 
 Wm^.'o.. a general reflection, which the S4 in the apod, applies to the 
 fecial case. aynKafx^dyoyrat. 80 i^yrdxoyrai, xil 66. Cf. Plat. 
 
 o^ag. pp. 275, 314, Bekker, and c. 62—' set vigorously to work.' 
 "^^67115 = ^401. So riKiKia. Abstract for concrete. Cf. 20, 21. 
 «»f iptas. The Schol. quotes the proverb, yKvKhs inrelpcp U'Ae^uos. 
 M*T6«po,-« wound up to the full pitch of warlike excitement,' Grote. Cf ii 
 
 eJ,,!"'' '^^^"' ''"'"' ^'^^"'- ^^PP^ compares the Latin phrases arrectum', 
 I ^^um, expectatione suspen.um esse. ^vytovw^y-^ coming into 
 
 u2 
 
164 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I G«^p- ^^'^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 165 
 
 conflict;* so ^uvtCTTj/ut, Herod, i. 202, cu yvwficu Iwieraffav — *the opiniona 
 clashed.' 
 
 {b.) \6yia. The difference between \6yia and xpV^H-o^ seems to be this-- 
 Xpr}<riJi6s (Th, xp^o'f XP^*^^^^) ^^ ^^ answer returned to one who consults an 
 oracle; \6yiov any ominous saying, whether given by a God unconsulUd, or a 
 soothsayer. ' Weissagungen' K. Cf. lib. viii. i. ; for the xpV<^H-o\6yoi, see 
 Aristoph. Av. 960 sq. h. 1. c. xii. A^Xoj iKitfijdri k.t.\. Cf, i. 
 
 23; Arist. Acham. 12; Schol. Call. H. Del. 11; Schol. Virg. Mn. iii. 77, 
 with Heyne's Excursits. There is a difficulty here, as Herodotus, vi. 98, men- 
 tions an earthquake in Delos B.C. 490. Wass thinks this is the one to which 
 Thucydides refers, oAfyy wph rovrwv being taken in a loose sense (just as nuper 
 in Ijatin has the same vague meaning). Pliny (^w^ N. iv. 12) and Seneca 
 (A'. Q. vi. 26) speak of only tu^ earthquakes at Delos. See Thirlwall, iii. 
 124. n. who quotes Voss, Mythol. Forsch. Some suppose that Her«dotus 
 merely quoted a report of the Delians, us eKtyov ol AtjAioj, and that his earth- 
 quake never did take place. Miiller {Dor. i. 312, Germ, ed.) supposes 
 Thucydides had never seen the passage in Herodotus. Cf. ad i. 2c ; Cramer's 
 Anc. Greece, s. v. Delos. ikvf^TjT (Ira. The prep, exerts its force of 
 
 hack, hence 'altius indagabantur,' wa(Tir€7(rdai = &va>dfv (r]Tf7<rdai. So avacKo- 
 vfiy, aj/ari/uai/, avadrjpavy kvoKpivuv^ Abresch. ap. Gottleb. 
 
 (c.) ^ fivoia trapa iroXv iwoiei. Cf. Dion. xlv. p. 427, Iv. p. 851, who 
 
 copies this passage. So Appian, B. C. i. 82, ri fVroia rwv av^pSiv 4s robs uirdroi/s 
 
 waph voKxf 4irol€iy which seems to confine the reading ^iroUt, which K. and Barer 
 
 prefer to dinjtt. Cf. vpoa-Kotrjffaiy c. 3, irocou/xf^oi, c. 7, ' adjungebat homines,' 
 
 ' won over,' B. For the feeling entertained by the subject-allies towards Athens 
 
 flee Grot«, vi. 44, and Wachsmuth's Hist. Antiq. ii. 98. For Trapa iroKv soe 
 
 Jelf, § 637, iii. 3. f. See note, i. 29. e. irpoinrSpruv—' set forth as 
 
 their plea (irp6<paffis) for going to war.' For the grammatical construction, see 
 
 Jelf, § 710 b, the gen. abs. implying the notion of catise, instead of agreeing with 
 
 the subject of the verb, or some object thereof. Cf Theoph. Ch. ir. /jiiKpo<pi\(n. 
 
 (Kfvdtpovffiv. Cf. c. 72. a. 'As chief of the Peloponnesian confederacy, 
 
 Sparta presented the majestic and winning aspect of the champion of liberty 
 
 against Athenian tyranny and ambition.' — Thirlw. iii. 120. (ppwro— 
 
 * was fully set' — ' had all its energies strung up.' l^idTrjs. Cf. c. 67, where 
 
 we find Pollis, an Argive, fitting out a privateer. ^wfirikaixfiavfiv. 
 
 The middle is the more common form, K. ^ fi-f} ris aiirhi 
 
 urapiffrai. Thuc. repeats the idea, iv. 14, K^KuKvaBai 4^6k€i e/cao-TOj w p.v t*"* 
 
 fcal aurbs ^pyof vaprjtr. The perfect KfK. denotes the certainty of the result. K. 
 
 6p7f7 clxo"' Cf. c. 65, rhv UfpiKKta iv opy^ «'X<'*'> ^nd 18, eV roiavrij opyri " 
 
 (TTparhs rhy 'Apx't^ofiov flx^^i the form with the prep, being more common. i^'» 
 
 5i' opyris ^X*'*'> ^'^ t^XVS, c. 1 1 ; 610 (nroyS^s, Sih. (pikiasy irjffrews, "KoKfp-ov, out 
 
 SucTjy, Soph. Ant. 742. K. cf Plat. Ale. 18. 
 
 Chapteb IX.— (a.) Aaic. ^vfifiaxoi. 'Within the isthmus her allies in- 
 eluded all the states of Peloponnesus, except Achaia and Argos: hence the 
 great contest now beginning was not improperly called the Peloponnesian war. 
 —Thirlw. iii. 119. 'Ap7€t'«y. Cf. Diod. xii. 42 ; WachsmuthV 
 
 if. A. ii. 106, seq. 
 
 (b.) *o}Kris. Cf. i. 112. n. Had the Phocians passed over to the Lace- 
 daemonian interest since this event, or must we with P. suspect some error ? 
 Probably the former; as we find them afterwards decidedly joining the 
 Lacedaemonians. Cf. iv. 89, 118, v. 64. AoKpoi. t.e. Opuntii. 
 
 'AfiirpaKii,Tai. Cf c. 68. I'7rir4a5 5^ Boia>roi. Cf. c. 12. c. 
 
 (c.) 'Ad-nyalcov S4. Aristophanes (Vesp. 707) says the Athenian empire 
 comprehended a thousand cities, but some allowance must doubtless be made 
 for poetic exaggeration. Her subjects were more opulent than the allies of 
 Sparta, and she disposed of their revenues at pleasure. Xlot, AeVjSioi. 
 
 At that time the only free islands. fJavirdKrcp. Cf. i. 103. 
 
 KKapvivoiv. All but (Eniadae, c. 102, aei irSri iroAe^tow ovras fxSyovs 'A#c. 
 Kapla, Cf. c. 69. tA 4ir\ ep^KTjs. Cf. ad i. 56, and c. 29; Xen. 
 
 Hell. II. ii. 5 ; Grote, vi. p. 90. The Thraceward allies included Potidjea, 
 Chalcidice, Bottiaea and probably Thasos. The neighbouring inland territory 
 was held by Perdikkas. For the early connexion between Athens and Thrace, v. 
 Herod, vi. 39. Hegesipyle, wife of Miltiades, was daughter of a Thracian king. 
 Cf. Wachsmuth, ii. pp. 39 and 94. ♦ Some of the possessions of Thasos on the 
 Thracian coast had fallen into the power of the Persians, and required to be de- 
 livered from the Persian governors by whom they were occupied. We may infer 
 from the expeditions to Eion and Daton that this was chiefly effected by the 
 Athenians, who, upon pretext of compensating themselves for their exertions, 
 retiiined possession of these places.' See Mr. Shilleto's pamphlet, Thucydides 
 '>r Grote, i. 10, note. MVjAow Kal e-fipas. Colonies of the Minyae, 
 
 from Lacedaemon. P. Cf. Thirlwall, i. 277. 
 
 Chapter X. — (a.) ra* s ir<JA€<ri— t.c. kotA ir6\fis, as fKoa-roi, below. 
 i<r$aKovyTfs. Cf. vii. 28, v. 14. They were forty days absent from home. 
 ^^^^ ^- 5'- iroTfia yiyyoiro — * as they severally got things 
 
 ready: Cf Matth. p. 899. The iterative optative is here referred to the several 
 States, each in its turn. rh 5tJo ix4pr\. Cf. K. ad i. 74. a. • Two-thirds 
 
 of all th£ population capable of bearing arms.' ii. 12, c, t^ <r(p4repov fiepos. ii. 
 47, 01 ^vfi^axoi rh. Uo fx4pri Zairep «ai rh vpuTov. iii. 15. Caes. B. C.i. 82. 
 Grote, vi. 168, explains it as 'two-thirds of a certain assumed rating, for 
 which the city was held liable in the books of the confederacy. So that the 
 Boeotians and others who furnished cavalry were not constrained to send two- 
 thirds of their entire force of hoplites.* 
 
 (*•) 'ApX'5a^os (i. 79, av^p ^werhs icai ffdotppuy), the second of his name, 
 and eighteenth king of the Proclide branch, succeeded on the deposition of his 
 grandfather Leotychides, Zeuxidamus having died before his father. Cf. 
 Herod, vi. 71 ; Pans. iii. 7. 8. He married Lampito, daughter of Leotychides 
 W a second marriage. He led the first three expeditions into Attica, in the 
 years b.c. 43"i, 430, 42S, and died about b.c. 427, as in the following year his 
 son Agis invaded Attica. Plutarch (Cimon, c. xvi.) mentions the fourth year of 
 his reign as coincident with the earthquake at Sparta. Clinton fixes his ac- 
 '^sion therefore at b.c. 469. Pans. I.e. briefly mentions the chief transactions 
 of his reign. His presence of mind saved Sparta at the time of the earthquake, 
 "nd his whole life justifies the character that Thucydides gives him for intelli- 
 gence and temperance. His death was as great a loss to Sparta, as that of 
 
1 66 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 11. I Chap. 1 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 167 
 
 Pericles to Athens. He left a riaughter, Cynisca, the first woman who ever 
 ctirried oif an Olympic victory. The first ten years of the war are said to hare 
 heon called from him 'Apxt^o-nios irdXejuos (v. Harpocration, s.v. and AfKekmhs 
 irSKf/xos). roi/s 4u riKn^iv apxv^ P- C)f. ad i. lo. e, 58. a, iii. 
 
 36, vi. 88; Xen. Anah. ii.; Herod, ix. 106. aiio\oyosr6.Tovs vaptlvai 
 
 — ' most of consideration so that they should he present,' i.e. those who had tb 
 greatest right to be present. K. says ^iryKoAeVas TrapeZj/at, ' having summoned to 
 he present,' would be without example, he would therefore read vapaivuv. 
 Eeisk. suggests irapiuy. 
 
 Chapter XI. — (a.) iirfipot. Cf. K. ad i. 80. a. 
 
 (6.) iirrjpTat^' is up at the sound of,' 'up in arms,' as c. 8, (xfTtupos ^v. Cf 
 Liv. ii. 54, xxi. 20. irpo(r4x^i T^f yvwyL-riv — * attend it quo tandem res 
 
 sit €\'asura,' G. (ijvoiav ix°^^°-' Cf. ad c. 8, * having a strong 
 
 feeling in our favour, which induces them to hope we shall succeed in our enter- 
 prise, and therefore is anxiously watching the result.' This is surely better than 
 the other interpretation, ' that we are doing what we purpose, through hatred of 
 the Athenians.' Kruger compares Plat. Bep. 608 a, edvoi 4<r6neea (pavrjv<ii 
 avT^^v ws ^iKrlffTriv. Thuc. iii. 83, v. 40. 4wivoovfi(v. So iirivoriffai 
 
 o^ets, i. 70. vK-fidfi. So * multitudo' in Caesar. ' With supiriority oj 
 
 force.' Cf. ch. 89 a., i. 125. a. Plutarch {Pericles, c. xxxiii.) says 60,000 men. 
 The Scholiast on Soph. (Ed. Col. 694, says 100,000. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 117. 
 a(Tip<i\€ia fih tiy 4 KB f 7 v. Cf. iii. 39, irap4<Tx^v okvov fi^ eXeeTj/ ^5 to SetJ/ci. 
 
 (c.) ra ruv iroXfixcDu — ' bcllorum eventus, res bellica,' P. So c. 80. q. v. to 
 rrjs 6pyris = 6pyf). Soph. (K. T. 977, to ttjs tux^JS. 4^ 6\lyov. Cf. c. 
 
 89. In its usual sense in Thucyd., ' on a sudden,' ' at short notice,' K. 
 yv(anri = <f>poirfifxari, i. 81. ' Geist und Muth,' K., but Bl. translates it by 
 'consilii8'(?). See ch. i. 130. b, from which it appears that it refers to the 
 state of the will or purpose — ' with resolute will, hut cautious action.' 
 
 (d.) ovTO). Connect with aSwaToVy K. * Not so wiak as their enemies wmU 
 wish us to believe,' Arnold. Cf. the Latin phrases—' haud ita magnus,' ' hand 
 ita pridem.' 
 
 {e.) ofifiafft, Cf. i. 82. Hom. H. xiii. 99, OavfAu t68' 6<pda\fjLo7(nv bpwfuu. 
 4v Tff irapavTiKa — * all are angry to see themselves with their own eyes, and at 
 tfie present moment suffering some unusual injury.' Poppo, T. K. A. considers 
 opav a loosely appended explanatory infinitive. firjOts. Grote. 
 
 vi. 169. • All men exposed to any unusual indignity become incensed, and wt 
 more under pas^on than under calculation, wJien it is actually brought under 
 their eyes' r^v lavruv. Snip^ly Srjovfifvrjv. Jelf, § 895, c. 
 
 (/. ) BS^a V — ♦ glory or shame, as the result may be.' ' Kuhm oder Schande,' K. 
 ^ir' hLp^<p6repa, Jelf, 635. 3. b., 'both ways,' i.e. whether the issue be glorious 
 or disastrous. Reisk. explains it, ' whether they come out to fignt or not.' 
 otrri ISlv ris vyvrai. Jelf, § 838. 2. K6(Tfiou = €VKO(rnla, (vr^a- 
 
 P.* Cf. Herod, vii. 104. 6|€(ws »6x<5m«''o'- Combining tb^ 
 
 meaning of each word, ' quick to hear, and prompt to obey your orders.' A tech- 
 nical expression, K. says. vi. 34- d, o^eccs vflOttrSai. 
 
 Chaptbk XII. — (a.) 8toAu<ras— ' having dissolved.' We have the middle 
 
 form below, ^7r€*5^ lyufWe BiaXvireffdai — ' when he wa^ about to fart from his 
 
 conductors' = a(piara(Teai, Schol. 4irl rh Kotv6v = Ta t4\t], ras apxds 
 
 •/6 the authoritu'S,' i.e. ' to a public hearing.' Cf. K. ad i. 90, who explains it 
 by * die Eegierung.' 
 
 (b.) vfviKrjKvTa. Simply implies that Pericles' proposition was carried, 
 not that any contrary vote was proposed. 4^ecrrpaT€vti4v<t}v^ 'now that the 
 lAcedamonians had taken the field.' irplv aKovaai. The aorist 
 
 infinitive—' without a hearing.' The phrase is observable in connexion with 
 Matth. i. 25, '4(i)s ov €T€K€. 
 
 {c.) Sri, ^5€ T] 7] 1x4 pa k.t.K The ^ri simply introduces the saying of 
 Melesippus, as in Herodotus, passim. Hudson compares Virg. Mn. iv. 169, 
 
 Hie dies primus lethi primusque malorum 
 Causa fuit. 
 
 Aristophanes had this passage also in view in the Pax, 435, according to the 
 Scholiast, 
 
 airivhovTCS €vx6fif(r6a t^v vvv r]fi4pav 
 
 EAArjo'ti/ 6.p^ai Trotri TToWdv Kayadwv. 
 
 Gott. compares Hom. v. 63 ; Xen. Hell. 11. ii. 23 ; Valckenar ad Herod, v. 
 
 97; SdU.. Jug. ws Se acplKeTo k.t.A. Observe the change of 
 
 «"1>ject. robs tmreas—ct ad c. 9. b. — ' the whole of their 
 cavalry.* 
 
 Chaptee XIIL— (a.) ^vWeyo^iivtav 4s rhv IffdfiSv. The preposition 
 « refers to a verb of motion, connected with a verb of rest, when previous 
 motion is implied. So in Latin, ' abdo me in Italiam.' So aOpoiCeiv, ^wayeipeiv, 
 aXi^fiv, 4$. See notes, i. 51. b. 65. b. ffrpar-nyds — 'minister of war.' 
 
 Niebuhr compares the re-election of Pericles year after year to that of Lorenzo 
 the Magnificent at Florance year after year to the post of Gonfaloniere. Cf. c. 
 ^5- 56KOTOS avT6s. Cf. Hom. //. x. 495, 
 
 rhv rpiffKaiBcKarov fifXirj^ea dv(xhv ainjvpa. 
 
 fih iroWaKis — * ne forte', properly, ' as often happens' It has this force after 
 €1, eai/ /xrj, iVa ju^. irapa\iTrri Ka\ jutj dridxrrj — ' pass bl/ without 
 
 i'ljuring.' Justin (iii. 7) says it was actually done. Cf. Tac. Hist. v. 23, 
 vSicut Corialis agros villasque Civilis intactos, notd arte ditcum, sinebat.' So 
 Coriolanus. Fabius's lands were spared by Hannibal (Liv. ii. 39, xxii. 
 *3)- G. TO, 6.yri 4\avv€iv. Cf. i. 127. fjv &pa fi^ 
 
 ^Tjufffuaiv . . . atpiriaiv — 'in the possible event of their not ravaging.' &pa 
 implies th&,t there existed some ground for such an inference. See also Jelf, 
 ij 887. i. Matth. § 529. olKlas. Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 
 
 5ia xc'p^s «X«*''- A metaphor from driving, ' to have well in hand.' Matth. 
 55580. 
 
 (0.) Ttt 5^ iroWa rov iroXefiov yvdi^rt K.r.X. — ' that superiority in war 
 <is a general rule is the result of skill and superabundance of resources' 
 
 {c.) ■Kpo<Ti6vT(av e^aKoalwv raXdvrtav K.r.\. — ' si7ice the avi rage {4x\ rh 
 »o\i>) yearly revenue amounted to,' &c. The original amount levied was 460 talents, 
 ^•*-'' 477» Thuc. i. 96. The money was paid lo the Hellcnotamiae at Delos, which 
 
 I 
 
i68 
 
 NOTES ON TUUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 1 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 169 
 
 I 
 
 -was then the treasury, rofxitioy. The treasure was r*>moved from Delos to Athens 
 during the lifetime, and with the concurrence, of Aristides, who had adjusted 
 the original levy (C. Nep. in vit. 3). Wachsmuth supposes this to hare been 
 done B.C. 461, 01. 79. 4. Pericles was appointed the superintendent (v. Diod. 
 xii. 38), as at his instigation, or that of the Samians, the treasury was removed ; 
 and by a despotic decree, piissed apparently at his suggestion, the amount was 
 raised to 600 talents. Towards the closo of the reign of Philip it was raised to 
 1 200 talents ; and the management of it was entrusted to the orator Lycurgus, 
 who, like Pericles, defrayed out of it the expenses of restoring and improving 
 the public buildings. Grote considers these 600 talents to be equal to about 
 138,000/. (cf. Diod. xii. 40). &y€v t^$ &,\\rts vpoffoSov — i.e. <l>opoi, 
 
 tcAtj, irevrrjKoar'fi, Ti/x^/tara, the fieroiKioy, or ' tax on resident aliens,' the 
 revenues from the mines ut Laureium (for which see Boeckh's dissertation at 
 the end of his Pub. Earn., Grote v. 71 sq,). Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. i. 27. 
 Tck yhp v\(7(rra . . . ixvpia iyivito. The buildings erected or restored by 
 Cimon and Pericles might easily have cost this sum. Cimon built the tempie 
 of Theseus, the Dionysiac theatre, the stoae and gymnasium, and embellished 
 the academy, the agora, and other parts of the city, though this Plutarch «ays 
 he did at his own expense. Pericles completed the fortifications left unfinishi-d 
 by Cimon, rebuilt many temples and buildings which the Persians had de- 
 stroyed, and erected the temple of Eleusis, the Parthenon, and the Propylsea. 
 The last building was one of the noblest in Greece ; it was five years in erecting, 
 and cost 2012 talents = 460,000/. (v. Harpocrat. in voc.). The whole was of 
 Pentelic marble, and the size of the blocks was enormous (v. Pans. i. 22, 4; 
 Aristoph. Equit. 1 326). It was commenced in the archonship of Euthymenes — 
 the architect was Mnesicles (v. Smith's Geog. Diet. art. Athenge; Miiller's 
 Anc. Art. § ioq. 3 ; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 136). is IloriSaiav. 
 
 Fromii. 70. b. we learn thatthey had thenspent2ooo talents on thesiege,andfrom 
 iii. 17, that 3000 hoplites were engaged in the blockade, each of whom received 
 two drachma; a-day. apyvpiov iiriff-fifMou — ^ argcntum signatum! 
 
 Coined money, as opposed to bullion, apyvpiov Harifiov (vi. 8), aurum infectum, 
 and aurum factum in CKcvrj, avadijixara, aydXixara, &c. The first stamper of 
 Grecian coins is said to have been Pheidon the Argive. The oldest Greek 
 coins to which a date can be unhesitatingly assigned, are the silver medals 
 of Alexander the First of Macedon, minted about the year of the battle of 
 Marathon (v. Cardwell, on Coins, Lect. v. p. 110; Wordsworth's Greece, 
 
 p. 127). 
 
 (d.) leph ffKf^ri—' sacred vtensils used in public processions and games' Of 
 
 these spectacles Pericles was very fond, as one great engine of political power 
 
 (v. Plut. in vit. xi. : del /xfv rtva deay vayrjyvpiK^y fl karia/riv ^ irofxinjv «?''fl' M^' 
 
 Xawd'tJ'^yos iv iffTei). These sacred vessels (Trofiir€7a) were kept in the Pom- 
 
 peium, a building near the Piraic gate, and probably chosen for this purpose 
 
 as the most suitable place near the road to the Piraeeus. Cf. Pans. Att. i. 2; 
 
 Harpocrat. in v. vofiirua, Demosthenes, c. Androt. p. 61 5. Pausanias says some 
 
 of these processions were annual, others at longer intervals. Leake and Miillcr 
 
 suppose the Panathensea are alluded to ; Forchhammer, the Eleusinian festival. 
 
 The orator Lycurgus is said to have furnished vases and other ornaments 
 
 and dresses for the Panathenaic processions. Cf. Pans. Att. i. 29 ; Pint, t"^- 
 
 lycurg. VKxiXa MtjSi/ccC. The Scholiast mentions the silver-footed 
 
 throne of Xerxes, and the golden acinaces of Mardonius, which appears to 
 have been worth 3000 darics. (Dem. adv. Timoc. p. 741.) Cf. Herod, viii. 
 90, .^sch. Pers. 466. For the grammatical construction oi raKivrta-v, see Jelf, 
 1^0. h. Twu &K\ctv ifpuv. The commentators differ as to 
 
 whether these words refer to sacred vessels, or to temples. Arnold main- 
 Uins that they can onlt/ mean the latter. Bloomf. and Poppo extend the sense, 
 land Kriiger clearly shows from Xenophon {Hell. i. 7. 23), Appian (ii. p. 613), 
 and Isocrates (viii. 126), that the sense need not be restricted. 
 ^flpywvrai — 'if they should be absolutely exdvdcd' from all revenue arising 
 from these things — tribute, offerings, &e. avrris rrjy 0€ou. 
 
 This was the famous chryselephantine statue of Athena, executed by the hand 
 of Phidias himself. It was twenty-six cubits, or nearly forty feet, high. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Pac. 588. Philochorus reckons the moveable drapery at four talents 
 more than Thucydides, and by some the weight is placed even at fifty (Diod. 
 xii. 40, where Wesseling considers Philochorus' statement to be the most pro- 
 bable, the others using round numbers). For a full account of the statue, see 
 Miiller's Ancie7it Art, § 113; Smith's Geog. Dkt. art. Athenae, and Diet, of 
 Biogr. s.v. Phidias, iii. 250; Cramer, v. 2, p. 330, Plin. H. N. xxxvi. § 5. 18, 
 Sillig. The statue was finished and dedicated b.c. 438. 
 (TTaefiSv. See Jelf, § 578. 
 
 (e.) xpv<^^ov air44>dov — 'aurum coctum,' * refined gold* (Thcog. 449, 
 Herod, i. 50). Opposed to white gold, XfvKhs xp^crds, i.e. alloyed with silver ; 
 fr. fifa, coquo ; cf. Butt. Irr. V. p. 1 14. Cramer calculates the value of this gold 
 at more than 1 50,000/. sterling of our money, ii. p. 297. Poppo considers it equal 
 to ten times the value of silver. Cf. Bockh, P. (Ec. i. p. 479 and 23, Grote vi. 
 p. 163. Lachares appropriated the gold (Pans. i. xxv. 5). 
 
 rtpiatpirdv may refer either to the statue or the gold, 'capable of having the 
 gold detached; or • capable of being detached: Bl. and T. K. A. prefer the 
 latter, Poppo and Kriig. the former sense. xp'^f^aa-i. The 
 
 causal dative. ruy irap' ^iraK^iv — * the men who manned the ram- 
 
 parts: sing, for plur., • the Ivie of battlements: or rather the termination implies 
 the plural, just as we might say the * coping ' for the line of * coping-stones.' Cf. 
 \hrsmiv, ch. 14. a. ; Horn. E. xii. 381 ; Blomf. ad ^sch. 8. c. Theb. 30, Ag. 
 37i ; Arist. Ach. 72, irapa r^y eiraA|iv iy <popvT^ Karajciifxeyos ; Herod, ix. 7 ; 
 fhuc. iv. 115, vii. 28. 4<pv\a<T<roy — ' were on garrison duty: 
 
 (/.) fifrolKwy. Only the richest resident aliens, probably the IfforeXus, 
 wved as 6Tr\7Tai. They mostly served on board ship. (See Poppo, who quotes 
 Bockh's Inscrip. i. p. 306.) Cf. c. 31. h. 1. ; i. 143 ; iii. ,6. These i<rore\e7s 
 ranked after the 'irp6^€yoi, needed no TrpoardT-ns, and paid no fi^roiKioy. L. and 
 S. Cf. Clinton, F. H. ii. 389. rov ^aK-npiKov relxovs. 
 
 The Phaleric or Southern wall (as the Peiraic was sometimes called the 
 Northern wall, Plat. Bep. iv. p. 440), formed one of the legs ((TKeArj, Diod. 
 Sic. XIV. ; so Meyap ko. aKeK-q, Arist. Lysist. 1170), or as the Latin writers call 
 ^nem, the arms {brachia, Liv. xxxi. 26) of the Pirseeus. It ran nearly due 
 south to Phalerum, consequently not parallel to the other two. By avrov rov 
 kukKov, Thuc. means the circuit of the walls of the astu itself. The part 
 g^'^wied was forty-thre© stadia; the space between the long wall and the 
 
170 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 1 5.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 171 
 
 Phaleric was left undefended. Col. Leake says the outer or Piraic wall alone 
 needed guarding, that being the only direction by which an enemy could ad- 
 vance. To the S. and E. of Athens there was no passage but by a circuitous 
 and difficult pass between the city and Mount Hymettus. The two long walls 
 ran in a S.W. direction to Piraeeus, parallel to, and at a distance of 550 fett 
 from, each other. The whole subject of these names is exceedingly compli- 
 cated ; perhaps from a misconception of a passage in Harpocration (s. v. iia 
 fxiffov relxovs). It seems, after a careful examination of the different passages, 
 that the following statement may reconcile the conflicting opinions. The two 
 original walls were the Piraic and Phaleric, called respectively rh ^optlov and 
 T^ v6rtov rfixos. These were commenced during the exile of Cimon, b.c. 457, 
 and completed che following year. Having thus far succeeded in carrying his 
 plans, Pericles, some time between this date and the commencement of the 
 Peloponnesian war, urged the Athenians to build the intervening wall. 
 Socrates we know (Plat. Gorg. p. 455) was present at the assembly when he 
 pressed his scheme. The object was to render the communication between the 
 city and Piraeus quite secure. This intervening wall was called rh 5»a ^aov 
 reixos, and in reference to this the Piraic wall was called rh t^wdev. But very 
 frequently in later times the term of v6riov reixos originally applied to the 
 Phaleric, was given indiscriminately to this intermediate wall from its relative 
 position to t\ie Piraic. After the erection of this intermediate wall, the Phaleric 
 was suffered to fall into decay, as we hear of the destruction of two long walls 
 by the Lacedaemonians (Xen. Hell. ii. 2), and Conon after the battle of Cnidus 
 probably restored but two. Their foundations may still be traced in many 
 parts. Cf. Cramer, ii. pp. 311, 12. 347; Smith's Gtog. Diet. art. Athena?: 
 Leake's Topogr. p. 351, and Forchhammer's essay, quoted by Smith; Clinton. 
 F. U. ii. 394. rov irfpiiffiffQai — ' that they wauld outlast tk 
 
 war,' Hobbes. 
 
 Chapteb XIV. — (a.) KaraffKfvfi. Cf. ad i. 10, ii. 5 ; Isocr. Areop. c. 20. 
 KaffaipovvTfs rriv ^vK<t)ffiv—' taking down and carrying into the city {(or 
 iffeKOfii^otno refers to this sXso) the wooden framework and weather'boardiruf ot 
 their houses.' Part of the ravaging an enemy's land consisted in the destruction 
 of these buildings. Cf. Herod, i. 17, who, speaking of Alyattes' invasion of the 
 Milesian territory, says, otK^/iara rh iirl ruv aypwv oihf KaTffiaWfv, oirf 
 ivfTrifivpTj, oSre ddpas dircVira. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii, 2. 16, to. airb ruv oIkiuv 
 ^vKa, and vii. 4. i. E6fioiay. Cf. i. 23. 114. tcij 
 
 vi\ffovs rhs iviK€tfi4va5. Atalanta (which they afterwards fortified as a 
 garrison, c. xxxii. a), the Petaliae, ^gina, Macris, &c. kvaffraffisl 
 
 (what precedes), /leTovao-Too-iy, ii, xvi., 'a breaking up of their est aid ishments anil \ 
 removing elsewhere,'' so vii. 75 ; an unusual sense, copied by Dion Cass, and 
 Appian. B. Its usual application in Herodotus is to the removal of the inhabi- 
 tants of a conquered city to the country of their victors, and their replacement 
 by settlers sent from their own country, as in the case of JEgiua. by the Athe-| 
 nians, Samaria by Shalmanezer, &c. Cf. Herod, i. 177, vii. 118, ix. 106, &c. 
 
 Chapter XV. — (a.) iripuv p,a\\ov. For ^ trtpois. Cf. K. ad i. 85. b- 
 €{€<rTi y rifx7y juaAAoj/ irfpatv. Karh ir6\€ii. Strabo, ix. 609, enumerates' 
 
 twelve. Tpvrav€7a — * town halls.'' The irprrraveiov was the mark of a 
 
 di."?tinct state or independent civil community. The common altar-fire was 
 here (hence derived by some from irvphs rafieTov), and stood in the same relation 
 to the national as the ecrria to the domestic home (Liv. xli. 20, • penetrale 
 nrbis;' Thirl wall's Greece, iii. 122). 
 
 (h.) 'EKfva-ivloi. Cf. Platon. Menex. p. 339 ; Plut. vit. Thes. p. 49. 
 t'lSotr/Aeuo-f — 'came to the. throne,' lit. ' became king: Cf. Herod, ii. 2. 
 ^ith. rov ^vverov. Cf Poppo. ' Who to political sagacity added great power: 
 Cf. Dion. Hal. Ant. p. 82, fxera rov Spaa-rrjpiov Kal ^vv€t6s. r^ 
 
 ^ovKivri]pia. The centres of municipal government, town councils, so to speak, 
 though of course the analogy is imperfect. vefio/xepovs 
 
 (V. ad i. 58, ii. 27) — * continuing to possess and occupy, and reap the fruits,' rovs 
 Kopvovs <p4p(iv. The union effected by Theseus had no relation to residence, 
 Imt merely incorporation into one political body, Athens being made the 
 Mipreme seat of government. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99. 
 \\}VT(Kovvrwv. Strangely explained by Dr. Arnold -ds.—' contributing to it: 
 It surely refers to ' forming one portion of a political union or state by paying 
 joiut taxes to it.' So Kriiger, ' staatlichen Genossenschaft.' Cf. iv. 76. 
 {vvoiKia. Hudson considers this festival to be equivalent to the fieroiKia, 
 it'lebrated on the loth day of Hecatombaeon. [Or perhaps we may say more 
 oorrectly that what in Thucydides' time was called ^vvoiKia was called in Plu- 
 tarch's days iJLfToiKia. Plut. in vit. Thes. xxiv. i.] It was originally distinct 
 from, but afterwards identical with, the Panathenaea. 
 
 (c.) S-nfior€Krj. K. Cf. Bockh, i. 228. SrjfiorfKrj, that for which the 
 ^iXis furnishes the victims ; Brf/ioriKd, for which the ^tj/jlos (or Stj/aoj). 
 'OKvfivlov. The Olympeium was one of the most ancient buildings in Athens, 
 and was said to have been founded by Deucalion (Pans. Attic. 1. xviii. 8). 
 Pfisistratus raised a magnificent structure on the site of the old building, but 
 (lid not live to finish it. After the expulsion of Hippias it remained untouched 
 lor 400 years ; the prejudices against the Peisistratidae, as Mure observes, 
 probably operating against its completion. Antiochus Epiphanes contemplated 
 its completion, but it was eventually finished by Hadrian, who was present at 
 its dedication. (Spartian, in vit. Hadr.) It contained a chryselephantine statue 
 of Jupiter. Its site is still indicated by sixteen gigantic Corinthian columns of 
 white marble, to the S.E. of the Acropolis, near the right bank of the Ilissus. 
 They are the largest columns now standing in Europe. [See the authorities in 
 I'mmer, ii. 324, and Smith, Geog. Diet. art. Athenae, 489.] Cf. Wordswoi-th's 
 ^necce, p. 159. Uvdiov (cf. vi. 54) stood near the Olympeium. Cf, Cramer, 
 II. p. 326. r^y. Surnamed /couporptJ^os. Hudson. ^i' Ai/xvais. 
 
 Limnae was a district south of the Acropolis. Cramer considers this temple 
 identical with the Leneum (ii. 326). Cf. Harpocrat. in v.; Arist. Ban. 218. 
 The Dionysiac theatre stood close to it (Leake, Topogr. p. 54). Poppo quotes 
 '"Schneider De He Scented, -p. ^4.. 'Avdfarrjpiuvi. This festival (distinct 
 
 from the Lenaea and rural Dionysia, Bockh and Wachsmuth) was celebrated on 
 ^he 11th, 1 2th, and 13th of Anthesterion. The 12th {ol x<^es) was the principal 
 day (Wachsm. ii. 254 sq. and 286). Cf. Demosth. c. Neter. p. 1371 ; Schneider, 
 •i-s. ; Clinton, ii. 332; Donaldson's Gk. Theat. p. 132. 
 
 {d.) Kpijyrf . . .'ZvveaKpovvcp. Hudson considers that the epithet cVvcoic, 
 
172 
 
 NOTES ON THUOYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ c hap. 1 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^73 
 
 f 
 
 is not to be taken literally, but as equivalent to iroXvKpoUtp (as Cratinus ap. 
 Tzetz. chil. viii. 184, calls it), as Virgil says of Timavus, which has but seven 
 mouths, 'unde per ora novem' {JSn. I 245). So Schol. ad Arist. Equit. 523, 
 BoodfKdKpovvov (TTona. Harpocrat. s.v. iwfcuc. and \ovrpo<p6poi, where see 
 Valesius note ; Paus. i. xiv. i. ; Plin. H. N, iv. 7, and Bekker's Charicles, ii. 
 460. This fountain of Callirrhoe was the only spring water used for drinking 
 by the Athenians, all the rest being too salt and brackish for that purpose. A 
 fountain near this spot still retains the name of Kalliroi, and Col. Leake says it 
 is still resorted to as the only spot in the neighbourhood furnishing sweet water 
 ( Topoff. p. 47). The natural sources were covered by some kind of building, and 
 fitted with nine pipes, by the Peisistratidae. Enneacrunos was therefore its 
 architectural name, the springf being called Callirrhoe (Stat. Theb. xii. 629, 
 ' Callirrhoe novies errantibus undis'). It flows from a ridge of rocks crossing 
 the bed of the Ilissus, from which it was distinct ; seven of these orifices are 
 still visible, [v. Smith, Gfog. Diet. Athenae, 292 ; Cramer, ii. 338.] 
 iKflvot—' the men of that day.' x6\is. K. cf. v. 18. 10 ; Arist. 
 
 Lt/s. 245, 487. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — oZy. Epanalepsis, from ch. xiv. t^ ^iri iro\i» 
 
 must be taken adjeetively — ' the long-protracted residence.* otKiifffi- 
 
 ' in the then prevailing manner of living, in their own townships in the country, 
 the. Athenians participated.' The unusual construction of a dative after 
 fieruxov instead of a genitive, is variously explained by commentators ; but 11 
 dative after the uncompounded fiera in the sense of local union or community 
 is common enough (Jelf, § 636. ii. b, and § 642 b.). Poppo produces two 
 instances of a dat. after KoivtopfTv from Demosthenes, and the Scholiast simply 
 explains it as an antiptosis, which is most natural. Baver would supply tlie 
 preposition 4y, * had a share in.' Abresch. says it is an independent dative = 
 * quod attinet ad.' Kriiger supposes an omission. -iravoiK-r\ai (f, — ' most oj 
 
 them having been born or bred in the country, or having settled and lived there, 
 they and all their families: Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 122. ou ^o5t«s. 
 
 A litotes — ' with great reluctance: fifravaffrdffcis. An idiii 
 
 exactly conveyed by the French * demenager: ovcjArj^x^Tcs— 
 
 ' wieder hergestellt: K., implying that they had * re-collected round them all their 
 ancient comforts and villas, farm and out-buildings, household furniture and 
 decorations, farm stock,* &c. Cf. Isocr. Areop. 20. ««p<i. as 
 
 Thirlwall remarks (u. s.), * though the incorporation of the Attic townships had 
 for ages extinguished their political independence, it had not interrupted their 
 religious traditions, or effaced the peculiar features of their local worship: Bl. 
 compares Aristoph, Pax, 574, h lair ay implies 'changing their hme, 
 
 as well as their way of life: 
 
 Chapteb XVn. — (a.) olKiitms — *had dwellings of their own to go to: 
 The wJ^le number of houses in Athens has been reckoned at about ten thousand. 
 Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 3. 24 ; Mem. iii. 6. 14 ; (Econ. viii. 22. Most of these 
 were small and incommodious (see Bekker's Charicles, quoted above), none 
 above one story high, constructed either of a framework of woo<l {^vKuffis) or of 
 unburnt bricks. Even those of Themistocles, Aristides, and Cimon, were very 
 
 ordinary buildings (Demosth. c. Arisfocr. p. 689 ; Olynth. iii. p. 35, 6). Their 
 insignificance is shown by the small prices they fetched, i.e. i.om three or 
 five miuae to 120; fifty minge was a considerable price (Bockh, P. E. p. 66). 
 The influx of a rural population (Aeharnae alone furnishing probably a popula- 
 tion of 12,000, not including slaves) into a city already containing 120,000' 
 persons according to Clinton, or 192,000 according to Leake, must have been 
 most distressing. Cf. Clinton, F. H. ii. 387, Leake, p. 618, and Bockh, p. 30, 
 who fixes the population of the city and harbours at 1 80,000 (Smith, art. 
 Athens, p. 622). rb. ^prjixa — 'places vaid of building: 'E\€vffiviov. 
 
 The temple of Demeter and Persephone, where the lesser Eleusinian mysteries 
 were celebrated (Paus. Att. xiv.). It probably stood in an island of the 
 Ilissus, a retired spot, where foundations are still discernible (Leake, p. 115 ; 
 Cramer, ii. 339). rh Ue\a<ryiK6v. A spot originally inhabited 
 
 by the Pelasgians who fortified the Acropolis, and from which they were 
 expelled because they plotted against the Athenians. It was applied not only 
 to a portion of the walls, but a space of ground below. It is placed by Leake 
 and most authorities at the N.W. angle of the Acropolis, the south side being 
 called Cimonium (Smth, Athense, p. 266; Cramer, ii. 332, and cf. Schol. 
 Arist. Av. }s33; Herod, v. 64, ii. 51, vi. 137; Paus. i. 28. 3; Thuc. iv. 109; 
 Heysch. V. U(\a(ryiK6v, and Smith, art. Pelasgi. apy6v — 'unoccupied' 
 
 Grote, vi. 173 ; 'untrodden,' Thirlw. iii. p. 123. i^^K-fjdri — 
 
 ' was blocked up with buildings — ' impletum fuit babitaturis,' Bav. Cf. Soph. 
 (Ed. C. 27 ; Reissig. 
 
 {b.) yfvfordai. Sc. Bokovo'iu. K. Karfo-Kevdaavro — ' richteten 
 
 mh h'duslich ein,' K. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 37, and see Arnold's note. 
 rwv Tfix^^v. Cf. Arist. Eq. 793 (Bergk), oIkovvt iv rah iridaKpaiffi Koi 
 ywaplois Ka\ irvpyi^iots. 
 
 (c.) 4x^P'n<rf — 'fassfe,* K. Properly applied to the measure of content of 
 a vessel. Herod, i. 51, 6 fxkv xpv(Tfos {Kpifrrip) . . . xwpfW hfjuipopias k^aKoaiovs. 
 Xen. Anab. i. v. 6. Oa-r^poy S-f]—' at a time considerably subse- 
 
 l^i^nt: Karayeifidfieyo i — ' having portioned out among themselves: 
 
 ivfifidxavs — e.g. Thessalians, &c. ; v. ii. 22. 4y rovr^ 
 
 TTctpaffKfvTJs. See Jelf, § 442. 6, and Arnold's notes on viii. 5. i. 
 
 Chapter XVIII. — (a.) Olvo4]v. When the name of a place is defined as 
 belonging to such a country governed by a preposition, the country usually has 
 tiie article, the place not. So i. iii, iffTpdrevaay rrjs ©eaa-aXirfs 4irl ^dptraXov. 
 K. This was not the demus near Marathon, but a town near Eleutherae, and 
 on one of the roads from Attica into Boeotia. It belonged to the tribe Hippo- 
 thoontis. (Herod, v. 74 ; Harpocrat. in v. ; Sophocles ap. Strab. viii. p. 375.) 
 Its exact site is not agreed upon by topographers. Sir W. Gell identifies it 
 ^ith Gypto Castro. Grote (vi. p. 170, n.) supposes Archidamus marched over 
 ^eraneia, and fell into this road in order to receive the Boeotian contingent. 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 28. Cf. Plat. Prolog. § i ; Wesseling ad Diod. Sic. 
 *^' °°- (fypovpl^ — • a garrisoned fort: Archidamus probably 
 
 thought it unsafe to have so strong a fortress on his rear or flank. 0. 
 OT<)T€ KaraKdfioi. The optative of indefinite frequency. KaroKaix^dyeiv is 
 used without the accusative in the sense of befalling. 
 
174 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Cbap. 21.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 175 
 
 (h.) SWws. Either simply 'in other wat/s: or better still, * fruitlessly, to 
 no purpose," ' in a way other than the right! See Buttman, Lexilogus, and L. 
 and S. Lex. on the Homeric use of the word. {ui/o7«7^ is variously 
 
 explained by the commentators : i. ' /« bringing the war about,'' Poppo. 
 2. ' While the war was a-gathering' Dale. 3. ' /» the congress held to deliberate 
 on the war,' B. The first seems the best interpretation ; it may include the getting 
 together everything necessary or serviceable for the prosecution of the war, 
 such as troops, ships, stores, &c., and the words of Thucydides just below seem 
 to confirm this, ^treiS-fi tc ^vveXeyfro 6 err par 6s. iirinovTj. The 
 
 variety of words used to express the inaction and dilatoriness of Archidamus is 
 noticeable — iirifioirfi, <rxo\ai6Tr}s, Maxfcis, ix€Wr}ffis, Kadf^pa. See the note in 
 Mr. Shilleto's ' Thucydides or Grote,' p. 20, on this ' restless love of change in 
 the use of words and constructions,' and i. 38. c. 
 
 (c.) Sih rdxovs. See Jelf, § 627. i. 3. &.v€7xtv—' held aloof,' 
 
 'kepi quiet.' C. vii. 48. c, viii. 94. b. ; Xen. Hell. i. vi. 14, 
 
 Chapter XIX. — (a.) iraffav Idfav — * having tried every conceivable form nf 
 attack.' Cf. ad i. 109. rov dtpovs Kal rov airov aKfidCovTos— 
 
 ' when the summer was at its height and the com ripe,' T.K.A., i.e. the end of 
 May according to Kriiger ; the end of June, Arnold ; the middle of June, Grote 
 and Niebuhr. Col. Leake says the harvest begins about June 10, and does not 
 end before July 20, or the beginning of August. 
 
 (6.) 'EXcuo-Ti/o. Eleusis, though a place of considerable importance, was 
 classed among the Attic derai (Pans. Att. 38, Schol. ad Soph. (E. C. 1050), and 
 belonged to the tribe Hippothoontis. The hero eponymus had a chapel in 
 its vicinity. It had a citadel of some strength, comprised within the precincts 
 of the temple of Dimeter (Liv. xxxi. 25). It is now an inconsiderable village, 
 retaining its name of Lesina. The temple which had been burnt by the Per- 
 sians was rebuilt by Ictinus, the architect of the Parthenon, under the adminis- 
 tration of Pericles, The bust of the colossal statue of the goddess is now in tlif 
 British Museum, having been brought to England in 1802. ■ Cramer, ii. 360, 
 pq., and the authorities there quoted. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 81. 
 epiiffiov irf^lov took its name from the demus Thria or Thrio, ii. 21 (v. ad 
 i. 1 14). Cf. Herod, viii. 7. 65 ; Athen. vi. 66 ; Strab. ix. p. 395. It was about 
 three miles N.E. of Eleusis. 'Pflrovs. These were two salt lakes 
 
 near the shore, on the right bank of which ran the sacred road, the ancient road 
 from Eleusis to Athens. They were supposed to come from the Euripus of Chalcis, 
 and being sacred to Dimeter and jPersephone, none but priests were allowed 
 to fish in them (Pans. Att. 38 ; Gell ap. Cramer, ii. 356). * The straight road 
 from Thria led directly to Athens, across the ridge of Mount iEgaleos ; l>ut 
 Archidamus turned off to the westward, leaving that mountain on his right 
 until he came to Kropeia, where he crossed a portion of the line of JEgAhoa 
 over to Acharnae. He was here about seven miles from Athens.' — Grote, vi. 175- 
 Aiyd\€a)v, now Scaramanga, a continuation of Corydallus, rises above the coast, 
 stretching northwards into the interior of Attica. From its summit Xerxes 
 watched the battle of Salamis (Herod, viii. 90 ; Demost. c. Timocr. p. 466). 
 Kf)«ir etas. For the old reading KfKpoirias, cf. Schol. ad Arist. Equit. 80. 
 ^Ax^pyds. Acharnae, the chief of the Attic demi, with a population of 
 
 12,000, furnished 3000 hoplites to the Athenian army. It was about sixty 
 stadia from Athens, which agrees with the situation of Menida, where extensive 
 ruins are still visible. It gave its name to one of the gates of Athens, the Pylre 
 Acharnicae. It was flourishing as well by its corn, wines and olives (the ir\% 
 too, was said to have been first discovered here, Pans. Att. 32), as by its pecu- 
 liar abundance of charcoal burning from the forests of ilex on theneighbourino- 
 hills. The Acharnians were celebrated for their sturdy valour even in the time 
 of Pindar, 'Axdpvai fvdvopfs, Find. Nem. ii. 25. Cf. Aristoph. Acharn. pass, 
 and [with Elmsley's note), v. 179 sq. : 
 
 Trp€(r$vTcd rivfs 
 *Axo-pviKoi, cTTtTTTol y4povTfs, irpivivot, 
 arfpdfjLovcs, Mapadcovofidxai, (r<p€i/5d/jLvivoi. 
 
 Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 85, sq. 
 xiii. a. 
 
 Kad€C6fievoi h. Cf. ad c. 
 
 Chapter XX. — (a.) Tvaixri — ' design* ' object.' 4<t$o\^. The 
 
 usual meaning of this word in Herodotus and Thucyd. is 'mountain pass' 
 (Herod, vii. 172. ^; Xen. Anab. i. 2. 21, Hell. v. 4, 48; Thuc. iii. 112, 
 iv. 83. 127). In a doubtful passage, viii. 31, it means apparently 'an attack.' 
 Does it mean here ' in this invasion of Attica ' ? If so, it is, Poppo observes, an 
 unusual instance of the dative of ti/ne, like the Latin adventu, discessu, &c. 
 vforriri. Abstract for concrete, as c. 8 and 21. irepttSetv r/nidriyai. 
 
 See Jelf, § 687. i, where the notion is not of permitting something already 
 existing, but something which may exist. 
 
 {h.) h.iri\vrt)(Tav avr^. The more usual construction of this verb is with 
 t'rand ixi, with an accusative, as iv. 77. 89, vii. i. 22. 35. It occurs again 
 with the dative, iv. 78. c, xai rore Tropevofievcp avr^ aTravrfiaayTcs, P. 
 iwiT-fjSeios 4v(TTpaT0Tr€^€v<Tai. Cf. Jelf, § 677, 2, obs. I. The object of 
 the infinitive made into the subject of the verb. So Herod, ix. 7, 4'niTT}lbewTaT6v 
 i<m» ifiimxeaaadat rb Qpidaiov xeSto*'. So Eurip. Photn. 739 ; Hippol. 369 ; 
 Herod, vi. 102. 
 
 {c.) ardffis — 'a division* (of feeling or counsels). Cf. iii. 2. c, iSla SvSpey 
 toTu vrdffiv, and vii. 50. So Kara ^vCTdceis in the following chap. In c. icxii. 
 It has a somewhat different meaning, q. v. Cf, .Ssch. P. F. 200. 
 
 Chapter XXI. — (a.) UX^io-roaydKra. Cf. ad i. 107 and 114. 
 ®P'«C<' Cf. ad c. xix. and i. 114. ficfivrififvoi 3t€. Jelf, 804. 8. 
 
 After the verbs fiffivrifxai, olSa, hcovu, et similia, instead of a substantival clause 
 introduced by Sri or ws, there not unfrequently follows an adverbial clause with 
 "^^ (Poet. ^fio$, TiviKa). This appears to arise from some ellipse, as rov xp^^ov, 
 ^hich the very notion of memory implies (Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 8 ; Plat. Menex. 
 P- 79 i> ; Soph. Gid. Tyr. 1 133)- So sometimes in Latin, memini quum darem ; 
 ^Kii quum prodiret ; audivi eum qumn diceret. The use of ci after such verbs 
 ii8 faw^^ft,, &c., is similar. ffrpartp. Jelf, § 604. 2. With verbs 
 
 f'l coming and going, that whereby the person comes or is accompanied is in 
 lae dative ; generally collective nouns, as arpar^, <rr6\a), irA^Oet, or their com- 
 plements, as arparicorais. Cf. Thuc. i. 102, Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 17. , 
 
 I 
 
176 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Rook IT. I Chap. 23.] 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 "^11 
 
 Teto-e^i'ot TTji' h.va.x^9t\<^^v. See Jelf, 545. 3. Cf. Time. i. 126, ^irmrpa^. 
 
 (b.) ^vardfffis. Lat. circuli, conciliabula, 'forming tumultuous assemJtlagcs: 
 See Bloonifield's collection of similar passages by later imitators, andc. Ixxxviii., 
 ai<Te6fifvo5 Sri Kar^ (r<pas avrovs ^vviardfievoi i<po^ovvro. Grote of. Eurip. Heracl. 
 416, Androm. 1077. 
 
 (c.) XP 'JO'/* ^'^ <^ '>"'*• Cf. viii. 1. &pyy\ro. The reading of thp 
 
 best MSS. for Sipfirrro. So unusual a word could not have been admitted ly 
 mistake, and the use of ofryfi in the sense of 'a passionate impulse,' and 
 fxfopyhrws, without any passionate impulse,' i. 122, are quite Thucydidean. 
 T. K. A. Dr. Arnold says these words are added because different persons 
 ran to listen to different prophecies, each choosing those which encouraged his 
 own opinions, or accorded with his own feelings, opydu occurs, though rarely, 
 in the active, K. «»' uKpoairdai. "We must supply iiKpouino 
 
 from OLKpoaffQai. The verb being placed in the dipendent, and not the principal 
 clause, must be supplied to the principal clause in the number and per.son re- 
 quired by its subject. Jelf, § 895. 3. ovk ^Aax^ o-tt/c fxolpav. See 
 eh. xix. sup., note on Acharnse. avqp^Qiaro. So ficrtapos, chap. viii. 
 (KtiKiCov. A mixed idea of blame and reproach, B. * They angrili/ reproached 
 him;' perhaps better, 'reviled him as a coward;' i.e. Cleon and his fellows 
 (Grote, vi. 177). iire^dyoi. Jelf, § 885, obs. 2. The oratio 
 obliqua used to mark that a statement is made, not as by the writer himself as 
 a fact, but as passing in his own or another person s mind,' ' qiiod exerciium 
 non educeret (e mente Acharnensium).' Soph. Trach. 903, KptJ\|;a<r' tavrrju (vda 
 fiil ris flcrlBoi. ^sch. P. V. 203. 
 
 Chapter XXII. {a.) ov rk Apitrra. A mexosh for Kcuci^s (Ppovovm-as. 
 
 iKK\rt<rlav re ovk ivoifi ouSc ^vWoyov. This, as minister of war, 
 Pericles had the power of doing ; cf. c. lix. ^vWoyov -noiiiffas, in ^ iffrpaT-frya, 
 and Plut. Pericl. xxxiii. This power of convoking the ecclesia was shared with 
 the strategi by the prytaneis ; and cf. iv. 118, and Schoman de Comitiis, c. iv. p. 
 62. But besides this power of calling a meeting, the strategus had also the 
 vo'^BT oi prevmiing or postponing those regular meetings which commonly took 
 place at fixed times, i.e. four times in each prytaneia. ^f'>Woyos is the gemric 
 term, i.e. any public meeting invested with an authorised character; iracKriffia is 
 the specijic assenbly. Cf. Grote, vi. pp. 178 and 226. K. quotes Plat. Gorg. 
 p. 456, ^i' iKKXria'Kf ^ iy AAAtj rivl lvW6y(f, rod /x^. See Jtlf, 
 
 § 749- *• 
 
 (h.) j8paxf*a = <^At*fp«- Cf. not. ad i. 14. c, *a slight affair of cavalry! So 
 
 St. John vi. 7, %va tKoffros ainuv ^paxv ti \ai8j7. ^pvylois. The 
 
 site of this spot is unknown (Cramer, ii. 415). T.K. A. supposes x^P'** ^^ 
 
 be understood = ' the dry plains or tracts.' (ppvyios = fTjpds, Hesych. 
 
 TfKos. The regular tc'Aos was 2048 men, T. K. Arnold says, sed qujpre, 
 
 ef(raaKo7s. On the ancient connexion between Athens and Thessaly, see 
 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99, Thuc. i. 102, 107. Pausanias saw the graves ol 
 
 these Thessalians, near Athens, on the side of the Academy (i. xxix. 5, Grote, 
 
 Ti. 179). av€i\ovTOy 'carried of their dead.' This fact shows the 
 
 equality of the conflict. 
 
 (c.) Aapi(Ta7oi. The older Attics prefer the single tr in the spelling of 
 this and similar words. napdaioi—Ilvp daioi. These two names 
 
 are probably identical, or perhaps one ought to be expunged, the Magnesian 
 tribe mentioned by Steph. Byz., as quoted by BL, having no connexion with 
 them, Poppo says. Gott. would read TlapaXioi, but these were a Melian race. 
 Strabo (ix. 5, 14) mentions Pyrasus, a sea-port of the Thessalian Thebae. Cf. 
 P., K., and Bl. It is mentioned by Homer, //. ii. 695, and Col. Leake thinks 
 its ruins are now to be seen near Kokkina. (Smith's Dtct. of Geog. art. 
 Pyrasus). arda^ws^ ' each from {i.e. delegated by) his ovm particular 
 
 political party .' That the oligarchs should have sent one is, as Kriiger says, 
 eurprising, and therefore Thucydides mentions it. MeVwi/. Poppo 
 
 says this is not the Menon mentioned by Xenophon and Plato. See his note 
 on Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6, though there is no chronological argument against it. 
 
 Chapter XXIII. — (a.) dpavres. Applied to the movement from their 
 quarters of both land and sea troops, usually of the latter (where an ellipsis of 
 tA IffTia used to be supplied) ; as applied to the former, cf. h. 1. c. 98, iii. 96, 
 iv. II. Twj' Siifiwv Tivas dWovs. For the names of the demi in 
 
 this district see Smith, art. Attica, p. 329. ndpvri6os. The 
 
 loftiest mountain range in Attica, branching off in an easterly direction from 
 Cithaeron. These two high and in many places inaccessible mountain ranges 
 formed the impassable barrier of Attica. Parnes terminates on the sea-coast 
 above the promontory Rhamnus. Its modern name is Nozia. It is from 
 Parnes that Aristophanes evokes his clouds (Nub. 323). 
 
 Bpi\r}(r(Tov. This mountain chain is identified by Col. Leake, Dodwell, and 
 other topographers, with Mount Pentelicus (Pans. i. 32. i), which was perhaps 
 its lat€r name. It is still called Penteli or Mendeli, from the ancient demus 
 U(VTf\Ti (Steph. Byz. s. v.). Its magnificent marble quarries are well known. 
 The whole range is known by the modern name of Turko Vonni (Gell's Bin. 
 p. 68). This plain, ravaged by the Lacedaemonians, is probably the celebrated 
 Diacrian table-land ; and was important, not only from its own fertility, but 
 also as being the route by which the corn from Euboea was imported into Attica, 
 [v. Smith, Atti/;a, p. 322; Cramer ii. p. 400 sq.] ras cKarhv 
 
 "a us. Cf. c. xvii. c. In c. Lxvi. of this book we find the same relative numbers : 
 1000 hoplites to loo ships. ififxelyavr^s. The invasion lasted 
 
 thirty or forty days ; and the statement of Thucydides that they stayed as long 
 as their provisions lasted, contradicts Diodorus' account that the coasting ex • 
 pedition round Peloponnesus recalled the Lacedaemonians. Diod. xii. 42. 
 offow— '/or such time as they had: Cf. Livy, xxiv. 11, 'cum triginta dienim 
 coctis cibariis.* ovx V'^fp i(r4$a\oy. In order to commit the 
 
 greater depredation, Schol. TlpuTrSv. Oropus was a town near 
 
 the sea-coast in the vale of the Asopus, and in the debateable land which was 
 so long an object of dispute between the Athenians and Boeotians. Though 
 properly in Bceotia, as the Diacrian range of hills was the natural boundary of 
 Attica, Oropus from very early times was in the hands of the Athenians. It 
 ^as a place of great importance to them, as keeping open their communication 
 ^ith Eubcea, which otherwise could only have been effected by doubling Cape 
 ^uniura. In b.c. 412, the Boeotians became masters of it (Thuc. viii. 60), and 
 
 K 
 
ijS 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 25.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 179 
 
 ten years after removed the site of it seven stadia from the sea. Of this latter 
 town the ruins are visible at Oropo ; of the ancient seaport at Scala. In 
 mythological times it was celebrated as the spot near which Amphiaraus was 
 swallowed up with his chariot and horses. Tie ipaUi) v. Grote 
 
 prefers the reading TpouKriv (vi. 189), and Poppo admits it into his text. 
 Cramer seems also inclined to it (ii. 273). See the whole question discussid 
 in the Pkilol. Mus. i. 193, in connexion with the passage, Thuc. iii. 91. But 
 all the best MSS. have ndpaiK-fjv, without variation ; and Steph. Byzant., the 
 chief authority for the change, has clearly misquoted the passage ; the state, 
 too, of the MSS., especially of that part of Steph. Byz., is excessively corrupt. 
 
 Chapter XXIV. — (a.) <pv\aKds. Not 'guards,' <pv\aKas (as Arnold 
 renders it), but ' estahliahcd garriaons on the coasts, and stationed blockading or 
 guardships off the shore' ' The Athenians made arrangements for placing 
 Attica ia a permanent state of defence both by sea and land.' — Grote, vi. 185. 
 ;(;(X<a raXavra . . . i^aipera. ' They set apart a thousand talents out of the 
 treasure in the Acropolis as an inviolable reserve, not to be touched except ou 
 the single contingency of a hostile naval force about to assail the city, with no 
 other means at hand to defend it.' — Grote, vi. 185. The sentence of capital 
 punishment was repealed, and the money appropriated to meet the imminent 
 peril of the state in the twentieth year of the war, after the terrible news of 
 the revolt of Chios (cf. viii. 15). It is amusing to see the contradictory con- 
 clusions as to the bsirbarism of democratical governments drawn by Mitford 
 and Grote from this statement of Thucydides (v. Grote /. c.) 
 
 {h.) iTri>i>-n<pi(Trj. Cf. ad i. 87. Any one might move the question (cfirr?), 
 but only one of the ten proedroi, i.e. the president for the day, could put the 
 question to the vote, Bl. Kipflv. Cf. ad i. 143, viii. 15, with 
 
 Arnold's note. v-rjir'n = vavTiK<f. So iv. 85. d. 
 
 ddvarov (-nfilay. In this connexion Kriiger observes Odvaros stands without 
 the article. Jelf, § 580. i. Tpit\pdpxovs. Here, 'men tocommand 
 
 as well as to equip the triremes.' In later times it was not so ; see Smith's 
 Diet. Antiq. s.v. 
 
 Chapter XXV. — {a.) iKet ^vfxfidxoiv — e.g. Acarnanians, Zacynthians. 
 and their countrymen from Naupactus. &\Xa re iKdnovv — 'devastated 
 
 other places in the course of their circumnavigation' Diod. specifies the 
 Argolic Acte (xii. 43 ; cf. Cramer iii. 34). Meduvvv t^j 
 
 AaKwviKri 5 This is added to distinguish it from the Argolic Methone, between 
 Epidaurus and Trcezen, which was occupied by the Athenians in the seventh 
 year of the war (iv. 45). (There were besides three other towns of the same 
 name in Macedon, Thessaly, and Eubcea.) It was, strictly speaking, i" 
 Messenia, a little to the south of the harbour of Pylos. (So Xen. Hell. \'i. ^• 
 19, speaks of the Sphagian islands as being off the Laconian, i.e. the Messenian. 
 coast. Pausanias says it took its name from the rock Mothon, which formal 
 the breakwater of its harbour {Messen.iLxs.x.). The Lacedaemonians established 
 a colony of Nauplians in Methone, who had been expelled from their native 
 city by the Ai^ives (Paus. u. s.). There is a modern Greek town called Modon, 
 with a fortress built by the Venetians, near which Sir W. Gell saw vestiges ot 
 
 a city, with a citadel and some marbles, at a place called Palaio Mothone. 
 (Crell's Itin. p. 54 ; Cramer, iii. 138 ; Smith's Diet. Geog. s.v.). 
 avdpdsirav ovK ^v6vra>v—i.e. 'no regular garrison,' P. 'No portion of the 
 one-third of the available military force of Sparta left at home for the defence 
 of the country,' T.K.A. In joining in this attack on Methone, the Corcyrgeans, 
 as Poppo observes, violated the principles of their purely defensive alliance 
 {enifxaxia, i. 44). This was probably the result of the embassy to Corcyra 
 alluded to in cap. vii. of this book; the invasion of Attica by the Spartans 
 justifying a naval imiption of the allies of Athens into Peloponnesus. 
 
 (b.) BpaaiSas 6 TeWiSos. We are here introduced for the first time to 
 the man most eminent not only among his own countrymen, but among all * 
 whose names are mentioned as connected with this war. We may justly bestow on 
 him the praise of having ' had the head to devise, the tongi.e to persuade, and the 
 hand to execute ' (not a?i?/ mischief, as was said of Cromwell), but every scheme 
 evincing daring enlerprisc, brilliant execution, and the soundest patriotism. 
 From this time until his untimely death there is no single gallant achievement 
 that was not either planned or conducted by him. He was (a rare qualification 
 with his countrymen) ovk aUparos eme?^ (iv. 84), /xdrpios, irpavs (iv. 108), 
 ^paffT-npm us Ttt Trdvra, Kara irdvra ayadSs- irXeiarou ^los AaKiSai/xoyioil 
 y(v6n€vo5, and these noble qualities were of this essential servnce to his country- 
 men, that they inspired a ground of confidence among those whom they wished 
 to win over that he was a fair sample of what might be expected in every 
 Spartan commander : iXiriSa iyKaT4\nr€ fie^aiov &s Koi ol SAAoi rotodrol eiaiv 
 (81). Such are the scattered expressions in which Thucydides, an historian 
 above all others chary of praise, sums up the character of this noble man. The 
 words of Diodorus are simple but expressive— »/eos /uev &u a\KT} 5e Kal avBpeia 
 ^latpfpuv, xii. 43. 8ia^pafi(i>y. He forced his way through the Athenian 
 
 line while their attention was fully engaged with the fort in front of them, 
 andthrew himself into {iffTrlirrei 45) the town, and saved it (Trepifjroi'nffe). 
 iffiriirruv seems to be the technical military term ; in Latin, ' intromittere ' 
 (Liv. xxiv. 13). [No doubt the primitive notion of rerpa/xfievoy is having ' th^eir 
 faces turned towards '—the natural position of all persons intently occupied on 
 anything, but to translate it so literally, as Bl. does, seems childish.] Kriiger, 
 cf. iii. 102, irfpifTTol'naau rh xopiov- iirriv^en. B. quotes Westermann,' 
 
 Qmst. Bern. ii. 26, (who describes these public honours as ' civitatis gratiarum 
 actio erga civem qui munere aliquo in commodum reipublicse bene functus erat,') 
 and a decree preserved in Plut. Fit. x. Bhd. p. 851, Se^Sxeai ry S^y 4iraiviffdi 
 t^movpyov . . . aperris €V€Ka Kal SiKaioffvvris. In addition to these public honours 
 he was probably made ephor eponymus the next September. Cf. Xen. Hell. 
 ii. 2. 10. 
 
 (o.)(rx<^i'T€s TTJs 'HKfias is ^eidv. So ahove, is Medtiurju Tijs AaKuviKrjs, 
 and Thuc. passim. On th6 omission of the article here, the regular construction, 
 [ct.c. 1 8. h.l.] Bl. founds a surely unnecessary theory that *eia and r) ^eia are dis- 
 tinct places ; the former a peninsula, the latter a city. A look at any good map 
 {('■9. Cramer's) will show this to be incorrect. The Athenians, be it observed, 
 *ere sailing northward, purposing to attack Pheia (as is ^tiav shows). From the 
 position of the town, just at the neck of the peninsula, on whichever side of the 
 peninsula Ichthys they had landed, Thuc. words would be correct. But they de- 
 
 K2 
 
i8o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 T)arked their troops on the south side, in what is now called the Bay of Katacolo, 
 which may be described as a xwp^o" aXifievou. When overtaken by the storm, to 
 avoid being caught in this open roadstead, they sailed round the peninsula to the 
 true port of Pheia, which was on the north side (vii. 3 1 ). This is the creek of 
 Pontikocastro, or Pundikocestro, where some vestiges of the Hellenic walls 
 of Pheia are still found. The promontory Pheia of Strabo (viii. 343) lies still 
 further again to the north, and is identified with the modern headland of 
 Skaphidi. Near this is a mountain torrent which flows into the sea, and is 
 probably the lardanus (on which Homer places Pheise, //. vii. 135), and the 
 modern Cardamo. Cf. Xen. Hefl. vi. ii. 19, Hom. Od. xv. 297 (Cramer, iii. p. 
 87, Leake's Morea, ap. Smith, Geog. l>ict. s. v.). Koi\y]s "WXilos. 
 
 * Hollow Elis' was the name originally given t« the plain of the Peneus to dis- 
 tinguish it from the mountainous district of the Acroreia; but as this was the 
 larger and more fertile part, the name was given to the whole north territory, to 
 distinguish it from the dependent districts of Pi satis and Triphylia. No doubt 
 the name of Elis, fdKis, is connected with the Latin Vallis (Smith. Diet. s.v.). 
 av4fiov KaTidvros. K. cf. c. 84, rh vvfvfxa Kar^fi, vi. 18, the regular term for 
 a squall coming sweeping down; so Luke viii. 23, Karf^rj Aa2Xa;|/ dv6>ou us 
 T^v \ifjLVi\v, and Acts xxvii. 14, €/3aA€ nar aur^s tvifxos tv<Pwvlk6s. 
 X 6 iyia^6yL€voi — ' making bad weather of it', as our sailors say. So Acts xxvii. 
 1 8, (r4)o5p«s 8€ xf t/AoCoMeVwi' T]uuiv. irepifirXeov. * Strong winds 
 
 on a harbourless coast induced the captains to sail with most of the troops round 
 Cape Ichthys, in order to reach the harbour of Pheia on the northern side of it. 
 while the Messenian hoplites, marching by land across the promontory, attacked 
 Pheia, and carried it by assault.' —Grote, v. 181. These were the Messenians 
 
 of Naupactus. 
 
 {d.)ava\afxfidvov<ri—'picktfp' ^ toXX^ ifStj CTpaTtti. By 
 
 this time the main body of the Eleians had come to the reinforcement of the 
 men of Pisatis. 
 
 Chapter XXVI. — irfpL For the force of irepl see not. ad i. 14. b. 'To 
 coast round the shores of the Locri Opuntii and Epicnemidii, and keep guard 
 over Eubcea, whence they derived their corn, and where they had deposited 
 their cattle.' kvo^daf is— ' descents' rrjs re irapadaXaffffiov 
 
 Ka\ ep6viov. The grammatical construction is borne out exactly by the geo- 
 graphical position of Thronium, which lies inland at some distance from the 
 coast, on the banks of the Boagrius (Hom. II. ii. 533), twenty stadia from 
 Cape Cnemis, which gives its name to the Epicnemidii (Strab. ix. 426). The 
 town was afterwards enslaved by the Phocian general, Onomarchus. Sir W. 
 Gell identifies its site with a ruin nearLongachi, whercan inscription containing 
 the name was also discovered. (Cramer, ii. 114.) *A\6rii 
 
 lies a few miles to the east of Cnemis, on the coast, in the territory of the 
 Locri Opuntii. Gell discovered its ruins on an insulated hill near the shore. 
 The Locri Ozolae had also a town of the same name. dfiiipovs. 
 
 Cf. L 108, iii. loi. 
 
 Chaptkb XXVIL— (a.) iiv4arr,(rav. Cf. n. ad c. 14. The word impliee 
 not only the expulsion of the -Eginetans, but the occupying their island with 
 
 Chap. 28.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 181 
 
 settlers of their own (KK-npovxoi, iii. 50). These men are of course fiirot/cot with 
 reference to the country they leave — i. e. emigrants, and iiroiKoi to that in which 
 they settle as immigrants. For the Dorian origin of ^gina, see Strabo, viii. 
 375 ; Pans. Corinth. 29. We learn from i. 105, 108, that the Athenians had 
 tjvken seventy of the ^ginetans' ships, forced them to surrender the rest, de- 
 molish their fortifications, and submit to taxation. They now eject the whole 
 population : but not content with this, in the eighth year of tlie war they made 
 a descent upon Thyrea, burnt down the city in which the iEginetans had taken 
 refuge, sacked the whole place, and carrying the survivors in chains to Athens, 
 put the whole number to death in cold blood, Sta tV vpor^pav ad irore ex^pav, 
 as Thucydides quaintly adds, iv. 57. Cf. Xen. HlIL ii. 2. 5. 
 
 (h.) Qvpfav is interesting as the place where the battle took place between 
 the 300 Spartans and 300 Argives, described by Herodotus, i. 82, who, we 
 may observe, uses the plural form of the word, ©upeat. Cf. Ov. Fast. ii. 663. 
 The modern Astro probably represents the ancient town, i.e. the one com- 
 menced by the iEginetans, which the arrival of the Athenians suspended. But 
 the whole subject is of great difficulty. (See Smith, D/ct. s.v. Cynuria.) This 
 district of Thyreatis -was one of the most fertile plains in Peloponnesus, ex- 
 tending about six miles in length along the coast, but never more than three 
 miles broad, being shut in by Mount Parnon. This plain, which belonged to 
 Argolis, is said to have been seized by the Lacedaemonians as early as the reign 
 of Echestratus, son of Agis, circa b.c. iooo, but they were expelled by the Argives, 
 who retained doubtful possession of it till B.C. 547, when the battle before re- 
 ferred to was fought. When the ^Figinetans were settled there, the two towns of 
 Thyrea and Anthene were given to them. It was afterwards ceded by treaty 
 to the Argives, v. 41, and Philip confirmed them in the possession of it. 
 Pausanias, vii, 12, says the border quarrels continued even down to his day. 
 T^ 'A.6T}valuv Sid(popov. Objective genitive — ^ their quarrel with the Athe- 
 nians' ffeifffidv. Cf. ad i. loi. ficdopia. These compound 
 adjectives, K. says, are of three terminations. Cf. iv. 56, where Thucydides 
 repeats, almost word for word, the statement here. 01 S* icnrdp-nffav. 
 These scattered remnants were probably those whom Lysander collected and 
 reinstated in their ancient home after the battle of ^gos Potamoi (Xen. Hell. 
 ii. 2. 5). 
 
 Chapter XXVIII. — vovfitivia Karh o-eXrjrrjj'. The physical new moon 
 not coinciding with the ci\Hl one. toKcl — Hs the received opinion.* 
 
 ^ ^\ios 4^4\nr€. Modern astronomical calculations refer this eclipse to the 
 3rd of August. Had it happened thi-ee months earlier, as Mr. Grote observes, 
 it might have been looked upon as an unfavourable omen, and stopped the in- 
 vasion of Attica (vi. p. 184). Eclipses, together with earthquakes, famines, 
 Kc, were still reckoned among fortuitous natural phenomena, i. 23, and 
 Herod, i. 74, where, though the historian implies the previous calculation of 
 the eclipse by Thales {oZpov irpodefi^vos) he uses the curious phrase, r^v v/xdpijv 
 f^airiiojs vvKTu y^viaQai: and the still more curious passage in Xen. Anah. iii, 
 4- 8, where the inhabitants of Larissa take advantage of an eclipse to escape 
 from the invading army (Xen. Hist. v. 3. 10; Herod, vii. 37, ix, 10; Quintil. 
 Inst. Or. i, 10, 47, ed, Gesner). aarepwv. Heiss states that these 
 
 were Venus and Mars, 
 
l82 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book H. | ^^^^' ^9-3 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 183 
 
 Chapter XXIX.— (a.) Nu/Li^xJSwpoi/ rhv n<50«cw, Sv»pa 'A^STjpfTTjj^. 
 Herodotus (rii. 137) uses these words in exactly the same order, when speaking 
 of Nj-mphodorus as having betrayed Nicolas and Anoristus, sons of Bulis, and 
 Sperthias, to the Athenians. Cf. h. 1. c. 67. (nu0€«, the Ionic genitive of Tlveiis, 
 as the Schol. observes.) Abdera was on the south coast of Thrace, some little 
 distance east of the river Nestus. Kark "A^Srjpa . . . irorofxhv K4<Trov piovra, 
 Herod, vii. 109 (perhaps in e. 126 we may explain 5t' "h&^iipwv ^€wv irora^ihs 
 Nt'tTTos, ♦ flowing through the territory of the Abderites '). Hercules was its 
 mythological, Timesias of Ciazoraenae its historical, founder (Herod, i. 168). 
 When Harpagus was left by Cj-rus to complete the subjugation of Ionia, the 
 Teians, following the example of the Phocaeans, left their country and sailed in 
 a body to Abdera. Fifty years after, the Abderites had the expensive honour 
 of feeding the Persian king on his march to Greece (Herod, vii. 120). Abdera 
 was reduced by Thrasbylus B.C. 408. Though proverbial for the stupidity of 
 its inhabitants, it produced the philosophers Democritus and Anaxarchus and 
 the sophist Protagoras : 
 
 * cujus pnidentia monstrat 
 Summos posse viros et magna exerapla daturos, 
 Vervecum in patri4 crassoque sub aere nasci.' 
 
 — Juv. X. 50. 
 
 Cf. Mart. X. 25. 4. 
 
 2 i T c£ A K rj s . Son of Teres, succeeded his father as king of Thrace, or more cor- 
 rectly of the powerful tribe of the Odrys?e, probably some years before the break- 
 ing out of the Peloponnesian war, as he had so far increased the already extensive 
 kingdom of his father, that it reached from Abdera to the mouths of the 
 Danube, and inland to the sources of the Strymon, thirteen days' journey ac- 
 cording to Diodorus, xii. 50 (Diod. is probably mistaken as to the date of his 
 accession). As he was on hostile terms with Perdiccas, king of Macedon, 
 (having espoused the cause of his brother Philip,) the Athenians, who were 
 also exasperated against Perdiccas for supporting the Potidaeans in their revolt, 
 cultivated the friendship of Sitalces by repeated embassies, and as we see 
 below, conferred the rights of citizenship on his son Sadocus. At the close of 
 this book we have the account of the gigantic but unsuccessful expedition 
 which he undertook against Macedon (ii. 95—101). He afterwards fell in 
 a battle against the Triballi, B.C. 424, and was succeeded by his nephew 
 Seuthes, son of Sparadocus, who was a partisan of Perdiccas (iv. loi ; cf. not. 
 ad i. 57. 59. 61. 63, Dion. xii. 34). Aristophanes alludes to these embassies in 
 his Acharnians, 140 — 150, where the Scholiast says that Sadocus was also 
 known by the names Teres and Sitalces. This enrolment appears to have taken 
 place at the festival of Apiituria ; hence the allusion in line 146. 
 Trp6^€vov. Poppo cf. Wachsmuth, Gr. Ant. i. i, p. 122 ; Thuc. ii. 85 ; iii. 2. 
 
 70. 92 ; iv. 78 ; V. 76, &c. 
 
 (b.) *05pvaais. Herod, (iv. 92) mentions the Odrysae as settled on the banks 
 of the Artiscus, a tributary of the Hebrus. But their territory was afterwards 
 much enlarged. Tham\Tis is said to have been an Odrj^sian, Pans. iv. 33, 
 and Orpheus was their king. iirl 7r\€iov rrjs &\\r}S 0po/c7js— K. 
 
 compares i. ix. c. ical vavruc^ fi/xa ivl ir\4ov tuv 6XKu3V Icrx^^"-^' -^^ 
 
 translates, '■he founded the great kingdom of the Odrysm on a larger scale than 
 
 the other states of Thrace.^ avrSj/ofiov. Cf. c. 96 (b.) where he 
 
 specifies the Dii: the koI signifies /or all thut, Qiotwithstanding. 
 
 irpoff'{)Kfi ouSe'i/ — ' has 910 connexion with.* So ot TrpoarijKovrcs and al rrpoffi]. 
 
 KQwrai, c. xxxiv. 6. rrjs avrrjs @pdKy\s — ' they did not coins from the 
 
 same part of Thrace,* K., who compares ir6\€dos rivos ehai, Xen. Anab. vii. iii. 19 
 
 (Plat. Apol. xxix. e. ; Prot. 316). AavXlcf.. The more ancient name 
 
 ^as Daulis (Strabo, ix. 423), afterwards changed to Daulia, which is retained to 
 
 the present day. The signification, ' thick forest,' seems to point to some such 
 
 derivation as Sa-^Ar;. Cf. Horn. E. ii. 520 ; Liv. xxxii. 18. There was, we may 
 
 o1)serve, another Daulia in lUyria, spoken of by Homer as a Phodan town. Cf. 
 
 Paus. X. 4, 5. For the occupation of this district by Thracians, see Miiller's 
 
 dmans,\.^', Wachsmuth's Ant. Gr. Introduction; Paus. i. 41 ; Strabo, ix. 
 
 Fnan using the words ai yw at kcs we may infer that Thucydides was aware 
 
 of the variation of the legends in the story of Itys. Homer, in the well-known 
 
 passage in the Odyssey [v. i.] makes Aedon wife of Zethus, and daughter of 
 
 Pindareus. The words AauAias opvis do not occur in any extant Greek 
 
 atthor of a date prior to Thucydides (Poppo), though the allusions in later 
 
 voters are very common. As Grote observes, i. 265, 'Neither the archaeology 
 
 of Attica, nor that of its various component fractions, was much dwelt upon 
 
 by the ancient epic poets of Greece.' Grote quotes the passage referred to 
 
 above. (Hom. Od. xix. 523 ; ApoUod. iii. 148 ; JEsch. Supp. 61 ; So^ph.. Elect. 
 
 107; Ovid, Metam. vi. 425, sq. ; Hygin. Fah. xlv.) There is probably an allu- 
 
 sicn to the myth in Hesiod, Op. et Di. 566 (Gaisf.) iravdiovU &pTo xcAtSc^i/. To 
 
 th«se we may add Paus. i. 41 (who speaks of Daulis as rrjs inrhp Xaipavflas, and 
 
 adds vdXai yap rris vvv KuXov/Mevris 'EWddos ^dp^apoi ra iroWa (pKTja'av), Soph. 
 
 ElKt. 148, and with the Schol. Sophocles and Philocles both wrote a ' Tereus.' 
 
 (.Tsch. Aga?n. 11 52; Arist. Av. 100, 209, 676, with Schol. ; Catull. Ixv. 14, 
 
 ' Eaulias absumpti fata gemens Ityli ' ; Ov. Heroid. xv. 1 54, ' Concinit Ismarium 
 
 Daulias ales Ityn ;' Metam, v. 276, ' Daulia Threicio Phocaeaque milite rura 
 
 cesserat;' Virg. Ciris, 200, * Dauliades Puellae;' Eclog. vi. 78; Georg. iv. 15; 
 
 Albinovan. i. 105, 'Deflet Threicium Daulias ales Ityn;' Senec. Agamem. 671, 
 
 Tliyest. 275.) 5ta roaovrov. ' At so short a distance' from his own 
 
 coontry. P. cf. ii. 89, Si 6\lyov; iii. 21, 51, 5i' iKda-aovos ; 94, Sta ttoAAou ; iv. 
 
 115, ha ir\cl(rTOv; vi. ii., &c. iv* axp^Klc^ — ' with a view to 
 
 mutual assistance / as i. 3. fiaWov f] Bih iroWatv r}fi€pa>v — 
 
 ' rather than amongst the Odrys(S, whose country lay at a distance of many days* 
 
 jouniey.* 
 
 {d.) %x^v • • • iy^vfTo. Either ^v must be supplied from the other clause 
 of the sentence, as implied in kyivero, or by the change in the construction the 
 participle is put for the finite verb. P. Kpdros = hivafiiv. ' Pri- 
 
 musque potens rex Odrysarum fuit.* P. ^we^^K^tv — ' una expug^ 
 
 'nare ; in expugnando adjuvare* B. ^dZoKov. See above, StrdtX/crjs. 
 
 Tf^Kraffriav. The Thracian peltastae were renowned. Cf. iv. 129, 6 (so li. 
 79; iv. 28, 32; iii. 123; V. 6, 10); Arist. Acharn. 160, KaTaTrfKrdcTovTai ri)v 
 Boiwrfoj/ gXTji/ ; Lys. 563, viKT'i)v adonv &(nr€p 6 Tripevs ; Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 2 ; 
 Klmsley ad Arist. Acharn. I. c). 
 
 («.) luvc^ijSao-e — ' reconciled' i.e. from the notion of bringing the parties 
 together. Q4pfiriv. Cf. i. 01. 
 
1 84 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 34.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 185 
 
 Chapter XXX. — (a.) irtpl UeKovdwififfov. From Pheia the Athenian 
 fleet coasted northwards, the coast of Acarnania being probably included in 
 their mission. Naupaetus would be their main station to the north, of course. 
 :S,6\iov, or ^6\\iov — as Colonel Leake and Poppo read, on the authority of the 
 best MSS.— is placed by Cramer on the Acarnanian coast, N. of Astacus, and a 
 little S. of Palsenis, over against Leucas. He identifies it with the modern 
 Selavena : Zavedei representing the ancient Palaerus. It was at SoUium that. 
 Demosthenes convened the Acarnanians, prior to his attnck on ^tolia (iii. 95). 
 And we find the Corinthians claiming it, on the cessation of hostilities (v. 30) 
 TlaXaipevaiv. Strabo mentions this town along with Alyzia (x. p. 459). 
 "AaraKov, said to have been a colony of Cephallenia, lies on the bay nov 
 called Dragamasti, one side of which is formed by the promontory Crithot?. 
 Its ruins are to be seen near the monastery of St. Elias (Leake, North. Greex, 
 iv. 4 ; Cramer, ii. 19). Karh Kpdros — ' by assault' 
 
 (i ) Kf<paWT\via, called by Homer Same, or Samos {Odys. i. 246 ; U ii. 
 634), had the Taphians for its earliest inhabitants. The name of the islml 
 first occurs in Herodotus, ix. 28. The fourfold division of the island ws 
 probably very ancient, since an early legend derived their names from the foir 
 sons of Cephalus, the eponymus of Cephallenia. None of them became of ai)' 
 importance. Same and Proni are on the E. coast ; Crania and Pale on the V. 
 Cf. Strab. x. 455 ; Grote, vi. 182. Karb. 'AKapvaviav — ' gegei- 
 
 uber; K. See Jelf, § 629. i. 
 
 Chapter XXXI. — (a.) irepi rh (pdivSirupov. Cf. Diod. xii. 43, 4. 'T)- 
 wards the close of September.' — Grote. 4s rvv MeyapiSa. 'Adecre 
 
 was proposed in the Athenian ekklesia by Charinus, though perhaps notcarritl 
 to the effect that the strategi every year should swear as a portion of their oah 
 of office, that they would twice invade and ravage the Megarid.' — Grote, "i. 
 184. It appears from iv. 66, that, for several years of the war certainly, ths 
 was actually done — irif^Sixfvoi inrh 'Adrtvalwv ry iroAt'/ity act kuto. €tos ckcut'dv 
 3\s 4<T^aLKK6vrwv iravarrpaTiS is rrji' x^'P°-^' (C'f- Duk. in loc. Plut. Vit. Peril. 
 p. 306.) The distress and privations endured by the Megarians, remember-d 
 even down to the days of Pausanias (i. 40, 3), were extreme ; as not only thdr 
 com and fruits and even their garden vegetables were destroyed, but ly 
 blockading the port of Nissea the Athenians prevented all importation of pD- 
 visions into the city, which was reduced to a state of famine. See the graphs 
 description in the Acfiamians (SS^-jii) and Pax, 4.Z2. They suffered in a 
 similar manner before the battle of Leuctra from being the allies of Sparta aid 
 enemies of Athens (Demosthenes, c. Neoer., p. 1357). 
 
 (6.) fjifyiffroi/ 5rj. [Cf. iii. 17, a., where Thucyd. mentions the largest 
 display of the naval force of the Athenians preparatory to the blockade -it 
 Mytilene.] ' The junction of the two formed the largest Athenian force that 
 had ever yet been seen together.' — Grote, vi. 183. out of. For the ex- 
 
 pressive force of the pronoun here cf. Arist. Acharn. 507 : 
 
 aAA' ifffjLfv ouTol vvv yt trfpnimfffiivoi' 
 rovs yhp fierolKovs &xvpa twv affrStv \4yu, 
 
 irpiffx^^'^oi. Cf. iii. 17, where we learn that the pay of each hoplite on 
 
 service at Potidsea, was two drachmae a-day. In i. 57 we hear that 1000 were 
 spnt (v. ch. 64), a second reinforcement of 1600 under Phormio. Either 
 therefore their numbers were thinned by the siege, as Poppo thinks, or some 
 had returned, as Kriiger says. Ni«raio edXo). In the eighth year 
 
 of the war, B.C. 424. Cf. iv. 69. 
 
 Chapter XXXII. — 'ATa\dvrri (not to be confounded with the Mace- 
 donian Atalanta, ch. 100, or with the small island of the same name oflf the 
 coast of Attica) lies off Locris, in the Opuntian gulf. A great part of these 
 .\thenian fortifications was swept away by the inundation of the sea in the 
 sixth year of the war, which did so much damage in Eubcea also. Cf. iii. c. 
 89 ; cf. Diod. xii. 44. 59, who even states that this irruption of the sea made 
 Atalanta, which was before a chersonesus, an island. It is still called Talando- 
 Xisi. ippovpiov. ' A permanent garrison was planted, and a fortified 
 
 post erected.' — Grote, vi. 182 ; cf. vi. 75. ipijixT), probably as c. xvii., 
 
 • having only scattered inhabitants.' Some of the cattle of the Athenians were 
 probably transported here. toO /xtj. civ. Xriffrds — 'privateers.' 
 
 Chapter XXXIII. — (a.) Kar€\d€7v, Kardyeiv. The technical phrases 
 for the return and restoration of exiles. Cf. -^sch. Choeph. 3 : 
 
 ^KO) ydp €is yriv r-ftv^c koX Karepxo/iai. 
 
 (viKovpovs — 'mercenaries' P. 
 
 (b.) i^ bfioKoyias — ' from a preconcerted plan agreed wpon hy the parties* 
 i. e. on pretence of surrender. a-Trp oaSoK-firois. Here used actively, 
 
 as 93; iv. 72 ; vii. 29 ; passively, in ii. 5. 61 ; iii. 39. fiiaidrfpov. 
 
 Cf. iv. 31, avax^prjO'^s jSc/Saiorepa ; V. 73, ^ aTTox^p^ffis ov filaios "tiv. 
 
 Chapter XXXIV. — (a.) ry irarpitf vdfxep. Grote, vi. 41, quoting 
 Westermann, says that this custom seems to have been introduced shortly after 
 the Persian war. Pericles had pronounced the funeral oration over those who 
 fell in the Samian war. Some portions of his speech seem to have been pre- 
 •^erved to the time of Aristotle {Rhet. i. 7. 3. 10. 3). Who the originator of 
 this practice was is doubtful. Grote thinks that no one in particular was in- 
 t^-nded by rhv irpoaQivra in the following chapter. The Scholiast says Solon was 
 the author of it ; Weber, Cimon ; Westermann, Aristides ; while other com- 
 mentators fix on Z5^wi5^oc^e5. ra<pas iiroff^ffavro. The indef. plural 
 —' a funeral.' Plato, Menex. c. i, uses the active form, Cf. Isocrates, c. viii., 
 and below § c. ; Pans. i. 29 ; iv. sq. reb oar a. For the whole passage, 
 cf. Hom. II. xxiv. 790 sq. irporldivrai. So 'proponere,' Tac. 
 ^'m. iii. 5. T&v airoyevofiivcov — ' of the departed.' Cf. c. 51, 
 Tas oKo<pvp(rcis reap array lyvofxivcav, and 98, aireylyvero ouSej/ toO arparov. 
 "erod. ii. 136, /nifSeVa twj/ kwvrov airoyevdncvoDV dd^pai. irporptra. 
 Poppo says that this irpSdeais took place sometimes the day before. 
 <T j(j)€p€ ( — ' brings presents (or tokens of respect) ;' n^t to be understood here of 
 such offerings as the Latins expressed by * inf erics.' P. and Weber. 
 
 (A.) KdpvaKas — 'open coffins,' ' sandapilcB.' The Scholiast says cypress 
 ^ood was chosen from its property of resisting corruption — 5ta rh &(mrrov ehai. 
 
i86 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Boo^ IT. ■ (,pj^p^ 2S-^ NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 187 
 
 Cf. Horn. n. u. s.; Miiller's Arch(Pohgy, § 301. ^s cKaaros ^1/ 
 
 <pv\r\s. Inverse attraction of the relative by the transposition of the substan- 
 tive (Jelf, § 824 ; ii. 2). ra>v a<pav(av. Explained by the •ucceeding 
 words, • those whose bodies were not found for burying' {avaipiffiv, cf. xxii. 6; 
 Plat. Mencx. xiv.). For these a cenotiiph was erected. For the grammatical 
 construction, see Jelf, § 5 1 8. b. ^vvfK<p4pf i— 'Joins thefumral 
 procession.' B. says this was not allowed at private funerals. 
 
 (c.) (rrjfia — ' Grabstdite,' 'burning-place.' "rov KaWltrrov irpo- 
 
 aarelov, the outer Ceramicus, between the astu and the academia. Cf. Pans. 
 ii. 5 ; Smith's J>ict. v. Athenae, p. 302. iel— * as a general rule; i.e. 
 
 ever since the first establishment of the custom, with the exception of those 
 who fell at Marathon {iv Mapaduvi, where observe the omission of the article), 
 and the case of Tellus, mentioned by Herodotus, i. 30, who was buried at 
 i:ieusis; probably in the war against Megara (see Turner's note ad loc). 
 Herodotus says also (ix. 85) that those who fell at Plataea were buried on the 
 spot. -pp-qficvos vvh rrjs Tr6\(ws — ' bj^ the senate.' Plato says, 
 
 Menex. C. i., iupiKSix-qv vphs rh BovXfvriipiov, Trvedfievos Srt rf $ov\^ /xcAAet aipuadu 
 S(ms 4pu iwl roLS airoQavovai- Ta<pcLs y^p oJada ^ri fitWovffL irotcTj/. ts &v. 
 
 Cf. Jelf, § 829. 4. /i^ a^vvfTos. Cf. c. xiv. fierh rov ^vi/(tov Ka\ 
 
 Awards, and c. Ixv. o|ici<r€i. Cf. ad i. c. 69. For the difference be- 
 
 tween a^iuxTis and a^iwfxa, see Grote, vi. 233. n. ^ir' avroh— 
 
 ' in thsir praise; ' zu Ehren derselben' K. 
 
 (rf.) dx<JT€ ^vn$al-n avTo7s. * So oft ihnen der Anlass dazu eintrat; K 
 * Whenever circumstances occurred to call forth the necessity of the custom: 
 as e.g. over those who fell at Sphacteria, Delium, Amphipolis, in Sicily, the 
 Hellespont, and Arginusje,' Weber. n e p t k A ^ s . He had before 
 
 pronounced the oration over those who fell in the Samian war (Grote, vi. 
 41), on which occasion the women present crowned him with garlands, like a 
 victorious athlete. Kaiphs i\dfji$av€. Cf. xviii. b., dirSrf irdAe/ios koto- 
 
 \d$oi; Dion -Cass. 393, i-irdrf 6 naiphs i\dfji$av€, 'when the proper time for so 
 doing came.' a-fitiaros. Here used for the actual spot in the 
 
 cemetery where they were buried, not, as above, for the whole sppul- 
 cretum. ^irl TrAelo-Tov rov dfilKov. Cf. ad i. i. b, M nKtlffrov 
 
 avQpititruVy K. 
 
 Chapteb XXXV.— (a.) The principles already laid down concerning the 
 speeches in Thucydides (cf. i. 22. a), are doubtless applicable to the present 
 one ; but this is probably more exactly reported than most of the others, for it 
 is likely that Thuc. heard it delivered, and the matter as well as the character 
 of the speaker would impress it deeply upon his mind. It is one of the most 
 beautiful and remarkable fragments of antiquity, and with its commentaries and 
 its translations forms quite a little literature of itself. The English reader may 
 consult the prolegomena to Poppo's larger work ; Thirlwall, vol. iii.; Grote, vi.; 
 Muller, Hist. Gr. Lit. xxxiv. § 8. Lysias, as is well-known, has also an 
 imrdipios \6yos among his extant orations, but it is of an inferior order of ment. 
 That called ' Menexeuus,' which passes under the name of Plato, is altogether 
 unworthy of him. The ' Funeral Oration ' of Demosthenes is generally acknow- 
 ledged to be spurious. rhv xpoadfvra ry vd/xy— ' Am who attacnea 
 
 to the law; i.e. made the delivery of a speech one of the provisions which the 
 law enjoins. Solon is supposed to have originated the law. It is not clear who 
 made this particular addition ; Kriig. and others refer it to the era of the 
 Persian war. The form of expression seems to be borrowed from Herod, ii. 
 136, vpoareOripai 5e 6Tt roury r^ vdfiCf} t6v^€. &s Ka\hv — as with 
 
 (he idea that it is a right and proper thing ; so editors suppose that hi/ has 
 fallen out after the similar termination, but such omissions are easily paralleled. 
 Some would destroy the ain6p, but it is obviously necessary for the euphony of 
 the sentence. ifio). 5e &v 4S6k€i — ' to me personalli/ (the -position \b 
 
 emphatic) it would have seemed enough; I prefer taking h.v thus to h.v thai 
 with G611., for several reasons, and especially because Thuc. did not write 5ok€7. 
 (pytp Kai. ' We might,' says Kriig., ' have anticipated Koi ^pycf, but koI belongs 
 to the whole clause.' This would greatly have weakened the rhetorical effect — 
 ' As by deeds they have shown themselves good men and true, by deeds too should 
 their honours be set forth.' Ka\ fiij. * Supply KoXhv from apKovv,' 
 
 Kriig., but in English we should also say elliptically, ' a7id not; &c. The sense 
 of the following words is clear, whatever conclusion we come to as regards the 
 regimen of irKXTivBrivai. The Schol. makes it depend upon Kivdvyeveadai, i. e. 
 'run a risk of being believed; implying also the contrary idea, a risk of being 
 disbelieved. Others, connecting it with eS re koX x^'^pof' k.t.X., suppose the 
 whole phrase a sort of epexegesis to Kivdwemtrdai, i.e. * are put in peril, that is 
 to say, of having the belief attached to them dependent upon the fact of whether a 
 man speak well or ill.' There is a third method, i.e. to repeat Kivbvve{ie(rdai 
 twice in the sentence as GoU. does. The Kal between e5 and x^po" might if 
 necessary be considered the adversative and not the connective one, as in several 
 passages in Thucyd., and with re also in one quoted by Kriig. from Dion. Br. 
 an. d. Pomp. i. 7, XF^o^hs erepy XP^^V Tro-paredeh Kpeirroiv re koX x^'^P<^v evpiarKerai. 
 The prep, iv in the sense of perilled upon seems necessary, though some MSS. 
 omit it. Cf. with Kriig. 4v ry Kapl Kivhwevao^iev ; Eur. Cycl. 654, and iv 
 oXXorplais r\/vxa7s KipSwevaofiev, Isoc. iv. 86, and tci. rjfiirepa iv evl avdpl Kivhvvev' 
 (rai, Lucian, Jup. Frag. 4. 
 
 (b.) fier pitas — 'observing the due mean; iv S sc. iv rw aer pitas 
 
 "T«v, says Poppo. He therefore would render, wherein, or the which, if a man 
 does, he finds it difficult even to establish a conviction that he speaks the truth, 
 thus making Z6Kr\ais t^s a\T)Qiias, ' existimatio; or ' opinio veritatis; as iv. 18, 55, 
 ^7- Yet it is somewhat doubtful whether Thuc. would have used language 
 «hich makes the difficulty of obtaining credence look like a result of observing 
 moderation in statements. The words iv $ may be taken differently—' It is no 
 (a^y thing to speak suitably (without any sort of exaggeration), in a matter where 
 nm one's character for veracity is established with difficulty,' i.e. this preliminary 
 difficulty makes exact propriety of speech more hard to attain. The thought 
 seems to be : 'one can hardly get believed at all ; much more then is it difficult 
 foget a fit and proper estimate of the matter believed.' Am, quotes iii. 43, 
 "^i^ ov ^i^aiov hoK'i](r(tas rSov Kfplwv, 'your ill-grounded impression that we are 
 'riUd; Cf. also ii. 84, iii. 45, &c. The word is of frequent use in the tragic 
 ^^ • irphs & $ov\€ra i — ' w?ien compared with what h is wishes are 
 
 (refers to eCvovs) and what he knows to be the case* (refers to ^weiSdos). 
 <«i »"A.€oj/a^€(r0ai has reference to fxer pitas, ' sofarfrmn being moderately ex- 
 
 m 
 
i88 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Boon II. 
 
 Chap. 37-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 189 
 
 I 
 
 pressed are e ven exaggerated.* 5ta <t>e6vov—' through an en lious 
 
 feeling," stands somewhat independently, as we might ourselves place it. 
 vTTfp T^v (avrov (pvffiv — 'that transceiids his own natural powers' 
 
 (c.) Ty ifirtpfidWovTi aitrwv. If, with the Schol., we consider aurwvto 
 refer to iiraiywv, we must translate—* to such of them as are extravagant'— i.e. 
 of the praises. But it is also quite possible to refer airrwv to the general con- 
 ception implied in &v fJKovaev — ' to the surpassing among them ' — i. e. the exploits; 
 or generalizing the antecedent notion still more, we may explain, with Popp.. 
 a &v eKoaros otrrrai Uavhs elvai 5pai/, tr. ' that which goes In-yond what each man 
 fancies himself aide to do.* But that inrip^aWnv should be intransitive, is no 
 objection to the other methods. Cf. vii, 67, ii. 45, and Isoc. xii. 36, rols imfp^ik- 
 Kovffi rS)v tpywv i^iauxrai roi/s K6yovs. Something of the same kind happens with 
 our verbs ' to pass,' and ' to surpass.' In old English, ' Well that passes.' 
 irjSri. This word denotes that the mind pauses, and goes no further. Tr. there- 
 fore, ' straightway— at once, because they envy, without further examination, dis- 
 believe: Eor the sentiment, cf. Sallust, Caiil. c. 3, and Rochefoueault, Max. 
 376, ' Les esprits mMiocres condamnent d' ordinaire tout ce qui passe leur 
 ' port6e.' iBoKifidffdri, a strong word, the one employed to denote that 
 
 after scrutiny a person has been found fit for a public office, and youths for the 
 rights of manhood (Dem. 814, 20), tr. 'tested and approved.* See Hermann, 
 Pol. Antiq. Greece, §123, 12. xp^fa^^M^ k.t.K—' it becomes necessary 
 
 that I, as well as others, in pursuance of the law, should endeavour to meet, as 
 far as possible, your several wishes and opinions.* The 5<J{7j meant is that of the 
 |uj/€i5<i>s oKpoar-^s, as the fiov\r)ffi5 is that of the edvovs. 
 
 Chapter XXXVI.— (a.) "Ap^ofxai . . . irpwrov—' The first thinglshalldo 
 will be to commence from; ^c. This, Krug. admits, may be the meaning, though 
 he observes that even if taken otherwise there is no pleonasm, for a commence- 
 ment may embrace several topics. Cf. 11, 53 («). and vpSnov &pxf(rBai, ii. 68, 
 and Monk on Hippolytus, v. 991. Ka\ Trpiirov hk S.p.a—' and suitaUc 
 
 withai: Such is generally the force of 8^ following Koi. r^v njx'hf, sc 
 
 of first and distinguished mention. ael 01 avrol. See note on i. 2. b. 
 
 iiaSoxv '^'^^ iiriyiyvofjifvav. This may be the instrumental dative de- 
 noting the means of transmission, ' by means of aperpetual successioti; or simply 
 the dative after irap4So<ray, ' to an uninterrupted succession.* GoU. remarks that 
 the words are intended to explain oi airroi, ' virtually the same, that is to say m 
 the sense of a successive body,* but this seems to me hypercritical ; who would 
 ever have supposed that they were actually the same ? 
 
 {b.) irphs ols ib(^avTO—'in addition to what they had received from their 
 ancestors.* Up to the Persian war only Attica. Kriig. oi/K av6vws. 
 
 The editors doubt whethei; this is to be connected with Kry]aap.ivoi. or irpoff- 
 KcniXiirov. Probably the author, in such cases, had no very determinate pur- 
 pose himself, and Poppo's remark may be correct : ' Fortasse dat4 oper& in 
 medio coUocata sunt, ut ad ambo verba spectent.' I would only say that Kriig* 
 objection to connect it with Trpoc. because inappropriate, seems to me unreason- 
 able — • and at the cost of no slight labour have bequeathed it to us as well; is sure y 
 verv intelligible. ra ir\€ia> avrvs. This certainly appears a con- 
 
 tradiction to what precedes. Melhorn, as quoted by Popp., explains tUM ^■ 
 
 territorial extension is intended, but the gradual consolidation of power by policv, 
 and the increase of internal resources. It may be so ; yet Popp.'s conjecture, 
 avrfjv, is worthy of consideration, in which case we should take rk irAelw adver- 
 bially, as in Kara yrjv ra irAetw ^ Kara daXda-aay, i. 13. 
 
 iy T^ KaeeaTTjKvla TJAt/cta— ' the set time of life; i.e. physically speaking, 
 when the muscles are set, and the human frame will henceforth receive no ad- 
 ditional growth, yet has not begun to decay. The use of ixaKiara here is surely 
 inconsistent with the notion that it means to the full, exactly as has been inti- 
 mated before. Cf. i. 13. c. 18. a., for Ka6€(rrr}Kvla. Cf. with Popp. 'composite 
 aetate,' Tac. Ann. vi. 46, and ' constanti aetate, quae media dicitur,' Cic. de Senect. 
 c. 20. avrapKiffrdrriv, used proleptically, wo"T6 ilvai avrapK^ffrar-qv. 
 
 [c.) S)v. Either simply "KQrivaiwv, or more probably 7}fiS)v rwj/Se, /cai rwv 
 raripwu. Poppo remarks, that not only does the orator avoid the old mythical 
 commonplaces about the Amazons, the Heracleidae, &c., but does not even 
 speak of the Persians in the usual rhetorical style. v6\cfxov iiridvTo, 
 
 'an invading war; or 'war of invasion; or more strictly still perhaps, ' war, bar- 
 barian or Greek, when it came upon them; I cannot see the desirableness of 
 reading iro\4fiiov, as Kriig. suggests with others. Popp. quotes trpoaiwv 
 Kivhwos, Lys. p. 99, and * appropinquans terror,' Livy, xliv. 6. The use of 
 ^apfiapos for $ap$apiK6s is not very remarkable. ''EA.A771' for 'E^Xr]yiKhs 
 is more so, and is only found in the poets. Cf. Eur. Iph. T. 334. But when 
 such phrases as "EAAaSa yXaxraav, 2/cu07js olpLos {P. V. 2), are found, we need 
 not suspect anything wrong. fiaKpriyopiiy 4v elSSaiv-^' to 
 
 enlarge upon the subject amongst you, who are well acquainted with it.* * It is not 
 txactly that vfiiv is omitted,' T. K. A. If it is not at all that vfji2v is omitted, 
 the idea of v/juv must be excluded, for as Kriig. remarks, the words are quite a 
 stereotyped formula, ' to enlarge upon topics before persons who know them a^ 
 vdl as ourselves: Cf. i. 68 ; ii. 43 ; iv. 59. Kriig. thinks Pericles could not 
 have mentioned the matter so briefly, but Thucyd. was compelled to do so 
 because he had already treated of it, i. 73. 
 
 (d.) fTTir-nSfva-ecos. T. K. A. interprets 4irir^Sev<ri5, ' the source ; the par- 
 ticular tiTiTTjSev^Ta.' It is not easy to see what he means, but the termination 
 ought to have pointed out to him that the word denotes the actual process which 
 results in iirirrjSevfxaTa — 'from what sort of training: Cf. vii. 86. This is 
 also the Platonic use of the word. Cf. Legg. 853 b. ^\eov 4^ 
 
 <ii>ri. This is the reading of the best MSS., to which supply 01 irarepes Tjfiwv. 
 It must be acknowledged that Bekker's ij\eofx€v supported by some MSS. seems 
 more plausible, for surely Pericles meant to include himself and his contempo- 
 raries. But Popp. retains ^A0oj/ upon the principle in MS. criticism, that 
 the easier reading is not altered into the more difficult, but vice versd. The 
 iwa refers to the general notion of trpdyfiara implied in the foregoing words, 
 and serves itself as an antecedent notion to fiiyaXa. tlpn . . . 4^1 
 
 —' I will proceed to: Cf. ^irl rhv &kKov \6yov I4vai, i. 37. Let the junior student 
 notice how M cum accusativo only indicates primarily up to a certain point, 
 , without connoting hostile intention. Cf. i. 30. a. 54. a. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII. — {a.) oh Cv^oIxtti— 'not emulating: Pericles here ad - 
 Tances the claim of originality, tacitly contrasting the Athenian polity with tho 
 
IQO 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Cuaf. 38.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 
 
 Spartan, which had borrowed so much from Crete, and perhaps other Dorian 
 sources. vapaSe^yfia . . . uvm. On the principle of variety so fre- 
 
 quently mentioned (cf. i. 38, c), for irapa^ely/xan oii<rr} ; the indefinite ris is 
 used as often, when the hearer can readily supply the persons whom the 
 speaker, from motives of discretion, will not mention. ^s irKfiova^ 
 
 oiKiip. These words have occasioned a very elaborate controversy. Some 
 early copyists, unaware that o1k€7 may mean ' is administered,* altered the word 
 in the MSS. (see Bloomf.) into fiKu; and this alteration, though not accepted 
 by the later editors, has had some influence in inducing them to attach the 
 same sense to olKf7v. I cannot but think Am. is right, who interprets, ' h?/ reason 
 of the g&vemmeyit being administered for the benefit, not of the fiv), hut of th 
 many.' Popp. objects that is cannot be for ' the benefit of.' I reply that ^i 
 denotes the object to which a man looks in doing anything, and if in Lis 
 administration he looks to the many, it may be truly said to be conducted for 
 their benefit. The same meaning will hold good in the passages which he 
 quotes, is oXiyovs /jmWov rks apxas ■jrof^o-o/acv, viii. 53 ; ^s d\iyovs KareaTriffav 
 TO T«j/ 2tK. V. 81 — * mith a vievj to the ifiterests ofthefw' and there is no other 
 objection to Arn.'s interpretation of which I am aware. Popp. himself, with 
 G611., ed. 2da, makes the meaning nearly equivalent, as I have said, to what 
 would arise from ^K€t — ' imperium non ad ijattcos redactum esse,' ' the government 
 devolves not upon the few, but the many.' For the passive sense of oXkH see 
 Xen. Cyriyp. viii. i, ^ ; Hellen. vii. i, 3 ; and ^ -k6\is oIku KaKus, Plat. Bey 
 a6z d. btifioKpaTla. The Scholiast's comment is, (ttciSt} <pav\ov 
 
 SoK€7 7} ^fifioKparla Koi Sp^ rovs AaKwvas (T€iivvvofi4vovs iirl rfj api(TTOKpaTia. I 
 think any one acquainted with the Greek notions about * aristocracy' will be- 
 lieve that the Schol. is right. Pericles meant to excuse the name, and to show 
 that the government really was quite as much an apiffroKparla as that upon 
 which the Spartans prided themselves. Plato, or the author of the Memxtnm, 
 plainly savs, ^ yh.p awrrj iroKinia KttL tovto ^v koI vvv ipiffroKparia, /caAf? 5^ i 
 fi€u airr^v STj^oKparlav, d 5e &\\o (p tiv X^^^PV- Isocrates, in a similar spirit, 
 speaks of 'an aristoeratical democracy,' 12, 133, 153; and Kriig. cf. XfD. 
 Mem. iv. 6, la. The words airh apfr^s irporifiaTai explain the nature of the 
 aristoeratical element, as Pericles considered it ought to exist. to 
 
 tdia Sid<popa. This is explained in the most general terms by G611., ?«<? 
 hominibus privatis agenda sunt, and he is probably right. We might tr. 'flW 
 causes of dispute arising among private individuals' rh %<tov, what 
 
 is called Icrovoixlav in the Menextntts, and 'juris sequabilitas,' by Cicero, 
 * equality in the eyes of the law.' Kara Se ttjj' a^iucriv k.t.K. — *M 
 
 with respect to our estimate of men, as each one chances to have a reputation in 
 any particular, he is preferred to an honourable place in the p^iblie service, not 
 because he belongs to a class or caste, but from merit;' the words airb p.(povs refer 
 to the distinctions of birth, such as that assigned to the old Dorian or Heracleid 
 blood at Sparta, to which belonged the Sfioloi or peers. Arnold denies this, 
 because the nfroiKot at Athens were no more eligible to office than the 
 ir€ptolKoi at Sparta. But surely the first must be regarded as external to the 
 Athenian polity ; whereas the latter belonged to the Lacedaemonian, though in 
 an inferior position. It is to my mind a much greater difficulty to make, as hi^ 
 does, a-rh fitpovs mean ' distinctions of fortune or party ;' for in what state have 
 
 191 
 
 not members of different parties succeeded to the administration of affairs? 
 Cf. the English phrase ' class legislation.' On the usage of rh irKiov, see i. 83. 
 
 {h.) Ix«»' 5«— ' if he nevertheless have it in his power, does he find himself 
 hindered,' &c. The construction changes upon the principle of variety (cf. ch. 
 37. a), and proceeds as if Kara ireviav had been Trenjs fAv &v. a^Utiaros. 
 
 This means ' the value at which a man is rated ; ' hence we may tr. ' has he been, 
 or is he ever, hindered by the obscurity of his rank, or social position V 
 iXevdepas 8e k.t.A. 'We not only conduct public affairs in a liberal spirit, 
 but we carry the same spirit into private life, and do not exhibit those absurd 
 jealousies and irksome restrictions which characterise the Dorian states.' I 
 had always translated, ' and in tlie matter of that jealousy which is sometimes felt 
 ahout the daily habits of life between man and man, we regard not our neighbour 
 with anger, if we find him pleasing himself, nor do we fix upon our faces looks of 
 ill-humour, which are annoying enough, though they inflict no actual penalty.' 
 Cf. Grote. Somewhat similar is the general view ; but I perceive Kriig. 
 understands by axO-nUvas, ' spiteful and vexatious penalties,' such as those 
 mentioned by Xen. Hell. iii. i, 9, ia-Tiet) rw aairlBa ^xov t Sokc? kt)Ms iivai ro7s 
 (j-Kov^aiois Tuv AaKcZaifiouiwv. Plato also suggests something of the kind, ij 
 rivas afi6p<t>ov5 'iSpas fj ardaeis, ^ Trapaardaeis els Upa iirl ra rrfs x^pas eo-xara 
 (i/</^. p. 885). In this case \vm1pa5 rp ov^et must mean ' acerbos visu,' and 
 TtpoaTieeixtvoi ^x^-qbdyas, ' infiictiiig penalties.' I prefer, however, the other 
 interpretation, and would with Popp. compare iii. 37, rh kojO' vfiepay aS€« /coi 
 0LifcrL$ov\€vrov irphs aWifhovs. 
 
 (c.) aveiraxOws—'In a manner that is not burdensome,' i.e. vexatious. 
 ha 8 60S — * through a principle of fear,' i.e. a wholesome moral restraint. This 
 is best illustrated by Sophocles, Ajax, 10(53. afpoWet ' obedientia, cujus signifi- 
 cationis, alterum exemplum non novimus.'— Popp. But surely the cognate 
 words all bear the meaning of ' listening,' in the sense of ' attending to,' which 
 is all that is required here. avruu '6a-oi—' and of them especially such 
 
 ^f- Kfiyraij the regular term, 'are enacted.' &ypa<pot 
 
 ""Tcs. The reader will of course consult Arist. Rhet. i. 10, Koivhv Xiyu vd^ov 
 S<ra iypaxpa irapa iruaiv dfxoXoyeladai SoKe7. See Dem. Trepl Srec^. § 317; 
 Plato, %y. 841 b; Soph. Antig. 450; Cic. pro Milone, § 10, de Invent, ii. 
 "' *^- *• aiVxwvrji/ <p4pova-ip—' bring with their violation confessed 
 
 disgrace.' The words ' with their violation ' must be considered as implied in 
 tue whole sentence. But as <l>4povaiv alaxvvnv is not revermtiam effictre in its 
 ordinary usage, Meyer would here interpret it pudorem, i.e. inf amice timorem, 
 fhich is perhaps as unusual, for altrx^vni can scarce mean more than a 'sense 
 of shame.' 
 
 Chapter XXXYIII.— di/a7roi5Aay — somewhat archaic for avairavo'eis, re- 
 Y^'^htmits, or recreations. Cf. c. 75, Kar' avairavXas, 'in relief parties: 
 priig. adds that the word is also used for 'a place of recreation;' and 
 quotes Plato, Legg. 653 d. We may add Arist. Bana, 113. tt; 
 
 y»'«Mp. The Schol. explains tt? V'i/xP ^ t^ ^vvia^i. In the first case it is 
 ueordmary dative—' to the mind;' in the second it is the instrumental dative, 
 ''>!/ our wisdom.' kySxri fi4y 76. This form of expression seems 
 
192 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 3 9. J 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 193 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 ' . 
 
 coveitly to refer to the reproaches cast by the severer Dorians upon this part of 
 the social life of Athens—' Ay! even by those games of which they talk.' 
 S t €T Tj <r ( 1 s— ' lasting throughaut the year.' This may well have been the case, 
 if the Scholiast does not grossly exaggerate, for he says there were sacrifices on 
 every day of the year except one. Another grammarian, however, has ex- 
 plained, amX rov 8' trovs oXov Kaff %Kaffrov tros, &ovk. koL 'Aptffro<pdu7)s ; and 
 Popp. says that the word has this force in Dion. Hal. But merely ' anniversan- 
 festivals' were common everywhere, and would not be distinctive of Athens, so 
 that the former interpretation is preferable. If the latter were correct we 
 should at least have had, as Kriig. says, iroWars. vofiiCovr^s. See 
 
 notes on i. 77; iii. 82. Am. originally interpreted the word 'making our custom 
 consist in; and so connected it with a dative. But this he subsequently, I think 
 with justice, questioned. I do not place any faith in the construction with a 
 dative. The passage i. 77 has been already explained ; here I would make Ovaiais 
 the instrumental dative in combination with iiropicrdfitday and aft^r vofxi^ovra I 
 would supply dvalas hitrijalovsj * we have provided recreation for our spirits, ay, 
 even by games and religious festivals, in the regular observance of them: Cf. 
 Soph. Elect. 47, &77€AAe 5' Spxy TpotrTi0€is, announce with an oath, adding one. 
 For iii. 82, cf. ad locum. In Herod, iv. 117, 0d>vv voniCov<ri ^kuBik^, the 
 Xp^<y0ai which has preceded must be repeated. See also note on iii. 59, 
 <f>fi<Taadai o'iKr<f <Tw<t>povt \a06yras. vofiiCovrfs must be explained as equivalent 
 to hs yo,jLi(ofi€y. Cf. (Ed. Col. 1322; Homer, II. ii. 774; Cat. Carm. xxxix. 
 385, 'Pater Divum templo in fulgente revisens,' sc. quam revisere solebat. 
 On the matter itself, see Xen. de Rep. Aihen. iii. 2, 8. faTa- 
 
 aKfva:s. See note on i. 10, b. Here the words splendour of private cstablid- 
 ments would seem to imply that we should ourselves include under the term. 
 ij Te>4»iJ. 'Connect this with koB' vfi^pay .'—Krug. But see note supra. 
 c. 36. b. rbKyirrtpdv refers, I think, to the painfid character of 
 
 the social life of Sparta ; or it may mean the annoyances which in general 
 render life gloomy and disagreeable. iTrtiffdpxfrai—' are imported! 
 
 T. K. A. without acknowledgment from Bloomf., who adds ' neut. for pass.' It 
 was hardly worth appropriating, for who does not see that such a version 
 destroys the rhetorical beauty of the passage, which by a verb of actvt 
 meaning depicts in a lively manner, ' all the commodities of the world coining in 
 up to the very doors of the citizens day by day.' Cf. iii. 53. irr^ff^yn'^^'"'^' 
 Xen. de Rep. ii. 11; Isocrat. p. 63; Plato, Legg. 949. M^^e.' 
 
 olKfiOT€p(f K.r.K. It is rather interesting to remark how in the ancient 
 authors we find statements put in the converse way to that naturally adopted 
 by ourselves. We should say our enjoyment of foreign productions is not a whit 
 less familiar and intimate than that of our own. Pericles says, our enjoyment 
 of our own is not more familiar than of that which comes from abroad. See 
 infra. Why T. K. A. should explain an enjoyment that is no less familiar, by 
 no less peculiar, I cannot understand ; peculiarity is, I apprehend, never hint 
 at. The meaning of oticetoTtp? may be illustrated by the breakfast-table of the 
 Englishman, where ^he products of the extreme east and west (tea and sugar) 
 are as familiar as the products of his own fields (milk and bread). 
 
 Chapter XXXIX.— (a.) rS,v xo\€)uik«v. The editors notice that ta 
 
 irokfUM is more common in Thuc. Here I think the former word is required 
 — ' our practice in matters relating to war.* rS>v troK^iiiuiv, as has been said, might 
 be supposed to come from at 'iro\4fuoi. In what follows the tacit reference to 
 the Lacedseraonian government is obvious. t /u^ Kpv<pdev tv K.r.\. 
 
 The editors here notice what I think holds good in many places where it is over- 
 looked, that the tv exerts a sort of double influence ; in strictness it refers to 
 axptXridfl'n, but it is not without a modifpng effect upon Kpv<pQfv — ^ which 
 were he to see without concealment^ he might derive benefit: This generally 
 holds true of cases where the participle is to be resolved by a conditional 
 clause, as here, /i^ KpwpBtv is equivalent to et jutj Kpvipdilyi ; the relative ft is 
 of course dependent upon tbwv. On the ^(vnKaaia^ see i. 144, and with 
 respect to the rh Kpvnrhv of the Lacedaemonian policy, v. 68, and Miiller's 
 Dorians, ii. 124. 
 
 {b.) fi€T4pxovTat—\go after,* ' make the object of their pursuit: Cf. i. 124. 
 hdfitvoos. Cf. i. ch. 6, a.; Eurip. Alcest. 198, Tohs i(roTra\e75. 
 
 The general way of taking this is, ' none the less on that account go to meet eqiial 
 dangers; i.e. equal to any confronted by our adversaries ; and this I cannot 
 but think correct. Kriig., however, prefers the version of Grottleber, ' dangers 
 of a sort in which we are a match for our enemies: His ailment is, that the 
 former rendering gives no account of the iroActy. But surely this is to attach 
 too much importance to a mere termination. Compounds not unfrequently 
 lose in general usage the distinct notion attached to one of their component 
 parts. The word occurs again, iv. 94, and in Herod, and Plato. Mr. Grote 
 translates 'perils within the Tneasure of our strength; making the word contain 
 a comparison within itself, for which use of it I know no authority. 
 ^aK(^aln6plOl. To the Athenian mind the 'Lacedaemonians,' naturally 
 enough, represented the whole band of adversaries with whom they were 
 engaged. They impersonated the opposite cause, and therefore the orator speaks 
 of them as a whole, the several parts of which are denoted by Kaff eKdarovs. 
 Tliis is also Arn.'s view, and I think renders unnecessary the substitution of 
 TlfKoTrovyf}<rioi for Acuc^Sai/jiSvioi, or ^avrovs for eKcurrovs, one of which finds 
 favour with most editors. ouroi — ' we by ourselves ;' i.e. unaided by 
 
 auxiliaries from other states, as the Spartans were. ire pi ruv 
 
 oiKfiwp afivvofifuovs recalls the Homeric a/jLuveadat irepl irdrpris. The verb 
 exerts its true middle force — to ward off a person for one's own interest, and so 
 becomes nearly equivalent in construction to tidx^^Qai. 
 
 {c.) iitX TToWd — ' to many objects' {oT enterprises). k air 01. The 
 
 speaker sums up all the particulars before given at length, and draws his con- 
 clusion, padvfiicf, corresponds exactly to our phrase ' taking it easily; 
 though such a rendering would not suit the dignity of the orator's style; tr. 
 'vnthout painful efforts;* it refers to wfi/xtvus diairdfifvoi. vofiuy is to 
 be connected with avdpeias; ' bravery which is the result of institutions; i.e. 
 such as the Spartans laboriously produced by their educational training, and 
 the laws concerning military service. ^ € X o/u € v. The best MSS. read 
 mxoififv, which would state the same thing hypothetically, and more modestly. 
 >it I apprehend the orator means to speak with the utmost positiveness and 
 confidence, assuming as a fact, that they were ready to encounter danger. Bl. 
 well suggests that id4\oifi(v arose from the ignorance of some copyists (which 
 
 ••. i 
 
194 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDE8. 
 
 [Booi IL ■ Chap. 40.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 195 
 
 opinion G611. seems to share), who took H^fi^ in a bad sense, and therefore would 
 not believe that Pericles asserted it directly of himself and his countrymen. 
 •wtoiylyvtrai. See i. 144, and tr. ' there results over and above, — ' there tsthu 
 balance in our favour: ,rpoKci^.€i.-' distress ourselves before the Ume 
 
 at coming annoyances: The dative is connected with the verb in a sort of in- 
 Btrumental construction. See iEsch. Eum. 74, "^^ ^^ -^P^Katxv., and compare 
 Aqam.mnonr-AV ^'^ ^.oxMvr.s. The Lacedemonians, whose 
 
 city has been compared to a camp, might weU have been described as «l 
 
 Chapter XL.— W *i\oKa\ovfxiv yhp k.t.X. Mr. Grote has, I think, 
 well given the general sense of these words-' we combine elegance of taste with 
 simplicity of life, and we pursue knowledge without being enervated: The 
 cvrcXeU here spoken of must have had reference to private life, for, as Kriig. 
 remarks their public life and public monuments exhibited much lavish magni- 
 ficence ' But how does this correspond with the IZiais KaraaK^vais ^h^p^n.m, 
 ch 38' I apprehend the orator refers to their actual household expenses, 
 which were on a simple scale (cf. c. xvii. a.), not comparable to the luxury of 
 A«ia or Corinth. See what is said about Pausanias, and contrast it with the 
 words of Deraosth. quoted by Arnold: ihia Sh oSto, <r<&<ppou.s 9i^au . . . 5<r« 
 tV 'Api<rTeidov, Koi r^v MiXriciSou, /col ru>u \afiirpa>u olKiay ,X ns &pa oJd.v viiu,v 
 bitoia ttot' iariv, Spa rris rov y^rouos obS'ep ff^iivor^pav o{,<rav {Olynth. 11.. p. 35)- 
 See, however, Miill. Hist. Gr. Lit. p. 285. 4>iXo(ro<^oO^.. must be 
 
 understood to comprise all sorts of intellectual pursuits. That these are 
 accompanied by effeminacy is a notion common to all rude and militaT^ 
 societies like that of Sparta. hjov Ka.p<f. These words are he 
 
 predicate of nrXoirv, and iu, which is found in some MSS.. is plainly an mter- 
 polation ' Our wealth we use as an opportune rneans' (or aid to actwn) ; then 
 follows the invariable antithesis, ' and not as a subject for ostentatious tcdkinci. 
 The form of expression is not more harsh than is often found in Thuc. ; ct. k^ 
 Xhov Kol inov Kcupc?, ch. 43. b. The next sentence commences with t 
 ,.'..(r0a., because that is the main and prominent thought, antithetical to 
 'K\o{>ri,> h^ l,a<p^<>yiiv—' nottodoourbesttoavoidit ;' fornotethat 
 
 t,h is used, not oh. Does the preposition denote a continuous and persevering 
 struggle to avoid poverty ? Cf. 60. a. ^"i to.s avro.s k..x 
 
 ' Those of us who discharge public offices do not neglect domestic duties, ana 
 even that portion of our citizens whose business does not permit them to engage 
 ill the administration of the state are not without a fair knowledge of politics. 
 This seems to be the meaning of the whole. Cf. Arn.'s somewhat diffuse para- 
 phrase. Popp. describes the latter class as ' 07}t«j et his similes. Ihey ^e . 
 generally employed as hired labourers, and were excluded from all po mc 
 offices But it is not clear that Pericles did not mean to distinguish betwee 
 those engaged in the administration, and the general body of the citizens j^s^ 
 at least I infer from rhv fiv^ep r&vSe fi€T4xo^<^- "^P^^ ^P'^"' - 
 
 word means business or employTnent. Cf. (Edip. Tyran. 11 24. 'P^'^'^'^^^^ 
 To7ov, fi fiiov riva ; hence its well known philosophical usage in the .>ic^ _ 
 Ethics of Arist. The Spartans proper were not permitted to engage in 
 mechanical labour, merchandise, or agriculture. 
 
 (b.) o6k airpdyfiova. Eeferring, says Kriig., to the stock charge of 
 iroKmrpaynoffvyn brought against the Athenians. Grote tr. • not as harmless but 
 as useless: Perhaps it approaches more nearly to the spirit of the words to say 
 'not as a man who only minds his own business, but as one good for no business' 
 (or nothing at all). In the same spirit was conceived the famous ordinance of 
 Solon. avToi. Some copjdsts, from want of understanding this, 
 
 introduced at avrol. The speaker gracefully identifies himself with the mass 
 of his fellow-citizens. Kriig. narrows the meaning too much when he refers 
 merely to the orators who 4(rK€fifi4poi ^kov, Dem. i. i. Kpivo^tv ye. 
 
 The particle yt being apparently derived from the root of yivofxai, the verb de- 
 noting existence, is naturally emphatic,, and by connexion with any word or 
 clause, attracts attention to the existence of that which it expresses. Here, 
 therefore, it insists emphatically upon the truth of Kplpofxev, whatever be thought 
 of ivdufLovfieda, 'can judge of at any rate (or criticise)^ if we cannot form the 
 original conception: Cf. for this usage of yt, Arist. Eth. JSic. i. 8, eV y4 n, ^ 
 wAcio-Ta KaropBovv. I do not think there is any doubt about ivOvfiovfifda, and 
 would compare 6 ykp yyoi/s koL p}] acuputs 5i5a|as iv Xvtp koI ct n^ ivfOvfiiiBrj. 
 Cf. also viii. 68. We should say, ' if we cannot originate, we judge of,' but with 
 respect to the inverse way in which the statement is made, see supra, ch. 39. a. 
 Tohs \6yovs. A defence against the often-repeated accusation that .the 
 Athenians were <pi\6\oyoi. [See on the accent L. and S. Lex.] 'Not thinking 
 discussion any doftnage to action, but rather that the dainage consists in not 
 having been previously enlightened by discussion, before proceeding to follow out 
 in action those matters to which we must of necessity address ourselves: 
 
 (c.) ToXfiap. Cf. the use of the word, i. 70, Kriig. iKKoyl^fffdai 
 
 may be simply to * ex-cogitate,' or, as usual, • to compute in full: g. This 
 
 was formerly explained by whereas, and the accusative of the relative accounted 
 for by understanding the prep. Kara, a theory which received some support 
 from the Latin quod. Cf. Livy, xxx. 61, 'quod si possim ;' Ter. Phor. i. 33, 
 But now the editors incline to the principle of anacolouthon for explanation. 
 The whole clause I should suppose would have been arranged koL reSe ro7s 
 &K\m {ifiaOias dpdffos <(>€pova-r]s) okvov <pipii. But koL r6hi becomes 8, and the 
 writer lets it stand, as preparatory to \oyi<riJ.6s, which he introduces to make 
 the antithesis more plain and ' piquant.' This is the opinion of Kriig. and 
 Poppo, and I suppose Am. meant the same thing, for he says ' the verb which 
 should have followed h is omitted, and another construction substituted in its 
 place, which is irreconcileable with the former construction.' To understand 
 rovvavriov ylyverai after t seems to me singularly futile, for if that, why not 
 anything anywhere ? I am not sure whether after all I should not tr. ' in respect 
 of which matter {i.e. the effect of previous deliberation upon coiu-age), with the 
 ^fst of men, it is ignorance that proditces boldness, while reflection brings along 
 V-iih it hesitation ;' h then would stand like rh vfuftreai supra, and many other 
 accusatives at the commencement of a sentence, to receive further elucidation 
 
 , m its course. at . . . yiyudxTKovrts kuI /xij airoTp€ir6pieyoi, The 
 
 same persons ; though ra is used in the same sentence of two different (incom- 
 patible) things. See Granville Sharp's canon, note i. 1 8. a. Tr. ' turn not aside 
 >ow (lit. out of) the danger: r^hia are 'the sweets of peace,' as Scii^a 
 
 I are ' the terrors of war: and aSea is quite a needless conjecture. 
 
 o 
 
^:! 
 
 196 
 
 NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 JjHAP. 4^»] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 197 
 
 (d) iLp€r4,p. The popular explanation of ipcr^, as given by Arist. Rhet.l 
 9 2 forma the best explanation of this: 'Ap^r^ «€ i<rrL ixiv l{,vaiiis, &,s 8o«r, 
 'Kopi<TTiK)i ayaQwv koL <pv\aicnKi\, Ko^ niuafiis fh^pyfruci) iroWS,y Koi firyd\u>p wl 
 •Kdyrcov T€pl wdina. So ' goodness' and ' bonte' have a special meaning wherem 
 they are nearly equivalent to kindness and liberality. Cf. German gutig. We 
 find of course a more scientific definition of iptWj, Nic. Eth. 11. See the same 
 usage ii. 51. c, where the Schol. explains dprrrjs, <^iAav0p«iri'«. 
 ^vavn^ix^ea. This, says T. K. A., = «'« are opposed to ; but does not this lose 
 aight of the fact that a process is denoted by the termination of the verb? tr. 
 • we have been made to entertain very opposite views; sc. by education, and the 
 principles of conduct generally accepted among us. The editors need not have 
 remarked on the perfect, for it is the proper tense. ^t^aidrcpos h\ 
 
 K.r.K.—' Now the doer of the favour (note the indefinite participle) u the 
 more abiding friend J<yr the sake of keeping it still owing, in the shape of a debt, 
 by continued kindness to the recipient: and so nearly Pop. and Kriig. ^dvoiiTm, 
 is most properly, as this version represents it, ' benevolentia in ahquem ; and 
 this meaning is also most suited to the argument, for the orator wants to convey 
 the impression that ^tvoia most truly and permanently attaches to his countn- 
 men, and this he proves by showing that it is to them a necessary means of re- 
 taining the benefit to be derived from their own liberality. The whole is well 
 illustrated and explained by Arist. iV^ic. Eth, viii. 7 •• ol «€ €U6p76Ta» rm 
 €{;6p7€Tr,0€Waj loKovffi fxaWov 4>»A«:»' fl ol «S iro0(JvT€S rohs ^pdaauras; then 
 comparing the parties to debtors and creditors, he adds, oSt« kuI robs ^j-epycTf 
 ffomas $o{>\((rdai civat robs TradSyras, «s KOfiiOfitvovs rhs X'^P*'^^' '^^'^ ^« ""^ 
 thai iwifKKh rh aKTOTToSoGi/ai. See Tacitus, ^^ric. xlii. Peile prefers, 'w 
 order to keep it owing to him in the shape of good wiU on the part of him to whom 
 he hath given '—considering that 5i* thvolas explains hip^iKoiiivr^v. But both for 
 the sense and the Greek I prefer the former. GoU. seems to understand '^) 
 keep dive the obligation arising from his good wiU in the mind of him whom 
 he has obliged: which would, I fancy, as Peile has suggested, require 5. 
 •tfMtov, or rather 8io rktv tUvoiav. Engelman's ed. also, I observe, agrees with 
 the version which I have given, ' urn durch Wohlwdlen gegen den welchmtt 
 sie verliehen hat, sich den schuldigen Bank zu sichem: The French veKion 
 •has the usual vagueness, ' U la garde a son oblige comrm une dette de^ bien- 
 veUlance: i,fifi\<,ripos—' duller in his feeling: ^s xap'"- 
 
 ' bu way of a free gift: kiro^<i><ru,u is only applicable on the principle ot 
 zeugma, for it contains the notion of paying a debt. Cf. Sheppard's Theoph. 
 p. 176. T7}$ ihtve^pias TV iricTTV. We might tr. ' m flW M^ c^«- 
 
 Jidence of liberality {i.e. with that cmfidence which a truly liberal man fe^s); 
 but most edd. prefer to tr. * in the confident spiHt of freedom' (i.e. the confidence 
 which freedom bestows upon those who possess it), thus introducing a politica 
 allusion. Cf. i. 68. a. a^^ws is, ' without fear of the consequences, ana 
 
 ▼ill suit either interpretation, for we may suppose it to mean, without t a 
 fear of future ingratitude and forgetfulness which characterize the recipien^^ 
 of favours, and so deter many from being liberal; or again, it may reter 
 political injury resulting from measures undertaken ou behalf of others, 
 proposed alteration into v^td^s (mentioned by T. K. A.) seems to me smgulary 
 unnecessary. 
 
 Chapter XLL— (a.) s.vv€\(&v. IM. ' taking all together ;* hence, ' summing 
 lip in a word.' So it is used i. 70, ad fin. naldfuffiv. Grote con- 
 
 fsiders that the abstract word for irai^fvrplap softens the afSrmation. It is 
 loiibtful whether there was any such intention. We should say ' the school 
 of Greece,' and so Zevort, ' I'^cole de la Grece.' ^ KaO* fKaarov k.t.A. 
 
 The masculine gender, * as respects our citizens regarded as individuals: Re- 
 mark how the writer varies his style, /u^rct x«P^''"*'*'> cbrpair^Xws and atirapKts, 
 vhere another would have used three adverbs. The position of &v, which 
 properly belongs to irapexeo-Sat, is not without its influence upon SoKt7v. 
 nap vficov — ^ going forth from among us: See note on the use of irapa, 
 i. '^9. c. Krug. certainly explains, ' owing to our training and education,' but 
 he does not say, as T. K. A. makes him, that there is a causal reference involved. 
 The use of traph ' cum genitivo' denotes ' motion from alongside of an object,* 
 and though more may be employed, a causal notion is not necessary to the sense, 
 ^irl irActo-Ta eJfSrj. The expression is rather general. elSos, says Popp., is often 
 connected with rpitrov, and therefore he is probably right in explaining agendi 
 ratio. Ka\ unites iiri irXuar tidrf to /ndKiara evrparreXus, though in translating 
 it is as well, for our idiom, omitted. ' The same man going forth from among 
 its coidd, without requiring aid from others, address himself to the most varied 
 vicissitudes of action, with the most graceful versatility: The use of awfia may 
 indicate that only bodily accomplishments are intended ; and Kriig. seems to 
 assert as much — ' <rwjua kann hier nicht fiiglich Person sondern nur Korper 
 heiesen.' Cf. ii. 51. a. The idea seems to be that the Athenian is ' in se totus, 
 teres, atque rotundus,' and unless intellectual versatility be elsewhere implied, 
 it would hardly be omitted here. € u t p a ir e A w s, like our dmple, 
 
 and other words in perhaps all languages, passes from a good into an evil accep- 
 tation. Thus, though originally, as here and in Aristotle, it denotes a sportive 
 demeanour, it came to signify * scurrilous.' 
 
 {b.) aKoijs KptlffffcDV -'superior to repute: i.e. its reputation. I cannot 
 agree with Kriig. in this instance, who tr. ' superior to any of which tradition 
 telh; a meaning which, he says, the absence of the article plainly indicates. 
 But does not i^Koif, ' fame,' ' parlance,' belong to that class of words which, 
 under special circumstances, are used without an article ? See note i. 8. a. 
 And as -m^pav is anarthrous, it is not surprising that aKorj should be so also. 
 Cf , vii, 21, iiyavdKr-riffiv ex* * — ' contains in itself cause of indignation ;* 
 
 the accusative has an objective signification. Cf. r^v iiruvv/xiav ffx^'^v, i. 9, a. 
 Popp. also adduces Kardfxfixi^iv ^x^iv ; and ii. 61, aXa-drja-iv ; ii. 87, iv. 126; and 
 a similar objective usage of habeo, ' Nam causam justi semper amoris habent,' 
 TibuUus, i. 4, 10. v<p' otuv — 'with rasped to the sort of persons by 
 
 uhom: Cf. with Kriig. vii. 75. Kardfit^^iv. T. K. A. explains 
 
 'aseiise of degradation: but this is not Greek. We musttr. ' occasion for depre- 
 mtion: i-e. not of themselves, but of us ; and hence, ' matter for self-reproach: 
 They are forced to acknowledge us a great nation, and such as it is no disgrace 
 to be governed by. <r 77 /x € / w v — ' accompanied by palpable proofs: i. e. the 
 
 facts of history and the visible monuments of power ; then we might have 
 anticipated ovk 6.v(v fxaprvpoov, but the principle of variety (i. 38. c.) comes in, 
 and the construction changes. See several instances in this chapter, and espe- 
 cially rwv 5c lEpyoov, where 8c unites a direct to a relative statement. The com- 
 
198 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book T Irhap. 4^*1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 199 
 
 bination of 8^ roi is as strong as possible, as they are the two chief partich 
 for denoting affirmation. y€ exerts its proper force, as explained supra. Thl 
 general notion is that they have inscribed their glory too palpably upon Greeee 
 and her history to fear oblivion by posterity. Ka\ oiScV. This koI couple.^ 
 
 'wpo<rSt6^€yoi to ^apaax^h^^o}- The plur. ^Tt<n denotes poetry. Cf. ^avdovi 
 iv roh ?irc<n, i. 3. tiros is 'word' in prose only in particular combinaticns^ 
 j^j.^ t6 avriKa — '/or the immediate moment' Cf. iv. 107, vi. 57J 
 
 •OM^pou ^irotvcTou— sine articulo— 'a Homer for a panrgyrist {ox, to siv^ 
 their praises): ruv Si ?P7« v—' whereas the truth will damage the dm- 
 
 ception formed of the facts.' The exaggerated estimate of a thing, wbn cor- 
 rected by the test of experience, is apt to depreciate it-^ value m our noticns. 
 All attempts to make out from the rhetorical usage of lnr6yoia, that it is in this 
 place employed for a ' magnificent conception,' I regard as founded^ upon a 
 wrong view of the requirements of the argument. kukHv t€ K^yaSwy 
 
 —'for good or for ill: I do not see why Pericles might not have thus spoken, 
 even if he had not meant to confine the Kcuth to evils wrought upon their enemies, 
 as most editors explain. Cf. ii. 45- ^- Kriig. considers the expression so ' naive' 
 that he conjectures the usual formula Ka\S>p rt KhfoBuv. IvyKaroiKi- 
 
 ffavTfs. The metaphor seems to be taken from colonization, or perhaps the 
 consolidation of a state. Grote therefore well renders ' hainng planted im- 
 perishable monuments: BiKatovyrft fi^ h<paip(€riyai auT^v- 
 ' asserting their right not to be robbed of it: It certainly is an illustration of 
 the principle. <piKu iiras rh lavroD tpyop, that Mr. Grote, after having been told 
 the right one, should retain his own strange translation of these words, ' vimh- 
 eating her just title to unimpaired rights: He naively remarks that neither 
 Popp., GolL, nor Arnold notice the difficulty. They do not do so, because 
 there ' can be none to anyone who remembers that the verbs which take a 
 doable accusative in the sing, have this construction in the passive. Cf. infra, 
 ^A h. Kiiirotiivwv. Note the present part.—' whom they art 
 leaving behind them. 
 
 Chapteb XLII.— (a.) irepl Uov^'for an equal stake: Kriig. cf. Dem. 
 viii. 6b, ovx vw^p 'ra>v Icrcov vfilv t« koI rois iWois 4<rff 6 kIv^vvos. 
 /iij 8 i 1/ ' 6ir (£p X < '• We have ixrj^fv rather than omv, because the clause is de- 
 pendent upon fih ^Ti'at. ^<^' 0J5. Understand the antectnient roirwv. The 
 preposition M indicates the local position of the speaker; hence, iir-aiyos, be- 
 cause spoken over the bodies of the dead, eulogy. Cf. 24. c. Snvv<f'^ 
 Though originally employed for poetic praises, the word naturally passes into a 
 rhetorical usage, as Bl. has shown by examples. iff6ppoiro j-ht. 
 ' equal in the scales ;' hence, ' the just equivalent of their deeds: 
 
 (h.) SoK€T56/toi B-nKovvK.r.X. There is some little difficulty here. 
 av6p6s kp€rfiv, as Popp. observes, cannot be ' alicvjus horum defunctorum virtu- 
 tern;' the genitive must therefore have an adjectival force, and the whole is 
 *fortitudo vir'tlis: So in the passage quoted by Bl. from Isoc. ix. 8, x^^^ " 
 i<rTip aydpbs kptr^v Si^ \6yu>v iyKoffudC^iy. We must, as Meyer has pointed out, 
 recognise a reference to two classes of persons : those whose previous life had as 
 yet given no indications of worth, and those who had long been distinguished as 
 valuable citizens. Tr. therefore, ' Now what a man's worth is, this worth the closing 
 
 cene of these rmrCs life appears to me to show, whether now for the first time 
 \nouncing it, or coming as its final confirmation (lit. being the first to announce 
 So Peile tr. * both in the case where it is the first indication, and where it 
 the final confirmation: Kriig. remarks upon the euphemism contained in 
 IT affrpotpii, which was, he says, imitated by the later writers. 
 )OTidtadai. Popp. explains this * fortitudinem pra se ferre, profiteri, exhibere 
 Dr, in magnd laude poni): I am, however, inclined to think that the notion of 
 Ming before as a screen is implied, meaning that their subsequent merit should 
 iclude their previous deficiencies from view ; or more simply still, ' to putfor* 
 lard in the first place: so that their other conduct becomes a secondary matter. 
 fHere, then, the word is used in a favourable sense ; the unfavourable sense is 
 more common, as iii. 64, iir\ ry iKclvuv kcuc^ iiyhpayadiav irpoHdeffde. Cf. Tac. 
 Hist. V. 25, 'ilium domesticis malis excidium gentis opposuisse,' 
 
 (c.) irXotJry, the reading of the best MSS.. taken instrumentally, with 
 
 lHjdKaxlffdTi. TTf]v in airSXavffiv — ^ the further enjoyment of it: 
 
 KivUs iXirlhi. Here we have the true genetic or genitive case. cf. i. 23. d. — 
 
 * hope engejidered by poverty: i. e. which poverty causes to spring up in the mind, 
 
 or, as some say, ' the poor man's hope: See, however, Jelf, § 898. 3. 
 
 i\ouT^(r6ie. T. K. A. can hardly be right in tr. this * to become rich, to grow 
 
 rich' though, as usual, blindly following Kriig., who has ' reich werden: The 
 
 word, I believe, implies ' being,' compounded as it is with io) ; so we say in 
 
 English, ' he hopes to be a rich man some day or other.* And similarly in the 
 
 passages quoted by Kriig., e.g. Plat. Eep. p. 421 d, irKovriitras x^P^^^ is the 
 
 potter when a rich man. See i. 107. c. ii/o/3oA.7?v — * a putting off from 
 
 ones self (or shirking, if the word be not too inelegant). Cf. with Kriig. 
 
 ava$o\as iitoiuTO, Dem. 48, 20. avTwv, sc. Trjs diroAautrcwy Koi 
 
 TTjs iKirlios. \aP6vTes, here in reference to the mental grasp, or 
 
 conception. Cf. th Kifpvyfxa . . . ^iKcuoy thai iKdfi^ayov, iv. 106, and note iii. 259. 
 
 Cf. ib. 38. d., 56. c. fi«T' ovToi;, sc. rov Kiy^vyov. rwy St itpifffdai. 
 
 These words are also to be taken in close connection with juer' avTov^ which is 
 
 the condition upon which the infinitives are predicated — * not without this peril;' 
 
 80 Kriig. ' nur mit Bestehung der Gefahr: This was the only condition upon 
 
 which they would consent to seek these objects. ^Att/Si yLtv k.t.A.. 
 
 — ' committing to hope the uncertainty of fiture success,' i. e. so far as future 
 
 success, a thing never certain, was concerned, they were content to hope for the 
 
 best. tpycf) 5f — ' but when mice engaged in action thinking it right to 
 
 tmst none other than themselves concerning what had met them face to face" — lit. 
 
 before their eyes, i. e. the dangers of the combat, tpytf stands as an adverbial 
 
 dative ; rov ^Stj bpwfiivov is antithetical to rh a<pay€5 rov KaTopdtaffeiy, and ^lovvres 
 
 i^P'mv avrols Trciroideyai to ^XirfSt iinTp4}\/ayT€s. Meyer, on the other hand, to 
 
 whom Popp. assents, makes ipytf 8e follow Tr€iroi64vcu, and fftplaiv avrots follow 
 
 ^McVju — ' trust to action in what was before their own eyes: This has the 
 
 advantage of more exactly balancing the antithesis, but the sense seems to me 
 
 inferior ; G<pi(ny avrots, too, is weak in this way of taking it ; and should we not 
 
 ^ave had rov fftpicriy avrots dpwiifyov? iy avrif — * therein: t6 
 
 '^iiviffQat Ka\ iraQtty. Said of the same act. Cf. Granville Sharp's canon, 
 
 !• 18. a. — ' to fall in repelling the enemy,' contrasted with rh iy^Syres ff(a^f- 
 
 fflat— .« to secure safety by submission: See Jelf, § 678. The question thaa 
 
200 
 
 l^OTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 ansea. what are we to make of /xaAXov i,yr,(rd^^,yoi? An Englishman might 
 be tempted to tr. • hainr^sf thought more of; i. e. preferred, or, having morefanckd ■ 
 ^ovfia, would then be used with t^aXXov, as fiaWov d^ouv, and t^ixXov Boix.aQcl 
 This agrees with Popp., who says, • cum ^^laQat interdum sequente infinitivo 
 notionem <Bquum censendi habeat (ut vofiiCuv iv. 86), ridetur sonare posse prcB 
 ferre, malU: This Arn. calls the ' sensus pr^gnans' of frpi<rdfx,uoi, and places it 
 among the instances cited by Lobeck ad mrynicK c. vi. p. 753, where ^c?(r0«, 
 oUiTQox, and vom/C"", are used in the sense of thinking right To this it is 
 objected that they are always followed by an infinitive sine articulo. Arn 
 replies by quoting ii. 53, rh wpoaraKaiTrwp^Ty oi^B.h irp6dv,Mos ^v. But is this 
 exactly parallel-' «;ia respect to the taking much trouble, no one was zealou^^ 
 However, Matthi*, § 543, has collected numerous instances of the infin with 
 article, some of which are more appropriate, though many are otherwise ex- 
 plicable. Perhaps it might lessen the difficulty to say for /uaAAoi/ ^(ra^em 
 instead of. « thought more of; more thought of i.e. gave more thought to, though 
 even this is scarcely consistent with the common use of vyov^iai. Another method 
 of explanation is to consider that the words stand elliptically for thai iia)0,ov 
 toSto, that this more consisted in, &c., where by ♦ this ' is meant rh ffipiaiv ainoh 
 wtwoid^yai. Kriig. tr. ' theg therein more recognised {i. e. understood and accepted 
 the necessity of) defence, though accompanied with death, than self-preservation 
 purchased by submission.' I do not exactly understand either T. K. A 's ex- 
 planation or his translation of Krug. Peile prefers the old reading ry to rd 
 which he considers confirmed by c. 43, iy rep ^.f^iv^adat, and tr. ' and accounting 
 that to consist in actually defending themselves and suffering {i.e. at every cost, 
 come what may), rather than in seeking to save themselves by giving in: 
 rh fi'^y aitrxphv K.r.\.—' disgrace, indeed, to their reputation (lit. what would 
 be said of them) they fled from, but the brunt of battle with their bodies they bore, 
 and at the very briefest crisis of their fate (when the least thing might hare 
 turned the scale of victory), they departed in the height of their glory rather than 
 of their fears: The kKix^ seems to me to be applied by a sort of zeugma to 
 rov S4ovs, for had the latter stood alone the orator would probably have used 
 another word. 8.' i\axi(rrov Kaipov t{,xvs seems equivalent to the 
 
 ' hora memento cita mors venit' of Horace. Meyer and Popp. doubt this, and 
 tr. ' dum fortuna brevissimam nacta erat opportunitatem,' meaning, I suppose, 
 ' when fortune had for a moment obtained an opportunity; i.e. they had a chance 
 for a moment of distinguishing themselves, and did not let it slip. 
 iwvWdyrtcray—' were set free from; an euphemism, as in H^acleid<p, 965, 
 Kfivov 8' airoAAax^cWoy. So the Latin decesserunt, our departed, and the Ger- 
 man sie schiedcn. 
 
 Chaptee XLIII.— (a) rpoffriKSyrcs, D. well tr. ' as became the character 
 of their country: k<r<pa\,<Tripay, Certainly there is force in K.'s 
 
 objection, that itff<p. ^liuotoi^ cannot signify a securer life. He therefore reads 
 neut. plur. M(paX4<Tr^pa. But I am sure Thuc. would have sacrificed something 
 for the antithesis which makes both adjectives predicates to Mvoiay; and, 
 after aU, we say a safer policy, a safer line of action, meaning that which conduces 
 to safety. Cf. the weU-known passages Soph. Ajax, 550, and Virg. xii. 435. 
 aKQirovvras fi^ \6y<(> fi 6 ytp-^' considering not in words alone; or merely 
 
 [Book II. ■ chap. 43.] nqtes ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 201 
 
 Am. says, means regarding a thino- m.^.i f \v. '^'"''^"^' -^^i« Matter, as 
 toth/former will be, TeliJ ^1!^ nif^ll """"" ^"" °' "' *""»• 
 seeing it as in fact it i iTe antithel I '^^' "f """'"^ '" ''P°^' •"" 
 
 mie Athens your mistress IZZJ ^'^''»'' ".""-' ^"^'^"'9 ''» '<"^-*/' 
 
 pinpe.o„!,„ution:i,t„rftrre:r^^^^^ r"-- - 
 
 that T0X;.i„„ sine articulo is th« Z,!!', V '''">«1'"><">' do not ahow 
 
 the othe. the cause of S:^t:Z':^- ^cff iV ^"^ '''" 
 
 Optative, because indefinite frequeniy.' Cf i ,0 d 7 'f'^'h'ray. 
 
 mtributiott ;' the regular techni«,l L™ ' a ^ Ipavoy-- a joint 
 
 auditors. For 'nforLZnt^t^Tf 711^^ '""' '''"'"'^' '" ""^ 
 5-«, § .46-9; and Boeekh's P £ ;/^l" r; :if rT^ ^^1- ^"'^ "^ 
 Wf, and the money subscribers, weif eircrUed' '*^' "f ^' "^'''^ 
 
 n*', and their or^sidenf .„ "' ^«^ each called tpayos; the members ipa^,. 
 
 mks much u e 0^0 ame meTX „. T'^T ^"^'- ^^^ § ^'' *«■) 
 
 wa. society, to which ::^:^:^^2r' - - "-' "^^-' 
 
 I/™ til to tim"; Z kl^'toTZTt^T'^^^^z '-t-''^<»«'* 
 
 «d commemoration by fe^valsT. 4 " .,,"^"'"8 '» ^Poken panegyric, 
 ' Juree with »„, - "^ '"^t'™'. &c. Krug. will not allow that ^^^y-im can 
 
 " with a pirson. ^^^l l^^^^^Z Zt thT "''"'? '"' " ^ ^'°*' 
 
 ' we not RAv thof fu • ^ i'"*' nypocnesis that the occasion does occur, mav 
 
 say that thetr gl„.y certa.ly abides with it, is always to bo found 71 
 
 Ljj , ^ "^ ^y^^^^' ^^- ^ 5^ f^^aaa nf\o7r6yyri(ros. Kriig 
 
 k«lation Kriii" ho ^ rn^urn^nt: So D., and this is the usna 
 
 •"hemM a„7' - 7'™' "^'' '^' ""''' ^'"^^^'■' itself implies a memork 
 •»«M rh erew /"."i'^'"' " """ \ ^"^^^ "^f'^^^"" f- » »aterial thinr He 
 
 k«her ZMy^ ,^ "'■''^ "" '™ '""•'l be indissolubly bknded 
 
 f^^k, u. What z actu^sri:;^:- ;r„iL:jr'^h': 
 
202 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ ^^^p^ ^^j NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 orator does not intend to exclude such commemoration, but implies that even 
 where this was absent, their recollection would still dwell in the minds of their 
 countrymen. In justice to Kriig.'s argument, it should be noticed that the 
 combats in which these men fell were somewhat insignificant. Engelman's 
 translation agrees with Kriig. — mehr ihrer Gesinnung als des Kampfes selbst. 
 Cf. -^sch. cont. Ctes. 50 c. : ob yap (povro Scti/ iv to7s ypdfjLfjMai rifiacQaiy oAA' eV 
 T^ fivfifirj rS)V €5 ireirovQSroiV. 
 
 (c.) rh tfitaifjLov and rh tfi^vxov are predicates, for the predicate takes 
 the article where it is represented to be coextensive with the subject — * happiness 
 is freedom, and freedom courage;' — is meaning consists in. irtpiopaadf 
 
 — voce medi4 — * neglect to your own damage.' Kriig. cf. i. 24, 4, vi. 93, i. 
 KaKoirpayovvTfs in reference to the itrlirovoi Sc/crjo-ts of the Lacedaemonians, 
 ch. 39, 2. Kriig. * those who fare hard.' This is probably, as Bl. says, antici- 
 pative of an objection likely to be urged by the rich, who might say, like the 
 soldier of LucuUus, that they ought not to risk their lives in the same way as 
 those who had nothing to lose. The argument is certainly a paradox, contrd- 
 dieted by experience, however ingenious on the part of the speaker. 
 7) ivavrla fierafioK 4] — ' the change to the opposite is still a risk (or there is still 
 a risk of a change to the opposite).* <l>p6vnixa — ' high spirit.' See i. 81, 
 
 and cf. ii. 62. i) fitrh. rod /xaXaKicrdrivai KaKwffis. Am. says 
 
 KdKwa-is is misery, urretchedness. This is scarcely exact enough ; it is really 
 * worsening' were there such a word, i.e. that deterioration of character, or de' 
 gradation, which follows upon (lit. accompanies) the having shown cowardice. 
 Before fjierh rov in some MSS. stand iv r<p, which is, I think, plainly a gloss 
 introduced from the margin. Kriig., however, retains the words, from the 
 notion that rh fiera rov /AeiA.ouct(r0Tji/at may be one logical term capable of 
 declension like a substantive, and he assigns to it the meaning ' the state that 
 follows upon proved cowardice.' But of such a phrase * desiderantur exempla.' 
 ^(inv — * vigour,' and so ' valour,' which is from valeo. Koivit—'hpe 
 
 common to all,' i.e. of coming safely out of battle ; but * hope for the common 
 good' gives, as Kriig. says, a loftier thought, and is not contradictory to the 
 idiom of the language. But may not the meaning be affected by its combination 
 with ^ci/UT; J ? i.vai(r6riros ^ describes the speediness of the pang of death 
 
 when it comes in the heat of battle without the protracted suffering of disease.' 
 Arn. If the meaning assigned by Kriig. to koivt] be correct, the hope of 
 benefiting their country is another element in rendering death unfelt, or pain- 
 less. Arn. quotes similar usages of the word from Dem. ; Arist. Ehet. c. 6, § 4 ; 
 Plutarch, Demetritcs, c. 29. 
 
 Chapter XLIV. — (a.) 6\o(f>6pofiai. The fut. IXw^vpovyiai has been con- 
 jectured, but the present is more proper, because it relates to the actual state 
 of feeling which the orator was then expressing — ' / am not, as you, see, lament- 
 ing, but shall rather ,' &c. rh 8* thrvx^^, o\ ttv rr^s finrpftreffrdrris 
 K.r.K Peile tr. ' happiness belongs to those who shall have obtained the most 
 glorious — death, as these men have now obtained, or affliction, as you.' This is, 
 I think, correct, except that rh tinvxh is goodhap, not happiness, evdaifxovia; 
 and we should perhaps say, * they shall be accounted to have had the most fortunate 
 lot.' The whole, I fancy, means, ' your aflliction, as their death, is the best of 
 
 203 
 
 the sort that can befall a man.' But Peile and others explain. Death and afflic- 
 tion are the lot of all men. Human happiness is therefore altogether comparative. 
 Hence, ' they may be said to be happy, whose lot it is to have the Tnost glorious, as 
 in the present instance these m£n have, death ; whilst you have affliction.' 
 Ka\ oJs . . . |ui/f /i6Tp^0r?. This passage is of acknowledged difficulty. ' In 
 duabus rebus,' says Popp., ' hie haereas.' One is the change of construction from 
 oi y \dxoxri to oh ^vv€fi€rpiidn, but this is amply accounted for on the principle 
 of variety so often mentioned (i. 38, c); the second is the force of the preposi- 
 tion iv, when it is not stated what are the things in which they were happy. 
 It seems to have escaped Popp., that these verbs belong to a class compounded 
 with iv, which in English are expressed by putting the prep, after the verb, and 
 which stand almost independently: e. ^. Aristoph. Aves, 38, koI iraai Koiyrjy 
 ivairoTlffai xp^f^ara, * open to all to spend their mxmey in ;' Herod, ix. 65, oi^e 
 kik^^visrh rififvos oCre ivairoQavdiv ; Arist. Pax, 11 56, ivairanaruv yap iar" 
 inniiSdos irdtw; Eurip. Baccha, 508, iySvcrrvxvaai. I should therefore inter- 
 pret. ' whose life has been dealt out to them to be happy in, equally as to die iji,* 
 or, inverting, ' to die in, equally as to be happy in,' i.e. their death has been 
 correspondent to the happiness of their life. If you look at the happiness they 
 enjoyed in life, and at the close to which their life was brought, you will find 
 them 6noiu)5 ^vfinfrpridivra—* dealt out in corresponding ratio.' 1 subjoin other 
 explanations, which the reader may perhaps prefer. Meyer has, ' quorum vita 
 tmorita congruit, ut eddem re et felices essent, et obirent, i.e. qu4 in re vitae 
 terminum, in ed etiam- felicitatem invenerunt '— the close of their life was made 
 to them happiness. This I cannot think accordant with the usage of the verbs 
 in Greek. Hermann—' quibus sic est traducta vita, ut in ed pari et felicitate et 
 txitu uterentur: To this it is objected that eS does not occur before i'vrfKixrntffai. 
 This objection I think remedied by the version which I have ventured to give. 
 Peile—' who have had their life equally dealt out, so as for them to be happy in 
 it to the saTM extent, and to dk in it,' i.e. die simultaneously with their earthly 
 enjoyment. Cf. Eurip. Hipp. 1069 ; 2 Cor. vii. 3. Krug.— ' their good fm-tune 
 has been equally balanced (abgesehlossen) for them, so as in and with it to meet 
 their end.' T. K. A.—' the accurate measurement of life ( = space of life) 
 allows space enough for these two things, a happy existence, and death, but no 
 I THore.' 
 
 (*.) 7t€lefiv,8C. rxwra. Kriig. ingeniously suggests vaOflv. &v\s 
 
 the masculine, having reference to an antecedent implied in what has gone be- 
 fore-' with respect to persons of whom you will so often have things to put you 
 I w mtnd: For the sentiments here expressed, Popp. cf Isoc. Plat. § 19 ; Xen. 
 l^^p. xu. 5. 82. ir€ipa(r6fAtvo s— ' deprived of before he has had an op- 
 
 \fortuniiy of experiencing.' Kriig. quotes Valla's version, 'quibus nunquam 
 mitunprivantur' with approbation, adding that ireipatrdfi^yos, the reading of 
 some MSS., is inadmissible, because ' a man cannot be deprived of what he has 
 peverhad.' I suppose one might retort with reference to the future, it is no 
 ^eat deprivation to lose what you are never going to have. In fact I believe 
 e aop. part, to be very suitable, as conveying the idea without any limitation 
 ^^time-«. e. simply • without experience of them.' k^paip^df, 
 
 hT^^i-^^' ^' ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^' P^^°^^° ^® understood as object to the verb. 
 KM, oblivion, for the ground, or cause of oblivion. Popp. refers to imcKixrh, 
 
 \ 
 
204 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Cbap. 46.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 205 
 
 i 52; and &\ooffiv 'lAiou {Phil. 61), though this is scarcely the same thing. 
 h I x6efv— 'beneficial in two ways' T. K. A., or more accurately, 'benefit will 
 accrue from two sources' {uvoUet has for its subject rtKvuaiv troKhBai, 
 
 according to Popp. and Bl. Kriig. says it has no subject at all, or at most 
 irpayfxa is to be supplied, which actually is so, Arist. Nubes, 594. So he also 
 explains Xen. Anab.vn. 8. 4; Andocid. i. 77 ; and Dem. xliii. 66, iirtpuri ... 
 S,Ti tiv Spaxriv 'Aerivalois fhai M rh Ikfifivov iiirh rob ffrifieiou. 
 
 (c.) fiov\(v€(Tdai—' contribute counsel to the state in any fair and equal 
 way* irapafia\\6n(vo i — ' bringing forward j and exposing equally to 
 
 risk: Cf. iii. 14. On iK tov byioiov cf. i. 143. c. iropTj^TJKOTt. 
 
 icapa is here transitive— ' have got beyond the prime of life: and are therefore 
 not likely r^Kvcoffiv woiutrdai. KfpBos riyfTad t— ' consider as so 
 
 much clear gain '— ' lucro apponite: That this is a legitimate construction of 
 rryovfjLai may be readily shown. Cf. inter alia, ra dyrrra 5' ov vZv irpSnov T}yoinai 
 (TKlav, Eur. Med. 1224, and with Kriig. Dem. viii. 66, ttSKcus ir\odTov iyurn 
 iyovfMi (TvufidxovSf irlariVy tHyoiav. t<Jv5€, sc. fiiov, has its proper 
 
 use, this whkh is to follow. rh (fnXdrifiov, ' synonymous with cfJ/cAtw, 
 
 honour,' Kriig., and of course following him T. K. A. But is it not rather the 
 love of honour contrasted with the love of gain, both being regarded as passions of 
 the human mind which are thought never to become extinct? Then we have ri 
 jc€p5a{i'€i»' opposed to rh r ifiaa-d a i, the getting money, and the getting honour. 
 rv «IXP*^V refers to incapacit;^ for active service, as may be seen from i. 93, 
 ruv ixP**'^*''''*"' apKcVeii' r^v <pv\aici]v. 
 
 Chapter XLV. — [a.) rhv aySava—' the struggle y&it will have to undergo in 
 attempting to rival their renown: rhv yhp ovk ovra k.tA. Knig. 
 
 quotes from Mimnermus apud Stob. 125. 12 : 
 
 (avri (pdovTJaai, KwrBavdura 5* cuVeVat. 
 The Horatian sentiment will recur to the thoughts of every one : 
 
 * Virtutem incolumem (whUe it dwells with us) odimus, 
 Sublatam ex oculis quserimus invidi.' 
 
 Kaff {,irfp$o\^v dp€T^j— 'fn (or by) an excess of merit ;* even supposing that \ 
 you reachtd transcendent merit, would you be judged, Isay not on a par with, kt 
 even a little inferior to them V <pd6yo5ydp k.t.\. Is this not to be 
 
 expressed in English by saying, ' the living have envy to contend against as a\ 
 rivar? For xphs rh ivrdroXov is not, I think, rightly rendered by Meyer- 
 • propter emulationem,' i. e. tlie living are envied on account of rivalry ; nor by 
 Popp. ' ab (Bmulis: making it equivalent to irphs rwv ^vriirdKuv, by their rimls;\ 
 nor by GoU. ' erga amulos: i. e. the Hiring have a feeling of envy towards ik^f\ 
 rivals ; nor as Dale, ' the living are exposed to envy in their rivalry: K^gJ 
 merely says, • among the living, envy dominates, whether enviers or envied. 
 It will be seen that I make vphs rh hivriircLKoVy \for oppositix>n: i.e. to discharge 
 the function of an opponent; which sense it is I think capable of sustaining. 
 Then rb /u^ ipuroliav — ' those who are in no one:s way* (= ol ovk uvrfsJm 
 neuter being a general form of statement)— are opposed to oi Cofyrts ; and they 
 
 are said to find no such obstacle against (rphs) which it is necessary for 
 them to struggle ; but ♦ they are honoured with a good will which has no one to 
 oppose it: 
 
 (b.) aptrris—' if I must say anything on the subject of woman's excellence* 
 D. The Scholiast, says Kriig., is ungallant enough to deny all virtues to the sex 
 except that of (ra}<ppo<Tvv)]. oh yap av^ptia ^ biKaioavvr] fj <pp6vri(ris. Mever 
 and Bl. refer this to ♦ chastity ;' Arnold to * modesty and affectionateness.' But 
 as there is no article, D. is right in referring it to nothing special (see i. 2. d.) ; 
 it simply means the sort of merit which is to be looked for from women on such 
 an occasion. That this, according to the Greek conception, was of a very nega- 
 tive and passive character, is clear enough, even from what follows. Scroi, 
 of course, has for its antecedent yvvaiKfs contained in yvvouKelas. Cf. Jelf, 819. 
 
 i.435.a. rrjs vvapxovff'ns (ftvaeus fi^ x^h^^^^ y^v^<^^<ti' An 
 
 eloquent passage occurs in one of the Oxford Prize Essays, [* Domestic Virtues 
 of the Greeks and Eo)7ians,*] condemning the cold-heartedness of the orator 
 who, on such an occasion, could tell wives and mothers not to be worse than 
 they were by nature ! But this is surely the meaning most suitable for the 
 argument. When the Greeks were exhorted, as they often were, tuv irar^puv 
 li^ Xfipovs (pavrivai, ii. 62. d., cf. i. 122. 3 ; 'vi. 92. b., nothing unworthy was 
 implied of their ancestors ; on the contrary, the words were an exhortation not to 
 fall short of their valour. So here the orator means, ♦ Do not deteriorate from 
 that character which Nature has given you ; we know you to be weaker than the 
 other sex, but do not extravagantly indulge in this weakness. tj S6^a 
 
 —'the praise: i.e. which will result from such conduct. kuI 'tis, sc. 
 
 H(yd\il r) U^a— 'great, too, will be her praise, of whom among the other sex there 
 is least talk, either for good or evU: Cf. Jelf, 819. b. The word kK4os is & 
 'nomen n4aov, ut non raro apud poetas,* Popp., who cf. U^a, 6vfihos (viii. 27), 
 i\rh and iKirl^uv, i. i. We might also cf. ' facinus,' ♦ famosus,' ' venenum,' and 
 many other words. For the sentiment cf. ^sch. Agam. 611. 'The two 
 properly opposed notions would be (i) merit, demerit; (2) praise, censure. 
 But Thuc. gives us one of each pair, Tnerit and censure = conduct that is cen- 
 sured.'— T. K. A. 
 
 Chapter XLVI.— (a.) nal 4fio\ — * by me, as has been done by my predeces- 
 sors. >^6y<p . . .tpytf. The usual antithesis, as has often been pointed 
 out— the first is, so far as words are concerned ; the second in respect of the 
 Victual co?nmemoration by deeds, i.e. regarding the subsequent support of the 
 children as part of the practical recognition of the father's merits. 
 I'^Xpl ^^7] 5— 'to the age of eighteen,* says the Scholiast. From sixteen to 
 eighteen the young Athenian was educated in the Gymnasia. At eighteen the 
 youth was enrolled among the ephebi, entered into the registry of his demus,. 
 and after taking the oath of a citizen, was armed in the presence of the public 
 assembly. From that time he was, in the eye of the law, of age, might marry, 
 appear before courts of law, and so forth ; but he had yet to do frontier duty 
 as TfplroKos, before, on attaining his twentieth year, he entered upon the full 
 exercise of his civic rights, by participating in the general assemblies of the 
 P^ple, from which fact we may understand why some have asserted that he 
 »a8 not registered till then. Hermann, Pol. Antiq. of Greece, § 123. See, 
 
206 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book II. H chap. 470 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 207 
 
 with Kriig., Plat. Menex. 22, Lysias ii. 75, iEschin. 3, 154, Arist. Pol. 2, 5,4. 
 cri^avov — ' therein proposing a prize,* 8C. which consists in this maintenance 
 of children. to is 5^ — ' to these I sa^,* 5k in a^odoBi. Seethe 
 
 grammars, Hermann ad Soph. Phil. 87, and infra c. 65 c, and cf. Livy, iv. jj, 
 * Nihil non aggressuros homines, si magnis conatibus magna prsemia propo- 
 nantiir.* airo\o<f>vp(ifi€vo t — ' having brought your lamen tations to a 
 
 close,' such being sometimes the force of unb in composition. Cf. avaXyriaainas, 
 infra ch. 61, and Herod, ix. 31, ws aTrfK-fjBfva-av, * cum lugere desierant,' where see 
 Valckn. note; and also ii. 40, iirfav airorv\pa>vrou, *when they have finished beat- 
 ing their own breasts* tv irpoffiiKn. 'iKaaros, sc. oKopvpaaQai. On 
 this mode of supplying the simple from the compound verb, Kriig. refers to his 
 own grammar, § 62, 4, i. 
 
 Chapter XLVII. — (a.) irpwrov €to 5. For the little that had been achieved 
 during this year towards the final object of the war, v. Grote, vi. 206. Even 
 the relief of Potidsea had been no way advanced ; and while the expectations 
 of the Corinthians and other instigators of the war were disappointed, the 
 anticipations of Pericles and Archidamus were fully justified (i. 140, a.). 
 €T€\fVTa — • was drawing to a close* The imperf . is used because ' ad rei effectum 
 qui permanebat respicitur.' — P. ra Svo /xtpr;, cf. ad c. x. ; Diod. 
 
 xii. 45. For the gramm. construction see Jelf, § 467, obs. 2, 478, a. 
 'Apx*5o)Lios, cf. ad c. x. 
 
 {b.) ff v6<ros. The description of this famous pestilence occupies eight 
 chapters of book ii. — from xlvii. to liv. — which description we may divide into 
 three portions. The first (chaps, xlvii. xlviii.) describes the origin and causes 
 of the pestilence. The second (xlix. 1.) its character, symptoms, and physical 
 effects. The third (Ii. sq.) its effects on the moral character and social life 
 of the Athenians. 
 
 It may not be uninteresting to mention briefly the oecumenical plagues, 
 whose ravages have been recorded. 
 
 The first is that of Athens, here described by Thucydides, who has been 
 closely copied by Lucretius in the end of his sixth book. A similar one is 
 mentioned by Galen as occurring in the year a.d. 167-70, which he calls the 
 long plague (v. inf. and Clinton in an.). 
 
 The second is that which broke out in the reign of Vibius Gallus and 
 Volusianus, a.d. 252, and is described in the letter of Dionysius quoted in 
 Eusebius, lib. vii. c. 22 (cf. Cyprian, de Mortal.), commented upon by Calvi- 
 sius, Justus Lipsius {de Constantid, ii.), and our own countrymen, Brightman 
 and Mead, who interpret it to be the opening of the fourth seal of the Book of 
 Kevelations (vi. 8). It is said to have lasted fifteen years, and five thousand 
 persons are reported to have died daily. 
 
 The third broke out in the reign of Justinian, a.d. 540, and is fully described 
 by Procopius in his Persica (lib. ii. 22, sq.). He is a close imitator of Thucy- 
 dides. It is also mentioned by Evagrius, Agathias, Gregory of Tours, and 
 Paulus Diaconus, who tells us it carried off Pope Pelagius, a.d. 580. It lasted 
 fifty-two years; and in 583 appears to have extended its ravages to Britain. 
 In Constantinople it carried off a thousand persons daily. It is curious that 
 the origin of all these three plagues is traced to Egypt or .Ethiopia, which, as 
 
 Hi 
 
 Gibbon says (chap, xliii.), have been stigmatized in every age as the original 
 source and seminary of the plague. 
 
 The fourth commenced in the N.E of Asia, in a.d. 1347, and in six years 
 overran the world with such violence, that Calvisius says two-thirds of the 
 population of Europe were swept awiy. Camden in his Bntannia, describes 
 its ravages in England in the following year, during which 50,000 persons are 
 said to have been buried in the churchyard of the Charterhouse in London 
 (Hume, ii. 448). It lasted for six years, and is known by the name of the 
 •black death.' This is the pestilence which made its appearance in Florence 
 in 1348, and is so graphically described by Boccaccio in his DecaTnercne, and 
 in the historical narrative of the brothers Matteo and Giovanni Villani. Sis- 
 mondi {Hlstoire des Frangais) relates its effects in France, and its horiors in 
 England are beautifully told in the novel of Rothelan. 
 
 The next famous pestilence is that of Milan in the year 1630, of which we 
 have a vivid picture in the Pronmsi Sposi of Manzoni, in the Storia della 
 Colonna Infame, and in the history of the Plague by Ripamonte. The most 
 stnking events connected with it are the exertions of Cardinal Borromeo and 
 the horrid practices of the Monatti and Untori. 140,000 persons are reported 
 to have died between April and September. The last and greatest plague made 
 Its appearance in London in the year 1 664, and is well known to English readers 
 from the journal of Pepys and the narrative of Defoe, who, though not himself 
 an eye-witness of it, writes with all the force and truthfulness of one. The 
 total number of deaths is given as 68,000. It is, as Mr. Grote observes (vi. 
 209), 'not one of the least of the merits of Thucydides, that his notice of the 
 symptoms of this epidemic, given at so early a stage of medical science and 
 observation, is such as to instruct the medical reader of the present age and 
 enable the malady to be understood and identified.' It has consequently been 
 the subject of frequent disquisition at home and abroad. The following treatises, 
 among others, have appeared in Germany: by Eyerel, in 1810; Schoenck* 
 1821; Grimm, 1829; Krauss, 1831; Meurs, 1843; and Brandeis, 1845; to 
 which we may add the general treatise by Haser. 1839 J Littr^'s introduction 
 to Hippocrates ; and Dr. Mead's book, De Peste. Littr6 remarks that it is to 
 be regretted that Hippocrates, though an eye-witness, does not describe this 
 plague, as neither does Galen that which he witnessed in the time of M. 
 Aurelms (the Pestis Antoniniana), and which was probably a renewal of this 
 plague of Athens. Diodorus also defers the description of it till its reappear- 
 ance m the fifth year of the war (xii. c. 58). Grote speaks of it as 'an 
 eruptive typhoid fever, distinct from, yet analogous to, the smallpox.' Niebuhr 
 tbinks It was neither the Oriental plague nor the yellow fever, but something 
 (between the two, vomiting of bile being rare in Oriental plague but common 
 m yellow fever ; ulcers, which are general in Oriental plague, being extremely 
 rare m yellow fever. Schoenck considers it to have been a camp fever, and 
 •Heister holds the same opinion. Krauss maintains the opposite, and says' that 
 e mgumal pestilence of Justinian was merely a degenerate form of the same. 
 ^ jas distinct from the inguinal plague described by Procopius and Ripamonte 
 2J IS believed (Littr^ says) to be now extinct. For three years it desolated 
 nens, continuously during the entire second and third years of the war, after 
 Qicn there was a marked abatement for a year and a half. It then revived 
 
208 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book II. ■ chap. 48.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 2og 
 
 and lasted for another year (the fifth) with the same fury as at first. It carried 
 off, Thucyd. tells us (iii. 87), 300 of the laoo hippeis, the chief men of the 
 Stat€, 4400 hoplites, and of the poorer population a number too great for com- 
 putation, iivf^fvpfros apid/xSs. Diodorus says they lost 4000 trtCoi, 400 linrfh, 
 and of others, freemen and slaves, 10.000 (xii. 58), but this number is, as 
 Grote says, much below the mark. Xcyi- 
 
 fjitvov. There is perhaps a confusion in Thucydides' mind as to I'Jo'os and 
 vdffTjfjLa, both which are used indiscriminately. In the following chapter he 
 uses the neuter throughout, as though v6(n)}m had really preceded; and so 
 Sophocles uses oSttj after I'cJtrrj/xa, as though v6<tos had preceded ^xnt^ irp^i 
 rh avvwvvfjiov^ : 
 
 BdvSv yt roxnriffayfia rov voffijuaros . . . 
 
 ^K(i yap a0Ti7 5tek XP^*"^^' — Phil. 755-8. 
 
 Cf. Hom. Od. xii. 75, where vapixt] and vi<pos are similarly confounded. Or it 
 maybe taken absolutely = ' Moj^^A it was said;' neuter part, like Sc'ov /c.t.A. 
 iyKaraffKTJr^/ai. Properly used of the descent of lightning, storms, &c., 
 therefore implying violence and rapidity (c. xlix. e.) * A diinne visitation! It 
 is here intransitive, as in xlix. the simpler form ; when transitively used it is 
 followed by a dative, or the accus. with iis. See Elmsley ad Eurip. Med. 93 ; 
 Eurip. Hipp. 141 6 ; Herod, vii. 134, viii. 65 ; JEsch. Eumen. 83 ; Procop. Pm. 
 ii. 22 ; rots i^ ovpavov ^TruncfiTrovaiv = ivtir^fff, ch. xlviii. 
 At} fivov. Grote remarks that about sixteen years before there had been a 
 similar calamity in Rome, and in various parts of Italy. ov tihrou 
 
 Observe the transition to the oratio recta. K. compares Xen. Anah. iv. 1, 15, 
 SflTTC QavfjLCUTThv y€v4(rdcu iracri koX xnranmvoy. <pdoph ovrws — 'to 
 
 such a degree,' K. Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. 4, 3, ^v U x^^*' iroXX)? koI r^vxos ovrwi 
 &arr€ k.t.A.., and Eurip. Hipp. 999. 
 
 (c.) iarpoi. P. quotes Cantacuzen. iv. 8, oihe iarpwv i^ijpKfi TfX^ 
 ovSffila. Cf. Ov. Met. vii. 526, ' Pugnatum est arte medendi. Exitium 
 superabat opem ;' ib. 561, ' Inque ipsos saeva medentes Irrumpit clades ;' Liv. 
 vii. 2, *Quum vis morbi nee humanis consiliis nee ope divin4 levaretur.' 
 ijpKovv. See Buttmann's Lexilogus, pp. 162, 543 (Eng. ed.). B. quotes 
 Eurip. Ion, 952, 'ATr6\\a)V ovStv fjpKtfff ; cf. Here. Fur. 500 ; Soph. Phil. 281, 
 339. * Not that it is any derogation from the labour or application of the phy- 
 sicians to say they fell in the common calamity ; it rather is to their praise that 
 they ventured their lives so far as even to lose them in the service of man- 
 kind.'— Defoe, p. 40. Z(r(f> Ka\ fiiKiffra. See Matth. § 462: 'Two 
 superlatives in two different propositions are compared with each other by the 
 words ro(rovT(f) and Za(f, to show that a quality exists in the highest degree in 
 one subject, in the same measure as it is possessed by another in the highest 
 degree.' Thuc. viii. 84, So-y /xeUio-ra koI iKfvdfpoi . . . roffovTCf) koI dpaffvrara. 
 So i. 68, 8<ry koI fityiffra iyKXiifiara ixofxiv ; Herod, v. 29 ; Soph. Track. 3i>: 
 (Ed. Cd. 53, with Wiinder's note ; Jelf, § 870, obs. i. ifp^^ '</"''^ 
 tKinvffav. For this use of irpbs at a point at rest, cf. Soph. Track. 37'- 
 irpt>j niari Tpaxivlc^v ayopd ; (Ed. C. 12, vphs &Kfftcriv Q(S>v; Thuc. iii. 81, e.. 
 viii. 98. Compare the 'supplicationes' of the Romans (Liv. iii. 7, x. 23, s%yi^ 
 9, xx^'ii. 23, xxxvii. 3), the ' rogazioni' of the Italians and the Middle Ages, 
 
 and the procession of the relics of Cardinal Borromeo, during the plague at 
 Milan, described by Ripamonte, lib. i. Boccaccio says, * Nor was there more 
 profit from tlie humble supplications made to God by devout persons, not once, 
 but often, both in formal processions and in other manners.' 
 ^avTflois. The MSS. vary between /aavTelots and fMyrelais. 
 rcKevTuvTCi. Frequently used for lastlj/, or at last (li. c). Cf. Soph. Ant. 
 260, ntiy iyiyyero irKriy^ reKevruaa ; Xen. Ci/r. i. 6, 19; Plat. Bep. iv. p. 425. 
 Wemaytr. * thcj/ ended by leaving off.' So apx^ixevos is put for 'at first.' 
 Matth. G. G. § 557, 4; Jelf, § 696, obs. i. b. 
 
 CHMTEfi XLVIII.— (a.) ^1 At0to7r fas. Nubia and Sennaar. See Gibbon 
 u. s. hlyvirrov. ' Nam penitus veniens iEgypti e finibus.'— Lucr. 
 
 vi. I139. GottL quotes Am. Mareell. xix. 4, 'Clades ilia abusque ferventi 
 yEthiopi^ plaga paulatim proserpens Atticam occupavit.' Schonck, p. 14, sq. 
 (yereae = iyKaTftTKT]^€. So Lucr. vi. 1141, * Incubuit tandem populo Pan- 
 (iionis;' Ov. Met. vii. 522, ' Dira lues ira populis Junonis iniquse Incidif ;* 
 Liv. xxvii. 23 ; Plut. V. Pericl. p. 66, ^ XoifxcaZti^ ti/eVeo-e <p6opa.. 
 iy r(f Ilei/jate*;. Niebuhr notices this fact to show the difference between 
 tiiis epidemic and the yellow fever, which generally follows the course of rivers. 
 It began of course here first, being brought by sea. * The place of its first out- 
 breaking in Attica indicates that the contagion came from abroad. It may 
 nevertheless have been connected, as Niebuhr believed (ii. 273), in some 
 mysterious way, with the volcanic convulsions which were unusually frequent 
 and violent about the same time, though Attica was but slightly affected by them, 
 for the earthquakes felt at Athens are not said to have damaged any part of the 
 city ; and other regions of Greece which suffered much more from them do not 
 appear to have been visited by the pestilence.'— Thirl, iii. 135. Cf. Procop. 
 Bell. Pers. ii. 22, c: ap^afi4vr) Se del iK rris irapaklas tj voaos 7}5e ovru 5^ is 
 T V n«T6ycuay ay4ficuye x<^P°-V' i'l^aro r&v aydpuvcov. Bl. says the 
 
 wepunrvtv is not emphatic, as though animals had been previously attacked. 
 But it was clearly the opinion of the ancients that in pestilences animals were 
 first attacked (Hom. //. i. 150; Ov. Met. vii. 536). The sheep and cattle had 
 been conveyed to Eubcea and the adjacent islands (c. xiv» ; ef, Grote, vi. 203). 
 There may therefore be some force in the word ; had the cattle been attacked 
 it would have been an aggravation of the calamity. Cf. Liv. iii. 66 ; Dion. 
 Hal. A. R. X. 53. (pdpfiaica ia^€^\i\Koi€v is rk <pp4ara. 
 
 The Jews were accused of having poisoned the wells in the plague of 1 348 
 (Thirlw. iii. 135). Cf. the account of the Untori in Ripamonte, lib. i.; 
 Aretaeus, p. 12, § 6 (ed. Kiihn,), o6iv oi/d' aireoiKhs cV ry Koifx^ r^ iv 'Ad-fiyricrt 
 MfTe|fT€poys hoKfeiv is ra <pp4ara ifi$eP\rjj6(u (pdpfmKa; Ov. Met. vii. 532, 
 Constat et in fontes vitium venisse lacusque.' So when the plague broke out 
 at Naples in 1656, the Spaniards were said to have suborned persons to 
 scatter poisoned dust in the streets. Even the holy water was supposed to 
 have been poisoned at Milan (Knight, p. 77). A similar notion existed at 
 Paris upon the outbreak of the cholera for the first time in that city. The 
 credulity of the lower orders may be excused wlien we find that even learned 
 ^^n believed in the possibility of exciting pestilence by means half medical, 
 half magical. <pp4aTa are * cisterns, tanks, or reservoirs.' 
 
210 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 49.] 
 
 avr6di — i.e. iu Piraeeus. The Kp-fjvTi of Callirrhoe, mentioned aboTe, was in 
 the astu. 
 
 (b.) A€7^T<w ir€pl avrov. Either supply roo^juaToy ; or tr. simply ' about 
 the matter.' Procop. liclL Pirs. ii. 22 b: A67€t« fifv oZv S)S irr? e/cacTTos itip\ 
 avTuv yivuKTKfif Kcd a'0(pi(rT^5 koI /xfTewpSKoyos ' iyw Se BOev re lip^aro f] v6(ros 7)8f, 
 Kol Tp6Tt(f 8^ Sry Tous avdpanrovs Si4<l>d(ipfv ipuv tpxafxai. yiyvaxTKn 
 
 — ' the opinion he forms — the judgment he arrives at.' ' Urtheilt.^ K. 
 iSttSrrjy. In Aristotle's sense {Eth. Ific. iii. 8. 8). ' The lay person' (K.), 'the 
 non-professional man' as opposed to the professed physician. Bl. compares 
 Plat. Pol. 433 ; Pint. Ser. Find. Num. v. 4, Cf. Plat. Leg. 933 d, Soph. 221 c, 
 Phofdr. 258 D, Protag. 327 c; Proc. B. P. ii. 22, o(rr€ yap iarp^ othf ISidmi 
 (vv€$r]. ficTajSoATjs. 'Respecting the causes which he deems 
 
 sufficiently powerful to have produced so great a revolution.' — Grote, vi. 210. 
 P. distinguishes properly between /nerajSoA)) and yardaraffiSy and shows that 
 there is no idle repetition here. fiera^oXri is the 'act of change,' conversio; 
 fifrdcTTcuris * the altered state of circumstances,' conversus status. The passage 
 quoted from vi. 20, quite bears out this view, ir6Mi^ . . . oirre SfOfifvas /wera/SoA^y, 
 ^ &v ris (5 pa<a fxcrdaracriv x^P°^V- The fUTdffTaffis is explained by thQ first 
 sentence of the following chapter — ' The change from an unusually healthful 
 to a pestilential state.' Demosth. Olynth. ii. 6, iroXK)}v r^v fieraa-Taffiv ScLKTiov. 
 Cf. xliii. c. fxdKtffT' hv txoi ri irpoeiSibs jx^ ayvoelv. 'Such 
 
 matters as will furnish any man who lays them to heart, with knowledge and 
 the means of calculation beforehand.' Lit. 'from having acquired some previous 
 knowledge, not to be in a state of ignoratice about the matter.* To record past 
 facts as a basis for rational provision in regard to the future ; the same senti- 
 ment which Thucyd. mentions (i. 22) as having animated him to the composi- 
 tion of his history, was at that time a duty so little understood, that we have 
 reason to admire not less the manner in which he performs it in practice, than 
 the distinctness with which he conceives it in theory.' — Grote. For the gram- 
 matical construction, see Jelf, § 832 — the optative with hy expressing a sup- 
 position or assumption depending on certain conditions; hence a still more 
 indefinite possibility. 
 
 Chapter XLIX. — (a.) ^dKiffra Z)\ 4Ke7vo. Cf. ad i. 13. 18. 118. 
 tLvoffov. Hippocrates {Epidem. i. 8) says that the same was the case during 
 the epidemic at Thasos. av^Kpldrj. So c. Ii. ; 4s rovro ^reAeura, 'deter- 
 
 mined in this* P. compares Cantacuz. iv. 8, vdma us iKui/o KaTeKTjyf rh 
 y6<r7ifjLa; and Krauss, p. 15. Tepo<pd(T€us — ' ostensible cause,* & ^ori 
 
 frequently used by Hippocrates in this sense. Aretaeus, p. 43. So Procop. 
 B. P. ii, 22, aTrpo^aalffTots. Boccaccio says of the plague at Florence, that 
 * there was no fever or any incidental symptom.' 0€pfiaiy an unusual 
 
 word (the later Attic form is 0<'p/to. Arrian, An. ii, 4. 8 ; Menand. ap. 
 Phavorinum). Lucian, JHal. Marin, xi. Ofpfiif • 6 Trvpir6s ; Tim. Lex. u. v. 
 Buhnken ; Tibull. iv. 11. 2, calor. See Lucret. vi. 1143 : 
 
 • Principio, caput incensum fervore gerebant, 
 Et dupliceis oculos suffusA luce rubenteis. 
 Siudabant etiam fauces intrineecus atro 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 Sanguine, et ulceribus vocis via septa coibat ; 
 Atque animi interpres manabat lingua cruore.' 
 
 211 
 
 ipvd^fiara. Observe the plur. Cf. Lucret. u. s. ; Virg. Georg. iii. 505, of the 
 disease of horses : 'Turn vero ardentes oculi.' irvevfia droirov Kal 
 
 ivffwS^s i}<f>l€i — 'emitted an unnatural and fxtid breath* P. translates 
 irvirov by ' tetrum,' as Lucr. v. 11 52, ' Spiritus ore foras tetrum volvebat 
 odorem.' Kriiger says, Thucydides meant that besides being ' noisome' (B.) 
 the breath was unnatural from the extreme difficulty of respiration. So 
 Viroil u. s. ' attractus ab alto Spiritus interdum gemitu gravis.' Cf. c. Ii. a. 
 iroXAet Kol &KKa ar air I as. 7j<^Utand d</)i€t are used indiscriminately 
 
 by Thuc. K. 
 
 (h.) vr a pixhs— 'sneezing.* Plat. Symp.^. 185. ^pdyxos — 
 
 * hoarseness* ' Humoris in fauces influxio, quam raucilatera vocat.' — Cael. 
 Aur. vii. 2 ; ^pax^v, Heyscli. rjxf/o-ot, y^ocpTiffai^ Foes. (Eg. p. 79. 
 /3tjxJ>s Iffx^pov — ' a hard cough* This meaning Fcesius gives to P>hl simply. 
 Kapilav—' the cardiac extremity of the stomach,* L. and S.; 'os ventriculi,* 
 Fees.; Lucr. vi. 1149, 
 
 * Inde ubi per fauces pectus complerat et ipsum 
 Morbida vis in cor mcestum confluxerat segris.' 
 
 (TTTjptlai. Intrans. P. avoKaddpa-^is xo^^vs—' purgings of bile* 
 
 Grote observes (p. 211), that *in Thucyd.'s day speculation was active re- 
 specting the causes of this plague, according to the vague and fanciful physics 
 and scanty stock of ascertained facts which was all that could then be con- 
 sulted.' These very words awoKaddpaeis xo^'js k.t.A. seem to indicate that Thuc. 
 was familijir with the medical terminology, and was no stranger to the habits and 
 training of his contemporary Hippocrates, and the other Asclepiads of Cos. 
 See M. Littre 8 note, quoted by Grote. But, as has been well observed, many 
 words which have now become technical in medical science, were of ordinary 
 use in Greek conversation. Freind, Hist, of Med. pp. 416-20, ed. Lond. 
 fSffot— differing in colour, smell, and taste. Krauss. raKanrupias 
 
 refers rather to mental depression and abandonment of all hope, such as Defo^ 
 describes, than to physical distress {= aOvfiia, c. Ii.), the 'anxius angor adsidue 
 comes.' Cf. Lucret. vi. 1156. (So Krauss, p. 17.) Auy^ kcv^—' an 
 
 iwffectiial retching.,* ' motus ventriculi irritus,' Krauss, p. 20. So Lucr. vi. 
 1158, ' Singultusque frequens ;' and Virg. Georg. \\\. 506, 'Imaque longo ilia 
 singultu tendunt.' Cf. Aretaeus, p. 50, ed. Kiihn ; Nicand. TAcr. 434, \vyfxo7a-i 
 ^vv6fifvoi BafjLfeffffiv. \vy^ generally means * hiccough,' and is the term used 
 for the hiccough of Aristophanes in the well-known passage of Plato's Sym- 
 foaium, p. 185. 
 
 (c.) aiTTOfifv^ — * to the outward touch* So Lucret. vi. 1163, 'tepidum 
 manibus proponere tactum.' Defoe mentions the same fact. For the con- 
 struction, see Matth. § 388. 6, and note ad i. 10. f. rh fieaov ffKOTrovvri. So 
 c. H. (a) xapoAtTTiJj^t. ovK6.yav6epiJ.6v — ' not over-warm* Krauss, p. 
 
 »2, says this was a bad symptom. Procop. B. P. ii. 22, Kal rh (xev trufia oUre 
 Tj hiiWofffff TTjy Trpor4pas xpo"*^* oihe dfpixhv V, o,T€ vvpfTOV iirnreffdvTOS. 
 oCre x^op^v — ' nor pale ; but reddish, livid, breaking out with small pustules 
 
 P2 
 
212 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Boo I ^^^^' ^^'^ NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 213 
 
 and ulcers* The 'exanthema typhosum' of medicine, P. Foes, explains 
 ireA.i5j/J)i' (TreXtTvbj/) by 'color ad nigrum tendens ex mbro; qualis sanoruinis 
 sub cute, ex ictu aut plag4 collecti' — 'livid or leaden colour* — rh /xeTexov uxpi- 
 rrjros Kol ixcKavlas, Sch, tA ivrhs ovtcos iKdfro. Lucr. vi. 1166: 
 
 * Intima pars hominum rero flagrabat ad ossa ; 
 Flagrabat stomacho flamma ut fornacibus intus.' 
 
 TUP irdvv Xfirrwv Ifiariuv. So Lucr. vi. 1168: 
 
 ' Nil adeo posset cuiquam lere tenueque membris 
 Vertere in utilitatem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 558 : 
 
 * Non stratum, non ulla pati velamina possunt.' 
 
 fi-fiT* &\Xo ri fi yvfjLi/oi. Jelf, § 895. 4, Brachylogy — 'a verb of n, general 
 meaning is supplied from a following verb of special meaning ; as every par- 
 ticular verb implies the genrral verbal notion of action or state.' Pop. reads 
 yvfiv6v, sub. ffwfia. Cf. Mark xiv. 51, iT€piPeP\r}iJ.4vos ffiyd6va M yvfjivoi, 
 the art. omitted. K. says yv/xvoi is correct, though the reading of interior 
 MSS. ^hiffri T€ hy is v^cop \pvxp^i^ K.r.\. For the grammatical 
 
 construction of the infinitive with h.v instead of the historic tenses, see Jelf, 
 8 866. 2. P. says fl ■hfxcXovmo must be supplied. Procop. B. P. ii. 22, tJj 
 05a>p re oh traparvxoi iixireffuv f}d€\ov. Lucr. vi. 1 170 : 
 
 * In fluvios partim gelidos ardentia morbo 
 Membra dabant, nudum jacientes corpus in undas/ 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 568 : 
 
 * Fontibus et fliiviis puteisque capacibus haerent, 
 Nee prius est extincta sitis quam vita bibcndo.' 
 
 Diod. xii. 58 : ol irKflffroi twv voffovvruv tppiirrov kavrovs fls ra (ppfdra Koi ras 
 Kpfi)vas, iiridv/xovmes eavruv Karaypv^ai to. (Tcafiara. Defoe (p. 105) says: 'Some 
 broke out into the streets, perhaps naked, and would run directly down to the 
 river, and plunge themselves into water.' Ka\ ^Spatrav — ^ aciualli/ 
 
 did so.' The common use of Ka\ in Thuc. For the ellipse after tovto, see 
 Jelf, § 895. 4. cLTrava-ra) rp Biipp. Larrey mentions the same fact 
 
 in the French invasion of Syria. Observe that the adj. by standing before the 
 article becomes the predicate. ^vv^x^l^^^o^' Cf. Matt. iv. 24, 
 
 voiKiXais v6<Tois KoL fiaadvois ^vvexoM-^vovs ; Luke iv. 38, ffvvix^l^^^ irvpertf 
 ix€yd\^. aypvvvia. Lucr. vi. 11 79, * lumina vorsarent expertia 
 
 somno.' aKfid^oi. The regular use of the optative. Jelf, § 843. i- 
 
 (d.) eVoTttTot. Lucr. vi. 1195: 
 
 ' Octavoque fere candenti lumine solis 
 Aut etiam nona reddebant lampade vitam.' 
 
 P. quotes Wolmar. p. 39, and Liv. xli. 21. diappolas aKpdrov^ 
 
 either violent diarrhoea, as Port. Steph. Thes. and Poppo, or = &fiiKToi vyp6rriros 
 v^arcoSovs, as Galen. Lucr. vi. 1198, ' nigram proluviem alvi.' 
 («.) KOT€<rKTjTT€ yap /c.T.A. Lucr. vi. 1204: 
 
 * tamen in nervos huic morbus et artus 
 Ibat, et in partes genitaleis corporis ipsas ; 
 Et graviter partim metuentes limina leti 
 Vivebant ; ferro privatei parte virili, 
 Et manibus sine non nullei, pedibusque manebant, 
 In vita tamen, et perdebant lumina partim.' 
 
 Cf. Eyerel and Grimm, ap. Pop. of the pestilence at Venice in 1576. Galen, 
 Schonck, and Krauss also speak of the disease attacking the hands and feet. 
 fs oi'SoTa. Parts of the body are frequently put without the article (K.), on 
 the principle of familiar usage. Cf. i. 8, a.; 12. b; 16. a, &c. K-hO-n. 
 
 Lucr. vi. 1211 : 
 
 ' Atque etiam quosdam cepere oblivia rerum 
 Cunctarum, neque se possent cognoscere ut ipsei.' 
 
 Schonck confirms this statement, and Defoe also mentions it. The forgetfulness 
 was only temporary. 
 
 Chapter L. — Kpeiffo-ov \6yov—' baffling all description/ K. Cf. Xen. 
 Mem. iii. 11. i, Kpuaaov ^v \6yov rh KdWos rrjs yvvaiKds. So Herod, ii. 35, 
 ipya \6yov /xe^cw, and ii. 148; Soph. (Ec?. T. 1374, Kpclaaov ayx6vns. See 
 Jelf, § 783, b. The whole thought contracted into a single substantival notion, 
 put in the genitive after the comparative. Matth. § 451 . 
 
 XaKettuTepas fj Karh r^v avdpooTTilav ^vffiv — 'heftiger alsdiemenschliche 
 Natiir ertragen Icann ' — ' nwre grievously than human nature can endure' K., a 
 common usage of /caret — according to the proportion of. iS-fiXwai. 
 
 See Jelf, § 373, i. The subject being indefinite, is not expressed, as it may be 
 easily supplied from the context. Matt. § 549. ^vurpd^uv = tuv 
 
 (lueSruv, K.— ' t/iat which is familiar to man: Cf. Soph. Fhil. 171. rk 
 
 yap opvea. So Lucret. vi. 1215 : 
 
 • Multaque humi quom inhumata jacerent corpora supra 
 Corporibus, tamen alituum genus atque ferarum 
 Aut procul absiliebat, ut acrem exiret odorem, 
 Aut ubi gustarat languebat morte propinqua.' 
 
 Cf. Ov. 3/c^. vii. 545-5^; Stat. Theb. i. 624, xii. 565, 'Eminus ipsge Pabula 
 <lira ferae campumque odere volucres ;' Liv. xli. 21, 'Nee vulturium usquam 
 visum.' Krauss, p. 26. Boccaccio states that two pigs who turned up with 
 their snouts the rags of a man who had died of the plague, in a short time 
 after reeled about as if from the effects of poison and presently died. Durino- 
 the black death in England it was also observed that neither beast nor bird of 
 prey would touch the carcasses (Knight, p. 64). reK^iiipLov Se, with- 
 
 out the yap following, is unusual. K. cf. Xen. Anab. i. 9, 29 ; Plat. Legg. p. 
 "IE. Cf. Matt. § 630. ivl\€i\f/is implies, as K. says, not 
 
 only that birds died from eating the corpses, but that they were observed to 
 keep aloof (Lucr. u. s.). HWcos—oUt* 6.\\(as. Not = alibi, as Arnold 
 
 "plains it, but = neque o?wwi«o. P. irtpl toiovtov ovSev — ».<?. xepl 
 
 Ta ha^a crd^fxara. Jacobs. Or we might say, 9ieither otherwise employed^ nor 
 engaged about the dead. ol S « K^yes. Lucr. vi. 1220: 
 
214 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 * cum primis fida canura vis 
 Strata viis animam ponebat in omnibus segre.' 
 
 Cf. Hom. n. i. 50 ; Sil. Ital. xiv. 594; Virg. Georg. iii. 496. 
 Tov kvofialvovro y — ' gave emdence of wha t the remdt would be J P. But is it 
 not rather — ' of the thing resuHing ; gave o'pportunity of observing the effect jpro- 
 chtced * — i. e. rh nTpdiroha yevffdfxfva Sicul>d(lp€<r6aij Xen. Anab. iv. 6, 13; 
 Hell. vi. 8, Sirws /*); ^aoffplbs tti} /X7j8' oXaOticftv irope'xoi. 
 
 Chapter LI. — {a.) irapa\nr6vTi. As oirTojuci/y, xlix. e. (Jelf, § 599, i). 
 the dative expressing 'reference to,* as (rvv(\6tni, (rvvrifiSmi flirfiv. So 
 Thnc. i. 34. a, 4v Se^ia iffirKeovri ; Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 33. 
 aroirlas — ' peculiar character' — * Seltsamkeit,* K. So we eay, out-of-the-way 
 character. dia<pep6vra)s erepy irphs 'inpov yiyvd/iifvov. trphs 
 
 erepov belongs to ^ia<p€p6in(i)s ; kriptf is only used to give force to the antithesis. 
 l^iav. Vide ad i. 109. a. For the accusative as a means of defining the 
 verbal notion, see Jelf, § 579, 2. Krauss, p. 26, translates it hy ' externnm 
 speciem.' irapf\vv(i. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 29. K. The 
 
 preposition here retains its proper primitive force, of something accompanying, 
 • alongside,' as it were. irfXfvra. Cf. xlix. a. Plat. Protag. p. 
 
 35. 4 a; Thuc. iii. 104. c. So Lat., ' desinere in aliquid' Ka\ 
 
 irapv dfpairevSfXfPo i — * with every attention that co vld be paid thern^ as below, 
 ■jracnj Smirp 0€pa7rei;d/xeya. \v ouScv Karsffr-n Xa/xa — 'there 
 
 was no established specific' — *kein einziges Arzneimittel.' So Lucret. vi. 1224: 
 
 • Nee ratio remedi communis certa dabatur, 
 Nam quod alls dederat vitales aeris auras 
 Hocce aliis erat exitio, letumque parabat.* 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22, Koi t5 ^vn-irav ctVeTj/ ovSeula ftrjxo"^ avdpuncf} is rijv 
 auTi\piav i^ev^Tiro. Compare the powerful language of Defoe : * The contagion 
 despised all medicine, death raged in every corner : men everywhere began to 
 despair — every heart failed them for fear ; people were made desperate through 
 the anguish of their souls, and the terrors of death sat in the very faces of the 
 people' (p. 180). 
 
 (b.) afjTapKfs, K. compares Herod, i. 32, avOpcavov aSiixa %v ovSfv 
 afjrapKes iffri. ^vv^ptt — ' swept off' — ^rieb alles aitfj Gottl.— 
 
 ' corripiebat.' ' Et velocifafem et vim morbi notat,' Bav. Cantacuz. p. 50, uses 
 Kadrjpfi. f^ T6 advfila. So Lucret. vi. 1228: 
 
 ' Illud in his rebus miserandum et magnopere imum 
 iErumnabile erat, quod, ubi se quisque videbat 
 Implicitum morbo, morti damnatus ut esset, 
 Deficiens animo moesto cum corde jacebat, 
 Funera respectans, animam et mittebat ibidem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 565 : 
 
 * salutis 
 Spes abiit, finemque vident in funere morbi ; 
 Indulgent animis, et nulla quid utile cura est.' 
 
 Chap. 51.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 215 
 
 rh av4\iriffToy rp yvdofxri. Cf. lix. b, travTax^O^v rfj yv(jQfxj] iiropoi. 
 vpotfVTo — 'gave themselves up,' abandoned themselves to despair. 
 oyT6*x°''' ^- explains by 'that moral resistance of the will that assists 
 recovery' — 'Tnoralischen Widerstande.' Oepaireias avaTrnnrXdfxcvoi 
 
 — '■catching the infection from attendance upon others' — ' contagione infecti,^ 
 Kuhnken. Plat. Phcsd. p. 67 a. K. compares Plut. Per. xxxiv. wainp 
 fioaK^jfiara avaTrifnr\a<r6ai <p6opas air' aWiiKuv. So Liv. iii. 6, ' Ministerla in 
 vicera ac contagio ipsa vulgabant morbos,' and xxv. 26, ' vi morbi repletos.' Cf. 
 Ruhnken's Timcetis^ s. v. ai/c^TrAews, who gives many passages where dvairiix- 
 irhaadat and KaTaTrlfXTrKcurdai convey, besides filling, the collateral notion of 
 defiling; hence of infecting by contact. Cf.Arist.iVM5. 1023. The Latin 
 impkri has the same sense — Liv. iv. 30, ' vulgatique contactu in homines morbi, 
 ot primo in agrestes ingruerant servitiaque. Urbs deinde impletur' 
 uKTvep TO. Trp6^ara, Lucret. vi. 1234: 
 
 * avidi contagia morbi . . . 
 Lanigeras tanquam pecudes et bucera secla.' 
 
 Juv. ii. 78 : 
 
 ' dedit hanc contagio labem 
 Et dabit in plures ; sicut grex totus in agris 
 Unius scabie perit. et porrigine porci.* 
 
 Hom. Od. xi. 408 : Virg. Georg. iii. 556. 
 
 {c.) <pd6pov = <pQopa^ xlvii. b. — 'mortality' usually applied to beasts of 
 burden. Arrian, vi. xxv. i ; Procop. B. P. ii. 22. d7rc«>AA.i/i'To 
 
 ipriiJLOt. Liv. xxv. 26, ' Curatio ipsa et contactus aegrorum vulgabat morbos, 
 ut aut neglecti desertique qui incidissent morerentur, aut assidentes curan- 
 tesque e&dem vi morbi repletos secum traherent.' a perils ti 
 
 fifTa-Koiovfievoi z:i <pi\apdp<aTria5. Schol. ' such as made any pretensions to 
 ffoodncss.' For this use of aper^ see the Aristotelian classification of virtues, 
 Rhet. i. 9, 2, and ch. xl. d. Arrian copies the expression, An. ir. xxvii. 6. 
 K. ' Qui humanitatem quandam prce se ferebant,' Gott. Cf. Dion. Halic. 
 Antiq. vi. 91 ; Procop. B. G.\. 8, kaX fidXiara oTs 87; dper^s t* ix^raTroiucrQai 
 ^vv($aive, and Lucret. vi. 1241, sq.: 
 
 * Quel fuerant autem prsesto contagibus ibant 
 Atque labore, pudor quem tum cogebat obire, 
 Optimus hoc leti genus ergo quisque subibat.* 
 
 rav dvoyiyvoixivtav. Cf. xxxiv. a. rcXevrwvres — * at last.' Cf. 
 
 xlvii. c. Xen. An. iv. 5, 16. i^^Kafxpov — 'grew weary of lamenting the 
 
 dead.' Xen. Hdl. vii. 5, 19, ttSpop firf^epa diroKdfipeip ', Plut. Sol. xiii.; Lucr. 
 vi. 1246, 'Lacrymis lassi luctuque redibant.' Cf. Liv. xxv. 26. For 6\o(pvp(r€is, 
 the acciLsative of equivalent notion, see Jelf, § 549 c. So-re Kal 
 
 KTflpeip — 'so as to be fatal.' The fact is confirmed by modern medical 
 writers. P. 
 
 {d.) ivl TrKfop. Cf. ad i. 9. c. 'In hbherem Grade,' K. irreXdfi- 
 
 Bavfp — 'attacked.'' So Herod, viii. 115, i-mKa^iiv \oi[xbs rhp arparSp ; Thuc. 
 IV. 27, tV ^vKaK^v 6 x^tyttajj' ^TreAojSe. r^ irapaxpvt^o- Tcpixapei — 
 
 'through their excessive joy at the moment* vir^ 6.K\ov poa"f)fi,aTos — 
 
2l6 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. H Chap. 52.] 
 
 i.e. not that they should never die ; but not be cut off by disease, but die of old 
 age. So Bio Cass, xlvii. 44, Koxxp-qs. Is this very slight, or vain, fond hope? 
 
 Chapter Lll.—{a.) ' EirUcc Plut. Per. c. 34 ; Lucr. vi. 125*7 : 
 
 ' Nee minimam partem ex agris moeroris in urbeni 
 Confluxit, languens quem contulit agricolarum 
 Copia ; conveniens ex onini morbida parte, 
 Omnia condebant loea tectaque.' 
 
 ^ ^vyKoyLihi]. Cf. Liv. iii. 6, * Auxere vim morbi, terrore populationis pecor- 
 ibus agrestibusque in urbem acceptis ; ea conluvio mixtorum omnis generis 
 . . . urbanos et agrestem confertum in areta tecta . . . augebat,' &c. 
 ovx ^<T(Tov rovs iiriXdSvras . A ftfiaxris for fiaWov. Cf. i. 82, d. The de- 
 jection of mind coasequent on the total loss of their property would render 
 them more obnoxious to the effects of contagion. Defoe mentions (p. 20) among 
 the aggravations of the plague of London, the great immigration into the 
 metropolis in consequence of the recent restoration of the monarchy, which 
 brouf'^ht together more than 100,000 persons, either for the purposes of business, 
 or in hopes of rewards for past services in the royal cause. 
 oIkiwv oitx vtfapxovaSov. Cf. ad c. xvii. for the number of hoiises of 
 Athens. The number there given corresponds with the number of heads of 
 families obtained from the calculation of the divisions of tribes for political and 
 social purposes. If each tribe contained three phratrise, each phratria thirty 
 gentes, and each gens thirty heads of families, we obtain 12 phratrice, 360 
 gentes, and 10,800 heads of families. The coincidence is observable. h 
 
 Ka\v$ais TTviynpaTs — some 3ISS. read irviyipais — 'in siijling cabins! 
 Thirlwall, iii. 137, 'the stifling closeness of the temporary cabins and the 
 apartments in the towers was more generally pernicious.' Cf. Arist. Eq. 789, 
 quoted c. xvii. fip? trovs Gottl. shows to be applied peculiarly 
 
 to the summer season. Cf. Plut. Peric. x.; Arr. Anab. i. xvii. 6. 
 ouSei/1 KSfffxcp. Procop. a. P. ii. 22, uses the, same words. Jacobs translates 
 ♦ ita ut nulla hahereiur ratio ordinis et discijplin<s publico! Cf. lib. iii. 108. c. 
 vii. 23. c. ; Polyb. iv. 71 ; Arr. An. i. 8. 8. viKpoX iw aW-h^ois 
 
 a.TroQvl](TKOVTiS e/cejVTO — cf. iv. 48, <popfi7f^hv ivX aud^as i-m^aXovTes; 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 23, tows vfKpovs ffu>prr]Zhv iy.iWov Sinj irapa-rvxoi KOfu^effBai— 
 ' ike dying and the dead lay mingled in masses,' K. Boccaccio says, ' There 
 they were stowed, layer upon layer, like the merchandise in a ship ; each layer 
 covered with a little earth.' Virg. .<£». xi. 207 : 
 
 ' Cjetera, confusseque ingentem caedis acemim 
 Nee numero nee honore cremant.' 
 
 Cf. Horn. II. yii. 336, &Kpnos tvn^os. Kal 4v rati 65o7s. Lucr. vi. 1261 : 
 
 • Multa siti prostrata vlam per, proque voluta 
 Corpora silanos ad aquarum strata jacebant, 
 Interclusa anima nimia ab dulcedine aquarum, 
 Multaque per populi passim loca prompta "viasque,' &;c. 
 
 ri T€ Upd. Lucr. vi. 1270: 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21 7 
 
 • Omnia denique sancta Deum delubra replerat 
 Corporibus Mors exanimis, onerataque passim 
 Cuncta cadaveribus coelestura templa manebant, 
 Hospitibus loca quae complerant sedituentes.' 
 
 (b.) 8 Ti yivwvrai—'whM is to become of them! Jelf, § 427. 3; Matt. 
 §4.88. Cf. -^sch. S. c. Theh. 297. is okiywpiav irpdirovro 
 
 Koi Upwv Ka\ &ffi(av Sixoicos. B. says kphs relates to the gods, offios to the 
 republic. Cf. Lucr. vi. 1274: 
 
 • Nee jam relligio divom neque numina magni 
 Pendebantur : enim prsesens dolor exsuperabat.* 
 
 P. translates it by ' sacra et religiosa ;' ' ilia enim sunt diis consecrata, hsec 
 legibus et consuetudinibus augusta,' Sehom. de Com. ii. 10. Boccaccio says, 
 ' In this affliction and wretchedness of the city, the respected authority of laws 
 both divine and human was almost entirely fallen to decay and dissolved.' 
 
 (c.) v6fioi T€ irdi/Tes (rvvfTapdx6r](rav. Cf. Procop. ^. P. ii. 23, ircivTa 
 T6 imfpaxpdT) rore ra irepl ras racpas vSfiifxa. Lucr. vi. 1276 : 
 
 ' Nec mos ille sepulturae remanebat in urbe 
 Quo pius hie populus semper cousuerat humari.' 
 
 By the universal law of the Greeks, the burial of the body by the relations of 
 the deiid was considered a religious duty. Even a stranger who found a dead 
 body was bound by law to throw earth upon it (Hor. Od. i. xxviii. 36 ; Quintil. 
 Decl. 5. 6 ; JElisLXi, V. H. v. 14). And children who were released from all 
 other obligations to unworthy parents, were nevertheless bound to bury them 
 by Solon's law, iEsch. c. Timarch. p. 40. The neglect of this duty is mentioned 
 as a grave charge against the moral character of a man. Smith's Diet. Antiq. 
 s. V. Funus. Cf. Cic. de Leg. ii. 26, with Turnebe's notes, and Kirchmann de 
 Funeribus, i. cap. i ; Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 23. The Athenians always buried 
 their dead with the feet to the west (^lian, V. H. v. 14, and cf. the appeal to 
 this custom by Solon, ib. vii. 19; Plut. Sol. 8. 9; Paus. i. 40. 5 ; Strab. ix. p. 
 394)- avaiffxvvrovs di^Kas. Eeiske conj. ra^as, which K. adopts 
 
 —'modes of burial.' di]Kas would imply the place of deposit of the dead. 
 I'oppo shows that Arnold's translation of B^kos, ' modes of burial,' is quite in- 
 admissible. Cf. Soph. El. 895. Why may it not mean, 'they put them into 
 places which, under other circumstances, decency would have forbidden?' 
 T. K. A. explains avaucrx^vrovs properly as ' the want of shame, evinced in the 
 violation of all the usual modes prescribed by custom, founded on right feeling.' 
 Defoe, p. 66 : * The matter was not much to them, or the indecency to any one 
 else, seeing they were all dead, and to be huddled together in the common grave 
 of mankind. There was no other way of burials, for coffins were not to be had 
 for the prodigious numbers that fell.' cvdvn ruv iTririj^iiuy, 
 
 Lucr. vi. 1280: 
 
 • Multaque vi subitd paupertas horrida suavit,' 
 
 'through lack of all things fit and proper for the burial,' P. ; *i.e. wool, gar- 
 ments, honey, ointments, perfumes,' Bl. Cf. Soph. El. 894 : 
 
2l8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 VfOppVTOVS 
 
 trdyrwu Za^ iffTlv auOecov. 
 
 Dion. lo. 53 ; Herodian, viii. 5. 18, K. i-rrl irvpas aWorpios. Cf. 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22, koI is aWorpias 6r}Kas ippiirrovv ^ Xavddvovrfs fl $ia(6fimi, 
 Lucr. vi. 1 28 1 : 
 
 ' Namqne suos consanguineos aliena rogorum 
 Insuper instructa ingenti clamore locabant, 
 Subdebantque faces.' 
 
 So Boccaccio : * The priests, with the assistance of the gravediggers. witliont 
 troubling themselves about any over long or solemn offices, laid tlie corpse as 
 quick as possible in the first burial place which they found unoccupied.' 
 rovs vi]<ravras. The technical terra iov piling the wood for the pyre (Proc. 
 B. P. ii. 23, ^vvi^(TavT€s ; Hom. Od. xv. 321 ; Herod, i. 50. 86, ii. 107; Arist. 
 Li/s. 269; Lucian, de Mort. Pereg. p. 560. rhv kavrSiv vcKpiy. 
 
 The distributive singular, P., who compares the analogous use of aWr]\wv, 
 c. Ixx. 
 
 Chapter LIII. — (a.) nrpwrov 5^ ^pfe k.t.K.—' was the first commence- 
 ment of.' avo/xlas depends upon ^p|6, not upon irrl irXiov. It has, 
 
 therefore, the force of apx^ ^»', as in c^V- '*• ^- ^- 93- ^« ^vp^ro avrov, and 
 i. 6, Tfiiravrai. Aristophanes and Plato furnish abundant evidence that about 
 this time a great change did take place in the manners and morals of the 
 Athenians. This subject, which is one of great interest, is treated at consider- 
 able length in the preliminary' discourse to Mitchell's Aristophanes. 'We are 
 not to suppose that this total demoralisation was brought about, in the short 
 space of a few months, by the influence of terror and recklessness. This was 
 but the crisis of the change. The pestilence determined the victory of an evil 
 influence which had long been spreading. The open practice of the new doc- 
 trines of the Sophists had been repressed by laws, and by the received opinio^ 
 of good and evil, but now that the insecurity of life and property banished 
 thought of the future, by alike extinguishing both hope and fear, and the 
 general disorder and distress removed all check of public opinion, the doctrine? 
 of the Sophists sprung at once to maturity, and bore abundant fruit after their 
 kind.'— C. Knight. irdXfxa rts. The indefinite used collectively; 
 
 hence, in the succeeding clause, we have the plural participle, dpumes ; cf. 
 Pflugk ad Eurip. Here. F. 79. aTnKpvimro fi^ KaO' vdov7}v iroifiv. 
 
 Cf. xxxvii. 2; Ov. Met.YU. 564. ayxi^o^Tpocpop r^f fi€rafio\i]v— 
 
 *thestidden change.' ayxi(rTpo<pov properly applies to that which is sudden or 
 quick in turning ; here, perhaps, transposition, change of places. Procop. B. P- 
 ii. 23, ayiipifTTpo^ov r7\v (XirafioXiw. So JElian, V. H. v. 1 3, tV ovrm ayx^fftpoi^v 
 /ufTajSoA-V "Tov Tp6irov (I iiraivuv xp'h- Cf. Herod, vii. 13. Tox^'aJ''"^ 
 
 ivavpeff^is. airoXavffcis koI rjSinradfiaSf Sch. iiravpeffis has the general sen?o. 
 *use, employment, usufruct^ * Genuss;' therefore trphs rh nptrphv become* 
 necessary to qualify the meaning. Herod, vii. 158. i<pi]iu(po-' ^'• 
 
 JEsch. P. V. 83. 
 
 (6.) rh vpoiTraKanrtapilv. Jelf, § 670, 1. Even when the preceding 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 54-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 219 
 
 verb is construed with a substantive or genitive, the nom. neuter of the article 
 is used, especially in tragedy, in emphatical or antithetical sentences, when the 
 infinitive is conceived as standing to the preceding verb in the relation of the 
 accusative, i. e. eflfect, operation, or intention, as the verbal notion may require. 
 For the use of the dative ry Zd^avri Ka\(pf see Jelf, § 596, i — the dativus 
 commodi. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 137 n.: 'The only exceptions to the general all- 
 engrossing selfishness were some persons of extraordinary generosity, who, 
 from a sense of honour, ventured their lives to attend upon their sick friends. 
 A striking contrast to the sublime charity which has made the plagues of Milan 
 and Marseilles bright spots in the history of religion and humanity.' 
 tWs out 5 — ' thereunto profitable' Kar4(Trt\ — ^ was laid down to be* 
 
 as T. K. A. says, that was the place it was henceforth to occupy. 
 
 {p.) dfwv 8e <p6$os ^ kvQpdiiruiv vSfios. See Luc. vi. 1274, quoted 
 above ad Iii. a. Note the absence of the article. * Fear of God, or law of man, 
 there was none which restrained,' &c. So infra, 62. c. rh fihv Kpivovres. 
 
 Jelf, § 708, I. The nominative participle used absolutely, where we should 
 expect the gen. abs. Cf. Thuc. iv. 23, v. 70 ; Soph. Aiit. 259, <^yAa| i\4yxov 
 ipiKaxa ; Matt. G. G. § 562 ; and compare the phrase c. xlix. e, iv r$ dfiolcp 
 KaJdettrrl^Kei. twv 5e a/Aaprrj/iioiTWj/ — ' no one expecting that he had 
 
 a chance of living until judicial proceedings might be instituted, by which he 
 might be called upon to pay the penalty of his crimes.' The hv qualifies both 
 the participle and infinitive. ttoKv 5e fielCw t^v ^Stj KaT€»|/i7- 
 
 pi(Tp.evriv. Observe that fiflCoo from its position becomes the predicate, and 
 that the aorist iniKpefiaadrivai implies the ipunishment •wa.ssusjyended, ready 
 to fall in due time. ' The sentence which was already pronounced against them, 
 ready at any moment to be put into execution, was far greater than any that a 
 human tribunal could award ; and before it fell it was but fair, upon all human 
 principles, that they should snatch some brief enjoyment of life.' 
 ^/iireo-f ti/ = ^7/caTO(r/c7)v|/at. So Hor. Od. ill. i. 17, 'Destrictus ensia cui super 
 impia Cer\4ce pendet.' ' In no age or place,' says Mr. Knight, ' in which the 
 Christian religion has been professed, however corrupted in principle or de- 
 praved in practice (if we, perhaps, except the account of the plague of Florence 
 by Boccaccio), do we find that that general depravity which Thucydides describes 
 has ensued in consequence of a sinrilar calamity. This difference can only be 
 ascribed to the powerful effects produced by the received belief of a future 
 existence upon the minds even of those who, under common circumstances, 
 seemed regardless of such considerations. Among the Athenians practically 
 no such belief existed ; it was the creed of their poets, it was inculcated at their 
 mysteries, but it was devoid of all authority to serve as a rule of conduct.' Cf. 
 Thirlwall, u. s. 
 
 Chapter LIV. — {a.) irtpiwea-Svr^s. So c. Ixv. 2, irepnrea-SvTcs i<r<pd\ri(raVf 
 usedhere rather in the sense of the cognate wepiiriTeia than as in i./^.'^,Trepnr€irT(c- 
 ti^TEy, u. V. not. iirii^ovro — as c. Iii. iirUffc Se . . . ■^ |iry/co/iiS^ — ' were 
 
 ^ore pressed' <f>da-K0VT€s 01 irpeafivrfpoi. A sort of nominativus 
 
 pendens, as lib. i. 49, d€^i6res 01 (nparr\yoi. Abresch. explains it as an hypallage 
 for avaninjaOevrfs . . . €<pa(rKov. Cf. supra Kplvovns. 
 
 (J).) iyiviro fiev ipis , . » iii\. P. says the passage is important as bear- 
 
 ■■§•' 
 
220 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 59.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 "I 
 
 B 
 
 If 
 
 I 
 
 • 
 
 ing on the pronunciation of the Greek language. Bl. says, * not only are the 
 sounds similar but the ideas cognate,' Kifihs being always followed by \oifi6s. 
 Cf. Schol. ad Arist. Eq. 727. ^iri rod vapSvTos. Jelf, § 633, c. 
 
 The genitive expresses that from which the action springs, and iirX represents 
 the action as resting on the object. A«p i K65. It was literally, as Bl. 
 
 remarks, a war of races, Dorians against lonians. KaraAa/Sr;. Cf. 
 
 ad xviii. i. 
 
 (c.) fivTjfiiq . . . ro7s eiSSffiv = avdfjLvrjffis. ai/€t\€, the technical 
 
 term for the oracular answer. Cf. i. 118, where Thuc. gives the oracle. Cf. 
 Plut. de Pyth. Orac. p. 586 ; Xen. Anah. iii. i, 6. Hudson quotes Fab. 
 Paulinus, who arranges the answer in iambic trimeters. The connexion of the 
 pestilence with Apollo is of course familiar to every one, from II. i. 
 
 {d.) 8 ri &^ioy Kal flireTy. At all events to an extent worth speaking 
 of, for Pans. viii. 41, testifies that it did penetrate into the Peloponnpse. Cf. 
 sup. ware Kal Knivuv. 4ir€Vfifiaro — ' it ravaged' = iirriKde. Hesych., 
 
 properly of the ravages of wild beasts, conflagrations, and similar calamities. 
 It denotes passing into a neighbours ground, tresjmssing. See that remarkable 
 passage, jEsch. Agam. 466, & QriKvs Bpos ^wivfficrai. ri iroXv- 
 
 avBpwTrSrara. See Grote, vi. 219. Perhaps Chios; hardly Lesbos, or the 
 fact would have been noticed when the revolt of that island occurs. 
 
 Chapter LV. — tnfxov. For this use of the aorists, see Sheppard's 
 JTicophrastus, ip. 263, Appendix i. ^s t^v UdpaKov yriv — ' the 
 
 sea-coast district' of Attica, a triangular piece of land of which the apex was 
 Sunium, and the two points the base of Brauron and the promontory Zoster. 
 It was hilly and barren, but contained the rich mines of Laurium. It derives 
 its importance from the political division to which it gave rise. Cf. Herod, i. 
 59 ; Plut. V. Solon, xiii. So the ol ireStajfof, Ar. Pol. v. 5. 9, from the ireSioy 
 above, t.^. the plain immediately about Athens. Aavpiov. Cf. 
 
 vi. e. 91 ; Pans. Att. i. i ; Cramer, ii. p. 375. The miners, Thirlwall sa^s (iii. 
 134), would probably take refuge with their property in Anaphlystus. Cf. 
 Xen. Vectig. iv. 43. 5. &p^ — ^ spectat or prospectat, 'looks towards.' 
 
 P. says that jSAeVet is the more usual phrase, while K. says Thuc. never uses 
 /BXcVeiv in this sense, but quotes four passages where 6pav occurs. 
 &v Kal t6t€. The koI t({t€, as the Schol. remarks, may refer either to the 
 former or the latter part of the clause. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — (a.) iv vav<rlv l'jr'trayuyo7i irpurov k.t.X. — e.^. the 
 old galleys were now for the first time applied to the purpose of horse-trans- 
 ports. Cf. Thirlw. iii. 103. In this counter-invasion, the object of Pericles may 
 partly have been to diminish the crowd accumulated in the city ; and perhaps 
 those who went aboard might consider it as a chance of escape to quit an in- 
 fected home (Grote, vi. 219 ; Diod. xii. 45). 
 
 (6.) '^Trihavpov. Epidaurus, now Epidauro, the famous seat of the worship 
 of ^sculapius (v. Smith's Diet. Biog. s.v. ^scul.), lay on the eastern shore of 
 Argolis, nearly opposite iEgina and the harbours of Athens, from which it was 
 distant only six hours sail. It lies on a small peninsula, protected on the land 
 side by mountains. It was at an early period a Dorian settlement (though 
 
 221 
 
 perh:ips originally Ionian), and one of the most flourishing commercial cities of 
 the Peloponnese (Herod, i. 146; v. 8^ ; vii. 99}. Besides Cos, Calydnus, and 
 Nisyrus, it colonized ^gina, which soon surpassed its mother city in com- 
 mercial importance. In the thirteenth year of the wai:, we also find them 
 Euccessfully resisting an attack of the Argives (v. 53 sq.). Cf. Strabo, viii. p. 
 374; Cramer, iii. p. 270; Smith's Geog. Did. s.v.; Miill. Mgi7i. i. 
 vpoexcifiV(r^. Either supply ^ irpoa^oKh or ^ 7re?pa, or more probably consider 
 the verb used impersonally. Cf. Iviii. b. 
 
 (c.) T7> 'AKidSa. See not. ad i. 105 a. In the seventh year [iv. 45] they 
 made a similar descent on this district (Herod, vii. 137 ; Cramer, iii. 258). 
 npaffids. Both the singular and plural forms of the name occur, as of 
 riata>a. The town lay on the shore, near the foot of Mount Thornax, aud was 
 the farthest place of the Eleuthero-Lacones on this part of the coast. The 
 name is said to have been derived from the noise of the waves (^pdCeiu). It 
 was again ravaged in the seventeenth year of the war by the Athenians' and 
 Argives (vi. 105), and by the Athenians alone in the eighteenth year (vii. 18). 
 Hence Aristophanes says, 'lib Upaatal rpiadexiai, Pax, 242. Leake places it at 
 St. Andrew, in the Thyreatis, but it more probably stood at Tyro. Cf. Smith, 
 Geog. Diet. s.v. ; Cram(!, iii. 202. 
 
 Q'Yif^VT'ERj.Yll.—ddTrTovras-^credvovro. 0a7rToi/ray, as Arnold observes, 
 IS used for any mode of performing funeral rites, whether by burning or other- 
 v^ise (Herod, v. 8, ddirTovan KaraKavcravTcs, ^ aKKws yij Kp^aurfs ; Biihr ad loc • 
 Oudendorp ad Suet. Dom. xv.; Tac. Ann. ii. 73 ; i:iian, N. A.'x. 22 ; Bl. ad 
 .i^ch. S. c. Th. 1023). It may therefore either imply here, perceived the 
 smoke of the funeral pyres, or saw them burying in the exterior Ceramicus. 
 rXilarov—'a longer time than in any other invasion.' Cf. K. ad xiii. c. 
 hdKiara. So Iviii. 6 ; v. not. ad i. 13. 
 
 Chapter LVIII.-(a.) "Ay^^o,;/. Cf. lib. vi. 31, where he alludes to the 
 greatness of this expedition, when comparing it with the armament equipped 
 forSicily. ^ti TroXiopKovfi^vnv. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 [h.) rohs irporepovs. The 3000 under Callias (i. 61). vo(Tri<rai 
 
 ath—'fell sick, having taken the infection from.' 
 
 Chapter LIX. — (a.) iiWoiuvro Groto translates by 'distracted' (vi. 
 220), Bl. by ' changed their sentiments,' comparing Dio Cass. p. 344. 22. So 
 h. and S. It might also imply their being ' deranged in mind,' as Polyb. viii. 
 39- 5 ; their being ' estranged in sentiment towards Pericles,' or being changed 
 for the worse, as Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 9, 'having lost their former high courage and 
 determination.' The Sch. explains it by fx^reB\i}dr,aay. K. compares iv. 106, 
 <^oi6T,poi iy4youTo rhs yv^ixas. P. says the pluperfect implies, ' that their 
 Jfntiments had become changed, and had continued so for some time.' 
 ^''aiT/a cTxoy. So Sl' dpyrjs ^x^iv. Cf. ad ii. 8. n.piTreTrrwKdr^s. 
 
 : '^- ^- ^ ^vyxo^p(Tp—'to give in, to submit,' 4vSi56yat, Sch. 
 
 ^achgcbcny K., « to come to terms by making concessions.' Cf. Ixvi 
 ^?^<rBfis. Cf. Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 {h.) iravrax6e^v—'from the pressure of untoward circumsiances on all 
 
 
222 
 
 NOTES ON THUGYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 6i.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 223 
 
 sides' IjXiriCfv—* expected' as i. 1. a. For the fact, see i. 140. a. 
 
 ^6\\oyov — 'an extraordinary assembly' which his position as crrparTfyh 
 enabled him to summon. Cf. ad xxii. c. %ti ^ iffrpaThy^i^ 
 
 i.e. as Seidler says, had not yet been deprived of his generalsliip. Both 
 Phitarch and Diodorus mention his removal from this office, Thucydides only 
 the fine. Grote therefore is inclined to doubt the reality of the former event. 
 He imagines that the strategi were re-elected in Hecatombseon ; that the 
 Peloponnesian army entered Attica about the end of March or beginning of 
 April, and remained forty days, i.e. till the first week in May. During the 
 inten-al that elapsed between this event and the time of his re-election, Pericles 
 convoked this assembly. When the period for his renewal of office arrived, 
 his enemies prevented his re-election ; which might in loose language be called, 
 'taking away the office of general' (vi. 226, n.). Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 142. 
 h-wayaytcv K. explains by ' ablenken,' 'to divert.' Bl. translates, 'to divert 
 the irritation of their feelings, and bring them to a calmer and less dispirited 
 state of mind.' ^-iridirfpov refers to their feelings towards hinisdj. 
 
 hZiiffr^pov. The disheartened condition of their own minds. 
 
 Chapter LX.— (a.) koI Trpoo-Sexo/icvy. One might be tempted to tr. 
 
 * it is even as I expected;' but I think the editors are right in connecting koI 
 with the Koi before iKKK-naiav. The dat. vpoa^fxof^^^V stands as the dative 
 in such idioms as /BouAo^ieVots ia-Ti. Cf. ry irX-fidei ov $ov\ofA.4v(a ^v, ch. 3. b. 
 rh rrjs opyrjs. Rather more gene|^l than opyh, perhaps indications of anger. 
 /Li€Vi|/wfiat. As this is the reading of a large majority of MSS., it is quite 
 useless to read fi4fx^i>ofiai with Bekker, who indeed gives the subjunctive in a 
 similar collocation, viii. 109. 
 
 (6.) opeovixev-nv. As the antithetical word is (rt^aXKofiiv^v— tripped vp, 
 (wertkrown, the metaphor here is not from a vessel proceeding in a straight 
 course, but from a person retaining an upright position. Cf 2 Tim. n. 15, 
 cum comment. opOoTO/ioGrTa. fl Kaff 'iKaarov f bir pay ovffav—' than 
 
 when prosperoiLS in the case of individual citizens' Livy has a well-known 
 imitation, xxvi. 36 : ' Respublica incolumis et privatas res facilfe salvas praebet; 
 publica prodendo tua nequidquam serves.' KaXws <pip6nivo%- 
 
 * when it goes well with him,: T. K. A. rather, * whm he is going on prosperously: 
 like a vessel with a favouring breeze. Cf. v. 15 and 16, and Xen. (Econ.y. 
 17, eS (pepofievrjs Trjs, yeupyias ippotvrai Koi at &K\ai T^x^ai S-iraaai, quoted by 
 Krug. 8 1 a 0- c6 C« T a t— ♦ is enabled to carry out his own preservation.' Cf. 
 sup. ch. 40. a., Sioupfvyfiv. 
 
 (c.) iirdrc. Used as we ourselves use wA^w for sjwce. See Kriig. on Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 2. 2. t^s tSUs. If we do not, as Kriig. suggests, read 
 
 1810, tr. 'private calamities,' i.e. calamities of its private citizens. We have 
 rh I5la Sid<popa, sup. ch. xxxvii.; but see i. 68, rwv i8ta ^laipSpwv. 
 a/jivvfiv. Note the active voice— * w-are^ off evil from her,' come to her aid. 
 The junior student must carefully distinguish from afx^/veffdcu, 'from ourselves: 
 Kal fiTj K.r.\.—'and not do what you are doing now, letting go your hold of, 
 &c. a<^(€(r0e must not be altered as in some MSS. to atpUffeai ; 
 
 for it is epexegetical to 8paT€. Popp. refers to Hermann, ad Vig. p. 759 » ^^°' 
 Cyrop. i. 6. 19 ; Pflugk, ad Eurip. Hec. 178. ^vviyvfart. So useu 
 
 vii. 73— ' «m7g£? wiVA Tne in determining: Cf. ivv^iiyva>ri iufr. c. 64. a.; St' 
 otWas tx^r€, cf. i. 18. a. 40. c; and ^C opyns tx^iv, v. 29. 
 
 {d.) yvwvai rh Sdovra—'to know what the interests of the state require' 
 Popp. has collected a large number of passages where a similar statement o*f 
 qualifications is found. The best illustration of the whole is supplied by Arist. 
 mt ii. I. 3. ^^^6Tco\is— 'patriotic: 'Some grammarians have 
 
 olrected to this word, as not Attic. Duk. ad vi. 92, has shown that it is ' 
 Popp. For some most interesting remarks on the nature of ancient patriotism 
 see Comte Franz de Champagny's Les Ctsars, ii. 391. xpVfidr<cl 
 
 Kpeiaacov-a, somewhat elliptical form of s^e-^kmg-' superior to the influence 
 (f bribes: The converse xpvf^drwv ^aawv occurs Arist. Plut. v. 362. 
 iy^crv ia-rl Kal fi^ ^l~' perinde ac si non; 'is in just the same position as 
 xfJie had never had the concept io^i ;* on iy^Ovfiiiev, cf. supra 40. b. 
 k(i(p6repa-'both qualifications: obK hv dfiolu^s. Sc. Sxrwep (I 
 
 <pi\6iro\is ur,. olKei<c5—' convenienter: ' e re civifatis,' Popp. and 
 
 others. I think the use of the word is to be explained by what is said i 70 
 rri yy^iixv olKeiordrr) is rh irpd(r<reiu n inrlp alrris (t^s ndx^m) xpS>V7ai • and 
 here, therefore, oiV./a,s will mean 'as if they belonged to it, and took its in- 
 terests to heart ; loyally, dutifully: rod S h-i. e. rod .Hvov rfj tt^JAc* 
 which IS also the subject of piKu,fi4yov, at least I do not see the use of introducing 
 an avTov with some editors. Similarly Ta,Ao?To is passive ; ' all would be bartered 
 Jor this one thing; sc. xpVf^drwu. The genitive is that of price, which is cor- 
 rectly explained, as in Latin, by the ellipse of ' pretio.' rod ye aSiKeli/ 
 = ' /o have injured,' T. K. A. Why so ? This sort of comment seems to mo 
 to introduce unnecessary confusion and uncertainty into the student's mind 
 It means to be a wrong-doer, to stand to you in ike position of a wronq-doer. 
 See note supra on vKouriiffeiey xlii. c. 
 
 Chapter LXL— (a.) K^p ydp. The connexion is, 'I am innocent, for 
 circumstances forced us into war,' Kriig. a'/p.a/s yey4ynrai-'when 
 
 the choice between peace and war has been offered to them: el 8^ 
 
 ivayKaJop '7,u puts the case hypothetically, with an assumption of its occur- 
 rence—' but say that it was necessary eitJier to give way at once, and submit to 
 m s neighbours, or at the expense of peril to come successfully out of the contest •' 
 tile participles without the article as usual indicate the condition under which 
 the following verb is predicated. 6 <pvyii>y K.r. A.-' why then in that 
 
 (m the man who has shrunk from the danger is more censurable than the one 
 ^ho has stood to face it: 
 
 [b.) i ahrSs €*>i_' the same in opinix)n: sc. rrj yvd>(xTi, as iii. 38. where 
 
 the words are found. oIk 4^l<Tra,Mai~'Ido not withdraw from it: 
 
 M€Ta0dAA€T€, sc. tV yyd>fivi^, lit. transfer your opinion to the other side - 
 
 ^ (emphatic) it is who change. Kriig. cites as another instance of fi^ra^dXJ^ 
 
 I without an expressed object, Isoc. iv. 125, roffovrov fjiera^eMKaaiv &<rre rais 
 
 -oWa«xoAeM«,>. Cf. Plat. i?.^. 564 A. U.paio.s. Somewhat 
 
 \^ix^^\~' scaiMess: r^ V^Te'py. Kriig., from Lobeck ad Soph. Ajax, 
 
 P- 74, remarks that {>fi4r(pos generally is rendered conformable in constructioJ 
 
 ^0 tHe governing word : tr. ' your infirmity of purpose: tx ^ ^-^ pain is in 
 
 Uomssum of each man's feeling; D. I should prefer understanding fx« as it 
 
224 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 62.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 225 
 
 has been previously explained, i.e. nearly equivalent to irope'xct. Cf. eh. 41. b, 
 and tr. * the annofjance makes itself fdt in each man's case' rh 
 
 AwiroDi/ is not ' pain' in the abstract, but t/iat which is now paining you. 
 /uf TajSoX^s — * a great reverse of fortune, and that too all of a sudden.' 
 raviivii. See note on oXiyai anvviiv, \. 50. e, and tr. • not hold enough to persist 
 in;' but iyKapT€p€7v also implies the notion of endurance — endure to the end. 
 We should have rather expected oh than fi, as the figure called Attic attraction 
 generally has place in such collocations. But Popp. quotes ^vviiaomai & h 
 •yvSiffiv iyKapTfpdV. 
 
 (c.) rb vKeiffrcp Trapa\6y<f ^vfifialvov — ^ that which occurs with the 
 greatest contradiction to our calculations ; tJie greatest unlikelihood.' So we have 
 rov TToAffiov rhv irapaAoyov, i. 78. infra, 85. a. I see no occasion for Kriig.'s 
 conjecture, TrAffffTy ry. irphs roTs &\\ois. This refers to the 
 
 devastcition of their lands, and their crowded condition in the city. 
 <pp6vr]fia. Cf. supra, and ch. 62, * enslaves a high spirit.' avri- 
 
 TrdXois — 'that are a fine match;' here, * of corresj^ondeiit character.' 
 a^luxriv. As in i. 69, ii. 37 ; and cf. a^iuixaros afavcia^ xxxvii. b. sup. 
 vvapxovffTjs 5(J|i7$. This gen. depends upon ^AAeiVct. See note on vrap- 
 Xova-qs (pva-euSj ch. xlv. — 'that reputation which is properly his,' i.e. which 
 attaches to him as a property, and which we look for naturally in him. So t^j 
 fi^ TrpocnjKoixrrjs is ' that to which he has no claim.' 6.ira\yijffavTas. 
 
 See note on uiro\o<pvp(iiM€voiy c. 46 ad fin., and tr. ' having done with grief about 
 yoiir private affairs.' avTiKa/jL^dveaeai. Sc. XP^^^ — '^^It ^"^^ "f 
 
 instead ;' i.e. address yourself instead to. The word is used in the LXX. for 
 taking the feeble by the hand. See also avr iXafi^dvovraij supr. ch. 8. 
 
 Chapter LXII. — (a.) rhv ir6vov. This would formerly have been de- 
 scribed as an accus. absolute; and indeed even now in translation we are 
 compelled to say 'with regard to your labour in the war;* yet it is best to 
 consider with Popp. and Kriig. that the words are in grammatical combination 
 with aTTc'Sej^a inroTTTfvdfjLfvop, as if no such parenthetical statement as OrpiceiTa (v 
 oh had intervened. We should say 6 ttSvos imoirrevirai n^ y^vrrrai ttoAi'j, as 
 well as imoTndvfrai jur; b it6vos yivrirai iroKvSf and therefore aired^t^a rhv vuKefiov 
 ovK opdws vTr(nrTev6ix€Voy is a legitimate way of speaking. Kal iKciva 
 
 — ' even that to go no farther.' Cf. with this way of speaking, Yirg. Eel. iii. 50, 
 
 • Audiat haec tantum, — vel qui venit ipse Paljemon.' 
 
 SrjXttiffo} 5e Ktti T<J5€ K.r.X.—^ I mill also put before you this fact, that you 
 possess a circumstance,' &c., T. K. A. As it is not very clear to me what 'the 
 fact of possessing a circumstance' may be, I should prefer to make the con- 
 struction B-nXxixrw T6ie inrdpxov—' I will show that this advantage attaches to 
 you.' The next words, fieyfOovs irepi, follow rather awkwardly, but I take thm 
 quite parenthetically (on the score of extent), i.e. pointing out what is impli*^ 
 in the T<i5e, and standing as a sort of epexegesis to it ; then is apxV is './<"" 
 dominion," or ' for empire,' i.e. for maintaining it. Others, as T. K. A., interpnt 
 fx€y4eov5 wfpt, • connected with the extent of your empire.' ovr €7"- 
 
 Popp. supplies ivfevfiTidriv, but surely Pericles did not mean to say that, great 
 statesman as he was, he had never considereji so plain and patent a fact before. 
 
 Besides the adjunct, 4u roh irph \6yois points to something else. We must 
 therefore understand 4xpv(rdt,7)v, or some notion contained in it, ' have in no 
 farmer speech availed wyself of it as a means of persuading you.' And why? 
 
 * Because the pretension which it involves is soiiuwhat of a boastful character ' 
 Surely these words are sufficient to show that he had hxid the conception in his 
 mind. See note on ivtdvfxiiQi]., ch. xl. b. 
 
 {b.) ix^p&v—' those parts of the world open to man's use.' So viii. 46. He 
 speaks oUrh rris OaXdaans fx^pos. There is no necessity to conjecture Krriffiv. 
 The expression is quite general, and probably one of common parlance. 
 ifCfieade. Cf. i. 2, a. 
 
 (c.) $a<TtK^hs and ^0pos stand in contrast, and are more emphatic sine 
 articulo— ' thire is no one, be it king or he it nation.' See supra, 53, c. &XXo is 
 used as it very commonly is, in the sense of besides. Karh xp^iav— 
 
 • in respect of the use of; ' tr. ' this power is not to be found in your having the 
 vM of your houses or your land, whkh you think great things to have been 
 deprived of '-or Kar^ may denote comparison, * is not a thing you should com- 
 pare uith.' 
 
 (d.) abr&v—* for the sake of them.' Matth., § 368, and Jelf, § 488, 3 
 'Most of these genitives of the cause or aim of the action, were formerly 
 explained by an ellipse of fV«o or xdpiy.' fxaWoy fj oi. A good 
 
 instance of the idiom called redundant negative. See i. 95. Popp. quotes 
 Hermann, ad Vig. p. 799; Hartung de Part. ii. 170; Matth. § 455, 3, to 
 which we may add Jelf, § 749, 3. But perhaps the best discussion upon the 
 subject IS to be found in Buttmann's able appendix to his edition of the 
 Midias, Excursus xi. p. 149. His principle is,-' Eatio hujus usus commode 
 in plerisque videatur explicari ita, utrespectu verbi negantis infinitixnis iste (or, 
 as here, it need not be an infinitive) cum negatione non sit instar objecti, sed 
 adjectus tantum ad expriraendum effectum ;' i.e. when the result is negative, 
 a negative is associated with it, even where a negation belongs to it fr^m the' 
 previous part of the sentence. So in the French idioms cited by Jelf, § 749, 
 -* il n'^it pas mieux cette annee-ci qu'il ne faisait I'ann^e passee. 
 Ki\rlov. It has been supposed that this refers to a particular way of dressing 
 tlie hair. The French translation of Zevort has ' la parure et Vornement.' 
 The more usual interpretation is a garden, or pleasure ground. The German 
 tr. « ein Lustgdrtchen.' Popp. says * noti Athenis recentioribus temporibus amceni 
 Kpicuri hortuh, et alii.' This is true, but only of * recentiora tempora.' On 
 the want of taste for the picturesque, and its imitation by horticulture, &c., 
 amoug the Athenians, see note on kvitos, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 164' 
 Bekker's Charicles; Kitto's Palestine, p. 26; Card. Wisemans Lecture on the 
 ^ J®^^* ^7'caAAfl6irio'/«a is, says BI., a very rare word, which I 
 
 have not observed except in the later historians (Procopius, &c.). Probably 
 their adoption of it arises from an imitation of the present passage Bl tr 
 ■m embellishment.' nrp6s. Cf. Jelf, § 638. irpotr/ce^ 
 
 p/i€Vo. So the majority of MSS. Others, however, read TpoKeKrnfjL^va. In 
 act MSS. vary so continually between these two prepositions when found in 
 imposition, that I should generally have little scruple in adopting that which 
 gave the best sense. The latter woidd here mean what he has been possessed of 
 •^/ore his reduction to slavery, and this Kjrug. and Engelman's editions give. 
 
226 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 11. I Chap. 64.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 227 
 
 iiii t 
 
 Popp. and Bl. retain the former, and explain whatever we are possessed of in 
 addition tofreedmn; but I believe the expression may imply no more than 
 acquisitions. Bekk. edits irpofreKTiy/xcVa, from an old Ionic perf. eWrj^t, on the 
 ground, I suppose, that copyists would not have invented such a form ; but in 
 a case where so many variations are known to occur, this looks like hyper- 
 criticism, fi-h x^'^P^^^' ^- supra, xlv. b. kot' 
 aix<}>6T€pa — i.e. as explained afterwards, Kara rh Karao-xctv ifol diaa-wacanes 
 Trapa5i56vai. That Kareffxov means retained their hold upon—maintauied, 
 seems clear from the elements of which the word is composed, and from the 
 passages quoted by Popp. 
 
 {e.) KTUfjLfvovs. Note the distinction from KtKTTifjLtvovsj and tr, \fail in 
 the attempt to acquire.* (ftpovfiixar t ... Kuraippovi] nan. Of 
 
 course the play upon the words is obvious, but I have seen no very successful 
 attempt to keep it up in translation. ' Not only with spirit, hut also with a 
 spirit of contempt', D. ; * Non-seulernent avec confiance, mais avec dedain,' Zevort; 
 ' Nicht nur mit Selbstachtung, sondern auch mit Verachtung,' Engelman. Dis- 
 dain is, I think, the nearest English word to KaTaxpp6vr\ixa, as here used. 
 Dionys. Hal. reprehends the verbal jingle. Certainly it scarcely suits the 
 dignity of historical composition, but these words were supposed to be addressed 
 to an audience of very mixed character, and carry an air of authenticity with 
 them. o {/xTj^a. Kriig. well has ' prahlerisch^ Keckheit.' It is not 
 
 easy to render into English, but the word contains the idea of a braggart, or 
 boastful confidence. Cf. vii.66. yvufiri viarfv ri — ' has a confidence 
 
 grounded upon Judgment.' Kara<pp6vvffts. It certainly is possible 
 
 to supply ^KctVy with the Scholiast as the antecedent to 3s ; but it is more, I 
 think, in accordance with the style of Time, to translate as Kriig., * but it is 
 contempt, when a man,' &c. Cf. Jelf, § 829, 2. avh rrjs o^oios 
 
 Tvxvs — 'where fortune is the same on one side as the other;* 'a fair stage 
 and no favour.' For inrh see i. 91, 6, and compare 4k tov d/xoiov, iv. ic, 
 with 4k rod vTr4p<f>povo5i which I suppose means proceeding out of a spirit 
 which disdains the foe ; having its origin in a disdainful spirit, according to the 
 true meaning of the preposition. D. has ' with a high spirit.* 
 ixvp<aTfpav irapexfrai — 'guarantees boldness {as in such cases) more secure! 
 4\irl5i re k.t.\. See this translated i. 9. a. i-vh rwv ifvap- 
 
 x6vTuv — 'proceeding from {i.e. grounded icpon) existing resources* Popp. 
 writes, * ra vvapxovra esse pnesentem rerum copiam, opes prcesentes, pluribus 
 docet Gail.' I would not therefore, with D., render present realities. 
 TtpSvoi a — 'forecast.* 
 
 Chapter LXIIL— (a.) ry Tt/x(»/it€v<^ t^s wSXecos—' the honour received 
 by the state* Cf. note on ry ju^ fifXeruvri^ i. 14, 2, and Jelf, § 436. 7. 
 ^iTfp atravTis. One good MS. has <? inrtp inavras, which Kriig. does not 
 disapprove, and which the German translator has adopted. /htjSc vofilffm 
 
 K.T.X. — ' nor consider the struggle to be about one jnatter simply, whether you are 
 to have slavery instead of freedom, but that it also respects the loss (lit. depnva- 
 lion) of empire, and peril on account of the animosities which you have incurred 
 in its exercise* i.e. with most nations it might be a simple struggle whether 
 they were to be freemen by victory or slaves on defeat ; but to the latter you 
 
 would have two aggravations: (i) the loss of a dominant position; (2) the 
 peril which arises from the animosity engendered by it. wv'is certainly 
 
 neuter. Upon this usage of kir^x'^dvofiaL see a good note by Wunder, (Ed. B. 
 259; Jelf, §483,4- 
 
 {b.) r6he. Since this must refer to rh 4K(rrrjvai Trjs apxvs, it cannot be 
 governed by 5e5tctiy. I should therefore take Sedius independently and connect 
 T(J56 with avSpayadl^erai—' if in his present alarm, any one is for playing the 
 good, quiet man, in this way.* The passages quoted by Popp. do not at all prove 
 that avdpayael(((Tdai caniwt take an accusative ; I interpret Kara rdde ' in respect 
 of this point,* nor does it seem to me necessary to read r^Se. Cf. iii. 40. 
 
 {c.) us TvpavvlSa. Because Cleon, iii. 37, repeats the sentiment without 
 a-y, Dobree would strike the word out here. But, as the editors observe, 
 Pericles would probably put forward the notion less coarsely than Cleon. 
 ol ToiovTot K.T.K. The sentence is somewhat elliptical, Tr6\iv aTroAeVeioj/ 
 belonging to both clauses. * People of this sort (sc. olav5payaeiC6fX€voi rdSe), 
 either when living where they could influence others {i.e. when members of a 
 community like Athens), or when independent and left to their own devices 
 (as in a colony), would most speedily play mischief with the fortunes of a 
 ^^*6. rh ykp &Trpayfiov k.t.A. — ' for quiet is not maintained except 
 
 when it has the power of action for an auxiliary (met. from the disposition of 
 raihtary forces), nor is it in a dominant city that it is of any use, but in a sub- 
 ject one, to insure security in one*s submission (or unnwlested submissioQi). This 
 I believe to be the force of this somewhat difficult passage ; rh &irpayixov is the 
 subject of ^vfx(p4p€i, for we cannot, as might seem natural, make the subject to 
 be a(r<t>a\w5 dov\fvetv without forcing the meaning of these words. What would 
 be a(T<pa\m SouAeueiv in an &pxov(ra Tr6\is ? Gottleber quotes from Dem. ovk 
 T/5uH]0rj -Kwirore rrjv ■n6\iv avails 4k Travrbs rov xp^^ov Tre7crai ro7s Iffx^ovffi fxiv, fxij 
 iUaia 5e irparrovaiy TrpoffQe/xfinjy aacpaKufS ^ov\€V€iy (p. 18, 203). 
 
 Chapter LXIV. — («.) irapdyea-Oe. The preposition, as often, may exert 
 the same force as the Latin se-, away from, i. e. what is right ; hence tr. seduced. 
 Or it may mean ' be not brought over to their way of thinking.* Cf. i. 29. c. 
 ^vydifyvure. Cf. ii. 60. c. ei Kal—' if, as has turned out to be the 
 
 case, true though it be that,* &c. Popp. considers that these words continue 
 to exert their force on 4iriyey4vTjrai re. I am inclined, however, to think that 
 the latter is 'quite an independent clause ; had it not been so, Kriig. contends 
 Thuc. would have written Kal, not re. 4 Kir 15 as. Cf. i. i. On the 
 
 whole Bloomf. well compares Tacit. Jgric. 27, • Iniquissima hsec bellorum con- 
 ditio est ; prospera omnes sibi vindicant, adversa uni imputantur.' 
 
 {b.) fi4pos ri. Cf. i. 74; Jelf, § 579. 4. fxaWov, sc. still more 
 
 than had you only been exasperated by the loss of your land. 
 <ivay Kal us—' as a necessity, as a thing that cannot be helped* On this particu- 
 lar usage of the adverb, see note on iii. 40 ; and on the sentiment, Soph. Phil, 
 ^y^- 4v ie^i ^v — ' was the way of this state, was habitual to it.* 
 
 ^riig. cites 4v roxn(f> ry rpS-ntp ovresy i. 8 ; ' and now let it not find any impedi- 
 ment in you* i. e. let not the continuance of the good custom meet with an 
 obstide in you. Nothing is gained that I can see by the conjectures koXovO^ 
 or«OTaAu0^. 
 
 <J3 
 
228 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 (c.) is aiSiov. This occurs again, iv. 63, but is, as Kriig. remarks, rare. 
 It belongs to the somewhat poetic tone into which an orator naturally falls 
 when excited. vvv vurt — ' nunc tandem aliquando.' Popp. 
 
 virevZSj^iiv. The Schol. explains uiroxaXc£(rw)Lie»', 'give way a little: 
 Kot i\a(r(rovffBai,i.e.'AS well as to experience the opposite. 'All human 
 things wane as weU as wax.' KaTa\€\€^i//€TO*. On these so- 
 
 called paulo-post futures, see Matth. § 498 ; Rost, 116. 9 ; and Jelf, § 407. i. 
 'EW-fji/ofv, The construction passes from the participle to ori, as sometimes 
 from the infinitive, and vice versa from Sti to the infinitive. See Popp. here, 
 and on i. 87 ; or with Kriig., we may consider that the clause follows fivij^r), 
 'AH explanatory of what is implied in it, i.e. ' the memory that we as Greeks over 
 Greeks have kid the largest sway.' On the Athenian Empire, see i. 80. Bloomf. 
 from want of appreciating the true aoristic force of ^p^afiev would refer these 
 words to a period twenty-seven years before the war. But Pericles did not 
 mean to speak of the power and glories of Athens as in any way past, and as 
 has been remarked, even if ijp^afifv were strictly here a past tense, it mij^^ht 
 have been used in reference to the future KaTaXcXfly^/frat. Trp6s rt 
 
 ^vixiravras Kal Kad' kKaarovs—' against all collectively or severally ^ an '\\[- 
 stance of the disjunctive Tf Kai, two cases are supposed, and these happen to 
 differ. It is hyperbolical to say that they had ever fought the Greeks collectivelt/. 
 though such langiiage might well be used by an orator respecting the Pelopon- 
 nesian league. Buttmann quotes this passage in his lexicographical notice of 
 Karit (Dem. Midias, p. 185) as an instance of the fact that such phrases as 
 Ka0' (Kdffrous become almost substantival in their nature, and therefore stand in 
 clauses us nouns, and with the government of nouns ; e.g.' hie, Kaff UaffTovs 
 pendet a prfepositiono irpSs; nam si sine ilia jungas verbo, hoc dicas " singulatim 
 ijm restitiraus." ' See the other cases there quoted, and cf. fariy oh, and 
 similar phrases. T. K. A. in this passage misquotes Poppo's Greek, and re- 
 ferring to Buttmann without examination, informs the reader that the latter 
 considers the words to stand for koX tovs naff Udarovs. (uvopurarTiv- 
 
 ♦ most thoroughly fu mi skid with all things.' fitylffr-nv, Popp. observes. 
 
 has reference not merely to extent and number of houses, but also to population. 
 It is well known that in Xen. Me7n. iii. 6. 14, the houses of Athens are estimated 
 at 10,000. This, counting the inmates of each house, inclusive of slaves, as i:. 
 gives lao.ooo inhabitants. The average number of free citizens in classical 
 times was 20,000. See Boeckh, P. E. of Athens, i. 46 ; Clinton, Fasti Hellenici, 
 p. 387 ; Wachsmuth, ii. i. 2, § 32. 
 
 (d.) KalToi. If we are to retain the usual force of this word we must, with 
 Hartung and Kriig. (not as T. K. A. says, * with Popp.,' who argues on the 
 other side), suppose that it refers to the contrasted notion contained in 6 8e 
 tpav K.T.A.— ' and yet while the ea^-going man finds fault with all this, he, on 
 the contrary (8«), who is anxious to be tip and doing (or, anxious to effect some- 
 thing), will of himself (i.e. without being urged by me) emulate it: It must, I 
 think, be from want of duly considering this that Popp. insists upon attaching 
 the unusual meaning ' atqui: but now, to the word in this place. See Jelf, 
 § 772. I. rh fjLiff€7<rdai. Cf. vi. 16. erepoi is added, as 
 
 kriig. seems to hint, for the purpose of indicating that the dominant race pre- 
 serve their distinct nationality, and are not to be confounded with the vau- 
 
 Chap. 65.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 229 
 
 quisled . iirl fi€yi<rToi s—'for the most exalted objects: Cfesar's 
 
 favourite sentiment, referred to by Am., will recur to most minds ; cf. Eurip. 
 Pkoin. 524: eXirtp yap aSiKsTv xp^y rvpavviSos ire'pt KdWiarov aSiKelv. 
 T] Kan-irpdrTjs . . . d6^a. See note on Granville Sharp's canon. The occur- 
 rence of T6 after the first noun makes it perhaps uncertain whether this pas- 
 sjige comes under the rule. One MS. omits the re, in which case certainly the 
 meaning will be, ' our present splendour which will form our future glory; or 
 eren if the Tf be retained I am not sure that we may not tr. ' tJmi which is at 
 once both our splendour at the present, and our glory for the future: 
 
 (e.) irpoyv6vT€s. This is parallel to the expression v vpSvoia avrov fj e'y 
 rhv Tr6\€fxou (c. Ixv.), and is well rendered by Arn., 'providing in your decision 
 for your future glory ;' then 4$ rh avrUa fi^ alffxpov is a sort of Wtoies—' what 
 certainly is not disgraceful for the present: He would insinuate, that though 
 the immediate result of such conduct may appear less brilliant, owing to the 
 (suffering it entails, yet brilliant it will be, as securing certain glory for the 
 future. This seems to me better than to say, with all the editors—' t^ fxeWov 
 KoXhv ad T'ov eirena B6^av et rh ainiKa firj altrxphv ad ri^v wapavriKa \afi-np6Tr]Ta, 
 respicit' What sort of a XafiTrpdr-qs would that be which was onlv ovk 
 
 Chapter LXV.— (a.) avrSv. We might have anticipated ayroi/, but practi- 
 cally the Athenians may be considered the subject, and we have therefore ainhv 
 in reference to them. irapaXveiv rris opyrjs. The ace. is more 
 
 common, Kriig. Bl. says the gen. is only imitated by Dio Cassius. May it 
 not be a sort of partitive gen. * remit somewhat of their anger' 1 Cf. inf. c. Ixxv. 
 d. Or may it not have axnhv understood, so that the construction will be like 
 TtapaKviiv <TTpar-nir]5, Herod, vii. 38, to remit from military service, and ou irapi- 
 Kvcraif ttjs apx^s, Thucyd. vii. 16, did not excuse from his comma7id'! Cf. the 
 same phrase, viii. 54. op tK^jfx^vos—' having less to start from: Cf. 
 
 our phrase, a start in life, and see note on i. 144, a. otKoSofiiaiSy 
 
 I.e. oiKiais. Popp. But does it not imply all the buildings upon the premises, 
 just as we speak of * farm buildings ?' Editors connect these datives with 
 KoXd. On KaTaaK€va7s, cf. i. 10 b, and ii. 16. Jelf, § 604. Am. remarks 
 that though they might have removed much of their furniture, &c., they would 
 practically have lost the use of it, and that indeed the term would include the 
 colonnades round their houses which were of course destroyed by the enemy. 
 
 (6.) ov fifVTOi yc. A second statement opposed to aueireieovro, the first 
 bemg tSio Se ^A-i/TTouKTo. Popp. iCvf^icca-av xP'^t^^-'^^v—' ^^^^iJctcd him 
 
 in a sum of money: The dative is instrumental. Cf. cpvyf} iCvf^iwaav, iv. 65, 
 and 'pecunia mulctatos,' Livy, xxi. 61. According to Plutarch those who give 
 the lowest estimate say fifteen, these who give the highest say fifty talents. It 
 IS not verj' likely that they were exacted. Diodorus speaks of eighty talents, 
 and says that he was dismissed from his office ; this is, however, quite in the 
 tone of the later exaggerations. Thucyd. would certainly have mentioned the 
 fact if it had been tme. Svep (piKcT iroieTv. Thucyd. repeats the 
 
 sentiment, x. 28 c. and viii. i. iir4rp€^pav^' turned all their affairs 
 
 over into his hands: They made him supreme over the nine other arpaTnyoi. 
 Like First Lord of the Admiralty, says Arn. Kriig. cf. riy^fiiav avroKpdTup, Xen. 
 
 
230 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 65.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 231 
 
 Hcllen, i. 4, 20, said of Alcibiades. S> v—i. e. roinwv a. ' The gen. 
 
 governed by a/i/SXiirepoi, less sensitive, like t^s -yvdi^i-ns an^Kiveardai, 11. 87, 2/ 
 Popp.; but, says Kriig., the two places are something diiferent, and he accord- 
 ingly 'conjectures Tr4pi post casura, supplying Kurh ravra before the second 
 &v. Popp. also suggests that Sv may depend upon ii\yu, a view of the case 
 adopted by L. and S. Lex. in voce, but this construction seems to be confined 
 to poetry. rp € *> ^ kt?, generally understood of the thirty years' truce 
 
 which followed the revolt of Eubcea. 
 
 (<?.) fJLcrpicos i^vy^'^-ro. Popp. quotes Aristid.ii. iz6, rodrd iffriv ivavrlov 
 rod iSm/cos Kal TrMoveKriKws. This must not, I think, be understood merely of 
 personal violence and avarice. Thucyd. rather refers to the moderation of his 
 national policy, in not seeking territorial aggrandisement, &c. 
 afffpaXws—' safe from trips and overthrows: Cf. i. 69, ad finem, and i. 84, iv. 
 jg 4yi' iKcivov— 'under hi?}i' i.e. h\s a.dmm\stTaLtion. Cf. Herod. 
 
 iv. 114, olKfcofiev cV wecoi^ axnS>v, and the passages quoted by Jelf, § 633 ; or 
 it may be in his time, as i-K\ Aapflov iy^vero TrAe'w Konk ri} 'EWdh, Herod, vi. 
 98. Cf. Jelf, ibid. KaTtcrrri. Cf. Ka0i(rTa^eVou i. i. a. ^ 5e. Cf. 
 
 iii.' 98. a. This is 8^ in apodosi-' he, then, I say! But, says I^iig., this form 
 of speech is more Ionic than Attic. It was, however, again taken up by tho 
 later writers, as, for instance, Arrian ; it resembles the rots St, to these I say, 
 sup. c. 46. irpoyvovs r^v Svvafxiv—' having taken afar-siffhtcd vieu^ 
 
 of its power; i.e. discerned beforehand what its true nature consisted in. 
 ivf^io)—' he over-lived it: See the same expression, v. 26. 
 
 (cf.) e^pa-Trevovras. Bl. remarks that this use of the word is uncommon. 
 But it is, as Krug. says, very graphic, being equivalent to the German phrase 
 ' hegen und pflegen'— ' to cherish and make much of Indeed, it might be well 
 employed of the feeling of Englishmen toward their own navy. Cf. also the 
 use of tlie word, i. 9, redfpaTrfvKOTes rh 7rA^0os, and ibid. c. 137, and iv. 67, 3- 
 Kal apx^v K.r.K.—' making no attempts to acquire additional dominion whlU 
 they still had the war upon their hands, nor perilling their country upon a cast: 
 iy r(p iro\4ix(p is equivalent to o/ita ttoXcjuoCvtcs, i. 144, a. ; and W\ei is the 
 instrumental dative denoting the stake with which they played. Cf. viii. 45. 4- 
 ^lodai Kal ro7s (rtUfxaaL Kal toTs xP^^a'^'*' ^^0^^ ^'^P "^^^ ^''^^'»"*"' ^^^''^^P'"' 
 KivZvv^<iiiv, and again, roh ^roifioii KivSweiuy, vi. 9. In Latin, pcrielitari aliqu^ 
 re. Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 25. Ha> rod TroAe'/xou. This seems a sort ot 
 
 technical phraseology, if one might so express it, i.e. belonging to such phrases 
 as 6> rod irpdy^Laros in the Rhetoric, iii. § 14, and frequently in Demosthenes 
 and the Orators, * tvhich seemed to have nothiiig to do with the war: Thucydides 
 alludes, as Am. says, to ii. 85, the mission of the squadron to Crete which 
 ought to have reinforced Phormion, the preliminary expeditions to Sicily, the 
 attock upon Melos, and perhaps to the expedition against Bceotia, which termi- 
 nated in the defeat at Delium. Karh rhs iSias (^iKorifiias^ 
 
 * in prosecution of their private ambitious views: iiroXlrevffav 
 
 * they conducted their polity; or as Am. tr. ' adopted unwise measures: 
 
 {e.) aZoiporaros. Kriig. remarks that for &5wpos, aSwpoSJ/CTjTos is more 
 frequent in Attic Greek, Jelf, §629.2. ^ X € u €> « s-' indepeii' 
 
 dently; «.e. uninfluenced by the popular clamour, Kriig.; other, as Bl. and 
 Popp., compare 37, and tr. * in such a way as comported with individual liberty. 
 
 ^y€TO . . . ^76. Cf. with Kriig., Plat, Phadrus, 94 b. ^ih rh 
 
 p.71 Krafxevos — 'while he made no attempt to acquire; such is the force of the 
 pres. part. ; cf. ch. 62 e. ; this would be unnecessary perhaps to notice had not 
 Bl. tr. ' because he had not acquired: vphs rt^ovijv . . . vphs 
 
 hpy^v. These two stand correlatively, and must be rendered alike — the first 
 is, to please them, the second, to make them angry. For the first cf. irpbs ^SovV 
 \4y€iy, Soph. Elect. 921. ex®*' — * having it in his power, by standing 
 
 upon the reputation in which he was held, even in some respects to contradict 
 them in a way to make them angry; i.e. he could aflford to brave their anger, 
 because he knew they would relent or give in ; cf. the commencement of the 
 ch. I cannot persuade myself, with Bl., Goll., Kriig., and T. K. A.'s editor, 
 to translate ' cum ird; ' with heat: Why should Pericles have made it any 
 object to contradict them with heat and asperity ? Is such conduct consistent 
 with what we know of the calmness of his character ? The above is I see nearly 
 Arn.'s view ; it may be some slight corroboration that I had quite indepen- 
 dently arrived at the conclusion before consulting any commentator. 
 
 (/.) KareTrK7\(Te€v ivl rh (poficTcrdai — ' beat down their confidence so far 
 as to create alarm.* * Quare Athenae ejus terrorem timuisse dicuntur,' Cie, Brut. 
 c. II. § 44, Popp. iylyyero — * it amounted to during his time; 
 
 imperfect. virh follows a verbal noun, as it would a passive 
 
 Tcrb. Cf. i. 130. a. avr ol fxaWov k.t.X. — * bei?}g more on a par 
 
 themsdves with one another ;' instead of avroi irphs kavrovs — * on a par among 
 themselves: irpdvovro K.r.\. — 'betook themselves to permit tiiig even 
 
 public affairs to go just as suited the whims of the midtitude* Kjiig. For irpbs 
 rtlovi]v^ cf. Soph. El. 1503, Prom,. V. 261. t^ irpdy^iara — 
 
 'public 7)ieasures: The word is preceded by koI because Thuc. implies that 
 they moulded these, as well as their speeches, in conformity with the current 
 humour of the people; for ivBi86vai, cf. ivdidSvai r^v Tr6\iv^ iv. 66. c, and 
 avTots Ttt Trpdyfiara, v. 62. Bl. less rightly, I think, tr. 'they took to gratifying 
 the people, so as to give up to t/iem the administration; &c. 
 
 {g.) xoKXh rifj.apr'fjdii — 'many blunders were made, and more especially 
 the blunder of the Sicilian ejrpedition.^ There is no valid objection to this way 
 of speaking, as may be seen from Popp. quotations, afxaprSyicva fpya, iii. 67 ; 
 T] i^afxaproficvrt Trpa^is, Plat. Protag. p. 357. e. ; why not then irKovs r]fjLapri)dr]? 
 ov roaovroy k.t.A. — 'not so much an error of judgment in respect of the 
 persons against whom thy went, as that those who sent them forth did not follow 
 the matter up lyy decreeing what was requisite for the departed armament: An 
 English writer would have balanced the sentence by some noun answering 
 afidpri^na, but this unsymmetrical construction is introduced upon the principle 
 of variety so frequently noticed. Cf. i. 38. With rois olxofifvois, cf. ruv 
 olxofifyuvj eaid of the Persians who had gone upon the expedition to Greece, 
 iEsch. Per. i. Some difficulty has been felt about iTriyiyvuffKovres^ but I 
 believe the above to be the true meaning here from i. 132,^1?; eTriyvt^; i. 70, ra 
 vKapxovra cdi^eiy koI iriyvuvai fir)84v. The force of the pr':'p. is less obvious in 
 other cases, iii. 57. 5ia/3oA.ar — 'cabals; such as are reco.ded by 
 
 Andocides. Perhaps Thuc. particularly refers to the intrigues which terminated 
 in the recall of Alcibiades. t^ irepl rrjy irSXiy. Kriig. considers 
 
 that allusion is made to the factions which in Olymp. xcii. z broke out in the 
 
.11 ml 
 
 292 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 6/.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 233 
 
 army itself. irpwrov. Not, I think certainly, */or ihefrsf time since the 
 
 Pisistratido',' but 'Jirst began the internal troubles' which subsequently reached 
 such a height. Cf. vi. 53. 
 
 (A.) <T<paK4vr^s irapaa-Kfvp. Cf. \i. lo, (T<pOL\ivr(i3U a^iSxpfV ^vvdufi^ 
 Popp. rpia irt]. It is not clear what three years are intended. 
 
 Arn. understands the three years which elapsed from the arrival of Cyrus in 
 Asia Minor to the surrender of Athens to Lysander, B.C. 407-4. Of this 
 Popp. says ^prtrrsus ferri non potest.' Kriig., in his clironologieal work, esti- 
 mates the time as included between the commencement of the seditions in the 
 city till the arrival of Cyrus at Sai-dis, i.e. from the early part of B.C. 411 to 
 the spring of B.C. 408. To this Popp. objects that if rpia fxtv cttj avruxov 
 were meant to be opposed to Kvpcp re v<mpov^ these words would have been 
 written vffT€p6v re or St. He does not himself give any other explanation, but 
 seems to regard with favour Hajick's conjecture, Se'/ca for rpia, which is, he 
 thinks, slightly confirmed by Isocrat. Panath. § 57. ^aaiXfus 
 
 TraibL Son of Darius Nothus, the son of Artaxerxes. vpo(ry€vonh<f> 
 
 — * coming upon them in addition to all their other enemies.* 
 
 (i.) cy (r<l>l(Ti. Popp. well cf. 4v toZs BiKa(TTa7s ovk ifiol toS' tV^oA?;, Soph. 
 AJax, 1 1 37; but as vfpnriirTftj/ should be followed by an objective dative, cf. i. 
 43 d., ii. 54, 59 ; ho supplies avrais from biatpopds, which Kriig. considers rnehr 
 als hart. Kriig. also directs attention to <T<pi(nv without avruv, reflected back 
 to the nearest subject, which is an Ionic usage, and refers to ii. 76. a. ; iv. 8. a. 
 103. c; V. 14. a. i-Kfplaa-fvcrf. This verb denotes the existence 
 
 of a svpfrfluiti/, and indicates that the spirit which the Athenians showed in 
 their difficulties, and their protracted resistance, was so much over and above 
 what Pericles had calculatetl upon, and consequently a proof that his calcula- 
 tion was a sound one, and would have been verified had they not run counter 
 to his policy. o<^' S>v avrhs tt pa tyvoo — 'from tJte resources of 
 
 which from his own perspicacity he had foreknowledge J Am. explains avrhs by 
 ' his own mere ability, before experience proved it to tlte world.' On IlepiKAei, 
 cf. Jelf, § 597. 
 
 Chapter LXVI. — ZaKvi/dov. The name of the island was derived, ac- 
 cording to Pausanias (viii. 24. 2), from Zacynthus, son of Dardanus, an 
 Arcadian chief. According to a very ancient tradition, the Zacynthians, in 
 conjunction with the Kutuli of Ardea, founded Saguntum, in Spain. [Liv. 
 xxi. 7.] It was here that Demaratus took refuge from the persecution of his 
 enemies (Herod, vi. 70). Not long before the Peloponnesian war it was reduced 
 by Tolmides, the Athenian general, and from this time became dependent on 
 Athens (Diod. Sic. xi. 84 ; cf. Thuc. vii. 57). Its modern name is /Aante. 
 vavapxos. This office at Sparta lasted for one year. (Cf. ad c. Ixxx., where 
 we find it continued to him for another year.) Xen. He/l. ii. i, 7, ov v6nos 
 avro7s 81s rhv avrbv vaxxipx^'ty. (Manso, Sparta, ii. 382. P.) 
 ^vyfx'^pov- Cf. ad lix. (b.) 
 
 Chapter LXVII. — {a.) 'kpicrnvs. Cf. ad i. 60. *kvi]pi<rros 
 
 KaX 'NiK6Kaos. Aneristus, son of Sperthias, and Nicolaus, son of liu/is, the 
 Spartans who volunteered to go to Suya to atone for the murder of the Persian 
 
 heralds. Herod, vii. 134-8. Thirlwall, iii. 163, n. 'Tho romantic and 
 tragical coincidence' «>f these persons being the sons of the envoys whose lives 
 were spared by Xerxes, ceases, Mr. G-rote says, when we remember that the 
 functions of herald at Sparta were the privilege of a particular gens : every 
 jierald was ex officio the son of a herald. These two, therefore, being the sons 
 uf men who had been to Susa before, had probably talked a great deal about 
 it, and had derived great glory from the unaccepted offi^r of their lives in 
 atonement, would be the men whom the Spartans would most naturally fix 
 upon, in preference to any others, to fulfil this dangerous mission (vi. 245, 
 note). Mr. Grote also thinks that Aneristus had distinguished himself in the 
 capture of the fishermen on the coast of Peloponnesus by the Lacedaemonians. 
 Apyf'ios Idla n6\\i5. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 163. ' PoUis had no commission 
 from his own city, but probably represented the wishes of a party ;' Argos, as 
 a state, being favourably disposed towards Athens. See Schol. For the 
 privateering of the Lacedaemonians, cf. Thuc. v. 115 ; Xen. Hell. v. i. 29. 
 us &a(Ti\ia. Darius Nothus, Gottleber says; but Darius Nothus did not 
 corao to the throne till B.C. 424. It was Artaxerxes Longimanus, whose 
 death Thuc. records in the archontate of Stratocles, iv. 50. Cf. Wess. ad 
 Dmd. Sic. xii. 64. StTaAKTjj/. Cf. ad c. xxix. «^ 
 
 Tus TTfiffeiav — cf. i. 58 — * if possible persuade,' hence e? ttws, with the opta- 
 tive, means to * try to do something,' like the epic eX Ke, aUe. Jelf, § 877, 
 obs. 5. St' iKelyov iropevdrjvai — i.e., they applied to him for a 
 
 safe escort to the banks of the Hellespont, their main object (^T€p ^pfi-nvro) 
 being to get to Persia. Cf. c. vii. a. Pharnaces was satrap of Dascylitis. Cf. 
 i. 129. a. 
 
 [h.) raparvx^vres — * who happe7ied to be resident at the court of Sitalces. 
 TTjv iKelvov ir6\iu rb fxepos. Sadocus, having been admitted to the rights 
 of Athenian citizenship, would be supposed to participate in any injury done to 
 the state of which he now formed an integral part; upon the principle that if 
 one member suffer, all the members suffer with it. By the exaggeration of 
 his ridicule Aristophanes testifies to the fact of an Athenomania, as Thirlwall 
 calls it (iii. 161, n.), on the part of Sitalces and his son Sadocus. the new- 
 made citizen {Acharn. 141, sq.). This seizure, therefore, of Aristeus and his 
 companions was, as Grote observes, ' a testimony of zeal in his new character 
 of Athenian citizen ; ' and this interpretation is fully borne out by Aristophanes' 
 ^ords, Kol rhv Ttarep' r]vrifi6\ci fio-qdelv rfj irdrpa, Ach. 147. It has been made 
 a question whether rh /idpos means ' so far as in them lay,' or whether it refers to 
 r6\iv, and implies a partial participation by Sadocus in Athenian citizenship. 
 Popp. seems to prefer the latter, and tr. ' earn urbe^n qucB ipsius pro rata parte 
 emt' So too Gcill. * urbem qucs ipsius ex parte sit.' Haack, Arn, and Kriig. 
 I adopt the former view, and certainly the ordinary usage oi fiepos appears to be 
 in their favour. Arn. e.g. quotes i. 74 and 127. We may add Soph. (Ed. Tyr, 
 \ro.vrwv ip-fifiovs, irK^v offov rh ahv fiipoSy 1509 ; (Ed. Col. ovk kv-^v, rh ahv fiepoSy 
 ^368; and similiter Antig. 1049. Nor is the idiom confined to poetr}\ Plato 
 I has. ot TttiSes Ti> tr6i/ /ie'pos, 8 ri h.v rvxaai, rovro irpd^ovci (Criton, §45). It 
 t^ertainly does not seem that the other interpretation is so well supported by 
 I'^sage; or indeed by the sense, for why qualify his citizenship at a moment 
 when he was most strenuously asserting it? 
 
 
234 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book ir. I Chap. 69.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 235 
 
 (c.) r€paid)ff€iv — sc. lourous, used here intransitively = Trcpaicio-eo-eaj, L, 
 and S. Thomas M. reniarks it as a peculiarity of Thucydides. K. from Duker. 
 Cf. ' trajicere.' ^vWa/xPayfij at Bisanthe, on the Hellespont 
 
 (Herod, rii. 137). 
 
 (d.) <pdpayyas. P. says that the use of the plural shows that the specific 
 fidpadpov (Wachsm. Ant. ii. i. p. 254) is not intended. Cf. Arist. Nub. 1450; 
 Plat. Gorq. 516 e; Seh. Arist. PL 431 ; Thuc. i. 134; Paus. Mess. iv. x\-iii. 
 3. The ^dpadpov at Sparta "was called KaidZas or Kcd^as. See Paus. I. c. for 
 the story of Aristomenes. Cf. Buttm. Lex. s. v. KT^Tweaaa ; Harpocration s. v. 
 ^dpaBpov and opvy/xa; Arist. P/uf. 431, Fischer's note. Hence the Athenian 
 executioner was called 6 iirl r^ opvyyiari. to7s avrott a/jLvveaBai 
 
 — *as a reprisal for the c'aptured seamen slain by the Lacedaemonians' (Grote. 
 Ti. 245)- Cf. ad i. 42. a. ; iioph. Ant. 643, us koI rhv ^x^p^v am-aixvvuvTai Kams. 
 In i. 30, and iii. 32, we find similar instances of the killing prisoners of war. 
 vdvras 5^ — * all without exception.* Cf. i. i. b. 
 
 (e.) robs fiijSh fi^ff trfpuv — lit. those neither with one nor the other; 
 ' the neutrals,' c. Ixii. i, Ixii. 2 ; vi. 45, d. Grote (vi. 243) says, ' these persons 
 were probably slain as the best way of getting rid of them and thus supprcsshig 
 evidence — since to dismiss them, or sell them as slaves, would have given pub- 
 licity to a piratical capture, and provoked the neutral towns.' 
 
 Chapter LXVIII. — (a.) 'AnirpaKiuTai. Ambracia was an important city 
 on the north of the Ambraciot gulf, or lagoon, which took its name from the 
 city. Its legendary founder was Ambrax, whom the tradition represented as 
 son of Thesprotus ; but it was made a Greek city by a colony of Coriuthiacs 
 who settled hero in the time of Cypselus, about b.c. 635; Gorgus, a son or 
 brother of Cypselus, being the Krun^s. It soon became a flourishing city, and 
 the chief of the Corinthian colonies in these parts, furnishing seven ships in tbe 
 war against Xerxes [Herod, viii. 45], and twenty-seven to Corinth in their war 
 with Corcyra, b.c. 432 (Thuc. i. 46). Its territory, watered by the Arachtlms, on 
 the east bank of which the city stood, extended along the coast for 120 stadia. 
 The valley of the Arachthus was extremely fertile, producing excellent corn 
 in abundance. As a Corinthian colony, it sided of course with the Laceda?rao- 
 nians. It became in after-times the capital of Pyrrhus, king of Epirus. See 
 Smith, Geog. Diet. s. v. It is now called Arta. $ap$dpwv. The 
 
 earliest inhabitants of this province, according to Hecatjeus of Miletus, ami 
 Aristotle (as quoted by Strabo, vii. 321), were the barbarous Leleges, Curetos, 
 and Teleboje, who occupied several other parts of Greece before the Pelasgi. 
 avaffTTjaavres — ' quum excivissent, ad expeditionem evocassont.' Cf. iii. 7* 
 iv. 77, 80. P. ' Aufbieten zum Feldzuge,' K. The * solicitare' of Cfes. B. G. 
 pass. "Apyos Th 'fiiii^iKoxiKov. The accounts diflfer as to the 
 
 founder of this city, Thucyd. representing it to have been founded by Amphi- 
 lochus, son of Amphiaraiis, on his return from Troy, in consequence of tlu' 
 discontent he felt at the state of affairs in Argos, owing, says the Scholiast (ad 
 c. cii.), to the murder of his mother Eriphyle, by Alcniseon, son of Amphiaraiis. 
 By others Araphilochus is called the son of Alcmaeon, and therefore grandson 
 of Amphiaraiis. Ephorus, quoted by Strabo (vii. p. 326; cf. Apollod. iii. 7! 
 Scymn. Ch. 454), says it was founded by Alcmaeon, who called it after the 
 
 name of his brother, whom the legend, quoted by Thucyd. ii. 102, represented 
 as having colonized the Echinades, islands at the mouth of the Acheloiis 
 (Cramer, ii. 10). The city lay on the river Inachus, now Ariadha, which 
 tradition represented to be identical with the river of the same name, near 
 Argos, in Peloponnese. [See the fragment of the Inachus of Sophocles, quoted 
 in the Oxford Strabo, i. 391.] It was twenty-two miles from Ambracia (Livy, 
 xxxriii. 10 ; or 180 stadia, Polyb. xxii. 13). The ruins of an ancient city, the 
 walls of which were about a mile in circumference, are still visible at the 
 modern village of Neokhori (Leake's N. Greece, quoted in Smith's Diet. Geog. 
 s. T.; Thuc. iii. 105). The expedition of Phormion here alluded to, probably 
 took place b.c. 432. ' Phormio was sent to Chalcidice about October or 
 November of that year (i. 64), and the expedition against Argos probably 
 occurred between that event and the naval conflict of Corcyrseans and 
 Athenians against the Corinthians, with their allies, Ambraciots included, 
 which conflict had happened in the preceding spring.' — Grote, vi. 162. 
 Iip^aro trpwToy. Cf. xxxvi. (a.); &p^ofiai 5k Trpwroy, iv. 87; &p^cu vpuroi, 
 Xen. Cgr. i. 5. 6. 
 
 [b.) ovK ap€<TK6/jL€vos. Cf. ad i. 35, a. ^dissatisfied,* followed by the 
 dative, and lib. viii. 84, d. Karaardff^i — ' the existing state of 
 
 things — the constitution.* 
 
 [c.) T}K\rivl(Td7}ffav. Lobeck's correction for iXXfivla-Oriffav without the 
 augment, p. 380. The language they used before was a more Pelasgic dialect; 
 the original dialect as spoken in Argos and Southern Greece after the Trojan 
 war (to TpwiKd ; so to MTjStKct, cf. i. 3). But see the note on i. 3 (d.). 
 ykSxraav. The accusative of ' equivalent notion' (Jelf, § 548, c. 579. i). 
 
 ((/.) iTpo(rKa\4(ravT€s Se. avavrairS^oroVf P. Ka\ K. says couples 
 liUaaiv ix\i(\. aipovai. But cf. iii. 55, vi. 64. acpi KOfxeyov 5e — 
 
 ^theii I sag upon the arrival of Phormion* Se in apodosi. /Ltereb Se 
 
 toCto — ' and it was in consequence of this.* 
 
 (e.) €xOpay 4s. Cf. Herod, v. 81, ij ex^pv is 'AOrivaiovs. Cf. vi. 65. 
 
 Chapter LXIX. — Sp/jL^fievos — ' taking up his station — making his head- 
 quarters' Cf. ad i. 64. b.; Diod. xii. 47. t/cTrAet*/. See c. xciii. d. 
 Kpiffalov K6\Trov. Properly, the inner sea, from the promontories of Ehium 
 and Antirrhium to the Isthmus of Corinth, but see chap. Ixxxvi. 
 iipyvpoKoyccffi — cf. iii. 19; iv. 50 — ^ to collect the tribute (or raise money)* 
 These ships were called yavs apyvp6\oyoi. So ^affnoKoyeTyy Isocr. iv. 132. 
 ri A.77o-TtK(Jv. 'Though the Peloponnesians were too inferior in maritime 
 force to undertake formal war at sea against Athens, their single privateers, 
 especially the Megarian privateers from the harbour of Nissea, were active in 
 injuring her commerce.'— Grote, vi. 243. Cf. Thuc. v. 115 ; Xen. Hell. v. i. 29. 
 ♦a(r7j\j5os. A maritime town of Lycia, on the Pamphylian Gulf. (Strabo 
 xiv. p. 667.) It was a Dorian colony (Herod, ii. 178), situated on a headland, 
 and conspicuous to those sailing from Cilicia to Khodes. It possessed three 
 harbours, and was an independent state. [Cf. Thuc. viii. 88. 9 ; Polyb. xxx. 
 9] Becoming in later times a haunt of pirates, it was attacked and taken by 
 Servilius Isauricus (Liv. xxxvii. 23). The light sailing vessels called * phaseli' 
 were said to have been invented here ; hence the coins of the town bear an 
 
236 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 72.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 237 
 
 Ik I 
 
 image of such a boat. It is now called Tekrova. See Smith's Gcog. Diet, s.v. 
 rrjs iKf7e€v Tjirclpov—i.e. ^gjpt, especially. Cf. viii. 35, P. 
 
 Chapter LXX. — (a.) oi/^ev fiuWov airavlcrraffav — 'failed in their 
 ohject of making the Athenians raise the siege.' Herod, vi. 133 ; ix. 86. The 
 death of Aristeas also deprived them of their last hope. axfroBi- 
 
 (opposed to the former part of the sentence, which refers to what was done in 
 Peloponnese)— ' in Potidsea.' •J^Sr; implies as usual that ' matters 
 
 had come to such a pitch.' /Bpcio-ews ir4pi avayKaias—'wifh 
 
 regard to the distress for food.; i.e. what their extremity had forced them to eat ; 
 ♦ in Bezug auf Dingo welche die Noth zu geniessen zwang/ K. (cf. i. 61, b. 84^ 
 c). Bl. explains it 'the supply of necessary food;' but then jSpcT-^uaTa would 
 be used, not ^pwa-is. Compare avayKo<l}ayia, ' the compulsory diet of the 
 athletes,' Arist. Pol. viii. 4. 9, and the comic word ayayKSffiros, 'the p.arasite 
 who eats anything he can get.' Cf. rod avayKaioTdrov vif/ovsy i. 90, and see note 
 there. aW-fiKuu—i.e. the dead bodies of their comrades (reciprocals and 
 
 reflexives are constantly interchanged). Cf. Herod, iii. 25, aW'n\o<t>ayi^] [.bist. 
 H. A. viii. 3. 17]. BI., forgetting the siege of Samaria, says that this is the 
 first instance on record of the eating of human flesh, viz. Ihe expedition of 
 Cambyses into Ethiopia, iy^iovro. Jelf, § 537. Note that the partitive 
 genitive follows. o'jirco H. Cf. i. 131. \6yov^ 
 
 ■Kpo(T<p4pov<Ti. Cf. iii. 109. itpo(r(p4p€i \6yov Trepl a-irovdufv koI avaxoopWiui 
 Aijfiotreeufi, i. 57. 
 
 (b.) x^^t^fp^v^—'hleak, cold, inclement: Cf. Grote's note, vi. 257. The 
 suflfcrings of the Athenians may be understood from the preparations made by 
 the Lacedaemonians for their blockade of Plat^a (c. Ixxviii.). Sio-x^Ai'a 
 
 rdXavra. Isocr. irepl 'Ajn-<S. xv. 113, says the siege cost 2400 talents. 
 Diodorus says (xii. 46) that before the departure of Hagnon (v. s. Iviii.) more 
 than I coo talents had been expended. Thucyd. (iii. 17) says each hoplite 
 received two drachmae a day; one for himself and one for his servant. The 
 assailant force had never been less than 3000 hoplites during the entire two 
 years of the siege ; and for a portion of the time considerably greater. 
 is iroXiopKlav. The absence of the article makes it equivalent to xp^/««i"a 
 TroXiopKTYTiKo., without specifying the locality. P. ^hv lv\ tfiar'Kf. 
 
 •Cum singulis vestimentis,' Liv. iv. 10 (of the siege of Ardea). For simihir 
 instances see Paus. ix. i. 9; App. i. 400; PolyjBn. vii. 48. As the women 
 always wore two garments (Herod, ii. 36), it was equivalent to allowing them 
 one suit apiece. B. 
 
 (c.) ivriTidffavTo. 'Were displeased at the indulgence shown, since a 
 little additional patience would have constrained the city to surrender at dis- 
 cretion (jf 4Bov\ovTo) ; in which case the expense would have been partly made 
 good by selling the prisoners as slaves, and Athenian vengeance probably 
 gratified by putting the warriors to death.' We find, however, tliat Xenophou 
 was appointed to command in Chalcidice the next year (iii. 17 ; Grote, vi. 247)- 
 iiroiKovs. Diod. xii. 46, «y x^^^ovs olKiiropas il4'irfp.^av koL tV t^ tt^^^v m 
 T^v x(*>fyav KarcKX-npovxway' It was to convey these settlers that the expedition 
 related c. Ixxix. was fitted out. rh Sevrtpov ^ros. In these phrases 
 
 Thuc. generally omits the article. 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) ovk 4a4^aXov. For fear of the plague, and from 
 the strong desire of the Thebans to be revenged on Plataea. Kadlaas. 
 
 Cf. vi. 66, and iv. 93, vii. 82 ; Eur. Heracl. 664. It is also used transitively 
 in Homer, Plato, and Aristophanes. The penultima is common. Cf. expraa, 
 Buttm. Cat. s.v. 
 
 (b.) 'Af)X*5a/te. See Grote, vi. p. 248, for an excellent translation of the 
 }<peeches in this and the following chap. iXevdepd^xras aw 6. Jelf, 
 
 ^ 531. obs. 3. ^vvdpaaOai rhv kIv^vvov. This verb is generally 
 
 construed M'ith the genitive. Cf. iv. 10, v. 28 ; Eurip. Orest. j^j; JEsch. Pr. V. 
 65a. iXevOeplep. Diod. xi. 29, mentions an ayuji/ iXevdepios to be 
 
 instituted at Plataea. (Cf. Paus. ix. 2. 5.) These solemnities were to be 
 celebrated evcrg fifth year, the victors being rewarded with chaplets. [aywv 
 yviiviKhs jTpe^avtTrjs, Strab. ix. 266.] Delegates [^rrpS^ovXoi koI dfcopol] were 
 to assemble from all the Greek states at Plataea evcrg year to celebrate the 
 Eleutheria. Cf. Thirlwall, ii. 253, &c, ; Paus. ix. 2. 4. This annual solemnity 
 continued to be observed till the time of Plutarch {Arist. xxi. ; cf. Thucyd. iii. 
 58), und the image of Zeus Eleutherius was still standing in the time of 
 Pausanias (Harpocration, p. 145). aTreSiSst;. Inasmuch as the 
 
 city had been held by the Persians, and the land around in the occupation of 
 the confederate army. Note the imperfect — he was for granting, he projioscd to 
 ijrant — as contrasted with thoaav^ iSiKaicofftv. To (rrpaTfvffai supply €Ta|€, 
 or some similar verb, P. nXaTa€?s affvXovs Koi Upovs a<puadat ry 6e^ (Plut. 
 i^m^ xxi.). ivl SovXeic}. Sed tantum c'ttI a/iui/77 koI Ti/i«/>/a, P. 
 
 tj Se fi-fi. Cf. n. ad c. v. 
 
 (c.) apeTTJs Ka\ irpoQvfilas. Qi. Herod, viii. i, xnrh 5e ap^rris re ko^ irpo- 
 dvn'ias UXaTcufes iireipoi rris vavriKris iSmes (rvv(TrX'i]povv ro7<Ti ' KQTfvaiotai ras 
 v(as. Tohs SpKtovs. Diod, (xi. 29) gives the formula of the oath 
 
 taken by the confederate troops at the Isthmus before marching northwards. 
 Cf. Lycurg. c. Leocrat. p. 149 ; Plut. Milt. ; and note ad i. 71 (d.). 
 (yxofpiovs — i.e. Juno TfAela. Minerva 'Ape^a, P., from Paus. ix. 2. 5 ; iv. i 
 [so Dii patrii indigetes] ; Soph. Ant. 185 (Bothe). 
 
 Chapter LXXII. — {a.) viroXaPdov — ' having cut them short in their speech, 
 when they wished to add much 7nore; Ducas. Gottl. quotes many passages. 
 
 (6.) /i7j5€ /i€0' erepuv. Cf. Ixxii. e. Grote (vi. 250) considers that the 
 Lacedaemonians had previously sent a summons to the Plataeans to remain 
 neutral. (Cf. lib. iii. 6i.) rh irpSrepoy, but when this took place, 
 
 Thucjdides has not informed us. iirl iroXefAq). As ^ttI SouXeia in e. 
 
 Ixxi. rdbe r}iJL7v ap4ffK€ i — ' with this we will be satisfi£d: So 
 
 •Staph, and Huds. and Duk., but Goller, P., and K. prefer apK4<rei. 
 
 (c.) acplaip OVK ivn p4iro}(Ti v — ' would not permit them to carry out their 
 neutrality.* ivopKoi ovres k.t.X. €i/opKoi = ev(rTrov5»ij P. The 
 
 expression is rather involved. ^vopKoi ought to agree with ol Qrifiaioi, whereas 
 it is the Platceans who, by an oath of neutrality, would be bound to admit the 
 Thebans who might then make a fresh attempt to seize on their city. 
 aplOfiu — 'by tale.* euis ap 6 trSXffxos p. Cf. iEsch. Ag. 1435, ecus 
 
 h atBri irvp irr iffxapas i/x^s h%yi<xQos. '4<as is used with the conjunctive when a 
 present action is conceived as possibly continuing during another action, over 
 
ill 
 
 238 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 75-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES* 
 
 239 
 
 an indefinite space of time. In this construction it always takes &v. * As long 
 as the war lasts, however long that may be^ Jelf, § 847. 3. 
 
 {d.) rapaKaradiiKriy. 'In the interim we will hold it in trust, keep it in 
 cultivation, and pay you such an allowance as shall suffice for your wants' 
 Grote. Even Mr. Grote admits that the offer of the Spartans was fair and 
 tempting; and the Athenians, had they been -perfectly generous allies, might 
 well have granted their consent to the Plataeans* accepting it, for the forces of 
 Platsea counted for little as a portion of the aggregate strength of Athens, nor 
 could the Athenians possibly protect it against the superior land force of their 
 enemies. In fact, they never even tried throughout the whole course of the long 
 subsequent blockade (Grote, vi. 251). 
 
 Chapter LXXIII. — (a.) 4v aTs ^iKhs ^v Koixicrdrivai. Allowing them 
 a fair and reasonable time for going to Athens and returning. 
 
 {b.) 4u Ty irph Tov. During ninety-three years, which the alliance had 
 lasted (iii. 6S). Trphs twv SpKwv — * th(y adjure y oil. by the oath 
 
 which your fathers swore* iiriaKT]irTovffi. Cf. iii. 69. d. — • oh- 
 
 testantur' 
 
 . Chapter LXXIV. — ci ScT — *if so it must be.* The present is used be- 
 cause the Plataeans well knew what 7mist be the immediate consequence of 
 their rejection of the offer of Archidaraus, not the opt., which would imply 'if 
 need should be.' iiri/xapTvpla — ^obtestation,* a solemn appeal to 
 
 the gods, an unusual word. Cf. Dio Cass. 914, 51, Bl. ruv 
 
 iyX^P^^*'' Cf. Ixxi. d. ^vviffropes ^ffre. Either indicative 
 
 or imperative. ' Ye are, or be ye, my witnesses* Cf. Soph. Philoct. 1292; 
 Afit. 542; Eurip. Snpp. 11 74. K. prefers the indie, sense. 
 rh ^vvtv/xoToy — 'the oath of confderacy* —t\ ^vvcoiioa-'iaj P. 'Beschwomer 
 Bund,' K. (VfjLfyri 4vaya)ul(ra(r6ai — * a favourable field to fight 
 
 in.* Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 6, 12 ; Herod, vi. 102. In the sense of ' gliickbringend,' 
 as K. translates it, cf. Eurip. Phoen. 938, and note on ivairodtrfja-KfiVy iii. 104, b. 
 ^vyyv (a fjLov^s 5€ iffrt. From the primary meaning of this word, ' fellow- 
 feeling,' and hence 'pardon,' the transition is simple to ' indulgence or favour.' 
 It is here equivalent to ' favourably hear our prayers, and grant that . . . .' 
 This seems to be more in accordance with the usual meaning of the word than 
 Mr. Grote's translation, *be consenting parties;' or Dr. Arnold's explanation, 
 ' assent to the aggressors being punished.' K. explains it by gcwahrt, ' vouch- 
 safe.' The infinitive follows as the object of the verb, marking also more clearly 
 the notion of the effect (Jelf, § 664, 3). dSt/cIas. Verbs of requital, 
 
 revenge, &c., take a genitive of that whence the desire of requital or revenge 
 arises (Jelf, § 500). For the attraction in the dative imipxovaij in consequence 
 of the ^vv in ^vyyvufiov€t, where we should expect imdpxovraSi see Jelf, § 674. 
 irporepots — the praedicate, 'who were the aggressors.' K. toIj 
 
 4Ti<(>4pov(ri yofilficos. ' Those who are aiming to inflict penalty righteously,' 
 Grote. • Qui ultionem petant, ut fas est,' P. 
 
 Chapter LXXV. — (a.) Too-oOro iTridetdaas — ' having made this solemn 
 appeal to the gods,* i.e. having concluded the iirifxaprvpla of the preceding 
 
 chapter. Cf. viii. c. 53, b., where, in the case of the return of Alcibiades, 
 Thucydides speaks of the Eumolpidae and Ceryces as tiaprvpojjLivuv kouL 
 (iriOeiaC^mwVy and vii. 75, in the disastrous retreat from Sicily; ovk &vev 
 indaafffiwv airoXcnrdfXfvoi. Cf. Blomf., ^sch. Cho. 843 ; Buttm. Lex. s. v. 
 QaAffffiiv — iiriQ^d^iiv is the more usual form in this sense. Kadlffrri 
 
 fs iroKefiov. Cf. ad c. i., i. a. -TrepiiaTavpwffev — 'invested the city 
 
 with a p(disade,* Thirlw. iii. 145. The forming regular lines of circumvallation 
 is expressed by irfpneixl^eiv (c. Ixxviii.). ro^s B4vSp€(riv—i.e. 
 
 the fruit trees cut down in laying waste the land (Grote, vi. 253). |uAa 
 
 is the heavy timber obtained from the forests of Cithaeron. Cf. iv. 69, for the 
 wme distinction. SeVSpos, it may be observed, is the Ionic and poetic form. 
 (KOfpav. Note the change of subject from the general to his soldiers. K. 
 Xw/iio tx'^^^' Cf. Herod, i. 162, of Harpagus in Asia Minor, x^l^'^o- X^" 
 rph TO. reix^a iir6pd€€. Arrian, E. A. i. xviii. Cf. Jerem. vi. 6, ' Hew ye 
 down trees and cast a mount against Jerusalem ;' so Joab, 2 Sam. xx. 15, and 
 Sennacherib, 2 Kings xix. 32. For the construction, see Jelf, § 571. 
 re(j.vovr(s iK. Like the analogous phrases Kadi^eiy es, &c., ' felling the wood 
 on the mountain, and fetching it thence.' 
 
 (6.) TOV Kidaipuvos. The summit of Cithseron is still crowned with 
 forests of fir; hence its modern name of Elatea. Eurip. Phoen. 802, & (adccov 
 KitaKau voXv6r)p6raTOv vdiros . . . KiOaipcav. (popixTjbhv — 'like basket 
 
 or wattled, work.* (Cf. iv. 48, of the bodies of the Corcyraeans, where the lower 
 tier was placed lengthwise, and the others piled across them.) Thirlwall says, 
 ' It was piled up with earth and rubbish, wood and atones, and was guarded on 
 either side by a strong lattice-work of forest timber, the growth of Cithaeron ' 
 (iii. 145). ' Cross palings of wood were caiTied on each side of it, in parallel 
 lines, at right angles to the town wall, for the purpose of keeping the loose 
 mass of materials between them together.' — Grote, p. 253. [Cf. Herod, viii. 
 71, the description of the wall at the Isthmus.] ' Kreuzweise,' K. 
 ayvTeiv — 'likely to be effective* Cf. infra, Ixxvi. a. kut* apava^Xas 
 
 'in relief parties* Cf. iv. 11, avaTravovres. The first meaning is 'rest' (Soph. 
 I'hil. 878; cf. Herod, i. 181). 01 ^e y ay oi = ^4va)v ffTpariapxai 
 
 (Xen. Bell. iv. 2, 19 ; v. 2, 7 ; De Bcp. Lac. xiii. 4). The Lacedaemonians who 
 commanded the contingents of the allies. See Thirlwall, u. s. The generals 
 whom the allies sent with their troops were subordinate to these Spartan 
 ifvayoi; though they attended the council of war as representatives of their 
 respective countries (Smith, L>ict. Ant. s. v. ; and cf. Thuc. v. 54). Arnold 
 compares the ' prsefecti sociorum' in the Roman armies, twelve of whom were 
 appointed by the consuls. Lobeck remarks that the Doric dialect is retained 
 in words of a military or musical character ; as, oi/paydsy xof>a7<^s, Xoxay6s (ad 
 Phryn. p. 430). 
 
 (c.) ^iXiyov T€ixo5 — 'a superstructure of brick, secured in a framework 
 of timber, and shielded from fiery missiles by a curtain of raw hides and skins.' 
 —Thirlwall, iii. 145. Grote supposes it to have been supported by brickwork 
 kUnd, p. 254. ^vvh^a^ios — ' Bindemittel* P.; ' Emfassung* K. — 
 
 'acted as a binding* Arrian, E. A. i. 18. Seppcis Kal ^i(pe4pas 
 
 — ' h'uies and dressed ski7is.' Cf. Caes. B. C. ii. 9. sq., the account of the siege 
 of Marseilles, where Csesar describes a wall very similar in construction to the 
 
240 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. ']^-'\ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 241 
 
 one mentioned here. Cilicia is the word used by Livy (xxxviii. 7) for these 
 skins. Csesar nses coria or centones, 1. c. Cf. Arrian, \t. s. who copies this 
 passage very closely. 
 
 (d.) 7cvp<p6pois oiffToTs. The 'malleoli' of the Romans (Festus, p. 135, 
 ed. Miill. ; Nonius, p. 556). Cf. Liv. xlii. 64, 'Faces tseilamque et malleolos 
 stuppae inlitos pice parari jubet.' Caes. B. Civ. ii. ii,*'Cupas tsed4 et pice 
 refertas incendunt : eas de muro in museulum devolvunt.* 
 Si€\6vTes Tov Tflxovs. Any verb whose operation extends only to part of 
 the objects signified by the objective substantive, may be followed by a parti- 
 tive genitive, so ttjs yrjs (Tffjtov (Thuc. i. 30), and again heXutv reixovs, v. 2: 
 (xryKoXfaavras rStv &irkir&Vy Xen. An. iv. 1, 26, Jelf, § 533, 3. 
 ^ irpoa-fTrnrrf rh x^t^°- — "where the mound abutted on the wall, they made 
 an aperture and conveyed away the earth, &c., inwards.' Cf. Liv. u. s. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI. — (a.) iv rapcrols KaXdfiov rrrf\hv ivclWovTfs— 
 ' roliing stiff clay in wattled reeds' Grote. TopffoX are cnitcs or frames of 
 basket-work. Herodotus mentions the use of these rapcoX KoXdncoif, in the 
 building of the wall of Babylon (i. 179, u. v. Bahr's note ; Ar. Xub. 226). 
 KaXdfiov. Sing, for plur. as Kfpdfiov^ c. iv. ^vef Wovtcs = impri- 
 
 mentes, infercientes, P. 9iaxf^H-fvov. The neuter of the participlt 
 
 is used, K. says, to comprise the notion of rap<roX and 'in)\6sy or it may refer to 
 XcofJLU understood. rovro cireVxo*'- Cf. v. 46, 63 ; vii 33, for 
 
 similar uses of the accusative instead of gen. after this verb. Jelf, § 642. 
 
 a. b. vir6voyLov — *a mine,* * cuniculus.' Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 7, 
 * Cuniculum occultum, rineis ante contecto loco, agere instituit ; et aliqiiamdiu 
 non solum sub terrd fodientes, sed egerentes etiara humum, fefellere hostem,' 
 Cses. B. G. iii. 21, * Cuniculis ad aggerem actis;' vii. 22, 'Aggerem cuniculis 
 subtrahebant.' ^vvTeKfjLTipdii€voi — ' calculating both the distancf 
 and direction, so as to bring the mine right under the enemg's mound.' The 
 ^vv, as K. says, implies ' the result of many ailculations.' ifirh rh 
 xSiyLttj K. refers rather to oprv^avns than ^vtnfKfi,7ipdfxfvoi. X°''^t 
 humus aggesta, x^^M* ^gg^r* ^- ?i<T8-ov avvreiv. Their labour 
 did not accomplish as much as they knew it ought to have done from the quantitj 
 of material heaped on the mound, avvreiv is trans. ' to forward the work,' 'for- 
 dem,' K. as above, ft rt &AAo ay6T€iv /icAAot. l^dvovros — ' constantly/ 
 settling down.* 
 
 (6.) rh Karh. rh x^l*-^ — * directly in fro7it of the mound, over against' 
 rov fipax^os rflxovs. From the low, i.e. the original, waU. Cf. vii, 29. 
 
 b. of the wall of Mycalessus, as rh n4ya reixos is the part they had added td 
 rh iJ.4ya oiKoB6ix7ifia. firfvoeibes. ' They built a new portion of 
 wall in the interior, in the shape of a crescent taking its start from the old 
 town wall on each side of the mound.' — Grote, vi. 255. Most of the Englisli 
 commentators, and Dr. Thirlwall among thera, infer that it follows that the 
 walls of Plataea were straight, but surely a semicircle could be described on the 
 arc of a circle. 
 
 (c.) iv kiji<pi$6\ci) — 'be exposed to a crossfire' Cf. iv. 32. 
 liaWov. * More than when only one wall existed,' K. Karh ri 
 
 X<»/ta — ' along the mound,' i.e. up the inclined plane. iirX /iteyo— 
 
 'greatly, imlently.' It is perhaps better to translate it thus simply, with Grote, 
 than couple it with rov fify. oIk. as Dr. Arnold does, who translates ' as much 
 as a great part of the raised wall.' The instances which he quotes from ii. 97, 
 and iv. 100, are not exactly parallel. We might add iirX fiey^ Suj/ajnews, i. 48. 
 b. TOW fiiy. OIK. had better be simply taken as the genitive of direction. 
 ayeKXuv. Betant explains ' sursum attollendo convellere,' and L. and S. 'to 
 break short oflf.' K. thinks it cannot imply more than breaking their force. 
 Cf. vii. 25. d. ; App. Mith. 74 ; Dio Cass. 66. 4. So G611. ' avertebant, non 
 frangebant.' ^oKohs fJL€yd\as aprr]aavr€s K.r.K. ' They prepared 
 
 heav}' wooden beams on the wall, each attached at both ends by long iron 
 chains to two polos projecting at right angles from the wall, by means of which 
 poles it was raised up and held aloft.' — Grote, p. 255. rofi^ is 
 
 properly ' the end left after cutting ; ' hence ' the stump of the tree,* as Horn. 
 //. i. 235, €7r6t577 TrpwTtt ron^v iv opeffffi \4\onr€v ; ' the place from which a lock 
 of hair has been cut,' ^sch. Ch. 230 ; ' the square cut ends of stones,' Thuc. 
 i. 93; therefore here 'the ends of the beam.' Cf. Sch. /ccpatoi 
 
 are yard-arms, 'cornua antennarum,' Virg. .En. iii. 549, .S^sch. Eu77i. 556, 
 or 'the projecting beams of a crane ;' here, ' spars or poles resting on the wall, 
 and inclined at an angle to it,' L. and S. * Sie hingen an zwei iiber die Mauer 
 gelegte, und iiber die Mauer hinausragende Balken,' K. Cf. Liv. xxiv. 34, 
 ' Tollenones super murum eminentes.' iyKdpffios—' transversus' 
 
 They raised them l)y means of these chains in a direction oblique to the line of 
 wall. Veget. f/c i?. Jf. iv. 23, 'Laqueis captos arietes in obliquum trahunt.' 
 Liv. xxxvi. 23, 'Laqueis exceptos declinabant ictus.' Caes. B. C. vii. 22, 
 'Laqueis falces avertebant, quas cum destinaverant, tormentis introrsus re- 
 ducebant.' ov 5to x^'P^s ^xovres — ' letting them go with a run' 
 
 as our sailors say. a tt k: a u A t ^e i v~' to break off by the stalk or stem' 
 
 as the head of a plant or flower. Eurip. Siipp. 717. Appian imitates the 
 passage, i. 751 b. 
 
 Chaptbr LXXVII. — {a.) rh avrireixKr/xa — 'and the coitnteni-ork rose 
 ogainst them,' i.e. 'the crescent wall,' P. and K. hirh rwv -rrapdvrcov 
 
 ieivwv—' with their present means of offence,' Dale; ' prmentibus terror ibus,' 
 Port. ; ' tirriculamentis,' T. K. A. ; ' Schrcckzwangsmittel,' P. ; ' under their 
 present circumstances of difficulty' is Valla's interpretation, approved by Kriig., 
 who would however much prefer to strike out Zeiviav altogether, or substitute 
 another word for it. irphs r^v irfpirelxio'iv irapecrKevdCovro. 
 
 Prepared to turn the siege into a blockade. ov<rav ov ij.€yd\7]v. 
 
 Some of the commentators propose to strike out the negative, as the present 
 state of the ruins seems to contradict the statement of Thucydides. But though 
 the circuit of the walls may be traced near the small village of Kokhla, to the 
 extent of about two miles and a half in circumference, these are probably the 
 remains of the city as restored by Philip after the battle of Chaeroneia, B.C. 
 338; the ancient city being probably confined to the southern extremity, where 
 Col. Leake discovered the more ancient masonry, N. G. ii. 325. 
 Sairdj/Tjs. We find above that the blockade of Potidaea had cost Athens 2000 
 talents. Hudson considers this an instance of hendiadys, 'an expensive 
 blockade.' (paKcKovs. The commentators seem to be nearly equally 
 
242 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 79.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 243 
 
 divided as to whether this word should be spelt with one X or two. P. Wassa 
 inclines to the latter ; Casaubop, Hesychius, Ammonius, Ducker, Oudendopp, 
 and Gottleber, to the former. In Herod, iv. 62. 67, the best MSS. have one 
 A, which the metre requires in Eur. Cycl. 242. They first laid these faggots 
 side by side (P. ad loc), letting thorn down from the mound into the space that 
 intervened between it and the semicircular wall. Arn. explains trapafidWu 
 to throw beside, hence to throw itp, to heap up ; but is not the notion of placing 
 objects beside each other, quite contrary to that of placing them upo7i one 
 another ? May it not mean * they placed the faggots side by side along the 
 extent of the wall,' [irpScrxoiorts is here equal to irpoflrx«/ua; in c. 102, it is used 
 for the alluvial deposit of the Acheloiis. Cf. jEsch. P. V. 849 :] and then 
 threw them as far as they could reach into other parts of the city beyond? 
 ' So viel sie irgend auch von der iibrigen Stadt (d. h. Stadtmauer) bereichen 
 konnten,' K., which seems the simplest and best interpretation. 
 iirfx^iV' Cf. i. 48, and iii. 107. S\ri rpipOela-a — * bi/ attrition,' 
 
 Cf. Suid. V. Spv/xSs ; Lucret. i. 896 : 
 
 * At saepe in magnis fit montibus, inquis, ut altis 
 Arboribus vicina cacumina summa terantur 
 Inter se, validis facere id cogentibus austris, 
 Donee fulserunt fiammse fulgore coorto.* 
 
 oir' avTov — ^ thrrefrom,' 8C. airh tov rpi<pdrjvai, i\axi(yrov cScTjffe. 
 
 rovro is the subject. For this use of the privative genitive, see Jelf, § 529. i. 
 So Xen. Anab. i. 5. 15, axnov oKlyov Sfffffavros KaTa\€v(rdrjvai. 
 (Tri<popov. Cf. iii. 74, ei &y€fios iTfeytvero rfj <p\oyl iirl<popos. 
 vSap €| ovpavov. Thucyd., as Grote observes, evidently discredits this 
 story of the opportune thunderstorm. (Cf. the story of Croesus, Herod, i. 87.) 
 Xen. uses the same phrase for rain, Anab. iv. 2. 2. So Hor. Od. iii. 10. 30, 
 ' aqua ccelestis.' 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII. — T^piinlxiCov. 'There now remained no other 
 resource but to build a wall of circumvallation round Plataea, and trust to the 
 slow process of famine.' — Grote, p. 256. irept *ApKTo6pov imroXas. 
 
 It is not often, Grote remarks, that Thucydides gives us any fixed marks to 
 discriminate the various periods of the year. The time mentioned here is the 
 heliaciil rising of Arcturus ; i. e. the period when Arcturus rises immediately 
 be/ore sunrise (after the forty days during which it had been invisible, as rising 
 after the sun), sometime between the 12th and 17th of September, according 
 to Grote and Goller, or the i8th according to Ideler, i. 247. Cf. Grote u.s.; 
 GoU. ad loc. ; Virg. Georg. i. 68. 204, with Forbiger's note ; Columell. xi. a. 
 63; Plin. H. N. ii. 47; xviii. 31. 74; Plant. liud. Prol. 71. Hippocrates 
 also employs the appearances of certain stars to indicate time in medical cases, 
 probably, as Grote says, because the Greek months, being lunar, varied in 
 different cities from the necessity of intercalation, and therefore aflforded no 
 one standard of time. Hudson cf. Scaliger ad Manilium. iit^' 
 
 ro\al. Cf. Lobeck, PAryw. p. 124. sq. rh apx^'iov. Cf. ad c. 
 
 vi. axpfiordrovs. ffir oiroioi. [Cf. vi. 22. 44.] Not that their 
 
 duties were confined exclusively to the preparation of food. They no doubt 
 
 acted as nurses, dressed the wounds, and tended the sick, and performed many 
 offices for the rest, such as carrying provisions, arras, &c., to the ramparts. 
 T. K. A. compares Eurip. Hec. 366 ; Trood. 494; Herod, vii. 187. The usual 
 proportion was one woman to foicr men, but at the siege of Babylon (Herod, 
 iii. 150), we find a woman allowed to each man. In the Sicilian expedition 
 the (TiTOTToioi we may observe are males. At Eome the preparation of food was 
 confined to females. Even down to the year u.c. 580, there were no bakers at 
 Rome, *Ipsi panem faciebant Quirites, mulierumque id opus erat,' Plin. K X. 
 xviii. II. Cf. Plant. Merc. ii. 3. 62 ; Terent. Adeljih. v. 3. 60; Feith, Ant. 
 Horn. IV. 3. KaT€<rKeud(r d-r] — ' such were the permanent arra7ige- 
 
 ments made for the siege'— not simply 'preparations' [see note ad i. 10. on the 
 difierence between KarcurKfirf) and Trapa<TK€v^, Thuc. \'iii. 5 (a.)]; but 'such 
 means as would be taken by men anticipating a tedious and protracted blockade.' 
 These Thuc. describes lib. iii. 21, ' They consisted of two walls, with sixteen 
 feet of intermediate space all covered in, so as to look like one very thick wall ; 
 there were moreover two ditches out of which the bricks for the walls had 
 been taken, one on the inside towards Plataea, and the other on the outside, 
 against any relieving force. The interior covered space served as permanent 
 quarters for the troops left on guard.'— Grote, p. 257. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX. — (a.) rfi rS>v TlXaraiiwv i-KKTrpaTiic^. The ob- 
 jective or causative genitive. So y\iT)(pi<Tna Meyapeuv, ' the decree against the 
 Megarians.' Jelf, § 464; Matth. § 367. See i. 103, c. 108, c. 
 ((TTpaTevffav. The object of this expedition was partly to convoy the Athenian 
 cleruehi, who were going to settle in the land ceded by Potidjea. 
 aKnd(ovTOs rov (rirov. Cf. c. xix. a. s.€vo<puv. Cf. ad ch. 70. 
 
 Tplros avT6s. Thirhvall, iii. 159, n. The two others were Calliades and 
 Phanoraachus. Pint. Mo. p. 348 ; Diocl. xii. 47. 
 
 (6.) 2rrapTwAov, a Chalcidic fortress, north of Olynthus, in the direction 
 of Potidsea. It is mentioned (v. 18) as one of the cities which was to bo 
 neutral, under the conditions of the truce. [Cramer, i. 253.] Bottisea was the 
 name anciently given to a narrow space of country lying between the rivers 
 Haliiicmon and Lydias. From this district, however, the Bottiseans were early 
 expelled by the Macedonian princes (Thuc. ii. 99), and retiring across the 
 Axius about Therme and Olynthus, formed a new settlement with the Chalci- 
 dians, another people of Thracian origin. (Herod, vii. 127; viii. 127 ; Thuc. 
 i. 77 ; Polyb. v. 97 ; Li v. xxvi. 25. Cf. Cramer, i. 220.) 
 Ttpo<TXfDpi](mv vvh — cf. Jelf, 359, 3 — 'would come over through the co- 
 operation of a party inside the city.' is /xdxv KaOiaravTai. 
 tf. ad I. i. a. So h <p6$ovy is <puy^i/ Karaffr^vaiy and supra c. Ixv. c. 
 
 (c.) ir€\Taa-Tds. ' These peltasts, a species of troops between heavy armed 
 and light armed, furnished with a pelta or light shield, and short spear or 
 javelin, appear to have taken their rise among these Chalcidic Greeks ; being 
 equipped in a manner half Greek and half Thracian: we shall find them here- 
 after much improved and turned to account by some of the ablest Greek 
 generals.' —Grote, vi. 258. Cf. Xen. Anab. v. 2. 17, where the i|/i\ol and 
 iTfXrcurral are distinguished. KpovffiSos. The line of coast between 
 
 Thessalonica and Olynthus seems to have borne this name. Herodotus, vii. 
 
 b2 
 
244 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 8o.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 245 
 
 123, calls it Crossaea, Kpoo-o-afrj, and enumerates the cities it contained, one of 
 which was Gigonus, mentioned by Thucydides, i. 61, c. ; Steph. Byz. calls it 
 Kpouffty, and Dionys. Halicarn. calls the inhabitants Crusaei, Kpov<ra7oi, i. ^(^ 
 (Cramer, i. 242 ; Smith, Diet. s. r.; Grote, iv. 32), 
 
 (f/.) dap(ri)ffavr€S to7s irpoffy iyvo {x^vo is— ' encouraged hy this addition 
 to thfir nunihersJ Note the pres. part., which implies ' as they kept coming vp 
 — the new comers.* ayaxefpovffi — 01 *Adriva7oif Schol. 
 
 rd^fis. Cf. iii. 87, iv. 4; Xen. Atiab. iv. 16, iv. 4. 8. y Boko7. So 
 
 ch. c. e, 8in7 doKo7, iii. 16. a. 
 
 (e.) Irpcv^aiA Tovs 'Adrivalovs. Cf. Pint. Nie^. p. 348 G. 
 
 (/•) TpoiraTov farrjaav. The more usual form would be icrriiffavro. Tho 
 active is said to be used oi generals wh-o erect a trophy ; the middle, of an army. 
 But probably when the cases are examined they will be found to depend on the 
 distinctive uses of the active and middle voices ; the first being used where the 
 action comes directly from the agent, the second where some intermediate 
 agency, or ulterior object in reference to the subject, is implied. So tho law- 
 giver is said Buvaiv 6ixov; the people who vote it are said 64a6ai. Cf. c. 86, c. 
 
 Chapter LXXX. — (a.) rSfv airh Ba\A(T(n\s = rS>v iraph, t))v 6d\a(T(Tav 
 otKoyvTOjj', ^-Em. Port. ; G. paSicas tiv ffx^ivres. Here av gives a 
 
 contingent force to the participle. Peile well compares ybr^«! as used by Livy, 
 * Ne penes ipsos culpa esset cladia forte bello Gallico accepto' (v. 36). On h 
 with a participle see Jelf, § 429, i. 90, ii. 39. a. ; Donaldson, New Crat. p. 325. 
 Ke<pa\\rjvias. Cf. c. 30. Editors seem divided as to whether this word 
 should be spelt with one \ or tivo. Cf. Duker, n. ad i. 27. In Homer, Strabo. 
 Polybius, Xenophon, and Pausanias, it is generally doubled. dfxo7os. 
 
 So C. Ixxxi. oi/K &v fTi (TcpitTi Tovs"EW'nvas S/JLoico^ Trpo(T€\Qi7v. i\-niha 
 
 8' iJvai. A similar collocation of moods occurs, sup. xiii. — Trporiy6p^v€ — oti 
 — ftrf — ov fiipToi yfvoiro — atpiTjfftv — ylyveadai. Cf. Dem. de falsa Leg. ^ 2i3> 
 where Mr. Shilleto observes : • In oratione obliqud perinde est ws [s. Sti] cum 
 i^tat. cum indicat. cui omissa particula infinit. sequatur. Cf. Thuc. viii. 51.' 
 
 {h.) ra^apxoy tri 6vra, Cf. n. ad c. Ixvi. So c. lix. Irt 8' i<n par-hy^i. 
 See Arnold's note, and Xen. Hell. i. 6, 4, where we find the Spartans com- 
 plaining that as soon as their admirals had begun to learn a little of their pro- 
 fession {^pri ^vvUvrav ra vairriKh.) they were removed from office. I have more 
 particularly referred to this passage, as Professor Cobet of Leydon, one of the 
 most brilliant of living scholars, in some remarks with which lie has favoured 
 me, expresses an opinion that it is unintelligible, and ought to be amended. 
 But surely the present participles ^wievruv and yiyva><TK6tnwv point to the 
 meaning which I have suggested. trepi-fjyyeiXav. Cf. 85 b. iv. 8. 
 
 AfvKdSa. Leucas, now the island of Sta. Maura, once formed part of the 
 continent, but was afterwards separated from it by a narrow cut. Livy, xxxiii. 
 17, says in his time it was an island, but in the Macedonian war it had been a 
 peninsula. The cut was called Dioryctus (Plin. iv. 2 ; Polyb. v. 5). Thucydides 
 more than once describes the Peloponnesian fleet as having been conveyed 
 across the isthmus. Cf. note iii. 81, iv. 8. It was occupied by 1000 Corinthian 
 colonists from the settlements of Ambracia and Anactorium. 
 'AvaKToplov. Anactorium was the first town in Arcaruania, after Actium 
 
 (which was included in its territory, i. 29), on entering the Ambracian gulf 
 from the Ionian sea. It was founded, together with Leucas and SoUium, by a 
 Corinthian colony, in the middle of the seventh century b.c, when the original 
 inhabitants were driven into the interior. These seem to have been the Taphii, 
 or Tek'boae, Leleges, and Curetes. It appears from Thuc. i. 55, that the 
 Corcyneans shared in the colony, but the Corinthians obtained sole possession 
 of the settlement. It remained in their hands till B.C. 425, when they were 
 expelled by the Athenians and Acarnanians conjointly, who occupied the place. 
 Of. iv. 49, vii. 31. Augustus transferred its inhabitants to Nicopolis, which 
 he founded on the opposite coast, and it ceased to be a town (Strabo x. p. 451). 
 Its present site must be looked for on the promontory which now bears the 
 name of C. Madonna. Smith, Diet. Gcog. s. v. Anactorium and Actium. 
 Cramer, ii. 7. 
 
 ((?.) ^opfiiwva. For the high estimation in which Phormio was held at 
 Athens see the compliment paid to him by Aristophanes, Equit. 562, with the 
 note of the Scholiast. (Cf. Clinton m «7i.) nepl 'NaviraKrov. Cf. ad 
 
 c. Ixix. iir* erriffio) irpoffraffla, iK rov apxiKov yevovs — ^ on the 
 
 ground of the annual ^''residency (or chieftainship) which they, as being of the 
 royal gens, enjoyed.' iirX assigns the reason why these two persons had the 
 command. On this force of ivX cf. Jelf, § 634, 3. c. Steph. Byzant. would 
 read iirer-qaitf, a word from Hom., and repeated by Dio Cassius. Kriig. 
 asserts that the naked dative would be objectionable, which Engelmann, who 
 inclines to the reading, will not concede. It was their year of office ; each 
 irpoffTaTT^s (cf. iii. 75, 82) being bound at the expiration of his period of office 
 to resign in favour of another member of the royal gens. GoUer compares the 
 privileges of the Alcmseonidse at Athens, Bacchiadae at Corinth, and the 
 Aleuadse and Scopadse in Thessaly. Cf. Cramer, i. 93. ' The Chaones diffi?red 
 from their neighbours in being subject to an aristocratical and not a monarchical 
 government ; their annual magistrates being always chosen from a particular 
 family.' The exact limits of Chaonia were not ascertainable even in Strabo's 
 time. Its seaboard line probably extended from the Acroceraunian promontory 
 to the harbour of Buthrotum, opposite Corcyra. The Chaones were once the 
 most warlike and powerful people of Epirus (cf. Strab. vii. p. 324; Thuc. i.46 ; 
 Arist. Eq. 72, Schol.). 
 
 {d.) QfairpcoToi. The Thesproti extended along the coast from the 
 Thyamis to the confines of the Cassopaei, and in the interior to the boundaries 
 of the territories of Dodona, which was in ancient times regarded as part of 
 Thesprotia. The Chaones, Thesproti, and Molossi, were the three chief Epirote 
 tribes. 'Mo\o<rffov5. The Molossi, who became subsequently the 
 
 rulers of Epirus, originally inhabited only a small strip of country extending 
 from the Ambracian gulf, between the Cassopa?i and Ambraciotse, northwards 
 as far as the Dodonsei. 'Artj/Taras. The Atintanes were an 
 
 Illyrian tribe bordering on the Paravsei (v. inf.). Qdpviros. This 
 
 Tharypus (called also Tharypas, or Arrhybas) was the son or grandson of 
 Admetus, the Molossian king to whom Themistocles addressed himself as 
 suppliant. [Thuc. i. 136.] He was a minor, had been educated at Athens, 
 and is said to have been the first to introduce among his subjects Hellenic 
 civilization. [Cf. Pausanias, i. xi. i. ; Justin, xvii. 3 ; Plut. Fyrrh. i.] The 
 
246 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. | Chap. 8 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 247 
 
 
 Molosslans retained their kingly form of government, Alexander, the brother of 
 Oljmpias, wife of Philip of Macedon, at length extending his dominion over 
 most of the Epirot tribes. Uapavalovs. The Paravjei were of 
 
 Thesprotian origin, and bordered on the Oiestse and Atintanes, and the Mace- 
 donian district of Elymiotis. They took their name from the Aous (now 
 Voiusa), on whose banks they were situated. The Orestse lay to the south of 
 the Lyncestse. Their country was of small extent, and contained but few 
 towns. Steph. Byz. says they were a Molossian tribe. They occupied the 
 district now known as Castoria, with its lake and the rugged mountains 
 beyond. ' This large and diverse body of Epirotic invaders (a new phenomenon 
 in Grecian histor}-. and got together doubtless by the hope of plunder) proves 
 the extensive relations of the tribes of the interior with the city of Ambraeia.' 
 — Grote, vi. 260. ^Opearai. The Orestae were situated apparently 
 
 to the south-east of the Lyncest?e, and, like them, were originally independent 
 of the Macedonian kings, though afterwards annexed to their dominions. 
 Steph. Byz. terms them a Molossian tribe. Their country- was also of small 
 extent and contained but few towns ; it was called Orestis or Orestias, and is 
 represented by the modern districts of Gramista, Anaselitza, and Kastoria. 
 [Leake's N. Greece, ap. Smith, Diet. G. s.v.; Cramer, i. 197; Polyb. xviii. 30; 
 Strabo, vii. p. 326 ; Liv. xxvii. 33, xxxi. 40, xxxiii. 34.] Kp{><pa 
 
 rwv 'Ae-nvalwv. Since he was nominally at peace with them. See c.xxix. 
 SffTfpov — • too late to take amj part in the affair.' 
 
 {e.) 'Apyeias—i.e. the territory of Amphilochian Argos. Palmerius, from 
 iii. 106, would read 'Aypaias. Cramer, ii. 9. Aifivaiav—'n 
 
 frontier village territory' (Grote) at the south-east corner of the Ambracian 
 gulf, between Anactorium and Argos, at the foot of Mount Thyamus. Thuc. 
 mejitions it again, iii. 106. Cramer places its site at Loutraki ; Col. Leake, 
 with greater probability, at Kerbasera, in the vicinity of which there is a 
 marsh, two miles in length, from which Limnfea probably derived its name. 
 [Cf. Polyb. V. 5 ; Cramer, ii. 9, 37 ; Smith, s.v.] ^rpdrou— so callod, 
 
 B. supposes, as being ' the camp or place of muster for the armed population 
 of Acarnania,' their enmity with their formidable neighbours the Ambraciots 
 rendering an armed confederacy necessary. (Cramer, ii. 4.) It lay on the 
 right bank of the Achelous, about 200 stadia from its mouth, the river being 
 navigable as far as its walls. (Strab. x. p. 450.) Xenophon speaks of it as 
 the capital of the province, at the time of the expedition of Agesilaus into 
 Acarnania. [Xen. Hell. iv. 6. 4.] Pouqueville says its ruins are still to be 
 seen on the site called Porta. Cramer, ii. 30, sq. Radius hv 
 
 vpo(Txf>p-h(r€iv. K. admits the correctness of the use of &v with the fut. inf ; 
 so Kiihner and Hartung. Madvig says, wherever it occurs it is an error of 
 the editions. P. quotes Thuc. v. 82, vi. 66, viii. 25, 71. Cf. Matth. § 598, 9. 
 
 Chapter LXXXL— (a.) o(?t6 . . . re. On the use of ofke followed by re 
 (or more rarely Kal\ see Jelf, § 775, obs. b. a.; Herod, v. 49, vii. 8. i; 
 Soph. Phil. 1321. x6y^> . . . tpytp. See the remarks on this 
 
 antithesis,^ i. 22. a. 69. d. Here it must be admitted to be somewhat forced. 
 
 {h.) iiUov. ' So definite in describing a portion, as not to need the article,' 
 B. Cf. Xen. Anab. i. 8, in several places. (So of time, fx4<Tov ^/u€>ay, Xen. 
 
 Anab. iv. 4. i, &c.) P. cf. i. 8. a. 12. b. 16. a. 48. a. 52. b.; see iv. 31. 96. 
 So we sometimes use ' riffht,' 'left.' ol fierh tovtwv. The 
 
 (EniadjB, says Haack from the following chapter, but Bl. is most probably right 
 iu saying that they only joined Cnemus after his repulse at Stratos. ' The 
 perioeci of the Leucadian peninsula,' Am., who adds, there was scarce in Greece 
 a town which had not its perioeci. See his note. 
 
 (c.) rerayfievoi. ' This fact shows,' Grote says, 'the great inferiority of 
 the Epirots to the Greeks, and even to the less advanced portion of the Greeks, 
 in the qualities of order, discipline, steadiness, and power of co-operation for a 
 joint purpose. Confidence of success with them is exaggerated into childish 
 rashness, so that they despise even the commonest precautions either in march 
 or attack, while the Greek divisions on their right and left are never so elate as 
 to omit either' (vi. 271). Sia (pvXaK'ns exovres — ' keeping con- 
 
 stantly/ on their guard;' lit. m a state of guard. See note, i. 17. a. 40. c. 
 42. c. ev eTTtTrjSeiy. Even for a single night the Greeks and 
 
 Romans chose the spot for their encampment with great care and precaution. 
 See Ca?sar, passim, for the equivalent phrase ; e.g. ^. C. i. 61, ' Nactus idoneum 
 locum ; ' and he says of the Spaniards who had served under Sertorius, that 
 they had learnt * consuetudine populi Romani loca capere, castra munire,' B. 
 Gall. iii. 23. a^iovfievoi — &^ioi KpivSfx^voi^ Schol. — ' they enjoyed 
 
 the high reputation of being esteemed the most warlike,' &c. On the uses of 
 o^Wtj and a|ictf/ia, see i. 130, ii. 34. 64. 88, vi. 15. iTreaxov. 
 
 There is a reading iirecrxovro^ ' non se retineri passi sunt, se retinuerunt,' as vii. 
 33, ol IvpaKovaioi . . . ^TreVxovro . . . rois 'Adrfvalois iirix^ipiiv, and Gottl. 
 adopts this reading. P. tr. ' neque morati sunt (substiterunt) ut aistra occu- 
 parent,' and says iirix^iv with the inf. means in Herod. ' deliberare, sibi pro- 
 ponere tanquam m otam.' K. explains it, * Sie hielten sich nicht ein Lager 
 aufzuschlagen.' T.K.A. ' did not turn their minds to.' * Neither forbore so 
 far as to occupy,' Hobbes. * They would not halt to encamp,' Grote, vi. 252. 
 G611. takes no notice of the diff ".ulty. Cf. Soph. Phil. 349, 539. 
 KOTo\aj3€i»' is a military term. See i. ; here it means ' take up ground for a 
 camp;' cf. infra d. I apprehend the construction is rb KardKa^Ctv, as rh 
 h(po&r\(Tai, infr. 87. a. ^»5m»7. Eor the old reading pdijxT^. The 
 
 two words are constantly interchanged. See c. 76, where we have ^v/up, mean- 
 ing impetus, which suits the sense here. ahro^oei — aur^ ^So?? — 
 • the very shout of onset' For the orthography see n. on c. i. K. says Thuc. 
 is the only Attic writer who uses the word. He quotes Bekker, Anecd. 214. 
 465, ayTOjSoef, Tax^ws. Ka\ afia r^ Tro\efiiK(fi a\a\ayix^. So 
 Liv. i. 1 1 , ' primo impetu et clamore ; ' vi. 4, ' primo clamore atque impetu.' 
 
 {d.) avTwv rh epyov yeveadat — 'the achievement wmdd be their own' 
 avrwv for axnSov is fr. Bekker. dfiolcas — i.e. as they had intended. 
 
 So Ixxx. a., 6 ireplirXovs ovk4ti tffoiro 'AOrfvaiois 6fxo7os. ' irpoXox^C^^^'' 
 
 hihpais — 'besitzen mit Hinterhaltzposten,' Kriig. — 'occupy the environs with 
 ambuscades' ' Planting ambuscades in convenient places, and suffering the 
 Epirots to approach without suspicion near to the gates ; they then suddenly 
 sallied out and attacked them, while the troops in ambuscade rose up and 
 assailed them at the same time.' — Grote, vi. 252. Cf. iii. 112 and 119 ; Herod. 
 V. 121. diA6<T€. So, 'cominus,' Lat. Cf. Horn. //. xii. 24, xiii. 
 
248 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 
 3 7, Ar.stoph.Z^. 451; Xen.^.«6.iii.4.4: ^[y^^. i;. ,3. Hence tropically 
 Plat Luh.29^ !>. 6^<i<re i.W roh ipan^^^aa^-' to grapple with; L. and S ^ 
 {€.) ^^^K.^vro. P.tr. ^brokc in upon,' 'fug4 eflfnsa in eos ferrentur'' rare 
 of an army m flight, being the usual term to signify ' pursuit of a flying Irm' ' 
 av.Aa^^a.ov-' received tl^m into thnr ranks: Arnold tr. ' rallied tlrn ' /, 
 theChaon,ans! is a.opia. KaB.ar^.r..-. reducing to disire^: 
 
 i.e. 6.K.U. A circumstance very annoying to Greek soldiers, who laid aside 
 their shields and defensive armour when they halted, T.K.A. For illustration 
 of the fact see Xen. Anab. iii. 3. ^^Zro .o..7.-i.e. ^.oB.. .^ J/X" 
 
 harassing heavily-armed troops by this sort of guerilla fighting. 
 
 Chapter LXXXII-.''A.a^o.. The Anapus flows into the Achelous on 
 the right bank a httle below Metropolis. It is called in modern maps Lo 
 [Cramer, 11. 32]. Olvta^iiv. Cf. ci. c. 
 
 Chaptkb LXXXIII._(..) Kp.<raiov. The whole of the inner sea now 
 known as the Sea of Lepanto east of the promontories of Khium and Antir. 
 rhium, was called originally tlie Criss^an Gulf, 6 Kp.aaios kSk^os. [See the 
 Homeric i/y.. to Apollo, ^^r, Kpia.s .6k.os a..>.] And this continued 
 to be Its designation even down to the time of Strabo, who gives this specific 
 
 tTmTo Tl rr^r' ''^ '^'"''''^ ^^^^ (^"'- P- 335)- But soon afl'er the 
 time of Thucydides. it went more generally by the name of the Gulf of Corinth 
 Xen. ^.//. VI. z. 9, k6k^os Kop^.e^cvcSs; Polyb. v. 3; Liv. xxvi. 26, sinus 
 
 toT I'll "r- '-'' '""' n'""^'"^- ^^'°^ ^'- ^) -"«"- ti- -me 
 to the small gulf running up to C.rrha, now known as the Gulf of Salona It 
 
 took Its name from Crissa, which lay inland a little S.W. of Delphi at the S 
 
 end of a projecting spu. of B^nassus (its ruins may still be Ln neL tht 
 
 Zl^t^'T t . rt -^'"'^ "^^ subsequently built at the head of th 
 bay, at the mouth of the Pleistus, and rose into a town from being the port of 
 
 tainfnf ;^n"rT'° '^' ^^ ^y ^'^^^'^-' ^^^ on the W. 'by the moun- 
 tains of the Ozolian Locrians. The Homeric hymn quoted above, gives the 
 legendary history of the foundation of Crisa, which was ascribed to Apollo 
 himself, and hence the city is called Kplaa Ca9.^, Hom. 77. ii. 520. In L 
 m the earlier writers Crisa is identified with Delphi, the name afterwards given 
 to the sanctuary of Pytho. The town of Cirrha is famous for the two sacred 
 wars carried on against it by the Amphictyons. (For the authorities, sec Cramer, 
 
 L!^ V. j' • "-'"'? u- . ^ ^^" -apay..4.ea.-' v^JM ought to have 
 
 ^^n at hand, ^.e^ 'which was intended to co-operate with Cnemus, and to 
 prevent, &c. Cf. h. 1. v. a. ; Wiv. c. ; xcii. d. ; xcv. c. &,^^ into 
 
 the ^uter^or of the country: vvayKdaBr^.av. Observe change of 
 
 number [axwa yhs rh <r„,aa..^^e.a.], /... the Corinthians, &c., implied in rh 
 vavr.K6u. So Tpoiav .X6vr.s Hnor' 'Apyd.u <rr6Kos, yEsch. Ag. c88. 
 
 ^€pi ras avras ^^4pas rrjs f^dxvs. K. cf. Xen. Anab, vi.' 2. 9 ; Pol. iii. 
 45. 6, IX. 5. 7. > ' 
 
 (A ) rji .hpvxcpU, . The Peloponnesians had not yet made actual trial 
 
 11 rr "^^T"^" '®"'°'^' "' '^' P^^°^ ^^ ^'^^^"«"^« ^hiel^ it. had now 
 reached; themselyes retaining the old unimproved method of working ships at 
 
 [tSooK II. ■ Chap. 83.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 249 
 
 sea, they had no practical idea of the degree to which it had been superseded 
 by Athenian training. If we revert to the battle of Salamis, we find that 
 narrowness of space was at that time accounted the best of all protections for a 
 smaller fleet against a larger. But such had been the complete change of 
 feeling, occasioned by the system of manoeuvring introduced since that period 
 in tlie Athenian navy, that amplitude of sea room is now not less coveted by 
 Phormio than dreaded by his enemies.'— Grote, vi. 263, 274. Cf. c. Ixxxix. e. 
 itapar^Kiovras ^w rod KdXirov—^ as they were coasting alo72g so as to steal 
 if possible outside the strait: See P. in loe. 4r-f,p€i—' kept 
 
 watchivg: <rrpaTiwTLK<irepov. ' The triremes were fitted out 
 
 more as transports for numerous soldiers than with any view to naval combat.' 
 -Grote, p. 263. ohK &v ol6fievoi-'not dreaming of the probabUity 
 
 #/ the Aihenums venturing; &c. The &v, which properly belongs to roKfxr^aaL, 
 IS attracted to the participle (Madvig, quoted by T.K.A. ). 
 
 {c.)^apk yrip a<pS>u Kof,cCo^^yu,p—i.e. as the Schol. rightly explains 
 It ^ while the Corinthians, ^-c, were coasting along the Peloponncsian shore: See 
 Jelf, § 710. a.: 'We sometimes find the genitive absolute where we should 
 expect the participle to agree with the subject of the verb.' Cf. Thuc. iii. 13. 
 70; Herod, i. 178; Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20, and a remarkable instance Luke xiv! 
 32. Cf. also Matth. § 561. In this case, Madvig observes, the genitive absolute 
 usually m Thucyd. precedes the principal sentence, and senses to give more 
 prominence to the participial clause as a special circumstance. Like this is 
 1. 10 4, ha^e^vKdros U.piKK4ovs~vyy^Ker, avr^, for the simpler construction, 
 Sia^e^m6Tt n. ijyy^KOv, which illustrates Mad^'ig's remark. See T. K. A 
 and chap. vin. e. Sia$a\x6,^Tu>;^, according to the general use of 
 
 the present, which is also the participle imperfect, implies 'purposing to cross/ 
 te. making the attempt without carrying it out (Poppo). Cf. vi. 30. 
 XaKK^Sos A look at the map will show that the Athenians had considerably 
 outstr.pt the Lacedaemonians with a view to intercept them. From i. 108. c. 
 we learn that the Athenians had taken Chalcis after their victory at (Enophyta, 
 when Tolmidas sailed round Peloponnesus. It was being then used by the 
 
 I f r'« '''^^' ^. "^''^^ '^^^^"' ^' ^'^^ ^« Molycrium and Sollium. It was one 
 he five ^tohan towns mentioned by Homer (//. ii. 640), and lay at the foot 
 ot the mountain of the same name, whence it is also called inoxoAKis. It was 
 a httle to the east of the Evenus, now the Fidhari, and is probably represented 
 ^>} the modern Ourio-Kestro, the mountain being called Varassova. Leake, 
 ^.Greece, 1. ,10, ap. Smith, s.v. E^yov. The Evenus rises in the 
 
 ■ghest summit of Mount (Eta, and runs into the sea about 120 stadia from 
 the promontory of Antirrhium, In winter it becomes a very considerable 
 
 iver, receiving several mountain torrents, and flowing with great rapidity, and 
 oeanng along great stones in its course. Hence 'Eveni rapids undae,' Ov. 
 .IX. 104. In mythology it is famous for the death of the Centaur Nessus. 
 !\ '' '^'^ W^'"""' ^^^° ^^'^ here by Hercules for oflfering violence to Dejanira 
 as he earned her across the river. Col. Leake supposes its modern name to be 
 acorupuon of the Romaic from 6<p^s, and that it retains a vestige of the 
 
 cient people the Ophieis in whose territory the river rose. (N. Greece, ii. 
 
 I ;f"'l' • ''7- ""^- ""'■ ^^P^- ^''''' 557. o^K UaSo. 
 
 «Tds v<popf,tadf,,,o^. The difficulty of completely comprehending this 
 
250 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. Ichap. 84.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 
 
 251 
 
 r' 
 
 description is well known. In the first place the Scholiast explains v<t>opfii(rdn(m 
 iXaBov by ot ^Mr\vaioi; but Haack, Poppo, Arnold, Goller, and indeed most 
 modem commentators, adopt the opinion expressed by Grote, that * the natural 
 structure of the sentence, as well as the probabilities of fact, point to oj 
 TifKoTtovv^ffioi as the nominative case to the verb. This is however not 
 all, for even those who agree as to the persons denoted by ixpopfxiadixevoi are 
 at vjiriance respecting the operation described by that word. The most 
 common view, based upon Arnold's note, is well given in Engel man's German 
 tr. : * The Peloponnesians were sailing along the coast of Peloponnesus, 
 out of the Corinthian Gulf, with the intention of crossing over to Acarnania, 
 as soon as they got past the town of Khium. They had brouglit to during 
 the night in the harbour of Patrse, a circumstance which they had in rain 
 endeavoured to conceal from the Athenians [ouk €\adov]. When then they 
 were attempting to cross from Patrre to the other Fide, Phormion, who had 
 been on the watch for this moment, came rapidly down upon them from 
 Chalcis, met them in mid-passage, and forced them to come to action.' Grote 
 objects that the Peloponnesians did not wisli, and could not hope, to conceal 
 from Pliormio the spot where they put to for the night, and make him suppose 
 they were west of Patrse when they were really in the place, which is ^hat 
 Dr. Arnold supposes. He urges too that the battle was fought in mhl-cha/inel, 
 and very little offer daf/brcak, which is inconsistent with the supposition 
 that they passed the night in the harbour of Patr?e. Accordingly he interprets 
 i<popixi(rdneyoi — ^ having taken wp a simiilatcd (or im'pirfcct) night-station! 
 I have great doubt whether this exact force can belong to inrdy but find 
 that the explanation which I had myself attempted in a projeetetl review 
 of Arnold's first volume somewhat resembles this. ' It is impossible to sup- 
 pose that there can have been time enough for the Peloponnosian fleet to have 
 regularly entered the harbour of Patrse, as Arnold suggests, and also to have 
 been in a position to fight a battle early next morning {M r^]v ew) half-way 
 between the two coasts. The " dodge," if we may use the word, attempted ly 
 Machaon was that so frequently practised by the " chase" in the pursuit of slavers 
 and the like. As long as daylight lasted, he continued his course parallel to 
 the enemy ; when night came on he tried to lay to without their seeing him 
 [vTfh — clam Athcnienses], in the hopes that they would sail past him. When 
 he thought Phormion far enough onward, he turned sharply at right angles to 
 his former course, steering N. instead of W. But Phormion had been too 
 much on the alert, and stopping while the enemy stopped, was down upon them 
 in the first light of morning before they had time to escape. This too explains 
 the reason why the Peloponnesians had not the sam.e chance of keeping away 
 from their enemy as they had enjoyed all the previous day. They had 
 come into disagreeable proximity during the night. ixpopfxi^eaQai may origin- 
 ally have meant "clam appellore ad liitus," because this was the only way 
 in which the first mariners did "lie to." But as navigation improved, and ships 
 wer« brought to, as occasion required, at sea, the term would naturally be re- 
 tained. And it is ridiculous to suppose that the Peloponnesian admiral, whose 
 object it was to reach the Acarnanian coast with all possible speed, would 
 retrace his way to the opposite shore, thereby doubling the distance to be 
 traversed, and the chance of interruption from Phormion.' I do not know that 
 
 anything which I have seen has much modified the opinion here expressed. 
 We may add that the words avb rris Xa\Ki5os do not necessarily mean, as 
 some apparently suppose, that the Athenians had just left the harbour of 
 Chalcis that very morning; airh denotes the direction from which, as ivX the 
 
 Uinction towards which, a movement takes place, cf. sup. 80, a. On the aorist, 
 as applicable to an action not carried into effect, see remarks in the appendix 
 
 Ion Soph. Ajax, 11 25-6: 
 
 ME. hlKaia yap t6vV €utu;^6«/ Kr^lvavrd fxe ' 
 TET. KTelyayra; Seiv6y 7' elnas, ei Ka\ Cfjs Qavwv. 
 
 I The whole will then mean — ' when their attempt to lay to in the night unknown to 
 \tk enemy did not pass undetected.^ Those who make xxpopfiiadfievoi refer to the 
 Athenians, might I suppose tr. ' when the fact that the Athenians had brought to 
 
 Uuring the night became perceptible' but this is I think very questionable. 
 There is a v. 1. marg. Cam., icpop/xiadficvoi, and probably it is to this reading 
 that the Schol. refers when he supplies ot 'Adrivaioi to €\adov. But for the same 
 reason this is not quite satisfactory; ov XavQdvw means 'I do not succeed 
 in escaping detection when I make some attempt intended to be secret.' This 
 
 \might be said of the Athenian fleet, but the furtive efforts of the others to 
 escape were evidently prominent in the writer's mind. oi/'rw S^. Cf. 
 
 |adi. 131. 
 
 [d.) (TTparriyol. Cf. i. 46. b. irapecrKevd^ovro — 'who con- 
 
 Urihuted to the equipment of this fleet' K. kvkKov. Cf. iii. 78, 
 
 and note. /u^ ^ihSvrfs SifKirXovv. Cf. i. 49. c. ' The Athenians 
 
 rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their 
 rear, turned rapidly and got the opportunity before the ship of the adversary 
 could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak 
 part. The success of course depended on the extreme rapidity and precision of 
 the movements of the Athenian vessel.' — Grote, vi. 267 ; see the rest of the 
 
 bote. This manoeuvre could only be executed by ships that had the superiority 
 in speed and management. Compare the account of the battle of Arginusse, 
 
 iXen. Hell. i. 6, where the balance of naval skill is on the side of the Lacedge- 
 
 Imoniani, and Xenophon, speaking of the Athenian ships, says (§ 31), outu S* 
 
 h'Tax0i7(roj/ iVa jx^ 5ieK7rA.ouv SiSoTex/, x^*pov yap iirKeov (where see Schneider's 
 
 [valuable note). to. AcTrra ir\o7a — 'the small craft' — i.e. the store 
 
 ressels. Cf. vii. 40. e. ; cf. Duk. ad iv. 116. b. P. 8ta /3pax€os = 
 
 m oKiyov — ' exiguo ex intcrvallo,' P. irapayiyvSfjLevoi — i.e. the crews, 
 
 jObs. the change of gender {Kara ^vvfcriv). Cf. i. no. d. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIV. — (a.) Kara filau vavv rerayixevoi — 'formed in 
 fineofbattk a-head; as it is technically called. Cf. Xen. Hell. i. 6, 29, 31, ot 
 i^ioi SfKa vavfflv inl fjiias r^raynivoi. Poppo cf. c. xc. d. /cara fxlav iitX KepcoSy 
 t^hich confirms this translation. Of course Korb. filav 7Jiight also mean one 
 ^t% V. ad xc. a. ^vvrjyov 4s oKiyov — ' kept forcing them to con- 
 
 }f Oct their circle.* iv XPV acl trapairXiovm — aith ix€Ta<popa.s rris 
 
 Mwpay TTjy fi^P* toO xp«Tbs 7t7J'o/ieVou— Schol. ; ' strictim' Haas cf. Herod. 
 
 n ; Soph. Aj. 797. Procopius imitates the passage, ii. J5. G. 7. Gottleb. 
 ffptewAet Ka.\ elddci. Observe the change of subject. 
 
252 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES* 
 
 [Book II ■^^^^•^5-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 (b) 4<t>^ J a vr V. The affair would then be, as we say, ' in his own ha>ids ' 
 to attack when he pleased. Cf. iii. ,2 ; iv. 29 ; vii. xz ; Matth. § 586 
 ovSeya xp^you-note, not ^rjS^.a; perhaps we may give the same idiomatic 
 torce by saying, «no time,' as a sort of single tense-cf. om^ ariyovaai-^u, 
 seaworthy: ch. xciv. See what is said on the use of ob as a particula infiuitan" 
 1. I. a. 5, b. 17. a.; and the remark of Hermann 071 Viger, No. 309 'oh aretis' 
 sim^ conjungi cum verbo debet, ita ut hoc verbo eonjunctum, unam uotionem 
 constituat, cujusmodi est, ovk oUa, nescio.' KaWiar-qy K. 
 
 suggests Kc^AAz^r' &u, but needlessly. Cf. the old English usage of handsomct 
 a kandsomc heating. 
 
 _ {p.) Kar^ei. Qucr>', more violently than usual? The prep, seems to 
 imply this. See ad c. xxvi. c. .po.eV^.r.. WaL cf. Zl 
 
 yavs yap irphs a\\-f]\ai(ri Qp^Kiai irvocd 
 ijpeiKov al Bh KepoTxnrovfiei'ai $ia 
 X^^t^Sivi, K.r.K. 
 
 \oi5opl(f. Wass quotes Horace, Sat. i. v. 11 ; Eur. ffec. : 
 
 iv yap nvpl(f (Trparfv/xaTi 
 aKoXaa-TOS ox^os, vavriKi) t avapxia 
 Kpfiaawv TTvpos. 
 
 «6A€u(rT«.. Duk. quotes Scheffer de Mil nav. iv. 7. These were called bv 
 the Romans ' hortatores et pausarii.' Mr. Grote has a good note on the pas- 
 sage VI. 269, where he shows from the structure of the trireme how important 
 the functions of these officers were, the voice of the keleustes being the only 
 thing that kept the 170 rowers to good time in their strokes. He refers t'o 
 Arnolds note and Plant. Merc. iv. 2, 5, and Asin. iii. i. 15. Cf. Thuc. vii 
 70; Ovid, ilf^^. iii. 618: 
 
 ' Qui requiemque modumque 
 Voce dabat remis, animorum hortator.' 
 
 He carried in his hand a hammer or truncheon to keep time with, called 'por- 
 tisculus.' See Plant, u. s. and Eich's Diet. s. v. ava<p4puv- 
 
 ' could not get their oars clear of the water; Grote. ' Die Euder bei un^e- 
 stumer See aufheben,' Gottl. 'Eemos ad se reducere, et attoUere suspensoV 
 P. 'Eeferre,'K. ' Becovcr their oars: J., ^nd ^. Kv0epu^ra^s. 
 
 \\e learn from 1. 143, a. the importance of this office, and the stress laid on the 
 lact of having Athenian steersmen. 5i4<pd,ipoy (see Poppo). 
 
 means frequently ^spoilt: I 29, c and here is simply disabled-i.e. for the 
 time ; &t\ovs ^Tvoirjae, Diod. Sic. xii. 48 ; so KaraSiuu, i. 50, h. 1. 90, e. 92, b,; 
 vii. 41, Jill. 34, cf. note ad i. 29, a. Udrpas. Patrae, one of the 
 
 twelve Achaean cities (Herod, i. 145), lies on the Corinthian gulf on one of the 
 spurs of Mount Panachaicus. Patreus the Ach^Ban was its eponymus hero. 
 Alter the Macedonian wars it was one of the four cities tliat revived the federal 
 league. After the battle of Actium, Augustus planted a considerable colony 
 there placing the neighbouring towns under its dominion. Pausanias, whoj 
 visited It, gives a long description of its buildings and statues. It retains its 
 name m the modern Patras. A6,.7,y, Dyme, also one of the 
 
 253 
 
 twelve Achaean cities (v. Herod, u. s.), is said to have derived its name from 
 being the most westerly of them all {airh Bv(rixS>v). Its ancient name, according 
 to Strabo, was Stratus. It was one of the four cities which revived the 
 Achaean League. Pompey colonised it with a number of Cilician pirates and 
 Augustus placed it under the authority of Patrae. Its remains are to be 'seen 
 near the modern town of Karavostasi (Leake, Morea, ii. 160). 
 h a\K^p rp4w€(reai K. explains by ' se mettre en defense: and cf. Horn // 
 XV. 564 ; Herod, ix. 70 ; Thuc. iii. 108, a. He says ^Ak^ is not used by other 
 Attic writers in this sense of resistance. It is, in fact, vigorous fighting • and 
 so, io betake themselves to vigorous fighting, in such circumstances, means to 
 make rcsoAtie defence. * 
 
 (d.) ay€\6^fvoi—' took prisoners, and transferred to their own ships ' 
 yady 'avaeivr^s. Cf. Scheff. de Mil. nav. iv. 2; Hiuls. Herod, viii i2r • 
 Procop. B G. IV. 22, Gottl. KuAA^vr,.. Cyllene was the sea- 
 
 port of Ehs, from which it was distant about 120 stadia, and is mentioned in 
 very early times in connexion with the legendary history of the Peloponnese 
 The Corcyraeans burnt it because it had supplied ships to the Corinthians 
 (Thuc. i. 30). It was the principal port on this part of the Peloponnesus 
 (Thuc. VI. 89 ; Diod. xix. 66, 87 ; Polyl). v. 3 ; Liv. xxvii. 32). Leake assigns 
 Its position to the modern Glarentza, but there appears reason to doubt the 
 identity (Smith, s. v.). al iK,7e,v viies. Cf. i. 61, c. ; for the ftict 
 
 see Ixxx. c. Leucas was the rendezvous for the fleet. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV.— (a.) ^v^^oixovs. Apparently here mentioned for 
 the first time in the Peloponnesian war. Ten were sent to Agis after his 
 failure at Argos (v. 63). Astyochus was accompanied by eleven (viii. 39). 
 Grote vi. 272, ' Commissioners, to assist by their advice and exertions ' 
 P. compares Hermann, Gr. Ant. § 45, 4 ; Thuc. iv. 79, v. 63 ; and Schweigh. 
 ad App. ill. p. 305, for a similar custom among the Eomans. 
 TifiOKpdrvv-foT his fate, see xcli. b. KaraaKevdC^aeai. Cf 
 
 Ixxviii. c; iv. 75 ; and Poppo's note. ^^' 6\lya,y-^ by an in- 
 
 terior number of ships.' So conversely, 7rA7)0os is used for superiority in num- 
 bers. Cf. i. 106, 2, 125. TTpCorov—i.e. in this war. Sehol. 
 rapiKoyos. Cf. ad i. 78, a. and ii. 61, c; 66, a. ; 91, c. ; vii. 28 ; tr. the 
 mreamwbleness ; the contradiction to all rational calculation was great. 
 
 (b.) avTirid4vT€s. Cf. iii. 56. c. on its use with a genitive. P. Eurip. 
 /;)//. Taur. 358, tV eVeaS' Ai>\iv avriOeTcra ttjs e'fce?. 4 k no Wo v. 
 
 For the fact, see i. 142, g. Si' 6\lyov. Cf. i. 77, f.; 124, b. 
 
 (c.) Kae' i)fi4pav de/. Cf. iv. 66, a. iei Karh Iros iKoarov. Soph. Phil. 
 
 7S0, with Wunder's note. rep KOfii(ovri Nicias. 
 
 (d.) roprivios. Gortyn (afterwards more usually called Gortyna, and not 
 to be confounded with Gortys in Arcadia) was, next to Cnossus, the most im- 
 portant city in Crete. It was anciently called Larissa, and was therefore in all 
 probability a Pelasgic town. [Cf. Cramer, iii. 384. We find also a Gortynia 
 m Macedonia, Thuc. ii. 100, probably also Pelasgic] In early times it was 
 leagued with Cnossus, and the two cities together held the rest of Crete 
 m subjection. Afterwards, dissensions having arisen between them, they were 
 engaged in continual hostilities. [Strabo, x. 478, who reckons the circuit 
 
254 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [BookIlB Chap. 87.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 of the city at fifty stadia.] It stood on the river Lethjeus, about nine mfles 
 from the sea, where it had two harbours, Lebena and Metallum. Mr. Pashlev 
 fixes its site at the modern Hagius Dh^ka, where the ten saints of Gortyna aw 
 said to have suffered martyrdom in the persecution of Decius. See Pashleys 
 Crete I 295. ^p6^e.os. Cf. ad c. 29. a. and iii. 70, d., where for 
 
 the difference between ' proxenus ' and ' epiproxenus,' see Arnold's note. 
 KvSwylay. One of the most ancient and important cities of Crete It pro 
 bably existed very long before the time of Polycrates, and was only enlaL 
 and adorned by the Samian colonists, and not founded, as Herodotus supposed 
 111. 44, 59. A considerable portion of its citizens were ^ginetan colonists' 
 (Olymp. Ixv. 2) ; hence their especial hatred for Athens. See Miiller's Mne- 
 hca^^. 113. It was 1000 stadia, according to the Schol., or 800 according to 
 Strabo (x p. 479) from Gortyna, lying on the sea looking towards Laeonia 
 Mr. Pashley identifies it with the modern Khania (i. 15). The quince was 
 indigenous to this district, and took its name from it. [Plin xv 11 -cf. 
 Smith, Geoff. Diet. s. v.; Mull. Bar. i. p. 30.] Uo^^x^'ira'^s The 
 
 terntory of Polichne bordered on Cydonia. The site of the town has not been 
 ascertained (Smith, in v.; Herod, vii. 170). {,^h ^v4t,o,v The 
 
 causal use of the preposition, see Jelf, § 639. i. 2, b. &ir\oia is used for any 
 thing that stops navigation, either adverse winds, or the absence of wind- but, 
 as Poppo obsen-es, it is more likely that the former meaning is the correct one 
 as vessels propelled by oars would not be detained by a calm (viii 99) EiK^el^ 
 man in his transktion remarks on imh kirKoias, ' Wenn die Praposilion achtlt 
 kann ^irKoia nur die in der Uebersetzung ausgedriickte Bedeutung, Windstilb 
 haben;' but see ^sch. Ag. 188, where the context shows that foul winds are 
 meant, irvoal ^.-nh :S.Tp6,iovos fioKovcrai ; so Eurip. Iph. A. 88; Herod ii 119 
 There is no reason therefore to believe with Kriig. that inr' h.v4fiwp is a glo«s- 
 the better plan is with some inferior MSS. to strike out the second {rK6, and 
 thus make airXolas a sort of epexegesis to vn ayffxcDi/. 
 
 CHAPTEfe LXXXVL— (fl.) irapfaKfvaffniyoi &s ^ttI vavfiax'tav. Not 
 as before, c. 78, 8, arTpanarriKt^rfpov napfaKtvaafi^yoi. Udyopfioy rhv 
 
 'AxaiKtJv. [To distinguish it from Panormus in Sicilv (vi. 2), and Panonnus 
 in Miles;a (riii. 24).] It lay fifteen stadia to the ea^t of the promontory of 
 Rhium. The bay is now called Tekieh, from a tekieh or tomb [diiKTj] of a 
 Tiirkish saint which formerly stood upon it (Smith, s. v.). Ttap^nXeva 
 
 86 Ka\ 6 *op;i/a„^' coasted along from Naupactus ' (/.f. of course in aeon- 
 trary direction to the Lacedaemonians) to Molycrium, so as to get outside the 
 strait into broad water. 
 
 (A.) 'Pi'ov. The towns on both sides of the strait bore this name. To dis- 
 tinguish them, the south- town was called rb 'AxaiKby (now the castle of the 
 Morea); the north town'P(ov rb MoKvKpiKby or 'A^ipp.oy (now the castle of 
 Rumih). These two promontories formed the entrance to the Corinthian gulf. 
 The distance between them is variously stated. Thucyd. makes it seven stadia 
 (11. 86) ; Strabo, five (pp. 335, 6) ; Pliny about a Roman mile (iv. 6). But both 
 Dodwell and Leake make it a mile and a half (Smith, Diet. s. v. Achaia;! 
 Dodwell, p. 17, ; Leake's Marea, ii. 148). yrpo<re&,fioveiiKa 
 
 Cf. adi. 134, d. P. fnoy—sc.6pfiiffafi4yovs, P. 
 
 255 
 
 (c.) irpbs iKelvuv—' in favour of the Lacedcstnomans.' Trpbs or ir-po-n is, 
 according to Dr. Donaldson, only a lengthened form of vapd, containing in 
 itself the notion of onward — adversus ; oi irpbs /xriTpbs = a matre versus me 
 cognati—' motion towards that which is before the subject.' — N. Crat. p. 302. 
 From this he deduces the various usages of Trpds, though without special men- 
 tion of the present one. Jelf appears to classify this usage among those which 
 denote « properties belonging to the subject from which the action is supposed 
 to arise,' § 638. Matthiae, § 590, a. places it after the case of neuters, re- 
 presented as produced by something— jSW ^luvai irpbs dvOpwirwy. In other 
 cases also, as dyai irp6s Tiyos, stare ah aliquo, cf. Herod, i. 124. It is, I think, 
 most simple to explain the usage from such a phrase as 6 Bebs irpbs rj/xwu iariy, 
 iv. 92 ; that which stands by our side, and acts from that position, being sup- 
 posed to make in our favour. 
 
 {d.) T^y yavfiaxiay iroirja-ai. Observe the difference between the active 
 and middle voices : * Actinim de ducibus ponitur, qui auctores sunt ut pugna 
 fiat.' Cf. iv. 91, V. 59, 80. P. Compare the phrases v6fiov dewai and deadaif 
 rpoKoiov ffTTJaai and (rTWaadai (v. ad c. 79, f.). ^irb twv 
 
 'Adrjualuy. Cf. ad i. no b. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVII.— (a.) &pa. See note on i. 75. a., and the article 
 
 referred to in tiie Classical Museum, and tr. ' if, as it seems.' ovxl 
 
 hiKalav K.T.A. — ' does not afford (or bring with it) any just ground of inference^ 
 
 that it should alarm you' i.e. gives you no reason for drawing such a conclusion 
 
 as would alarm 3'ou. TfKfiapffiy, Kriig. calls the object-accusative, and rb iK<po~ 
 
 &wai, the resultative accusative. His interpretation does not differ from the 
 
 above. Reiske's notion that rb 4K<pofiriaai. is the immediate object, and hiKaiav 
 
 TfKfi. the predicative accusative, though mentioned by the editors,. is not, I 
 
 think, to be approved. He would tr. ' has not the fact of its having alarmed 
 
 you as a just ground of inference.' Jelf, § 670, remarks that the article would 
 
 naturally be attached to the substantive infinitive, when especial emphasis was 
 
 to be laid upon the notion which it expresses, and as this infinitive alwavs 
 
 stands to the preceding verb in the relation of the accusative, this article 
 
 is always the neuter, r6. On Ix^' for Trape'xet, cf. ii. 41, ayavaKriKriy ex^i, i. 9, 
 
 1. 47- b., iv. 126. 45 yavfiaxiay fiaWoy. Cf. Tac. Hist. ii. 40, 
 
 'Non ut ad pugnam, sed ut ad bellandum profecti,' Popp. 
 
 ((T<pi)\fv—'tri_pped us up (or laid us by tJie heels),' i.e. was the cause of our 
 failure. 
 
 {h.) rris yvdffXTjs rb /i^ Kara Kpdros yiKi]d4y. There is considerable 
 variety of opinion about this passage. Am. tr. ' 9ior ought our spirits, which, 
 so far from having been fairly beaten, have that within them which still bids de- 
 fiance to the enemy, to lose their edge from the result of chance.' This is right in 
 the main, but yydfin is not Ovfibs or spirit (an usage of which I find no example). 
 It should rather be * will,' in the sense of a resolved purpose, cf. i. 32. Such is 
 Its frequent force in the P. V. ; see e.g. yvcafij) (rrofiiwy &r€p fi/dvycoy, v. 295. 
 The whole then will mean, that part of our resolution which has not been van- 
 quished in an overmastering way, but still retains within a defiance for the foe, 
 should not be cowed by what is the result of nothing but accident (or, by the result 
 of mm accident at any rate), for such is the effect of 7c, and the phrase differs 
 
256 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 much from the Schol. explanation, rrj iwoBdap ^vfjL<p6pa, quoted by most of th. 
 editors. We have rrjs yp^f,r,5 rh /.^ k.t.\. instead of ^ ^^ Kar^ Kp6.ros mr 
 eucra yvd,fMr,, because the orator would not be so unreasonable as to ascribe no 
 moral effect to defeat ; he insinuates that while any part of the old heroic 
 resolve is still left, it ought to hold out against the caprice of fortune. 
 ^XO" riph auTiXoyiaylthmk expresses the state of one who is not entirely 
 silenced by his adversary, but has still a word to give him in reply. Cf i ,,' 
 d. and V. 76, y€Po,i4u7j5 toWtjs iuriXoyias, and viii. 5,, yroW^y ipnKoy'lap Ll 
 ax^TMafffidu, where the word plainly implies a violent dispute between tvro 
 parties. It is possible that Popp.'s meaning, ' Rcchtfertigungsgrunde; counter 
 plea, or argument in excitse, justification, may be correct. Kriig 's interpreti 
 tion would differ from the above in making rh fi^ p^KnO'eu rm yu<^^r„ tiie 
 accusative coming after afx^Kipeadai, and following the analogy of af,$\6,,aea^ 
 r^uyvc:>fx'nu, and similar phrases. In this case the ij^as, which is the subject 
 of dfi$Kvu€(Teat, is again supplied without change before vo/xlaai. 
 4uS4x^aeai. See i. 124. 140, and iv. 18. e. robs avrohs is made 
 
 by Am. the predicate, jf^e brave should aJwai/s he the brave, the same persons 
 and we may quote in confirmation 6 avr6s €/>t rfj yvd^fxr,, iii. 38, and v. 75 as 
 well as (EcL Tyr. 557, abr6s elfit r<2 $ov\,ifiari' But 'it is also possiblJ to 
 make rohs ainohs the subject, 'tis right to hold that those who remain unchamd 
 in purpose are brave men rightly so called (or as Kriig. has it gehilhrcndcrwme 
 I. e. as is seemly they should), and not to think that they can while still rdaining 
 courage (or claiming to he brave men) by putting forward inexperience as an 
 excuse with^ any show of reason show the white feather in any respect. The 
 adverbs 6tK0T*s and opeS>s seem to be contrasted, and are used in a somewliat 
 peculiar manner. Cf. note upon ipiXiws ov iroKffiiccs, iii. 65. The metaphor 
 contained in irpo0a\ho,i4povs is ' shielding themselves behind inexperience 
 as a pretext.' 
 
 (c.) txp-hix-nv here seems to be the faculty of recollection. Kriig. quotes 
 fiefip^aew ayadhs eJpai, Xeu. Anab. iii. 2. 39. Hyev ev\pvxias. This 
 
 is a sort of fallacy not uncommon in practice, though not noticed in the rheto- 
 rical treatises, where the speaker covertly implies the incompatibility of two 
 qualities, and argues from the presence of one the absence of the other. See 
 for illustration Macaulay's remarks upon ]Montagu and Harley, Hist. vol. iv. 
 4KTr\-fi<T(T€i—'frightens out.' Cf rb Kvn-nphv e'/cTrAVo-et, ii. 38, and Aristotle's 
 4KKpo<>(i tV 6V6p7etW. -trphs fi'tp rb ifxireipSrfpop K.r.\.—' against 
 
 their superiority in practice, place your superiority in courage: 
 rvxf'^v. With no expressed participle. Cf. i. 32. b. 
 
 (d.) Trepiylypfrai—' there results as a balance in your favour; i.e. after 
 the calculations just recommended, as the verb is used ii. 39. The meaning 
 arises from the force of irept', ' over and above,' i. 2. b. See a somewhat remark- 
 able combination of the prop, with €*>/, vi. 55,7ro\A65 r<^ TreptcJ^Tt, and again viii. 
 46, iK 7r(pi6pros, CT-abundanti. xA^0os— ' superior numbers: Cf. 
 
 supra i. 106. b. 125, and infra 89. a. rh iroWd, adverbially, as 
 
 i. 13. a. So Napoleon said, Providence generally favours the strow 
 battalions. avrk ravra K.r.K.—' the fact that these very mishaj'.^ 
 
 have befallen us will teach us better for the future: In accordance, as Arn. 
 says, with the proverb iraO^fiara fiadiifiara. 
 
 [Book II. I CfiAP. 89.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 (..) T^ K«a' Uvr6y~^ so far as concerns himself: Kriig. rather ' in his own 
 partwuhr department (or duty): x<i^9-v. I have pointed out in a note 
 
 upon ff^^Agarn. 11 (Terminalia ii.) that this is the technical military word 
 io.^ station. Cf. iv. 126. e. i. 28, iii. 22, vii. 49, viii. 71 ; Xen. Anab. Z%. 15. 
 
 /; 't l'^\ . ^"' ^' ^^«t^°g"i«h«d from .1, see note i. 120. c, and on 
 Kai, to be rendered by an emphasis on the auxiliary verb, see i 15 b 
 r.M^^o.ra. We have the regular passive form, r.^r^eVo^ra., vi. 80, but on 
 these middle for passive forms, see i. 68. c. 81. b. The instrumental dative in 
 this case makes it more difficult to give the middle sense-* .M win honour 
 for themselves bt/ means of the rewards; &c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII.-(a.) ri »a?9o,. Cf. supra, 87. d. 
 {„,,^Ta^«„>. Haack rightly remarks that this is equivalent to K„h. i^ri- 
 «» W<!m..<.<, sup. 27. 2, 'formmg into groups among themselves.' 
 .y* rafiyy. There is doubtless, as Kriig. notices, a sort of reference to 
 ^ei^epoy—' under the existing circumstances: Uiyt Note th ' 
 
 ^rfect of continuous action-^ iept telling them (or, it u.as his u,ont to tett thlm) 
 Krug. says .. may be simply attached to rx^., and the wds .po..r..Jl 
 ra, y,..^« considered as a 5.4 ^.W. But it is in realitv att^hed to both 
 Terbs, for the plam reason that i.p«ap.a«i<. is a sort of epexegesis to rxry. 
 It was by what he said to them that he prepared them to adopt the notion Tr' 
 possessed thar minds with a notion. airoTf airoTs ' Th' 
 
 repetition is awkward, but the first aW. is the dative, as in 'th^ common usage' 
 
 (J.) Sx^^o" . . . i-Kox^p^iu. One of the cases where a neuter verb passes 
 mto an active one because it expresses some action commonly describ^ri 
 
 TZlt: " ^- " "'i™ """ " '^■'^^ ^^ -«™ construction.^ So 
 oT „/ Z 7T; '"-i*' tf "■ *"• '^''"^''''" ^* ^¥n^i'"'~-'asfor backing 
 o^t of what he had said. Cf. in Latin ' egredi urbem,' and similar phrases 
 
 Popp. refe« to Pflugk ad Eur. Hec. g.z.'^See Jelf, § 548. or The worf 
 ^te IS used with somewhat of contempt. Eemark the absence of the artick 
 Wh A«,,a.„i and naoTo^njaW, conveying as it does the reason of the fact 
 
 Sasnl^^t- . <"^,^'n<riy...roZeap..U. This is notl 
 
 mint, as Dale and some others have understood it, to put them in mind of the 
 
 ^.ffl«, as IV. .7. b WM«,<r,v To5 KaX&, 0cvK,i,ra^ai. So too f^,M.^™.a»a, 
 by no means always recordari, but sometimes merely mentionem facere 
 1. 10, ikl^y ^eyiOovs irtp, ovK iuytaen i 17 ii ac h iii «« If 1, 
 ^y to see how one ideals in^ Z^IIJ: *'' '• "'' '"• '' "' ''""^^"' 
 
 pretatir^ I-XXXIX.-(a.) rh .A?e„. Cf. Ixxxvii. d. That the inter- 
 W^lTi, ^"'^ '" '"""'=' ''^"' '='^" f«"» ">« ««'■ that the contrary 
 
 tst itrTt"".'^""^ '"' "= ^■^"^- not on unequal scale.' Z!, 
 eas^ I believe to be the meaning of the worfs, from such phrases as ^.i, M 
 
 m. 10, II, avb rov iaov dfiiXovpres, and many others, as i^nd rS,v 6fjLoi<,p, 
 
 I 
 
258 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 89.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 259 
 
 viii. 89. Kriig., hcwever, inclines to the interpretation, * with inferior means 
 for preparation.^ 
 
 (b.) t^TTfira ^ fidxiffra. k.t.X. I should be inclined to tr. this contro- 
 verted passage — * and then with regard to the point upon which they principally 
 place their reliance in coming forward to the combat, as though it were a peculiar 
 prerogative of theirs to he brave men, they feel confident for no other reason than 
 on account of their general success, which they owe to their experience in land 
 service, and they fancy it will do the same for them at sea.* The relative ^has 
 for its antecedent either rovro simply (Am., Kriig.), or we may assign it to the 
 class of cases mentioned by Madvig, Gr. Gr. : * A preceding relative sentence, 
 with a relative in the neuter, occasionally assigns merely the action, opinion, or 
 utterance, upon occasion of which something is remarked in the principal sen- 
 tence, and signifies with regard to.' In this case, the clause in apposition is 
 &s icpo(rf\Kov thai. The verbs otovrai and ddpffovaiv are, despite what Am. says, 
 simply connected by the conjunction. As for the subject of voiija-eiv, it seems 
 to me in vain to dispute whether it be rrfv ^(xtrupiav k.t.K. or the to kv^uov 
 implied in the rovro, which is antecedent to ^, for both are possible, and neither 
 can be disproved. The last, as nearer, looks more probable. rb li 
 
 . . . v€pi4ffTat — ^ but this in all Justice,* i.e. t6 aind — that is to say, the suc- 
 cess, r6 Karopdovv, implied in Karopdovvrts—* wUl, as things are, turn out (come 
 round) to be ours.' This appears simple and unobjectionable. But other editors, 
 as GolL and Am., refer t3 5^ to iriffrfvopr^s irpocepxaurai, and make it the 
 cmifidence of victory trf pi4<rTai — will be as balance in our favour. Cf. ircpj- 
 ylyverai, supra, ch. 87 d. Their principal argument is, that we have 4k tov 
 SiKaiov, and not 4k rod flK6ros. But to say, that the expectation of what is pro- 
 bable is a 'just expectation,' is surely natural in all languages. Cf. Ixxvii.a. 
 ^iKcdav r^v r4K^ap<rLv. Popp., on i. 5 1 . b. has collected a great number of similar 
 adverbial phrases — 4k rov <pavfpov, 4k rod Sfioiov^ &c. fitirfp—'ifioe 
 
 gran t for the sake of argument.* 4v 4Kfiv(f—' in that other case ; ' 
 
 i. e. by land. t y 5 e /c.t.A. — • but in what we either of us possess 
 
 superior experience, therein we possess superior courage.* If tI be read before 
 4tnr€ip6rfpotf it may either be a mere qualification, at all, or it may mean nwre 
 experience in any matter, whatever it be, 
 
 (c.) Sicl r^v (r<pcr4pav ^6^av — *for their own glory's sake,' i.e. upon 
 purely selfish principles, without regard to the interest of the allies—' Steit hie 
 valet (vtKa, ut iv. 102, v. 53,' Popp. See Jelf, § 627. ovk &v icort 
 
 iirtx*^p^ffo-v K.T.X. — i.e. if not subjected to some compulsion of the kind. 
 irapa TtoXv. Cf. i. 29 c. iri<Tr6r€pov — *o7iefor which there is 
 
 more ground.' ovk &y riyovvrat — by hyperbaton for ^7oi!rrat oy 
 
 avdlaroffdai. The usage is to be explained upon the same principle as the 
 double &y. When anything contingent is to be stated, the Greeks prepare the 
 hearer for it at once by bringing forward, even out of its place, or at the risk of 
 repetition, the particle used to denote such contingency. See e.g. infra xcliv. a. 
 Am. compares the German practice of placing the auxiliary verb at the com- 
 mencement, and reserving the principal verb for the close of the sentence. 
 rov iraph iroAu. These words might certainly stand for a noun, like ri 
 iruf/avriKay iii. 4. b. ; Ty irap' ^Air^5a, iv. 62. Most editors, however, supply 
 iffvimiKfvtu from the preceding TpovfyiKriKiveu — * worthy of tlte very signal victory 
 
 which you have gained;' and this seems confirmed by i. 29, 4viKT\(Tav irapa iro\u, 
 and T]ff<rt)e4vri'! vapa iroA-u just above, to which the article may refer. On Tapa 
 see i. 29 c. ; 41 c. 
 
 (d.) kvriiraKoi. ' Dubitatur utrum haec vox hie significet, ^args viribus 
 an adversarios pugnam commitientes.' Popp. But says Kriig. avriiraKoi 
 never signifies emimies, in Thuc. ; and surely this is tme. The collocation 
 shows the word to be contrasted with 4k -noKK^ inrod€€arr4pwv, and therefore to 
 me&n fairly matched in point of resources; tr. ' 71020 it is when fairly inatched in 
 externals that men in the generality of cases (as the Lacedemonians now) go forth 
 against the foe, relying more on might than policy ; but those who on very un- 
 equal terms, yet entirely of their own free will, do the same thing, these 1 say, 
 dare to meet the foe, because the assurance in their own minds is something very 
 powerful indeed {i.e. they must have some very powerful assurance in their own 
 minds) to give them courage to Tneet the foe.' In most of the cases where you 
 find men in battle tmsting to strength and courage, rather than calculation, 
 they are at least upon equal terms with the foe ; where, therefore, you find 
 them doing the same thing upon very unequal terms, you may be sure they 
 are supported by a superabundance of vigour and resolution. This is one of 
 those passages which is easily slurred over, but proves difficult upon exami- 
 nation. The above is, I think, the right interpretation. Of course after oi 8' 
 we must supply 4ir€px6fievoi. via wot — the word recurs, v. 14. 
 
 Dionysius reckons it among the yXanrdSri of Thuc. Kriig. remarks that it is 
 not found elsewhere in Gr. prose, but in Arist. Nub. 949. Ty ovk 
 
 (Ik6ti — ' that which is contrary to all reasonable expectation,' ^improbability.' 
 We may tr. ' are more afraid of us owing to the very unreasonableness of our 
 conduct, than if we had met them with the proportionate preparation (or com- 
 mensurate preparations) calculated according to reason. The article r^ is used 
 because the writer means the sort of preparation commonly found in such cases. 
 This is, I think, a fair answer to Krug.'s objection founded on the need of 
 its absence. He himself tr. our calcidable force, the force which they can 
 calculate, but surely of Kara, \6yov thus used ' desiderantur exempla.' For the 
 sentiment, cf. vi. 34. 
 
 (c.) troWh fie Ka\ — ' and further again.* ffSij, as frequently, 
 
 ' ere now,' cf. 77, c. ; and with Kriig. voKKa IjSt} a-rparSTTcda dia rr]y roiaurriv 
 apiraT^j/ airciA6T0, Plat. i?^^. p. 469. ^Treo-ey. Haase, according to a style 
 
 of criticism more popular formerly than at present, altered this word to eirTazo-e;/, 
 because he did not find the verb irtirrw so used in Thucyd. But we have r^v 
 li(ya\'/)v Hvafxiv rrjs TrdAews tmrrwKvtav, vii. 77 ; and there is no reason in the 
 nature of things, so far as I can see, why a similar metaphor should be in- 
 apphcable here. Indeed, as Kriig. remarks, the connexion of the inrh with 
 hraxffiv would form a greater diflBculty. The argument is implied rather than 
 expressed, and somewhat resembles that noticed above, Ixxxvii. c. ' Though the 
 Peloponnesian force is greatly superior, we may still hope to defeat it, for 
 greatly superior forces have frequently succumbed to inferior ones from in- 
 experience or want of spirit. These qualities don't attach to us, but we can't 
 presume so much for them.' kKtiiv tXvai. This phrase, it is well 
 
 known, expresses a sort of reservation upon the simple kKwv — ' willingly if I 
 can help it.' I agree with Am. in thinking it a relic of that early stage of 
 
 s2 
 
26o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book II. I (>g^p. qq.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 261 
 
 language, when expletive clauses were as common as they now are m the con- 
 versation of the ^nilgar. These garnish their discourse with many such 
 unnecessary' words and phrases, if so he, to be sure, and the like, without much care 
 for their grammatical coherence. The thvu here resembles the former of the 
 above expletives in meaning, the latter in absence of construction. Jelf, § 667, 
 explains kKiov (hai = Ui^v oixriav, 'according to his real nature,' «.«. m%. 
 Madvig, § 151. says, ' The infinitive dvai stands in a restrictive sense with the 
 adjective kK(i,u in negative sentences-<o be wUling, i.e. at least wUlingly ; rarely 
 in affirmative sentences, and that willingly' This I consider nearer the truth. 
 Kost's explanation, § 185, 5, does not materially differ ; he classes it with such 
 cases as the parenthetical «is ctVcT*', «s itioX So/ceTi/ ; remarking that such in- 
 finitives are usually preceded by i>s or '6crov, but that they may be omitted. 
 See also i. 21. b. and Herm. Opusc. i. 227. 
 
 (/) ifiPoX-fiv. The impact with the ?Ai/3oXoj/, i.e. the rostrum or beak of 
 the ship (vii. 34, 36). Kriig. quotes iEsch. Persa, 407, 4^iPo\a:s x«AKo«rT({Mo» 
 waiovrai. ir p <J (T 4* i </. Bekker reads irpdor^iiv, perhaps rightly, says 
 
 Kriig Cf iv. 29. d. It has been already remarked how hopeless is the con- 
 fusion of these prepositions in MSS. ^k ,roX\oC-'/m» a distance; 
 i.e. the space necessary to give impetus to the charge (iv. 34. a. ; 100. b.). 
 iv ^4ovTi—'when in need; 'when in a position that required it.' I do not 
 think that it is, as Popp. states, exactly equivalent to S(6irrws. So in the 
 passage quoted by Kriig. from Dem. iv. io-^o{no>u ovScvl irc^kore 4u Seo^t 
 ic€KXP?o'0€_' on an occasion requiring it.' 5 1 € k ir \ o t. See 1. 49, b. 
 ^va<TTpo<f>ai—' wheeling back again; i. e. when the enemy's line had been broken 
 by the 5t6W\ous. If the line was but a short distance from the shore, Hke the 
 French fleet at Aboukir, this would be impossible for want of room in which to 
 turn after passing through the hostile ships. I do not think Am. is nght in 
 confounding ava(rrpo<f>ri with the iivdKpovais, which was backing water after 
 having struck an enemy with the l[n$o\ov, in order to repeat the blow. This 
 would be possible if the enemy were ever so near the shore, because the attack- 
 ing ship would have the same space to back in, as it had to advance. tV 
 itpovolav—' the provision; tr. ' I will make the necessary provision; 
 K o 1 o-T a <r at— ' constitute itself a regular land fight; 
 
 {g.) irapa TaTs vouff/—' contrary to the sense and the grammar,' Krug. 
 It is, however, retained by Popp. The objection is, I suppose, that Trapa 
 ' cum dativo' denotes rest near a person, or personified object. See Madng, 
 § 75, 2, who however only says usually with persons. Jelf, § 646, e. remarks 
 that this constructio prsegnans, i.e. of motion terminating in rest, is rare with 
 Topa and the dative, but quotes Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 27, Uvai irapa Tiffffatpepvei, to 
 go and stay with Tissaphemes. If irapA stands here I would tr. * go and watt 
 quietly by your ships.' After toTs in five good MSS. tc is found : it is explic- 
 able upon the principles expounded, i. 9, a. i.e. irap^ uuv(r\ fi4vovr€5 is a sort of 
 cumulative clause, repeating the idea contained in ttkoKroi. Popp. tr. ' ordinem 
 servantes et apud navem remanentes: irapayytWSfifva. Is there 
 
 not a special force in the present participle—' the words of command as they ore 
 given'? 6^4a>s, like i. 70, 6^4m ^trtvo^ffoi, and iii. 82, rh ^/xtAW? o^v, 
 
 denoting quickness, or sharpness of apprehension. «i' oXiyovy equivalent 
 
 to fi^ iK ircJAAow, supra (f.), and the same phrase, iii. 21, where it is, at a short 
 
 interval, cf. vii. 36, 71- 4<pop,jiii<T€ws. The word, as Arn. shows, is 
 
 properly employed of a blockade, as iii. 33. vi. 48, &c., but this it is said imphes 
 the close observation of the blockading squadron. Phormion might well describe 
 the watch he had been keeping over the Peloponnesian fleet in these terms, and 
 therefore the regular meaning of 4<p6pix-n(Tis is applicable here. I do not think 
 Kriig. is right in rendering with Heilmann, ' Anlauf the onset ; or ' der Standort 
 dtr Feinde; the post fro7n which the enemy is observing us. In fact, as Arn. 
 <:ays the word may apply to both parties—' watching each other as we are at a 
 ^.hort distance: «> Is re. So Bekker and the other editors, fi'om a 
 
 conjecture of Stephens. The MSS. had Ihare, for which some give &s re, but 
 inappropriately here. iv^<p4pei 4^. ' As iv. 26, 3 ; with an imper- 
 
 sonal dat. i. 123, a. is tffov rots vZv ^vfjup4pei, which is unusual. Cf. also Xen. 
 Hell. vi. 2, 19, oTT^p ^Kiara els fxdxw ^vn<p4p€i. The Koi which some good MSS. 
 insert before |i//ii<^€pei is unendurable.' — Kriig. 
 
 {h.) b ay(i)v—'the struggle; containing within itself the idea of the issue of 
 the stniggle, tr. 'great is that for which you have now to fight, i.e. either the 
 breaking up of all the hopes which the Peloponnesians found upon their fleet, or 
 the bringing more home to the Athenians their fears respecting the sea.' 
 rhy <p6Poy, because it refers to what would then be a definite source of peril 
 and apprehension. aS, either ' again; with reference to what has 
 
 been said, § b. Popp. ; or 'on the other hand; i.e. ' though you have a great 
 struggle before you' (Kriig.). dfiolat-yual to what they were 
 
 before: Cf. i. 35, o^X ^Mo^« ^ aWoTplwcris, and ii. 80, iii. 40, e. 
 60€Aow(rti'— literally, do not clwose to be, tr. 'are not readily;' there is a 
 similar Homeric usage— /i^Mvetr ou/c mx^^Kov Ivivrwv, II. xxi. 366, and some- 
 what similarly— T^ SeVSpa ohUv fi' ie4\ei SiUaK^ip, Plat. Ph(sd. 230 D. Cf. the 
 more common analogous use of <pi\4(a. 
 
 Chapter XC— (a.) tt op € /c € \ € t5 € t 0— ' cohortatus est; Ca^s. Cf . Xen. Anab. 
 i^ 2 II. ^^i Tiffaipwv—'four abreast: Of course, if eVl fxias 
 
 TeravMeVoi means ' in single line,' as Poppo observes (or, as it is called tech- 
 nically, ' in line of battle ahead'), iirl recrcr. must me-^n four abreast, iirl fiias 
 is equivalent to the lipdm x6xos of land warfare. Cf. Xen. Ajiab. iv. u. s., and 
 Miiller's Dor. ii. 246 (Eng. ed.). ' Matth. {Gr. § 584) quotes this passage of 
 Thuc. to show that in\ re<y<r. mesons four deep ; but it is to be recollected that a 
 column four abreast, when turned into line, becomes four deep: Grote, vi. 
 
 277 n.; Thirlw. iii. 155. ^'^^ "^^^ ^«"^^" '^'^''' ^'^ ^^'' ^^T^^ 
 
 discussed, Appendix i. Se^t? K4pa ^yovt.4vv-' the right squad^oiv 
 
 under Timocrates led the van: The circumstantial or modal dative. Jelt, 
 § 603-4, 699 ; cf. Matth. § 405. ^-^^ 5' aiT<?-query, in it-m 
 
 the right wing. &pa-'if, as they had every reason to suppose, 
 
 Phormio should suspect Naupactus to be the object of the attack.' 
 
 {b.) irUovra i-ninrKovv. The expression appears so strange that Krug. 
 would adopt Dobree's conjecture ■KK4ovr^s ; others quote ' tanti belli impetus 
 na^^ga^^t,'Cic.f^em^.ew.Po»l^§34. y^em^sttT.Hn mid course: €|« 
 
 ToG kavTwv K4pws. To illustrate this by an analogy from land-fighting, 
 compare Xenophon's account of the two lines at Cunaxa, Anab. i. 8, 13, 
 roaolnu, yhp irA^0€t irepiriv ^aaiX^bs ficrre tJi4(Tou rh kavrov ^x^p rod Kvpov 
 
262 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 93.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 263 
 
 9v^wnop ^0} ^v. Observe that iT(pS)v and kavruv refer to the same subject as 
 
 yiii. 76, P. 
 
 (c.) ^p-hf^V 6yTi=:avep(inra)v ovk 4v6yra}Vi ch. XXV. — * undefended* as the 
 Messenians were marching along shore. Kara fil av iirl K(pws. 
 
 The complete plirase ; Kara fjiiav alone might mean one deep (cf. vi. 32) ; both 
 together mean ' in single fiU- Cf. Herod, vi. 12 ; Liv. xxxvii. 29, 23. 
 irphs T^ 7^ -' close offshore: fieruir'n^hy—'adversisfrontibus: 
 
 P. ; 'jmctisfrontih-us: GolL; to /ueVwira trapuxov roh ivavrioiSy Schol. P. cf. 
 Liv. xxxvii. 23, ' In frontem directas habebant naves, et in frontem dirigebant.' 
 Bkc conversione uniim ilium arlxov quern 4ir\ Kiptos v\4otnes efficiebant, muta- 
 venmt in unum C^ov. P. cf. Miill. Emnen. The word is itself an fiirol \(y. 
 in Thucyd. ; but we have rh Icro* fiiruvovj the inner front of the wall, iii. 21. 
 
 Thuc. V. 10. 
 
 {d.) &>s elx* rixovs. Jelf, § 528. iinffrpoip^v-'th 
 
 sudden tacking round; as we should say. It is used for any rapid evolution 
 or manoeuvre in war; see Soph. (Ed. Col. 1045, Keisig. fhpvxo>p^'iy 
 
 not 'open sea,' but comparatively open, mid-channel. 4^4w(Tav, 
 
 Diiker says, is the technical phrase for driving an enemy's ship on shore. Cf. 
 vii, 36, 52; A-iii. 104-5. St€<peeipav—' disabled; cf. i. 49-50- 
 
 vTro<t>€vyov(ra 5 — ' as they were endeavouring to escape: itvadovixevoi 
 
 —'lashing them and towing them astern: Cf. Xen. Hell. v. i, 21 ; and i. 50. 
 ovx iT\KOP avaSovpLtPOi. avrols avZpdffi. Matth. § 405 ; Jelf, 
 
 § 604, I, iv. 14, I. iir^ff^aivovr^s — cf. iv. 14. b. icoi ^Treo-^ai- 
 
 vomis h r))v QoKaffffav ivv rots 5ir\ois avQuKKOV aimXafx^avSfifvoi ra>v veHv- 
 * wading, Iieavy armed as they were, into the sea, and having boarded the ships, 
 they f ought from the decks, and recovered the ships while in the very act {fih) 
 of being carried off: 
 
 Chapteb XCI.— (rt.) (pedvovffiv. *A0tji/a?oj, sc. Observe the change of 
 subject. laxovffai hvriirpapoi Kara rh 'ATroWdviov—'formivg, 
 
 close in shore, in line of battle off the temple of Apollo, with their prows fncius 
 the enemy: Cf. iv. 8, 14, vii. 34, 36, 40, viii. 53 ; Herod, viii. 11 ; Diod. xi. 
 6i;Wess. K. hpLvvovyifvoi. Observe the change of gender. "We 
 
 have iffxo^^°-^ j^st before. It is a (rx^/ia irphs rh (rnfiaiv6n€vov— the crews being 
 implied in the ships. So below, we have Kadelffai followed by $ov\6fievoi. 
 
 (h.) iiraicaviCov &fia vAfovrfs — 'chanted tlie pcean as they sailed along' 
 On the V. L. iiraiwviCov and iiraidviCoVy see note ad i. 50, and Wessel. ad Diod. 
 xiii. p. 554. troXv Tcph^'far ahead of the rest: 
 
 6pfiov<ra fifr4(apos — 'lying at anchor in the open roadstead: Cf. i. 48a.; 
 vii. 71, Schol. (pedffaffa. Some MSS. have koI irepiirXcuo-acra (cancelled 
 
 or marked as doubtful by Bek., Popp., and Goll.), performing the evolution 
 called ir€pm\ovs, the whole being equivalent to (pedaa<ra &(m irfpnrMvffai. 
 
 (c.) iraph \6yov. Cf. Ixxxv. b. Kadt'iaai rhs Kuiras^ 
 
 * demissis remis; Liv. xxxvi. 44, * holding water; as we say. iviartiffnv 
 
 rov ir\ov—' stopped their way: Cf. Matth. § 353, 5 ; Jelf, ^ $^7' 
 a^{>fi<popov—'rem pemidosam; cf. i. 32; literally 'inutilem; by fxeluffis. 
 Blomf. quotes an early instance from Hes. Op, et Dies, /noX' d.ffvfi<pop6s <<m 
 <pvromv. The Latins use 'inutilis' in the same manner. See Heusing. ad 
 
 Cic. de Off. iii. 13, qnoted by P. ; and so oxperos, Horn. H. u. 269 ; cf. Stallb. 
 ad Plat. Pist. 334 A. k\vffir€\-hs, Polyb. iii. 116 ; Hebr. xiii. 17. 
 uphs ri)y kvrii6pixt]a IV—' propter incursionem qtiam Jtostis ex brem spatio 
 in ipsas erat facturus; Port. h.vrii6ptn)aiv has no connexion in signif. with 
 l^6pii-nais in c. Ixxxix., which implies taking a position from which they could 
 mtch one another, from ip/Ltco,. This is from bpixd^. [So we have in the next 
 sentence iir' ahrohs &pii-n<rav.^ ' Considering what a short distance the Athenians 
 were from them, so that they could make an instantaneous charge upon them: 
 If, hXiyov. Cf. Ixxxix. hi oXiyov, Xen. Anab. i. 10. 10, I^. ^pdx^a— 
 
 'shallows; Arrian, KA.i.ii; 'In brevia et syrtes urget,' Virg. ^n. i. iii ; 
 Luean ix. 338 ; Tac. Ann. i. 70. iv. 33- &KeiKau, here mtransitiv^. 
 
 ' ran aground: In iv. 26 e. it is used transitively, and so iiroKiXKuv, 26. P. & K. 
 
 Chapter XCIL— («•) ^"^^ ^"^^ K^Xeicrpiaros. 'The Athenians were 
 b-yond measure elated by the incident, so that a single word from Phoriiiio 
 sufficed to put them in active forward motion.'— Grote, vi. 283 ; cf. xc. c. ; airh 
 
 ffripeiov €v6s. Soph. Aj. 704, Lobeck. 
 
 (b.) Sia<pe€ipavr€S auehiiffavro. Cf. xc. d. 9i irepl r^v 
 
 bkKdha Kare'Su. An elliptical, but very intelligible, expression—' which was 
 sunk by the manoeuvring [irepLirXods] of thi Athenian ship round the merchant' 
 man: i^eirfffev—' delatus est, vel proprie a mari ejectus est: iKirlirTeiv 
 
 is commonly used in the sense of being cast on shore (so iKcp^ptadai, of frag- 
 ments of wreck, i. 54), both in Thucyd. and Xenophon. Cf. vii. 74, vni. 34- 
 
 P. = i^efixiiev ; elTjWx^T,, K. . , . . I . .u 
 
 Ic ) ^(rrriffav 80e,/. Another elliptical form—* erected their trophy at the 
 spot from which they had put to sea: Cf. with Bl. vi. 68, 4^ h Kparup Se7. ^ 
 vavdyia. The younger student may observe the difference between vauavta 
 and vaviyia—ihe former meaning a shipwreck, the loXtev fragments of wreck. 
 h.v^i\ovro— 'recovered; lit. picked up; cf. i. 54- Cf. Xen. Hell. i. vii. 4, m 
 the famous passage describing the battle of Arginus^, hi6ri oIk aveiXovro rohs 
 vavdyovs. rpo7ra7ov rvs rpoirrjs &s k.t.A.- sub. rwv V€wv. Steph. 
 
 ap. Pop. ; cf. vii. 54 ; Lobeck ad Soph. Aj. 254. au^dea-ay. Cf. 
 
 Ixxxiv c ■ i.e. to Poseidon, whose temple stood there; cf. Strab. viii. p. 335.- 
 The promontory seems to have been called Drepanum from its shape. ^Gottl. ^ 
 (d.) virh viKra—' at nightfall (or uoider cover of night): aXs U^i. 
 
 K says the dat. is naturally used here : the ships with which they were to 
 have co-operated ; cf. 83. a. and i. 116, &c. P. supplies ahrois, and says this 
 is an isolated instance of ^Su with a dative. Cf. Matth. § 391. 
 
 Chapter XCIII.—Sia\G(rai— transitive-' before Cnemus and Brasidas 
 allowed the combined fleet to disperse: Diod. xii. 49- x^*^**'"^— 
 
 October. Thirlw. ^iZaidvrwv—' at tJie suggestion: 
 
 k-KOK^ipaffai. Cf. vii. 43, ^Troirtipuffai rov irapar^ix^anaros, and 1. 61 d. P. ; 
 also iv. 135, a-niTriipaffiu 6 Bpaaldas Uonhalas. atpvXaKros, cf. 
 
 xiii.f. AkAtjotos. See below, xciv. c. rh iiriKparf7v. 
 
 'Such was the confessed superiority of the Athenians at sea, that while they 
 guarded amply the coast of Attica against privateers, they never imagined the 
 possibility of an attack upon their own main harbour.'— Grote, vi. 286. 
 
264 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 rh^^y,a,oy-' sitting ehth; Grote, irho thus follows the Schol who 
 
 ra, ^.O-i., a very intelligible explanation to any boa^L man T^ Tl 
 doubtless a s.ond object, viz. to provide against the los /Cei; th Tt 'f 
 which takes place when the oarsman sits upon a slippery surface \T^ 
 Append,x to Am. Thucyd. by Dr. Bishop. Thojokes, hleTer •nTristonh, 
 upon the subject, seem to indicate that the skin of the IXenian s Ime!? 
 rather rnore sensitive than the worthy doctor imagines. Cf Ir ^^7 El 
 
 n^s..£::ZZJ^;^-^;^^^^^r^^ -I^niina nauti,..] 
 
 of the Thranit., JlL!Z:tJC:ZS^':^^^^ ^^^^ 
 sl.pp.ng downwards, whether the fulcrum of the 0^!.%^^ ! f™ 
 notch on the gunwale, or by a perfo^Ln n Z Xp-f ^de X' "' 
 
 of the rowlock HoZl .u'\T ^'^ '""^ M /"^temng the oar to the peg 
 
 oj tnerowiocK. ilomer calls them Tooirof- Od iv tS, a„' .... 
 
 Tp«<,r. ^, JwarU.,r,, (a line repeated vii.', T^' """'""'"' ''"^'^ 
 also called a.,o^i, corrupted in S tto st^ppus^ Yv'Th*: "''T """ 
 a drawing of the manner of fastening the oars "a ^L-/'' ^""^ ^r'' ^™ 
 
 the sense of y«,f<,, see i. 83, iv ^^ „, vil if ,: '' ••' " '""'^'"'' '° 
 
 .* a. in a conditional pro^i:n;e/>:i;r;^'"t.r"M:tthr'''"^"' 
 ToXjuS™ after M,, Jelf ggg The infinif *' . ^ '""^ • "" 
 
 ^ Signifying .e.pectati;n,.t be^x^t: ::;:,:i"^:^,rc:rre: 
 
 into 'effect a' preconceived* plan'""7^"',H,"'j -«' '"'-'"'--'« "f-^^-g 
 
 «. retains this sense in the^form ^J^:i:^Z^';T'7^V1 
 vii. 60, Till. I, 3, 27; cf Jelf 76i-'5 > ' ' 
 
 in Thucvd ^ thit if w«« r,^f \!' • •" , Acyerai implies (as elsewhere 
 
 in inucyd.) that it was not his opinion that this was the real oaii.e of their 
 abandoning their onginalintention ^x ' / 
 
 as we learn from the next chan Thi. ^ .1, a'cpc.r^p.o. -,-.,. Boihopov, 
 
 only three miles distan from lis J TI^ ^ "T°.'"T^^^^ ^''^^^™'' 
 bore the simfi nnm« /Tf "^^'^ '^'^'^^ «*^ «" ^^e peninsula 
 
 m 51 , -uiod. xii. 49; Strab. xi. 446. rf,»x„^vi n^ u i: . 4 
 
 squadron maintaining a strict bWd« f. ^ . ^"^Aa^^. Cf. eh. 69. 'A 
 
 [Book IJ. Bchip. 95-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 265 
 
 Chapter XCIV. — (a.) 4$ rks 'Adijvas — * to convey the intelligence to 
 Ithens-^ <ppvKTo\ vo\€fiioi — * t^ar-Jeacows,' to distinguish them 
 
 ifrom those used in peace. Cf. iii. 22, 80. From the long note of the Scholiast 
 It appears that they resembled those used in the middle ages, figured in most 
 rorks on heraldry. The peace signal was borne quietly [rjpffjLovvTes], Schol. 
 [he war signal was shaken [kivovvt^s], in token of alarm. Diod. xii. 49, 4, 
 expresses it by the word -nvpoeveiv. Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. 8, 15 ; Eurip. El. 694; 
 IPolvb. X. 43. The classical passage in illustration is of course the commence- 
 iTneDt of the Agamemnon of .Slschylus. Cf. Herod, vii. 182, ix. 3. So 
 L/ju(CTwp(a, Soph. Tr. 379; Arist. Av. 11 61; and the passive form tppvKru- 
 \pHff6ai, Thuc. iii. 80. Zirou ovk. See Jelf, 823, obs. i. 
 
 \ovK &v ivffios. Dale tr. ' It was not a wind which would have prevented 
 Ithem.' There is a sort of irony implied. Tr. therefore * always supposing of 
 hourse that the wind had not prevented them.' See note on Xiy^rai^ ch. xciii. 
 Ik. Engelman has * der Wind wurde sie nicht gehindert hahen.' 
 
 (h.) iari yap 8 ri — ^ to a certain extent.' The reading now adopted for 
 Ithe old iffTi yap 8x6, from Abresch's emendation. <Tr4yov(rai — * not 
 
 \hcing water-tight.' * Quae aquarum vim ferre non poterant,' P. Cf. ^sch. S. c. 
 TA. 204 (with Blomfield's note), 793; Supp. 135, aAa areywv; Eur. Fr. Inc. 
 I9; Iph. A. 888 ; Plat. Bep. 621 a. rre (ol — 'on foot.' The objections 
 
 of Popp. and Kriig., who would read ve^^, are quite nullified by Tre^ous iropevo- 
 \fi(vovs, vii. 75, 7. Said also of sailors proceeding by land. Cf. Crit. iii. d; 
 Plut. Pkilop. 14. ixaWov — 'more dilige7itly,' as often in Thuc. 
 
 \\ip.ev(ov KKriffei Ka\ ri} &AX77 iirineXeia — ' harbour-shutting, and other 
 \hnd of precaution.' For the indefinite plur. At/xeV«j/ cf. ad i. 93, b. ; iv. 8, c. ; 
 Diod. u. s., rhv St Tiupaia K\fldpoi5 koX <pu\aKa'is iKavals hiaXa^Sures (custodiis 
 opportunis locis coUocatis) wxvpuxrav. Hesych. in Ze'a. cx^' ^^ ^ Tinpauhs 
 Xifiivas rpfis K\fi(rrov5. Gottl. See Leake, Athen. p. 338, sq. P. 'The 
 lesson was salutary to the Athenians ; from henceforward Peirseeus was 
 furnished with a chain across the mouth, and a regular guard down to the end 
 of the war. Forty years afterwards, however, we shall find it just as negli- 
 gently watched, and surprised with much more boldness and dexterity by the 
 Lacedaemonian captain, Teleutias.' — Grote, vi. 288. Cf. Xen. Hell. v. i, 19. 
 
 Chapteb XCV. — (a.) The following episode (xcv.-ci.) is of great value. 
 Thucydides, himself descended from a Thracian ancestor, living, at the time he 
 wrote his history, in Thrace, and having considerable possessions and large 
 influence in the country, would have ample means of acquiring full information 
 on the subject which he treats. [Cf. Thuc. iv. 104; Herod, v. 16; Marcellin. 
 in vii. ; Grote, vi. 293, n.] With regard to Macedonia, on the other hand, both 
 Miiller {Dor. i. 454, E. T.) and Gatterer consider the accounts of Herodotus to 
 be more accurate than those of Thucydides (Gatt. diss, de Herodoti et Thucyd. 
 Thracid, quoted by Miill.). For the Thracians generally see Herod, v. 3, 9, 
 ^i- iio, Aiii.ii6, ix. 119; Thuc. ii. 100, vii. 29, 30; Xen. Anab. vii. 2, 38, 
 and the seventh book generally ; Grote, iv. 28. x^*M*«'»'o^- Thirlwall 
 
 places this expedition in October; Dodwell {Ann. Thuc.) in October, or Mcemak- 
 tcrion ; Grote in November or December. (Observe that Clinton identifies 
 M(B^rmkterion with November, Diss, on Attic months, ii. 326.) The Athenians 
 
266 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 96.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 267 
 
 complained of the dilatoriness of Sitalkes, who ought to have commenced his 
 invasion at a better season for military operations, but, as Grote observes, the 
 number of independent chiefs over whom he had not even nominal control, 
 rendered this very difficult, if not impossible. 2ird\Kr)$. Cf. 
 
 ad xxix. 'OSpvffTis. The Odrysse seem to have belonged to that 
 
 Northern swarm of barbarians who invaded Thrace after the Trojan war, and 
 their name is often found interwoven with the ancient myths. Thus the 
 Thracian singer Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian (Pans. iv. 33,4),! 
 and Orpheus is represented as their king. In Herod, iv. 92 (see Bahr's note), 
 we find them on both sides the Artiscus (now Arda) ; and the Hebrus itself isi 
 said to have had its sources in their country. Their name first occurs in the 
 account of the Scythian expedition of Darius Hystaspis. While the south parts 
 of Thrace were overrun by the Persians, the Odrysians, protected by their 
 mountains, retained their independence. Teres was hence enabled to incorporate 
 many Thracian tribes with his subjects, and to extend his kingdom to the 
 Euxine, in spite of a signal defeat which he sustained in that quarter from the 
 Thyni. [Xen. Anab. vii. », 22.] In subsequent times they were completely 
 subjugated by Philip of Macedon. (Cramer, i. 286, sq. ; Smith's i>w'^ CmgA 
 8.V.) 8uo iiro<rx«o'6is. The accusative absolute — ffxrifMKa^l 
 
 Z\ov Koi (xfpos. ' We sometimes find an accusative without any verb on which 
 it directly depends, followed by two other accusatives of its parts, each witli| 
 its proper verb, on the joint notion of which it depends.' Cf. Soph. Ani. 
 21 ; Jelf, §581.4; Matth., § 288 ; tr. * of two promises, wishing to exact tkA 
 fulfilment of one, and himself to fulfil tlie other.' Engel. tr. neatly gives the 
 sense: * Von zwei Versprechiingen, die eine einzufordem, die andere sclbst :x\ 
 erfiillen.' Bl. cf. Hebrews vi. 18. 
 
 (6.) avTtf vvo<Tx6ti€vos. Tr. * having made hitn certain promises,' vhatl 
 the nature of these promises was Thuc. has not told us. SiaWd^env. 
 
 Cf. xxix. He had done so. */Atiriroi'. Perdiccas ought tol 
 
 have given a certain portion of his kingdom to Philip and to Derdas. [Cf. 
 Miiller's Bar. I 468 ; Thuc. i. 57, n., vi. 7.] From Thucydides' words (ii. 2.c. 
 4s T^p *iAiinrou irpSrepov oStrov ipxh^^) Poppo thinks he had actually been put I 
 in possession and reigned, but had been expelled by Perdiccas. He was dot 
 probably dead, as Sitalces purposes to restore, not him, but his son Amyntas.| 
 Koraydyot seems also to confirm this view. ivl $a(Ti\tl<f. Matt., 
 
 § 586, 'with a view to placing him upon the throne.* ovk ^TreTe'Afi 
 
 — • was not for fulfilling * The imperf. implies that he ' showed no disposition^ 
 or intention to fulfil his promise* 
 
 {c.) "Ayvava. Most of the modern German editors read this word with an I 
 aspirate. This was the founder of Amphipolis, b.c. 437. [Cf. iv. 102, i. Sl<\ 
 ii. 58. For Amphipolis, see Clinton, F. H. ii. 261.] Cf. Schol. ; Cramer,i.' 
 291; Thuc. i. 100; Arist. Eth. N. y. 7; Pans. Att. 29; Plin. H. iST. iv. 10; 
 Acts xvii. I. net. Cf. Ixxxiii. a. The delay of Sitalkes preveutedl 
 
 their sending them. 
 
 Chapter XCVI. — (a.) h.viffrit\aiv. Qt bcviii. a. * ex sedihus evocat! 
 Spu^fifvos has here its primary meaning, ' setting out from ;' not the usuilj 
 one in Thucydides, ' taking up his head-quarters at' See note, i. 54. b. 
 
 W'ly.ov. Cf. ch. xix. 6. Mr. Grote (chap. xxv. note) remarks that we learn 
 from the researches of modern travellers and geologists that the ideas of the 
 direction and ramifications of this great range entertained up to the present 
 time are very erroneous. It was considered to be a great belt extending from 
 the Adriatic to the Euxine, running nearly parallel with the coast of the JEgean, 
 and with spurs branching off in a southerly direction, forming the water-shed 
 of the Hebrus, with its tributaries Artiscus, Agrianes, Contadesdus, Tearus, 
 &c., the Nestus and Strymon. The ancients considered it as the highest range 
 with which they were acquainted, though Polybius thought the elevation less 
 than that of the Alps (xxxiv. 10, 1 5). It was said that from its summit could be 
 seen at once the Euxine, Adriatic, the Danube, and Alps, and to see this view, 
 Philip, last king of Macedon, made the journey described by Livy (xl. 22). 
 Pliny, iv. 10, estimated its height at 6000 paces. Modern travellers consider 
 
 [the Great Balkan to be 3000 feet high. Hsemus proper, like the modern 
 
 I Balkan, extends from Mount Scomius to the Euxine. It is also known by the 
 name of Emineh Dagh (Horn. //. xiv. 227 ; Herod, iv. 49 ; Theoc. Id. vii. 76 ; 
 Strab. vii. p. 313; Virg. Georg. i. 491, ii. 489; Ov. Met. vi. 87; Cramer i. 
 318; Smith, Diet. Geog., s.v.). BaXdaa-ns 4s rhv EH^etPov 
 
 \tiprov. Popp. says this is added because Ei/|. v. was also used for 'the 
 countries bordering on the Euxine.' Cf. Xen. Anab. v. i, i. m^'xP's ^'^l 
 edXaTTaj/ T V ^»' Ty Ev|ef j/y irSvTCfi. vveppdvri. The dat. of reference, 
 
 rather curiously employed. See Jelf, § 599, i; Thuc. i. 24. a., ii. 49, c; 
 Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 53, &c. fJ^^pv — y^*'Vt 46yuv SrjXoi/Jrt, 
 
 Schol. Hence Poppo would rather read ytvri or e0j/7j. K. sees no need of 
 change, and cf. Acts ii. 10. "la-rpov iroTanov. For the account 
 
 of the Thracian rivers see Herod, iv. 48, 9, 51-8. KartpKiiTo. See 
 
 Ii. lao.b. P. 
 
 (6.) Ttrai — 01 adavarlCovTfs (Herod, iv. 93). The Getse lay between the 
 
 IHaemus and the Danube, occupying the modern Bulgaria and part of Servia. 
 Like their Scythian neighbours on the other side of the river, they were equipped 
 with bow and arrow, on horseback. They were reckoned by the ancients 
 among the Thracian group of nations, a notion which is supported by Schafarik, 
 who has written on Sclavonian antiquities. The theory which identified them 
 with the Goths of Scandinavia has been exploded. After the days of Philip of 
 Macedon they extended over the countries now known as Wallachia and Mol- 
 davia, and became known to the Romans under the formidable name of Dacians. 
 
 piannert even thinks they stretched as far as Transylvania and Hungary. See 
 the valuable note of Bahr, on Herod, u.s. (Smith's J)ict. Geog. s.v. Dacia.) 
 
 y>ii.o<rKivoi — 'cidtu similes,' P. Cf. iii. 95. rav opeivuv . . . 
 
 Wvrov6yL(t)v. In ci. we read of the autonomous inhabitants of the plain. 
 Alot. Cf. vii. 27, where we read of 1300 of this race (toO AtaxoD yhovs) who 
 arrived too late to take part in the expedition of Demosthenes against Sicily. 
 (Xen. Cyr.y'i, 2, 10; Lips, ad Tac. Ann. iv. 46.) 0\ad, speaking of these 
 
 Iregions, says {Trist. v. 7, 19], 
 
 Dextera non segnis fixo dare vulnera cultro, 
 Quem vinctum lateri barbarus omnis habet. 
 
 (c.) 'A7piai'os Ka\ Aaialovs, The Paeonian Agrianes (Herod, v. l6) 
 
268 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II t^^- 9 7'^ NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 269 
 
 were a considerable tribe in point of territory and population. Strabo savj 
 that the Strymon had its source in their country. They were therefore probablTl 
 located near the foot of that part of Haemus known to the ancients as Scomid 
 and Rhodope. They were not molested by the Persians when the great removal! 
 of the Pseonians took place under Darius (Herod, u. s.). In the time ofl 
 Alexander the Great they were under the rule of their native princes, and didl 
 him good service in repressing the incursions of the Triballi, who lay on tiieii 
 north frontier (Arr. E. A. i. 5). They formed excellent light-armed troops, 
 and are frequently mentioned in the campaigns of Alexander (Diod. Sic. xvii,- 
 Q. Curt. i. 12, 14, ii. 12, 10; Polyb. ii. 6$, v. 79; Cramer, i. 274, whosajs 
 that this is the only passage where the name of the Laesei occurs). They were 
 probably to the east of the Strymon. (Smith, Bid. Gcog. s. v.) 
 Ate'xp* rpaotwv. It seems certain from the context that the Graa?ans were 
 the subjects of Sitalces, and accordingly /*6Xf>t cannot mean, as usually, 'up to 
 a certain point of time or place objectively.' From this passage therefore, and 
 some others, I am induced to believe that it sometimes has the force of «>• 
 extensive tviih, i.e. with that which the succeeding genitive specifies. Here 
 then it implies his empire went just so far as the Crraaans went, and nofarihA 
 So in i. 71, c. (where see note), ftf'xpi rovU is, just so far as this goes, andm\ 
 farther. Cf. i. 51, 90, c, and especially iitxpi rov SiKaiov, iii. 82. Would not 
 this interpretation entirely simplify that difficult passage, Rom. v. 13?-% 
 v6nov afiapria ^v iv K6<rfx(p is tr. ' until the law sin was in the world,' though 
 the apostle's argument is,— there is no sin without law: there is sin wherever 
 there is law; a meaning exactly given by &xpi in the above sense— 'sm v(u\ 
 coextensive with law,' both nouns being anarthrous. I would suggest a similar 
 interpretation for another well-known passage, which has puzzled all the com- 
 mentators, and is altered as corrupt by Hermann and others ( Ar. Poef. § 1 2) : ^ /if' 
 oSv iiroTTolia Tp rpaytpBici fx4xpi ti6vov fiirpov fxtra k6yov fiifirfffis dvai (TTrovhloit 
 VKo\ovdT}<revy tr. ' The epos has gone along with tragedy only in this one point oj\ 
 being the imitation of exalted characters in metrical language: This interpreta- 
 tion is, I think, confirmed by another passage in the >ame treatise, del p^iv }> 
 fifiCuyy fifxpl rod <rw^Tj\os chaiy Ka\kla>v iffri, where fi^xpl is clearly inclusive, 
 Tr. ' the longer a plot be, the better it is, provided it be at the same time clear -\ 
 fifXP^ rov ffivSTiXos ehai = coincident with clearness. :S.Kop.iov. P. 
 
 reads ^K6(i^pov (and so Hesych.). Scopius in Pliny, H. N. iv. 10; Scombrus; 
 Arist. Meteor, i. 13. Cramer, i. 273, considers Scomius to be the Rhodope of 
 Herodotus, both being, in fact, summits of the same great central chain. 
 ov atpi^^ro—'apudquospopidos.' P. ^Srj. ' Having crossed | 
 
 the boundary, you are at once in the territory of the autonomous P^onians.' 
 <JSi7 usually marks the point of time ; here the limit of space. In fact, the two 
 are mixed together. The primary notion is retained in the verb upiCero. K. 
 compares v. 67, vii. 4, viii. loi ; and so Eurip. Hippol. i. 200, irphs ttovtov fih 
 KUfiiirt) 'XapwviK6v. \ 
 
 (d.) Tpi0a\\o{>s. The Triballi, as we have seen above, lay to the N.of 
 the Agrianes. They bordered also on the Paeonians, and reached to the 
 Danube, 'extending, as far as can be determined, from the plain of Kossoto 
 in modern Servia, northwards towards the Danube.'— Grote, xii. 31. At the | 
 time of Alexander's accession, they were by far the most numerous and power- 
 
 people of Thrace. Alexander began his reign by invading their territory, 
 
 ^nd hanng defeated them, pursued them across the Danube, and made them 
 
 je for peace. They had previously defeated and wounded his father, Philip 
 
 JGrote, xi. 639). It was while fighting against the Triballi that Sitalces was 
 
 [frerwards killed. Cf. Bahr, n, ad Herod, iv. 49 ; Arist. Aves, 1528, 1626. 
 
 )ffKlov. Gatterer (in his treatise quoted above) considers that the proper 
 
 jiame of this river is "Ho-zcios, or "EffKios (retained in the modern Ischar or 
 
 Jsker river, near the Danube), and Mannert follows his view. The edd. of 
 
 lerod. spell it ^ihs and K7os or Ki6s. In Strab. xiii. p. 590, we find ^Kaidsj 
 
 Plin. H. N. iii. 29, CEscus. Hudson reads 'OoKiov, and so Poppo, Kriiger, 
 
 Lnd Groller. Herod, represents it as rising in Mount Rhodope, amongst the 
 
 pjeonians, and dividing Hsemus in half (iv. 49). Cf. Cramer, i. 273, who spells 
 
 ItEscius. 'N4<ttos Kal 6''E0pos. Both these rivers are men - 
 
 ioned as taking their rise in Mount Scomius or Rhodope. In the time of 
 
 Philip, the Nestus was the boundary of Thrace and Macedonia, and continued 
 
 be so under the Roman government. It is spelt both Nestus and Nessus. 
 
 the middle ages it was corrupted into Mestus, and is still called Mesto, 
 [i Carasou (Black river) by the Turks (Cram. i. p. 308 ; cf. Herod, vii. 109, 
 I26; Plin. iv. II ; Liv. xlv. 29). The Hebrus, now Maritza, is the principal 
 irer of Thrace ; rising in the junction of Scomius and Rhodope, it receives 
 lany tributaries (v. Herod, iv. 89, 92), and falls into the ^gean near JEnus, 
 Arming an estuary called by Herod, (vii. 58) Stentoris (Cramer, i. 316; 
 Vith's Diet. Geog. s.v.). ipTJuov. Cf. Herod, i. 117, iprjuov ovpos. 
 
 [he epithet implies that species of wildness and desolation which arises from 
 [he absence of human habitations. Bl. cf. the Latin secretus, and supposes 
 |hat Milton used a Latinism when writing by the secret top of Horeb, «Sce. 
 
 Chapter XCVIL— (a.) 'A/85^p«i/. Cf. chap. zg.a. ivl 
 
 UXaaaav KadiiKovaa — ' taking the line of sea-coast' = rh rrapa 6d\aa: Herod. 
 P- 6- avTij ircplTrXovs ^arly t] yrj. irepiirAous may be used 
 
 ^djectively or substantively. The Schol. takes the former view, and so Abresch. 
 
 inclines to the latter, and cf. Herod, ii. 29, rh x^p^op rovrd iffri iirl ^/tepas 
 mcepas ir\6os. ("We find the adj. TrpdirXoosj vi. 44.) Kara npvyivav. 
 
 i. Soph. FhU. 145 1. Iffrrirai — stand, i.e. be permanently fixed in 
 
 Qat quarter during the voyage, if there be no foul winds. i/t/J" arpoy- 
 
 pAp. Merchantmen continued their route during the night, the men-of-war's 
 lien generally landed and slept on shore, cf. ch. 93. a. n. ; Herod, iv. 86. 
 iHuvos. euo-TaA^y, Kcd Kov<pos, /cal /xrjScv exwv rb ifnroSl^oVj Sch. Cf. Herod. 
 •74' i03> ii- 34> iv. loi [where the day's journey is computed at 200 stades], 
 
 49. 97 ; Xen. Anah. iv. ii. 7, iii. 20. 65y — * itinere terrestri,* P. 
 
 Felf, § 603. 2. avv(rai = rcXfi above. The idea implied is that 
 
 9^ accomplishing with dispatch. Cf. Dionys. Pcm^. 985, 
 
 T6(r<rov 6.vevQiv l(i)v Zffov t^bofiov iifiap SSeiffos 
 XtpQifios K(A KpaiTTvhs avTip avvamv dSiTTjs. 
 
 tpo(Tri^av—' brought in.* The first aorist is very rare, P. cf. Lobeck, Phryn. 
 F^y. We find the first aor. midd. in Hom. II. viii. 545, iK rr6\ios S' 6^avTo 
 foas <col 1<}>ia firiXa. :i€vdov. iv. loi. This Seuthes must not be 
 
270 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. Bchap. 98.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 271 
 
 confounded with the Thracian king at the time of the return of the Ten Thou- 1 
 sand, Xen. Anab. vii. 2. 17, iii. 7. TfrpaKocluv raXduTcov. Dioi 
 
 [xii. 50], with his usual amplification, fixes the revenue of Sitalces at more 
 than 1000 talents. /jidKtara Suvo/ms — ' the sum total.' Cf. v. 20. c 
 
 A Xpvahs Ka\ ipyvpos fXri — 'so viel davon {rov <p6pov) Goldund Silher war' 
 P. uri the opt. of indefinite frequency, ' quod de qiiotannis redeuntibus pecuniis I 
 sermo est,' Haack (Madv. App. § 234; Matth. § 528 ; Jelf, § 831. 4. a.). Kriig. 
 and Bernhardy, Synt. p. 406, give the meaning of uncertainty, may prrhapt 
 come in. Others read ^«. vtpavrd t€ Ka\ Xtla, y(^ovTc£, as P. 
 
 observes, are properly woven fabrics of any sort of texture ; but here, vhen 
 opposed to Aeta, they must mean embroidered or brocaded stuffs — he therefore 
 tr. ' Textilia acu picta et levia.' The barbarian chiefs, as Mr. Grote remarks, 
 learnt at length to appreciate the woven fabrics, the polished and carved me- 
 tallic work, the tempered weapons, and the pottery which issued from Grecian 
 artisans. He compares them to the v<pi.ff^ff Updy and to the x^piapa" TCKT6vti>r I 
 ScUSaAa, offered as presents to the Delphian God, Eurip. Ion, 1141 ; Pindar, 
 Fyih. V. 46 ; Grote, iv. 8, n. • The Circassians of the present day weave mats 
 of very great beauty, which find a ready market in Turkey and Russia. '- 
 Clarke's Travels, quoted by Grote, ib, p. 9. For the actual custom of offering 
 these presents, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 27 ; Grote, vi. p. 292. n. For \(h, cf. 
 L. and S. s.v. ^druy and Horn. B. viii. 441. Grote [ix. 196, n.] compares the 
 splendid * regia textilia,' and abundance of gold and silver vessels captured, 
 together with Perseus, last king of Macedonia, by the Roman general, Paulus 
 iEmilius (Liv. xlv. 33-5 ; Xen. Anab. vi. i. 2). KaraaKtvi 
 
 Cf. ii. 14. 'Gerathe mancherlei Art die zur hauslichen Einrichtung dienen,' 
 K. irapadvyaffTfiovffi. Many tr. ' qui apud regem valebant' 
 
 comparing i. 138, yiyvfrai irap avr^ /xdyas. But there seems reason in Arn.'s 
 objection that this is to confound Bvpaorrfvfiv and Bvvcurdai ; ' reyuli infra regem 
 positi,* G611. Cf. Seuthes, c. loi. ' Nebenherrschen," Kriig. ♦ Seinen Foialknl \ 
 Engel. tr. For the fact, see Xen. Anab. y'li. 3. 16. K. compares Soph. ap. 
 Stob. 10. 25, <pi\dpyvpov fxkv vav rh fiap^dpwv y4t/os. 
 
 (6.) KarttTTi)<TavTQ rohvavriov . . . Utpffwv. This contrast between 
 the Thracians and the Persians is illustrated by what Xenophon says respect- 
 ing the habits of the younger Cyrus, Anab. i. 9. 22. Cf. Cyrop. viii. 14, xxxi. 
 2 ; Grote vi. 292. Kaix^dv^iv. P. prefers translating by 'sumere.' 
 
 Thirlwall thinks the remark of Thucydides more singular than the custom of | 
 the Thracians. Bl. considers that among the Thracians, contrary to the practice 
 in Persia, these gifts were exacted with the utmost avarice and rapacity, and 
 that Thucydides is here speaking sarcastically, and with an intent to reproach 
 the Thracian nobility. The remark is consequently not so strange. 
 i-wX icXiov. Ty v6fi^ fiaXKov ruy iAAwi' &pc(.Kuv 01 *OSpv(rai 4xP^^<*i ^^^^^ 
 ' Though the custom existed among other Thracians also, the Odrj'sae practised 
 it more extensively.' &<rT€ — with indicative, actual result in a given 
 
 case, see i. 119. a. 
 
 (c.) 'lovlov K6\'irov. Cf. i. 24. The name probably dates from a very | 
 early period, when the lonians still inhabited the shores of the Corinthian gulf, 
 and that part of Peloponnese, known subsequently as Achaia. The name is 
 first used by JEschylus {Prom. V. 840), no trace of the name being found Id 
 
 iHomer. Herod, and Thucyd. use the term as synonymous with the Adriatic, 
 but in the latter it always applies to the narrow gulf or inlet at the entrance of 
 jthe Adriatic (vi. 30. 44, vii. 33). It was considered to commence from the 
 lAcroceraunian promontory on the coast of Epirus, and the lapygian promontory 
 Ion that of Italy (Cramer, i. 5). See the whole question as to its extension 
 Idiscussed in Smith's i)ic^. G^co^. s. V. Seurcpa. P. translates 
 
 ^longe secundum ab imperio Scytharum^ i.e. secundum quidem a Scythico, sed 
 Itamen longe eo inferius. So in Virgil, ' longo sed proximus intervallo.' Were 
 it not thus emphatic, we should have simply Seurtpa rris tuv 'SkvOwv. Bloomf. 
 thinks otherwise, but brings forward no argument of weight. Engel, tr. also 
 has ' bei weitem in zweiter Linie gegen das der ScythenJ eiiBaifiovia 
 
 includes all the external adjuncts of national prosperity: eariv iv iraa-p ei/Sat- 
 hoviri, Herod, v. 4, and cf. Xen. de Fep. Lac. i. 22. ravrrj Se aSvvara 
 
 Uliffovffdai. Herod, v. 3, €t 5e vir' evhs &pxoiro ^ <ppovioi Kara rwvrh, &^ax6v 
 It* h> ttrf, Kol iroAAy Kpdriffrov irdyrcev idv(<av Karh. yv^fi-riv t^v ifiijv. ' The 
 natural state of the Thracian tribes — in the judgment of Herodotus permanent 
 and incorrigible — was that of disunion and incapacity of political association ; 
 vere such association possible, he says, they would be strong enough to van- 
 quish every other nation, though Thucydides considers them' as far inferior to 
 the Scythians. The Odrysian dominion had probably not reached, at the period 
 nrhen Herod, made his inquiries, the same development which Thucydides de- 
 scribes in the third year of the PeloponnesianWar, and which imparted to these 
 tribes an union partial indeed and temporary, but such as they never reached 
 either before or afterwards.' — Grote, vi. 290. ovx ori. Jelf, 
 
 [762. 3. ev irphs €V. Cf. Herod, iv. 50, 05a>p ^e €P irphs ev avfi- 
 
 \^ixX(tv. The expression is here used to exclude comparison with Persia, which 
 contained many separate subordinate nationalities. ov fi^y oi/Se — 
 
 r nor yet again,* as in Xen. passim, Vig. vii. 8, Hoogev. de Partic. p. 486. ' Not 
 that either I mean to say they are on a par with the rest of the world in all other 
 Xpints of good counsel and sagacity,' &c. ovx ^t^oiovvrai — as a meiosis for * are 
 [superior to,' is intolerable both in respect of the Greek and the sense. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII. — (<z.) eroTfia — * when things were ready.* Cf. ch. 3. c, 
 Utfi 5e us iK TUP Svparup eroTfia ^v, cf. i. 88. a. &pas. For the 
 
 use of this verb, as applied to land forces, see i. c. ii. 3. c, 10. a., 56. a., &c. 
 IViaKfioplap. The name applied to the country occupied by the tribes dwelling 
 northward of Thessaly and Mount Olympus, eastward of the chain by which 
 Pindus is continued, and westward of the river Axius. Though it afterwards 
 received greater extensions, the original country known by this name was but 
 small, and its population peculiar. The eponymous ancestor of mythological 
 times was Macednus, son of Lycaon, ancestor of the Arcadians, or Macedon, 
 son of iEolus. Herodotus identifies the Macedonians with the Doric race in a 
 passage which Miiller has examined at some length [i. 56; MiilL Dor. i. 3. 
 &c.]. These are merely attempts to form a genealogical connexion between this 
 semi-barbarous people and the rest of the Hellenic race. From the resemblance 
 of some of their customs to the Illyrians (cf. Strab. vii. p. 327), and on other 
 I grounds, Miiller, by the process of exhaustion, arrives at the conclusion that 
 they were of Hlyrian descent. Mr. Grote and the writer of the article in 
 
272 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. I Chap. 98.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 273 
 
 Smith's Geog. Diet maintain the contrary (iv. 14. n.) ; Mannert agrees 
 with Miiller. It is clear, as Miiller shows, that though their language differed 
 from the Illyrian (v. Polyb. xxviii. 8) and from the Greek, it contained many 
 forms commonly called JEolic, together with Arcadian and Thessalian words 
 and many which, though not found in Greek, have been preserved in the 
 cognate Latin. The race pre-eminently known as the Macedonian, had their 
 original centre at ^gae or Edessa, the modern Vodhena, and finally absorbed 
 the other sectional races, as the Eleimiotae, Lyncestae, Orestae, &c. (Grote, ir. 
 16). 'The Macedonians of the seventh and sixth centuries b. c. were an 
 aggregate only of rude inland tribes, subdivided into distinct petty principali- 
 ties, and separated from the Greeks by a wider ethnical difference even than 
 the Epirots, to whom they were analogous in character and civilization ; they 
 had some few towns, but were chiefly village residents (Thuc. ii. 100, ir. 
 124). The original seats of the Macedonians were in the regions east of the 
 chain of Skardus, north of the chain called the Cambunian Mountains, which 
 connects Olympus with Pindus, and which forms the north-west boundarj^ of 
 Thessaly, but they did not reach so far eastward as the Thermaic Gulf, appa- 
 rently not farther eastward than Mount Bermius, or about the longitude of 
 Edessa and Berrhoia. They thus covered the upper portions of the course of 
 the rivers Haliakmon and Erigon, before the junction of the latter with the 
 Axius, while the upper course of the Axius, higher than this point of junction, 
 appears to have belonged to Paeonia, though the boundaries of Macedonia and 
 Paeonia cannot be distinctly marked out at any time.' — Grote, iv. 11. Mace- 
 donia, in its proper sense, did not touch upon the sea, and must be distinguished 
 into upper and lower ; the former inhabited by people about the west range of 
 mountains extending from the north as far as Pindus ; the latter about the rivers 
 which flow into the Axius, only extending, however, as far as Pella. From this 
 district the Macedonians extended themselves, partially driving back the original 
 inhabitants, just as we find in later times the armed hordes of the Sclavonians 
 driving the descendants of these peoples into the Chalcidic peninsula, or the low 
 grounds near the sea. The subdivisions of Macedonia will be noticed as they 
 occur in the following chapters. The Cambunian mountains, which form the 
 great south boundary of the country, are the watershed of various rivers, whose 
 wide alluvial basins formed the homes, as they modified the character, of the 
 eeveral tribes who peopled their banks. From them flow northwards the Aous. 
 now Voiussa (see Wordsworth's Greece, p. 9), whence the Paraujei took their 
 name (Cramer, i. 9), and the Haliacmon (now Inje kara). To the south, the 
 Acheloiis, now Asprapotamo (see chap. 102. b.), Peneus (Salempria), and 
 Arachthus (Arta). The west spur of the Cambunians forms the Pindus chain, 
 and the east terminates in Olympus [cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 4]. The 
 other rivers of Macedon are the ^straeus (now Vistritza), flowing by Edessa 
 and Pella, along the banks of which ran the Via Egnatia, leading from Epidamniis 
 through Thessalonica and Amphipolis, to the Euxine [v. Cramer, i. 80, 280 ; 
 for the pass, through which the Via Egnatia, and the modern road fromDurazzo 
 to Betolia led into Macedon, see Grote, iv. 3. n.], the Axius, now the Vardar 
 [a corruption from the Bardares of Tzetxes and Anna Comnena, hence the 
 Vardariot cohorts of the Imperial guard (Smith's Diet. Geog. p. 236; Miill. 
 Dor, i. 450]» ^^^ its great tributary the Erigon, now Kuichuk. The country 
 
 therefore contains three wide alluvial basins, of great extent and fertility, viz., 
 those of the Axius, the Erigon, and the upper Haliacmon, which form a greut 
 contrast as to their capacity for cultivation with the plains and valleys on the 
 Albanian or west side of Greece. These are represented respectively by the 
 modern districts of Tettovo, Bitolia, and Grevena. On the rivers of Macedon, 
 see Cousinery, quoted by Bahr (Herod, v. iii. p. 826). On the present state of 
 our knowledge of the geography of these regions, see Grote's long note at the 
 beginning of his twenty-fifth chapter, and the quotations throughout the chapter 
 from the travels of Col. Leake, Bou^, Grisebach, and Pouqueville. 
 KfpK/yrjs, now Tchengel Bagh, is the watershed of the streams which flow 
 into the Cercinitis palus (now Lake Takinos) above Amphipolis, through which 
 flows also the Strymon (Thuc. v. 7 ; Arrian. Exp. Alex. i. ; Cramer, i. 289 ; 
 Walpole ap. Cramer, i. 295). lEivrav. The Sinti lived on the banks 
 
 of the Strymon, north of the Siropaeones. Strabo says they once occupied the 
 island of Lemnos, thus identifying them with the Sinties of Homer (//. i. 
 593)— ^v^o fif Xivries livSp€s &<pap KOfiiffavro ir^ffSvra. Cf. Odys. viii. 294; 
 Strabo, Epit. vii. 331, v. 457, xii. 549. Livy places them on the right bank of 
 the Strymon (xlv. 29). Their chief town was Heraclea, fifty miles from 
 Philippi. Cf. Gatterer, quoted by Cramer, i. 305 ; Liv. xlii. 51, xlv. 29 ; Plin. 
 i7. 10; Miiller'sDor. i. 470. Uai6v<av. The Pseonians once 
 
 occupied the greatest part of Macedonia, and even a considerable portion of 
 Thrace, extending along the coast of the -iEgean as far as the Euxine. It was 
 probably the general name of the whole of Northern Macedonia, from the 
 source of the Erigonus to the Strymon. • We are not to suppose that the whole 
 territory between Axius and Strymon was continuously peopled by them : con- 
 tinuous population is not the character of the ancient world. The Paeonians in 
 theirnorth-west tribes bordered upon the Macedonian Pelagonia ; in their north 
 tribes upon the Illyrian Dardani and Autariatae : in their east, south, and 
 south-east tribes, upon the Thracians and Pierians, i.e. upon the second seats 
 occupied by the expelled Pierians under Mount Pangaeus.' — Grote, iv. 20. 
 Homer mentions them among the allies of Priam, and places them on the banks 
 of the Axius (i?. ii. 849). Herodotus says they were a colony of the Teucri 
 who came from Troy (v. 13, where see Bahr's note). Livy also says that the 
 Dardani of Illyria once exercised dominion over the whole of Macedonian 
 Paeonia. Hence Niebuhr supposes them to be of Pelasgian race {Bom. Hist. i. 
 53)' They were divided into several tribes, each probably governed by a 
 separate chief (Herod, iv. 12, v. 98, vii. 20). iirX Tlaiovas. The 
 
 date and circumstances of this expedition are unknown. 
 
 (i.) M a 1 5 j/s. N.E. of the Sinti. This tribe is not mentioned by Herodotus ; 
 but they are perhaps to be identified with the Thracian tribe near the Ister, 
 vhom he calls the Sigynnae, who, as he understood, referred their origin to the 
 Medes of Asia : the probability being that they were the Maedi of Thrace. 
 Strabo calls them Maedo-Bithyni. (Herod, v. 9 ; Strab. vii. p. 295. 316 ; Plin. 
 |T. II ; Liv. xxvi. 25, xl. 22, xliv. 26 ; Cramer, i. 306.) ASfirjpov 
 
 I IS probably the spot now called Doiran (Cramer, i. 276 ; Miill. Dor. p. 460), 
 a Paeonian town on the frontier of Macedonia, at the foot of Mt. Cercine, a 
 branch of the great central chain of Rhodope, perhaps identical with the 
 Orbelos of Herodotus (v. 16). Cramer identifies the Lake of Doiran with Lake 
 
 X 
 
274 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 Prasia., of which Herodotus gives snch a curious account in the passage quoted 
 above. See Gatterer's note, quoted in Cramer, u. s. Cf. Herod: vii, ,,3 
 a-.T.'^tyv.To—'his army suffered no diminution: did not fall away ' 1% 
 nngemng: K. Cf. xxxiv. a, li. c. Here the expression, though somewhat' 
 strange .s introduced for the sake of the verbal antithesis-' keinen aC 
 woklaber .ul Zugang; ^n^. tr. i^^ i,,,^^,. The dat. ist^' 
 
 usually, found (alter i.X) in this meaning, v. Matth. § 585, 6. Perhaps X 
 verbs oi motion, when the substantive denotes the action which is the end 
 onr going, the accusative would be more correct, as Uua^ i^\ 05a,p, Herod iii 
 ;^,"r ^'^r* '- ^\ ^-- «-.A. on the fact, cf. Ar.:^ ' 
 
 CHAPTjBXCIX.-(a.)|„.^epo(Ca.To^.ri?Ao^^p^. As K. observes , 
 the prep ^y after a verb of collecting or assembling, bears reference to the place 
 of assembly ; iu to the fact of the completion of the union (i. 6, c. 23, d c, b 
 0..S U^aKoZ.... On the future indie, after W following verbs f 
 canng, providing, considering, &c., see Matth. § 623. 2. It is in fact = 3T, 
 
 Cf Soph. ^- "96; PA^. 54; ^>x, 557. with Wunder's note; Xen. Anak 
 
 ; ^'' ^:, . : ''^'''°' ^"''^' metaphysically from the tendency to vivid 
 
 narration and objective representation which characterizes the language, another 
 
 development of which is found in the usage of c^s, l.a^ &c. cum Indictivo. 
 
 The grammarians have not as yet sufficiently noticed the bearing of this ob- 
 
 jective tendency upon the idioms of the language. ,aJ .opv<p^.- 
 
 keeping along ty height: With the genitive it would be dov^n tL hlu. 
 
 wLT '" T""' ^"- ^ ' n.pSU.a.. PerdicJl. 
 
 was the son and successor of Alexander I., called the Philhellene. Por his 
 previous history in connexion with this war see i. 57, 59, 61, 63 ; ii. 29, 80; 
 i>iod. xn. 34. In B.C. 474, we shall find him instigating Brasidas to invade 
 Macedon and Thrace (cf. iv. 79). but subsequently making peace with Athens 
 (V. fin.), then secretly joining the league against her, but again forming an 
 alliance with Athens : siding, in fact, with either of the belligerent parties as 
 suited his interest for the time being (v. 80, 3 ; vi. 7 ; vii. 9). Clinton fixes his 
 death m the archonship of Pisander. b.c. 413 ; 01. xciii 3. The date of his 
 accession is doubtful, as very different periods are allotted to his reign by 
 ancient writers (Clinton, i^:^.ii.a2 3. Cf. Tab. in an. 4,4 2) 
 AvyKv^rai One of the four subdivisions of Upper Macedonia. Lyncestis 
 comprehended the modern district of Filurina, and all the south part of the 
 basin ot the brigon The district went by the names of Lyncestis and Lyncus. 
 In L.vT, however the latter appellative stands for a city on the Bevus. It lay 
 to the south of the Pelagones, and between them and the Eordjei. It was once 
 an independent kingdom, and probably became an appanage of Macedon by 
 marriage. Cf. Thuc. iv. 83, 124; Strabo, vii. p. 326 TLiv. xxxi. 33, xxvi. z5. 
 Tl' \i ■ ^\^J^°^«"i^* <^lai°ied their descent from Argos, and the kings 
 ot the ±.pu.otic Molossi pretended to a descent from the heroic Placid race of 
 
 [Book If. Bjhap. 99.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 275 
 
 reece, so the princes of Lyncus claimed the Bacchiadae of Corinth for their 
 ancestors. One of these, Arrhibaeus, was on the throne when Brasidas invaded 
 .yneus (Cramer, i. 193 ; Grote, iv. 15, 22). 'EA*/.i«T«.. Elimeia 
 
 another of these subdivisions, comprehended the modern districts of Grevena 
 !m>, and Tjersemba. It lay to the east of Stymphalia. and was originally 
 ,n independent state like Lyncus, but was afterwards conquered by the 
 ^racedonian kings, to whom it became a very important acquisition, from the 
 :t that the passes to Epirus and Thessaly led through this province. From 
 le latter it was separated by the Cambunian mountains. We read in Xeno- 
 )hon of a Derdas, prince of Elimeia, probably a son of the Derdas mentioned 
 ,ere. Cf. Thuc. 1. 56; Xen. Hell. v. 2, 28; Liv. xlii. 23; Cramer, i. 200 : 
 Miill. Dorians, 1. 458. ^AAa ^dyr,~e.g. the Orest*. P. 
 
 •aff avrd—' separate and independent kingdoTm: 
 
 (6.) 'AA6'|a,/5pos, son of Amyntas L, and tenth king of Macedon (v 
 linton, 11. 221), succeeded his father probably soon after the subjugation of 
 hraco by Megabazus (b.c. 507), and was still living b.c. 463, when Cimon 
 ■ecovered Thasos. He probably lived on till b.c. 454. He is known in history 
 [or his murder of the Persian envoys, his good services to the Greeks though 
 lommally m the train of Xerxes, and his proving his Greek descent when he 
 )resented himself as a competitor at the Olympic games. [Herod v 17-22 
 'ii. 137, viii. 136-40, ix. 44; cf. Justin, vii. 2.] He no doubt added verycon- 
 iderably to the dominions of his predecessors, advancing his frontiers along the 
 iea coast, and to the interior. But ' to suppose that Alexander, son of Amyntas 
 lade all these conquests, is an error which is even refuted by the words of 
 'hucyd. ; although it is very possible that this prince, who began his reign 
 ibout B.C. 488, at the time of the Persian power, and was the brother-in-law 
 )f a Persian general, added considerably to the territory which he had inherited 
 onsequently the story that Xerxes gave Alexander all the country between 
 lounts Olympus and Haemus (Justin, vii. 4) is not entirely fabulous During 
 :he interval between the Persian and Peloponnesian wars, the territory of 
 Uacedon was not much enlarged.'— Miill. Dor. i. 464. 
 
 |p•I,^'■^'^^'^^^'"• ^"^ ^^^ ^''^'''^ ''"S''' ""^ ^^^ ^^>'^^ g^°« ""^ Macedonia, see 
 Uiahr ad Herod, v. 22, who quotes the following authorities : Isocr. Philip 
 
 ^p. 88_ 103, 4; Pans. vii. 8. 5; Thuc. ii. 99, v. 80; Socrat. Epist. xxviii. • 
 
 T) i^i"^' ^' "'''^' '"''"• ^°' ^"^ ""^'^^ "^^ ""^y ^^^ ^^^^- I^orians, i. 172' 
 .&3 cf. Herod, vii. 173, viu. 137, 8, ix. 44). ♦ The origin of the Macedonian 
 amily, or Argeadae, from Argos, appears to have been universally recognised 
 y Grecian enquirers.'-Grote, iv. 21. i^a^il^.vaav-' estMished 
 
 U'rTTi T' ^' "'^^^'*^- ^''''''^ lyi°g ^ the east and 
 
 8 uth-east of Lordaea and Elimeia, was one of the most interesting parts of 
 
 paoedonia, both as being the traditionary birth-place of Orpheus, and first seat 
 
 01 tne JMuses, and on account of the important historical events of which it 
 
 8ubsequently became the theatre. It forms the slope of the range of mountains 
 
 P Winch Olympus is the highest peak, and is separated from Magnesia by the 
 
 eneus. It coincides with the modern district of Katerina. [Cf. Herod vii 
 
 '31. The name was known to Homer, //. xiv. 226, where Hera passes from 
 
 ^mpus through Pieria and ^mathia to Thrace.] It was watered by the 
 
 l^^^^nion, and contained the famous towns of Pydna and Methone, and the 
 
 T2 
 
276 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 poetical localities of Libethms and Piraplea. (Cramer, i. 204-220.) * Between I 
 the Thermaic gulf and the eastern counterforts of Olympus and Bermius, there 
 exists a narrow slip of plain land, or low hill, which reaches from the mouth of 
 the Peneius to the head of the Thermaic gulf; it there widens into the spacious 
 and fertile plain of Salonichi, comprising the mouths of the Haliacmon, the 
 Axius, and the Echeidorus : the river Ludias, which flows from Edessa into the 
 marshes surrounding Pella, and which in antiquity joined the Haliacmon near 
 its mouth, has now altered its course so as to join the Axius. This narrow 
 strip between the mouths of the Peneius and the Haliacmon was the original 
 abode of tlie Pierian Thracians, who dwelt close to the foot of Olympus, and 
 among whom the worship of the Muses seems to have been a primitive charac- 
 teristic: Grecian poetry teems with local allusions and epithets which appear 
 traceable to this early fact.' — Grote, iv. 17. ndyyaiov. Pangseum 
 
 (now called Pundhar Dagh, or Castagnetz,) is a spur of Rhodope and Hjemus 
 branching off in a south-east direction, lying between the Strymon and the | 
 Nestus, and forming a boundary line between Macedon and Thrace, and hence 
 assigned indiscriminately to either. It was famous for its gold and silver I 
 mines, which were worked by the Pieres, Odomanti and Satrse ; v. Herod, vii. 
 112, hence called xp»<^^^(^^<*'^ \4iras by Euripides {Rhes. 919). Of these metals 
 no traces are said to be found in modern times. See Bahr ad Herod, v. 16, 
 and the authorities quoted. They are said to have first attracted the attention 
 of the Thasians (Diod. Sic. xvi.). Pangseura is often mentioned by the poets 
 (Pind. Pyth. iv. 319; Msch. Pers. 5C0 ; Eurip. Hhes. u.e. and 972; Virg. 
 Georg. iv. 462 ; Lucan, Ph. i. 680). Philippi stood at its foot (Cramer, i. 301, 1 
 2). *dyprjTa. See Cramer, i. p. 297, who quotes Strab. Epit. vii. 
 
 p. 331; Scylax, Perip. 99; Steph. Byz. s.v. Herodotus also, vii. 112, speaks 
 of it as one of the two fortresses of the Pieres. KSkiroi- 
 
 * Thalgrund' K., applied to any sinuous tract of land ; v. L. and S. ; Xenophon, 
 Hist. vi. 5, 17, 6Aa0€ (TTpaTOTrcSevadfjLCvos fis rhi/ orriffQiv k6X.v9v t^s lAayTmKi\% 
 fid\a (Tvye-y/vSi Kcd /cuxAy 6p7] lxo>^a- Bl. has, I perceive, this reference, and | 
 also one to Plin. Hist. N. iii. 16, 'Padus gremio montis Vesuli profluens.' 
 
 (c?.) "A^iov, now Vardar. See sup. c. 98, n. on Macedonia; Horn. iZ. ii. 
 849 ; Liv. xxxix. 54. aT(vi\v — 'a narrow strip of land, Scottice, I 
 
 a strath' Bl. ; frequently found in composition, as Stratheden, Strathmore, 
 Strathfieldsay. ^UUvvas. The Edonians lay beyond the river 
 
 Axius, at the lower part of its course. They were a large and powerful tribe: 
 hence their name is constantly used by the poets as synonymous with Thrace 
 generally. 'E p 5 f a y. Eordaea was one of the four subdivisiors | 
 
 of Upper Macedonia before alluded to, and comprehended the modern districts 
 of Budjay Sarighiul, and Ostrovo. It was contiguous to Elimeia ; north of the 
 Bermius, east of Lyncus, west of Edessa, in fact, the basin of the Ludias, no» I 
 Cara Asmac ; v. Miiller's Dorians, i. 459 ; Cramer, i. 201 ; Smith, Geog. BidA 
 p. 236. Cf. Herod, vii. 185 (Bahr's note); Thuc. iv. 128; Polyb. xviii. 6;| 
 Liv. xxxi 39. Ptolemy was a native of Eordaea, according to Arrian, E. A. vi. 
 28. $paxv'»fAiKp6v. Cf. i. 14, not. ^ixrKav. MiilL| 
 
 Dor. i. 458. Between Strymon and Axius. See Grote, iv. 23. 
 'AKfiuirias. Almopia or Almonia was an ancient settlement of the Minyansl 
 (Miill. Dor. i. 458, 469 ; Plia. H. N. iv. 17) on the confines of Macedonia and 
 
 Ichap. 100.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 277 
 
 rhessaly, apparently not far from Pieria : whether they were of Macedonian 
 race is difficult to say (Grote, iv. 14, 23). Cramer places Almopia near the 
 burces of the Erigonus, on the borders of Illyria, i.e. rather to the north-west 
 of the locality assigned them by MuUer (Cram. i. 272). Tp-narwvlas 
 
 Is said to be the Attic, Kpr]ffrajvias the Ionic orthography, P. Herod, places it 
 cear the sources of the Echeidorus. Kruse says it is called now Christonia 
 (Hellas, i. 435. ap. Pop.). Cf. Herod, i. 57 (Bahr's note), v. 3, vii. 124, 7, 
 viii. 116. BicraXriav. Bisaltia includes the maritime district 
 
 Test of the Strymon, and the land to the interior (Miill. Dor. i. 454). Thucyd. 
 however makes Mygdonia reach as far as the Strymon. Herod, makes the 
 Persians enter Bisaltia immediately after crossing the Strymon, viii. 115. Cf. 
 iii. 116. Grote, iv. 18, 28. 
 
 Chapter C. — (a.) iiriSvros — ^the genitive absolute implying cause. Cf. 
 
 ch. 8; Jelf, § 710, 6. 'Apx^kaos. Archelaus succeeded his 
 
 tfather, B.C. 413 ; he reigned fourteen years, and was assassinated, b.c. 399, 
 
 lin the archonship of Laches (Diod. xiv. 35, 7). Plato calls him spurious, and 
 
 an usurper, and says he was a son of a slave of Alcetas, named Simiche ( Gorg. 
 
 471 a; Clinton, ii. 223 ; Miill. Dor. i. 483). €T€/a€. The 
 
 piV)per word for road-making; v. Wesseling ad Herod, iv. 136. ra 
 
 liWa hiiK6ayif)<Tc. Bl. says there is an ellipse of tV X^P«''> referring to 
 
 ch. 15, rd re 6.XKa 5i6K(J(r^7j(re 7T)v x«^pa»', fat» k.t.A. oktco. Cf. 
 
 IClinton's dissertation on the kings of Macedonia, vol. ii. p. 220. Herod, viii. 
 
 1139, gives the line of Macedonian kings. The three first usually given are 
 
 considered by Clinton to be merely mythical. The predecessors of Archelaus 
 
 Ivill therefore be Perdiccas I., Argaeus, Philippus I., Aeropus, Alcetas, 
 
 lAmyntas I., Alexander I., Perdiccas II. (Miill. Dor. i. 463 ; Grote, iv. 23). 
 
 (b.) EiSofievriv. Miiller, from the Itineraries, places Idomene fifty-three 
 jmiles from Therma. [Dor. i. 474.] It was on the borders of Paeonia, on the 
 jroad leading from Stobi to Thessalonica. In some modern maps we see a spot 
 parked Idomini in this locality (Cramer, i. 230). Toprwiav 
 
 lis placed by Ptolemy in ^raathia, south of Idomene ; he writes the name 
 |Gordenia (Cramer, i. 230; Miill. u.s.). 'AraAdvr-nv. From a 
 
 passage in Steph. Byz. Dr. Arnold proposes to read Allante, cf. Plin. iv. 10, 35, 
 jbutMuller, Spruner, and Cramer all read Atalanta. Evpwirhp 
 
 lis placed by Pliny on the Axius. [H N. iv. 10.] Nothing further is known 
 lof its history, than that it appears in a list of towns in the seventh century 
 |(Cramer, i. 231). 
 
 (c.) UfWTjs. Pella, one of the most ancient and celebrated cities of Mace- 
 donia, stood at the distance of 120 stadia from the mouth of the Ludias, to 
 '•hich point the river was navigable. It was on the borders of Bottiaea and 
 "^mathia; Herodotus assigning it to the former (vii. 123), Ptolemy to the 
 Patter (p. 82). Piiilip considerably enlarged and embellished it, as being his 
 native city (cf. Dem. de Cor. 83), and here Alexander also was born (hence 
 'Pellgeus juvenis,' Juv. x. 169; Lucan, iii. 233). Its situation is exactly 
 described by Livy, xhv. 46, xlv. 29 [probably from Polybius, xxix. 3]. It was 
 laitt-rwards colonised by Julius Caesar. Its ruins are still visible near the 
 Imodem Palatisa. Euripides probably resided here under the patronage of 
 
278 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [BooKllBciiAi'. 102.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 279 
 
 Archelaus, and the sconerj in its neighbourhood is supposed to have suggested 
 some passages in his Bacchce (Cramer, i. 223). ♦ Though in later times the 
 residence of the kings was transferred to marshy Pella in the maritime plain | 
 beneath, yet Edessa was always retained as the regal burial-place, and as th^ 
 hearth to which the religious continuity of the nation (so much reverenced iji 
 ancient times) was attached.'— Grote, iv. 16. Kvppov. A place 
 
 of no great importance, except from its being sometimes confounded with the 
 Cyrrhus in Syria. The town of Palaokastro, about sixteen miles north-westof 
 Pella, very probably represents the site of Cyrrhus (Leake, K (r., quoted in! 
 Smith, I>ict. Geog. s. v. and Cramer, vol. i. 229 ; Miill. Dor. i. 458, n.). 
 iirri doKo7. Cf. chap. Ixxix. f. K. says the words must be taken ^thl 
 i<r4$ak\ov—' wherever it seemed fit' icr^^aWo v—s. rare word for 
 
 a charge of cavalry, K. lirh -1^X1)6 ovs. The sentence is very niuchl 
 
 involved. P. seems inclined to refer it to the Thracians, as though it were, 
 * encumbered by their own numbers.' K. would strike out avrovs and readl 
 Kodearaa-av. I believe it is an elliptical way of speaking—' brought themselves 
 into great peril when they did fight, and therefore soon left it off.' Oa 
 
 wfptKKri6fi€woi cf. Cges..5. C. iii. 30, 'ne duobus circumcluderetur exercitibus,' 
 
 Chapter CI. — {a.) \6yovs iiroi^'iro = \&yovs Trpo(r4<pfp€, i. 57 — '<7^f)^(7f; 
 P. ; • began to negotiate;' ' unterhandelte; K. oh Taprjaav rah\ 
 
 pavorip. Cf. xcv. c. and Groto quoted there. airKrrovvTfs /ti 
 
 K.T.A. Here we have an illustration of the redundant negative, which maybe 
 expressed in somewhat vulgar English—' being doubtful that he would not cmt 
 Tfix^pf *s— a rare word in Attic Greek. K. cf. Thuc. iv. 25 ; Herod, i. i6i;| 
 Xen. HdL v. 3, a. Tr. 'having made them take refuge in their fort ijicatim] 
 Cf. our expression of ' putting persons in a state of siege.' naj/aroij 
 
 K.T.A. These obscure tribes of Pseonian and Thracian origin must bo placed 
 near the Strj-raou ; but their exact locality cannot be determined. The Odo- 
 manti were contiguous to, and apparently intermixed with, the Edones, Ptolemj 
 identifying Edonis with Odomantice. ' They were probably settled upon the 
 whole of the great mountain Orbelus, extending along the north-east of the 
 lower Strymonic plain, from about Meleniko and Demarissar to Zikhna in- 
 clusive, where they bordered on Pangaeus, the gold and silver mines of whichl 
 they worked with the Pieres and Satrae.'— Smith, Diet. G. s.v. Herodotm 
 says they were Pseonians, and were not conquered by the Persians, v. 6. Thucj 
 (v. 6) speaks of Polles, their independent prince. Drabescus (Thuc. iv, 101) 
 was probably one of their towns. The Panaei are also called Edonians h\ 
 Steph. Byz.. who places them near Amphipolis. Tlie Dersfei are also ni«- 
 tioned by Herodotus [Herod, vii. no, cf. v. 11, with Bahr's notes on Iwtli 
 passages]. The Droi some think to be the same as the Dersj^i (Cramer, i. 303,1 
 Bq.). [Mr. Grote places them in the plains north-east of the Strymon, nearl 
 Mount Panga?us, and not far from Amphipolis, vi. 295.] 
 
 (b.) 'Kapfcrx^ ><6yov—' pra-buit occasiotiem rumoris,' Kvids. ; 'gaverisfti 
 talk— afforded matter of discussion' Dale. Bl. quotes an example, Xen. Ojrm 
 vi. I, 21. We might tr. * gave occasion to a rumour which even reached i\ 
 (^1) those who were enemies of the Athenians.* fj^'h—' as to whetha 
 
 it might not be possible that,' &c. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 13. 
 
 Kara rh ^vfMfiaxiK6v—m accordance with the terms of the alliance existing 
 between them. Cf. xxii. c. e'lrexwi' K. translates by 'ilber- 
 
 schummend; P. by ' occupatam tenere.' The Scholiast explains it by 4in- 
 Kflii€vos. But this sense of the word, though common in Homer and Herod., 
 is never, P. says, found in Thucydides. We have it as ' halting there,' Xen! 
 Cyrop. iv. 2, 6 ; V. 4, 38. Cf. Acts xix. 22. a ury. So Xen. 
 
 Anab. i. 7, 20, rh Se iroXv avrif aparerapayficvov ^iropciJeTo. It is the dative 
 of the object more remotely affected by the action of the verb. The want of 
 provision affected him through the army. It is equivalent to the construction 
 where the want would be expressed as the subject of some verb having rijv 
 ffTparelav for its direct, and aintf for its remote object. Therefore I believe 
 Arn.'s translation to be a good one, though Bl. disputes it—' when he found 
 that the army had no provisions: ^irapSdKov. Cf . Herod, i v. 
 
 80. Poppo prefers this reading to 'SirapUKov or 27rapa5({/coi;. 
 rpo(riroi€7Tai—'wins over to his views.' Cf. chap. 85, d. rpidKovra 
 
 rks irdffas ^p.4pas. ^ See Jelf, § 454. Cf. Thuc. iii. 66, vri^s at wa<rai Se'/ca; 
 Herod, vii. 4, fiaaiKfiaavra rh irdvja ^rea e| re Kal rpiiiKovra. So omnino in 
 Latin, e.y. Ca?s. B. G. iv. 38, 'Ese duo omnino civitates obsides miserunt.' 
 'Macedonia then {i.e. at this time) contained the elements of a great power 
 afterwards developed by Archelaus and Philip, though one scattered and 
 feeble.'— Thirlwall. 
 
 Chaptee CII.— («.) o\ l\ 4v NavKdKTO}. The narrative is resumed from 
 cb- ^cn. 'AiTTdKov. Cf. ad ch. 30, a., where we learn that the 
 
 Athenians expelled their tyrant Euarchus. airo^dvTfs 4s. P. 
 
 couples the 4s with 4<rrpdT€V(rav, and this punctuation is adopted by Goll., Arn., 
 ^^^^^' _ TfrpaKoalois. These, P. thinks, wpre the c/a^mn'e from' 
 
 the forty triremes, ten 4iri$aTal to each being the usual complement. 
 ^rpdrov. See n. to Ixxx. e. KopSprwv, A small town lying. 
 
 It IS supposed, between Metropolis and old ^nia. Its probable remains were 
 seen by Colonel Leake on a hill about a mile from Prodhrorao. 
 ov SoKovpTas $€$alov5—'dubi<sfidei: Cf v. 43, e. Duk. 
 Kivrira. He had probably been expelled by the opposite party (Cramer, ii 
 33; Grote, vi. 285). 
 
 (b.) OipidSas. The siege of this place was the great object of the expedi- 
 tion; as this great and powerful town had from time immemorial (del Trore) 
 sided against the rest of Acarnania and Athens. Cf. ch. 82, i. 1 1 f , c. 
 'Axf Ayoy. The largest and most celebrated of Grecian rivers, equally famous 
 in mythical and historical times. It takes its rise in Mount Pindus, near a vil- 
 lage now called Khaliki, probably a corruption of Chalcis [v. Dion. Perieg. 496] 
 After flowing through the mountainous district of the Dolopians and Agr^ans, 
 It entered the plain of Acarnania and ^Etolia near Stratus, and discharged 
 Itself into the Ionian sea near (Eniadae. Its waters are of a whitish yellow or 
 cream colour, hence its epithet in Hesiod {Theog. 340), 'Ax^AyoV t' dpyvpo^Lpr^v 
 (copied byDionys. Perieg. 433), and its modern name of Aspropotamo, or 
 ' White River.' Homer only mentions it once, but calls it the king of rivers. 
 [n. xxi. 194.] Dr. Wordsworth says, ' That the Achelous should have been 
 generally considered in Greece as the symbol and synonym of water is probably 
 
28o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. ■ Chap. 103.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 281 
 
 to be ascribed to its superiority in magnitude to the other streams of the 
 Greek continent' [Greece, p. la]. Cf. Virg. Gearg. i. 9, 'Poculaque inventis 
 Acheloia miscuit uvis.' (So our own poet Lovelace says, ' When flowing cups 
 pass quickly round, "With no assuaging Thames.') For the classical passages in 
 illustration of this symbolic use, see Macrob. Saturn. \. 18, and Elmsleyad 
 Eurip. Bacch. 519. In mythology, Acheloiis, as a river god, received especial 
 honours ; he is also celebrated for his rivalry with Hercules for the possession 
 of Deianira ; the horn wrenched oif from the ' Tauriformis' god by Hercules, 
 being metamorphosed into the Cornucopia. Cf. ApoUod. ii. 7 ; Soph. Trach. 
 9, 507; Diod. Sic. iv. 35 ; Paus. iii. 18, 9 ; Ov. Met. ix. i, 90, &c. ; Sen. Here. 
 (Et. 300. &vu6€v ix4v. * The only way of removing the difficulty is to 
 
 supply ftfwv from the preceding, and to take ivcodev with Arn. as standing for 
 ivw, superne, high up the river, as we find it, iv. 108. We may tr. with Goll.: 
 " supeme quidem Stratum urhem, ubi vero in mare influif, (Eniadas prcBter- 
 Jluens." ' — Bl. ircpiXifxvd^u v — ' surrounding with water, so as to 
 
 insulate the city.^ Strabo mentions three marshy lakes in this neighbourhood. 
 The question as to whether these are alluded to by Thucyd. here is discussed 
 by Colonel Leake, N. Greece, iii. 593. Cf. Arrian, Anab. vi. 14, 5. Bl. cf. the 
 description of Venice, Livy, x. 2. 
 
 (f.) 'Ex^aSctfj/. These islands are said to have derived their name from 
 
 the echinus, or sea-urchin, in consequence of their sharp and prickly outlines. 
 
 Homer (/?. ii. 625) caPs them 'Ext»'ai, and speaks of them as inhabited, and 
 
 sending a contingent of forty ships to the Greek force against Troy, under a 
 
 distinguished warrior named Meges. Later writers mention them as rugged 
 
 and desolate. The chief of them was Dulichium (Hom. Od. i. 24.5, ix. 24, xiv. 
 
 397, &c. ; Strabo, x. 456), which some writers identify with Dolicha ; the latter 
 
 appears, however, to be too small to answer the description of Homer, while 
 
 its position does not tally with that of the island mapped out in the passages 
 
 foregoing. Dodwell supposes it to have been submerged by a violent convulsion 
 
 of nature, and says some Greek sailors told him of an island seven miles long, 
 
 which was submerged by the ocean. Herodotus [ii. 10] alludes to the fact of 
 
 the Echinades being gradually united to the mainland (Paus. viii. 24, 11 ; Ov. 
 
 Met. viii. 588). But both of these writers were ignorant of the fact, known to 
 
 modern writers on physical geography, that, after a certain point, this junction 
 
 of the islands off the mouth of a river to the mainland ceases, the superfluous 
 
 alluvial deposit being swept away (as at the mouths of the Nile and Danube) 
 
 ])y the irresistible force of the deep sea. Pliny (iv. 12, 19) enumerates nine of 
 
 the Echinades, other writers, as Ovid, mention only four. Strabo calls them 
 
 ' very numerous.' ohhlv iLit^xova-ai. Cf. ovh4va xp^vov, supra, 
 
 Ixxxiv. a. Tpoffxot hifi — * is constantly making alluvial deposit! 
 
 6tVi riav vfjffcov ot ^Tr^lpwvrai — ^ and some of the islands have been united 
 
 with the mainland (lit. continentalized, made into continent). Cf. Herod, ii. 10. 
 
 Kal oifK ^Kiffra 'Ax^X^oy, tts ^fW 5t* 'AKapvavirfS Kal i^ids 4s d<i\ourffav ruv 
 
 'ExivdSup viifftcv ras rifiicreas ffSij fjireipov ir€volr}Kf, The verb has been employed 
 
 by the imitators of Thucydides, vide Bl. 4\irls 54 xal vatras, 
 
 K.T.\. — ' there is every reason for believing that this may be the case with all 
 
 after no very great lapse of tinned On this use of cAiris cf. i. i, a. 
 
 T^j irpoo-xccercws k.t.A. See Jelf, § 898, 3. ry /tT? cKfSor- 
 
 vv<s^o.i ^ifv^fa-jxai yiyvovrai — 'mutually serve to connect the alluvium, in 
 
 consequence of its not being dispersed,^ K. and D. P. prefers the reading rh fi-fj^ 
 
 but Madvig observes, where the infinitive thus used expresses the consequence 
 
 and not the cause, it should properly /o//ow the verb. Cf. Ixxv. c. : ^vvdffffios 
 
 5' ?iv ahrots rb. ^vXa, ' the woodwork served as a frame to hold the bricks 
 
 together.' I believe myself that the collocation shows r^s irpoo-xwtrews to be 
 
 the latter of two nouns, whereof T^-p.)i-(TKiZdvvv<TBai^ is {i.e. stands for) the 
 
 former; and that the dative is simply an instrumental one. Tr. * are, from the 
 
 non-dispersion of the alluvial deposit, bound together as in a chain J 
 
 Tapa\Aa| — ' 06/ig'M^/?/,' in a sort of quincunx order — \ \ \ ' ' schrage geg€9i 
 
 iinaiidtr' K. (cf. Lobeck ad Soph. Aj. 1087) — whereas Kara arolxov is in 
 
 parallel lines — ! ! ! ! ! o^e 8r; aXatrQat. avrdv — ^ when, as the 
 
 legend goes,' &c. For this use of 5)j see supra. Cf. Arist. Lysist. 523. The 
 
 verb refers to actual wandering, not, I think, as some have suggested, to mental 
 
 hallucination, though the latter meaning may be supported (Soph. Aj. 23). 
 
 liHi.i.T(t}v. For the best comment on this phrase see the opening of ^sch. 
 
 Eumenides. Cf. Thuc. vii. 80. vTrenrSvra — ^ obscure significantem.^ 
 
 ?Tts, not f), is used, because no particular spot is specified, ' a country such 
 
 that! For this peculiar force of So-rts, in introducing the especial attribute 
 
 of the object, its real property, or differentia, see Jelf, § 816. b. For trplv h-v 
 
 ?ee Jelf, § 848. So Madvig ; irplv hv is only used in this way after a negative 
 
 expressed or implied. fxi^Trw — not of/7rw, the command itself, which 
 
 would be of course expressed by /in^irw, being here tacitly quoted. Cf. Soph. 
 
 Vhil. 1409, 
 
 jj/fliroo y€ -irplv &J/ rwu Tjfx€T€pa)V 
 
 dtj/s fivdwVj irai TloiavTOS. 
 
 fiffiia<Tix€yq 5 — * rendered unclean for him to be in* Ziair a — 
 
 ' a place sufficient to support life! For this sense of Siarra, nearly equivalent 
 to our 'home,' see Arist. Eth. Nic. i. 6; Thuc. ii. 16. A. cf. Philost. See 
 Herod. 562, Siaira rcf ffwp-ari imr-qBela. Compare the use of Tpo<p^ in Soph. 
 (Ed. Col. 362; Phil. 32, &c. iSvvdffT€va'€ — 'founded a dominion.' 
 
 firwi/vp.la. KovpTJT IS w&s its ancient name according to the Scholiast. Cf. 
 Strabo, x. 2, 8 and 3. A. cySfxeva, i.e. Thucyd. does not vouch for 
 
 the story. See what is said supra, xxiii. and cf. Herod, vii. 152, €70; 5e 6(pd\w 
 \fy€iv TO, Xfyofifva, TreiOiaOai ye fi^v oif iravrdiraaiv 0(/)6iAa). 
 
 Chaptee CIIL — kv^p avr avSpds. The first instance of such an ex- 
 change, says Bl. ; the first recorded instance, K. P. cf. v. 3, where a similar 
 f'xchange is mentioned. He observes also that iKevddpovs implies that the 
 fhtrcs were sold. 
 
282 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. ■ Cuap. 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 283 
 
 BOOK III. 
 
 Chapter I. — (a.) &fia ry fflTcp iiKfidCovri — sc. in June b.c. 428. 
 Olymp. 88, i. The period comprises the ripening of the corn, i.e. at Athens— 
 the end of May and the beginning of July. Goll. fixes the period a month later. 
 but he is undoubtedly wrong. See Vomel's Bissertafion, Frankfort, 1846, 
 
 (b.) SiTT? vapflKoi — 'wherever opportunity offered.^ Am. rather, ' miglt 
 chance to offar^ for such is the indefinite force of the opt. Am. quotes ef juoi 
 iropfiKot, Soph, PAt7. 1048. Cf. iv. 36, and ofcnrep h.v 6 dihs TrapeiKt), Plat. 
 Theatet. 150 d, cited by Kriig. 
 
 (c.) rh fx^ KaKovpyttv = Siffrt firj KaKovpryitv, or rov /x^ KOKovpyuv, or 
 as an accus. after efpyeti', which is constructed with two accusatives, Arist. 
 Vesp. 333, Kriig. The explanation of the SchoL, 'ellipsis rov hd,' is futile. 
 Cf. Matth. § 534. 
 
 (rf.) rS>v 3v\uv. First the 'arms' of the soldiers; then the spot where 
 they were piled ; hence by an easy transition, as here, the encampment. Cf. 
 ii. a, i. Ill, and iii. 64. 
 
 Chapter II. — (a.) Aristotle {Politics, v. 2. 3), in illustration of the posi- 
 tion that national erils frequently arise from the quarrels of individual citizens, 
 quotes the case of this revolt, which was he says produced by the indignation 
 of one Doxander against the Athenian government for refusing to sanction the 
 marriage of his sons with two orphan heiresses. The fact, as Grote says, may 
 be quite true, but with Thucydides before us we can hardly call it the cause of 
 the war. ^ov\y\Q4vr(5 — sc. ol AeV/Stot, understood from Ata^os. 
 
 Cf. infra, ch. r. a, on the revolt of Lesbos. See Niebuhr, Vortrdgc iib. alt. 
 Gesch. ii. 68. 
 
 (h.) Ka\ ra{)Triv r^v airSaraffiv. The »cal has occasioned trouble, as the 
 Scholiast says, ohx ois kolL 6.\\r}v TreirotTjjueVwj/ hTrSffTocnv. The language is eorae- 
 what inverted, but the meaning plainly is: 'The first attempt failed, and cm 
 this one was made against their will.' On the facts see Grote vi. 303-4. 
 Xcoffiv — sc. by building a x^t^ across the mouth. See the notes on the har- 
 bour of Pylos. W. 
 
 (c.) & /neTairfjuiro/Acvoi ^trav — 'had sent for * D. But this is an in- 
 correct rendering of the present, or rather imperfect, participle — ' were cngafjed 
 in sending for,' cf. i. 38. Kara <rrd<Tiv — 'domestic sedition;' ' B'lir- 
 
 gerzwiste.s halher,' Kriig., connected with fir^vvroL ylyvovrai. fiiivvral-- 
 
 ' informers,' emphatic ; not simply inform. 
 
 {d.) ^vvoiKi^ovai—' are atte^nptiiig to centralize! They attempted \vhat 
 Theseus effected in Attica (cf. ii. 15) and the Thebans tried to effect in Boeotia: 
 i.e. to make the independent WXzy into municipal 5tj/ho» subordinate to their 
 own Tty^fJ^ovia. So Am., but Goll. and Popp. understand it rather of the actual 
 gathering of the population within the walls of one metropolitan city f'"" 
 purposes of defence. They compare the case of Olynthus (i. 58). So too 
 
 Thirlwall: ' The population of Mji:ilene was receiving continual additions from 
 the smaller towns under her influence, from which by persuasion or force she 
 transplanted the inhabitants within her own walls.' 
 
 le.) Vivri\iivy)v. Therefore Mytilene, not Mitylene. The former is the 
 orthography found on coins and in some of the best Greek MSS. But the latter 
 is of such frequent occurrence in MSS. of the Latin writers, that it has been 
 generally adopted. Even Mr. Grote writes Mitylene. See Duker's note, in. 25. 
 
 quoted by Ar. 
 
 (/*.) ^oiwTwv ^vyyevuv. Because Penthilus, son of Orestes, after his 
 expulsion from Peloponnesus by the Heracleids, led a colony of Bceotians to 
 Lesbos. ' The Boeotians,' says Am., ' like most of the people of the northern 
 parts of Greece, considered themselves to belong to the ^olic race— a name 
 and race of the highest antiquity, as iEolus was said to be the eldest son of 
 Helen.' The Lesbians were always acknowledged as iEolians. Hence the 
 Lesbian Sappho is '^olia puella' with Horace {Od. iv. 9. 12), and her lyric 
 strains, which he was proud to copy, ♦ iEolium carmen' {Od. iv. 3. 12). Cf. 
 Thuc. vii. 57, and viii. 100. iir^iyovrai, an uncommon u&e of the 
 
 word, but cf. iv. 56, viii. 9. Pop. tr. • hurrying in,' i. e. urgently bringing in. 
 
 Chapter III.— (a.) &pri KaQiffrafiivov — 'just commenced; 'had so 
 nccnVy broken out,' D. But would not this require a past participle ? Render 
 -'just come into full effect,' or ' operation,' 'fairly afoot^ and cf. i. i. 
 
 (ft.) xpo(nro\6/ic6(ra(r0oi A. warns us to distinguish from irpo(nro\€- 
 ,u«(rat. The first medio sensu is, ' to bring upon themselves a war with Lesbos 
 in addition to that in which they were already engaged;' the second, ' to bring 
 upon another state a war with Lesbos in addition to that in which it was already 
 
 engaged' . 
 
 (c.) y.^lCov fx^pos— 'assigning more than right, i.e. too much weight to the 
 wish, that it might not be true,' or, to the not wishing it to be true, making the wish 
 the father to the thought, as Shakspeare has it. So also oUt^ ir\4ou veifiavres, 
 xlviii. and v4fiovr€^ r^ <t>e6p((> TrXtToj/ fx4pos, Eur. Sujyp. 241. The o\rj07) refers 
 to Ti KaTvyopovfi4ya contained in Karrryopias. Bl. quotes imitations from Philo 
 Jud. and Dio Cassius which leave no doubt as to their conception of tbe meaning. 
 
 {d.) Ma\6€VTos. See note on iv. ' Nomen nihil aliud significat, nisi 
 Apollinem diKpalov, nam Dii 6.Kpa7oi multi sunt in nummis Mytilenseorum,' G. 
 who follows Miiller in his Doriajis. It was probably this Dorian word that 
 the Latins confused with ' Maleventum.' Hence the singular euphemism of 
 re-christening it ' Beneventum.' Could it, notwithstanding the difference in 
 quantity, be connected with Latin mala, a jaw ? 
 
 {e.) Kal fiv fi€V ^vfi^fi r] ir € 7 p a— bc. koXus tiv ^x^iv. Where the apodosis 
 to one of the alternatives is too obvious for misconstruction, or too disagreeable 
 for mention, it is sometimes suppressed, as here. Some editors call this 
 nposiopesis. Perhaps it is better to confine this to the last-mentioned class, 
 hke the famous ' Quos ego— sed praestat,' of ^^. i. i35. and Herod, viii. 62, (rb 
 €l ,i€V6'€« airrod Koi fiivc^v ecreai iLv^ip ay<^e6s ' ei 5^ fi^ k.t.A. To the former 
 belong the following well-known instances : 
 
 cl fi€V h(i>ffova-i yfpas nfydOvfioi 'Axaiol [koXus c^et] . . . 
 
 cl 5€ K€ (M^ dwQXTlV K.T.\. IL i. 1 37. 
 
284 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 111. 
 
 Chap. 5.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 . 285 
 
 As also Plato de Rep. 575 d : ovk oZv iav /ikv €K6vr€s inrilKuKTiv [kuXws exftl- 
 4av 56 fi^ iTTiTpfirr) rj ir6\is. And again, Protag. 325 d: koX iav fiev huv 
 ircidTirai [koXus Ix*']* ** ^* M^ &(rirsp ^v\ov €v6vpovaiv. Kriig. cf. iv. 13. 3. 
 jMore on the subject may be seen by consulting the editors on Arist. Plutus, 
 466. €<ir€i»' depends on a verb supplied fr. iarryyfKdTj, 
 
 (/.) Tas 54k a rpiijpfis. As this is not a case of 'previous mention,' 
 G611. says, 'aliquis quaerat cur addatur articulus.' It seems to me plain enough, 
 though not exactly explicable by • illae decern naves, quae /oW<? apud Athenienses 
 erant.' Does it not rather imply the known and necessary Lesbian contingent 
 — the ordinary Lesbian quota to the fleet? ^noi-fiffavro. We had 
 
 a similar usage, ii. 83, ivrhs -iroiovvrai ; cf. also yiii. i, is a(T<pa\€iav iroiclffeai, 
 and infra \i. a, or perhaps i. 87, b. 
 
 iff-) '^^V XRVO'ii-fJ^^vos. Many understand ' a favorable voyage.' See i. 
 137. b. and Kriig.'s note on Xen. Anab. v, 9. 33. Arn. considers it as simply 
 contrasted with 6S6$y as in vi. 97, oiirf irKovvy oi/Tt ddhv OTre'xci. 
 
 (h.) rd re &\\a. Arnold takes these words per se — ' in other thitigs ;' he 
 should have said * all the other things ;' and then constructs, i<pvKa(T<Tov vtpX to 
 TIfineKfffTa ruv ruxa>v ippa^d^ievoi (aura). I confess that I should in this case 
 have preferred itpvXdaaovro (though later writers I believe employ (pvXaTru 
 sine objecto). Peile objects to 4<pv\a<Taov without an accusative of the object, and 
 constructs, rd re fiAAo, twv riixS)V koI Kifiivuv trepi, ra T]fxn4KfiTTa (ppa^djxcvoi 
 i(^v\a(T(Tov. He thus makes ra &K\a agree with T)yLir4\^(rra tpya^ and both 
 governed by i<pv\a(r<rov, while ruv k.t.K. is governed by irepi post casum. ' Tkey 
 both did not go out (to the temple), and the other half-finislied works in which th^ 
 were engaged abmU their walls and harbours, they protected with barricades;' 
 or, ' as for the rest, i.e. as respected their walls and harbours, they barricaded the 
 unfinished portions' This use of Tr4pi seems somewhat unusual; the diflSculty 
 not being that it follows its case, but that it follows a noun with something to 
 be supplied from a verb, sc. ttjs <pv\di,im. But even if this interpretation be 
 right, I should still, from its position and frequent occurrence in similar col- 
 locations, make tA &\\a = 'with respect to the other matters' Otherwise 6 &\Kos 
 must have the same force as iAAoy in the common idiom, where it signifies 
 * besides,' and I scarcely think it can. Goll. makes the expression identical with 
 TO Tf &\\a i<pv\a(raroyy inpl to. T]ixiT4\€(na rwv Tfixuv Kal \ifi4vwv (ppa^d^ivoi, 
 and this is well enough, if, supposing Thucydides to have meant this, we can 
 understand why in simple narrative he should have so contorted and mis- 
 placed his words. It is not to be paralleled by similar inversions occurring in 
 speeches, or in the expression of abstruse intellectual conceptions. However, 
 as Pop. and Kriig. assent to this, the reader may adopt it. We have, as they 
 saj' (ppa^dfifvoi without an objective case in viii. 35. 
 
 Chapter IV.— (a.) 01 'Aenva7oi—&s kd^poiv. Pop. Prol. voL i. 107, 
 compares iii. 5, oi -Kp^ff^fts ws ov5iv ^\Qov Trpd^avns, and v. 28, vii. 32. 
 ^Trt€iK€i, cf. rod iKieiKovt, i. 76, and iirieiKhs rh iraph rhy yeypafMiJ,4vov v6p.QV 
 ZiKaiov, Ar. Bh. i. 13, and infra xl. c. 
 
 {b.) rwv Sia$a\\6vroi)v. We might have expected the past participle. 
 But the participle with the article becomes so thoroughly a noun substantive 
 that it drops the temporal element of its sense, so to speak, and follows the same 
 
 law. Am. translates ' the infarmers: This is a matter of some importance, 
 and has not received as prominent notice from scholars as it should have done. 
 Compare roh i-nayofx^vois, ii. 2 ; ot irpo8iSoi/T6s, ii. 5. See also 01 dia4)e{ryovTes, 
 iii. 40, and a remarkable case Soph. Elect. 334, (Edip. Tyr. 1247, y\ ri- 
 KTovffa, ' the mother: Cf. robs <pi<jyovras, i. 24. d. ; oi {nrep^aivovres, xxiii. a. ; 
 
 St. Matt. ii. 20. 
 
 (c.) \ae6yr€s rh rwv ^AQrivaiau vavriK6v. 'These arrivals and dis- 
 patches were carried on without the knowledge of the Athenian admiral; 
 chiefly in consequence of the peculiar site of the town, which had been originally 
 placed upon a little islet, divided from Lesbos by a narrow channel or euripus, 
 and had subsequently been extended across into the main island, like Syracuse 
 and so many other Grecian settlements. It had consequently two harbours, 
 one north, the other south of the town. Klei'ppides was anchored off the 
 former, but the latter remained unguarded.' — Grote, vi. 306. 
 
 {d.) rri Ma\4a. Certainly not Strabo'e Malea, or Cape Zeitoun, as that 
 was seven* miles away— a distance which would make provisioning the seamen 
 impracticable. The article, moreover (as P. remarks), implies that it is the 
 locality indicated in the word MoKSevros, and this was only c^« rrjs ir6K€a>s, a 
 spot to which the citizens went in procession— irai/STj^tef. I believe it to have 
 been the N.E. headland forming one side of the harbour. The term MaXe'a, 
 Uke the Celtic beti, or dun, the Saxon head, and many others, seems to have 
 been a descriptive word converted into a local appellation, and so applicable to 
 many places of the same kind, e.g. there was another at S. pt. of Peloponnesus. 
 The word ' gate' in our own language is applied similarly to all sorts of places, 
 sometimes close to each other. Both Arn. and Thirlwall adopt the same solution. 
 (e.) oil yhp iiriarfvov. Arn. makes roh depend on iirlarevovy and con- 
 siders (StTTc) 7rpox<wMo-€ti/ a sort of epexegesis— ' trust to the answer from Athens, 
 that it would have a prosperous issue.' But it was about the issue of their 
 application, and not that of the reply, that they were dubious. I should render 
 —'they felt no confidence in the answer that was to coinefrom Athens, that they 
 should succeed in respect of it.' Compare 4irl ti^Kov {^irpo) x«P^o-a»^ros of a 
 person, iv. 117. Peile makes Trpox^p^o-ctj/ impersonal (as ii. 56, ou fi4vroi 
 'Kpo€x^pV(r^ 7f). and rah the dative after iir-' they felt no confidence that 
 there would be a favorable issue to what depended upon the Athenians ;' and com- 
 pares airh ruv AeffjBi'wi/, iii. 6. (Pop. renders—' non confidebant legatie Atherias 
 missis ab Athcniensibus aliquid processurum,' and compares ^8n m6vra>v ahrois 
 rS>v airb ©paKTjs /ucra ^paai^ov 4iiKe6vraiv ffrpari<i>rwv for rjK6vro}v avroTs airh 
 QpJK-ns rwv 4s epdKvv fi. B. 4^. arpar. But this is a very common ellipse, whereas 
 Poppo's rois Ttaph 'AO-nvalris—airh rwv ' Aevvaiwv—iraph referring to legate, and 
 wi. to vpdyfiara, as Goll. remarks, is very different.) 5ih rov 
 
 T(\dyovs. See iii. 33. 69, iv. 8. Ta\anr<i>pws—' at great pains.' 
 
 Chapter V. — (a.) ovroi — sc. ol Mrjei/juvaToi, ut supra, ii. a. 
 
 (i.) 4k UeKonovvhaov. Peile considers this as a condensed mode of 
 expression for fiov\6iJLivoi /ueret ttjs 4k U€\oirovvi)<Tov TrapoffKevris, koL ^€t' SAAtjs, 
 «' rpo<xy4voir6 ri, Kivhvviveiv ; and so Popp. and Goll. Kriig. would strike out 
 MfTtt and make the gen. depend on n. ^o5ov /xeV riva—' did indeed 
 
 Tnake a kind of sortie,' 
 
28b 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book HI. H Chap. 10.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 287 
 
 Chapter VI. — (a.) icxvphv — ant/ strong or vigorous measure. Again iv. 
 27. b. and viii. 9. Trfpiopfii<rdft.€vot. I do not see why the absence 
 
 of the preposition is or M should greatly disquiet Am., whose interpretation 
 ' bringing round their ships to a new station on the south of the town^ seems right 
 in the main. Perhaps we might give the middle more accurately by saying— 
 ' having come round, and brought themselves to an anchor south of the town* 
 rh TTphs v6rov, ' South' ma.y as well stand independently as rh vd\at,rh 
 wapavriKay or other phrases of the sort. (Compare too irepiupfiow, irX^v ra irphs 
 rh tr f Kayos, iv. 23 ; t^ Tcphs fiffAfas^ V. 59.) GoU. connects rh irphs v6rov with 
 iteiXKrav. But what becomes of the circumvallation if both camps were on 
 the south ? 
 
 {b.) rovs 4<p6pfiovs — ' their blockaders,' cf. iv. 27. 32. See note on iii. 
 76, and on iiroiovvro sup. iii. 
 
 (c.) vavaraOixov trXoiuv Ka\ ayopas. An extension of zeugma. As 
 GoU. remarks, the idea of an ayopd was quite inseparable from a naval station. 
 On all occasions where a fleet was collected there was a market held in some 
 neighbouring spot for the supply of provisions, and the two words seem united 
 by a closer bond than (as Arn. has it) the common generic notion of ' a place 
 for anything.' Krug. (as I had myself) conjectures ayopd, which is perhaps 
 correct, the transcriber having slipt into a second genitive. 
 
 Chapter VII. — (a.) Kararhv 'AxeA-<?o»' — * on tlie side of the Achelous' 
 Am. Rather perhaps, ' over against^ or nautically speaking, * off the mouth 
 of the AchelousJ That this is the meaning seems plain from such phrases as 
 KOT^ rh uircpe'xoi/, and Karit rovs Mfaaijviovs, iii. 107. Peile has ' sailing up' 
 but surely Kara would rather mean ' down stream.' See particularly i. 46, if 
 Kara KipKvpav Tpreip^^ where it is impossible to mistake the meaning — ' that 
 portion of the mainland which lag over against Corcyra'. Similarly we must 
 interpret /caret rhv 'kKiaivi\v irorafi6v, iv. 25. 
 
 (b.) rt nfpos — ' some part,' D.; rather, *a considerable number.' Cf. i. 
 avr6Q€v — '•from the spot' i.e. the inhabitants of the district. Cf. ii. 25. 
 c. iv. 129. a.Troit\ivaavris — ' after they had left the coast' Cf. i. 
 
 137. b. 
 
 Chaptkk VIII. — {a.) ^v Vf 'OXvuirlas k.t.A. The Olympiad in which 
 Dorieus for the second time ' was victor' was the 88th = B.C. 428. So v. 49. 
 A<i)pi€vs — son of Diagoras. See Miiller's Dor, ii. 142. ivlKa again 
 
 is used as a self -containing predicate. 
 
 (6.) fJirov rolaSe. ' We should have expected (in this speech) a confident 
 sense of righteous and well-grounded though perilous eflfort, and a plausible 
 collection of wrongs and oppressions alleged against the common enemy. In- 
 stead of which the speech is apologetic and embarrassed ; the speaker not only 
 does ndt allege any extortion or severe dealing from Athens towards the 
 Mityleneans, but even admits the fact that they had been treated by her with 
 marked honour.' — Grote, vi. 309. The speaker however does allege grounds 
 for a confident expectation of the loss of independence, and liberty, and con- 
 sequently of * severe dealing' to follow in its own good time. And this to some 
 persons might seem enough, at any rate to the auditors it did. 
 
 Chapter IX. — (a.) rh fihv Ka0€(rr6s. So a\so irepieffrhs for irfpitarus. 
 'The neuter keeps w unchanged, as it originated by contraction from a6s, 
 Thucyd. iii. 9, iv. 10, with the v. r. co-roy. The best MSS. however have not 
 tf, which Bekker has adopted universally in Plato and Thucydides.'— Matthise, 
 <'i98. 3. f. So also Buttman in his Complete Grammar (quoted by A.) notices 
 the inconsistency, but says that the Attic probably followed ' der scheinbaren 
 \nalogie.' x^'^povs—' deteriorated.' Cf. note on x«'W*> ii. 45, and 
 
 iv. 114. Bl. quotes: ' Transfugse nomen, execrabile veteribus sociis, novis 
 juspectum,' Livy, xxvii. 17. a|i«cris— ' opinion, a rare sense.'— Bl. 
 
 But unfortunately it does not mean opinion ; it is * this way of guaging their 
 mlue,' of estimating their worth, which is not a rare sense. 
 
 (b.) 6i rvxoiev . . . SiaKpivoivro. Peile notices these optative forms, 
 and contrasts them with u idwhe-naav at the close of the next chapter. The 
 first form puts a purely hypothetical case— in this instance one confessedly not 
 realized {t T,tuy koI 'Ad-nvaiois ovk ^v) ; the second puts the case as a matter of 
 fact, and implies the possibility of its realization. We may add that the same 
 thin*^ takes place in Latin when si cum indicativo is contrasted with si cum 
 mhjunctivo. Nor is the fact that et Se a<^' vy^wv ijp^avro is used in cap. xi. of 
 a case which did not occur, any exception to this rule, for here the writer puts 
 the case positively, as a possibility, and demanding of the reader for the 
 moment to assume that it was so, proceeds to state what would have followed. 
 Had the optative been employed all would have remained in the regions of 
 pure hypothesis. See note upon i. 120. c. and el iSwr^e-naav—' if ever they were 
 able,' X. ad finem, said of a case which the speaker particularly desires his 
 hearer to contemplate. 
 
 (c\) yvuixri Kal evvola. The first I apprehend refers to the purpose, in- 
 tentions, OT policy of the parties; the second to the ' state of feeling,' or the 
 ' entente cordiale' between them ; tr. * agree in designs and govd iiitentions: 
 Ttp6<^a(Tis iirieiK^ s—'fair excuse or pretext.' Cf. i v. 
 
 Chapter X.— (a.) /tter' uperris Sokouo-tjs— not, 'the seeming of virtue,' 
 hMt' an opinion of each others probity;' as we use the word when we say 
 'I have no opinion of such a Tnan,' and inxoi6rpoTroi = ' congeniality of senti- 
 ment.' rpoTTos, way, has a moral import. See Theophrastus. 
 T^ SiaWdaaovri. — ' diversity of policy or sentiment.' The expression is a 
 peculiar one, and has I think a correspondingly peculiar force. The writer 
 does not mean a * passive variety,' such as subsists between inanimate objects, 
 but such as is found between persons all pulling different ways— ^Ae active 
 development of difference. o.'Ko\nr6vrwv—' when you disap- 
 
 peared, or deserted: Cf. Herod, vii. 121. * hit 6 \oi-n a— 'remained to 
 
 he done: 
 
 [b.) ^{>fifiaxoi. We may make this word govern both 'AOwaiois and 
 "iKXriffi in order to preserve the antithesis ; or we may again supply 'ABrivaloiSy 
 and consider that we have a dative, tc?s "EW-nffiv, instead of ruv 'EWiivuVy 
 because the dative is stronger, and carries with it the notion, ' for the profit or 
 benefit of the Greeks.' Kriig. makes 'Adnvaiois dative after Karadov\<aafi, 
 as in vi. 76, and therefore ^EAAtjc/i/ dat. after iKevdepaxr^i. 
 
 (c.) iirayonivovs. Arnold obelizes this, and with G. prefers iireiyo^ivovs 
 
288 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book IlL I Chip. 12 ] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 289 
 
 proposed by Ross and Bekker. Now we have the word iirayofihuv i. 3, where 
 it denotes ' bringing in an auxUiart/ from abroad; and therefore if it is to stand 
 here I should render—' making the enslaving of the Greeks auxiliary or sul 
 sidiary to their own power: This comes pretty near to Pop., ' suscipientes, gil,i 
 assumentes: Kriig. I find quotes "AiSa h6pov <p€v^iy ov^ iird^erai. Soph. Antig 
 361, and avdaiperov avrots iiriyovrai SouAetav, which confirm the view I had 
 independently taken. 
 
 {d.) hib. iroKvy\n)<piav—' on account of the much voting; i.e.somanyhavino 
 to vote. This is explained by i. 141, or from diversity of counsels. 
 Kaff %y y€v6fievoi, ' having coalesced, or formed a coalition: So infra, Ka& 
 tv yeySfxevov. 
 
 (e) avr6vofioi 5); ^vres—' as they professed, independe7it.' 
 ilvvi\Qt)<rav. See supra, ix. 
 
 Chapteb XI.— (a.) ^e$ai6r€poi. The tiro may observe that here $(^aios 
 seems to classify itself with 5^\os, SUaios, and <pav€p6s. These adjectives ame 
 with the subject of the sentence, where another would stand in the nom. neuter. 
 followed by an accusative of the subject before an infin. mood, e.g. SrjKds ianv 
 ayadhs &v, not Srj\6v iartv axrrhv iyadov that. We may often imitate the 
 idiom in English, as here : • they would have given us better security against a 
 change of policy and conduct: 
 
 (b.) Kal Trphs rh irKilov ^5tj ^Ikop k.t.K This clause is coupled with wro- 
 X^ipiovs Se €xoi/T«s robs wXdovs by »coi, and both contain the reasons for xaAtw^i. 
 npov ukStws ffifWov olafiv—' as they had the 7Jiajority of the federation in a state 
 of submission, and as our power alone, as contrasted with that greater part alreadi/ 
 in subservience, was still holding out on equal terms against them: It is quite 
 true, as Am. objects, that this clause, koX -nphs k.t.\. ought to precede the finite 
 verb ffifWop ; but this additional consideration brought in as an afterthought 
 is precisely in character with the general run of public speaking (where some 
 new reason strikes a man as he proceeds), and is quite in the style of Thucydides. 
 So nearly also Peile, who says against Arn. that vphs here does not indicate 
 comparison but contrast. Both ideas however alike arise from the local force of 
 the prep, indicating that one thing is placed beside another ; and in this situa- 
 tion their points of resemblance and diflfereuce both become more apparent. 
 ipTiiraKov—' equally balanced/ and so, * reciprocal fear: viffrhv— 
 
 * is to be relied on or affords a guarantee: 
 
 (c.) r<f M^ rrpofxcty. The MSS. vary between rh nh and ry /lii. The 
 former Matthiae explains : ' the man of unjust designs is prevented from. 
 acquiring that superioHty of force which is necessary for successful aggression! 
 Popp., thinking r^ required by the sense, interprets : * the man of unjust deHgiu 
 is deterred from aggressions by finding himself with no superiority offeree to 
 prosecute them: So too Kriig., and it is the most natural translation. 
 
 (d.) yvdffiYis fiaWov 4<t>6Sci, ff iax^os—'the encroachments of polici/ 
 rather than those of open force: 4 s r^v iLpx^jv—'in respect to or 
 
 in regard of their dominion: rit irpdyfiara refers to the hege- 
 
 monia. 8 o- u v — only Just so far as. 
 
 (/•) a^a fi^y y^p fiapTvpltp k.t.K,— ' they availed themselves of us as a 
 standing proof that those at any rate who possessed an equal right of voting 
 
 [whatever the others might do] would not Join them against their own wills [i.e. 
 while they had the right of veto and power of refusal] in expeditions, if the 
 assailed party were not to a certain extent in the wrong: This I believe to be a 
 correct and literal interpretation ; that of Arnold is certainly not literal. I do 
 not exactly understand his charge of 'confusion,' nor his saying that — *nor 
 should we Join them at alV is to be supplied after &Kovras — an idea which h* 
 Bcoms to have taken from Poppo. Still less is it desirable to read, as many 
 have suggested, fKdpras. In this I am confirmed by Peile, whose version is 
 nearly to the same eflfect, and who asserts that there is no confusion in th« 
 passage, but merely a condensation, such as is found Antig. 2 and 7, or in 
 Thuc. i. 40, or indeed in the next chapter — t* cSet ^/los iK rov Sfioiou iv* 
 Ufivois that ; where Arn. complains of no confusion. To the afia fi€p responds 
 ^i^ T^ avTtp 5e, which is to be interpreted as maX iv t^ avrif in xiii. — * while 
 at the very same time: ra Kptiriorra — a way of expressing rifius 
 
 rovs KpariffTovs more generally, because it was the speaker's olgect to show 
 that this was the general principle of the Athenian policy. 
 
 (g.) irfpirip7in€Pov — ' stripped from around them like the foliage from a 
 tree: Am. cf. ii. 13, TrtpicupfThp tlpou airap. See Isaiah xxx. 17. 
 Ttt Te\€UToTa Xitrdprcs — * leaving us to the last.' The article thus standing 
 with the predicate is suspicious. Kriig. conjectures rcKJe. But perhaps the 
 article is explicable upon the principle that the one left, after all the rest have 
 heen subtracted, becomes something definite, the remainder, and so receives the 
 article. Something of the same kind takes place with fractional numbers, 
 ra 81/0 fifpjj — two thirds. air up. ' Not the possessive genitive, 
 
 but that of the subject : u irdprfs axnol icxvp ftx^^- — Kriig. 
 rphs 5ti xP^ ffTrjpai — ^ a point d' appui — piedaterre: 
 
 vapt^xf fih ' ' • "fapdo-xv — subj. and not opt. mood, because the conse- 
 quence would be continued down to the time of speaking — * cau,se, and be still 
 causing, apprehension: Compare i. 31, ^\6op koX avrol . . . UTrtts fi^ rh 'ArriKhr 
 'rpooy(p6fifpop ifiird^iop y4prfrcu. Cf. xxii. 
 
 (A.) iTfpifyiypdixeda — sc. airrdpofioi 6pr€s, 'remained free;* or, survived 
 ike peril. 
 
 ChaptkrXII. — (a.) Tls od» aSrri fi ^t\ia iylyptra ic.tA. The article 
 is 80 awkwardly removed from irwrr^ that Dindorf conjectures and Poppo 
 approves of ^. Goller objects that it is useless to ask the question, when in 
 the Teiy terms of the question the answer is conveyed. This is a singular 
 argument, as if the Lesbians thought iri<rr)i was really the answer ; or as if a 
 man might not ask — * what sort of faithful friendship do you call this V mean- 
 ing to imply that it was none at all. His own reading however with a note 
 »f interrogation after iylyvtro does not seem objectionable, for I think we 
 might render — * <jf what sort then did this (c^rri, friendship they talk about) 
 friendship of theirs {fi <fn\la) turn out to be?* 
 
 {b.) Tapk ypd)pL7\p — 'wobei es uns nicht recht von Herzen geht: — G. And 
 80 Kriig. after Heil. — * anders als es uns urns Hertz war: But the prominent 
 part of the idea expressed by ypwfiri is not so much heartiness or sincerity, af 
 'contrary to our own better Judgment; which assured us of the real insecurity of 
 our bond of union. virtScx^^i^*^**- Popp. would read a1rc$€x^/ic9c^ 
 
 <( 
 
290 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book Hi. ■ ^.^^p, ij.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 291 
 
 A 
 
 snd Haase vrtipx^fifQa ; but it is easy to see what the word means — we received 
 one another, i.e. continued our intercourse, said of fugitives, supra, iii. See 
 T. 83 ; vi. 22. 34. So Bl. not inaptly cites Livy xxx. 14: * benigno vultu 
 excipere aliquem ; ' and Cicero pro Mil. ad fin. : '0 terram beatam quae hunc 
 virum excipiet.* 
 
 (c.) 3 T€ Tots iWois K.r.K. Am. says: * Grammar there is none in the 
 sentence ;' but proposes to explain it as ii. 40 : t rois ISlKKois afmOia fitv dpdaoi 
 Koyifffihs Sf oKvov <p4p€i — * that which in the case of others takes this shape. 
 naTnely that faith is secured by love, thut in our case takes a different form, 
 namely that faith is secured by fear* Goll. simply explains 3 t€ *und wohin- 
 yegen,' and whereas. Cf. note on ii. 40. Where all is uncertain any suggestion 
 may be tolerated. Might 3 be taken as the accusative after ^e/Satoi, and 
 irlffTis as its epexegesis ? — ' and that which among all other men friendly feding 
 for the Tnost part secures, good faith, I mean, this in our case it was our fear that 
 furnished in a trustworthy form, and it was from apprehension rather than from 
 friendship that we were retained in the position of allies.' D. has — ' toe were 
 constrained to be allies,' not noticing the force of the participle with the sub- 
 stantive verb. Kriig.'s explanation is : The full sentence would be 8 re toIj 
 &AXots /itfAtora eHvoia iroieT, tricrriv ^f^dioi, but iroxf* as not essential is omitted, 
 and the epexegetical clause is confused with the antecedent one. Poppo makf.> 
 TtUrriv $€Bcuoi a form of expression almost equivalent to a single word, *faithfullii 
 oonjirms,' and Considers that it governs 8. To this I should prefer taking 
 iriffriv almost adverbially, Kark ir. — ♦ in the matter of good faith.' 
 
 (d.) €i ykp Svvarol ^fiei/ 4k rod "iaov . . . ^ir' ^Kfiyois elvai, or 
 as G. reads Uycu. A much controverted passage. Heilmann conjectured 
 avTfwifxeKTJaai rt, ?Sei . . . tlycUf and explains — ' Waren wir in den Umstanden 
 gewesen, dass wir mit gleichem Vortheil unsere Massregeln und Anstalten 
 gegen sie nehmen konnten; so batten wir in der That bei alien jeizt 
 erwahnten Bedenklichkeiten unser Betragen nach ihrigen einrichten miissen.' 
 But how (as indeed Goll. enquires) can ' bei alien jetzt erwahnten Bedevklich- 
 Jenten ' be contained in ^*c rov SfAoiov ? Besides ^ir' iKelyois flyai is in some way 
 or other ' to be dependent upon them,' and not, ' to fram£ our conduct upon tk 
 model of theirs.' Hermann reads avr iixtWrjacd t», eSet rjixas iK rov djxolov h' 
 iKilvois thai ; and explains iv iKtlyois fhai as equivalent to rh iw 4k. flvai-^'if 
 we had possessed the power of framing measures against them, we ought to havt 
 framed such measures as a set-off, so far as they would let us' He would 1 
 suppose support himself by ^kwv thai, but the absence of the article is more 
 than suspicious. Popp. follows a second suggestion of Hermann's, and omit- 
 ting 4irl reads 4k rod dfioiov {4Kfivois) flvou — ' if it was equally in our power to floi 
 against them, and delay the execution of our plots, we ought to put ourselves on 
 an equaliiy with them in our acts' This, though ingenious, is to cut the knot. 
 and not to untie it. Goll. too, with some show of reason, contends that 4k rot 
 6fxoiov fhai cannot be * similes in agendo esse, nihil significant nisi, in gleickn 
 Umstanden sein. Agendi notionem auctori inferciens obtrusit.' G.'s own 
 method is to read i«Vcu, and retain the interrogative rl — ' Why if our power 
 were eqtcal {4k rov dfiolov) should we assail them ? Why sJiould we be the first to 
 attack, if we possessed the power to defend ourselves on equal terms ? ' Some 
 again explain 4k rov dfiolov — ^ after having been in a position of equality,' li^*' 
 4k fihy fipijyrjs iroAc/ietv, k.t.A. i. 120, and ru<p\h5 4k SeSopKtJros, (Ed. Tyr. 454- 
 
 But then the direct and very Thucydidean correspondence of the clause with 
 ^»f TotJ ^(roi; preceding is lost. Finally Arn. makes 4k rov S/jloIov = dfxoicos — *in 
 like manner as we now are,' which is too unnatural to require confutation. His 
 objection about xnrh and 4tt\ is answered below. I confess that aU these methods 
 seem to me unsatisfactory, and that I adhere to the common-sense explanation 
 of the Scholiast, cl 'yap Xaoi avrots inrf}pxojJ.fy . . . ri cSct r]fxas 4ir' 4Kelyois raxBrJ^ 
 m ^ vTOKoveiv avrols ; — ' if we really stood upon this equality with them [i. e. in 
 the power of counterplotting, and deferring the execution of our plots— if we 
 could afford, like them, to wait], why did we not assert it ; and what need was 
 there for us, being upon an equal footing [i. e. if we were as you say upon an 
 equal footing], to be at their beck and call?' Against this Goll. brings three 
 arguments, (i) That this is not the real question (i.e. num Mytilensei in 
 potestate Atheniensium esse debuerint ?). (2) They could not call themselves 
 iffoi if they were inr' 'kdf\vai(av rerayfifyoi. (3) eVi riyi ehai is not the same 
 as vr6 rivi thai. To these I reply : (i) It is the question, for the Mytilenseans 
 are showing that circumstances proved them not to have been in that state of 
 (piXla and irttrr^ eKfvdepia which the Athenians pretended, and that therefore as 
 the weaker party they were justified 4y ry irpoairoarrivai. Cf. supra. (2) On 
 the contrary they are showing that the hypothesis of their being 4k rov Xcov 
 is false. (3) True; but the very difference between the prepositions is what 
 might be anticipated, xnrh would have denoted the usual position of subjects 
 in which they did not profess to be ; 4it\ denotes that state of modified 
 dependence in which they were, and which I have endeavoured in the transla- 
 tion to express. Kriig. reads, et 70^ k.t.A. ayrifieW^ffal riy ISet rjfxas 4k rov 
 ifiolov 4^' 4K€iyovs icVai, meaning, I suppose — ' if we had been so far on a footing 
 of equality as to be enabled to make counterplots and preparations, we ought 
 on this equal footing to have assailed them. ruv 45 ^/aos deiyuv — 
 
 ' the delay in putting into execution their violent rneas^ires against us' 
 
 Chapter XIII. — {a.) Trpo<p<i(r€is — ^ alleged causes.' airias — 
 
 'grounds of complaint.' 4yofilCoix€v airoariiaeffdai k.t.A. — 'wethought 
 
 to effect (or we held that we should be about to make) a twofold withdrawal, one 
 from the Greeks in general, so as not to co-operate with the Athenians in injuring 
 them, a second from the Athenians, so as not ourselves to be destroyed by them, 
 hut rather to do it first' (sc. destroy them). The conceit, and it is a poor one, 
 though acceptable to the Greek taste, depends upon the two meanings of 
 aTotrr^o-ecr^at, the first denoting simple absence, the second revolt. For (1) 
 Arn. cites iv. 118, ovZevhs a.iro<Tri)crovrai bffa hy SUaia Aeyr/Tc ; for (2) we 
 need not seek far anywhere in Thueyd. (e. g. xxxix. air6<rraa-is ruy ^iai6y ri 
 roffxSyruy 4<rriv). Goll. says, 4yofii^ofi€y, sc. Seti/ aTroa-r-fiacffdai. But Peile 
 notices the similarity of the English idiom as given above, and to prove the 
 impossibility of supplying St7y (as in the orators) quotes xxiv. : vofilCovres 
 m^Tra <r«/>os ravr-qy airrovs inroroTrqaai rpimadai — 'expecting, what was the 
 fact, that thy [the Peloponnesians] least suspected that they [the Plataeans] had 
 taken that road.' He adds iv. 9, 4in(Tirdaa(Tdai avrovs Tjyeiro irpodvu'fio'ejdai — 
 ' lie calculated upon his having tem'pted them to venture for it.' The truth is, 
 that here, as in the vynad/xeyoi of ii. 42, these verbs have a sort of ' sensufi 
 prseguana ; ' they imply an affirmative rather than a negative issue. 
 
 U2 
 
292 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. ■ cbap. 1 7.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 293 
 
 (b.) fii) |uv KUKws voKiv. This apparent tmesis is so rare that some 
 MSS. exhibit ^wkokus, and all editors hesitate about it. Tmesis it can scarcely 
 be considered, for, as Bloomfield has remarked, the expression kcocws ^vfxiroK'if 
 would by no means be equivalent The three words ^wKaKMsvoiuv seem to 
 me to be used as a single verb, since there was no exact antithetical one to 
 ^vv€\€v6fpovv at hand, and yet the anxiety of the Mytilenaeans to make a point 
 was too great to be restrained by ordinary grammatical considerations. Kriig. 
 too says ' Itry/coKCDsiroifTi' ware eigentlich in einem Worte zu schreiben, gleichdem 
 ivTfviroi(7y, avT^virflfffraiy' and refers to his grammar, § 42. 5. Or we may cod- 
 gider, with GolL, ^vv as an adverb, which opens out the question concerning the 
 adverbial usage of prepositions. Matthiae holds that in the early stage of the 
 language ' the prepositions really served as adverbs, which were put either im- 
 mediately before or after the verbs. At a later period, however, particularly 
 in Attic, the composition became more firmly established, and the prepositions 
 were considered part of the verb,' § 594. a. Similarly Jelf, § 640, * In Homer 
 the prepositions are used both in their primary force as local adverbs, and in 
 their secondary force as prepositions.' This, however, happened more rarely in 
 Attic poetry, and scarcely ever in Attic prose. Jelf produces a few instances of 
 the adverbial irp6s, e.g. Demosth. 835. 68 : BUaioi 5' ^<rr 4\€f7v . . . ^/uaj . , , crfpo- 
 fifvovSf Koi irphs vrb tovtuv ifipi^ofifvovs, and ib. 491. 112. See Iviii. infra, 
 irpbs 5* KoX yrjv. 
 
 (c.) itpddparat . . . Tfrdx<trai. On these forms, relics of the old Ionic 
 in the Attic dialect, cf. Matth. § 204. 6. They seem to have passed out of 
 use by the time of the orators. irfpiovatav — ^reserve' 
 
 cf. i. T^ B€{>T€pov — 'second time* in the same season ; the first 
 
 was recorded in i. &ti<f>or4puv — * us both.' Lacedaemonians and 
 
 Mytileneans. Jii* ^v . . . a><p«\€iTat — ' through the instrumentality of 
 
 which Attica is advantaged.* Cf. note, i. 83 (and 5i' ^v larxvofifVy xxxix.). 
 li€iy6T€pa K.T.A — 'worse than those who were in slavery before our revolt! 
 This is explained by what Cleon says, xxxix. : Xf^" 5i M\m\-i)vaiovs koL riXu 
 firfSfv hio/pipovras ra>v HWcou ixpt* rifiuy rerifiTiadai k.t.\. €Tx«t€ — 'ye have 
 
 hitherto had.' See i. 101, 114. iKfvdfpovyrts ipalvriaO^ — 'appear 
 
 in the character of liberators* rh Kpdros — • the upper hand (or the 
 
 superiorUy in the war) secured to you* 
 
 Chaptbb XIV. — (a.) is vfias — • hopes which look to you, whose object you 
 are,* The phrase i\vi((iv tU rwa is, according to Pop., often found in later 
 writers. iaa Ka\ iKirai — ♦ all are as suppliants* ' we and suppliants 
 
 are equal things* The explanation (as Am. remarks) of the Latin phraBes, 
 * seque ac,' ' simul ac,' is similar. See vii. 71. 
 
 (6.) rhv kIvZvvov TrapafiaWofitvovs. We need not object to this, be- 
 cause no physical object follows the verb, any more than we should object to 
 ftuch expressions as ' run the risk* or ' hazard of the die* or hvappiirrfai 
 Kiv^vvoy, iv. 85. Cf. with Kriig. iyd^ <roi vapafid^Xo/xai Bpiivovs, Eurip. Iph- 
 in T. 1094. XSiov {altogether our ovm) as opposed \a Koiyr\v (eqtudl^ 
 
 belonging to all). 
 
 (c.) yiyyeadf 5i — 'approve yourselves men, such as Greece has a claim 
 upon you to be, and our apprehensions unmldfain have you.' 
 
 Chapteb XV. — (a.) i(rfio\^y — governed by &>s irot7j(r<Jfifi/o<, and therefore 
 no anacolouthon, though, as Am. remarks, probably more from accident than 
 the fixed forethought of the writer. i<ppa^ov livai — ' bade go* This 
 
 syntax recurs, vi. 58, vii. 73. 
 
 {b.) ro7s S{/o fi4p€(Tiv. Ref. to note, ii. 10. 
 
 (<?.) d\Kovs, from e\Ku> — 'levers* or 'rollers* a sort of wooden cylinder. 
 This feat, which was not unusual, implies more mechanical skill than we could 
 have anticipated. See iii. 81, iv. 8, viii. 7. Pop. informs us (from Strabo, 
 380), that the spot where this was done bore the name of aIoKkos, and that 
 Livy, xlii. 16, describes the process as * traducere per isthmum.' And so Horace, 
 ' Trahuntque siccas machinae carinas,' Od. i. 4. 2. They probably started from 
 the Corinthian port Lechaeum. Kapirov. Sine articulo. As in 
 
 other cases of familiar mention (i.8). Cf. ' Harvest home.' 
 appuxTrla—'lazy disinclination.* Cf. with Pop. vii. 47, viii. 33, and with Bl. 
 ippwaros, Xen. (Econ. iv. 12. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — KardypaxTiv. (a.) There is no necessity to resort to the 
 metaphorical meaning of a judicial condemnation, as that itself rather arises from 
 the primary sense of the word as used here — * a looking down upon a thing in our 
 judgment of it,' ' despicere.' Hence it is—' the despicable (sensu activo) opinion 
 formed of their weakness* or, ' the undervaluing of their strength* This seems 
 a more correct view of Kara in composition than what A. says, ' to think at,' or 
 as we say, ' to think of a person.' We may cf. iii. 45, vii. 51, and KaratppovCiy, 
 viii. 8, KaraxppoviicTavTfS 'Adrjvaiwv a^vvafiiay. 
 
 (6.) avroi. The armament, therefore, would consist of the third class, or 
 {eiryiTai, and the fourth, or the 0f)T6s. The Solonian classes were : 
 
 1. •KiVTaKocriop.ilipLvoiy possessed of 500 medimni per ann. in com, wine, or oil. 
 
 2. liTTTus, possessed of 300 medimni — capable of maintaining a war-horse. 
 
 3. ^ixr/iTai, possessed of 200 medimni — capable of maintaining a pair of 
 
 mules or oxen. 
 
 4. fibres, all possessed of less than this sum. 
 
 Arn. calculates the medimnus at one bushel and a half, English measure, and 
 the price of corn 2 drachmae per medimnus. See Bockh, Econ. Athens, ii. 2^9, 
 E. T. Grote states the medimnus to be equal to about if of the imperial 
 bushel ; therefore 500 medimni = 700 bushels = 87^ quarters. 
 
 (c.) thv irapd\oyov. Here apparently a substantive, as in i. 78, vi. 85 — 
 ' the contradiction to their expectations (or calculations) to be great* ' Seeing a 
 thing which was a great surprise to them* Peile. &iropa. Popp. refers 
 
 this to rh fntdevra — ' the charges (or injunctions) of the Mytileneans were difficult 
 of execution.' Kriig. considers this interpretation ' strange,' and would translate 
 generally 'difficulties* as ii. 3. Read Grote, iiL 1 55-1 61. 
 TipioiKila — where their periceci lived — ' their frontier territory* 
 
 Chapteb XVII. — ly rots irXciCTot. See note oni. 6. The remainder is 
 difficult — iyivovro avrots. Sfio ivipyoX /cdAXet seems to mean — 
 
 ' ai the same tiTne on active service in handsome trim.* ' Fatendum est hie dis- 
 plicere additum KaWei,' says Pop. Perhaps so, but the word is used with 
 that sort of fondness and pride common to nautical nations on such a topic. 
 
294 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Goll. makes a stronger connpction between iutpyol and KaWti — ' effective from 
 good condition' and Am. (ed. ii.) approves of it. But this seems to me very 
 weak and tautological, nor could their KdXXos be rightly called the cause of their 
 efficiency. Kriig. suspects an error or lacuna in the text. Peile (ed. ii.) 
 renders — 'and at this time when the i<30 ships were afloat they had for display 
 (or to show) one of the most numerous fleets that they ever had on service at the 
 same time: Arnold's and GoU.'s version—* in a state of efeciiveness from their 
 pood condition' — he rightly says, would require ry KiWfi. He considers 
 KtiAAet the dativus consilii— *for show,' 'to make a show with.' riiv 
 
 T€ ykp 'Attik^v IC.T.A. The question is, do these words refer to the present 
 occasion — rhv ■xp6vov rovrov, or to i,pXoiJ.4i/ov rov iro\(fiov? Dale makes the 
 reference to the first, Pop. to the latter, because Thucyd. says ircpi Uori^aiay 
 not TTfpl Ae(T$ov, and he refers for rrjv 'Attuc^v i<pv\aff(rov to ii. 24, for Trfp\ n. 
 €T6pat kKar6v, ii. 17, for irepl UorlZauav, i. 57. 61. Am. explains the apparent 
 inconsistency about the reserve of one hundred triremes (ii. 13. 24) by suppos- 
 ing that these were not laid up till late in the summer. There could not have 
 been 100 irepi -njK *Attmc^j/ when the Piraeeus was so nearly surprised. 
 vTraviXaxTf. The preposition exerts its force as clam — ' secretly expended.' Cf. 
 Aristoph. lUpaxt^oi k.t.A. This is a locus classicus for Bockh 
 
 and others who have treated of the Athenian finance. See v. 47, viii. 29. 45. 
 hifJFoXiSpKriaa P — * served throughout the whole siege ' — tyiuvav ews oAwcrcwj t^j 
 ir(JA.€«y, Sch. thv avrhv fj^taBSv. Bl. observes that this means, the 
 
 sailors and soldiers serving on board the fleet had a drachma per day, as being 
 without servants ; so vi. 31, Zpaxfiw tris rjntpas ry vavrri fKdffrtp. Some editors 
 have drawn a distinction between ll<pfpov fiiae6v, said in reference to the payers, 
 and 4<p4povTo fiiaQdv, said in reference to the recipients. But <pfpi<rQai fiiffdhy is 
 not found in Thucydides ; and for the active see Xen. Anab. i. 3. 21. 
 
 Chapteu XVIII. — (a.) oi iirlKovpoi* Those mentioned v. and vi. 
 
 irpovx^P^i' Cf. i. 74. 
 
 (6.) iK^orjeeias—'a sortie,' cf. i. 105. ravra . . . Kparovvras. 
 
 A similar case of a masculine participle in epexegesis to a neuter pronoun is 
 given by Kriig. from Soph. Philoc. 1355, irws . . . | ravr' ^|oycMrx^<r€<r0€, romv 
 *Arp4a>s I fft^ ^vvSvra trauriv ; 
 
 (c.) ouT€p€Tai. See note on i. la and vi. 91, united in one predicate with 
 
 {d.) iyKarcpKo^Sfi-nrai, This perfect following the pres. hist, secnaed 
 to Poppo (ed. i.) 'intolerable' — an opinion apparently shared in by most 
 other editors. Am. at first proposed to interpret it of the completion 
 of the towers, meaning, I suppose, ' were finished off' as we say, but this 
 he has given up. I had myself thought reference might be parenthetically 
 made, not to the Athenian operations, but to some oi.tworks of the town 
 already existing, or perhaps perfected by the Athenians before they connected 
 them by a wall. This was the way at least in which Caesar surrounded 
 Pompey at Dyrrhachium, as may be seen by the passage to which Am. refers: 
 ' Erant circum castra Pompeii permulti editi atque asperi colles ; hos pnmum 
 presidiis tenuit castellaque ibi communiit' &c. — Bellum Civ, iii, 37. Pop. 
 (ed. ii.) seems to sanction the perfect, if I understand his somewhat obscure 
 
 Chap. 21.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 295 
 
 note • ' Sententia est, ilia cast^Ua in locis natur& jam munitis (et ek de causA 
 !d ilia recipienda idoneis) operi continuo quo urbs circumdaretur m^dificat^ 
 le^sicut turres apud Plat^a^.' The 4y compounded with the verb refers 
 L Pop. and Kriig. say to the connexion of the ^poip^a with the a^Kovv rux^ 
 ^' built into the wall.' 
 
 Chafi^b XIX.-(a.) Ka\ ahTol i<r.v.yK6vr.s. On the i<r<popk or 
 'voluntary contribution' of the citizens, as distinct from the ^.^s or tribute 
 of the allies, consult the Diet, of Antiquities. Pop. thinks it uncertain 
 whether the i<r<l>oph was now first instituted, or an 4<r<popa of 200 talents 
 now demanded for the first time, airol is I think simply contrasted witb o» 
 tiauuxot, and does not refer to any previous contribution on their part. Krug. 
 8 of opinion from xvii. that t(Jt. rrpi^roy may well refer o^ly ^o^^^ 
 present war AvaiKXU. Probably the Lysicles included by Aris- 
 
 tophanes in his list of post-Periclean demagogues {Eq. 132). He married 
 ABpasia after the death of Pericles. There is a very favourable account of him 
 in Mr. Lewes's Pericles and Aspasia.- See 1x)o Plutarch, V. Penel. 24. Grot«. 
 (6.) *Avaura>y. Cf. iv. 75 and viii. 19. 
 
 Chapter XX.- ^trrj^rj^a^cVou, a sort of technical term, having in- 
 itiated See Xen. His. i. 6. 8. Kriig. cf. eicrvyovmo irSpov xpVi^^rtcv, Polyb. xi. 
 ,5. 8. ' Cf. also ^oZv.0, inf. xxii. ^^rpar^7--equiva knt to crrpa- 
 
 l.),,iy 4$ hiaKotrlavs. Pop. refers to Matthi*, § 578, 
 
 X interprets is as 'about.' But surely Am. is right in saying 'up to' is the 
 meaning of is in this and all the other passages collected by Matth. 
 ;vv.M^Tp^,ra.To-mid. voice-' co^^^^^.' Kriig. well compares ^^u^iMerpncra. 
 U r^y&fmy rvs W^pris, Herod, iv. 158. raZs in.^oKa.s- layers. 
 
 Bl. cites an interesting parallel from Livy: ' Unus ex Romams ex pro- 
 pinquo murum cont^mplatus, numerando lapides, ^stimandoque ipse secum 
 uuid in fronte paterent singuli, altitudinem muri, quantum proxime conjecture 
 poterat. permensus ' (xxv. 23), with which cf. Polybius vu. 105. 
 )iaKnxZt.iyo.-^.i<pe.., rh Kovi^ XP^^v, Y^nsUXh.-^ whUewash^d Bl 
 ^thyroughly {H) whitewashed; Am. ^^ * ifiovKovro- for tl^ 
 
 „thit they w^hed: A. I preter Pop. version-' worauf su Unwdlten - 
 ^ J much of the wall as they wanted to see,' Kaeopcc,...ov{rovrov).s t rov 
 r^ixovs ifioixo^rro. |.^^er pt,cr.v fAa^o.. This coincides nearly 
 
 with the English idiom 'to take the Tmasure,' and the German ezn Mass 
 nehmen: but Poppo calls attention to its unusual occurrence in Greek, and 
 quotes Plut. jEmU. Paul. 15, f^Mcp Kal Sf 6pyd.o>y e^Arj^e.a. Zok^.t^. f.erpr,ai.. 
 
 Chapter XXI.-(a.) rv olKoSo^^^re.. Am. quotes with apparent ap- 
 probation, 'Pro olKono^^ia agnoscit Pollux, vii. 117/ Wass. But surely the 
 word is tme to the meaning always attached to supposed derivatives from 
 the 2nd person of the perf. pass., 'its building,' i. e. its mx>de of constructum. 
 Cf last note ^vo robs ir^pifidkovs. The usual method (see a 
 
 similar description, Livy v. 4) but xviii. sup. states, ..pn..xiCov<r. Mur^A^nj. 
 iv KtJKAy airAcp rc^x^i. 'Vide Causabon. ad Polyb. 181, apud quern multa 
 Bunt quibus Thucydidea Plataeamm circumvallationis descriptio pulchre 
 
296 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book IH. I Chip. 22.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 297 
 
 p.. 
 
 illustratnr.' — Dukep. olKi]fxara stands in the predicate — '/or 
 
 dwelling-places assigned severally to the sentries.' Am. has asked, 'Can it be 
 good Greek to say t^ fi6Ta|u rovro olK-fifiara t^KoZ6fxf]ro ? and decides in the 
 negative, after translating it, ' this interval had been built upon to make 
 quarters* But on the same principle which makes a verb between two nomi- 
 natives agree in number with the latter, we may argue that it also does so in 
 sense, and accordingly tfKoh6fir\ro has a closer affinity to olicfuxara than to rh 
 fura^b rovro. Or we might translate — ' this intermediate space had been built up 
 so as to become separate barrack rooms, and these were connected one with the 
 other.* oiK-fjuaTa in this ease stands as the epexegesis of rh fifra^v rovroy and I 
 see that Poppo now (in his last editirai) has 'appositio quae sequitur similiscst 
 iis de quibus explicat Matthiae, Gr. Gr. § 428. 5.' Kriig. would refer Iwvex^ 
 not to ra oiK-nnaia, but to the walls themselves which these intermediate 
 oucfifiara connected. 
 
 (6.) 5ii S4Ka iTr<i\^€a>if — ^ at intervals of ten turrets {ov pinnacles y battle- 
 ments),* i.e. there were ten turrets between two of the greater towers. So Pop., 
 'male, ac? decimam quamque pinnam.* Vail. Port. Vig. p. 587, * post denas 
 primasy interjeetis denis pinnis* ndpohov /x^ slvai. The walls of the 
 
 trvfyyoi were built so close up to the two external walls that there was no room 
 to pass between them (i.e. outside of the irvpyos)y but those who went along 
 the wall, passed through the towers. Cf. ai 8io5ot rwv vvpywvy xxiii. 
 
 (c.) x^^h^v voT€p6s. Arn. points out that the same thing is described 
 in xxii. by the words x^'M^'p'^^ uSart koI avffxfp — ' wintrt/ (i.e. stormy) weather 
 with rain* Cf. x^^h^^ iv. 6, and x^'M^''*'^ ovros — ' a storm raging,' next chap. 
 
 Chapteb xxii. — {a.) ^6<p(f is governed by avmrarayovvros. 
 rhv apicmphv wdSo ^ji6vov. Arn. understands this to mean that the ri^/i< 
 foot was bared, to prevent slipping in the mud, and quotes Sir W. Scott— 
 
 * Each better knee was bared to aid 
 The warrior in the escalade;* 
 
 but the knee is not the foot, and scaling a wall is a very different matter from 
 walking in the mud. Grote (vi. 319) contends that the bare foot is very likely 
 to slip in the mud, and that such slipping might be prevented by sandals or 
 -covering particularly adapted to that purpose. So we tie flannel round our feet 
 when walking on glaciers. He also urges with Wasse that the warrior who i.^i 
 to use his right arm requires to have his left foot firmly planted. Perhaps 
 Am. might have replied that the present was an affair of walking or running 
 and not of fighting, and that fidvov discountenances Grote's idea. However 
 with respect to this passage I believe Bl. to be in the right. ' As a further 
 proof of their lightness of equipment they were shod on one foot only, the left, 
 for security against the mire, while the right was left bare and unshod for 
 lightness.* That such was sometimes the case with the Greek soldiery he 
 proves from Eurip. Mdeagr. Frag. 14 — 
 
 oi Z\ Qfffrlov 
 K6poi rh \aihv txvos avdpfi't\oi irodds, 
 rhy 5* iv vfSiKots ws i\d(ppi(oy y6yv 
 I^XOif^' hs iSv; iruaiv Alru^ois ySfios. 
 
 The Latin writers furnish instances of leaving either foot bare. Thus the 
 
 Samnites {Livj ix. 40) had ' sinistrum crus ocreA tectum.' But the legionaries 
 
 ofPraeneste — 
 
 * Tegmen habent capiti : vestigia nuda sinistri 
 
 Instituere pedis, cnidus tegit altera pero.' — Mn. vii. 690. 
 
 The passage from Arist. Lost Poetics, if genuine (Macrob. Saturnal. v. 18), is 
 much to the point : St* yiip olfiai rhv rryov/xBt/ov (the right foot) ^x^iv ikouppSvy 
 oAA' ov rhv ifXfjLfvopra (the left foot). 
 
 [h.) avf^aivov — avi^7\. I have elsewhere discussed the distinction be- 
 tween the aorist and imperfect at length (Appendix II.). A.'s note, written 
 without the intention of supporting any theory, is exactly in accordance with 
 that which I have endeavoured to maintiin. 'The imperfect represents,' he 
 says, ' the party in the act of mounting the wall ; the aorist records the fact that 
 their commander was the first man to mount it.' oi eirSfxevoi e{ 
 
 —'those who followed, that is to say, six.* See with Kriig. Xen. Anab. i. 2. 3. 
 KfpafiiSa — ' the tiling of the roof* Bl. cf. Mn. ix. 558, 'altaque certat pren- 
 dere tecta manu.' rh deivhv — ' the cause of the alarm* 
 
 (c.) idopv^ovyro . . . fifvovres — * they caught the alarm, it is true, and 
 were ready to act in their several stations,' Arn. Kara x^pav. Gf. Kara 
 
 XUffcof iyevoyrOy next chap. 
 
 [d.) at rpiaKdaioi. The article is objected to because there has been no 
 •previous mention.' But surely tlie eh ireruKro limits, defines, and points out 
 the individuals sufficiently to justify the use of the definite article. Am. well 
 compares viii. 15, ras ixev oKrlb ijSrj irefxireiVy at oLTroXiirovaai r^v <pv\aK^v . . . 
 avaitexo(yf}Ke(Tay — where the latter clause performs the same defining office for 
 the ras oktw vavs. 
 
 («.) <\>pvKro\ iro\4ixtoi — * war beacons;' * beacons to indicate the presence 
 of an enemy.* From this place, and Ixxx., Arnold (against the Schol. and 
 Polybius X. 40) infers the existence of considerable proficiency in the art of 
 signalling, for the beacons must have indicated something more than the 
 presence of an enemy (e.g. the nature and direction of his movements), or the 
 counter-lights of the besieged would have been useless. See what has been 
 said ii. 94. 
 
 (/.) irapayTa-xoy . . . 2ir«y affatpij ra <rrjfi€ta jj . . . Kol fi^ fiori- 
 6o7ev. Arn. considers that the subjunct. indicates the imnwdiate, the optative 
 the secondary and 7nore remote consequence of the action contained in the 
 principal verb. Peile objects — * it might with more justice have been said that 
 the subjunctive represents the certain, the optative the possible, effect of what 
 the Plataeans did.' But the truth is, that both come round to the same thing, 
 an immediate consequence being regarded naturally as more certain, a remote 
 one more in the light of a probability. The subject of the change of moods has 
 certainly been well * ventilated' of late years : by Matthise, § 518. 3; Arnold, 
 ad h. locum; Pflugk ad Eurip. Hec. 11 20; Hermann on Viger, p. 350; 
 Tate on Dawe's Canons, Classical Museum, no. vi. ; Jelf, Gr. Gr. § 809 ; 
 Blakesley on Herodotus, lib. i. c. 9. Nevertheless as mere references are often 
 futile, I will submit ' oculis fidelibus,' for the benefit of the younger student, 
 some of the most remarkable instances of the idiom: Thucyd. vii. 17, vavs at 
 KopiVfiiot iirX.T]povyj hirus vavfiax^as re airoTeipda'caa'i [the direct and iname- 
 
 <^l I 
 
1 1 
 
 298 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. Bchap. 25.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 299 
 
 i . i 
 
 diate result, in their own power], koI ras 6\K<iSas avruv ^ffcov oi ^Adijvcuoi 
 
 KfoXvoKv avcup€iv [a secondary and contingent result — in their hopes]. Eurip. 
 
 Hec. 1 1 20 — 
 
 ^ficra firf <ro\ TroKf/xios \€i<p6f\s 6 vais 
 
 Tpoiaif kdpoiffri koX ^vvoiKiffri -irdKip 
 [a direct consequence, and therefore regarded as very probable], 
 
 yvdvres 5' 'Axowol ^aivra Hpiaixiduv rtva 
 ^pvywv is alay adBis^ aXponv <tt6\ov 
 
 [a result contingent upon the first, and therefore less certain]. 
 Similar is Herod, viii, 76 : rCovhi flv^Ktv hvi^fov ras lojas, Iva 5); ro7(riv "EXXTjtri 
 fiijSe <pvy4fiv 4^^ [a result depending upon themselves which they could secure]. 
 ^AA' airoKafKpdfvrfs iv rp ^aXafxivi 8ot€i' rlffiv /c.t.A. [a result contingent upon 
 the first, for which they hoped]. Compare id. ix. 51: tj/a koi uSoti ^x**"^' 
 Xpvo^Qcuy Kol oi iinrUs ffipcas fiv ffivoiaTo [the first being a result which 
 they could count on much more securely than the second]. On the same 
 principle is to be explained id. i. 53, ivftpciTav ra xpV<^''^P^°- *' <rTpaT({)Tjr<u 
 ixl U4paas [the first tiling to be done, and in his own power], koI cf rtvo 
 crparhv avhpaiv irpoffQioiro ipiXov [a second thing, contingent upon the first, and 
 depending on the will of others]. Compare with this the long passage from 
 Xen. Cyrop. ii. 4. 10 quoted Jelfs Gr. Gr. § 839. 4. b. Poppo has two referencts 
 in the Latin language — 
 
 ' MaiA genitum demittit ab alto, 
 
 Ut terrae atque novae pateant Carthaginis arces 
 
 Hospitio Teucris, ne fati nescia Dido 
 
 Finibus arceret.' — jEn. i. 298 ; 
 
 and Tl&ntua, Miles Glor. ii. i. 52: 'Dedi tabellas mercatori, qui ad illnra 
 deferat . . . ut is veniret^ See the commentators, &c. quoted by Forbiger on the 
 former passage. On the circumstances see Grote, vi. 320. I have written a 
 long note, because despite the 'magni nominis umbra' of Hermann, I cannot 
 accept as a full account of the matter his remark on Viger (p. 350) : *0b- 
 servandum optativum praesentibus jungere antiquos et diligentes scriptores ubi 
 finem indicant hunc esse, non ut quid fiat sed ut quid possit fieri.' See note 
 supra, xi. iiPrt\dPoivro—\\t. got hold of, therefore, * secured their 
 
 safety.' Cf. iv. 128, vii. 60. 
 
 Chapter XXIIL— (a.) ol 8e vtrtpPaivoyrfs . . . &irep4Paivov. ' Thix 
 is another instance of the subject being first stated universally, and then 
 divided into its several parts, and of the nominative case being used to express 
 both the whole subjects.' See Pop. Proleg. i. 1 07. Am. tr. — * the scaling party! 
 because it includes those who had not yet mounted. Cf. supra, iv. 
 ii6Sovs — * doorways in the tower,' like a college gateway. 
 
 (h.) &yood€v. Because some had clambered up to the top of the towers. 
 Kdrwdev—from the basement story of the towers. Kriig. connects arh ruf 
 irvpywv with elpyov — * they kept off the enemy, as they pressed forward, from w 
 towers, by discharging volleys at them from above and below.' ''"''^ 
 
 rdippo V — ' the outer ditch.' kwXvt^s yiyvoiro—' prove an impedim' ni. 
 
 Somewhat stronger than icwAuot, but cf. with Pop. i. 35, viii. 86, and ^ijvut^t 
 Liy€T(U, i. 132. ret yvfiyd — ' their unprotected side.' 
 
 voAfirws KaX ^iai<as^^ with difficulty and hard pressed by the foe* Cf.ii. 33. 
 \oUs aini\i(l>rov ^ pop4ov — ' such as usually is found when the wind is east 
 \mtead of north.' Schol. Am. who follows him, makes an ellipse of fiaWov 
 before ^ as in the line ifio\ viKphs t60j/t;k6i', fj Kflvois y\vKv5 {Ajax, 966), and I 
 suppose connects the second fxaWov with wSoTt^ST^s — ^rather watery.' The 
 expression is certainly awkward. It appears from the Constantinople Scholiasts 
 and others that the north wind brought snow and frost, the east wind soft 
 weather and thaw. Therefore why is the ice described as vdarudris under two 
 opposite conditions of atmosphere ? A. gets rid of the difficulty as above ; 
 but GoU. objects, irucphs like some other adjectives stands as a comparative, 
 and is no support to this passage. Dobree strikes out v Pop4ov as a gloss. 
 Poppo suggests that yLoKKov has been transposed, or vZaruZtis introduced as a 
 gloss, but acquiesces in A.'s interpretation. GoU. retains the reading of the 
 text, supposing an xifiardihris frost probable with either wind. This is re- 
 jected by Am., but I think he misunderstands the argument. 'Under what 
 wind; he says, ' could it [the frost] take place, if it could neither be with an 
 eastwindnor a north?' We might I suppose reply, under no wind at all. 
 Frost takes most effect when there is no agitation of the atmosphere ; these two 
 winds, north and east, are specified because, as the most prevalent, they most 
 frequently converted the frost into a slushy state. I therefore believe that 
 Thucyd. intended a comparison between frost in a calm atmosphere and 
 I frost with these winds, not between such frosts as severally accompany them. 
 Kriig. agrees with Am. v'irov€i<pofi4vn— 'partially besnowed (or 
 
 accompanied by partial snow).* 
 
 (c.) t n6\ts K.T.A. — 'h may be governed by iTrepaitodijcrav as the case is 
 sometimes accommodated to the finite verb rather than to the proximate parti- 
 ciple. Cf. iv. 24, vi. 87. But uircpc'xeiv also occasionally takes an accusative.' 
 I —Pop. See Lid. and S. 
 
 Chaptek XXIV.— (a.) rh rod 'kvBpoKpdrovs rip<fov. Near the foun- 
 tain of Gargaphia, as we learn from Herod, ix. 35. He was one of the Plataean 
 tutelary heroes, such as were invoked by Archidamus, ii. 74, and is mentioned 
 as such by Plutarch, Aristides, 325. Wass. 
 
 {h.) T^v irphs KieaipSiva. The student who would investigate the topo- 
 graphy of the places mentioned here, must refer \o Sir W. Gell's map and 
 memoir appended to A.'8 third volume. 
 
 (c.) \a^6pLtvot Tuv 6 pay—' having taken to the hills' (as our idiom is). 
 The middle force is the same as that of avriXufji^avSnevos in xxii. Erythrae 
 and Hysiae were not Plataean towns, but as the Schol. says ^vfioi Botwrtos. 
 UoTck x^po-v 4y4vovro — ' returned to their quarters' See xxii. 
 
 (d.) 4(xit4vloPTo. Note the imperfect force. See note on i. 134. Not 
 often, as here, followed by an accus., but cf. cix. and cxiv.— avax«iJfw?<^i>' 
 I <"r<»'8€(r0(u. tots y€Kpo7s — 'for the dead,' dat. of object. 
 
 Chapter XXV. —(a.) 2aAat0oy 6 AaK€^aifi6yios. 'The use of the 
 article here gives I suppose a certain distinction to the individual named, and 
 
300 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIPES. 
 
 [Book III. I ^«""- ^O-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 301 
 
 implies that he was, or ought to be known, in and for himself.' — Arn. 
 Kefer to 'HyrjffiinrlSay rby AcuceSoi/wJi'toi', v. 52, viii. 35. Pop. Kriig. objecta 
 to it. 
 
 (6.) x^'-P^^P"'-^ — ' ^^ ^^ ^^ ^f ^ watercourse,'' which here must have been 
 of considerable depth, as it was large enough to interrupt the Athenian wall of 
 circumvallation. So Arn., but it is probable from the word inrfp^arhv that the 
 works were not entirely interrupted ; the difficulty of the ground, it is likely, 
 produced some defect in the construction of which Salsethus availed him- 
 aelf. at rtatrapiKoyra — cf. xvi. elxov rrjv yvufiiiv — 'turned 
 
 their thoughts (or rather entertained any such notion as surrendery Bl. cf. ?. 
 44 ; Xen. Anab. ii. 5. 29. 
 
 Chapter XXVI— (a.) T Of is Vivr iXiivt^v—* destined for MytUene: I 
 agree with Kriig. that the construction is aircVTeiAav 'AA»ct5av ix°vra t^s . . . . 
 voMSy irp6<rra^avrfs — ' having appointed him to this command (or imposed this 
 duty upon him),'' cf. vi. 93, vii. 19, viii. 23. The other ed. are not clear upon 
 the point. At any rate Stephens's conjecture &pxovra is needless. 
 8<Jo Kal TfffffapdKovTa. They were described as forty only (rvi. xxt.). 
 Am. supposes that the additional two formed the Spartan contingent, which 
 in such cases was always small ; Pop. that in the former instances the historian 
 spoke only in round numbers. vtaripov It i — * still under age.' 
 
 Pop. compares ytwrtpos is rb &/>%**''» ^^' '*• ^® ^- '°7* ^° Pleistoanax see 
 ii. 21, V. 16. 
 
 (b.) [koI] €/ ti i0€$\a<rr'hK(i. The icol seems universally condemned. 
 Poppo and Goll. deny that in this collocation it can stand for adeo or etiajn, and 
 that therefore we must not render — • even to the very shoots which had spruvg 
 up since the last inroad' Goll. declares that the words would have this meaning 
 without jco/, which inde€d is true, though scarcely conclusive that they cannot 
 have it with Kcd. Arn. suggests an explanation which Pop. characterises as 
 'wonderful.' If, he says, the Athenians had planted their land again, there 
 would be (i) the new crops, (2) anything that had sprung up of itself, such as 
 shoots of cut-down trees, (3) the places previously untouched, all of which the 
 Pelop. might now ravage. He acknowledges, however, that in this case he 
 would have preferred koX ef tc itol i0. Haack supposes that rh xpSrfpor 
 TtTfiTifiiya is intended to be divided into and more fully explained by the 
 two clauses, koI el ri i$($. . . . Koi 5ffo k.t.A. But this Pop. and G. observe 
 is negatived by the presence of t€ after t(£, ra tc xprfTepov ic.t.A. Pop. ob- 
 serves that this word, as well as fiffiKcupivai, ^efi\aff<fyhfi'nKe (in Demosth.), 
 $e0\oumiK(vau (Hellenic Fray. 2) and i^i^\affTi]Kii (Lucian. Var. H. i. Ji)- 
 all refute the remark of Buttmann in his larger Grammar that the perf. pass. 
 $iB\afifjMi is the only instance of reduplication before /3A. 
 
 (c.) iTf^rjKdoy. Pop. objects to this, and would read iinixeoy, • adiervnt 
 but surely iirf^r}\eov is right — 'went regularly through the district: The 
 SchoL explains i-wiBpofioy. 
 
 Chaptbb XXVll.—iirKlCti—not simply 'arms' but 'ma^^ them hopliUs! 
 thereby also raising their social status. itaT^ ^vWSyovs yn^'^ 
 
 fkiPOi. iS«e note on ii. 21, Katk ^vffriatis yiry. 
 
 Chapteb XXVIII. — (a.) ol iv lots irpdyfiacriy — ' those in the adminis- 
 tration of affair s^ Cf. Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. loi, etvai avr^ arifi(7oy 
 ri irp6(ra>ira rwy iy to7s irpdyfiouriv, and Ixxii. Kiy^vytvaovrfs 
 
 must be referred back to yvovris. Kriig. 
 
 (6.) irpefffiiiav Zi. As'Adrivaiois fiey had preceded, we should have ex- 
 pected MvTiKrivaiovs Se, but the intervening words koI r^y . . . 5€X6O-0ai curroi/s 
 change the collocation. Pop. 
 
 (c.) t/jLus — sc. notwithstanding the pledges of Paches. Pop. quotes as 
 similar instances of ' breviloquentia,' i. 105, ii. 51, iii. 49, iv. 96. We may 
 compare the use of ' tamen ' in Latin, • Retraham hercl6 opinor, ad me idem 
 illud fugitivum argeutum tamen: — Ter. Heaut. iv. 2. 11. 
 
 {d.) HffTf ix^ dSiKrjcrat. On S)<rre signifying 'upon condition of* see 
 Matthias, § 629; Jelf, § 863; and Demosthenes, 68. 11, i^hy avrols rS>v 
 UvKuv &PX**'' 'EAA^»'(BV Star* ahrovs inroKovfiv /SactAet, ^ when it was in their 
 power to rule over the Greeks upon the condition that they would themselves sub- 
 mit to the King of Persia ; ' also infra, xxxv. 
 
 Chapter XXIX. — (a.) robs iK t^s w6\€ws 'AOvvaiovs. Haack sup- 
 poses these to be, either some Athenians accidentally present in Delos, or those 
 in the thirty ships mentioned in xvi. as employed upon the coast of Pelo- 
 ponnesus. 
 
 (6.) *lKdp(p KcH MvK6y<i> — inverting the order in which they would be 
 reached. But it is not worth while either to transpose or to read ndp<p for 
 'iKdlpv, for, as Pop. shows, the ancient historians were not very precise in such 
 matters, e.g. tifdv tvs ^owr^AtSoj icol Kaiyov, viii. 88, and ♦ Tarentino Brun- 
 diflinoque fcedere,' Tac. Ann. i. 10. 
 
 (c.) "Efifiaroy — rb ffnyby rb fiera^b Xiov koI 'EptfOpas. 
 
 {d.) T-p MuTiA^vp 4oAa>Kufoi — ' seven days had elapsed from the capture 
 ofMytilene: On this not uncommon idiom cf. Matthiae, § 388, and Jelf. 
 
 (e.) iK rSty irap6vra>y — 'as they best could under the circumstances,* a 
 Tery common phraseology (iv. 17, v. 87, vii. 62). 
 
 Chapter XXX.— (a.) 'AAk^So .... Tfdpeatxtv^' Alcidas, and as 
 many of us Peloponnesiaiis as are here present: The grammarians have in- 
 Tented the term Koiyaxns to express this combination of the first and second 
 
 persons. 
 
 (6.) iKitvffrovs corresponds to what in vulgar slang is called blown upon 
 —* before our presence comes to be known: Pop. compares iv. 70, viii. 42, and i^- 
 iyyeXroi ytyiffdcu, viii. 14. &<rirfp ^x^M**' is ^^ betaken, of course, 
 
 with vkeiy — 'just as we are, without stopping to make any alteration* therefore 
 'directly* ' at once.' See Hermann ad Fhiloct. 808. In i. 134, &(rirfp tlx^y 
 is used more in its primary sense, but see viii. 41, 42, and Xen. An. iv. i. 19. 
 avipuv yf(c<rr\ ixoyrwv. Formerly Pop. considered this passage to prove 
 that the word 01/^p may be used without the article to designate a definite 
 individual. Without seeing GoU.'s remarks, I demurred, because I believed 
 the whole to mean — 'for in all probability we shall find the want of pre- 
 caution great, as is the case with men when they have just got possession of a 
 ^o^on ; * zi. just below, w j K^KparnK&ruiv— '09 is the case with victors: To the like 
 
II 
 
 302 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. ■ Chap. 3^'] 
 
 NOTES ON THUOYDIDES. 
 
 303 
 
 effect Goll. — 'magnam in custodiis negligentiam inveniemus, qualis est hominitm,' 
 &c. Pop. has probably changed his opinion, as he says nothing about it in his 
 small edition. Kriig. makes avSpuy the gen. after rh oupvKoKToi/ — ' the careless- 
 ness of men when they have just got possession.' ix6.\i(rra olaoi. 
 Kriig. conjectures anovcra, because the Peloponnesians were notoriously defec- 
 tive in this arm of the service. But aAicJj is * aid' ' succour^' and the words of 
 the speaker have only reference to the special occasion, rvyxO'V^i oZaa. 
 
 ((?.) T^ Kaiyhv [rh Kfvhv] rov woKffiov. The MSS. vary between the 
 two readings, with a slight preponderance in favour of the former, t^ Kcuvby l< 
 * the unexpected,' and therefore what in military speech would be called ' a sur- 
 prise.' Pop. compares ' subita belli,' Liv. vi. 32, and * quod in bello novum 
 vel inexpectatum accidit/ Tacit. Hist. v. 13. Tr. therefore — 'this is a case of 
 what people mean hy the unexpected accidents of war.' On the other hand, to 
 Kivhv refers to the empty, baseless, or groundless alarms, panics, which some- 
 times occur in armies. See Xenoph. Anah. ii. 2. 20 : Tlpo'iov<n)s r^s wKris, 
 rots "EXAtjci <p6fio5 ifiirivrcif Kol 66pv$05 koX SoGiros ^v, oJov (iKbs <p6^ov 6/i«- 
 ff6vros ylyvfffdat. The generals assuage the alarm by pretending that an ass 
 had got loose among the baggage. In the Peninsula this did occur to the rifle 
 brigade, and some of the camp followers ran without stopping for miles, and 
 then protested that they did not quit the regiment until it was cut up to a 
 man (see Captain Kincaid's Narrative). Goll., with his usual overwrought 
 subtlety, argues against rh Ktv6v, because a panic is not a panic until it has 
 happened, and then it cannot be helped ! as if all such expedients as that re- 
 corded by Xenophon were impossible ; or as if organisation and discipline did 
 not prevent panics from being caused among well-trained troops by circum- 
 stances which would have produced them among others. 
 
 {d.) % €t Tts (rrparriy6 5 — sc. rh k<uv6v — ' which [i. e. and this^ if a general 
 guard against it in himself, and when he sees it in his enemy, takes occasion ^^ 
 attack, he will be most successful in his profession.' This way of speaking is, I 
 think, intelligible enough, and need not have occasioned diflBiculties. Cf. with 
 Kriig. ii. 60. 
 
 Chapter XXXI. — ^XirfSa 5' tlyai . , . davdvri ylyv-qrai. This is 
 perhaps the most difficult passage in Thucydides. It is no sinecure for a con- 
 scientious editor to make himself master of the very many pages in different 
 languages which have been written upon it. This I have endeavoured to do. 
 but without any commensurate result in the shape of positive conclusious. 
 One may, however, learn a good deal negatively from the numerous questions 
 which htive been raised, e.g. that i(f>opfjMv differs radically from i<j>opfi€7u, and 
 cannot here be considered as anything else than irruere, its more proper 
 meaning in the middle voice ; that ourots by the laws of the language can only 
 refer to the Athenians, and <r<pl<riv to the speakers ; that rjv cannot be equiva- 1 
 lent, as some would have it, to lya, but if it could be so used at all in prose. 
 must be accompanied by vais or Koi; that the proper meaning of Sardvi} juw 
 7£7i'€Tai is, ' it becomes a source of expense to me,' and not it becomes a means oj^ 
 meeting expenses, whatever may be found in Harpocration of contrary im- 
 port ; and that the apodosis to a sentence cannot be introduced by re, as 
 
 would be the case if xetVetv t€ oX^ffQai were — * then they thought they would be 
 able to persuade' as A. at first thought. With respect to interpretations: (i) 
 Am. now gives up the passage. (2) Bloomfield and Haack suppose an aposio- 
 pesis (like that after riv fxkv ^vfJL$ri r} Tceipa, iii.) to follow yiyv7,rcu, and 
 introduce the word ' well.' But this may be dismissed at once without going 
 further, as the passage fulfils none of the<jonditions of an aposiopesis. See supra, 
 iii. Poppo (3) reads, atroarijarwffiv, (iXviSa S' chai • ovSevl yap aKovaiws ii(p7xdai), 
 Kol tV irp6(roiov ravrr\v n^yi<Trr,v ouxrav *AQi]vaia)v 1)1/ ixpeKuxTi, kclL afia i\p 
 ((popnuffiv avro7s ffpiori Sandvn ylyvifrai ; and renders — * that they should in- 
 duce Ionia to revolt {and there were great hopes of it, for their — i.e. their own 
 and the Pelop.— coming had been disagreeable to no one in those parts), and that 
 they should withdraw [i. e. I suppose, * that they should see if it be not possible 
 to withdraw] from the Athenians this their greatest source of revenue, and at 
 the same time expense should fall upon the Athenians {a.vro7s) when they as- 
 sailed them {i<popn&a-iy, particip. from itpopfidw).' This rests upon the possi- 
 bility of considering that rjv — to see if a thing can be done, may be equivalent 
 to ha — that it be done. Two passages are quoted in confirmation from Aris- 
 tophanes; one of which (Ranee, 175) has another better reading; and the 
 second {Acharn. 1044) — W avn^oXia <r\ iju ttus Kofjilaufiai ru ^6^ — has ircws 
 subjoined, and may be explained by an ellipse of aK^^ufieQa, or something 
 of the sort. This Pop. himself sees, and therefore we need not insist on 
 this view. It is of course open to us to read li/a as Dobree conjectured. (4) 
 Schomann takes the same view, with the additional advantage of going quite 
 wrong upon the pronouns avrots and <T(pl(n. (5) GoUer reads as above, except 
 that he strikes out a<piffi, seeing no other possible remedy. He then randers 
 as before to a<p7x6aij and proceeds (placing a stop at v<p4\a>(ri) — ' if they could 
 urithdraw this greatest source of revenue from the Athenians, and if at the same 
 time while the Athenians were blockading them, they [the Athenians] should find 
 the expense upon their own shoulders' He attaches this force to ahro7s ipsis, 
 considering that the louians meant to insinuate that they now ' paid the piper.' 
 (6) It was originally suggested by Hermann, and has since been maintained by 
 (jerhard, as also by Haase (Lucubrationes Thucyd. p. 6), that the passage 
 should stand, iK-viba S' eivai, oi/Scvl yap aKovffiws d(^jx0at, Kal r^v irp6ffohov . . . 
 V i(popixov(nv avro7s Sairdtn) a<piai yiyvrirai. The whole in this case exhibits two 
 separate reasons for the ^A.7r(s ; the first in the fact that the lonians had wel- 
 comed them ; the second in that which would be the fact, if the great source of 
 Athenian revenue could be drawn away, and the Athenians put to expense. 
 The singular change in the way of stating the two clauses is supposed to be 
 paralleled by v. 30, fjricovro ri)v re i<T'i)yriaiv rov iravrdsf Koi el 'Apyeiois ^v/i- 
 Maxo* ^(Tovraiy and iv. 85, QavfidQa Se, r^ re airoKKriffei fiov twv trv\S>p, koL el /a^ 
 M^ihois xfxiv a<p7yyiai. But (Poppo argues) if Thucydides had meant this, he 
 surely would have written, as in the above examples, ovhevi re yap . . . koX K.r.K. 
 Neither does this explanation remove the difficulties concerning a<piin. And 
 thirdly, the occupation of a single city could not be described as the cutting off 
 TTji itpoa6^oii ravTTis fieyicrrrjs ov(n\s. (7) It is scarcely necessary to record 
 Schneider's version — ' damit sie lonien zum Abfall bewogen (dazu aber Hoff- 
 flung sei, denn Niemanden sei ihro Ankunft unwillkommen) und dieee Ein- 
 
304 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 34-1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 305 
 
 !l 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 kiinfte, die grossten der Athener, ihnen entzogen, zugleich aber selbst, zogen sie 
 gegen jene, den Kostenaufwand batten.' This it will be observed ignores the 
 fjv before v<f>4\a><ri — ' catise Ionia to revolt and abstract the greatest source,' &c. 
 and makes Sawdtrri = means of expenditure ; — 'and at the same time, should 
 they attack the others, to get the means of carrying on the war^ (8) Dr. 
 Peile has favoured me with a version, which I subjoin in his own words: <fal 
 T^y vp6<roSov ravnw fieyla-Ttiy odffay ^ Kdrivaiuv ^v v<p4\a)<riy Koi fi/ia, fiv 4<l>opiJLU(n 
 ff<pl<Tiy, ainois Bairdvrjv yiyvfadou, irelffeiv t€ oUffdai koX Ilt<r<rov6yr}v &<m ^vynto- 
 Ae/ieiv. Such is I believe the best reading of this perplexing passage, on the 
 authority of two Parisian and one Parmese MS., only placing the comma after 
 ffipiffty rather than after i<pop/jLu(ri. The clue which unravels the whole 
 sentence is to be found I think in the construction of od<rayy which (as in 
 the case of the words 4^ 'IroKias koI %Ke\laSf ii. 7) in reference to what pre- 
 cedes ought to have been flyai^ whereas it is odcay^ as if r^y irp6troSoy had 
 been the accusative after {>(f>4\6e<n. Translate — ' and that this [Ionia] was an 
 important source of revenue of the Athenians for them to cut off if they can 
 [literally, that this urUl be cut off, if they shall succeed in cutting it off, being 
 an important income of the Athenians; as if it had been ixpaiped-fiff^rdcu 
 olffcof K.T.A.] ; and at the same time [a further collateral advantage], if they 
 [the Athenians] blockade them [the Peloponnesians], they would themselves he 
 incurring expense all the time [such is the force of yiyyfffOcu the pres.] ; and in 
 that case [the coast of Asia being attacked] he thought they might prevail upon 
 Pissuthnes also to help them in the war^ Compare a sentence of similar form 
 and meaning iv. 3 : o\ Z\ iroAA^s t^axsoif tlvai 6.Kpas 4piifiovs Trjs TLe\oTrowfi<rov, 
 fiy fiovXtfrou KaraXa^^dyvy r^y TrdKiy ^airayay — • but they said that there were 
 many undefended promontories of the Peloponnese for him to occupy [kotoXo^- 
 fidyfiyy or hs KaraAa/u/Soli/p] if he wishes by occupying them to put the state to 
 charges.' I will only add that this appears to me at least as plausible as any 
 of the others. KJriig. supposes ff^iai may be referred to the Athenians, but is 
 rightly so doubtful about it as to enclose the word in brackets. Might not all 
 the difficulty have arisen from an accidental transposition of avro7s and ff<pl<ri?— 
 i. e. * if when the Athenians were blockading them [Lac.], the expense might fallen 
 themselves [Ath.]. This supposes us to read 4<popfxov(riyf the -fiSnTiy having 
 arisen from a careless assimilation to V ^^^^o*^* rh irXf'iffTov 
 
 rTJs yy(afJL7is — * his principal purpose.' Cf. iv. 34, rod dapauy rh vktiffrov. 
 TTjj MuTiA.^KTjj vffrtpiiKfi — 'had come too late for Mytilenet !•«• ^o^" ^^ 
 rescue. Cf. with Kriig. u<rr€p€ty rijs irarplSos, Xen. Ag. li. 1. 
 
 Chapteb XXXII. — (a.) Mvoyyija-tp — originally a small rocky peninsnla 
 (i^eroj), much infested by mice (fivts). There is a description of it Livy xxxvii. 
 47. Karh -wAovy — sine articulo. Cf. i. 8. T&y ^{ 
 
 'Ayalopv — i.e. the exiles residing there, who were hostile to the existing state 
 of things at home, and to the Athenians. Cf. iii. 19 and iv. 75. 
 €« Jii4<t>dciptp — 'expectes forsitan €1 8ta</>^€fpoi aut ct Sicupdelpti.* — Pop. The 
 first would be — ' should he destroy,' a pure hypothesis. The second — * if he be 
 now destroying,' conveying an idea of the incompleteness of the action. «' 
 Iii4<pd(ip€y, the aorist and indicative, is right both in mood and tense — ' if as is 
 the ease, he hat destroyed ;' indicative, because said of a fact, not a supposition ; 
 
 aorist, because the speaker wishes to point more to the fact having occurred 
 than to define the time of its occurrence. Kriig. simply says, The past tense, 
 because fl is almost equivalent to 4Tei. 
 
 (c.) 4\irlSa — ' had no expectation, even the slightest.' On this use of 4\Tr\s 
 
 I see note i. i, and vii. 61. H-h • ' • napa^aXelv. On this, sometimes 
 
 called the redundant negative, cf. i. 16. I agree with Kriig. in thinking that 
 
 the irapa in composition with the verb conveys some notion of risk, as e. g. 
 
 where it is coupled with Kiyhuvivw, roJ^rjaai. irapoKiy^vyevaai, xxxvi. 
 
 Chapter XXXIIL— (a.) (f>vy^y ^TrotetTo — 'made a flight of it,' i.e. his 
 I retreat was so precipitate as to amount to a flight. 
 
 (b.) Uap. Kal 2a\. These two gallies, the swiftest and best appointed in 
 the Athenian fleet, are occasionally described as * sacred,' from being employed. 
 upon sacred missions to Delos, and elsewhere. Their other duties were to carry 
 despatches and prisoners, to collect tribute, and to sen^e as admiral's vessels in 
 action. See Diet. Antiq. The Saliminia was sometimes called Delia, and 
 sometimes Theoris. Cf. iii. 77, vi. 53, 61, viii. 73, 74. 
 
 {c.) TTfpl KXdpoy. Popp. convinced by the arguments of A. and others, 
 now withdraws his conjecture "iKopov, admitting that Clarus is a well-known 
 I place in Ionia, between Myonnesus and Ephesus, and therefore lying in the 
 route of Alcidas. 
 
 (d.) 5tck Tov ireXdyovs — ' through the open sea,' & gre&tfeait {or ii2i\\ga.tOTS 
 of that era, who, from want of the compass, almost always skirted the coast. 
 Cf. infra, Ixix. 
 
 [e.) aT f I xi<r TOV. See Herod, vi. 32. After their unsuccessful revolt 
 against Persia, the Ionian cities had been stript of their fortifications. These 
 were subsequently rebuilt by the Athenians, viii. 14. 84. 
 
 (/.) Kal &s, i.e. oiirus — 'even though only en route,' or, as Krng.^' even 
 though the unprotected state of Ionia invited attack.' a/* a 
 
 vpoavliri ovT € 5—' while touching at them.' Peile quotes from Lucian aKovovn 
 I jHfTo^u -rns aireiKris. We may add, even still more appropriately, the same word 
 kith a participle : fiera^v dvcav ; koI ris aijef u<|)6i\6to ; — Ar. Ra7i(S, 11 77. 
 \avrayyi\oi—'the announcers of their own approach, the first to announce their 
 I own approach' 
 
 ig.) 4<paiv€To k.t.X.— sc. classis hostium, or Alcidas, their admiral— 
 
 I ' appeared capable of being caught' lit. come within catching. But, as this fleet 
 
 has not lately been mentioned, Pop. prefers to consider 4<p. as impersonal, and 
 
 compares vi. 60. The rest means — ' he considered it as so much gained [lucro 
 
 apposuit] when he did not light upon them out at sea, that they had not been 
 
 \caught near any harbour, where they would have been compelled to construct a 
 
 icmp, and so impose upon his own fleet the necessity of guarding and blockading 
 
 mm. Ou 4 <l>o p. ci. ii. 89, iii. 31. The re after ffTpar6iraoy is more than 
 
 [suspicious. 
 
 Chapter XXXIV.— (a.) Ko\o(l)<ayla)v. On Colophon, situated on a hill, 
 h^ Diet, of Ancient Geog. Notium, as the name imports, 'south,' or -New 
 IColophon,' on the low ground, was about two miles from the old town, which 
 |lay further inland ; it was, in fact, the port of the former. Bl. compares Leith 
 
3o6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book in. ■ Chap. 36.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 307 
 
 ft 
 
 t 
 
 and Edinburgh. See Grote, vi. 33-- jarhcrri^ri^ma.-^^ 
 
 'along of a private dispute :-donte8tic seditimi. When the Colophonian aristo- 
 crats called in the Persians, the opposite party settled at Notium These again 
 cplit up into two factions (a^atrz«£crarr«), of which the more oligarchical obtained 
 Persian aid, and so succeeded in expelling the democracy. They also hired 
 Arcadian mercenaries and barbarians, and fortified themselves in a citadel or 
 n^ar.ix^ay.a-^ place walled off from the rest of the town. See Xen^ « 
 i. 24. Bl. compares Livy xxi. 1 1. ' Vallo urbem ab arce mtersepire. Cf. 5m. 
 
 (bpdyuarty i. 133- „,, 
 
 (b) ot Kara<f>vy6yr.s Kal KaroiK^craur.s. The same persons, ac- 
 cording to Granville Sharp's canon. i^.oXir.vop^became citizens, 'con- 
 stituied themselves part of the community^ i.e. they and the reactionary party m 
 Notiura now called themselves ' the Colophonians.' vir^^^hedvr,^ 
 roirovs-' having withdrawn from before these.' Kriig. says an unusual con- 
 struction, as ^ox«f)€^«' ^X^«^, ii- 88, is something different. 
 
 (c) dSk irpoffKaX. This should, if the construction were regular, have 
 been followed by «s Hn^e.u. But, as Kriig. observes, for the sake of the anti- 
 thesis we have an anacolouthon, which is by no means harsh as Paches 
 continues the principal subject. ^^^ -al ^7—' safe^and sound, 
 ^sospes et immunis: On 5(rTf, cf. supra, xxvii. 4>i;AaK7, aSccTM^ 
 
 ♦ cmtodia libera: Duk. Lipsius ad Tac. Ann. vi. 2. Kararoi^.^u 
 ••Of this species of fraud, founded upon literal performance and real violation 
 of an agreement, there are various examples in Greek history, but nowhere do 
 we read of a more flagitious combination of decit and cruelty than the behaviour 
 of Paches at Notium. How it was noticed at Athens we do not know, but ye 
 may remark, not without surprise, that Thuc. recounts it plainly and calmly 
 without a single word of comment.'- Grote, vi. 331. oiKiaras. m 
 
 * coloni ' as we see from the termination. This would be ok^ropcy. i-op. 
 rightly' explains, 'Conditores, duces colonic, quos Athenienses Colophoniis ut 
 
 colonis suis pr^fecerunt.' Cf. i. 24. iii- 9*. ^^''^ -^^l', ''-''-^ ^"^^ , 
 
 the usual principles of connection between a mother city and its colony; onj 
 
 which see Diet, of Antiq. 
 
 Chapter XXXVL-(a.) rd t€ 4\\a. ♦ Expectaveris forsitan iXAa tc' 
 Pop who however, explains—' as well as all the other proposals he is known to 
 have made: The article is employed as in the usual formula, for the sake ot 
 a more distinct and antithetical emphasis on ^ird^eiv n^Koir. 
 
 (6.) .ISo^v ahroU . . . iiriKa\ovyr€s. One of the usual anacolouttia. 
 iirucaXedyr^s follows as if ^^ip^Cov or ^$ov\f{,(rayro had preceded. 
 
 (c ) riiv Tf &\\7iv. The t€ stands here because Thuc. was about to aaa 
 ua\ rbrks H. vavs To\^r,<rai k.t.X., but inadvertently substituted another form 
 of expression. Pop. ^p^^^.yoi-^ in the position of subjects. >« 
 
 dubium enim est, quin Thucyd. ad ea respiciat, quae Mytilenaei supra x. di ud^ 
 8ibi . . . libertatem relictam, sed plerisque ceteris sociis servitutem imposu 
 
 (d) Tpocr5uv€i8<£A€To(Arn., Bekker, Goll., and most MSS.), irpocr^" 
 fidhovro (Pop. ed. ii.), wpo<T^vv^\d$oyro (Bloomf., with some MSS and in_ 
 editors). That there is some difficulty in selecting may be inferred trom 
 
 fact that Pop. has changed his mind four times about the reading. Arn. gives 
 the sense of the passage correctly. * The Peloponnesian fleet having dared to 
 adventure over to Ionia, to help the Mytilenseans, not a little contributed to their 
 violence.' This opens out two questions — (i) Can ^vfi$dW€(rdai in this sense 
 govern a genitive ? (2) Is the singular verb admissible after aS vri€s ? The 
 first seems determined in the affirmative by the instances produced by Matthiae, 
 § 326, and Kiihner, § 520. A.'s principal instance, |u/A)BaAA€Toi Se iroAAa 
 ToDSf 5€(/xaTos, Eurip. Med. 279, Pflugk, ad loc, disputes, considering the gen. 
 to depend upon iroWd. Goll., however, makes the genitive in the present 
 passage to depend upon 4\dx^<nov, which is possible, though scarcely probable. 
 The answer to the second is somewhat uncertain. Arn. says, ' the nom. fem. 
 plur. is used as a single term, " Quod naves ansae essent," equivalent to rh ras 
 vwi To\ii.r\ffai: "With this G. seems to agree, and adds that the whole may be 
 quite as well regarded as an instance of xpbs rh <rvfiaiv6n€Pov as of ' schema 
 Pindaricum.' Pop. objects that no really parallel cases have been produced, 
 and that the ' schema Pindaricum ' is not to be thought of in Thucydides ; and 
 therefore reads (ed. ii.) vpocr^vvi^dXovro, as the word from which the other 
 variations were most likely to arise. This is perhaps best, for, even granting 
 that ' the ships ' might resolve themselves into the equivalent conception * the 
 fleet,' we should have to account for the fact that similar condensations are not 
 found much more frequently, inasmuch as the opportunity for them must have 
 been perpetually afforded. On the idiom, at vr\is ToXju^o-atrat irpoa^wefidKovro, 
 cf. i. 36. Bloomf. supports Trpo(r^vv(\d$ovro by iv. 47, vii. 70. Kxiig. reads as 
 he does, translating — ' took part in, co-operated therewith to this end: 
 ov yap airh jSpax^^os diayoias — 'from no brief consideration' (i.e. upon a 
 deep-laid plan). 
 
 {e.) Tfii'Kovffiv—sc. on the evening of the same day ; cf. irpoeTxe w^pa koX 
 vvktI fidXiara^ xlix. 
 
 (/.) fi€Tdvoid ris — 'a qualified repentatice — a feeling aJcin to repentance: 
 avaXoyifffih s — ' upon reconsidering — thinking the Tnatter over again: The pre- 
 jposition exerts its common force of back. \oyi<Tfihs is, of course, ' computation,' 
 i' calculation: cf. viii. 84. At€7a, Pop. observes, is not * severe,' or * cruel: 
 
 according to Bl. view, but, • of grave importance: Kriig. says the word is used 
 [because the decree affected so many persons. On naWop fi ait cf. i. 16, ii. 62. 
 {g.) TapiffKivaffav. Pop. interprets 'bearbeiten: i.e. the word implies 
 Isome labour and effort — ' worked upon: ' managed to induce: Cf. iv. 132, viii. 52. 
 Toi/s iv T€A.€t. The prytanes or the ten strategi ; the former convoked as- 
 semblies in peace, the latter under extraordinary circumstances and in war. 
 |See Thuc. iv. 118, ii. 59, and Schom. De Com. p. 61. Arn. A question arises 
 18 to the legality of any such second convocation. Schomann, from the expressions 
 )f Nicias, vi. 14, decides in the negative. A. thinks that if it had been illegal 
 !leon's language would have been much more violent. Surely he would have 
 mt the case more strongly, and threatened a ypa(pv napapdficov. ' His wish,* 
 says Arn., • seems rather to be to confound ylrn<pi(TiJLaTa and v6iioi together, and 
 fo excite against the repeal of one of the former the same strong feeling which 
 ^as entertained in Greece against any alteration in the latter. For the distinc- 
 tion between vSfxoi, or the constitutional laws of the state, and ^l/ri<plafMra, or 
 lecrees of the people on particular questions, cf. Arist. Pol. iv. 4.' ' By so 
 
 X2 
 
3o8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book IIL 
 
 |l 
 
 I 
 
 doiDg they committed an illegality, and exposed themselves to the ehance ,t 
 impeachment. ... I agree with Schomann on th.s point m sp.te of the doul.s 
 
 of Dr. Arnold-'-Grote, vi. 34*. ^' ^' '^.^^'/'f'" . t^ "tl 
 
 Grote's views extend to an almost entire vindication of Cleons characteMk 
 stndent will do well to peruse his ingenious pleading, vol. v.. pp. 334-39- W„h 
 xespect to the decree, itself, he says, ' such a sentence was m principle notlimg 
 moi« than a very rigorous application of the received laws of war, p. 34=. I 
 
 Chapter XXXVII.-(a.) ^oXKiKiS k.t.\.— '«» "m«y occamms ere m 
 I have, for mu part, found out with respect to a d^ocracy. that it .smeompeM 
 toooJn otll' lit. ' that it is an impossihle thing for it to govern others. Thi, 
 « I think the simplest method of taking the words. Popp. prefers to constact 
 ^/a ':.Vtl C»«paWa. .««^ e..>., and so also Goll But the ate. 
 version is quite in accordance with the genius of the Greek language- /™«i 
 out the character of a democracy: Cf. o?5i «, »» .i. ^.Ta^Ao,- 
 
 • change of feeling,' he will not admit it as yet to he a ^^a^ou<. 
 iSfi,—' having no fear of others. oveiripu n n 
 
 no cause M ""V- ^^^_^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^_^ .^ ^ j^^ .^ „ j„<,„^ i„,t„^, j,„„ «i, 
 
 a fals^ step from being over-persuaded by their words, or in whatever instance y„ 
 Te way to compassion, U is with danger to yourselves that you showweaknu, 
 S If with aly likelihood of securing gratmde from your aU..s, faUmg as j, 
 Ttoreflectthatiisasadespotismyou hold your sovereignty and o^r[mresp<ct 
 on2ose [sc. i.^K'-A engaged in plots against you and subnUtmg .. 
 wUlingly to your rule.- The d, is connected with *7"<'««. not |ir«.v5«m». Ol 
 St mfanings of X<V« ) the sentiment which induces to ^^^^^-- 
 (,) the favour itself, (3) the sentiment inspu-ed by t^; {I'vonr- ^tude _ 
 have taken the last. A. seems to take the second. Goll. caUs attention to tt. 
 dSerfnc between ««1 .6« and oM.'. The same indeed exists bet,^en et ,m 
 ^3,;L also between 'a«<i «„rand'»o* even.' The difference hm 
 would be (Koi oiK K.r.X.)-'with danger to yourselves, and not (as you seemU 
 imagine) with a good effect upon your allies; setting the two notions in dir«t 
 
 rJs; (j^:^^uh --.-J— ■:.:rrrahi 
 
 fZ r;roftT-. or an but one ; but as L editor has suggested ho^J 
 r^ssible to do without it, we can only conjecture that .t has been acc.deatallj 
 omitted before oiit and the other monosyllables. 
 
 n^riX.. Kp.(.r<r», iarX-'a state is better.' Kriig. says equmleottt 
 . it I better that a state should be.' a^aH. is not ^i-Pl^ ' f -^Z ™to ' 
 
 „ther . the ignorance of simplicUy,' 'want of due >.iBr^Js (le. '"f";^^ 
 7nd polish): Seei. 84. ^.uX.iT.p.. does not, of course, >"? J ^-^J"* 
 
 worXlessness. but means ' inferior people,' ' co,nmo» or plam people, as we «^ 
 Cf W 83. On iK0Xa<r.'.-' absence of principle,' the state which no .i^^ 
 0, 2s sement can improve, see Aristotle (Eth. m yi,.). in whose mo«^ 
 system it is an important technical term, denoting the lowest moral staWs 
 
 •'ZZldvice: "^ 'P^-' '''«-"":7°"7'tTrndA!' 
 their superiors in inteUect: Compare on the whole sentiment .. « J J^J^ 
 Bhet. i. 16. Ti- T» i.l \,yo^i4y«^-^ and to out-do [Peile outmi 
 
 Lap. 38.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 3°9 
 
 Mevcr is said or proposed for the publU i/oorf.'-Am. He ought to have 
 \lJi bom iA-' on each occasion as U is brought forward. 
 
 Jf; importance in which U exhibU their wisdom: On this ... cf. Matt. § 568. 
 'a fiiA force exerted by h.v upon participles, see note, Ixxxii. 
 "" t) ? "--• The preposition denotes, according to its true and Prope' 
 ^Z^nLrial cause-' th. abUity whi.h proceeds from them^lve. (Pf whu^hthey 
 A ..;,», fhj; source) ' More emphatic than the simple genitive. Cf. M, 11. 
 « t'-«-^'^'^lZZ-Malt with, to crit^e. Krug. remarks that the 
 •L follows i5waT<ST«o. in that it is an adjective, not in that it is a compara- 
 ;^ and do s 'rt appXve of Pop. « S-. M^.t-*-. to which he denies that 
 r^fc 870 is parallel Kp.ral 8J iy.. s-' but being impartml}uiges 
 
 'Zi^ertJLtendi.gdisput.nU, they are gener^^^^^^ 
 irh Tov Uov—' ex (squo {i.e., (gqui). rop. ci.i.77- "''' ' 
 
 «• generally, without reference to principle-' .toj,«...,' and is especi^ly 
 lloyed to de;ote oratorical ability. Cf. viii. 8. Aristot discusses it, Eth 
 IT {""'". f™™ «"' "-"i '^'""' -l^™'^^ *' '=^P'°'*y to go along with 
 
 sneaker in his arguments-' quick comprehen^n: ^apaUiay. Arn. 
 
 XI version of Portus-' aliter quam sentimus '-contrary to our convrc- 
 fa to that of other .oramen^tovs-' adversus guam ^psepop^dus scmt - 
 Tfrl to the decree passed by th. peopU. This he and GoU observe wo^d 
 lie tV iii-" But have they not both lost sight of the fa^t, thati may 
 rZ the absence of the article makes the whole into a general principle, m- 
 dlj indS this special case, but asserting the speaker's argument much 
 more strongly ?— ' contrary to a decree mu:e ratified. 
 
 r, VYVVTTT — fa 1 i airSs. Cf. ii. 61, and (Edip. Tyr. 557, 
 
 JT. ™/^'. ^.^o..Uy..y impUes in^ve,^g d^ay, 
 
 ,e. betCeen^the sentence and its execution. ^^JZ^;:;tZZ. 
 
 tltlZZ his anger], but wh.re reguUal comes as dose as posszble upon 
 tZTofTnjury, it Uts Us retribution, being mad. as nearly as may I. 
 tnereceiptoj injy self-explaining version of the pas- 
 
 an equivalent. This I think a lair ;„ referred to diiiya,Tem rather 
 
 sase which is onlv awkward because ai/rliraXov is reierrea 10 a^ 
 to rtw- There is no reason why iyaKa,$iy..-takes up, assumes U, 
 sZldlothav'e this force, and Kriig.'s conjeet„e "^--"^""-^^f^X^.. 
 Ja} "hi dn onTy Lean-'L* o«r calamities result in [lit. c^stitute 
 ZelvJidaZ to lur confederates: Cf. ii. 85 .V «j- -f ^^ ' 
 .M.ra.el-' tl^ naval action would constitute itself a '■eS'f^rJZ^J^^^ 
 Kow this might be a very good argument beforehand to prove that the Mytik- 
 neans were not likely to revolt, inasmuch as tW would thereby eventuaUy 
 damage themselves, but when the fact of the revolt was Pf^^'^^^M^r^ttC 
 us«las an excuse for it? We should expect that an f^'^'^^J'^'^^^'f^ 
 case conversely, -that the calamities of our confederates are sure to r^ultm 
 damage to ouLves' (ergo, for our own sakes it is better not to destroy the 
 Mytileneans). Is it possible that Thucydides only meant to say this, and has 
 
310 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 11 
 
 said it very awkwardly, or are we to give tip the passage m its present 
 state? ro7s iv^fxdxois &\i^as—' damage done to our adversaries: as an 
 anarthrous subject, would be most awkward with rhs 5', &c., even were 
 we to translate—' damages, #c., are the things that constitute what are our 
 real misfortunes: Goll. says the calamities of Athens were necessarily 
 advantages to her confederates when they had become enemies (qui hostes 
 facti sunt), and that the absurdity consists in attempting to show that they 
 were i3A(i/3ai, and not advantages. But, in the first place, what would Le 
 the bearing of such an argument ? and, secondly, how can we possibly 
 be justified in inserting qui hostes facti sunt? To insert oh after ^M<J>opa5, 
 with several editors, does not clear up the difliculty. The Athemans looked to 
 their own interest in the matter, not to that of their confederates. It vrould 
 have been quite unmeaning to make this latter the point in question, and 
 to urge (with Cleon's supposed adversary) that the calamities of Athens would be 
 sure to damage it. D. following Am. translates, ' and that our misjortunes are 
 losses to our allies: If this have any meaning it can only be found by sup. 
 posing the clause to imply as much as the famous shake of Lord Burleigh's 
 head, i. e. ' consequently our remaining allies do not require this severe ex- 
 ample, because they are sufficiently bound to us already by community of 
 interest '—an inference disproved by this very revolt. Besides, D. does not 
 see that he is translating ixlv U as if it were Kai, Kriig. for -rks 5' V"*P«s 
 IviJi^ophs reads ri 8' V^«P« i{,tJL<popa~mtr advantages, our interests, ^rhich 
 gets rid of the difficulty by inverting the sense. 
 
 (c.) Tb Trivv hoKovv K.r.\. Ar. understands this to mean— ' that m\ 
 know nothing of what we think we know best; and similiarly Kriig.— 'rf«5 i'o% 
 Anerkannte: Others refer it to the decree—' that most certainly determind 
 uyon: The objection that this would require -rh Uiav is not tenable, for Cleon 
 on purpose represents the determination as still actually existing in the minds 
 of the Athenians. Or we may consider it to fall under the class of cases 
 mentioned, to which add a very remarkable one, Matth. ii. 20, Tefl^^/cacrt 7«p 
 oi CrrroDrres rh^ ^vxhv rov iraiSW jh ,i,^peir',s expresses the 
 
 abstract notion—* elaborated sjpcciousness of speech: 
 
 (d.) k-yu^voQ^roZvr^s. Cf. JEsch. c. Ctesiph. 50, {nro\d0€r^ 'rolvvv vm«s 
 ainoijs fhai aywvoderas iroXiriKris aptrris, and Kriig. on Xen. Anab. iii. 1. 2i- 
 eear ai'. Cf. d^arah, this ch. ad fin. This is explained well by Arist. Rhet. 1. 3- V 
 iivdyKT, rhv i.Kpoar^v ^ ei<vphv ehat ^ Kpirhv. They attended upon and es- 
 timated serious debates, as theatrical spectators do, i.e. more in reference to 
 their Uterary ability than to their real merits ; and facts they were content to 
 learn from hearsay, when they ought personally to have investigated their 
 truth- • estimating [i. e. affirmatively] the practicabilitg of things proposed to ^ 
 done from what clever speakers say about them, and in respect of what has ki^ 
 done already not regarding the ^^ acccmplished facf as more credible vpon m 
 evidence of your eyes, than what you have heard from those who in words ^f'*'^' T«' 
 a clever attack— sc. on some political opponent, or it may he—kavemdeM« 
 assigned a specious value to them (i. e. put a fair gloss upon them): T^4« 
 an antithetical aKpodau is implied in a/couo-eeV. &piffTOi—'f 
 
 best people in the world to be cheated: h^ZoKifxa.fffxivov, so. X^« 
 
 — ' wdl tried and approved: 4 u y f t « «r 6 o i— * ^0 along with: 
 
 CHAP. 39-3 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. S^^ 
 
 " ^xo. .r,K,-^ slaves of every paradox for th. timebeing: To the passages 
 1:^0— ly quoted concerning this feature in the Athenian character, we 
 
 « fl(ld rfrom Bloomf.) Aristoph. Ecclez. 581-88. , ^ ^„ 
 
 "Vf^oZ, ..0, L^. Arn. observes that all this sentence depe.as „pon 
 
 , VL„_. it is vour fault, because each man awmgyou severally, as thegreat 
 
 ^IZt 7us aZ,Ln, iishcs to he an orator, andfaUiug tkis.' &. To.av^a ,s 
 
 f Loin antecedent implied in «W.. though Kriig. says to &rc.a, as the 
 referred to an antecedent imp ^_^^^^ .^ ^^j 
 
 1 r' rl^^.- Arn. translates, I do not see ^by-' theM tr,Uh 
 Z trikes out X.. before .piOo^., judging it to be altogether -adm.ss,ble 
 vL r aces it in brackets. Goll. understands ri X.7"M-» '-"-' ^"f i" >" 
 S "bu tL collocation of the words negativesthis. f :t >s to stand, we 
 'tl sunnose explain 6^..?. oSr-oi ^<r« SouA^^c.o. €l.«. V«''/'°' -^P"'"'-!'""- 
 
 high interests of state. 
 
 Chapter XXXIX.-(a.) ^^ix-rra Si, ».I«. ^i^^v-'for a s»gle city.' 
 The-r!lik^thel.tin itissimusunu.^^^^^^^^ 
 
 SfStr-s ^^^m^-ra :;rde: oL as X can .men^, 
 
 S::rBr."i 1^:1:^ z ^ ..^ - the pa. 
 
 :^::rapplfJon of it, orr..« belonging to the first-' .•« tUe case of a„y 
 
 n:;rr:x5''^.s;t^^?o.sub.x.^^.-'-^-- «•>-- 
 
 .1 \L. For this not unusual phraseology cf. IvU. w. 85, ^^^''^ 
 
 j:^:::: ::.:•! .beiii:::;;::::,. ^.J^^ -r-, 
 
 us, rather than revolted from us. fi^v 7 - ft 
 
 clause is introduced by 8.', but the implied antithesis is obvious. 
 
 (d) u€Ti T«. ^oA. <rTdvr.s^^ having taken their stand along with our 
 \a.) fiiTo. Twy - ,„ c, ..rM\ ihe Ti^im ' stare cum aliquo. 
 
 hitterest enemies: Pop. compares vii. 57- 61, and the J.atin s ^ 
 
 X Tl.a ^Ph exolains ixdCova, rather beyond the reach oj tneir 
 
 txaKp6T,pa. The Sch explains /x^ , ,. J .oKodrepov in the same 
 
 power, than iKdaaco, falling short of it. Cf. iv. 41. ^""^ t'^^P ^ 
 
 To cr.ee. The subject is .h^palia. ,i^^<rra koI U^iKaycicrrov, 
 
 The .Lxa must not be joined with arpoaU^^ros, as has been done by some, 
 
312 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III.l Chap. 40.I ^^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 313 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 
 e.g. Pop.—' to whom most espeeiaUy, and most suddenly unexpected , prosperity 
 has befallen: Kriig. makes ti6.\i(Tra independent—' im hohen Grade' -prospenty 
 in a high degree. 8.' i\axl(rrov— after the shortest interval, bc. of expectation, 
 cf. ii. 42. '««'' « \6yov—* success in accordance with ordinary calculation: 
 
 iropi hSlav—' contrary to expectation: Ka\ KaKoirpayiav k.t.\.~ 
 
 « and they jnore easily, so to speak, repel the assaults of adversity, than cmitmuously 
 [uninterruptedly, Sia] maintain prosperity: 
 
 (/) Kul &\\w5—' in other cases besides this ;' i.e. it is a matter of general 
 experience. davfidCfiv—' to treat with respect: 
 
 (g) rhv fx€rk Twv hhiycov Kivhvvov— 'thinking the risk incurred with 
 the oligarchs to he the safer of the two: Mwos is of course risk before it 
 comes to signify danger, as may be seen by the phrases irapa^ciAAetv Mvvov, 
 &c., and the perpetual use of »f«i'5u^6iJa; in Plato. irdKiV iv rri irdKu 
 
 refers to the state of things supposed by the hA^wthesis of the speaker— ' fl^^am 
 restored to their country; i.e. even if the oligarchs had expelled them. 
 $pax^la, vide supra. A,roK€Ktv5uv.tJ(r€Ta:-' the risk will have to 
 
 he run in the case against each separate state: Kriig. cf. rS>y 2\cw ti k.v- 
 5y*'ev€Tai t^ irJAet, Dem. xviii. 278. 
 
 Chapter XL.— (fl.) irpoacTva^-aliter, irpoae^^yai. ' I hare adopted ihe 
 reading irpoduyai because " to hold out a hope'' seems a more natural expression 
 than " to give a hope.'' '—Am. ; to which Poppo assents, ed. ii. This is true ; 
 still it may be said irpo<re€7vai is not ' to give a Jwpe; but ' to give an additional 
 hope; and Cleon may mean that the Athenians ought not to increase the 
 natural disposition among their allies to act even upon the slightest chance of 
 success, by the additional encouragement which the acquittal of the Myti- 
 lenjeans would give. ^6yv Tnariiv. BL, upon the strength of a 
 
 passage in Plato {Leg. vii. 824), makes this equivalent to X6yv -^^trvyny, ' do- 
 quentid fretam; with which Arn. and Pop. agree. This does not seem satis- 
 factory, as there is no instance of its being so employed by Thucyd. The 
 passage may be rendered—' to he made credible by plausibility of speech, in/o 
 which you could be persuaded by argument reliable, or purchaseable by money. 
 Peile has, ' persuadeable by argument, or purchaseable by money: Kriig., after 
 Heilm., makes itiffr^v agree with ivyyvwyi-ov, and explains it by nopiff-riw, 
 i<piKTi\v, but this he himself calls ' etwas hart,' and the collocation is I thmk 
 decisive against it. Bl. quotes ro^ovXKif Ai^/xaxi iri<rTot5y, FerscB, 55, as decisive, 
 but surely troops may be trusted by their leaders for their good qualities, as 
 well as trusted by themselves. 
 
 {b.) ws ^vyyvwfJL-rjv afxapT€7v k.t.X, Poppo considers this equivalent to 
 rod afxapruv, and for the omission of the article refers to the cases quoted by 
 Matthiae, § 542. Am. understands the words a/xapretv avepomivws as an explana- 
 tion of ivyyvdifiW' But is not the latter the feeling in the mind of the offended 
 party {v 5€ ^vyyJ^I^V yv<ayi.n iffrl Kpiriiaj rod iirmKovs ope-fj, Arist. Nic. Eth. 
 vi. 8) ; the former the act of the offenders ? How then can one be an epexegesis 
 of the'other? He seems to have been led away by the Scholiast's ixryy'^u}!^'^'^ 
 &iiov, but this is his ei^planation of the adjective ^{ryyywfxov. I would trans.-- 
 Uhat they will receive consideration from us, as having [that they have] erred 
 from human infirmity: ^iyypu,(xoy-' matter for consideration, 
 
 i.e. allowance. ivyyv(i)yLi\s ^lov, says the Scholiast. 
 
 ic ) ^.auixoy^ai. The prep, seems to exert the same force as m SmercC^o-eac 
 iJl)Jhroughout, therefore thoroughly, obstinately. Compare 5u.xupiC<«, 
 T^th Pop Ptlugk ad Eur. Ale. 694. ^--t^-^-^ ''^ ^P'^/^l'' 
 
 1'" The notion seems to me rather the technical one of uniting what they 
 rresolved upon, than the general one of repealling: Am., who supports this 
 w at some Lgth, and so also Pop. But if we translate-' c^a.^. your 
 :;:;/rr:^ .; have already decreed: this as they were met in a deUbe- 
 „l™ assembly will of necessity imply ' mvoimsi; »»"'■'»' • • • 
 
 ;:jr 1™ explains the former as the feeling of compassion ; the latter 
 h^W^of r^M^' general. Udness of temper: •E...Keia, the -^-jl^ 
 L™ber is the habit of equity or fairness, in contradistinction to strict justice 
 i^muZou... .0)' This perhaps therefore, though he does no noUce 
 rll some ground for Mr. Grote's remark (vi. 345) that ' c«c,«.a here 
 ^tht m ans tL'^isposition to stop short of your fuU rights, a spirit of fair- 
 "ssld adjustment, an abatement on your part likely to be requited by abate- 
 Zt on the part of your adversary.' Cf . Thucyd. i. 76, iv. . 9, v. 86, viii. 93- 
 Zo^^ltZlLis rightly .Hoin to tkose .ho are Uke-minM, and not to 
 
 ZlkoJsl.. »o olAn ir. return, -'';- .»/ «?f ^t » 4^ 
 I p^im of enemies: i.yS,.a-' room for display, Peile, or perhaps 
 
 "' wfl-f i?'.':..r.-'/ro» tkeirfine speaking mU receive fine treatment 
 
 »^i(;. bribes). ^P^^ v''y-'-'''T::MtZtr 
 
 Uyy always were, and, after all done for them, remain not a "*'' («M/°^- 
 li^ iL before: So we might tr., but Krug and most others condemn the 
 'words. frraA^iwu. contains the idea of toM^ieW. (^f-^"-, 
 vap..t.e. A. renders-' y««.«/ ""t confer a favour « f ". ^^ ' J*"^ 
 ' L^y be said under the circumstances ; the verb "^^ ^^'^^fj.^^''!^.^'Z 
 hv^'you will not oblige them;' i.e. 'wiU not do anythmg to th^m whu.h they 
 viU reaard as a favour: So the Sch.-oix Ho""" V" X'P"- 
 
 <?)LaJ..e.. There is I think no difficulty about the general sense- 
 I • you ire sitting here professedly to pass sentence upon the Myt,len,eans ;^J^ 
 I not take care it will be a sentence against yourselves that you pass Instead 
 of coniectnring 5.«a.<i«Te as Elmsley {Medea, 93), the m.d. voice seems to 
 meZTapproViate-'.^ will find that wkUe sUting ^y^^-^f^^y^^ 
 om> interest, it mil be yourselves who receive sentence: .f.a. avrovs stands as >t 
 Ue«^-««..;y, indicating 'the defendants,' and is not tautological, with the 
 UecUve notL of self contained in the middle verb. Peile has, 'you wdl 
 \mkr furnish arguments [pleas'] against yourselves; and compares t^.^ «.- 
 «.;w, xhv. But if this explanation be not satisfactory, we may accept Poppo, 
 who quotes an instance of the reflexive pronoun with the mid. verb, i. 33. 
 Ws mnohs p.&a,^<Taaeai. Krug. after quoting Elms, ad Eur Med. 93, 
 5«ai»,s Koff iS;..;;^ aiTiv 47ro5€i{€T€ 8^' rvpavviKis Spx"^. and Valla s version, 
 \cmdcmnabitis, says that no such sense or construction of the word is found in 
 IThiic., and therefore suspects that the passage is greatly corrupt.^ HI. touows 
 |Pop. and quotes Ar. Ethics, v. 9, and Herod, iii. 19. «" XC'"" • ■ • 
 
 U irpo,r«Ko,<_the absolute usage. irpoavKoy and r!. «Ki.s are equivalents, 
 [hat u'hich is seemly. In ^ai.oOai the force of the present is, at once to begm 
 ^niivgup. Matthiae, § 564. Kriig. (?r. § 569- a.5p«7«9I^<rea.. 
 
314 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIUES. 
 
 [Book III. I Chap. 42-] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 315 
 
 ,# 
 
 
 Cf ii 65 ipa\y'nr67€poi-^les8 sensitive, less quicJc in your feelings: 
 
 «f'5.«<l,c*,57o.T6s-' the escaping party: Goll. vainly conjectures Z.a<p<niov7,,, 
 Cf iv -Koov^ipiavras-^. on the principle 'odisse quem laesens. 
 
 U.l'ipxov-ra.-^ hunt them down: h.6KKvvra^. If with Am. 
 
 we consider this the middle voice, it may of course be legitimately ren- 
 ^^r^,^ compass their destruction r nor can any satisfacto^ reason be g-ven 
 « a priori' why UkXv^. should not have a middle voice. Ct iwa^oX.aQa. in 
 someMSavi. iz; and on the other hand all usage is against it and the 
 instances quoted may be otherwise explained. Hermann has therefore trans- 
 lated the words passiva voce with i><popiy.^vo.-^ dispereunt si suspicantur - it 
 Mis them to live in suspicion of danger: This must strike every one as very 
 awkward. There remains but a choice between difficulties. I scarcely thin 
 Kriig.'s solution, to strike out the koL and read hdKKvu-ra, referring to what 
 
 follows, will be accepted. y. ^ ^-m u 
 
 if) 6 yap M^ Vv^ avdjKV T. ^a0«i,. k.t.X. This is somewhat difiieiilt. 
 I consider the argument to be. ' They would have treated you with severity, be- 
 cause they would have known that your indignation would be great and your 
 revenge commensurate.' These words contain the reason why the Mytilen^ans 
 must have inferred that the anger of Athens would be excessive. ' For he who 
 has been in any matter unnecessarily [i.e. wantonly and without provocation-as 
 Athens would be, Mytilene not heing forced into revolt] iH-treated, if he escapes. 
 is more exasperated than an enemy upon equal terms. Bo not therefore, become 
 traitors to your own interests, hut putting yourselves in your feeling as near a. 
 possible to the state you would have been in as sufferers, and recollecting how you 
 wmld have preferred before all things to get them into your potver noivpay back 
 unto them your debt, without any weak compassion for their plight at the present^ 
 moment, and without forgetting the danger that once hung over your heads. 
 ^hy ivdyKT, is explained in the words of the version, x«A€7ra,Tepos. Arn. 
 translates,' '?Kor^ dangerous: but it means ' more angry and implacable. X«^^- 
 ■^ohs Xhof^^y robs icp' oh T€ /i), 5€T xc^^'ratVo./Tas, koI fxaWov ^ Se*, Kal itm. 
 Xp6vov, Kol /i^ 5iaAXaTTO/x€Vous t>.v^v Ti/i«pias ^ Ko\(£(r€«v.-Arist. Eth. iVtc. iv. 5- 
 Cf. the common phrases, xctXeircSs <^h^iv and b xaA*^a(.a,^. For ^ry';^«T ^ 
 T^ yvfi>im cf. Srt ^77T5TaTO -xoirrov 5ia»/oTj0€Was, i. I43 ; and tor 7«>'o^«' 
 Kriig. aptly quotes ^sch. iii. 153, 7^V.(r0c 5^ ^0. ^.Kp}>v xP^^ov rf? Z.avoia ^^1 e. 
 r^ LJTrjptV. Before Kal <J,s irpb .avrhs is supplied from y^vo^vo. vm 
 some participle like hiavoy^Qivr.s, or, as Poppo suggests, y.v6tx.voi Se is to 
 repeated, and i:s is to be taken as quia-^^ since you would have valued &c. 
 4hs rh Taphv ahrUa. The above version is, I see, supported by Pop. m 
 is, I think, wrong in taking ainUa with the verb as a simple adjunct- ^nmj- 
 ing in weakness at tlie present moment: -ior is ^pbs sufficiently consiclereQ. 
 Schneider conjectures irapouriKa ; Krug. erases irapcJ./. ^^Um^eJf) 
 
 (a.) C'ny^..<r6f..vov. Cr^f..M<ro,a. {bring the penalty of death upon hmelj^ 
 occurs iii 9. -. vide L. and S. The participle is either P-t J^e.nise^ .a^« 
 (irapaS 
 apposition 
 
 £ue. quotes Xen' ^««J. v. .. .5. i^.^l"^ "= '^^^'^"•' '^»'» "" '^ 
 
 (jf>X€''"0 
 
 Chapter XLI.-EiKpiro... Very little is known of this Eucrates. 
 Some identify him with the ffTWTreioiriiXijs of Ar. Eq. 129- 
 
 Chaptee XLII.-(a.) ««t. to!,. ^poBiyras k.t.X. The student will 
 
 iw r^eife how each clause is exactly referred to somethmg m the pre- 
 
 Sfpn" The oorrespondences are pointed out hy ^^^^ - ^^^^ 
 
 .udied for the due comprehens.on of the ay m nt I'^lZTkold that 
 
 fK« fnrce of the prepos tion. rdxos re Kai opyv^ 
 
 tZm^llol adverse to ,.<„* counsel are precipita.,^ TfjZ'7:S 
 7m the fJmer is ever the companion of ignorance, while, the latter ,s always 
 t^tJZul a shullow Judgment and coarse [unchastened<.und.c.p^e^ 
 :Zr Pop. asserts tl>at it is impossible to ascertain to wh.ch -^;- "i"^; 
 rrlectivelv refer. If the above version be correct we may urge that pre 
 
 •pXttil'nL associated with ^-M^.-^--'^^). "PfJ^f.^^Xt 
 ;^at 'fools n.h in ^here angels fear to tread.' And «g»'^*';'';:!"'^;7^i£ 
 Larks on iuaWa) designates that want of moral and mtellectual traming 
 Ii:*:iways Lves a m!n brutal, and liable to the passionate ,mpulses ot a 
 
 '"tuTur, «4t,- 5.a^.V..--« snakes some difference to himself in 
 ^iL''_h; has some private and personal interest - -i^^^^ ^^J^ \« ^i so 
 ^ (c.) oiK &.' ii7-Ta.. Tlie It. of course goes with * '"fi"'*'"' »'' 
 infl,«l does oiK-' he thinks lie has no chance of speaking well. Cf. n !i9- 
 tttZ BI. well points out that this refers to the ^^^^^^^l^^ 
 e^aracter for which he is censured by An^pha^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Ji^li^a^wUh L eye to bribes: The construction .sl*e he Lat^ 
 e^proirare allquid alicui. Pop. compares 45..!a ""'S^'; « ""'^;-/|,i "° 
 iLi^-ri^, 'L oratory of display,' see of -^T.^f''"""' '■ ^°' 
 noting the object of an action, cf Matth. 585- 3, Jelf, § «3+- 3- 
 ,i uf. yip iuaeUy-' for did they lay mere want of knowledge to '"^'"^''ff'' 
 IZJZmed to cariy his poiJ wouU in t^tcase ,uit tU '^^f^^^^ 
 tU repntati^ of want of sense, rather than want i r'^f^^rellT^ofa 
 mJng inaiility rather than wanting in honesty i.e. with the reputatmi 0/ « 
 M rathe, than that of a knave. For the double <:°'"V-r^'^''\''\'..^- .™ 
 V though coupled with i^ex^ip", is not without .ts ^''^^''^'^/^'".J^l 
 .hen a charge of unjust dealing is bought against a ^'^"'^'"'J.^J^ZZ 
 point he bJoJsan ohject of suspicion, and if lie JaUs, together wUh his stupidly 
 
 he is [held to be] a knave a. well.' ^°.^''.-'"!'™*'""'' ,„ed,al^ 
 
 T<,.oL«vs-sc. who make these calumnious msmuat.ons. .^i<re.,naa, 
 
 — sc. 01 itoMtoi, from ir6\is, cf. supra. , _ ■ <,;,,™„i,mo 
 
 (..) M tJd r^ou . . . ^aiy..e,i. Certamly not as Am.- Wte<, 
 
 inlo^nce;' m, ' to approve himself the *^«^ .«<'"«-^7°".>";"^^,t 
 tenns' i.e. taking no unfair advantage by insinuation or otlierwise of h- -^f " 
 In what follows there is no difficulty if we remember the/«< oXNa >^^~^ 
 ' but neither in tlie other to detract from what already belongs to Um ; the second, 
 
3i6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. ■ ch^p. 4?yl 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 317 
 
 1 
 
 h 
 
 1 
 
 ' not even: i. e. ' not only, I will not say punish, hut not even treat with disrespect: 
 Oix 8^«s for oi-x ^'Tc^s oh (cf. i. 35) seems to be employed on the same prin- 
 ciple as non mode for nm modo non. The second negative in the first sentence 
 is omitted, if both sentences have the same verb, and if the verb is contained 
 in the second sentence. See Zumpt, Lat. Gr. § 724. Mr. Long considers 
 that 'the confusion about this matter arises from translating " non modo not 
 only, whereas it means not so much as, that is, as the following word denotes.' 
 Therefore * non modo intrari, sed ne perspici quidem posset ' {into which there 
 tvas not so much as a possibility of enteHng, nay not even of seeing through). 
 —Long's C(Bsar, ii. 17. He would therefore render this^ passage, ' not so much 
 as punish, nay not even treat with disrespect: Cf. Kriig.'s Gr. Gr. § 67. 14. 
 rhv fiv rvx6yra yvii^yL-ris. Not 'the man who fails to carry his measure,' 
 but ' the man whose measure has failed to fulfil its design '-' not happy in his 
 advice: Trapa yv<i>fjiVP . • • «al irpbs x'^P'*'- «^«^*««^ ^^^ >^^'«^"^ 
 
 ...and to airry favour: 2 rf n^ iTrirvx^p-' and the rnan who failed 
 
 of success would not, in the attempt to ingratiate himself somewhat with the 
 people a.9 well as his nval [ahr6s], enter upon an eager struggle [grasp at] to 
 bring them over to his side: We must with hp4yoiro repeat the ^Kiara h. 
 Kriig. thinks that x<H>^Ch^v6s n is either most probably a gloss, or a mere 
 epexegesis. 
 
 Chapteb XLnL-(a.) K4pBov5 filp . . . rk ^^Xnara U t>i^m. 
 Pop. remarks that his countrymen would have put the statement inversely. 
 So too should we—' what is indeed the best admce ; but given from a dishonest 
 ^notive: <i>dovh(ravrts. Krug. rightly remarks that (pdopuv 
 
 Ke>5oui is a natural expression enough, but <pdou€7v hoKiifftajs is singular, and so 
 conjectures kt^^ccj. ' To grudge a man the reputation: is confused with '^ 
 feel a gnidge against him for hairing the reputation: air 6 to i 
 
 fi,e4o5—' in a straightforward way: Cf. i. 34- r^^vadfieuoy ._. 
 
 Ti(rr6y. A sort of oxymoron-' rcwt/^r himself credible by telling lies: The 
 whole, in a modern writer, would be exactly inverted. 
 
 (b) irtpivoias. -repl denotes ' stiperabundance: or ' supererogation, bee 
 note on ir.pzoucrfa, i. c. Here then we must understand ' over-sharpnm: 
 Sir Walter Raleigh has over^wiseness. Bloomf. ' This is the only state which, on 
 account of these extravagant and far-fetched notions of its being so over-clever, it 
 is impossible: &c.— Am. There seems some awkwardness in this, ansmg from 
 the absence of rairriv. Can the whole mean-' and one's country alone [or 
 country alone of all things], owing to these excessive suspicions, one u unable to 
 benefit without previously cajoling' ? i.e. the only thing one cannot benefit fairlj 
 is ' Fatherland,' whereas one would suppose that it would be the easiest ana 
 most natural thing to benefit. Since writing this I see Krug. has ' einen Staot 
 aUein:—' a state is the only thing one cannot: &c., i.e. in contradistinction t^ 
 private individuals, x^pipola denotes the excess of an active mind, which not 
 only sees all that is really to be seen in a subject, but fancies something more. 
 a<pava)5—' in, a way that does not meet the eye:—Pei\e. 
 
 (c) iv TV Toiv5e iiiiovvri (vulgo), a^iovv ri (Popp.)- It is usual to 
 explain this like ip ry m^ fi^\^rwvTi, i. l^i; iy ry 5iaAXti<r(roKTi rvs yy^^f^vs. nu 
 
 ,, m this case we must translate-' in such a state of your se^itzments, or, 
 Zhileyou esti^nate thi^s in this way: But Haase, Lucubrat. Thucyd p. 37 
 ,!n;es that the expression is incorrect ; first, because when the participle neuter 
 Tthe article is used as a substantive, we never find, as here, an adjective, or 
 t^TZ^ ir^ -^50. coupled with it ; secondly, because Thucyd. uses 
 If expression 4y r<f ro:<?5e per se with the same force, e.g. 11. 36, v. 88, 111^81 
 isTg^ I think, bJ questioned). He therefore reads |.oO^. and Pop^ 
 ■ IZ: They would, I suppose, translate-' but it is desirable, when regard is 
 to W to oul highest interests, and in so grave a matter that we sMddcon- 
 sZit our duty to speak with somewhat longer forecast, thin you whose judg- 
 Z is so sumLry, m.re especially as the advice which we give ^s responsible, 
 Mvof^ to whom it is addressed are subject to no responsibility at all Krug 
 loo and Donaldson, read ^ai^ovy t, but the r. is, he says, to be connected with 
 xi^a and not. as above, with irepatrtpcw. -.t i -n a 
 
 ^TUsopy^^ VT..a TtixrjTe k.t.X. Hermann Haaek, Popp.,^ and 
 Kr^ supply Cv^^ovyr.s, i.e. .phs 6py^y %yr.ya r^x^r. {_C^i..ovyr.s) C.^^oure- 
 Z2'vJ^hin accordance wUh the passionate feeling zn wh^h you ^ happen to be 
 KllunishinQ' Am., Bekker, and Goll. supply a<i>oX^yr,s, 1.^. c<paK.y'r.s 
 IZy ZTt7s'on^y Wa -Xn- l.^a^iyr.s]-^n.eting with disaster ^n 
 Jordance with the passions which may happen to hnve brought it about 
 Zmfloins irpbs 5p4- • • C./^--^,and supplies .apa.Ve.. to ^.r.a from the 
 Wr sentenc^' whatever counsel it may he in which you may happen to Uve 
 IZlZvvointed you punish: &c. To me this seems, as to Am., an unnatural 
 rerancT^^^^^^^^ I« it possible that this is one of the rare cases 
 
 ZrT^U-tands^.r.ewithoutaparticiple?Cf.Soph.^,^^^ 
 Tr k^QZO, and Kvp.7 (or the almost certain emendation Kupe.r.), Soph. Meet. 
 If so translate-' but now sometimes whsn you meet with a reverse, you 
 "^sh in accordance with the temper in which you happen to be, the single 
 Zl ' &c., i.e. Demus takes his reverses lightly when in a good humour, but 
 Tn n a b^d one he is severe. Am., it is tme, objects against Poppo s inter- 
 Tetltion that ' it is not the speaker's object to represent the punishment vai^. 
 fn Tc corcing to the ebb and flow of the people's resentment, but to describe 
 the resentment and the consequent punishment as certain and severe. I 
 Lot S so ; the existing debate and the case of Pericles are proof to the 
 Tn^rT I do not believe that he wishes to make the Athenians as bad as 
 ha : he' merely insinuates that there is no security for public men agains 
 sudden and arbitrary popular resentments originating in disappointment ; et 
 
 il a raison.' , . ^ j j tt- 
 
 ' How many traitors to their God and King 
 
 Escaped the fate that was reserved for Byng.' 
 
 .pbs hniiv. says BL. it is scarcely necessaiy to add, signifies ' pr^ ira.' Scarcely 
 indeed^for the preposition has it. proper sense-i.^ reference to, estwuited zn 
 coZarison Jh-^^.t as it is infra, xliv., ^pU rV - ^/^-^P- opyi^y, where 
 he most Btxangely tr.— ' on account of your; &e. 
 
 Chapter XLIV.-(a.) ^y r. yap h.o^i^y^'K.r.K, ' Two difficulties,' says 
 Am. ' present themselves-the omission of the apodosis, and use of ^ with the 
 
3i8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 y 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 % 
 
 
 optative mood.' The former he thinks easily removable, and in his note 
 practically asserts the same principle as that maintained in the note, iii. 3, 
 This is, I believe, correct, but there is still another reason in favour of such an 
 omission of the apodosis here. The speaker goes to work very delicately ; he 
 purposely avoids all plain and direct assertion of his object, as calculated to 
 offend. Therefore he gladly leaves, what he means to recommend— the expe- 
 diency of excusing the Mytileneans — as an inference rather than a statement. 
 ' If I prove theni ever so guilty, I shall not an that account straightway {kcCC) re- 
 commend you to put them to death if it he not expedient, nor again if, per- 
 adventure, they may have a slight excuse [shall I say anything about excusing 
 them], if it he not clearly estahlished {(podvono) that it is for the good of the 
 country.^ The second point is one which involves much. Are we to adopt 
 and lay down a rule framed upon a careful, but blind induction, without any 
 reference to the principle which the rule exemplifies ? or are we to admit a priori 
 considerations to a large share in the ground upon which we construct our 
 rules? The former method is unphilosophical, the latter unsatisfactorj' 
 because so liable to perversion. But as the national tendency is the other way, 
 one is inclined to believe that English scholars should rather cultivate the 
 latter. Until, therefore, some satisfactory reason be given (which is perhaps 
 possible) why fjv never can be coupled with an optative, nor u with a subjunc- 
 tive, it is perhaps right to permit explanations of the apparent anomaly. I 
 quote then with pleasure Peile's comment upon this passage : * The change 
 in this clause from the subjunctive which should properly have followed ijv, to 
 the optative, I attribute to the art of the speaker, who for the first time ven- 
 turing to hint that the Mytileneans may not be so bad as Cleon has represented 
 them, purposely makes it a more remote and improbable contingency than the 
 supposition of their guilt.' Cf. i. 120, fiv nh afivvaxn . . . u rh, Kdru vpSoiino, 
 and ii. 44, iii. 46. This it must, however, be admitted does not answer the 
 question why is it not, fiv airwlyfiva) . . . cl €Uv ? Hermann and Bekker seem to 
 decide as Peile, Pop., Am., GolL, the other way. It ought to be mentioned 
 that Dr. Donaldson has suggested (following a hint from Dobree) ^v exoin-it 
 Ti ^vyyvdlt/x-ns (se. oiro4>'^iw aurous), elcv [let that pass — * what of that ']. See 
 Arist. Nuh. 176. So Kriig. eUv^sei es. ^av and Cv^ have also ingeniously been 
 conjectured for (hvj and also i\i(iy. My own belief is that we owe V to the 
 ignorance or carelessness of some copyist who, having written it in the pre- 
 vious clause, thought proper to repeat it here, not noticing or not caring for 
 the transition to the optative, which Peile explains rightly enough. 
 Iffx^piC^Tcit — insists upon ; makes a strong point of, a word of which Thuc. 
 seems fond. Cf. iv. 23, v. 26, &c. irpodflff lysine articulo, if we 
 
 hold forth. 
 
 (h.) SiKaiSrfpos — * containing a greater show of justice when looked at in 
 reference to your present anger against the Mytilenceans' i. e. if that he thf 
 standard to which you refer, and hy which you measure it. ruv 
 
 SiKaloav — 'pleas of Justice,' 'points that may he urged.* See Theophrastus. 
 Char. n€pl Me/i\|/iMO'p^« (x^i. ed. Shep.) : Ka\ Zita]v viicfjffas, koI \a$^y iriffas 
 T^s ^ipovs, iyKa\uv ry ypdy^avri rhv \6yoVf us iroXAa "KopaKcXonrSri rwv 
 ^tKodoov. Compare iiKanHtiara, i. 41, and h ?xoM«»' S^Kaia, c. 54. 8irw$ 
 
 Xpijo't/nws 6|ou<rtv — ' how they shall hest serve our purpose.' 
 
 CHAP. 45-3 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 3^9 
 
 CHAPTEB XLV.-(a.) Karayvols lauroO-' having passed sentence against 
 \ Us oZ prospects of success in his plot, or passed sentence aga^nst Mmself of 
 mure ^^ hi! plot [Ut- Jiving condemned himself that h. w^l nots.cceed\. So 
 I failure F L ^ ^ ^^ ^^^ Xen. Cyr. vii. i. 36. 
 
 ^ffffw K.T.A. «««/ .V ii:„„^^y pf ii ic b The form of expression 
 
 ,,,i.e or furnM by M«gn alhance. Cf. u. 35^^ 1 P .^ 
 
 i8 as usual varied from JuMf'oX"^''- ^ ',t 
 
 .i„«. hoth men and states, to commit offences.— O-Oboes. 
 
 "^autTu.i.K,Kiea.i y.-'si.cemen have gone through att poss,bU 
 J to for the whole catalogue of punishments], heaping one upon the other [or 
 '^iTiothem i e. increasing their severity], to see if possxbly by any means, 
 f Tf Si Goll. rendL .po.r.e^^« Hnjungentes; .\Aci. » not so 
 "• '=^"- ^a.a&aivo^ivwv has sometimes been coupled with 
 
 rirVated. See note on .apa3a!«™ .0O.0. G611 supplies ^^^., 
 
 trrjwers that the general notion of vit^>, U> be gathered from what pre- 
 Pop. considers tnat me B j^^^ foice— 'when men 
 
 eedes, is to be supplied. Or the -rd m'ght h _,^^^^ ^, ,^, 
 
 hecome transgressors. i,Tl,,ilay ^„i ^„Sto irap.Pai.cra.. 
 
 („ rf/./,/J ' met from reaching a climax. koi toi-ti. j. ^■ 
 
 It, death; met. iromr» B sneaking like that noticed in iropaflwoficwi', 
 
 frt^i:rZi:T'^ssity affording the necessary daring [of •' My poverty 
 
 {7not my will consents'], and power gi^ng birth to a gr<.p.ng ^"^^/on^ 
 out not my v. _ , „,, ,r. „,a^ circmnstances or conditwns oflife,from 
 
 arrogance and ^'f'J''^/^'~^u) i, under the dominant influence of 
 
 ::TJm$^^r::XfassiZ: no^-^^^^. ^.^-^ 
 
 *"-'" ^"'"^r d- on' Bl" a 'Z'TT^St^^ATrot: 
 ''''T'-^£Z:nIl. «:». i- — -. "ut it is rather ' the 
 Zmswh^^M^^^^tre to afford; ' the chapter of accidents,- .s^e ..y 
 •tCr.tX. in fact represents the source of the famous Mr. Micawbers 
 
 'TtT-'-^^P-- Kriig. supiK>ses that a compa-on with the resot^es 
 of the enemy is intended. I should rather suppose that an infenonty to those 
 
 which their calmer judgment would consider "^^'r^ '^^^^^'tnold (though 
 
 M ^Kio, T. air&y. This is the reading of the best MSS. Arnold (thouga 
 
 p^n ts ai:;.^) renders, ■ carries his imaginatu>ns sonuwhat too farcon^- 
 
 ingthem: Of this Pop. approves, ~>»P»"''g *\«'""."r2 ''' ^aZnr^m 
 ii ,7 M Toxi. T% Wins iv. .2. G6U.'8 explanation is, al>gu>d ''^'^^'^^ 
 yibJr'taL, et in aUos imperii] in majus aninu, concipit sc. majorem libertatem 
 
 Hx ^° t^^ZtZ^^^t^^^^^Z:^^ dream JUL say! 
 Tit I «aX ^tlate™r Peile-a^^. ^-^^TIJ:'^^ 
 
 .Uho. reflection^ is apt -^ -^^^J^^^tZ trnTu^er 
 at any rate /iera vdmuv reters to ine couuut5uv,D 
 
i 
 
 1 i 
 
 320 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 48.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 321 
 
 universi audent, quod singnli reformidarent. But ahrw. is, I have little 
 
 doubt, Thueydidean. . .1, ^ 7 , 
 
 (e.) hhi,varov KaX tro\\y\s ^v-nQ^Us--^ it xs impossible and a mark oj 
 
 great simplicity in him who supposes: Cf. ii. 44, and iv. 18. 
 
 Chapter XLVI.-(«.)^X*77'i¥. 7^a is « the hollow of the hand.' ^ Hence 
 i-nvif^^ to give security by placing a thing in the hand,' and .'r/'^r)-' the 
 Becurity given ' ^x^Tf^os therefore means ' hiving ' or ' affording sccimty; 
 ' to be relied on ' Cf. ' spondeo.' ' We should not therefore from confidence in 
 the punishment of death, as if it afforded any security; &c. Cf. v,ii. 68, 
 <p,peryv<^aros. kviK-K^crrov . . . &s ovk .<rrai ^.ray.wva^ 
 
 is equivalent to ku4\-Kicrov iroirjaai rh fi,TayuS>i^ai-' not to make repentance 
 mid expiation of their faidt a matter of despair;' not to establish in them a 
 sentiJnt of despair, as though, &c. The principle is that of building a bndge 
 for a flying enemy. ''"^ goes with k^oaraaa-^ even supposing it to 
 
 have revolted: , . ^ • j 
 
 (b) diiro^ovvai-'to reimburse us for the expenses of the war, to indem- 
 nify: On this particular force of anh in composition, see the long notes in 
 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, pp. 176, n^- 
 
 (c) TapaaK,vd<raaeat . . . Trapar^y^ardai, I cannot account for the 
 union of tenses except upon the principle maintained in a tract upon the aonst. 
 App. II. Similar cases occur, iv. a8. 5^, v. 49^ ^i- ^4, vm. 46. Am. adds in 
 accordance with the theory there advocated, ' In the latter the notion of future 
 time is essential, whereas in the former the time is unimportant, and it is 
 simply the occurrence of the thing which the writer wishes to signify Pop. 
 believes that ^apar.vuaOai means 'suffer itself to be, will be, put to the rack, 
 'very hard pressed; because its subject really is ir6\iu, not rroXiopKiav. 
 Kemark that r. may follow iroXtop^fa because no real opposition to the idea in- 
 troduced by fih is intended, but only an extension or amplification of it. tt. 1. 
 rh avrh dvvarai. Cf. note, i. 141. 
 
 (d ) ^Kfk-Kr.aQai. Am. makes this the mid. voice-' hurt yourselves k 
 resistinq ' but if we consider the real meaning of the word ^XcCirro,, which is, 
 to put an obstacle in a man's way, we see that here and elsewhere it is passive. 
 See observations on .Esch. Ag. in Terminalia, No. 21. ^ opras, sine 
 
 articulo-'/rm being too strict Judges: Cf. with Am. 1. 71, a,.vu6f..yoL. 
 aaWov fi—' 80 much as it is to look and see: 
 
 (e) is Yp7,M<iT«v \6yoy^'on the score of money:-A.rn. This seems 
 correct But as X^os and ' ratio ' are so neariy the same, it appears unnecessay 
 to explain the phrase as he and Pop. are at pains to do, by ^ if we come to 
 talk about money: The Sch. has ^api0AiT,criv. Bl. has many examples from 
 later writers, but he tr.— ' solvent in respect of the payment of money. Xoyiarvs 
 is *a calculator,' 'a teacher of arithmetic' (vide L. and S. Lex.), not a 
 ^^^gy, ^pyuv rris iwtfxfXtias. The usual sort of antithesis, 
 
 meaning here-practical precautions against revolt. Cf. ^pr**' <Pf<^^^ ^^'■ 
 .poJraXa^fi7y..y. See i. 57- Lid. & S. (L.x.) give several Thucydidea 
 loci. ^ir' ^\<£x*«^Toi'— ' extend the blame over as S7nall a surjace [ol toe 
 
 population] as possible: 
 
 Chaptee XLVIL — (a.) Sc? Se Koi et ^SUtjo-aj/ fi^ irpoo-xoicTadai. 
 Pop. argues, if d Zvfios rwv ir({\€«v is the subject of ^5i»c7j(rav, and the notion be 
 general, we should require a future sense, and koX iav a^iK-^ffacri. But if it be 
 ^ iriiJLOsruv MvriKwaiwv, inasmuch as the orator has just denied that they were 
 ouilty, we should expect cSct, not Sel. This, it seems to me, is to tie down the 
 speaker rather too closely to his words. Cf. hiKaiws oi>s fx^ Se? Siow^eeTpai, where, 
 at any rate, we might have expected xpi Or is €t 7j5iKTj(raj/ to be rendered—' if 
 we are to assume that they have wronged us; * assuming that they have wronged 
 us' ? just as eiirep (i. 6y. b.) means ' if, as is the case; but is sometimes employed 
 in sUting a position, not really correct, but necessarily assumed as the basis of 
 an lAcyiis— ' if as we are for the present to assume: Cf. Ivi. Kriig. does not 
 hesitate to read e8«. ju)} vpoinroieladai—'not to take it up; 
 
 6c. as a ground of quarrel. Arn. refers to Theophrastus xepl Etp«j/€i'as. ^ See 
 Sheppard's note on the passage, from wliich it appears that fi^ 7rpoflr7rot«(r0at, 
 like oif </)T|/if, may mean—' to make as if it were not the case; ' to pretend not: 
 But from the epigram there quoted — 
 
 et Koi^opoi Tis, iav 6 \oiZopovfiivos 
 
 fit) irpocriroi^Taiy AoiSopetTai Xoi^opuv — 
 
 it seems that the word meant primarily, ' to make; or, * take to oneself, take it 
 misapplying to oneself;' an interpretation which will hold good here, andlbeUeve 
 in aU cases, and explain the ofl'ending U^ei in Theophrastus, which all the 
 editors have given up. The connection between not ' taking up' a matter of 
 offence and not ' noticing' it, is near enough to have produced the confusion. 
 Kie^iiv. e{is is formed from the second person sing, of the perfect pass, of 
 €>, and follows the analogy of such words, i.e. it means ' a way of having; or 
 ' hddiiig; in this place, maintmance. Kriig. says it is peculiar to Thucyd., and 
 refers to Lobeck, Fhrynichus, p. 3 5 1 • J^^t so the old English ' haviour ' (now 
 behaviour) is fonned from the verb ' to have.' ' Nor the dejected haviour of 
 the \\^Q.ge:— Hamlet, c/cttjs, the noun from the third person, we have in com- 
 pounds, e.g. irXeoi/eKTTji. 
 
 (6.) a8tKrj07jvoi. Cf. i. 110, d. diKalus—' on strict grounds of 
 
 justice; the ' summum jus,' which often is * summa injuria.' Kal rh 
 
 K\€«;/os— ' Cleon's point, the identity of justice and expediency in our revenge, 
 is found to be incapable of subsisting in it at one and the same time: There is a 
 slight impropriety in the use of B.}ixi, as if he had forgotten that he had spoken 
 of the identification of the two things, instead of the two things separately. 
 h auTtp— sc. T<? Tijuwpercreat, to be supplied from rifLwplas. Pop. and Goll. 
 Peile aptly compares laxvoyi^v rySe following, and referring to t^j irpoa6Uv, 
 I xlvi. Dobree, T<p avrtf. Krug., Taur^, but needlessly. 
 
 Chapteb XLVIII.— (a.) yv6vr^s . . . -»ref0€<r06. Poppo, with Rost 
 UGr. Gr. 129. 4. c). objects to the old rendering of these words— 'ff?wm intel- 
 \kxmtis; «&c. The meaning of yv6vre$ here is, what it always is—' when you 
 \ have found out; implying a conclusion the result of some previous information 
 I or instruction. 
 
 {b.) Tphs rovs ivavriovs. I do not see much in Poppo's remark, 'sed 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III.|c«^'- 5^3 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 323 
 
 I 
 
 -222 
 
 Athenienses tunc non adversus hostes (Peloponnesios) sed super adversariis 
 (Mytileneis) consultabant.' The sentiment is general thov^h, as usual, 
 inclusive of the case in question. There seems a sort of antithesis between 
 ^vKei.<reai .ph, {to deliberate looking to, and therefore not yet tn contact wtth, an 
 enemy) and Mv f^er^ ^P7«»' {actually 'and in very deed assailing him). 'The 
 man who deliberates wisely, looking to his enemies, is in a stronger posttton than 
 he who recklessly with Ment acts assails them.' The argument is directed against 
 the notion that strength is evidenced by action only, and not by words. Krug. 
 would insert the article after ^. 
 
 Chapter XLIX— (a.) 8iu«s, i.e. notwithstanding what might have been 
 inferred from xxxTi.. that they (viz. the people) had repented, and a l^e 
 maiority were in favour of ^e repeal. The omission of the article before 
 J..dL proves, as Popp. rightly remarks, that it is to be taken in close con- 
 nection with the predicate /ir,a6.<r«.-' were delivered in Tnost palpable oppositwn 
 to each other.' Am. says, • so in the debate in the Koman senate on the punish- 
 ment of the accomplices of Catiline, the motions of C^sar and Cato were 
 udK^^a M.axa. [what authority is there for this word?] ; and although D. 
 sTanus and several other persons had proposed motions nearly to the same 
 effect as Cato's, yet Cato's was adopted by the aristocratical party as expressing 
 most strongly and decidedly what they wished. See Cic. ad Attic, xi. zi. 
 ivvciuaAo.. The Sch. explains ^TTi'S raai Kal (Tx^Si^i/ ^apaTTA^crtoi. Thu jd. 
 repLs the word iv. 134, vii. l^- It seems to be a reUc of the old poetic lan- 
 guage, which fell into.disuse after Thucydides. • . 
 
 (b\ Sira,s M^ «r»0a(rc£«r^s rfjs nrporipas. Bekk.,Krug., Am.; tt,s cr.pas. 
 Popp" 8cuTc>«s vulgo, which G611. adopts, but says, ' non sanum est nisi 
 dictum eodem sensu quo It.>«.' Though the authority is so preponderan 
 against l^v^ipas, it certainly had stmck me that by suspending the sentence a 
 X the whole might be considered equivalent to Sires h ^^vr.pa uavs ^6a.a<ra , 
 .0^ [or cSpa,(n, sc. ol mGrat, understood in vavs] 8.c4>0ap^.vT,. rV ^'^^»'-^*« 
 th7second ship might not {having got beforehand) find the city destroyed. Th 
 has I found, struck Dale also, who explains-' that by the previoics arrival of 
 the\econd they might avoid finding the city ruined,' and quotes two cases 
 ah similarly used in ii. 3. But long before either of us, Peile wrote : Ibe 
 Lth is M^ is not here to be taken in connection with S.a,s in the common -,, 
 oilest,hnt is to be carried over <peaad<rns -rns Seurcpas-which words dec are, ^ 
 it were in passing, the manner in which what follows was to be prevented-t 
 .0p«a. h..^apf.4yny-that they may not {the second galley having outstn^i 
 the first) find the city already destroyed.' ^ • v • f\..t here 
 
 (c) irpo€iX€ ^M^P? ««^ »""''^^ ^d\i<rra. It is obvious that here, 
 where Thucydides is expatiating on the greatness of the feat, ,^dKi<rra is not | 
 be rendered '«^ most,' but rather 'at least.' See note on 1. 118. m accordance 
 with which it would mean—' as nearly as may be.' (xvovov \ 
 
 , X u— * zealous prosecution of the voyage.' 
 
 {d.) oUcf . . . ^.<pvpa^4ya. It is probable that the wine was an add 
 tion to the common ,aCa^ a cake of meal and oil used for the ratio- oH 
 rowers. f^C^- lix<pna ^.<pvpa^4ua SSart .aWAaly, Hesych Cf. Arist Fac. 
 Eq. 55, Plutus 1121.. 'cara ^4pos-^ turn and turn about. 
 
 ii\\6K0'.^ov. Peile renders, 'cross,' 'untoward' 'unkindly,' 'against the 
 ^g^in! I 80-01/ aj/€7. cf. i. z. a. iiriKariyi^rai. Pop. 
 
 doubts whether this means 'insuper appellatur,' or 'postea appellatur.' There 
 seems little practical difference : KardyeTaL {comes to her moorings) irrl {close 
 on the heels of the first). Cf. viii. 28, a. imKaTayovrai. 
 
 {e.) Traph roaovrov ^X0€ Kivhvvov. This phrase (which recurs vii. z) 
 has called forth a good deal of remark, for the usual way of rendering it would 
 be—' so little short of danger did MytUene come,' which is absurd, as it was 
 within an ace of destruction, but actually in danger, and not shart of it at all. 
 Are we, then, as Arn. suggests, to consider kivZvvos like our * danger,' an 
 equivocal word sometimes implying * the thing of which there^ is a danger ' ? 
 But (i) desiderantur exempla ; and (2) he has shown that danger, 'from its 
 derivation (damnum, damniarium, danneggiare) always has a bad sense, whereas 
 KivlwQs and KivZvuivw have not.' Bloomfield supposes there is some confusion 
 between h roaovrov Kivhvvov and irapa roffovrov oiiK aircaXero — but this is telling 
 us what Thucydides might have written, not explaining what he did vn-ite. 
 Peile tries to escape the difficulty by searching for a similar equivoque in Eng- 
 lish. * Thus far did all Mitylene {(JiJev opposed to rovs aWovs) go danger-ward.' 
 He compares Dem. c. Mid. § 18, vikuv irapa toCt' ol6fx€uov—' but for this,' i.e. 
 short of this. iEsch. c. Cies. sub finem, Trap' ohtiv ^\Qov h.-noKT^wai—' came next 
 to nothing short of putting to death.' The old version, apparently approved by 
 Pop., is perhaps the safest—' in tantum pericidum MytUene venit,' which may 
 be explained, ' up to such a pitch of danger did MytUene come, and stand 
 therein; or so much risk did MytUene run, irapa denoting ' motion up to the 
 side of a thing.' See i. 29, ad finem. See Grote's remarks upon these two 
 speeches. Without detracting from their general fairness and ability, it is, I 
 think, impossible not to feel that they are coloured by a.feeling towards Cleon, 
 not unlike that between advocate and client.. 
 
 Chmt^r Jj.—{a.) yv<aiJL.ri KX^ofvos— the proposal of Cleon; on aeon^s 
 
 motion, as we should say. 
 
 (6.) KXtipovxovs ... . a7r€7r€)Lnf/a»/. I do not think it necessary to sup- 
 pose that these KKrjpovxoi went into permanent personal occupation of their allot- 
 ments. See the accounts of the other revolts, viii. 22, 23, and Xen. i. 6, ii. 2. 
 It seems unlikely that so large a number of citizens should have been exempted 
 from the onerous local duties at Athens. Nor, as Bockh urges, could there 
 have been many Athenian kleruchs in Lesbos at the time of the Sicilian expe- 
 dition, for Thucyd. mentions the Athenian settlers at other places, sc. Histiaea 
 and ^gina, as forming part of the expedition, but says nothing of these. Grote 
 subjoins (note, vi. 352), ' We might push this argument further, and apply the 
 same inference to an. earlier period, the eighth year of the war.(iv. 75), when 
 the Mitylenseans were so active in their aggressions upon Antandrus, and the 
 other towns originally Mitylenaean possessions on the mainland.' Cf. Chnton, 
 F. H. 389. Probably they received rent as absentee landlords. On the 
 K\y)povxia, see Diet, of Antiq., which has all the necessary information from 
 Bockh. ra^dfifvoi. See note i. 99. c. itoX'tCfiaTa. 
 
 Pop. refers to iv. 52. On the fate of Paches, see Grote vi. 553. 
 
 t2 
 
324 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. cVoK uMf^,,. 5 J.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 325 
 
 n 
 
 Miti 
 
 Chaftee LI.-(«.) M.v<4a. rV 'V^oy. It was a peninsula ipRM, 
 time an7the map by the .un-eying officer., given in Arn.'s edmon sW .hat 
 
 Iv-ZloSl'^e tra&rir TTtropyUl^a mo. pi.,. 
 
 Sphacteria and the Gulf of Pylos. . ,„.£,^,.. Arn. make, this 
 
 an auucolouthon, the latter clause standing for the infinmye which was to foUo. 
 an »'".""7;"™' . . 1 ,„„,eption of the sentence ; 3oi*«rea. ought to hav,. 
 
 f'Z':: "''"^"" T '.Sop!^ Budorum. a promontory and town ., 
 Sritr^^r against Minoa. called in ii. 9^ r,s .aXa.T.« .. ..p<^V« -^ 
 
 ''^lo T^^ 'r;.X. AH this must he admitted to be very obscure. Strange 
 to sly Art our great resource, does not make anything clear by h.s note^ H 
 cuotsGai ' iriN.<ral«, "on the Me of Ks^a." :s opposed to ri « r, 
 quotes tfou., « .„.>,, -m:,™ itself was on the mainland, at least 
 
 iprflpov: which, considering that JSissea itseii >^ab .semicircular 
 
 reouires explanation. Minoa was an island shutting in on the S. a semicircnUr 
 requires eipiauanvy extremities. >iS8ea, 
 
 r^f rcrabr^o^rti^stit brrii. N.K of nm. 
 
 rrwXdtloaltlyrmolesterminatingin 
 
 theTher from the mainland near Nisiea, so constructed, we may infer, a. 
 the otner ir communication from one shore 
 
 ratter ' ;or-k , How tyou know that this was on the E. and not the 
 W of the isJd? We answer, because the English officers have obsm.1 
 
 Xrhat sT:: na « "obstLctions, probably want of water (if we mayju , 
 
 ?a*d by which succours from Nis^a were occasionally thrown into th fort » 
 he island. But an inspection of the ground wiU show that such a^^ idge ^^ 
 an arm of the sea would be a feat quite beyond the engineers of M«6»»' 
 B^nTly if succours were thrown into Miuoa from Nis>«a, is it not more hU 
 Z came by the moles and a drawbridge, which were quite near them. hj» 
 '^, hey went round to the other side of the bay -d built a huge brid ' 
 theDuroose? May we therefore translate-' Ae ;«-o««icd to build a «»»_ 
 Sr,Tl Joftne .lainUnd aUo.Just at *'- ^'^'^'^I^I^J X^ 
 Jay through a marsh, there was access for succours into the island' i.e. 
 
 „f in thi mainland the communication between the mole from the mainland 
 Nisala, whi( 
 
 and Nisak which communication consisted of a causeway or bridge over some 
 marshy ^found. The reader will excuse the length of a note which deals with 
 adifficult point, as yet unexplained. rh iK r^s ^^erpou-on the 
 
 bide of (i.e. looking from) the mainland. Cf. i. 64. a. 
 
 Chapter LII.— (a.) iroKiopK^LtTeai, equivalent to ^ofi4v€tv r-nv iroXiopKlau. 
 Q^ ch. 109. ilp-nii^vov K.r.K. Pop. cf. V. 17. 3- on the history. 
 
 Kiyoyra-'io make the proposal,' i.e. to see whether they would consent to 
 the proposal. «» PovKoyrai. Arn. says that the indicative arises 
 
 from a blending of the dramatic and narrative together, that is to say, the 
 mood and tense employed by the speaker are coupled to the third person of 
 narrative composition. He also supposes that the apodosis is suppressed after 
 ^oiKovrat, quoting iv. 37, €«^pi'l«'' re ei ^oiXoivro ra Uha TrapaZodpai Ka\ <r<t>a, 
 avrohi 'AO-nvaiois 5(rT6 $ov\ed<Tai '6ri kv iKeivois So/cj^. But, as Peile remarks, 
 'this very passage points out the construction of the last clause to be Zare rois 
 re aZiKovs K.r.\. We might indeed have expected Sore rohs fiev ahUovs k.t.X., 
 but the clause begins as if rois re fxh a<t>i4vai were to follow.' All the in- 
 finitives are governed by jSouAovrat, and rohs AoKeSaiixopiovs is the subject of 
 
 KoXaCdV. 
 
 {b) rovs T6 al'iKovs. Pop. considers that this t6 connects xp*j<ra(r0ai and 
 KoKK^iv, and supplies ZiKoxTrks before the latter verb from the preceding 
 hKMrali. This, though somewhat harsh, is not I think more so than many 
 other things in Thucyd. re is used because the idea implied in koU^^iv is 
 a mere epexegesis of the general notion ZiKa<rrats xp^(Ta(reai, both being included 
 in that of ♦ trial'—' for judges to try them and be merciful therein.' In this 
 way the future is not reciuired, which seems necessary to Kriig., who makes re 
 contradictory to Se, referring to his own Gr. § 69, 16. 
 
 (c.)t«p k<TQeve(Tr6.r<^—^m the last degree of feebleness: Bl. quotes 
 imitations from later writers. iiriKaKea6,iievoi. The junior 
 
 student should notice the force of the middle yoxcq— caused them to he summoned. 
 €? T* AaK65atMO»'^ous K.rX. The ri is repeated because the Lacedaemonians 
 meant to put the question as strongly as possible : ' fi^hethcr they had in any 
 pint done any service; Arn. So in the second Punic war after the capture of 
 Capua the Romans a.sked— ' Ecquis Campanorum bene meritus de repubhca 
 Romana esset?' Pop. oi 5' tK^ov alrvcrdfxeuoL-' but they 
 
 rrplkd hy asking, &c., and appointing; i.e. 'their reply consisted m having 
 
 asked; Peile. 
 
 {d.) irpordiayres trc^wv ahrwv ' \ar{iii a xov — ' having appointed 
 
 Aetymachus to be their spokesman^ 
 
 I Chapter LIII.— (a.) T)?^ \x.\v irapdSoaty K.r.X. This speech merits the 
 praise which has been so generally bestowed upon it. Even Dionysius says— 
 
 Was iv reus erra fii^Kois ^epofiivas r)]v YiXaraUwv nrjfx'nyopiav redaifiaKa irap' 
 
 \ovhh oJJtws erepov, (is rh fJ.^ )36j8a(ra^iV0at /trjS^ KareTrirer-n^edaOai, aA-nOel 5e' rr.'i 
 «al (f,v<rtK(? KeKoaixrKxeat xp<^fJiari. r& re yh.p iyevfi-hfxara i^ddovs i<rr\ fieard, KoX 
 
 \hkiii^ohKa-KO,Trpe^ovffarh.sh.Ko6.s' ^ re ff{,v6e(rLS evenifs, koX rb. ax^fmra rwv 
 rpoTi^rwv r5m. ohK ev ttAXou. Dobree conjectures h.v &\\ois. 
 
326 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 55*3 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 327 
 
 ^ut it is unnecessary, such repetitions of the prep, ^-^"fj^^^^^ 
 (Pop quotes vi. 8z. and Bemhard's Synt. p. 211.) Some difficult isf^tabout 
 i^rop. 4UU1.CB >i. , Pr.r, '« PTnlanation IS best. Hp makes 
 
 the three participles in the nom. masc. Pop. s explanation 1 f 
 
 8.f<£u.m equivalent to M ^5€|<£;i€0a, and prints without a comma Vt v^. 
 Iw (IL we had now accepted your proposal) th.nkmg not to k 
 
 plZintU hands of any otUr judges ^^- 7-^-'^-;^:;^ kX ^ 
 that so^ &c.; repeat the ohK iv &AAo«5 after ^ctm... ^v is sa>s Krug., the 
 that so, «^- F .^^ ^.pt^cre^vfi^u iv ifny, Ixvu. 
 
 proper preposition for this sefise. w jr j^^ , _gc, . j^^tice and 
 
 4,4p€<reat-carryoffM ourselves. a^<por^pw j 
 
 a fair trial, in accordance with the established customs of Greece. 
 
 ;;r^Vap%KaM-, with the indicative, lest we have lost, indicating the strength 
 
 '''^;^1Z^.o,,r^lest ye do not turn out fair i^V^^^^ 
 iudges^ K0.6S, a man who is as much on one side as 1 1, other See Theophrastus 
 
 hpi<TK^^v. kWh Ka\ TV kvrih'iK^, Iva Koivh, ^luai Sokt,. Cf ^uus. 
 f^ ' f i-^fowrnna— no hdl of indictment. Mere 
 
 we W both the genitive and accusative ■'^'-'^'^ ^ '""' T ^ftW t .t 
 tinction in meaning. Elmsle/s rule therefore (f^^Jf]^ I'^f^'*'^ ^ 
 denotes the existence of a fact, the accusafve absolute «°™^ °"^^ ""f J'™ 
 about it, is not of universal application, irpo- ,s pleonastic. See ; »3j- 
 mT Pop. supposes that as P^x" »' is frequently used .mpersonaUy ^Matt . 
 Ifil 'R^tf.,. 4), it retained the same ease when connected, as happened 
 here, with a noun-just as we find 8d{a. Tai>ra, and the like. 
 
 i e ^«; .0 run the risk before v. kave said s^ihi^ (w.thout hav.ng sa,d » 
 our favour. Similar is the expression (i. »o) 6o.A^,."o. Jpa.a,.« r. .«i «. 
 
 SMveCo-ot, where see note. 'A\^r» fn tJ) u)j 
 
 (,) i u^ bn^^U K6yos. equivalent by a very common idiom to r5 , 
 
 KL:C »*'•'' y» - r^^ifyins other, (i e. ^^^^^«;;^: ^ ^^^^^^^^ 
 .teW be brought to a trial already decM agmmt us. ^o je mu f J^,^ 
 
 passage if ^^po.T« xip"^ 'rr" V "rioTl di ^ent « L 
 Lea I confess that, although Am., Pop., and GoU. dissent, 1 canno 
 r™ that ^^poKr« x<tp.^ may not mean, as we say, ' bnr,g '-''^ '^ -*'* 
 ofafn^.ur: If the orator had merely meant to say xap.f^.-, he -u'd 
 have gone out of his way to select an unusual -P";-^'""-^ Jf^.'^al^^ ther- 
 uncommon seems to imply that the ordinary meanmg .s -^^^^^^f^? 
 wise we have to account for the violent disruption of the nom nat.ve^^P 
 CTts natural adjunct ..e.r,,.e.. and this at best can only J^o^ v._ 
 wardlv ' The words SXXo.s x'tp" *«>"« ""^ inserted, like f "« ^ 
 Wp« in c. 49. apart from the rest of the sentence, as a mere epexege -^ 
 ^rS. i.e. het o'f the manner in which the thing apprehended was l.kelj 
 to happen.' — Peile. 
 
 ChaWeb LIV.— (a.) & IxoM^" Si««t«- See note, xliv. jrpbs rh 
 
 Ui<popa-^our claims of justice against the animosity of the TMans and towards 
 you '-Jirn. He does not quote any similar cases. Pop. refers to i. 38- -But 
 neither in that sentence-oiJre irphs rohs &\Kovs, oik^ is V^^ TOtoiSe €t(rl,/-is 
 there any such contrast of the prepositions ; nor in the is rk 'rrpayfxara-^pbs 
 rohs \6yovs found in the opening sentence of the third Olynthiac. Besides ra 
 8.i*opa does not mean ' the animosity of the ThebansJ but ' our points of differ- 
 ence with the mhans; ^our quarrel; &c. I do not therefore think that Am. s 
 distinction is tenable. But from another passage of Demosthenes, p. 113. H- 
 (Brenii), ^Is *(»Keas &s irphs avfifidxovs iirop^iero, we may, perhaps, conclude 
 that Tpbs denotes a more particular and immediate reference, and this agrees 
 
 with the present instance. * ^.u 
 
 [b)<t>l\ovs 8^ vofilCovras—foT d §6 <t>i\ovs was vofilC^re. Another 
 instance of the desire to vary the form of statement in the second clause, 
 extending even to anacolouthon. ^vp^TCLeifxeuoi-^joining you m the 
 
 attack against.' 
 
 (c) iJL6voi^oiwrwv. This is an oratorical statement natural under the 
 circumstances. We learn from Herod, viii. 50 that the Thespians did so also. 
 And Pop. quotes Pausan. ix. 32. 4. an assertion to the same effect concerning 
 
 the Haliartians. 
 
 (d) Tip I € (TTij— ' when very great alarm encompassed Sparta. Poppo quotes 
 Klv5.yos KoL <p6Pos ^eptecTTT, tV ^6Kiu, Dem. D. Cor. § 195. and Tacitus, Hist. 
 iv 79, ' circumsteterat civilem metus ;' add Trepieiffr-hKei, viii. i. 
 kiro<rrdvrc... According tx) Pop. the gen. of the object after <p6Pos, ^ about 
 tk Helots when they revolted and established themselves in Ithorm, There 
 seems, however, no objection to making h.Tocrrdvr<.v the gen. absolute, ^upon 
 oocasim of the revolt: &c. ; and Peile judges this more proper, owing to the 
 absence of the article before <l>6^os. See i. loi. There are said to have been 
 three Messenian wars. The first from B.C. 743 to the capture of Ithome b.c 
 71+. The second from B.C. 685 to the taking of Ira, B.C. 671. The third (that 
 mentioned here) from B.C. 465. 01. 78. 4. to B.C. 455- Diodorus places the 
 
 earthquake Olymp. 77. 4. . ^ .^- » 
 
 (..) ^t.S>v ahr5>v. Am. rightly notices the emphasis. ' Our own citizem, 
 8C. not allies and contingents such as you are in the habit of sending. Cf. 11. 
 39. iv. 34. 
 
 Chapter LV.-(a.) iK^p.^iar^pov, cf. i. ^%-^nothing out ofths way: 
 ^nothing rermrkaUe or extraordinary: ' unseemly: On the fact cf. Herod, vi. 
 108 airwKvetT € — shrunk hack. 
 
 (6) i^KXws T€ Ka\ oOs cS iraQd^p ns K.r.X. This formula seems to be 
 one of those found in most languages, where a man takes his own particular 
 case, and throwing it into general language, endeavours so to gam for it the 
 sanction of some general principle which it is supposed to imply, bo the 
 French use 'on,' the Germans 'man,' and we ourselves 'a man, or 'one it 
 is true that a German author (Muersch. de rebus Hat<2ens. pp. 67-69) has 
 taken three pages to say this, but I do not think after all he has said any more^ 
 Tr.-' and to give them up now became dishonourable, especially in the case of 
 persons whom a man, after receiving kind treatment, and at his own entreaty 
 
328 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [bJx in. |c..P. 56.] NOTES ox THUCTDIDES. 
 
 329 
 
 <«,, has called in U be allm, and received frcm them the rights of citi.'.-n>Mp: 
 D.-; version fails to express this. ^ ri „pa77.XA.iA.-a-prese«t 
 
 ToiTticivle—' orders as they were given.' u- . • , 
 
 ^ IcLoX.r.U, ^,rixa0... Some eonteionhss arisen among h.sto,o»l 
 writer from the fact that the Platans were twice admitted to nghts of at,- 
 ^ hTp at Athens. The first occasion was that here ment.oned when th.y 
 r^eiv^ l<ro.oXnua. This included, acconiing to Arn., the nght of .nter- 
 Zlil, as well as that of purchasing and inheriting land ,n A t.ca, but .0 
 TharoT^oting. or eligibility to offices of state. He compares the mod>lied 
 rights of citizenship enjoyed by the C^erites, and the other P-P'-- '^ose ^ 
 Antium e,g. and Velitra., connected with early Eome, on wh,ch see > eb. 
 rli. But after the cruel capture of their city the Plata^ns were admitted 
 a more intimate civil relationship-that is to say. they were considered hg^bl^ 
 to all offices except the archonship, and certain family hereditary pnesthoed.. 
 Thtrets. however, a restriction as to residence. See the words o the decree. 
 Demos.he;es Kaxi N.aipa._sc. ^i, ^{.Vt^m* .«po^.> "P^ -- 'Vo» -^ 
 
 ''"1?^l^7.'-re«-properly, 'to lead the way in order that otl>ns n,ay 
 
 /«^i» • henle its vario«; meanings-as 'P-- -l^-'" f '"f "^' ^^^^ 
 out wJrds to be repeated. See Liddell and Scott. Here 'h- .t -J ^-»J^»_ 
 primary sense, 'set the example and expect us to follow the lead, or the secoa 
 ZZy school \s to do: Yet perhaps it is best after all to refer ,t to fh 
 t^Ze- of Sparta, &c.--«.*<c* yen. in your character of hegemones cause yon 
 allies to do.' Cf. i. 74. 
 
 plural to be inadmissible, would read 8..p. GOT. compares v i" o., after SU 
 T., xxxviii. But the phrase toAo -r. may be considered as inclusive of a ptol 
 notion. t» tiK is the accusative after {vwirrt. „„,tHv 
 
 (h) Upou,.ia,not certainly equivalent to vow'", the regular monthly 
 fest v.^ f» as Pop remarks, tLi^Si^o, t.D ,r,r6,, ii. 3, is -d oi daybreak 
 "day after the Theban inroad. Therefore i.po.,.ra seems to have he™ 
 a genericVrm, including yo.,.^<^ and every other • holyday > - '^^ " *^ 
 Pop. refers to Buttmanns excellent glossary to the Mcvl>a, who expb™ 
 ioL-'ipsum soknne: ' a festival ;' Upo^r,.i^' d^es sohnn^. 'he day of a 
 S.,r 1m. quotes Schol. Find. Nen. iii. 4: i^P-^W- "."7; 
 Upal vi^ipa:. K.TaXa^/3clvo.T.s-pres. part.cip.- v,hde .» the 
 
 . The « is not out of its pn>per place, as Arnold seems to think, here or m . 4 . 
 Nay had it been as he supposes, .f r, uMKa xMl-f ""»■; ™' """^ ™^''''', 
 17Z. have h«l the a^^fcle repeated before .«(... -<!/; J-^/j;-^^ 
 have been very different-" JoM by your prnent «''7'''^'' ""^ jf J^^^U ;, 
 tmty' (cf. 64. sub fin. Ti. ^M. - «.T.X.). Whereas the use of " J-" ^ere 
 to connect both xP^'m* ^M- and U.i^ .oX^^l* with ^-^ '■^"•Vl^^^ 
 translate "for if y<m mean to form y<mr notions of (or, as we famUiar y v^ 
 ^ worf "ZlJ') justice by wLt is at this m^ent at once your tnterest end 
 Zr^^XfX t-'^rds us." Strictly speaking the arrangement should 
 
 l„e been t^" ai.i.a t,^r « xpW^r "^ ^-'-' -'^:^^' ^f, ^^^'^^iet 
 In for placing in immediate connection if^^ . . ■ ^"f""". the two parties 
 :r S-' - the same, though in one case from motives ^ expediency 
 k, other of revcnge.'-Peile. This seems correct with regard to the non 
 
 Itpot on of « Yet it is hard to understand how the interests of one 
 
 : Cd he L.7., of the other could be spoken of a. 'he »- *^»^. Jo- 
 ™r much they tended to the same object. The peculiar position of « appears 
 
 :\ll oiythat ..- .opai^l- l>elongs to both ■ yo«. ^»— — > 
 .d 'their immediate hostdUy'-^. both motives ^^ *''\'^»™^°'^2l J^e 
 
 lent than they would afterwards be. Pop. objects to taking A.7,+.<r9 as the 
 11 of the English verb ' to take,' points out, and seems to think th diffi- 
 S'fnsoluble. But are we not justified by s-h expressions as ..Jp. 
 ArfL.'to define; i, t^* X«0-, 'to sketch; and the like? See ™; 
 passim, and Theophrastus, cap. i., or tr. 'form your 5™«f '""/(/J », 
 Others compare ii:4^, iii. 38- Kriig. reads «A.Mi<»^^'f « ^»^* «"'3'' '■'^' 
 mmies, which is certainly simple, and good. Cf. 5.«a.<.. infra 
 
 (rf.) ., ipa J,M<lpT,T«.-'i/- as it seems you are to assume that we dul 
 
 Ti ofl^'rl\i,<po,a . . . a0.o:.-al. airot. Am., Pop., and G511. 
 J-L deride ui^n the'first-'i..r^«»,, in safety (cf. i. 56) "^'-^r 
 fei( for themselves with reference to the invas^.' Peile f'^'l']^^^^, 
 Miking aWots refer to r^ E.'p£o. 5«.<i/^"-' those wh^ did not «. ^<'^^JJT. 
 .im negotiate underhand what was conducive to tMm (the Persians) >rrt.«r 
 „,M a.*aA.i,is equivalent to S.' 4.^aX.f«, ^,>;f ^ r'' KrL unit s 
 kw adverbs were originally the datives of nouns. Of. m. 8z K^"|. ^'^^ 
 .irro« with xpiff^o.^" rather than with ii^opa, making irpis t),. ^<i^iov 
 tcith a view to the barbaric invasion. . , , , - „„„„«!;„» to 
 
 (/■) Tiu,fl.VT« ^. T^ ^pira. They received the ap„rT..« according to 
 thettatement of Plutarch (« m ^r«.), which there »-»-°7; ^^^^^^^"'^ 
 ,lo„bting, as from the account of Herodotus we ^'-"l\>f J ^f;^;:-;^:.;', 
 TO paid to the Spartans. Grote, v. 254- "^' 
 
 \lk very same conduct. i .„„ < „^/i me 
 
 {Q\ Ka\ rh lint.^pov f.i, S\Xo T. ro^(<r«.. Am. translates- and we 
 UJihdd it a, our real interest to retain an ever-enduring sense of th^J^^'S 
 If brave and faithful allies, while we take care of whatever ctr ^^mM^^ 
 U,antage may seem to call for! This is elegant, as Arn.s versions always 
 ». l^t it appears doubly defective, (.) in ignoring the sk.Wul manner in 
 rtich the language slides into that of general principles, and (2) ma 
 faulty rendering of the well-known collocation, pi^o, rV xop'". which 
 is. of course, not 'an enduring sense; but on^s *j'"^^"*'""-«'- . ^„3 
 translates the whole-' and yet men oxyht to be seen uniformly h,ldmg tU sanw 
 Union of the same principles of conduct, and to consider th^r own '"t^^st o 
 % no other than (the interest of) their brave allies, viz. so long as these have the 
 mteful acknowledgment of their good conduct always warranted unto them, 
 it the same tune that th.t which on any occasion may be our tmmedmje mterest ,s 
 loured: He therefore understands r!. {.M-^W again before r.y ^v^.i^X"^ 
 This looks improbable; is it not gen. after r.?. iyaio^s ?-not to thmk that 
 ' rpediency or good policy consists in anything else than in this, when viz. men 
 
NOTB8 OK THUCTDIDE8. [BooK I... l ^,. 58.] 
 
 331 
 
 "11 
 
 330 
 
 Donaldson adopts the conjecture of Dobree^ « J .^ , ^^^.^ .^ 
 
 K.e.«^Ta.--even though «Pf ^^I^.''! ^?' ^^.T" ^ fn this case would 
 very plausible, but I cannot help thinfang '>"" *^^^^7°' . ^^^^ tardlv 
 haSl^ have used so strong an »P--° -j;trL^:,^ ^A^rf again. 
 have admitted that a case of ^^'^-'y^'^^^2 as Peile p«>perly remark,, 
 them. The language is vague on V-r^^^'J^^^^^ ^^^J^ Z.Lmon\>.s 
 they dared not, for fear of g.v,ng offence o^enty a^ert t ^ ,__ ^^ 
 
 had been guilty in this respect, ^bey a«ord.ng y p l,.)isneataBa 
 
 general terms as possible. H-l^^^^/J ^t"; Jl Lg for l«.. 
 ingenious but unnecessary ; so also is ot ly suggestea oy b 
 
 has selected this passage as an .UustraUon ° »"« '^''^YJ. ^„^ i,e testes 
 
 1 493). .^ f^^^2 ;"i ;ri^ r.Tr.tx Vy- '*«>^.'' 
 
 _'iAi5 judgment which you will give, wm , j^ ^^ ^^^ter has 
 
 been elsewhere discussei ^ »» J" J ^^ ^.j^^^ l.a..oi^yo. from Us 
 
 seems to me to ignore the tee of -« »" ,^_ Translate- 
 
 place, being as it is an adjunct of ^e subject ana P ^^^^.^ 
 
 ./or i< is not in a comer that you mil deade this tr,^, M <^2„^ant): See 
 Lernin, «s .-ho are neither on "-^^^-^ j J/^^aX^^tsseL, f 
 
 r;i;it;t^' «i «/«.«'.• - dlstmct from ..a..:. 
 
 —sc. at Olympia and Delphi. . Tin p names of nations are some- 
 
 j:t^"::re;t^r:;:^.-.££^^^^ eonvey. 
 SffreT—to^rtLt ^^^^ij^::^ 
 
 ! general idiom, the absence of the article in <>-* P™« '^^^1^ for 
 as the introduction of the indefinite article a •» Engl. J-'.-e- ^"J"; . 
 what follows, or some particular condition "^ ''^^j^ P ;^:i7^^^^^ 
 
 gested. To this idiom may be "f ^ ^Vr::^^;;^^^^ liculo) ,.*■ 
 without the article. Thus, Soph. (Mip. Tyr. .175. ;^ J. , ^;^^,,„ 
 
 ^„,; is equivalent i^'n,hat, a mot^ *';<''™ .tf', ^ fled ibligations to 
 : hard thing for Uced^monians who ^ ^-^^^/"^^^rlir !«»-« /«' 
 defend it) to sack Platna ; and that... you shotM o ^j 
 
 Sans- (Who were such 'fU-known -ito. t^^^^^^^^ 
 
 viii. 50). 
 
 J. judicial verbs fV^^-^^^^^ZT^S^.. Cyr. i. ^7 ; ^elf S 50. ; 
 ,Wt«., 7pi4..<r9«', &c- <^*- ''''"':^'" ^^ i„ Latin, m««» is understood, and so 
 Jbtth. i 370 ; Bo^t. ■°9- 4- .»• J,^';X° here understand fW«. 
 j^uces a genitive after such ^^f^^^l^^hrust aside hy <il-- 
 
 > wi^A none to come to our rescm. 
 Livy, xxi. II. 
 
 Chapteb LVm.-(a.) ©^o^ .^^^^.Tk t \. These words contain (as Am. 
 ihe league: rfjv oop \ ...^.^ y^pip 4,4povres—' ask back 
 
 Ldicafes) an evident reference to S.S^"' M «^^'^ ^''Jjm those (=such 
 ,/*™.A.,i/**%*«--*^^>:J "poTnJrt'tl'e difference between this 
 „e« as) it becomes you not. ^^IT^I, .« not to kUL' See i. 4°. Krug- 
 .„d 06. o4 -P ^'- '-: "« »f "- t" miration, as if to ridicule it ; though 
 prints this interpretation with " »»'« »* '^J'" „ ^huc's manner. Kruger, 
 
 I confess I cannot see the ^^surdity.and it is qurtein __^^ ^^.^ ^^^ 
 
 with the Scholiast, makes avTa^a.T„<rai foUow t f. ,<j^po.« 
 
 ;;i«.«™/-o«--f«.**«^*/.f;tru^^^^^^^^ you have acted 
 U,,-'fair and >Tr''' C T^^ZeM^nd khonouraiU gratitude.' sc. 
 iustly ; opposed to ai.rxpi-' X"?"— disgjacejm ^^^^ .^ , ^ 
 
 ChelLbans,forcomplyi.g^b^e.b^e^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ctoac(«r/<-r iasenm, as in 1^>- f-™g; 3^,^. ^.g). Cf. i. 33- »• 
 
 par- 
 
 oW«(er/or Aa.e««., as in -^^ ^ ^^ ^g^. j^,^. «8). Cf. i. 33- a. 
 
 ticulam positum est, respondet.'— Pop. j^^^^ employed ex- 
 
 Ic.) ixoPX^ + are 7^P ^' ir«T.p«.|' ''•^•^- ."^j;^, t„ni„g the eyes from 
 
 pjse! a particular and admiring f -r;p : thttegiven.^Cf. ii>.V, "' 
 U) all other objects in order to fix them upon toe g ^^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 L^x4^owiy rfs « .i S^ep""' (Theophrast. CA. u.), an 
 
 by Sheppard ad loc. . ^^^ j^ appears that Plutarch 
 
 (,.) ,.eVa... The-rdisp, tic sa^ &^ ^P^^ ^^ ^^^^^^^ „f 
 (Fi<. ^ri5(.) when speaking of these annual ^ 6 .^ piutarch's time 
 
 vestments. Bl. therefore conjectures .-rrii^.^.. P^ ceremony' (Thirl- 
 
 piverty had induced the Plat<.ans to ^~P *- P^^^^^ed in the same snpersti- 
 TOll, ii. 393). Arn. beheves 'that "'""""S J ^^. ^s if the dead were 
 tious feeling which prompted "^^S^ of ^^^ ^^ ^^Ji^fs to the necessities 
 
 cold in their disembodied state, and ^tiH required tno ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^_ 
 
 of human nature which they had needed when aliv . ^^ .Ex..e.>.a, on the 
 Herod. V.9Z.' There were two sj»te fesals -U^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^_ 
 4tli of Boedromion (the day of the battle^, ^^makterion. See Grote, v. 
 (i) The annual commemoration on the ibtn 01 Jii- 
 
332 
 
 XOTES ON THCCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Cbap. 6o.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 333 
 
 their cwn kinM'-s^ch is the peculiar meaning of t .ose compounds of ajro. 
 C^ ainoSiX^.,, .Wkto..., iEach. Sep. c. Uehas, 735-. »-^X"P. Soph. AnKg. 
 ,75 . aM.'m,., ^BCh. ^«m. z...'-Peile. Cf. Ix>beck P*«7». p i^o. Pop. 
 ?; ) ariuoU 7epi.-i.e. «.«; r.Miis-«..-*«( t'^ honour of the prmlegn. 
 KA>. quotes ST.MOS r.^vs t..«, Plato, i>ff. 774 b; and roD ^.^^o.x.y. Do» 
 „ :, AU the grammars notice the idiom. '!>>>' 'j-'ff *^ *'■ 
 
 slelii. b. ipn.o-.r. Some h.ave supposed th,s to be - /""- 
 
 See Matthi., Gr. Gr. % ,8.. ., and Buttmann ,n h,s larger Gr. G^ But the 
 present is occasionaUv united with the future, as in ii. 44. '^- '°- ^"P" ^ ^ 
 ^ T) IZa, ri/,«Tp(ov. These are the sacrifices that havejusth.™ 
 mentioned. Pop. points out that we musttranslate-'<«fe/r<,m thoseu,ho.fouM 
 TZT^sacrifiel; &c. ; not, as Port, has it, ' re^c.,e the sacred l.rMar!,nU, 
 Tof theM^ers: because it is not forbidden in respect of these part.cu^ar 
 founders, but as an enormity under any circumstances ; and besides we shoal 
 tZLl^^^^'re^ . . . r£. .Vo^^o,. »! .r.^i...... These words do no.. 
 
 I thinTimplv anything different, nor do they, as Bloomfield sx^oses refer, 
 one o!^^ and the o,h!r to <h«r(«. Pop. justly remarks that the first 1,™= 
 Told f^hioned word, the second is added to explain ,t, and give we.ght.o 
 thetpre In. Somewhat similarly we have • acknowledge and confess, ■»» 
 Ind Snesses,' &c. in our Liturgy. There is authority for l.a...»., wh.oh 
 Krug. thinks right, and iaaof^iyo,.. See Buttmann, Gr. Or. in voce. 
 
 Pop armijit be eipected (cf. Z. b.), explains this-*.l.a.ea. cUr,, 
 xalw iaM,, sc. olKTo.)-' spare us in pity, having take ifuponns. It . 
 not quite clear, however, that it may not mean Xa^dn-as 'j;^ " ^^ . 
 estimated our case mth a wise e<mmiseratim ; or ,t may ^e-' A"^"? '^J 
 to vour friend.-:hip: &c. Before 4,*i<ra,T9«< understand ?o-t. St t7,5 Kl'- 
 
 "^ ;> -t^ie/Vxo. (cf. Ar. Ares, .70) is literally. ' incapahle of he.r^ ^f'i 
 and, estimated in the scales'-' beyond the power of calnMwn. _ ^ y^ 
 
 j„^,^„p5. is only a more general and abstract way of say.ng ^_|u^*<.pa a^ 
 Ara renders-' (fe nature of misfortune.' Am. compares t!. ^1' T"*'"'^- ' ' 
 tTTr^^^MO^^-- iv. 54. Add .6 tS. t^x.^ iv. ,8, vii. 61 ; and r6 ™* 
 in Soph. Elect. 1203, 
 
 i^i ,))p<iiro.n' i.v, «' Til Tii-S' eifi'oui' irdpa. 
 (.1 Au.Ts T«, is ^pi^ov . . . TapiSoeS.a.. The arr.angement of theso 
 worfshL excited great controversy. Hermann boldly strikes out ,.,.^,* 
 Ponno fed mai ) says the construction is a.ToV««a M 7««''«'" • • • f" 
 5„£'. -dthaf all the intervening clauses ought to have been expre. 
 b7rarHciples,butthatby an anacolouthon we have y.y,i^*Oa for W-i^ ""^"^ 
 ■L'oxo Jea for ...KoXo^M.-.. In his sn.all edition he ,s »"<»' '» ^^rc ' 
 verba flnit. airo^M^ea, iWr., r7..1..ea et ^...oXo^M^ea '»'- ^ -"X;.. 
 smbo participia ^ir.3o<4M..a.' et .M-pil"'"^ «* '-'f ^%;' ™? ' rJ2,i, 
 copulanda esse.' G611. explains : .Iroi^^Ba i^s «.™ J-^f -""T^'^X ,- 
 
 Of this Am. approves. It may be presumptuous to suggest anything ,ig.ui. ,^ 
 such authority, but is it not possible to explain the whole simply by asyndeton. 
 
 t^aSlU ,ods worsU^ .»-- ^^ -— ^I 
 \\l Greece, to allow us to persuade you m this matter , V[^^'J . 
 
 enemies. ine omy puoon-'x "^ , , , ^f -piot^a mav reasonably be 
 
 «^'it^rat::r;vr:h::::fir aTtLr^drnir There .1.0 
 
 represented as swearing lor purpose ; and m 
 
 r rr g- ■:: i:::^. ZZZ:.^T^^^ and semUca. .ne of 
 "M^eToi. Tois V<.e»Ml»«. 'Gods who were worshipped at one and 
 .jrrar,;;. aUpoCed congeniaUty -^^-^Z^^^ 
 ship sabsisting between them Here then it ^^^"^ »» J ^^ fj ^f,, f^^^ 
 
 U not be admitted to such an ""7 j""^^^^;,, ,„, .i„„. 5' 
 
 ceUent remarks, ^-f ,*» ™^.'"-;:,trsUudf "of grr;hom all Greece 
 iyhiM rHyit Koivo^fioAi. GoU. understanas oi go 
 
 Might sacrifice in common, e.g. Olympian Jupiter, Pythian Apollo, &c. Poppo 
 .1. them. contubemaW from Cie._a^^^^^^^^^^^^^ videntur vel delenda 
 
 ie.) J..T- avT.. -P^f™ , /^^(1,_G6U. Most persons wiU I 
 tsse, vel mutanda m Kar a,,r«v (bc- CH^*^ ' hypercriticism. He 
 
 ,hink regard this as a specimen of <^°'^";, ""'^^ J^,o„id have acted 
 ohjects .. . Chronology^orbids us l^^-l^l^ZT^:. rhetoric did not 
 :r L -Sin":" * X f -ir ances^rs and in .seeing t^ 
 great doctrine of national morality, the uninterrupted continuity 
 ''^*' , , - tl,. oneTeuesis of 8i€p km-tKoM. Pop. considers 
 
 :::r.t:^rmt:\r^rfr (xen. c..^.™^ .. ^;^^ 
 
 i 4' -«-ni»/5a€i/ot — ' as our last wora. 
 
 stopped. ^au6At€i/ot ^ Tivvxxi 41, 'ultimo suppUcio 
 
 hurorum, fame; Pop. ^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 .•Xc.e.p.Cvras (sine articulo)-' «*.& 2/« W^ «» ^•''='•'''''"• 
 
 P TV ,oU T-bv Uyov. It is not easy to see whether jpbs is 
 
 .^^::::^:^:uL:^:^ or^....... nor does poppo determine. Tor the 
 
 close of the speech see Isoc. lUoTauKi-s Kiy'.s, p. 3=3, ^ t)». 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 111. I chap. 63.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 334 
 
 Chapter LXI.— (a.) robs \6yous—BC. which we have demanded. 
 ahroX—'they; here much the same in sense as olnoi, koL a^rol— 'these them- 
 selves also.' ^riatiivutv is the gen. plur. neut. governed by 
 
 kTcoXoyiav—' beside the question', and on points concerning which not even wa^ 
 any blame hinted: So at least Pop., Arn., and Kriig. Peile prefers the gen. 
 absolute—' and moreover when they were not so much as accused: 
 TToWhy rvv aTToXoyiav—'Tnade their defence a protracted one; or * spun out 
 
 their defence: 
 
 (b.) avr€iirt7v— 'to make a counter-statement: iXeyxov 
 
 iroi-fiffaffeai-^' to make a refutation: lA€7xos is the test by which a thing is 
 
 proved to be false. The fanciful derivation 4Xeri/ ^Xos, ' to take up a spear' (as 
 
 in the trial by combat), is probably false, but it conveys well the meaning of 
 
 the word, and impresses it on the mind. wphs (ihv rd, mstead of 
 
 irphs Tck fx4u, because t^ fi4v, rk K would have been understood to mean, 
 
 « some: and ' others: ii to{>twu 5(J|a— « these things which they 
 
 have boasted of Peile. 
 
 (c.) S(rr€pov T7J5 &XXt?s Boiurias. For an explanation of this see 1. 12. 
 This 'mixed population' is said by Strabo (cf. 321) to have consisted of Hy 
 antians, Thracians, and Pelasgians. The &AXa x«P^a were probably situated 
 between the roots of Cithseron and the Euripus (Muersch. de Rep. Plat. p. 27). 
 
 {d.) Tiy€fioP€vf<rdai v(p' ^/*«»^ The vyetiovia seems to have been a 
 tolerably well-understood political relation, though it is not easy to determine 
 its exact nature. It probably fluctuated according to circumstances, and cer- 
 tainly was not at first despotic, for we find Boeotarchs with equal powers chosen 
 from several cities, and without any preference to Thebes (Thuc. iv. 91. 92). 
 But such a precedence, as Am. remarks, when supported by real superiority, 
 soon becomes positive supremacy. He cites Xen. Hellenic, v. i. ^^. 33- So 
 also Grote : ' Substantially the affairs of the Confederation will be found in the 
 hands of Thebes, managed in the interests of Theban ascendency, which appears 
 to have been sustained by no other feeUng, except respect for superior force 
 
 and bravery.'— His^. ii. 394- 
 
 (e.) irapa^alvovTes rk wdrpia. This was a federation among the greater 
 
 cities, to which the smaller were attached in a species of union, and modified 
 dependence. There were annual magistrates called Boeotarchs, who at the 
 battle of Delium were eleven in number, but we have no means of ascertaining 
 whether the number ever varied, or the mode of their election. Besides these, 
 there were (at least during the Pelopounesian war) four different senates, regu- 
 larly consulted by the Boeotarchs on matters of importance. And finally there 
 was the great Pan-Bceotian festival and confederate council periodically held 
 at Koroneia. See Grote (to whom the matter of this note is due), ii. 393. 
 
 Chapteb LXII.— (a.) SkJt* ou5* *Adnyalovs—sc. fiv^iaai <pati4p, if we 
 may not read 'AOvfoioi. rfi abrfi i5«>-sc. ry ain^ rp6^V (PoP-) 
 
 —^on the same type, or fcrrm of cmduct; i.e. making their policy assumthe 
 same /brm— casting it in precisely the same mould. See i. 149. 
 ^1. oty erSei— sc. Tp(Jiry iroAjTcIas, 'in quo statu' (Po^.)—' under what form 
 of polity; in what seat of political position. 
 
 (b.j Kar* o\iyapxiav l(r6voiiov. 'The term Iffdvofios relates to the 
 
 equality of all citizens with one another, as far as related to their private dis- 
 putes and private injuries ; whereas under that worse form of oligarchy, which 
 was called Si/va<rT€i'a, those who were possessed of political power were also 
 above the law in all private matters, and could oppress their feUow-citizens at 
 tbeir pleasure. Pop. believes that the words refer to an aristocracy of race, the 
 members of which were iffoi and Sfxoioi, or 'peers,' among themselves. 
 
 (c.) iyyvrdru) rvpdvvov. Bloomf. remarks that ripavvos means a 
 tyranny, just as S^^os means a democracy. Pop. quotes Tac. Ann. vi. 4*, 
 . Paucorum dominatio regi* libidini propior est.' But we may say-' came 
 my near to a despot; for came very near to haviiig a despot, 
 i,\lywv kvhpS>v. See Herod, ix. 15. 86. ohK ahroKpdra^p k.t.X, 
 
 ^'it was not the state collectively, being master of its own actions, that did it: 
 ail ficrk v6(XQ}v—' when in a state of anarchy: 
 
 {d.) robs pSfiovs na$€. The period referred to is the time immediately 
 following the battle of (Enophyta. Seei.108. Pop. ^v Kopwvcla—cf.i. 113. 
 
 Chapter LXIII.— («.) ^i<i>r€poi. When an author is subjected to such 
 a strict anatomy of style and matter as Thucydides has been, it is not surprising 
 to find occasional difficulties as to his language raised by higher criticism. 
 Under ordinary circumstances few people would stumble over this word, or 
 hesitate to believe that it refers to the accusations brought in the last speech 
 a^inst the Thebans ; of which, and of the punishment which they imply, they 
 now assert their adversaries to be more deserving than themselves. Yet one 
 editor (Valla) interprets, ' ye are more worthy of punishment' (sc. than of com- 
 miseration or pardon) ; and Pop. suggests ai^<inaroi. The stumbling-block of 
 both is the foregoing statement of the Thebans (Ixii.), oC-S' &^lop avrr, ovet5((rat 
 S>v fih fi€rk vdfjicov ^fiapr.p. But k^id!,T€poL implies no admission of guilt upon 
 the part of the Thebans. Kriig. merely remarks upon the harshness of Valla's 
 interpretation without suggesting another. 
 
 (6.) T^ vfji€r4pa rifxwpia. The pronoun for the genitive of the object— 
 for our punishment; i.e. for the sake of punishing us. Cf. <rfi, ndr^p, nrponneiq, 
 ("Soph. (Edip. Col. 333), '^ii^ foresight for thee;' ai Ifi^r.pai ^ATrtSes Thuc 1. 
 69 (Am.), and rh vnir^pou S4os, i. 77- There does not seem any authority for 
 making nnwpia rivhs = a.id or assistance rendered against a person. 
 
 Ic ) iTrdyecreai The common reading is {nrdy^adai, which was adopted by 
 Pop. He DOW follows Arn. in reading indyeaOcu as more apt to denote what is 
 meant, and as more generally employed by Thucydides. iirapx^" 
 
 7€ iti7v, i.e. rh /x); luj/eirieVat. Kriig. cf. i. 124- a. irpoff'hy^ae^ 
 
 —'were driven to anything: See, with Kriig., vi. 54. c. 
 
 (d) Karanponovvai. ' Kark addito intendendi qu^am vis videtur con- 
 tineri.'-Pop. Kark appears to have its force of downHght derived from its idea 
 of motion downwards-/ro7n he^d to foot. A real though not obvious parallel 
 is found in ^n. ii. 290, ' ruit alto a culmine Troja.' ols ^vu<.y.6aaT., 
 
 See i. 71, and ii. 72. , . , 1 j 
 
 (e) Kairoi rks bfxoias x^P^ras. ' The stress of this obscurely expressed 
 sentence, which is well explained by Arnold, is upon rks Sfwias; and ^^ 
 hn^iUvai, as its position seems to indicate, must be connected both with 
 what foUows and what precedes. It is surprising, however, that we have not 
 
 7 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 111.1 Chap. 65.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 337 
 
 I ' 'IB 
 
 mm 
 
 1 
 
 aaXKou ^ ou here, where the negative is so much needed, as in ii. 62, and iiiJ 
 ^6 Translate— aw(f yet the not returning Imnogeneous acts of ktiidiiess (i.e. 
 such as can be returned under the same circumstances under which they Mere 
 received) is disgraceful rather than (the not returning) siwh as became dv, | 
 indeed in the first instance, without any infringement of justice, but are in a my 
 to be 'so discharged as to lead us to injustice. Cf. St. Paul, Romans x. 10, 
 KopZiayhp TTiar^i^rat els ZiKaio<x{,^n)V' <TT6imTil\ 6^o\oyurai e^s aanvpiay , and 
 Ixiv. 'sub tinem, Hv^hxev i^ rh dAr,0«.'-Peile. On the force of the present 
 participle a^roSiSo/iteVos as above given, cf. supra, and add oc airoWvfimi 
 rohs aUof^^povs, in the New Testament, and ^sch. Ag. 803, Opdcros aKov<rwv\ 
 ^.dpdac eu-h^Kovai KOfxiC<.v-^ to men in a wag to perish: Am. compares 
 Cic de Officlis, i. 1 5, ' Non reddere beneficium (/x)j ayrid^Uyai xap'") ^^ro 
 bono non licet {ai<rxp6y\ modo id facere possit sine injuria (r^v 6ju>ia. 
 ydpnas) ' But if it can only be returned ' cum injuria {is adiKiau aToSi- 
 LcVas) then the not returning it (/x), aunMpai) is allowable in a good man 
 (ohK aJxP^u). The argument runs, ' Granted it is disgraceful not to return a 
 favour • but it is more disgraceful not to return such favours as can be re- 
 turned 'upon equal terms,-such, that is to say, as ye owed to the Greeks at 
 large -than not to return those which can only be repaid with unjust results, 
 such 'that is to say, as ye may be supposed to owe to Athens.' As often happens, 
 the Greeks inverted the way in which we should put an argument or statement ; 
 for we should probably have said, ' It is less unbecoming to shrink from re- 
 turning favours, when such return would produce a wrong, than to tail m 
 returning those which we can fairly repay.' Or it may be possible that no 
 allusion is intended to the general benefits which the whole confederation 
 bestowed upon Platiea ; and the meaning implied is, ' what men have to guard 
 acainst is the not returning homogeneous favours ; they need not guard against 
 returning such as,' &c. Eeal ingratitude consists in failing to return the first, 
 not in refusing the second. Kriig. I perceive does not take this view but 
 asserts that the words can only have a meaning which in their present form 
 cannot be got out of them, i.e. according to his version-'iV^oi to return a hh 
 nratitude (i.e. like the favour received) is less unbecommg than to return that 
 ,>hwh indeed became due with justice, but if repaid must contribute to uvjust 
 dealings: 
 
 Chafteb LXIV.— (a.) vfieU Sc. Zv has been conjectured, and not un- 
 reasonably. But Pop. explains this as 8^ in apodosi, supplying 5r)Aov iiro^¥^n 
 oi, avU<rcunes. Peile says-' Supply oU e>r,5icraT., not however from MjSt- 
 cayres. but from the o^k iis.i)hiCo^ which is of necessity to be supplied at or 
 i^rt ou5' ' A0tjvaToi— ' whereas you did not Medise from a desire to do as tin 
 Athenians did, and therefcyre only [it is implied] to oppose the Medes: 
 
 a ) a<|>' S>v. Kiihner, when speaking of the attraction of relative and ante- 
 cedent, says on this passage : ' The attraction is seldom brought about by the 
 repetition of a preposition ^vith the relative as in Thuc. 111. 64. Either a.6 
 Toirrwv should have been omitted, or a</)' S>p been merely fi ; as the sense ij»- 
 ' to draw profit from those things in which they have been brave: He compare. 
 Demosth.p. 95- -3; Herod, iii. 31. But may it not be a mere rhetonca 
 XQ^^iiiiQU-i—^ but now ye claim Jrmn circumstances wherein by reason oj omr 
 
 men ye showed bravery, from these (ye claim) to receive a benefit for yourselves: 
 This, too, agrees better with both the passages quoted. 
 
 (c.) rovrois ^wayonviCf <r Be— ' go on with the alliance as you have thought 
 
 jit to begin it— go through the struggle with them: * The force of the present 
 imperative ia pergite eorum esse socii—rpermanete in horum partibus: — Pop. 
 ox avTTJs — * in consideration thereof: 
 
 (d.) Kal &\\ovs rivds. Reference cannot be made to the Thessalian 
 expedition of the Athenians (Thuc. i. iii), or the battle of Coronea (i. 113), in 
 which Meursius not unreasonably supposes that the Platseans took part, for 
 neither the Thessalians nor the Boeotian exiles were ever allies of the Platseans. 
 Nor again can we with any propriety refer the words to the case of the Phocians 
 andOpuntian Locrians, for they undoubtedly fought in the Persian ranks at the 
 battle of Plataea (Herod, ix. 31). It is better to understand the words of the 
 Eubceans, for they formed part of the army of Pausanias (Herod, ix. 18), and most 
 probably the Plataeans were summoned by Pericles to take part in the expedi- 
 tion against them, which was said to have been made arpaTi^ ' h.ei]vai<av (i. 114). 
 Perhaps also the Naxians are meant (i. 98), who, though not expressly men- 
 tioned by Herodotus, probably fought on the side of the Greeks at Plataea 
 (Thirlwall, ch. xvi. p. 345). It is less likely that the Thebans should have 
 referred to the Thasians, Samians, or Byzantians, who could not be described 
 as allies of Platfea in the Persian war. Poppo. 
 
 (e.) ovK c'5ex6(r06. Pop. thinks that the imperfect is used because the 
 transaction was a prolonged one, and heralds were sent backwards and forwards 
 several times ; or perhaps it is, ' were not for accepting: showed no symptoms of 
 oicctpting, and never have accepted. 
 
 (/.) IT p a de a 6 €— 'ostentatiously made a pretext of your virtues for their^ 
 destruction' (cf. with Kriig. TrivOos fieya Trpoed'f}KavTO, Her. vi. 21). On eVt 
 denoting the purpose or tendency of an act {=with a view to the harm of), see 
 Jelf, § 634, 3. ov trpoaiiKovTa K.r.K.—' the good traits which ye 
 
 the^ exhibited ye have now shown not to be your own [your real attributes, cf. 
 67. b.], but what your nature was ever aiming at, has been tested, and brought 
 out in the process unto truth (or, your real character and designs have been 
 ieded, and the truth brought out about them): is used thus seems to denote the 
 result accomplished by the process described in the preceding verb ; so in the 
 common phrase nKevrav h ri. Cf. Ixiii. fls aSiKlav. 
 
 ig.) &5iKov 68hv Uvrutv—'ye have gone along with the Athenians as 
 thy walked in the ways of injustice: Pop. refers to Matth. § 409 ; Rost, 
 104. 3. a. Cf. Arist. Aves 42, r6vhe rhv jSciSov ^aU^otiev = ' gang this gait: 
 
 Chapter LXV.— (a.) Upo^iiivlais. * It would seem by the plural form of 
 the word that the festival during which the Thebans entered, whatever it was, 
 was one of several days' duration.' -Arn. The plural is, I believe, to be 
 accounted for upon a principle which I have elsewhere illustrated. The Greeks 
 eroployed what may be called an indefinite plural when they wished to express 
 an idea in an abstract and general manner without limitation to any individual 
 instance or special circumstance. In Eng'' '' we often effect the same thing by 
 tlie use of the indefinite article ' a' or ' an.' A few examples are necessary to 
 aake the matter clear. /ueVai v^kt^s (Herod, viii. 76, Xen. Anab. 1. 7. i) 
 
 
rn III I ,'„.p 66 T NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 NOTES ON THCCTDIDES. [Book III. I tniP. DO.J 
 
 339 
 
 338 
 
 „ean8 ' midmgU: when nights in gene™l are at the middle not the middle of 
 Tny partieulaf night. Again, «o7Ta. means • W<™. -the general fme of 
 retiring to rest, not the customary honr of any specified ,nd,v.duaK U. ..oh., 
 
 r!^r ismnch sLger in the collocation than 'Ms ohscure rnurder: Some- 
 Zt^ioh a rendering is even necessary to the sense: e.g. t«« « t«.». 
 
 i;r L (iCid. .359). ' « i«--''» *^'^'«'»' On the same pnnc.ple we mast 
 explain — itairtSffJaT* 
 
 irarcpoj, i5«\()>ol/s, iratSas, olfi' ifUpiMov, 
 ,iix<t>a!, yxiycuKa,, ^vrfpas « K.T.X.— OiW. Ti'T-. 1405- 
 Cf ib .49?. Examples might easily be selected from any Greek play, but I 
 hav preferred to take a single instance in order .0 show thcr frequency. 
 ill'fcl will therefore mean-' at a time ofMivaV Goller seems to haw 
 rr a sLTlar view for he speaks of nsing the plnral • nb, indolem et naturam 
 ^nm v7~r«m (den Character nnd nicht das Individuelle) md.ca™ 
 vZ, t:Z,.X.. res^t i^rsonas in mente habent.' He t -fote t-s^^^e, 
 here-- an eineM Taffe, der als M^ats-Festtag hed,gwar - ^ a day «^« 
 « a monthU, Myday.' See moreover Hermann on fyer. p. 739- Je>f ^«'" 
 ♦n hive an idea of this in his observations, § 355- '• ... - 
 
 "" "'a^Z^Tai.rol-'.e of o^ro^n motion: sc. without inv, at.on from a 
 r'^ ; 1 i,diKoda€V—'we are guiliy verb without 
 
 sect^n of yourselves. ^^^^^ ^:X>^:,,.'0.-'Tl'ra ve^icmatV-'^i^ 
 
 S ™M. ..: .;«.. .».e u,^^ ^ard of t^d. «M ; .... 
 
 fdiom belongs to Sat class in which the adverb appears to be -olj^ ■»'; 
 adjective to be attached to the predicate, some consequence of ^e ^^ 
 described being indicated. This form of expression .s noticed by ScholeSeM 
 ZTckoeph 794 App.), who renders ««( wv lx.ve.^iu>s, Kof.^P"' r .5... a^ 
 S„iS;o"*;Aw%X.i<».p.. Kol X«M.po.. This Pe,le adopts, and apph. 
 Tsame principle to ..— o™, 770, .^' ^"f '"2;- ^^riZ.: 
 
 4r5;v<lM.vo.,and,rcl^« 6,^-t», ^xiM^a.., vi. 53; and x«X«« ». A >,.« 
 tt^oy. Now as these forms in -». are -""> t'""; .T f^t 'that 
 idiom as Peile remarks (Ch^ph. 794), may he explained by the fact tha U 
 dre d^otes the • virtual tendency' of an action ; -d upon^Uns pnncp^ t. 
 explains that difficult passage .l^poc^y m.-r^^-rn (^»eh ^«- ^° > ,, 
 we may regard .C^po... as such a dative m the '»"- '^ ^^"^ "'^"j,,- 
 adverb! and consequently = 5,rT. .<,^p».a .<«.-' .o ^ 'V^^- 1 ^^^feir ».J 
 In the same way, 4.(.™. U,.y.^K6ra(, a.) .s not, *«»''^ "^^^ '^.^e.;. 
 incrMhVhut'soastohecomeinoredm: ''''"'\' ''"^ rj/a by the 
 
 sc. xclpo- The estimate of 'good' and 'bad' was naturally formed by 
 stand^^ of party and political predilections. Compare such expressions 
 
 ,1 ^,«««, .! ^ir.T<i8«.., iv. 78. V. 64, vii. 40, viii. .7 ; --^i- of democracies, 
 :; T ^.^To^paria itself is a case in point. See an interesting paper on 
 this expression by Stanley, Clascal Mmeum, no. xiii. ; and cf. note 1. 24. c._ 
 
 iJa.<t,,oy',rra\ S.t« k.t.X. The question here raised is, whether t<.. 
 ,2ir^y be the genitive after ■r.^po-.TTol or governed by AxXorp-ouKrcs. Arn. 
 leUeves that another substantive corresponding to ,«,.fpo..»TaI, e. g. such as 
 \Lrai, was meant to follow, but a. the latter word did not exist, <r.>^<^- is 
 1 ft without any regular construction at all. Peile regards it as a- sort of 
 zeugma-' i««ff coTT'ctors of your political principles, and as curators of your 
 " L,..' G611 and Pop. regard c.^r^ as the genitive aft*r "^^P-";"- 
 id translate-' ab urbe cives non abalunantes,' i.e. ' not deprimng the state of 
 lie benefit of your persons' (personal servi.cs). This too is the idea expressed in 
 11: i. .4I It is true we should have rather anticipated ri o6,ara m, 
 :Ls button, aptly illustrates the expression by Kol '^^" -'"^;;^-^ 
 i,o,r.pS,y (i. 40) for ixxoy ia^oS. The ^^pov,ara\ were curators of youth in 
 heGymna ia, and some editors have thought that reference is here made to 
 h m but Schomann (Antig.Juv. p. 337. q-ted by Pop ) is of opinion hatth« 
 office was of later date. Krug. quotes, for the more full illustration of <rc^po^ 
 Zrai. Plat. Rep. 471 - : -M-- -fpo«W.., oJk M 5.„x.(a Wo-.s, «v! 
 7mp^, <r JpoLrol «.«, ob .oX.>.a. (cf. vi. 87. 4. ™i. 48- 6)- Arn^''^" 
 expresses the general sense of the closing words, oIk.ioO.'t" k.t.X.- brmg- 
 iLour cUy Ime to a natural union with ,neu of your own Uood and race, and 
 Zlingyouencn^iesto no man, but o» ter^s of tr^c mthall oZjfe. Pe.le 
 lers ' domesticating into the family connection.' The {m-'« "fers of 
 course to the Boeotian federation. 
 
 CHArrEE LXVI.-(a.) .1 ipa .al ^okou^.'v r,-' even if haply we we^ 
 lk>,,gkt to have done anything unfair in not ent^ing! See infra « t„ V- 
 ,.lL'«T<. i.y.r,i^.Ki<,T^9oy-'unjair: /.^jo- »''* 
 
 !« ZttL act the same part te^ard u. as we acted toward you.' .J.a 
 follows a variation in the tense of the infinitives-^T . 'J"J''"'"''Jl^^l' 
 Xiyots T. ».i«.v. Arn. considers that the change should be accounted for 
 as in xlvi. ,.pa<rK.vi,ra<rea.- ^apar.yuoea,, the first verb expressing a thing to 
 W done immeliately and at once, and the second something that was to be 
 later in point of time, and longer in the continuance o the action. Jo^ »^J««^» 
 that here we have no ' verbum putandi' (as in xlv,.), the P-^^. f/J^^* ^^^ 
 seems to consider necessary; he is therefore inclined to read -"-'^^^J 
 MS. of no great authority. But the change seems explicable upon the Principle 
 maintained concerning the aorist (Appendix II.) .-"piaa. denote the 
 general condition of doing nothing violent against the existing «tate of things 
 «i«.. refers to a particular and special attempt which they were to make if 
 opportunity permitted. This idea, quite independently formed is «nPPorted by 
 HcVmann's version: 'Nichts Thatliches .u unlemehmen, sondern durch Vor- 
 X en uns .urn Abzuge be^egen .u wollen'-not ^"-'^-'^..^^-f 
 mentbut by representations to try to induce us to withdraw I'ed^ takes a 
 simila view, and well points out that by the assault of the Platans they were 
 prevented from actually attempting to persuade («»...) them, and therefore 
 
 Z 2 
 
 I? 
 
 V 
 
 .J^ 
 
340 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 / 
 [Book 111. I Cbap.(67.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 341 
 
 |||B 
 
 if 
 
 w 
 
 I "I 
 
 the pres. infinitive would be improper ; and this holds good more especially of 
 the aorist infin. ir«cr«. The objection would not apply to y^<-^¥<rai. for the 
 Thebans profess never to have attempted violence. See is ovSe.a ov^.y iy.^ 
 r4ptCoy ii 3 ' &<rr^ ^l^^^**" (^^^^^ S^^'^ ^° ^^ ^^^^ '^ applicable only to the 
 cse of the Plateaus, not to the conduct which is here proposed as their model.' 
 ov, may, says Kriig.. be governed by aKjodf^.y, for such phrases as aA7.«' 
 
 irpdiiy, TrdBos k.t.X. occur. 
 
 (b) Kal ravra. This can hardly be regarded as an instance of the common 
 
 phrase ' and that too; as the collocation is not suitable. We must mther regard 
 it with Pop. as the accusative after the participle, and rp^ls aS./cUs as an 
 epexegesis of it. Kriig. says, Koi ravra, und srwar, beginning as if irp<£|avTes 
 belonged only to cr^a^rfl., whereas it is also attracted to <par., and connects 
 what follows This sort of connection is not uncommon : for instance, Herod, 
 vii 144, where we ought to place a comma before 8x6, as it is also connected 
 with what goes before. Hermann in his Sophocleshas collected other instances. 
 f,f i ,g o{,K, fiv—'notso,i/: The force of these collocations, 
 
 where oh strongly negatives what goes before, is best expressed by placing a 
 comma after it. More may be seen upon the subject in Pop. note, and also 
 Pflugk. Eurip. Hec. 399. 
 
 Chaptbr LXVIL— (a.) iirfi^Xdofiev—' we have gone into these parti- 
 ^/^yg» T^Ti^wpTj/xeVoi. To carry out the construction we must 
 
 of course supply Mfi.y, yet this word is, strictly speaking, inapplicable to the 
 sense, for they wished the Lacedaemonians to be convinced of the J"sticeot 
 th. ir vengeance ; they themselves were of course convinced of it already. We 
 must therefore either read V^s • . • T€T£)U(«pr,^e'.ous, or suppose that by a care- 
 less brachylogy Thucydides left the nominative to convey the same idea. 
 ^tirXaffias (vfiia^- Arn. would supply dmt or 4iri<p^peiy, but this is un- 
 necessary, for Cvf^ias can as well mean the material, or cause of punishment^ 
 as the actual punishment itself. cVrt ri ^01 (wla (Pop. remarks) is-' aliquid 
 
 mihi poenae est.* .. j ». 
 
 (b) ohK 4k wpoffriKivrwv, like ^ oh irpo<TvK6vru,p, 11. 65. Here 4k, as 
 is usual, denotes the antecedent conditions out of which anything arises ; and 
 since these are regarded as its material cause (e.g. premises of conclusion), we 
 may class phrases of this sort as illustrations of the fact that 4k denotes the 
 material, S.i the efficient, and iu^Ka the final cause. Goll. renders ' Niclit ihrem 
 Character und Wesen gemass'-' not conformahly to their nature and character 
 Cf oh irpo<rfiKoyra, Ixi V. Tr.-' not in accordance with what -properly attaches to 
 them' (and which accordingly we have a right to look for at their hands • 
 Hence rb irpdenjKOV is a man's duty. Peile compares ^-c twv ihiu>v XoAe., &i. 
 John viii. 44. ««i o*''^«' ^f)7)fiOi-to be taken parenthetically, 
 
 as in English, * and their houses desolate !' 
 
 (e.) Airpcirts Ti— • unseemly in respect of their deserts! i.e. undeserved. 
 i^iyajtoi—' objects of exultafion,' or ' to be exulted over.' irafi\v ■ 
 
 f,rt<rau. Pop. has shown that this is the correct form in preference to Traptvo- 
 anaay exhibited by one MS. and defended by Dindorf. 
 
 (d)ohK kyra-KoUyr^s r^y Ur)y r^i^piay-^ the comme7isurate punuf" 
 menV (sc. ftvo/xov). How are we to account for the past tense here instead ot 
 
 the present or future? Bloomfield thinks that it is used by anticipation, as 
 though, I suppose, the meaning were — * will not have paid an equivalent penahjf 
 (ven when they are condemned' — taking it for granted that they will be. Tliis 
 is plausible ; but should we not have expected hv with this sense attaching to 
 the words ? Arnold supposes the tense to refer to the surrender of the Plataeans : 
 ' In surrendering themselves up to justice they have offered a most inadequate 
 satisfaction.' But in the first place the Thebans would never speak of the m(re 
 surrender, not followed up by condemnation, as any satisfaction at all ; ami, 
 secondly, inro^id6yat rifiwplay is not * to offer satisfaction,' but to 'pay tJie 
 penalty.' As therefore no other has been suggested, we must accept Bloom.'s 
 explanation. Or are we to consider the aorist participle as truly aoristic, i.e. 
 indefinite, and merely pointing out the great patent fact that they were paying 
 no real equivalent, without indicating anything specially about the time ? See 
 Appendix II. Kriig. has, I see, another interpretation, and upon reflection I 
 heheve it to be right, i.e. * durch ihr bisheriges Schicksal ' — have not, in the fate 
 that has as yet (i.e. yvv) befallen them, sufficiently expiated. The patent mis- 
 fortunes of the Plataeans might have been pleaded as some expiation for their 
 errors, but these, the Thebans urge, are not enough. 
 
 ie.) ivvofia yap irfia-oyrai. Strange difficulties have been raised about 
 these words. Goll. goes so far as to suggest tiiat they are a mere parenthesis, 
 reading t^j* To'tji/ ripLuplav, {ivvofia ydp,) miffotn-ai k.t.A. But is not the stress to 
 be laid upon t V '((Tvv, and are not these words the explanation ? — ' the punishment 
 mil not be a fair equivalent, for our citizens perished in open violation of law, 
 hut these men will suffer in strict conformity with law.' 
 
 (/) irepiwffdwfiey. It is unnecessary to point out the intentional and 
 scornful reference to the language of the Plataeans in this and several other 
 expressions in the speech. With 4v vfuv cf. 4v 6XKois, liii. 
 
 (g.) \6ywv rovs hyuvas. This refers of course to the rhetorical contests 
 just about being brought into vogue by the Sophists. The force of the article 
 \s—'do not let this trial which you have established be a mere rhetorical exhibi- 
 i2(?n' (i.e. without any practical result). \6yoi cireo-t Kofffi-ndevrts 
 
 —' orations got up with rhetori-^cd, ornament' — fine language and tropes, &c. 
 anaprayofieyuv—* when in the wrong — wrongly done.' So ijiiapriidri d irAoDs, 
 ii. 65. 
 
 [h.) i\\' fjy 01 r]yefi6y€5 K.r.X. This sentence Am. says is a curious 
 instance of grammatical confusion. It must necessarily be so, for the speakers 
 as usual try to amalgamate their own particular case with a general rule or 
 principle, and in expressing half one and half the other their language becomes 
 intricate and ungrammatical. Thus fiv ot r]y€fji6y€5 troii]<T<avrai, Ssa-rnp vfxeis vvy 
 *otu(r6€ becomes ^v oi rjyffiSyes, Sxrinp vvv vfif7s iroiija'rjffOe. ' Should all 
 leaders, as ye now' — then we might anticipate, are doing, — but the hypothesis 
 is suddenly transferred to the second person — ' .<ihould you now make,' &c. The 
 sense may in general terms be expressed — * but should all leaders act, as we would 
 now have you act, bring matters to a head, and pronounce decision with reference 
 to aU collectively,' &c. Ke<pa\aidoffavr€s. This word is so uni- 
 
 versally applied to language and not to facts or things, and the reference to rh 
 htp^T-qiw. rh jSpaxu so obvious, that it is strange to find GoUer devoting a long 
 and elaborate note to the suggestion of other interpretations. Tr. — ' having briefiy 
 
'ri 
 
 342 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDE8. 
 
 ■ 
 
 summed «p. or brought the whole affair Mo the compass of a short qu^km' 
 addressed to all Mike. i-' "'"o" «<>r»«-' »"«- "V^' K' 
 
 i. e. to veil unjust acts. 
 
 CHiLPTER LXVIIL-(a.) ro^adra 5c. The 5^ refers us back to xliii 
 ol bk AaK.Sa^fi6y.oi St^aaral . . . i^irdyour.s i^iKr.iuou. These 
 words present more than the ordinary amount of intricacy and confusion caused 
 by crowding too much within the compass of a single sentenc^. Grotc re- 
 marks ' To construe the passage as it now stands is very difficult, if not 
 impossible' (vi, 359. note). Am. originally said, * All that is wanted to com- 
 plete the grammar is to repeat irpclxovro twice over-Src var.pov ^podxov.o 
 a ^po.ixoyro-&s in viii. 27.' But if anything is to be repeated, the 
 
 words 8t<JTi r6y t€ &\\ov x^^^ov ^^lovu, Kal seem to show that it ^B^iow, 
 HBd not ^po^ixoyro, which ought to be supplied in the next clause. And Arn. s 
 version is so unsatisfactory even to himself, that in the second edition he aban- 
 dons it. considering the passage corrupt; which conclusion he forms from the 
 fact that Ti? lauT«. 8,Ka(^ &ovKi,<rH is not Greek of the time of Thucydides; 
 i e I suppose he means in the sense which he gives, 'in consequerwe of tkir 
 just request being refused: He accordingly would erase these words, as well as 
 i, before miavro, and change 8tc into Srt. Peile has come to the same con- 
 elusion as that above given, i.e. of repeating h^iovv rather than ^poexovro ami 
 translates-' inasmuch as, both on every former occasion they used, as they said, to 
 entreat them to remain quiet according to the ancient treaty concliided byPausa- 
 nias after the [second! Persian War, and particularly when afterwards, on a 
 recent occadon, [they entreated them] to be neutral according to those proposals 
 which they made to them before the skge [eircumvallation?]-in«^m«eA /5«j/,«* 
 they did not accept them, thinking that they [the Laced^momans], ^ their mn 
 riqhteous intention being out of alliance now, had been ill used by thrm [the 
 Platans], again leading on one side; &c. It does not seem easy to obtain a 
 more satisfactory account of the passage, rhv UKov xP^^ov must mean all 
 the other time'-le. beside that in immediate question, as for instance when 
 they were engaged against the ^ginet^ns ;-««! gre g^r.po. refers to the last 
 occasion of offence in the existing war ;-5r)0€v of course implies that the state- 
 ment is that of the speaker not guaranteed by the author, icar' iKuua, accord- 
 ing to Peile, are the terms of Archidamus' proclamation : & ^poeixoyro {ko. 
 Icrre ut,8^ m^^' ^r4pu>., ii. 7^)' There does not seem any positive objection, 11 
 preferred, to understand it-' those ierms'-le. the same as mentioned before. 
 viz the treaty of Pausanias. Ufrnop^oi is well explained by Arn. : ' they were 
 placed in a mere state of nature with regard to them, and then nothing hin- 
 •dered them from putting them to death, just as they would barbarians, or as 
 they were in the habit of treating their Greek enemies, as appears Irom 11. bj. 
 iii It ' Peile understands tK<nroy^oi k.t.K to mean-' all that they got by thex 
 righte<ms intention was to be placed out of the pale of truce: But the oppos. e 
 idea appears more proper in connection with the context '''^^ f^-";?' ' 
 they were thereupon released from the obligations of the truce. Yet this se^n^ 
 to require another rendering for t^ ^avrS>y ^o.A^«.. ^^^""^^^^^ *^«"'.^"'^^^ 
 ' with v^feeUy just intentions of their m^.'-but, as Pop. observes, this tore 
 doea not exist in a simple dative. Poppo, however, suggests nothing ebe. 
 
 ICUAP. J68.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 343 
 
 iMight/we regard the words as a sort of instrumental dative with ^olfi^voi^^ 
 ,yj( mowing to) their own honesty of purpose or desire: i.e. the consciousness 
 of thiir own honesty of purpose in the proposal was the ground upon which they 
 
 I coDsiidered themselves released from the obligations of the truce. On the 
 question concerning this use of ^oiKnffn, see ii. 35 ad fin.— t7]s eKdffrov fiov- 
 K^fffws— where the meaning is not materially different ; Eurip. Androm. 703, 
 f;T(J\iiia Trpoa-^hoiTO ^ovKtxrit ff a/ta; Iph. in Taur. 1019 ; and Here. Fur- 
 1305. Krug. interprets ^ovK-nau-—' in Folge des Verlangens der Neutralitdt'— 
 in consequence of their desire for the neutrality, which the Plataeans would not 
 
 (6.) iviavrhv fifv riva—' something like a year: tis has this qualifying 
 effect after numerals, as after other words. Meyap4(av. See 
 
 j^^5 (r<p4r€pa <ppovQvvT€i — ' thought with them;' of. ra 
 
 Saxi^aipLOviotv <ppoviiv, v. 84 and vi. 51. 
 
 (c.) <^Koh6iM-n(Tav . . . Karay(i)yiov. This appears to have been a large 
 caravansary resembling those found in the East. The size is accounted for 
 by the number of persons who came to worship the Platsean Juno. The k\:pcu 
 Bloom, supposes were meant for the use of these persons during their stay. 
 Arn. thinks, with more probability, that they were employed by the guests at 
 the sacrificial feasts. Pop. compares the ' lecti aerati,' or ' triclinia aerata' of 
 the Latins (Liv. xxxix. 6, 7), where Crevier has, Mectos seratos '— 'Intellige 
 lectos in quibus epulaturi discumberent, ut patet ex Plin. H. K xxxiv. 3.' The 
 olK-hiiara are * chambers '—here probably small 'cells' or sleeping apart- 
 ments. ^ a vT ax ^—'measured all ways,' i.e. 200 ft. square. Kriig. 
 cf. Xen. Anab. iii.i. 2. * HvooOtv Ka\ Kdrwdev—' looking at them from 
 afiove or below'— therefore coming to much the same thing as &vw koI ndru}. 
 Arnold supposes that the temple was built by the Thebans to propitiate the 
 Plataan goddess, whose natural worshippers they had just exterminated ; and 
 compares the case of Camillus, who invited Juno Veientina to Kome after 
 destroying Veii. On 'Hpaicp cf. Herod, ix. 5^; ^^^^' ^'^'^- '^5 ^^^" 
 
 oias, ix. I. 
 
 [d.) iv r^ reix^t k.tA. These words are generally supposed to refer to 
 the metallic clamps used in constructing the wall. But Pop. argues, that though 
 dhpos was used for this purpose (i. 93, iv. 69. vi. 88), we have no proof that 
 XoAxbs ever was. Again, the word eirtTrAa means supellectiles (' movables,' 'fur- 
 niture,' as we say), and therefore would not be properly applied to part of the 
 permanent fabric of a wall. Pinally, the writer speaks of opo<l>al and flupc^^aTa, 
 and then ra &\\a & fju k.t.K, which shows that these words cannot refer to rb 
 ulxQs. I suppose he means that as the article ra is used, ra iiAAa means 
 something of the same kind as what has been mentioned, otherwise it would 
 have been &Wa. He therefore accepts Heilmann's explanation that eV t^J 
 T«(x« means ' intra mania: i.e. within the wall of the city. So Kriig. To all 
 this GoU. will not assent, alleging that ^v ry t€i'x" cannot be supported in the 
 above sense. It might be replied that such phrases as eV^areiJeiv irarpiloi 
 ((Edip. R. 825) seem to indicate that such a force may exist in the preposition. 
 Neither is it inconsistent with the account given of it. Jelf, § 622—' the notion 
 of being in. enclosed within, contained by a spot;' nor with the analysis of it 
 by Donaldson, N. Cratylus. 
 
 (1 
 
 \ 
 
344 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [BoAkIII. I CHAP.jJO.l 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 345 
 
 I 
 i 
 
 's 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 SI 
 
 ill 
 111 
 
 (e) <rx«8J>«' 8^ -r* "f-i ""^ ^ifiwar. The expression (tx^Up ti, 'jbretti, 
 nearly: occurs again, v. 66, and vii. 33- Here it may mean-'t^ was }^etty 
 nearly the case throughout this whole business: Peiie, on the contrary, trans- 
 lates-' t)r««y nearlf/, or rather, ato^./A^r,' comparing for this disjunctive u.e of 
 Kol i 143 -roiaira koI irapairXi^tria ; and ii. 3, "-^"^^ ""^ ""^^ ''^ ir€pi(Jp(>.. 
 Pop has ' propemodum autem, atqm adeo omnino: We may add as an illus- 
 tration of the corrective koI, Dem. de F. L. loz : Mk.X. koX y.yov.vacre.As-- 
 < has been ruined, or I should rather say^Mcorrw. enfeebled ; and Phdijpp. in. 
 
 (/) ir€pi nxarai&p—' qiu>d attinet ad Plataenses; Pop. Rather—' mail 
 they did about the Platceans: iiroT.rpa^M.Vo.-' alimated; ' .o 
 
 luile disposed to listen <o,'-metaphor from the act of turning aside from a 
 person, and refusing to regard him. Similarly the Latins used aversaru 
 
 (a) iTft rp.'Tv Ka\ iv.WKoarcf-B.c. 519. The dates are given differ- 
 ently by a year in different writers, because as Plateea was taken in the summer, 
 it is not certain whether the exact time is to be found at the close of the first 
 or commencement of the second year of Olymp. 83. The further fortunes of 
 the town are recounted by Duker. After lying in ruins for forty years it was 
 rebuilt at the peace of Antalcidas in the third (fourth according to Clinton) 
 year of Olymp. 98, B.C. 375- It was again destroyed ^7 tbejhebans just 
 before the battle of I^uctra (Olymp. 102. 2.). and restored by Philip after he 
 battle of Ch^ronea, Olymp. 1 10. 3. This is the account of Pausanias Plut. 
 {Arist.) ascribes its restoration to Alexander after he became master of Asia. 
 
 Chapter LXIX.— a/ r€<r(rapdKoyra yrits. See xxix. . ^ ,, ^i; 
 
 rSip 'Advpalwp. Am. compares this not unfrequent use of iK with the old 
 English of-^ followed after of the Athenians: Schomann. on Iscms, 349. ^^- 
 plains-' of some belonging to the Athenian quota: Kriig. refers to his own Gr. 
 ca 5 2 The squadron of Paches is meant (xxxiii.). 5a-5ffca 
 
 lavt^'i. Seelxxv. The m^" follows UUko, and the 8^ follows irpfv because 
 say Pop. and Kriig., this is the rhetorical antithesis ; in the syntax irap(J.^«>v and 
 girws TtpoipddaroxTi are opposed. 
 
 Chapter LXX.-(a.) oi alxf^d\a>roi. 'See i. 54- 55- .*" 
 
 Q^^ ; r^ wf ol 'Eiridanvov—'in the neigh- 
 
 r&p vavfiax^f'V- oee 1. 5$. ^*P^ r.Trmi»f*r 
 
 hourhood of Epidamnus: i.e. at Sybota. •> 1 / , 
 
 (6) hKraKoaloop raKivrcop I trtyyvr^tiipoi-^ ransomed ostensibly .for 
 the sum of 800 talents for which their irp«i|evot became sureties: As two rams 
 were the' usual ransom of a Peloponnesian soldier taken in battle (Herod^vi. 
 79), this sum, amounting to more than three talents per man, has seenied to 
 many so monstrous that they suppose an error in the numerals, and read 80 tor 
 800 Arn. argues that some of the richestmerchants in Greece, as these tor- 
 cyr^ans were, might well afford to pay even so heavy a ransom as this, n 
 also quotes from Bockh instances, where a talent was paid for a single indivi- 
 dual of no great wealth (^sch. de fal. Leg. 274). and nine talents for on 
 of Philips ambassadors (Dem. 1 59. Reiske). Perhaps it has not been enougn 
 observed that this transaction was a fictitious one, and that the sum named was 
 large precisely because no one expected the money to be paid. See i. 44- 
 
 (cf) Ka\ 9,p yi^p Uetelas. This is more in the style of Herodotus. Cf. 
 with/Arn i. 8. Clio. hoI is connected with the apodosis, yhp with the paren- 
 thetiLl clause ; cf. iAXa 7^P = sed enim. See cvii. and i 31. b- 
 *uL Sxr^^P Ka\ irp6T^pop. 'The resolution now adopted abandoned the 
 Lint to go back to the past, and to a past which could not be restored. - 
 Grote, vi. 364. ^iTo<pvy(i>p—' escaped judicial sentence, —got 
 
 air as' we say. i.e. acquitted, as h<p\6pTu,p, infra, is ' condemned: 
 
 (d) id.Ko^p6^ep<y,. The proxeni were, as is well known, persons who 
 discharged the duties of modern ' consuls ' or ' residents,' and resembled them 
 except in the fact that they were natives of the state where they lived not of 
 that whose interests thoy protected. Their principal duties were to look after 
 the lives and properties of citizens belonging to the state of which they were 
 uroxeni to receive ambassadors and introduce them, and in short to exercise a 
 Leral 'superintendence over the interests of their clients. They seem to have 
 had their names inscribed upon a tablet which was publicly exposed to view 
 iUypairrop eis x^A'^^/^). and to have received from the state which they re- 
 presented a right to the produce of certain lands so long as they continued m 
 office They also seem to have been publicly appointed by the state which 
 they represented, and a Trpoi^.ta was sometimes transmitted from father to son. 
 These facts appear in the inscriptions collected by Bockh, and quoted by 
 GoUer ad locum. An ieeXonp6^.po. was obviously one who took these duties 
 upon himself without any public appointment. It is not, however agreed 
 whether an ie.Konp6i.pos was one unrecognised by the state which he repre- 
 sented (as Kiihner says) or one undertaking such duties without recognition 
 from his own state (according to Bockh's view). There were -1-/^'^^-; J^^ 
 performed the same good offices as individuals for individuals. These probably 
 were the representatives of the bopi^epoi of earlier times (11. 29). 
 
 (..) ^pdaK.p reV.cc. x'^P"'^"^- There has been considerable con- 
 troversy upon the nature of these ' stakes,' and that of the trespass committed. 
 Bloomfield seems to suppose that they were procured and employed nearly in 
 their natural state, and ridicules the idea of their requiring anything like 
 manufacture. Goll., on the contrary, professes to speak from personal know- 
 ledge, and asserts that in France and Germany vine stakes are made out of 
 ^timber, and prepared with some pains. Nothing, he says distressed he 
 French peasantry in Champagne more deeply in the invasion of 18.4 than the 
 destructL of these vine-stakes by the soldiers of the allied armies, who used 
 them for firewood. It would apRear upon this view of the case that the tres- 
 passers must have cut down timber trees in the sacred r.^.pos^ Arndd 
 reasonably conjectures that the Corcyrean nobles had occupied and used the 
 sacred ground as the Roman patricians had the Ager Pubhcus and had 
 acquired from long tenure the notion that it was at their own disposition. 
 Hence their incapacity to make any defence when suddenly accused of sacrilege. 
 ItisGrote's opinion that the present «V.c.. indicates they were habitually 
 making use of the trees for the purpose. He illustrates the whole of the 
 oration of Lysias (vii.) against Nicomachus. Here we have certain obve- trees, 
 so far protected by law that not even the proprietors could cut them down 
 The speaker defends himself against the charge of having grubbed up one and 
 M the wood. There were visitors, appointed by public commission, to 
 
 »" 
 
 ill 
 
 (: 
 
346 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book in. I Chap. 76.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 347 
 
 
 I 
 
 lip 
 
 inspect the state of the trees. ct o t^ p. The stater was prolVally 
 
 the silver stater (4 drachrase), and not the gold one (20 drachmae), as owii^^ to 
 the rarity of gold, when the golden one was meant, it was generally so speci fied. 
 Great surprise has been expressed by Heilmann and others how a number of 
 atakes sufficiently great could have been cut, that the fine upon them even at a 
 stater apiece could have reduced such opulent merchants to penury. Probably 
 the practice had been continued for several years, and the number cut during 
 the whole period determined on the average of the last two or three. 
 
 (/.) u<pK6vra>» k.t.K. — 'when they had been judicially condfmned to pay 
 the fine: Some MSS. read o<p(iK6vra)v, which, according to a distinction 
 rightly taken by the grammarians, would, simply mean, ' as they owed the 
 Tnoney^ 
 
 iff') ra^dfifvoi. Duker quotes from Budaeus, reTorYfifvats rats KaraBoXal^, 
 which is equivalent to the modern phrase—* by instalments: He compares iii. 
 50, i. 99, and loi, though these do not seem much to the point. T(f 
 
 v6fjL(p xp'h(raaeai—'toputthelawinforce: We have no means of ascertaining 
 the measures pursued against non-solvent debtors at Corcyra, but judging from 
 the analogy of other states they must have been severe. Cf Diet. Antiq. 
 T<p v6fjL(p i^flpyovro. Some have supplied Tt}s jSouXrjy, but this has little to 
 recommend it. G611. follows the Scholiast, 4^finirrov rris 3ou\T?<recDS ahrwy, 
 i.e. their wish to pay the fine by instalments. But perhaps it is better to take 
 it with Arn. : ' the severity of the law shut them out from all hopes of saving 
 themselves except by violence: Pop. also has, * cum lege co'ercerentur, adstricti 
 essent, cogerentur, ita certe Herod, vii. 96. 139, ix. iii.' ^ovA^y— 
 
 sine articulo. See i. 8. a. 
 
 Chapter LXXI.— (a.) flirov. Repeat this verb before Ztx^ffQai, and (by 
 zeugma) in a slightly diflferent sense—* made a proposition: /*»? v-nt 
 
 So the Lacedaemonians, ii. 7. riavxdCouras. Bloomf. refers this 
 
 to /uij56T€pous, because similar precautions are now taken with respect to 
 foreign vessels in neutral ports; but Poppo compares ii. 7, rd t' &\Ka 7]<rvxdCop- 
 ras, Kal 'AOrivalovs Sexo/teVots fii^ Kxjt, and rightly argues that riffvxdCovras 
 refers ' ad tous SexofieVovy non ad rovs dfx^4yras: rh 5^ %\foy— 
 
 just as we should say in English, ' anything more than this: 
 
 (b.) ^vv4<p(p€. It is questioned whether (Ttphiv avroiis or roTy 'Aer^vaiois 
 be meant. Pop. prefers the former. Perhaps in translating we ought to 
 retain the antiquity of the original—' to prova the expediency of what had been 
 done: rohs iK€7 KaraircipfvySras. * Aut ^K€? valet ^/celtrf (cf. 
 
 Doederl. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1015) aut conferendum exemplum iv. 14, rals Se 
 Koirais iv Tf yv Karajr€(p(vyviais it^ oXXov.'— Pop. The use of ^/ce* seems to 
 indicate that they had * fled for refuge there and had got it' (i.e. as Am. 
 renders, ' had taken nfuge there'), meaning something more than iKufff. 
 i-KUTT po<p^ is, as Arn says, equivalent to the modern words, * reaction,' 
 * counter-revolution.* It is a metaphor from the movement of troops in wheel- 
 ing right round — ' vdte-face: 
 
 Chapteb LXXII. — ol ^xo*"*"** "^^ Trpdy^iara. Sec xxviii. 
 ^vXktytU lZp{>eTi— 'collected and entrenched itself —or it maybe merely, 
 
 7 . «.«/,•/,« ' elYoi/ Remark the change of number from 
 
 ^tooknp a portion. .^''^°"- ^.^,, Remark that the dat. 
 
 KaTo4>€<>y«. Pop. compares IV. 57. , 7 . ^o' 
 
 with xpby is ♦ lyin^ close beside; and with accus. ' looking towards. 
 
 Chapter LXXIII.-^^U oupot. 'Dubitatur, sint ne auxUmres an m^- 
 cenarii: Cf. ii. 33- 7°, i"- '8- 
 
 Chapter LXXIV.-(a.) A.aA..o,5<r^y ^^.ipas-^ After the intermljf^a 
 
 dav' Bloom, compares biaKiir6vT(cu rpmv irwv. n"*/^'^"''?'^!^ 
 
 fthe tumult of street fighting the women seem generally to have taken 
 Lfuge upon the flat housetops, and not unfrequently to have collected miss.les, 
 r„d parUcipated in the conflict. Such was the case with the Platan women 
 " th'combat recorded ii. 4. and thus by the hand of a woman penshed both 
 
 Pvrrhus and Abimelech. • ^ „„ 
 
 (M i.lKvv May-' the late afternoon approaching toward evening aB 
 
 Sc^VUa is the early afternoon when thesun has passed the mendxan. 
 
 See Buttmann's Lexilogm, in IdW and SeieXos.'— Arn. 
 
 (O Lo.Kla,. Houses where a large number of the poor famihes lodged 
 
 tosether They are described by iEseh. oo«<ra Timarch. nV- »«" ^.^^--raMe^"' 
 
 Such were the -insnte' at Komc. Existing instances may be seen among 
 "h ho" es built in Hats; or perhaps the nearest resemblance .s to be found 
 t^he dwellings of the French workmen at Lyons and some other manufac- 
 turinff towns. Pop. quotes Cas. ad Athen. vii. i. , 1, «^u 
 
 TiTZLJii air«,-sc. tV -rf^-. This would not perhaps be worth 
 noticing had n^t Dale, following a Scholiast, apparently taken ,t the^oto way. 
 which is unmeaning-any worf would have been i.i<^opos « tV .p^»r«. 
 JireJai-AyeTO— ' secretly got out to sea: 
 
 CH.PTBB LXXV.-N.K^.Tpa.os. This apt^rently judicious officer Ml 
 
 atMantinea. See v. 6.. 74- ^"'?'''°"': . '^ "l X' tl 5 
 
 Lobeck ad Phrynichum, p. .35- Phrynichus has 7«Aa...s ou. ."«_;"^ " 
 .Vt«. Pop however prefers A..<r.oip<»., which certainly is the reading 
 
 of the great majority of the MSS. both hereof «'f ">•;"• ^ . „.„,/,lL„ 
 ui f„;,rX€l/air.aT!a-'/A« distrust which induced them to refuse saiUng 
 llThi: Athenians: On the apparently redundant . see no^"^^. 
 
 p. 5, note 7) thinks that this temple was near the harbour of Ale n^ua 
 Bllf. and GoU. from bxxi. believe that it ™^ ''' ''"''^ Hyllaie harbou. 
 They fled thither because the fane was more sacred than that of Castor and 
 PouL. and therefore the asylum was more likely to ^-^ -^P-""*-, "at 
 island, according to most authorities, must have been Ptych.a, the ".hers^-e 
 ' "^ 'V L'y vovT HI — come ku 
 
 not large enough to contain 400 persons. T / 
 
 ^ , I /•» rhv vriaov — Ptychia. manso, u. 
 
 I>e: 'grow to the number of. '^^^ "_'''' . ^ / y,x 
 
 8^. Kriig. 5i6T€V7r€TO. The subject is to .xt'HjS€ia. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI.-r^op^o. olaa.. Only in this pla.e is i^op^os used 
 as an adjective ; as a substantive, iii. 6, iv. 27. ^^. Pop- compares ^c.iirXouy, 
 
348 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I Chap. 8 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 349 
 
 which also is both in Thucydides. He explains, 4v 8f)ju« oScat, 4v KuAAtjvj; 
 dpfiovaai. Goll. agrees with this— 'die im Hqfen von Cyllene lagen nack der 
 Fahrt aus lonien ;' and Bloomf. also— 'Aam;^' kept in port there since their 
 vot/agefrom Ionia.' It is however quite possible that Am. may be correct in 
 his notion that the words me^n—* forming a fleet to cruise off Corcyra! 
 Translate at any rate — 'forming a blockading squadron ; ' something like the 
 English fleets off the mouth of French and Spanish ports during the Peninsular 
 war. TTis T^TTiipov. Cf. i. 50. c, and i. 47. a. 
 
 Chapter LXXVIL— to$ ocl vX-npovufpas. Younger students wilhin- 
 derstand that this must mean — ' each as it was manned' i.e. 'as fast as they 
 could be got ready.' 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII.— >coa' aurous. This may mean, as Am. says— 'wrc 
 in a bad condition of themselves' i.e. their own confusion had defeated them 
 before they met the enemy. So also Poppo. Haase contends that it means 
 ' the Corcyreans alone,' as distinguished from the Athenians. He assumes 
 that rahanrtapuffQai must be — ' to be hard pressed hy the enemy' This verb, 
 however, signifies to be distressed, to be hard put to it, a state which might 
 quite as well arise from their own disorder as from an hostile attack. Poile, on 
 the other hand, quotes some passages which support Haase's view: Kaff Tim 
 8' ofriroT' iKpiil^i txaxn, Soph. Ajax, 775 ; Kara rh inrepex'*^ ru>u ivainio)v,'nmc. 
 iii. 107 : rh kut Ei/pvXoxov . . . 01 Karii rh 5e|tb^ Ke'pas, ib. 108. Kriig. con- 
 siders that any other interpretation than '/wr sich,' i.e. themselves as distin- 
 guished from the Athenians, would be erroneous. Probably his view is the 
 tme one. &,dp6ais some refer to the Athenians, some to the 
 
 Peloponnesians. The latter are apparently right, as the word generally indi- 
 cates a certain degree of crowding, more applicable to the assailed than to the 
 assailants ; and oitSe seems to imply that rh piiaov must refer to the same fleet. 
 Kark K 4 pas— 'on the wing, or flank' according to Portus, Poppo, and Goll. 
 Others suggest, in single column. The more proper expression for this is eirl 
 icf'pojs. Pop. admits that the other is found (Xen. Cyrop. i. 6. 43) ; still, as he 
 points out, the words are evidently opposed to Karh fiftrov not to aOpdais, for 
 i9p6ais could never have been used to express the opposite measure, sc. 
 fieroirn^hv—junctisfrontibus — in line. ra^aixivmv avrS>v. The 
 
 Peloponnesians. Cf. ii. 83. d. tr^pii-nX^ov. T lie Athenians, as 
 
 before, ii. 84. Cf. vii. 36. irpvtivav Kpov6fi€voi. See i. 50. 
 
 ^T«A€UTa ^5 T}Kiov ^vciv — 'finished after having lasted up to sunset.' See 
 note i. 51. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX.— <r4)i<rii'— dat. incommodi. Kriig., who refers to his cd. 
 oi Anab. i. 3. 16. ovh^v fiakXatf—'nof a whit the more,' sc. on 
 
 account of their success. See ii. 70. BpatriSou. See iii. 69. 
 
 ' Hos viros nauarchis laoy\rfi<povs non faisse hinc discimus.' — Pop. 
 AfvKifjLvrty. Cf. i. 30. 
 
 Chapter LXXX. 
 not in the Heraeum. 
 
 -TO IS 4XAois— the remainder of the aristocratical party, 
 ZfjiCDS—BC. notwithstanding the confusion 
 
 caused by the appearance of the enemy ; or, notwithstanding their hopes of 
 coming to an accommodation. fifffov r^x^pas. ' Ita bene dici 
 
 demonstrant Thorn Mag. p. 609, et Lobeck ad Phrynich. p. 53/ Pop., who 
 also quotes ' medium diei,' Liv. ^tppvKrt^p-herKrav—' were an- 
 
 noumed by fire signals.' It has been observed that not only the approach of 
 the enemy, but the direction also and number were indicated. See note on 
 iii. 2. It is best with Goll. to connect 4(t>pvKra}p^dr](rav with cnrh AeuKaSos, for 
 had the Athenian fleet already left Leucas it would have been too close upon 
 the others to admit of their escaping. Those who would pursue the sub- 
 ject will find a large number of authorities quoted in GoU.'s note upon this 
 passage. 
 
 Chapter LXXXI.—uTr€p€^€7K(i»'T€s. See xv. note. Leucas was origin- 
 ally a peninsula ; a canal was subsequently dug through the isthmus connecting 
 it with the mainland by the Corinthians (Strab. 45^)- This canal was however 
 filled up by accumulations of sand caused by the prevalent gales (Plin. Hist. 
 Sat. iv. I. 5). It was in this state during the Peioponnesian war, and indeed 
 continued to be so up to the period when Philip was at war with the Romans. 
 In Livy's time it was again an island (xxxiii. 17), and at present is connected 
 with the continent only by a very narrow and shallow channel (Dodwell, p. 67). 
 See Poppo's note, from which this has been gathered, and iii. 94. 
 robs maffriviovs. Cf. Ixxv. ii.Tr€x<ipr)<Tav. Grote, vi. 375- 
 
 ht(T<p irepteKOfjilCovTO. The vessels were in the port mentioned Ixxii. 
 near the forum— i.e. the aristocratical quarter, for as we saw in Ixxiv. the 
 viiptov was there. They were accordingly brought designedly round the small 
 peninsula, upon which the mins of the ancient town are still visible, to the 
 Hyllaic harbour, which was the head-quarters of the democratical party. It 
 has been made a question whether the oligarchs were slaughtered on board 
 boats of their own, while attempting to escape, or on shore, as Grote supposes. 
 I Poppo would infer the former from Ixxxv., which seems to imply that about 
 i five hundred of the oligarchical party got across to the mainland in this way. 
 It is not however quite certain to what Ixxxv. refers, and Thucydides would 
 scarcely have left so much to be supplied by implication to his narrative. To 
 Goller's objection, ' why should the slaughter have been confined to the time 
 tV '6<T<f TrepieKofxiCovro at v^es?' I should answer, ait^KTeivov does not imply that 
 it was. It is to be tr. as the imperfect often \^—they proceeded to slaughter, 
 they set about the slaughter, which was continued upon the arrival of the ships 
 in the Hyllaic harbour. « Zvpvfi4^(ay. Grote, vi. 376. 
 
 iirexpSi/To. The reading of two MSS. The others have aTrex^prj^ai/. Now no 
 one has made any sense of this ; it is better therefore to adopt the former, more 
 especially as the imperfect is the tense required (cf. supra). This reading has the 
 support of the grammarian Zonaras (quoted by Goll.), who writes kirexpwvro. 
 QovKvm-ns ii^rl ToD kuripovv. We have kir^xP^cravro and kv^x(^,(T°.vro as con- 
 jectures, but they are not necessary. Hermann conjectures an^x^^piaav. 
 hi(pd€ipav . . . kwiiXovs. It is now admitted that Matthise's explanation 
 (§ 486), kW-fiKovs for ^avTois, is incorrect. ' They destroyed one another' ia not 
 the same thing as, • thty destroyed themselves.' Compare Tac. Ann. iii. 46 : 
 'lUic 8u& manu, reliqui mutuis ictibus occidere.' avrov iv r^ Up(f— 
 
 \t\ 
 
350 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I ^^^^ ^^'^ 
 
 wf 
 
 * an the spot, in the grounds of the temple itself: The last words are added by 
 wav of explanation. Pop. compares avrddtp 4k t^s koi'Atjs "HXtSos. 
 drixoOKTo. Kriig. cf. iv. 48. b. The expression he considers poetic 
 TOi» Thy SrifjLoy Kara\{>ov(riv. The presence of the article toij renders this 
 phraseology very questionable. G611. says-' thei/ accused only those who were 
 enemies of the eommms, but using th^t pretest they slew others also from pnvate 
 animosity;' thus resolving the participle into ' denjenigen, welche die I oik- 
 herrschaft sturzen wollen: It is not however quite clear that this a^ees with 
 the facts. Pop. seems to approve Bauer's version-' upon those who msM 
 to subvert the commons they brought their charge openly, but others/ &c. This 
 is open to the same objection, and makes 4ir4<t>€pov mean too much. Krug. 
 explains the whole (after Matt. § 268) as equivalent to aiVtc^Mevoi abrok 
 6,7f,KdKovv robs rhv Br.fioy Kara\{,oyTas, saying that toTs k.t.X. is in apposition to 
 an a{rro:s understood ; and he quotes kiroKrdvuu ^wu rohs tlv hrn^ov Kara\{>ovras, 
 viii 86 and several other passages to the same effect: e.g. Herod, vn. 177, 
 ra{rrv o^(/>i ?8o^ d^Kerrdai rhu im6ura ^irl r)^v 'EXAciSa. It would almost seem as 
 though ol KaraKiovr^s thv ^vfxov had become a sort of cant phrase, to denote a 
 defined class of persons, and was so used without changing the form of expre;^- 
 sion, when the ordinarv laws of syntax required it, so that the whole would 
 menu-' as for accusation, when they brought any at all, it was that they were 
 *^ Reactionists'' ; that they came under the category of at Kara\{>ovr€S rhv Stj/xov, 
 but many were slain whom they did not trouble themselves to accuse at all, from 
 pnvate animosity: But after all. when we reflect how easily to7s might have 
 been substituted for i>s, it is difficult to refrain from reading is Kara\vova^v 
 ^^j^ {,Tri, rS>v \a$6vra>v—&c. i^iredavov. Debtors were called 01 
 
 Xap6in-€s, because they had received the money ; and the money lent. Am. 
 points out, was called r^ AT,<^0eWa (Dem. cont. Timarch. 1 186). Traaa (Sea. 
 Cf. i. loi. Bauer quotes Tacitus, Hist. iii. 28 : ' omnis imago mortium. Goll. 
 makes ov^lvUiov equivalent to ira*/ and the antecedent to otov. Is it not 
 better to suppose a sort of irregularity in the words, and translate— ' a/jrf, fl.' 
 is wont to be the case in such a conjuncture, th^e was nothing that did not 
 happen, and even worse' (lit. and going beyond, sc. what does generally occur in 
 such conjunctures) ? ««! It. ^cpatr.'pu,-' and that m an 
 
 aggravated form: Cf. Juvenal, xiv. 53 ; Aris. TJies. 705. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIL-(fl.) oSt«j i/i^ ari.<ns. Dobree has conjectured 
 ^ (TTciffi?. The absence of the article, if we consider the Corcyrean sedition to 
 be meant, must iar upon most ears, and the final tj in i/i^ may well have 
 caused its omission. But it may perhaps be equivalent to our abstract use ot 
 the word— 'to mich cruel lengths did sedition proceed: Cf. Dem. de Cor.AA9' 
 § 387: tih A€'7€ i>s Ka\hv €l^w, vfhere Shilleto remarks: * Abstract words m 
 Greek admit or retain the article.' irpoirxciprjrrfi/— cf. ^4ya rpom, 
 
 '^ J3. a. ^ia<popS>v . . . iirdyeaeai. There is no satisfactory 
 
 authority for making the substantive Sia<l>opai signify U?iterest; hut it occurs 
 twenty-two times (Am.) in Thuc, signifying ' quarrel.' Nor is there any 
 reason why it may not in this sense as a verbal sul)stantive govern iirayf<roai. 
 It contains, says Kriig., 'die Idee eines Gegenatrebens,' i.e. it implies action 
 directed against an opponent, and so may rightly be followed by the infanitive. 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 351 
 
 as if i I verb had gone before. * There being quarrels, as the place and occasion 
 might be, on the part of the democracy to bring in the Athenians, and on th£ 
 mri w the oligarchs the Lacedemonians: ovk ttv ixivrot r— ' and 
 
 in time of peace thiy would have had tw pretext' — the participle is employed 
 »ith a sort of attraction to what goes before where we might have anticipated 
 the filial verb. On tiv with the participle see Jelf, § 429, whose principle is— 
 ' y is joined with the infinitive or participle when the construction changes to 
 them from the finite verb if it would have been used in the construction with 
 the finite verb.' Matthiae, it is well known (§ 598. b.), asserts that 'ai/ with 
 infinitives and participles gives to these moods the same signification that the 
 indicative or optative or conjunctive with hv would have in the resolution by 
 means of the finite verb.' To this view many scholars object. Mr. G. Kennedy 
 [Remarks upon Mr. MitcheUs Aristophanes, p. 29), after refusing his assent to 
 Matthias's doctrine, continues—' I lay it down as a principle that h.v in the best 
 Attic writers, when construed with the verb in conditional propositions, strictly 
 belongs in all cases to that clause which the logicians call the consequent: An 
 example will explain his meaning. Matthiae says, and rightly, that x<^P^^ ttJs 
 n-fpto-ToaTjs h.v alTxvvris = ^ ireptetrTTj &v ; but he goes on to say that in koI rh 
 vivu dKptjSes hv ^vyKpaOfv fiaKiar h.v iVxvet", the ttv ^vyKpadkv is equivalent to 
 (( ^vyKpadeirj. Now if his former resolution of the word with tv be right, the 
 latter, common sense shows, cannot be right also. I suppose therefore Mr. 
 K. would have classified this case among the repetitions of tiv explained by 
 Jelf, § 432. He also supports himself by Kiihner's authority, who, citing 
 (Edip. Tyr. 446, writes: ' Hier gehort das hv nicht zum Parti cip ; denn das 
 Particip auch ohne tiv driickt sehr haufig das Verhaltniss der Bedingung aus' 
 (• y in this place does not belong to the participle, for the participle of itself 
 without ttv quite sufficiently expresses the condition'). Applying the principle 
 here, we find the words equivalent to ci 5e cV elprjtni ?i<rav (antecedent), ovk tv 
 (Ixo^ (con sequent). 
 
 (6.) 6 T t/u o) v. Some editors have conjectured 4T6\fio)v, but the word is used 
 in its proper sense — ' ready : ' prepared,' as we employ it when we speak of 
 not 'being prepared to go so far,' and the like (cf. i. 28. e, 85. b, 135 c, 145). 
 ToK^liovfxivuv (cf. i. 7, irKmfiurepuv ovrwv) by a similar attraction to that 
 above noticed — ' when engaged in war: If we understand with Arn. the ex- 
 pression to be equivalent to vo\4fiou virdpxovros, then ^ififMxias agrees with 
 inrapxov<r-ns to be supplied from it. This, if permissible, is certainly more 
 simple than to make it the gen. after iiraycoyaly as Poppo does. Kriig. seems 
 to make ^ufifiaxias depend on KaKdxni and irpo(nrotii(T^i—'for the damage of 
 their adversaries as derivable from an alliance, and their own advantage arising 
 from the same source (dat. of object ; Kriig. cf. vi. 33. b), the means of intro- 
 ducing foreign aid were readily procured: Perhaps the word ^aSiws means 
 'lightly; i.e. 'recklessly.' Up6n the whole this seems to me the best inter- 
 pretation, but I had at one time thought of placing a longer stop at Tro\ep.ovfi4vwv 
 8f', understanding av ^xovres 'irp6<pa(nv, and then considering |u///iaxfas as the 
 ace. plural following iiropiComo — ' and alliances for both parties alike {to the 
 damage of their opponents, and their own profit to be obtained from the same 
 m,rce), their callings-in of foreign aid offered ready means of procuring to 
 persons c^irous of disturbing the existing state of things: ^ o A A v 
 
352 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIt»ES. 
 
 [Boob: II [. I Chap. 82.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 353 
 
 we may with Pop. supply r7-5/*-^^^^^ ,„, .^.^..^ .rf Aomin., et eade 
 
 ea.s4 ..e..>. ad senten^am apUus ^^^^^ ^^ ^J ,^ ^,,^,,,,„, 
 irp.V /tioi r{>xn To.a5 ^i^^cttt,. -fop. ira ^ av<£7Kas. Dionys. 
 
 ^W/y pm-^ the^sel^^s, co.ne upon «. ^^^J/ ..^^Lause they do 
 
 Hal. explains this by "f^^ ;- ^^^^ ^ temsls] ; .kereas J, /, 
 not fall into straits [without being ^^^^1 /lii^ie. o/" daily maintenance, is 
 
 "*^**r7/::::'.'c':;.'''^t::'i;t,ue..onea w.e^e. the. wo.. 
 
 f Ag m5U^ and the like ? Tr.— Z/io«« wno wer -^ ^ 
 
 iTnobbes), as in 1,0..^^^ T, r^lTeThX^X^ 
 
 Lw .0 «.A./ ^as reported of the previous o^res, earned o^a ^^ ^;-^;~ 
 ..i....; ..i.e we. thecause of ^y^^ ^^^^^ ^X::,, 
 
 imum of novelty m schem^B, &c. ^ ,^,7. Cf. iii. 43- - with 
 
 says Kriig as .n^ ..«». -P^^ J ^^^^^^^ ^^^^. . 
 
 T^^^^ion^:S^^ides us to the right meaning in boOi t^. ^ ^ 
 Len changed the ordinary ac.ptatu.n of words {... ^^.-';il\^^X^l 
 ZrAA in their reference to action, (a practice) hy the way m whv.h ^hei/Jhougn^ 
 ;:t^ ;:L at L. ; o. m their way of loo.iny at th.m men cA«...^^^^^^^ 
 cepted signification of words in respect of actions been censured 
 
 tI rhetorical and antithetical character of what ^^^^^^^ "j^;,^;^^^^^^ 
 by Bionys. Hal. I shall only notice such terms as ^ J^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^r 
 
 or usage! ^a.Va.po, has evident ^^^^^^^^ gained 
 
 political clubs, which, like those o modern ^^"«' ^;/^^";"^^^ 
 ^t political influence. Tr.-' reck ess during -^/^^^/^^^^ l^^,,^. 
 espJde corps: <r<i<Ppo^. Cf. with K-^^ Pl^^^;^/^^^* ^60 -, tP 
 
 ,Jc...r^.--^aunsecaution in ^^'^jf^^as^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 mho considered about e^^ything, as good for noting. We know 
 
 heaped upon ' moderates,' trimmers,' and the policy of ^^^^^ ^J^'. ^^^j,,,:^ 
 
 r5 '..MKTcs hVv-^ a furious sudder^ness was ^ep-ted a^^r^^^^ \ ^^,,,, 
 
 Hobbes. l^^Ki^Kr.. (Sch. ^--So,.) and its cognate -;"?;/ ,^ 
 
 visitation of frenzy. Cf. the English phrase, ' .m.«e. w.th madness. 
 
 ^oipa, though rather unusual, is supported by such phrases as ^oTp' 'A<f)po5tVas 
 (jEsch. Su^. 1024), and iv vH-m y^P MO*p airpSffKoiros Pporwv{Eum. 105, where 
 translate, Uhe condition of manhood'), and may therefore be rendered here, 
 
 manhood, manliness. 
 
 {d.) a<r<pd\€ia Se rh ^irt/SouAetJcoo-eoi k.t.X. Arn. and Poppo 00-4)0- 
 \(lq. They adopt this reading from the Scholiast's explanation, 81* a(r<pa\€iav, 
 and accordingly take the dative case adverbially—' safely to concert 7neasures 
 against an enemy was accounted but a decent pretence for declining the contest 
 with him altogether' (cf. iii. 56, rh ^ifitpopa kff<pa\€la npdcffoPTfs). The objec- 
 tion to this is, that the use of aTrorpoTr^ in this sense is not supported by 
 examples. Lidd. and Scott give as a special meaning for the passage slightly 
 otherwise: ' airorpoiri, . . . ii. desertion of one's party, ratting.' In a very 
 long and elaborate note Mr. Grote supports the active meaning of airorpoTrii 
 (which no one would dispute), and reads iL<r<pdKela U rh iTn^ovK^vffaffeai, airorpo- 
 injs ■Kp6<f)a<ris eii\oyos—' secret conspiracy against an enemy was held to be safe 
 precaution, a specious pretence of preventing him from doing the like; thus 
 making the three last words a sort of epexegesis to a(r</)a\€ia. This does not 
 look like the antithetical writing in the rest of the chapter. Goll. has a notion 
 that tJ) iiriPov\€i(Ta(reai is *quod attinet ad iteratam deliberationem*—' hin und 
 her iiberlegen ' (i.e. ' to consider a thing over, first on one side and then on th£ 
 other'), and airorpoir}, he also interprets ' detrectatio: His meaning there- 
 fore is—' security which consists in careful consideration was held to 6e a 
 specious pretence for shirking.' Without denying the possibility of this being 
 the meaning of rb iirifiovK^iffaaeai, one familiar with the use of the word in 
 Thueydides will regard it as improbable. Poppo observes that there is no 
 satisfactory authority for such an accusative as rh iTrifiovXcia-offdai after a 
 noun, as b.(r<pdK€ia, and that it would in this case have been rod iin$. I am not 
 certain that such a construction as a<T<pd\€ia {Karb.) i'jrL$ov\e{>(raaeaL—' caution 
 in respect of taking second thought about the matter'— woyAd be impossible, could 
 we assign this force to iw\ in connection with ^ovK^^ofiai. Similar usages can 
 easily be produced, but does iinfiov\^6ofiai in Thueydides ever mean anything 
 except 'to form designs against a person' ? Kriig. seems to think so, for he 
 gives, ' mit Vorsicht iiber einen Gegenstand sich bedenken,'—' to reflect with care- 
 ful forecast upon a subject: , rr.. 7 /•» 
 {e.) 6 X « ^ « "^ « ^ " « "— * ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ vehement man. Pop. has, Hitzkopjy 
 hot-headed. Understand an ' impiger, iracundus, inexorabilis, acer.' ^ ^ 
 rvx(i3V—'if he succeeded' (cf. Koi rvx^vres ^eV, iii. 39). avrwp 
 -to be explained from the general sense of the preceding words. 
 iraipias ^ia\vrhs—'a breaker-up of political fellowship' -we should say, 
 Uhreaker^p of his party: U't^.^K-nyt^ivos-^ ccmed by (lit. 
 dismayed at) his opponents: intKeK.iaas-^ he who has worked upon, 
 or. egged on, the man who had no idea of joining in the strife' (or supply kokSv 
 T, 8p5^N rh ^vyy€vhs—' relationship came to be a less intimate 
 hond of union than party, because the latter was more ready for unhesitating 
 danng ' i,,rpo<l>a(ri(rrcos expresses the recklessness of partisanship 
 which in times of political excitement hesitates at nothing to serve its party. 
 See viii. 48 on this subject. 06 yap ^er^ r«^ K.^/ic'vcv .<J/xa,v 
 -'for it is not for the sake of any advantage which could coexist with the present 
 
 i I 
 
 A A 
 
354 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I Chap. 82.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 355 
 
 laws that such associations are formed, hut ^rather against established law 
 from a spirit of grasping ambition (or, as Peile tr.—for such corahinatims do 
 not go so far only as legitimate advantage goes).' kuI ras — * 7nutud 
 
 faith was kept, pledges derived their power not from any consideration of the 
 laws of God, but from a common participation in crime.' rd re ath 
 
 rup ivavrlcov k.t.X. — 'and the fair proposals of their adversaries men listened 
 to with a careful watching of their actions, if they were the stronger party, and 
 not mth frankness and simplicity:— Km. Pop. also refers €t irfioUxoiev to tovj 
 ivavriovs, and certainly this seems most natural. Others, however, as Dobree, 
 refer them to tous ^i'5«xom«»'<»'5, comparing ?p7V <pv\a(T(rofifvri (vi. 40) with 
 l[pya>v <pv\ouc-p—' precaution shown in action.' Peile tr. — ' and fair proposah on 
 the part of their adversaries men received with a watchful eye to their actions [to 
 see] whether they [the adversaries] were the stronger party, and not with 
 gcTierosity,' or, as Hobbes says, ' ingenuously.' On air($, ♦ coming from,' cf. supra, 
 
 xxxvi. 
 
 (/.) Ka\ ZpKoi K.T.K — ' and oaths, if ever 'perchance oaths were contracted, 
 being proffered merdy to raeet a difficulty far the moment by either one side or 
 the other, held good while the parties had no resource from any other quarter! 
 I really do not see why Am. and Poppo should insist that Zih6iievoi cannot 
 have its proper meaning here, but must be understood as * oaths taken.' One 
 party finding itself in difficulty was ready enough to proffer oaths of friendship 
 or fidelity, but when, like the Mytilenseans, it saw a chance of foreign aid 
 (&\Ao0€v hivafjiiv), it then {iv ry iraparvx^vri) revenged itself with 
 more pleasure (i) 5 1 o v ^Ti^wpctro) than if the whole transaction had been 
 open and undisguised (^ hirh rod irpo0ovoCs). 6 <pddaas dapcrriffai 
 
 — * the first to acquire confidence in himself (i. e. his own power), 
 fkippaKTov is not, as Dionys. Hal. would have it, equivalent to a<pv\axrov -, the 
 latter is unguarded, off his guard; the former, * without Tneans of defence! 
 r^v Tciffriv is, 'the confidence' supposed to exist between the parties, and which 
 it was considered a very clever thing to have maintained while meditating 
 treachery. iKoyiC^ro k.t.A. — ' and both the security obtained was 
 
 put down to the account as profit [lucro apponebatur], and also the fact that by 
 having surpassed the adversary in stratagem they had won a prize for superior 
 ability as well' {irp6s, cf. i. 22). There were thus two items in the account of 
 their success : (i) The security with which it was effected; (2) The acquisi- 
 tion of a second advantage — sc. a reputation for superior acuteness. 
 P^ov . . . KfK\rivrai~-' men in general, when dishonest, nwre easily gain 
 credit for ability than, when simple, they gain credit for honesty.' — Am. ; and 
 Kriig. couples ovrts with KfKXrivrai — ' called to be,' and says : ' Die participial- 
 Constmction findet sich oft noch auffallender,' and proceeds to quote several 
 instances, none of which contain anything like K€K\rifxai, in which word the 
 whole strangeness of the phrase consists. Indeed, this explanation is said 
 (Engelmann's tr.) only to be calculated for those who understand nothing about 
 Greek. Yet is there no alternative between this and Arnold's 'gain credit for . 
 We may perhaps translate—' though being knaves all the time, are more pleased^ 
 to be called diver (or clever though knaves) than good-natured simpletons. 
 P^ov KiK\t]vrai = ' lubentius audiunt' in this method of constming, and ovns- 
 ' being all the time (or therewUh).' So Jacobi (quoted by Goll.)— ' die meistcn 
 
 Menschen wollten lieber fur bose und klug, als fur einfdltig und rechtschaffen 
 gelten.' Goll. has — 'facilius did patiuntur callidos dum improbi sunt, quam 
 simplices dum probi.* Kriig. well supports this meaning of p^ov by Xen. Symp. 
 iv. 14: 'kovoIt]v h.v paov iKiiv(p ^ avairavoifi'qv. Compare on KeKXrjvrai, Butt- 
 Diann, Gr. Gr. § 113, not. 12 ; and Thuc. ii. 37, v. 9. o-PX^ V 
 
 ilk K.T.A. — 'power sought through rapacity and ambition' (i.e. rapacious and 
 ambitious means ; ' or perhaps 5ia with accusative more rightly expresses the 
 THotive — 'power which is sought at the instigation of ambition'). iK 
 
 5' avTuv — ' and arising out of (^k =the material cause) these (sc. TrXeove^iav koI 
 (piKoTifilav), also, the spirit of party zeal came upon men once embarked in rivalry 
 and contention.' He means the spirit excited by party as such, independently 
 of the motives inducing men to enter into it ; a spirit which exists among those 
 who are either ignorant of, or have forgotten, the principles for which they 
 professedly contend. Arnold cites the case of the Circus factions in Constanti- 
 nople, and the Shanavests and Caravats in Ireland. An amusing illustration 
 may be found in the ' English' and * French' factions in the island of Corsica, 
 on which see Un Hiver en Corse, par M. C. Reynaud {Rev. des Deux Mondes). 
 "Washington Irving's account of 'Long Pipes and Short Pipes' is referred to by 
 Goll., who quotes : ' Not that the original cause of difference still existed, but 
 it has ever been the fate of party names and party rancour to remain long after 
 the principles which gave rise to them have been forgotten.' Bloomf., supply- 
 ing ^v and rS)v, seems to be quite misled as to the meaning. 
 
 {g.) fi€T ovSixaros k.t.A. — ^ either party with its own specious name' (cf. 
 'honestis nominibus,' Sail. Cat. 38). i<Tovopi.ia5 tr oXitik^s Am. 
 
 rightly explains to mean, * that equ^allaw which justly deserves to be called poll' 
 tied society ;' -koXvtik)) implying the relation of citizen to citizen, as opposed to 
 SeffiroT^^ and rvpavviK'f}. The phrase recalls the French revolutionary formula, 
 'Liberte, Egalite, Fraternity.' apiffroKparias ffditppovos 
 
 — ' attaching higher valu£ to the moderation of an aristocrajcy: 
 rh fihv KOLvh — ^professedly devoting themselves to serve the public interest, 
 in reality they made it the prize of the contest.' iirc^T^fffdu re 
 
 (sc. T^ ^eivdraTo) — * they formed the most audacious schemes, and put 
 them into execution too.' This is the punctuation of Am. and Pop., who 
 object to Bekker's punctuation after fid^ovs, because they are not satisfied 
 that iirt^^cffav rifxiapias can be, * they prosecuted thdr revenge,' like pcenas 
 persequi in Latin ; at least they say, ' desiderantur exempla.' Peile compares 
 k^|^ovs arparfias ovk 4^-^effav, i. 16 ; and ivOvfieiTai yap ouSeis dfiola Kal ^pycp 
 ixflfpxfrai. Matthise (§ 409. 4. a) explains, * they went out after (i.e. in the 
 way of, or in the prosecution of) their vengeance to still greater lengths.' Liddell 
 and Scott translate in the same y/ay—' carry out greater vengeance.' Upon the 
 whole I prefer to place the stop at p.^l^ovs, for itr^^i^fffdv re by itself would I 
 think be harsh, or at least not after the manner of Thucydides ; and with the 
 other interpretation we are compelled to make ir6\pi-r]aav ra d€iv6TaTa = ' formed 
 most daring projects,' a sense which the words do not contain. Tr. — * th^y both 
 dared deeds of the most terrible character, and prosecuted their vengeance (lit. 
 y^ent out upon their revenges) to a greater degree' (sc. than ever heretofore). 
 Or /uet'Covs may have reference to ra. hnvSrara, and be a natural hyperbole — 
 ' to still more extravagant lengths ' (i. e. their violence in all matters was terrible, 
 
 AA2 
 
 / 
 
35^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 84.] 
 
 NOTES ON THTTCTDIDES. 
 
 357 
 
 but most terrible of all in their vengeance). So I see Donaldson has punctuated 
 in his latest text. In that case, reading Trpo<rrie4yrfs, from Dionysius and a 
 few MSS., translate — * inflicting them not so that they should be limited by 
 justice and the interests of the State (lit. making them coincident, or coextensive 
 with Justice, cf. ii. 96), but determining them by what at any time or place (aei, 
 -Kov) caused pleasure to one party or other, whichever it might be' Peile thinks 
 that vponeivres may be retained, because Herodotus (i. 32) uses it as nearly 
 equivalent to bpiCovr€s—h mofiilKovra frea olpov ttjj ^6-i]S avdpwTttfi irpoTl%t. 
 But surely here the introduction of the word olpov makes all the difference. If 
 irporieevrcs can mean anything, I apprehend it must be setting forth— holding 
 out, as it were, in terrorem. But I have little doubt about the propriety of 
 reading irpo£rTi0€VT€s. ti^rk y\ii]<pov . . . ^ x^'P^- Compare the 
 
 same variation in phraseology above— /x«Ta rSiv Keifievwv vdfiwv w<p€\ias . . . 
 i>Act irXfovf^ia, and in ii. 39— H'^M*? . . . koI fx^ fitrk v6ficov avdpdas. Peile 
 translates—' and either by help of an unjust vote of condemnation, or by that of 
 the strong arm in endeavouring to gain the ascendency, were they ready to gratify 
 their present eagerness of contention: (pi\oyeiKiav is the contentious 
 
 rivalry of men engaged in the struggles of party or ambition. 
 ^ic» i/AirXavat— ' satiate to the full'— feed fat the ancient grudge. 
 €u<r6j8tta . . . iv6fxi(ov. Am. and others make vo/xlCu, govern the dative 
 both here and in ii. 38. See also i. 77. d. Kriig. somewhat freely translates 
 — •• religious feeling was at a discount; a clever colouring put upon hateful actions 
 was held in better esteem.' I had always considered that it would be more 
 correct to supply an infinitive, as for instance Ziairpd^affdai. Thus, too, Peile, 
 and the old translation of Portus— ' itaque neutri quicquam transigere con- 
 sueverant, habitd ratione religionis'—' so that neither side made account to havt 
 anything done (or thought do do anything) the sooner by the religion ofwn oath! 
 im<pe6vw5 is obviously opposed to fvat^iit^, and may be rendered with Arn.— 
 ' to effect anything in an odious and guilty manner ;' or it is possible that it 
 may mean—' in a manner so as to bring envy upon them.' ra fifffa 
 
 ruv •noKiTwv — 'those citizens who joined neither party,' Am. Pop. says the 
 Latins call such citizens 'medii.' See ol Ztk fi4<T0Vy viii. 75. 
 '^ ipdSvcfi — 'or grudging that they should come safely out of it.' Kriig. quotes 
 Ear. Iph. i« T. 352 : 
 
 ol Svffrvxf^s yhp rotaiv thrvx^f^rtpois 
 airroX koXus irpa^avrts ov <ppovov<Tiv cS. 
 
 Chapter LXXXm.— (a.) iroo-o Uea—* every conceivable form.' Cf. supra, 
 i. 109. KUKorpoTrias — ' evil ways (or courses).' '''*' 
 
 rh fH-n^fs ic.T.\. 'EitheT^' mmplidty, of which nobility of nature makes a 
 very large portion ;' or— ' simplicity, of which a noble nature partakes most 
 largely, was laughed down and altogether banished from tite sight of men, whilf 
 a state of mutual antagonism and distrustful preparation very widely prevailed, 
 rh ytvva'ioy. Kriig. cf. rh fw7e»'«, Eur. Hipp. 1390, and Soph. (Edip. Tt/r 
 1042. rh oKTiTCTiixfiat— note the past tense—' to have been put 
 
 in a state of guard against one another.' 6 5ia\t;<r«v— ' the on( 
 
 who is to reconcile.' Cf. ^Esch. Prom. Vine. 27, & Aa«^<r«v 7^^ ov Tr4<pvK4 ira. 
 Kp(i<r<rovs 5c ovrts. The SchoL explains Kp^[<x(Tovs = pinovns—' more in- 
 
 clined.' This certainly is very strange, and questionable. But in spite of Arn.'s 
 positive assertion that these words cannot be translated without violating the 
 genius of the Greek language, neither sense nor construction is violated in 
 referring Kptlaaovs to the words immediately preceding — 'for there was neither 
 profession so valid, nor oath so awful, as could bring men to terms^ but being 
 universally, upon a settled calculation which tended to despair, above all security 
 (i.e. inclined to look down upon security as only satisfoctory to simpletons), 
 they rather looked out to avoid the possibility of accident, than felt themselves 
 enabled to indulge confidence.' There is perhaps a subaudition of irony — ' men 
 were superior to the influence of promises and oaths ; and the more they re- 
 flected, the more they were inclined to accept no security against injury, except 
 what was a positive immunity from it;' such, for instance, as would be effected 
 by destroying the source of apprehension. 4s rh aveXirKTrov — 
 
 ' reflection put them so far beyond the influence of these things as to induce them 
 to despair,' because they saw them so universally violated. This (connecting 
 Kpeiffffovs with AoyitTjuy ) seems to have been in the main the meaning of Dobree, 
 but he is unfortunate in his translation of Kpflaaovs — ' steeled against.' En- 
 gelmann's translation has the ingenious Tendermg—' sicherer filhlten durch 
 kalte Birechtiung'—'felt themselves more secure in cold calculation (sc. than in 
 oath or promise), likewise taking Kpelcraovs \oyiffix^ in close connection, and 
 
 supplying ^ xSycp ^ opKw. 
 
 (b.) ol <pav\6r€poi yvwfirjv—' thoseintellectuaUy inferior' (cf. iii. 37>c.): 
 such is necessarily the course of most revolutions. Arnold compares the over- 
 throw of the Girondists by the Jacobins, and the Presbyterians by the Inde- 
 pendents. Modern experience might, perhaps, add to the list. 
 7(p y^ 5e5t cVat K.r.\.—' for, from apprehensio^n about their own deficiency 
 aiui the ability of their opponents, lest they should be worsted by them in words, 
 and be anticipated in some plot by the versatility of their intellectual powers, they 
 went at once boldly to work; while the other party, thinking with a proud con- 
 tempt that they would be sure to be aware of anything beforehand, and that 
 there was no need for them to take by force what they could compass by policy, 
 being left without defence (or, off their guard), were the more easily destroyed.' 
 kIlv irpoai<Te4<reai Peile well translates—' that they will even be aware,' and 
 compares fj kUv $ia irpoaaxQrivai, inf. xclv. ; i. 20 ; and iv. 73, vvv 8e kIxv 
 Tvxfiv aureus 'Mtivaiovs /at? ^ovK-ndevras ayuvlC^ffOai. The word TroXvrpoirov 
 contains a shade of meaning ' in malam partem,' implying knavery. See the 
 Hymn to Mercury, 13, 439, and iroXvrpotria in Herod, ii. 121. This is post- 
 Homeric, for TtoXvrpoirov in the Odyssey can scarcely connote anything evil. 
 See i. I. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIV.— The genuineness of this chapter, it is notorious, is 
 generally denied. Arn., who in his first edition wrote an appendix in its 
 favour, retracts his previous opinion in the second, deferring to the judgment 
 of the Constantinopolitan Scholiasts. Poppo inclines to the same side, and 
 prints the chapter within brackets. Goll. feels no doubt at all, and urges all 
 sorts of objections reasonable and unreasonable against everything in the text. 
 Bloomfiekf, on the other part, seems disposed to accept the chapter nearly as it 
 
 IH 
 
3S8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 84.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 359 
 
 stands. The arguments against it may be divided into external and internal. 
 
 The external are : 
 
 (i) The Scholiast of the Augsburg MS. (F) expressly declares rk <i,$€\itrfi^va 
 omvl rwv i^nrn-^wv iloif (dovKvmov fhai. We may add that Am. 
 attaches great value to the judgment of these Scholiasts in critical 
 matters, and contends, reasonably enough, that there were no personal 
 or party grounds to influence their decision in a question of this sort. 
 (2) Dion. Hal., after quoting at length and commenting upon Ixxxii. and 
 Ixxxiii., takes no notice of Ixxxiv., and as his main object seems to have 
 been to find fault, had this chapter existed in his copy, he would 
 scarcely have omitted so favourable an opportunity for criticism. 
 
 The internal reasons as given by Arnold (it is hopeless to enter upon 
 GoUer's) are : 
 
 (i) There is nothing to which avrStv can properly be referred. [But ra tfnea 
 in the preceding chapter is not so very far removed, and there are 
 many cases where the pronoun is used without any immediate antp- 
 cedent— see ^irl irXiov ri avrwv ^S^o-eF, xlv. ; irpoPovXfvffas Uus 
 ^nScv avrwv Sc^trci, Ixxxiii.; and irdvrwy avrwv aXrioy apxh - - - 
 iK 5' auTw»' Kol is rh <piKov€iK€7v, ib. It will be remembered that a 
 similar difficulty has been felt about connecting avpopdoy avra7s with 
 r4x^^ KaKX<^vros, a few lines preceding it (Agam. 243), and that Wel- 
 lauer retains the words.] 
 
 (2) If the sentiment be general, the tense of ^pdtrftuv seems wrong. [This 
 
 I cannot understand, for what tense so proper as the indefinite or 
 aorist, to express an indefinite or general fact?] 
 
 (3) 5p<£<r€tai/ does not agree with yiyvuffKoity. [Yet how often does 
 
 Am. himself point out occasions where the aorist is coupled with other 
 
 U)iLpx6tifvoi uirJ> rS>v %apa(rx<iy'rQ>v ought to be ipx^eWe? inrh rav 
 Trapixivroiv. [This is true, but somewhat hypercritical ; apx^fi^voi I 
 take, as in cases already noticed, for * those in a state of suhjeciion' 
 ' subjects' just as v riKrovffa is the mother. It is the common case of 
 the part, present and article, losing the connotation of time, and 
 becoming equivalent to a noun. Cf. tovs (peiyovras—' the exiles,' i. 24- 
 d.; iLpx6nfvoi = inr{iKooi, ciii.; and instances in iv. b. Krug. tr. 
 ira^a<rx<J»'TWi' nnopiav—' welche die Bache provocirt hatten,' of which 
 he may well say, ' beispiellos ist der Ausdruck.'] 
 
 (5) rdQovs is used in a sense perfectly unlike its meaning everywhere else 
 
 in Thucydides. [Certainly it is if we persist in translating it 'passion- 
 ately '(Am.) or ' leidenschaftlich' (Poi,.); but why may it not mean 
 « in a state of suffering ' ?— sc. that superinduced by poverty.] 
 
 (6) airaiSe uo-f (J is open to a similar objection. [Scarcely so if the 
 
 remarks made xlii. b. are correct. An undisciplined and coarse mind 
 is necessarily brutal in the development of its passions. Besides, we 
 have (asBloomfield points out) in Enrlip. Archd., ^6\K' icrrlv opyrii 
 i^ 6.-waiB€{rrov KaKd (Stob. Serm. xx. 12, ed. Meineke), and various imi- 
 tations in Josephus. See Liddell and Scott in voce.] 
 
 f';)iv ^ fih is used for u fiii, which ought not to be. [ip ^ H-V is in itself 
 a perfectly intelligible expression, and not contrary to analogy (cf. viii. 
 86 4u v), neither need we consider it as put for anything but itself. 
 ^/^ fih seems more definite and precise than u ixi,, just &s Hn a case 
 where such a thing does not exist; is clearer than 'unless it exists.'] 
 On the argument from external evidence they alone can decide who have 
 carefully studied the Greek Scholiasts and judiciously estimated their worth. 
 • But the sentence which they pronounce is surely one upon which modem 
 scholars aided by a far more exact and elaborate study of the text, are quali- 
 fied to pass an opinion: aaa<t>ii 7^ (says one Scholiast) koI ry tvtt,, ttjj 
 hunv^las Ka\ ro7s 5iapoi),Jia<Ti iroKhp ifitpaivovra t)>v peun^pi<rfi6y. ^ow, these 
 charges are not, at least to the best of my judgment, conclusively made out. 
 At any rat., criticism of a similar character, if applied to other portions of our 
 author's writings with the same rigour, might shake our faith in more than one 
 generally accepted passage.' It is not clear that an ordinary English commen- 
 tator would b^ more competent to pronounce upon the genuineness of a passage 
 in Shakspeare, though a fellow-countryman, than some of the German critics 
 who have trai^lated Shakspeare, and studied him as a classic. I confess 
 therefore that Arn.'s * argumentum ad verecundiam ' does not in my estimation 
 altogether decide the question. Besides, Am. forgets that it proves too much, 
 for on the same grounds we ought to reject book viii., which these same Scho- 
 liasts repudiate. Perhaps we may render the whole somewhat in this way-' It 
 was to return (bh\ in Corcyra then that the greater part of these audacious deeds 
 wm first essayed, -as wdlj mean, all such as men, ruled with insolence rather 
 thin moderation by the persons who have now afforded them an opportunity for 
 miqeance, inxiy he conceived of as doing whm retaliating thdr wrongs (or when 
 th^ have become t)^ retaliating party)-as those, which men, m their eaga-ness 
 to get rid of their habitual poverty, and particularly in their strong desire 
 Me under the suffering it entails, to make themselves masters of their neigh- 
 bour's property, world contrary to all justice decree [e.g. the confiscations of 
 the Athenian dicasts] ; and such things again as those who are assailants, not 
 from covetousness so much as upon terms of equality, have been found savagely 
 and relentlessly tofolhw out, because transported beyond bounds by the brutality 
 of an undisciplined temper. And when at times like these the social life of the 
 state was disorganised, and human nature had got the upper hand of the laws 
 wont as it is to go wrong even despite of existing laws, it showed with a sort of 
 exultation that it is without mastery of its passions, superior to all considerations 
 ofriqht [cf. Ixxxiii. ad init.], and hostile to everything above it; for men would 
 not have set vengeance above piety, nor profit before justice in a case where envy 
 did not exert a pernicious power [i.e had it not been for the pernicious influence 
 of envy, piety and justice would have not succumbed to avance and revenge]. 
 And men, in prosecuting revenge against others, think proper rather to abrogate 
 beforehand than [koX ^^, lit. and not ; cf. Latin, et non] uphold for themselves 
 [shoiUd one perchance in the day of danger require the aid of any of them) those 
 common laws of humanity about such matters, from the operation of whwhall 
 people have in store a hope that they too, should they meet with reverses, wM have 
 a chance of preservation.' ' Three principal causes are given, says Arn. 'of 
 the crimes committed in civil disturbances: (i) The desire of vengeance for 
 
360 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I Chap. 88.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 361 
 
 
 I 
 
 oppression and insolence in the ruling party, (a) The thirst for plunder 
 which urges the needy to covet the property of the rich. (3) The mere 
 bitterness of party spirit which men contract by being habitually opposed to 
 
 one another.' 
 
 (a) dpd<r,iay. 'Haeremus in optativo.' Pop. The version given cut 
 above seems to agree with the general notion of the mood as used to express 
 ^possible conception, &.. See Jelf, § 4", § 4i8. a. So Rost : ' Der Optativ an 
 und fiir sich ohne &v, die Vorstellung als freien Akt des Geistes und ausseraller 
 Beziehung zu dem Gebiete des Wirklichen hinstellt'-' The optative simpiy and 
 per se sets forth the conception as the pure act of the mind, independert of all 
 relation to the sphere of reality.' From an examination of the irstances 
 collected by grammarians, the naked optative would seem to express a notion 
 or concevtim about an act, i.e. what we are to conceive persons as doiig. rather 
 than the direct statement of what they do. See ^sch. Agam. 10^9 (I>ind.), 
 -K^iQoC &v, €l TTiieoC' arrudoiris 5' •((rw$—* you will have done well by obeying [the 
 mild imperative], if one can imagine you obeying, but in all probability you 
 would disobey ', ibid. 1394; Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 936. a<rxd?^o.s P 'i<r.s-^ one 
 may conjecture you will probably be annoyed;' Elect. 800, oih i^ov Karo^.m 
 wpdliias—'your acting so could not be conceived as worthy either yfme, or, &c.; 
 ibid &</)* ^v ixo^fxi—' frrnn, the small stores you may conceive me to have pos- 
 sessed ' Similarly may be explained iEsch. Sup. 727 ; Eurip. }ph. A. 418, &c. 
 (b ) Koi Kpariiffatra. This variation after a genitive absolute is not un- 
 common, and quite in accordance with the practice of Gretk writers. See 
 
 Botes on i. 61. and Matthise, § 578. b. . , „ • . r .1. • 
 
 (c) fiv viroXfiir^ffdai. Translated above as middle roice— '/or their 
 own future benefit: ' Non relinquere illas leges, de quo transitivo hujus medu 
 nsu cf. Ell. ad Arr. v. ao. 2, et supra i. 140.'— Poppo. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV.— (a.) ra7s irpdnais—' the earliesi ones: upon the 
 supposition that others followed. GolL, who denies the genuineness of the 
 last chapter so emphatically, interprets the words rals irpcirais t«v 'EAAVo,.. 
 But there is an evident reference to the cruelties recorded iv. 46. 
 5t€trw07?(ra»'— ' in small boats to the mainland: See bcoi. ^ rris 
 
 ■K4pav oiK€ias yrjs— 'their own territory on the mair.land opposite; Am. 
 Blooraf. shows that several islands, such as Lesbos, Simos, Chios, Ehodes, 
 and Thasos, possessed similar strips of land on the opposite continent. 
 
 (6 ) i\-h"^Cov- This is the reading of the best MSS., though the middle 
 voice is more usual, and one or two exhibit iKinKovro, which Bekker and Am. 
 adopt Poppo, on the authority of iv. 41, ^^"hKov t^p Aa/c«^i«iljv, and some 
 analogous cases (cf. i. 1 3), supports iK^xCou. i^pd<ra.ro. Note the 
 
 imperfect tense—' was in process of heiiig effected: &\\o r i—the 
 
 usual ellipse of irpa^ai or something similar (cf. iii. 39)- ' ^odem modo Latini, 
 quid aliud, quam?'-Duker. Translate-' /Aa^ they may be reduced to de- 
 spair of beiJig able to effect anything else than obtaining mastery of the 
 l^^^^ 6po5 rijy 'l(rrd,vnv. The idiom is similar to 'urbs 
 
 Roma,' ' flumen Rhodanus,' and the like. There seems to be some doubt about 
 the locality, which is again mentioned iv. 46. See Bloomfield's note. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVL— (a.) oh /x^Vtoi ^vpeiro\4tiv(rav. Am. remarks 
 that from this it is clear that the Sicilians had not as yet obeyed the order of 
 the Lacedaemonians (ii. 7) to contribute a quota of ships. X a A k » 5 1 k o f . 
 
 Seevi 3, 75, 82. Karh rb ^vyyepis. Both were colonies 
 
 fromChdcis'. Cf. vi. 44, with vi. 3. Pop. T€>i|.avT€s. This 
 
 was the embassy at the head of which was the famous sophist Gorgias (Thirl- 
 waU, iii. 22, 232). It is singular that Thucydides does not mention his visit. 
 See Plat. Hipp. Maj. 282 b ; Diod. xii. 53 ; Pans. vi. 17- 5- H^ says ' the 
 aUies of the Leontines ' rather than ' the Leontines and their aUies,' because 
 the argument of an old alliance, already subsisting, could only, so far as we 
 know, 'be used by the Rhegians, and not by the Leontines themselves. A 
 fragnient of a treaty of alliance between Athens and Rhegium exists in one of 
 the Elgin marbles, and may be seen in Bockh, Corp. Inscript. i. 74. Kriig., 
 however, interprets—' the Leontine League,' including the Leontines, and so 
 
 does Bloomf. 
 
 {h.) fiov\6fi€voi S6 fiitre. He commences as though about to^ write 
 jp67C€ipdu T€ iroiuadai, and proceeds as if he had written rh 5h aX7)0« oiJre 
 &ov\6fi€yoi. Pop. .KaraardvTiS—'when they had established 
 
 themselves in Bhcgium' (i. 49). 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIL— (a.) rb Travrdiraaiv. A singular instance of the 
 article with this adverb, says Poppo, who yet supports it by tI irapdirav k.t.A. 
 Kriig. wishes for another example. Sm/ccx^-' « ^^^^^ ^^'P'''- 
 
 iion (or holding back) of arms: See avcucccx-fi, i. 40. ^'^ 'r"»' rd^etcv 
 
 He means those whose names were contained iv ry KaTaK6y<f>—the hst of 
 persons liable to serve as hoplites (vii. 43, vi. 20). They belonged to the 
 zeugitae, the epibatae came from the thetes. 
 
 (6) &(rT€ 'Advpalu^y ye. The MSS. greatly fluctuate between the 
 genitive and accusative ; with the genitive translate-' so that of the Atliemans 
 at am rate [whatever may have been the case with others] there was nothing 
 that more damaged the power: But with 'Adr,palovs translate-' the Athenians 
 in respect of their power: Some MSS. have roirov after f^aWoy, which is most 
 
 probably a gloss. 
 
 (c.) ol TToWol T6r€ (T€iafioi. Bloomf. considered the article as intole- 
 rable. Its meaning is however easy to understand-' the numerous earthquakes 
 of that day (i.e. of that period, which was famous for its earthquakes). Arnold 
 compares such expressions as-' this was the period of the famous great frost 
 (i.e. the year 1746). So we have ra iroW^ Trvevfiar' eVx' cV AuAi'St, Soph. 
 Elect. 564—' the well-known succession of storms which detained the Greeks at 
 Aulis: TV BotwTiy— to distinguish it from that in Arcadia. 
 
 'The Boeotian town is twice masculine in Thucydides, here andiv. 76; once 
 feminine, i. 113. The Arcadian is masculine, v. 61.'— lingelmanu's tr. 
 
 Chapter LXXXYUl.—KvtSlwv &ir oikoi. ' Sic et Strabo, Pausanias 
 atque alii. Adeundus est de his Cluverius, Sicil. Antiq. ii. 14. 395-'— 
 Duker. ^Tpoyy<)\t\v contains the germ of the modern name 
 
 Stromboli. 2tKe\«v Ka\ ^effffnviwv yvv. 'Messenii enim non 
 
362 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. Icsap. QL] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 363 
 
 erat pars Slculomm sed ^iKiXtonZv, Siculi enim barbari erant, non tothis 
 Sicilije, sed partis septentrionalis et mediterraneae incolae. Vide vi. 2, iii. 
 115.' — Poppo. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIX.— («.) "hyi^os rot 'Apx'5<£/iou. Archidamus, who 
 was last mentioned in the first chapter of this book, died (according to Clinton) 
 about the year 427 B.C. Cleomenes is mentioned in xxvi. as leader of the 
 Lacedaemonian army, in the capacity of guardian to Pausanias, from which 
 Kriig. {Hist. Stud. p. 151) conjectures that Archidamus was sick, not dead at 
 the time, otherwise the army would as now have been entrusted to Agis. 
 dir6Tp(£irovTO iretXiJ'. Cf. vi. 95. 
 
 (6.) rwv ffiiffiJiuv Kan x^vTtDV— 'when the earthquakes prevailed: For 
 Karc'xei see i. 10; iifiaxov, i. 23. Am. rightly places a comma after Kar^x^v- 
 Tw, because the earthquakes were not confined to Eubcea. They were re- 
 garded as an evil omen, and induced the Lacedsemonians to appoint fresh 
 generals (viii. 6), and to send out a smaUer fleet (viii. 11). The same phe- 
 nomena also disturbed the Athenians and Corinthians (iv. 45-50 ; vi. 95). Pop. 
 (c.) ^iroi'6A0oi5(ra— lit. ' gmng back, like an animal that rears! So Poppo, 
 after Haacke's conjecture, approved though not inserted in the text by Arnold. 
 The word is indeed employed by the Scholiast on the passage, which seems to 
 imply that he found it in his "copy. But <£ir€\0oD(ra may very possibly have 
 been the original word, when its corruption would be accounted for by the 
 neighbouring iirnXQ^. The MSS. have ^iriKQovtra, which is not intelligible, 
 particularly in connection with ^ir^A0€. Bloomf. ii^KQoZffa, which is not 80 
 good. Translate—' having recoiled from what was then the coast came up again 
 in rolling waves, and overspread a considerable portion of the town; and in part 
 itfiyrmed an inundation there, but partly also it receded, so that what once was 
 land is now sea.' The last words are, I conceive, a correct tr. of the Greek, 
 and show that it is unnecessary to read, as Pop. and Kriig. would have us do, 
 i<rr\v v irp6r€pov. rod <ppovpiov w a p (7 K €—' swept away part 
 
 of the fort: For the building of the fort, see ii. 32 ; genitive after irapd, Jelf ; 
 and see Elmsley on vapaipcov <ppoiH]ixaros (Herac. v. 908). 
 
 {d.) nfirapijev. 'Hanc insulam, quam olim cum recentiore Piperi aut 
 Pelagisi comparabant, XiXi^pofiiav {'ll\loZpo^llav, Ai^pofilay) esse suspicatur 
 
 Leake . . . Scopelon, Field. {It. Gr<Bc. ii. 22) Peparethum et Scopelon 
 
 manifesto distinguit Ptol. iii. 13. 47.'-Pop. iicayax<i>P^<r^^- 
 
 * a reflux: The word contains the notion that the waves curled upwards in 
 their retrograde motion. (Cf. supra iTraufXeovtra.) 
 
 {e.) dwoffrtWdv is by some editors supposed to be intransitive, and to 
 have for its subject eaf<a<r<rav, because ffreWeiv is found intransitively in 
 Sophocles. But this, as Pop. observes, is unnecessary. Translate— 'M^ earth- 
 quake where it is most violent, in this spot drives back the sea! &e. Kriig. points 
 out that the infinitive is epexegetical to an cTj/at understood after vofxiCo. But he 
 prints, I suppose from inadvertence, diroffrfWu in his text. 
 jB i o I <J T 6 p 1/ ' may here be adverbial, but also an adjective, as diropdntpos r, a ri^is, 
 V. no, and Sy<r6(rj8oXc6TaTos ^ AoKpls, iii. loi— the only passages of the sort 
 known to me in Attic prose. Only a seeming parallel is furnished by v. 71- - 
 Kriig. 
 
 I Chapter XC.-(«.) &AA01. It is not clear who are meant. Poppo con- 
 jectures the Locriaus. He would read SAAa, as contrasted with & Se &$'« (cf- 
 U i\Xa ivu.^o\4fx,., i. 65). I should imagine that Thuc. means to refer to the 
 petty warfare always going on among the Sicilian tribes. _ avri- 
 
 |;o\eVtoi. Not elsewhere known in Attic prose. Kriig. It is, however, 
 emDloved, probably as an imitation, by Dion. Hal. Ant. vi. 8. 
 
 ib)MvXds. The modern Milazzo. Ho <pvXal. It was con- 
 
 tnry to the Greek practice to mix together in military service the members of 
 different tribes. Cf. Duker ad vi. 98. Poppo. We may tr. ' regiments 
 
 (c) ^67rotT,/u6Va.. ' Vix quisquam hodie in Graecis literis adeo hospes 
 e.t ut neseiat verba media et passiva, paucissimis exceptis, eandem prorsus 
 tapoKUfLdpov forraam habere, ^'ipyaarat e.g. utrumque sigm^c^t, J ecit etjactum 
 est' So long ago wrote Elms, ad HeracHd. v. 601 ; and he points out twelve 
 instances of the truth of his assertion with respect to ^t^ifc'^rai. Few persons 
 will require to be told that modern views have greatly modified the conception 
 formerly entertained of the Greek passive and middle voices. They are now 
 regarded as possessing one common element, i.e. both represent the subject as 
 recipient of something. In the middle voice the subject produces the effect 
 upon itself by its own agency. In the passive voice the subject receives the 
 effect from without. While the force of the middle therefore is reflexive, that 
 of the passive is purely receptive. Very little consideration will show how 
 often these ideas run into each other, and become confused. Hence very much 
 of the difficulty which has been occasioned by the use of passive for middle and 
 middle for passive forms. To take an example : Cvt^ia>eii<ro,.a.-'ptm^hment 
 mil come upon me' (from an external source), and Cw^dxrofxai-' I shall bring 
 punishment upon myself Both words might be used of the same act, under 
 I precisely the same circumstances. Some grammarians go so far as to assert 
 that there are but two truly passive forms in the Greek language, i.e. the future 
 and aorist. This throws the perfect out of the purely receptive into the reflex- 
 ive class, and consequently such usages of 7r6,ro.7,^/.6Vat as the present are at 
 once accounted for. With respect to elpydCof^ai and .1pya<rf.a^ the same exp ana- 
 tion may be given. And so too we may explain some cases where the middle tense 
 is said to stand anomalously for the passive-e.g. oh K-n^rSf.euov (Soph. ±Aect. 
 1249) may mean-' will never bury itself in oblivion: See Jelf on the verb. 
 
 {d) r\ &AAa -^^tr-rk seems to mean ' a^^ the other usual pledges. So Pop.; 
 but Am.-' everything else in a state of security; or, as he explains-' sat^Symg 
 the Athenians on all other points: ' Generally speaking,' he adds, ' ^«P^X«'' is 
 to prese^it or offer really, xape'x€(r0at, to present or offer to notice, to exhibit. 
 See Ammonius de Differentia Vocabulorum, in voce nap^x^iu. Ct. ^apex^<rvai 
 and cxii. With respect to writing rSAAa or ri &KXa Arn. appears to be right 
 in saying that the former is substantival -all else, the rest ; the latter adjectival. 
 He adopts the same principle in writing icaAol Hayaeoi. but ^era ^okKcv koX 
 uyaBS>p ivix^axS>v '^^<rrd, says Kriig., belongs to the predicate, as ex^pa, 1. 3*, or 
 the article would have been repeated. 
 
 Chapter XCL— t o i; s M tj A ^ y s. The subject is continued v. 84. 
 'opras vv<ri<&Tas-and consequently, the Athenians would suppose, subject to 
 
 ♦1, • •.• • / _ ««\ ai/K idiKovras vvuKOveiv 
 
 their maritime empire (v. 97.99). ouKti/tAUKi^* 
 
3^4 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 93.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 365 
 
 —because they had been colonists from Lacedsemon (v. 84). ^ . } 
 
 K T \ -explained by the similar phrase h rhs 'ArriKhs crirovnas iff^xe.iv. 
 Pop TVS iripav 7^s. The h ircpafr, t^s Boiorrirjs x^PIs of 
 
 Herod, viii. 44. GoU. supposes that the district Oropus opposite to Eub^a 
 was so frequently called tV ^h^'^ 7^" that the words came to be used ahnost 
 like a proper:name. See ii. ^^. But Cramer reads ncpaiKTjs. 
 'l-KiroviKov. ' This Hipponicus was the father-in-law of Alcibiades, and one 
 of the richest individuals in Greece. His father Callias was the ambassador 
 who is said to have procured the assent of the Persian king to that memorable 
 treaty by which the king's ships of war were forbidden to sail to the westward 
 of the Cyanean islands.'— Andoc. cont. Ale. 117. ^'^^ (rij^eiou. 
 
 See note on ii. 90. g^rXa-sc. of those killed in the action. 
 
 A K p f 8 s. Opuntian Locris is meant. 
 
 Chapter XCIL— («.) iiri. roiaaZ^ yviifxin^—'from some such purpose 
 as this: i. e. the motive is rightly spoken of as the source of the motion-that 
 from which it proceeds. m^^vs rpia i^ip-n. This Matthi^ explains 
 
 as equivalent to MrjXi^c. tcSv |u/i7rci.Ta,v ^l<r\ (or ^crrl) rpia fi^pv. ' Tu sic m- 
 tervTetQ-ie^Melienses sunt tres partes (i.e. constant ex tribus partibus). -i'o^. 
 Arnold enters upon the question whether or no these names m their ongin 
 referred to three classes of persons politically as well as locally separate from 
 each other, or not. It will be remembered that there is a similar question 
 raised concerning the three tribes of Athens-the EupatridjE, the Parali and 
 the Hyperacrii. The subject is too extensive for a note ; but refer to Thirlwall, 
 ii 4-15 where all the best sources of information are indicated. If the two 
 classifications are analogous, we must compare, (i) the Hiereusians, or priest- 
 nobles, with the Eupatrid* ; {^) the Parali of one with the Parali of the other 
 in each case a mixed population growing up round the original Eupatnds, and 
 forming the germ of the future ^^os; (3) the Trachinii-the inhabitants of 
 the rough or broken country— with the Hyperacrii, the primitive inhabitants, 
 gradually forced into the hill-country by the more civilised settlers, who 
 naturally selected the plains and more fertile districts. Arnold, however, 
 jusdy says, that whatever may have been the origin of these names, we must 
 not suppose that they retained their primitive meaning in the time of Thucy- 
 dides Like the Koman tribes in the time of the Commonwealth, they expressed 
 little more than mere local divisions. ^cAA^cravres-* ham^ig had 
 
 the intention: irpoffe^lvai. As in viii. 50.— Pop. 
 
 ^.o-Tol- ' not to be trusted' (i.e. to leave them their independence). 
 A«p:rjs. Cf.i. 107. ro^y OiTai<.y. These are mentioned again 
 
 viii 3, and by Xenophon, Hell. i. a. 1 8, in his account of the affairs of Heraclea. 
 They occupied part of the district of Mount (Eta, between the Trachinii and 
 
 Epicnemidii. Dodw. quoted by Poppo. 
 
 (i.) trapaaK^vaaeriyai tu—' classem parari posse' (Poi^.)—' mt^ht be pro- 
 cured' (since ship-timber abounded there, although very scarce in the Pelopon- 
 nese. See Dodwell's Journey, quoted by GolL). Note that ^apaa-K,va<Te7ipa^^ 
 an aorist infinitive participating in a future sense. 0poKrjs k.t^ . 
 
 'suitably situated for the passage to Thrace.' For this genitive cf. note, bhej- 
 pard's Theophrastus, p. 77. Bloomf. remarks that they had evidently alreaay 
 
 conceived the design with respect to this district which they subsequently put 
 into execution (cf. iv. 78). iiriipovro. Cf. with Krug. i. 25. 
 
 K6\6iJo»'Tos— sc. ToO0€oG(cf. viii. 6). Kriig. kir4xov<ra 
 
 SfpixoirvKuv. Arn. has a long note to show that the account here given is 
 correct. The sites of the towns mentioned cannot be ascertained, owing to the 
 alteration in the course of the Sperchius, and the alluvial deposits which have 
 changed the coast line. * But the remains of Heraclea, with its citadel on a hill, 
 and traces of the city lower down, according to the description of Livy, xxxvi. 
 22, on the north bank of the Asopus, and about four miles from Thermopylae 
 (Dodwell, Class. Tour, ii. 73), still correspond with the account of Thucydides.' 
 When Strabo says that the port of Heraclea was forty stadia from the town, he 
 means, what Thucyd. here points out, that the arsenal and dockyard were at 
 Thermopylae. The ' sea twenty stades of was the nearest point of the Sinus 
 Mdliacus in a straight line from the ridge of (Eta, where the town was built. 
 fhipvKaKra. Cf. i. 7, and eixpvKaKrdrepa avrols iyiyvero (viii. 55). 
 
 Chapter XCIII.— (a.) ^woiKiCofi^v-ns— unviSMaX for oiKiCofievris or ktiCo- 
 ;i€.ajs, Pop. Bloomf. compares Eur. ^ec. 1 1 15. But probably allusion is made, 
 as Mg. says, to the population collected from different quarters (see note on 
 ii. 15. b.). The verb is of frequent occurrence (i. 10. 2, ii. 16, vi. 2. and 5), 
 and generaUy implies diverse parties. ^^l t^ Eu^oi'a the Schol. 
 
 explains— Kara ttjs Zhfiolas. It seems to mean—' as a point from whixih to 
 opiate against Eubcea.' Compare the use of the preposition in iirireixifffia 
 and its cognate words. irphs rh Kiiyaiov. ' Cf. Strabo, 444. 46* 
 
 nbi prope Oreum, et Thermopylis contrarium esse dicitur ; hodie Ai0(i5a (Leak. 
 
 GrcBC. ii. 67).' 
 
 (6.) aXriov Bh ?iv. Matthi*, § 309, says that Thucydides meant to have 
 continued his sentence carioy ?iy . . , ot eeaaroKol (f>o$o{>fi€voi, Kal (^0€t>o»/T6S koX 
 to\(fiovyr€5, but from the distance of the principal verbs from their nominative 
 he was led to consider the last part of the sentence as an independent proposi- 
 tion, and accordingly altered the construction to ^<t>eupoy and eVoXe'/ioui/. Thus 
 the words aXnoy 8^ ^y become like nK^^'hpioy 5f, a-nii^tov U, and the like, except 
 that ol e^craoKol yhp could not follow, because properly oi ee(r<ra\ol should be 
 the subject of cLtnoy ?iy. The passages which Kriig. quotes are apposite : atnoy 
 hlro{na,y, irap((TK€v6.Ka<riy {^fxas (Dem. 8. 32, and 18. 108); also atrioy 5' iiy, 
 odre iK,7yoL Apx^iy k^iffravro, oUr^ ol apx6fi€yot rh hKSkovdov h.-K€-n\i]povv (Arist. 
 i. p. 204). This explanation does not, however, account for the awkward 
 particle t« which foUows ®i<T<roXoi. Poppo explains it by anacolouthon, and 
 says that it answers for oh ixiyrm ^Kiara. Or, he says, Kal &y may stand for 
 wl ^vTiywy (i.e. koI rdyrts, &y), a conjecture which he thinks confirmed by rp 
 roinoiy (i.e. Aiytduuy koL AoAcJttwv Koi MTjXtcWKal eeffffaX&y), V. 51. Those who 
 have studied Peil^'s long and learned appendix upon re, affixed to his edition of 
 the Agamemnon, may perhaps be of opinion that we have here an instance of 
 what he means. His leading idea is, that re communicates nothing fresh to the 
 mind (in such cases), and brings forward nothing with which the mind has not 
 been abeady made familiar— the details of a picture, for instance, already 
 'mente repostum.' Hence he translates by such phrases as-^o wit, namely, 
 and so on (see note on i. 133). Here I suppose we must render-' the Tkessa- 
 
 ■r^ 
 
NOTES ON THUCTDIDE3. [Book 111.1 Chap. 970 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 366 
 
 IU.«, that is to say.' i' »">"'''.. J"' ^"''r'r'ftZ 't 
 
 reaims in their Jw^r'-rather a peculiar usage of Siyatus, but cf. 8™ h.. 
 Z"; LiH^-iM-^ ii. 7. Perhaps-' ^.i-^ -/- «» '*-^ "i"--' . 
 a, ^,l\i; ^i;_the Scholiast, aud after him Am., e.pla.n the ^jl as con am- 
 i.g the notion of detriment-' those, to the damage of whose land ,t was huns_ 
 founded: Its transition to this sense may be understood from «...: M T5 
 EiXr .-.Kb. ..p..«-.W.«. S.-a change of meaning .nsnific.ently no ,c«l 
 L the' lexicons. L. and S. have : ' the dative is used where host.hty ,8 imiJirf, 
 whether, o^er against, opposite {II. n. 47»). or moving agamst, atachng (tt ,. 
 ,L aJd later, even in prose.' ii„pix''aay--wc^e out (™. , 
 
 382), ana ,i^„ ,„xxoij. According to Diodorus (x.i. 59), 4000 
 
 Pe oponnesians and 6000 other Greeks. ' Scymnus (v. 597) ^"P'"" "''"^"P" 
 
 a Jedeemoniis missos esse dicit.'-Bloomf. '-'- » »" '"•^-; 
 
 ii-nfovyiivot. See note on a ^$Try€i<r0e, iv. K 
 JEnianes, Dolopes, Thessalians (v. 51). 
 
 rfis A.uKaSU,. ' A small place, still retaming its name. -Dodwell It. 
 worth observing with a view to the right estimate of their value, that^nearly 
 all the MSS. retain the impossible reading 'ApicaSIas. ^J^'^" 
 
 0.^.cpov. The first word points to the order of events, the second to that ol 
 tJmP Kriiff A€UK(i5a-here the town. ttjs €|« 
 
 U/ This must have been situated somewhere in Acarnania. ^-^-^^^-'^ 
 Tlginally a peninsula. See Ixxxi. a. and the map of Leucadia (Santa Mam 
 in "ImoM's'edition. i.or e.x^C--' -all 0/ (sc. from 
 
 mainland), the same thing is afterwards expressed by i^.pn.ixK^.v (cxv.. see 
 
 """"^'m Nau*]'(£KTv T6. Here, as in the preceding chapter, we have an awk- 
 ward re If we take it in the way there indicated, translate-' being, that u U 
 sav enemies of Naupactus: Pop. says there is an anacolouthon, and koI r,. 
 KparVn proceeds as if tc h^d not come before, as occasionally happens after 
 genitives absolute (iv. 3, Vii. 8). Bloomf conjectures N«u.«kx<, 7- 
 la\ ^v Kpariiav. The Koi connects oZfft with ^pocrirom^iP (Krug.) which 
 latter is governed by some word understood in i.vair,ideTai. 
 
 (c) rh ^ir^ipt^TLKhu Pop. and Am. print without a capital letter, con- 
 sidering the term a mere adjective-had it been a proper name rb ra^np wouk 
 Lt have been added, yet evidently in the time of Th-y^i^es 1^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 so In cxiv infra, 'Hirc.'pou must be incorrect, though most MSS. have it wUQ 
 the capital letter. Poppo adds that the remoter Epirots -^-l^^^\^^^^^^ 
 they at this period had no connection with Grecian affairs), but the Ambraciots. 
 Leucadians, and (Eniad*, who were allies of the Lacedaemonians ^ 
 8. A TToWod^^ and these separated by wide intervals: Cf. with Krug. n. 29- 
 cK.vri v|/iX^^ Editors refer to Polyb. iv. 8. 10, and Pausanias x Z2. 4- 
 i,yJar6raro.-'unintelUgible: a sense scarcely to be found elsewhere. s.y 
 
 Kriig. 
 
 Chapteb XCV._(..) M.a.r^.l.y, Oh^eciWe Qe..-^ moved by fhe^^^^^^^^^^ 
 do the Messenians a favour: See Grote. vii. 406. "^^^ 
 
 367 
 
 l,[ TOT€ ibiXiav. There is some vagueness about the expression, which is 
 perhaps accounted for by the fact that in ii. 9 we find the Athenians included 
 in the Lacedemonian confederacy. Poppo suggests that they were forced into 
 it by fear of the BcBotians ; and yet that they were not entirely surrounded by 
 the Peloponnesian party is proved by the neighbourhood of the Ozolian 
 Locrians.'^ ivarpar.^... ^ «&. ^ia yo.axe.va.-^would 
 
 join the expedition, or might e'en be brought into it by con>pulswn. Ci.Khy 
 La^cBiaea., Ixxxii. ^pa. o5.-the particle brings up the sense 
 
 from ire^creels, supra. r),. oh...pir.ix^<r.u-^ the non-oircum- 
 
 mllation: See the note on tV rS>v y€<pvpS>v oh-hidhvatv, 1. 137- 
 
 (6 ) rpiaKoaioi,. Therefore 300 in 30 ships (cf. xci.). So we see from 
 ii oa. 102, there were 400 in 40 ships (cf. iv. 76-101). Each trireme there- 
 fore had a complement of ten. In Herod, vi. 15. forty are given to a single 
 vessel. But this, Arnold remarks, was at an earlier period of Greek naval 
 tactics, when battles at sea were decided by main force, and not by man- 
 (Buvring. At Salamis each trireme carried eighteen (Plut. T^mi^^.). The 
 great improvement introduced by the Athenians was to decrease the number of 
 fpibatae. and augment the crew properly so called. Thirlwall suggests that 
 many of the choicest Athenian troops volunteered, owing to the personal influ- 
 ence of Demosthenes. Hence the statement xcviii. infra, ovroc ^eAr^crro; 5r, 
 i.8p« IC.T.A. Ordinarily thetes alone served as epibate. The classes (ot 4k 
 KaraXSyov) were only called upon in cases of emergency (cf. viii. 24, ^^X^" 5e 
 kifidras tS>v birKirwy 4k KaraK6yov ^myKaarois, and Grote, vi. 407)-^ ^ 
 Tc.T€ica(5€/ca. Only thirteen, in iii. 79- ^r^g- Ot.ec.os. 
 
 The port of (Eneum is mentioned by Steph. Byzant. It was two days from 
 
 Potidania (cf. next chapter). ^^^''"'"'VZ^KTV^T^T^'^^ 
 
 ^ou. Mp.-Schol. t^^XVs. In oldEn^hBh their battle me.n. 
 
 their order of battle. So here—' way offightiiig: 
 
 CujiVT^RXCYl.-Ah\i<TdfL^yos-^'quumpernoctasset:-Poi^. 
 'HMos. For the circumstances of Hesiod's death the editors refer to Plu- 
 tarch's tract De convivio septem sapientum. See Smith s Bwg.JJwt. 
 Xh^rai K.T.A.-' i. said to have been kUled by the people of the country --i.e 
 by Amphiphanes and Ganyctor, sons of Phegeus, in revenge for an alleged insult 
 
 offered by Hesiod to their sister. Am. .,\c ,i/f„.^,,l 
 
 We here have ofc. in reference to i^^M r^'neUher u-ken first ^ formed 
 the scheme, and whm (or, both at first it did not, and afterwards), &<=• , 
 
 rpbs tW M,X.aKbV ^6K.ov-'in the direction of tlu: Svnus Mehacus. 
 Arnold says this is not to be understood to mean that any iEtohan tnbes ex- 
 tended to the shore of the Malian gulf. 
 
 Chaptee XCVn.-(<r.) rJ,. iy ^oaiy-BO. k^w-'"' « % "* f «>^' 
 (i.e. each village as he happened to come upon it). Dale compares rirra t..« 
 riv Kiym Tiy i, TOffl yiy6^yo,, Herod, iii. 79- 7 """^l \ /r 
 
 -an instrumental dative-' his good luck was the cause (o. occa.m,)<if h,s 
 hope: Cf. Thuc. iv. 85. »«•'*'«" ^ iTroKA.f^" M"" ™'' ''"^''•'- ^ ^t 
 'wegendesGluckes: Pop. refers to Matthise, | 399- <=• I""" 
 
 iKoyr^rrHy-'light-armed troops who used the javehn. There were other 
 
368 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 Chap. 1 01.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 369 
 
 ^tAol there (see xcviii.). Pop. ' I take ^ol as an adjective (cf. Xen. Hell. 1,. 4. 
 la ,r€XTo«l,<$poi T€ kcUl ^i\o\ UoprKTral, and Thuc. vu. 78). -Krug. 
 
 \b) ill Mytriov .. .inl rh Alyinoy. These instances appear ex- 
 actly to reverse the rule, (i) that 4^1 with the gen. = inthe direction ./and {^) 
 with the accusative = .^am.^. But, (i) motion in the direction of a thing may 
 7f course be as truly predicated of an enemy as a friend, and the hostile inten 
 is expressed by alpu Kar^ Kpdros ; (x) the second instance must be classified 
 among the cases where M seems to be employed as an equivalent of .^: eg. 
 
 8 649 This preposition is usually coupled with ^o^0«., as ifionev<ray i^ avrovs, 
 i 1 07 Of .^gitiura ' nulla apud veteres memoria ' (Duker). « ara 
 
 \piros-^so far as they could scale the wall' Pop. connects the word ^ith 
 iLy which the collocation will not allow. Kriig. The y^p seems to refer to 
 i^J, containing a reason for the expression-' going up against it. 
 X.pi.y is suspected by Kriig., who considers that .6x.s ov x-P^o. i<p u^X«. 
 Lplv is an unparalleled expression. This is somewhat hypercritical. 
 J/,.y,^al-explained by the Scholiast = &vaxa>p^^«s. The u.5 ;>er^.^. im- 
 plies that an attempt was made to elude observation. See iv. izj, virny.'^h 
 Irpdr^vt^a^^hevePo^Vi^.-^pedetentim reducebat r but it is not easy to see 
 
 how in this case it would be practicable. • ^ -r • f «.« 
 
 (c\ iv oU k(.<por4pois. 'Sail. Cat. 5: "Inopia rei familians et con- 
 
 scientia scelerum. qu^ utrague his artibus auxerat/' Similiter a^^^^-P^;- 
 
 postduofeminina,vi.72. Cf. Interp. Liv. xhv. 36. -Poppo. Jelf, § 39i- ^• 
 
 Chapter XCVm.-(a.) ol rol6ra.. Either, Arn. says, Cepballenian or 
 Messenian auxiliaries, or the rowers from the ships, equipped for this particular 
 service. Pop. has no doubt but that the latter are meant. jd AJ.at, 
 
 ahrots-avrl rod at ro^6rai ainS>y, Schol.; which shows that the Scholiasts 
 had not always the best appreciation of the delicacies of their native language. 
 Am 's interpretation is doubtless right : ainoh describes the circumstance in its 
 relation to the Athenians-' so long as they found that the archers had their 
 arrou^s ' Poppo adds : ' Dativi pronominis aWhs ita positi pluriina exempla 
 arudThuc.re'periuntur.' oU. ^...1x0. Cf. i. 11 and ii. 65 for 5^ inapodosi 
 -1' theu I say, held out: i^y.eriXXovro-^re^mehantur Poppo, 
 
 ^ zurucJcgetrieljen: Engelmann's translation ; ' were kej>t in check. The imper- 
 fect denotes the continuous act of forcing them back. Kriig. refers to vi. 70, 
 and hL own Anabasis, v. 4. ^3. -^ --^-' '^ ^^^"^^ '\ 
 
 Ll / ol ^>ara, Sch. -1 i.l .ox.. Bekker would expunge 
 
 the leaf. Kriig. {ad Dionys.) compares such expressions as koJ ^aXa, Koi .ra.^ 
 Accordingly, Am. and Pop. retain it in the text. The former translates- even 
 for a long time' (i.e. for as much as a considerable time). ^ 
 
 (6 ) Kark jr6Zas. The Scholiast explains, ctukt^^ws— 1. e. illico, straigni- 
 way 'on the ^pot, directly on the track. Others suppose it to mean l^ speed ol 
 fZ: Poppo^omparing Ka.a .6Zas rb .H^xo^ iy r^ a.,a..T 6^.^ ^vSel..... 
 (iv 126), rightly decides in favour of the former. ^ I''' vL 
 
 well-known Homeric epithet, and therefore somewhat poetic here^ ^f .^"^ 
 refers us to Plat. Rep. 467 e; Xen. Mem. iii. 11. 8, and De re Equest. in. n. 
 ht^aprivoyras. Pres. participle* while in the act of missing their way. 
 
 r^v 0A7JJ/. Though there is no ' previous mention,' the article denotes 'the 
 brushwood which from the description given of the locality (xap^Sp") may be 
 supposed to have been there.' iracra U4a. See i. 109, iii. 8iv 
 
 Kol vXiKia 7) aifr-h. 'Vide an legendum koX TjKiKia aurrj fifKriarot k.t.K. 
 ilMKia ut supra, Ixvii. ifKiKiay ^fxStv Sie^peap/ieVrji/.'— Dobree. To me it appears 
 like the Latin usage of idem— e.g. plunmi, iidemque jiorentissima juventute— 
 >and at the same time the flower of th^ youth: D. has, less rightly, I think— 
 ' 50 many, and all in the flower of their youth: Some read v ain^ without any 
 stop, which Eugelmann thinks avoids ' ein hartes Asyndeton.' rots 
 
 Kcrpayneyois (po^ovfxivos. See note on ry ovk cIkSti Tr€<p6$vv^ai, ii. 89 ; 
 and T^ rixv iJ^Triaas, xcvii. Kriig. cf. Eurip. A^idrom. 919, ivyrJKa' rapfius rots 
 SeSpa/ieVois ifoffiy. 
 
 Chapter XCIX.— '»reptir(J\toi'. A station of TrcpfTroXot— a guard-house, 
 probably fortified (cf. i. 142). On the 'K^phoKoi cf. iv. 67, vi. 45, vii. 48, and 
 Dkt. of Antiq. 
 
 Chapter Q.—Trpoviix^avris irpSrepoy—sc. before the Athenian expedi- 
 tion against ^Etolia. On the grounds of the quarrel cf. xciv. ' One object of 
 the expedition of Demosthenes was to free the most faithful of the allies of 
 Athens from the attacks of an enemy who was even at that very time applying 
 to the Peloponnesians for their aid in order to effect its destruction.'— Ara. 
 iicayu^yity. Grote, vi. 409. :^irapridrvs. The word is intro- 
 
 duced to show that the Trachinian expedition had had its own (subordinate) 
 commander. Kriig. ^vyvKoKoidovy. Arn. conjectures from 
 
 avrhs rpiros icpv^^^os ipx^y Karh vofioy (iv. 38), that generally there were two 
 officers appointed to succeed to the command, one after another, upon the death 
 of their superior (iii. 92, iv. 132, v. 12). In this case of course at ^iraprlarai 
 (with the article) will be correct-' the usual Spartan commissioners: Poppo 
 seems to consider it as a case paraUel to ^aXaiBos 6 AoK^Saifwyios, iii. 25. 
 
 Chapter CI.— (a.) 'AfKpKraris. Notorious for the circumstances of the 
 fourth Sacred War. The chief, if not the only city of the Locrians, who lived 
 Karh K<i>ixas. Bloomf. The reader must refer to the Dictionary of Ancunt 
 Geography for an account of the small tribes here mentioned; at least such 
 account as can be given of them. It is suflacient, as Arn. says, to know that 
 they all belonged to the Locrians. The Phocians (supra, xcv.) were zealously 
 disposed towards the Athenians, though enumerated ii. 9 as part of the Lace- 
 demonian confederacy. 'Kpiroy. A usage hardly to be supported 
 by any real parallelism. Therefore Popp. aud Kriig. rightly conjecture i:puyroi 
 {b.) fihv oZv. Poppo rightly notices the somewhat unusual collocation of 
 these words. They of course are generally immo—nay rather. Here they axe 
 like p.\y H- A simUar use of the words occurs, as he points out, iv. 104 ; and 
 Xen. ^na6. iv. 7. 2. 5u(r€(r/3oAc6TaTos. Cf. iii. 89. Kriig. 
 XoAaious. Poppo quotes Plin. H. N. iv. 7 : ' Portus Chalaeon, a quo vii. m. 
 pass, introrsus liberum oppidum Delphi.' 'OXTraTot. These are 
 not to be confounded with Olpa, or Olpae, the fort belonging to the Amphilochian 
 .Ogives (cv.). Poppo. oyofia ^x^i^^a*'— so oyofxa rovro txovaa, iv. 70. 
 
 B B 
 
KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IIiJ Ch.p. 1040 ^OTES ON THUCYDIBES. 
 
 371 
 
 PIT Ka\ oi Mra>\ol. Connect these words with of M^^i 
 
 Chapter CIL— ««* <>» ^'^"' yioXiKp^iov. 
 
 ^i^x6xo^■, on accouBt of -hat Fo"-!-^ Z^^l^ Us-' after «hat hod l.faV„ 
 
 ^J- "; *• *•/./;« •-Ar/'POPPO quotes rhy ^.ri ri ^. 2.KA(a, .<iX.^o. iv. 
 g, ; tV « T„s 3.K.Mas Tu, ^^^ ^^ _^ ^^ _ ^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^1^.^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^p^ 
 
 {„M*opi.. vi. 89. .„„,_- M. d./«rf^«.' I cannf «™J';°* "> "■' 
 
 iciT. TIKI' af r Jc tJii- Aio^I'"- Ithasboen 
 
 conjecture of Kriig.-A/^"-";'*'"'-'- ^j j^j ,,,,„ 
 
 doubted whether this is a ""77/^*'^,'°!^^ '^'^^ ^ " -"«>' *' 
 true meaning is— i/'« aisiria unn ^ ^ TTp^vohius has v Ka\u5^v 
 
 M. .»» .w«.^«' T:t:mTrt ^^-^ ?^? -«^' '^'™^'" *■ 
 
 Ai.Xls ^«»X«I" ; l^-t ^™- 5 • . I'. „ '^ the coniecture is generally accepted. 
 In the last passage Pop ^^^X'^I^^^XT^^:,-,. LoJo. MUller 
 This, according to Enge Imanns tr., "^^^^^^ P^" ,,^ ^,„,i„„,, pie„roa of 
 (S. Gree.^) that originally Calydon was the ^^»' °J "^ ,^„;„„ ,i^ ^. 
 
 L Curetes. When the l^rr'^^lZenrU- when thf^cn^^^ of th, 
 
 considered as ''f ™^ "^^o f^'-^./lZ t^^^^^^^^^ discontin.d. 
 
 one town upon th= other ceased .he co ^^ ^ _^^ ^_^^^^^ 
 
 <KffTpaT€»(ra^ei'0.5 irepl Td Apyos. ± / , .yaoaivoii «pl t* 
 
 tion, Univalent, as Pop. observes, >« ^"-P—^': ^ ,;;',;,,,:, (shep^rf', 
 
 Ttr;hr. p ;; or. as Poppo suggests, .cpl might be connected w.th ^o,e«,. 
 
 _Mko« 5.r« Ti. ^^-'f-. v'^««- .^ ,i^ v^„i„. Orations. It 
 
 a.e the -- - ^^ fU^ «;\^^ ,,y .^i, f^„, Catana and 
 was upon Mount ^.tna, anais p j ^ ^^ „f 
 
 ,XV.- -, K.-OP'-- ^-;- H-~ ^2rg the name of the town t. 
 cooo Syracusans and others at t^atana, cnan„ g restored its 
 
 JEtna But subsequently the native tribes recovered the c.ty, '««'»'" 
 jlitna. D\a tuu 4 j „„i„„;,t8 The latter took possession of Incsa. 
 
 ancient name, and expelled the colonists, ine . J Hiero bestowed 
 
 a town in the interior, about ten miles distant, and in memory 01 ii 
 .^Ht the name of the city from which ^^"^^f^^hM^' Am 
 .r«.X.K.. .^^.<;.p- tSiTntHnlltriSeratr^ or rath. 
 
 ,8 govemea d> p v ^, (^^aros-i.e. the Acropolis. 
 
 f". The localit/ of this riv'lr is not dearly mad^ou. Some - 
 rdentified it with the Alex, but this is mentioned xcix and Pop. argues 
 ThueydTd. would not have assigned two names to a single stream. 
 
 ni-vT c„ \ ,.Ti votiffu!.!' 8i Arnold has a long note, whifk 
 .oi^rrbe^'J:;; ly^nlle^, to pr- thi ^, is sometimes usedjike^^;. 
 rlo expTe^ the writL's op-ion but that of the pei^ons -^-^^J* 
 X^^^' in accordance, <M was professed, mth an orade. This interp 
 
 Poppo does not consider certain in this case. See .ar^ 5), rhv -'^«t ;^^-' 
 
 ; Z ' Perhaps it was thought prudent to oo">'t^''^\^" "P^^W A Juo 
 Delphic oracle may have rendered common among the Greeks, that Apollo 
 »ided with the Peloponnesians.'— Thirlw. iii. ch. 12. ,.,.-,„ 
 
 (i7n..aUTparos. See the account given in Herod 1. 64, rvv ^^0. 
 ^^iXovKoSiipas, KoMipa, U S5. ..r.X. With respect to the principle upon which the 
 T,ractice was founded, see note, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 224. 
 C %-P-» r^' '^'"- Am. compares Herod, i. 64, ^^- S.o^ W« 
 ll ip.C V. Poppo refers to Thucyd. vii. 37, «««■ S^"" -P^^ -^^ "^"' ■"""" 
 
 '"li ^ eSKa. 8ff a.. This is an instance of the attraction of the antecedent 
 i Jthe case of the relative, like the well-known ' urbem qnam statuo. vestra 
 „t.' The term 'inverse attraction' has been invented to express the idiora. 
 Cf. Homer, iZ. xiv. 371, 
 
 iurmSfs ScTO-ai Spurrai ^i-l trrparf fi5e ^eyiffTai, 
 ifftraufpot K.T.K 
 Jelf 5 824. i. I. Eost adds: ■ This sort of attraction only occurs where the 
 wori to which the relative belongs comes immediately before it: e.g. rV outlay 
 V «aT^X.,r. r^ vW, oi tA.Io.os 4|la .VtIv t, «TT<tp». koI 5«a ra,^..y. -Schul- 
 
 ^Ti )^ ]'Loe.<i^K-'-' to Ai^ '«•' This usage of Iv is common. Cf. Arist. 
 Am 38 Kal,ra<r. ko^A' har,0T7,yai ^filf^ara-' to spend money in ■ Pac. 1156, 
 
 Beems to consider that ' antecedens dictum pro eonsequente, as ei^^,v ,s 
 Ztitutd by Diodorus and Strabo. But that death itself was regarded as 
 i r,o those in the neighbourhood seems clear from the P-»g« of ^he^ 
 nhrastus (x»l A«ff.Sa.^<,,la.) referred to above; from the language of Apollo 
 ^!Z^l Alcestis^and from Kuri, /.. . ^^^^ See.^e ..^. «. 
 
 ^xWov ^Tre'x^t. Four stades. according to Strabo, x 486. Krug. 
 ,,;,,,,,,^5a-« ^A. quinquennial festival: i.e. the festival was -lebr^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 the lanse of four years. See Clinton, F. H. 337- 3- r^, . -, '^^^ •■' 
 
 On tieMian festival, see Plut. Nic. iii. 4 ; Diet. ofAntig. ; Thirlwall, lu. 2.7 ; 
 Go* J? 427. The Ust observes, ' At this period the Athenians were excluded 
 bl* frlVe Olympic and Pythian games, which P™hahly made the rovival^of 
 tie Delian festival more gratifying to them. _,.,.'"' ^ 
 
 Diet, of Antiq. The commentators refer to Dion^Hal. Ant. iv. 25. 
 
 (e( « Jpou.-' ap;,.<i«<i a» s;,.rf«to«.' This seems to be one of rtat 
 class f verbs compounded of a noun and the substantive v-b .» of wh-h 
 S^,U., Po,e.'», 0.V0X-, -f"«--. -"d others are examples. (Sec Sheppards 
 Theophrastus, p. 58.) Its formation thus = 9.<«p!.s r«, and accoriingly w^d 
 it constructed with .U, Lucian, Timon, 50 (^^f ^\^°PP°\v "'^^T^ 
 
 .»pi. J.q,< ^0 Paro..' Stephen., Tkes., renders-' /.<^». r:'"'"- J-Tllo 
 M..a.K.i. Because Poll. iii. .4^ says the Attics prefer ay.ya, '^'""'•^jj° 
 47. Mn«r.Ko<t, Kriig. would read the former here. ayvyoy- duct- 
 
 BB2 
 
 \t\ 
 
372 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 hant •' ' sie fuhrten auf J—Poj?. Our own expression, ' led up the dance; ei- 
 plains the word and its usage. Kriig. refers to Callim. Hymn. Bel 279. 
 iK xpooi/iiou. We learn from Wolfs Prolegomena that hymns of this sort 
 were only intended as introductions to longer and more elaborate compositions. 
 This is the reason why they are called i^pooitua. The Scholiast, as quoted by 
 Am gives an unusual derivation of the word : tJ> rod irpootfiiov 6vofia, ovk iAXo 
 fl rhl t-naivov StjAoX' irpb yhp rS,v oifio^v koI rS>y b^o>v oli^aXaioUohsii^aivovsxihv. 
 Were the Scholiasts more trustworthy and less imaginative, this statement 
 would doubtless affect the explanation above given. Duker rightly adds a 
 caution that we are not to accept all the so-called Homeric Hymns as genuine, 
 from the recognition of this particular one by Thucydides. 
 
 (/) i\\oT€— Arn., Pop., GoU. ^AA' 8t€ occurs in more MSS., and is 
 adopted by Bekker and Kriig. iAXi <rh is read in the common editions of the 
 Homeric Hymns. But from this we are not likely to derive much aid, for 
 Thucydides of course copied from a source not available to us, who have the 
 text of Homer only as it came forth from the hands of the Alexandrian gram- 
 marians. One may perhaps venture to render—' other whiles: 
 ir^K^vra rod iiraivov—' made an end of his encomium' (sc. of the Delian 
 chorus). See X&yo^ r^^^vray, ante lix. This does not of course imply that 
 the words terminated the composition. Poppo remarks accordingly that 
 Ruhnken's argument drawn from this passage to prove the existence of two 
 Homeric Hymns to Apollo in the age of Thucyd. altogether falls to the ground. 
 ToAaircIpios— probably the same as raXaiiroopos—UoUsome; 'painstakinp; 
 implying the labour which arises from long and careful investigation. The 
 expression, a painful student, though quaint, is still intelligible. 
 irtKix-npivviv—' showed by certain proof: See note, i. 3. 
 fi€0' Upuv itripLirov — 'setit the choral hands of dancers with sacnfices! 
 * Up^la, simply the aiiimah killed ; Upk everything required for sacrifice, such 
 as, perhaps, the tripod (Herod, iv. 179) and all the other vessels.'-Am. On 
 the exceeding care bestowed upon the training and equipment of the Delian 
 chorus see Xen. Mem. iii. 3. i*. ««^ "^^ ^ Xotrra-' as well as mod 
 
 other things' (sc. of those appertaining to the chorus). ' &AAa in sententia latet, 
 quemadmodum in dicendi genere, i. 116.'— Pop. &AA01 is .however expressed 
 there. 
 
 Chapter CV.— (a.) ficrrrep iTroffx^n^yoi—' as, haviyig pra?nised, they 
 detained' (i.e. as they promised when they detained)— implying, as is usual 
 with the participle sine articulo, that the promise was the cause or condition ol 
 the detention. See for the promise sup. cii. 
 
 (6.) "OAn 0$. This is one of the places for which both a singular and plu- 
 ral form exist. Cf. TlKdraia and UXaratal, ii. 7, and Pop. note. ' Nur em In- 
 stitut zur Schlichtung von Hiindeln mit den nordlichen Nachbarn.'— Wachsm- 
 Hell. Alt. i. 16. ' The seat of national justice.'— Thirlwall. 
 
 (c.) Koiv^ SiKatrrnplcfi. Whether common to the Acamanians alone or to 
 them with the Amphilochians is not apparent. Various interpretations have 
 been given. Kruse {Hellas) understands a common convention between tne 
 Acarnanians and Amphilochians ; and this view is favoured by the testimony 
 Stephanus Byz. (voce "OAirai) and the eituation of the place. Poppo however is ol | 
 
 Chap. 106.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 373 
 
 opinion that had this been the meaning of Thucydides he would have written 
 I edffiv alrolf Koi ro7s 'Afji<pL\6xots. This savours of dogmatism, and is scarcely 
 sufficient ground for rejecting the testimony of a writer who had probably greater 
 opportunities of ascertaining the truth than we have. Bloomfield thinks it 
 identical with the rh Koivhp rS>v 'AKapvdvwv mentioned by Xenoph. Hell. iv. 6. 4. 
 The Acarnanians were separated into several federal divisions, which ^some- 
 times acted in concert, and sometimes not. See ii. 9, iv. 49, iv. 77. "OAirat 
 then may have been the locality of their federal council. Yet, as Poppo ob- 
 serves, it is hardly probable that this would have been located in the Argive 
 territory. Wachsmuth, as we have already seen, supposes it to have been a 
 place selected for conference, and for the adjustment of differences between the 
 Acarnanians and their northern neighbours. 
 
 {d.) ^iridaXaffffias. Leake explains this from its vicinity to the lake or 
 marsh now called Ancyro ; but Urquhart is of opinion that any city situated 
 in the vicinity of the Ambracian gulf might be called imeaXaffirla, or 'man- 
 
 tima! Pop. . 
 
 {e.) rrjs 'An<piXoxia5 K.r.X. Arn. calls attention to the collocation, which 
 is that usually adopted in Greek, when a place, and the country in which it is 
 situated, are mentioned together. He contrasts the English idiom which repeats 
 the same preposition— * w Amphilochia in the place called Wells: But we 
 might compare ' in Bethlehem of Judaea,' though this, it is true, is derived 
 from a Greek source. It coincides with the other idiom noticad by A. 
 where the town is the prominent subject, and the name of the territory is 
 added for the purpose of more accurate description : e.g. ^i^ Tavaypa ttjs 
 Bo.cot(«. i. 108 -, is UXdraiay rvs Boio^rias, ii. a ; is M^e^y-ny rrjs AoKwyiK^s, 
 
 (/.) Kpvyai This must have been a spot at the foot of the limestone 
 hills, where the water gushed up from streams which in all probability acted 
 as a subterranean drain to the lake visible from the hill of Argos. We know 
 that it lay east of Argos, and on the high road between Acarnania and 
 Ambracia. The geographical matters connected with these chapters are too 
 Taffuely known to be commented upon with certainty. We have already a 
 memoir upon the district by Lieut. Wolfe, K.N. {Journal of Geograph Soc, 
 iii. pt. I. 77), but this is confined to the sea-board. The route of the Pelopon- 
 n^sian army is traced with accuracy enough for ordinary purposes by Arn 
 See his note 'ApitrroriXris. Prom the researches of Pop. and 
 
 Roscher. who refers to Xen. Hell. ii. z. 17, Plato, Farm. 127 d. it appears that 
 this man was subsequently one of the Thirty Tjp-ants. ij rfty 
 
 HUy-Ho their city: i.e. to Ambracia. h f^^X-n-'the battle that 
 
 wmld be: 
 
 Chaptkb CVI.-(a.) roh, iy "OX.a.s K.r.X. The right rendering of 
 these words depends upon the well-known force of ^o, (cf. Porson ad Eurip 
 Hec. I), which, being derived from a perfect, has the sense of completed 
 action; ^nd was rightly translated by the Latins adsum-^ that the Amhra^ots 
 now in Olp<E were arrived ; ' or, as we should say-' as soon as they heard of the 
 arrival of the Ambraciots now in Olp<B: It is strange that Pop., after giv- 
 ing the correct translation for ^Kovras-^' venisse:-^\ioM quote Duker: 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IIT. ■ Chap. HL] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 374 
 
 "OXvcus 'Au-Kpajcidkais,' and then add, et fiKtiv ebt , 
 
 ^ V • 1 i? 1 V* a50ts — ' i» ^?/«i,' I.e. next, 
 
 matter admitted of doubt. ,/*-.. 2V l^vara^ 
 
 territory, in such away that .t ehould "^'^^'J'^J^H^ ^„ have been cut off 
 and Amphilochians would never have permitted 'hem elves to n 
 
 from thJsea, and consequently iron. ^^-'^/^^^^.V^ ™J ^^n that 
 
 "Sder to avoid the Acarnanians who were wa.tmg for him at Cren=e. 
 
 ouKCTt A« P xa^Sfji^uoi. Cf. note, XXIV. supra. 
 
 r"^^Spartanor„s (»e. fparto-vuni) :.uc .se. cui .nt ine. . 
 Mac-rinoros decent Kruse, p. 3°^- ^t Leake, v^ ^$^. -Poppo. 7P 
 
 'uwmltimted: used somewhat in the sense of Hrfpios, u,Jd. 
 
 CHArr^ CyU.-Mr,r,6.o.... ^sapi^ars to have hee„ part o^^^^^^ 
 of Olp., but why so called it does not appear. A name, ^ays Th>riw^l ^^^ 
 haps connected with the ancient importance of 01l«e A'"" ^ ^^^ 
 
 the spot was chosen by the Acarnanians as *;^;,'^;°; jf ;^'' ^-^^ :: " ° t setUe- 
 
 ^-rrof'Tcr ' ^BLridrtiri::rrfor n%. of the .u 
 rirMrnni. Pei. .-.;---::. -' ^"""^ ^^r 
 
 ".el^^Tef:, "'The MSS. vary, with a preponderance towards the last, m 
 ffQivt)v-*}tvf\- -Li J pisewhere Kriiger substitutes it here, ibe 
 
 as the former is always found ^^«^^f "^f-'T^^^^ ^^^^^ obably be con- 
 truth is that both forms were current. .»^^^^^^ {^^^ f,^, ^ere 
 sistentin his orthography, but a transcriber to whose ear both 
 familiar would naturally glide from one into the other^ \^^^ ,,, 
 
 The dry bed of one of the numerous mountain ^«^^f ^. ~^^^,i,g the 
 .ral a^iCov ydp. The Herodotoan use of 7af>-expressing 
 
 ^asoB orwhat ollowsllxx^. ^^^^ ^^ P^^^,^^^ ^^^ ,^ , 
 
 • of^ a^« W5^ if'^i P^l'"^ /. ''*' r ^ i\ U a, V. The sixty men- 
 
 in the next chapter. t6 -^ -^Ir -^ ^l ^KXo . . . ^s U. 
 
 tioned at the beginning of the chapter. ,v gi ixAo a£^al eWxo", and 
 
 H":d- ••• tr^x^^n^vr^r^irfl'ticrit appear, th. 
 fhrwo-rd";i;m::tT.:c;niJ one ^-7'"fjr't trr; * 
 
 bodies. Cf.i.3. For i.«^U,ef. with Kriig., Herod, v.1. 41. 
 
 375 
 
 i„^.TK..-' «■«;« to "«•& «"? '■ff'""''' „ tin should be contrasted with that 
 
 to the Ust chapter-' thM part of tkarj y ^^^ ,^^^^^ ^^^ 
 Eun/Mm: Compare Soph. Ajax 775, "^^ ^^^^^.^^ ^j^ j^( 
 
 parto/ the business: There is no »«'=^»^; y'^/^^^f ^^^^gh, as he admits. 
 'Cf. i 70, t. ^^'^«-'■ Kriig. '^»--'jtra,.BlIomf'(U.i.) wished to 
 against MS. authority. ^ proposition imphes— 
 
 f.d..».but Po^has ^^^ tltJn,\.t Thucyd.did 
 'from the place 0/ combat. Haase wa* w b j^g_ ^ ^_ 
 
 /ot use the word, for -"'-f-;!:: „ ^'^^^.i^^ to be distin- 
 
 . . """"Ta^d of I mi itl y fie thromng itself into a town 
 guished from .i<nrkTorr«, said of a mmia^y ^ ^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ p ^, 
 
 for purposes of defence. "• « J " j^ ^ ^ ^p^eies of brachy 
 
 explains this-.ap"«... - -K. ^^ ;+;,«.)-■ »a. protracted to a late hour 
 logy easily para Wed (K 71. ^^XP'- H J^ p,ii,_. «^.d a« e.«.n?. 
 
 „„i then oW'-(i.e. was l^W betoe ^.j^^, ^^^^.^ed by .. S'-"'- 78- 
 
 Several MSS. however read €s »+«, wmcn i» 
 
 Cha^bb CIX.-M...xiV". Cf. sup. chap. ^°°-^ ^^^ JJ^^JL 
 
 jJKT.Ta.-' sWi stand a swge (In.). ^^^„„e,v^s . . . o^iy^ovra,. 
 
 ' recovery of dead ' (1. 57)- . , . ,, ^ f„„ of the expression. Kriig. aptly 
 
 \ 
 
 Because the i-'^P^^^" f^l'ZZ !m.^ .-^ Ma^.e.'ov W, .Imo^- 
 cites Xen. //««• i- •• •<>. 'AXk-^'oS^/ ^" 7;„,,;„ „/.„»«&raa».' 
 
 ♦ .Xi^ai. Explained by the Scholiast, +.XOU. Tu, J^^^^^^^^^„^ j^^,,. 
 ,ta <,/<A.ir o/tos' (i.e. to isolate them). ^^^^^ ,^,, „„t 
 
 As these are mentioned beside the M^nt.~ •t p ^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^ ^j^^ 
 Mantineeans. Some suppose them to "''" ^''° .^ „,y have been 
 
 Lacedaemonians out of PtP^T'^^iJorMantin^eans, considering that the 
 
 Peloponnesians other ^^^t:^:::'^: ZfZ and ..Ve„,.po. as between 
 antithesis is not so much ^«tween n ^^ ^^^ ^^^^.^^ ^as been 
 
 ^..„,.^«.o. and «x-»-'- ^^::"^J^„7eu ^lochus. ch. icc, these were some 
 
 made of any mercenaries a<^'='>"^P''">"'l, . „„bablv Epirots. 
 
 forcesgot together by the A»„.^^^^^^^^ ;,,„„„.. the areeU 
 
 ^"reachery practised against their confederates. 
 
 u€pos Tt — 'aeon- 
 CH^rrER CX.-i77*^i"-- See sup. cv. 
 
 «Wcra6k jw'io™' ('• ^3'" „ 
 
 «.q„rW»l usaffe of the accusative. Compare 
 Cha^ee CXI.— P^*»-"'- ,^^'t^"es collected by JIatthiae, | 4-5- 
 such phrases as irixra rpte»v and the insUnces collec 
 
376 
 
 NOTES ON THtrCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I Cbap. 112.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 
 II 
 
 l! 
 
 It n,aT be classed under the cases of an accusative with «>(, &c., ' *»''««"?«'» 
 existence of some quality in some particular place or relation (Jelf. § 579. 
 3), as may be seen from the instance there quoted : 
 
 nirpoicXoi' TpAfKiffii/, <r((>iiF «' oinS,v KrjSf' 4K<i<m,.— /i. xix. 30»- 
 Kriig. quotes v. 8o, but there we have Tp<W.a<r.. iro.«<ras ; and vi. 33. "W'^t 
 l^s a really parallel case, for there we have .^^a... A' standing absolu ely, 
 as opposed to xb « iX7,9«. Duk. cf. Eurip. Iph. in A. 362, and Dem 18. 77. 
 X.^..^^.. The Xix- Bloomf believes to have been the w.ld cabbage 
 mentioned by Gell. (Af^^a, p. .90, -n<l 'tiU a common article of food m 
 Greece. He compares iv iyt>io..r, rot. Xax-"" »«-»' ^P«f«''. ^f- '^'"^*- 
 .„ k«t' i\l7o«— 'a/ew «t a time.' S'"' >'"' • • • 
 
 £„„xe,iKT«-^' complura sunt in quibus hie offendimus.'-Pop. In the first 
 place the particle ^iv would seem to distinguish the party who have just been 
 described as leaving in a body, from some others, whereas no oth- are sub- 
 sequently mentioned. This is true ; yet it may be question^ f;'^"''^'^ 
 not an implied reference to those left behind-' as manymdccd (or, that « to 
 sav) as left together,' for the rest (either such as remained, or such as left sepa- 
 rably) were not engaged in the transaction described. In the second place he 
 intends that .8r»s has no meaning. It seems obvious to suggest that it refe. 
 to M Aax<u'..rf.!.K-'i» this way that I have described the others going But 
 Poppo contends that this would have been H' .W iKuuo- a much more 
 JZa expression certainly, but must Thucydides necessanly ^--^^"^'^'^^ 
 We might perhaps compare ^sch. Ag. 695, iyi\<^ov „ut«,s where Klunsen 
 translaL-- i^a leonem quidam nutrivit ; ' and «lds, oSr^ simihtndinem inducit 
 nt oTos vers. 388. Pop. conjectures ivr.s to be connected with ^tit-x""'. as 
 i„.l.xti,T„ with fipM,<ra., and urges that Thucyd. never couples the imp 
 Wxo^"' 'rith an aorist participle. On what principles one is to prove this 
 B,^tive is not clear. Peile simply translates-' to have come with th^m ths 
 w^' It is perhaps worth remarking that <.5t»., like the Homeric a.T«, is 
 sometimes used to express carelessly, without studied design See Buttmann s 
 able note on Dem. c. Midiam, | ai b]: iv <rwo.aia t..I ««1 J-arpi^J o"t<.s .5^, 
 _. in a private party as one n,ay say, and no more.' Cf St. John iv^6, M,(.ro 
 „5t». M ■n; ,rw. For 8<ro. ^iv Kriig. conjectures 8»o.x.p. He considers 
 „i!r«s obscure, but would explain-' dU sowie es eben der FaU war 9e^<^^^'^^ 
 (' who had so got together into a body'), referring to cv. ^ 
 
 zX'f-'ranat^eed: See Kriig. Xen. Anab. i. 8. .. It seems to hav 
 been a technical military phrase-' tOCT* at the double quick. So again iv^ 67 
 and . .1. From such phrases the tiro will perceive how the dative in so many 
 cases merged into an adverb. t.iK.raX.^^U-' catch them «p. 
 
 MK6,Tiai T.t. 'T» est hie nostrum mancher.'-Vo^^. t« is used ot a 
 person with some degree of uncertainty and vagueness-»««« '^'P^^^'^^^, 
 Zght be two. Am. is right in comparing Herod ui. .40, "''^'^^" '^, \^ 
 % !iS.U-' not more than one or two ;' and Xen. Anab. 1. 8. ^o. "f "«"■'«' J" 
 iK^rr.. Peile adds to these, for plural force of t„, X«r W^. t.. , ^. >^^ 
 r^Z<^i.o,-E^.Ion, ,315. and Homer, Odys. xi. 50- Compare the UU 
 non-nemo ; as, ' Non istum ut non-neminem provincia corrupit, Cic. contra 
 
 r„em ii. ». 16 ; and 'Video de istis, qui se populares haberi volun, abesse 
 .„„.neminem.' Cic. in Cat.iy. 5. Madvig remarks: 'By non-nemo, one or 
 ,« some few defined but not named persons are always indicated, §493- «• 
 But' after all I confess I do not see why the ordinary sense of the word is not 
 .robable. The enonnity of the action was quite enough to make it remark abe 
 in a single individual, and the regular construction with a singular participle 
 makes it doubtful whether more than one person be meant. This has i see also 
 rtnick Kriig., who says-' t« mancher zu iibersetzen, wird mjd^as kaum 
 ffstatten ' S.aitoffious ^4v Tiras-' some two hundred. 
 
 ■ATpatSa. Poppo prefers •A7pa.{Sa,as the cognateterm nxarmh occurs 11. 7»- 3- 
 Lob. (ad Phryn. p. 41) and Krug. take the opposite view. 
 
 Chapter CXII.-(a.) 'lU^^ivr,,. The exact locality of the Uo X^^»has 
 not yet been well ascertained. See Arnold's note. Either the pass which led 
 L the ridge of Macrinoros into a large valley or plain (seen ,n the surveys) 
 ^"h extended to the shore, or the entrance to the hiUs from the plain of 
 Aita, called PaleaKulia, may be meant by ^<r0o\<i. /J „„ 
 
 iU.,. . . . irpoa.a3i.T«. Kriiger conjectures ^. SJri. or ^STi. 8., as 
 he does not believe that the preposition would be omitted in good Attic prose 
 On the other hand Plato's authority has been produced against h,m-a.a3a.n-« 
 »8), aJroTs ixV-ri i'r^ {P''<edo, 113 d). "irb ^"J'^P"- On the 
 
 i of the preposition see Matthi., § 573. and Jelf, ao, who quotes 
 Srlv ."Ao^o, iirb S«..ou e.^a,ro.ro (11. viii. 53). and i. 6.I..0U, Her v . 
 ,^„ In these instances M signifies departure from a pomt in respect oiUme, 
 as elsewhere in respect of pte. So we have iiri. ■•rpirov uwou, vu. 43- Krug. 
 as eisewnero lu v r ioOov. ' Paulo post, TOirrbs €Ti 
 
 refcrstohsown^«aft. Ti. I. 13- '^^\^^. I .1,. .t„t« 
 
 On^ ■ et iv. . .0, n.«Ti,. rr. «al «pl Spflpo^.'-Poppo. This confirms the state- 
 let ;fPhrynichus (p. .75. ed. I^beck) that Vpo. is the P-oaO-st P^cedmg 
 the dawn, when a lantern might still be used. Krug cf.^iv. ..o, and Plat. 
 Protoj. 310 A ; -rnt ^ap,xeoi,rr,s •'VKrh, raurnfff, ^' 3ae«s op0pov. 
 ?Ti ir ToTs (ivals. Cf. iv. 32. Krug. , u .t,« 
 
 (6) TpoSrale K«l 4k4x,v.. The imperfect, says Am., is used wherethe 
 
 1.1 ,^^r« tn 1-ennire the aorist. But his explanation is in exact accord- 
 sense would seem to require tne auiiot. ^^ f^ . , . . ._.,„ ,„ ii,_ 
 ance with the theory which has been all along maintamed in reference to the 
 :it and it is accTrdingly quoted in his own words, ' 'That these tenses are 
 often varied in a narration is well known, theaonst simply stating the fac the 
 imperfect converting it, if I may so speak, into a picture, by representing it as 
 still going on, and not altogether past.' See the note on 111. 22. _ 
 A.plJa 7X£ff<r«v UVt« .. Am. compares ii.r..a yX^aavU,rayo, mx^ryoi 
 (Herod i 57). The phrase is much varied by Aristophanes. Its Latin analogue 
 ; 57)- -^ P raotxou4vovs—' making them fed confidence,' 
 n wcem mtttere. xiffTiK »aptx"t'"" ' . ,f /■ _•«... p^iia . 
 Am.; 'fidudam injidentes,' Poppo; 'caUing up a feehng of securtty^ Peile 
 ■ r«- ™C« erregend,' Kriig. ^aSopa-^.vo- r,, 0+... 
 Portus translates-' quod eorum fades cerni non posset,' to which PoPP" ^f; 
 So, too, Peile-' (i«r/<«^«. could not be distinguished. Others_ interpret- 
 •w(A thar eyes,'^ in the phrases Sp<!^»- e.t., cxi. ; and Xo^^ «x"^ i_ 22 
 Kriig.— 'tArer Erschemung nach. A,«^iri 
 ,09 iii. 81. «^i^« -"^^ ^'P'^"'' ""^ ivvrvxi<i. Arnold 
 
 Pi 
 
 ^ 
 
378 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. I Chap. 1 1 6.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 379 
 
 f 
 
 hm—* whilst the action was taking place: But the word seems to imply 
 that the event was a sort of accident. Cf. t} ^vvrvxia rrjs ^/iertpas xpf'«, 
 i. 33. (i Set — ' if needs must be: virh rwv 0ap^dpu>v. 
 
 The Ambraciots affected to regard the Amphilochians as barbarians, because 
 they were in reality a mixed race, mostly of Pelasgian extraction. See ii. 68. 
 Cf. Granville Sharp's canon, and note on i. 1 8. , 
 
 Chapter CXIII. — This chapter affords an admirable praxis upon the Greek 
 pronouns, but offers no difficulty to a reader fairly acquainted with their usage. 
 'Aypalovs. Cf. ii. loa, ill. lo6, ill, 114. ryjs irpdr-qs fxdxvs. 
 
 Cf. supra, cvii., eviii. /Ltcra (T(p5>v. This refers to the herald and 
 
 those by whom he was sent. Poppo remarks that the plural ffip^ts is often 
 used where one person only is mentioned but more are meant (iv. z8, v. 58). 
 *I 5 ^ € c a t s . See cv. and note on ii. 7. ndhiar a—' somewhere 
 
 about two hundred: It would be quite unnatural in this place to interpret ' two 
 hundred fully : (palyera i — ' are clearly seen to be,' * 'plainly are! 
 
 See note on i. 2. eiircp yt—'yes certainly, if, as we must suppose, 
 
 you were the persons who fought yesterday in Idomene^ eifTrep here again denoting 
 an assumed hypothesis. Tcpu-nv — ♦ nudius tertius ;' • the day before 
 
 yesterday: Ka\ fihv 8)j t jvto is— ' and yet these undoubtedly are 
 
 the men we f might with yesterday: Pop. refers to Heindorf. Protag. 4. Parti- 
 culae Koi ft€v 5^ ut ssepe simillimse Koi /li^v cum asseveratione adversandi vim at 
 vero habent. Non usitatse simt koI h^v Stj, quas restitui vult Bloomf.'— Poppo. 
 iLpidfidy. Kriig. cites Eur. Heraclid. 669, iroWovs apidfihv itAAov ovk 6x« 
 <ppd(Tai. c'leAcTj/— as in iv. 69 and v. 43. ' The reason was per- 
 
 haps operative, but not the only one. . It would have made them afraid of 
 Athenian co-operation at Leukas. The displeasure arising from the former re- 
 fusal of Demosthenes had never been appeased, and they were glad to mortify 
 him in a similar manner.'— Grote. Perhaps the recollection of Phormio's arbi- 
 trary proceedings put them on their guard. Thirlwall. 
 
 Chapteb CXIV.— TpiTov /xepos. * Dem. had'300. The Athenians must 
 have had at least six times as many, i.e. 1800. But this was only a third part, 
 and many stragglers were slain beside. Therefore the slain were about 6000.' 
 
 Grote. irKiovra kdhoi — * in navigatione* '^o^^O', ' during tk 
 
 voyage,' ^ at sea: i^i^pfdriaav agrees with the latter nominative, 
 
 viz. that placed in apposition. Poppo quotes Tac. Ann. xiii. 37, ' Insechi, gens 
 hand alias socia Romanis, avia Armeniie incursavit.' Of this Kriig. says, * hier 
 doch hart.' But why especially so ? The word originally implying selection, 
 it comes to signify dedication of spoils to the Gods, as being in that case 
 selected. Duker quotes Thomas Magister in voce tlelXe— ^lelXe r^ 5e»fi 
 yepas, Koliifipe. r} KadoSos. This, the technical term for return 
 
 from exile (Herod, i. 60), is used because Demosthenes by his voluntary ex- 
 planation had placed himself in an exile's position. iaveiffavro 
 — because, as Pop. remarks, they had no ships to take them. home. 
 fxf7aif4(Trr}(rav here as elsewhere (i. 2. 12, ii. 16) denotes change of locality 
 and habitation. Had the writer been anxious to define the precise relations of 
 time in these movements he must have used the pluperfect ; but as he merely 
 
 dwelt upon the fact, the aorist was the natural tense. Am. justly compares &s 
 ,aruUaeiau,l 50. ^ap^ :ZaKvyelov. This is Hermann's now universally 
 
 reived correction for :ZaK^vdLOu, which after roh ws ^oKiudiOu Kara<pvyov<riu is 
 inadmissible. Am. translates-' to which place [i.e. (Eniadae] they also had 
 removed from Salynthius: His explanation is that their return to their own 
 country was cut off by the Acarnanians and Amphilochians, and that they naa 
 accordingly accompanied the Peloponnesians to (Eniad^e. Poppo connects e^ 
 Olnddo,u otherwise-' >^erc facto} ex (Eniadis, qui a Salynthw discesserant, 
 akundi [in Peloponnesiam et Acarnaniam] potestatem dederunt: Grote alone 
 ^ould retain iraph. ^K<>udiov, believing that 0\viaZS>v is not here the name of the 
 place but of the inhabitants : ' As the word is already in the patronymic form it 
 vrould be difficult to deduce from it a new nomen gentile: He tr.— ' safe retreat 
 was granted to Ambrakiots and Peloponnesians from the (EniadcB, who also [as 
 ;.eU as Ambrakiots and Peloponnesians] went up to the territory of balyn- 
 ^J^^^^g> iTrl roTcrSe— 'on these conditions: Matthise, § 479- »• ; 
 
 j,lf *836 5.C. 8t^ T^s f/Trefpou. Most MSS. have 'HTrelpou 
 
 thoilgh the Corinthians in passing over to Ambracia could not possibly cross 
 Epirus. See sup. xciv. 
 
 Chapter CXV.--t S>v -Zik^Xwu. K necessary correction for SiKcXtwrw./, the 
 reading of the MSS. The Greek settlers were called SiKeMirat ; the 2t/o6\o^ 
 according to Thucydides vi. 2, were a barbarous tribe, or rather congeries ot 
 tribes, inhabiting the central portion of the island (vi. 88). This agrees (as 
 Bloomf. observes) with what is subsequently said about making an invasion 
 from the upper part of the country. Besides, as the ^iK.KiS^rai were divided 
 between the Syracusans and Athenians, one party of them would scarcely have 
 been described as oi 2iKeMS>rai. But the 2./ceAol were at that tme allies ot 
 Athens (iii. 103, iv. 25). Perhaps the best resum6 of Sicilian affairs is that 
 given by Thirlwall in iii. 22. It is necessary to a full understanding of the 
 narrative of Thucydides, and should be mastered by the student. See also 
 Grote, vii. ch. 57. nu0(55a,pov-possibly the man mentioned as 
 
 archoi when the war began (ii. 2). M -- yavs-^whohad b^n 
 
 mt to command th^ fleet: Acix^s-recalled for peculation. See 
 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 240. Bloomf. 2o^oKA.'a-afterwards one of the 
 
 Thirty Tyrants, according to conjecture. ,tpy6i..voi-^ as being 
 
 adudedfrcnn the use of the sea by but a few ships, they were engaged in pre- 
 faring a Jleet with the intention of not futting up with it: Pop. ct. Ixxxviu. 
 
 Chapter CXVI.-x.pl aM rh tap rovro. 'H.pl drca, sub, quum jam 
 appropinquaret hoc ver.'-Pop. ^ ^"«l-' rivus ignis, Plm. H N 
 
 106.231; ^der Fuerstrom,'-^ the Eruption: Thucyd. means the ^ood of 
 lava. Kriig. refers to Heind. Plat. Phc^d. 139. The root is f>ec.. Then M^ 
 tic^bv4a>, perf. ipp^mKa. The article indicates the notoriety of the pheno- 
 menon rh irp6r€pov adverbially— ' oti the previous occasion. 
 r^.rvKocrr^ ?T.t . . . ^lerk rh ^p6Tepou ^eS^a. ' According to the 
 computation of Thucydides the previous eruption occurred 01. Ixxvi. 2, i.e. 
 B.C. 475, sixteen years before the victory of Hiero, commemorated by Pindar in 
 the first Pythian, when he refers to Etna and its eruptions.'-G oiler. ' Ac- 
 
 tli 
 
38o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 [Book III. 
 
 cording to the Parian marble the eruption of Etna took place 01. \xxv. z, ,.e, 
 BC 479. This Boekh and Kriiger consider to have been the t^ -'P'i^.p.. 
 ^^;«. meant by Thucydides. The former supposes that e.ther Thucyd.de. 
 Lke loosely in round numbers, or that the eruption lasted for severa yea.. 
 T?e latter supposes that .' (the numerical symbol for s) has been lost before 
 the word (J Or the eruption mentioned in the Panan marble may be the 
 third of Thucydides, since it is clear from the expression ^pdT.po.' that Thucy- 
 dides knew of no eruption between the two which he mentions -PjFf- 
 TPU YO"*'*""- Th« third eruption here mentioned ,s not to be >dent,fie,l 
 with that which, as we learn from Diodorus (xiv. 59) and Orosius (u. j8), oc- 
 ^red 01. xcvi. .. i.e. 396. e..«.515,. i.yiypa^^'. Cf. 1. .. 
 
 20-23 ; v. 20. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 On Book II. c. 90— ^^rl tV iamuv yvy- 
 
 The controversy which this passage has excited would fill a moderate volume. 
 Mr Grote alone has devoted to it ten octavo pages of very small print. Under 
 these circumstances, I can merely give what appears to be the most plausible 
 interpretation, and reply to the objections which have been urged against it. 
 1 should tr — ' the Peloponnesians getting under weigh at daybreak, directed their 
 mrsein a column four abreast upon their own coast, inward, in the direction 
 of the qulf, with the right wing leading, in which order also they had been lying 
 at their nworings: Mr. Grote, on the other hand, interprets M rV cauro,. yvy 
 as the Athenians' own land, meaning thereby the northern shore of the gulf 
 in the neighbourhood of Naupactus. No one, I imagine, would naturally ^do^t 
 this view. It is only tolerable if the objections against the other be fatal. Let 
 
 us examine them. , . . . m i r u +^ 
 
 (1) 'Though the Scholiast explains i^\ hy ^apd, it is impossible for it to 
 have any such meaning. With an accusative inl must mean against, with 
 hstile intent, and this meaning is inconsistent with the above interpretation. 
 I have already intimated my belief that hostile intent is a secondary not a 
 primary meaning of . eVl with the accusative [i. 30, a. 54, a]- The primary 
 meaning is ' motion on to a fixed point' The secondary notion flows from this, 
 and is connected with the actual meeting or confronting that which is hostile 
 to us; the actual coming into contact with opposition. That inl followed by 
 an ax:cusative does not of necessity connote ' hostile purpose, may be seen by 
 many examples furnished by the lexicons and grammars. In the present case 
 we need not go far for an instance very much to the point, irom n. 86 
 we learn .ap4.K.vae 8^ Kal 6 4>opt.i.u M rh '?loy rh MoKoKp.Ku . . 
 h 5^ rovTO uey rh 'Fiov <piKioy ro7s 'A0T,va:'ots. I do not therefore at all ac- 
 cept the necessity for any such meaning as ' hostile purpose.' The preposition 
 I believe has its original meaning, and I compare to it our own military 
 usage of the preposition ' upon,' which does not mean * on the top of anything 
 as a foreigner might suppose, but in the direction of-e.g. ' the advanced guard 
 will move upon Quatre-Bras.' It is here employed rather than napd, because 
 the coast, as the map shows, makes a sweep upward to the north. Cons^e- 
 quently the fleet in advancing eVi, rov k6x.ov, would naturally seem to be 
 advancing upon it, rather than parallel to it; just as Phormion, 11. 86, ad- 
 vanced upon the promontory of Rhium. There was also more occasion to 
 .mploy the accusative, as the genitive was wanted to express the general direc- 
 tion, the ultimate object of their course iaw rov KdKirov. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
382 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 383 
 
 « 
 
 A^nia h« weakened his own case greatly by referring to ^^1 eum dativo. 
 He d™ n!t bZv", by any means say what Mr. Grote puts ,nto h.s momh 
 ,W does' he • assi^ to M with an accusative a sense which he h>mselt 
 
 :re:rd:heTrn::>eaf perception o^ the di. Action -^^^ -.otio. 
 
 of the shfprde f^m these places. They are too distant ; the e.planafoa . 
 
 f J^ MTandTmprobable ; besides it is true of only part of the Peloponnes.aa 
 
 fl'^^ HeretaTAr^^ damages his own case. Surely a Peloponnes.an fleet 
 
 ^It ^uTdeTpeloponnesus a's ^ ia^^^ yv without descending mto part.cu. 
 might «.ns.aerr p ^_^ ^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ coast could be , 
 
 w/,^ to'th" Atheirans' Things are not described in ordinary narrative as 
 
 ^ytS::: SU::tclle.as I have there said, • the Uce 
 party descnooa a „,,^bolised to the Athenian mind, the aggregate of 
 
 tr:re: a^^r^ t*:: s^^k trthe French invasion of Russia though it 
 
 -^r/xnKoS:r:r;:i been ..hugged" by the eWs^ee. 
 J^^' ■ .„„1,1 h-we had no cause for alarm concerning Naupactus. Why 
 ^otTphol on wl 'utide of the straits, Naupictns within them. Suppose 
 bl to have remained outside, and the Peloponnesian fleet to have cont.n.«i 
 hm to have ^^"n*'" ^ binder them from making a sudden 
 
 would P^tably maRe v ^^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^.^^ { 
 
 Naupactus, It wonWde,p'«oJ .^^j,,^ ^„, ,,,„ t„ q„it Boulogne a» 
 
 : reVon,' -S- ilL ..i). Cape Grisnez, I «>nceive that an Eng * 
 :::::LI^ opposite them might well b-j-ned ^b-afety ^ .^^^^ 
 n .^♦. Va iiictifiAd in remaimnff at anchor, inis wouiu uo ^axi- . 
 
 :ht r :^ tte enS^^^^^^^^^ eonsisted^f screw steamers, to which the ancje. 
 triremes may be considered in some respect analogous on account of the. 
 
 ^ThelTelS^t^^^^^^^^^^^ important objections which can be ur^d 
 
 S ^::ri:^^^^ to fortify it b^y a very la^ cone^i. 
 of what he appears to consider similar instances. I cannot ^S^ee ^^ti^^^^^ 
 of what ne app deference, I must say that Hr. Grote 
 
 Z^ ^:!t^^e real poin^ at'issue. It is not whether the r^ e..e 
 r;:::. may not be referred to more than one sort ^^l^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 it is ever found where the antecedent would properly demand the demons: 
 
 pronoun instead. In the present case, Mr. Grote himself would readily sub- 
 stitute aina>u or iKeivwv ; in most of the cases cited by him it would be utterly 
 impossible to do so— e.g. iv. 97, ^Y iroiJ ris riva r5oi ix^phv kavrod; ii. 95, 
 nepSiKKM ahrv imoffx^yiivos, cl 'A0rji/afots 5iaAAa|€i€v kavrdv ; Xen. Anah. iv. 7» 
 ,3, Pdvdas . . . lUv Tiva Biovra. cbs ^(v|/oj/Ta kavr6v, imKati^dv^rai ^s ourbv kwXtJ- 
 Jv: iVfm.iv. 3. 14, 6 ^Atos ouk e'Trirpe'Trei toIs a;/0pc6irots kaxn)>v h.Kpi^S>s 6pS,/, &C. 
 In these cases if Mr. Grote alters the reflexive pronoun into the demonstrative, 
 he will obtain either no meaning at all, or one directly contrary to what the 
 author intended. But here, upon his hypothesis of the authors intention, 
 according to his own showing, a similar alteration would give the meaning with 
 certainty and clearness. In short, we want to know whether we can have the 
 reflexive pronoun in cases where we should have anticipated the demonstrative. 
 Nothing is proved in favour of the affirmative by producing cases where it is 
 impossible to expect the demonstrative at all. 
 
 One class of instances adduced by Mr. Grote it is perhaps desinible to notice, 
 because they involve a principle important to the younger scholar, which is not 
 very prominently brought forward in grammars and commentaries. Mr. Grote 
 justifies his loose way of taking havrwu here, by the fact that kavrov and iniivov 
 are sometimes found in the same sentence, in reference to the same person. 
 This is true ; but a very cursory examination of Mr. Grote's passages ^411 show 
 that they do not prove much in favour of his conclusion. The first is ii. 13, 
 neptKXrjs iiroTOir-haas, Srt 'Apx»Sa/iAOS ahr^ |ej/os S)V iriryxa^^, t^h TroWdnis, fj 
 oinhs i5(a fiovXSfievos x<^pK^<^^°-' "^^^^ "O'poi's ^-^od irapaAtTrr? Kot fi^ ^(i>av, ^ 
 Ka\ AaKiLifiovlwv K^X^vaivruiV iirl S.a/SoAf if kavrov y4v7iTai toCto, ScTTrep 
 Kol ra &yv f\a{>v€iv Trpo^t-Kov 'iv^Ka iKeivov, irpovy6p€V€ k.t.A. But here all 
 Ib quite regular. Anyone acquainted with the genius of the language, will per- 
 ceive that the introduction of the word Trpornrov completely changes the point 
 of riew from which the person is regarded, and with it the pronoun by which 
 he is designated. & {nroToirfjcras must have the reflexive, because both refer to 
 the same person ; ol irpoei^6pres on the contrary would naturally speak of him 
 
 as iKfivos. , r * > A fl 
 
 Again iv. 99, Ol 84 Boiccto\ 6.ir€KplvavT0, €(' /tej/ 4u rfj Botwria eifflv [01 A0tj- 
 moi], ^m6uras iK r^s UvtS>v ^irocp^peadai rk <r<p4r€pa' « 54 iu -nj iKeiv<cv, 
 ahrohs yiyv^oK^^v rb Troirjrc'or. In this most interesting passage [see commen- 
 tary ad locum], the whole thing turns upon the fact that the dispute about 
 locality is described strictly from the Boeotian point of view. The BoeotiMi 
 herald had orders to say if Delium was iMrs {kavrciy) the Athenians might 
 depart on certain terms; if it belonged to th^ other party {^K^iucoy), they of 
 course could do as they chose with their own. 
 
 In Xen. Hell. i. i. 27, caurwy refers to the generals as regarded by them- 
 selves, and iKdu(cv to the same generals, as regarded by those who had to elect 
 them. The pronouns could not be interchanged without violating the sense, 
 and neither this, nor either of the two previous passages, afford the least 
 countenance to such a misapplication of the reflexive pronoun, as Mr. Grote's 
 translation of the present one appears to me to exhibit. 
 
APPENDIX II. 
 
 385 
 
 APPENDE n. 
 
 On the Greek Aorist. 
 
 I woTTLT) propose to arrive at the meaning of the Aorist. as a tense of the 
 Greek Verb, by the process of exhaustion. 
 
 We can onlv comprehend the true mutual relation of the tenses, or Um,, 
 expressed by the verb, by regarding them from one fixed point of view. 
 
 Such a central sland-point in time, as the individual himself is m space, is 
 
 found in the present. _ , . 
 
 All other tenses or times must take up their position on one side of this or 
 
 the other. 
 
 First then of those behind it:— . 
 
 (,) One denotes an action simply past in reference to this pomt-the past 
 in reference to the present This is the proper perfect. 
 
 (2) Another denotes an action past in a complex or twofold way : i.e. past 
 in reference to some point of time, which is itself past in reference to the 
 present-the past in reference to the past. This is the pluperfect. 
 
 (i) Another denotes an action in a state of passing, and arrested at some 
 given point, which point is either the present, or past; perhaps, strictly speak- 
 ing. always the last. This is the imperfect. -a .f ih. 
 
 We have next to consider those times which lie at the other side of the 
 
 ^TiT One denotes an action future in respect of the present, without standing 
 in determinate relation to any other point of time-future in reference to the 
 present. The future, commonly so called. 
 
 (2) Another denotes an action future in respect of the present, but past n 
 reference to some determinate point which is itself future in respect of th. 
 present-the future in reference to the present, but past in reference to future 
 time. The second future, or future perfect. 
 
 This is an exhaustive analysis of the notion of time, or tense, as employed 
 
 the description of action. 
 
 Or, again, to take another method of analysis :— 
 
 Every action is either complete or incomplete. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in present time = Perfect [' I have . . . ], or pres 
 
 Complete or incomplete in past time = Pluperfect or imperfect. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in future time = Future perfect or future. 
 
 Here then we have a complete apparatus of tense or time for describing an. 
 action in its temporal relation to any other action, and when such is our oujec^ 
 
 we employ one of the above forms, among which, it is to be noted, the aorist 
 
 finds no place. „ , . xi, 1. 
 
 But we may also merely mean to declare the occurrence of an action without 
 ,„ object of the sort. Most languages employ for that purpose one of the same 
 Lses as would have been employed had the expression of a temporal relation 
 b«n required. The Greeks, who were, I believe, ' far more accurate speakers 
 ffld thinkers than oursekes,' seeing that a tense properly connoting a special 
 temporal relation ought not to be used where none such is impUed, adopted a 
 iJative tense, to serve simply as such, without any connotation of the re a- 
 tions of time at aU. This tense was the aorist, or indefinite, indeterminate 
 tense • and they made use of it when they merely wanted to say that something 
 had happened, without stopping to give any special infoi^tion """"""'"g »''; 
 relation in time of this something to anything else ; when, in short, the fact 
 was prominent in their mind, and the time of the fact altogether subordinate. 
 
 To this usage belong the great mass of aorists which encounter ns m narrative. 
 It is needless to give examples ; though some few have been pointed out in the 
 
 ^"Xtlherrare several particular usages of the aorist which so strongly 
 illustrate the principle, that it may be instructive to refer very briefly to 
 
 *™ irst, then, we have that common and acknowledged use of the aorist, wherein 
 it is said to resemble the imperfect, and is predicated of anything wont to 
 
 happen.' e.g. fPXa,^c 5rf|a, Eur. M.d.; Vip? ->> TP'L '^°"' T\JL 
 „I .6X.I, I Kiv .S T« ..-.fi.faSU. KM»p.aav, (Ed Col. .535; /'*'f'"« ^ ^-^ 
 hi in'^ea Sof^o,., olKo,s i^iS.H.y. Med. 130; H^ava^.M. 2^5] J""^"' 
 Ajax, 674. ' Instances, indeed, are quite innumerable. Now to consider these 
 iLt eai with the notion of habitual or continued action "edby he imper^ 
 feet seems to me altogether faUacious and unphilosoph.cal. They describe what 
 JC^^ned, is happening, and will happen again. To limi^ the action or event 
 ,„ any particular time would destroy the whole force of the expression No 
 .peciil time is connoted, and therefore we have the true -™'; ^the .eZt ' 
 Tte tense. The Latins conveyed the same force more clumsily by the perfec^ 
 ■«UM aversos Penates,' • dedu^nt corpore febres,' Horace ; 'ilUus immense, 
 ruperunt horrea menses,' Virgil, Georg. i. 49. where Forbiger observes igni- 
 fi^tione aoristi Graeci pro " rumpere solent," quod lU exphces. Jam aliquoties 
 niperunt, ideoque e4dem rerum conditione redeunte, etiam nunc rumpunt, et 
 
 "^tdri^Lion with this we have another usage of the aorist, which is 
 «id to be nearly equivalent to the present. This occurs where t^e co°-^''f " 
 of pure past time is clearly inappropriate, and where the action descnW by 
 the aorist is generalised so as to take in the notion of the present. Thus Dr 
 Peile explains ?KaK Choeph. 4.0, ' I am in the predicament rf one that before 
 BOW has'beaten-lnd hence, a beater, or one tMt beat. ^« -? ^'"P^. 
 t„„fa »«^^., (Ed. Col. .466, ■ I am in a state of terror ; ^in,«cra, 4f^'S^6. 
 _ '^ '^ ' -r t« Q ^ T 8ic- ^(boifa Aiax, 674., and Track. 
 
 Elect. 1322 ; Alcest. 1047 ; ^t€u|o, S. c. 1. 835 » «<PP'^«' ^J ' i^\ 
 1044. Eost, ^ 151, notices this class of cases as one expressed m all other 
 lan^ages b^ the p;esent, and, rightly I think, translates them thus: ^.K^a, 
 ' ich muss lachen j' 4M<^ ' ich muss seufeen,' &e. 
 
 c c 
 
 1 
 
^86 APPENDIX II. 
 
 From this indefinite acceptation of the tense, refusing, as it were, to connote 
 any exact temporal relation, we find grammarians and commentators telling us 
 that it stands first for one tense, then for another, as e.g. fo' the pluperfect 
 (Buttmann, Large Gr. Gr.). Of this no further proof is requisite than an 
 examination of that carefully edited and popular school-book, Xenophon's 
 Anabasis, by Macmichael (Grammar School Classics, 1851). There we find, 
 without advancing beyond lib. i. the aorist said to be put for the future [1. 2. 2.], 
 for the pluperfect [i. 4. Sl for the perfect [i. 6. 6], indifferently with the 
 imperfect [i. 9. 19]. Now, it is impossible to conceive that the Greeks can 
 have interchanged their tenses in this wild way. What we should say is, that, 
 in any of the above cases, had the writer wished accurately to connote the time 
 of the fact, and not simply to mention it, he might have used the future, or the 
 perfect, &c., mstead of the aorist. It is from the wide circumference of meaning 
 which this indeterminate sense of the aorist embraces, that it seems to trespass 
 upon the province of the other tenses. Nay, it does so even with regard to the 
 future, which is a source of no small difficulty and vexation to those commenta- 
 tors who persist in fixing upon it a definite connotation of past time. Such, for 
 instance, is its employment after verbs of promising, with an obviously future 
 force, e.g. {nroffxifi^vos airroh fih ^p^frQ^^ raiaatrdai, wplv ainohs Karaydyoi oUoSf, 
 Xen^Anab. i. 2. 2. koI irepl ti'^v roirt^v lnriffx^r6 fxoi ^ovK^iaaadai, ibid. 11. 
 3. 20. oIk olv XP^ 'TO'' eavdrov r^ C^/x/oi iriffrilxTavras x^^P^v fiovXeiaaaeai, 
 Thuc! iii. 46, said of the stiU pendent decision. uKhs U thai iroWohs kiroXn- 
 4,eriPai r|«, vi. 49, of a probable case, upon which GoU. remarks : * Aoristuspro 
 futuro post €Ik65, iX-nls et similia frequens est.' i) h^rvp vvv fih oterai rvxSyra 
 fi€ rwv hKaiioy wap ^p imoU^aaQai [Reiske, e conject. {nroUi^ffBaC] koI t^v 
 'aUK<phv iMativ, Dem. p. 842. 21. Here we have of two future events, the 
 aorist and future infinitives in conjunction. In a similar manner, 
 
 cTirfp ydp T€ Koi out(k* '0\<5/uir»05 ovk ireKtffffev, 
 (k t€ Kal 6^h T€X€i, <rvy re nfyd\cf> airfTiffav, 
 
 B. iv. 160, we have both tenses together, and as the fact denoted by the last 
 depends upon the first, it is absurd to say that it is more certain. And in the 
 other moods, we may remark the same connection with the future, e.g. ^ireiSdv 
 8€tirW3<T<»^€v, Anab. iv. 6. 17, is said of a problematical event. I beheve that a 
 similar absence of temporal connotation is found sometimes with respect to the 
 aor. part: e.g. rS>v ^vfnroXtfuiffivruv irpoi^xo*^". Thuc. i. 18, must, in its 
 collocation, be nearly equivalent to ^vti,xdx<^y. From this it follows, not that 
 the aorist can be indifferently substituted for any other tense, but that it may 
 stand for any tense, where the notion of the tifne connoted by that tense i3 
 absent from the writer's thoughts. No tense Umiting action to time would 
 seem so proper as the aorist m^Ma of John xvii. 4, or ol fih l^^^res koI Tritrrfv- 
 
 aavreSi xx. 29. , , 
 
 From the absence of all connotation of time properly so called, comes tnai 
 very curious use of the aorist, to express, so to speak, acts not defined as 
 happening at any time at all. These could not properly be described by any 
 tense specifying an actual time of occurrence, and it strongly supports our 
 theory of the aorist to find that the aorist alone is employed for the purpose. 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 
 387 
 
 We find it accordingly in the description of unfulfilled purposes, and intended, 
 though incomplete, actions. See e.g. Soph. AJ. 1 126-7 : 
 
 MEN. SiKata yhp rovh* evrvx^'^y Krclvavrd fie ; 
 
 TETK. KTtlvavra; deivov 7' eliras, el Kal Cv^ 6av(!>v. 
 
 Here the aorist has the sense of ' was my slayer; i.e. in intention, though not 
 in fact The usage perfectly agrees with our theory of the aorist. That of the 
 great Hermann does not seem very intelligible : ' Praesens prohibitum esse 
 facere rotisIms fecisse sed sine effectu significat: How to kill a man withont 
 effecting his death, seems rather a difficulty. Elmsley [Herachda, 1000] 
 dogmatically asserts-' Aoristus ejusque participium banc significationem 
 respuunt' But cf. tKruvd a" 6vra, addressed to a living person, Ion, 1291, 
 miW(ra, Andromeda, 811, K\4^as, (Ed. Col. 1008, said of an action attempted. 
 but never carried into execution. In Xen. Anab. ii. 6. 4, ^e find ^davar^Qv said 
 of a person still alive, in fact, only sentenced to death; and Herod, vii. 10. 2, 
 supplies us with a very curious instance, ou/c Siv aixtporipri <r<pi ix<^P'n<re, said 
 of what is future and h}T)othetical. 
 
 The general conclusion, therefore, at which we arrive is, that the aonst is 
 properly a narrative tense, not connoting any one particular determinate notion 
 of time, and that accordingly it is employed of actions or events occurring 
 under all sorts of relations of time. Hence the attempt to assign to it any 
 special temporal connotation tends to confound it with other tenses, and obscure 
 the true metaphysical conception of its nature. This is, I think, the fault of 
 Buttmann's theory, so generally accepted, that the aorist signifies momentary 
 action. It is very true that, generally, the aorist is used to describe momentary 
 actions. But this must be so from the nature of the case, where the act is not 
 determined either in its occurrence or progress by defining its temporal relation 
 to other actions. Momentary, in the sense of lasting for a moment cannot be 
 assigned to the aorist as its essential signification. Many actions described by 
 the aorist last for a long time, and many actions lasting only for a moment are 
 imribed by the other tenses. Want of space forbids the enumeration of passages 
 which I had selected in illustration. It is enough to quote Buttmann s own 
 translator, who cites II. i. 437-8, where the acts described by the aorist are of 
 as long duration as those described by the imperfect. Cf. note on TrpofJrale Kai 
 kiK,v., Thuc. iii. 112. Similarly, I do not think it right to assign, with Jelf, 
 and Mr. Shilleto {De Falsd Legatione, p. 181), to the aorist, as its distinctive 
 sense, a meaning which is admitted to be proper to the perfect, i.e. to have 
 completed an action. The latter thus translates Thuc. vi. 23, JKirKuv . . . 4K' 
 tMvcai, ' to commence the voyage, to have finished the voyage. What then is 
 k7c,ir\,vK4pai? Why should not the first mean ^now to be sailing, ^nd the 
 second speak merely in general terms, • to saU V Indeed, in the second passage 
 quoted by Mr. Shilleto, he seems to adopt a similar principle of explanation, 
 e.g. viii. 46, where he translates iKeve.povv, 'to liberate; iXeve^pSxrai, ' not to 
 apply the principle in liberating; It is to be wished that Mr. Shilleto would 
 turn his attention to the subject, as he is of all persons best qualified to eluci- 
 date it. There are many subordinate questions which would be benefited by 
 Mch an investigation. I do not, for instance, think the common rules about fxv 
 ^ith the imperative pres. and aor. subjunctive, quite satisfactory. Can it be 
 
 P 
 
388 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 
 .roved that the first is always general, and the latter ,Mrl^ It may^be 
 ^rtic^ar, when followed by some particular objective ease but is it so univer 
 sally? What, then, are we to make of Soph. Meet. 3»3 4 f 
 
 ^pbs raxna ^pd^ov, Koi m^ M^ ^o0' ^crrepoy 
 -iraOovffa fJiifJ-^V' 
 T, not uh «X^. rather 'don't be stealing now,' Hibernici. 'don't be after 
 f Ji / andT; Z^. ' lon't steal,' and ' don't steal some .artu^Ur tUn,; 
 when that particular thing is mentioned ? 
 
 By way of conclusion, I would remark that we may answe the old stock 
 question [Elmsley ad Med. 78] very easily on the above pnnciples. 
 ^ V" 8«..eT.-' hefore 1 a.n supping; i.e. before I g^ ^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ .^ ^^^^ 
 xl 5e5«^vr,K.Va.-' 6r/or. / Aai;. rfo;». supper; 1. e. before supper is over. 
 wp\y 5«irv^(rai-perfectly general. Before supper time. 
 
 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA, Lib. I. 
 
 
 Chapter 
 I. («•) 
 
 VI. (a.) 
 
 {d.) 
 
 Xin. {e.) 
 
 XXXII. (6.) 
 
 XXXIV. (b.) 
 
 XUI. (c.) 
 L. (a.) 
 
 LXIX. (c.) 
 XCVII. (6.) 
 
 cvn. (6.) 
 
 5«^ «.g««m ^..^a ..n^ The ref. is Bloomfields. But the 
 parallel^ is removed if we tr. 'which kave e- been wage 
 I roh -npSno. may perhaps stand as a nominative, the whole 
 three words having coalesced into one from habit, and being 
 so declined ; cf. ^<rr\v tn. and similar phrase^. ^ 
 yet one Schol. has atriov ahr^ rr^s ^rr^s iy^v^ro. It is not 
 
 easy to see how. _ „„_^,, 
 
 after Bl. read ' take fc<n. with 5^ and tr. ' always, as I suppose 
 
 for certain, had a mart; 
 
 ad fin., ' cf. by aU means, Dem. de Cor. p. 277. «' r^v l^"""« 
 
 irvKaiay ic.t.\.' , 
 
 ad fin., ' or perhaps we may refer S^o/x.Vor. to the speakers.- 
 
 « .0 ^Aa^ y^; m«2/ not in a matter of deceit be led astray by them, 
 
 and in a matter of open request refuse us assistance. 
 
 ad fin., ' rh does not, of course, appertain to the infinitive, but 
 
 rh -k\4qv is the object of ^x***'-' . „ ^ , ^. .1 
 
 ad fin., ' perhaps, after all. the term is -^tentionally techn -^ 
 
 -performing the operation of the 5..k.AoCs upon the dispersed 
 
 ships ;— charging them over and over again.' 
 
 ad fin., /or ' supra a,' %.• supra b.' 
 
 after ' importance,' add^ ' see Appendix U. 
 
 after KcoX{,<ruu, transpose ' and ^^eXAor, &c.' to the end of tne 
 
 note on l/ieXAov. 
 
 CJ-A.3>TXJ-A-I^"^ 1870-] 
 
 GENERAL nST OE WORKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND GO. 
 
 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. 
 
 History and Politics, 
 
 LOED MACAXTLAY'S WORKS. Complete and Uniform Library 
 Edition. Edited by his Sister. Lady Teevelyak 8 vols. 8vo. with Portrait, 
 price £5 5». cloth, or £S 8s. bound in tree-calf by Rivi^re. 
 The HISTORY of ENGLAND from the Fall of Wolsey to the Defeat 
 of the Spanish Armada. By James .^^^hont Eboude MA. late FeUow 
 of Exeter College, Oxford. 12 Vols. 8vo. price £3 18*. clcth. 
 The HISTORY of ENGLAND from the Accession of James H. By 
 Lord Macaulay. • 
 
 LiBKABY Edition. 5 vols. 8vo. £4. 
 Cabinet Edition, 8 vols, post 8vo. 48». 
 People's Edition, 4 vols, crown 8vo. 16*. 
 
 At, vsqAY on the HISTORY of the ENGLISH GOVEENMENT and 
 ^SSAY on ^f;® *^JJ^"^.^^ "'f Henry VII. to the Present Time. By 
 Sohn^EabS'rSS.' &th'EdS revised. Crown8vo.6*. 
 SPPPPWBS of EARL RUSSELL, 1817-1841. Also Despatdies 
 '^^sS from C™ndence P-ented t. Parl^m^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Introductions to the Speeches and Despatches, by Earl ^YNmrly^eJj 
 
 VARIETIES of VICE-REGAL LIFE. By Major- General Sir Will^^ 
 Denisok. K.C.B. 2V013.8VO. ^}^'''';^Z 
 
 On PAELIAMENTAEY GOVEENMENT in ENGLAND : Its Origin 
 De^opm^nt. and Practical Operation. By Alpheus Todd. Librarian of 
 the il^iSative Assembly of Canada. 2 vols. 8vo. price £1 17*. 
 
 HISTORY of the REFORM BILLS of 1866 and 1867. By Homersham 
 Cox, M.A. Barrister-atLaw. 8vo. 7». 6d. 
 
 Antient Parliamentary Elections, a History shewing how Parlia- 
 ments were Constituted, and Representatives or the People Elected, m 
 Ancient Times. By the same Author. 8vo. 8«.6d. 
 
 Whig and Tory Administrations dnring the Last Thirteen Years. 
 By the same Author. 8vo. 5». 
 
 rOWBOir: PEIWTETJ BY 
 
 BPOTTI8WOODB AND CO.. NEW-STRKBT SQUIBB 
 
 iJKD PABI.IAMENT 8IB£BI 
 
NEW W0EK8 PTJBLISHED BY LONGMANS AKD CO. 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS Am) CO. 
 
 Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 33*. 
 HISTORICAL STUDIES. By Heeman Merivale, M.A. 8vo. price 
 
 BEVOLUTIONS in ENGLISH HISTORY. By Robert Vaughan.D.D. 
 
 SEEBOHM. Second Edition, enlarged. 8vo. 14». 
 
 . ^-rcr/tw «* "OTATPq Hprived from Authentic Sources. By Jane 
 A HISTORY of WALiiS, denvea ^^y^f^ ^ Thomas Price, and 
 
 WILLIAMS, Ysfrafell. Author of a Memoir of the Rev. inom 
 
 Editor of his Literary Remains. 8vo. 14«. 
 
 and Illustrations. 8vo. 16*. «,^ ,^ frirr-Dn 
 
 l^rth.^^nTpfetetoBX. a vols, crown 9VOS4.. . ,„,. gv 
 
 WATEKLOO I.ECTTOES:. Study .of^h^S^TMnUaJy*'^ .nS 
 
 So?^ SftlS.^crgr5e^lai«ol ^^! With Map. IC. 0.. 
 DEMOCbIcT in AMERICi. By Alexis D= TocQxnmLLZ. Trans- 
 
 lated by HBSET ESETS. a vols. 8vo. 21.. 
 
 TITSTOSY Of the EEF0BMATI05 in KHEOPE in Ae /nme of 
 
 «Sd and ^^0^. ^, ,^\TLr.2fI-tn.^X,T^ 
 
 rup*?s;jftiraadr&»"'»"'^«^^->'*- "' ^"^""^ "^^^ '"• 
 
 mSTORY oTpBANCE, from Cloyis and Chariemagne to theAcces- 
 
 T./HimKY^'of OEEECE. By C. TBntLWAU, D.D. Ix.rd Bishop 
 
 THo^ALTrtrOErATTEKSlTlT WAB, from the Historic, of 
 %l"ftu^. ByGEOBaB^7.Cox,M.A. New Edition. Pep. 3,. 6*. 
 
 OBEEK HISTOET from Themistoclee »» AlexandCT. in a Seri«^of 
 
 Lives from Plutarch. Eevised and arranged by A. H. Clocgh. Jrcp. w»ii 
 
 M Woodcuts, 6». ,, , 
 
 -„T.i.T^»T TTTcsTmiT of the lANGTJAGE and IITEBATTTEE 01 
 
 <^'S S" B^wU^lMoL^fCaldwell. 6 vols. Bvo. ^ 9,. 
 
 wTQTmiY Of the LITEBATTJEE of ANCIENT GEEECE. By Bro- 
 
 Maps, 15*. 
 EOMAN HISTOEY. By W11.H..M I^. ^^^^^^^^^^IZ^^^f 
 i'S?,^w1?k°^ill\rp.^SsSeV-to|^?i.erpy^^^^^^^ and the whole work 
 ^1 bTcompleted i.i Three or at most Four Volumes. 
 
 HISTOEY of the BOMANS under the EMPIEE. By the Very Kev. 
 
 C MEKITAIE. D.C.L. Deau of Ely. 8 vols, post 8vo. 48.. 
 The FAIL of the EOMAN BEPTJBLIC; a Short History of the tart 
 
 cfntir of the Commonwealth. By the same Author. 12mo.7..M. 
 
 Tt,. -HTSTOEY of INDIA, from the Earliest Period to the close of Lord 
 %^Ss^ALllt«Tion. ByJonsCiiBKJUBaHMA^. 3vol..crown 
 
 8vo. 22s. Gd. . . . • T J • 
 
 TWT^TAV POTTTY • a View of the System ef Administration in India. 
 ^^ r'v MaifrSoE C^^^^^ the University of Calcutta. 8vo. 
 
 with Map, 21s. ^ V /M *!. 
 
 wnwT? POLITICS: being a consideration of the Causes of the Growth 
 ^'of^TrTinSon ti Lbour. Pauperism, a.d Emi^^ation. ^By D^iex. 
 
 Grant. 8vo. -r j a 
 
 PI? AT TTTFS of IRISH LIFE. By W. Steuart Trench, Land Agent 
 
 ?^.J;bk J^T^r ^SSi SioS^w^h lo Plites.. 8V0. 21s. 
 
 Av TTT TITRATED HISTORY of IRELAND, from the Earliest 
 Penc^ to t^e Year of Catholic Emancipation By Mary F. Cusack. 
 Second Edition, revised and enlarged. 8vo. 18s. &d. 
 
 CRITICAL and HISTORICAL ESSAYS contributed to the Edinburgh 
 Review. By the Right Hon. Lord Macaulay. 
 Cabinet Edition, 4 vols, post 8vo. 24s. 
 Library Edition, 3 vols. 8vo. 36s. 
 People's Edition. 2 vols, crown 8vo. Ss. 
 Student's Edition, in One Volume, crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 flftTi in WTSTORY • or, the Progress of Man's Faith in the Moral 
 ^ i^A ffh. World Bvtho late Baron Bunsen. Translated ft-om the 
 Order of the World «y ^"^ '^^^^ ^-^^^ ^ preface by Dean Stanley. In 
 German by SUSANNA wi:Nb.>>vjM.ia, ^ ucarlv ready. 
 
 Three Volumes. Vols. L and II. 8vo. oOs. \ ol. in. ueari^ reaujr. ., 
 
OTW ^onm^v«^^^^^^lJf^2!^^l^^^^ 
 
 HI8T0ET .f ^OPEAK M0UAI8 JJ.m f^^Z'^^^"''^'' 
 By W. E. H. LECKT, M.A. SeMnd tmv ^j 
 
 HI8T0BT .f th. W« 1° VwTh^^-kt. mX Cabinet Bditton. 
 being the Fourth «'»;». ""'"^ "j^^^ Th»,e9 to Comte. Bj 
 
 GBOEQB HENBT LBWB9. ^■""' „,_,n^a Bt Gkobge W. 
 
 The MYTHOLOGY of tl»e, .*^^*^.i'oitordJo,nt."Editor, with the 
 
 'ili^eSJi«";'n5rt%°ur/o?^.le. of Ancient Greece. ^*c.^^ ^^^, 
 EGYPT'S PLACE in tmiVHtSAl fflSi/c.^SK!! 
 
 vj-s PLACE in TWIVEESAl HISTQBl j^ an ^^^ „j^ 
 
 ^«on, Bj^Ba™n_^Bus8BN^D.CX.j^^^^^ _ ^^ 
 
 ptJo;. By Baron BnssBN D.aL Tram^ea^ u,^^^^, ^^ ^_ 
 ^ith Additions by S. B'»'^=' ';^. ■ ^ . ,„„„i8ine a General In 
 WAimDES'S HISTOKICAL TBEASTOY , compriBing ^^^^^ 
 
 SM«[SriS£K^&ti^oKo\^f^ 
 
 l3Ii„fo?l'^^nrX«oS5.^'^eMO..e. 
 HXSTOBT or t.e^«OB«A^^^^jSef BfT-L^orio^XBarrister, 
 
 ""S t^U conversion of Co^^,^t,neB^^^^^^ 3.. ,,. 
 
 PTof.ofDivimtyintheUniv.oru«or 6 EH6LAHD to the 
 
 SJ^CH of t^e HIS^OEY of t^^SevTv^|„'i. B^. Lord Bishop of 
 
 rAtriM"-^-r:;t First PreacMngof the 
 HI8T0EY of the EABLY CHTOCH, trom ^°« ^^^^^^ m. Sewbll. 
 
 Author of Amy Hemn^ Massinoberd, M.A- 
 
 "'^S^of LLra^?^Io°^^«°-^«-''^- ^»^^^^^ 
 Pep. 8vo. Is. &d. 
 
 Biography and Memoirs. 
 
 -S^^ry'?f^K!,^^»«^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^/^rfr^UvlB^ -0«WELL, to the Death o, Carlesl. B, 
 
 '^^TA^BBWS.BarnsU.-at.Law 8vo^»- 
 
 A LIFE of the THIED E^«\^'„,f„*^Tue Philccphy of the Period. 
 W£e\%" m" hT ";,' ll^'^er "of Ne. C„,ie«e. <Mo^^^^^ 
 
 UVES of the aiIEE»S of ENGLAND By^ A ^^^„_^„^„,„^^^ 
 
 I'^^'T ^ijlL°"'8"voi 'P sfo. 7» w'^Scb. 
 
 and Vignettes. 8 vols, po fw,™ VamiW Papers 
 
 HKHOIBSofBAEOHBIINSEH^^m-ehieflyfr^^^^^ 
 
 by his Widow F^t^TooS" 2voS^post8vo.ai.. 
 
 ,^th 2 Portraits and 4 >*oodcu.s^ COBNEWAlt 
 
 ^Sr?dit:'dr.ito»?^V.B\G.P.LB...Ba;^^^^^^^ 
 
 8vo. with Portrait, 55. „ t ti TJrwMAN D.D- 
 
 HISTOBY Of HY BELIGIOnS Onm^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Being the Substance of Apo ogia pro ^^^^^ 
 
 TATHEB MATHEW •• ^Sr^^^'P"*-^^""™ '"" ''•''• 
 
 M.P. for cork. Popular Edition, w, Switeerfo«<J, 
 
 mix MENBELSS0HN.8 LEmBSJ.^^^^ ,,„,,«on. 
 
 -rP?r'[?a(i:»'?^^^----7r;^ ^„^ BWoH^C^nK 
 KMOIBS of 83.HENBY HAVELO«, I^^^^^ 
 
 MiESDMAK. Cabinet Edition, w t,tsC0VEEIE8. ISmo. 
 
 CAPTAIN COOK'S LIFE, VOYAGES, and DI8C0VEBI 
 
 Woodcuts, 2s. 6d. BUBKK C.B. 
 
 VICISSITBBES 0fJ^«^«'iait^^.fiLieiS »d eniarged. '..voU. 
 Ulster King of Arms, x^cw 
 
 crown 8vo.2l». « , xr vioTTamilv of Forbes. 
 
 ™EXAELSofGBANABB:aMe™oiroJ^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 r^rB^lsx^lTorirSe*-'--^'^^- 7-;^; _ ,, Hon. 
 .SSAYS in BCCLESIASTim BI0G^f„^^^^ 
 
 MA^^B^r^ oi^PmCAL , TBEA8.B. ^ --^ JS 
 re™icted,thorouglily revved a^dm^ea^^ Fcp.l0..6d. 
 
 Hmo additional Memoirs and Notices, Dy q^..^. 
 
 lETTEBS and LIFE of FBANCI8 Bf ON inc^dmg al|h>8^0cc 
 
 '^SwortlMlect^-\t^fl-.^t5^^^^^^^^ 
 Trin. CoU. Cantab, vols. i. anu xa. 
 
 I* 
 
 i 
 
NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS akd CO. 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS aitd 00. 
 
 Criticism^ Philosophy, Polity, &xj. 
 
 The INSTITUTES of JUSTINIAN; with English Introduction, Trans- 
 lation, and Notes. By T. C. Saitdaes, M.A. Barrister, late Fellow of Oriel 
 Coll. Oxon. New Edition. 8vo. 15s. 
 
 SOCRATES and the SOCRATIC SCHOOLS. Translated from the 
 German of Dr. E. Zellek, with the Author's approval, by the Eev. Oswald 
 J. Reichel, B.CL. and M.A. Crown 8vo. 8*. 6d. 
 
 The STOICS, EPICUREANS, and SCEPTICS. Translated from the 
 German of Dr. E. Zellee. with the Author's approval, by Oswald J. 
 Reichel, B.C.L. and M.A. Crown Svo. INearly ready. 
 
 The ETHICS of ARISTOTLE, illustrated with Essays and Notes. 
 
 By Sir A. Grant, Bart. M.A. LL.D. Second Edition, revised and completed. 
 
 2 vols. Svo. price 28*. 
 The NICOMACHEAN ETHICS of ARISTOTLE newly translated into 
 
 English. By R. Williams, B. A. Fellow and late Lecturer of Merton College, 
 
 and sometime Student of Christ Church, Oxford. 8vo. 12*. 
 
 ELEMENTS of LOGIC. By R. Whatelt, D.D. late Archbishop of 
 Dublin. New Edition. 8vo. 10s. &d. crown Svo. 4». M. 
 
 Elements of Rhetoric. By the same Author. New Edition. 8yo. 
 10*. Qd. crown Svo. 4*. 6cf. I 
 
 English Synonymes. By E. Jane Whatelt. Edited by Archbishop 
 
 Wuately. 5th Edition. Fcp. Ss. 
 
 BACON'S ESSAYS with ANNOTATIONS. By R. Whatelt, D.D. 
 
 late Archbishop of Dublin. Sixth Edition. Svo. 10s. Gd. 
 
 LORD BACON'S WORKS, collected and edited by R. L. Ellis, M.A. 
 J. Spedding, M.A. and D. D. Heath.' Vols. I. to V. Philosophical Workt, 
 6 vols. Svo. £4 6«. VOLS. VI. and VII. Litei^ary and Professional Worki 
 2 vols. £1 16«. 
 
 ENGLAND and IRELAND. By John Stuart Mill. Fifth Edition, 
 
 8vo. 15. 
 
 The SUBJECTION of WOMEN. By John Stuart Mill. New 
 
 Edition, post Svo. 5*. 
 On REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNMENT. By John Stuart Mill. 
 
 Third Edition. Svo. 9*. Crown Svo. 25. 
 
 On LIBERTY. By John Stuart Mill. Fourth Edition. Post 
 
 8vo. 7*. 6d. Crown 8vo. 1». 4d. 
 Principles of Political Economy. By the same Author. Sixth 
 
 Edition. 2 vols. Svo. 305. Or in 1 vol. crown Svo. 5*. 
 A System of Logic, Ratiocinative and Inductive. By the same 
 
 Author. Seventh Edition. Two vols. Svo. 255. 
 ANALYSIS of Mr. MILL'S SYSTEM of LOGIC. By W. StebbikO, 
 
 M.A. FeUow of Worcester College. Oxford. New Edition. 12mo. 35. 6d. 
 
 UTILITARIANISM. By John Stuart Mill. Third Edition. Svo. 5*. 
 
 DISSERTATIONS and DISCUSSIONS, POLITICAL, PHILOSOPHI- 
 CAL, and HISTORICAL. By John Stuaet Mill. Second Edition, revised. 
 8 vols. Svo. 365. 
 EXAMINATION of Sir W. HAMILTON'S PHILOSOPHY, and of the 
 Principal Philosophical Questions discussed in his Writings. By JoHK 
 Stuaet Mill. Tliird Edition. Svo. 165. 
 An OUTLINE of the NECESSARY LAWS of THOUGHT : a Treatise 
 on Pure and Anplied Logic. By the Most Rev. Wiu-iam. Lord Arch- 
 bishop of York. D:D. F.R.S. Ninth Thousand. Crown Svo. 55. 6d. 
 The ELEMENTS of POLITICAL ECONOMY. By Henry Dunnwo 
 
 MACLEOD, M.A. Barrister-at-Law. Svo. 165. 
 k Dictionary of Political Economy ; Biographical, Bibliographical, 
 
 Historical, and Practical. By the same Author. Vol. I. royal Svo. 805. 
 The ELECTION of REPRESENTATIVES, Parliamentary and Muni- 
 cipal ; a Treatise. By Thomas Haee, Barrister-at-Law. Third Edition, 
 with Additions. Crown 8vo.6«. 
 SPEECHES of the RIGHT HON. LORD MACAULAY, corrected by 
 
 ffimself. Library Edition, Svo. 125. People's Edition, crown Svo. 3». 6d. 
 Lord Macanlay's Speeches on Parliamentary Reform in 1831 and 
 
 1832. 16mo. 1». 
 INAUGURAL ADDRESS delivered to the University of St. Andrews. 
 
 By JoHif Stuart Mill. Svo. 55. People's Edition, crown Svo. 15. 
 A DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By R G. Latham, 
 M A M D F R.S. Founded on the Dictionary of Dr. Samuel Johnson. ^ 
 Slit^dby the ^v.H. J.ToDD.iwith numerous Emendations and Additions. 
 In Four Volumes, 4to. price £7. , ./. j ;■ 
 
 THESAURUS of ENGLISH WORDS and PHRASES, classified and 
 mrran^ed so as to facilitate the Expression of Ideas, and assist m Literary 
 SiSsition By P. M. Roget, M.D. New Edition. Crown Svo. IO5. ftJ. 
 
 LECTURES on the SCIENCE of LANGUAGE, delivered at the Royal 
 
 LiStiUJiJ^o on 1.U0 Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 
 
 J^^Kv"- IfR^T^SEaS's^Fif^ Edi^^^^^^ SECOND SERIES. Second 
 
 CHAPTERS oil LANGUAGE. By Frederic W. Fabrar, F.R.S. late 
 
 Fellow of Trin. Coll. Cambridge. Crown Svo. 85. 6d. 
 WORD-GOSSIP ; a Series of Familiar Essays on Words and their 
 
 Pecuharmes. 'sy the Rev.W. L. Blacklet, M.A. f P' S^^' f . _ ,. , 
 A BOOK ABOUT WORDS. By G. F. Graham, Author of Enghsh, 
 
 or the Art of Composition/ &c. Fcp. Svo. pnce 85. 6d. ^.,,^ 
 
 The DEBATER ; a Series of Complete Debates, Outlines of Debates, 
 
 and Questions for Discussion. By F. RowTON. Fcp 65. 
 MANUAL of ENGLISH LITERATURE, Historical and Critical. By 
 
 THOMAS ARNOLD. M.A. Sccoud Edition. Crown 8^0. pnce 75 6d. 
 SOUTHEY'S DOCTOR, complete in One Volume. Edited by the Bev. 
 
 J. W. Warter. B.D. Square crown Svo. 125. 6d. 
 HISTORICAL and CRITICAL COMMENTARY on the OLD TESTA- 
 
 165. or adapted for the General Reader, 85. . 
 
 it 
 
NEW WORKS PFBLTSHBD BY LONGMANS and OO. 
 
 NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LON GMANS akd CO. 
 
 A HEBBEW GBAMMAE, with EXEECISE8. By M. M. KALiscff, 
 
 Ph D PaeT I. Outlines with Exercises. 8vo. 12*. 6d. KEY, 5#. Pabt II. 
 
 JSxceptional Forms and Constructions, 12». 6d. 
 A LATIK-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. By J. T. White, B.D. of 
 
 Corpus Christi College, and .I.E. Riddle. M.A. of St Edmund HaU, Oxford. 
 
 Thi?d Edition. revisJd. 2 vols. 4to. pp. 2,128. price 4,2s. cloth. 
 
 White's College Latin-English Dictionary (Intermediate Size), 
 abridged for the use of University Students from the Parent Work (as 
 above). Medium 8vo. pp. 1,018, price 18«. cloth. 
 
 White's Junior Student's Complete Latin-English and English-Latin 
 Dictionary. Nevr Edition. Square 12ino. pp. 1.05S, price 12*. 
 
 , , (The ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY, price 5*. 6d. 
 Separately | rjij^g LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, price 7«. 6<i. 
 
 An ENGLISH-GEEEK LEXICON, containing all the Greek Words 
 used by Writers of good authority. By C. D. Yonge, B.A. New Edi- 
 tion. 4tO. 21«. 
 
 Mr YONGE'S NEW LEXICON, English and Greek, abridged from 
 his larger work (as above). Revised Edition. Square 12mo. 8*. 6d. 
 
 A GEEEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. Compiled by H. G. Liddel^ D.D. 
 
 SZn of Christ Church, and R. Scott. D.D. Master of BalhoL Fifth Edition. 
 
 Crown 4to. 31*. 6d. 
 A Lexicon, Greek and English, abridged from Liddell and Scott 8 
 
 Greek-Enclish Lexicon. Twelfth Edition. Square 12mo. Is. 6d. 
 
 A SANSEHIT-ENGLISH DICTIONAKY, the Sanskrit words printed 
 both in the original Devanagari and in Roman Letters. Compiled, by 
 T. Benpby, Prof, in the Univ. of Gottingen. 8vo. 52*. 6d. 
 
 WALKER'S PEONOTTNCING DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LAN- 
 
 GUAGE. Thoroughly revised Editions, by B.U. Smart. 8vo.l2«. 16rao.6». 
 
 A PEACTICAL DICTIONAEY of the FEENCH and ENGLISH LAN- 
 
 GUAGES. By L. CoKTANSEAU. Fourteenth Edition. Post 8vo. 10*. 6a. 
 
 Contanseau's Pocket Dictionary, French and English, abridged from 
 the above by the Author. New Edition, revised. Square 18mo. 8<. 6d. 
 
 NEW PEACTICAL DICTIONARY of the GEEMAN LANGUAGE; 
 
 German-English and English-German. By the R«v. W. L. Blackley. MX 
 
 and Dr. Gael Martin Feiedlandee. Post 8vo. /«. 6d. 
 The MiSTEEY of LANGUAGES; or, the Art of Speaking Foreign 
 
 Tongues Idiomatically. By Thomas Prexdeegast, late of the CivU 
 
 Service at Madras. Second Edition, 8vo. 6». 
 
 Miscellaneous Works and Popular Metaphysics, 
 
 The ESSAYS and CONTEIBUTIONS of A. K. H. B., Author of* The 
 Recreations of a Country Parson.' Uniform Editions :— 
 
 Becreations of a Country Parson. By A. K. H. B. First and Second 
 Series, crown 8to. Zs. 6d. each. 
 
 The Common-place Philosopher in Town and Country. By A. K. 
 
 H. B. Crown 8vo. price 3«. 6d. 
 Leisure Hours in Town; Essays Consolatory, .ffisthetical, Moral, 
 
 Social, and Domestic. By A. K. H. B. Crown 8vo. 3*. M. 
 The Autumn Holidays of a Country Parson; Essays contributed 
 
 to Fraser's Magazine and to Good Words. By A.K.H.B. Crown 8vo.35. 6d. 
 
 The Graver Thoughts of a Country Parson. By A. K. H. B. First 
 and Second Series, crown Svo. 3«. 6d. each. 
 
 Critical Essays of a Country Parson, selected from Essays con- 
 tributed to Fraser's Magazine. By A. K. H. B. Crown Svo. 'is. M. 
 
 Sunday Afternoons at the Parish Church of a Scottish University 
 City. By A. K. H, B. Crown Svo. 3«. 6d. 
 
 Lessons of Middle Age ; with some Account of various Cities and 
 Men. By A. K. H. B. Crown Svo. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Counsel and Comfort spoken from a City Pulpit. By A. K. H. B. 
 Crown Svo. price Zs. Gd, 
 
 Changed Aspects of Unchanged Truths ; Memorials of St. Andrews 
 Sundays. By A. K. H.B. Crown Svo. 3*. tW. 
 
 SHORT STUDIES on GEEAT SUBJECTS. By James Anthony 
 Froude, M. a. lato Fellow ot Exeter Coll. Oxford. Third Edition. Svo. 12s. 
 
 ICED MACAULAY'S MISCELLANEOUS WEITINGS :— 
 
 Library Edition. 2 vols. Svo. Portrait, 21s. 
 People's Edition. 1 vol. crown 8vo. 4s. M. 
 
 The EEV. SYDNEY SMITH'S MISCELLANEOUS WOEKS ; includ- 
 ing his Contributions to tho Edinburgh Review. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 The Wit and Wisdom of the Eev. Sydney Smith: a Selection of 
 the most memorable Passages in his Writings and Conversation. 16mo. 3«. 6rf. 
 
 TRACES of HISTOEY in the NAMES of PLACES; with a 
 
 Vocabulary of the Roots out of which Names of Places in England and Wales 
 are formed. By Flavbll Edmunds. Crown Svo. 7s. 6rf. 
 
 ESSAYS selected from CONTEIBUTIONS to the Edinburgh Review, 
 By Henry Rogers. Second Edition. 3 vols. fcp. 21s. 
 
 Reason and Faith, their Claims and Conflicts. By the same Author. 
 New Edition, accompanied by several other Essays. Crown Svo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 The Eclipse of Faith ; or, a Visit to a Religious Sceptic. By the 
 same Author. Twelfth Edition. Fcp. 5s. 
 
 Defence of the Eclipse of Faith, by its Author j a rejoinder to Dr. 
 Newman's .Eflp^y. Third Edition. Fcp. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Selections from the Correspondence of E. E. H. Greyson. By the 
 
 same Author. Third Edition. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 FAMILIES of SPEECH, Four Lectures delivered at the Royal 
 
 Institution of Groat Britain ; with Tables and a Map. By the Rev. F. W. 
 
 Farear, M.A. F.R.S. late Fellow of Trinity College, CambridRe. 
 
 llfearly ready. 
 
 m 
 
10 
 
 NEW WORKS PIJBLISHBD BY LONGMANS AJSD CO. 
 
 INEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 11 
 
 CHIPS from a GEEMAN WOBKSHOP; being Essays on the Science 
 
 with an index. 2 vols. 8vo. 24». «„„.» uttwti Tl 
 
 ANALYSIS of the PHENOMENA of the HUMAN MIND. By 
 ^""SmxI 'a New Edi^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^^.l^^aiiSnS^Sef^^^^^^^^^ 2 vols. 8vo. price 28.. 
 
 An INTKODTJCTION to MENTAL PHILOSOPHY, on the Indnctive 
 
 Method. ByJ.D.MoRELL,M.A.LL.D. 8V0.12*. - ,, t„,^,i«^„^. 
 
 Elements of Psychology, containing the Analysis of the Intellectual 
 
 Powers. By the same Author. Post 8vo. 7». 6d. . n-: • 
 
 The SECRET of HEGEL: being the Hegelian System ^ Ongin, 
 
 Principle Form, and Matter. By J. H. SxiELi^a. 2 vols. 8vo. 28,. 
 iri,. <»T'NqFS and the INTELLECT. By Alexander Bain, M.D. 
 '^'^'pSr of Lo'c\nl.eUn^^ Third Edition. 8voa5, 
 
 The EMOTIONS and the WILL. By the same Anthor. Second 
 
 Edition, 8vo. 15«. ^ .. . r T>t,««,xi«/«, 
 
 On the STUDY of CHARACTER, inclndingan Estimate of Phrenology. 
 
 By the same Author. 8vo. 9,. 
 ifTTNTAL and MORAL SCIENCE: a Compendium of Psychology 
 "fndmics By thet^e Author. Second EditW Crown 8vo. 10*. 6d. 
 STRONG AND FREE; or, First Steps towards Social Science By 
 
 thf Author of ' My Life, and What shall I do with it ? ' 8vo. price m. 6d. 
 The PHILOSOPHY of NECESSITY; or, Natural Law as applicable to 
 
 Mental Moral, and Social Science. By Chaeles Beat. Second Edition. 
 
 The^ Education of the Feelings and Affections. By the same Anthor. 
 
 Third Edition. 8vo. 3«. 6d. „ , a *i,«. 
 
 On Force, its Mental and Moral Correlates By the same Author. 
 
 8vo. 5«. _ ^ T 
 
 MIND and MANNER, or DIVERSITIES of LIFE. By James 
 Flamank. Post 8to. 7*. 6d. „,„t.o 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS of MEN, MANNERS, OPINIONS, TIMES. 
 Bva/thont Third Earl of Shaftesbuet. Published from the Edi- 
 ^L of 17?3 with Engfavings dr.igued by the Author; and Edited, wi^ 
 Marginal Analysis, Notes, and Illustrations, by the Rev. W.M. HATCH. MJL 
 Fellow of New College. Oxford. 3 vols. 8vo. Vol. L price 14». 
 
 A TREATISE on HUMAN NATURE ; being an Attempt to Introduce 
 the Experimental Method of Reasoning into Moral Sub^^^^^^^^^ ^^ T H. 
 
 ' TTrMF Edited, with a Preliminary Dissertation and IM ores, oy a- " 
 GE^EN, Fellow?knd T. H. Geose. lat^ Scholar, of Balhol College. Oxford. 
 
 ESSAYS MORAL, POLITICAL, and LITERARY. By David Hume. 
 
 . JC'Ibre^vilWorm a new edition of Dayib Hume's %osop/;^jJ 
 T^'orik. complete ii; FoTvolumes. to be had in Two separate Sections aa 
 announced. 
 
 MENES and CHEOPS identified in History under P^ff^^^J. ^f^!fJ 
 with other Cosas. By Carl von Rikaet. 8vo. with 5 illustrations, pnce 
 
 10*. 6d. 
 
 Astronomy, Meteorology, Popular Geography, &c. 
 
 OITTLIHES of ASTBONOMY. .»? I^JiJ-^^^-^o^S^Jv^: 
 M J.. Tenth Edition, revised; with opiates and many wooacuv 
 
 ..TimH »nd it» SYSTEM. By Ricbakd A. Peoctok, B.A. late 
 
 *^ Sr o?St John's Coll. Camb. 8vo. with M Plates. 14,. 
 
 HanTol" Of *e Stars. By the sa^e Author. With 3 Maps. Squaxe 
 
 <™t'^«tt»t objects for COMMON TELESCOPES. By the Eev. 
 "^^W.'^bb" m!" W Second Edition revised, with a large Map of 
 
 ^'\T;r TNl^tA^EONOMY (Practical. Theoretical. 
 "I^SLTht n^f rstu^nttaX^tical Ln. By J. M..ra.iBX.. 
 
 F R \ S and H. Eveks. 8vo. 145. 
 i>nvT7'R LAW of STORMS, considered in connexion with 'he Ordmary 
 "Tove "ta of to Atm.iphere. Translated by B.H.Scoti.M.A.T.C.D. 
 
 PH^SimllEOGEAPHY for SCHOOLS and 6ENEEAL EEADERS. 
 
 '^y M F. MirET LL,D. Fop. with2 Charts,' 2,. 6d. 
 
 „ «wT T nnuia mcTTONARY. Geoeraphical, Statistical, and Historical, 
 
 A ^UAL of GEOOKAPHY, Physical, Industrial, and Political. 
 ^ HnoHES, P.B.G.S. With 6 Maps. Pcp.7..6<J. 
 
 and 16 Plates. Pep. 10«. 6d. 
 
 Natural History and Popular Science. 
 
 ELEMENTAEY TEEATISE on FHTSICS Expertoentd a^^Apf |^: 
 Translated and edited from Gabot-s |^.m.nte* ,^ 
 
 iKn^^rvJitS^a^ololrrS-ffle ^'g---^^- /^^^^^^^ By 
 The ELEMENTS Of |HYSICS or^ NATITJI^^^^^ , By 
 
 Neil Abkott, M.D. 1 .K.b. f °y^^^^" ^ pa-f„ gvo. 21s. 
 
 TSdition rewritten and completed. Two raris, ovu. ^i*. ^., x-«« 
 
 80.NT;Conrse of Eight I-ectures^eUvered »V^^«»^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 l«n"lto^'^l"po^?aiiT/S£^<W^'i6"woodcuts. price 9.. 
 
 ta 
 
IS 
 
 NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 IS 
 
 TTPAT CONSIDEKED as a MODE of MOTION. By Professor Johh 
 ^Tykd^lLlIx^S Third Edition. Crown 8vo. with Woodcuts. 10.. 6d. 
 
 LIGHT: Its Influence on Life and Health. By Forbes Winslgw. 
 
 M.D. D.C.L.Oxon. (Hon.). Fop. 8vo. 6*. 
 A TKEATISE on ELECTBICITY, in Theoiy and Practice. By A. 
 
 Db la Rive. Prof, in the Academy of Geneva. Translated by C. V.Waxieb, 
 
 F.R.S. 3 vols. 8vo. with Woodcuts, £3 13*. 
 THe COREELATION of PHYSICAL FORCES. By W. R. Grove, 
 
 O C V P R S Fifth Edition, revised, and followed by a Discourse on Con- 
 
 tinuity S^o. m 6d. Tlie Discourse on Continudy, separately, 2«. 6d. 
 
 MANITAL of GEOLOGY. By S. Hauqhton, M.D. F.R.S. Revised 
 Edition, with 6G Woodcuts. Fcp.7».6d. , 
 
 A GUIDE to GEOLOGY. By J. Phillips. M.A. Professor of Geology 
 in the University of Oxford. Fifth Edition, with Plates. Fop. 4». 
 
 Tlie SCENERY of ENGLAND and WALES, its Character and Origin; 
 ^'l^inKlAtlmpt to trace the Nature of tbe Geological C.us^^^^ 
 
 d^^r]?;b^^M]^Kri-'xSs"H^^^^^^ 
 
 S'rl? oninin.alVhVs'lo^^^^^^^ College, London. INearly ready. 
 
 VAW T\VTL HOEVEN'S HANDBOOK of ZOOLOGY. Translated from 
 
 ^^he'l^nJSSIJf Ec^li^ the Rev. W. Cla^... M.D. F.ILS. 2 vols. 8vo. 
 
 with 24 Plates of Figures, GO*. .„.,„/^*rv 
 
 Professor OWEN'S LECTURES on tlie COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
 
 Td Physiology of the Invertebrate Animals. Second Edition, with 235 
 
 Woodcuts. Svo. 21*. 
 
 Thu COMPARATIVE ANATOMY and PHYSIOIOGY of the VERTE- 
 
 ^^•bSSrinSals By Richabd Owek. F.R.S. D.C.L. With 1,472 Wood- 
 
 cuts. 3 vols. 8vo. £3 1 3«. 6d. 
 •me PRIMITIVE INHABITANTS of SCANDINAVIA : containipg a 
 Description of the Implements, Dwellings. Tomb., and Mode of Living of 
 tJi« Sav^es in the North of Europe during the Stone Age. By SVEX 
 NiLSSON? WUh 16 Plates of Fi},'ures and 3 Woodcuts. 8vo. l&r. 
 
 BIBLE ANIMALS ; being a Description of every Living Creature 
 
 8vo. 215. XT »-• • f 
 
 HOMES WITHOUT HANDS : a Description of the Habitations ot 
 
 ^:'^rovrA^ET8':^"^firh::S^^^ ^^i^^-^f 
 
 page). New Edition. Svo. 21». -r* t? Q 
 
 A FAMILIAR HISTORY of BIRDS. By E. Stanley D.D. F.R.b. 
 1 "Lord Bishop of Norwich. Seventh Edition, with Woodcuts. Fcp.3«.6rf. 
 
 me HARMONIES of NATURE and UNITY of CREATION. By Dr. 
 
 Gbokqb Habtwiq. Svo. with numerous Illustrations, 185. 
 me Sea and its Living Wonders. By the same Author. Third 
 
 (English) Edition. Svo. with many Illustrations, 21«. , 
 
 The raOPICAL WOELD. By Dr. Geo. Hartwio. With 8 Chromo- 
 
 xylographs and 172 Woodcuts. Svo. 21«. 
 The POLAB WOELD ; a Popular Descnption o^^VeIS h"™ 
 
 KIEBT and SPENCF8 INTRODUCTION to ENTOMOLOGT or 
 Elements of the Natural History of Insects. 'tl> E'»^«'"- "-" „„„„,,, 
 
 aATTNDER'S TEEASUEY of KATTTEAL HISTOEY or PopuW 
 Dictionary of Slooiogy. lU'viiad and corrected by T. s.. i-onBoi. 
 *CD. with 900 Woodcuts. 10s. tii/. , , ..r ._vl» 
 
 The TOEASUEY of BOTANY, or Popular K^ionaryonheVe^^^^^^ 
 
 f '{l-f °a^Vr'MtL^%l"iS™S>oS3"tors. Vp. l.»-7*. , 
 wHh^lWoodrutsani 20 Steel Plates. 2 Parts, fcp. 2W. 
 
 The ELEMENTS of BOTANY '« J.t"'"^ Fc" it' '^"^°^- 
 Tenth Edition, revised by Thomas MooEt. ]?.L.i.. Icp.wmi 
 
 The"EOSE''AMATETrE'S GTJIBE. By Thomas Kiteb,. Ninth 
 
 Edition. Fcp. 4«. irinwPTinff 
 
 The BEITISH FLOEA; -rT^^^^I^T^TZG.rZl^^l 
 
 lOUBON-S WcLOPiEBIA o,^.^T8 ; -P^^^, the Spec.fic 
 HAUNBEE-S scientific and "^^EEAEY TEEASUEY.^^ ^ew 
 
 A BICTIONAEY of SCIENCE. "Jf,^7,^,f,;a"»t?WXo^rMt. 
 
 3 vols, medium Svo. price G3*. cloth. 
 The ftTTAETEElY JOUENAL of SCIENCE. EdUed ^hy J^^- 
 Ja^/Sl?^TprU^'tlJ!- "c^toS^ro. l^^ lUustrations. price 5. each 
 Number. ^ -~ 
 
 Chemistry, Medicine, Surgery, and the 
 Allied Sciences. 
 
 A BICTIONAEY of CHEMI8TEY and the AlUedJra^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 „ . „ -R,, ■htjvpy Watts, r.iv.o. assisveu uy ^^^ 
 
 Sciences. U.v ^*^"^^,. " o.,^ .pt n« 
 
 Complete in 5 vols. medium Svo. A-/0*. . , -o w Atttv 
 
 ELEMENTS of CHEMISTEY, Theoretical and Practjical By W. A.«=« 
 
 MILLER, M.D. 4c. Prof. «f^}}Tc^EH^IST'Sx"{cl^^ns. PAttX U. 
 
 A MANXTAL of CHEMISTEY, De^JlCrPABTaJ^^i^V. ' 
 William Odling, M.B. r.K,.s. i-akt a. ovu. ^ 
 
NEW WOEKS vr,^u^«^«2U^^^^^^^^-^^Z^ 
 
 NBW WORKS PUBLISHED BT LOHOMASBakbOO; 
 
 u 
 
 1« 
 
 . ^,TT.i.T«TiiT • or Brief Notes of Chemical Facts. 
 OTJTLIHES of CHEHISTET, or, W"^; j, gd. 
 
 ByW.LLi.vM0i,u.o.iLB.FR.8^ Crow ^^^^^_^^^_ 
 
 A course of ^-^^f ^^,TaS?' ^ Jh*'oV<Slc^^^^ 
 
 B,thes.n>eAutho . NewE^ ■ College of 
 
 nC.:^^-^"^^^~- ^"'"/Iiri Belivered 
 XECTTOE8 on the CHEMICAL CHANGES of ^ 
 
 HArB;oK;n=EH^^^^^ 
 
 ^CT^BESontheBimS^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 CHABiBS WEST. M.D. ic. lux T>,^rtical In Treatises 
 
 A 8TSTEM of STOOEBT, Theoretical and ftact.ca^. in ^^^^^ 
 to Various Authors. Edited by T.Holmf.s, >^A- ^^.P^S to the Metro- 
 5.»Sc^ ^?„^7lJitSrt'£Uh.y'rI?Uwith numerous lUus- 
 
 trations. =™'»-^"^fJ'_ cHILDBEN'S DISEASES. By 
 
 Tk. STOGICAL TBEATMEHT of Cf LB^ ^.^^ ^^,^^^ 
 
 LS.^^SSL^;^itr» ^^JesWd n. vroodcu- 8V0. 2 .. 
 
 KiUls-n^iurer^n Sur^e^ at St MajT^^^^^^^ "^- ,, /„ 1S70. 
 
 Eminent ^^^f"";;, J" ' ".''"' '".Xlly as connected with GOUT, 
 
 i^';^nowJlJ;D*FVc.P. 4c. 8V0. U. W. ™v*LIDS- 
 
 ™. nrtwATB of the SOUTH of FBANCE as SUITED to mVAlIDS , 
 Tlie CLIMATE 01 tne ouuxn «» Winter Stat ons. By t. i. 
 
 ""^ with Notices of "'■^"S As.i"a >t$h"ieTanTo^ho^ Hospita^^^^^ Co"" 
 
 Sptiorkt^BrompU Sicor Eaitiou, with Eroot.sp.ece and Map. 
 
 Crown 8vo. 6*. 
 
 PULMONARY CONSUMPTION ; its ^ture T^e^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 "" txempliiied by an Analysis of One Th^t^nd Casg sele^te (^, ^ing Phy- 
 
 Twenty Thousand. By C. J. B. ^J^^^^ Xo Snton ; and C. T. Williaus, 
 Sn to the Hospital for Consumption at Brompron , jm ^.^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 MA. M.D. Oxon. ^ «.B«.fp vrtTAT'N' 
 
 with 25 Woodcuts, 10s. 6d. t» tt v Tti-AY 
 
 treated with the assistance of tlie I^S08Cope.^^^y 
 
 S;?lhete^?tor'S^-\tS^^^^^^^ 
 
 Ti, THEOBY of OCULAB JE^*^^"* '^ ^J^Sbb. F^f i 
 lS?S*hat*<S^§'oJS^nS\?'ha?t;=r^Tl?r^Sarin^^ Post 8,0. 
 
 Sown 8vo^ 4h 122 Woodcuts. 82«. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL A^ATOHT and ^I^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 '^r f HS^- X^i«S: E.^S. in course of .hU- 
 
 «°^.^ot^r ,arr.rt.t.^ou^-u"--- - »— * «•- 
 Of Medical Science. 8vo. S6«. -nrPTVATIVES: 
 
 EEIMANN'S HANDBOOK 'f *SL"niUne S^ Edited hi 
 a Treatise on the M»n"f»|t"'Srifi, 5"-wS>dcSts. 8vo. 10». 6d. 
 
 WILU^ ^^'""^'.'ft . MEDIcIld THEBAPEUTICS. abridged 
 A MANUAL of MATEBIA "^'"CA aM m .^^ , r. bebMT. 
 
 from Dr. P^.^f ^^''^SfolorF-a-S^™*"'' 9" Woodcuts. 21.. 
 M.R.C.S.aadbyB.WABis«TON ».«. pHABMACOPffiU. 
 
 Snl^g'^rvnhS »cuS"-C?oS?. 8,0. lO. 6.. 
 
16 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS a»d CO. 
 
 ^ :NEW works published by LONGMANS ajtd COJ 
 
 1» 
 
 The Fine Arts, and Illustrated Editions. 
 
 rs FAIRYLAND ; Pictures from the Elf-World. By Richard 
 
 DOTLE WUh a Poem by W. Allinoham. , With Sixteen Plates, containing 
 . Thirty-'six Designs printed in Colours. Folio. 3U. 6d. 
 LIFE of JOHN GIBSON, B.A. 8CULPT0B. Edited by Lady 
 
 Eastlake. 8vo. 10s. 6rf. 
 The LORD'S PEAYEE ILLTJSTEATED by F. R. Pickersgill R A 
 
 and IIENET ALFOUD. D.D. Dean of Canterbury. Imp. 4to. price 21*. cloth. 
 MATEEIALS for a HISTOEY of OIL PAINTING. By Sir Charles 
 
 Locke Ea3tl^ sometime President of the Royal Academy. Vol. 11. 
 
 8vo. lis. _, . ,, 
 
 TTATF HOUR LECTTJEES on the HISTOEY and PEACTICE of the 
 
 ^^F^; and Ornai^^^^^ By William B. Scoxx^ New Edition, revised 
 
 by the Author •, with 50 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 8a. bd. 
 ALBERT DUEEE, HIS LIFE and WORKS; including Auto- 
 
 hfo^Dhical Papers and Complete Catalogues. By William B Scott. 
 
 wSx Etchings by the Author, and other Illustrations. 8vo. 165. 
 
 ^TX LECTTJEES on HAEMONY, delivered at the Royal Institution 
 of Great Britain ^n the Year 1SC7. By G. A. Macfakben With nume- 
 ?ous engraved Musical Examples and Specimens. 8vo. 10s. Gd, 
 
 The CHOEALE BOOK for ENGLAND : the Hymns translated by 
 MissC WiNKwoRTH; the tunes arranged by Prof.W. S. Benkett and 
 Otto Goldschmidt. Fcp. 4to. 12». 6d. 
 The NEW TESTAMENT, illustrated with Wood Engravings after the 
 Early Masters, chiefly of the Italian School. Crown 4to.63s. cloth, gilt top ; 
 or £5 5». elegantly bound in morocco. 
 LYEA GEEMANICA ; the Christian Year. Translated by Cathebinb 
 VM^iK^ORTH; with 1:^, Illustrations on Wood drawn by J. Leighto*. 
 F.S.A. 4to. 21». 
 LYEA GEEMANICA ; the Christian Life. Translated by CAXnERnra 
 Wink worth ; with about 200 Woodcut Illustrations by J. Leighton. 1 .b.A. 
 »nd other Artists. 4to. 2.1s. 
 The LIFE of MAN SYMBOLISED by the MONTHS of the YEAR. 
 Text selected bv R. Figot ; Illustrations oa Wood from Original Designs by 
 J. Leighton, F.S.A. 4to. 42s. 
 ^ATS' and FAELIE'S MOEAL EMBLEMS ; with Aphorisms, Adages, 
 and S-overbsof all Nations. 121 l"ustrations on W<^ by J.Leightok. 
 F.S.A. Text selected by E. PiGOX. Imperial 8vo.31». 6rf. 
 SHAKSPEARE'S MIDSUMMEE NIGHTS DEEAM, illustrated 
 with 21 Silhouette, or Shadow-Pictures by P. Kosewka, engraved on Wood 
 by A. VoGEL. Folio. 3ls. 6d. 
 SHAKSPEAEE'S SENTIMENTS and SIMILES, printed in Black and 
 Gold, and Illuminated in the Missal Style by Heket Noel Humpurets. 
 bHuare poet 8vo. 21s. 
 
 8ACEED and LEGENDAEY AET. By Mrs. Jameson. 
 
 Legends of the Saints and Martyrs. Fifth Edition, with 19 
 
 Etchings and 187 Woodcuts. 2 vols, square crown bvo. 31s. 6d. 
 Legends of the Monastic Orders. Third Edition, with 11 Etchmgs 
 
 and 88 Woodcuts, l vol. square crown 8vo. 2 Is. 
 Legends of the Madonna. Third Edition, with 27 Etchmgs and 165 
 
 Wnrtflputs 1 vol. sauai'C crown 8vo. 21s. 
 Tie msto^ of Our Lord, with that of his Types and Precaraois 
 ^%^:^Z by lX EastLak.. B^vised Edition, .ith SI Etching, and 
 
 281 Woodcuts. 2 vols, sfiuare crown bvo. 42«. 
 
 The useful Arts, Manufactures, &c. 
 
 V\ Engravings. Imperial 8vo. price 2.U. 
 ^c^riLTS ENCYCLOP^IDIA of A^CHITECTTOE ■«.& ahoTc UOO 
 
 O jTwUt. and more than 100 other new W oodcuts. 8vo. B-*. brf- 
 
 13 Wood Engravings. Imperial 8vo. 42*. 
 THRPAN SCTILPTOES, their Lives, Works, and Tunes. With 45 
 
 ?;^th about 90 Illustrations. Square crown 8vo. 18* 
 
 C.S.LOWXDES. PostSvo. 55. «c c,„^pT,ta in 
 
 PEINCIPLE8 of MECHANISM, .<l-ignea^r the Use o^^^ 
 
 the Universities, and for , ^"Smeering Stu^cnt^^^ ffivoxsity of Cam- 
 
 Willis, M.A. F.RS &(;. J^^^"^;/i?^?^„^'°cvo i^'early ready. 
 
 bridge. A new and enlarged Edition, bvo. , n4wAMT?NTAL 
 
 TATWP<* and TUENING, Simple, Mechanical, and OENAMENTAL. 
 ^ B^ W HEtR.NfuTUCOTT. With about 240 Illustrations on Steel and 
 
 jDimONAEY of AETS, HANTI^^^^^^^^^^ 
 and familiar with Man r. Pictures. \Vith ahovo -.uou «uvm 
 
 Ind£'B,U.S.Cc^HT. Third Edmou. 8,0.1.. 6<Z. 
 
18 
 
 NEW WORKS PiTBLisnED by LONGMANS ^m> CO. 
 
 NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY J^^Gm^^SA^^^ 
 
 10 
 
 . T4VIwsron"Ibe tlEAM CTGINE, in its various Applications 
 
 CatecHr'rrt.e Stea-n J-g|ne ^n Hs ™™us ^Ppl.^- ^to 
 
 Miiira, Mills, 8tcam Nsviitation, Railxvays, ana Agr.^ 
 ^ ^'f "v „f 't^sTeam EnsinT by the same Author, forming . 
 n^rto'th C^lS t^^ir. Enjino. with 6, ^'^'-^^■^l'^\ 
 
 various appHcations to Mines, MiUsbtearar^^^^^ ^^^ g^^^^j^ 
 
 culture. %m a SupplfJ^ent to the Autl^or s C^^ate^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 Engine' By ^onx Bo^K^E CE INew ^amon^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 EXAMPLES of MODERN S^EAM' ,^/^,J^;4 f^^^^^^ 
 
 the most Approved Types as employed for Pi^^^^^^ described. 
 
 for Ix>conipUon a..d '«' A^^^^^^^'^^'^'dT.XfdyTnr^^^^ Account of all 
 
 Illustrated by Working Drawings, f^^f^^Xes Boilers, and Engines. By 
 Proiects of Eecent^ Improvement ^"Xl'J^.fi'n^^^'g^rts? price sS.ed. each. 
 
 ;l.^vS'.?i?icj3.?ii'vo.. li. price 36,. Vol. III. P"Ce3U. «. 
 
 VITCHELL'8 MANUAL of PKACTICAL ASSAYING. Third Edi- 
 KITCH£i.l< » ma-a uoj^ „_■..„„ ™ith all the rocent Discoveries incor- 
 
 SjStS' if wTroSTr." Vth isl woodcuts. 8V0. 28». 
 The AST 'of PEKFUMEEt; the History and Theory of Odours «.d 
 
 the Methods of Extracting «>« A™"?" «' PI*"''- J^ ^- ^"*''* 
 Third Edit.. wUh^Wocdcu^^ ,^ 
 
 '*'SJ^Wy"eUcAJhorThirdEdliou,with38 woodcuts. Fcp.e.. 
 
 lOTJDON-8 ENCTCLOPBDIA of AGEICUf TO^^ ^^"-"^^^ 
 Woodcuts. 8vo. 21*. , . T^nnrv and 
 
 dening. With 1.000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 21«. 
 BAYIBON-S AET of VAXUING EENTS -d mLA^ES,_^and^Clajm,_ 
 
 Of Tenants upon Quitting ^'^ToetoT 8vo. 10*. 6d. 
 Eighth Edition, revised by J . O. xUOEToh. ovu. xv 
 
 Religious and Moral Worhs. 
 
 trative Notes by the Rev. WiLLiAMNJ^ .^ PHTNCIPLES and 
 
 ««eiceTSL?^Sl=^as^^>— ^^^ 
 
 T^rxS^t^rr^OmES; .ith^a Co^^^^^^^ 
 
 fb^-I^rl' |To^S?S.£^cttS Eii^rAcVEditio^n. 8V0. 12,. 6.. 
 
 TBrn?™rXu L O^ina. Illustrations. Maps, Landscape. 
 "^r!IMTCBEn^";.orwpsTe;tiouofMaps,FUtes.andW^^^^^^ 
 
 'Cp^XE^m^rrettd^nd condensed, with « lUustrations and 
 
 Maps. « 'o'^- '"•°"l?!^Jf;;^cK Of ST. PAUL; with Dissertations 
 Tie VOYAGE aniSHIPWEECK Of BI ra ,^ ^^^^^.^^ 
 
 on the Life »"* ^J^t-g^'iy. F^^s! ThiM Edlti'on. Crown 8vo. 10». (W. 
 Anceuts ^^ ^^"!' "" " j,^ COMMENTAEY ou ST. PAUL'S 
 * "l^^S^Bya J.B™x^™"rS Bishopof Gloucester .BristoL Svo. 
 
 Galatians, Fourth Edition, 8s. 6d. 
 Ephesians, Fourth Edition, 8«. 6<I. 
 
 Pastoral Epistles, Fourth Edition, 10». M. . „ . . 
 
 PhSpLs. Colossians, and Philemon, Third Edition, 10s. 6* 
 ThessaloniansT^ird Edition 7.^^^^^ _ 
 
 =^'Lll^L«\rel?oV's!9''%°thrsan>e Author. Fifth Edition. Svo. 
 price 12*. 
 
11 
 
 20 
 
 NEW W0EK8 PUBLISHED by LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANSJ^KD^; « 
 
 EVIDENCE of tho TKTJTH of the CHKISTIAN RELIGION derived 
 
 from the Literal fulfilment of Prophecy. By Alexander Keitii, D.I). 
 
 37th Edition, with luimerous Plates, in square 8vo.. 12*. M. ; also the 39tU 
 
 Edition, in post 8vo. with 5 Plates, 6*. 
 Tho HISTORY and DESTINY of tho WORLD and of the CHURCH, 
 
 accordini? to Scripture. By the same Author. Square 8vo. with 40 
 
 Illustrations. 10». 
 An INTRODUCTION to the STUDY of the NEW TESTAMENT, 
 
 Critical, Exegetical, and Theological. By the Rev. 8. Davidsox, D.D. 
 
 LL.D. 2 vols. 8vo. 30*. 
 
 Bar. T. H. HORNE'S INTRODUCTION to the CRITICAL STUDY 
 and Knowledge of the Holy Scriptures. Twelfth Edition, as last revised 
 throughout. With 4 Maps and 22 Woodcuts and Facsimiles. 4 vols. 8vo.42«. 
 
 Rev. T. H. Home's Compendious Introduction to the Study of the 
 Bible, being an Analysis of the larpcr work by the same Author. Ec-edited 
 by the Rev. John Ayeb. MA. With Maps, Ac. Post 8vo. Os. 
 
 EWALD'S HISTORY of ISRAEL to the DEATH of MOSES. Trans- 
 lated from the German. Edited, with a l»reface and an Appendix, by Russeli, 
 JlAETiNKAU. M.A. Prof, of Hebrew in Manchester New Coll. London. 
 Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 24^. 
 
 riVE YEARS in a PROTESTANT SISTERHOOD and TEN YEARS 
 in a Catholic Convent ; an Autobiography. Post 8vo. Is. (id. 
 
 The LIFE of MARGARET MARY HALLAHAN, belter known in 
 tho relijtious world by the name of Mother Margaret. By her Keligious 
 CniLDEBK. Second Edition. 8vo. with Portrait, 10». 
 
 The SEE of ROME in the MIDDLE AGES. By the Rev. Oswald 
 J. Reichel, B.C.L. and SI.A. Vice-Principal of Cuddcsdon College, 8vo. 
 
 [Nearly ready. 
 
 Tho EVIDENCE for the PAPACY, as (derived from the Holy Scrip- 
 tures and from Primitive Antiquity, with an Introductory Epistle. By tho 
 Hon. Colin Lindsay. INearly ready. 
 
 The TREASURY of BIBLE KNOWLEDGE ; being a Dictionary of the 
 Books, Persons. Places, Events, and other matters of which mention is made 
 in Holy Scripture. By Rev. J. Ayee, MJL. With Maps, IG Plates, and 
 numerous Woodcuts. Fcp. 10*. 6d. 
 
 The GREEK TESTAMENT ; with Notes, Grammatical and Exegetical. 
 By the llev. w. Webstee, MJL and the Rev. W. F. Wilkinson, MA. 
 vol?. Svo. £2 4*. 
 
 EVERY-DAY SCRIPTURE DIFFICULTIES explained and illustrated. 
 By J. E. PEE3C0TT, M.A. Vol. I. Matthew and Mark; Vol. II. Luke and 
 John. 2 vols. 8vo. 93. each. 
 
 The PENTATEUCH and BOOK of JOSHUA CRITICALLY EXAMINED. 
 By the Right Rev. J. W. Colenso, D.D. Lord Bishop of Natal. People's 
 Edition, in 1 vol. crown Svo. Os. or in 5 Parts, 1*. each. 
 
 The CHURCH and the WORLD : Three Series of Essays on Questions 
 of the Day. By Various Writers. Edited by the Rev. Oeby Shipley, 
 M.A. Three Volumes, Svo. price 15*. each. 
 
 The FORMATION of CHRISTENDOM. By T. W. Allies. Parts L 
 and II. 8to. price 12«.cach Part. 
 
 ESOLAHD and CHEI8TEND0M. By Abchbisbop M.«ki»o. D.D. 
 Post Svo. price 10«. 6<i. ^^ -, t - "PT.il ftsnnbical Sketch of 
 
 PF0ULKE3. Post SVO. pnce 7«. 6d. ^ T «tins beine a His- 
 
 Christendom's Divisions, ^^^^l^^^jf^Soa^^^^^ 
 tory of their Dissensions and Overtures for reace u 
 By the same Author. Post Svo. \oS. vwOWLEDGE ; 
 
 Tie mDDEH WISDOM of CHEIST Mj^i t^e^^,l^''°K''S.. 
 or History of the Apocrypha. By Lenest ujs .du ^„,^,i with 
 
 T JkEYS 7f 8T. PETEE ; or the House of R^^^^^^^ 
 
 the History of Syrabolism and Idolatry. B>tf^""'^ R^vealine the 
 
 -v=i* ^. sf„^St.r/. --.--■ «--• 
 
 T.e%"erd -r. a=d the .^^ta^-^.itLTH^'r-iP- 
 
 57lro'S^u5[^r. "■^.t-.lSU? Cro.v-'u SVO. Zs. 6.^ 
 ES8AT8 and EEVIEW8. By the Kev W Temple ©D- ^^.S^; 
 
 ?^wb?t:'m.S? Twelfth Edition. Fcp 8v..5. 
 
 PASsfNGTHOtGHTS on EEI.IGION. By E.^.BKTa M. Sbw..^ 
 ''^Sor or Amy Herbert.- New Edition. ^ J^P' ?;°;^^ ^^^„, g^^^. 
 Self-Examinatlon hefore Confirmation. By the same Author. 
 
 price u.ed. T,„naratory to Confirmation, from Writers 
 
 Eeadings for » """t^.^'SBVthe same Author. Pop.«. 
 
 of tho Early and English uiurcn. bj n .ho Writincs of 
 
 ^ ;.• . ♦„, TtMrT Dav in Lent, compiled from the writmgs 
 Eeadings for ^^^"J "^l bt the sime Author. Fcp.6«. 
 
 Bishop JBEEMT Tatloe. By the same a „ ,i„„g chiefly from 
 
 Preparation for the Holy Commnmon; the De™^^^^ y 
 
 tho works of JbbemtTatiob. ^y the«'«'« A'" Bt the Author 
 
 Occasions of a Matron's Life. By the Jiev. w. v> 
 Sl/arEirdSONOS of the CH^^CH : heiu. BU,^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Lylr'GStKKA%a„.atea fr^m^Jhe G.r^^^^ 
 
NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BT LONGMANS AWP OO.V 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED byLONGMANS^^k^ 
 
 23 
 
 «,m^»T ennrrn^ fnr the STTNDATS and HOLIDAYS tlirougll- 
 
 ' ^^^^^^Jl^^sJV^!^^l^\^^''f Eghan^and Rural Dean. 
 
 ifurthEcWonf Sixth Thousand. Fcp. 4.. 6d. w.^kness 
 
 no Beatitude, : Abasement Wore God^ Sorrow for Sm , Meekness 
 
 ^iSrf kaSg:°CcS"B?Th'l=: VrJEdition. Pcp^8.^«. 
 Hi. TEESENCE-not hi. MEMOKY, 1855. By the same Author, 
 
 „£,T.7Hl'BtsriCA;XmrpVr2^^^^^^ 
 
 Ancient and Modern : with other Poetns.^ Editedby the Rev. Okbt bHiP 
 iaY,M.A. Second Edition. Fcp. 5*. , t'F^ r.f rhrn^t Ancient 
 
 altered and enlarged. Fcp. 5«. c«v;o/.fa Anripnt and 
 
 Lyra Mystica ; Hymns and Verses on Sacred Subjects, Ancient ana 
 
 Modern. By the same Editor. Fcp. 5». 
 
 TOUEAVOTIES after the CHRISTIAN LIFE: Disconrses. By 
 ™?E.b!m.bLeIii Fourth and el-pcr Edition carefully revved; the 
 
 Two Series complete in One Volume. Post 8vo. 75. W. T^yr^^v.^ ^f 
 
 TWvnrATTON of SAINTS and ANGELS, for the use of Members of 
 
 Bishop Hebeb. Revised and corrected by the Rev. i>. J-.isi^Eif. 
 price £5 5«. 
 
 Travels, Voyages, &c. 
 
 ■EWBI.AHD to DEIHI ; a Narrative of Indian TraTel. By John 
 
 MinESo'?Grafgow. Imperial 8vo. with very numerous lllu.trat>on8. 
 rATlOXE- or TITIAN'S COUNTKY. By JosiAH Gilbert, one of 
 "K.Uo"' o?-?te Dolomite Mountains.-' With Map. FaesmUe. and 40 
 
 ^.S^lTlvTof^hf EUPHeItES expedition carried on by 
 
 « ^"iiir r*?' ^t^. nrwTTlAL CAUCASTJS and BASHAN. Including 
 ?rw^E„r^vi;!,TS l^^w'^e'Sr Scuare c-n «voaS. 
 
 with numerous Illustrations, 21«. rT.^„„ :„ Cwitser- 
 
 HOW WE SPENT the SUMMER; or, a Voyage en Zigzag »n Switaer 
 
 BEATEN TEACES; or. Per. and P-fi^ties!coSaSa.,S; t 
 
 snetciies ■ro'uj' » „nHT ULANC. from an actual Survey m 
 
 KAP of the CHAIN of MONT »!■*»«'' ^^„ published under the 
 
 1603-1804. By A. AYf^^-^^lS^^^-^Sfiolithokraphy on extra stout 
 
 KONEEEINO in THE PAMPAS ^». the F.jt|;ou^^^^^^^ 
 
 Settler's Experience m the La Plata camps, ujr x^. 
 
 Second Edition, with Map, 6s. /.-d—^^ott 
 
 The pIeAGTTAYAN WAE: ^ith Sketch- of *eH,st^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 |,S:»d I Portrait of Lope.. J"-' *™. i"! _"' „ 45145 COLONIES. 
 HISTOEY of DI8C0VEEY in •« ^^^™the Ea^st me to thi 
 
 »°K?o.^S?t:L;t a^M-n^r k^t= S^-^ "'^ "' 
 
 Ouiro^^ri !t;; inclndin, alUhe Oher,ana district, r.^^ 
 
 Ltroauetion on Alp-'/'i-f^lJf Ce^X^ s ^^Parts 0^' h^ll^^ 
 of the Alps, price l^Eag, of the Throe >^^^^^^ ^^-^^ ,,. ,^t^ 
 
 ?r"oWi&H Ills Vy-Jl'tir ^^'-'^ 
 translated, and ed>ted by H_T.En.E^ CONSTITUTION, and CHAE- 
 COMMENTAEIES on *« ^"^OEy, tunai ByGronnENoEion, 
 
 ?oSyro??h^'cll'm-He'aS 
 CUrosmES of IONDON; e.hibitingJhemo^tBare- 
 
 Recollections. By John ^^^ 
 larged. 8vo. with Portrait, 21». 
 
II 
 
 M 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMAXS awb CO. 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 26 
 
 The NORTHEEN HEIGHTS of LONDON ; or, Historical Association* 
 nf H^m^tad Highgate. Muswell Hill, Hornscy, and Islington By 
 William HowiTT. With about 40 Woodcuts. Square crown 8vo. 21*. 
 
 VISITS to REMARKABLE PLACES : Old Halls, Battle-Fields, and 
 
 The RURAL LIFE of ENGLAND. By the same Author. With 
 
 Woodcuts by Bewick and Williams. Medium 8vo. 12s. dd. 
 ROMA SOTTERRANEA ; or, an Account of the ^I^oni*° ^aUcombs 
 
 (^omr^^ndator^e^^^^^^^^ i'lans and other Illustrations. 
 
 8vo. 31*.6d. , . « 
 
 PIIGKIMAGES in th. PYKENEE8 and lANDES: their Sancman^ 
 
 and Shrines. By BEST3 SnYXE LiWLOK. Post bvo. Jntl^prea 
 
 vrvRAIW ana the VAMPIEE ; or. Talcs of Hindu Devilry. Adapted 
 
 by mcnrEP F Bcnxos, F.E.G.S.tc. With aS lllustraiions by Ernest 
 
 Griset. Crown Svo. 'J.?. 
 va-RPTT^-FAN or CHRISTIANITY REVERSED; being the History 
 ^Ta^Famny a social. Political, and Theological Novel. By OwE^ 
 
 GowBR. of Gaybrook. 3 vols, post 8vo. 31*. (kl. 
 THROUGH the NIGHT ; a Tale of the Times. To which is added 
 ^^Onward.or ! Summer Sketch.' By Walter Sweexmax. BA. 2 vols, post 
 
 The GERMAN WORKING MAN; being an Account of the Daily 
 Sjmuelson. Crown 8vo. with Frontispiece, is. Qd. 
 
 Works of Fiction, 
 
 The WARDEN: a Novel. By Anthony Trollope. Crown 8vo. 1*. 6cf. 
 Barchester Towers : a Sequel to * The Warden.* Crown 8vo. 2*. 
 STORIES and TALES by Elizabeth M. Sewell, Author of * Amy 
 Herbert ' uniform Edition, each Tale or Story complete m a single Volume. 
 
 Amy Herbert, 2s. 6d. 
 Gertrude. 2*. 6</. 
 Earl's Daughter, 2s. M. 
 
 EXPERIENCB OP LIPE. 2s. W. 
 
 Clevb Hall, 3». 6d. 
 
 Ivors. 3*. 6fi. 
 Katharine Ashtoh, Sa. 6d. 
 Margaret Peucival, 5s. 
 Laneton Parsonage, 4». 6a. 
 Ursula, 48. 6d. 
 
 A Glimpse of the World. By the Author of * Amy Herbert. Fcp. 7«. 6rf. 
 The Journal of a Home Life. By the same Author. Post 8vo. 9s. 6d. 
 After Life ; a Sequel to ' The Journal of a Home Life.' Price 10*. 6d. 
 UNCLE PETER'S FAIRY TALE for the XIX CENTURY. Edited 
 
 by E. M. Sewell. Author of * Amy Herbert.' &o. Fcp. 8vo. Is. 6d. 
 DOCTOR HAROLD'S NOTE-BOOK. By Mrs. Gascoigne, Author of 
 
 ' The N.xt Door Neighbours," &c. Fcp. Svo. 6*. 
 
 BECKER'S GALLUS ; or, Roman Scenes of the Time of Augustus : 
 with Notes and Excursuses. New Edition. Post Svo. 7s. 6<i. 
 
 BECKER'S CHARICLES; a Tale illustrative of Private Life among the 
 Ancient Greeks : with Notes and Excursuses. New Edition. Post Svo. 7*. Od, 
 
 NOVELS and TALES by G. J. Whytb Melville : — 
 
 The Gladiators, 5*. 
 Digby Grand, 5s. 
 Kate Coventry, 5*. 
 General Bounce, 5*. 
 
 Holmby House, 5*. 
 Good for Nothing, 6*. 
 The Queen's Maries, 6*. 
 The Interpreter, 5s. 
 
 TALES of ANCIENT GREECE. By George W. Cox, M.A. late 
 
 Scholar of Trin. Coll. Oion. Being a Collective Edition of the Author's 
 Classical Stories and Tales, complete in One Volume. Crown Svo. 6*. 6d. 
 
 A MANUAL of MYTHOLOGY, in the form of Question and Answer. 
 
 By the same Author. Fcp. 3*. 
 OUR CHILDREN'S STORY, by one of their Gossips. B\' the Author 
 
 of ' Voyage en Zigzag,' ' Pictures in Tyrol,' &c. Small 4to. with.Sixty.IlIus- 
 
 trations by the Author, price 10s, 6d. 
 
 Poetry and The Drama. 
 
 THOMAS MOORE'S POETICAL WOR^S, the only Editions contain- 
 ing the Author's last Copyright Additions :— 
 Cabinet Edition, 10 vols. fcp. Svo. price 35*. 
 Shamrock Edition, crown Svo, price ;i*. (Ul. 
 Ruby Edition, crown Svo. with Portrait, price 6*. 
 Library Edition, medium Svo. Portrait and Vignette, 11*. 
 People's Edition, square crown Svo. with Portrait, &c. 10*. 6c?. 
 
 MOORE'S IRISH MELODIES, Maclise's Edition, with 161 Steel Plates 
 from Original Drawings. Super-royal Svo. 31*. 6d. 
 
 Miniature Edition of Moore's Irish Melodies with Maclise's De- 
 signs (as above) reduced in Lithography. Imp. 16mo. 10*. 6c?. 
 
 MOORE'S LALLA ROOKH. Tenniel's Edition, with 68 Wood 
 Engravings from original Drawings and other Illustrations. Fcp. 4to. 21*. 
 
 SOUTHEY'S POETICAL WORKS, with the Author's last Corrcctiona 
 
 and copyright. Additions. Librniy Edition, in 1 vol. medium Svo. with 
 
 Portrait and Vignette. 14*. 
 LAYS of ANCIENT ROME ; with Ivry and the Armada. By the 
 
 Eight Hon. Lord Macaulay. 16mo. 4*. 6c?. 
 Lord Macaulay' s Lays of Ancient Rome. With 90 Illustrations on 
 
 Wood, from the Antique, from Drawings by G. Scharp. Fcp. 4to. 21*. 
 
 Miniature Edition of Lord Macaulay's Lays of Ancient Rome, 
 with the Illustrations (as above) reduced in Lithography. Imp.l6mo.l0*.6<t 
 
 GOLDSMITH'S POETICAL WORKS, with Wood Engravings from 
 
 Designs by Members of the Etching Club, Imperial 16mo. 7*. 6d. 
 POEMS. By Jean Ingelow. Fifteenth Edition. Fcp. Svo. 5*. 
 
 POEMS by Jean Ingelow. With nearly 100 Illustrations by Eminent 
 Artists, engraved oa Wood by the Brothers Dalziel. Fcp. 4to. 2K. 
 
 D 
 
w 
 
 . .V p*niT By JBA» INGELOW. Pp. 256, with Eight 
 K 0F8A the F*™^- . "\f«>d Fcp. 8vo. 6s. _. ^ 
 
 Ulustrations engraved on Wood, rep JsoELOW. Third 
 
 A STORY of DOOM, and other Poems. By Jean 
 
 Edition. Fcp.". , TTTTTTT A ELIZABETH LAHDOH (I'.E.I..). 
 FOETICAL -WOEKS of LETITIA ISU^" 
 
 « vols. lemo. 10». .— .■n-cnjT»Tl'E cheaper Genuine Editions: 
 
 BOWDLEB'S FAHILT SI^SPEABE, cheape ^^^^^ ^^^.„„_ 
 
 J!5^-?SS^e'&'Si-tf;°-ti:-:;:;Si, eorrected Te.t. 
 
 ntivL^e.ter^^^'1^- --^ '^ '^' ^- '■ " 
 
 ?SSS M.A. Square ismo. 4^ M References and 
 
 HOBATII OPEBA libraiTf^ -. -^t^.>^^^^^^^^^ 
 ^.^"i'^EIBtf ^BmC'ted into English Verse. By Jor. 
 COHISMOK. M JL. Crown Svo. 9.. . j^^ l„s„s canon. 
 
 ABTODIHES CAMI, sive M.s^«^- ^a^SrcuravitH.J.Honosoi,. 
 
 "^ *r'?roMER"TKA5SLATED into BLANK YEESE. By 
 Tie ILIAD of HOMER TBansi' ^^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 1chabodChabiesV,e.ghtM.a^ ^^ ^^^gj, py 
 
 The ILIAD of HOMEE xn ENGIISH^HEXA^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 J. HESKT DAM. M.A. Of Eieter U>». 
 BA5TE-S DIVINE 0O^^^,J^fj-J:,^T«n.U, iuterpa^ed.] 
 
 John Dayman, ju.a. l 
 
 8V0.21*. TMrTqrPLLANEOTJS VERSES. By B. E. 
 
 HUNTING SON^S and ^jS^.^r Fcp. 8vo. 5. 
 
 EgertokWabbubto>. bccon Christian and Jewish 
 
 EwraZ Sports, &c. 
 
 JOHN LwcH). 8V0. 42«. VOTING SPOETSMEN in all 
 
 S;U 8m with Ulustrations, 18». 
 ,.. BEAD SHOT o,Sp„„^^^^^^ 
 
 gL^2e1 Ed t'ion^Fep':Tvo. with Plates. 5.^ „T,„«^,„B With 
 
 Xh.El"»HEE-8ENT0M0t0GT^,^^^^^^^ 
 
 ffiSL*.,„^h'S%"»V.tirsvo.X«. ^^„f^„^„„g 
 
 A BOOK on ANGLING ;^co™pi.eJVeat..^^^^^ 
 
 i:i/l5Tthrm«.%SlnS'colourcd. Post 8V0.15,. 
 
 NBW WOEKS PCBiiBHBn bt LONGMANS asp CO. 
 
 W 
 
 Wn.COCKS'S SEA-EISHEEMAN; comprising the ChirfM^^^^^^ 
 
 MaJifo^Ss trBSJf;^': fe^o-nr^S. enlarged ; with 80 
 Woodcuts. Post Svo. 12». 6d. thpKinff's 
 
 MILBS. ES4. Ninth Edition, with Ulustratious. imper 
 A Plain Treatise on Horse-Shoeing. By the same Author. Sutth 
 
 Edition. Post8vo.withIUus^tions.2..M. .,^i3p,^tes.l5s 
 
 Stables andStable-Fittlngs. Bythe same. Imp. Svo.witnisria 
 
 Eomark. on Horses' Teeth, addressed to Purchasers. By the same. 
 BOB^N;;%tvALEY CATECHISM o^ns^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 BlIiBE'S 'vETEEINAEY AKT; aTreatU^on he Anat my,^^^ 
 
 |ro.v.ithWesandWoodcnts.l8». n, Wn-LIAH TorATT. 
 
 The HOESE: with a Treatoe on D^^^-^g^^-ni^L^ w'Xts. m 6d. 
 
 New Edition, revised and enlarged, svo.wituu 
 
 Th. ;.g. By the same Author. Svo. with numerous ^oodcuU 6, 
 S. DOG in HEALTH and DISEASE^ By Sxokbhenoe. With 70 
 Wood Engravings. Square erown Svo. 10». 6d. 
 
 Commerce, Navigation, and i¥ermnftfe ^^a^rs. 
 
 The ELEMENTS of BANKING. By Henky DmmiNO Maclbod J^-A. 
 ThoTn^'^'Crd PnlmCE of banking. By the same Author. 
 
 '^•sTa^E^ti^^^-o^--;^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 A BITIOnIrY Practical. Theoretic^ and^H.toncs^^ of^^^^^^ 
 merceand Commereial Navi^tjon. ByJ.^ M 
 
 pSi. I^Si2». Paet II. War,lSs. 
 
NBW WORKS P„BUaBBD bt LONGMANS ahd CO. 
 
 Works of Utility and General Information. 
 
 XOOTES COOKEUT 'o^ PBIVATB FAMn,IM. rcduc^^^^^^^^ 
 
 CT/r^e!rJnVlK°i"Sf^-f1^^^^^^^ Of -Figure, and X5. 
 
 Of Four Cantour Lectures ^^hv^rea uaorL lethebt. M.B. 5I.A. 
 
 ment of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce. x>y xi (;jv^earZy ready. 
 
 . rmcr TREATISE 0= BB^O, .itH.o™uJ« .. ^^Hc 
 
 W^St"^t'tO LEAD. By Cam. Fourth Edition. 32mo. 1. 
 
 ™SB^K for BEABEKS at t.o BEITISH MITSEUM. By 
 
 Thomas Nichols. Post8vo.6«. ^, t „ /^f TrncrUnd 
 
 n. CABINET lA^^B; a Popular Digest ^ 
 
 Xk. PHILOSOPHY of HEALTH, or an Ex^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 'ni'^nS* B^n^oo^'si^^S B.-uth Edition, revved .nd 
 »ed; with 113 Woodcuts. «-•''• «^ j^,i, HEALTH 
 
 »™ar;th^?.^Kp°^.n*r.^--^^^^^ 
 
 ^e^T^L hV;gE«ENT ., CHIL.BEI. in HEALTH ..d 
 
 D^e By Thomas BULL. M.D. Pep. 5*. 
 
 Th. LAW BELATINa to ^^f f ^7,,^ ^bl^StS't™ J 'i*. 
 
 Second Edition. Fcp.3«.Cd. , . , t r.A T ^n.Unff 
 
 COLLIEBIES and COLLIEBS : « »»k f th^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 &S;"M5^"t"r'::te £? fho'-DuS VZthyr T>dfll and Abcrd.re. 
 
 Second Edition. Pep. 8vo. 7». Cd. 
 HOTES on HOSPITALS. By Florekce Nwhtisoai-k. Third Ed. 
 
 tion. enlarged = '"'';» "'"^^""""'^ABLES at 24 Different Bates 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 »•••••• 
 
 20 
 23 
 14 
 
 Actoh'b Modern CooTicry ... 
 
 A UX)CK'8 Residence in J apin 
 
 Allies on Formation of Christendom . 
 
 Alpine Guide (The) 
 
 Althaus on Medical Electricity ••••••• ^ 
 
 AN DUEWs'.s Life of Oliver Cromwell 4 
 
 ARNOLD'S Manual of EncUsh Literature .. / 
 
 AliNOTTS Elements of Fhy.sics " 
 
 Arundines Cami ....•••• ••••• „ 
 
 Autumn Holidays of a Country Parson .... * 
 AYBE'8 Treasury of Bible Knowledee ^o 
 
 Calvkrt'.'< "Wife's 'Manual 
 
 Cateh's Biosraphical Dictionary 
 
 Cats' and Faulie's Moral Emblems . 
 Changed Aspects of Uncli»n<.'ed Truths 
 
 CnESNEY's Euphrates F^xpedition 
 
 Indian Polity 
 
 Bacoh '8 Essays, by Whatklt 
 
 Life and letters, by SrEDDlNG 
 
 Work8,editedby Si'KDDiNG ... 
 
 Bain '8 Mental and Moral Science 
 
 on the Emotions and ^^ ill 
 
 on the Senses and Intellect 
 
 .on the Study of Character 
 
 Ball's Alpine Guide 
 Barnauk'h Drawing from Nature 
 Batldon's Kcnts and Tillages . . . 
 
 Beaten Tracks \-^-,{ 
 
 Becker's Chancles and Gallus .., 
 Bexfky's Sanskrit Dictionary • • ■ 
 Black's Treatise on Brewing .... 
 
 Bi-acklby's Word-Gossip . . . 
 l!zf___German-English Dictionary , 
 Blaine's Rural Sports 
 
 "Veterinary Art 
 
 Bourne on Screw Propeller ^ ....... • 
 
 Bourne's Catechism of the Steam Engine . 
 ___^__Handbook of Steam Engine .... 
 ImproTcments in the bteam 
 
 Engine 'A' • • •' 
 
 Treatise on the Steam Engine .. 
 
 Examples of Modern Engines .. 
 
 Bowdlkr'b Family Shakspkark .••••••• 
 
 Brahde's Dictionary of bcience, La.era- 
 
 ture. and Art •.' :• "-i," V- 
 
 Bra.y'8 (C.) Education of the Feehngs .... 
 Philosophy of Necessity 
 
 on Force ;' V.'i 
 
 Browne's Exposition of the 39 Articles. .. . 
 
 Buckle's History of CiTilization 
 
 Bull's Hints to Mothers ...... -i-a; v.y ' ' ' 
 
 Maternal Manaaement of Children 
 
 BussBN's (Baron) Ancient Egypt 
 
 God in History 
 
 . Memoirs 
 
 bunsen (e. d '^) °\^pf;/,tWr:::::::: 
 
 BURKR'B Vicissitudes of Families 
 
 Burton's Christian Church.. 
 
 Vikramand the vampire 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 6 
 10 
 10 
 10 
 10 
 23 
 17 
 19 
 23 
 2.^ 
 
 8 
 28 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 26 
 27 
 18 
 18 
 
 18 
 
 18 
 18 
 26 
 
 13 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 19 
 
 2 
 
 28 
 
 28 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 21 
 
 21 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 24 
 
 ■•■•••• 
 
 -. Wnterloo Campaisin. 
 
 Child's Physioloffieal Essays 
 
 Chorale Book for Enjrland 
 
 CloUGU'h Lives from Plutarch 
 
 CoBBE's Norman Kings of England........ 
 
 Colenso (Bishop") on Pentateuch and Book 
 
 of Joshua •."•x: ; 
 
 Commonplace Philosopher m Town and 
 
 Country ; 
 
 CoNlNGTON's Chemical Analysis • 
 
 Translation of VlRGlL'S 
 
 jl'Jnciil 
 
 CONTANPEAr's French-English Dictionaries 
 CoNYBKARE and HowsON's Work on St. 
 
 Paul 
 
 Cook on the Acts 
 
 Cook's Voyages 
 
 Cooper's Surgical Dictionary. . . ..... .... ... . 
 
 Copland's Dictionary of Practical Medicine 
 Cotton's Introduction to Confirmation. ... 
 
 Coulthart'S Decimal Interest Tnblcs .... 
 
 Counsel and Comfort from a City Pulpit.... 
 
 Cox's (G. W.) Aryan Mythology 
 
 Manual of Mythology 
 
 —Tale.'' of the Great Persian 
 
 War 
 
 Tales of Ancient Greece .... 
 
 (a.) Ancient Parliamentary Elec- 
 tions 
 
 History of the Reform Bills 
 
 Whig and Tory Administration* 
 
 Cresy's Encyclopedia of Civil Engineering 
 
 Critical Essays of a Country Parson 
 
 Crowe's History of France 
 
 Ccllky's Handbook of Telegraphy 
 
 CUSACK'B History of Ireland 
 
 21 
 i 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 22 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 15 
 16 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 20 
 
 9 
 14 
 
 96 
 
 8 
 
 It 
 
 19 
 
 h 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 19 
 
 S 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 h 
 
 2 
 26 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 1» 
 9 
 t 
 
 17 
 3 
 
 Cabinet Lawyer 
 
 88 
 
 I 
 
 Dart's Iliad of Homer .• . . 26 
 
 D'AuniGNE's History of the Reformation 
 
 in the time of Calvin ....... ..^ * 
 
 Pavi dson's Introduction to New Testament 20 
 
 Dayman's Dante's Divina Commedia 96 
 
 Dead Shot (The), by Marksman 96 
 
 De la Rive's Treatise on Electricity 19 
 
 Dkni.«!ON's Vice-Kegal Life ; . . 1 
 
 De TorQXJEViLLK's Democracy in America 2 
 
 Dobson on the Ox ^7 
 
 Dove on Storms 'i 
 
 DOYLE'8 Fairyland 16 
 
 Dyer's City of Rome * 
 
r 
 
 80 
 
 NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 NEW WOEKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS and CO. 
 
 EastlaKE'S Life of Gibson ••••• — ••;-'*" 1? 
 
 Z Hints on Household Taste j7 
 
 ___^___Hi9tory of Oil Tainting lb 
 
 Edmunds's Names of P lacea ^ 
 
 E DWARDS'a Shipmaster's Guule 
 
 Elements of Botany 
 
 ELLICOTT'8 Commentary on Ephosmns .... 
 
 Lectures on Life of Christ 
 
 Commentary on Galatians ..... 
 
 _^_ Pastoral Kpist. 
 
 ~~~Z Philippia!is,&c. 
 
 "~~[ Thessuloriians 
 
 Essays and Contributions ot A. K. IL B 
 
 Essays and Reviews *i 
 
 EWALDS History ot Israel ^ 
 
 27 
 13 
 19 
 19 
 19 
 19 
 19 
 19 
 A 
 
 HtTMB'a Treatise on nnman Nature 10 
 
 IIUMPURKY'8 Sentiments of fehakspeare. . . . lb 
 
 lHXF,'s Roman Ilistory ' 
 
 IXGKLOW'8 Poems ^ 
 
 Story of Doom * 
 
 Mopsa 
 I^egendi of the 
 
 Saints and 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 18 
 18 
 
 18 
 
 Faikbairn on Iron ShipbuiWinz .......... 
 
 '8 Applifati.in ot Cast and 
 
 Wnmsrht Iron to Building 
 
 . Tnlunnation for En^rineers .. 
 
 Treatise on Mills and Mill- 
 
 Faraday's I Jfe'and Letters 4 
 
 Farrar's Families of Speech » 
 
 Chapters on Laiijruwrc . ... ...... > 
 
 FELKix on Hosiery and Lace Manufactures 18 
 
 FFOtlLKES'8 Christendom's Divisions fi 
 
 FiTZWYGRAM on Horses and Sta iles -7 
 
 Five Years in a Protestant Sisterliood » 
 
 Ft- SHANK'S Diversities of Life »" 
 
 FORBES'8 Earls of Granard » 
 
 Fowler's Collieries and Colliers f^ 
 
 Francis's Fishing Book •••-••■- 
 
 Freshfikld'h Travels in the Caucasus — 
 Froude's History of Encland. . . . .•••••• ;• 
 
 !_ Short Studies on Great Subjects 
 
 JAMESOT^'S 
 
 __11ZI!— I'Leceiidsof the Madonna — .. 17 
 
 •" Leeends of the Monastic 
 
 Orders •••••• " 
 
 Jameson and Eastlake's History of Our 
 
 Lord •.•.•••.••^•••i; J" J; 
 
 Johnston's Geojiraphical Dictionary ii 
 
 J UKKS on Second Death 'J 
 
 on Types of Genesis *i 
 
 KAl.lscn'8 Commentary on the Bible 7 
 
 Hebrew (Jraniinar » 
 
 Keith on Fultilinent of Prophecy » 
 
 Destiny of Uie World -• » 
 
 Kerl's Metallurgy by Cuookks and 
 
 RiillRIO •■•. }z 
 
 Kksteven's Domestic Medicine 1» 
 
 26 
 
 22 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 11 
 24 
 22 
 23 
 
 OANOT's Elementary- Physics 
 
 GAStX>IONE's l>«tor HaroUl 
 
 Gilbert's Caiiore. or Titian s Couiitrj .... 
 Gilbert and Chcrchi ll s I>olomue8 .... 
 
 Goldsmith's Ptiems. Hlustrated »a 
 
 Gould's Silver Store •■••••• ^ 
 
 Graham's Book about Words 7 
 
 Grant's Home Politics •» 
 
 Ethics of Aristotle » 
 
 Graver Thoughts of a Country Parson 9 
 
 Gray's Anatomjjr •.••-.•• '^ 
 
 Oreknhow on Bronchitis 
 
 Grove on Correlation ot Physical F orces . . 
 
 GURNEY's Chapters of French 1 1 istory 
 
 GWILT'8 Encyclopedia of Arcliitccturc 
 
 IS 
 
 26 
 
 7 
 11 
 34 
 
 4 
 4 
 
 Leighton's Sermons and C barges 19 
 
 Leisure Hours in Town * 
 
 liCssons of Middle Age 
 
 Letheby on Food • 
 
 Lewes' History of Philosophy 
 
 Lewis's Letters -.••;,••••,•. •;*;•"•* 
 
 LiDDELLand SCOTT'8 Greek-English Lexi- 
 con 
 
 KiUBY and SvENCE's Eutumology. 
 
 Landon's Qj. E. L.") Poetical Works ... 
 
 Latham's English Dictionarj' 
 
 River Plate 
 
 Lawt^or's Pilgrimatres in the Pyrenees, 
 LecKY'8 History of European Morals .. 
 RationalisTii 
 
 9 
 
 IS 
 
 4 
 
 b 
 
 U 
 13 
 
 2 
 17 
 
 16 
 20 
 
 13 
 
 l» 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 38 
 
 Hare on Election of Representatives 7 
 
 Habtwig's Harmonies of Nature i- 
 
 Polar World ■> 
 
 Sea and its Living W onders . . 12 
 
 ^___ Tropical World '■» 
 
 Hatch's Life of Shaftesburj- * 
 
 HauGHTONS Manual ut Geologj •-» 
 
 H \WKER's Instructionsto YoungSportsmen 2h 
 
 H ERSCHEL's Outlines of Astronomy H 
 
 II KWlTT on Diseases of Women ' * 
 
 Holmes's System of Surgery * 
 
 Surgical Diseases ot Infancy . . . . 14 
 
 HOOKER and WalKEB-Arnott's British 
 
 Flora 
 
 HorNE'8 introduction to the Scriptures.. 
 Compendium of ditto 
 
 Abridged ditto ^8 
 
 Life of Man Symbolised 
 
 Life of Margaret M. Hallahan i--:---- 
 
 LiNDLEY and Moore's Treasury of Botany 
 
 Lindsay's Evidence for the Papacy 
 
 LONGMAN'S Edward the Third y^'-" 
 
 Lectures on the History of Eng- 
 land 
 
 Chess Openings 
 
 lord's Prayer Illustrated }» 
 
 Loudon's Agriculture '^ 
 
 Gardening {* 
 
 Plants i* 
 
 — ■■ 13 
 
 23 
 
 ...16.21 
 
 . 23 
 
 "•'... 23 
 
 How we Spent the Summer 
 
 Howard's Gymnastic Exercises 
 
 HowlTT's Australian Discovery. ... 
 
 f______Northcrn Ileichtsof l^mdon 
 
 _ Rural Life of England 24 
 
 -Visits to Remarkable Places. ... 24 
 
 Hughes's (W.) Manual of Geography .... H 
 
 HUKK'sEssays '" 
 
 Lowndes's Engineer's Handbook 
 
 Lyra Eucharistica 
 
 _^^— German ica .....•• .••> 
 
 Messianica ............•.•.••• 
 
 Mystica 
 
 9« 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2S 
 
 9 
 
 Mabeldean 
 
 M AC A c LAY'S (Lord) Essays ... ^ .......... . 
 
 History of England .. 
 
 _^__Eay8 of Ancient Rome 
 
 MiscellaneousWritings 
 
 Speeches » 
 
 Complete Works 1 
 
 MacfarRENS lectures on Harmony 15 
 
 MACKINTOSH'S Sccncry of England and 
 
 Wales 
 
 MACLEOD's'Elements of Political Economy 7 
 
 Dictionary of Political Eco- 
 
 nomy -I 
 
 Elements of Banking........... » 
 
 Theory and Practice of Banking =7 
 
 McCuiJ.OCH'9 Dictionary of Commerce. 
 -Geographical Dictionary 
 
 37 
 
 „ 11 
 
 Maquirb's Life of'Father Mathew 5 
 
 Manning's England and Christendom 2i 
 
 Marcbt on the Larynx >» 
 
 Marshall's Physiology...... »^ 
 
 MARSHMAN'sLifeofHavelock o 
 
 History of India •/,;••.■• "* 
 
 Martineau's Endeavoius after theChns- 
 
 tian Life i-^'V'j 9 
 
 Massey's History of England • z 
 
 Massingbhrd's History of the Reformation 4 
 
 Mathkson's England to Delhi 22 
 
 MAUNDEtt'8 Biographical Treasury a 
 
 Geographical Treasury H 
 
 Historical Treasury .. 4 
 
 . . ScienUfic and Literary Trea- 
 
 iury '^ 
 
 Treasury of Knowledge 28 
 
 Treasury of Natural History 13 
 
 Maury's Physical Geography.............. 11 
 
 May's Constitutional History of England., j 
 
 Mhlvlllb'9 Digby Grand ^> 
 
 . General Bounce *^ 
 
 __^^_^___ Gladiators *5 
 
 Good for Notliing 25 
 
 ___^ Holmby House 25 
 
 Interpreter ^ 
 
 KateCoventry 25 
 
 .^__ Queen's Maries .............. ** 
 
 Mbndelssohn's Letters ^ 
 
 Menes and Cheops i" 
 
 liERiVALB's (H.) Historical Studies ...... 2 
 
 (C.) Fall of the Roman Re- 
 public 3 
 
 Romans under the Empire 3 
 
 Mkrrifield and EvER's Navigation .... 11 
 
 Miles on Horse's Foot and Horseshoeing . . ^7 
 
 Horses' Teeth and Stables 27 
 
 Northcott'S Lathes and Turning HT 
 
 Norton's City of London "l 
 
 Odling'8 Animal Chemistry .••••••:••-••• J* 
 
 Course ot Practical Chemistry.. M 
 
 Manual of Chemistry 13 
 
 Lectures on Carbon J* 
 
 Outlines of Chemistry 1* 
 
 Our Children's Story » 
 
 Owen's Lectures on the Invertebrate Ani- 
 mals j-nu""** 
 
 Comparative Anatomy and Physio- 
 
 logy of Ver tebrated Animals .... 13 
 
 Packe's Guide to the Pyrenees » 
 
 Paget'S I.K:ctures on Surgical Pathology .. 1* 
 
 Perkira's Manual of Materia Medica 15 
 
 Perkin's Italian and Tuscan Sculptors.... 17 
 
 Phillips's Guide to GJeology ^ 
 
 Pictures in Tyrol » 
 
 Piesse's ArtofPerfuniery »» 
 
 Natural Magic ....►• 18 
 
 Pratt's Law of Building Societies 
 
 Prp:ndergast's Mastery of Languages.... 
 
 Prkscott's Scripture Difficulties 
 
 Proctor's Satum 
 
 _^ Handbook of the Stars ; . . 
 
 Pyne's England and France in the Fif- 
 teenth. Century 
 
 Mill (J.) on the Mind . 
 
 MILLCJ. S.) on Liberty ....•..•> : 
 
 ______ on Representative Government 
 
 on Utilitarianism 
 
 (K. 0.1 
 Greece 
 
 8 
 SO 
 II 
 
 u 
 
 Quarterly Journal of Science M 
 
 8 
 SD 
 
 n 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 Mill's (J. S.") bfssertations and Discussions 7 
 
 1 Political Economy 6 
 
 System of Logic « 
 
 liamilton's Philosophy 7 
 
 Inau;:ural Address / 
 
 ____^_ England and Ireland 
 
 Subjection of Women 6 
 
 Miller's Elements of Chemistry 13 
 
 . Hymn-Writers *i 
 
 Mitchell's Manual of Assaying i» 
 
 MONSELL'S Beatitudes V L" • \1,"--11 S, 
 
 His Presence not his Memory 22 
 
 ' Spiritual Songs' 22 
 
 Moore's irishMelwiies */ 
 
 Lalla R<x)kh ^? 
 
 - Poetical Works • • . • • . • • f 
 
 Power of the Soul over the Body 21 
 
 MORELL'S Elements of Psychology J" 
 
 Mental Philosophy 1" 
 
 MULLER'SCMAX) Chi^^from^»..Gf.'-."^.*° ^^ 
 
 - Lecturci-on the Science 
 
 ot L.anguage — ..... 7 
 Literature of Ancient 
 
 Recreations of a Country Parson 
 
 Reichkl's See of Rome 
 
 Reily's Map of Mont Blanc ■ 
 
 ReimanN on Aniline Dyes » 
 
 Riley's Memorials of Ixmdon 
 
 Rivers' Rose Amateur's Guide 
 
 Robbin'S Cavalry Catechism 
 
 Roger's Correspondence of Greyson 
 
 Eclipse of Faith • 
 
 Defence of ditto .- . • 
 
 Essays from the Edinburgh Revteui 
 
 Reason and Faith 
 
 Roget's English Words and Phrases 
 
 Roma Sotteranea ;•'•••■ : 
 
 Ronald's Fly-Fisher's Entomology 
 
 RowTON's Debater yv.""\"<:'^' 
 
 Russell's (Earl) Speeches and Despatches 
 on Government and ConsUtution 
 
 IS 
 
 tr 
 9 
 9 
 9 
 9 
 9 
 7 
 94 
 
 96 
 7 
 1 
 1 
 
 MURCHISON on continued Fevers 15 
 
 ■■- on Liver Complaints. 1 J 
 
 MUBE's Language and Literature of Greece i 
 
 New Testament, Hlustrated Edition. .. ...... 16 
 
 Nrvs-MAN's History of his Religious Opinions 5 
 NICHOLS' Handbook to the British Museum ^ 
 
 Nightingale's Notes on Hospitals s» 
 
 NiLSSON's Scandinavia . . . ..... . • • • • •,•••••• " 
 
 Noethcjote'S Sanctuaries of Uie Madonna 20 
 
 Sandar'S Justinian's Institutes 6 
 
 SxMUELSON's German Working Man...... a* 
 
 SciiEFFLERon Ocular Defects and Spectacles 15 
 
 Scott's Lectures on the Fine Arts 16 
 
 Albert Durer w 
 
 Seebohm's Oxford Reformers of 1498 » 
 
 Sewell's After Life... Ji 
 
 Amy Herbert f* 
 
 Clevellall «4 
 
 Earl's Daughter. «4 
 
 . Examination for Confirmation . . 31 
 
 Experience of Life W 
 
 Gertrude •• *4 
 
 Glimpse of the World....... 24 
 
 History of the Early Church 24 
 
 ^^^^^^_^__ iTors " 
 
 Journal of a Home Life 84 
 
 Katharine Ashton »4 
 
 Laneton Parsonage ** 
 
 Margaret Percival . 
 
 Passing Thoughts on Religion 
 Preparations for Commumon . . 
 
 Principles of Education 
 
 Readings for Confirmation ..., 
 Readings for Lent. 
 
 •••••••••••••• 
 
 94 
 
 31 
 81 
 21 
 21 
 81 
 
sa 
 
 NEW WORKS PUM ^SHEi. BT M)KGMAM8 a» dCO. 
 
 8«W»LL's Tales and StoricB •••••; 3^ 
 
 Ursula. . . y • ^vi iiAi :' Week .... 21 
 
 Skymoc 
 
 - ThouRht. for the Holy Week . . . . ^ 
 u? Seering in the l'ampa«. . . ■ ■ • » 
 
 andMinet 
 
 SHA:4K8BrRY>Charar^^^^^^^ 
 
 8HXPLBVB {^V"J,ch and^th| Wo^^^^^ ^ 
 
 ary 
 SMITH 
 
 - <i:}i*"i^M^i..lUneoUS Works.. ? 
 
 7 
 
 v:> 
 
 12 
 6 
 
 ^""^'l.S'.iwoVi;;-::.:.::.:::::-:'- 
 
 S:;rr7r7T^ lliutory of British Birds 
 
 8TONEHENGHontheD.>K^.j^..^.^-^ 27 
 
 oii^nirKLANU's Tudor Princesses. • 
 
 ?I^!^__-_(iueens of England .•••••■• j^ 
 
 Strong and Free ..... • • • • 'p* ' 'i^h Church of 
 Onward 
 
 VKS DEK HOEVK>-'s Handbook of Zjxjlozy 
 ^ -^'*'i^..„.o RevoluUous in English Uutory 
 
 V AUG HAS s 
 
 IS 
 2 
 
 WATSON'S Principles and Practice of Physic H 
 Watts-s Wctionary ofCherni.trT ...^..... ^ 
 wSh ObiectH for Common r^W^^^^^^^ 
 
 Webstku and WilA.iJ«o«J-^ b „ * 
 
 AV^mJ's Notes on Burgundy. . . ...-•• • • • ■ • - '^ 
 
 WKMiNGTON's Life, by the Rev. G. K- 
 
 (■IFHI 
 
 wi 8T on Children's Diseases 
 
 WHATKLY's English Syn.mymea 
 
 I>ogic 
 
 Paraguayan War ^ 
 
 TODD and BOWMAN'S Anatomy and Phy- ^^ 
 
 TSS^'lSie^^^IHs^ ^ 
 
 Tkollopk'8 Barchcstcrlowem '][[], ^ 24 
 
 .Warden 
 
 Twiss's lAWofNaUons ••• jj 
 
 TYKDAi'liOnHeat jj 
 
 Sound 
 
 14 
 6 
 ft 
 6 
 
 ^!!!^!!!f !l'ReKu;'w^"iur::^^.--. | 
 
 Whist, what to lead, by j'^Jf^^-.KnglUh Dic^ 
 
 WlilTK and RlDlH.fc s^ J^ft"" ^"» g 
 
 tionaries ••••••:•:•••••■ ■'■'". 27 
 
 Rhetoric 
 
 the Truth of Christianity. . 
 
 27 
 
 _(>)n8umption . 
 
 wTTlis's Principles of Mechanism 
 
 WlNSi'OW on Liilht 
 
 WtMJD's Bible Animals .••••■ 
 
 ^^^" Homes without Hands . . • • 
 WRIGHT'S Uomer'6lh«id 
 
 Vno'S Manual of ZooloBT 
 
 IJnoe 8* ;..!.'li'*h-Gm-K l.exicou» • 
 
 __ Editions of Horace 
 
 YOUATT on the Dog 
 ou the Horse 
 
 ^ stoics, Epicurcaus, aud . 
 
 
 17 
 12 
 12 
 12 
 26 
 
 IS 
 8 
 26 
 27 
 27 
 
 6 
 b 
 
 lOiroON: PRINTED BT 
 
 8I0TTISW00DK AND CO.. XEW-STEBET SQUABB 
 
 AND PABLIAMBNT STMBT 
 
This hrt' ' •«• f?"- two weeks fr^ ^ thr last 
 
 
 ( #*<■ 
 
 
 1 
 
 L 
 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 0032017138 
 
 
 68T'V3 
 
 I 
 
 *I r >^' 
 
 (f'^mzcp 
 
 it 
 
 4 
 
 I ' 
 
 N6V 3 1 1941 
 llOV 2 9 1937 
 
*_!!*■* 
 
 ^pK ^ 
 
 -*^: 
 
 ^••liis^iy 
 
 
 - ■*-VTi i Ai-, 
 
 WV^i 
 
 A^^-. 
 
 ■iij 
 
 j?< 
 
 1. ^^fjrori- 
 
 iV*--5 
 
 
 -fc* 
 
 .« r: 
 
 1-^1 
 
 i^^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 %■ 
 
 \y ^ 
 
 ■-.s- 
 
 
 '**%"'- " 
 
 *s^* 
 
 mU 
 
 r./ ' ' ^ ^■^:- . .^ ,1^$^; 
 
 ■% -I'-^'c 
 
 l/'fcS! 
 
 r-* i^f 
 
 1^1 
 
 V>,- 
 
 ;:'.fi 
 
 MW: 
 
 %'. 
 
 hii 
 
 ff-! 
 
 Ws'X 
 
 4 ! ?"', 
 
 Zil 
 
 
 
 j4. 
 
 '^:^f^-?' /V ., K;.?f,^ 
 
 
 .^^■-^^^■V 
 
 ►i*^" 
 
 xjs ^ 
 
 .W-li 
 
 
 ^%' 
 
 f 
 
 m^..^-^^ 
 
 ?*■ 
 
 * 
 
 ■M«>' -^' ■■■;■■> ^",JiiiAi" 
 
 .-^IP' 
 
 ?fe 
 
 <^ sfe*-? *f/. 
 
 ■-V 
 
 5.>^ 
 
 
 
 '%^^ 
 
 
 %f^'^/- / «• 
 
 H^t^" 
 
 
 ...1;1^